839 files changed, 274562 insertions, 274562 deletions
diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c
index 9f7878617..b2a278ed7 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c
+++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c
@@ -1,576 +1,576 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the CDC class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C
-#include "BootloaderCDC.h"
-
-/** Line coding options for the virtual serial port. Although the virtual serial port data is never
- *  sent through a physical serial port, the line encoding data must still be read and preserved from
- *  the host, or the host will detect a problem and fail to open the port. This structure contains the
- *  current encoding options, including baud rate, character format, parity mode and total number of 
- *  bits in each data chunk.
- */
-CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { .BaudRateBPS = 9600,
-                                 .CharFormat  = OneStopBit,
-                                 .ParityType  = Parity_None,
-                                 .DataBits    = 8            };
-
-/** Current address counter. This stores the current address of the FLASH or EEPROM as set by the host,
- *  and is used when reading or writing to the AVRs memory (either FLASH or EEPROM depending on the issued
- *  command.)
- */
-uint32_t CurrAddress;
-
-/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
- *  via a watchdog reset. When cleared the bootloader will exit, starting the watchdog and entering an infinite
- *  loop until the AVR restarts and the application runs.
- */
-bool RunBootloader = true;
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously 
- *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start
- *  the loaded application code.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	/* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
-	sei();
-
-	while (RunBootloader)
-	{
-		CDC_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-	
-	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
-	USB_Detach();
-
-	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
-	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
-
-	for (;;);
-}
-
-/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
-	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
-	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
-	
-	/* Initialize USB Subsystem */
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
- *  to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
-	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library, so that they can be handled appropriately
- *  for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding;
-
-	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(LineCoding); i++)
-				  Endpoint_Write_Byte(*(LineCodingData++));	
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-				{				
-					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-					  return;
-				}
-			
-				for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(LineCoding); i++)
-				  *(LineCodingData++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-	
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetControlLineState:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-	
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Reads or writes a block of EEPROM or FLASH memory to or from the appropriate CDC data endpoint, depending
- *  on the AVR910 protocol command issued.
- *
- *  \param[in] Command  Single character AVR910 protocol command indicating what memory operation to perform
- */
-static void ReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command)
-{
-	uint16_t BlockSize;
-	char     MemoryType;
-	
-	bool     HighByte = false;
-	uint8_t  LowByte  = 0;
-	
-	BlockSize  = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8);
-	BlockSize |=  FetchNextCommandByte();
-	
-	MemoryType =  FetchNextCommandByte();
-
-	if ((MemoryType != 'E') && (MemoryType != 'F'))
-	{
-		/* Send error byte back to the host */
-		WriteNextResponseByte('?');
-		
-		return;
-	}
-
-	/* Check if command is to read memory */
-	if (Command == 'g')
-	{
-		/* Re-enable RWW section */
-		boot_rww_enable();
-
-		while (BlockSize--)
-		{
-			if (MemoryType == 'F')
-			{
-				/* Read the next FLASH byte from the current FLASH page */
-				#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
-				WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte_far(CurrAddress | HighByte));
-				#else
-				WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte(CurrAddress | HighByte));					
-				#endif
-				
-				/* If both bytes in current word have been read, increment the address counter */
-				if (HighByte)
-				  CurrAddress += 2;
-				
-				HighByte = !HighByte;
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Read the next EEPROM byte into the endpoint */
-				WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)(uint16_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)));
-
-				/* Increment the address counter after use */
-				CurrAddress += 2;
-			}			
-		}
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		uint32_t PageStartAddress = CurrAddress;
-
-		if (MemoryType == 'F')
-		{
-			boot_page_erase(PageStartAddress);
-			boot_spm_busy_wait();
-		}
-		
-		while (BlockSize--)
-		{
-			if (MemoryType == 'F')
-			{	
-				/* If both bytes in current word have been written, increment the address counter */
-				if (HighByte)
-				{
-					/* Write the next FLASH word to the current FLASH page */
-					boot_page_fill(CurrAddress, ((FetchNextCommandByte() << 8) | LowByte));
-
-					/* Increment the address counter after use */
-					CurrAddress += 2;
-
-					HighByte = false;
-				}
-				else
-				{
-					LowByte = FetchNextCommandByte();
-				
-					HighByte = true;
-				}
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Write the next EEPROM byte from the endpoint */
-				eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)(uint16_t)(CurrAddress >> 1), FetchNextCommandByte());					
-
-				/* Increment the address counter after use */
-				CurrAddress += 2;
-			}
-		}
-
-		/* If in FLASH programming mode, commit the page after writing */
-		if (MemoryType == 'F')
-		{
-			/* Commit the flash page to memory */
-			boot_page_write(PageStartAddress);
-			
-			/* Wait until write operation has completed */
-			boot_spm_busy_wait();
-		}
-	
-		/* Send response byte back to the host */
-		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
-	}
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the next byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint, and clears the endpoint bank if needed
- *  to allow reception of the next data packet from the host.
- *
- *  \return Next received byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint
- */
-static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void)
-{
-	/* Select the OUT endpoint so that the next data byte can be read */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */
-	while (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	{
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-		{
-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-			  return 0;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	/* Fetch the next byte from the OUT endpoint */
-	return Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-}
-
-/** Writes the next response byte to the CDC data IN endpoint, and sends the endpoint back if needed to free up the
- *  bank when full ready for the next byte in the packet to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] Response  Next response byte to send to the host
- */
-static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response)
-{
-	/* Select the IN endpoint so that the next data byte can be written */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* If IN endpoint full, clear it and wait until ready for the next packet to the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	{
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		
-		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
-		{				
-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-			  return;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	/* Write the next byte to the OUT endpoint */
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(Response);
-}
-
-/** Task to read in AVR910 commands from the CDC data OUT endpoint, process them, perform the required actions
- *  and send the appropriate response back to the host.
- */
-void CDC_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Select the OUT endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Check if endpoint has a command in it sent from the host */
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-	{
-		/* Read in the bootloader command (first byte sent from host) */
-		uint8_t Command = FetchNextCommandByte();
-
-		if ((Command == 'L') || (Command == 'P') || (Command == 'T') || (Command == 'E'))
-		{
-			if (Command == 'E')
-			  RunBootloader = false;
-			if (Command == 'T')
-			  FetchNextCommandByte();
-
-			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');			
-		}
-		else if (Command == 't')
-		{
-			/* Return ATMEGA128 part code - this is only to allow AVRProg to use the bootloader */
-			WriteNextResponseByte(0x44);
-
-			WriteNextResponseByte(0x00);
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'a')
-		{
-			/* Indicate auto-address increment is supported */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('Y');
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'A')
-		{
-			/* Set the current address to that given by the host */
-			CurrAddress   = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 9);
-			CurrAddress  |= (FetchNextCommandByte() << 1);
-
-			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'p')
-		{
-			/* Indicate serial programmer back to the host */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('S');		 
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'S')
-		{
-			/* Write the 7-byte software identifier to the endpoint */
-			for (uint8_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < 7; CurrByte++)
-			  WriteNextResponseByte(SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER[CurrByte]);		
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'V')
-		{
-			WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR);
-			WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR);
-		}
-		else if (Command == 's')
-		{
-			WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_3);		
-			WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_2);
-			WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_1);
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'b')
-		{
-			WriteNextResponseByte('Y');
-				
-			/* Send block size to the host */
-			WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE >> 8);
-			WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE & 0xFF);		
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'e')
-		{
-			/* Clear the application section of flash */
-			for (uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR; CurrFlashAddress++)
-			{
-				boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress);
-				boot_spm_busy_wait();
-				boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress);
-				boot_spm_busy_wait();
-
-				CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE;
-			}
-			
-			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'l')
-		{
-			/* Set the lock bits to those given by the host */
-			boot_lock_bits_set(FetchNextCommandByte());
-
-			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'r')
-		{
-			WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS));		
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'F')
-		{
-			WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOW_FUSE_BITS));
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'N')
-		{
-			WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS));		
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'Q')
-		{
-			WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_EXTENDED_FUSE_BITS));		
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'C')
-		{			
-			/* Write the high byte to the current flash page */
-			boot_page_fill(CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte());
-
-			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'c')
-		{			
-			/* Write the low byte to the current flash page */
-			boot_page_fill(CurrAddress | 1, FetchNextCommandByte());
-			
-			/* Increment the address */
-			CurrAddress += 2;
-
-			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'm')
-		{
-			/* Commit the flash page to memory */
-			boot_page_write(CurrAddress);
-			
-			/* Wait until write operation has completed */
-			boot_spm_busy_wait();
-
-			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
-		}
-		else if ((Command == 'B') || (Command == 'g'))
-		{
-			/* Delegate the block write/read to a separate function for clarity */
-			ReadWriteMemoryBlock(Command);
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'R')
-		{
-			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
-			uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word_far(CurrAddress);
-			#else
-			uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word(CurrAddress);			
-			#endif
-			
-			WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord >> 8);
-			WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord & 0xFF);
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'D')
-		{
-			/* Read the byte from the endpoint and write it to the EEPROM */
-			eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)((uint16_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)), FetchNextCommandByte());
-			
-			/* Increment the address after use */			
-			CurrAddress += 2;
-	
-			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
-		}
-		else if (Command == 'd')
-		{
-			/* Read the EEPROM byte and write it to the endpoint */
-			WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)((uint16_t)(CurrAddress >> 1))));
-
-			/* Increment the address after use */
-			CurrAddress += 2;
-		}
-		else if (Command == 27)
-		{
-			/* Escape is sync, ignore */
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Unknown command, return fail code */
-			WriteNextResponseByte('?');
-		}
-
-		/* Select the IN endpoint */
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
-
-		/* Remember if the endpoint is completely full before clearing it */
-		bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
-
-		/* Send the endpoint data to the host */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		
-		/* If a full endpoint's worth of data was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to signal end of transfer */
-		if (IsEndpointFull)
-		{
-			while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
-			{				
-				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-				  return;
-			}
-
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		}
-
-		/* Wait until the data has been sent to the host */
-		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
-		{				
-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-			  return;
-		}
-		
-		/* Select the OUT endpoint */
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
-
-		/* Acknowledge the command from the host */
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the CDC class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C
+#include "BootloaderCDC.h"
+
+/** Line coding options for the virtual serial port. Although the virtual serial port data is never
+ *  sent through a physical serial port, the line encoding data must still be read and preserved from
+ *  the host, or the host will detect a problem and fail to open the port. This structure contains the
+ *  current encoding options, including baud rate, character format, parity mode and total number of 
+ *  bits in each data chunk.
+ */
+CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { .BaudRateBPS = 9600,
+                                 .CharFormat  = OneStopBit,
+                                 .ParityType  = Parity_None,
+                                 .DataBits    = 8            };
+
+/** Current address counter. This stores the current address of the FLASH or EEPROM as set by the host,
+ *  and is used when reading or writing to the AVRs memory (either FLASH or EEPROM depending on the issued
+ *  command.)
+ */
+uint32_t CurrAddress;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a watchdog reset. When cleared the bootloader will exit, starting the watchdog and entering an infinite
+ *  loop until the AVR restarts and the application runs.
+ */
+bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously 
+ *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start
+ *  the loaded application code.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
+	sei();
+
+	while (RunBootloader)
+	{
+		CDC_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+	
+	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
+	USB_Detach();
+
+	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
+	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+	
+	/* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
+ *  to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library, so that they can be handled appropriately
+ *  for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding;
+
+	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(LineCoding); i++)
+				  Endpoint_Write_Byte(*(LineCodingData++));	
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+				{				
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+			
+				for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(LineCoding); i++)
+				  *(LineCodingData++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+	
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetControlLineState:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+	
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Reads or writes a block of EEPROM or FLASH memory to or from the appropriate CDC data endpoint, depending
+ *  on the AVR910 protocol command issued.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Command  Single character AVR910 protocol command indicating what memory operation to perform
+ */
+static void ReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command)
+{
+	uint16_t BlockSize;
+	char     MemoryType;
+	
+	bool     HighByte = false;
+	uint8_t  LowByte  = 0;
+	
+	BlockSize  = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8);
+	BlockSize |=  FetchNextCommandByte();
+	
+	MemoryType =  FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+	if ((MemoryType != 'E') && (MemoryType != 'F'))
+	{
+		/* Send error byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('?');
+		
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command is to read memory */
+	if (Command == 'g')
+	{
+		/* Re-enable RWW section */
+		boot_rww_enable();
+
+		while (BlockSize--)
+		{
+			if (MemoryType == 'F')
+			{
+				/* Read the next FLASH byte from the current FLASH page */
+				#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+				WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte_far(CurrAddress | HighByte));
+				#else
+				WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte(CurrAddress | HighByte));					
+				#endif
+				
+				/* If both bytes in current word have been read, increment the address counter */
+				if (HighByte)
+				  CurrAddress += 2;
+				
+				HighByte = !HighByte;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Read the next EEPROM byte into the endpoint */
+				WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)(uint16_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)));
+
+				/* Increment the address counter after use */
+				CurrAddress += 2;
+			}			
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		uint32_t PageStartAddress = CurrAddress;
+
+		if (MemoryType == 'F')
+		{
+			boot_page_erase(PageStartAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+		
+		while (BlockSize--)
+		{
+			if (MemoryType == 'F')
+			{	
+				/* If both bytes in current word have been written, increment the address counter */
+				if (HighByte)
+				{
+					/* Write the next FLASH word to the current FLASH page */
+					boot_page_fill(CurrAddress, ((FetchNextCommandByte() << 8) | LowByte));
+
+					/* Increment the address counter after use */
+					CurrAddress += 2;
+
+					HighByte = false;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					LowByte = FetchNextCommandByte();
+				
+					HighByte = true;
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Write the next EEPROM byte from the endpoint */
+				eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)(uint16_t)(CurrAddress >> 1), FetchNextCommandByte());					
+
+				/* Increment the address counter after use */
+				CurrAddress += 2;
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* If in FLASH programming mode, commit the page after writing */
+		if (MemoryType == 'F')
+		{
+			/* Commit the flash page to memory */
+			boot_page_write(PageStartAddress);
+			
+			/* Wait until write operation has completed */
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+	
+		/* Send response byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
+	}
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the next byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint, and clears the endpoint bank if needed
+ *  to allow reception of the next data packet from the host.
+ *
+ *  \return Next received byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint
+ */
+static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void)
+{
+	/* Select the OUT endpoint so that the next data byte can be read */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return 0;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Fetch the next byte from the OUT endpoint */
+	return Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+}
+
+/** Writes the next response byte to the CDC data IN endpoint, and sends the endpoint back if needed to free up the
+ *  bank when full ready for the next byte in the packet to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Response  Next response byte to send to the host
+ */
+static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response)
+{
+	/* Select the IN endpoint so that the next data byte can be written */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* If IN endpoint full, clear it and wait until ready for the next packet to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+		{				
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Write the next byte to the OUT endpoint */
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(Response);
+}
+
+/** Task to read in AVR910 commands from the CDC data OUT endpoint, process them, perform the required actions
+ *  and send the appropriate response back to the host.
+ */
+void CDC_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Select the OUT endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Check if endpoint has a command in it sent from the host */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		/* Read in the bootloader command (first byte sent from host) */
+		uint8_t Command = FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+		if ((Command == 'L') || (Command == 'P') || (Command == 'T') || (Command == 'E'))
+		{
+			if (Command == 'E')
+			  RunBootloader = false;
+			if (Command == 'T')
+			  FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');			
+		}
+		else if (Command == 't')
+		{
+			/* Return ATMEGA128 part code - this is only to allow AVRProg to use the bootloader */
+			WriteNextResponseByte(0x44);
+
+			WriteNextResponseByte(0x00);
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'a')
+		{
+			/* Indicate auto-address increment is supported */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('Y');
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'A')
+		{
+			/* Set the current address to that given by the host */
+			CurrAddress   = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 9);
+			CurrAddress  |= (FetchNextCommandByte() << 1);
+
+			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'p')
+		{
+			/* Indicate serial programmer back to the host */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('S');		 
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'S')
+		{
+			/* Write the 7-byte software identifier to the endpoint */
+			for (uint8_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < 7; CurrByte++)
+			  WriteNextResponseByte(SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER[CurrByte]);		
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'V')
+		{
+			WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR);
+			WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR);
+		}
+		else if (Command == 's')
+		{
+			WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_3);		
+			WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_2);
+			WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_1);
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'b')
+		{
+			WriteNextResponseByte('Y');
+				
+			/* Send block size to the host */
+			WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE >> 8);
+			WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE & 0xFF);		
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'e')
+		{
+			/* Clear the application section of flash */
+			for (uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR; CurrFlashAddress++)
+			{
+				boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress);
+				boot_spm_busy_wait();
+				boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress);
+				boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+				CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE;
+			}
+			
+			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'l')
+		{
+			/* Set the lock bits to those given by the host */
+			boot_lock_bits_set(FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'r')
+		{
+			WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS));		
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'F')
+		{
+			WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOW_FUSE_BITS));
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'N')
+		{
+			WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS));		
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'Q')
+		{
+			WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_EXTENDED_FUSE_BITS));		
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'C')
+		{			
+			/* Write the high byte to the current flash page */
+			boot_page_fill(CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'c')
+		{			
+			/* Write the low byte to the current flash page */
+			boot_page_fill(CurrAddress | 1, FetchNextCommandByte());
+			
+			/* Increment the address */
+			CurrAddress += 2;
+
+			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'm')
+		{
+			/* Commit the flash page to memory */
+			boot_page_write(CurrAddress);
+			
+			/* Wait until write operation has completed */
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
+		}
+		else if ((Command == 'B') || (Command == 'g'))
+		{
+			/* Delegate the block write/read to a separate function for clarity */
+			ReadWriteMemoryBlock(Command);
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'R')
+		{
+			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+			uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word_far(CurrAddress);
+			#else
+			uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word(CurrAddress);			
+			#endif
+			
+			WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord >> 8);
+			WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord & 0xFF);
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'D')
+		{
+			/* Read the byte from the endpoint and write it to the EEPROM */
+			eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)((uint16_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)), FetchNextCommandByte());
+			
+			/* Increment the address after use */			
+			CurrAddress += 2;
+	
+			/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('\r');		
+		}
+		else if (Command == 'd')
+		{
+			/* Read the EEPROM byte and write it to the endpoint */
+			WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)((uint16_t)(CurrAddress >> 1))));
+
+			/* Increment the address after use */
+			CurrAddress += 2;
+		}
+		else if (Command == 27)
+		{
+			/* Escape is sync, ignore */
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Unknown command, return fail code */
+			WriteNextResponseByte('?');
+		}
+
+		/* Select the IN endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
+
+		/* Remember if the endpoint is completely full before clearing it */
+		bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+
+		/* Send the endpoint data to the host */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		
+		/* If a full endpoint's worth of data was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to signal end of transfer */
+		if (IsEndpointFull)
+		{
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+			{				
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+
+		/* Wait until the data has been sent to the host */
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+		{				
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+		
+		/* Select the OUT endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
+
+		/* Acknowledge the command from the host */
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h
index 81422119f..64811c85f 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h
+++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h
@@ -1,130 +1,130 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for BootloaderCDC.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _CDC_H_
-#define _CDC_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/boot.h>
-		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** CDC Class Specific request to get the line encoding on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port, including the
-		 *  baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits.
-		 */
-		#define REQ_GetLineEncoding          0x21
-
-		/** CDC Class Specific request to set the line encoding on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port, including the
-		 *  baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits.
-		 */
-		#define REQ_SetLineEncoding          0x20
-
-		/** CDC Class Specific request to set the state of the serial handshake lines (such as DCD and RTS) on
-		 *  a CDC-ACM virtual serial port.
-		 */
-		#define REQ_SetControlLineState      0x22
-		
-		/** Version major of the CDC bootloader. */
-		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR     0x01
-
-		/** Version minor of the CDC bootloader. */
-		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR     0x00
-				
-		/** Hardware version major of the CDC bootloader. */
-		#define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MAJOR   0x01
-
-		/** Hardware version minor of the CDC bootloader. */
-		#define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MINOR   0x00
-
-		/** Eight character bootloader firmware identifier reported to the host when requested */
-		#define SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER          "LUFACDC"
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a non-returning pointer to the start of the loaded application in flash memory. */
-		typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN;
-
-		/** Type define for the CDC-ACM virtual serial port line encoding options, including baud rate, format, parity
-		 *  and size of each data chunk in bits.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate in BPS */
-			uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format, an entry from the BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum */
-			uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity mode, an entry from the BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodeingParity_t enum */
-			uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Size of each data chunk, in bits */
-		} CDC_Line_Coding_t;
-		
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port */
-		enum BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
-		{
-			OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Single stop bit */
-			OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< 1.5 stop bits */
-			TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Two stop bits */
-		};
-		
-		/** Enum for the possible parity modes on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port */
-		enum BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingParity_t
-		{
-			Parity_None         = 0, /**< No data parity checking */
-			Parity_Odd          = 1, /**< Odd data parity checking */
-			Parity_Even         = 2, /**< Even data parity checking */
-			Parity_Mark         = 3, /**< Mark data parity checking */
-			Parity_Space        = 4, /**< Space data parity checking */
-		};
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void CDC_Task(void);
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static void    ReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command);
-			static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void);
-			static void    WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderCDC.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _CDC_H_
+#define _CDC_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** CDC Class Specific request to get the line encoding on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port, including the
+		 *  baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits.
+		 */
+		#define REQ_GetLineEncoding          0x21
+
+		/** CDC Class Specific request to set the line encoding on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port, including the
+		 *  baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits.
+		 */
+		#define REQ_SetLineEncoding          0x20
+
+		/** CDC Class Specific request to set the state of the serial handshake lines (such as DCD and RTS) on
+		 *  a CDC-ACM virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define REQ_SetControlLineState      0x22
+		
+		/** Version major of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR     0x01
+
+		/** Version minor of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR     0x00
+				
+		/** Hardware version major of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MAJOR   0x01
+
+		/** Hardware version minor of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MINOR   0x00
+
+		/** Eight character bootloader firmware identifier reported to the host when requested */
+		#define SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER          "LUFACDC"
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a non-returning pointer to the start of the loaded application in flash memory. */
+		typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN;
+
+		/** Type define for the CDC-ACM virtual serial port line encoding options, including baud rate, format, parity
+		 *  and size of each data chunk in bits.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate in BPS */
+			uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format, an entry from the BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum */
+			uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity mode, an entry from the BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodeingParity_t enum */
+			uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Size of each data chunk, in bits */
+		} CDC_Line_Coding_t;
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port */
+		enum BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
+		{
+			OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Single stop bit */
+			OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< 1.5 stop bits */
+			TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Two stop bits */
+		};
+		
+		/** Enum for the possible parity modes on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port */
+		enum BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingParity_t
+		{
+			Parity_None         = 0, /**< No data parity checking */
+			Parity_Odd          = 1, /**< Odd data parity checking */
+			Parity_Even         = 2, /**< Even data parity checking */
+			Parity_Mark         = 3, /**< Mark data parity checking */
+			Parity_Space        = 4, /**< Space data parity checking */
+		};
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void CDC_Task(void);
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static void    ReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command);
+			static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void);
+			static void    WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt
index 7bfacc3c4..064ff350e 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt
+++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage CDC Class USB AVR Bootloader
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a CDC Class device (virtual serial port), allowing for AVR109
- *  protocol compatible programming software to load firmware onto the AVR.	
- *  
- *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and will fit into 4KB of bootloader space. If
- *  you wish to enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU
- *  values in the accompanying makefile.
- *  
- *  This bootloader is compatible with the open source application AVRDUDE, or Atmel's AVRPROG.
- *
- *  After running this bootloader for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF
- *  file located in this bootloader project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows.
- *  This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the
- *  device. Other Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage CDC Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a CDC Class device (virtual serial port), allowing for AVR109
+ *  protocol compatible programming software to load firmware onto the AVR.	
+ *  
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and will fit into 4KB of bootloader space. If
+ *  you wish to enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU
+ *  values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *  
+ *  This bootloader is compatible with the open source application AVRDUDE, or Atmel's AVRPROG.
+ *
+ *  After running this bootloader for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF
+ *  file located in this bootloader project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows.
+ *  This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the
+ *  device. Other Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c b/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c
index 110c14bd9..1aaf10bb4 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,239 +1,239 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x02,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204A,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x01,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x10, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},	
-
-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x02
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"AVR CDC Bootloader"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see LUFA library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration:
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String:
-			if (!(DescriptorNumber))
-			{
-				Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-				Size    = LanguageString.Header.Size;
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-				Size    = ProductString.Header.Size;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x02,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204A,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x01,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x10, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},	
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x02
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"AVR CDC Bootloader"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see LUFA library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			if (!(DescriptorNumber))
+			{
+				Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+				Size    = LanguageString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+				Size    = ProductString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h b/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h
index faec0ddae..3efb01225 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,146 +1,146 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x87
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
-		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
-		#else
-			#error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader.
-		#endif
-
-		/** Structure for a CDC class Functional descriptor, with a given data size. This is used instead of a
-		 *  type define so that the same macro can be used for functional descriptors of varying data lengths,
-		 *  while allowing the sizeof() operator to return correct results.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size of the functional descriptor's data payload, in bytes
-		 */
-		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
-		     struct                                        \
-		     {                                             \
-		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
-			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
-		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
-		     }
-
-		/** Endpoint number for the CDC control interface event notification endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         3
-
-		/** Size of the CDC control interface notification endpoint bank, in bytes */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Endpoint number for the CDC data interface TX (data IN) endpoint */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   1	
-
-		/** Endpoint number for the CDC data interface RX (data OUT) endpoint */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   2	
-
-		/** Size of the CDC data interface TX and RX data endpoint banks, in bytes */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x87
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#else
+			#error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader.
+		#endif
+
+		/** Structure for a CDC class Functional descriptor, with a given data size. This is used instead of a
+		 *  type define so that the same macro can be used for functional descriptors of varying data lengths,
+		 *  while allowing the sizeof() operator to return correct results.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size of the functional descriptor's data payload, in bytes
+		 */
+		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
+		     struct                                        \
+		     {                                             \
+		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
+			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
+		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
+		     }
+
+		/** Endpoint number for the CDC control interface event notification endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         3
+
+		/** Size of the CDC control interface notification endpoint bank, in bytes */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Endpoint number for the CDC data interface TX (data IN) endpoint */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   1	
+
+		/** Endpoint number for the CDC data interface RX (data OUT) endpoint */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   2	
+
+		/** Size of the CDC data interface TX and RX data endpoint banks, in bytes */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf b/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf
index 1e4cc83b8..71f1042df 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - CDC Class Bootloader"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - CDC Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf b/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf
index 1dd7471d3..0c0f603fc 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf
+++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
-INSTDISK="LUFA CDC Bootloader Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
+INSTDISK="LUFA CDC Bootloader Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile b/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile
index 8fd6b3635..732198942 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile
+++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile
@@ -1,713 +1,713 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Starting byte address of the bootloader
-BOOT_START = 0x1E000
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = BootloaderCDC
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR=0
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START)
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program clean debug clean_list clean_binary       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Starting byte address of the bootloader
+BOOT_START = 0x1E000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = BootloaderCDC
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR=0
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START)
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program clean debug clean_list clean_binary       \
 gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c
index d90accb6c..752c32009 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c
+++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c
@@ -1,699 +1,699 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the DFU class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C
-#include "BootloaderDFU.h"
-
-/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is currently running in secure mode, disallowing memory operations
- *  other than erase. This is initially set to the value set by SECURE_MODE, and cleared by the bootloader
- *  once a memory erase has completed.
- */
-bool IsSecure      = SECURE_MODE;
-
-/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
- *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
- *  jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000 (or other location specified by the host).
- */
-bool RunBootloader = true;
-
-/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is waiting to exit. When the host requests the bootloader to exit and
- *  jump to the application address it specifies, it sends two sequential commands which must be properly
- *  acknowledged. Upon reception of the first the RunBootloader flag is cleared and the WaitForExit flag is set,
- *  causing the bootloader to wait for the final exit command before shutting down.
- */
-bool WaitForExit = false;
-
-/** Current DFU state machine state, one of the values in the DFU_State_t enum. */
-uint8_t DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
-
-/** Status code of the last executed DFU command. This is set to one of the values in the DFU_Status_t enum after
- *  each operation, and returned to the host when a Get Status DFU request is issued.
- */
-uint8_t DFU_Status = OK;
-
-/** Data containing the DFU command sent from the host. */
-DFU_Command_t SentCommand;
-
-/** Response to the last issued Read Data DFU command. Unlike other DFU commands, the read command
- *  requires a single byte response from the bootloader containing the read data when the next DFU_UPLOAD command
- *  is issued by the host.
- */
-uint8_t ResponseByte;
-
-/** Pointer to the start of the user application. By default this is 0x0000 (the reset vector), however the host
- *  may specify an alternate address when issuing the application soft-start command.
- */
-AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000;
-
-/** 64-bit flash page number. This is concatenated with the current 16-bit address on USB AVRs containing more than
- *  64KB of flash memory.
- */
-uint8_t Flash64KBPage = 0;
-
-/** Memory start address, indicating the current address in the memory being addressed (either FLASH or EEPROM
- *  depending on the issued command from the host).
- */
-uint16_t StartAddr = 0x0000;
-
-/** Memory end address, indicating the end address to read to/write from in the memory being addressed (either FLASH
- *  of EEPROM depending on the issued command from the host).
- */
-uint16_t EndAddr = 0x0000;
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously 
- *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start
- *  the loaded application code.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	/* Configure hardware required by the bootloader */
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
-	sei();
-
-	/* Run the USB management task while the bootloader is supposed to be running */
-	while (RunBootloader || WaitForExit)
-	  USB_USBTask();
-	
-	/* Reset configured hardware back to their original states for the user application */
-	ResetHardware();
-	
-	/* Start the user application */
-	AppStartPtr();
-}
-
-/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
-	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
-	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
-
-	/* Initialize the USB subsystem */
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Resets all configured hardware required for the bootloader back to their original states. */
-void ResetHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Shut down the USB subsystem */
-	USB_ShutDown();
-	
-	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */
-	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
-	MCUCR = 0;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the DFU commands, which are
- *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Get the size of the command and data from the wLength value */
-	SentCommand.DataSize = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
-
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case DFU_DNLOAD:
-			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-			
-			/* Check if bootloader is waiting to terminate */
-			if (WaitForExit)
-			{
-				/* Bootloader is terminating - process last received command */
-				ProcessBootloaderCommand();
-				
-				/* Indicate that the last command has now been processed - free to exit bootloader */
-				WaitForExit = false;
-			}
-			  
-			/* If the request has a data stage, load it into the command struct */
-			if (SentCommand.DataSize)
-			{
-				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-				{				
-					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-					  return;
-				}
-
-				/* First byte of the data stage is the DNLOAD request's command */
-				SentCommand.Command = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-					
-				/* One byte of the data stage is the command, so subtract it from the total data bytes */
-				SentCommand.DataSize--;
-				
-				/* Load in the rest of the data stage as command parameters */
-				for (uint8_t DataByte = 0; (DataByte < sizeof(SentCommand.Data)) &&
-				     Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); DataByte++)
-				{
-					SentCommand.Data[DataByte] = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-					SentCommand.DataSize--;
-				}
-				
-				/* Process the command */
-				ProcessBootloaderCommand();
-			}
-			
-			/* Check if currently downloading firmware */
-			if (DFU_State == dfuDNLOAD_IDLE)
-			{									
-				if (!(SentCommand.DataSize))
-				{
-					DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
-				}
-				else
-				{
-					/* Throw away the filler bytes before the start of the firmware */
-					DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE);
-
-					/* Throw away the packet alignment filler bytes before the start of the firmware */
-					DiscardFillerBytes(StartAddr % FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE);
-					
-					/* Calculate the number of bytes remaining to be written */
-					uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1);
-					
-					if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))        // Write flash
-					{
-						/* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */
-						uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1);
-					
-						union
-						{
-							uint16_t Words[2];
-							uint32_t Long;
-						} CurrFlashAddress                 = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
-						
-						uint32_t CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long;
-						uint8_t  WordsInFlashPage          = 0;
-
-						while (WordsRemaining--)
-						{
-							/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
-							if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-							{
-								Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-								while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-								{				
-									if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-									  return;
-								}
-							}
-
-							/* Write the next word into the current flash page */
-							boot_page_fill(CurrFlashAddress.Long, Endpoint_Read_Word_LE());
-
-							/* Adjust counters */
-							WordsInFlashPage      += 1;
-							CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2;
-
-							/* See if an entire page has been written to the flash page buffer */
-							if ((WordsInFlashPage == (SPM_PAGESIZE >> 1)) || !(WordsRemaining))
-							{
-								/* Commit the flash page to memory */
-								boot_page_write(CurrFlashPageStartAddress);
-								boot_spm_busy_wait();
-								
-								/* Check if programming incomplete */
-								if (WordsRemaining)
-								{
-									CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long;
-									WordsInFlashPage          = 0;
-
-									/* Erase next page's temp buffer */
-									boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long);
-									boot_spm_busy_wait();
-								}
-							}
-						}
-					
-						/* Once programming complete, start address equals the end address */
-						StartAddr = EndAddr;
-					
-						/* Re-enable the RWW section of flash */
-						boot_rww_enable();
-					}
-					else                                                   // Write EEPROM
-					{
-						while (BytesRemaining--)
-						{
-							/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
-							if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-							{
-								Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-								while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-								{				
-									if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-									  return;
-								}
-							}
-
-							/* Read the byte from the USB interface and write to to the EEPROM */
-							eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr, Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-							
-							/* Adjust counters */
-							StartAddr++;
-						}
-					}
-					
-					/* Throw away the currently unused DFU file suffix */
-					DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE);
-				}
-			}
-
-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-
-			break;
-		case DFU_UPLOAD:
-			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-			while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
-			{				
-				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-				  return;
-			}
-							
-			if (DFU_State != dfuUPLOAD_IDLE)
-			{
-				if ((DFU_State == dfuERROR) && IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))       // Blank Check
-				{
-					/* Blank checking is performed in the DFU_DNLOAD request - if we get here we've told the host
-					   that the memory isn't blank, and the host is requesting the first non-blank address */
-					Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(StartAddr);
-				}
-				else
-				{
-					/* Idle state upload - send response to last issued command */
-					Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseByte);
-				}
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Determine the number of bytes remaining in the current block */
-				uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1);
-
-				if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))            // Read FLASH
-				{
-					/* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */
-					uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1);
-
-					union
-					{
-						uint16_t Words[2];
-						uint32_t Long;
-					} CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
-
-					while (WordsRemaining--)
-					{
-						/* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
-						if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
-						{
-							Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-							while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
-							{				
-								if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-								  return;
-							}
-						}
-
-						/* Read the flash word and send it via USB to the host */
-						#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
-							Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(pgm_read_word_far(CurrFlashAddress.Long));
-						#else
-							Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(pgm_read_word(CurrFlashAddress.Long));							
-						#endif
-
-						/* Adjust counters */
-						CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2;
-					}
-					
-					/* Once reading is complete, start address equals the end address */
-					StartAddr = EndAddr;
-				}
-				else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02))       // Read EEPROM
-				{
-					while (BytesRemaining--)
-					{
-						/* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
-						if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
-						{
-							Endpoint_ClearIN();
-							
-							while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
-							{				
-								if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-								  return;
-							}
-						}
-
-						/* Read the EEPROM byte and send it via USB to the host */
-						Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr));
-
-						/* Adjust counters */
-						StartAddr++;
-					}
-				}
-
-				/* Return to idle state */
-				DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
-			}
-
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			break;
-		case DFU_GETSTATUS:
-			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-			
-			/* Write 8-bit status value */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_Status);
-			
-			/* Write 24-bit poll timeout value */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(0);
-			Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(0);
-			
-			/* Write 8-bit state value */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_State);
-
-			/* Write 8-bit state string ID number */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(0);
-
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			
-			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			break;		
-		case DFU_CLRSTATUS:
-			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-			
-			/* Reset the status value variable to the default OK status */
-			DFU_Status = OK;
-
-			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			break;
-		case DFU_GETSTATE:
-			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-			
-			/* Write the current device state to the endpoint */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_State);
-		
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			
-			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			break;
-		case DFU_ABORT:
-			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-			
-			/* Reset the current state variable to the default idle state */
-			DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
-
-			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Routine to discard the specified number of bytes from the control endpoint stream. This is used to
- *  discard unused bytes in the stream from the host, including the memory program block suffix.
- *
- *  \param[in] NumberOfBytes  Number of bytes to discard from the host from the control endpoint
- */
-static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes)
-{
-	while (NumberOfBytes--)
-	{
-		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-		{
-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-			/* Wait until next data packet received */
-			while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-			{				
-				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-				  return;
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/** Routine to process an issued command from the host, via a DFU_DNLOAD request wrapper. This routine ensures
- *  that the command is allowed based on the current secure mode flag value, and passes the command off to the
- *  appropriate handler function.
- */
-static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void)
-{
-	/* Check if device is in secure mode */
-	if (IsSecure)
-	{
-		/* Don't process command unless it is a READ or chip erase command */
-		if (!(((SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_WRITE)             &&
-		        IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) ||
-			   (SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_READ)))
-		{
-			/* Set the state and status variables to indicate the error */
-			DFU_State  = dfuERROR;
-			DFU_Status = errWRITE;
-			
-			/* Stall command */
-			Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-			
-			/* Don't process the command */
-			return;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Dispatch the required command processing routine based on the command type */
-	switch (SentCommand.Command)
-	{
-		case COMMAND_PROG_START:
-			ProcessMemProgCommand();
-			break;
-		case COMMAND_DISP_DATA:
-			ProcessMemReadCommand();
-			break;
-		case COMMAND_WRITE:
-			ProcessWriteCommand();
-			break;
-		case COMMAND_READ:
-			ProcessReadCommand();
-			break;
-		case COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR:
-			if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03, 0x00))              // Set 64KB flash page command
-			  Flash64KBPage = SentCommand.Data[2];
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Routine to concatenate the given pair of 16-bit memory start and end addresses from the host, and store them
- *  in the StartAddr and EndAddr global variables.
- */
-static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void)
-{
-	union
-	{
-		uint8_t  Bytes[2];
-		uint16_t Word;
-	} Address[2] = {{.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[2], SentCommand.Data[1]}},
-	                {.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}};
-		
-	/* Load in the start and ending read addresses from the sent data packet */
-	StartAddr = Address[0].Word;
-	EndAddr   = Address[1].Word;
-}
-
-/** Handler for a Memory Program command issued by the host. This routine handles the preparations needed
- *  to write subsequent data from the host into the specified memory.
- */
-static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void)
-{
-	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) ||                          // Write FLASH command
-	    IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                            // Write EEPROM command
-	{
-		/* Load in the start and ending read addresses */
-		LoadStartEndAddresses();
-		
-		/* If FLASH is being written to, we need to pre-erase the first page to write to */
-		if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))
-		{
-			union
-			{
-				uint16_t Words[2];
-				uint32_t Long;
-			} CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
-			
-			/* Erase the current page's temp buffer */
-			boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long);
-			boot_spm_busy_wait();
-		}
-		
-		/* Set the state so that the next DNLOAD requests reads in the firmware */
-		DFU_State = dfuDNLOAD_IDLE;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Handler for a Memory Read command issued by the host. This routine handles the preparations needed
- *  to read subsequent data from the specified memory out to the host, as well as implementing the memory
- *  blank check command.
- */
-static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void)
-{
-	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) ||                          // Read FLASH command
-        IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02))                            // Read EEPROM command
-	{
-		/* Load in the start and ending read addresses */
-		LoadStartEndAddresses();
-
-		/* Set the state so that the next UPLOAD requests read out the firmware */
-		DFU_State = dfuUPLOAD_IDLE;
-	}
-	else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                       // Blank check FLASH command
-	{
-		uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0;
-
-		while (CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR)
-		{
-			/* Check if the current byte is not blank */
-			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
-			if (pgm_read_byte_far(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF)
-			#else
-			if (pgm_read_byte(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF)
-			#endif
-			{
-				/* Save the location of the first non-blank byte for response back to the host */
-				Flash64KBPage = (CurrFlashAddress >> 16);
-				StartAddr     = CurrFlashAddress;
-			
-				/* Set state and status variables to the appropriate error values */
-				DFU_State  = dfuERROR;
-				DFU_Status = errCHECK_ERASED;
-
-				break;
-			}
-
-			CurrFlashAddress++;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/** Handler for a Data Write command issued by the host. This routine handles non-programming commands such as
- *  bootloader exit (both via software jumps and hardware watchdog resets) and flash memory erasure.
- */
-static void ProcessWriteCommand(void)
-{
-	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03))                            // Start application
-	{
-		/* Indicate that the bootloader is terminating */
-		WaitForExit = true;
-
-		/* Check if empty request data array - an empty request after a filled request retains the
-		   previous valid request data, but initializes the reset */
-		if (!(SentCommand.DataSize))
-		{
-			if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x00)                                   // Start via watchdog
-			{
-				/* Start the watchdog to reset the AVR once the communications are finalized */
-				wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
-			}
-			else                                                               // Start via jump
-			{
-				/* Load in the jump address into the application start address pointer */
-				union
-				{
-					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
-					AppPtr_t FuncPtr;
-				} Address = {.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}};
-
-				AppStartPtr = Address.FuncPtr;
-				
-				/* Set the flag to terminate the bootloader at next opportunity */
-				RunBootloader = false;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	else if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF))                 // Erase flash
-	{
-		uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0;
-
-		/* Clear the application section of flash */
-		while (CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR)
-		{
-			boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress);
-			boot_spm_busy_wait();
-			boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress);
-			boot_spm_busy_wait();
-
-			CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE;
-		}
-
-		/* Re-enable the RWW section of flash as writing to the flash locks it out */
-		boot_rww_enable();
-					
-		/* Memory has been erased, reset the security bit so that programming/reading is allowed */
-		IsSecure = false;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Handler for a Data Read command issued by the host. This routine handles bootloader information retrieval
- *  commands such as device signature and bootloader version retrieval.
- */
-static void ProcessReadCommand(void)
-{
-	const uint8_t BootloaderInfo[3] = {BOOTLOADER_VERSION, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2};
-	const uint8_t SignatureInfo[3]  = {AVR_SIGNATURE_1,    AVR_SIGNATURE_2,     AVR_SIGNATURE_3};
-
-	uint8_t DataIndexToRead = SentCommand.Data[1];
-
-	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))                         // Read bootloader info
-	  ResponseByte = BootloaderInfo[DataIndexToRead];
-	else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                    // Read signature byte
-	  ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[DataIndexToRead - 0x30];
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the DFU class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C
+#include "BootloaderDFU.h"
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is currently running in secure mode, disallowing memory operations
+ *  other than erase. This is initially set to the value set by SECURE_MODE, and cleared by the bootloader
+ *  once a memory erase has completed.
+ */
+bool IsSecure      = SECURE_MODE;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
+ *  jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000 (or other location specified by the host).
+ */
+bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is waiting to exit. When the host requests the bootloader to exit and
+ *  jump to the application address it specifies, it sends two sequential commands which must be properly
+ *  acknowledged. Upon reception of the first the RunBootloader flag is cleared and the WaitForExit flag is set,
+ *  causing the bootloader to wait for the final exit command before shutting down.
+ */
+bool WaitForExit = false;
+
+/** Current DFU state machine state, one of the values in the DFU_State_t enum. */
+uint8_t DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+
+/** Status code of the last executed DFU command. This is set to one of the values in the DFU_Status_t enum after
+ *  each operation, and returned to the host when a Get Status DFU request is issued.
+ */
+uint8_t DFU_Status = OK;
+
+/** Data containing the DFU command sent from the host. */
+DFU_Command_t SentCommand;
+
+/** Response to the last issued Read Data DFU command. Unlike other DFU commands, the read command
+ *  requires a single byte response from the bootloader containing the read data when the next DFU_UPLOAD command
+ *  is issued by the host.
+ */
+uint8_t ResponseByte;
+
+/** Pointer to the start of the user application. By default this is 0x0000 (the reset vector), however the host
+ *  may specify an alternate address when issuing the application soft-start command.
+ */
+AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000;
+
+/** 64-bit flash page number. This is concatenated with the current 16-bit address on USB AVRs containing more than
+ *  64KB of flash memory.
+ */
+uint8_t Flash64KBPage = 0;
+
+/** Memory start address, indicating the current address in the memory being addressed (either FLASH or EEPROM
+ *  depending on the issued command from the host).
+ */
+uint16_t StartAddr = 0x0000;
+
+/** Memory end address, indicating the end address to read to/write from in the memory being addressed (either FLASH
+ *  of EEPROM depending on the issued command from the host).
+ */
+uint16_t EndAddr = 0x0000;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously 
+ *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start
+ *  the loaded application code.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Configure hardware required by the bootloader */
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
+	sei();
+
+	/* Run the USB management task while the bootloader is supposed to be running */
+	while (RunBootloader || WaitForExit)
+	  USB_USBTask();
+	
+	/* Reset configured hardware back to their original states for the user application */
+	ResetHardware();
+	
+	/* Start the user application */
+	AppStartPtr();
+}
+
+/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Initialize the USB subsystem */
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Resets all configured hardware required for the bootloader back to their original states. */
+void ResetHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Shut down the USB subsystem */
+	USB_ShutDown();
+	
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = 0;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the DFU commands, which are
+ *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Get the size of the command and data from the wLength value */
+	SentCommand.DataSize = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case DFU_DNLOAD:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+			
+			/* Check if bootloader is waiting to terminate */
+			if (WaitForExit)
+			{
+				/* Bootloader is terminating - process last received command */
+				ProcessBootloaderCommand();
+				
+				/* Indicate that the last command has now been processed - free to exit bootloader */
+				WaitForExit = false;
+			}
+			  
+			/* If the request has a data stage, load it into the command struct */
+			if (SentCommand.DataSize)
+			{
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+				{				
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				/* First byte of the data stage is the DNLOAD request's command */
+				SentCommand.Command = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+					
+				/* One byte of the data stage is the command, so subtract it from the total data bytes */
+				SentCommand.DataSize--;
+				
+				/* Load in the rest of the data stage as command parameters */
+				for (uint8_t DataByte = 0; (DataByte < sizeof(SentCommand.Data)) &&
+				     Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); DataByte++)
+				{
+					SentCommand.Data[DataByte] = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+					SentCommand.DataSize--;
+				}
+				
+				/* Process the command */
+				ProcessBootloaderCommand();
+			}
+			
+			/* Check if currently downloading firmware */
+			if (DFU_State == dfuDNLOAD_IDLE)
+			{									
+				if (!(SentCommand.DataSize))
+				{
+					DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Throw away the filler bytes before the start of the firmware */
+					DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE);
+
+					/* Throw away the packet alignment filler bytes before the start of the firmware */
+					DiscardFillerBytes(StartAddr % FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE);
+					
+					/* Calculate the number of bytes remaining to be written */
+					uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1);
+					
+					if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))        // Write flash
+					{
+						/* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */
+						uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1);
+					
+						union
+						{
+							uint16_t Words[2];
+							uint32_t Long;
+						} CurrFlashAddress                 = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
+						
+						uint32_t CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long;
+						uint8_t  WordsInFlashPage          = 0;
+
+						while (WordsRemaining--)
+						{
+							/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+							if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+							{
+								Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+								while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+								{				
+									if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+									  return;
+								}
+							}
+
+							/* Write the next word into the current flash page */
+							boot_page_fill(CurrFlashAddress.Long, Endpoint_Read_Word_LE());
+
+							/* Adjust counters */
+							WordsInFlashPage      += 1;
+							CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2;
+
+							/* See if an entire page has been written to the flash page buffer */
+							if ((WordsInFlashPage == (SPM_PAGESIZE >> 1)) || !(WordsRemaining))
+							{
+								/* Commit the flash page to memory */
+								boot_page_write(CurrFlashPageStartAddress);
+								boot_spm_busy_wait();
+								
+								/* Check if programming incomplete */
+								if (WordsRemaining)
+								{
+									CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long;
+									WordsInFlashPage          = 0;
+
+									/* Erase next page's temp buffer */
+									boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long);
+									boot_spm_busy_wait();
+								}
+							}
+						}
+					
+						/* Once programming complete, start address equals the end address */
+						StartAddr = EndAddr;
+					
+						/* Re-enable the RWW section of flash */
+						boot_rww_enable();
+					}
+					else                                                   // Write EEPROM
+					{
+						while (BytesRemaining--)
+						{
+							/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+							if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+							{
+								Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+								while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+								{				
+									if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+									  return;
+								}
+							}
+
+							/* Read the byte from the USB interface and write to to the EEPROM */
+							eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr, Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+							
+							/* Adjust counters */
+							StartAddr++;
+						}
+					}
+					
+					/* Throw away the currently unused DFU file suffix */
+					DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE);
+				}
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+			break;
+		case DFU_UPLOAD:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+			{				
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+							
+			if (DFU_State != dfuUPLOAD_IDLE)
+			{
+				if ((DFU_State == dfuERROR) && IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))       // Blank Check
+				{
+					/* Blank checking is performed in the DFU_DNLOAD request - if we get here we've told the host
+					   that the memory isn't blank, and the host is requesting the first non-blank address */
+					Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(StartAddr);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Idle state upload - send response to last issued command */
+					Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseByte);
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Determine the number of bytes remaining in the current block */
+				uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1);
+
+				if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))            // Read FLASH
+				{
+					/* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */
+					uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1);
+
+					union
+					{
+						uint16_t Words[2];
+						uint32_t Long;
+					} CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
+
+					while (WordsRemaining--)
+					{
+						/* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+						if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+						{
+							Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+							while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+							{				
+								if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+								  return;
+							}
+						}
+
+						/* Read the flash word and send it via USB to the host */
+						#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+							Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(pgm_read_word_far(CurrFlashAddress.Long));
+						#else
+							Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(pgm_read_word(CurrFlashAddress.Long));							
+						#endif
+
+						/* Adjust counters */
+						CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2;
+					}
+					
+					/* Once reading is complete, start address equals the end address */
+					StartAddr = EndAddr;
+				}
+				else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02))       // Read EEPROM
+				{
+					while (BytesRemaining--)
+					{
+						/* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+						if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+						{
+							Endpoint_ClearIN();
+							
+							while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+							{				
+								if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+								  return;
+							}
+						}
+
+						/* Read the EEPROM byte and send it via USB to the host */
+						Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr));
+
+						/* Adjust counters */
+						StartAddr++;
+					}
+				}
+
+				/* Return to idle state */
+				DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_GETSTATUS:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+			
+			/* Write 8-bit status value */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_Status);
+			
+			/* Write 24-bit poll timeout value */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(0);
+			Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(0);
+			
+			/* Write 8-bit state value */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_State);
+
+			/* Write 8-bit state string ID number */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(0);
+
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;		
+		case DFU_CLRSTATUS:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+			
+			/* Reset the status value variable to the default OK status */
+			DFU_Status = OK;
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_GETSTATE:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+			
+			/* Write the current device state to the endpoint */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_State);
+		
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_ABORT:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+			
+			/* Reset the current state variable to the default idle state */
+			DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Routine to discard the specified number of bytes from the control endpoint stream. This is used to
+ *  discard unused bytes in the stream from the host, including the memory program block suffix.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] NumberOfBytes  Number of bytes to discard from the host from the control endpoint
+ */
+static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes)
+{
+	while (NumberOfBytes--)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			/* Wait until next data packet received */
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+			{				
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Routine to process an issued command from the host, via a DFU_DNLOAD request wrapper. This routine ensures
+ *  that the command is allowed based on the current secure mode flag value, and passes the command off to the
+ *  appropriate handler function.
+ */
+static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void)
+{
+	/* Check if device is in secure mode */
+	if (IsSecure)
+	{
+		/* Don't process command unless it is a READ or chip erase command */
+		if (!(((SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_WRITE)             &&
+		        IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) ||
+			   (SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_READ)))
+		{
+			/* Set the state and status variables to indicate the error */
+			DFU_State  = dfuERROR;
+			DFU_Status = errWRITE;
+			
+			/* Stall command */
+			Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+			
+			/* Don't process the command */
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Dispatch the required command processing routine based on the command type */
+	switch (SentCommand.Command)
+	{
+		case COMMAND_PROG_START:
+			ProcessMemProgCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_DISP_DATA:
+			ProcessMemReadCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_WRITE:
+			ProcessWriteCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_READ:
+			ProcessReadCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR:
+			if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03, 0x00))              // Set 64KB flash page command
+			  Flash64KBPage = SentCommand.Data[2];
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Routine to concatenate the given pair of 16-bit memory start and end addresses from the host, and store them
+ *  in the StartAddr and EndAddr global variables.
+ */
+static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void)
+{
+	union
+	{
+		uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+		uint16_t Word;
+	} Address[2] = {{.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[2], SentCommand.Data[1]}},
+	                {.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}};
+		
+	/* Load in the start and ending read addresses from the sent data packet */
+	StartAddr = Address[0].Word;
+	EndAddr   = Address[1].Word;
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Memory Program command issued by the host. This routine handles the preparations needed
+ *  to write subsequent data from the host into the specified memory.
+ */
+static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void)
+{
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) ||                          // Write FLASH command
+	    IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                            // Write EEPROM command
+	{
+		/* Load in the start and ending read addresses */
+		LoadStartEndAddresses();
+		
+		/* If FLASH is being written to, we need to pre-erase the first page to write to */
+		if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))
+		{
+			union
+			{
+				uint16_t Words[2];
+				uint32_t Long;
+			} CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
+			
+			/* Erase the current page's temp buffer */
+			boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+		
+		/* Set the state so that the next DNLOAD requests reads in the firmware */
+		DFU_State = dfuDNLOAD_IDLE;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Memory Read command issued by the host. This routine handles the preparations needed
+ *  to read subsequent data from the specified memory out to the host, as well as implementing the memory
+ *  blank check command.
+ */
+static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void)
+{
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) ||                          // Read FLASH command
+        IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02))                            // Read EEPROM command
+	{
+		/* Load in the start and ending read addresses */
+		LoadStartEndAddresses();
+
+		/* Set the state so that the next UPLOAD requests read out the firmware */
+		DFU_State = dfuUPLOAD_IDLE;
+	}
+	else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                       // Blank check FLASH command
+	{
+		uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0;
+
+		while (CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR)
+		{
+			/* Check if the current byte is not blank */
+			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+			if (pgm_read_byte_far(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF)
+			#else
+			if (pgm_read_byte(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF)
+			#endif
+			{
+				/* Save the location of the first non-blank byte for response back to the host */
+				Flash64KBPage = (CurrFlashAddress >> 16);
+				StartAddr     = CurrFlashAddress;
+			
+				/* Set state and status variables to the appropriate error values */
+				DFU_State  = dfuERROR;
+				DFU_Status = errCHECK_ERASED;
+
+				break;
+			}
+
+			CurrFlashAddress++;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Data Write command issued by the host. This routine handles non-programming commands such as
+ *  bootloader exit (both via software jumps and hardware watchdog resets) and flash memory erasure.
+ */
+static void ProcessWriteCommand(void)
+{
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03))                            // Start application
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the bootloader is terminating */
+		WaitForExit = true;
+
+		/* Check if empty request data array - an empty request after a filled request retains the
+		   previous valid request data, but initializes the reset */
+		if (!(SentCommand.DataSize))
+		{
+			if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x00)                                   // Start via watchdog
+			{
+				/* Start the watchdog to reset the AVR once the communications are finalized */
+				wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+			}
+			else                                                               // Start via jump
+			{
+				/* Load in the jump address into the application start address pointer */
+				union
+				{
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+					AppPtr_t FuncPtr;
+				} Address = {.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}};
+
+				AppStartPtr = Address.FuncPtr;
+				
+				/* Set the flag to terminate the bootloader at next opportunity */
+				RunBootloader = false;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	else if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF))                 // Erase flash
+	{
+		uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0;
+
+		/* Clear the application section of flash */
+		while (CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR)
+		{
+			boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+			boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+			CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE;
+		}
+
+		/* Re-enable the RWW section of flash as writing to the flash locks it out */
+		boot_rww_enable();
+					
+		/* Memory has been erased, reset the security bit so that programming/reading is allowed */
+		IsSecure = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Data Read command issued by the host. This routine handles bootloader information retrieval
+ *  commands such as device signature and bootloader version retrieval.
+ */
+static void ProcessReadCommand(void)
+{
+	const uint8_t BootloaderInfo[3] = {BOOTLOADER_VERSION, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2};
+	const uint8_t SignatureInfo[3]  = {AVR_SIGNATURE_1,    AVR_SIGNATURE_2,     AVR_SIGNATURE_3};
+
+	uint8_t DataIndexToRead = SentCommand.Data[1];
+
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))                         // Read bootloader info
+	  ResponseByte = BootloaderInfo[DataIndexToRead];
+	else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                    // Read signature byte
+	  ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[DataIndexToRead - 0x30];
+}
diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h
index 4583d6ce1..43ea70f5c 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h
+++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h
@@ -1,207 +1,207 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for BootloaderDFU.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_H_
-#define _BOOTLOADER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/boot.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-	
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Configuration define. Define this token to true to case the bootloader to reject all memory commands
-		 *  until a memory erase has been performed. When used in conjunction with the lockbits of the AVR, this
-		 *  can protect the AVR's firmware from being dumped from a secured AVR. When false, memory operations are
-		 *  allowed at any time.
-		 */
-		#define SECURE_MODE              false
-
-		/** Major bootloader version number. */
-		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 2
-
-		/** Minor bootloader version number. */
-		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV   0
-
-		/** Complete bootloader version number expressed as a packed byte, constructed from the 
-		 *  two individual bootloader version macros.
-		 */
-		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION       ((BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR << 4) | BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV)
-
-		/** First byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */
-		#define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1      0xDC
-
-		/** Second byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */
-		#define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2      0xFB
-		
-		/** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given one-byte long command.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] dataarr  Command byte array to check against
-		 *  \param[in] cb1      First command byte to check
-		 */
-		#define IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1)       (dataarr[0] == (cb1))
-
-		/** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given two-byte long command.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] dataarr  Command byte array to check against
-		 *  \param[in] cb1      First command byte to check
-		 *  \param[in] cb2      Second command byte to check
-		 */
-		#define IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1, cb2) ((dataarr[0] == (cb1)) && (dataarr[1] == (cb2)))
-	
-		/** Length of the DFU file suffix block, appended to the end of each complete memory write command.
-		 *  The DFU file suffix is currently unused (but is designed to give extra file information, such as
-		 *  a CRC of the complete firmware for error checking) and so is discarded.
-		 */
-		#define DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE     16
-
-		/** Length of the DFU file filler block, appended to the start of each complete memory write command.
-		 *  Filler bytes are added to the start of each complete memory write command, and must be discarded.
-		 */
-		#define DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE    26
-	
-		/** DFU class command request to detach from the host. */
-		#define DFU_DETATCH              0x00
-
-		/** DFU class command request to send data from the host to the bootloader. */
-		#define DFU_DNLOAD               0x01
-
-		/** DFU class command request to send data from the bootloader to the host. */
-		#define DFU_UPLOAD               0x02
-
-		/** DFU class command request to get the current DFU status and state from the bootloader. */
-		#define DFU_GETSTATUS            0x03
-
-		/** DFU class command request to reset the current DFU status and state variables to their defaults. */
-		#define DFU_CLRSTATUS            0x04
-
-		/** DFU class command request to get the current DFU state of the bootloader. */
-		#define DFU_GETSTATE             0x05
-
-		/** DFU class command request to abort the current multi-request transfer and return to the dfuIDLE state. */
-		#define DFU_ABORT                0x06
-
-		/** DFU command to begin programming the device's memory. */
-		#define COMMAND_PROG_START       0x01
-
-		/** DFU command to begin reading the device's memory. */
-		#define COMMAND_DISP_DATA        0x03
-
-		/** DFU command to issue a write command. */
-		#define COMMAND_WRITE            0x04
-
-		/** DFU command to issue a read command. */
-		#define COMMAND_READ             0x05
-
-		/** DFU command to issue a memory base address change command, to set the current 64KB flash page
-		 *  that subsequent flash operations should use. */
-		#define COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR 0x06
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a non-returning function pointer to the loaded application. */
-		typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN;
-		
-		/** Type define for a structure containing a complete DFU command issued by the host. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  Command; /**< Single byte command to perform, one of the COMMAND_* macro values */
-			uint8_t  Data[5]; /**< Command parameters */
-			uint16_t DataSize; /**< Size of the command parameters */
-		} DFU_Command_t;
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** DFU bootloader states. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each state. */
-		enum DFU_State_t
-		{
-			appIDLE                      = 0,
-			appDETACH                    = 1,
-			dfuIDLE                      = 2,
-			dfuDNLOAD_SYNC               = 3,
-			dfuDNBUSY                    = 4,
-			dfuDNLOAD_IDLE               = 5,
-			dfuMANIFEST_SYNC             = 6,
-			dfuMANIFEST                  = 7,
-			dfuMANIFEST_WAIT_RESET       = 8,
-			dfuUPLOAD_IDLE               = 9,
-			dfuERROR	                 = 10
-		};
-
-		/** DFU command status error codes. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each error code. */
-		enum DFU_Status_t
-		{
-			OK                           = 0,
-			errTARGET                    = 1,
-			errFILE                      = 2,
-			errWRITE                     = 3,
-			errERASE                     = 4,
-			errCHECK_ERASED              = 5,
-			errPROG                      = 6,
-			errVERIFY                    = 7,
-			errADDRESS                   = 8,
-			errNOTDONE                   = 9,
-			errFIRMWARE                  = 10,
-			errVENDOR                    = 11,
-			errUSBR                      = 12,
-			errPOR                       = 13,
-			errUNKNOWN                   = 14,
-			errSTALLEDPKT	             = 15
-		};
-				
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void ResetHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C)
-			static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes);
-			static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void);
-			static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void);
-			static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void);
-			static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void);
-			static void ProcessWriteCommand(void);
-			static void ProcessReadCommand(void);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderDFU.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+	
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Configuration define. Define this token to true to case the bootloader to reject all memory commands
+		 *  until a memory erase has been performed. When used in conjunction with the lockbits of the AVR, this
+		 *  can protect the AVR's firmware from being dumped from a secured AVR. When false, memory operations are
+		 *  allowed at any time.
+		 */
+		#define SECURE_MODE              false
+
+		/** Major bootloader version number. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 2
+
+		/** Minor bootloader version number. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV   0
+
+		/** Complete bootloader version number expressed as a packed byte, constructed from the 
+		 *  two individual bootloader version macros.
+		 */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION       ((BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR << 4) | BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV)
+
+		/** First byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1      0xDC
+
+		/** Second byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2      0xFB
+		
+		/** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given one-byte long command.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] dataarr  Command byte array to check against
+		 *  \param[in] cb1      First command byte to check
+		 */
+		#define IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1)       (dataarr[0] == (cb1))
+
+		/** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given two-byte long command.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] dataarr  Command byte array to check against
+		 *  \param[in] cb1      First command byte to check
+		 *  \param[in] cb2      Second command byte to check
+		 */
+		#define IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1, cb2) ((dataarr[0] == (cb1)) && (dataarr[1] == (cb2)))
+	
+		/** Length of the DFU file suffix block, appended to the end of each complete memory write command.
+		 *  The DFU file suffix is currently unused (but is designed to give extra file information, such as
+		 *  a CRC of the complete firmware for error checking) and so is discarded.
+		 */
+		#define DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE     16
+
+		/** Length of the DFU file filler block, appended to the start of each complete memory write command.
+		 *  Filler bytes are added to the start of each complete memory write command, and must be discarded.
+		 */
+		#define DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE    26
+	
+		/** DFU class command request to detach from the host. */
+		#define DFU_DETATCH              0x00
+
+		/** DFU class command request to send data from the host to the bootloader. */
+		#define DFU_DNLOAD               0x01
+
+		/** DFU class command request to send data from the bootloader to the host. */
+		#define DFU_UPLOAD               0x02
+
+		/** DFU class command request to get the current DFU status and state from the bootloader. */
+		#define DFU_GETSTATUS            0x03
+
+		/** DFU class command request to reset the current DFU status and state variables to their defaults. */
+		#define DFU_CLRSTATUS            0x04
+
+		/** DFU class command request to get the current DFU state of the bootloader. */
+		#define DFU_GETSTATE             0x05
+
+		/** DFU class command request to abort the current multi-request transfer and return to the dfuIDLE state. */
+		#define DFU_ABORT                0x06
+
+		/** DFU command to begin programming the device's memory. */
+		#define COMMAND_PROG_START       0x01
+
+		/** DFU command to begin reading the device's memory. */
+		#define COMMAND_DISP_DATA        0x03
+
+		/** DFU command to issue a write command. */
+		#define COMMAND_WRITE            0x04
+
+		/** DFU command to issue a read command. */
+		#define COMMAND_READ             0x05
+
+		/** DFU command to issue a memory base address change command, to set the current 64KB flash page
+		 *  that subsequent flash operations should use. */
+		#define COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR 0x06
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a non-returning function pointer to the loaded application. */
+		typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN;
+		
+		/** Type define for a structure containing a complete DFU command issued by the host. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Command; /**< Single byte command to perform, one of the COMMAND_* macro values */
+			uint8_t  Data[5]; /**< Command parameters */
+			uint16_t DataSize; /**< Size of the command parameters */
+		} DFU_Command_t;
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** DFU bootloader states. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each state. */
+		enum DFU_State_t
+		{
+			appIDLE                      = 0,
+			appDETACH                    = 1,
+			dfuIDLE                      = 2,
+			dfuDNLOAD_SYNC               = 3,
+			dfuDNBUSY                    = 4,
+			dfuDNLOAD_IDLE               = 5,
+			dfuMANIFEST_SYNC             = 6,
+			dfuMANIFEST                  = 7,
+			dfuMANIFEST_WAIT_RESET       = 8,
+			dfuUPLOAD_IDLE               = 9,
+			dfuERROR	                 = 10
+		};
+
+		/** DFU command status error codes. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each error code. */
+		enum DFU_Status_t
+		{
+			OK                           = 0,
+			errTARGET                    = 1,
+			errFILE                      = 2,
+			errWRITE                     = 3,
+			errERASE                     = 4,
+			errCHECK_ERASED              = 5,
+			errPROG                      = 6,
+			errVERIFY                    = 7,
+			errADDRESS                   = 8,
+			errNOTDONE                   = 9,
+			errFIRMWARE                  = 10,
+			errVENDOR                    = 11,
+			errUSBR                      = 12,
+			errPOR                       = 13,
+			errUNKNOWN                   = 14,
+			errSTALLEDPKT	             = 15
+		};
+				
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void ResetHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C)
+			static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes);
+			static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void);
+			static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void);
+			static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void);
+			static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void);
+			static void ProcessWriteCommand(void);
+			static void ProcessReadCommand(void);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt
index 2ca771c2e..61e587400 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt
+++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt
@@ -1,90 +1,90 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage DFU Class USB AVR Bootloader
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs (Excluding the 8KB FLASH variants)
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- * <table>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *   <td>Device</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *   <td>Device Firmware Update Class (DFU)</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr> 
- *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *   <td>None</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *   <td>USBIF DFU Class Standard, Atmel USB Bootloader Datasheet</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *  </tr>
- * </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a DFU Class device, allowing for DFU-compatible programming
- *  software to load firmware onto the AVR.
- *  
- *  This bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP application. However, it requires the use of Atmel's
- *  DFU drivers. You will need to install Atmel's DFU drivers prior to using this bootloader. If you are
- *  using a 64 bit Windows OS, you will need to either disable the driver signing requirement (see online
- *  tutorials for details) or use a digitally signed version of the official Atmel driver provided by a
- *  third party AVR user at
- *  <a>http://www.avrfreaks.net/index.php?module=Freaks%20Academy&func=viewItem&item_id=2196&item_type=project</a>.
- *  
- *  As an open-source option, this bootloader is also compatible with the Linux Atmel USB DFU Programmer
- *  software, available for download at <a>http://sourceforge.net/projects/dfu-programmer/</a>.
- *  
- *  If SECURE_MODE is defined as true, upon start-up the bootloader will be locked, with only the chip erase
- *  function available (similar to Atmel's DFU bootloader). If SECURE_MODE is defined as false, all functions 
- *  are usable on start-up without the prerequisite firmware erase.
- *  
- *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and should fit into 4KB of bootloader space. If
- *  you wish to enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU
- *  values in the accompanying makefile.
- *  
- *  <b>NOTE:</b> This device spoofs Atmel's DFU Bootloader USB VID and PID so that the Atmel DFU bootloader
- *               drivers included with FLIP will work. If you do not wish to use Atmel's ID codes, please
- *               manually change them in Descriptors.c and alter your driver's INF file accordingly.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>SECURE_MODE</td>
- *    <td>BootloaderDFU.h</td>
- *    <td>If defined to true, the bootloader will not accept any memory commands other than a chip erase on start-up, until an
- *        erase has been performed. This can be used in conjunction with the AVR's lockbits to prevent the AVRs firmware from
- *        being dumped by unauthorized persons.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage DFU Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs (Excluding the 8KB FLASH variants)
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device Firmware Update Class (DFU)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr> 
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>None</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF DFU Class Standard, Atmel USB Bootloader Datasheet</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a DFU Class device, allowing for DFU-compatible programming
+ *  software to load firmware onto the AVR.
+ *  
+ *  This bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP application. However, it requires the use of Atmel's
+ *  DFU drivers. You will need to install Atmel's DFU drivers prior to using this bootloader. If you are
+ *  using a 64 bit Windows OS, you will need to either disable the driver signing requirement (see online
+ *  tutorials for details) or use a digitally signed version of the official Atmel driver provided by a
+ *  third party AVR user at
+ *  <a>http://www.avrfreaks.net/index.php?module=Freaks%20Academy&func=viewItem&item_id=2196&item_type=project</a>.
+ *  
+ *  As an open-source option, this bootloader is also compatible with the Linux Atmel USB DFU Programmer
+ *  software, available for download at <a>http://sourceforge.net/projects/dfu-programmer/</a>.
+ *  
+ *  If SECURE_MODE is defined as true, upon start-up the bootloader will be locked, with only the chip erase
+ *  function available (similar to Atmel's DFU bootloader). If SECURE_MODE is defined as false, all functions 
+ *  are usable on start-up without the prerequisite firmware erase.
+ *  
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and should fit into 4KB of bootloader space. If
+ *  you wish to enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU
+ *  values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *  
+ *  <b>NOTE:</b> This device spoofs Atmel's DFU Bootloader USB VID and PID so that the Atmel DFU bootloader
+ *               drivers included with FLIP will work. If you do not wish to use Atmel's ID codes, please
+ *               manually change them in Descriptors.c and alter your driver's INF file accordingly.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SECURE_MODE</td>
+ *    <td>BootloaderDFU.h</td>
+ *    <td>If defined to true, the bootloader will not accept any memory commands other than a chip erase on start-up, until an
+ *        erase has been performed. This can be used in conjunction with the AVR's lockbits to prevent the AVRs firmware from
+ *        being dumped by unauthorized persons.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c b/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c
index 510a29fb4..1e9ec4587 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,181 +1,181 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = PRODUCT_ID_CODE,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x01,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces          = 1,
-
-			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes         = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.DFU_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 0,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0xFE,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = 0x02,
-
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.DFU_Functional = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_DFUFunctional},
-			
-			.Attributes             = (ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD | ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD),
-
-			.DetachTimeout          = 0x0000,
-			.TransferSize           = 0x0c00,
-		
-			.DFUSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.01)
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */ 
-USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"AVR DFU Bootloader"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			if (!(DescriptorNumber))
-			{
-				Address = &LanguageString;
-				Size    = LanguageString.Header.Size;
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				Address = &ProductString;
-				Size    = ProductString.Header.Size;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = PRODUCT_ID_CODE,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x01,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes         = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.DFU_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 0,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0xFE,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = 0x02,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.DFU_Functional = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_DFUFunctional},
+			
+			.Attributes             = (ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD | ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD),
+
+			.DetachTimeout          = 0x0000,
+			.TransferSize           = 0x0c00,
+		
+			.DFUSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.01)
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */ 
+USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"AVR DFU Bootloader"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			if (!(DescriptorNumber))
+			{
+				Address = &LanguageString;
+				Size    = LanguageString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				Address = &ProductString;
+				Size    = ProductString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h b/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h
index 961e480e7..becfb8de1 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,172 +1,172 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Descriptor type value for a DFU class functional descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_DFUFunctional               0x21
-		
-		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device will detach and re-attach when a DFU_DETACH
-		 *  command is issued, rather than the host issuing a USB Reset.
-		 */
-		#define ATTR_WILL_DETATCH                 (1 << 3)
-
-		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can communicate during the manifestation phase
-		 *  (memory programming phase).
-		 */
-		#define ATTR_MANEFESTATION_TOLLERANT      (1 << 2)
-		
-		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_UPLOAD requests to send data from
-		 *  the device to the host.
-		 */		
-		#define ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD                   (1 << 1)
-
-		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_DNLOAD requests to send data from
-		 *  the host to the device.
-		 */		
-		#define ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD                 (1 << 0)
-
-		#if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFB
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF9
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFB
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF9
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFB
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF4
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x87
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF3
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF0
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FEF
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
-		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFA
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF7
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
-		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)
-			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FEE
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
-			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
-		#else
-			#error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader.
-		#endif
-		
-		#if !defined(PRODUCT_ID_CODE)
-			#error Current AVR model is not supported by this bootloader.
-		#endif
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a DFU class function descriptor. This descriptor gives DFU class information
-		 *  to the host when read, indicating the DFU device's capabilities.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t               Header; /**< Standard descriptor header structure */
-			
-			uint8_t                               Attributes; /**< DFU device attributes, a mask comprising of the
-			                                                    *  ATTR_* macros listed in this source file
-			                                                    */
-			uint16_t                              DetachTimeout; /**< Timeout in milliseconds between a USB_DETACH
-			                                                        *  command being issued and the device detaching
-			                                                        *  from the USB bus
-			                                                        */																	
-			uint16_t                              TransferSize; /**< Maximum number of bytes the DFU device can accept
-			                                                      *  from the host in a transaction
-			                                                      */			
-			uint16_t                              DFUSpecification;	/**< BCD packed DFU specification number this DFU
-			                                                          *  device complies with
-			                                                          */
-		} USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t;
-	
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            DFU_Interface;
-			USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t       DFU_Functional;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Descriptor type value for a DFU class functional descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_DFUFunctional               0x21
+		
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device will detach and re-attach when a DFU_DETACH
+		 *  command is issued, rather than the host issuing a USB Reset.
+		 */
+		#define ATTR_WILL_DETATCH                 (1 << 3)
+
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can communicate during the manifestation phase
+		 *  (memory programming phase).
+		 */
+		#define ATTR_MANEFESTATION_TOLLERANT      (1 << 2)
+		
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_UPLOAD requests to send data from
+		 *  the device to the host.
+		 */		
+		#define ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD                   (1 << 1)
+
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_DNLOAD requests to send data from
+		 *  the host to the device.
+		 */		
+		#define ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD                 (1 << 0)
+
+		#if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFB
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF9
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFB
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF9
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFB
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF4
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x87
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF3
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF0
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FEF
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFA
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF7
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FEE
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#else
+			#error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader.
+		#endif
+		
+		#if !defined(PRODUCT_ID_CODE)
+			#error Current AVR model is not supported by this bootloader.
+		#endif
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DFU class function descriptor. This descriptor gives DFU class information
+		 *  to the host when read, indicating the DFU device's capabilities.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t               Header; /**< Standard descriptor header structure */
+			
+			uint8_t                               Attributes; /**< DFU device attributes, a mask comprising of the
+			                                                    *  ATTR_* macros listed in this source file
+			                                                    */
+			uint16_t                              DetachTimeout; /**< Timeout in milliseconds between a USB_DETACH
+			                                                        *  command being issued and the device detaching
+			                                                        *  from the USB bus
+			                                                        */																	
+			uint16_t                              TransferSize; /**< Maximum number of bytes the DFU device can accept
+			                                                      *  from the host in a transaction
+			                                                      */			
+			uint16_t                              DFUSpecification;	/**< BCD packed DFU specification number this DFU
+			                                                          *  device complies with
+			                                                          */
+		} USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t;
+	
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            DFU_Interface;
+			USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t       DFU_Functional;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf b/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf
index de1d4e06a..a7c7496c8 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - DFU Class Bootloader"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - DFU Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile b/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile
index 4d5c30131..6695ff5ad 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile
+++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile
@@ -1,715 +1,715 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Starting byte address of the bootloader
-BOOT_START = 0x1E000
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = BootloaderDFU
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR=0
-LUFA_OPTS += -D CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=32
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
- 
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC = 
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fdata-sections
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START)
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program clean debug clean_list clean_binary       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Starting byte address of the bootloader
+BOOT_START = 0x1E000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = BootloaderDFU
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR=0
+LUFA_OPTS += -D CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=32
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+ 
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC = 
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fdata-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START)
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program clean debug clean_list clean_binary       \
 gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c
index 52d6c737a..003ff2c9f 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,189 +1,189 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-	  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t HIDReport[] =
-{
-	0x06, 0x9c, 0xff,        /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined)                     */
-	0x09, TEENSY_USAGEPAGE,  /* Usage (Vendor Defined)                          */
-	0xa1, 0x01,              /* Collection (Vendor Defined)                     */
-	0x0a, 0x19, 0x00,        /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
-	0x75, 0x08,              /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-#if (SPM_PAGESIZE == 128)    /*   Report Count (SPM_PAGESIZE + 2)               */
-	0x95, (SPM_PAGESIZE + 2),
-#else
-	0x96, ((SPM_PAGESIZE + 2) & 0xFF), ((SPM_PAGESIZE + 2) >> 8),
-#endif
-	0x15, 0x00,              /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0xff,              /*   Logical Maximum (255)                         */
-	0x91, 0x02,              /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0xc0                     /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x16C0,
-	.ProductID              = 0x0478,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0120,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_VendorHID = 
-		{  
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-			
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalHIDDescriptors    = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(HIDReport)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | HID_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x40
-		},
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	/* If/Else If chain compiles slightly smaller than a switch case */
-
-	if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Device)
-	{
-		Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);	
-	}
-	else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Configuration)
-	{
-		Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);	
-	}
-	else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_HID)
-	{
-		Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_VendorHID;
-		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		Address = (void*)&HIDReport;
-		Size    = sizeof(HIDReport);
-	}
-
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+	  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t HIDReport[] =
+{
+	0x06, 0x9c, 0xff,        /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined)                     */
+	0x09, TEENSY_USAGEPAGE,  /* Usage (Vendor Defined)                          */
+	0xa1, 0x01,              /* Collection (Vendor Defined)                     */
+	0x0a, 0x19, 0x00,        /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
+	0x75, 0x08,              /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+#if (SPM_PAGESIZE == 128)    /*   Report Count (SPM_PAGESIZE + 2)               */
+	0x95, (SPM_PAGESIZE + 2),
+#else
+	0x96, ((SPM_PAGESIZE + 2) & 0xFF), ((SPM_PAGESIZE + 2) >> 8),
+#endif
+	0x15, 0x00,              /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0xff,              /*   Logical Maximum (255)                         */
+	0x91, 0x02,              /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0xc0                     /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x16C0,
+	.ProductID              = 0x0478,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0120,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_VendorHID = 
+		{  
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalHIDDescriptors    = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(HIDReport)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | HID_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x40
+		},
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	/* If/Else If chain compiles slightly smaller than a switch case */
+
+	if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Device)
+	{
+		Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);	
+	}
+	else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Configuration)
+	{
+		Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);	
+	}
+	else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_HID)
+	{
+		Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_VendorHID;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		Address = (void*)&HIDReport;
+		Size    = sizeof(HIDReport);
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h
index 8ef964d2a..a772dbe8e 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,115 +1,115 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-	  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
-		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
-		 */	
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
-				
-			uint16_t                HIDSpec;
-			uint8_t                 CountryCode;
-		
-			uint8_t                 TotalHIDDescriptors;
-
-			uint8_t                 HIDReportType;
-			uint16_t                HIDReportLength;
-		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
-		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID_VendorHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the HID data IN endpoint. */
-		#define HID_EPNUM                 1
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */		
-		#define HID_EPSIZE                64
-
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
-		
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
-		
-		/** Vendor usage page for the Teensy 1.0 board */
-		#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_10       0x19
-
-		/** Vendor usage page for the Teensy++ 1.0 board */
-		#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_10PP     0x1A
-
-		/** Vendor usage page for the Teensy 2.0 board */
-		#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_20       0x1B
-		
-		/** Vendor usage page for the Teensy++ 2.0 board */
-		#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_20PP     0x1C
-		
-		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__))
-			#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE      TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_10
-		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
-			#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE      TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_20
-		#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__))
-			#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE      TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_10PP
-		#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
-			#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE      TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_20PP
-		#else
-			#error The selected AVR model is not currently supported by the TeensyHID bootloader.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+	  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
+		 */	
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
+				
+			uint16_t                HIDSpec;
+			uint8_t                 CountryCode;
+		
+			uint8_t                 TotalHIDDescriptors;
+
+			uint8_t                 HIDReportType;
+			uint16_t                HIDReportLength;
+		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID_VendorHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the HID data IN endpoint. */
+		#define HID_EPNUM                 1
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */		
+		#define HID_EPSIZE                64
+
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
+		
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
+		
+		/** Vendor usage page for the Teensy 1.0 board */
+		#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_10       0x19
+
+		/** Vendor usage page for the Teensy++ 1.0 board */
+		#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_10PP     0x1A
+
+		/** Vendor usage page for the Teensy 2.0 board */
+		#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_20       0x1B
+		
+		/** Vendor usage page for the Teensy++ 2.0 board */
+		#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_20PP     0x1C
+		
+		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__))
+			#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE      TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_10
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
+			#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE      TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_20
+		#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__))
+			#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE      TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_10PP
+		#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
+			#define TEENSY_USAGEPAGE      TEENSY_USAGEPAGE_20PP
+		#else
+			#error The selected AVR model is not currently supported by the TeensyHID bootloader.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf
index 1502ec619..3f97c7c59 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1563 +1,1563 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Teensy HID Bootloader"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Teensy HID Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c
index ffbaca8b3..f2bb6df33 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c
+++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c
@@ -1,157 +1,157 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the TeensyHID bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
- */
- 
-#include "TeensyHID.h"
-
-/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
- *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
- *  started via a forced watchdog reset.
- */
-bool RunBootloader = true;
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously 
- *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	/* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
-	sei();
-
-	while (RunBootloader)
-	  USB_USBTask();
-	
-	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
-	USB_Detach();
-
-	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
-	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
-
-	for (;;);
-}
-
-/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
-	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
-	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
-
-	/* Initialize USB subsystem */
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
- *  to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Setup HID Report Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HID_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE,
-	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
- *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_SetReport:
-			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-			
-			/* Wait until the command has been sent by the host */
-			while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()));
-		
-			/* Read in the write destination index */
-			uint16_t PageIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
-			
-			/* Check if the command is a program page command, or a start application command */
-			if (PageIndex == TEENSY_STARTAPPLICATION)
-			{
-				RunBootloader = false;
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
-				uint32_t PageByteAddress = ((uint32_t)PageIndex << 8);
-				#else
-				uint16_t PageByteAddress = PageIndex;
-				#endif
-			
-				/* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */
-				boot_page_erase(PageByteAddress);
-				boot_spm_busy_wait();
-				
-				/* Write each of the FLASH page's bytes in sequence */
-				#if (SPM_PAGESIZE == 128)
-				for (uint8_t PageByte = 0; PageByte < SPM_PAGESIZE; PageByte += 2)				
-				#else
-				for (uint16_t PageByte = 0; PageByte < SPM_PAGESIZE; PageByte += 2)				
-				#endif
-				{
-					/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
-					if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-					{
-						Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-						while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()));
-					}
-
-					/* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */
-					boot_page_fill(PageByteAddress + PageByte, Endpoint_Read_Word_LE());
-				}
-
-				/* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */
-				boot_page_write(PageByteAddress);
-				boot_spm_busy_wait();
-			}
-
-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the TeensyHID bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+ 
+#include "TeensyHID.h"
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
+ *  started via a forced watchdog reset.
+ */
+bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously 
+ *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
+	sei();
+
+	while (RunBootloader)
+	  USB_USBTask();
+	
+	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
+	USB_Detach();
+
+	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
+	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Initialize USB subsystem */
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
+ *  to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Setup HID Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HID_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE,
+	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
+ *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_SetReport:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+			
+			/* Wait until the command has been sent by the host */
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()));
+		
+			/* Read in the write destination index */
+			uint16_t PageIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+			
+			/* Check if the command is a program page command, or a start application command */
+			if (PageIndex == TEENSY_STARTAPPLICATION)
+			{
+				RunBootloader = false;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+				uint32_t PageByteAddress = ((uint32_t)PageIndex << 8);
+				#else
+				uint16_t PageByteAddress = PageIndex;
+				#endif
+			
+				/* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */
+				boot_page_erase(PageByteAddress);
+				boot_spm_busy_wait();
+				
+				/* Write each of the FLASH page's bytes in sequence */
+				#if (SPM_PAGESIZE == 128)
+				for (uint8_t PageByte = 0; PageByte < SPM_PAGESIZE; PageByte += 2)				
+				#else
+				for (uint16_t PageByte = 0; PageByte < SPM_PAGESIZE; PageByte += 2)				
+				#endif
+				{
+					/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+					if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+					{
+						Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+						while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()));
+					}
+
+					/* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */
+					boot_page_fill(PageByteAddress + PageByte, Endpoint_Read_Word_LE());
+				}
+
+				/* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */
+				boot_page_write(PageByteAddress);
+				boot_spm_busy_wait();
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h
index 7e3d72dcf..0afa308f3 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h
+++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h
@@ -1,64 +1,64 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-	  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for TeensyHID.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _TEENSYHID_H_
-#define _TEENSYHID_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/boot.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
-		#define REQ_SetReport             0x09
-		
-		/** Teensy Bootloader special address to start the user application */
-		#define TEENSY_STARTAPPLICATION   0xFFFF
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+	  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TeensyHID.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _TEENSYHID_H_
+#define _TEENSYHID_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetReport             0x09
+		
+		/** Teensy Bootloader special address to start the user application */
+		#define TEENSY_STARTAPPLICATION   0xFFFF
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt
index 1034c1c49..adc541254 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt
+++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Teensy HID Class USB AVR Bootloader
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - AT90USB162 (Teensy 1.0)
- *  - AT90USB646 (Teensy++ 1.0)
- *  - ATMEGA32U4 (Teensy 2.0)
- *  - AT90USB1286 (Teensy++ 2.0)
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- * <table>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *   <td>Device</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *   <td>Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr> 
- *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *   <td>N/A</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *   <td>USBIF HID Class Standard \n
- *       Teensy Programming Protocol Specification</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *   <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *       Full Speed Mode</td>
- *  </tr>
- * </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a HID Class device, allowing for Teensy compatible programming
- * software to load firmware onto the AVR, such as the official software at <a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/</a>.
- *  
- * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the ATMEGA32U4, and will fit into 2-4KB of bootloader space. For other
- * devices, the makefile will need to be updated to reflect the altered MCU model and bootloader start address. When
- * calculating the bootloader start address, use (TARGET_FLASH_SIZE_BYTES - 4096) for targets where the bootloader
- * compiles larger than 2KB, or (TARGET_FLASH_SIZE_BYTES - 2048) for smaller targets where the bootloader compiles
- * under 2KB.
- *
- * This spoofs (with permission) the official Teensy bootloader's VID and PID, so that the software remains
- * compatible with no changes.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Teensy HID Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - AT90USB162 (Teensy 1.0)
+ *  - AT90USB646 (Teensy++ 1.0)
+ *  - ATMEGA32U4 (Teensy 2.0)
+ *  - AT90USB1286 (Teensy++ 2.0)
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr> 
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF HID Class Standard \n
+ *       Teensy Programming Protocol Specification</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *       Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a HID Class device, allowing for Teensy compatible programming
+ * software to load firmware onto the AVR, such as the official software at <a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/</a>.
+ *  
+ * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the ATMEGA32U4, and will fit into 2-4KB of bootloader space. For other
+ * devices, the makefile will need to be updated to reflect the altered MCU model and bootloader start address. When
+ * calculating the bootloader start address, use (TARGET_FLASH_SIZE_BYTES - 4096) for targets where the bootloader
+ * compiles larger than 2KB, or (TARGET_FLASH_SIZE_BYTES - 2048) for smaller targets where the bootloader compiles
+ * under 2KB.
+ *
+ * This spoofs (with permission) the official Teensy bootloader's VID and PID, so that the software remains
+ * compatible with no changes.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile
index 891be4923..5b268bad4 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile
+++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile
@@ -1,713 +1,713 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = atmega32u4
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = 
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 16000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Starting byte address of the bootloader
-BOOT_START = 0x7000
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = TeensyHID
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR=0
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START)
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program clean debug clean_list clean_binary       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = atmega32u4
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = 
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 16000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Starting byte address of the bootloader
+BOOT_START = 0x7000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = TeensyHID
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR=0
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START)
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program clean debug clean_list clean_binary       \
 gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Bootloaders/makefile b/Bootloaders/makefile
index 0fa1fcfd1..638cdc170 100644
--- a/Bootloaders/makefile
+++ b/Bootloaders/makefile
@@ -1,29 +1,29 @@
-#
-#             LUFA Library
-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-#              
-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-#      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-#
-
-# Makefile to build all the LUFA USB Bootloaders. Call with "make all" to
-# rebuild all bootloaders.
-
-# Bootloaders are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
-# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
-# code.
-
-all:
-	$(MAKE) -C DFU clean
-	$(MAKE) -C DFU all
-
-	$(MAKE) -C CDC clean
-	$(MAKE) -C CDC all
-	
-	$(MAKE) -C TeensyHID clean
-	$(MAKE) -C TeensyHID all
-
-%:
-	$(MAKE) -C DFU $@
-	$(MAKE) -C CDC $@
-	$(MAKE) -C TeensyHID $@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+#              
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA USB Bootloaders. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all bootloaders.
+
+# Bootloaders are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+all:
+	$(MAKE) -C DFU clean
+	$(MAKE) -C DFU all
+
+	$(MAKE) -C CDC clean
+	$(MAKE) -C CDC all
+	
+	$(MAKE) -C TeensyHID clean
+	$(MAKE) -C TeensyHID all
+
+%:
+	$(MAKE) -C DFU $@
+	$(MAKE) -C CDC $@
+	$(MAKE) -C TeensyHID $@
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.c
index 09a2f0f01..dd0028a55 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.c
@@ -1,148 +1,148 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the AudioInput demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "AudioInput.h"
-
-/** LUFA Audio Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Audio Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t Microphone_Audio_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber     = AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize       = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		ProcessNextSample();
-
-		Audio_Device_USBTask(&Microphone_Audio_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);
-	ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL);
-	
-	/* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */
-	ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | MIC_IN_ADC_MUX_MASK);
-}
-
-/** Processes the next audio sample by reading the last ADC conversion and writing it to the audio
- *  interface, each time the sample reload timer period elapses to give a constant sample rate.
- */
-void ProcessNextSample(void)
-{
-	/* Check if the sample reload timer period has elapsed, and that the USB bus is ready for a new sample */
-	if ((TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)) && Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample(&Microphone_Audio_Interface))
-	{
-		TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
-
-		/* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */
-		int16_t AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult());
-		
-		#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL)
-		/* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */
-		AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2);
-		#endif
-
-		Audio_Device_WriteSample16(&Microphone_Audio_Interface, AudioSample);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-
-	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
-	OCR0A   = (F_CPU / 8 / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY) - 1;
-	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
-	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Stop the sample reload timer */
-	TCCR0B = 0;
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	
-	if (!(Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Microphone_Audio_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Microphone_Audio_Interface);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AudioInput demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioInput.h"
+
+/** LUFA Audio Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Audio Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t Microphone_Audio_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber     = AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize       = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		ProcessNextSample();
+
+		Audio_Device_USBTask(&Microphone_Audio_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);
+	ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL);
+	
+	/* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */
+	ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | MIC_IN_ADC_MUX_MASK);
+}
+
+/** Processes the next audio sample by reading the last ADC conversion and writing it to the audio
+ *  interface, each time the sample reload timer period elapses to give a constant sample rate.
+ */
+void ProcessNextSample(void)
+{
+	/* Check if the sample reload timer period has elapsed, and that the USB bus is ready for a new sample */
+	if ((TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)) && Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample(&Microphone_Audio_Interface))
+	{
+		TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
+
+		/* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */
+		int16_t AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult());
+		
+		#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL)
+		/* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */
+		AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2);
+		#endif
+
+		Audio_Device_WriteSample16(&Microphone_Audio_Interface, AudioSample);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	OCR0A   = (F_CPU / 8 / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY) - 1;
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Stop the sample reload timer */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	
+	if (!(Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Microphone_Audio_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Microphone_Audio_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.h
index dc3475e69..9231f8962 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.h
@@ -1,87 +1,87 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for AudioInput.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
-#define _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** ADC channel number for the microphone input. */
-		#define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL        2
-		
-		/** ADC channel MUX mask for the microphone input. */
-		#define MIC_IN_ADC_MUX_MASK       ADC_CHANNEL2
-
-		/** Maximum ADC sample value for the microphone input. */
-		#define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE          0xFFFF
-
-		/** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */
-		#define ADC_MAX_RANGE             0x3FF
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void ProcessNextSample(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioInput.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ADC channel number for the microphone input. */
+		#define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL        2
+		
+		/** ADC channel MUX mask for the microphone input. */
+		#define MIC_IN_ADC_MUX_MASK       ADC_CHANNEL2
+
+		/** Maximum ADC sample value for the microphone input. */
+		#define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE          0xFFFF
+
+		/** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */
+		#define ADC_MAX_RANGE             0x3FF
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void ProcessNextSample(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt
index aedb4b782..2406cdd0b 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Audio Input Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Audio Class</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
- *        USBIF Audio Class Terminal Types Specification \n
- *        USBIF Audio Data Formats Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Audio Input device using the
- *  basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
- *  required).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
- *  as a USB microphone. Incoming audio from the ADC channel 1 will
- *  be sampled and sent to the host computer.
- *  
- *  To use, connect a microphone to the ADC channel 1.
- *  
- *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
- *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo so that the half VCC bias of the microphone input is subtracted.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY</td>
- *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
- *    <td>Gives the audio sample rate per channel for the audio stream, in Hz.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Audio Input Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio Input device using the
+ *  basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ *  required).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a USB microphone. Incoming audio from the ADC channel 1 will
+ *  be sampled and sent to the host computer.
+ *  
+ *  To use, connect a microphone to the ADC channel 1.
+ *  
+ *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
+ *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo so that the half VCC bias of the microphone input is subtracted.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY</td>
+ *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
+ *    <td>Gives the audio sample rate per channel for the audio stream, in Hz.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.c
index 784ce79da..006e45b5b 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,314 +1,314 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
- 
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2047,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
-
-			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-
-			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-
-			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-
-	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
-
-			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t) +
-			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t) +
-			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t)),
-			
-			.InCollection             = 1,
-			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
-		},
-
-	.Audio_InputTerminal = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal,
-
-			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
-			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_IN_MIC,
-			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
-
-			.TotalChannels            = 1,
-			.ChannelConfig            = 0,
-
-			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_OutputTerminal = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal,
-
-			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
-			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_STREAMING,
-			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
-
-			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
-
-			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
-
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
-
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-
-			.TerminalLink             = 0x02,
-
-			.FrameDelay               = 1,
-			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
-		},
-
-	.Audio_AudioFormat = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Format_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Format,
-
-			.FormatType               = 0x01,
-			.Channels                 = 0x01,
-			
-			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
-			.BitResolution            = 16,
-			.SampleFrequencyType      = AUDIO_TOTAL_SAMPLE_RATES,
-		
-			.SampleFrequencies        = {AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)}
-		},
-	
-	.Audio_StreamEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Endpoint = 
-				{
-					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM),
-					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-					.PollingIntervalMS   = 1
-				},
-			
-			.Refresh                  = 0,
-			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-			
-			.Attributes               = 0x00,
-			
-			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
-			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Audio In Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2047,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
+
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t)),
+			
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
+		},
+
+	.Audio_InputTerminal = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal,
+
+			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
+			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_IN_MIC,
+			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalChannels            = 1,
+			.ChannelConfig            = 0,
+
+			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_OutputTerminal = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
+			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_STREAMING,
+			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
+
+			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
+
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
+
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+			.TerminalLink             = 0x02,
+
+			.FrameDelay               = 1,
+			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
+		},
+
+	.Audio_AudioFormat = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Format_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Format,
+
+			.FormatType               = 0x01,
+			.Channels                 = 0x01,
+			
+			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
+			.BitResolution            = 16,
+			.SampleFrequencyType      = AUDIO_TOTAL_SAMPLE_RATES,
+		
+			.SampleFrequencies        = {AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)}
+		},
+	
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Endpoint = 
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM),
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 1
+				},
+			
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+			
+			.Attributes               = 0x00,
+			
+			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
+			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Audio In Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.h
index 9bc94f39f..79825bd40 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,82 +1,82 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
-		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM           1
-		
-		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires
-		 *  at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller
-		 *  USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output.
-		 */
-		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE          ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM)
-
-		/** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */
-		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY       48000
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t             Audio_InputTerminal;
-			USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t            Audio_OutputTerminal;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t              Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_Format_t                    Audio_AudioFormat;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM           1
+		
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires
+		 *  at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller
+		 *  USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output.
+		 */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE          ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM)
+
+		/** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY       48000
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t             Audio_InputTerminal;
+			USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t            Audio_OutputTerminal;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t              Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Format_t                    Audio_AudioFormat;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf
index 374aac9df..6b0ede97c 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/makefile
index eb51c61f3..d73449810 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = AudioInput
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c          \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = AudioInput
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c          \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c
index 0dda68c37..622e423c6 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c
@@ -1,201 +1,201 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the AudioOutput demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "AudioOutput.h"
-
-/** LUFA Audio Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Audio Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t Speaker_Audio_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber    = AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize      = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		ProcessNextSample();
-
-		Audio_Device_USBTask(&Speaker_Audio_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Processes the next audio sample by reading the last ADC conversion and writing it to the audio
- *  interface, each time the sample reload timer period elapses to give a constant sample rate.
- */
-void ProcessNextSample(void)
-{
-	/* Check if the sample reload timer period has elapsed, and that the USB bus is ready for a new sample */
-	if ((TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)) && Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived(&Speaker_Audio_Interface))
-	{
-		/* Clear the sample reload timer */
-		TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
-
-		/* Retrieve the signed 16-bit left and right audio samples, convert to 8-bit */
-		int8_t  LeftSample_8Bit   = (Audio_Device_ReadSample16(&Speaker_Audio_Interface) >> 8);
-		int8_t  RightSample_8Bit  = (Audio_Device_ReadSample16(&Speaker_Audio_Interface) >> 8);
-
-		/* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */
-		int8_t  MixedSample_8Bit  = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1);
-
-#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
-		/* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */
-		OCR3A = (MixedSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
-		/* Load the dual 8-bit samples into the PWM timer channels */
-		OCR3A = (LeftSample_8Bit  ^ (1 << 7));
-		OCR3B = (RightSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
-		/* Load the 8-bit mixed sample into PORTC */
-		PORTC = MixedSample_8Bit;
-#endif
-
-		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-
-		/* Turn on LEDs as the sample amplitude increases */
-		if (MixedSample_8Bit > 16)
-		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4);
-		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 8)
-		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3);
-		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 4)
-		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
-		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 2)
-		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
-
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-	
-	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
-	OCR0A   = (F_CPU / 8 / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY) - 1;
-	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
-	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
-
-#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
-	/* Set speaker as output */
-	DDRC   |= (1 << 6);
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
-	/* Set speakers as outputs */
-	DDRC   |= ((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
-	/* Set PORTC as outputs */
-	DDRC   |= 0xFF;
-#endif
-
-#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
-	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
-	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM30) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)
-	        | (1 << COM3B1) | (1 << COM3B0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
-	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed
-#endif
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-
-	/* Stop the sample reload timer */
-	TCCR0B = 0;
-
-#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
-	/* Stop the PWM generation timer */
-	TCCR3B = 0;
-#endif
-
-#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
-	/* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
-	DDRC   &= ~(1 << 6);
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
-	/* Set speakers as inputs to reduce current draw */
-	DDRC   &= ~((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
-	/* Set PORTC low */
-	PORTC  = 0x00;
-#endif
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	
-	if (!(Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Speaker_Audio_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Speaker_Audio_Interface);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AudioOutput demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioOutput.h"
+
+/** LUFA Audio Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Audio Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t Speaker_Audio_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber    = AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize      = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		ProcessNextSample();
+
+		Audio_Device_USBTask(&Speaker_Audio_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Processes the next audio sample by reading the last ADC conversion and writing it to the audio
+ *  interface, each time the sample reload timer period elapses to give a constant sample rate.
+ */
+void ProcessNextSample(void)
+{
+	/* Check if the sample reload timer period has elapsed, and that the USB bus is ready for a new sample */
+	if ((TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)) && Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived(&Speaker_Audio_Interface))
+	{
+		/* Clear the sample reload timer */
+		TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
+
+		/* Retrieve the signed 16-bit left and right audio samples, convert to 8-bit */
+		int8_t  LeftSample_8Bit   = (Audio_Device_ReadSample16(&Speaker_Audio_Interface) >> 8);
+		int8_t  RightSample_8Bit  = (Audio_Device_ReadSample16(&Speaker_Audio_Interface) >> 8);
+
+		/* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */
+		int8_t  MixedSample_8Bit  = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1);
+
+#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+		/* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */
+		OCR3A = (MixedSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+		/* Load the dual 8-bit samples into the PWM timer channels */
+		OCR3A = (LeftSample_8Bit  ^ (1 << 7));
+		OCR3B = (RightSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+		/* Load the 8-bit mixed sample into PORTC */
+		PORTC = MixedSample_8Bit;
+#endif
+
+		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+		/* Turn on LEDs as the sample amplitude increases */
+		if (MixedSample_8Bit > 16)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 8)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 4)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 2)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+	
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	OCR0A   = (F_CPU / 8 / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY) - 1;
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+
+#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC   |= (1 << 6);
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+	/* Set speakers as outputs */
+	DDRC   |= ((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+	/* Set PORTC as outputs */
+	DDRC   |= 0xFF;
+#endif
+
+#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
+	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
+	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM30) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)
+	        | (1 << COM3B1) | (1 << COM3B0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
+	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed
+#endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+	/* Stop the sample reload timer */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+
+#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
+	/* Stop the PWM generation timer */
+	TCCR3B = 0;
+#endif
+
+#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+	/* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC   &= ~(1 << 6);
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+	/* Set speakers as inputs to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC   &= ~((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+	/* Set PORTC low */
+	PORTC  = 0x00;
+#endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	
+	if (!(Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Speaker_Audio_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Speaker_Audio_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h
index cf0034f87..5a7b2efe8 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h
@@ -1,75 +1,75 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdlib.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h>
-	
-	/* Macros: */		
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void ProcessNextSample(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdlib.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h>
+	
+	/* Macros: */		
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void ProcessNextSample(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt
index b05ee45ce..9170478ad 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt
@@ -1,96 +1,96 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Audio Output Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Audio Class</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
- *        USBIF Audio Class Terminal Types Specification \n
- *        USBIF Audio Data Formats Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Audio Output device using the
- *  basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
- *  required).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
- *  as a USB speaker. Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto
- *  the timer 3 output compare channel A for AUDIO_OUT_MONO mode, on
- *  timer 3 channels A and B for AUDIO_OUT_STEREO and on PORTC as a signed
- *  mono sample for AUDIO_OUT_PORTC. Audio output will also be indicated on
- *  the board LEDs in all modes. Decouple audio outputs with a capacitor and
- *  attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
- *  
- *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
- *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_STEREO</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in stereo to the timer output pins of the microcontroller.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_MONO</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to the timer output pin of the microcontroller.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_PORTC</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to port C of the microcontroller, for connection to an
- *        external DAC.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY</td>
- *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
- *    <td>Gives the audio sample rate per channel for the audio stream, in Hz.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Audio Output Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio Output device using the
+ *  basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ *  required).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a USB speaker. Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto
+ *  the timer 3 output compare channel A for AUDIO_OUT_MONO mode, on
+ *  timer 3 channels A and B for AUDIO_OUT_STEREO and on PORTC as a signed
+ *  mono sample for AUDIO_OUT_PORTC. Audio output will also be indicated on
+ *  the board LEDs in all modes. Decouple audio outputs with a capacitor and
+ *  attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
+ *  
+ *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
+ *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_STEREO</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in stereo to the timer output pins of the microcontroller.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_MONO</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to the timer output pin of the microcontroller.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_PORTC</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to port C of the microcontroller, for connection to an
+ *        external DAC.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY</td>
+ *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
+ *    <td>Gives the audio sample rate per channel for the audio stream, in Hz.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c
index 3f62031f7..a9a5f05a1 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,314 +1,314 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
- 
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2046,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
-
-			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-			
-			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-			
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-			
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-	
-	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
-			
-			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t) +
-			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t) +
-			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t)),
-			
-			.InCollection             = 1,
-			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
-		},
-
-	.Audio_InputTerminal = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal,
-		
-			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
-			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_STREAMING,
-			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalChannels            = 2,
-			.ChannelConfig            = (CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT | CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT),
-			
-			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_OutputTerminal = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal,
-		
-			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
-			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER,
-			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
-			
-			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
-			
-			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-			
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-			
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
-			
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-			
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-			
-			.TerminalLink             = 0x01,
-			
-			.FrameDelay               = 1,
-			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_AudioFormat = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Format_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Format,
-
-			.FormatType               = 0x01,
-			.Channels                 = 0x02,
-			
-			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
-			.BitResolution            = 16,
-
-			.SampleFrequencyType      = AUDIO_TOTAL_SAMPLE_RATES,		
-			.SampleFrequencies        = {AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)}
-		},
-	
-	.Audio_StreamEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Endpoint = 
-				{
-					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM),
-					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-					.PollingIntervalMS   = 1
-				},
-			
-			.Refresh                  = 0,
-			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-			
-			.Attributes               = EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS,
-			
-			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
-			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(19), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Audio Out Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration:
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00:
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2046,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+			
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+			
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+	
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
+			
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t)),
+			
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
+		},
+
+	.Audio_InputTerminal = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal,
+		
+			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
+			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_STREAMING,
+			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalChannels            = 2,
+			.ChannelConfig            = (CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT | CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT),
+			
+			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_OutputTerminal = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal,
+		
+			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
+			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER,
+			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
+			
+			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
+			
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+			
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+			
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
+			
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+			
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+			
+			.TerminalLink             = 0x01,
+			
+			.FrameDelay               = 1,
+			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_AudioFormat = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Format_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Format,
+
+			.FormatType               = 0x01,
+			.Channels                 = 0x02,
+			
+			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
+			.BitResolution            = 16,
+
+			.SampleFrequencyType      = AUDIO_TOTAL_SAMPLE_RATES,		
+			.SampleFrequencies        = {AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)}
+		},
+	
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Endpoint = 
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM),
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 1
+				},
+			
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+			
+			.Attributes               = EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS,
+			
+			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
+			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(19), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Audio Out Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h
index 34dd481b1..ff7f0bbc6 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,82 +1,82 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
-		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM           1
-		
-		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires
-		 *  at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller
-		 *  USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output.
-		 */
-		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE          ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM)
-		
-		/** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */
-		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY       48000
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t             Audio_InputTerminal;
-			USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t            Audio_OutputTerminal;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t              Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_Format_t                    Audio_AudioFormat;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM           1
+		
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires
+		 *  at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller
+		 *  USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output.
+		 */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE          ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM)
+		
+		/** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY       48000
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t             Audio_InputTerminal;
+			USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t            Audio_OutputTerminal;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t              Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Format_t                    Audio_AudioFormat;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf
index 632a749c5..2c4c279aa 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = YES
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = YES
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/makefile
index 1aae8ea34..b37f84ae4 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/makefile
@@ -1,738 +1,738 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = AudioOutput
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c          \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DAUDIO_OUT_STEREO
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = AudioOutput
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c          \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DAUDIO_OUT_STEREO
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
index 18cd906c4..5a89cc8b1 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,381 +1,381 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-	
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0xEF,
-	.SubClass               = 0x02,
-	.Protocol               = 0x01,
-	
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-	
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204E,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-	
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-	
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 4,
-			
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-			
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC1_IAD = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
-
-			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 0,
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-
-			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-			
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-			
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC1_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-			
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-			
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC1_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC1_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_IAD = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
-
-			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 2,
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-
-			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 2,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-			
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-			
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC2_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x02, 0x03}
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 3,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC2_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC2_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Dual CDC Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+	
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0xEF,
+	.SubClass               = 0x02,
+	.Protocol               = 0x01,
+	
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+	
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204E,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+	
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+	
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 4,
+			
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC1_IAD = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 0,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+			
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+			
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC1_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+			
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+			
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC1_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC1_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_IAD = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 2,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 2,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+			
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+			
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC2_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x02, 0x03}
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 3,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC2_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC2_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Dual CDC Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
index 89a8855ad..8cebab379 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,102 +1,102 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM        3
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC1_TX_EPNUM                  1
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC1_RX_EPNUM                  2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM        4
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC2_TX_EPNUM                  5
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC2_RX_EPNUM                  6
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC1_IAD;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC1_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC1_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC2_IAD;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC2_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC2_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM        3
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_TX_EPNUM                  1
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_RX_EPNUM                  2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM        4
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_TX_EPNUM                  5
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_RX_EPNUM                  6
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC1_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC1_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC1_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC2_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC2_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC2_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
index 906862b3e..56c93a724 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c
index ba3b86f12..cc8f92ccd 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c
@@ -1,192 +1,192 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the DualVirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "DualVirtualSerial.h"
-
-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the first CDC interface,
- *  which sends strings to the host for each joystick movement.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.ControlInterfaceNumber           = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber             = CDC1_TX_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize               = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank         = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber            = CDC1_RX_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize              = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank        = false,
-
-				.NotificationEndpointNumber       = CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
-				.NotificationEndpointSize         = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the second CDC interface,
- *  which echos back all received data from the host.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.ControlInterfaceNumber           = 2,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber             = CDC2_TX_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize               = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank         = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber            = CDC2_RX_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize              = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank        = false,
-
-				.NotificationEndpointNumber       = CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
-				.NotificationEndpointSize         = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		CheckJoystickMovement();
-
-		/* Discard all received data on the first CDC interface */
-		while (CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface))
-		  CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface);
-
-		/* Echo all received data on the second CDC interface */
-		while (CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface))
-		  CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface, CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface));
-		  
-		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface);
-		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change
- *  through the first of the CDC interfaces.
- */
-void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
-{
-	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
-	static bool ActionSent = false;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
-	else
-	  ActionSent = false;
-	  
-	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
-	{
-		ActionSent = true;
-		
-		CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface, ReportString, strlen(ReportString));		
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface);
-	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the DualVirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "DualVirtualSerial.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the first CDC interface,
+ *  which sends strings to the host for each joystick movement.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber           = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber             = CDC1_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize               = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank         = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber            = CDC1_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize              = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank        = false,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber       = CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize         = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the second CDC interface,
+ *  which echos back all received data from the host.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber           = 2,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber             = CDC2_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize               = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank         = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber            = CDC2_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize              = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank        = false,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber       = CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize         = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+
+		/* Discard all received data on the first CDC interface */
+		while (CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface))
+		  CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface);
+
+		/* Echo all received data on the second CDC interface */
+		while (CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface))
+		  CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface, CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface));
+		  
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface);
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change
+ *  through the first of the CDC interfaces.
+ */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
+	static bool ActionSent = false;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+	  
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+		
+		CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface, ReportString, strlen(ReportString));		
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface);
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h
index 1c99cfde8..e1ac0bb5a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h
@@ -1,76 +1,76 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DualVirtualSerial.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
-#define _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DualVirtualSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+#define _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt
index b1ba267a3..f21bd0c73 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Dual Communications Device Class (Dual Virtual Serial Port) Device
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Interface Association Descriptor ECN \n
- *        USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Dual Communications Device Class demonstration application.
- *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
- *  a compound device with dual CDC functions acting as a pair
- *  of virtual serial ports. This demo uses Interface Association
- *  Descriptors to link together the pair of related CDC
- *  descriptors for each virtual serial port, which may not be
- *  supported in all OSes - Windows Vista is supported, as is
- *  XP (although the latter may need a hotfix to function).
- *  
- *  Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings
- *  through the first serial port. The device does not respond to
- *  serial data sent from the host in the first serial port.
- *  
- *  The second serial port echoes back data sent from the host.
- *  
- *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
- *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
- *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
- *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
- *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
- *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
- *  CDC-ACM drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Dual Communications Device Class (Dual Virtual Serial Port) Device
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Interface Association Descriptor ECN \n
+ *        USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Dual Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a compound device with dual CDC functions acting as a pair
+ *  of virtual serial ports. This demo uses Interface Association
+ *  Descriptors to link together the pair of related CDC
+ *  descriptors for each virtual serial port, which may not be
+ *  supported in all OSes - Windows Vista is supported, as is
+ *  XP (although the latter may need a hotfix to function).
+ *  
+ *  Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings
+ *  through the first serial port. The device does not respond to
+ *  serial data sent from the host in the first serial port.
+ *  
+ *  The second serial port echoes back data sent from the host.
+ *  
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf
index beb62c644..f32c81c35 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
-INSTDISK="LUFA Dual CDC Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
+INSTDISK="LUFA Dual CDC Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/makefile
index cc4b44b62..32de86311 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/makefile
@@ -1,738 +1,738 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = DualVirtualSerial
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = DualVirtualSerial
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.c
index 953edfe16..35b655949 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,240 +1,240 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] =
-{
-	0x06, 0x9c, 0xff,     /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined)                     */
-	0x09, 0x01,           /* Usage (Vendor Defined)                          */
-	0xa1, 0x01,           /* Collection (Vendor Defined)                     */
-	0x09, 0x02,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
-	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
-	0x15, 0x80,           /*   Logical Minimum (-128)                        */
-	0x25, 0x7F,           /*   Logical Maximum (127)                         */
-	0x81, 0x02,           /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
-	0x09, 0x03,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
-	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
-	0x15, 0x00,           /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0xff,           /*   Logical Maximum (255)                         */
-	0x91, 0x02,           /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0xc0                  /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204F,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_GenericHID = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-									 
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(GenericReport)
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | GENERIC_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		},
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(21), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Generic HID Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&GenericReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(GenericReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] =
+{
+	0x06, 0x9c, 0xff,     /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined)                     */
+	0x09, 0x01,           /* Usage (Vendor Defined)                          */
+	0xa1, 0x01,           /* Collection (Vendor Defined)                     */
+	0x09, 0x02,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
+	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
+	0x15, 0x80,           /*   Logical Minimum (-128)                        */
+	0x25, 0x7F,           /*   Logical Maximum (127)                         */
+	0x81, 0x02,           /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
+	0x09, 0x03,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
+	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
+	0x15, 0x00,           /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0xff,           /*   Logical Maximum (255)                         */
+	0x91, 0x02,           /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0xc0                  /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204F,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_GenericHID = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+									 
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(GenericReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | GENERIC_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(21), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Generic HID Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&GenericReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(GenericReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.h
index 26985f1fa..410e1954f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_GenericHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define GENERIC_IN_EPNUM          1
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */
-		#define GENERIC_EPSIZE            8
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reports (including report ID byte). */
-		#define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE       8
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_GenericHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_IN_EPNUM          1
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_EPSIZE            8
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reports (including report ID byte). */
+		#define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE       8
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Doxygen.conf
index dc1902e4a..cd0d6f046 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.c
index 285a197b7..0efcd569d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.c
@@ -1,171 +1,171 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the GenericHID demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "GenericHID.h"
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevHIDReportBuffer[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
-
-/** Structure to contain reports from the host, so that they can be echoed back upon request */
-struct
-{
-	uint8_t  ReportID;
-	uint16_t ReportSize;
-	uint8_t  ReportData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
-} HIDReportEcho;
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Generic_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber              = 0,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = GENERIC_IN_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize         = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
-				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
-				
-				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevHIDReportBuffer),
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		HID_Device_USBTask(&Generic_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);	
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Generic_HID_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Generic_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Generic_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
- *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
-{
-	if (HIDReportEcho.ReportID)
-	  *ReportID = HIDReportEcho.ReportID;
-
-	memcpy(ReportData, HIDReportEcho.ReportData, HIDReportEcho.ReportSize);
-	
-	*ReportSize = HIDReportEcho.ReportSize;
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
- *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
- *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
- */
-void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	HIDReportEcho.ReportID   = ReportID;
-	HIDReportEcho.ReportSize = ReportSize;
-	memcpy(HIDReportEcho.ReportData, ReportData, ReportSize);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the GenericHID demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "GenericHID.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevHIDReportBuffer[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+/** Structure to contain reports from the host, so that they can be echoed back upon request */
+struct
+{
+	uint8_t  ReportID;
+	uint16_t ReportSize;
+	uint8_t  ReportData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+} HIDReportEcho;
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Generic_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = 0,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = GENERIC_IN_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize         = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
+				
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);	
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Generic_HID_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
+{
+	if (HIDReportEcho.ReportID)
+	  *ReportID = HIDReportEcho.ReportID;
+
+	memcpy(ReportData, HIDReportEcho.ReportData, HIDReportEcho.ReportSize);
+	
+	*ReportSize = HIDReportEcho.ReportSize;
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	HIDReportEcho.ReportID   = ReportID;
+	HIDReportEcho.ReportSize = ReportSize;
+	memcpy(HIDReportEcho.ReportData, ReportData, ReportSize);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.h
index 595bd0ea0..052ba0d51 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.h
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for GenericHID.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _GENERICHID_H_
-#define _GENERICHID_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
-		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
-		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for GenericHID.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _GENERICHID_H_
+#define _GENERICHID_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
+		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt
index fe46abdfc..022ce5b5a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt
@@ -1,75 +1,75 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Generic HID Device
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Generic HID device demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
- *  for implementing a generic HID device, using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
- *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). By default it accepts and sends up to 8 byte reports
- *  to and from a USB Host, and transmits the last sent report back to the host.
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a vendor HID device.
- *  When controlled by a custom HID class application, reports can be sent and received by
- *  both the standard data endpoint and control request methods defined in the HID specification.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *  
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE</td>
- *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
- *    <td>This token defines the size of the device reports, both sent and received. The value must be an
- *        integer ranging from 1 to 255.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Generic HID Device
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Generic HID device demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a generic HID device, using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
+ *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). By default it accepts and sends up to 8 byte reports
+ *  to and from a USB Host, and transmits the last sent report back to the host.
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a vendor HID device.
+ *  When controlled by a custom HID class application, reports can be sent and received by
+ *  both the standard data endpoint and control request methods defined in the HID specification.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *  
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE</td>
+ *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
+ *    <td>This token defines the size of the device reports, both sent and received. The value must be an
+ *        integer ranging from 1 to 255.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/makefile
index fc4578b5a..a5caf9738 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/makefile
@@ -1,739 +1,739 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = GenericHID
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = GenericHID
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.c
index 64d72add5..ec46c3f51 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,250 +1,250 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM JoystickReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                       */
-	0x09, 0x04,          /* Usage (Joystick)                                   */
-	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                           */
-	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                                  */
-	0xa1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Physical)                            */
-	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                   */
-	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage (X)                                      */
-	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage (Y)                                      */
-	0x15, 0x9c,          /*     Logical Minimum (-100)                         */
-	0x25, 0x64,          /*     Logical Maximum (100)                          */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                                */
-	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                               */
-	0x81, 0x82,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute, Volatile)     */
-	0xc0,                /*   End Collection                                   */
-	0x05, 0x09,          /*   Usage Page (Button)                              */
-	0x09, 0x02,          /*   Usage (Button 2)                                 */
-	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Button 1)                                 */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                              */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                                  */
-	0x95, 0x02,          /*   Report Count (2)                                 */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)                 */
-	0x75, 0x06,          /*   Report Size (6)                                  */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                                 */
-	0x81, 0x01,          /*   Input (Constant)                                 */
-	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                     */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-	
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2043,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_JoystickHID = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-			
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(JoystickReport)
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | JOYSTICK_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		}	
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Joystick Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_JoystickHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&JoystickReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(JoystickReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM JoystickReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                       */
+	0x09, 0x04,          /* Usage (Joystick)                                   */
+	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                           */
+	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                                  */
+	0xa1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Physical)                            */
+	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                   */
+	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage (X)                                      */
+	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage (Y)                                      */
+	0x15, 0x9c,          /*     Logical Minimum (-100)                         */
+	0x25, 0x64,          /*     Logical Maximum (100)                          */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                                */
+	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                               */
+	0x81, 0x82,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute, Volatile)     */
+	0xc0,                /*   End Collection                                   */
+	0x05, 0x09,          /*   Usage Page (Button)                              */
+	0x09, 0x02,          /*   Usage (Button 2)                                 */
+	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Button 1)                                 */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                              */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                                  */
+	0x95, 0x02,          /*   Report Count (2)                                 */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)                 */
+	0x75, 0x06,          /*   Report Size (6)                                  */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                                 */
+	0x81, 0x01,          /*   Input (Constant)                                 */
+	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                     */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+	
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2043,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_JoystickHID = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(JoystickReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | JOYSTICK_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		}	
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Joystick Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_JoystickHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&JoystickReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(JoystickReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.h
index 1777a566c..a80260c1a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,69 +1,69 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_JoystickHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define JOYSTICK_EPNUM               1
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define JOYSTICK_EPSIZE              8
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_JoystickHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define JOYSTICK_EPNUM               1
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define JOYSTICK_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Doxygen.conf
index 47c6bcda3..1abcd716a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.c
index 6a259d7c3..bbd577d2e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.c
@@ -1,179 +1,179 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Joystick demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "Joystick.h"
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevJoystickHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t)];
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Joystick_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber              = 0,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = JOYSTICK_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize         = JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
-				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
-
-				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevJoystickHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevJoystickHIDReportBuffer),
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		HID_Device_USBTask(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Joystick_HID_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
- *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
-{
-	USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* JoystickReport = (USB_JoystickReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
-	
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  JoystickReport->Y = -100;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  JoystickReport->Y =  100;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  JoystickReport->X = -100;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  JoystickReport->X =  100;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  JoystickReport->Button  = (1 << 1);
-	  
-	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	  JoystickReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
-	  
-	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t);
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
- *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
- *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
- */
-void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Joystick demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Joystick.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevJoystickHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Joystick_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = 0,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = JOYSTICK_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize         = JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
+				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
+
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevJoystickHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevJoystickHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Joystick_HID_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* JoystickReport = (USB_JoystickReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+	
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  JoystickReport->Y = -100;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  JoystickReport->Y =  100;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  JoystickReport->X = -100;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  JoystickReport->X =  100;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  JoystickReport->Button  = (1 << 1);
+	  
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  JoystickReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+	  
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.h
index 9f666fe72..20428b25f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.h
@@ -1,93 +1,93 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Joystick.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _JOYSTICK_H_
-#define _JOYSTICK_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the joystick HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
-		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			int8_t  X; /**< Current absolute joystick X position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
-			int8_t  Y; /**< Current absolute joystick Y position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
-			uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed joystick buttons */
-		} USB_JoystickReport_Data_t;
-			
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
-		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
-		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Joystick.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _JOYSTICK_H_
+#define _JOYSTICK_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the joystick HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			int8_t  X; /**< Current absolute joystick X position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			int8_t  Y; /**< Current absolute joystick Y position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed joystick buttons */
+		} USB_JoystickReport_Data_t;
+			
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
+		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.txt
index 51c9bdbc7..994aac435 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.txt
@@ -1,73 +1,73 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Joystick Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Joystick demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard device, for USB Joysticks
- *  using the standard Keyboard HID profile.
- *  
- *  This device will show up as a generic joystick device, with two buttons.
- *  Pressing the joystick inwards is the first button, and the HWB button
- *  is the second.
- *  
- *  Moving the joystick on the selected board moves the joystick location on
- *  the host computer.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Joystick Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Joystick demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard device, for USB Joysticks
+ *  using the standard Keyboard HID profile.
+ *  
+ *  This device will show up as a generic joystick device, with two buttons.
+ *  Pressing the joystick inwards is the first button, and the HWB button
+ *  is the second.
+ *  
+ *  Moving the joystick on the selected board moves the joystick location on
+ *  the host computer.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/makefile
index fce8d1f82..0b415aa3d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/makefile
@@ -1,739 +1,739 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = Joystick
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Joystick
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.c
index 7e12c6596..20c33b375 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,257 +1,257 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-	  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
-	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
-	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
-	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
-	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x05,          /*   Report Count (5)                              */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x05, 0x08,          /*   Usage Page (LEDs)                             */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*   Usage Minimum (Num Lock)                      */
-	0x29, 0x05,          /*   Usage Maximum (Kana)                          */
-	0x91, 0x02,          /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x03,          /*   Report Size (3)                               */
-	0x91, 0x03,          /*   Output (Const, Variable, Absolute)            */
-	0x95, 0x06,          /*   Report Count (6)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
-	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
-	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
-	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
-	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2042,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_KeyboardHID = 
-		{  
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-			
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		},
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(16), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Denver Gingerich"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Keyboard Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+	  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
+	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
+	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
+	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
+	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x05,          /*   Report Count (5)                              */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x05, 0x08,          /*   Usage Page (LEDs)                             */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*   Usage Minimum (Num Lock)                      */
+	0x29, 0x05,          /*   Usage Maximum (Kana)                          */
+	0x91, 0x02,          /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x03,          /*   Report Size (3)                               */
+	0x91, 0x03,          /*   Output (Const, Variable, Absolute)            */
+	0x95, 0x06,          /*   Report Count (6)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
+	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
+	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
+	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
+	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2042,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardHID = 
+		{  
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(16), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Denver Gingerich"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Keyboard Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.h
index 6a147c62e..c8810b664 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-	  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_KeyboardHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_EPNUM               1
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */		
-		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+	  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_KeyboardHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPNUM               1
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */		
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf
index 90fe9c9e4..067a08ee2 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.c
index 0da529543..0937e1c4a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.c
@@ -1,196 +1,196 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Keyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "Keyboard.h"
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
- 	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber              = 0,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = KEYBOARD_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize         = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
-
-				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
-			},
-    };
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware()
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
- *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
-{
-	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
-	
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
-
-	uint8_t UsedKeyCodes = 0;
-		
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x04; // A
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x05; // B
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x06; // C
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x07; // D
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x08; // E
-	  
-	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x09; // F
-
-	if (UsedKeyCodes)
-	  KeyboardReport->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT;
-
-	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
- *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
- *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
- */
-void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	uint8_t  LEDMask   = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-	uint8_t* LEDReport = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
-
-	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
-	
-	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
-
-	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
-	  
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Keyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Keyboard.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+ 	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = 0,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = KEYBOARD_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize         = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
+
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+    };
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware()
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+	
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	uint8_t UsedKeyCodes = 0;
+		
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x04; // A
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x05; // B
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x06; // C
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x07; // D
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x08; // E
+	  
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x09; // F
+
+	if (UsedKeyCodes)
+	  KeyboardReport->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT;
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	uint8_t  LEDMask   = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+	uint8_t* LEDReport = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+	
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+	  
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.h
index 2c86bf5a2..76c662163 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.h
@@ -1,84 +1,84 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Keyboard.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_
-#define _KEYBOARD_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-			
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
-		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
-		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Keyboard.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+			
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
+		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt
index b7171e570..613359e89 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Keyboard Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Keyboard Subclass</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description:
- *
- *  Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
- *  for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
- *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus
- *  works under compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a keyboard 
- *  when the USB connection to a host is present. To use the keyboard example,
- *  manipulate the joystick to send the letters a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID
- *  documentation for more information on sending keyboard event and key presses. Unlike
- *  other LUFA Keyboard demos, this example shows explicitly how to send multiple keypresses
- *  inside the same report to the host.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *  
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Keyboard Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
+ *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus
+ *  works under compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a keyboard 
+ *  when the USB connection to a host is present. To use the keyboard example,
+ *  manipulate the joystick to send the letters a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID
+ *  documentation for more information on sending keyboard event and key presses. Unlike
+ *  other LUFA Keyboard demos, this example shows explicitly how to send multiple keypresses
+ *  inside the same report to the host.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *  
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/makefile
index eb47bd0ed..d65ada0ed 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/makefile
@@ -1,739 +1,739 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = Keyboard
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Keyboard
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c
index 2818b6e98..2783809ab 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,344 +1,344 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- *
- *  This descriptor describes the mouse HID interface's report structure.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
-	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                                   */
-	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
-	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                               */
-	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Physical)                         */
-	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                            */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                             */
-	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                         */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)                    */
-	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)                    */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                         */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                         */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)            */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                            */
-	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                             */
-	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                            */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                             */
-	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                            */
-	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control)        */
-	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                                     */
-	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                                     */
-	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)                      */
-	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                       */
-	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)            */
-	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                                */
-	0xC0,                /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Same as the MouseReport structure, but defines the keyboard HID interface's report structure. */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
-	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
-	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
-	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
-	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x05,          /*   Report Count (5)                              */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x05, 0x08,          /*   Usage Page (LEDs)                             */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*   Usage Minimum (Num Lock)                      */
-	0x29, 0x05,          /*   Usage Maximum (Kana)                          */
-	0x91, 0x02,          /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x03,          /*   Report Size (3)                               */
-	0x91, 0x03,          /*   Output (Const, Variable, Absolute)            */
-	0x95, 0x06,          /*   Report Count (6)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
-	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
-	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
-	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
-	0xC0                 /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204D,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID1_KeyboardInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID1_KeyboardHID = 
-		{  
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-			
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
-		},
-		
-	.HID1_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		},
-
-	.HID2_MouseInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x01,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID2_MouseHID = 
-		{  
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-			
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
-		},
-		
-	.HID2_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(28), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mouse and Keyboard Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			if (!(wIndex))
-			{
-				Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID1_KeyboardHID;
-				Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID2_MouseHID;
-				Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);			
-			}
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			if (!(wIndex))
-			{
-				Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
-				Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
-			}
-			else
-			{			
-				Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
-				Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ *
+ *  This descriptor describes the mouse HID interface's report structure.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
+	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                                   */
+	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
+	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                               */
+	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Physical)                         */
+	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                            */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                             */
+	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                         */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)                    */
+	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)                    */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                         */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                         */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)            */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                            */
+	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                             */
+	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                            */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                             */
+	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                            */
+	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control)        */
+	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                                     */
+	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                                     */
+	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)                      */
+	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                       */
+	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)            */
+	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                                */
+	0xC0,                /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Same as the MouseReport structure, but defines the keyboard HID interface's report structure. */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
+	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
+	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
+	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
+	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x05,          /*   Report Count (5)                              */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x05, 0x08,          /*   Usage Page (LEDs)                             */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*   Usage Minimum (Num Lock)                      */
+	0x29, 0x05,          /*   Usage Maximum (Kana)                          */
+	0x91, 0x02,          /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x03,          /*   Report Size (3)                               */
+	0x91, 0x03,          /*   Output (Const, Variable, Absolute)            */
+	0x95, 0x06,          /*   Report Count (6)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
+	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
+	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
+	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
+	0xC0                 /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204D,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID1_KeyboardInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID1_KeyboardHID = 
+		{  
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+		
+	.HID1_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+
+	.HID2_MouseInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x01,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID2_MouseHID = 
+		{  
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+		
+	.HID2_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(28), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mouse and Keyboard Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			if (!(wIndex))
+			{
+				Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID1_KeyboardHID;
+				Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID2_MouseHID;
+				Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);			
+			}
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			if (!(wIndex))
+			{
+				Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
+				Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			}
+			else
+			{			
+				Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
+				Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h
index 517b3a08e..e664996b3 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,76 +1,76 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID1_KeyboardInterface;
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID1_KeyboardHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID1_ReportINEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID2_MouseInterface;
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID2_MouseHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID2_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM         1
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define MOUSE_IN_EPNUM            3
-
-		/** Size in bytes of each of the HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define HID_EPSIZE                8
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID1_KeyboardInterface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID1_KeyboardHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID1_ReportINEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID2_MouseInterface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID2_MouseHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID2_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM         1
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_IN_EPNUM            3
+
+		/** Size in bytes of each of the HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define HID_EPSIZE                8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf
index 4f7695ec2..ce0a890e4 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Keyboard/Mouse Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Keyboard/Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c
index 94f27bd1b..9e0da9389 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c
@@ -1,253 +1,253 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-	  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the KeyboardMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "KeyboardMouse.h"
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the keyboard HID
- *  interface within the device.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber              = 0,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize         = HID_EPSIZE,
-				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
-
-				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
-			},
-	};
-	
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the mouse HID
- *  interface within the device.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber              = 1,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = MOUSE_IN_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize         = HID_EPSIZE,
-
-				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
-			},		
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-		HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware()
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-    LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-    LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	
-	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
- *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
-{
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
-
-	/* Determine which interface must have its report generated */
-	if (HIDInterfaceInfo == &Keyboard_HID_Interface)
-	{
-		USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
-		
-		/* If first board button not being held down, no keyboard report */
-		if (!(ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
-		  return 0;
-		
-		KeyboardReport->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT;
-
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A
-		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B
-
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C
-		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D
-
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E
-		
-		*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
-		return false;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
-
-		/* If first board button being held down, no mouse report */
-		if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-		  return 0;
-		  
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-		  MouseReport->Y = -1;
-		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-		  MouseReport->Y =  1;
-
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-		  MouseReport->X = -1;
-		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-		  MouseReport->X =  1;
-
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-		  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
-		
-		*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
-		return true;		
-	}
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
- *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
- *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
- */
-void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	if (HIDInterfaceInfo == &Keyboard_HID_Interface)
-	{
-		uint8_t  LEDMask   = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-		uint8_t* LEDReport = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
-
-		if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
-		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
-		
-		if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
-		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
-
-		if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
-		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
-		  
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-	}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+	  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardMouse.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the keyboard HID
+ *  interface within the device.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = 0,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize         = HID_EPSIZE,
+				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
+
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+	
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the mouse HID
+ *  interface within the device.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = 1,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = MOUSE_IN_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize         = HID_EPSIZE,
+
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
+			},		
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware()
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+    LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+    LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	/* Determine which interface must have its report generated */
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo == &Keyboard_HID_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+		
+		/* If first board button not being held down, no keyboard report */
+		if (!(ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
+		  return 0;
+		
+		KeyboardReport->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E
+		
+		*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
+		return false;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+		/* If first board button being held down, no mouse report */
+		if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+		  return 0;
+		  
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+		  MouseReport->Y = -1;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+		  MouseReport->Y =  1;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+		  MouseReport->X = -1;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+		  MouseReport->X =  1;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+		  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+		
+		*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
+		return true;		
+	}
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo == &Keyboard_HID_Interface)
+	{
+		uint8_t  LEDMask   = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+		uint8_t* LEDReport = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
+
+		if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+		
+		if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+		if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+		  
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
 }
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h
index 4c540ccb0..bb7e1eeed 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
-#define _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-			
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
-		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
-		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+			
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
+		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt
index f1a4c509b..6f24efe53 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Dual HID Keyboard and Mouse Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Keyboard/Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a composite device containing both USB Keyboard
- *  and USB Mouse functionality using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes
- *  (i.e. no special drivers required). This example uses two separate HID
- *  interfaces for each function. It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works under
- *  compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard and mouse (e.g. PS/2).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
- *  as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present and the HWB is not
- *  pressed. When enabled, manipulate the joystick to send the letters
- *  a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information
- *  on sending keyboard event and key presses.
- *  
- *  When the HWB is pressed, the mouse mode is enabled. When enabled, move the
- *  joystick to move the pointer, and push the joystick inwards to simulate a
- *  left-button click.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Dual HID Keyboard and Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Keyboard/Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a composite device containing both USB Keyboard
+ *  and USB Mouse functionality using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes
+ *  (i.e. no special drivers required). This example uses two separate HID
+ *  interfaces for each function. It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works under
+ *  compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard and mouse (e.g. PS/2).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present and the HWB is not
+ *  pressed. When enabled, manipulate the joystick to send the letters
+ *  a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information
+ *  on sending keyboard event and key presses.
+ *  
+ *  When the HWB is pressed, the mouse mode is enabled. When enabled, move the
+ *  joystick to move the pointer, and push the joystick inwards to simulate a
+ *  left-button click.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/makefile
index 4dafc1a06..75e425e09 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/makefile
@@ -1,739 +1,739 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = KeyboardMouse
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = KeyboardMouse
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.c
index 4b9e03bff..640c83224 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,326 +1,326 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
- 
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2048,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
-
-			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-	
-	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
-			
-			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t),
-			
-			.InCollection             = 1,
-			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x03,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-
-			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-			
-			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
-			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
-			.JackID                   = 0x01,
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
-			.JackID                   = 0x02,
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
-			.JackID                   = 0x03,
-
-			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
-			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
-			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
-			.JackID                   = 0x04,
-
-			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
-			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
-			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint = 
-		{
-			.Endpoint = 
-				{
-					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM),
-					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
-				},
-			
-			.Refresh                  = 0,
-			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
-		},
-		
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-
-			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
-			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01}
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint = 
-		{
-			.Endpoint = 
-				{
-					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM),
-					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
-				},
-			
-			.Refresh                  = 0,
-			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
-		},
-		
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-
-			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
-			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x03}
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA MIDI Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2048,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+	
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
+			
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t),
+			
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x03,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+			
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
+			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
+			.JackID                   = 0x01,
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
+			.JackID                   = 0x02,
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
+			.JackID                   = 0x03,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
+			.JackID                   = 0x04,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint = 
+		{
+			.Endpoint = 
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM),
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
+				},
+			
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+		
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01}
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint = 
+		{
+			.Endpoint = 
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM),
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
+				},
+			
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+		
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x03}
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA MIDI Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.h
index ffd261e58..9933d060e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
-		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM        2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
-		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM       1
-
-		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface;
-			USB_MIDI_AudioInterface_AS_t          Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
-			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
-			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
-			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
-			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
-			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
-			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM        2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM       1
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface;
+			USB_MIDI_AudioInterface_AS_t          Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Doxygen.conf
index a551c26dd..f40442cac 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.c
index 7fcdfcc5f..04d4bdb21 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.c
@@ -1,193 +1,193 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "MIDI.h"
-
-/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		CheckJoystickMovement();
-		
-		MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent;
-		if (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent))
-		{
-			if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON >> 4)) && (ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data3 > 0))
-			  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2 > 64 ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
-			else
-			  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
-		}
-	
-		MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending MIDI events to the host upon each change. */
-void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
-{
-	static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
-
-	uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
-	uint8_t MIDIPitch;
-	
-	/* Get current joystick mask, XOR with previous to detect joystick changes */
-	uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
-		
-	/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
-	uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
-
-	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
-	{
-		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-		MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
-	}
-
-	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
-	{
-		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-		MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
-	}
-
-	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
-	{
-		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-		MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
-	}
-	
-	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
-	{
-		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-		MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
-	}
-
-	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
-	{
-		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-		MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
-	}
-	
-	if (MIDICommand)
-	{
-		MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (MIDI_EventPacket_t)
-			{
-				.CableNumber = 0,
-				.Command     = (MIDICommand >> 4),
-				
-				.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
-				.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
-				.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,			
-			};
-			
-		MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &MIDIEvent);
-		MIDI_Device_Flush(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
-	}
-
-	PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	
-	if (!(MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MIDI.h"
+
+/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+		
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent;
+		if (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent))
+		{
+			if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON >> 4)) && (ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data3 > 0))
+			  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2 > 64 ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+			else
+			  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+		}
+	
+		MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending MIDI events to the host upon each change. */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
+
+	uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
+	uint8_t MIDIPitch;
+	
+	/* Get current joystick mask, XOR with previous to detect joystick changes */
+	uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
+		
+	/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
+	uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
+	}
+	
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
+	}
+	
+	if (MIDICommand)
+	{
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (MIDI_EventPacket_t)
+			{
+				.CableNumber = 0,
+				.Command     = (MIDICommand >> 4),
+				
+				.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
+				.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
+				.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,			
+			};
+			
+		MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &MIDIEvent);
+		MIDI_Device_Flush(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+	}
+
+	PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	
+	if (!(MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.h
index 96e2b40d8..2ed037e18 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.h
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-				
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+				
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.txt
index 7fbfd171a..56aeec419 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.txt
@@ -1,74 +1,74 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage MIDI Input Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Audio Class</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
- *        USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n
- *        General MIDI Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  MIDI demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing the USB-MIDI class in USB devices.
- *  It is built upon the USB Audio class.
- *  
- *  Joystick movements are translated into note on/off messages and
- *  are sent to the host PC as MIDI streams which can be read by any
- *  MIDI program supporting MIDI IN devices.
- *  
- *  If the HWB is not pressed, channel 1 (default piano) is used. If
- *  the HWB is set, then channel 10 (default percussion) is selected.
- *  
- *  This device implements MIDI-THRU mode, with the IN MIDI data being
- *  generated by the device itself. OUT MIDI data is discarded.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage MIDI Input Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n
+ *        General MIDI Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  MIDI demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing the USB-MIDI class in USB devices.
+ *  It is built upon the USB Audio class.
+ *  
+ *  Joystick movements are translated into note on/off messages and
+ *  are sent to the host PC as MIDI streams which can be read by any
+ *  MIDI program supporting MIDI IN devices.
+ *  
+ *  If the HWB is not pressed, channel 1 (default piano) is used. If
+ *  the HWB is set, then channel 10 (default percussion) is selected.
+ *  
+ *  This device implements MIDI-THRU mode, with the IN MIDI data being
+ *  generated by the device itself. OUT MIDI data is discarded.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/makefile
index c397c75c7..10e685f43 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MIDI
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MIDI
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
index 856d408ca..d7d41c5bb 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,217 +1,217 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2045,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.MS_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x08,
-			.SubClass               = 0x06,
-			.Protocol               = 0x50,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(22), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mass Storage Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2045,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.MS_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x08,
+			.SubClass               = 0x06,
+			.Protocol               = 0x50,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(22), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mass Storage Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
index e249fc479..a13ee013f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          3	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         4	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */		
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */		
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf
index bd89e3c09..5d4f094a3 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
index 90ec930dd..4f34d75f2 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -1,525 +1,525 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
- *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
- *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
- *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
-#include "DataflashManager.h"
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
- *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-				
-				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
-			}
-
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;			
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-				
-				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-			
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-	
-	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
- *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
- *  dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
-			}
-			
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
- *  the files stored on the dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
-void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
-{
-	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	
-	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
- */
-bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnByte;
-
-	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-	#endif
-	
-	return true;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;			
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+			
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+	
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+			
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	
+	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+	
+	return true;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
index cad3ea160..d159b2647 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		
-		#include "MassStorage.h"
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
-			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Defines: */
-		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
-
-		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
-		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
-		
-		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
-		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
-		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		
+		#include "MassStorage.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+		
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
index dd31dd1cc..6c20576c8 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -1,286 +1,286 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
- *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
- *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
-#include "SCSI.h"
-
-/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
- *  features and capabilities.
- */
-SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
-	{
-		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
-		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
-			
-		.Removable           = true,
-			
-		.Version             = 0,
-			
-		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
-		.NormACA             = false,
-		.TrmTsk              = false,
-		.AERC                = false,
-
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
-			
-		.SoftReset           = false,
-		.CmdQue              = false,
-		.Linked              = false,
-		.Sync                = false,
-		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
-		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
-		.RelAddr             = false,
-		
-		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
-		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
-		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
-	};
-
-/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
- *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
- */
-SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
-	{
-		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
-	};
-
-
-/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
- *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
- *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Set initial sense data, before the requested command is processed */
-	SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
-	               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-	               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-					   
-	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
-	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
-	{
-		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
-			SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
-			SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
-			SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
-			SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
-			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
-			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
-		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
-		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
-			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-			break;
-		default:
-			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
-			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-			break;
-	}
-
-	return (SenseData.SenseKey == SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD);
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
- *  and capabilities to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
-	                                         MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
-	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
-	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
-
-	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
-	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
-	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
-	{
-		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-	
-	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
- *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
-	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
-	
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
- *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
-	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
- *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
- *  supported.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
-	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
-	{
-		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
-	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
-	{
-		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
-	
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
- *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
- *  reading and writing of the data.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead)
-{
-	uint32_t BlockAddress;
-	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
-	
-	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
-	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
-
-	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
-	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
-	
-	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
-	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
-	{
-		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-
-	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
-	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
-	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
-	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
-	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-	else
-	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-
-	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+			
+		.Removable           = true,
+			
+		.Version             = 0,
+			
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+			
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+		
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Set initial sense data, before the requested command is processed */
+	SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+	               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+	               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+					   
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	return (SenseData.SenseKey == SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD);
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
+	                                         MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
+	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+	
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
+	
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
+	
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+	
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+	
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
+	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
+	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
index 12b53d457..4453bbf3e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -1,86 +1,86 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for SCSI.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _SCSI_H_
-#define _SCSI_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-
-		#include "MassStorage.h"
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "DataflashManager.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
-		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
-		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
-		 */
-		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = (key);                   \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (acode);      \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (aqual); }MACROE
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_READ           true
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_WRITE          false
-
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
-		
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
-			static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+
+		#include "MassStorage.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = (key);                   \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (acode);      \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (aqual); }MACROE
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+		
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.c
index c58dff95f..f91a998d9 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.c
@@ -1,138 +1,138 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MassStorage demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "MassStorage.h"
-
-/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber           = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize        = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-
-				.TotalLUNs                 = TOTAL_LUNS,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
-	Dataflash_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-
-	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
-	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
- */
-bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool CommandSuccess;
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	
-	return CommandSuccess;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MassStorage demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MassStorage.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize        = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+
+				.TotalLUNs                 = TOTAL_LUNS,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.h
index 64da5b3bc..a9abd0edb 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.h
@@ -1,88 +1,88 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MassStorage.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_H_
-#define _MASS_STORAGE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
-		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-		
-		/** Total number of logical drives within the device - must be non-zero. */
-		#define TOTAL_LUNS                1
-		
-		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
-		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS         (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStorage.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_H_
+#define _MASS_STORAGE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+		
+		/** Total number of logical drives within the device - must be non-zero. */
+		#define TOTAL_LUNS                1
+		
+		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
+		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS         (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt
index 7f4a83b9f..3489ca033 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt
@@ -1,92 +1,92 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mass Storage Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
- *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
- *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
- *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Dual LUN Mass Storage demonstration application. This gives a simple
- *  reference application for implementing a multiple LUN USB Mass Storage
- *  device using the basic USB UFI drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no
- *  special drivers required).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as an
- *  external mass storage device with two LUNs (separate disks) which may
- *  be formatted and used in the same manner as commercial USB Mass Storage
- *  devices.
- *  	
- *  You will need to format the mass storage drives upon first run of this
- *  demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between
- *  the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used,
- *  as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device.
- *  
- *  This demo is not restricted to only two LUNs; by changing the TOTAL_LUNS
- *  value in MassStorageDualLUN.h, any number of LUNs can be used (from 1 to
- *  255), with each LUN being allocated an equal portion of the available
- *  Dataflash memory.
- *
- *  The USB control endpoint is managed entirely by the library using endpoint
- *  interrupts, as the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT option is enabled. This allows for
- *  the host to reset the Mass Storage device state during long transfers without
- *  the need for complicated polling logic.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
- *    <td>MassStorage.h</td>
- *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive
- *        - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Dual LUN Mass Storage demonstration application. This gives a simple
+ *  reference application for implementing a multiple LUN USB Mass Storage
+ *  device using the basic USB UFI drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no
+ *  special drivers required).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as an
+ *  external mass storage device with two LUNs (separate disks) which may
+ *  be formatted and used in the same manner as commercial USB Mass Storage
+ *  devices.
+ *  	
+ *  You will need to format the mass storage drives upon first run of this
+ *  demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between
+ *  the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used,
+ *  as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device.
+ *  
+ *  This demo is not restricted to only two LUNs; by changing the TOTAL_LUNS
+ *  value in MassStorageDualLUN.h, any number of LUNs can be used (from 1 to
+ *  255), with each LUN being allocated an equal portion of the available
+ *  Dataflash memory.
+ *
+ *  The USB control endpoint is managed entirely by the library using endpoint
+ *  interrupts, as the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT option is enabled. This allows for
+ *  the host to reset the Mass Storage device state during long transfers without
+ *  the need for complicated polling logic.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
+ *    <td>MassStorage.h</td>
+ *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive
+ *        - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/makefile
index d009ccfb8..c2976d0e4 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/makefile
@@ -1,741 +1,741 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MassStorage
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-LUFA_OPTS += -D INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
-	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MassStorage
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+LUFA_OPTS += -D INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.c
index 4f7684c8a..4bd2e4885 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,305 +1,305 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
-	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
-	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
-	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
-	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x05,          /*   Report Count (5)                              */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x05, 0x08,          /*   Usage Page (LEDs)                             */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*   Usage Minimum (Num Lock)                      */
-	0x29, 0x05,          /*   Usage Maximum (Kana)                          */
-	0x91, 0x02,          /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x03,          /*   Report Size (3)                               */
-	0x91, 0x03,          /*   Output (Const, Variable, Absolute)            */
-	0x95, 0x06,          /*   Report Count (6)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
-	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
-	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
-	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
-	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2061,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.MS_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x08,
-			.SubClass               = 0x06,
-			.Protocol               = 0x50,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = EP_TYPE_BULK,
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = EP_TYPE_BULK,
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.HID_KeyboardInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_KeyboardHID = 
-		{  
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-			
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x04
-		},
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(35), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mass Storage and Keyboard Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID:
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report:
-			Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
+	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
+	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
+	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
+	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x05,          /*   Report Count (5)                              */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x05, 0x08,          /*   Usage Page (LEDs)                             */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*   Usage Minimum (Num Lock)                      */
+	0x29, 0x05,          /*   Usage Maximum (Kana)                          */
+	0x91, 0x02,          /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x03,          /*   Report Size (3)                               */
+	0x91, 0x03,          /*   Output (Const, Variable, Absolute)            */
+	0x95, 0x06,          /*   Report Count (6)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
+	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
+	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
+	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
+	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2061,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.MS_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x08,
+			.SubClass               = 0x06,
+			.Protocol               = 0x50,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = EP_TYPE_BULK,
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = EP_TYPE_BULK,
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardHID = 
+		{  
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x04
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(35), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mass Storage and Keyboard Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.h
index 13fb64c4d..70b161d93 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_EPNUM               1
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */		
-		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM        3	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM       4	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE       64
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */		
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_KeyboardInterface;
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_KeyboardHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPNUM               1
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */		
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM        3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM       4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE       64
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */		
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_KeyboardInterface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_KeyboardHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Doxygen.conf
index ad378201d..8ad7bb349 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.c
index 73b2191a3..89c426bf8 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -1,492 +1,492 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
- *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
- *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
- *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
-#include "DataflashManager.h"
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
- *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-				
-				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
-			}
-
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;			
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-				
-				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-			
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-	
-	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
- *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
- *  dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
-			}
-			
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
- *  the files stored on the dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
-void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
-{
-	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	
-	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;			
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+			
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+	
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+			
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	
+	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.h
index ec92ef182..c5d1264b7 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		
-		#include "MassStorageKeyboard.h"
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
-			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Defines: */
-		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
-
-		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
-		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
-		
-		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		
+		#include "MassStorageKeyboard.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+		
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.c
index daa3034c6..2b4477aad 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -1,345 +1,345 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
- *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
- *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
-#include "SCSI.h"
-
-/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
- *  features and capabilities.
- */
-SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
-	{
-		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
-		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
-			
-		.Removable           = true,
-			
-		.Version             = 0,
-			
-		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
-		.NormACA             = false,
-		.TrmTsk              = false,
-		.AERC                = false,
-
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
-			
-		.SoftReset           = false,
-		.CmdQue              = false,
-		.Linked              = false,
-		.Sync                = false,
-		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
-		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
-		.RelAddr             = false,
-		
-		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
-		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
-		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
-	};
-
-/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
- *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
- */
-SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
-	{
-		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
-	};
-
-
-/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
- *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
- *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool CommandSuccess = false;
-
-	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
-	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
-	{
-		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
-		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
-		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
-			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
-			CommandSuccess = true;
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-			break;
-		default:
-			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
-			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-			break;
-	}
-
-	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
-	if (CommandSuccess)
-	{
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-		
-		return true;
-	}
-
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
- *  and capabilities to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
-	                                         MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
-	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
-	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
-
-	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
-	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
-	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
-	{
-		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return false;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-	
-	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
- *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
-	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
-	
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
- *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
-	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
- *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
- *  supported.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnByte;
-
-	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
-	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
-	{
-		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return false;
-	}
-	
-	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	{
-		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
-	
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	{
-		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
-	
-		return false;
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
- *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
- *  reading and writing of the data.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead)
-{
-	uint32_t BlockAddress;
-	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
-	
-	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */
-	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[3] = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2];
-	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[2] = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3];
-	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[1] = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
-	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[0] = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[5];
-
-	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */
-	((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[1]  = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7];
-	((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[0]  = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[8];
-	
-	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
-	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
-	{
-		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
-	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
-	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
-	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
-	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-	else
-	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-
-	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
-	
-	return true;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+			
+		.Removable           = true,
+			
+		.Version             = 0,
+			
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+			
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+		
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+		
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
+	                                         MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
+	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+	
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
+	
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+	
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
+	
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
+	
+		return false;
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+	
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */
+	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[3] = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2];
+	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[2] = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3];
+	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[1] = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[0] = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[5];
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */
+	((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[1]  = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7];
+	((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[0]  = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[8];
+	
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
+	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
+	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+	
+	return true;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.h
index 41ff5f626..344e42680 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -1,87 +1,87 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for SCSI.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _SCSI_H_
-#define _SCSI_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-
-		#include "MassStorageKeyboard.h"
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "DataflashManager.h"
-		#include "SCSI_Codes.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
-		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
-		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
-		 */
-		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = key;              \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = acode; \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = aqual; }MACROE
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_READ           true
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_WRITE          false
-
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
-		
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
-			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+
+		#include "MassStorageKeyboard.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "SCSI_Codes.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = key;              \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = acode; \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = aqual; }MACROE
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+		
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
index 62af9996f..5b6b76ac8 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to
- *  the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and
- *  the SENSE data.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_
-#define _SCSI_CODES_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                               0x12
-		#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE                         0x03
-		#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY                       0x00
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10                      0x25
-		#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC                       0x1D
-		#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL          0x1E
-		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10                              0x2A
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                               0x28
-		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                               0x0A
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                                0x08
-		#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10                             0x2F
-		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6                          0x1A
-		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10                         0x5A
-
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD                            0x00
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR                 0x01
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY                       0x02
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR                    0x03
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR                  0x04
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST                 0x05
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION                  0x06
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT                    0x07
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK                     0x08
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC                 0x09
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED                    0x0A
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND                 0x0B
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW                 0x0D
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE                      0x0E
-
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION          0x00
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY             0x04
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB               0x24
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED                    0x27
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR                       0x31
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND                    0x20
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT                 0x3A
-
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER                      0x00
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED             0x01
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED     0x02
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS             0x07
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to
+ *  the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and
+ *  the SENSE data.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_
+#define _SCSI_CODES_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                               0x12
+		#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE                         0x03
+		#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY                       0x00
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10                      0x25
+		#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC                       0x1D
+		#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL          0x1E
+		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10                              0x2A
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                               0x28
+		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                               0x0A
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                                0x08
+		#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10                             0x2F
+		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6                          0x1A
+		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10                         0x5A
+
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD                            0x00
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR                 0x01
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY                       0x02
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR                    0x03
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR                  0x04
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST                 0x05
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION                  0x06
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT                    0x07
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK                     0x08
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC                 0x09
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED                    0x0A
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND                 0x0B
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW                 0x0D
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE                      0x0E
+
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION          0x00
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY             0x04
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB               0x24
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED                    0x27
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR                       0x31
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND                    0x20
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT                 0x3A
+
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER                      0x00
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED             0x01
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED     0x02
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS             0x07
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.c
index 9b4efb679..780b2b273 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.c
@@ -1,242 +1,242 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MassStorageKeyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "MassStorageKeyboard.h"
-	
-/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber           = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize        = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-
-				.TotalLUNs                 = TOTAL_LUNS,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
- 	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber              = 1,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = KEYBOARD_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize         = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
-
-				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
-			},
-    };
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Joystick_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
-	Dataflash_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-
-	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
-	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
- */
-bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool CommandSuccess;
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	
-	return CommandSuccess;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-    HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
- *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
-{
-	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
-	
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
-
-	KeyboardReport->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E
-	  
-	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x09; // F
-	
-	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
- *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
- *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
- */
-void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	uint8_t  LEDMask   = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-	uint8_t* LEDReport = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
-
-	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
-	
-	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
-
-	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
-	  
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-}
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MassStorageKeyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MassStorageKeyboard.h"
+	
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize        = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+
+				.TotalLUNs                 = TOTAL_LUNS,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+ 	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = 1,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = KEYBOARD_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize         = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
+
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+    };
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+    HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+	
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	KeyboardReport->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E
+	  
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = 0x09; // F
+	
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	uint8_t  LEDMask   = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+	uint8_t* LEDReport = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+	
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+	  
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.h
index 65600eef1..4c1ce9606 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.h
@@ -1,101 +1,101 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MassStorageKeyboard.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_KEYBOARD_H_
-#define _MASS_STORAGE_KEYBOARD_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
-		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.h>
-			
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY         LEDS_LED2
-		
-		/** Total number of logical drives within the device - must be non-zero. */
-		#define TOTAL_LUNS               1
-		
-		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
-		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS         (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
-		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
-		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStorageKeyboard.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_KEYBOARD_H_
+#define _MASS_STORAGE_KEYBOARD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.h>
+			
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY         LEDS_LED2
+		
+		/** Total number of logical drives within the device - must be non-zero. */
+		#define TOTAL_LUNS               1
+		
+		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
+		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS         (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
+		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.txt
index 590d35705..568874157 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.txt
@@ -1,92 +1,92 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Classes:</b></td>
- *    <td>Mass Storage Device \n
- *        Human Interface Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclasses:</b></td>
- *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport \n
- *        Keyboard Subclass</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
- *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
- *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
- *        SCSI Block Commands Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a
- *  simple reference application for implementing a dual class USB Mass Storage
- *  and USB HID Keyboard device using the basic USB UFI and HID drivers in all
- *  modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as an
- *  external mass storage device (which may be formatted and used in the same
- *  manner as commercial USB Mass Storage devices) and a USB keyboard.
- *  	
- *  You will need to format the mass storage drive upon first run of this
- *  demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between
- *  the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used,
- *  as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device.
- *
- *  Keys on the USB keyboard can be pressed by moving the board's Joystick.
- *  
- *  The USB control endpoint is managed entirely by the library using endpoint
- *  interrupts, as the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT option is enabled. This allows for
- *  the host to reset the Mass Storage device state during long transfers without
- *  the need for complicated polling logic.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
- *    <td>MassStorage.h</td>
- *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive
- *        - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Classes:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device \n
+ *        Human Interface Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclasses:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport \n
+ *        Keyboard Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a
+ *  simple reference application for implementing a dual class USB Mass Storage
+ *  and USB HID Keyboard device using the basic USB UFI and HID drivers in all
+ *  modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as an
+ *  external mass storage device (which may be formatted and used in the same
+ *  manner as commercial USB Mass Storage devices) and a USB keyboard.
+ *  	
+ *  You will need to format the mass storage drive upon first run of this
+ *  demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between
+ *  the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used,
+ *  as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device.
+ *
+ *  Keys on the USB keyboard can be pressed by moving the board's Joystick.
+ *  
+ *  The USB control endpoint is managed entirely by the library using endpoint
+ *  interrupts, as the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT option is enabled. This allows for
+ *  the host to reset the Mass Storage device state during long transfers without
+ *  the need for complicated polling logic.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
+ *    <td>MassStorage.h</td>
+ *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive
+ *        - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/makefile
index 5d1d85c7f..24c1dfbfe 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/makefile
@@ -1,727 +1,727 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#     Typical values are:
-#         F_CPU =  1000000
-#         F_CPU =  1843200
-#         F_CPU =  2000000
-#         F_CPU =  3686400
-#         F_CPU =  4000000
-#         F_CPU =  7372800
-#         F_CPU =  8000000
-#         F_CPU = 11059200
-#         F_CPU = 14745600
-#         F_CPU = 16000000
-#         F_CPU = 18432000
-#         F_CPU = 20000000
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MassStorageKeyboard
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-LUFA_OPTS += -D INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
-
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
-	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-
-
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build showeventhooks showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-showeventhooks: build
-	@echo
-	@echo -------- Unhooked LUFA Events --------
-	@$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
-	           cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
-			   echo "(None)"
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all showeventhooks showliboptions showtarget  \
-begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion build \
-elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff program clean debug   \
-clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen dfu flip    \
-flip-ee dfu-ee
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#     Typical values are:
+#         F_CPU =  1000000
+#         F_CPU =  1843200
+#         F_CPU =  2000000
+#         F_CPU =  3686400
+#         F_CPU =  4000000
+#         F_CPU =  7372800
+#         F_CPU =  8000000
+#         F_CPU = 11059200
+#         F_CPU = 14745600
+#         F_CPU = 16000000
+#         F_CPU = 18432000
+#         F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MassStorageKeyboard
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+LUFA_OPTS += -D INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+
+
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build showeventhooks showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+showeventhooks: build
+	@echo
+	@echo -------- Unhooked LUFA Events --------
+	@$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+	           cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+			   echo "(None)"
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all showeventhooks showliboptions showtarget  \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion build \
+elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff program clean debug   \
+clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen dfu flip    \
+flip-ee dfu-ee
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.c
index 7a5fc349e..703051e84 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,251 +1,251 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)             */
-	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                            */
-	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                 */
-	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                        */
-	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Application)               */
-	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                     */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                      */
-	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                  */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)             */
-	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)             */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                  */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                  */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)     */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                     */
-	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                      */
-	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                     */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                      */
-	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                     */
-	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */
-	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                              */
-	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                              */
-	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)               */
-	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                */
-	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)     */
-	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                         */
-	0xC0                 /* End Collection                           */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2041,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_MouseHID = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(15), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mouse Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration:
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String:
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00:
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01:
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02:
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;		
-	return Size;
-}
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)             */
+	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                            */
+	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                 */
+	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                        */
+	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Application)               */
+	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                     */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                      */
+	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                  */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)             */
+	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)             */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                  */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                  */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)     */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                     */
+	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                      */
+	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                     */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                      */
+	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                     */
+	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */
+	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                              */
+	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                              */
+	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)               */
+	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                */
+	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)     */
+	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                         */
+	0xC0                 /* End Collection                           */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2041,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_MouseHID = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(15), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mouse Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;		
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.h
index f5364ce15..2c77d7841 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,69 +1,69 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_MouseHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define MOUSE_EPNUM               1
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE              8
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_MouseHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPNUM               1
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Doxygen.conf
index d90b43076..ef8bb45fc 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.c
index 96af14558..2335c11b9 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.c
@@ -1,179 +1,179 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Mouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "Mouse.h"
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber              = 0,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = MOUSE_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize         = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
-				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
-
-				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{	
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB WakeUp event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Suspend event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
- *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
-{
-	USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
-		
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  MouseReport->Y = -1;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  MouseReport->Y =  1;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  MouseReport->X = -1;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  MouseReport->X =  1;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
-	  
-	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 1);
-	
-	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
- *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
- *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
- */
-void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Mouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Mouse.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = 0,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = MOUSE_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize         = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
+
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{	
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB WakeUp event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Suspend event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+		
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  MouseReport->Y = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  MouseReport->Y =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  MouseReport->X = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  MouseReport->X =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+	  
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 1);
+	
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.h
index 818d54069..3ce9d046d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.h
@@ -1,84 +1,84 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Mouse.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MOUSE_H_
-#define _MOUSE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-			
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
-		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
-		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Mouse.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_H_
+#define _MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+			
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
+		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.txt
index e0cf40795..04df35c6e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.txt
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mouse Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Mouse Subclass</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID
- *  drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is
- *  boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if
- *  it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
- *  as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
- *  the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the
- *  joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as
- *  the right mouse button.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mouse Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID
+ *  drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is
+ *  boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if
+ *  it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
+ *  the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the
+ *  joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as
+ *  the right mouse button.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/makefile
index f0c937a1c..821081747 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/makefile
@@ -1,740 +1,740 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = Mouse
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Mouse
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
index 0e08d57fe..068f628f7 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,255 +1,255 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
- 
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x02,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204C,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0xFF,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_Header = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00}
-		},
-	
-	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x02
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(19), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String:
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00:
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01:
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02:
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x02,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204C,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0xFF,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00}
+		},
+	
+	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x02
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(19), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
index 6a6577646..c84461c2e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
-		
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         3
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   1	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   2	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Header;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+		
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         3
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   1	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   2	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Header;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf
index f3e37be65..2cd90c3f6 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
index a124afec1..47dbf236d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
@@ -1,52 +1,52 @@
-;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-[Version]
-Signature           = "$Windows NT$"
-Class               = Net
-ClassGUID           = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
-Provider            = %COMPANY%
-DriverVer           = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384
-;CatalogFile        = device.cat
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%COMPANY%         = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64
-
-; Decoration for x86 architecture
-[RndisDevices.NTx86]
-%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
-
-; Decoration for x64 architecture
-[RndisDevices.NTamd64]
-%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
-
-; Decoration for ia64 architecture
-[RndisDevices.NTia64]
-%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
-
-;@@@ This is the common setting for setup
-[ControlFlags]
-ExcludeFromSelect=*
-
-; DDInstall section
-; References the in-build Netrndis.inf
-[RNDIS.NT.5.1]
-Characteristics = 0x84   ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
-BusType         = 15
-; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF
-include         = netrndis.inf
-needs           = Usb_Rndis.ndi
-AddReg          = Rndis_AddReg_Vista
-
-; DDInstal.Services section
-[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services]
-include     = netrndis.inf
-needs       = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
-
-; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build 
-; (part of the operating system).
-
-; Modify these strings for your device as needed.
-[Strings] 
-COMPANY="LUFA Library"
+;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[Version]
+Signature           = "$Windows NT$"
+Class               = Net
+ClassGUID           = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
+Provider            = %COMPANY%
+DriverVer           = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384
+;CatalogFile        = device.cat
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%COMPANY%         = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64
+
+; Decoration for x86 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTx86]
+%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+; Decoration for x64 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTamd64]
+%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+; Decoration for ia64 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTia64]
+%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+;@@@ This is the common setting for setup
+[ControlFlags]
+ExcludeFromSelect=*
+
+; DDInstall section
+; References the in-build Netrndis.inf
+[RNDIS.NT.5.1]
+Characteristics = 0x84   ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
+BusType         = 15
+; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF
+include         = netrndis.inf
+needs           = Usb_Rndis.ndi
+AddReg          = Rndis_AddReg_Vista
+
+; DDInstal.Services section
+[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services]
+include     = netrndis.inf
+needs       = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
+
+; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build 
+; (part of the operating system).
+
+; Modify these strings for your device as needed.
+[Strings] 
+COMPANY="LUFA Library"
 RNDISDEV="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
index 53eaa57a9..6cbc67f89 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the
- *  conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the
- *  device.
- */
- 
-#include "ARP.h"
-
-/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the
- *  virtual server device on the network.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart   Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ARP header
- *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
- */
-int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
-{
-	DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart);
-
-	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN  = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
-
-	/* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */
-	if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) &&
-	    (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST))
-	{
-		/* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */
-		if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) || 
-		    MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress))
-		{
-			/* Fill out the ARP response header */
-			ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->Operation    = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY);
-
-			/* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */
-			ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA;
-
-			/* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */
-			ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress;
-
-			/* Return the size of the response so far */
-			return sizeof(ARP_Header_t);
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return NO_RESPONSE;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the
+ *  conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the
+ *  device.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ARP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the
+ *  virtual server device on the network.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart   Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ARP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN  = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	/* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */
+	if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) &&
+	    (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST))
+	{
+		/* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */
+		if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) || 
+		    MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress))
+		{
+			/* Fill out the ARP response header */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->Operation    = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY);
+
+			/* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA;
+
+			/* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress;
+
+			/* Return the size of the response so far */
+			return sizeof(ARP_Header_t);
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
index 93409babc..fce77969d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
@@ -1,74 +1,74 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ARP.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _ARP_H_
-#define _ARP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation */
-		#define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST            1
-
-		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation */
-		#define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY              2
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */
-			uint16_t      ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */
-			
-			uint8_t       HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */
-			uint8_t       PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */
-			uint16_t      Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */
-			
-			MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */
-			IP_Address_t  SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */
-			MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */
-			IP_Address_t  TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */
-		} ARP_Header_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ARP.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _ARP_H_
+#define _ARP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation */
+		#define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST            1
+
+		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation */
+		#define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY              2
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */
+			uint16_t      ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */
+			
+			uint8_t       HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */
+			uint8_t       PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */
+			uint16_t      Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */
+			
+			MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */
+			IP_Address_t  SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */
+			MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */
+			IP_Address_t  TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */
+		} ARP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
index 085a50705..e6377af52 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
@@ -1,118 +1,118 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol
- *  handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided
- *  IP address given to it by the device.
- */
- 
-#include "DHCP.h"
-
-/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address.
- *
- *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
- *  \param[in] DHCPHeaderInStart   Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's DHCP header
- *  \param[out] DHCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
- */
-int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart)
-{
-	IP_Header_t*   IPHeaderIN    = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
-	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN  = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart;
-	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart;
-	
-	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart  = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderInStart  + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-
-	DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart);
-
-	/* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it legacy and left at 0 */
-	memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-
-	/* Fill out the response DHCP packet */
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType          = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops                  = 0;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID         = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags                 = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP                = ClientIPAddress;
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie                = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE);
-	
-	/* Alter the incoming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that
-	   when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */
-	IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress      = ClientIPAddress;
-	IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress;
-
-	/* Process the incoming DHCP packet options */
-	while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
-	{	
-		/* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */
-		if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
-		{
-			if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST))
-			{
-				/* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */
-
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER
-																								: DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK;
-
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00;
-
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t);
-				memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t));
-				DHCPOptionsOUTStart     += sizeof(IP_Address_t);
-
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END;
-				
-				return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t));
-			}
-		}
-		
-		/* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */
-		DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2));
-	}
-	
-	return NO_RESPONSE;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol
+ *  handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided
+ *  IP address given to it by the device.
+ */
+ 
+#include "DHCP.h"
+
+/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] DHCPHeaderInStart   Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's DHCP header
+ *  \param[out] DHCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	IP_Header_t*   IPHeaderIN    = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN  = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart;
+	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart;
+	
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart  = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderInStart  + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart);
+
+	/* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it legacy and left at 0 */
+	memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	/* Fill out the response DHCP packet */
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType          = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops                  = 0;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID         = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags                 = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP                = ClientIPAddress;
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie                = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE);
+	
+	/* Alter the incoming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that
+	   when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */
+	IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress      = ClientIPAddress;
+	IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress;
+
+	/* Process the incoming DHCP packet options */
+	while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{	
+		/* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */
+		if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+		{
+			if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST))
+			{
+				/* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER
+																								: DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK;
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00;
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+				memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+				DHCPOptionsOUTStart     += sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+				
+				return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+			}
+		}
+		
+		/* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */
+		DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2));
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
index c4df5b3c7..cacdd8ffd 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
@@ -1,125 +1,125 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DHCP.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DHCP_H_
-#define _DHCP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-	
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server */
-		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
-
-		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host */
-		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
-		
-		/** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier */
-		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       0x01
-		
-		/** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP) */
-		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63825363
-		
-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK    1
-
-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE   53
-
-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER    54
-
-		/** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_PAD           0
-
-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
-			
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER    2
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST  3
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE  4
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK      5
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK     6
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE  7
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
-			uint8_t  HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
-			uint8_t  HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
-			uint8_t  Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
-
-			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
-
-			uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
-			uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
-			
-			IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
-			IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
-			IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			
-			uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
-			uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			
-			uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
-		} DHCP_Header_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DHCP.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DHCP_H_
+#define _DHCP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+	
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
+
+		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
+		
+		/** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier */
+		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       0x01
+		
+		/** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP) */
+		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63825363
+		
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK    1
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE   53
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER    54
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_PAD           0
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
+			
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER    2
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST  3
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE  4
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK      5
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK     6
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE  7
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
+			uint8_t  HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
+			uint8_t  HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
+			uint8_t  Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
+
+			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
+
+			uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
+			uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
+			
+			IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
+			IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
+			IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			
+			uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
+			uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			
+			uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
+		} DHCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
index d09930e4e..a3a42e22d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
@@ -1,130 +1,130 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet
- *  frames sent and received, deferring the processing of subpacket protocols to the appropriate
- *  protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP.
- */
- 
-#include "Ethernet.h"
-
-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */
-const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress    = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS};
-
-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */
-const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress     = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS};
-
-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */
-const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS};
-
-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */
-const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress  = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS};
-
-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */
-const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress     = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS};
-
-
-/** Processes an incoming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet
- *  frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response.
- */
-void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT)
-{
-	DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN);
-
-	/* Cast the incoming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */
-	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader  = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN->FrameData;
-	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData;
-	
-	int16_t                  RetSize        = NO_RESPONSE;
-	
-	/* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */
-	if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) ||
-	     MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) &&
-		 (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN->FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE))
-	{
-		/* Process the packet depending on its protocol */
-		switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType))
-		{
-			case ETHERTYPE_ARP:
-				RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
-				                               &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
-				break;		
-			case ETHERTYPE_IPV4:
-				RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(FrameIN,
-				                             &FrameIN->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
-				                             &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
-				break;
-		}
-		
-		/* Protocol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */
-		if (RetSize > 0)
-		{
-			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
-			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
-			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = FrameINHeader->Source;
-			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = FrameINHeader->EtherType;
-			
-			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
-			FrameOUT->FrameLength           = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize);
-			FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer         = true;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Check if the packet was processed */
-	if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS)
-	{
-		/* Clear the frame buffer */
-		FrameIN->FrameInBuffer = false;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's
- *  compliment of each word, complimented.
- *
- *  \param[in] Data   Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated
- *  \param[in] Bytes  Number of bytes in the data buffer to process
- *
- *  \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value
- */
-uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes)
-{
-	uint16_t* Words    = (uint16_t*)Data;
-	uint32_t  Checksum = 0;
-
-	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++)
-	  Checksum += Words[CurrWord];
-	  
-	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
-	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
-	
-	return ~Checksum;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet
+ *  frames sent and received, deferring the processing of subpacket protocols to the appropriate
+ *  protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP.
+ */
+ 
+#include "Ethernet.h"
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress    = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress     = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress  = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress     = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+
+/** Processes an incoming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet
+ *  frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response.
+ */
+void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT)
+{
+	DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN);
+
+	/* Cast the incoming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader  = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN->FrameData;
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData;
+	
+	int16_t                  RetSize        = NO_RESPONSE;
+	
+	/* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */
+	if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) ||
+	     MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) &&
+		 (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN->FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE))
+	{
+		/* Process the packet depending on its protocol */
+		switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType))
+		{
+			case ETHERTYPE_ARP:
+				RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+				                               &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+				break;		
+			case ETHERTYPE_IPV4:
+				RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(FrameIN,
+				                             &FrameIN->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+				                             &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+				break;
+		}
+		
+		/* Protocol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */
+		if (RetSize > 0)
+		{
+			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
+			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = FrameINHeader->Source;
+			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = FrameINHeader->EtherType;
+			
+			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+			FrameOUT->FrameLength           = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize);
+			FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer         = true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the packet was processed */
+	if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS)
+	{
+		/* Clear the frame buffer */
+		FrameIN->FrameInBuffer = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's
+ *  compliment of each word, complimented.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Data   Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated
+ *  \param[in] Bytes  Number of bytes in the data buffer to process
+ *
+ *  \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value
+ */
+uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint16_t* Words    = (uint16_t*)Data;
+	uint32_t  Checksum = 0;
+
+	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++)
+	  Checksum += Words[CurrWord];
+	  
+	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+	
+	return ~Checksum;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
index 5029b7f3e..d5e091c13 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
@@ -1,107 +1,107 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Ethernet.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_
-#define _ETHERNET_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
-
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-		#include "ICMP.h"
-		#include "TCP.h"
-		#include "UDP.h"
-		#include "DHCP.h"
-		#include "ARP.h"
-		#include "IP.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Physical MAC address of the USB RNDIS network adapter */
-		#define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS              {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}
-
-		/** Physical MAC address of the virtual server on the network */
-		#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS               {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01}		
-
-		/** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address */
-		#define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS            {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
-	
-		/** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical.
-		 *  
-		 *  \param[in] MAC1  First MAC address
-		 *  \param[in] MAC2  Second MAC address
-		 *
-		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
-		 */
-		#define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2)          (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0)
-		
-		/** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard */
-		#define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE            0x0600
-
-		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated */
-		#define NO_RESPONSE                      0		
-
-		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled */
-		#define NO_PROCESS                       -1
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame header */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */
-			MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */
-			
-			union
-			{
-				uint16_t  EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet sub-protocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */
-				uint16_t  Length; /**< Ethernet frame length, for Ethernet V1 packets */
-			};
-		} Ethernet_Frame_Header_t;
-		
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress;
-		extern const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress;
-		extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress;
-		extern const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress;
-		extern const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void     Ethernet_ProcessPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT);
-		uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Ethernet.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "ICMP.h"
+		#include "TCP.h"
+		#include "UDP.h"
+		#include "DHCP.h"
+		#include "ARP.h"
+		#include "IP.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Physical MAC address of the USB RNDIS network adapter */
+		#define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS              {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}
+
+		/** Physical MAC address of the virtual server on the network */
+		#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS               {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01}		
+
+		/** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address */
+		#define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS            {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+	
+		/** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+		 *  
+		 *  \param[in] MAC1  First MAC address
+		 *  \param[in] MAC2  Second MAC address
+		 *
+		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2)          (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0)
+		
+		/** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard */
+		#define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE            0x0600
+
+		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated */
+		#define NO_RESPONSE                      0		
+
+		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled */
+		#define NO_PROCESS                       -1
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame header */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */
+			MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */
+			
+			union
+			{
+				uint16_t  EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet sub-protocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */
+				uint16_t  Length; /**< Ethernet frame length, for Ethernet V1 packets */
+			};
+		} Ethernet_Frame_Header_t;
+		
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress;
+		extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void     Ethernet_ProcessPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT);
+		uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
index 23f75108f..6117fe13e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by
- *  all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack.
- */
-
-#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
-#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV4                   0x0800
-		#define ETHERTYPE_ARP                    0x0806
-		#define ETHERTYPE_RARP                   0x8035
-		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK              0x809b
-		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP           0x80f3
-		#define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q              0x8100
-		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX              0x8137
-		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL                 0x8138
-		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV6                   0x86DD
-		#define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET               0x8819
-		#define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING       0x88a8
-		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST            0x8847
-		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST          0x8848
-		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY         0x8863
-		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION           0x8864
-		#define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN             0x888E
-		#define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI              0x889A
-		#define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET        0x88A2
-		#define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT               0x88A4
-		#define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII              0x88CD
-		#define ETHERTYPE_CESoE                  0x88D8
-		#define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY            0x88E5
-		#define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL           0x8906
-		#define ETHERTYPE_QINQ                   0x9100
-		#define ETHERTYPE_VLLT                   0xCAFE
-		
-		#define PROTOCOL_ICMP                    1
-		#define PROTOCOL_IGMP                    2
-		#define PROTOCOL_TCP                     6
-		#define PROTOCOL_UDP                     17
-		#define PROTOCOL_OSPF                    89
-		#define PROTOCOL_SCTP                    132
-
-	/* Type Defines: */		
-		/** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */
-		} IP_Address_t;
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by
+ *  all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV4                   0x0800
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ARP                    0x0806
+		#define ETHERTYPE_RARP                   0x8035
+		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK              0x809b
+		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP           0x80f3
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q              0x8100
+		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX              0x8137
+		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL                 0x8138
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV6                   0x86DD
+		#define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET               0x8819
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING       0x88a8
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST            0x8847
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST          0x8848
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY         0x8863
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION           0x8864
+		#define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN             0x888E
+		#define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI              0x889A
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET        0x88A2
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT               0x88A4
+		#define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII              0x88CD
+		#define ETHERTYPE_CESoE                  0x88D8
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY            0x88E5
+		#define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL           0x8906
+		#define ETHERTYPE_QINQ                   0x9100
+		#define ETHERTYPE_VLLT                   0xCAFE
+		
+		#define PROTOCOL_ICMP                    1
+		#define PROTOCOL_IGMP                    2
+		#define PROTOCOL_TCP                     6
+		#define PROTOCOL_UDP                     17
+		#define PROTOCOL_OSPF                    89
+		#define PROTOCOL_SCTP                    132
+
+	/* Type Defines: */		
+		/** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */
+		} IP_Address_t;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
index dd339ca3a..2d8183746 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles
- *  Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host
- *  and the virtual server.
- */
- 
-#include "ICMP.h"
-
-/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request.
- *
- *  \param[in] FrameIN        Pointer to the incoming Ethernet frame information structure
- *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ICMP header
- *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
- */
-int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
-{
-	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
-
-	DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart);
-
-	/* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */
-	if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST)
-	{
-		/* Fill out the ICMP response packet */
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Type     = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY;
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Code     = 0;
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Id       = ICMPHeaderIN->Id;
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence;
-		
-		uint16_t DataSize = FrameIN->FrameLength - ((((uint16_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (uint16_t)FrameIN->FrameData));
-		
-		/* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */
-		memcpy(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
-		       &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
-			   DataSize);
-
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)));
-
-		/* Return the size of the response so far */
-		return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t));
-	}
-	
-	return NO_RESPONSE;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles
+ *  Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host
+ *  and the virtual server.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ICMP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] FrameIN        Pointer to the incoming Ethernet frame information structure
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ICMP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	/* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */
+	if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the ICMP response packet */
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Type     = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Code     = 0;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Id       = ICMPHeaderIN->Id;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence;
+		
+		uint16_t DataSize = FrameIN->FrameLength - ((((uint16_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (uint16_t)FrameIN->FrameData));
+		
+		/* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */
+		memcpy(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+		       &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+			   DataSize);
+
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)));
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t));
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
index e630c1afc..6c2fbb134 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ICMP.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _ICMP_H_
-#define _ICMP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY              0
-
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3
-		
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH           4
-
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE        5
-
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST            8
-
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED           11
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for an ICMP message header. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       Type; /**< ICMP message type, a ICMP_TYPE_* constant */
-			uint8_t       Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */
-			uint16_t      Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */
-			uint16_t      Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */
-			uint16_t      Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */
-		} ICMP_Header_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ICMP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ICMP_H_
+#define _ICMP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY              0
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3
+		
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH           4
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE        5
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST            8
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED           11
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an ICMP message header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Type; /**< ICMP message type, a ICMP_TYPE_* constant */
+			uint8_t       Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */
+			uint16_t      Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */
+			uint16_t      Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */
+			uint16_t      Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */
+		} ICMP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
index 000d89001..6766322ca 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
@@ -1,113 +1,113 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the
- *  host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP.
- */
- 
-#include "IP.h"
-
-/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a sub-protocol handler.
- *
- *  \param[in] FrameIN        Pointer to the incoming Ethernet frame information structure
- *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
- *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
- *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
- *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
- */
-int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
-{
-	DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart);
-
-	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
-
-	/* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */
-	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
-
-	int16_t  RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
-
-	/* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */
-	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
-	    !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress)))
-	{
-		return NO_RESPONSE;
-	}
-	
-	/* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */
-	switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol)
-	{
-		case PROTOCOL_ICMP:
-			RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(FrameIN,
-			                                 &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
-			                                 &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
-			break;
-		case PROTOCOL_TCP:
-			RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart,
-			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
-			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		
-			break;
-		case PROTOCOL_UDP:
-			RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart,
-			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
-			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
-	if (RetSize > 0)
-	{
-		/* Fill out the response IP packet header */
-		IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
-		IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
-		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
-		IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
-		IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
-		IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
-		IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
-		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
-		IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = IPHeaderIN->Protocol;
-		IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
-		IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress;
-		IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress;
-		
-		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
-						
-		/* Return the size of the response so far */
-		return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
-	}
-	
-	return RetSize;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the
+ *  host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP.
+ */
+ 
+#include "IP.h"
+
+/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a sub-protocol handler.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] FrameIN        Pointer to the incoming Ethernet frame information structure
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	/* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */
+	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	int16_t  RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+	/* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+	    !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress)))
+	{
+		return NO_RESPONSE;
+	}
+	
+	/* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */
+	switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol)
+	{
+		case PROTOCOL_ICMP:
+			RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(FrameIN,
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+		case PROTOCOL_TCP:
+			RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart,
+			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		
+			break;
+		case PROTOCOL_UDP:
+			RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart,
+			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+	if (RetSize > 0)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the response IP packet header */
+		IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+		IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+		IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = IPHeaderIN->Protocol;
+		IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
+		IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress;
+		IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress;
+		
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+						
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+	}
+	
+	return RetSize;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
index 60d43e14d..82f28e80e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
@@ -1,93 +1,93 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for IP.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _IP_H_
-#define _IP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Protocol IP address of the host (client) machine, once assigned by DHCP */
-		#define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    1}
-
-		/** Protocol IP address of the virtual server machine */
-		#define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    2}
-
-		/** Protocol IP address of the broadcast address */
-		#define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS             {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
-
-		/** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination is reached */
-		#define DEFAULT_TTL                      128
-		
-		/** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical.
-		 *  
-		 *  \param[in] IP1  First IP address
-		 *  \param[in] IP2  Second IP address
-		 *
-		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
-		 */
-		#define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2)             (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0)
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define of an IP packet header. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			unsigned char  HeaderLength   : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */
-			unsigned char  Version        : 4; /**< IP protocol version */
-			uint8_t        TypeOfService; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */
-			uint16_t       TotalLength; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */
-
-			uint16_t       Identification; /**< Identification value for identifying fragmented packets */
-			unsigned int   FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */
-			unsigned int   Flags          : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */
-
-			uint8_t        TTL; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */
-			uint8_t        Protocol; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */
-			uint16_t       HeaderChecksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */
-			
-			IP_Address_t  SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */
-			IP_Address_t  DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */
-		} IP_Header_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for IP.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _IP_H_
+#define _IP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Protocol IP address of the host (client) machine, once assigned by DHCP */
+		#define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    1}
+
+		/** Protocol IP address of the virtual server machine */
+		#define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    2}
+
+		/** Protocol IP address of the broadcast address */
+		#define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS             {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+
+		/** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination is reached */
+		#define DEFAULT_TTL                      128
+		
+		/** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+		 *  
+		 *  \param[in] IP1  First IP address
+		 *  \param[in] IP2  Second IP address
+		 *
+		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2)             (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0)
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define of an IP packet header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned char  HeaderLength   : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */
+			unsigned char  Version        : 4; /**< IP protocol version */
+			uint8_t        TypeOfService; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */
+			uint16_t       TotalLength; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */
+
+			uint16_t       Identification; /**< Identification value for identifying fragmented packets */
+			unsigned int   FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */
+			unsigned int   Flags          : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */
+
+			uint8_t        TTL; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */
+			uint8_t        Protocol; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */
+			uint16_t       HeaderChecksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */
+			
+			IP_Address_t  SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */
+			IP_Address_t  DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */
+		} IP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
index 37cb840fd..e0bf6ecfe 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
@@ -1,280 +1,280 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines
-   accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertinent information
-   on the packet through the serial port.
-   
-   To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol}
-   in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes.
- *  Enabled protocol decoders will print incoming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human
- *  readable format.
- *
- *  Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably.
- *  Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile
- *  and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
- */
- 
-#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-
-/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] FrameINData  Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame information structure
- */
-void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameINData)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET)
-	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)FrameINData->FrameData;
-	
-	printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
-	
-	printf_P(PSTR("  ETHERNET\r\n"));
-	printf_P(PSTR("  + Frame Size: %u\r\n"), FrameINData->FrameLength);
-
-	if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) &&
-	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)))
-	{
-		printf_P(PSTR("  + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
-		return;
-	}
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]);
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"),    FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]);
-
-	if (SwapEndian_16(FrameINData->FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE)
-	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType));
-	else
-	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: UNKNOWN E1\r\n"));
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header
- */
-void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP)
-	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;	
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    ARP\r\n"));
-
-	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
-	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress)))
-	{
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
-		return;		
-	}
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType));
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation));
-	
-	if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4)
-	{
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]);
-
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0],
-		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1],
-		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2],
-		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]);
-
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]);
-
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0],
-		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1],
-		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2],
-		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]);
-	}
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an IP packet header
- */
-void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP)
-	IP_Header_t* IPHeader  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-
-	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    IP\r\n"));
-
-	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)))
-	{
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
-		return;
-	}
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version);
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength));
-	
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol);
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL);
-	
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0],
-	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1],
-	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2],
-	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]);	
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0],
-	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1],
-	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2],
-	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]);
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header
- */
-void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP)
-	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     ICMP\r\n"));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type);
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code);
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header
- */
-void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP)
-	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader  = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-
-	uint16_t               HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     TCP\r\n"));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort));
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber));
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber));
-	
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags);
-	
-	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed)
-	  printf_P(PSTR("     + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n"));
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header
- */
-void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP)
-	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     UDP\r\n"));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort));
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length));
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header
- */
-void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP)
-	uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     \\\r\n      DHCP\r\n"));
-
-	while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
-	{
-		if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
-		{
-			switch (DHCPOptions[2])
-			{
-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER:
-					printf_P(PSTR("      + DISCOVER\r\n"));
-					break;
-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST:
-					printf_P(PSTR("      + REQUEST\r\n"));
-					break;
-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE:
-					printf_P(PSTR("      + RELEASE\r\n"));
-					break;
-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE:
-					printf_P(PSTR("      + DECLINE\r\n"));
-					break;
-			}
-		}
-		
-		DHCPOptions += ((DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptions[1] + 2));
-	}
-
-	#endif
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines
+   accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertinent information
+   on the packet through the serial port.
+   
+   To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol}
+   in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes.
+ *  Enabled protocol decoders will print incoming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human
+ *  readable format.
+ *
+ *  Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably.
+ *  Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile
+ *  and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] FrameINData  Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame information structure
+ */
+void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameINData)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET)
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)FrameINData->FrameData;
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("  ETHERNET\r\n"));
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + Frame Size: %u\r\n"), FrameINData->FrameLength);
+
+	if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) &&
+	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("  + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"),    FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]);
+
+	if (SwapEndian_16(FrameINData->FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE)
+	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType));
+	else
+	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: UNKNOWN E1\r\n"));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP)
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;	
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    ARP\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;		
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType));
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation));
+	
+	if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an IP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP)
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeader  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    IP\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength));
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL);
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]);	
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP)
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     ICMP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type);
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP)
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader  = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	uint16_t               HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     TCP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber));
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags);
+	
+	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed)
+	  printf_P(PSTR("     + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n"));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP)
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     UDP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP)
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     \\\r\n      DHCP\r\n"));
+
+	while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{
+		if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+		{
+			switch (DHCPOptions[2])
+			{
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + DISCOVER\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + REQUEST\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + RELEASE\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + DECLINE\r\n"));
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		DHCPOptions += ((DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptions[1] + 2));
+	}
+
+	#endif
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
index 2dfc60868..56ed795e6 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
@@ -1,59 +1,59 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
-#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameINData);
-		void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameINData);
+		void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
index 6500f3ba0..318085f59 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
@@ -1,621 +1,621 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission
- *  and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data
- *  delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C
-#include "TCP.h"
-
-/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are
- *  stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This
- *  allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired.
- */
-TCP_PortState_t        PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
-
-/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active
- *  (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections
- *  not present in the array are closed.
- */
-TCP_ConnectionState_t  ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS];
-
-
-/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application
- *  level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT
- *  buffer for later transmission.
- */
-void TCP_TCPTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* RNDISInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Run each application in sequence, to process incoming and generate outgoing packets */
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */
-		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
-		{
-			/* Run the application handler for the port */
-			if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) && 
-			    (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open))
-			{
-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry],
-				                                               &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	
-	/* Get pointer to the output frame info struct for convenience */
-	Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT;
-	
-	/* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */
-	if (FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer)
-	  return;
-	
-	/* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */
-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) &&
-		    (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready))
-		{
-			Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData;
-			IP_Header_t*             IPHeaderOUT    = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)];
-			TCP_Header_t*            TCPHeaderOUT   = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
-			                                                                              sizeof(IP_Header_t)];
-			void*                    TCPDataOUT     = &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
-			                                                               sizeof(IP_Header_t) +
-			                                                               sizeof(TCP_Header_t)];
-
-			uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length;
-
-			/* Fill out the TCP data */
-			TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port;
-			TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort;
-			TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut);
-			TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn);
-			TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
-			TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize           = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
-
-			TCPHeaderOUT->Flags                = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
-			TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
-			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
-			TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
-
-			memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize);
-			
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize;
-
-			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, ServerIPAddress,
-			                                                    ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress,
-			                                                    (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize));
-
-			PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
-
-			/* Fill out the response IP header */
-			IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize);
-			IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
-			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
-			IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
-			IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
-			IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
-			IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
-			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
-			IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = PROTOCOL_TCP;
-			IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
-			IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = ServerIPAddress;
-			IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress;
-			
-			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
-		
-			PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t);
-		
-			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
-			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
-			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}};
-			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4);
-
-			PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t);
-
-			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
-			FrameOUT->FrameLength           = PacketSize;
-			FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer         = true;
-			
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false;
-			
-			break;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are
- *  processed.
- */
-void TCP_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */
-	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
-	  PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed;
-
-	/* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	  ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed;
-}
-
-/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state.
- *
- *  \param[in] Port     Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian
- *  \param[in] State    New state of the port, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
- *  \param[in] Handler  Application callback handler for the port
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the port state was set, false otherwise (no more space in the port state table)
- */
-bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*))
-{
-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
-
-	/* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */
-	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */
-		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
-		{
-			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
-			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */
-	if (State == TCP_Port_Open)
-	{
-		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
-		{
-			/* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */
-			if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed)
-			{
-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  = Port;
-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
-				return true;
-			}
-		}
-		
-		/* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */
-		return false;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */
-		return true;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian.
- *
- *  \param[in] Port  TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian
- *
- *  \return A value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
- */
-uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port)
-{
-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
-
-	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */
-		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
-		  return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State;
-	}
-	
-	/* Port not in table, assume closed */
-	return TCP_Port_Closed;
-}
-
-/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the
- *  connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible.
- *
- *  \param[in] Port           TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian
- *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected device
- *  \param[in] RemotePort     TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian
- *  \param[in] State          TCP connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the connection was updated or created, false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table)
- */
-bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State)
-{
-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
-
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find port entry in the table */
-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
-		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
-			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
-		{
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find empty entry in the table */
-		if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed)
-		{
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port          = Port;
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = RemoteAddress;			
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort    = RemotePort;
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State         = State;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host.
- *
- *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
- *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
- *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
- *
- *  \return A value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
- */
-uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
-{
-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
-
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find port entry in the table */
-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
-		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
-			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
-			 
-		{
-			return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return TCP_Connection_Closed;
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host.
- *
- *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
- *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
- *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
- *
- *  \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise
- */
-TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
-{
-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
-
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find port entry in the table */
-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
-		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
-			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
-		{
-			return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return NULL;
-}
-
-/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler.
- *
- *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
- *  \param[in] TCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's TCP header
- *  \param[out] TCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
- *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
- *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
- */
-int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart)
-{
-	IP_Header_t*  IPHeaderIN   = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
-	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN  = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart;
-	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart;
-
-	TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo;
-	
-	DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart);
-
-	bool PacketResponse = false;
-		
-	/* Check if the destination port is open and allows incoming connections */
-	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open)
-	{
-		/* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */
-		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN)
-		  TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen);
-
-		/* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */
-		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST)
-		{
-			if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-			                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed))
-			{
-				TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
-				PacketResponse = true;			
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Process the incoming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */
-			switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort))
-			{
-				case TCP_Connection_Listen:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN)
-					{
-						/* SYN connection starts a connection with a peer */
-						if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-						                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_SYNReceived))
-						{
-							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);						
-
-							ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn  = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1);
-							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0;
-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse      = false;
-						}
-						else
-						{
-							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_RST;
-						}
-											   
-						PacketResponse      = true;
-					}
-					
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
-					{
-						/* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */
-
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established);
-
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-															   
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
-					}
-					
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_Established:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
-					{
-						/* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */
-					
-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
-						PacketResponse      = true;
-						
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait);
-
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
-					}
-					else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH)))
-					{
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-						/* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */		
-						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false))
-						{						
-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN;
-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse     = true;
-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    = 0;
-						}
-						
-						/* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */
-						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) &&
-							(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE))
-						{
-							uint16_t IPOffset   = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
-							uint16_t TCPOffset  = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
-							uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset);
-
-							/* Copy the packet data into the buffer */
-							memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length],
-								   &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset],
-								   DataLength);
-
-							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength;
-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    += DataLength;
-							
-							/* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */
-							if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH))
-							{
-								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
-								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true;
-
-								TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
-								PacketResponse      = true;
-							}
-						}
-						else
-						{
-							/* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incoming packet */
-							return NO_PROCESS;
-						}
-					}
-					
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_Closing:
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN);
-						PacketResponse      = true;
-						
-						ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
-						
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1);
-
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_FINWait1:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
-					{
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
-						PacketResponse      = true;
-
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
-						
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
-					}
-					else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
-					{
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2);
-					}
-					
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_FINWait2:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
-					{
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
-						PacketResponse      = true;
-
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
-						
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
-					}
-				
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_CloseWait:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
-					{
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
-					}
-					
-					break;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */
-		TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
-		PacketResponse      = true;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */
-	if (PacketResponse)
-	{
-		ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-		                                       TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-		TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
-		TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
-		TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut);
-		TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn);
-		TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
-		
-		if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse))
-		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
-		else
-		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length);
-
-		TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
-		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
-		TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
-		
-		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress,
-		                                                    IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t));					
-
-		return sizeof(TCP_Header_t);	
-	}
-
-	return NO_RESPONSE;
-}
-
-/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word,
- *  complimented.
- *
- *  \param[in] TCPHeaderOutStart   Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header
- *  \param[in] SourceAddress       Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
- *  \param[in] DestinationAddress  Destination protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
- *  \param[in] TCPOutSize          Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload
- *
- *  \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value
- */
-static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
-                               IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize)
-{
-	uint32_t Checksum = 0;
-	
-	/* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP pseudo-header,
-	   complimented */
-	
-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[0];
-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[1];
-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[0];
-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[1];
-	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP);
-	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize);
-
-	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++)
-	  Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord];
-	
-	if (TCPOutSize & 0x01)
-	  Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF);
-	  
-	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
-	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
-	
-	return ~Checksum;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission
+ *  and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data
+ *  delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C
+#include "TCP.h"
+
+/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are
+ *  stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This
+ *  allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired.
+ */
+TCP_PortState_t        PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
+
+/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active
+ *  (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections
+ *  not present in the array are closed.
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionState_t  ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS];
+
+
+/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application
+ *  level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT
+ *  buffer for later transmission.
+ */
+void TCP_TCPTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Run each application in sequence, to process incoming and generate outgoing packets */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */
+		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+		{
+			/* Run the application handler for the port */
+			if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) && 
+			    (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open))
+			{
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry],
+				                                               &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Get pointer to the output frame info struct for convenience */
+	Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT;
+	
+	/* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */
+	if (FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer)
+	  return;
+	
+	/* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) &&
+		    (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready))
+		{
+			Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData;
+			IP_Header_t*             IPHeaderOUT    = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)];
+			TCP_Header_t*            TCPHeaderOUT   = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+			                                                                              sizeof(IP_Header_t)];
+			void*                    TCPDataOUT     = &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+			                                                               sizeof(IP_Header_t) +
+			                                                               sizeof(TCP_Header_t)];
+
+			uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length;
+
+			/* Fill out the TCP data */
+			TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut);
+			TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn);
+			TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+			TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize           = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Flags                = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
+
+			memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize);
+			
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize;
+
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, ServerIPAddress,
+			                                                    ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress,
+			                                                    (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize));
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
+
+			/* Fill out the response IP header */
+			IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize);
+			IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+			IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = PROTOCOL_TCP;
+			IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
+			IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = ServerIPAddress;
+			IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress;
+			
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+		
+			PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t);
+		
+			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
+			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}};
+			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4);
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t);
+
+			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+			FrameOUT->FrameLength           = PacketSize;
+			FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer         = true;
+			
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false;
+			
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are
+ *  processed.
+ */
+void TCP_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+	  PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed;
+
+	/* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	  ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port     Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] State    New state of the port, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ *  \param[in] Handler  Application callback handler for the port
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the port state was set, false otherwise (no more space in the port state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*))
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	/* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */
+		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+		{
+			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */
+	if (State == TCP_Port_Open)
+	{
+		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+		{
+			/* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */
+			if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed)
+			{
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  = Port;
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+				return true;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		/* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */
+		return false;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */
+		return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port  TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */
+		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+		  return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State;
+	}
+	
+	/* Port not in table, assume closed */
+	return TCP_Port_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the
+ *  connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected device
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] State          TCP connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the connection was updated or created, false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+		{
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find empty entry in the table */
+		if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed)
+		{
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port          = Port;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = RemoteAddress;			
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort    = RemotePort;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State         = State;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+			 
+		{
+			return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ *  \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+		{
+			return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] TCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's TCP header
+ *  \param[out] TCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	IP_Header_t*  IPHeaderIN   = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN  = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart;
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart;
+
+	TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo;
+	
+	DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart);
+
+	bool PacketResponse = false;
+		
+	/* Check if the destination port is open and allows incoming connections */
+	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open)
+	{
+		/* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */
+		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+		  TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen);
+
+		/* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */
+		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST)
+		{
+			if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+			                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed))
+			{
+				TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
+				PacketResponse = true;			
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Process the incoming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */
+			switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort))
+			{
+				case TCP_Connection_Listen:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+					{
+						/* SYN connection starts a connection with a peer */
+						if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+						                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_SYNReceived))
+						{
+							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);						
+
+							ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn  = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1);
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse      = false;
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_RST;
+						}
+											   
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						/* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established);
+
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+															   
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_Established:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						/* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */
+					
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait);
+
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+					}
+					else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH)))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						/* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */		
+						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false))
+						{						
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse     = true;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    = 0;
+						}
+						
+						/* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */
+						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) &&
+							(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE))
+						{
+							uint16_t IPOffset   = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+							uint16_t TCPOffset  = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+							uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset);
+
+							/* Copy the packet data into the buffer */
+							memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length],
+								   &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset],
+								   DataLength);
+
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    += DataLength;
+							
+							/* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */
+							if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH))
+							{
+								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true;
+
+								TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+								PacketResponse      = true;
+							}
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							/* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incoming packet */
+							return NO_PROCESS;
+						}
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_Closing:
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN);
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+						
+						ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1);
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_FINWait1:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+					else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2);
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_FINWait2:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+				
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_CloseWait:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+					
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
+		PacketResponse      = true;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */
+	if (PacketResponse)
+	{
+		ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+		                                       TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut);
+		TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn);
+		TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+		
+		if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse))
+		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+		else
+		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length);
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
+		
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress,
+		                                                    IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t));					
+
+		return sizeof(TCP_Header_t);	
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word,
+ *  complimented.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] TCPHeaderOutStart   Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header
+ *  \param[in] SourceAddress       Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ *  \param[in] DestinationAddress  Destination protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ *  \param[in] TCPOutSize          Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload
+ *
+ *  \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value
+ */
+static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
+                               IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize)
+{
+	uint32_t Checksum = 0;
+	
+	/* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP pseudo-header,
+	   complimented */
+	
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[0];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[1];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[0];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[1];
+	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP);
+	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize);
+
+	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++)
+	  Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord];
+	
+	if (TCPOutSize & 0x01)
+	  Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF);
+	  
+	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+	
+	return ~Checksum;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
index d84256024..4baa0898f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
@@ -1,249 +1,249 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for TCP.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _TCP_H_
-#define _TCP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time */
-		#define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS              1
-
-		/** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time */
-		#define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS             3
-
-		/** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time */
-		#define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE                 512
-		
-		/** Port number for HTTP transmissions */
-		#define TCP_PORT_HTTP                   SwapEndian_16(80)
-		
-		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device */
-		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN                false
-
-		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host */
-		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT               true
-		
-		/** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_CWR                    (1 << 7)
-
-		/** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_ECE                    (1 << 6)
-
-		/** Urgent TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_URG                    (1 << 5)
-
-		/** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_ACK                    (1 << 4)
-
-		/** Data Push TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_PSH                    (1 << 3)
-
-		/** Reset TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_RST                    (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Synchronize TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_SYN                    (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_FIN                    (1 << 0)
-		
-		/** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
-		 *
-		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, false otherwise
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer)  (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN))
-
-		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
-		 *
-		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && \
-		                                              (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT))
-
-		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
-		 *
-		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)   Buffer->InUse
-
-		/** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be
-		 *  performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host.
-		 *
-		 *  \note The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER().
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to lock
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; }MACROE
-
-		/** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to release
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->InUse = false; }MACROE
-
-		/** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to send
-		 *  \param[in] Len     Length of data contained in the buffer
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len)     MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; }MACROE
-
-		/** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to clear
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer)         MACROS{ Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; }MACROE
-		
-		/** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Connection  Open TCP connection to close
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection)  MACROS{ Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing;  }MACROE
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for possible TCP port states */
-		enum TCP_PortStates_t
-		{
-			TCP_Port_Closed            = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */
-			TCP_Port_Open              = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */
-		};
-	
-		/** Enum for possible TCP connection states */
-		enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t
-		{
-			TCP_Connection_Listen      = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */
-			TCP_Connection_SYNSent     = 1, /**< Unused */
-			TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */
-			TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */
-			TCP_Connection_FINWait1    = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
-			TCP_Connection_FINWait2    = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */
-			TCP_Connection_CloseWait   = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
-			TCP_Connection_Closing     = 7, /**< Unused */
-			TCP_Connection_LastACK     = 8, /**< Unused */
-			TCP_Connection_TimeWait    = 9, /**< Unused */
-			TCP_Connection_Closed      = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */			
-		};
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t               Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */
-			uint8_t                Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */
-			bool                   Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN  or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */
-			bool                   Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates
-			                               *   buffer ready to be sent to the host
-			                               */
-			bool                   InUse; /** Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */
-		} TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a TCP connection information structure */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t               SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */	
-			uint32_t               SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */
-			TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */
-		} TCP_ConnectionInfo_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a complete TCP connection state */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t               Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */
-			uint16_t               RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */
-			IP_Address_t           RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */
-			TCP_ConnectionInfo_t   Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */
-			uint8_t                State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */
-		} TCP_ConnectionState_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a TCP port state */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t               Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */
-			uint8_t                State; /**< Current port state, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum */
-			void                   (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState,
-			                                              TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */
-		} TCP_PortState_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a TCP packet header */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t               SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */
-			uint16_t               DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */
-			
-			uint32_t               SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */
-			uint32_t               AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */
-			
-			unsigned char          Reserved : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */
-			unsigned char          DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */
-			uint8_t                Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */
-			uint16_t               WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaining in reception buffer) */
-			
-			uint16_t               Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */
-			uint16_t               UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */
-		} TCP_Header_t;
-		
-	/* External Variables: */
-		TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void                  TCP_TCPTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* RNDISInterfaceInfo);
-		void                  TCP_Init(void);
-		bool                  TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*));
-		uint8_t               TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port);
-		bool                  TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State);
-		uint8_t               TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
-		TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
-		int16_t               TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C)
-			static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
-										   IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TCP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TCP_H_
+#define _TCP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time */
+		#define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS              1
+
+		/** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time */
+		#define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS             3
+
+		/** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time */
+		#define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE                 512
+		
+		/** Port number for HTTP transmissions */
+		#define TCP_PORT_HTTP                   SwapEndian_16(80)
+		
+		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device */
+		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN                false
+
+		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host */
+		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT               true
+		
+		/** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_CWR                    (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_ECE                    (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Urgent TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_URG                    (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_ACK                    (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Data Push TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_PSH                    (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Reset TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_RST                    (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Synchronize TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_SYN                    (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_FIN                    (1 << 0)
+		
+		/** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer)  (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN))
+
+		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && \
+		                                              (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT))
+
+		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)   Buffer->InUse
+
+		/** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be
+		 *  performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host.
+		 *
+		 *  \note The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER().
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to lock
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; }MACROE
+
+		/** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to release
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->InUse = false; }MACROE
+
+		/** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to send
+		 *  \param[in] Len     Length of data contained in the buffer
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len)     MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; }MACROE
+
+		/** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to clear
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer)         MACROS{ Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; }MACROE
+		
+		/** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Connection  Open TCP connection to close
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection)  MACROS{ Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing;  }MACROE
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible TCP port states */
+		enum TCP_PortStates_t
+		{
+			TCP_Port_Closed            = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+			TCP_Port_Open              = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+		};
+	
+		/** Enum for possible TCP connection states */
+		enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t
+		{
+			TCP_Connection_Listen      = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */
+			TCP_Connection_SYNSent     = 1, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */
+			TCP_Connection_FINWait1    = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_FINWait2    = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_CloseWait   = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_Closing     = 7, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_LastACK     = 8, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_TimeWait    = 9, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_Closed      = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */			
+		};
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */
+			uint8_t                Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */
+			bool                   Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN  or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */
+			bool                   Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates
+			                               *   buffer ready to be sent to the host
+			                               */
+			bool                   InUse; /** Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */
+		} TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP connection information structure */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */	
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */
+			TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */
+		} TCP_ConnectionInfo_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a complete TCP connection state */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */
+			uint16_t               RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */
+			IP_Address_t           RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */
+			TCP_ConnectionInfo_t   Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */
+			uint8_t                State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */
+		} TCP_ConnectionState_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP port state */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */
+			uint8_t                State; /**< Current port state, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum */
+			void                   (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState,
+			                                              TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */
+		} TCP_PortState_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP packet header */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */
+			uint16_t               DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */
+			
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */
+			uint32_t               AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */
+			
+			unsigned char          Reserved : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */
+			unsigned char          DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */
+			uint8_t                Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */
+			uint16_t               WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaining in reception buffer) */
+			
+			uint16_t               Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */
+			uint16_t               UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */
+		} TCP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* External Variables: */
+		TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void                  TCP_TCPTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* RNDISInterfaceInfo);
+		void                  TCP_Init(void);
+		bool                  TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*));
+		uint8_t               TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port);
+		bool                  TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State);
+		uint8_t               TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
+		TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
+		int16_t               TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C)
+			static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
+										   IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
index 47b0ab87a..c9c523f71 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low
- *  reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C
-#include "UDP.h"
-
-/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if a sub-protocol handler has created a response packet.
- *
- *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
- *  \param[in] UDPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's UDP header
- *  \param[out] UDPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
- */
-int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart)
-{
-	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN  = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart;
-	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart;
-	
-	int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
-	
-	DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart);
-	
-	switch (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort))
-	{
-		case UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST:
-			RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart,
-			                                 &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)],
-		                                     &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
-	if (RetSize > 0)
-	{
-		/* Fill out the response UDP packet header */
-		UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort      = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
-		UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
-		UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum        = 0;
-		UDPHeaderOUT->Length          = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
-
-		/* Return the size of the response so far */
-		return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
-	}
-	
-	return NO_RESPONSE;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low
+ *  reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C
+#include "UDP.h"
+
+/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if a sub-protocol handler has created a response packet.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] UDPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's UDP header
+ *  \param[out] UDPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN  = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart;
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart;
+	
+	int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+	
+	DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart);
+	
+	switch (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort))
+	{
+		case UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST:
+			RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart,
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)],
+		                                     &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+	if (RetSize > 0)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the response UDP packet header */
+		UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort      = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum        = 0;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->Length          = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
index 7725d6c2f..73f7664f7 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
@@ -1,67 +1,67 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for IP.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _UDP_H_
-#define _UDP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-	
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-		#include "DHCP.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Source UDP port for a DHCP request */
-		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67
-
-		/** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply */
-		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY   68
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a UDP packet header */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */
-			uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */
-			uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */
-			uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */
-		} UDP_Header_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for IP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UDP_H_
+#define _UDP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+	
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "DHCP.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Source UDP port for a DHCP request */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67
+
+		/** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY   68
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a UDP packet header */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */
+			uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */
+			uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */
+			uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */
+		} UDP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
index 7f2502027..7f90de3b8 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
@@ -1,200 +1,200 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This
- *  application will serve up a static HTTP web page when requested by the host.
- */
-
-#include "Webserver.h"
-
-/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
- *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
- */
-char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
-                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
-                               "Content-type: text/html\r\n"
-                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
-
-/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
- *  given URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
- */
-char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
-                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
-                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
-
-/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically
- *  broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run.
- */
-char PROGMEM HTTPPage[]   = 
-		"<html>"
-		"	<head>"
-		"		<title>"
-		"			LUFA Webserver Demo"
-		"		</title>"
-		"	</head>"
-		"	<body>"
-		"		<h1>Hello from your USB AVR!</h1>"
-		"		<p>"
-		"			Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack."
-		"			<br /><br />"
-		"			<small>Project Information: <a href=\"http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php\">http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php</a>.</small>"
-		"			<hr />"
-		"			<i>LUFA Version: </i>" LUFA_VERSION_STRING
-		"		</p>"
-		"	</body>"
-		"</html>";
-
-
-/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application
- *  callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port.
- */
-void Webserver_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */
-	TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback);
-}
-
-/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command.
- *
- *  \param[in] RequestHeader  HTTP request made by the host
- *  \param[in] Command        HTTP command to compare the request to
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command matches the request, false otherwise
- */
-static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader, char* Command)
-{
-	/* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */
-	return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0);
-}
-
-/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request
- *  has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses.
- *
- *  \param[in] ConnectionState  Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information
- *  \param[in,out] Buffer       Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer
- */
-void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer)
-{
-	char*          BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data;
-	static uint8_t PageBlock     = 0;
-	
-	/* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */
-	if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer))
-	{
-		if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET"))
-		{
-			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET / "))
-			{
-				PageBlock = 0;
-
-				/* Copy the HTTP 200 response header into the packet buffer */
-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
-				
-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
-
-				/* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */
-				TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Copy the HTTP 404 response header into the packet buffer */
-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
-				
-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
-				
-				/* All data sent, close the connection */
-				TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
-			}
-		}
-		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD"))
-		{
-			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD / "))
-			{
-				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
-
-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
-
-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));			
-			}
-			
-			/* All data sent, close the connection */
-			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
-		}
-		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE"))
-		{
-			/* Echo the host's query back to the host */
-			TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length);
-			
-			/* All data sent, close the connection */
-			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */
-			TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer);
-		}
-	}
-	else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer))
-	{
-		uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]);
-		uint16_t Length;
-	
-		/* Determine the length of the loaded block */
-		Length = ((RemLength > HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE) ? HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE : RemLength);
-
-		/* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */
-		strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length);
-		
-		/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
-		TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length);
-
-		/* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */
-		if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE))
-		{
-			/* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */
-			TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer);
-			
-			/* Close the connection to the host */
-			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
-		}
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This
+ *  application will serve up a static HTTP web page when requested by the host.
+ */
+
+#include "Webserver.h"
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
+ *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
+                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+                               "Content-type: text/html\r\n"
+                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
+ *  given URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
+                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+
+/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically
+ *  broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTPPage[]   = 
+		"<html>"
+		"	<head>"
+		"		<title>"
+		"			LUFA Webserver Demo"
+		"		</title>"
+		"	</head>"
+		"	<body>"
+		"		<h1>Hello from your USB AVR!</h1>"
+		"		<p>"
+		"			Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack."
+		"			<br /><br />"
+		"			<small>Project Information: <a href=\"http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php\">http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php</a>.</small>"
+		"			<hr />"
+		"			<i>LUFA Version: </i>" LUFA_VERSION_STRING
+		"		</p>"
+		"	</body>"
+		"</html>";
+
+
+/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application
+ *  callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port.
+ */
+void Webserver_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */
+	TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback);
+}
+
+/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] RequestHeader  HTTP request made by the host
+ *  \param[in] Command        HTTP command to compare the request to
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command matches the request, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader, char* Command)
+{
+	/* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */
+	return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0);
+}
+
+/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request
+ *  has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ConnectionState  Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information
+ *  \param[in,out] Buffer       Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer
+ */
+void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer)
+{
+	char*          BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data;
+	static uint8_t PageBlock     = 0;
+	
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */
+	if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer))
+	{
+		if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET"))
+		{
+			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET / "))
+			{
+				PageBlock = 0;
+
+				/* Copy the HTTP 200 response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
+				
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+
+				/* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */
+				TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP 404 response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
+				
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+				
+				/* All data sent, close the connection */
+				TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+			}
+		}
+		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD"))
+		{
+			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD / "))
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));			
+			}
+			
+			/* All data sent, close the connection */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE"))
+		{
+			/* Echo the host's query back to the host */
+			TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length);
+			
+			/* All data sent, close the connection */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */
+			TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer);
+		}
+	}
+	else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer))
+	{
+		uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]);
+		uint16_t Length;
+	
+		/* Determine the length of the loaded block */
+		Length = ((RemLength > HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE) ? HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE : RemLength);
+
+		/* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */
+		strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length);
+		
+		/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+		TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length);
+
+		/* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */
+		if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE))
+		{
+			/* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */
+			TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+			
+			/* Close the connection to the host */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
index be96f7f34..3ba4186ea 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
@@ -1,55 +1,55 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Webserver.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
-#define _WEBSERVER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		
-		#include "TCP.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */
-		#define  HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE     128
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void Webserver_Init(void);
-		void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Webserver.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
+#define _WEBSERVER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		
+		#include "TCP.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */
+		#define  HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE     128
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Webserver_Init(void);
+		void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
index 14016aa64..76c49068e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
@@ -1,136 +1,136 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "RNDISEthernet.h"
-
-/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
-
-				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
-				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-				
-				.AdapterVendorDescription       = "LUFA RNDIS Demo Adapter",
-				.AdapterMACAddress              = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS},
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	TCP_Init();
-	Webserver_Init();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		if (Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameIN.FrameInBuffer)
-		{
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-			Ethernet_ProcessPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameIN, &Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameOUT);
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-		}
-
-		TCP_TCPTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
-
-		RNDIS_Device_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RNDISEthernet.h"
+
+/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+				
+				.AdapterVendorDescription       = "LUFA RNDIS Demo Adapter",
+				.AdapterMACAddress              = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	TCP_Init();
+	Webserver_Init();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameIN.FrameInBuffer)
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+			Ethernet_ProcessPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameIN, &Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameOUT);
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+		}
+
+		TCP_TCPTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+
+		RNDIS_Device_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
index c6c092ccc..a689ee819 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for RNDISEthernet.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_
-#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/Ethernet.h"
-		#include "Lib/TCP.h"
-		#include "Lib/ARP.h"
-		#include "Lib/Webserver.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-	
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISEthernet.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/Ethernet.h"
+		#include "Lib/TCP.h"
+		#include "Lib/ARP.h"
+		#include "Lib/Webserver.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+	
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
index b897f1bb5..2175ecb7f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
@@ -1,122 +1,122 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet)
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application.
- *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
- *  a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for
- *  ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft
- *  standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually
- *  patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no
- *  manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels.
- *  
- *  Before running, you will need to install the INF file that
- *  is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will
- *  enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the
- *  need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install,
- *  right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If
- *  Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix
- *  will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and
- *  then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted.
- *  
- *  When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network
- *  adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received
- *  from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP
- *  stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be
- *  accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or
- *  through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports
- *  ping echos via the ICMP protocol.
- *  
- *  \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations
- *  and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor
- *  compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is 
- *  recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP
- *  stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_ETHERNET</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received Ethernet headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_ARP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received ARP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_IP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received IP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_ICMP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received ICMP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_TCP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received TCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_UDP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received UDP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_DHCP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received DHCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet)
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for
+ *  ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft
+ *  standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually
+ *  patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no
+ *  manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels.
+ *  
+ *  Before running, you will need to install the INF file that
+ *  is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will
+ *  enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the
+ *  need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install,
+ *  right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If
+ *  Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix
+ *  will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and
+ *  then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted.
+ *  
+ *  When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network
+ *  adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received
+ *  from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP
+ *  stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be
+ *  accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or
+ *  through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports
+ *  ping echos via the ICMP protocol.
+ *  
+ *  \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations
+ *  and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor
+ *  compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is 
+ *  recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP
+ *  stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ETHERNET</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received Ethernet headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ARP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received ARP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_IP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received IP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ICMP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received ICMP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_TCP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received TCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_UDP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received UDP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_DHCP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received DHCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile
index 9dc1ce2b6..f0648dd27 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile
@@ -1,750 +1,750 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = RNDISEthernet
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-      Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  Lib/Ethernet.c                                              \
-	  Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c                                      \
-	  Lib/ICMP.c                                                  \
-	  Lib/TCP.c                                                   \
-	  Lib/UDP.c                                                   \
-	  Lib/DHCP.c                                                  \
-	  Lib/ARP.c                                                   \
-	  Lib/IP.c                                                    \
-	  Lib/Webserver.c                                             \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c          \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_ETHERNET -DNO_DECODE_ARP -DNO_DECODE_ICMP
-CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_IP -DNO_DECODE_TCP -DNO_DECODE_UDP -DNO_DECODE_DHCP -DNO_DECODE_DNS
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = RNDISEthernet
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+      Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  Lib/Ethernet.c                                              \
+	  Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c                                      \
+	  Lib/ICMP.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/TCP.c                                                   \
+	  Lib/UDP.c                                                   \
+	  Lib/DHCP.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/ARP.c                                                   \
+	  Lib/IP.c                                                    \
+	  Lib/Webserver.c                                             \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c          \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_ETHERNET -DNO_DECODE_ARP -DNO_DECODE_ICMP
+CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_IP -DNO_DECODE_TCP -DNO_DECODE_UDP -DNO_DECODE_DHCP -DNO_DECODE_DNS
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
index 4d85c4f00..983f3ae62 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,267 +1,267 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x02,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2044,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-			
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-			
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-			
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-			
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA CDC Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*          Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t       Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x02,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2044,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+			
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+			
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+			
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA CDC Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*          Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t       Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
index 76eb1fc24..bb0b8e546 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
index 0852113dc..5cabce223 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf
index a179053eb..cd9c3433a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
-INSTDISK="LUFA CDC Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
+INSTDISK="LUFA CDC Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c
index 1a8d6ede8..d76f8cf95 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c
@@ -1,167 +1,167 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the VirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "VirtualSerial.h"
-
-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
-
-				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
-				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be
- *  used like any regular character stream in the C APIs
- */
-static FILE USBSerialStream;
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	/* Create a regular character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */
-	CDC_Device_CreateStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		CheckJoystickMovement();
-		 
-		/* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */
-		while (CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
-		  CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-
-		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */
-void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
-{
-	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
-	static bool ActionSent    = false;
-	
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
-	else
-	  ActionSent = false;
-	  
-	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
-	{
-		ActionSent = true;
-
-		/* Write the string to the virtual COM port via the created character stream */
-		fputs(ReportString, &USBSerialStream);
-
-		/* Alternatively, without the stream: */
-		// CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString, strlen(ReportString));
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "VirtualSerial.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be
+ *  used like any regular character stream in the C APIs
+ */
+static FILE USBSerialStream;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	/* Create a regular character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */
+	CDC_Device_CreateStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+		 
+		/* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */
+		while (CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
+		  CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
+	static bool ActionSent    = false;
+	
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+	  
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+
+		/* Write the string to the virtual COM port via the created character stream */
+		fputs(ReportString, &USBSerialStream);
+
+		/* Alternatively, without the stream: */
+		// CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString, strlen(ReportString));
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h
index 0edac545b..e4d79139c 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for VirtualSerial.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
-#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt
index 49837354c..a551379c3 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Communications Device Class demonstration application.
- *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
- *  a CDC device acting as a virtual serial port. Joystick
- *  actions are transmitted to the host as strings. The device
- *  does not respond to serial data sent from the host.
- *  
- *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
- *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
- *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
- *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
- *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
- *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
- *  CDC-ACM drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a CDC device acting as a virtual serial port. Joystick
+ *  actions are transmitted to the host as strings. The device
+ *  does not respond to serial data sent from the host.
+ *  
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/makefile
index bacb5e5a5..e6c88e5e2 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/makefile
@@ -1,738 +1,738 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = VirtualSerial
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = VirtualSerial
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.c
index e4d724b5a..873a035f6 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,362 +1,362 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)             */
-	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                            */
-	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                 */
-	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                        */
-	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Application)               */
-	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                     */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                      */
-	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                  */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)             */
-	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)             */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                  */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                  */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)     */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                     */
-	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                      */
-	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                     */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                      */
-	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                     */
-	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */
-	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                              */
-	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                              */
-	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)               */
-	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                */
-	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)     */
-	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                         */
-	0xC0                 /* End Collection                           */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-	
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0xEF,
-	.SubClass               = 0x02,
-	.Protocol               = 0x01,
-	
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-	
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2062,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-	
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-	
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 3,
-			
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-			
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-
-	.CDC_IAD = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
-
-			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 0,
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-
-			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-			
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-			
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 2,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_MouseHID = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(23), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA CDC and Mouse Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*          Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t       Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)             */
+	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                            */
+	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                 */
+	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                        */
+	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Application)               */
+	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                     */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                      */
+	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                  */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)             */
+	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)             */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                  */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                  */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)     */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                     */
+	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                      */
+	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                     */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                      */
+	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                     */
+	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */
+	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                              */
+	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                              */
+	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)               */
+	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                */
+	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)     */
+	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                         */
+	0xC0                 /* End Collection                           */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+	
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0xEF,
+	.SubClass               = 0x02,
+	.Protocol               = 0x01,
+	
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+	
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2062,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+	
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+	
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 3,
+			
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_IAD = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 0,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+			
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+			
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 2,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_MouseHID = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(23), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA CDC and Mouse Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*          Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t       Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.h
index edc4ccea4..5aa48672b 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,94 +1,94 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define MOUSE_EPNUM                    1
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE                   8
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC_IAD;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               HID_Interface;
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                     HID_MouseHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPNUM                    1
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE                   8
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                     HID_MouseHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Doxygen.conf
index 6bed99624..d6856dbd6 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Virtual Serial and Mouse Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Virtual Serial and Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/LUFA VirtualSerialMouse.inf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/LUFA VirtualSerialMouse.inf
index 0bd268a27..da86f151e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/LUFA VirtualSerialMouse.inf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/LUFA VirtualSerialMouse.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2062&MI_00
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2062&MI_00
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
-INSTDISK="LUFA CDC/Mouse Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2062&MI_00
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2062&MI_00
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
+INSTDISK="LUFA CDC/Mouse Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.c
index c55d6d001..b8884fe40 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.c
@@ -1,241 +1,241 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "VirtualSerialMouse.h"
-
-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
-
-				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
-				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber                = 2,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber         = MOUSE_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
-				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank     = false,
-
-				.PrevReportINBuffer             = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize         = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		CheckJoystickMovement();
-		 
-		/* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */
-		while (CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
-		  CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-
-		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-		HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */
-void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
-{
-	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
-	static bool ActionSent    = false;
-	
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
-	else
-	  ActionSent = false;
-	  
-	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
-	{
-		ActionSent = true;
-		
-		CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString, strlen(ReportString));		
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	  
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
- *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
-{
-	USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
-		
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  MouseReport->Y = -1;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  MouseReport->Y =  1;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  MouseReport->X = -1;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  MouseReport->X =  1;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
-	  
-	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 1);
-	
-	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
- *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
- *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
- */
-void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "VirtualSerialMouse.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber                = 2,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber         = MOUSE_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank     = false,
+
+				.PrevReportINBuffer             = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize         = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+		 
+		/* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */
+		while (CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
+		  CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
+	static bool ActionSent    = false;
+	
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+	  
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+		
+		CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString, strlen(ReportString));		
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	  
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+		
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  MouseReport->Y = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  MouseReport->Y =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  MouseReport->X = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  MouseReport->X =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+	  
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 1);
+	
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.h
index 3d6d3a7e3..a1371137c 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for VirtualSerialMouse.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_MOUSE_H_
-#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_MOUSE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
-		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
-		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerialMouse.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_MOUSE_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
+		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.txt
index 8ffe4d744..0d8c51d3e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.txt
@@ -1,76 +1,76 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Combined Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) and Mouse Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
- *        Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM) \n
- *        Mouse Subclass</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Combined Communications Device Class/Mouse demonstration application.
- *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing a combined
- *  CDC and HID device acting as a both a virtual serial port and a mouse.
- *  Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings and as mouse
- *  movements. The device does not respond to serial data sent from the host.
- *  
- *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
- *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
- *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
- *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
- *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
- *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
- *  CDC-ACM drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Combined Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) and Mouse Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
+ *        Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM) \n
+ *        Mouse Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Combined Communications Device Class/Mouse demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing a combined
+ *  CDC and HID device acting as a both a virtual serial port and a mouse.
+ *  Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings and as mouse
+ *  movements. The device does not respond to serial data sent from the host.
+ *  
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/makefile
index 07d1206d1..6e6c87d19 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/makefile
@@ -1,740 +1,740 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = VirtualSerialMouse
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = VirtualSerialMouse
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Descriptors.c
index 8f36caec3..f6d16c841 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,236 +1,236 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	USBSpecification:       VERSION_BCD(02.00),
-	Class:                  0x00,
-	SubClass:               0x00,
-	Protocol:               0x00,
-				
-	Endpoint0Size:          8,
-		
-	VendorID:               0x03EB,
-	ProductID:              0x2040,
-	ReleaseNumber:          0x0001,
-		
-	ManufacturerStrIndex:   0x01,
-	ProductStrIndex:        0x02,
-	SerialNumStrIndex:      0x03,
-		
-	NumberOfConfigurations: 1
-};
-	
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config =
-		{
-			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			TotalInterfaces:        1,
-				
-			ConfigurationNumber:    1,
-			ConfigurationStrIndex:  NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			ConfigAttributes:       (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			MaxPowerConsumption:    USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.SSHOW_Interface =
-		{
-			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			InterfaceNumber:        0,
-			AlternateSetting:       0,
-			
-			TotalEndpoints:         2,
-				
-			Class:                  0xFF,
-			SubClass:               0x00,
-			Protocol:               0x00,
-				
-			InterfaceStrIndex:      NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.SSHOW_DataInEndpoint =
-		{
-			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			EndpointAddress:        (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM),
-			Attributes:             EP_TYPE_BULK,
-			EndpointSize:           SIDESHOW_IO_EPSIZE,
-			PollingIntervalMS:      0x00
-		},
-
-	.SSHOW_DataOutEndpoint =
-		{
-			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			EndpointAddress:        (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | SIDESHOW_OUT_EPNUM),
-			Attributes:             EP_TYPE_BULK,
-			EndpointSize:           SIDESHOW_IO_EPSIZE,
-			PollingIntervalMS:      0x00
-		}
-};
-
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
-		
-	UnicodeString:          {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
-		
-	UnicodeString:          L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(22), Type: DTYPE_String},
-		
-	UnicodeString:          L"LUFA Sideshow Demo"
-};
-
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM SerialNumberString =
-{
-	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(12), Type: DTYPE_String},
-		
-	UnicodeString:          L"000000000000"
-};
-
-USB_OSDescriptor_t PROGMEM OSDescriptorString =
-{
-	Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_OSDescriptor_t), Type: DTYPE_String},
-	
-	Signature:              L"MSFT100",
-	VendorCode:             REQ_GetOSFeatureDescriptor
-};
-
-USB_OSCompatibleIDDescriptor_t PROGMEM DevCompatIDs =
-{
-	TotalLength:            sizeof(USB_OSCompatibleIDDescriptor_t),
-	Version:                0x0100,
-	Index:                  EXTENDED_COMPAT_ID_DESCRIPTOR,
-	TotalSections:          1,
-	
-	SideshowCompatID:       {FirstInterfaceNumber: 0x00,
-	                         CompatibleID: "SIDESHW",
-	                         SubCompatibleID: "UNIV1"}
-};
-
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration:
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String:
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00:
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01:
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02:
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x03:
-					Address = (void*)&SerialNumberString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&SerialNumberString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0xEE:
-					/* A Microsoft-proprietary extention. String address 0xEE is used by Windows for
-					   "OS Descriptors", which in this case allows us to indicate that our device is
-					   Sideshow compatible regardless of VID/PID values. */
-					Address = (void*)&OSDescriptorString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&OSDescriptorString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;		
-	return Size;
-}
-
-bool USB_GetOSFeatureDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex,
-                                void** const DescriptorAddress, uint16_t* const DescriptorSize)
-{
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = 0;
-
-	/* Check if a device level OS feature descriptor is being requested */
-	if (wValue == 0x0000)
-	{
-		/* Only the Extended Device Compatibility descriptor is supported */
-		if (wIndex == EXTENDED_COMPAT_ID_DESCRIPTOR)
-		{
-			Address = (void*)&DevCompatIDs;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_OSCompatibleIDDescriptor_t);
-		}
-	}
-
-	if (Address != NULL)
-	{
-		*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-		*DescriptorSize    = Size;
-
-		return true;
-	}
-		
-	return false;
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	USBSpecification:       VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+	Class:                  0x00,
+	SubClass:               0x00,
+	Protocol:               0x00,
+				
+	Endpoint0Size:          8,
+		
+	VendorID:               0x03EB,
+	ProductID:              0x2040,
+	ReleaseNumber:          0x0001,
+		
+	ManufacturerStrIndex:   0x01,
+	ProductStrIndex:        0x02,
+	SerialNumStrIndex:      0x03,
+		
+	NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+	
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			TotalInterfaces:        1,
+				
+			ConfigurationNumber:    1,
+			ConfigurationStrIndex:  NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			ConfigAttributes:       (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			MaxPowerConsumption:    USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.SSHOW_Interface =
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			InterfaceNumber:        0,
+			AlternateSetting:       0,
+			
+			TotalEndpoints:         2,
+				
+			Class:                  0xFF,
+			SubClass:               0x00,
+			Protocol:               0x00,
+				
+			InterfaceStrIndex:      NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.SSHOW_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			EndpointAddress:        (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM),
+			Attributes:             EP_TYPE_BULK,
+			EndpointSize:           SIDESHOW_IO_EPSIZE,
+			PollingIntervalMS:      0x00
+		},
+
+	.SSHOW_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			EndpointAddress:        (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | SIDESHOW_OUT_EPNUM),
+			Attributes:             EP_TYPE_BULK,
+			EndpointSize:           SIDESHOW_IO_EPSIZE,
+			PollingIntervalMS:      0x00
+		}
+};
+
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+		
+	UnicodeString:          {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+		
+	UnicodeString:          L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(22), Type: DTYPE_String},
+		
+	UnicodeString:          L"LUFA Sideshow Demo"
+};
+
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM SerialNumberString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(12), Type: DTYPE_String},
+		
+	UnicodeString:          L"000000000000"
+};
+
+USB_OSDescriptor_t PROGMEM OSDescriptorString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_OSDescriptor_t), Type: DTYPE_String},
+	
+	Signature:              L"MSFT100",
+	VendorCode:             REQ_GetOSFeatureDescriptor
+};
+
+USB_OSCompatibleIDDescriptor_t PROGMEM DevCompatIDs =
+{
+	TotalLength:            sizeof(USB_OSCompatibleIDDescriptor_t),
+	Version:                0x0100,
+	Index:                  EXTENDED_COMPAT_ID_DESCRIPTOR,
+	TotalSections:          1,
+	
+	SideshowCompatID:       {FirstInterfaceNumber: 0x00,
+	                         CompatibleID: "SIDESHW",
+	                         SubCompatibleID: "UNIV1"}
+};
+
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x03:
+					Address = (void*)&SerialNumberString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&SerialNumberString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0xEE:
+					/* A Microsoft-proprietary extention. String address 0xEE is used by Windows for
+					   "OS Descriptors", which in this case allows us to indicate that our device is
+					   Sideshow compatible regardless of VID/PID values. */
+					Address = (void*)&OSDescriptorString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&OSDescriptorString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;		
+	return Size;
+}
+
+bool USB_GetOSFeatureDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                void** const DescriptorAddress, uint16_t* const DescriptorSize)
+{
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = 0;
+
+	/* Check if a device level OS feature descriptor is being requested */
+	if (wValue == 0x0000)
+	{
+		/* Only the Extended Device Compatibility descriptor is supported */
+		if (wIndex == EXTENDED_COMPAT_ID_DESCRIPTOR)
+		{
+			Address = (void*)&DevCompatIDs;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_OSCompatibleIDDescriptor_t);
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (Address != NULL)
+	{
+		*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+		*DescriptorSize    = Size;
+
+		return true;
+	}
+		
+	return false;
 }
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Descriptors.h
index 564b44cfe..83c683be5 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,95 +1,95 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		
-		#include "Sideshow.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM          3	
-		#define SIDESHOW_OUT_EPNUM         4	
-		#define SIDESHOW_IO_EPSIZE         64
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            SSHOW_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             SSHOW_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             SSHOW_DataOutEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t                Header;
-			
-			int                                    Signature[7];
-			uint16_t                               VendorCode;
-		} USB_OSDescriptor_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t                                FirstInterfaceNumber;
-
-			uint8_t                                RESERVED;
-			
-			uint8_t                                CompatibleID[8];
-			uint8_t                                SubCompatibleID[8];			
-
-			uint8_t                                RESERVED2[6];
-		} USB_OSCompatibleSection_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t                               TotalLength;
-			uint16_t                               Version;
-			uint16_t                               Index;
-			uint8_t                                TotalSections;
-			
-			uint8_t                                RESERVED[7];
-			
-			USB_OSCompatibleSection_t              SideshowCompatID;
-		} USB_OSCompatibleIDDescriptor_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-								            ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-		bool USB_GetOSFeatureDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex,
-		                                void** const DescriptorAddress, uint16_t* const DescriptorSize)
-		                                ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		
+		#include "Sideshow.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM          3	
+		#define SIDESHOW_OUT_EPNUM         4	
+		#define SIDESHOW_IO_EPSIZE         64
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            SSHOW_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             SSHOW_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             SSHOW_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t                Header;
+			
+			int                                    Signature[7];
+			uint16_t                               VendorCode;
+		} USB_OSDescriptor_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t                                FirstInterfaceNumber;
+
+			uint8_t                                RESERVED;
+			
+			uint8_t                                CompatibleID[8];
+			uint8_t                                SubCompatibleID[8];			
+
+			uint8_t                                RESERVED2[6];
+		} USB_OSCompatibleSection_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t                               TotalLength;
+			uint16_t                               Version;
+			uint16_t                               Index;
+			uint8_t                                TotalSections;
+			
+			uint8_t                                RESERVED[7];
+			
+			USB_OSCompatibleSection_t              SideshowCompatID;
+		} USB_OSCompatibleIDDescriptor_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+								            ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+		bool USB_GetOSFeatureDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                void** const DescriptorAddress, uint16_t* const DescriptorSize)
+		                                ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowApplications.c b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowApplications.c
index e7b0ad8bd..a6c529e69 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowApplications.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowApplications.c
@@ -1,59 +1,59 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "SideshowApplications.h"
-
-SideShow_Application_t InstalledApplications[MAX_APPLICATIONS];
-
-
-SideShow_Application_t* SideShow_GetFreeApplication(void)
-{
-	for (uint8_t App = 0; App < ARRAY_ELEMENTS(InstalledApplications); App++)
-	{
-		if (!(InstalledApplications[App].InUse))
-		  return &InstalledApplications[App];
-	}
-	
-	return NULL;
-}
-
-SideShow_Application_t* SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(GUID_t* GUID)
-{
-	for (uint8_t App = 0; App < ARRAY_ELEMENTS(InstalledApplications); App++)
-	{
-		if (InstalledApplications[App].InUse)
-		{
-			if (GUID_COMPARE(&InstalledApplications[App].ApplicationID, GUID))
-			  return &InstalledApplications[App];
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return NULL;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "SideshowApplications.h"
+
+SideShow_Application_t InstalledApplications[MAX_APPLICATIONS];
+
+
+SideShow_Application_t* SideShow_GetFreeApplication(void)
+{
+	for (uint8_t App = 0; App < ARRAY_ELEMENTS(InstalledApplications); App++)
+	{
+		if (!(InstalledApplications[App].InUse))
+		  return &InstalledApplications[App];
+	}
+	
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+SideShow_Application_t* SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(GUID_t* GUID)
+{
+	for (uint8_t App = 0; App < ARRAY_ELEMENTS(InstalledApplications); App++)
+	{
+		if (InstalledApplications[App].InUse)
+		{
+			if (GUID_COMPARE(&InstalledApplications[App].ApplicationID, GUID))
+			  return &InstalledApplications[App];
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return NULL;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowApplications.h b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowApplications.h
index de8983ed2..ed885d40d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowApplications.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowApplications.h
@@ -1,62 +1,62 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _SIDESHOW_APPLICATIONS_H_
-#define _SIDESHOW_APPLICATIONS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>	
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "SideshowCommon.h"
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			bool                   InUse;
-			GUID_t                 ApplicationID;
-			GUID_t                 EndpointID;
-			UNICODE_STRING_t(50)   ApplicationName;
-			uint32_t               CachePolicy;
-			uint32_t               OnlineOnly;
-			bool                   HaveContent;
-			uint32_t               CurrentContentID;
-			uint8_t                CurrentContent[MAX_CONTENTBUFFER_PER_APP];
-		} SideShow_Application_t;
-	
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern SideShow_Application_t InstalledApplications[MAX_APPLICATIONS];
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		SideShow_Application_t* SideShow_GetFreeApplication(void);
-		SideShow_Application_t* SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(GUID_t* GUID);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _SIDESHOW_APPLICATIONS_H_
+#define _SIDESHOW_APPLICATIONS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>	
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "SideshowCommon.h"
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			bool                   InUse;
+			GUID_t                 ApplicationID;
+			GUID_t                 EndpointID;
+			UNICODE_STRING_t(50)   ApplicationName;
+			uint32_t               CachePolicy;
+			uint32_t               OnlineOnly;
+			bool                   HaveContent;
+			uint32_t               CurrentContentID;
+			uint8_t                CurrentContent[MAX_CONTENTBUFFER_PER_APP];
+		} SideShow_Application_t;
+	
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern SideShow_Application_t InstalledApplications[MAX_APPLICATIONS];
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		SideShow_Application_t* SideShow_GetFreeApplication(void);
+		SideShow_Application_t* SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(GUID_t* GUID);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommands.c b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommands.c
index c0f7096b2..5bce088c8 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommands.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommands.c
@@ -1,493 +1,493 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SIDESHOWCOMMANDS_H
-#include "SideshowCommands.h"
-
-UNICODE_STRING_t(80) UserSID       = {LengthInBytes: sizeof(SECURITY_INTERACTIVE_RID_SID),
-                                      UnicodeString: SECURITY_INTERACTIVE_RID_SID};
-
-Unicode_String_t DeviceName        = {LengthInBytes: sizeof(L"LUFA Sideshow Device"),
-                                      UnicodeString: L"LUFA Sideshow Device"};
-
-Unicode_String_t Manufacturer      = {LengthInBytes: sizeof(L"Dean Camera"),
-                                      UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"};
-
-Unicode_String_t SupportedLanguage = {LengthInBytes: sizeof(L"en-US:1"),
-                                      UnicodeString: L"en-US:1"};
-									  
-void Sideshow_ProcessCommandPacket(void)
-{
-	SideShow_PacketHeader_t PacketHeader;
-	
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_OUT_EPNUM);	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	
-	PacketHeader.Type.Response = true;
-
-	printf("\r\nCmd: %lX", (PacketHeader.Type.TypeLong & 0x00FFFFFF));
-
-	switch (PacketHeader.Type.TypeLong & 0x00FFFFFF)
-	{
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_PING:
-			SideShow_Ping(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_SYNC:
-			SideShow_Sync(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_CURRENT_USER:
-			SideShow_GetCurrentUser(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_SET_CURRENT_USER:
-			SideShow_SetCurrentUser(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_CAPABILITIES:
-			SideShow_GetCapabilities(&PacketHeader);
-			break;			
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_DEVICE_NAME:
-			SideShow_GetString(&PacketHeader, &DeviceName);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_MANUFACTURER:
-			SideShow_GetString(&PacketHeader, &Manufacturer);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_APPLICATION_ORDER:
-			SideShow_GetApplicationOrder(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_SUPPORTED_ENDPOINTS:
-			SideShow_GetSupportedEndpoints(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_ADD_APPLICATION:
-			SideShow_AddApplication(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_ADD_CONTENT:
-			SideShow_AddContent(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_CONTENT:
-			SideShow_DeleteContent(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT:
-			SideShow_DeleteAllContent(&PacketHeader);
-			break;		
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_APPLICATION:
-			SideShow_DeleteApplication(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		case SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_ALL_APPLICATIONS:
-			SideShow_DeleteAllApplications(&PacketHeader);
-			break;
-		default:
-			PacketHeader.Length -= sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
-
-			Endpoint_Discard_Stream(PacketHeader.Length);
-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-			PacketHeader.Length   = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
-			PacketHeader.Type.NAK = true;
-			
-			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);	
-			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));		
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			
-			printf(" UNK");
-	}
-}
-
-static void SideShow_Ping(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);	
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));		
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_Sync(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	GUID_t ProtocolGUID;
-
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ProtocolGUID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	
-	if (!(GUID_COMPARE(&ProtocolGUID, (uint32_t[])STANDARD_PROTOCOL_GUID)))
-	  PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
-	
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));		
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&ProtocolGUID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_GetCurrentUser(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t) + sizeof(uint32_t) + UserSID.LengthInBytes;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	SideShow_Write_Unicode_String(&UserSID);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_SetCurrentUser(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	SideShow_Read_Unicode_String(&UserSID, sizeof(UserSID.UnicodeString));
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_GetCapabilities(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	SideShow_PropertyKey_t  Property;
-	SideShow_PropertyData_t PropertyData;
-
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Property, sizeof(SideShow_PropertyKey_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	
-	printf(" ID: %lu", Property.PropertyID);
-
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
-
-	if (GUID_COMPARE(&Property.PropertyGUID, (uint32_t[])SIDESHOW_PROPERTY_GUID))
-	{
-		switch (Property.PropertyID)
-		{
-			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENTYPE:
-				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_I4;
-				PropertyData.Data.Data32 = ScreenText;
-				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint32_t);
-				
-				break;
-			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENWIDTH:
-			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CLIENTWIDTH:
-				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_UI2;
-				PropertyData.Data.Data16 = 16;
-				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint16_t);
-			
-				break;
-			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENHEIGHT:
-			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CLIENTHEIGHT:
-				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_UI2;
-				PropertyData.Data.Data16 = 2;
-				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint16_t);
-			
-				break;
-			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_COLORDEPTH:
-				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_UI2;
-				PropertyData.Data.Data16 = 1;
-				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint16_t);
-			
-				break;
-			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_COLORTYPE:
-				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_UI2;
-				PropertyData.Data.Data16 = BlackAndWhiteDisplay;
-				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint16_t);
-			
-				break;
-			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_DATACACHE:
-				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_BOOL;
-				PropertyData.Data.Data16 = false;
-				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint16_t);
-			
-				break;
-			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SUPPORTEDLANGS:
-			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CURRENTLANG:
-				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_LPWSTR;
-				PropertyData.Data.DataPointer = &SupportedLanguage;
-				PacketHeader->Length += SupportedLanguage.LengthInBytes;
-			
-				break;
-			default:
-				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_EMPTY;
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-	else if (GUID_COMPARE(&Property.PropertyGUID, (uint32_t[])DEVICE_PROPERTY_GUID))
-	{
-		switch (Property.PropertyID)
-		{
-			case PROPERTY_DEVICE_DEVICETYPE:
-				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_UI4;
-				PropertyData.Data.Data32 = GenericDevice;
-				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint32_t);
-				
-				break;
-		}
-	}	
-	else
-	{
-		PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;		
-		
-		printf(" WRONG GUID");
-		printf(" %lX %lX %lX %lX", Property.PropertyGUID.Chunks[0], Property.PropertyGUID.Chunks[1],
-		                           Property.PropertyGUID.Chunks[2],  Property.PropertyGUID.Chunks[3]);		
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	
-	if (!(PacketHeader->Type.NAK))
-	{
-		switch (PropertyData.DataType)
-		{
-			case VT_UI4:
-			case VT_I4:
-				Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PropertyData.Data.Data32, sizeof(uint32_t));
-				break;
-			case VT_UI2:
-			case VT_I2:
-			case VT_BOOL:
-				Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PropertyData.Data.Data16, sizeof(uint16_t));
-				break;
-			case VT_LPWSTR:
-				SideShow_Write_Unicode_String((Unicode_String_t*)PropertyData.Data.Data16);
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	return;
-}
-
-static void SideShow_GetString(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader, void* const UnicodeStruct)
-{
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t) +
-	                       sizeof(uint32_t) + ((Unicode_String_t*)UnicodeStruct)->LengthInBytes;
-	
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	SideShow_Write_Unicode_String(UnicodeStruct);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_GetApplicationOrder(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	uint8_t  TotalApplications = 0;
-		   
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	for (uint8_t App = 0; App < MAX_APPLICATIONS; App++)
-	{
-		if (InstalledApplications[App].InUse)
-		  TotalApplications++;
-	}
-
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t) +
-	                       sizeof(uint32_t) + (TotalApplications * sizeof(GUID_t));
-	
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(TotalApplications);
-	
-	for (uint8_t App = 0; App < MAX_APPLICATIONS; App++)
-	{
-		if (InstalledApplications[App].InUse)
-		  Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InstalledApplications[App].ApplicationID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_GetSupportedEndpoints(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	GUID_t SupportedEndpointGUID = (GUID_t){Chunks: SIMPLE_CONTENT_FORMAT_GUID};
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t) + sizeof(uint32_t) + sizeof(GUID_t);
-	
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(1);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SupportedEndpointGUID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_AddApplication(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	SideShow_Application_t* CurrApp;
-	GUID_t                  ApplicationID;
-
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ApplicationID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-
-	CurrApp = SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(&ApplicationID);
-
-	if (CurrApp == NULL)
-	  CurrApp = SideShow_GetFreeApplication();
-
-	if (CurrApp == NULL)
-	{
-		PacketHeader->Length -= sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t) + sizeof(GUID_t);
-
-		Endpoint_Discard_Stream(PacketHeader->Length);
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-		PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		CurrApp->ApplicationID = ApplicationID;
-		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CurrApp->EndpointID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-		SideShow_Read_Unicode_String(&CurrApp->ApplicationName, sizeof(CurrApp->ApplicationName.UnicodeString));
-		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CurrApp->CachePolicy, sizeof(uint32_t));
-		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CurrApp->OnlineOnly, sizeof(uint32_t));
-		SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream();
-		SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream();
-		SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream();
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-		
-		CurrApp->InUse = true;
-		CurrApp->HaveContent = false;
-		CurrApp->CurrentContentID = 1;
-	}
-
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_DeleteApplication(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	GUID_t ApplicationGUID;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ApplicationGUID, sizeof(GUID_t));	
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	SideShow_Application_t* AppToDelete = SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(&ApplicationGUID);
-
-	if (AppToDelete != NULL)
-	  AppToDelete->InUse = false;
-	else
-	  PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
-
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_DeleteAllApplications(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	
-	for (uint8_t App = 0; App < MAX_APPLICATIONS; App++)
-	  InstalledApplications[App].InUse = false;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_AddContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	GUID_t ApplicationID;
-	GUID_t EndpointID;
-	SideShow_Application_t* Application;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ApplicationID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&EndpointID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-	
-	Application = SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(&ApplicationID);
-	
-	if (Application == NULL)
-	{
-		SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream();
-		PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
-	}
-	else if (!(SideShow_AddSimpleContent(PacketHeader, Application)))
-	{
-		PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_DeleteContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	GUID_t   ApplicationID;
-	GUID_t   EndpointID;
-	uint32_t ContentID;
-
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ApplicationID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&EndpointID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ContentID, sizeof(uint32_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	
-	SideShow_Application_t* Application = SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(&ApplicationID);
-	
-	if ((Application != NULL) && (Application->CurrentContentID == ContentID))
-	  Application->HaveContent = false;
-	else
-	  PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
-	  
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static void SideShow_DeleteAllContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
-{
-	GUID_t ApplicationID;
-	GUID_t EndpointID;
-
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ApplicationID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&EndpointID, sizeof(GUID_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	SideShow_Application_t* Application = SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(&ApplicationID);
-	
-	if (Application != NULL)
-	  Application->HaveContent = false;
-	else
-	  PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;	  
-
-	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();  
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SIDESHOWCOMMANDS_H
+#include "SideshowCommands.h"
+
+UNICODE_STRING_t(80) UserSID       = {LengthInBytes: sizeof(SECURITY_INTERACTIVE_RID_SID),
+                                      UnicodeString: SECURITY_INTERACTIVE_RID_SID};
+
+Unicode_String_t DeviceName        = {LengthInBytes: sizeof(L"LUFA Sideshow Device"),
+                                      UnicodeString: L"LUFA Sideshow Device"};
+
+Unicode_String_t Manufacturer      = {LengthInBytes: sizeof(L"Dean Camera"),
+                                      UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"};
+
+Unicode_String_t SupportedLanguage = {LengthInBytes: sizeof(L"en-US:1"),
+                                      UnicodeString: L"en-US:1"};
+									  
+void Sideshow_ProcessCommandPacket(void)
+{
+	SideShow_PacketHeader_t PacketHeader;
+	
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_OUT_EPNUM);	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	
+	PacketHeader.Type.Response = true;
+
+	printf("\r\nCmd: %lX", (PacketHeader.Type.TypeLong & 0x00FFFFFF));
+
+	switch (PacketHeader.Type.TypeLong & 0x00FFFFFF)
+	{
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_PING:
+			SideShow_Ping(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_SYNC:
+			SideShow_Sync(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_CURRENT_USER:
+			SideShow_GetCurrentUser(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_SET_CURRENT_USER:
+			SideShow_SetCurrentUser(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_CAPABILITIES:
+			SideShow_GetCapabilities(&PacketHeader);
+			break;			
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_DEVICE_NAME:
+			SideShow_GetString(&PacketHeader, &DeviceName);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_MANUFACTURER:
+			SideShow_GetString(&PacketHeader, &Manufacturer);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_APPLICATION_ORDER:
+			SideShow_GetApplicationOrder(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_SUPPORTED_ENDPOINTS:
+			SideShow_GetSupportedEndpoints(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_ADD_APPLICATION:
+			SideShow_AddApplication(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_ADD_CONTENT:
+			SideShow_AddContent(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_CONTENT:
+			SideShow_DeleteContent(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT:
+			SideShow_DeleteAllContent(&PacketHeader);
+			break;		
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_APPLICATION:
+			SideShow_DeleteApplication(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		case SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_ALL_APPLICATIONS:
+			SideShow_DeleteAllApplications(&PacketHeader);
+			break;
+		default:
+			PacketHeader.Length -= sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
+
+			Endpoint_Discard_Stream(PacketHeader.Length);
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			PacketHeader.Length   = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
+			PacketHeader.Type.NAK = true;
+			
+			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);	
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));		
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			
+			printf(" UNK");
+	}
+}
+
+static void SideShow_Ping(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);	
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));		
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_Sync(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	GUID_t ProtocolGUID;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ProtocolGUID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	
+	if (!(GUID_COMPARE(&ProtocolGUID, (uint32_t[])STANDARD_PROTOCOL_GUID)))
+	  PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
+	
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));		
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&ProtocolGUID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_GetCurrentUser(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t) + sizeof(uint32_t) + UserSID.LengthInBytes;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	SideShow_Write_Unicode_String(&UserSID);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_SetCurrentUser(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	SideShow_Read_Unicode_String(&UserSID, sizeof(UserSID.UnicodeString));
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_GetCapabilities(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	SideShow_PropertyKey_t  Property;
+	SideShow_PropertyData_t PropertyData;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Property, sizeof(SideShow_PropertyKey_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	
+	printf(" ID: %lu", Property.PropertyID);
+
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
+
+	if (GUID_COMPARE(&Property.PropertyGUID, (uint32_t[])SIDESHOW_PROPERTY_GUID))
+	{
+		switch (Property.PropertyID)
+		{
+			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENTYPE:
+				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_I4;
+				PropertyData.Data.Data32 = ScreenText;
+				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint32_t);
+				
+				break;
+			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENWIDTH:
+			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CLIENTWIDTH:
+				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_UI2;
+				PropertyData.Data.Data16 = 16;
+				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint16_t);
+			
+				break;
+			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENHEIGHT:
+			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CLIENTHEIGHT:
+				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_UI2;
+				PropertyData.Data.Data16 = 2;
+				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint16_t);
+			
+				break;
+			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_COLORDEPTH:
+				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_UI2;
+				PropertyData.Data.Data16 = 1;
+				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint16_t);
+			
+				break;
+			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_COLORTYPE:
+				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_UI2;
+				PropertyData.Data.Data16 = BlackAndWhiteDisplay;
+				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint16_t);
+			
+				break;
+			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_DATACACHE:
+				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_BOOL;
+				PropertyData.Data.Data16 = false;
+				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint16_t);
+			
+				break;
+			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SUPPORTEDLANGS:
+			case PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CURRENTLANG:
+				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_LPWSTR;
+				PropertyData.Data.DataPointer = &SupportedLanguage;
+				PacketHeader->Length += SupportedLanguage.LengthInBytes;
+			
+				break;
+			default:
+				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_EMPTY;
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (GUID_COMPARE(&Property.PropertyGUID, (uint32_t[])DEVICE_PROPERTY_GUID))
+	{
+		switch (Property.PropertyID)
+		{
+			case PROPERTY_DEVICE_DEVICETYPE:
+				PropertyData.DataType    = VT_UI4;
+				PropertyData.Data.Data32 = GenericDevice;
+				PacketHeader->Length += sizeof(uint32_t);
+				
+				break;
+		}
+	}	
+	else
+	{
+		PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;		
+		
+		printf(" WRONG GUID");
+		printf(" %lX %lX %lX %lX", Property.PropertyGUID.Chunks[0], Property.PropertyGUID.Chunks[1],
+		                           Property.PropertyGUID.Chunks[2],  Property.PropertyGUID.Chunks[3]);		
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	
+	if (!(PacketHeader->Type.NAK))
+	{
+		switch (PropertyData.DataType)
+		{
+			case VT_UI4:
+			case VT_I4:
+				Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PropertyData.Data.Data32, sizeof(uint32_t));
+				break;
+			case VT_UI2:
+			case VT_I2:
+			case VT_BOOL:
+				Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PropertyData.Data.Data16, sizeof(uint16_t));
+				break;
+			case VT_LPWSTR:
+				SideShow_Write_Unicode_String((Unicode_String_t*)PropertyData.Data.Data16);
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	return;
+}
+
+static void SideShow_GetString(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader, void* const UnicodeStruct)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t) +
+	                       sizeof(uint32_t) + ((Unicode_String_t*)UnicodeStruct)->LengthInBytes;
+	
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	SideShow_Write_Unicode_String(UnicodeStruct);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_GetApplicationOrder(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	uint8_t  TotalApplications = 0;
+		   
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	for (uint8_t App = 0; App < MAX_APPLICATIONS; App++)
+	{
+		if (InstalledApplications[App].InUse)
+		  TotalApplications++;
+	}
+
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t) +
+	                       sizeof(uint32_t) + (TotalApplications * sizeof(GUID_t));
+	
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(TotalApplications);
+	
+	for (uint8_t App = 0; App < MAX_APPLICATIONS; App++)
+	{
+		if (InstalledApplications[App].InUse)
+		  Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InstalledApplications[App].ApplicationID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_GetSupportedEndpoints(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	GUID_t SupportedEndpointGUID = (GUID_t){Chunks: SIMPLE_CONTENT_FORMAT_GUID};
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t) + sizeof(uint32_t) + sizeof(GUID_t);
+	
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(1);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SupportedEndpointGUID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_AddApplication(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	SideShow_Application_t* CurrApp;
+	GUID_t                  ApplicationID;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ApplicationID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+
+	CurrApp = SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(&ApplicationID);
+
+	if (CurrApp == NULL)
+	  CurrApp = SideShow_GetFreeApplication();
+
+	if (CurrApp == NULL)
+	{
+		PacketHeader->Length -= sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t) + sizeof(GUID_t);
+
+		Endpoint_Discard_Stream(PacketHeader->Length);
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+		PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		CurrApp->ApplicationID = ApplicationID;
+		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CurrApp->EndpointID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+		SideShow_Read_Unicode_String(&CurrApp->ApplicationName, sizeof(CurrApp->ApplicationName.UnicodeString));
+		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CurrApp->CachePolicy, sizeof(uint32_t));
+		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CurrApp->OnlineOnly, sizeof(uint32_t));
+		SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream();
+		SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream();
+		SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream();
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		
+		CurrApp->InUse = true;
+		CurrApp->HaveContent = false;
+		CurrApp->CurrentContentID = 1;
+	}
+
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_DeleteApplication(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	GUID_t ApplicationGUID;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ApplicationGUID, sizeof(GUID_t));	
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	SideShow_Application_t* AppToDelete = SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(&ApplicationGUID);
+
+	if (AppToDelete != NULL)
+	  AppToDelete->InUse = false;
+	else
+	  PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
+
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_DeleteAllApplications(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	
+	for (uint8_t App = 0; App < MAX_APPLICATIONS; App++)
+	  InstalledApplications[App].InUse = false;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_AddContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	GUID_t ApplicationID;
+	GUID_t EndpointID;
+	SideShow_Application_t* Application;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ApplicationID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&EndpointID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+	
+	Application = SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(&ApplicationID);
+	
+	if (Application == NULL)
+	{
+		SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream();
+		PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
+	}
+	else if (!(SideShow_AddSimpleContent(PacketHeader, Application)))
+	{
+		PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_DeleteContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	GUID_t   ApplicationID;
+	GUID_t   EndpointID;
+	uint32_t ContentID;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ApplicationID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&EndpointID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ContentID, sizeof(uint32_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	
+	SideShow_Application_t* Application = SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(&ApplicationID);
+	
+	if ((Application != NULL) && (Application->CurrentContentID == ContentID))
+	  Application->HaveContent = false;
+	else
+	  PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;
+	  
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static void SideShow_DeleteAllContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader)
+{
+	GUID_t ApplicationID;
+	GUID_t EndpointID;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ApplicationID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&EndpointID, sizeof(GUID_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	SideShow_Application_t* Application = SideShow_GetApplicationFromGUID(&ApplicationID);
+	
+	if (Application != NULL)
+	  Application->HaveContent = false;
+	else
+	  PacketHeader->Type.NAK = true;	  
+
+	PacketHeader->Length = sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t);
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PacketHeader, sizeof(SideShow_PacketHeader_t));
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();  
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommands.h b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommands.h
index 0d8727d29..6d4ad4c26 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommands.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommands.h
@@ -1,165 +1,165 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _SIDESHOW_COMMANDS_H_
-#define _SIDESHOW_COMMANDS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-	
-		#include "Sideshow.h"
-		#include "SideshowCommon.h"
-		#include "SideshowApplications.h"
-		#include "SideshowContent.h"
-
-	/* Enumerations: */
-		enum SideShow_PropertyKey_Types_t
-		{
-			VT_EMPTY             = 0,
-			VT_NULL              = 1,
-			VT_I2                = 2,
-			VT_I4                = 3,
-			VT_R4                = 4,
-			VT_R8                = 5,
-			VT_CY                = 6,
-			VT_DATE              = 7,
-			VT_BSTR              = 8,
-			VT_DISPATCH          = 9,
-			VT_ERROR             = 10,
-			VT_BOOL              = 11,
-			VT_VARIANT           = 12,
-			VT_UNKNOWN           = 13,
-			VT_UI1               = 17,
-			VT_UI2               = 18,
-			VT_UI4               = 19,
-			VT_LPWSTR            = 31,
-		};
-		
-		enum SideShow_ScreenTypeText_t
-		{
-			ScreenBitmap         = 0,
-			ScreenText           = 1,
-		};
-		
-		enum SideShow_ColorTypes_t
-		{
-			ColorDisplay         = 0,
-			GrayscaleDisplay     = 1,
-			BlackAndWhiteDisplay = 2, 		
-		};
-
-		enum SideShow_DeviceTypes_t
-		{ 
-			GenericDevice = 0, 
-			CameraDevice = 1, 
-			MediaPlayerDevice = 2, 
-			PhoneDevice = 3,
-			VideoDevice = 4,
-			PIMDevice = 5,
-			AudioRecorderDevice = 6
-		};
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			GUID_t   PropertyGUID;
-			uint32_t PropertyID;
-		} SideShow_PropertyKey_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t DataType;
-			
-			union
-			{
-				void*    DataPointer;
-				uint8_t  Data8;
-				uint16_t Data16;
-				uint32_t Data32;
-			} Data;
-		} SideShow_PropertyData_t;
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_PING                     0x001
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_SET_CURRENT_USER         0x100
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_CURRENT_USER         0x101
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_CAPABILITIES         0x103		
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_APPLICATION_ORDER    0x104
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_ADD_APPLICATION          0x10D
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_APPLICATION       0x10E
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_ALL_APPLICATIONS  0x10F
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_ADD_CONTENT              0x114
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_CONTENT           0x115
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT       0x116
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_SUPPORTED_ENDPOINTS  0x117
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_DEVICE_NAME          0x500
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_MANUFACTURER         0x501
-		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_SYNC                     0x502
-
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_DEVICEID            1
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENTYPE          2
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENWIDTH         3
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENHEIGHT        4
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_COLORDEPTH          5
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_COLORTYPE           6
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_DATACACHE           7
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SUPPORTEDLANGS      8
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CURRENTLANG         9
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SUPPORTEDTHEMES     10
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_IMAGEFORMAT         14
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CLIENTWIDTH         15
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CLIENTHEIGHT        16
-		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_DEVICEICON          17
-		
-		#define PROPERTY_DEVICE_DEVICETYPE            15
-				
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void Sideshow_ProcessCommandPacket(void);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SIDESHOWCOMMANDS_H)
-			static void SideShow_Ping(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_Sync(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_GetCurrentUser(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_SetCurrentUser(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_GetCapabilities(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_GetString(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader, void* const UnicodeStruct);
-			static void SideShow_GetApplicationOrder(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_GetSupportedEndpoints(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_AddApplication(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_DeleteApplication(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_DeleteAllApplications(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_AddContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_DeleteContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-			static void SideShow_DeleteAllContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _SIDESHOW_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _SIDESHOW_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+	
+		#include "Sideshow.h"
+		#include "SideshowCommon.h"
+		#include "SideshowApplications.h"
+		#include "SideshowContent.h"
+
+	/* Enumerations: */
+		enum SideShow_PropertyKey_Types_t
+		{
+			VT_EMPTY             = 0,
+			VT_NULL              = 1,
+			VT_I2                = 2,
+			VT_I4                = 3,
+			VT_R4                = 4,
+			VT_R8                = 5,
+			VT_CY                = 6,
+			VT_DATE              = 7,
+			VT_BSTR              = 8,
+			VT_DISPATCH          = 9,
+			VT_ERROR             = 10,
+			VT_BOOL              = 11,
+			VT_VARIANT           = 12,
+			VT_UNKNOWN           = 13,
+			VT_UI1               = 17,
+			VT_UI2               = 18,
+			VT_UI4               = 19,
+			VT_LPWSTR            = 31,
+		};
+		
+		enum SideShow_ScreenTypeText_t
+		{
+			ScreenBitmap         = 0,
+			ScreenText           = 1,
+		};
+		
+		enum SideShow_ColorTypes_t
+		{
+			ColorDisplay         = 0,
+			GrayscaleDisplay     = 1,
+			BlackAndWhiteDisplay = 2, 		
+		};
+
+		enum SideShow_DeviceTypes_t
+		{ 
+			GenericDevice = 0, 
+			CameraDevice = 1, 
+			MediaPlayerDevice = 2, 
+			PhoneDevice = 3,
+			VideoDevice = 4,
+			PIMDevice = 5,
+			AudioRecorderDevice = 6
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			GUID_t   PropertyGUID;
+			uint32_t PropertyID;
+		} SideShow_PropertyKey_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t DataType;
+			
+			union
+			{
+				void*    DataPointer;
+				uint8_t  Data8;
+				uint16_t Data16;
+				uint32_t Data32;
+			} Data;
+		} SideShow_PropertyData_t;
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_PING                     0x001
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_SET_CURRENT_USER         0x100
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_CURRENT_USER         0x101
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_CAPABILITIES         0x103		
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_APPLICATION_ORDER    0x104
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_ADD_APPLICATION          0x10D
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_APPLICATION       0x10E
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_ALL_APPLICATIONS  0x10F
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_ADD_CONTENT              0x114
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_CONTENT           0x115
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT       0x116
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_SUPPORTED_ENDPOINTS  0x117
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_DEVICE_NAME          0x500
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_GET_MANUFACTURER         0x501
+		#define SIDESHOW_CMD_SYNC                     0x502
+
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_DEVICEID            1
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENTYPE          2
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENWIDTH         3
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SCREENHEIGHT        4
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_COLORDEPTH          5
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_COLORTYPE           6
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_DATACACHE           7
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SUPPORTEDLANGS      8
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CURRENTLANG         9
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_SUPPORTEDTHEMES     10
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_IMAGEFORMAT         14
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CLIENTWIDTH         15
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_CLIENTHEIGHT        16
+		#define PROPERTY_SIDESHOW_DEVICEICON          17
+		
+		#define PROPERTY_DEVICE_DEVICETYPE            15
+				
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Sideshow_ProcessCommandPacket(void);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SIDESHOWCOMMANDS_H)
+			static void SideShow_Ping(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_Sync(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_GetCurrentUser(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_SetCurrentUser(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_GetCapabilities(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_GetString(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader, void* const UnicodeStruct);
+			static void SideShow_GetApplicationOrder(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_GetSupportedEndpoints(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_AddApplication(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_DeleteApplication(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_DeleteAllApplications(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_AddContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_DeleteContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+			static void SideShow_DeleteAllContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommon.c b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommon.c
index 68a819509..29f768ecc 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommon.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommon.c
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "SideshowCommon.h"
-
-uint16_t SideShow_Read_Unicode_String(void* const UnicodeString, const uint16_t MaxBytes)
-{
-	Unicode_String_t* const UnicodeStruct = (Unicode_String_t*)UnicodeString;
-	uint32_t                UnicodeCharsToRead;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&UnicodeCharsToRead, sizeof(uint32_t));
-	
-	int UnicodeData[UnicodeCharsToRead];
-
-	UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes = (UnicodeCharsToRead << 1);
-
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&UnicodeData, UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes);
-	
-	if (UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes > MaxBytes)
-	  UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes = MaxBytes;
-	  
-	memcpy(&UnicodeStruct->UnicodeString, &UnicodeData, UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes);
-	
-	return ((UnicodeCharsToRead << 1) + sizeof(uint32_t));
-}
-
-void SideShow_Write_Unicode_String(void* const UnicodeString)
-{
-	Unicode_String_t* const UnicodeStruct = (Unicode_String_t*)UnicodeString;
-
-	uint32_t StringSizeInCharacters = (UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes >> 1);
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&StringSizeInCharacters, sizeof(uint32_t));
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&UnicodeStruct->UnicodeString, UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes);
-}
-
-void SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream(void)
-{
-	uint32_t StreamSize;
-
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&StreamSize, sizeof(uint32_t));
-	Endpoint_Discard_Stream(StreamSize);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "SideshowCommon.h"
+
+uint16_t SideShow_Read_Unicode_String(void* const UnicodeString, const uint16_t MaxBytes)
+{
+	Unicode_String_t* const UnicodeStruct = (Unicode_String_t*)UnicodeString;
+	uint32_t                UnicodeCharsToRead;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&UnicodeCharsToRead, sizeof(uint32_t));
+	
+	int UnicodeData[UnicodeCharsToRead];
+
+	UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes = (UnicodeCharsToRead << 1);
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&UnicodeData, UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes);
+	
+	if (UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes > MaxBytes)
+	  UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes = MaxBytes;
+	  
+	memcpy(&UnicodeStruct->UnicodeString, &UnicodeData, UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes);
+	
+	return ((UnicodeCharsToRead << 1) + sizeof(uint32_t));
+}
+
+void SideShow_Write_Unicode_String(void* const UnicodeString)
+{
+	Unicode_String_t* const UnicodeStruct = (Unicode_String_t*)UnicodeString;
+
+	uint32_t StringSizeInCharacters = (UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes >> 1);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&StringSizeInCharacters, sizeof(uint32_t));
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&UnicodeStruct->UnicodeString, UnicodeStruct->LengthInBytes);
+}
+
+void SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream(void)
+{
+	uint32_t StreamSize;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&StreamSize, sizeof(uint32_t));
+	Endpoint_Discard_Stream(StreamSize);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommon.h b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommon.h
index 9bda6acaf..7c632b3c4 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommon.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowCommon.h
@@ -1,103 +1,103 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _SIDESHOW_COMMON_H_
-#define _SIDESHOW_COMMON_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>	
-	
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define GUID_COMPARE(a, b)                (memcmp(a, b, sizeof(GUID_t)) == 0)
-	
-		#define ARRAY_ELEMENTS(x)                 (sizeof(x) / sizeof(x[0]))
-		
-		#define UNICODE_STRING_t(x)               struct                          \
-		                                          {                               \
-		                                              uint16_t LengthInBytes;     \
-		                                              int      UnicodeString[x];  \
-		                                          }
-
-		// {A33F248B-882F-4531-82C2-ED3B90C5C520}
-		#define STANDARD_PROTOCOL_GUID            {0xA33F248B, 0x4531882F, 0x3BEDC282, 0x20C5C590}
-		// {A9A5353F-2D4B-47CE-93EE-759F3A7DDA4F}
-		#define SIMPLE_CONTENT_FORMAT_GUID        {0xA9A5353F, 0x47CE2D4B, 0x9F75EE93, 0x4FDA7D3A}
-		// {8ABC88A8-857B-4ad7-A35A-B5942F492B99}
-		#define SIDESHOW_PROPERTY_GUID            {0x8ABC88A8, 0x4AD7857B, 0x94B55AA3, 0x992B492F}
-		// {26D4979A-E643-4626-9E2B-736DC0C92FDC}
-		#define DEVICE_PROPERTY_GUID              {0x26D4979A, 0x4626E643, 0x6D732B9E, 0xDC2FC9C0}
-
-		#define SECURITY_INTERACTIVE_RID_SID      L"S-1-5-4"
-
-		#define MAX_APPLICATIONS                  4
-		#define MAX_CONTENTBUFFER_PER_APP         1024
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t         Chunks[4];
-		} GUID_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t         LengthInBytes;
-			int              UnicodeString[];
-		} Unicode_String_t;	
-
-		typedef union
-		{
-			uint32_t TypeLong;
-
-			struct
-			{
-				uint8_t TypeBytes[3];
-
-				int ErrorCode     : 6;
-				int NAK           : 1;
-				int Response      : 1;				
-			};
-		} SideShowPacketType_t;
-	
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t               Length;
-			SideShowPacketType_t   Type;
-			uint16_t               Number;
-		} SideShow_PacketHeader_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t SideShow_Read_Unicode_String(void* UnicodeString, const uint16_t MaxBytes);
-		void     SideShow_Write_Unicode_String(void* UnicodeString);
-		void     SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream(void);
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _SIDESHOW_COMMON_H_
+#define _SIDESHOW_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>	
+	
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define GUID_COMPARE(a, b)                (memcmp(a, b, sizeof(GUID_t)) == 0)
+	
+		#define ARRAY_ELEMENTS(x)                 (sizeof(x) / sizeof(x[0]))
+		
+		#define UNICODE_STRING_t(x)               struct                          \
+		                                          {                               \
+		                                              uint16_t LengthInBytes;     \
+		                                              int      UnicodeString[x];  \
+		                                          }
+
+		// {A33F248B-882F-4531-82C2-ED3B90C5C520}
+		#define STANDARD_PROTOCOL_GUID            {0xA33F248B, 0x4531882F, 0x3BEDC282, 0x20C5C590}
+		// {A9A5353F-2D4B-47CE-93EE-759F3A7DDA4F}
+		#define SIMPLE_CONTENT_FORMAT_GUID        {0xA9A5353F, 0x47CE2D4B, 0x9F75EE93, 0x4FDA7D3A}
+		// {8ABC88A8-857B-4ad7-A35A-B5942F492B99}
+		#define SIDESHOW_PROPERTY_GUID            {0x8ABC88A8, 0x4AD7857B, 0x94B55AA3, 0x992B492F}
+		// {26D4979A-E643-4626-9E2B-736DC0C92FDC}
+		#define DEVICE_PROPERTY_GUID              {0x26D4979A, 0x4626E643, 0x6D732B9E, 0xDC2FC9C0}
+
+		#define SECURITY_INTERACTIVE_RID_SID      L"S-1-5-4"
+
+		#define MAX_APPLICATIONS                  4
+		#define MAX_CONTENTBUFFER_PER_APP         1024
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t         Chunks[4];
+		} GUID_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t         LengthInBytes;
+			int              UnicodeString[];
+		} Unicode_String_t;	
+
+		typedef union
+		{
+			uint32_t TypeLong;
+
+			struct
+			{
+				uint8_t TypeBytes[3];
+
+				int ErrorCode     : 6;
+				int NAK           : 1;
+				int Response      : 1;				
+			};
+		} SideShowPacketType_t;
+	
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t               Length;
+			SideShowPacketType_t   Type;
+			uint16_t               Number;
+		} SideShow_PacketHeader_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t SideShow_Read_Unicode_String(void* UnicodeString, const uint16_t MaxBytes);
+		void     SideShow_Write_Unicode_String(void* UnicodeString);
+		void     SideShow_Discard_Byte_Stream(void);
+
 #endif
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowContent.c b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowContent.c
index d77dc4a4e..0d1dd80fb 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowContent.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowContent.c
@@ -1,76 +1,76 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SIDESHOWCONTENT_C
-#include "SideshowContent.h"
-
-bool SideShow_AddSimpleContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader, SideShow_Application_t* const Application)
-{
-	uint32_t ContentSize;
-	uint32_t ContentID;
-		
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ContentID, sizeof(uint32_t));
-
-	PacketHeader->Length -= sizeof(uint32_t);
-
-	if (Application->CurrentContentID != ContentID)
-	{
-		Endpoint_Discard_Stream(PacketHeader->Length);
-
-		return false;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ContentSize, sizeof(uint32_t));
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Application->CurrentContent, sizeof(XML_START_TAG) - 1);
-	
-	PacketHeader->Length -= sizeof(uint32_t) + (sizeof(XML_START_TAG) - 1);
-
-	if (!(memcmp(&Application->CurrentContent, XML_START_TAG, (sizeof(XML_START_TAG) - 1))))
-	{
-		SideShow_ProcessXMLContent(&Application->CurrentContent, (ContentSize - (sizeof(XML_END_TAG) - 1)));
-		
-		Endpoint_Discard_Stream(sizeof(XML_END_TAG) - 1);
-
-		Application->HaveContent = true;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		printf(" BINARY");
-		Endpoint_Discard_Stream(ContentSize);
-	}
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-static void SideShow_ProcessXMLContent(void* ContentData, uint32_t ContentSize)
-{
-	printf(" XML");
-	Endpoint_Discard_Stream(ContentSize);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SIDESHOWCONTENT_C
+#include "SideshowContent.h"
+
+bool SideShow_AddSimpleContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader, SideShow_Application_t* const Application)
+{
+	uint32_t ContentSize;
+	uint32_t ContentID;
+		
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ContentID, sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	PacketHeader->Length -= sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+	if (Application->CurrentContentID != ContentID)
+	{
+		Endpoint_Discard_Stream(PacketHeader->Length);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ContentSize, sizeof(uint32_t));
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Application->CurrentContent, sizeof(XML_START_TAG) - 1);
+	
+	PacketHeader->Length -= sizeof(uint32_t) + (sizeof(XML_START_TAG) - 1);
+
+	if (!(memcmp(&Application->CurrentContent, XML_START_TAG, (sizeof(XML_START_TAG) - 1))))
+	{
+		SideShow_ProcessXMLContent(&Application->CurrentContent, (ContentSize - (sizeof(XML_END_TAG) - 1)));
+		
+		Endpoint_Discard_Stream(sizeof(XML_END_TAG) - 1);
+
+		Application->HaveContent = true;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		printf(" BINARY");
+		Endpoint_Discard_Stream(ContentSize);
+	}
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void SideShow_ProcessXMLContent(void* ContentData, uint32_t ContentSize)
+{
+	printf(" XML");
+	Endpoint_Discard_Stream(ContentSize);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowContent.h b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowContent.h
index 47c15fb88..97a6bee81 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowContent.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Lib/SideshowContent.h
@@ -1,125 +1,125 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _SIDESHOW_CONTENT_H_
-#define _SIDESHOW_CONTENT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include "SideshowCommon.h"
-		#include "SideshowApplications.h"
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		enum SideShow_ContentTypes_t
-		{
-			Content_Menu            = 0,
-			Content_Content         = 1,
-			Content_MenuItem        = 2,
-			Content_Button          = 3,
-			Content_Text            = 4,
-			Content_EndOfContent    = 5
-		};
-		
-		enum SideShow_ActionTypes_t
-		{
-			TODO
-		};
-		
-		enum SideShow_AlignmentTypes_t
-		{
-			TODO2
-		};
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t ContentType;
-			uint8_t ContentSize;	
-		} SideShow_Content_Header_t;
-	
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			SideShow_Content_Header_t Header;
-
-			uint32_t ItemID;
-			uint8_t  ActionType;
-			char     Title[];
-		} SideShow_Content_Menu_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			SideShow_Content_Header_t Header;
-
-			uint32_t ItemID;
-			uint32_t Target;
-			bool     IsSelected;
-			char     Text[];
-		} SideShow_Content_MenuItem_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			SideShow_Content_Header_t Header;
-
-			uint8_t  Key;
-			uint32_t Target;
-		} SideShow_Content_Button_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			SideShow_Content_Header_t Header;
-
-			uint32_t ItemID;
-			uint32_t AssociatedMenuID;
-			char     Title[];
-		} SideShow_Content_Content_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			SideShow_Content_Header_t Header;
-
-			char     Text[];		
-		} SideShow_Content_Text_t;
-		
-	/* Defines: */
-		#define XML_START_TAG         "<body>"
-		#define XML_END_TAG           "</body>"
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		bool SideShow_AddSimpleContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader, SideShow_Application_t* const Application);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SIDESHOWCONTENT_C)
-			static void SideShow_ProcessXMLContent(void* ContentData, uint32_t ContentSize);
-		#endif
-		
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _SIDESHOW_CONTENT_H_
+#define _SIDESHOW_CONTENT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "SideshowCommon.h"
+		#include "SideshowApplications.h"
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		enum SideShow_ContentTypes_t
+		{
+			Content_Menu            = 0,
+			Content_Content         = 1,
+			Content_MenuItem        = 2,
+			Content_Button          = 3,
+			Content_Text            = 4,
+			Content_EndOfContent    = 5
+		};
+		
+		enum SideShow_ActionTypes_t
+		{
+			TODO
+		};
+		
+		enum SideShow_AlignmentTypes_t
+		{
+			TODO2
+		};
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t ContentType;
+			uint8_t ContentSize;	
+		} SideShow_Content_Header_t;
+	
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			SideShow_Content_Header_t Header;
+
+			uint32_t ItemID;
+			uint8_t  ActionType;
+			char     Title[];
+		} SideShow_Content_Menu_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			SideShow_Content_Header_t Header;
+
+			uint32_t ItemID;
+			uint32_t Target;
+			bool     IsSelected;
+			char     Text[];
+		} SideShow_Content_MenuItem_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			SideShow_Content_Header_t Header;
+
+			uint8_t  Key;
+			uint32_t Target;
+		} SideShow_Content_Button_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			SideShow_Content_Header_t Header;
+
+			uint32_t ItemID;
+			uint32_t AssociatedMenuID;
+			char     Title[];
+		} SideShow_Content_Content_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			SideShow_Content_Header_t Header;
+
+			char     Text[];		
+		} SideShow_Content_Text_t;
+		
+	/* Defines: */
+		#define XML_START_TAG         "<body>"
+		#define XML_END_TAG           "</body>"
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SideShow_AddSimpleContent(SideShow_PacketHeader_t* const PacketHeader, SideShow_Application_t* const Application);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SIDESHOWCONTENT_C)
+			static void SideShow_ProcessXMLContent(void* ContentData, uint32_t ContentSize);
+		#endif
+		
 #endif
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Sideshow.c b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Sideshow.c
index 5f70b34c6..3e9778e29 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Sideshow.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Sideshow.c
@@ -1,158 +1,158 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/*
-	SideShow Class demonstration application. This give a reference
-	for implementing Microsoft SideShow compatible devices in an
-	embedded environment. SideShow allows for gadget data displayed
-	on a Windows Vista or later machine to also be displayed on an
-	externally connected interactive display. Upon enumeration, this will
-	appear as a new SideShow device which can have gadgets loaded onto
-	it.
-	
-	Note that while the incoming content is buffered in packet struct
-	form, the data is not actually displayed. It is left to the user to
-	write sufficient code to read out the packed data for display to a
-	screen.
-	
-	Installed gadgets can be accessed through the InstalledApplications
-	array, with entries that have their InUse flag set being active. As
-	only the active content is displayed on the device due to memory
-	constraints, new content can be requested as needed.
-*/
-
-#include "Sideshow.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		SideShow_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-}
-
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup Sideshow In and Out Endpoints */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, SIDESHOW_IO_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(SIDESHOW_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, SIDESHOW_IO_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-}
-
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Process UFI specific control requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetOSFeatureDescriptor:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE))
-			{
-				void*    DescriptorPointer;
-				uint16_t DescriptorSize;
-
-				if (!(USB_GetOSFeatureDescriptor(USB_ControlRequest.wValue, USB_ControlRequest.wIndex,
-				                                 &DescriptorPointer, &DescriptorSize)))
-				{
-					return;
-				}
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();				
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
-	
-void SideShow_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Select the SideShow data out endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_OUT_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Check to see if a new SideShow message has been received */
-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{
-		/* Process the received SideShow message */
-		Sideshow_ProcessCommandPacket();
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+	SideShow Class demonstration application. This give a reference
+	for implementing Microsoft SideShow compatible devices in an
+	embedded environment. SideShow allows for gadget data displayed
+	on a Windows Vista or later machine to also be displayed on an
+	externally connected interactive display. Upon enumeration, this will
+	appear as a new SideShow device which can have gadgets loaded onto
+	it.
+	
+	Note that while the incoming content is buffered in packet struct
+	form, the data is not actually displayed. It is left to the user to
+	write sufficient code to read out the packed data for display to a
+	screen.
+	
+	Installed gadgets can be accessed through the InstalledApplications
+	array, with entries that have their InUse flag set being active. As
+	only the active content is displayed on the device due to memory
+	constraints, new content can be requested as needed.
+*/
+
+#include "Sideshow.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		SideShow_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+}
+
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup Sideshow In and Out Endpoints */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(SIDESHOW_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, SIDESHOW_IO_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(SIDESHOW_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, SIDESHOW_IO_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+}
+
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process UFI specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetOSFeatureDescriptor:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE))
+			{
+				void*    DescriptorPointer;
+				uint16_t DescriptorSize;
+
+				if (!(USB_GetOSFeatureDescriptor(USB_ControlRequest.wValue, USB_ControlRequest.wIndex,
+				                                 &DescriptorPointer, &DescriptorSize)))
+				{
+					return;
+				}
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();				
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+	
+void SideShow_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select the SideShow data out endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(SIDESHOW_OUT_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Check to see if a new SideShow message has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		/* Process the received SideShow message */
+		Sideshow_ProcessCommandPacket();
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Sideshow.h b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Sideshow.h
index 871e47706..0f09e6489 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Sideshow.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/Sideshow.h
@@ -1,78 +1,78 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _SIDESHOW_H_
-#define _SIDESHOW_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "Lib/SideshowCommands.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Device control request for used in the Microsoft OS Descriptor for retrieving the OS Feature
-		 *  descriptors of the device
-		 */
-		#define REQ_GetOSFeatureDescriptor        0x01
-		
-		/** Descriptor index for a Microsoft Proprietary Extended Device Compatibility descriptor */
-		#define EXTENDED_COMPAT_ID_DESCRIPTOR     0x0004
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY              LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING          (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY                (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR                (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void SideShow_Task(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _SIDESHOW_H_
+#define _SIDESHOW_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/SideshowCommands.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Device control request for used in the Microsoft OS Descriptor for retrieving the OS Feature
+		 *  descriptors of the device
+		 */
+		#define REQ_GetOSFeatureDescriptor        0x01
+		
+		/** Descriptor index for a Microsoft Proprietary Extended Device Compatibility descriptor */
+		#define EXTENDED_COMPAT_ID_DESCRIPTOR     0x0004
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY              LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING          (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY                (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR                (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void SideShow_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/makefile b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/makefile
index 0c61122b7..f558b08c3 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/Sideshow/makefile
@@ -1,743 +1,743 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = SideShow
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  Lib/SideshowCommon.c                                        \
-	  Lib/SideshowCommands.c                                      \
-	  Lib/SideshowApplications.c                                  \
-	  Lib/SideshowContent.c                                       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = SideShow
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  Lib/SideshowCommon.c                                        \
+	  Lib/SideshowCommands.c                                      \
+	  Lib/SideshowApplications.c                                  \
+	  Lib/SideshowContent.c                                       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.c
index aa8967cd0..6655a27ee 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.c
@@ -1,188 +1,188 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Audio Input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "AudioInput.h"
-
-/** Flag to indicate if the streaming audio alternative interface has been selected by the host. */
-bool StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		USB_Audio_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);
-	ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL);
-	USB_Init();
-	
-	/* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */
-	ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | MIC_IN_ADC_MUX_MASK);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and
- *  configures the sample update and PWM timers.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-
-	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
-	OCR0A   = (F_CPU / 8 / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY) - 1;
-	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
-	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Stop the sample reload timer */
-	TCCR0B = 0;
-
-	/* Indicate streaming audio interface not selected */
-	StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
-
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup audio stream endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Audio class-specific
- *  requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Process General and Audio specific control requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_SetInterface:
-			/* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */
-				StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue) != 0);
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Task to manage the Audio interface, reading in ADC samples from the microphone, and them to the host. */
-void USB_Audio_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Check to see if the streaming interface is selected, if not the host is not receiving audio */
-	if (!(StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected))
-	  return;
-
-	/* Select the audio stream endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Check if the current endpoint can be written to and that the next sample should be stored */
-	if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)))
-	{
-		/* Clear the sample reload timer */
-		TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
-
-		/* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */
-		int16_t AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult());
-		
-		#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL)
-		/* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */
-		AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2);
-		#endif
-
-		/* Write the sample to the buffer */
-		Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(AudioSample);
-
-		/* Check to see if the bank is now full */
-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-		{
-			/* Send the full packet to the host */
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		}
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Audio Input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioInput.h"
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the streaming audio alternative interface has been selected by the host. */
+bool StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		USB_Audio_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);
+	ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL);
+	USB_Init();
+	
+	/* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */
+	ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | MIC_IN_ADC_MUX_MASK);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and
+ *  configures the sample update and PWM timers.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	OCR0A   = (F_CPU / 8 / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY) - 1;
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Stop the sample reload timer */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+
+	/* Indicate streaming audio interface not selected */
+	StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
+
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup audio stream endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Audio class-specific
+ *  requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process General and Audio specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_SetInterface:
+			/* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */
+				StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue) != 0);
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to manage the Audio interface, reading in ADC samples from the microphone, and them to the host. */
+void USB_Audio_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Check to see if the streaming interface is selected, if not the host is not receiving audio */
+	if (!(StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected))
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select the audio stream endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Check if the current endpoint can be written to and that the next sample should be stored */
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)))
+	{
+		/* Clear the sample reload timer */
+		TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
+
+		/* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */
+		int16_t AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult());
+		
+		#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL)
+		/* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */
+		AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2);
+		#endif
+
+		/* Write the sample to the buffer */
+		Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(AudioSample);
+
+		/* Check to see if the bank is now full */
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			/* Send the full packet to the host */
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.h
index 6902dc8f0..7be23e8dd 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.h
@@ -1,86 +1,86 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for AudioInput.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
-#define _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-				
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** ADC channel number for the microphone input. */
-		#define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL        2
-		
-		/** ADC channel MUX mask for the microphone input. */
-		#define MIC_IN_ADC_MUX_MASK       ADC_CHANNEL2
-		
-		/** Maximum ADC sample value for the microphone input. */
-		#define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE          0xFFFF
-
-		/** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */
-		#define ADC_MAX_RANGE             0x3FF
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void USB_Audio_Task(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioInput.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+				
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ADC channel number for the microphone input. */
+		#define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL        2
+		
+		/** ADC channel MUX mask for the microphone input. */
+		#define MIC_IN_ADC_MUX_MASK       ADC_CHANNEL2
+		
+		/** Maximum ADC sample value for the microphone input. */
+		#define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE          0xFFFF
+
+		/** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */
+		#define ADC_MAX_RANGE             0x3FF
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void USB_Audio_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt
index 4601077b0..fb021f897 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Audio Input Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Audio Class</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
- *        USBIF Audio Class Terminal Types Specification \n
- *        USBIF Audio Data Formats Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Audio Input device using the
- *  basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
- *  required).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
- *  as a USB microphone. Incoming audio from the ADC channel 1 will
- *  be sampled and sent to the host computer.
- *  
- *  To use, connect a microphone to the ADC channel 2.
- *  
- *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
- *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo so that the half VCC bias of the microphone input is subtracted.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY</td>
- *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
- *    <td>Gives the audio sample rate per channel for the audio stream, in Hz.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Audio Input Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio Input device using the
+ *  basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ *  required).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a USB microphone. Incoming audio from the ADC channel 1 will
+ *  be sampled and sent to the host computer.
+ *  
+ *  To use, connect a microphone to the ADC channel 2.
+ *  
+ *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
+ *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo so that the half VCC bias of the microphone input is subtracted.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY</td>
+ *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
+ *    <td>Gives the audio sample rate per channel for the audio stream, in Hz.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.c
index b9362e131..414c7666b 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,315 +1,315 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
- 
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2047,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
-
-			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-	
-	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
-			
-			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t) +
-			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t) +
-			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t)),
-			
-			.InCollection             = 1,
-			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
-		},
-
-	.Audio_InputTerminal = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal,
-		
-			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
-			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_IN_MIC,
-			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalChannels            = 1,
-			.ChannelConfig            = 0,
-			
-			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_OutputTerminal = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal,
-		
-			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
-			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_STREAMING,
-			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
-			
-			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
-			
-			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-			
-			.TerminalLink             = 0x02,
-			
-			.FrameDelay               = 1,
-			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_AudioFormat = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Format_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Format,
-
-			.FormatType               = 0x01,
-			.Channels                 = 0x01,
-			
-			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
-			.BitResolution            = 16,
-			.SampleFrequencyType      = (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormat.SampleFrequencies) /
-			                             sizeof(Audio_SampleFreq_t)),
-		
-			.SampleFrequencies        = {SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)}
-		},
-	
-	.Audio_StreamEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Endpoint = 
-				{
-					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM),
-					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-					.PollingIntervalMS   = 1
-				},
-			
-			.Refresh                  = 0,
-			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-			
-			.Attributes               = 0x00,
-			
-			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
-			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Audio In Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2047,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+	
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
+			
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t)),
+			
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
+		},
+
+	.Audio_InputTerminal = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal,
+		
+			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
+			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_IN_MIC,
+			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalChannels            = 1,
+			.ChannelConfig            = 0,
+			
+			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_OutputTerminal = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal,
+		
+			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
+			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_STREAMING,
+			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
+			
+			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
+			
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+			
+			.TerminalLink             = 0x02,
+			
+			.FrameDelay               = 1,
+			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_AudioFormat = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Format_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Format,
+
+			.FormatType               = 0x01,
+			.Channels                 = 0x01,
+			
+			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
+			.BitResolution            = 16,
+			.SampleFrequencyType      = (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormat.SampleFrequencies) /
+			                             sizeof(Audio_SampleFreq_t)),
+		
+			.SampleFrequencies        = {SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)}
+		},
+	
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Endpoint = 
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM),
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 1
+				},
+			
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+			
+			.Attributes               = 0x00,
+			
+			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
+			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Audio In Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.h
index d9048ab01..443cd1a10 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,318 +1,318 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_AudioInterface         0x24
-
-		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint          0x25
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_Header              0x01
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal       0x02
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal      0x03
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit         0x06
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_General             0x01
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_Format              0x02
-		
-		//@{
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-
-		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT           (1 << 0)
-		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT          (1 << 1)
-		#define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT         (1 << 2)
-		#define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE     (1 << 3)
-		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND        (1 << 4)
-		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND       (1 << 5)
-		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER       (1 << 6)
-		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER      (1 << 7)
-		#define CHANNEL_SURROUND             (1 << 8)
-		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT            (1 << 9)
-		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT           (1 << 10)
-		#define CHANNEL_TOP                  (1 << 11)
-		//@}
-
-		//@{
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-
-		#define FEATURE_MUTE                 (1 << 0)
-		#define FEATURE_VOLUME               (1 << 1)
-		#define FEATURE_BASS                 (1 << 2)
-		#define FEATURE_MID                  (1 << 3)
-		#define FEATURE_TREBLE               (1 << 4)
-		#define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER    (1 << 5)
-		#define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN       (1 << 6)
-		#define FEATURE_DELAY                (1 << 7)
-		#define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST           (1 << 8)
-		#define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS        (1 << 9)
-		//@}
-
-		//@{
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		
-		#define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED           0x0100
-		#define TERMINAL_STREAMING           0x0101
-		#define TERMINAL_VENDOR              0x01FF
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED        0x0200
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC              0x0201
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC      0x0202
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC     0x0203
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC      0x0204
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY        0x0205
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC   0x0206
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED    0x0300
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER         0x0301
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES      0x0302
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED    0x0303
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP         0x0304
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM            0x0305
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION   0x0306
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ         0x0307
-		//@}
-
-		/** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] freq  Required audio sampling frequency in HZ
-		 */
-		#define SAMPLE_FREQ(freq)  {LowWord: ((uint32_t)(freq) & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)(freq) >> 16) & 0x0000FF)}
-		
-		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
-		 *  accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
-		 */
-		#define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7)
-
-		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
-		 *  will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
-		 */
-		#define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS     (0 << 7)
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
-		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM           1
-		
-		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires
-		 *  at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller
-		 *  USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output.
-		 */
-		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE          ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM)
-		
-		/** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */
-		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY       48000
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
-		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
-		 *  details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint16_t                  ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
-			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
-			
-			uint8_t                   InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
-			uint8_t                   InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */
-		} USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features
-		 *  are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio
-		 *  specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint8_t                   UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */
-			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */
-			
-			uint8_t                   ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */
-			uint8_t                   ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each separate audio channel */
-			
-			uint8_t                   FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_Audio_FeatureUnit_t;
-
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
-		 *  contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
-		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-		
-			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
-			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
-			uint8_t                   AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals
-			                                                     *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
-			                                                     */
-			uint8_t                   TotalChannels; /**< Total number of separate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */
-			uint16_t                  ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */
-			
-			uint8_t                   ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */
-			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t;
-
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
-		 *  contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
-		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-		
-			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
-			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
-			uint8_t                   AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals
-			                                                    *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
-			                                                    */
-			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */
-			
-			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
-		 *  how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint8_t                   TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */
-			
-			uint8_t                   FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */
-			uint16_t                  AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
-		} USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype,
-		 *  this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t                  LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */
-			uint8_t                   HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */
-		} Audio_SampleFreq_t;
-
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details
-		 *  about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used
-		 *  in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint8_t                   FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
-			uint8_t                   Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */
-			
-			uint8_t                   SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */
-			uint8_t                   BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */
-
-			uint8_t                   SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */			
-			Audio_SampleFreq_t        SampleFrequencies[1]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */
-		} USB_Audio_Format_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint 
-		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
-
-			uint8_t                   Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
-			uint8_t                   SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
-		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;
-					
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
-		 *  on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
-		 *  class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint8_t                   Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */
-
-			uint8_t                   LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */
-			uint16_t                  LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */
-		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t             Audio_InputTerminal;
-			USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t            Audio_OutputTerminal;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t              Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_Format_t                    Audio_AudioFormat;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_AudioInterface         0x24
+
+		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint          0x25
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_Header              0x01
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal       0x02
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal      0x03
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit         0x06
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_General             0x01
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_Format              0x02
+		
+		//@{
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT           (1 << 0)
+		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT          (1 << 1)
+		#define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT         (1 << 2)
+		#define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE     (1 << 3)
+		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND        (1 << 4)
+		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND       (1 << 5)
+		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER       (1 << 6)
+		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER      (1 << 7)
+		#define CHANNEL_SURROUND             (1 << 8)
+		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT            (1 << 9)
+		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT           (1 << 10)
+		#define CHANNEL_TOP                  (1 << 11)
+		//@}
+
+		//@{
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+		#define FEATURE_MUTE                 (1 << 0)
+		#define FEATURE_VOLUME               (1 << 1)
+		#define FEATURE_BASS                 (1 << 2)
+		#define FEATURE_MID                  (1 << 3)
+		#define FEATURE_TREBLE               (1 << 4)
+		#define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER    (1 << 5)
+		#define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN       (1 << 6)
+		#define FEATURE_DELAY                (1 << 7)
+		#define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST           (1 << 8)
+		#define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS        (1 << 9)
+		//@}
+
+		//@{
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		
+		#define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED           0x0100
+		#define TERMINAL_STREAMING           0x0101
+		#define TERMINAL_VENDOR              0x01FF
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED        0x0200
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC              0x0201
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC      0x0202
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC     0x0203
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC      0x0204
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY        0x0205
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC   0x0206
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED    0x0300
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER         0x0301
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES      0x0302
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED    0x0303
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP         0x0304
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM            0x0305
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION   0x0306
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ         0x0307
+		//@}
+
+		/** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] freq  Required audio sampling frequency in HZ
+		 */
+		#define SAMPLE_FREQ(freq)  {LowWord: ((uint32_t)(freq) & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)(freq) >> 16) & 0x0000FF)}
+		
+		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+		 *  accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+		 */
+		#define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+		 *  will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+		 */
+		#define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS     (0 << 7)
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM           1
+		
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires
+		 *  at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller
+		 *  USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output.
+		 */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE          ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM)
+		
+		/** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY       48000
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
+		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
+		 *  details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint16_t                  ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
+			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
+			
+			uint8_t                   InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
+			uint8_t                   InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */
+		} USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features
+		 *  are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio
+		 *  specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint8_t                   UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */
+			
+			uint8_t                   ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */
+			uint8_t                   ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each separate audio channel */
+			
+			uint8_t                   FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_Audio_FeatureUnit_t;
+
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+		
+			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
+			uint8_t                   AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+			                                                     *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
+			                                                     */
+			uint8_t                   TotalChannels; /**< Total number of separate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */
+			uint16_t                  ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */
+			
+			uint8_t                   ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */
+			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t;
+
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+		
+			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
+			uint8_t                   AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+			                                                    *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
+			                                                    */
+			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */
+			
+			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+		 *  how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint8_t                   TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */
+			
+			uint8_t                   FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */
+			uint16_t                  AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
+		} USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype,
+		 *  this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t                  LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */
+			uint8_t                   HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */
+		} Audio_SampleFreq_t;
+
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details
+		 *  about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used
+		 *  in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint8_t                   FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
+			uint8_t                   Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */
+			
+			uint8_t                   SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */
+			uint8_t                   BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */
+
+			uint8_t                   SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */			
+			Audio_SampleFreq_t        SampleFrequencies[1]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */
+		} USB_Audio_Format_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint 
+		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
+
+			uint8_t                   Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
+			uint8_t                   SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
+		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;
+					
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+		 *  on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+		 *  class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint8_t                   Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */
+
+			uint8_t                   LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */
+			uint16_t                  LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */
+		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t             Audio_InputTerminal;
+			USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t            Audio_OutputTerminal;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t              Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Format_t                    Audio_AudioFormat;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf
index 374aac9df..6b0ede97c 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/makefile
index 337addfbb..68e860af1 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = AudioInput
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = AudioInput
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c
index 8cd6be17b..db6bc3c75 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c
@@ -1,239 +1,239 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the AudioOutput demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "AudioOutput.h"
-
-/** Flag to indicate if the streaming audio alternative interface has been selected by the host. */
-bool StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		USB_Audio_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and
- *  configures the sample update and PWM timers.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-	
-	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
-	OCR0A   = (F_CPU / 8 / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY) - 1;
-	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
-	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
-			
-#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
-	/* Set speaker as output */
-	DDRC   |= (1 << 6);
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
-	/* Set speakers as outputs */
-	DDRC   |= ((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
-	/* Set PORTC as outputs */
-	DDRC   |= 0xFF;
-#endif
-
-#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
-	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
-	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM30) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)
-	                        | (1 << COM3B1) | (1 << COM3B0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
-	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed
-#endif	
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Stop the timers */
-	TCCR0B = 0;
-#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
-	TCCR3B = 0;
-#endif		
-
-#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
-	/* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
-	DDRC   &= ~(1 << 6);
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
-	/* Set speakers as inputs to reduce current draw */
-	DDRC   &= ~((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
-	/* Set PORTC low */
-	PORTC  = 0x00;
-#endif
-
-	/* Indicate streaming audio interface not selected */
-	StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
-
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup audio stream endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Audio class-specific
- *  requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Process General and Audio specific control requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_SetInterface:
-			/* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */
-				StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue) != 0);
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Task to manage the Audio interface, reading in audio samples from the host, and outputting them to the speakers/LEDs as
- *  desired.
- */
-void USB_Audio_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Check to see if the streaming interface is selected, if not the host is not receiving audio */
-	if (!(StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected))
-	  return;	
-
-	/* Select the audio stream endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Check if the current endpoint can be read from (contains a packet) and that the next sample should be read */
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() && (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)))
-	{
-		/* Clear the sample reload timer */
-		TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
-
-		/* Retrieve the signed 16-bit left and right audio samples, convert to 8-bit */
-		int8_t  LeftSample_8Bit   = ((int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE() >> 8);
-		int8_t  RightSample_8Bit  = ((int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE() >> 8);
-
-		/* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */
-		int8_t  MixedSample_8Bit  = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1);
-
-		/* Check to see if the bank is now empty */
-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-		{
-			/* Acknowledge the packet, clear the bank ready for the next packet */
-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-		}
-
-#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
-		/* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */
-		OCR3A = (MixedSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
-		/* Load the dual 8-bit samples into the PWM timer channels */
-		OCR3A = (LeftSample_8Bit  ^ (1 << 7));
-		OCR3B = (RightSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
-#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
-		/* Load the 8-bit mixed sample into PORTC */
-		PORTC = MixedSample_8Bit;
-#endif
-
-		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-
-		/* Turn on LEDs as the sample amplitude increases */
-		if (MixedSample_8Bit > 16)
-		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4);
-		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 8)
-		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3);
-		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 4)
-		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
-		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 2)
-		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
-
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AudioOutput demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "AudioOutput.h"
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the streaming audio alternative interface has been selected by the host. */
+bool StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		USB_Audio_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and
+ *  configures the sample update and PWM timers.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+	
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	OCR0A   = (F_CPU / 8 / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY) - 1;
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+			
+#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC   |= (1 << 6);
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+	/* Set speakers as outputs */
+	DDRC   |= ((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+	/* Set PORTC as outputs */
+	DDRC   |= 0xFF;
+#endif
+
+#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
+	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
+	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM30) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)
+	                        | (1 << COM3B1) | (1 << COM3B0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
+	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed
+#endif	
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Stop the timers */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
+	TCCR3B = 0;
+#endif		
+
+#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+	/* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC   &= ~(1 << 6);
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+	/* Set speakers as inputs to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC   &= ~((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+	/* Set PORTC low */
+	PORTC  = 0x00;
+#endif
+
+	/* Indicate streaming audio interface not selected */
+	StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
+
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup audio stream endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Audio class-specific
+ *  requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process General and Audio specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_SetInterface:
+			/* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */
+				StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue) != 0);
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to manage the Audio interface, reading in audio samples from the host, and outputting them to the speakers/LEDs as
+ *  desired.
+ */
+void USB_Audio_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Check to see if the streaming interface is selected, if not the host is not receiving audio */
+	if (!(StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected))
+	  return;	
+
+	/* Select the audio stream endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Check if the current endpoint can be read from (contains a packet) and that the next sample should be read */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() && (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)))
+	{
+		/* Clear the sample reload timer */
+		TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
+
+		/* Retrieve the signed 16-bit left and right audio samples, convert to 8-bit */
+		int8_t  LeftSample_8Bit   = ((int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE() >> 8);
+		int8_t  RightSample_8Bit  = ((int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE() >> 8);
+
+		/* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */
+		int8_t  MixedSample_8Bit  = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1);
+
+		/* Check to see if the bank is now empty */
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			/* Acknowledge the packet, clear the bank ready for the next packet */
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		}
+
+#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+		/* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */
+		OCR3A = (MixedSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+		/* Load the dual 8-bit samples into the PWM timer channels */
+		OCR3A = (LeftSample_8Bit  ^ (1 << 7));
+		OCR3B = (RightSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+		/* Load the 8-bit mixed sample into PORTC */
+		PORTC = MixedSample_8Bit;
+#endif
+
+		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+		/* Turn on LEDs as the sample amplitude increases */
+		if (MixedSample_8Bit > 16)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 8)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 4)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 2)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h
index 69b59b8fa..de7b07175 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h
@@ -1,73 +1,73 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void USB_Audio_Task(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void USB_Audio_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt
index b05ee45ce..9170478ad 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt
@@ -1,96 +1,96 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Audio Output Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Audio Class</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
- *        USBIF Audio Class Terminal Types Specification \n
- *        USBIF Audio Data Formats Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Audio Output device using the
- *  basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
- *  required).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
- *  as a USB speaker. Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto
- *  the timer 3 output compare channel A for AUDIO_OUT_MONO mode, on
- *  timer 3 channels A and B for AUDIO_OUT_STEREO and on PORTC as a signed
- *  mono sample for AUDIO_OUT_PORTC. Audio output will also be indicated on
- *  the board LEDs in all modes. Decouple audio outputs with a capacitor and
- *  attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
- *  
- *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
- *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_STEREO</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in stereo to the timer output pins of the microcontroller.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_MONO</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to the timer output pin of the microcontroller.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_PORTC</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to port C of the microcontroller, for connection to an
- *        external DAC.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY</td>
- *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
- *    <td>Gives the audio sample rate per channel for the audio stream, in Hz.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Audio Output Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio Output device using the
+ *  basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ *  required).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a USB speaker. Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto
+ *  the timer 3 output compare channel A for AUDIO_OUT_MONO mode, on
+ *  timer 3 channels A and B for AUDIO_OUT_STEREO and on PORTC as a signed
+ *  mono sample for AUDIO_OUT_PORTC. Audio output will also be indicated on
+ *  the board LEDs in all modes. Decouple audio outputs with a capacitor and
+ *  attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
+ *  
+ *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
+ *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_STEREO</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in stereo to the timer output pins of the microcontroller.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_MONO</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to the timer output pin of the microcontroller.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_PORTC</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to port C of the microcontroller, for connection to an
+ *        external DAC.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY</td>
+ *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
+ *    <td>Gives the audio sample rate per channel for the audio stream, in Hz.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c
index 17a9d30f0..bcde7f982 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,315 +1,315 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
- 
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2046,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
-
-			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-	
-	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
-			
-			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t) +
-			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t) +
-			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t)),
-			
-			.InCollection             = 1,
-			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
-		},
-
-	.Audio_InputTerminal = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal,
-		
-			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
-			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_STREAMING,
-			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalChannels            = 2,
-			.ChannelConfig            = (CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT | CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT),
-			
-			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_OutputTerminal = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal,
-		
-			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
-			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER,
-			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
-			
-			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
-			
-			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR			
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-			
-			.TerminalLink             = 0x01,
-			
-			.FrameDelay               = 1,
-			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_AudioFormat = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Format_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Format,
-
-			.FormatType               = 0x01,
-			.Channels                 = 0x02,
-			
-			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
-			.BitResolution            = 16,
-
-			.SampleFrequencyType      = (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormat.SampleFrequencies) /
-			                             sizeof(Audio_SampleFreq_t)),		
-			.SampleFrequencies        = {SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)}
-		},
-	
-	.Audio_StreamEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Endpoint = 
-				{
-					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM),
-					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-					.PollingIntervalMS   = 1
-				},
-			
-			.Refresh                  = 0,
-			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-			
-			.Attributes               = EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS,
-			
-			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
-			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(19), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Audio Out Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration:
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00:
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2046,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+	
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
+			
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t)),
+			
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
+		},
+
+	.Audio_InputTerminal = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal,
+		
+			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
+			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_STREAMING,
+			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalChannels            = 2,
+			.ChannelConfig            = (CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT | CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT),
+			
+			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_OutputTerminal = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal,
+		
+			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
+			.TerminalType             = TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER,
+			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
+			
+			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
+			
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR			
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x02,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+			
+			.TerminalLink             = 0x01,
+			
+			.FrameDelay               = 1,
+			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_AudioFormat = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Format_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Format,
+
+			.FormatType               = 0x01,
+			.Channels                 = 0x02,
+			
+			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
+			.BitResolution            = 16,
+
+			.SampleFrequencyType      = (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormat.SampleFrequencies) /
+			                             sizeof(Audio_SampleFreq_t)),		
+			.SampleFrequencies        = {SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)}
+		},
+	
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Endpoint = 
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM),
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 1
+				},
+			
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+			
+			.Attributes               = EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS,
+			
+			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
+			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(19), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Audio Out Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h
index b08ec2f77..87c75941c 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,318 +1,318 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_AudioInterface         0x24
-
-		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint          0x25
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_Header              0x01
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal       0x02
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal      0x03
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit         0x06
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_General             0x01
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_Format              0x02
-		
-		//@{
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-
-		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT           (1 << 0)
-		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT          (1 << 1)
-		#define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT         (1 << 2)
-		#define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE     (1 << 3)
-		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND        (1 << 4)
-		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND       (1 << 5)
-		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER       (1 << 6)
-		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER      (1 << 7)
-		#define CHANNEL_SURROUND             (1 << 8)
-		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT            (1 << 9)
-		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT           (1 << 10)
-		#define CHANNEL_TOP                  (1 << 11)
-		//@}
-
-		//@{
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-
-		#define FEATURE_MUTE                 (1 << 0)
-		#define FEATURE_VOLUME               (1 << 1)
-		#define FEATURE_BASS                 (1 << 2)
-		#define FEATURE_MID                  (1 << 3)
-		#define FEATURE_TREBLE               (1 << 4)
-		#define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER    (1 << 5)
-		#define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN       (1 << 6)
-		#define FEATURE_DELAY                (1 << 7)
-		#define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST           (1 << 8)
-		#define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS        (1 << 9)
-		//@}
-
-		//@{
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		
-		#define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED           0x0100
-		#define TERMINAL_STREAMING           0x0101
-		#define TERMINAL_VENDOR              0x01FF
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED        0x0200
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC              0x0201
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC      0x0202
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC     0x0203
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC      0x0204
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY        0x0205
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC   0x0206
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED    0x0300
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER         0x0301
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES      0x0302
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED    0x0303
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP         0x0304
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM            0x0305
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION   0x0306
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ         0x0307
-		//@}
-
-		/** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] freq  Required audio sampling frequency in HZ
-		 */
-		#define SAMPLE_FREQ(freq)  {LowWord: ((uint32_t)(freq) & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)(freq) >> 16) & 0x0000FF)}
-		
-		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
-		 *  accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
-		 */
-		#define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7)
-
-		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
-		 *  will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
-		 */
-		#define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS     (0 << 7)
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
-		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM           1
-		
-		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires
-		 *  at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller
-		 *  USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output.
-		 */
-		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE          ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM)
-		
-		/** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */
-		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY       48000
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
-		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
-		 *  details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint16_t                  ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
-			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
-			
-			uint8_t                   InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
-			uint8_t                   InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */
-		} USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features
-		 *  are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio
-		 *  specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint8_t                   UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */
-			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */
-			
-			uint8_t                   ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */
-			uint8_t                   ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each separate audio channel */
-			
-			uint8_t                   FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_Audio_FeatureUnit_t;
-
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
-		 *  contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
-		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-		
-			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
-			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
-			uint8_t                   AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals
-			                                                     *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
-			                                                     */
-			uint8_t                   TotalChannels; /**< Total number of separate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */
-			uint16_t                  ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */
-			
-			uint8_t                   ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */
-			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t;
-
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
-		 *  contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
-		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-		
-			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
-			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
-			uint8_t                   AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals
-			                                                    *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
-			                                                    */
-			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */
-			
-			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
-		 *  how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint8_t                   TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */
-			
-			uint8_t                   FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */
-			uint16_t                  AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
-		} USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype,
-		 *  this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t                  LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */
-			uint8_t                   HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */
-		} Audio_SampleFreq_t;
-
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details
-		 *  about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used
-		 *  in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint8_t                   FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
-			uint8_t                   Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */
-			
-			uint8_t                   SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */
-			uint8_t                   BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */
-
-			uint8_t                   SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */			
-			Audio_SampleFreq_t        SampleFrequencies[1]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */
-		} USB_Audio_Format_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint 
-		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
-
-			uint8_t                   Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
-			uint8_t                   SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
-		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;
-					
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
-		 *  on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
-		 *  class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint8_t                   Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */
-
-			uint8_t                   LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */
-			uint16_t                  LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */
-		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t;	
-
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t             Audio_InputTerminal;
-			USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t            Audio_OutputTerminal;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t              Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_Format_t                    Audio_AudioFormat;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_AudioInterface         0x24
+
+		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint          0x25
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_Header              0x01
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal       0x02
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal      0x03
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit         0x06
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_General             0x01
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_Format              0x02
+		
+		//@{
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT           (1 << 0)
+		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT          (1 << 1)
+		#define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT         (1 << 2)
+		#define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE     (1 << 3)
+		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND        (1 << 4)
+		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND       (1 << 5)
+		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER       (1 << 6)
+		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER      (1 << 7)
+		#define CHANNEL_SURROUND             (1 << 8)
+		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT            (1 << 9)
+		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT           (1 << 10)
+		#define CHANNEL_TOP                  (1 << 11)
+		//@}
+
+		//@{
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+		#define FEATURE_MUTE                 (1 << 0)
+		#define FEATURE_VOLUME               (1 << 1)
+		#define FEATURE_BASS                 (1 << 2)
+		#define FEATURE_MID                  (1 << 3)
+		#define FEATURE_TREBLE               (1 << 4)
+		#define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER    (1 << 5)
+		#define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN       (1 << 6)
+		#define FEATURE_DELAY                (1 << 7)
+		#define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST           (1 << 8)
+		#define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS        (1 << 9)
+		//@}
+
+		//@{
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		
+		#define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED           0x0100
+		#define TERMINAL_STREAMING           0x0101
+		#define TERMINAL_VENDOR              0x01FF
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED        0x0200
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC              0x0201
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC      0x0202
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC     0x0203
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC      0x0204
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY        0x0205
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC   0x0206
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED    0x0300
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER         0x0301
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES      0x0302
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED    0x0303
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP         0x0304
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM            0x0305
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION   0x0306
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ         0x0307
+		//@}
+
+		/** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] freq  Required audio sampling frequency in HZ
+		 */
+		#define SAMPLE_FREQ(freq)  {LowWord: ((uint32_t)(freq) & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)(freq) >> 16) & 0x0000FF)}
+		
+		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+		 *  accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+		 */
+		#define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+		 *  will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+		 */
+		#define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS     (0 << 7)
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM           1
+		
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires
+		 *  at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller
+		 *  USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output.
+		 */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE          ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM)
+		
+		/** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY       48000
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
+		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
+		 *  details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint16_t                  ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
+			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
+			
+			uint8_t                   InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
+			uint8_t                   InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */
+		} USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features
+		 *  are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio
+		 *  specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint8_t                   UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */
+			
+			uint8_t                   ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */
+			uint8_t                   ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each separate audio channel */
+			
+			uint8_t                   FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_Audio_FeatureUnit_t;
+
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+		
+			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
+			uint8_t                   AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+			                                                     *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
+			                                                     */
+			uint8_t                   TotalChannels; /**< Total number of separate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */
+			uint16_t                  ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */
+			
+			uint8_t                   ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */
+			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t;
+
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+		
+			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
+			uint8_t                   AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+			                                                    *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
+			                                                    */
+			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */
+			
+			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+		 *  how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint8_t                   TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */
+			
+			uint8_t                   FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */
+			uint16_t                  AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
+		} USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype,
+		 *  this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t                  LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */
+			uint8_t                   HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */
+		} Audio_SampleFreq_t;
+
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details
+		 *  about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used
+		 *  in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint8_t                   FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
+			uint8_t                   Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */
+			
+			uint8_t                   SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */
+			uint8_t                   BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */
+
+			uint8_t                   SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */			
+			Audio_SampleFreq_t        SampleFrequencies[1]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */
+		} USB_Audio_Format_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint 
+		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
+
+			uint8_t                   Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
+			uint8_t                   SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
+		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;
+					
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+		 *  on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+		 *  class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint8_t                   Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */
+
+			uint8_t                   LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */
+			uint16_t                  LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */
+		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t;	
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t             Audio_InputTerminal;
+			USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t            Audio_OutputTerminal;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t              Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Format_t                    Audio_AudioFormat;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t        Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf
index 632a749c5..2c4c279aa 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = YES
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = YES
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/makefile
index 1c72b9897..50ca46956 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/makefile
@@ -1,738 +1,738 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = AudioOutput
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DAUDIO_OUT_STEREO
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = AudioOutput
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DAUDIO_OUT_STEREO
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
index fedf3dd48..a7d64a4e3 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,381 +1,381 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0xEF,
-	.SubClass               = 0x02,
-	.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204E,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 4,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC1_IAD = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
-
-			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 0,
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-
-			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC1_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC1_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC1_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC1_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_IAD = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
-
-			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 2,
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-
-			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 2,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC2_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x02, 0x03}
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 3,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC2_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC2_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC2_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Dual CDC Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;	
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0xEF,
+	.SubClass               = 0x02,
+	.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204E,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 4,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC1_IAD = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 0,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC1_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC1_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC1_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_IAD = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 2,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 2,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC2_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x02, 0x03}
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 3,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC2_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC2_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Dual CDC Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;	
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
index c659ad81c..f69c8c64c 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,116 +1,116 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
-		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
-		 *  a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
-		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
-		 */
-		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
-		     struct                                        \
-		     {                                             \
-		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
-			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
-		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
-		     }
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM        3
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC1_TX_EPNUM                  1	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC1_RX_EPNUM                  2	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM        4
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC2_TX_EPNUM                  5	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC2_RX_EPNUM                  6	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16	
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC1_IAD;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC1_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC1_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC2_IAD;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC2_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC2_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
+		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
+		 *  a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
+		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
+		 */
+		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
+		     struct                                        \
+		     {                                             \
+		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
+			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
+		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
+		     }
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM        3
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_TX_EPNUM                  1	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_RX_EPNUM                  2	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM        4
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_TX_EPNUM                  5	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_RX_EPNUM                  6	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16	
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC1_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC1_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC1_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC2_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC2_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC2_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
index 906862b3e..56c93a724 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c
index 5c90c6ab8..29fd57f29 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c
@@ -1,326 +1,326 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the DualVirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "DualVirtualSerial.h"
-
-/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the first virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
- *  the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
- *  upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
- *
- *  These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
- *  It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
- *  serial link characteristics and instead sends and receives data in endpoint streams.
- */
-CDC_Line_Coding_t LineEncoding1 = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
-                                    .CharFormat  = OneStopBit,
-                                    .ParityType  = Parity_None,
-                                    .DataBits    = 8            };
-
-/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the second virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
- *  the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
- *  upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
- *
- *  These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
- *  It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
- *  serial link characteristics and instead sends and receives data in endpoint streams.
- */
-CDC_Line_Coding_t LineEncoding2 = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
-                                    .CharFormat  = OneStopBit,
-                                    .ParityType  = Parity_None,
-                                    .DataBits    = 8            };
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		CDC1_Task();
-		CDC2_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management tasks are started.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{							   
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints for the first CDC */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints for the second CDC */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	/* Reset line encoding baud rates so that the host knows to send new values */
-	LineEncoding1.BaudRateBPS = 0;
-	LineEncoding2.BaudRateBPS = 0;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands,
- *  which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Determine which interface's Line Coding data is being set from the wIndex parameter */
-	uint8_t* LineEncodingData = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex == 0) ? (uint8_t*)&LineEncoding1 : (uint8_t*)&LineEncoding2;
-
-	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{	
-				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				/* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineEncodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
-				
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				/* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
-				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineEncodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
-
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			}
-	
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetControlLineState:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-	
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the first CDC interface, which sends joystick
- *  movements to the host as ASCII strings.
- */
-void CDC1_Task(void)
-{
-	char*       ReportString    = NULL;
-	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL   = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	static bool ActionSent      = false;
-	
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
-	else
-	  ActionSent = false;
-
-	/* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */
-	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false) && LineEncoding1.BaudRateBPS)
-	{
-		ActionSent = true;
-		
-		/* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPNUM);
-
-		/* Write the String to the Endpoint */
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString));
-		
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-		/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for another packet */
-		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
-		
-		/* Send an empty packet to ensure that the host does not buffer data sent to it */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	}
-
-	/* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Throw away any received data from the host */
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-}
-
-/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the second CDC interface, which echoes back
- *  all data sent to it from the host.
- */
-void CDC2_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Check to see if any data has been received */
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-	{
-		/* Create a temp buffer big enough to hold the incoming endpoint packet */
-		uint8_t  Buffer[Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()];
-		
-		/* Remember how large the incoming packet is */
-		uint16_t DataLength = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
-	
-		/* Read in the incoming packet into the buffer */
-		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength);
-
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-		/* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPNUM);
-		
-		/* Write the received data to the endpoint */
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength);
-
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-		/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for the next packet */
-		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
-
-		/* Send an empty packet to prevent host buffering */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the DualVirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "DualVirtualSerial.h"
+
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the first virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
+ *  the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
+ *  upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
+ *
+ *  These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
+ *  It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
+ *  serial link characteristics and instead sends and receives data in endpoint streams.
+ */
+CDC_Line_Coding_t LineEncoding1 = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
+                                    .CharFormat  = OneStopBit,
+                                    .ParityType  = Parity_None,
+                                    .DataBits    = 8            };
+
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the second virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
+ *  the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
+ *  upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
+ *
+ *  These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
+ *  It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
+ *  serial link characteristics and instead sends and receives data in endpoint streams.
+ */
+CDC_Line_Coding_t LineEncoding2 = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
+                                    .CharFormat  = OneStopBit,
+                                    .ParityType  = Parity_None,
+                                    .DataBits    = 8            };
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CDC1_Task();
+		CDC2_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management tasks are started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{							   
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints for the first CDC */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints for the second CDC */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	/* Reset line encoding baud rates so that the host knows to send new values */
+	LineEncoding1.BaudRateBPS = 0;
+	LineEncoding2.BaudRateBPS = 0;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands,
+ *  which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Determine which interface's Line Coding data is being set from the wIndex parameter */
+	uint8_t* LineEncodingData = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex == 0) ? (uint8_t*)&LineEncoding1 : (uint8_t*)&LineEncoding2;
+
+	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{	
+				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineEncodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
+				
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineEncodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
+
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+	
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetControlLineState:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+	
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the first CDC interface, which sends joystick
+ *  movements to the host as ASCII strings.
+ */
+void CDC1_Task(void)
+{
+	char*       ReportString    = NULL;
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL   = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	static bool ActionSent      = false;
+	
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+
+	/* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false) && LineEncoding1.BaudRateBPS)
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+		
+		/* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPNUM);
+
+		/* Write the String to the Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString));
+		
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for another packet */
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		
+		/* Send an empty packet to ensure that the host does not buffer data sent to it */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Throw away any received data from the host */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+}
+
+/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the second CDC interface, which echoes back
+ *  all data sent to it from the host.
+ */
+void CDC2_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Check to see if any data has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		/* Create a temp buffer big enough to hold the incoming endpoint packet */
+		uint8_t  Buffer[Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()];
+		
+		/* Remember how large the incoming packet is */
+		uint16_t DataLength = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
+	
+		/* Read in the incoming packet into the buffer */
+		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+		/* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPNUM);
+		
+		/* Write the received data to the endpoint */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for the next packet */
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+
+		/* Send an empty packet to prevent host buffering */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h
index 6ca8b72a6..6cce44c5f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h
@@ -1,120 +1,120 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DualVirtualSerial.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
-#define _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
-		#define REQ_GetLineEncoding       0x21
-
-		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
-		#define REQ_SetLineEncoding       0x20
-
-		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
-		#define REQ_SetControlLineState   0x22
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration
-		 *  as set by the host via a class specific request.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
-			uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
-			                      *   CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
-			                      */
-			uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
-			                      *   CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
-			                      */
-			uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per character of the virtual serial port */
-		} CDC_Line_Coding_t;
-		
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
-		enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
-		{
-			OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */
-			OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */
-			TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */
-		};
-		
-		/** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
-		enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t
-		{
-			Parity_None         = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */
-			Parity_Odd          = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */
-			Parity_Even         = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */
-			Parity_Mark         = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */
-			Parity_Space        = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void CDC1_Task(void);
-		void CDC2_Task(void);
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DualVirtualSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+#define _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+		#define REQ_GetLineEncoding       0x21
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+		#define REQ_SetLineEncoding       0x20
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
+		#define REQ_SetControlLineState   0x22
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration
+		 *  as set by the host via a class specific request.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
+			uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+			                      *   CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
+			                      */
+			uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+			                      *   CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
+			                      */
+			uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per character of the virtual serial port */
+		} CDC_Line_Coding_t;
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
+		enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
+		{
+			OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */
+			OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */
+			TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */
+		};
+		
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
+		enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t
+		{
+			Parity_None         = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Odd          = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Even         = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Mark         = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Space        = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void CDC1_Task(void);
+		void CDC2_Task(void);
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt
index b1ba267a3..f21bd0c73 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Dual Communications Device Class (Dual Virtual Serial Port) Device
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Interface Association Descriptor ECN \n
- *        USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Dual Communications Device Class demonstration application.
- *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
- *  a compound device with dual CDC functions acting as a pair
- *  of virtual serial ports. This demo uses Interface Association
- *  Descriptors to link together the pair of related CDC
- *  descriptors for each virtual serial port, which may not be
- *  supported in all OSes - Windows Vista is supported, as is
- *  XP (although the latter may need a hotfix to function).
- *  
- *  Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings
- *  through the first serial port. The device does not respond to
- *  serial data sent from the host in the first serial port.
- *  
- *  The second serial port echoes back data sent from the host.
- *  
- *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
- *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
- *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
- *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
- *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
- *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
- *  CDC-ACM drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Dual Communications Device Class (Dual Virtual Serial Port) Device
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Interface Association Descriptor ECN \n
+ *        USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Dual Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a compound device with dual CDC functions acting as a pair
+ *  of virtual serial ports. This demo uses Interface Association
+ *  Descriptors to link together the pair of related CDC
+ *  descriptors for each virtual serial port, which may not be
+ *  supported in all OSes - Windows Vista is supported, as is
+ *  XP (although the latter may need a hotfix to function).
+ *  
+ *  Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings
+ *  through the first serial port. The device does not respond to
+ *  serial data sent from the host in the first serial port.
+ *  
+ *  The second serial port echoes back data sent from the host.
+ *  
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf
index beb62c644..f32c81c35 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
-INSTDISK="LUFA Dual CDC Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
+INSTDISK="LUFA Dual CDC Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/makefile
index 5edabea13..62b0d320a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = DualVirtualSerial
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = DualVirtualSerial
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.c
index d3afa867c..12ff1f01e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,250 +1,250 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] =
-{
-	0x06, 0x9c, 0xff,     /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined)                     */
-	0x09, 0x01,           /* Usage (Vendor Defined)                          */
-	0xa1, 0x01,           /* Collection (Vendor Defined)                     */
-	0x09, 0x02,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
-	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
-	0x15, 0x00,           /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0xff,           /*   Logical Maximum (255)                         */
-	0x81, 0x02,           /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
-	0x09, 0x03,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
-	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
-	0x15, 0x00,           /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0xff,           /*   Logical Maximum (255)                         */
-	0x91, 0x02,           /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0xc0                  /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204F,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_GenericHID = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-									 
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(GenericReport)
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | GENERIC_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportOUTEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | GENERIC_OUT_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(21), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Generic HID Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&GenericReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(GenericReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] =
+{
+	0x06, 0x9c, 0xff,     /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined)                     */
+	0x09, 0x01,           /* Usage (Vendor Defined)                          */
+	0xa1, 0x01,           /* Collection (Vendor Defined)                     */
+	0x09, 0x02,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
+	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
+	0x15, 0x00,           /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0xff,           /*   Logical Maximum (255)                         */
+	0x81, 0x02,           /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
+	0x09, 0x03,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
+	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
+	0x15, 0x00,           /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0xff,           /*   Logical Maximum (255)                         */
+	0x91, 0x02,           /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0xc0                  /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204F,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_GenericHID = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+									 
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(GenericReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | GENERIC_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportOUTEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | GENERIC_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(21), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Generic HID Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&GenericReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(GenericReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.h
index 364ff3eaa..0babc2269 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,100 +1,100 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
-		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t               Header;
-				
-			uint16_t                              HIDSpec;
-			uint8_t                               CountryCode;
-		
-			uint8_t                               TotalReportDescriptors;
-
-			uint8_t                               HIDReportType;
-			uint16_t                              HIDReportLength;
-		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
-		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID_GenericHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportOUTEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define GENERIC_IN_EPNUM          1
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Generic HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
-		#define GENERIC_OUT_EPNUM         2
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */
-		#define GENERIC_EPSIZE            8
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reports (including report ID byte). */
-		#define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE       8
-
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
-		
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t               Header;
+				
+			uint16_t                              HIDSpec;
+			uint8_t                               CountryCode;
+		
+			uint8_t                               TotalReportDescriptors;
+
+			uint8_t                               HIDReportType;
+			uint16_t                              HIDReportLength;
+		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID_GenericHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportOUTEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_IN_EPNUM          1
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Generic HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_OUT_EPNUM         2
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_EPSIZE            8
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reports (including report ID byte). */
+		#define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE       8
+
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
+		
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Doxygen.conf
index dc1902e4a..cd0d6f046 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.c
index 9d9012aff..9929358c8 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.c
@@ -1,257 +1,257 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the GenericHID demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "GenericHID.h"
-
-/** Static buffer to hold the last received report from the host, so that it can be echoed back in the next sent report */
-static uint8_t LastReceived[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		HID_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management task.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the generic HID device endpoints.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup Generic IN Report Endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(GENERIC_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, GENERIC_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	/* Setup Generic OUT Report Endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(GENERIC_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, GENERIC_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
- *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetReport:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
-
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-	
-				CreateGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
-
-				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData));
-
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			}
-		
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetReport:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
-
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Wait until the generic report has been sent by the host */
-				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-				{
-					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-					  return;
-				}
-
-				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData));
-
-				ProcessGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
-			
-				/* Clear the endpoint data */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-				/* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */
-				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
-				{
-					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-					  return;
-				}
-				
-				/* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Function to process the lest received report from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] DataArray  Pointer to a buffer where the last report data is stored
- */
-void ProcessGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray)
-{
-	/*
-		This is where you need to process the reports being sent from the host to the device.
-		DataArray is an array holding the last report from the host. This function is called
-		each time the host has sent a report to the device.
-	*/
-	
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE; i++)
-	  LastReceived[i] = DataArray[i];
-}
-
-/** Function to create the next report to send back to the host at the next reporting interval.
- *
- *  \param[out] DataArray  Pointer to a buffer where the next report data should be stored
- */
-void CreateGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray)
-{
-	/*
-		This is where you need to create reports to be sent to the host from the device. This
-		function is called each time the host is ready to accept a new report. DataArray is 
-		an array to hold the report to the host.
-	*/
-
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE; i++)
-	  DataArray[i] = LastReceived[i];
-}
-
-void HID_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(GENERIC_OUT_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Check to see if a packet has been sent from the host */
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-	{
-		/* Check to see if the packet contains data */
-		if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-		{
-			/* Create a temporary buffer to hold the read in report from the host */
-			uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
-			
-			/* Read Generic Report Data */
-			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData));
-			
-			/* Process Generic Report Data */
-			ProcessGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
-		}
-
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	}	
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(GENERIC_IN_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Check to see if the host is ready to accept another packet */
-	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
-	{
-		/* Create a temporary buffer to hold the report to send to the host */
-		uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
-		
-		/* Create Generic Report Data */
-		CreateGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
-
-		/* Write Generic Report Data */
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData));
-
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the GenericHID demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "GenericHID.h"
+
+/** Static buffer to hold the last received report from the host, so that it can be echoed back in the next sent report */
+static uint8_t LastReceived[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management task.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the generic HID device endpoints.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup Generic IN Report Endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(GENERIC_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	/* Setup Generic OUT Report Endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(GENERIC_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
+ *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+	
+				CreateGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
+
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData));
+
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+		
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Wait until the generic report has been sent by the host */
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData));
+
+				ProcessGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
+			
+				/* Clear the endpoint data */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+				
+				/* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to process the lest received report from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] DataArray  Pointer to a buffer where the last report data is stored
+ */
+void ProcessGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray)
+{
+	/*
+		This is where you need to process the reports being sent from the host to the device.
+		DataArray is an array holding the last report from the host. This function is called
+		each time the host has sent a report to the device.
+	*/
+	
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE; i++)
+	  LastReceived[i] = DataArray[i];
+}
+
+/** Function to create the next report to send back to the host at the next reporting interval.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] DataArray  Pointer to a buffer where the next report data should be stored
+ */
+void CreateGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray)
+{
+	/*
+		This is where you need to create reports to be sent to the host from the device. This
+		function is called each time the host is ready to accept a new report. DataArray is 
+		an array to hold the report to the host.
+	*/
+
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE; i++)
+	  DataArray[i] = LastReceived[i];
+}
+
+void HID_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(GENERIC_OUT_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been sent from the host */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		/* Check to see if the packet contains data */
+		if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			/* Create a temporary buffer to hold the read in report from the host */
+			uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+			
+			/* Read Generic Report Data */
+			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData));
+			
+			/* Process Generic Report Data */
+			ProcessGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
+		}
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}	
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(GENERIC_IN_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Check to see if the host is ready to accept another packet */
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+	{
+		/* Create a temporary buffer to hold the report to send to the host */
+		uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+		
+		/* Create Generic Report Data */
+		CreateGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
+
+		/* Write Generic Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData));
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.h
index deaee336c..e6e0666f4 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for GenericHID.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _GENERICHID_H_
-#define _GENERICHID_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-			
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
-		#define REQ_GetReport             0x01
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
-		#define REQ_SetReport             0x09
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void HID_Task(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		void ProcessGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray);
-		void CreateGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for GenericHID.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _GENERICHID_H_
+#define _GENERICHID_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+			
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
+		#define REQ_GetReport             0x01
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetReport             0x09
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void HID_Task(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		void ProcessGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray);
+		void CreateGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt
index fe46abdfc..022ce5b5a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt
@@ -1,75 +1,75 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Generic HID Device
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Generic HID device demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
- *  for implementing a generic HID device, using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
- *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). By default it accepts and sends up to 8 byte reports
- *  to and from a USB Host, and transmits the last sent report back to the host.
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a vendor HID device.
- *  When controlled by a custom HID class application, reports can be sent and received by
- *  both the standard data endpoint and control request methods defined in the HID specification.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *  
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE</td>
- *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
- *    <td>This token defines the size of the device reports, both sent and received. The value must be an
- *        integer ranging from 1 to 255.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Generic HID Device
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Generic HID device demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a generic HID device, using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
+ *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). By default it accepts and sends up to 8 byte reports
+ *  to and from a USB Host, and transmits the last sent report back to the host.
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a vendor HID device.
+ *  When controlled by a custom HID class application, reports can be sent and received by
+ *  both the standard data endpoint and control request methods defined in the HID specification.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *  
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE</td>
+ *    <td>Descriptors.h</td>
+ *    <td>This token defines the size of the device reports, both sent and received. The value must be an
+ *        integer ranging from 1 to 255.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/makefile
index ea6a2b0b7..55438dcbe 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = GenericHID
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = GenericHID
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.c
index dcc5d6901..a1e35fe6e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,250 +1,250 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM JoystickReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                       */
-	0x09, 0x04,          /* Usage (Joystick)                                   */
-	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                           */
-	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                                  */
-	0xa1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Physical)                            */
-	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                   */
-	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage (X)                                      */
-	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage (Y)                                      */
-	0x15, 0x9c,          /*     Logical Minimum (-100)                         */
-	0x25, 0x64,          /*     Logical Maximum (100)                          */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                                */
-	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                               */
-	0x81, 0x82,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute, Volatile)     */
-	0xc0,                /*   End Collection                                   */
-	0x05, 0x09,          /*   Usage Page (Button)                              */
-	0x09, 0x02,          /*   Usage (Button 2)                                 */
-	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Button 1)                                 */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                              */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                                  */
-	0x95, 0x02,          /*   Report Count (2)                                 */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)                 */
-	0x75, 0x06,          /*   Report Size (6)                                  */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                                 */
-	0x81, 0x01,          /*   Input (Constant)                                 */
-	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                     */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2043,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_JoystickHID = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-									 
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(JoystickReport)
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | JOYSTICK_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		}	
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Joystick Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_JoystickHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&JoystickReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(JoystickReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM JoystickReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                       */
+	0x09, 0x04,          /* Usage (Joystick)                                   */
+	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                           */
+	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                                  */
+	0xa1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Physical)                            */
+	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                   */
+	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage (X)                                      */
+	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage (Y)                                      */
+	0x15, 0x9c,          /*     Logical Minimum (-100)                         */
+	0x25, 0x64,          /*     Logical Maximum (100)                          */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                                */
+	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                               */
+	0x81, 0x82,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute, Volatile)     */
+	0xc0,                /*   End Collection                                   */
+	0x05, 0x09,          /*   Usage Page (Button)                              */
+	0x09, 0x02,          /*   Usage (Button 2)                                 */
+	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Button 1)                                 */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                              */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                                  */
+	0x95, 0x02,          /*   Report Count (2)                                 */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)                 */
+	0x75, 0x06,          /*   Report Size (6)                                  */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                                 */
+	0x81, 0x01,          /*   Input (Constant)                                 */
+	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                     */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2043,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_JoystickHID = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+									 
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(JoystickReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | JOYSTICK_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		}	
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Joystick Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_JoystickHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&JoystickReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(JoystickReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.h
index c33671070..a3144c4cc 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,93 +1,93 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
-		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t               Header;
-				
-			uint16_t                              HIDSpec;
-			uint8_t                               CountryCode;
-		
-			uint8_t                               TotalReportDescriptors;
-
-			uint8_t                               HIDReportType;
-			uint16_t                              HIDReportLength;
-		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
-		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID_JoystickHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define JOYSTICK_EPNUM               1
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define JOYSTICK_EPSIZE              8
-
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
-		
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t               Header;
+				
+			uint16_t                              HIDSpec;
+			uint8_t                               CountryCode;
+		
+			uint8_t                               TotalReportDescriptors;
+
+			uint8_t                               HIDReportType;
+			uint16_t                              HIDReportLength;
+		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID_JoystickHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define JOYSTICK_EPNUM               1
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define JOYSTICK_EPSIZE              8
+
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
+		
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Doxygen.conf
index 47c6bcda3..1abcd716a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.c
index e84eef042..6ced1ce44 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.c
@@ -1,209 +1,209 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Joystick demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "Joystick.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		HID_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and joystick reporting tasks.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the joystick reporting task started.
- */ 
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup Joystick Report Endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
- *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetReport:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData;
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				/* Create the next HID report to send to the host */				
-				GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData);
-					
-				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, sizeof(JoystickReportData));
-				
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			}
-		
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
- *
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise
- */
-bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* ReportData)
-{
-	static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus    = 0;
-	static uint8_t PrevButtonStatus = 0;
-	uint8_t        JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t        ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
-	bool           InputChanged     = false;
-
-	/* Clear the report contents */
-	memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t));
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  ReportData->Y = -100;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  ReportData->Y =  100;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  ReportData->X = -100;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  ReportData->X =  100;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  ReportData->Button  = (1 << 1);
-	  
-	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	  ReportData->Button |= (1 << 0);
-	  
-	/* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */
-	InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL) | (uint8_t)(PrevButtonStatus ^ ButtonStatus_LCL);
-
-	/* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */
-	PrevJoyStatus    = JoyStatus_LCL;
-	PrevButtonStatus = ButtonStatus_LCL;
-
-	/* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */
-	return InputChanged;
-}
-
-/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host. */
-void HID_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-  
-	/* Select the Joystick Report Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPNUM);
-
-	/* Check to see if the host is ready for another packet */
-	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
-	{
-		USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData;
-		
-		/* Create the next HID report to send to the host */
-		GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData);
-	
-		/* Write Joystick Report Data */
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, sizeof(JoystickReportData));
-
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		
-		/* Clear the report data afterwards */
-		memset(&JoystickReportData, 0, sizeof(JoystickReportData));
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Joystick demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Joystick.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and joystick reporting tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the joystick reporting task started.
+ */ 
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup Joystick Report Endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
+ *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData;
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Create the next HID report to send to the host */				
+				GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData);
+					
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, sizeof(JoystickReportData));
+				
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+		
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise
+ */
+bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* ReportData)
+{
+	static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus    = 0;
+	static uint8_t PrevButtonStatus = 0;
+	uint8_t        JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t        ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+	bool           InputChanged     = false;
+
+	/* Clear the report contents */
+	memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t));
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportData->Y = -100;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportData->Y =  100;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportData->X = -100;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportData->X =  100;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportData->Button  = (1 << 1);
+	  
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  ReportData->Button |= (1 << 0);
+	  
+	/* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */
+	InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL) | (uint8_t)(PrevButtonStatus ^ ButtonStatus_LCL);
+
+	/* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */
+	PrevJoyStatus    = JoyStatus_LCL;
+	PrevButtonStatus = ButtonStatus_LCL;
+
+	/* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */
+	return InputChanged;
+}
+
+/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host. */
+void HID_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+  
+	/* Select the Joystick Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Check to see if the host is ready for another packet */
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+	{
+		USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData;
+		
+		/* Create the next HID report to send to the host */
+		GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData);
+	
+		/* Write Joystick Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, sizeof(JoystickReportData));
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		
+		/* Clear the report data afterwards */
+		memset(&JoystickReportData, 0, sizeof(JoystickReportData));
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.h
index 761582d45..3d876befc 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.h
@@ -1,92 +1,92 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Joystick.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _JOYSTICK_H_
-#define _JOYSTICK_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
-		#define REQ_GetReport             0x01
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the joystick HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
-		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			int8_t  X; /**< Current absolute joystick X position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
-			int8_t  Y; /**< Current absolute joystick Y position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
-			uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed joystick buttons */
-		} USB_JoystickReport_Data_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void HID_Task(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-		bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* ReportData);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Joystick.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _JOYSTICK_H_
+#define _JOYSTICK_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
+		#define REQ_GetReport             0x01
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the joystick HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			int8_t  X; /**< Current absolute joystick X position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			int8_t  Y; /**< Current absolute joystick Y position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed joystick buttons */
+		} USB_JoystickReport_Data_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void HID_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* ReportData);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.txt
index 51c9bdbc7..994aac435 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.txt
@@ -1,73 +1,73 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Joystick Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Joystick demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard device, for USB Joysticks
- *  using the standard Keyboard HID profile.
- *  
- *  This device will show up as a generic joystick device, with two buttons.
- *  Pressing the joystick inwards is the first button, and the HWB button
- *  is the second.
- *  
- *  Moving the joystick on the selected board moves the joystick location on
- *  the host computer.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Joystick Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Joystick demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard device, for USB Joysticks
+ *  using the standard Keyboard HID profile.
+ *  
+ *  This device will show up as a generic joystick device, with two buttons.
+ *  Pressing the joystick inwards is the first button, and the HWB button
+ *  is the second.
+ *  
+ *  Moving the joystick on the selected board moves the joystick location on
+ *  the host computer.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/makefile
index b15c809e3..3e4b46cdd 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = Joystick
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Joystick
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.c
index 879b289b6..baab8cf9e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,267 +1,267 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-	  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
-	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
-	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
-	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
-	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x05,          /*   Report Count (5)                              */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x05, 0x08,          /*   Usage Page (LEDs)                             */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*   Usage Minimum (Num Lock)                      */
-	0x29, 0x05,          /*   Usage Maximum (Kana)                          */
-	0x91, 0x02,          /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x03,          /*   Report Size (3)                               */
-	0x91, 0x03,          /*   Output (Const, Variable, Absolute)            */
-	0x95, 0x06,          /*   Report Count (6)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
-	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
-	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
-	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
-	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2042,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_KeyboardHID = 
-		{  
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-			
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportOUTEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(16), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Denver Gingerich"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Keyboard Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+	  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
+	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
+	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
+	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
+	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x05,          /*   Report Count (5)                              */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x05, 0x08,          /*   Usage Page (LEDs)                             */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*   Usage Minimum (Num Lock)                      */
+	0x29, 0x05,          /*   Usage Maximum (Kana)                          */
+	0x91, 0x02,          /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x03,          /*   Report Size (3)                               */
+	0x91, 0x03,          /*   Output (Const, Variable, Absolute)            */
+	0x95, 0x06,          /*   Report Count (6)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
+	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
+	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
+	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
+	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2042,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardHID = 
+		{  
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportOUTEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(16), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Denver Gingerich"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Keyboard Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.h
index 22701a3af..b20d0aef0 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,98 +1,98 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-	  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
-		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
-		 */	
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
-				
-			uint16_t                HIDSpec;
-			uint8_t                 CountryCode;
-		
-			uint8_t                 TotalReportDescriptors;
-
-			uint8_t                 HIDReportType;
-			uint16_t                HIDReportLength;
-		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
-		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID_KeyboardHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportOUTEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_EPNUM               1
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM          2
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */		
-		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
-
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
-		
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+	  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
+		 */	
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
+				
+			uint16_t                HIDSpec;
+			uint8_t                 CountryCode;
+		
+			uint8_t                 TotalReportDescriptors;
+
+			uint8_t                 HIDReportType;
+			uint16_t                HIDReportLength;
+		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID_KeyboardHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportOUTEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPNUM               1
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM          2
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */		
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
+
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
+		
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf
index 90fe9c9e4..067a08ee2 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.c
index 67715843b..c58162649 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.c
@@ -1,387 +1,387 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Keyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "Keyboard.h"
-
-/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot
- *  protocol reporting mode.
- */
-bool UsingReportProtocol = true;
-
-/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports
- *  for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user presses a key).
- */
-uint16_t IdleCount = 500;
-
-/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle
- *  milliseconds. This is separate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request 
- *  the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved.
- */
-uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0;
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		HID_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-
-	/* Default to report protocol on connect */
-	UsingReportProtocol = true;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard device endpoints.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{	
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	/* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
- *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetReport:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
-
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-	
-				/* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */
-				CreateKeyboardReport(&KeyboardReportData);
-
-				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
-				
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			}
-		
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetReport:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */
-				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-				{
-					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-					  return;
-				}
-
-				/* Read in the LED report from the host */
-				uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-
-				/* Process the incoming LED report */
-				ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus);
-			
-				/* Clear the endpoint data */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetProtocol:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Write the current protocol flag to the host */
-				Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol);
-				
-				/* Send the flag to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetProtocol:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				/* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */
-				UsingReportProtocol = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != 0);
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetIdle:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Get idle period in MSB, IdleCount must be multiplied by 4 to get number of milliseconds */
-				IdleCount = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF00) >> 6);
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetIdle:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{		
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Write the current idle duration to the host, must be divided by 4 before sent to host */
-				Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount >> 2);
-				
-				/* Send the flag to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-	/* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */
-	if (IdleMSRemaining)
-	  IdleMSRemaining--;
-}
-
-/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
- *
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
- */
-void CreateKeyboardReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData)
-{
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL     = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL  = Buttons_GetStatus();
-
-	uint8_t UsedKeyCodes      = 0;
-
-	/* Clear the report contents */
-	memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t));
-	
-	/* Make sent key uppercase by indicating that the left shift key is pressed */
-	ReportData->Modifier = KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT;
-	
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x04; // A
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x05; // B
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x06; // C
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x07; // D
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x08; // E
-	  
-	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x09; // F
-}
-
-/** Processes a received LED report, and updates the board LEDs states to match.
- *
- *  \param[in] LEDReport  LED status report from the host
- */
-void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport)
-{
-	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2;
-	
-	if (LEDReport & KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
-	
-	if (LEDReport & KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
-
-	if (LEDReport & KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
-
-	/* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-}
-
-/** Sends the next HID report to the host, via the keyboard data endpoint. */
-void SendNextReport(void)
-{
-	static USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t PrevKeyboardReportData;
-	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t        KeyboardReportData;
-	bool                             SendReport = true;
-	
-	/* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */
-	CreateKeyboardReport(&KeyboardReportData);
-	
-	/* Check to see if the report data has changed - if so a report MUST be sent */
-	SendReport = (memcmp(&PrevKeyboardReportData, &KeyboardReportData, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)) != 0);
-	
-	/* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */
-	if ((IdleCount != HID_IDLE_CHANGESONLY) && (!(IdleMSRemaining)))
-	{
-		/* Reset the idle time remaining counter */
-		IdleMSRemaining = IdleCount;
-		
-		/* Idle period is set and has elapsed, must send a report to the host */
-		SendReport = true;
-	}
-	
-	/* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM);
-
-	/* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write and if we should send a new report */
-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport)
-	{
-		/* Save the current report data for later comparison to check for changes */
-		PrevKeyboardReportData = KeyboardReportData;
-	
-		/* Write Keyboard Report Data */
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
-		
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Reads the next LED status report from the host from the LED data endpoint, if one has been sent. */
-void ReceiveNextReport(void)
-{
-	/* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM);
-
-	/* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint contains a packet */
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-	{
-		/* Check to see if the packet contains data */
-		if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-		{
-			/* Read in the LED report from the host */
-			uint8_t LEDReport = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-
-			/* Process the read LED report from the host */
-			ProcessLEDReport(LEDReport);
-		}
-
-		/* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */
-void HID_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-	  
-	/* Send the next keypress report to the host */
-	SendNextReport();
-		
-	/* Process the LED report sent from the host */
-	ReceiveNextReport();
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Keyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "Keyboard.h"
+
+/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot
+ *  protocol reporting mode.
+ */
+bool UsingReportProtocol = true;
+
+/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports
+ *  for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user presses a key).
+ */
+uint16_t IdleCount = 500;
+
+/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle
+ *  milliseconds. This is separate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request 
+ *  the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved.
+ */
+uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Default to report protocol on connect */
+	UsingReportProtocol = true;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard device endpoints.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{	
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	/* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
+ *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+	
+				/* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */
+				CreateKeyboardReport(&KeyboardReportData);
+
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
+				
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+		
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				/* Read in the LED report from the host */
+				uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+
+				/* Process the incoming LED report */
+				ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus);
+			
+				/* Clear the endpoint data */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Write the current protocol flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol);
+				
+				/* Send the flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */
+				UsingReportProtocol = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != 0);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Get idle period in MSB, IdleCount must be multiplied by 4 to get number of milliseconds */
+				IdleCount = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF00) >> 6);
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{		
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Write the current idle duration to the host, must be divided by 4 before sent to host */
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount >> 2);
+				
+				/* Send the flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	/* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */
+	if (IdleMSRemaining)
+	  IdleMSRemaining--;
+}
+
+/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
+ */
+void CreateKeyboardReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL     = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL  = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	uint8_t UsedKeyCodes      = 0;
+
+	/* Clear the report contents */
+	memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t));
+	
+	/* Make sent key uppercase by indicating that the left shift key is pressed */
+	ReportData->Modifier = KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT;
+	
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x04; // A
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x05; // B
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x06; // C
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x07; // D
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x08; // E
+	  
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = 0x09; // F
+}
+
+/** Processes a received LED report, and updates the board LEDs states to match.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LEDReport  LED status report from the host
+ */
+void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2;
+	
+	if (LEDReport & KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+	
+	if (LEDReport & KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (LEDReport & KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+	/* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Sends the next HID report to the host, via the keyboard data endpoint. */
+void SendNextReport(void)
+{
+	static USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t PrevKeyboardReportData;
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t        KeyboardReportData;
+	bool                             SendReport = true;
+	
+	/* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */
+	CreateKeyboardReport(&KeyboardReportData);
+	
+	/* Check to see if the report data has changed - if so a report MUST be sent */
+	SendReport = (memcmp(&PrevKeyboardReportData, &KeyboardReportData, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)) != 0);
+	
+	/* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */
+	if ((IdleCount != HID_IDLE_CHANGESONLY) && (!(IdleMSRemaining)))
+	{
+		/* Reset the idle time remaining counter */
+		IdleMSRemaining = IdleCount;
+		
+		/* Idle period is set and has elapsed, must send a report to the host */
+		SendReport = true;
+	}
+	
+	/* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write and if we should send a new report */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport)
+	{
+		/* Save the current report data for later comparison to check for changes */
+		PrevKeyboardReportData = KeyboardReportData;
+	
+		/* Write Keyboard Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
+		
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Reads the next LED status report from the host from the LED data endpoint, if one has been sent. */
+void ReceiveNextReport(void)
+{
+	/* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint contains a packet */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		/* Check to see if the packet contains data */
+		if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			/* Read in the LED report from the host */
+			uint8_t LEDReport = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+
+			/* Process the read LED report from the host */
+			ProcessLEDReport(LEDReport);
+		}
+
+		/* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */
+void HID_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+	  
+	/* Send the next keypress report to the host */
+	SendNextReport();
+		
+	/* Process the LED report sent from the host */
+	ReceiveNextReport();
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.h
index f41f6d4c3..d88b2def3 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.h
@@ -1,152 +1,152 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Keyboard.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_
-#define _KEYBOARD_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Idle period indicating that reports should be sent only when the inputs have changed */
-		#define HID_IDLE_CHANGESONLY        0
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
-		#define REQ_GetReport               0x01
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */
-		#define REQ_GetIdle                 0x02
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
-		#define REQ_SetReport               0x09
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */
-		#define REQ_SetIdle                 0x0A
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
-		#define REQ_GetProtocol             0x03
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
-		#define REQ_SetProtocol             0x0B
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left control key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTCTRL   (1 << 0)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left shift key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT  (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left alt key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTALT    (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left GUI key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTGUI    (1 << 3)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right control key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTCTRL  (1 << 4)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right shift key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTSHIFT (1 << 5)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right alt key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTALT   (1 << 6)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right GUI key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTGUI   (1 << 7)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's NUM LOCK mode is currently set. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK        (1 << 0)
-		
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's CAPS LOCK mode is currently set. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK       (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's SCROLL LOCK mode is currently set. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK     (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's KATANA mode is currently set. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_LED_KATANA         (1 << 3)
-		
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY        LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
-		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */
-			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */
-			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */
-		} USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void HID_Task(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		void CreateKeyboardReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData);
-		void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport);
-		void SendNextReport(void);
-		void ReceiveNextReport(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+      Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Keyboard.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Idle period indicating that reports should be sent only when the inputs have changed */
+		#define HID_IDLE_CHANGESONLY        0
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
+		#define REQ_GetReport               0x01
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */
+		#define REQ_GetIdle                 0x02
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetReport               0x09
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetIdle                 0x0A
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+		#define REQ_GetProtocol             0x03
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+		#define REQ_SetProtocol             0x0B
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left control key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTCTRL   (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left shift key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT  (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left alt key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTALT    (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left GUI key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTGUI    (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right control key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTCTRL  (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right shift key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTSHIFT (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right alt key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTALT   (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right GUI key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTGUI   (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's NUM LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK        (1 << 0)
+		
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's CAPS LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK       (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's SCROLL LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK     (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's KATANA mode is currently set. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_LED_KATANA         (1 << 3)
+		
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY        LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */
+			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */
+			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */
+		} USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void HID_Task(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		void CreateKeyboardReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData);
+		void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport);
+		void SendNextReport(void);
+		void ReceiveNextReport(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt
index fb6ffefa3..04012222c 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Keyboard Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description:
- *
- *  Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
- *  for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
- *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus
- *  works under compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a keyboard 
- *  when the USB connection to a host is present. To use the keyboard example,
- *  manipulate the joystick to send the letters a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID
- *  documentation for more information on sending keyboard event and key presses. Unlike
- *  other LUFA Keyboard demos, this example shows explicitly how to send multiple keypresses
- *  inside the same report to the host.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *  
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
+ *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus
+ *  works under compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a keyboard 
+ *  when the USB connection to a host is present. To use the keyboard example,
+ *  manipulate the joystick to send the letters a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID
+ *  documentation for more information on sending keyboard event and key presses. Unlike
+ *  other LUFA Keyboard demos, this example shows explicitly how to send multiple keypresses
+ *  inside the same report to the host.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *  
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/makefile
index 0043e38ab..87ae1bd93 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = Keyboard
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Keyboard
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c
index 80eac90f3..e09e3c857 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,354 +1,354 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- *
- *  This descriptor describes the mouse HID interface's report structure.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
-	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                                   */
-	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
-	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                               */
-	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Physical)                         */
-	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                            */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                             */
-	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                         */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)                    */
-	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)                    */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                         */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                         */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)            */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                            */
-	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                             */
-	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                            */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                             */
-	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                            */
-	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control)        */
-	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                                     */
-	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                                     */
-	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)                      */
-	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                       */
-	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)            */
-	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                                */
-	0xC0,                /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Same as the MouseReport structure, but defines the keyboard HID interface's report structure. */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
-	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
-	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
-	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
-	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x05,          /*   Report Count (5)                              */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x05, 0x08,          /*   Usage Page (LEDs)                             */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*   Usage Minimum (Num Lock)                      */
-	0x29, 0x05,          /*   Usage Maximum (Kana)                          */
-	0x91, 0x02,          /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x03,          /*   Report Size (3)                               */
-	0x91, 0x03,          /*   Output (Const, Variable, Absolute)            */
-	0x95, 0x06,          /*   Report Count (6)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
-	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
-	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
-	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
-	0xC0                 /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204D,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID1_KeyboardInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID1_KeyboardHID = 
-		{  
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-			
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
-		},
-		
-	.HID1_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		},
-
-	.HID1_ReportOUTEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		},
-
-	.HID2_MouseInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x01,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = 0x02,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID2_MouseHID = 
-		{  
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-			
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
-		},
-		
-	.HID2_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(28), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mouse and Keyboard Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			if (!(wIndex))
-			{
-				Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID1_KeyboardHID;
-				Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID2_MouseHID;
-				Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);			
-			}
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			if (!(wIndex))
-			{
-				Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
-				Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
-			}
-			else
-			{			
-				Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
-				Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ *
+ *  This descriptor describes the mouse HID interface's report structure.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
+	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                                   */
+	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
+	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                               */
+	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Physical)                         */
+	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                            */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                             */
+	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                         */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)                    */
+	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)                    */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                         */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                         */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)            */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                            */
+	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                             */
+	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                            */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                             */
+	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                            */
+	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control)        */
+	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                                     */
+	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                                     */
+	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)                      */
+	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                       */
+	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)            */
+	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                                */
+	0xC0,                /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Same as the MouseReport structure, but defines the keyboard HID interface's report structure. */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
+	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
+	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
+	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
+	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x05,          /*   Report Count (5)                              */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x05, 0x08,          /*   Usage Page (LEDs)                             */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*   Usage Minimum (Num Lock)                      */
+	0x29, 0x05,          /*   Usage Maximum (Kana)                          */
+	0x91, 0x02,          /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x03,          /*   Report Size (3)                               */
+	0x91, 0x03,          /*   Output (Const, Variable, Absolute)            */
+	0x95, 0x06,          /*   Report Count (6)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
+	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
+	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
+	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
+	0xC0                 /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204D,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID1_KeyboardInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID1_KeyboardHID = 
+		{  
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+		
+	.HID1_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+
+	.HID1_ReportOUTEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+
+	.HID2_MouseInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x01,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = 0x02,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID2_MouseHID = 
+		{  
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+		
+	.HID2_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(28), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mouse and Keyboard Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			if (!(wIndex))
+			{
+				Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID1_KeyboardHID;
+				Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID2_MouseHID;
+				Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);			
+			}
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			if (!(wIndex))
+			{
+				Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
+				Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			}
+			else
+			{			
+				Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
+				Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h
index f72212533..f23ef3696 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,104 +1,104 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
-		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t               Header;
-				
-			uint16_t                              HIDSpec;
-			uint8_t                               CountryCode;
-		
-			uint8_t                               TotalReportDescriptors;
-
-			uint8_t                               HIDReportType;
-			uint16_t                              HIDReportLength;
-		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
-		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID1_KeyboardInterface;
-			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID1_KeyboardHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID1_ReportINEndpoint;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID1_ReportOUTEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID2_MouseInterface;
-			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID2_MouseHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID2_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM         1
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM        2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define MOUSE_IN_EPNUM            3
-
-		/** Size in bytes of each of the HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define HID_EPSIZE                8
-
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
-		
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t               Header;
+				
+			uint16_t                              HIDSpec;
+			uint8_t                               CountryCode;
+		
+			uint8_t                               TotalReportDescriptors;
+
+			uint8_t                               HIDReportType;
+			uint16_t                              HIDReportLength;
+		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID1_KeyboardInterface;
+			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID1_KeyboardHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID1_ReportINEndpoint;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID1_ReportOUTEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID2_MouseInterface;
+			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID2_MouseHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID2_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM         1
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM        2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_IN_EPNUM            3
+
+		/** Size in bytes of each of the HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define HID_EPSIZE                8
+
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
+		
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf
index 4f7695ec2..ce0a890e4 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Keyboard/Mouse Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Keyboard/Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c
index ddcd3ce8e..03d6799f5 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c
@@ -1,324 +1,324 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-	  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the KeyboardMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "KeyboardMouse.h"
-
-/** Global structure to hold the current keyboard interface HID report, for transmission to the host */
-USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
-
-/** Global structure to hold the current mouse interface HID report, for transmission to the host */
-USB_MouseReport_Data_t    MouseReportData;
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Keyboard_HID_Task();
-		Mouse_HID_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management task.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard and mouse device endpoints.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup Keyboard Report Endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	/* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, HID_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-
-	/* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
- *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	uint8_t* ReportData;
-	uint8_t  ReportSize;
-
-	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetReport:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-	
-				/* Determine if it is the mouse or the keyboard data that is being requested */
-				if (!(USB_ControlRequest.wIndex))
-				{
-					ReportData = (uint8_t*)&KeyboardReportData;
-					ReportSize = sizeof(KeyboardReportData);
-				}
-				else
-				{
-					ReportData = (uint8_t*)&MouseReportData;
-					ReportSize = sizeof(MouseReportData);
-				}
-
-				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ReportData, ReportSize);
-
-				/* Clear the report data afterwards */
-				memset(ReportData, 0, ReportSize);
-				
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			}
-		
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetReport:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */
-				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-				{
-					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-					  return;
-				}
-
-				/* Read in and process the LED report from the host */
-				Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-
-				/* Clear the endpoint data */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Processes a given Keyboard LED report from the host, and sets the board LEDs to match. Since the Keyboard
- *  LED report can be sent through either the control endpoint (via a HID SetReport request) or the HID OUT
- *  endpoint, the processing code is placed here to avoid duplicating it and potentially having different
- *  behaviour depending on the method used to sent it.
- */
-void Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(const uint8_t LEDStatus)
-{
-	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2;
-	
-	if (LEDStatus & KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
-	
-	if (LEDStatus & KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
-
-	if (LEDStatus & KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
-	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
-
-	/* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-}
-
-/** Keyboard task. This generates the next keyboard HID report for the host, and transmits it via the
- *  keyboard IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data. Additionally, it processes host LED status
- *  reports sent to the device via the keyboard OUT reporting endpoint.
- */
-void Keyboard_HID_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
-
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Check if board button is not pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */
-	if (!(Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
-	{
-		/* Make sent key uppercase by indicating that the left shift key is pressed */
-		KeyboardReportData.Modifier = KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT;
-
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A
-		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B
-
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C
-		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D
-
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E
-	}
-
-	/* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM);
-
-	/* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{
-		/* Write Keyboard Report Data */
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
-
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-		/* Clear the report data afterwards */
-		memset(&KeyboardReportData, 0, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
-	}
-
-	/* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM);
-
-	/* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{		
-		/* Read in and process the LED report from the host */
-		Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-
-		/* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Mouse task. This generates the next mouse HID report for the host, and transmits it via the
- *  mouse IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data.
- */
-void Mouse_HID_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
-
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Check if board button is pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */
-	if (Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	{
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-		  MouseReportData.Y =  1;
-		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-		  MouseReportData.Y = -1;
-
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-		  MouseReportData.X =  1;
-		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-		  MouseReportData.X = -1;
-
-		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-		  MouseReportData.Button  = (1 << 0);
-	}
-
-	/* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPNUM);
-
-	/* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{
-		/* Write Mouse Report Data */
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData));
-
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-		/* Clear the report data afterwards */
-		memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData));
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+	  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "KeyboardMouse.h"
+
+/** Global structure to hold the current keyboard interface HID report, for transmission to the host */
+USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
+
+/** Global structure to hold the current mouse interface HID report, for transmission to the host */
+USB_MouseReport_Data_t    MouseReportData;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Keyboard_HID_Task();
+		Mouse_HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management task.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard and mouse device endpoints.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup Keyboard Report Endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	/* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, HID_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+
+	/* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
+ *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	uint8_t* ReportData;
+	uint8_t  ReportSize;
+
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+	
+				/* Determine if it is the mouse or the keyboard data that is being requested */
+				if (!(USB_ControlRequest.wIndex))
+				{
+					ReportData = (uint8_t*)&KeyboardReportData;
+					ReportSize = sizeof(KeyboardReportData);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					ReportData = (uint8_t*)&MouseReportData;
+					ReportSize = sizeof(MouseReportData);
+				}
+
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ReportData, ReportSize);
+
+				/* Clear the report data afterwards */
+				memset(ReportData, 0, ReportSize);
+				
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+		
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				/* Read in and process the LED report from the host */
+				Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+
+				/* Clear the endpoint data */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes a given Keyboard LED report from the host, and sets the board LEDs to match. Since the Keyboard
+ *  LED report can be sent through either the control endpoint (via a HID SetReport request) or the HID OUT
+ *  endpoint, the processing code is placed here to avoid duplicating it and potentially having different
+ *  behaviour depending on the method used to sent it.
+ */
+void Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(const uint8_t LEDStatus)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2;
+	
+	if (LEDStatus & KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+	
+	if (LEDStatus & KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (LEDStatus & KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+	/* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Keyboard task. This generates the next keyboard HID report for the host, and transmits it via the
+ *  keyboard IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data. Additionally, it processes host LED status
+ *  reports sent to the device via the keyboard OUT reporting endpoint.
+ */
+void Keyboard_HID_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Check if board button is not pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */
+	if (!(Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
+	{
+		/* Make sent key uppercase by indicating that the left shift key is pressed */
+		KeyboardReportData.Modifier = KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		/* Write Keyboard Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Clear the report data afterwards */
+		memset(&KeyboardReportData, 0, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{		
+		/* Read in and process the LED report from the host */
+		Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+
+		/* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Mouse task. This generates the next mouse HID report for the host, and transmits it via the
+ *  mouse IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data.
+ */
+void Mouse_HID_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Check if board button is pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */
+	if (Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	{
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+		  MouseReportData.Y =  1;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+		  MouseReportData.Y = -1;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+		  MouseReportData.X =  1;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+		  MouseReportData.X = -1;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+		  MouseReportData.Button  = (1 << 0);
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		/* Write Mouse Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Clear the report data afterwards */
+		memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h
index 993b326a2..565fa57ac 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h
@@ -1,145 +1,145 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
-#define _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
-		#define REQ_GetReport               0x01
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
-		#define REQ_SetReport               0x09
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
-		#define REQ_GetProtocol             0x03
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
-		#define REQ_SetProtocol             0x0B
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left control key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTCTRL   (1 << 0)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left shift key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT  (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left alt key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTALT    (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left GUI key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTGUI    (1 << 3)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right control key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTCTRL  (1 << 4)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right shift key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTSHIFT (1 << 5)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right alt key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTALT   (1 << 6)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right GUI key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTGUI   (1 << 7)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's NUM LOCK mode is currently set. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK        (1 << 0)
-		
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's CAPS LOCK mode is currently set. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK       (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's SCROLL LOCK mode is currently set. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK     (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's KATANA mode is currently set. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_LED_KATANA         (1 << 3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY        LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
-		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */
-			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */
-			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */
-		} USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
-		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */
-			int8_t  X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
-			int8_t  Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
-		} USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
-			
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(const uint8_t LEDStatus);
-		void Keyboard_HID_Task(void);
-		void Mouse_HID_Task(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
+		#define REQ_GetReport               0x01
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetReport               0x09
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+		#define REQ_GetProtocol             0x03
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+		#define REQ_SetProtocol             0x0B
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left control key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTCTRL   (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left shift key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT  (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left alt key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTALT    (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left GUI key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTGUI    (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right control key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTCTRL  (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right shift key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTSHIFT (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right alt key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTALT   (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right GUI key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTGUI   (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's NUM LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK        (1 << 0)
+		
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's CAPS LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK       (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's SCROLL LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK     (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's KATANA mode is currently set. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_LED_KATANA         (1 << 3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY        LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */
+			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */
+			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */
+		} USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */
+			int8_t  X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			int8_t  Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+		} USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
+			
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(const uint8_t LEDStatus);
+		void Keyboard_HID_Task(void);
+		void Mouse_HID_Task(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt
index f1a4c509b..6f24efe53 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Dual HID Keyboard and Mouse Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Keyboard/Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a composite device containing both USB Keyboard
- *  and USB Mouse functionality using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes
- *  (i.e. no special drivers required). This example uses two separate HID
- *  interfaces for each function. It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works under
- *  compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard and mouse (e.g. PS/2).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
- *  as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present and the HWB is not
- *  pressed. When enabled, manipulate the joystick to send the letters
- *  a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information
- *  on sending keyboard event and key presses.
- *  
- *  When the HWB is pressed, the mouse mode is enabled. When enabled, move the
- *  joystick to move the pointer, and push the joystick inwards to simulate a
- *  left-button click.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Dual HID Keyboard and Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Keyboard/Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a composite device containing both USB Keyboard
+ *  and USB Mouse functionality using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes
+ *  (i.e. no special drivers required). This example uses two separate HID
+ *  interfaces for each function. It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works under
+ *  compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard and mouse (e.g. PS/2).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present and the HWB is not
+ *  pressed. When enabled, manipulate the joystick to send the letters
+ *  a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information
+ *  on sending keyboard event and key presses.
+ *  
+ *  When the HWB is pressed, the mouse mode is enabled. When enabled, move the
+ *  joystick to move the pointer, and push the joystick inwards to simulate a
+ *  left-button click.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/makefile
index 40d8f41c1..f7c39c957 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = KeyboardMouse
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = KeyboardMouse
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.c
index 4edcb5e87..cc1f2efd9 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,326 +1,326 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
- 
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2048,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
-
-			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR			
-		},
-	
-	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
-			
-			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t),
-			
-			.InCollection             = 1,
-			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},			
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x03,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_MIDI_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-
-			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-			
-			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
-			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
-			.JackID                   = 0x01,
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
-			.JackID                   = 0x02,
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
-			.JackID                   = 0x03,
-
-			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
-			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
-			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
-			.JackID                   = 0x04,
-
-			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
-			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
-			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint = 
-		{
-			.Endpoint = 
-				{
-					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM),
-					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
-				},
-			
-			.Refresh                  = 0,
-			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
-		},
-		
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-
-			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
-			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01}
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint = 
-		{
-			.Endpoint = 
-				{
-					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM),
-					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
-				},
-			
-			.Refresh                  = 0,
-			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
-		},
-		
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-
-			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
-			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x03}
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA MIDI Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2048,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR			
+		},
+	
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
+			
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t),
+			
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},			
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x03,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_MIDI_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+			
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
+			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
+			.JackID                   = 0x01,
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
+			.JackID                   = 0x02,
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
+			.JackID                   = 0x03,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
+			.JackID                   = 0x04,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint = 
+		{
+			.Endpoint = 
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM),
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
+				},
+			
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+		
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01}
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint = 
+		{
+			.Endpoint = 
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM),
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
+				},
+			
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+		
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x03}
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA MIDI Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.h
index fffe866d4..672d08a01 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,189 +1,189 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_AudioInterface        0x24
-
-		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint         0x25
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_Header             0x01
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI input jack descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_InputJack          0x02
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI output jack descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_OutputJack         0x03
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_General            0x01
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an embedded (logical) MIDI input or output jack. */
-		#define JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED           0x01
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an external (physical) MIDI input or output jack. */
-		#define JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL           0x02
-		
-		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
-		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM       1
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
-		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM        2
-
-		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
-		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
-		 *  details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint16_t                  ACSpecification; /** Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
-			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /** Total length of the Audio class specific control descriptors, including this descriptor */
-			
-			uint8_t                   InCollection; /** Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
-			uint8_t                   InterfaceNumbers[1]; /** Interface numbers of each audio interface */
-		} USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
-		 *  how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class specific descriptors.
-		 *  See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint16_t                  AudioSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
-			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
-		} USB_Audio_Interface_MIDI_AS_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint 
-		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
-
-			uint8_t                   Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
-			uint8_t                   SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
-		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;
-
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either
-		 *  a physical input jack, or a logical jack (receiving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint).
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint8_t                   JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */
-			uint8_t                   JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */
-			
-			uint8_t                   JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t;
-
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either
-		 *  a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint).
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint8_t                   JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */
-			uint8_t                   JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */
-			
-			uint8_t                   NumberOfPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical */
-			uint8_t                   SourceJackID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack */
-			uint8_t                   SourcePinID[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data */
-			
-			uint8_t                   JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for an Audio class specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
-		 *  on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
-		 *  class specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint8_t                   TotalEmbeddedJacks; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint */
-			uint8_t                   AssociatedJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint */
-		} USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_MIDI_AS_t         Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
-			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
-			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
-			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
-			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
-			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
-			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_AudioInterface        0x24
+
+		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint         0x25
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_Header             0x01
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI input jack descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_InputJack          0x02
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI output jack descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_OutputJack         0x03
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_General            0x01
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an embedded (logical) MIDI input or output jack. */
+		#define JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED           0x01
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an external (physical) MIDI input or output jack. */
+		#define JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL           0x02
+		
+		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM       1
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM        2
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
+		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
+		 *  details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint16_t                  ACSpecification; /** Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
+			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /** Total length of the Audio class specific control descriptors, including this descriptor */
+			
+			uint8_t                   InCollection; /** Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
+			uint8_t                   InterfaceNumbers[1]; /** Interface numbers of each audio interface */
+		} USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+		 *  how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class specific descriptors.
+		 *  See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint16_t                  AudioSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
+			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
+		} USB_Audio_Interface_MIDI_AS_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint 
+		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
+
+			uint8_t                   Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
+			uint8_t                   SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
+		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;
+
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either
+		 *  a physical input jack, or a logical jack (receiving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint).
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint8_t                   JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */
+			uint8_t                   JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */
+			
+			uint8_t                   JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t;
+
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either
+		 *  a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint).
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint8_t                   JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */
+			uint8_t                   JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */
+			
+			uint8_t                   NumberOfPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical */
+			uint8_t                   SourceJackID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack */
+			uint8_t                   SourcePinID[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data */
+			
+			uint8_t                   JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for an Audio class specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+		 *  on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+		 *  class specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint8_t                   TotalEmbeddedJacks; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint */
+			uint8_t                   AssociatedJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint */
+		} USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_MIDI_AS_t         Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Doxygen.conf
index a551c26dd..f40442cac 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.c
index 03536b2c5..a9843ed8c 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.c
@@ -1,217 +1,217 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MIDI input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "MIDI.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		MIDI_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and MIDI management tasks.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the MIDI management task started.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup MIDI stream endpoints */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}	
-	
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Task to handle the generation of MIDI note change events in response to presses of the board joystick, and send them
- *  to the host.
- */
-void MIDI_Task(void)
-{
-	static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
-
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM);
-
-	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
-	{
-		uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
-		uint8_t MIDIPitch;
-	
-		uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
-		uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
-		
-		/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
-		uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
-
-		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
-		{
-			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-			MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
-		}
-
-		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
-		{
-			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-			MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
-		}
-
-		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
-		{
-			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-			MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
-		}
-		
-		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
-		{
-			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-			MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
-		}
-
-		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
-		{
-			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-			MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
-		}
-
-		/* Check if a MIDI command is to be sent */
-		if (MIDICommand)
-		{
-			USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t)
-				{
-					.CableNumber = 0,
-					.Command     = (MIDICommand >> 4),
-					
-					.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
-					.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
-					.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,			
-				};
-				
-			/* Write the MIDI event packet to the endpoint */
-			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent));
-		
-			/* Send the data in the endpoint to the host */
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		}
-		
-		/* Save previous joystick value for next joystick change detection */
-		PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
-	}
-
-	/* Select the MIDI OUT stream */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM);
-
-	/* Check if a MIDI command has been received */
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-	{
-		USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent;
-			
-		/* Read the MIDI event packet from the endpoint */
-		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent));
-	
-		/* Check to see if the sent command is a note on message with a non-zero velocity */
-		if ((MIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON >> 4)) && (MIDIEvent.Data3 > 0))
-		{
-			/* Change LEDs depending on the pitch of the sent note */
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(MIDIEvent.Data2 > 64 ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Turn off all LEDs in response to non Note On messages */
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
-		}
-	
-		/* Clear the endpoint ready for new packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDI input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MIDI.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MIDI_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and MIDI management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the MIDI management task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup MIDI stream endpoints */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}	
+	
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to handle the generation of MIDI note change events in response to presses of the board joystick, and send them
+ *  to the host.
+ */
+void MIDI_Task(void)
+{
+	static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
+
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+	{
+		uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
+		uint8_t MIDIPitch;
+	
+		uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
+		uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
+		
+		/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
+		uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
+		}
+		
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
+		}
+
+		/* Check if a MIDI command is to be sent */
+		if (MIDICommand)
+		{
+			USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t)
+				{
+					.CableNumber = 0,
+					.Command     = (MIDICommand >> 4),
+					
+					.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
+					.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
+					.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,			
+				};
+				
+			/* Write the MIDI event packet to the endpoint */
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent));
+		
+			/* Send the data in the endpoint to the host */
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+		
+		/* Save previous joystick value for next joystick change detection */
+		PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
+	}
+
+	/* Select the MIDI OUT stream */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Check if a MIDI command has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent;
+			
+		/* Read the MIDI event packet from the endpoint */
+		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent));
+	
+		/* Check to see if the sent command is a note on message with a non-zero velocity */
+		if ((MIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON >> 4)) && (MIDIEvent.Data3 > 0))
+		{
+			/* Change LEDs depending on the pitch of the sent note */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(MIDIEvent.Data2 > 64 ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Turn off all LEDs in response to non Note On messages */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+		}
+	
+		/* Clear the endpoint ready for new packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.h
index a49752729..72512f706 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.h
@@ -1,103 +1,103 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-				
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-
-   /* Macros: */
-		/** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event */
-		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON      0x90
-
-		/** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event */
-		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF     0x80
-
-		/** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events, as no pressure sensor is mounted */
-		#define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY    64
-		
-		/** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel
-		 *  addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] channel  MIDI channel number to address
-		 */
-		#define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel)    ((channel) - 1)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a USB MIDI event packet, used to encapsulate sent and received MIDI messages from a USB MIDI interface. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			unsigned char Command     : 4; /**< MIDI command being sent or received in the event packet */
-			unsigned char CableNumber : 4; /**< Virtual cable number of the event being sent or received in the given MIDI interface */
-			
-			uint8_t Data1; /**< First byte of data in the MIDI event */
-			uint8_t Data2; /**< Second byte of data in the MIDI event */
-			uint8_t Data3; /**< Third byte of data in the MIDI event */		
-		} USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t;
-		
-   /* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void MIDI_Task(void);
-   
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+				
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+
+   /* Macros: */
+		/** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON      0x90
+
+		/** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF     0x80
+
+		/** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events, as no pressure sensor is mounted */
+		#define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY    64
+		
+		/** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel
+		 *  addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] channel  MIDI channel number to address
+		 */
+		#define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel)    ((channel) - 1)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a USB MIDI event packet, used to encapsulate sent and received MIDI messages from a USB MIDI interface. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned char Command     : 4; /**< MIDI command being sent or received in the event packet */
+			unsigned char CableNumber : 4; /**< Virtual cable number of the event being sent or received in the given MIDI interface */
+			
+			uint8_t Data1; /**< First byte of data in the MIDI event */
+			uint8_t Data2; /**< Second byte of data in the MIDI event */
+			uint8_t Data3; /**< Third byte of data in the MIDI event */		
+		} USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t;
+		
+   /* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MIDI_Task(void);
+   
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.txt
index 7fbfd171a..56aeec419 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.txt
@@ -1,74 +1,74 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage MIDI Input Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Audio Class</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
- *        USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n
- *        General MIDI Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  MIDI demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing the USB-MIDI class in USB devices.
- *  It is built upon the USB Audio class.
- *  
- *  Joystick movements are translated into note on/off messages and
- *  are sent to the host PC as MIDI streams which can be read by any
- *  MIDI program supporting MIDI IN devices.
- *  
- *  If the HWB is not pressed, channel 1 (default piano) is used. If
- *  the HWB is set, then channel 10 (default percussion) is selected.
- *  
- *  This device implements MIDI-THRU mode, with the IN MIDI data being
- *  generated by the device itself. OUT MIDI data is discarded.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage MIDI Input Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n
+ *        General MIDI Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  MIDI demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing the USB-MIDI class in USB devices.
+ *  It is built upon the USB Audio class.
+ *  
+ *  Joystick movements are translated into note on/off messages and
+ *  are sent to the host PC as MIDI streams which can be read by any
+ *  MIDI program supporting MIDI IN devices.
+ *  
+ *  If the HWB is not pressed, channel 1 (default piano) is used. If
+ *  the HWB is set, then channel 10 (default percussion) is selected.
+ *  
+ *  This device implements MIDI-THRU mode, with the IN MIDI data being
+ *  generated by the device itself. OUT MIDI data is discarded.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/makefile
index c2bbad6a9..40e8f885c 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MIDI
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MIDI
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
index 856d408ca..d7d41c5bb 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,217 +1,217 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2045,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.MS_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x08,
-			.SubClass               = 0x06,
-			.Protocol               = 0x50,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(22), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mass Storage Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2045,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.MS_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x08,
+			.SubClass               = 0x06,
+			.Protocol               = 0x50,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(22), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mass Storage Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
index dae06061e..6d468f6bf 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,71 +1,71 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          3	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         4	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */		
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */		
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf
index bd89e3c09..5d4f094a3 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
index 4bfe7573a..aedfcc715 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -1,523 +1,523 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
- *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
- *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
- *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
-#include "DataflashManager.h"
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
- *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-				
-				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
-			}
-
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;			
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-				
-				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-			
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-	
-	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
- *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
- *  dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
-			}
-			
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
- *  the files stored on the dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
-void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
-{
-	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	
-	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
- */
-bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnByte;
-
-	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-	#endif
-	
-	return true;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;			
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+			
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+	
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+			
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	
+	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+	
+	return true;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
index 92a0a8add..6fcf3916f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -1,78 +1,78 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		
-		#include "MassStorage.h"
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
-			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Defines: */
-		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
-
-		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
-		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
-		
-		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
-		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
-		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		
+		#include "MassStorage.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+		
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
index 1f1190609..10e6bc4a7 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -1,293 +1,293 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
- *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
- *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
-#include "SCSI.h"
-
-/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
- *  features and capabilities.
- */
-SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
-	{
-		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
-		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
-			
-		.Removable           = true,
-			
-		.Version             = 0,
-			
-		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
-		.NormACA             = false,
-		.TrmTsk              = false,
-		.AERC                = false,
-
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
-			
-		.SoftReset           = false,
-		.CmdQue              = false,
-		.Linked              = false,
-		.Sync                = false,
-		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
-		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
-		.RelAddr             = false,
-		
-		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
-		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
-		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
-	};
-
-/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
- *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
- */
-SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
-	{
-		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
-	};
-
-
-/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
- *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
- *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise
- */
-bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void)
-{
-	/* Set initial sense data, before the requested command is processed */
-	SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
-	               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-	               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
-	switch (CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
-	{
-		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
-			SCSI_Command_Inquiry();			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
-			SCSI_Command_Request_Sense();
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
-			SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10();			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
-			SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic();
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
-			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_WRITE);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
-			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_READ);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
-		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
-		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
-			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
-			CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-			break;
-		default:
-			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
-			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	return (SenseData.SenseKey == SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD);
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
- *  and capabilities to the host.
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void)
-{
-	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
-	                                         CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
-	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
-	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
-
-	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
-	if ((CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
-	     CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
-	{
-		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the INQUIRY data to the endpoint */
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
-
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-	
-	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
-
-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
- *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  AllocationLength = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
-	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
-	
-	/* Send the SENSE data - this indicates to the host the status of the last command */
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
-	
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-	
-	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
-
-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
- *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void)
-{
-	/* Send the total number of logical blocks in the current LUN */
-	Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
-
-	/* Send the logical block size of the device (must be 512 bytes) */
-	Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
-
-	/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-	if (IsMassStoreReset)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Send the endpoint data packet to the host */
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
- *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
- *  supported.
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void)
-{
-	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
-	if (!(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
-	{
-		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
-	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
-	{
-		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
-	
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
- *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
- *  reading and writing of the data.
- *
- *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead)
-{
-	uint32_t BlockAddress;
-	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
-	
-	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */
-	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[3] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2];
-	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[2] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3];
-	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[1] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
-	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[0] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[5];
-
-	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */
-	((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[1]  = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7];
-	((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[0]  = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[8];
-	
-	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
-	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
-	{
-		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-
-	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
-	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
-	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
-	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
-	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-	else
-	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-
-	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
-	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+			
+		.Removable           = true,
+			
+		.Version             = 0,
+			
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+			
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+		
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void)
+{
+	/* Set initial sense data, before the requested command is processed */
+	SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+	               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+	               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			SCSI_Command_Inquiry();			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			SCSI_Command_Request_Sense();
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10();			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic();
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	return (SenseData.SenseKey == SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD);
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
+	                                         CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
+	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the INQUIRY data to the endpoint */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+	
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
+	
+	/* Send the SENSE data - this indicates to the host the status of the last command */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+	
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+	
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void)
+{
+	/* Send the total number of logical blocks in the current LUN */
+	Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+
+	/* Send the logical block size of the device (must be 512 bytes) */
+	Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+	if (IsMassStoreReset)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Send the endpoint data packet to the host */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
+	
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+	
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */
+	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[3] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2];
+	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[2] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3];
+	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[1] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[0] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[5];
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */
+	((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[1]  = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7];
+	((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[0]  = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[8];
+	
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
+	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
+	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
index a9b5248e4..b4b61580e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -1,149 +1,149 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for SCSI.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _SCSI_H_
-#define _SCSI_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-
-		#include "MassStorage.h"
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "DataflashManager.h"
-		#include "SCSI_Codes.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
-		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
-		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
-		 */
-		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = (key);              \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (acode); \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (aqual); }MACROE
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_READ           true
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_WRITE          false
-
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
-		
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a SCSI response structure to a SCSI INQUIRY command. For details of the
-		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			unsigned char DeviceType          : 5;
-			unsigned char PeripheralQualifier : 3;
-			
-			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 7;
-			unsigned char Removable           : 1;
-			
-			uint8_t       Version;
-			
-			unsigned char ResponseDataFormat  : 4;
-			unsigned char _RESERVED2          : 1;
-			unsigned char NormACA             : 1;
-			unsigned char TrmTsk              : 1;
-			unsigned char AERC                : 1;
-
-			uint8_t       AdditionalLength;
-			uint8_t       _RESERVED3[2];
-
-			unsigned char SoftReset           : 1;
-			unsigned char CmdQue              : 1;
-			unsigned char _RESERVED4          : 1;
-			unsigned char Linked              : 1;
-			unsigned char Sync                : 1;
-			unsigned char WideBus16Bit        : 1;
-			unsigned char WideBus32Bit        : 1;
-			unsigned char RelAddr             : 1;
-			
-			uint8_t       VendorID[8];
-			uint8_t       ProductID[16];
-			uint8_t       RevisionID[4];
-		} SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a SCSI sense structure to a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. For details of the
-		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       ResponseCode;
-			
-			uint8_t       SegmentNumber;
-			
-			unsigned char SenseKey            : 4;
-			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 1;
-			unsigned char ILI                 : 1;
-			unsigned char EOM                 : 1;
-			unsigned char FileMark            : 1;
-			
-			uint8_t       Information[4];
-			uint8_t       AdditionalLength;
-			uint8_t       CmdSpecificInformation[4];
-			uint8_t       AdditionalSenseCode;
-			uint8_t       AdditionalSenseQualifier;
-			uint8_t       FieldReplaceableUnitCode;
-			uint8_t       SenseKeySpecific[3];
-		} SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
-			static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void);
-			static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+		#include "MassStorage.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "SCSI_Codes.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = (key);              \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (acode); \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (aqual); }MACROE
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+		
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a SCSI response structure to a SCSI INQUIRY command. For details of the
+		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned char DeviceType          : 5;
+			unsigned char PeripheralQualifier : 3;
+			
+			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 7;
+			unsigned char Removable           : 1;
+			
+			uint8_t       Version;
+			
+			unsigned char ResponseDataFormat  : 4;
+			unsigned char _RESERVED2          : 1;
+			unsigned char NormACA             : 1;
+			unsigned char TrmTsk              : 1;
+			unsigned char AERC                : 1;
+
+			uint8_t       AdditionalLength;
+			uint8_t       _RESERVED3[2];
+
+			unsigned char SoftReset           : 1;
+			unsigned char CmdQue              : 1;
+			unsigned char _RESERVED4          : 1;
+			unsigned char Linked              : 1;
+			unsigned char Sync                : 1;
+			unsigned char WideBus16Bit        : 1;
+			unsigned char WideBus32Bit        : 1;
+			unsigned char RelAddr             : 1;
+			
+			uint8_t       VendorID[8];
+			uint8_t       ProductID[16];
+			uint8_t       RevisionID[4];
+		} SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a SCSI sense structure to a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. For details of the
+		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       ResponseCode;
+			
+			uint8_t       SegmentNumber;
+			
+			unsigned char SenseKey            : 4;
+			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 1;
+			unsigned char ILI                 : 1;
+			unsigned char EOM                 : 1;
+			unsigned char FileMark            : 1;
+			
+			uint8_t       Information[4];
+			uint8_t       AdditionalLength;
+			uint8_t       CmdSpecificInformation[4];
+			uint8_t       AdditionalSenseCode;
+			uint8_t       AdditionalSenseQualifier;
+			uint8_t       FieldReplaceableUnitCode;
+			uint8_t       SenseKeySpecific[3];
+		} SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void);
+			static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
index 62af9996f..5b6b76ac8 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to
- *  the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and
- *  the SENSE data.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_
-#define _SCSI_CODES_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                               0x12
-		#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE                         0x03
-		#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY                       0x00
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10                      0x25
-		#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC                       0x1D
-		#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL          0x1E
-		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10                              0x2A
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                               0x28
-		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                               0x0A
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                                0x08
-		#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10                             0x2F
-		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6                          0x1A
-		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10                         0x5A
-
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD                            0x00
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR                 0x01
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY                       0x02
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR                    0x03
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR                  0x04
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST                 0x05
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION                  0x06
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT                    0x07
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK                     0x08
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC                 0x09
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED                    0x0A
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND                 0x0B
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW                 0x0D
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE                      0x0E
-
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION          0x00
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY             0x04
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB               0x24
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED                    0x27
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR                       0x31
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND                    0x20
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT                 0x3A
-
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER                      0x00
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED             0x01
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED     0x02
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS             0x07
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to
+ *  the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and
+ *  the SENSE data.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_
+#define _SCSI_CODES_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                               0x12
+		#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE                         0x03
+		#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY                       0x00
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10                      0x25
+		#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC                       0x1D
+		#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL          0x1E
+		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10                              0x2A
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                               0x28
+		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                               0x0A
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                                0x08
+		#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10                             0x2F
+		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6                          0x1A
+		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10                         0x5A
+
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD                            0x00
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR                 0x01
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY                       0x02
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR                    0x03
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR                  0x04
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST                 0x05
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION                  0x06
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT                    0x07
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK                     0x08
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC                 0x09
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED                    0x0A
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND                 0x0B
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW                 0x0D
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE                      0x0E
+
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION          0x00
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY             0x04
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB               0x24
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED                    0x27
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR                       0x31
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND                    0x20
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT                 0x3A
+
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER                      0x00
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED             0x01
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED     0x02
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS             0x07
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.c
index 1ed84d326..9f13ff927 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.c
@@ -1,336 +1,336 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Mass Storage demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C
-#include "MassStorage.h"
-
-/** Structure to hold the latest Command Block Wrapper issued by the host, containing a SCSI command to execute. */
-CommandBlockWrapper_t  CommandBlock;
-
-/** Structure to hold the latest Command Status Wrapper to return to the host, containing the status of the last issued command. */
-CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus = { .Signature = CSW_SIGNATURE };
-
-/** Flag to asynchronously abort any in-progress data transfers upon the reception of a mass storage reset command. */
-volatile bool          IsMassStoreReset = false;
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		MassStorage_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
-	Dataflash_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-
-	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
-	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-	
-	/* Reset the MSReset flag upon connection */
-	IsMassStoreReset = false;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs and stops the Mass Storage management task.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the Mass Storage management task started.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup Mass Storage In and Out Endpoints */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}							   
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Mass Storage class-specific
- *  requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Process UFI specific control requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_MassStorageReset:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				/* Indicate that the current transfer should be aborted */
-				IsMassStoreReset = true;
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetMaxLUN:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				/* Indicate to the host the number of supported LUNs (virtual disks) on the device */
-				Endpoint_Write_Byte(TOTAL_LUNS - 1);
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Task to manage the Mass Storage interface, reading in Command Block Wrappers from the host, processing the SCSI commands they
- *  contain, and returning Command Status Wrappers back to the host to indicate the success or failure of the last issued command.
- */
-void MassStorage_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-	  
-	/* Select the Data Out Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Check to see if a command from the host has been issued */
-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{
-		/* Indicate busy */
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
-		/* Process sent command block from the host */
-		if (ReadInCommandBlock())
-		{
-			/* Check direction of command, select Data IN endpoint if data is from the device */
-			if (CommandBlock.Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN)
-			  Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
-
-			/* Decode the received SCSI command, set returned status code */
-			CommandStatus.Status = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand() ? Command_Pass : Command_Fail;		
-
-			/* Load in the CBW tag into the CSW to link them together */
-			CommandStatus.Tag = CommandBlock.Tag;
-
-			/* Load in the data residue counter into the CSW */
-			CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue = CommandBlock.DataTransferLength;
-			
-			/* Stall the selected data pipe if command failed (if data is still to be transferred) */
-			if ((CommandStatus.Status == Command_Fail) && (CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue))
-			  Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-
-			/* Return command status block to the host */
-			ReturnCommandStatus();
-
-			/* Indicate ready */
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Indicate error reading in the command block from the host */
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Check if a Mass Storage Reset occurred */
-	if (IsMassStoreReset)
-	{
-		/* Reset the data endpoint banks */
-		Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
-		Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
-		
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
-		Endpoint_ClearStall();
-		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
-		Endpoint_ClearStall();
-		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
-
-		/* Clear the abort transfer flag */
-		IsMassStoreReset = false;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Function to read in a command block from the host, via the bulk data OUT endpoint. This function reads in the next command block
- *  if one has been issued, and performs validation to ensure that the block command is valid.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if a valid command block has been read in from the endpoint, false otherwise
- */
-static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void)
-{
-	/* Select the Data Out endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
-
-	/* Read in command block header */
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock, (sizeof(CommandBlock) - sizeof(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData)),
-	                        StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
-
-	/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-	if (IsMassStoreReset)
-	  return false;
-
-	/* Verify the command block - abort if invalid */
-	if ((CommandBlock.Signature         != CBW_SIGNATURE) ||
-	    (CommandBlock.LUN               >= TOTAL_LUNS)    ||
-		(CommandBlock.Flags              & 0x1F)          ||
-		(CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength == 0)             ||
-		(CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength >  MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH))
-	{
-		/* Stall both data pipes until reset by host */
-		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
-		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-		
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/* Read in command block command data */
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock.SCSICommandData,
-	                        CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength,
-	                        StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
-	  
-	/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-	if (IsMassStoreReset)
-	  return false;
-
-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Returns the filled Command Status Wrapper back to the host via the bulk data IN endpoint, waiting for the host to clear any
- *  stalled data endpoints as needed.
- */
-static void ReturnCommandStatus(void)
-{
-	/* Select the Data Out endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
-
-	/* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */
-	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
-	{
-		/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-		if (IsMassStoreReset)
-		  return;
-	}
-
-	/* Select the Data In endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
-
-	/* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */
-	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
-	{
-		/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-		if (IsMassStoreReset)
-		  return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Write the CSW to the endpoint */
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&CommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatus),
-	                          StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
-	
-	/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-	if (IsMassStoreReset)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Stream callback function for the Endpoint stream read and write functions. This callback will abort the current stream transfer
- *  if a Mass Storage Reset request has been issued to the control endpoint.
- */
-uint8_t StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset(void)
-{	
-	/* Abort if a Mass Storage reset command was received */
-	if (IsMassStoreReset)
-	  return STREAMCALLBACK_Abort;
-	
-	/* Continue with the current stream operation */
-	return STREAMCALLBACK_Continue;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Mass Storage demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C
+#include "MassStorage.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the latest Command Block Wrapper issued by the host, containing a SCSI command to execute. */
+CommandBlockWrapper_t  CommandBlock;
+
+/** Structure to hold the latest Command Status Wrapper to return to the host, containing the status of the last issued command. */
+CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus = { .Signature = CSW_SIGNATURE };
+
+/** Flag to asynchronously abort any in-progress data transfers upon the reception of a mass storage reset command. */
+volatile bool          IsMassStoreReset = false;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MassStorage_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+	
+	/* Reset the MSReset flag upon connection */
+	IsMassStoreReset = false;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the Mass Storage management task.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the Mass Storage management task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup Mass Storage In and Out Endpoints */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}							   
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Mass Storage class-specific
+ *  requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process UFI specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_MassStorageReset:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Indicate that the current transfer should be aborted */
+				IsMassStoreReset = true;
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetMaxLUN:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Indicate to the host the number of supported LUNs (virtual disks) on the device */
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(TOTAL_LUNS - 1);
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to manage the Mass Storage interface, reading in Command Block Wrappers from the host, processing the SCSI commands they
+ *  contain, and returning Command Status Wrappers back to the host to indicate the success or failure of the last issued command.
+ */
+void MassStorage_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+	  
+	/* Select the Data Out Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Check to see if a command from the host has been issued */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		/* Indicate busy */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		/* Process sent command block from the host */
+		if (ReadInCommandBlock())
+		{
+			/* Check direction of command, select Data IN endpoint if data is from the device */
+			if (CommandBlock.Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN)
+			  Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
+
+			/* Decode the received SCSI command, set returned status code */
+			CommandStatus.Status = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand() ? Command_Pass : Command_Fail;		
+
+			/* Load in the CBW tag into the CSW to link them together */
+			CommandStatus.Tag = CommandBlock.Tag;
+
+			/* Load in the data residue counter into the CSW */
+			CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue = CommandBlock.DataTransferLength;
+			
+			/* Stall the selected data pipe if command failed (if data is still to be transferred) */
+			if ((CommandStatus.Status == Command_Fail) && (CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue))
+			  Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+
+			/* Return command status block to the host */
+			ReturnCommandStatus();
+
+			/* Indicate ready */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Indicate error reading in the command block from the host */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if a Mass Storage Reset occurred */
+	if (IsMassStoreReset)
+	{
+		/* Reset the data endpoint banks */
+		Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
+		Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
+		
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
+		Endpoint_ClearStall();
+		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
+		Endpoint_ClearStall();
+		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+
+		/* Clear the abort transfer flag */
+		IsMassStoreReset = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to read in a command block from the host, via the bulk data OUT endpoint. This function reads in the next command block
+ *  if one has been issued, and performs validation to ensure that the block command is valid.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if a valid command block has been read in from the endpoint, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void)
+{
+	/* Select the Data Out endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Read in command block header */
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock, (sizeof(CommandBlock) - sizeof(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData)),
+	                        StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+	/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+	if (IsMassStoreReset)
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Verify the command block - abort if invalid */
+	if ((CommandBlock.Signature         != CBW_SIGNATURE) ||
+	    (CommandBlock.LUN               >= TOTAL_LUNS)    ||
+		(CommandBlock.Flags              & 0x1F)          ||
+		(CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength == 0)             ||
+		(CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength >  MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH))
+	{
+		/* Stall both data pipes until reset by host */
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+		
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Read in command block command data */
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock.SCSICommandData,
+	                        CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength,
+	                        StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+	  
+	/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+	if (IsMassStoreReset)
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Returns the filled Command Status Wrapper back to the host via the bulk data IN endpoint, waiting for the host to clear any
+ *  stalled data endpoints as needed.
+ */
+static void ReturnCommandStatus(void)
+{
+	/* Select the Data Out endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
+
+	/* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */
+	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+	{
+		/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+		if (IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Data In endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
+
+	/* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */
+	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+	{
+		/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+		if (IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Write the CSW to the endpoint */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&CommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatus),
+	                          StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+	
+	/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+	if (IsMassStoreReset)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Stream callback function for the Endpoint stream read and write functions. This callback will abort the current stream transfer
+ *  if a Mass Storage Reset request has been issued to the control endpoint.
+ */
+uint8_t StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset(void)
+{	
+	/* Abort if a Mass Storage reset command was received */
+	if (IsMassStoreReset)
+	  return STREAMCALLBACK_Abort;
+	
+	/* Continue with the current stream operation */
+	return STREAMCALLBACK_Continue;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.h
index 27d1e3b00..a0b23b979 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.h
@@ -1,152 +1,152 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MassStorage.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_H_
-#define _MASS_STORAGE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
-		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Mass Storage Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface, ready for the next command. */
-		#define REQ_MassStorageReset       0xFF
-
-		/** Mass Storage Class specific request to retrieve the total number of Logical Units (drives) in the SCSI device. */
-		#define REQ_GetMaxLUN              0xFE
-
-		/** Maximum length of a SCSI command which can be issued by the device or host in a Mass Storage bulk wrapper. */
-		#define MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH    16
-		
-		/** Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between
-		 *  each drive - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.
-		 */
-		#define TOTAL_LUNS                 1
-		
-		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
-		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS           (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)    
-		
-		/** Magic signature for a Command Block Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
-		#define CBW_SIGNATURE              0x43425355UL
-
-		/** Magic signature for a Command Status Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
-		#define CSW_SIGNATURE              0x53425355UL
-		
-		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from host-to-device. */
-		#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT (0 << 7)
-
-		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from device-to-host. */
-		#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN  (1 << 7)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY       LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING   (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY         (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY           LEDS_LED2
-		
-	/* Type defines: */
-		/** Type define for a Command Block Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, must be CBW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Block */
-			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */
-			uint32_t DataTransferLength; /** Length of the optional data portion of the issued command, in bytes */
-			uint8_t  Flags; /**< Command block flags, indicating command data direction */
-			uint8_t  LUN; /**< Logical Unit number this command is issued to */
-			uint8_t  SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the issued SCSI command within the SCSI command data array */
-			uint8_t  SCSICommandData[MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH]; /**< Issued SCSI command in the Command Block */
-		} CommandBlockWrapper_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a Command Status Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t Signature; /**< Status block signature, must be CSW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Status */
-			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */
-			uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Number of bytes of data not processed in the SCSI command */
-			uint8_t  Status; /**< Status code of the issued command - a value from the MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */
-		} CommandStatusWrapper_t;
-		
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible command status wrapper return status codes. */
-		enum MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t
-		{
-			Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed with no error */
-			Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete - host may check the exact error via a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command */
-			Phase_Error  = 2  /**< Command failed due to being invalid in the current phase */
-		};
-		
-	/* Global Variables: */
-		extern CommandBlockWrapper_t  CommandBlock;
-		extern CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus;
-		extern volatile bool          IsMassStoreReset;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void MassStorage_Task(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C)
-			static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void);
-			static void ReturnCommandStatus(void);
-		#endif
-
-		uint8_t StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStorage.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_H_
+#define _MASS_STORAGE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Mass Storage Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface, ready for the next command. */
+		#define REQ_MassStorageReset       0xFF
+
+		/** Mass Storage Class specific request to retrieve the total number of Logical Units (drives) in the SCSI device. */
+		#define REQ_GetMaxLUN              0xFE
+
+		/** Maximum length of a SCSI command which can be issued by the device or host in a Mass Storage bulk wrapper. */
+		#define MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH    16
+		
+		/** Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between
+		 *  each drive - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.
+		 */
+		#define TOTAL_LUNS                 1
+		
+		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
+		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS           (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)    
+		
+		/** Magic signature for a Command Block Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
+		#define CBW_SIGNATURE              0x43425355UL
+
+		/** Magic signature for a Command Status Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
+		#define CSW_SIGNATURE              0x53425355UL
+		
+		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from host-to-device. */
+		#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT (0 << 7)
+
+		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from device-to-host. */
+		#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN  (1 << 7)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY       LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING   (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY         (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY           LEDS_LED2
+		
+	/* Type defines: */
+		/** Type define for a Command Block Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, must be CBW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Block */
+			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */
+			uint32_t DataTransferLength; /** Length of the optional data portion of the issued command, in bytes */
+			uint8_t  Flags; /**< Command block flags, indicating command data direction */
+			uint8_t  LUN; /**< Logical Unit number this command is issued to */
+			uint8_t  SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the issued SCSI command within the SCSI command data array */
+			uint8_t  SCSICommandData[MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH]; /**< Issued SCSI command in the Command Block */
+		} CommandBlockWrapper_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a Command Status Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t Signature; /**< Status block signature, must be CSW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Status */
+			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */
+			uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Number of bytes of data not processed in the SCSI command */
+			uint8_t  Status; /**< Status code of the issued command - a value from the MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */
+		} CommandStatusWrapper_t;
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible command status wrapper return status codes. */
+		enum MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t
+		{
+			Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed with no error */
+			Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete - host may check the exact error via a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command */
+			Phase_Error  = 2  /**< Command failed due to being invalid in the current phase */
+		};
+		
+	/* Global Variables: */
+		extern CommandBlockWrapper_t  CommandBlock;
+		extern CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus;
+		extern volatile bool          IsMassStoreReset;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MassStorage_Task(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C)
+			static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void);
+			static void ReturnCommandStatus(void);
+		#endif
+
+		uint8_t StreamCallback_AbortOnMassStoreReset(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt
index 7f4a83b9f..3489ca033 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt
@@ -1,92 +1,92 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mass Storage Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
- *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
- *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
- *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Dual LUN Mass Storage demonstration application. This gives a simple
- *  reference application for implementing a multiple LUN USB Mass Storage
- *  device using the basic USB UFI drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no
- *  special drivers required).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as an
- *  external mass storage device with two LUNs (separate disks) which may
- *  be formatted and used in the same manner as commercial USB Mass Storage
- *  devices.
- *  	
- *  You will need to format the mass storage drives upon first run of this
- *  demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between
- *  the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used,
- *  as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device.
- *  
- *  This demo is not restricted to only two LUNs; by changing the TOTAL_LUNS
- *  value in MassStorageDualLUN.h, any number of LUNs can be used (from 1 to
- *  255), with each LUN being allocated an equal portion of the available
- *  Dataflash memory.
- *
- *  The USB control endpoint is managed entirely by the library using endpoint
- *  interrupts, as the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT option is enabled. This allows for
- *  the host to reset the Mass Storage device state during long transfers without
- *  the need for complicated polling logic.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
- *    <td>MassStorage.h</td>
- *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive
- *        - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Dual LUN Mass Storage demonstration application. This gives a simple
+ *  reference application for implementing a multiple LUN USB Mass Storage
+ *  device using the basic USB UFI drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no
+ *  special drivers required).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as an
+ *  external mass storage device with two LUNs (separate disks) which may
+ *  be formatted and used in the same manner as commercial USB Mass Storage
+ *  devices.
+ *  	
+ *  You will need to format the mass storage drives upon first run of this
+ *  demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between
+ *  the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used,
+ *  as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device.
+ *  
+ *  This demo is not restricted to only two LUNs; by changing the TOTAL_LUNS
+ *  value in MassStorageDualLUN.h, any number of LUNs can be used (from 1 to
+ *  255), with each LUN being allocated an equal portion of the available
+ *  Dataflash memory.
+ *
+ *  The USB control endpoint is managed entirely by the library using endpoint
+ *  interrupts, as the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT option is enabled. This allows for
+ *  the host to reset the Mass Storage device state during long transfers without
+ *  the need for complicated polling logic.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
+ *    <td>MassStorage.h</td>
+ *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive
+ *        - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/makefile
index cc962792e..54691e533 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/makefile
@@ -1,739 +1,739 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MassStorage
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY 
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-LUFA_OPTS += -D INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
-	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MassStorage
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY 
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+LUFA_OPTS += -D INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.c
index 52e0a8cb2..f7fc2f714 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,251 +1,251 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)             */
-	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                            */
-	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                 */
-	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                        */
-	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Application)               */
-	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                     */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                      */
-	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                  */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)             */
-	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)             */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                  */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                  */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)     */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                     */
-	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                      */
-	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                     */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                      */
-	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                     */
-	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */
-	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                              */
-	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                              */
-	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)               */
-	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                */
-	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)     */
-	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                         */
-	0xC0                 /* End Collection                           */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2041,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = 0x02,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_MouseHID = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-									 
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		}	
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(15), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mouse Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration:
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String:
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00:
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01:
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02:
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;		
-	return Size;
-}
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)             */
+	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                            */
+	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                 */
+	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                        */
+	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Application)               */
+	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                     */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                      */
+	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                  */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)             */
+	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)             */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                  */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                  */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)     */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                     */
+	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                      */
+	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                     */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                      */
+	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                     */
+	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */
+	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                              */
+	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                              */
+	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)               */
+	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                */
+	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)     */
+	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                         */
+	0xC0                 /* End Collection                           */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2041,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = 0x02,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_MouseHID = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+									 
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		}	
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(15), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mouse Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;		
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.h
index f31fdd41e..21c394ff1 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,93 +1,93 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
-		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
-				
-			uint16_t                HIDSpec;
-			uint8_t                 CountryCode;
-		
-			uint8_t                 TotalReportDescriptors;
-
-			uint8_t                 HIDReportType;
-			uint16_t                HIDReportLength;
-		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
-		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID_MouseHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define MOUSE_EPNUM               1
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE              8
-
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
-		
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
+				
+			uint16_t                HIDSpec;
+			uint8_t                 CountryCode;
+		
+			uint8_t                 TotalReportDescriptors;
+
+			uint8_t                 HIDReportType;
+			uint16_t                HIDReportLength;
+		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  HID_MouseHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPNUM               1
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE              8
+
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
+		
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Doxygen.conf
index d90b43076..ef8bb45fc 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.c
index 3fce52210..7e38e7afd 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.c
@@ -1,308 +1,308 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Mouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "Mouse.h"
-
-/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot
- *  protocol reporting mode.
- */
-bool UsingReportProtocol = true;
-
-/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports
- *  for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse).
- */
-uint16_t IdleCount = HID_IDLE_CHANGESONLY;
-
-/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle
- *  milliseconds. This is separate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request 
- *  the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved.
- */
-uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0;
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Mouse_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-
-	/* Default to report protocol on connect */
-	UsingReportProtocol = true;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and Mouse reporting tasks.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the mouse reporting task started.
- */ 
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	
-	/* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MOUSE_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
- *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetReport:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData;
-
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				/* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */
-				CreateMouseReport(&MouseReportData);
-	
-				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData));
-				
-				/* Clear the report data afterwards */
-				memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData));
-
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			}
-		
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetProtocol:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Write the current protocol flag to the host */
-				Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol);
-				
-				/* Send the flag to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetProtocol:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */
-				UsingReportProtocol = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != 0);
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetIdle:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Get idle period in MSB, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */
-				IdleCount = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF00) >> 6);
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetIdle:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{		
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Write the current idle duration to the host, must be divided by 4 before sent to host */
-				Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount >> 2);
-				
-				/* Send the flag to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-	/* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */
-	if (IdleMSRemaining)
-	  IdleMSRemaining--;
-}
-
-/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
- *
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
- */
-void CreateMouseReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData)
-{
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
-	
-	/* Clear the report contents */
-	memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t));
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  ReportData->Y = -1;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  ReportData->Y =  1;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  ReportData->X = -1;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  ReportData->X = 1;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  ReportData->Button  = (1 << 0);
-	  
-	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	  ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1);
-}
-
-/** Sends the next HID report to the host, via the keyboard data endpoint. */
-void SendNextReport(void)
-{
-	static USB_MouseReport_Data_t PrevMouseReportData;
-	USB_MouseReport_Data_t        MouseReportData;
-	bool                          SendReport;
-	
-	/* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */
-	CreateMouseReport(&MouseReportData);
-	
-	/* Check to see if the report data has changed - if so a report MUST be sent */
-	SendReport = (memcmp(&PrevMouseReportData, &MouseReportData, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)) != 0);
-	
-	/* Override the check if the Y or X values are non-zero - we want continuous movement while the joystick
-	 * is being held down (via continuous reports), otherwise the cursor will only move once per joystick toggle */
-	if ((MouseReportData.Y != 0) || (MouseReportData.X != 0))
-	  SendReport = true;
-	
-	/* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */
-	if ((IdleCount != HID_IDLE_CHANGESONLY) && (!(IdleMSRemaining)))
-	{
-		/* Reset the idle time remaining counter */
-		IdleMSRemaining = IdleCount;
-		
-		/* Idle period is set and has elapsed, must send a report to the host */
-		SendReport = true;
-	}
-	
-	/* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM);
-
-	/* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write and if we should send a new report */
-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport)
-	{	
-		/* Save the current report data for later comparison to check for changes */
-		PrevMouseReportData = MouseReportData;
-
-		/* Write Mouse Report Data */
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData));
-		
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Task to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */
-void Mouse_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-	  
-	/* Send the next mouse report to the host */
-	SendNextReport();
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Mouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "Mouse.h"
+
+/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot
+ *  protocol reporting mode.
+ */
+bool UsingReportProtocol = true;
+
+/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports
+ *  for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse).
+ */
+uint16_t IdleCount = HID_IDLE_CHANGESONLY;
+
+/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle
+ *  milliseconds. This is separate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request 
+ *  the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved.
+ */
+uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Mouse_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Default to report protocol on connect */
+	UsingReportProtocol = true;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and Mouse reporting tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the mouse reporting task started.
+ */ 
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	
+	/* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
+ *  all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData;
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */
+				CreateMouseReport(&MouseReportData);
+	
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+				
+				/* Clear the report data afterwards */
+				memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+		
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Write the current protocol flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol);
+				
+				/* Send the flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */
+				UsingReportProtocol = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != 0);
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Get idle period in MSB, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */
+				IdleCount = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF00) >> 6);
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{		
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Write the current idle duration to the host, must be divided by 4 before sent to host */
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount >> 2);
+				
+				/* Send the flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	/* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */
+	if (IdleMSRemaining)
+	  IdleMSRemaining--;
+}
+
+/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
+ */
+void CreateMouseReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+	
+	/* Clear the report contents */
+	memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t));
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportData->Y = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportData->Y =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportData->X = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportData->X = 1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportData->Button  = (1 << 0);
+	  
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1);
+}
+
+/** Sends the next HID report to the host, via the keyboard data endpoint. */
+void SendNextReport(void)
+{
+	static USB_MouseReport_Data_t PrevMouseReportData;
+	USB_MouseReport_Data_t        MouseReportData;
+	bool                          SendReport;
+	
+	/* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */
+	CreateMouseReport(&MouseReportData);
+	
+	/* Check to see if the report data has changed - if so a report MUST be sent */
+	SendReport = (memcmp(&PrevMouseReportData, &MouseReportData, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)) != 0);
+	
+	/* Override the check if the Y or X values are non-zero - we want continuous movement while the joystick
+	 * is being held down (via continuous reports), otherwise the cursor will only move once per joystick toggle */
+	if ((MouseReportData.Y != 0) || (MouseReportData.X != 0))
+	  SendReport = true;
+	
+	/* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */
+	if ((IdleCount != HID_IDLE_CHANGESONLY) && (!(IdleMSRemaining)))
+	{
+		/* Reset the idle time remaining counter */
+		IdleMSRemaining = IdleCount;
+		
+		/* Idle period is set and has elapsed, must send a report to the host */
+		SendReport = true;
+	}
+	
+	/* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write and if we should send a new report */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport)
+	{	
+		/* Save the current report data for later comparison to check for changes */
+		PrevMouseReportData = MouseReportData;
+
+		/* Write Mouse Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+		
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */
+void Mouse_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+	  
+	/* Send the next mouse report to the host */
+	SendNextReport();
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.h
index 6a1a518fb..e818f8005 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.h
@@ -1,112 +1,112 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Mouse.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MOUSE_H_
-#define _MOUSE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Idle period indicating that reports should be sent only when the inputs have changed */
-		#define HID_IDLE_CHANGESONLY      0
-	
-		/** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
-		#define REQ_GetReport             0x01
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */
-		#define REQ_GetIdle               0x02
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
-		#define REQ_SetReport             0x09
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */
-		#define REQ_SetIdle               0x0A
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
-		#define REQ_GetProtocol           0x03
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
-		#define REQ_SetProtocol           0x0B
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
-		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */
-			int8_t  X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
-			int8_t  Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
-		} USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
-			
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void Mouse_Task(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		void CreateMouseReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Mouse.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_H_
+#define _MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Idle period indicating that reports should be sent only when the inputs have changed */
+		#define HID_IDLE_CHANGESONLY      0
+	
+		/** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
+		#define REQ_GetReport             0x01
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */
+		#define REQ_GetIdle               0x02
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetReport             0x09
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetIdle               0x0A
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+		#define REQ_GetProtocol           0x03
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+		#define REQ_SetProtocol           0x0B
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */
+			int8_t  X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			int8_t  Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+		} USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
+			
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void Mouse_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		void CreateMouseReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.txt
index 1e88e42c0..faa4a4b29 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.txt
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mouse Device Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID
- *  drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is
- *  boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if
- *  it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2).
- *  
- *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
- *  as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
- *  the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the
- *  joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as
- *  the right mouse button.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID
+ *  drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is
+ *  boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if
+ *  it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2).
+ *  
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
+ *  the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the
+ *  joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as
+ *  the right mouse button.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/makefile
index d63e08a73..e01119462 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = Mouse
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
- 
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Mouse
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+ 
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
index ff3dcccb0..9e6910bf1 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,255 +1,255 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
- 
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x02,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204C,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0xFF,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_Header = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00}
-		},
-	
-	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x02
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(19), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String:
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00:
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01:
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02:
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x02,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204C,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0xFF,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00}
+		},
+	
+	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x02
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(19), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
index 1840669f2..31fd77766 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
-		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
-		 *  a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
-		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
-		 */		
-		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
-		     struct                                        \
-		     {                                             \
-		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
-			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
-		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
-		     }
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         3
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   1	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   2	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Header;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
+		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
+		 *  a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
+		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
+		 */		
+		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
+		     struct                                        \
+		     {                                             \
+		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
+			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
+		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
+		     }
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         3
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   1	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   2	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Header;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf
index f3e37be65..2cd90c3f6 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
index a124afec1..47dbf236d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
@@ -1,52 +1,52 @@
-;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-[Version]
-Signature           = "$Windows NT$"
-Class               = Net
-ClassGUID           = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
-Provider            = %COMPANY%
-DriverVer           = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384
-;CatalogFile        = device.cat
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%COMPANY%         = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64
-
-; Decoration for x86 architecture
-[RndisDevices.NTx86]
-%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
-
-; Decoration for x64 architecture
-[RndisDevices.NTamd64]
-%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
-
-; Decoration for ia64 architecture
-[RndisDevices.NTia64]
-%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
-
-;@@@ This is the common setting for setup
-[ControlFlags]
-ExcludeFromSelect=*
-
-; DDInstall section
-; References the in-build Netrndis.inf
-[RNDIS.NT.5.1]
-Characteristics = 0x84   ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
-BusType         = 15
-; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF
-include         = netrndis.inf
-needs           = Usb_Rndis.ndi
-AddReg          = Rndis_AddReg_Vista
-
-; DDInstal.Services section
-[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services]
-include     = netrndis.inf
-needs       = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
-
-; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build 
-; (part of the operating system).
-
-; Modify these strings for your device as needed.
-[Strings] 
-COMPANY="LUFA Library"
+;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[Version]
+Signature           = "$Windows NT$"
+Class               = Net
+ClassGUID           = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
+Provider            = %COMPANY%
+DriverVer           = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384
+;CatalogFile        = device.cat
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%COMPANY%         = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64
+
+; Decoration for x86 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTx86]
+%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+; Decoration for x64 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTamd64]
+%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+; Decoration for ia64 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTia64]
+%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+;@@@ This is the common setting for setup
+[ControlFlags]
+ExcludeFromSelect=*
+
+; DDInstall section
+; References the in-build Netrndis.inf
+[RNDIS.NT.5.1]
+Characteristics = 0x84   ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
+BusType         = 15
+; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF
+include         = netrndis.inf
+needs           = Usb_Rndis.ndi
+AddReg          = Rndis_AddReg_Vista
+
+; DDInstal.Services section
+[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services]
+include     = netrndis.inf
+needs       = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
+
+; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build 
+; (part of the operating system).
+
+; Modify these strings for your device as needed.
+[Strings] 
+COMPANY="LUFA Library"
 RNDISDEV="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
index dc2f4a8ea..6eb74faff 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the
- *  conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the
- *  device.
- */
- 
-#include "ARP.h"
-
-/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the
- *  virtual server device on the network.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ARP header
- *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
- */
-int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
-{
-	DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart);
-
-	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN  = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
-
-	/* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */
-	if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) &&
-	    (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST))
-	{
-		/* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */
-		if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) || 
-		    MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress))
-		{
-			/* Fill out the ARP response header */
-			ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->Operation    = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY);
-
-			/* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */
-			ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA;
-
-			/* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */
-			ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress;
-			ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress;
-
-			/* Return the size of the response so far */
-			return sizeof(ARP_Header_t);
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return NO_RESPONSE;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the
+ *  conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the
+ *  device.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ARP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the
+ *  virtual server device on the network.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ARP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN  = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	/* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */
+	if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) &&
+	    (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST))
+	{
+		/* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */
+		if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) || 
+		    MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress))
+		{
+			/* Fill out the ARP response header */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->Operation    = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY);
+
+			/* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA;
+
+			/* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress;
+
+			/* Return the size of the response so far */
+			return sizeof(ARP_Header_t);
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
index 93409babc..fce77969d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
@@ -1,74 +1,74 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ARP.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _ARP_H_
-#define _ARP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation */
-		#define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST            1
-
-		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation */
-		#define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY              2
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */
-			uint16_t      ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */
-			
-			uint8_t       HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */
-			uint8_t       PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */
-			uint16_t      Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */
-			
-			MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */
-			IP_Address_t  SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */
-			MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */
-			IP_Address_t  TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */
-		} ARP_Header_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ARP.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _ARP_H_
+#define _ARP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation */
+		#define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST            1
+
+		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation */
+		#define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY              2
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */
+			uint16_t      ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */
+			
+			uint8_t       HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */
+			uint8_t       PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */
+			uint16_t      Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */
+			
+			MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */
+			IP_Address_t  SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */
+			MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */
+			IP_Address_t  TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */
+		} ARP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
index fd255e248..d3bffe996 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
@@ -1,118 +1,118 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol
- *  handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided
- *  IP address given to it by the device.
- */
- 
-#include "DHCP.h"
-
-/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address.
- *
- *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart      Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
- *  \param[in] DHCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's DHCP header
- *  \param[out] DHCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
- */
-int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart)
-{
-	IP_Header_t*   IPHeaderIN    = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
-	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN  = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart;
-	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart;
-	
-	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart  = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderInStart  + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-
-	DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart);
-
-	/* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it legacy and left at 0 */
-	memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-
-	/* Fill out the response DHCP packet */
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType          = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops                  = 0;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID         = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags                 = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags;
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP                = ClientIPAddress;
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie                = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE);
-	
-	/* Alter the incoming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that
-	   when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */
-	IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress      = ClientIPAddress;
-	IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress;
-
-	/* Process the incoming DHCP packet options */
-	while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
-	{	
-		/* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */
-		if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
-		{
-			if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST))
-			{
-				/* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */
-
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER
-																								: DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK;
-
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00;
-
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER;
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t);
-				memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t));
-				DHCPOptionsOUTStart     += sizeof(IP_Address_t);
-
-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END;
-				
-				return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t));
-			}
-		}
-		
-		/* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */
-		DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2));
-	}
-	
-	return NO_RESPONSE;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol
+ *  handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided
+ *  IP address given to it by the device.
+ */
+ 
+#include "DHCP.h"
+
+/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart      Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] DHCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's DHCP header
+ *  \param[out] DHCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	IP_Header_t*   IPHeaderIN    = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN  = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart;
+	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart;
+	
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart  = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderInStart  + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart);
+
+	/* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it legacy and left at 0 */
+	memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	/* Fill out the response DHCP packet */
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType          = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops                  = 0;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID         = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags                 = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP                = ClientIPAddress;
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie                = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE);
+	
+	/* Alter the incoming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that
+	   when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */
+	IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress      = ClientIPAddress;
+	IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress;
+
+	/* Process the incoming DHCP packet options */
+	while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{	
+		/* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */
+		if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+		{
+			if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST))
+			{
+				/* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER
+																								: DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK;
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00;
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+				memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+				DHCPOptionsOUTStart     += sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+				
+				return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+			}
+		}
+		
+		/* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */
+		DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2));
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
index c4df5b3c7..cacdd8ffd 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
@@ -1,125 +1,125 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DHCP.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DHCP_H_
-#define _DHCP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-	
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server */
-		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
-
-		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host */
-		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
-		
-		/** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier */
-		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       0x01
-		
-		/** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP) */
-		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63825363
-		
-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK    1
-
-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE   53
-
-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER    54
-
-		/** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_PAD           0
-
-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
-			
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER    2
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST  3
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE  4
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK      5
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK     6
-
-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address */
-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE  7
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
-			uint8_t  HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
-			uint8_t  HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
-			uint8_t  Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
-
-			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
-
-			uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
-			uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
-			
-			IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
-			IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
-			IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			
-			uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
-			uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			
-			uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
-		} DHCP_Header_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DHCP.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DHCP_H_
+#define _DHCP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+	
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
+
+		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
+		
+		/** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier */
+		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       0x01
+		
+		/** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP) */
+		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63825363
+		
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK    1
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE   53
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER    54
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_PAD           0
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
+			
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER    2
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST  3
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE  4
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK      5
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK     6
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE  7
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
+			uint8_t  HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
+			uint8_t  HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
+			uint8_t  Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
+
+			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
+
+			uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
+			uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
+			
+			IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
+			IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
+			IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			
+			uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
+			uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			
+			uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
+		} DHCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
index 7084e32e2..7131ac2b0 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
@@ -1,135 +1,135 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet
- *  frames sent and received, deferring the processing of sub-packet protocols to the appropriate
- *  protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP.
- */
- 
-#include "Ethernet.h"
-
-/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the incoming Ethernet frame from the host. */
-Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN;
-
-/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the outgoing Ethernet frame to the host. */
-Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT;
-
-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */
-const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress    = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS};
-
-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */
-const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress     = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS};
-
-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */
-const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS};
-
-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */
-const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress  = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS};
-
-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */
-const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress     = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS};
-
-
-/** Processes an incoming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet
- *  frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response.
- */
-void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void)
-{
-	DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN.FrameData);
-
-	/* Cast the incoming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */
-	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader  = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN.FrameData;
-	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData;
-	
-	int16_t                  RetSize        = NO_RESPONSE;
-	
-	/* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */
-	if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) ||
-	     MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) &&
-		(SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE))
-	{
-		/* Process the packet depending on its protocol */
-		switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType))
-		{
-			case ETHERTYPE_ARP:
-				RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
-				                               &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
-				break;		
-			case ETHERTYPE_IPV4:
-				RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
-				                             &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
-				break;
-		}
-		
-		/* Protocol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */
-		if (RetSize > 0)
-		{
-			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
-			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
-			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = FrameINHeader->Source;
-			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = FrameINHeader->EtherType;
-			
-			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
-			FrameOUT.FrameLength            = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize);
-			FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer          = true;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Check if the packet was processed */
-	if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS)
-	{
-		/* Clear the frame buffer */
-		FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = false;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's
- *  compliment of each word, complimented.
- *
- *  \param[in] Data   Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated
- *  \param[in] Bytes  Number of bytes in the data buffer to process
- *
- *  \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value
- */
-uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes)
-{
-	uint16_t* Words    = (uint16_t*)Data;
-	uint32_t  Checksum = 0;
-
-	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++)
-	  Checksum += Words[CurrWord];
-	  
-	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
-	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
-	
-	return ~Checksum;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet
+ *  frames sent and received, deferring the processing of sub-packet protocols to the appropriate
+ *  protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP.
+ */
+ 
+#include "Ethernet.h"
+
+/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the incoming Ethernet frame from the host. */
+Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN;
+
+/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the outgoing Ethernet frame to the host. */
+Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT;
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress    = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress     = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress  = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress     = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+
+/** Processes an incoming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet
+ *  frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response.
+ */
+void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void)
+{
+	DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN.FrameData);
+
+	/* Cast the incoming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader  = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN.FrameData;
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData;
+	
+	int16_t                  RetSize        = NO_RESPONSE;
+	
+	/* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */
+	if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) ||
+	     MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) &&
+		(SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE))
+	{
+		/* Process the packet depending on its protocol */
+		switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType))
+		{
+			case ETHERTYPE_ARP:
+				RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+				                               &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+				break;		
+			case ETHERTYPE_IPV4:
+				RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+				                             &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+				break;
+		}
+		
+		/* Protocol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */
+		if (RetSize > 0)
+		{
+			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
+			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = FrameINHeader->Source;
+			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = FrameINHeader->EtherType;
+			
+			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+			FrameOUT.FrameLength            = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize);
+			FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer          = true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the packet was processed */
+	if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS)
+	{
+		/* Clear the frame buffer */
+		FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's
+ *  compliment of each word, complimented.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Data   Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated
+ *  \param[in] Bytes  Number of bytes in the data buffer to process
+ *
+ *  \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value
+ */
+uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint16_t* Words    = (uint16_t*)Data;
+	uint32_t  Checksum = 0;
+
+	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++)
+	  Checksum += Words[CurrWord];
+	  
+	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+	
+	return ~Checksum;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
index e546c34dd..4bae3c4df 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
@@ -1,119 +1,119 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Ethernet.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_
-#define _ETHERNET_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-		#include "ICMP.h"
-		#include "TCP.h"
-		#include "UDP.h"
-		#include "DHCP.h"
-		#include "ARP.h"
-		#include "IP.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Physical MAC address of the USB RNDIS network adapter */
-		#define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS              {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}
-	
-		/** Physical MAC address of the virtual server on the network */
-		#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS               {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01}		
-
-		/** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address */
-		#define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS            {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
-	
-		/** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical.
-		 *  
-		 *  \param[in] MAC1  First MAC address
-		 *  \param[in] MAC2  Second MAC address
-		 *
-		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
-		 */
-		#define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2)          (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0)
-
-		/** Maximum size of an incoming or outgoing Ethernet frame in bytes */
-		#define ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX          1500
-		
-		/** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard */
-		#define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE            0x0600
-		
-		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated */
-		#define NO_RESPONSE                      0		
-
-		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled */
-		#define NO_PROCESS                       -1
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame buffer. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       FrameData[ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX]; /**< Ethernet frame contents */
-			uint16_t      FrameLength; /**< Length in bytes of the Ethernet frame stored in the buffer */
-			bool          FrameInBuffer; /**< Indicates if a frame is currently stored in the buffer */
-		} Ethernet_Frame_Info_t;
-
-		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame header */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */
-			MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */
-			
-			union
-			{
-				uint16_t  EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet sub-protocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */
-				uint16_t  Length; /**< Ethernet frame length, for Ethernet V1 packets */
-			};
-		} Ethernet_Frame_Header_t;
-		
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN;
-		extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT;
-
-		extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress;
-		extern const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress;
-		extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress;
-		extern const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress;
-		extern const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void     Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void);
-		uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Ethernet.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "ICMP.h"
+		#include "TCP.h"
+		#include "UDP.h"
+		#include "DHCP.h"
+		#include "ARP.h"
+		#include "IP.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Physical MAC address of the USB RNDIS network adapter */
+		#define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS              {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}
+	
+		/** Physical MAC address of the virtual server on the network */
+		#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS               {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01}		
+
+		/** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address */
+		#define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS            {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+	
+		/** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+		 *  
+		 *  \param[in] MAC1  First MAC address
+		 *  \param[in] MAC2  Second MAC address
+		 *
+		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2)          (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0)
+
+		/** Maximum size of an incoming or outgoing Ethernet frame in bytes */
+		#define ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX          1500
+		
+		/** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard */
+		#define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE            0x0600
+		
+		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated */
+		#define NO_RESPONSE                      0		
+
+		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled */
+		#define NO_PROCESS                       -1
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame buffer. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       FrameData[ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX]; /**< Ethernet frame contents */
+			uint16_t      FrameLength; /**< Length in bytes of the Ethernet frame stored in the buffer */
+			bool          FrameInBuffer; /**< Indicates if a frame is currently stored in the buffer */
+		} Ethernet_Frame_Info_t;
+
+		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame header */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */
+			MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */
+			
+			union
+			{
+				uint16_t  EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet sub-protocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */
+				uint16_t  Length; /**< Ethernet frame length, for Ethernet V1 packets */
+			};
+		} Ethernet_Frame_Header_t;
+		
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN;
+		extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT;
+
+		extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress;
+		extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void     Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void);
+		uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
index c22fe2b24..665e110c4 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
@@ -1,87 +1,87 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by
- *  all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack.
- */
-
-#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
-#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV4                   0x0800
-		#define ETHERTYPE_ARP                    0x0806
-		#define ETHERTYPE_RARP                   0x8035
-		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK              0x809b
-		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP           0x80f3
-		#define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q              0x8100
-		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX              0x8137
-		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL                 0x8138
-		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV6                   0x86DD
-		#define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET               0x8819
-		#define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING       0x88a8
-		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST            0x8847
-		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST          0x8848
-		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY         0x8863
-		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION           0x8864
-		#define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN             0x888E
-		#define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI              0x889A
-		#define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET        0x88A2
-		#define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT               0x88A4
-		#define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII              0x88CD
-		#define ETHERTYPE_CESoE                  0x88D8
-		#define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY            0x88E5
-		#define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL           0x8906
-		#define ETHERTYPE_QINQ                   0x9100
-		#define ETHERTYPE_VLLT                   0xCAFE
-		
-		#define PROTOCOL_ICMP                    1
-		#define PROTOCOL_IGMP                    2
-		#define PROTOCOL_TCP                     6
-		#define PROTOCOL_UDP                     17
-		#define PROTOCOL_OSPF                    89
-		#define PROTOCOL_SCTP                    132
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a physical MAC address of a device on a network */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       Octets[6]; /**< Individual bytes of a MAC address */
-		} MAC_Address_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */
-		} IP_Address_t;
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by
+ *  all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV4                   0x0800
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ARP                    0x0806
+		#define ETHERTYPE_RARP                   0x8035
+		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK              0x809b
+		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP           0x80f3
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q              0x8100
+		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX              0x8137
+		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL                 0x8138
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV6                   0x86DD
+		#define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET               0x8819
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING       0x88a8
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST            0x8847
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST          0x8848
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY         0x8863
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION           0x8864
+		#define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN             0x888E
+		#define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI              0x889A
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET        0x88A2
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT               0x88A4
+		#define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII              0x88CD
+		#define ETHERTYPE_CESoE                  0x88D8
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY            0x88E5
+		#define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL           0x8906
+		#define ETHERTYPE_QINQ                   0x9100
+		#define ETHERTYPE_VLLT                   0xCAFE
+		
+		#define PROTOCOL_ICMP                    1
+		#define PROTOCOL_IGMP                    2
+		#define PROTOCOL_TCP                     6
+		#define PROTOCOL_UDP                     17
+		#define PROTOCOL_OSPF                    89
+		#define PROTOCOL_SCTP                    132
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a physical MAC address of a device on a network */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Octets[6]; /**< Individual bytes of a MAC address */
+		} MAC_Address_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */
+		} IP_Address_t;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
index 6de8ba8e3..02a401f6a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles
- *  Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host
- *  and the virtual server.
- */
- 
-#include "ICMP.h"
-
-/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ICMP header
- *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
- */
-int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
-{
-	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
-
-	DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart);
-
-	/* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */
-	if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST)
-	{
-		/* Fill out the ICMP response packet */
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Type     = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY;
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Code     = 0;
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Id       = ICMPHeaderIN->Id;
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence;
-		
-		uint16_t DataSize = FrameIN.FrameLength - ((((uint16_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (uint16_t)FrameIN.FrameData));
-		
-		/* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */
-		memcpy(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
-		       &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
-			   DataSize);
-
-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)));
-
-		/* Return the size of the response so far */
-		return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t));
-	}
-	
-	return NO_RESPONSE;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles
+ *  Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host
+ *  and the virtual server.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ICMP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ICMP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	/* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */
+	if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the ICMP response packet */
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Type     = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Code     = 0;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Id       = ICMPHeaderIN->Id;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence;
+		
+		uint16_t DataSize = FrameIN.FrameLength - ((((uint16_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (uint16_t)FrameIN.FrameData));
+		
+		/* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */
+		memcpy(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+		       &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+			   DataSize);
+
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)));
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t));
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
index a7a098388..b43ce20f9 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ICMP.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _ICMP_H_
-#define _ICMP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY              0
-
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3
-		
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH           4
-
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE        5
-
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST            8
-
-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message */
-		#define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED           11
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for an ICMP message header. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       Type; /**< ICMP message type, a ICMP_TYPE_* constant */
-			uint8_t       Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */
-			uint16_t      Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */
-			uint16_t      Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */
-			uint16_t      Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */
-		} ICMP_Header_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ICMP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ICMP_H_
+#define _ICMP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY              0
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3
+		
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH           4
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE        5
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST            8
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED           11
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an ICMP message header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Type; /**< ICMP message type, a ICMP_TYPE_* constant */
+			uint8_t       Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */
+			uint16_t      Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */
+			uint16_t      Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */
+			uint16_t      Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */
+		} ICMP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
index c39894381..078f5b58f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
@@ -1,111 +1,111 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the
- *  host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP.
- */
- 
-#include "IP.h"
-
-/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a sub-protocol handler.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
- *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
- *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
- *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
- */
-int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
-{
-	DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart);
-
-	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
-
-	/* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */
-	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
-
-	int16_t  RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
-
-	/* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */
-	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
-	    !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress)))
-	{
-		return NO_RESPONSE;
-	}
-	
-	/* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */
-	switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol)
-	{
-		case PROTOCOL_ICMP:
-			RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(&((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
-			                                 &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
-			break;
-		case PROTOCOL_TCP:
-			RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart,
-			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
-			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		
-			break;
-		case PROTOCOL_UDP:
-			RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart,
-			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
-			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
-	if (RetSize > 0)
-	{
-		/* Fill out the response IP packet header */
-		IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
-		IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
-		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
-		IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
-		IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
-		IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
-		IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
-		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
-		IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = IPHeaderIN->Protocol;
-		IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
-		IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress;
-		IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress;
-		
-		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
-						
-		/* Return the size of the response so far */
-		return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
-	}
-	
-	return RetSize;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the
+ *  host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP.
+ */
+ 
+#include "IP.h"
+
+/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a sub-protocol handler.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	/* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */
+	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	int16_t  RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+	/* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+	    !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress)))
+	{
+		return NO_RESPONSE;
+	}
+	
+	/* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */
+	switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol)
+	{
+		case PROTOCOL_ICMP:
+			RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(&((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+		case PROTOCOL_TCP:
+			RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart,
+			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		
+			break;
+		case PROTOCOL_UDP:
+			RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart,
+			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+	if (RetSize > 0)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the response IP packet header */
+		IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+		IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+		IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = IPHeaderIN->Protocol;
+		IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
+		IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress;
+		IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress;
+		
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+						
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+	}
+	
+	return RetSize;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
index ad74a494b..0db924a8c 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
@@ -1,93 +1,93 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for IP.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _IP_H_
-#define _IP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Protocol IP address of the host (client) machine, once assigned by DHCP */
-		#define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    1}
-
-		/** Protocol IP address of the virtual server machine */
-		#define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    2}
-
-		/** Protocol IP address of the broadcast address */
-		#define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS             {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
-
-		/** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination is reached */
-		#define DEFAULT_TTL                      128
-		
-		/** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical.
-		 *  
-		 *  \param[in] IP1  First IP address
-		 *  \param[in] IP2  Second IP address
-		 *
-		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
-		 */
-		#define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2)             (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0)
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define of an IP packet header. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			unsigned char  HeaderLength   : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */
-			unsigned char  Version        : 4; /**< IP protocol version */
-			uint8_t        TypeOfService; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */
-			uint16_t       TotalLength; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */
-
-			uint16_t       Identification; /**< Identification value for identifying fragmented packets */
-			unsigned int   FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */
-			unsigned int   Flags          : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */
-
-			uint8_t        TTL; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */
-			uint8_t        Protocol; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */
-			uint16_t       HeaderChecksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */
-			
-			IP_Address_t  SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */
-			IP_Address_t  DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */
-		} IP_Header_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for IP.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _IP_H_
+#define _IP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Protocol IP address of the host (client) machine, once assigned by DHCP */
+		#define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    1}
+
+		/** Protocol IP address of the virtual server machine */
+		#define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    2}
+
+		/** Protocol IP address of the broadcast address */
+		#define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS             {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+
+		/** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination is reached */
+		#define DEFAULT_TTL                      128
+		
+		/** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+		 *  
+		 *  \param[in] IP1  First IP address
+		 *  \param[in] IP2  Second IP address
+		 *
+		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2)             (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0)
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define of an IP packet header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned char  HeaderLength   : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */
+			unsigned char  Version        : 4; /**< IP protocol version */
+			uint8_t        TypeOfService; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */
+			uint16_t       TotalLength; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */
+
+			uint16_t       Identification; /**< Identification value for identifying fragmented packets */
+			unsigned int   FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */
+			unsigned int   Flags          : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */
+
+			uint8_t        TTL; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */
+			uint8_t        Protocol; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */
+			uint16_t       HeaderChecksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */
+			
+			IP_Address_t  SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */
+			IP_Address_t  DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */
+		} IP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
index 9540ea7d8..84e03e0ae 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
@@ -1,279 +1,279 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines
-   accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertinent information
-   on the packet through the serial port.
-   
-   To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol}
-   in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes.
- *  Enabled protocol decoders will print incoming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human
- *  readable format.
- *
- *  Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably.
- *  Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile
- *  and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
- */
- 
-#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-
-/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame header
- */
-void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET)
-	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-	
-	printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
-	
-	printf_P(PSTR("  ETHERNET\r\n"));
-	printf_P(PSTR("  + Frame Size: %u\r\n"), FrameIN.FrameLength);
-
-	if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) &&
-	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)))
-	{
-		printf_P(PSTR("  + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
-		return;
-	}
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]);
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"),    FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4],
-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]);
-
-	if (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE)
-	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType));
-	else
-	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: UNKNOWN E1\r\n"));
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header
- */
-void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP)
-	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;	
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    ARP\r\n"));
-
-	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
-	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress)))
-	{
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
-		return;		
-	}
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType));
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation));
-	
-	if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4)
-	{
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]);
-
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0],
-		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1],
-		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2],
-		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]);
-
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4],
-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]);
-
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0],
-		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1],
-		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2],
-		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]);
-	}
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an IP packet header
- */
-void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP)
-	IP_Header_t* IPHeader  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-
-	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    IP\r\n"));
-
-	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)))
-	{
-		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
-		return;
-	}
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version);
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength));
-	
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol);
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL);
-	
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0],
-	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1],
-	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2],
-	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]);	
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0],
-	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1],
-	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2],
-	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]);
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header
- */
-void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP)
-	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     ICMP\r\n"));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type);
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code);
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header
- */
-void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP)
-	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader  = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-
-	uint16_t               HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     TCP\r\n"));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort));
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber));
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber));
-	
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags);
-	
-	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed)
-	  printf_P(PSTR("     + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n"));
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header
- */
-void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP)
-	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     UDP\r\n"));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort));
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length));
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
- *
- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header
- */
-void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
-{
-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP)
-	uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("     \\\r\n      DHCP\r\n"));
-
-	while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
-	{
-		if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
-		{
-			switch (DHCPOptions[2])
-			{
-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER:
-					printf_P(PSTR("      + DISCOVER\r\n"));
-					break;
-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST:
-					printf_P(PSTR("      + REQUEST\r\n"));
-					break;
-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE:
-					printf_P(PSTR("      + RELEASE\r\n"));
-					break;
-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE:
-					printf_P(PSTR("      + DECLINE\r\n"));
-					break;
-			}
-		}
-		
-		DHCPOptions += ((DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptions[1] + 2));
-	}
-	#endif
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines
+   accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertinent information
+   on the packet through the serial port.
+   
+   To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol}
+   in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes.
+ *  Enabled protocol decoders will print incoming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human
+ *  readable format.
+ *
+ *  Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably.
+ *  Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile
+ *  and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame header
+ */
+void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET)
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("  ETHERNET\r\n"));
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + Frame Size: %u\r\n"), FrameIN.FrameLength);
+
+	if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) &&
+	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("  + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"),    FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]);
+
+	if (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE)
+	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType));
+	else
+	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: UNKNOWN E1\r\n"));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP)
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;	
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    ARP\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;		
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType));
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation));
+	
+	if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an IP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP)
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeader  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    IP\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength));
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL);
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]);	
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP)
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     ICMP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type);
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP)
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader  = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	uint16_t               HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     TCP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber));
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags);
+	
+	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed)
+	  printf_P(PSTR("     + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n"));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP)
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     UDP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP)
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     \\\r\n      DHCP\r\n"));
+
+	while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{
+		if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+		{
+			switch (DHCPOptions[2])
+			{
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + DISCOVER\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + REQUEST\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + RELEASE\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + DECLINE\r\n"));
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		DHCPOptions += ((DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptions[1] + 2));
+	}
+	#endif
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
index 018567550..4723bf472 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
@@ -1,58 +1,58 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
-#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-		void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.c
index 6c365eeae..80b8bc813 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.c
@@ -1,393 +1,393 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  RNDIS command handler functions. This handles RNDIS commands according to
- *  the Microsoft RNDIS specification, creating a USB Ethernet network adapter.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C
-#include "RNDIS.h"
-
-/** Physical MAC address of the network adapter, which becomes the MAC address of the host for packets sent to the adapter. */
-static MAC_Address_t  PROGMEM AdapterMACAddress          = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS};
-
-/** Vendor description of the adapter. This is overridden by the INF file required to install the appropriate RNDIS drivers for
- *  the device, but may still be used by the OS in some circumstances.
- */
-static char           PROGMEM AdapterVendorDescription[] = "LUFA RNDIS Adapter";
-
-/** List of RNDIS OID commands supported by this adapter. */
-static const uint32_t PROGMEM AdapterSupportedOIDList[]  =
-							{
-								OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST,
-								OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM,
-								OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS,
-								OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED,
-								OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE,
-								OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE,
-								OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
-								OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED,
-								OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE,
-								OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE,
-								OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
-								OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION,
-								OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
-								OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
-								OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS,
-								OID_GEN_XMIT_OK,
-								OID_GEN_RCV_OK,
-								OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR,
-								OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR,
-								OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER,
-								OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS,
-								OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
-								OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST,
-								OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE,
-								OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT,
-								OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION,
-								OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS,
-							};
-
-/** Buffer for RNDIS messages (as distinct from Ethernet frames sent through the adapter. This must be big enough to hold the entire
- *  Supported OID list, plus the response header. The buffer is half-duplex, and is written to as it is read to save on SRAM - for this
- *  reason, care must be taken when constructing RNDIS responses that unread data is not overwritten when writing in responses.
- */
-uint8_t                 RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList) + sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)];
-
-/** Pointer to the RNDIS message header at the top of the RNDIS message buffer, for convenience. */
-RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
-
-/** Indicates if a RNDIS message response is ready to be sent back to the host. */
-bool                    ResponseReady               = false;
-
-/** Current RNDIS adapter state, a value from the RNDIS_States_t enum. */
-uint8_t                 CurrRNDISState              = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
-
-/** Current Ethernet packet filter mask. This is non-zero when the adapter is initialized, or zero when disabled. */
-uint32_t                CurrPacketFilter            = 0;							
-
-
-/** Processes the RNDIS message received by the host and stored in the RNDISMessageBuffer global buffer. If a response is
- *  created, the ResponseReady global is updated so that the response is written back to the host upon request.
- */
-void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void)
-{
-	/* Note: Only a single buffer is used for both the received message and its response to save SRAM. Because of
-	         this, response bytes should be filled in order so that they do not clobber unread data in the buffer. */
-
-	switch (MessageHeader->MessageType)
-	{
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG:
-			/* Initialize the adapter - return information about the supported RNDIS version and buffer sizes */
-
-			ResponseReady = true;
-			
-			RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*  INITIALIZE_Message  = (RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t* INITIALIZE_Response = (RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageType           = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageLength         = sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t);
-			INITIALIZE_Response->RequestId             = INITIALIZE_Message->RequestId;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->Status                = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
-			
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MajorVersion          = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MinorVersion          = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;			
-			INITIALIZE_Response->DeviceFlags           = REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->Medium                = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxPacketsPerTransfer = 1;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxTransferSize       = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
-			INITIALIZE_Response->PacketAlignmentFactor = 0;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListOffset          = 0;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListSize            = 0;
-			
-			CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Initialized;
-		
-			break;
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG:
-			/* Halt the adapter, reset the adapter state - note that no response should be returned when completed */
-
-			ResponseReady = false;
-			MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
-
-			CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
-
-			break;
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG:
-			/* Request for information about a parameter about the adapter, specified as an OID token */
-
-			ResponseReady = true;
-						
-			RNDIS_Query_Message_t*  QUERY_Message  = (RNDIS_Query_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			RNDIS_Query_Complete_t* QUERY_Response = (RNDIS_Query_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			uint32_t                Query_Oid      = QUERY_Message->Oid;
-						
-			void*     QueryData                 = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
-			                                                          QUERY_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
-			void*     ResponseData              = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)];		
-			uint16_t  ResponseSize;
-
-			QUERY_Response->MessageType         = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT;
-			QUERY_Response->MessageLength       = sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t);
-						
-			if (ProcessNDISQuery(Query_Oid, QueryData, QUERY_Message->InformationBufferLength,
-			                     ResponseData, &ResponseSize))
-			{
-				QUERY_Response->Status                  = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
-				QUERY_Response->MessageLength          += ResponseSize;
-							
-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = ResponseSize;
-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
-			}
-			else
-			{				
-				QUERY_Response->Status                  = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
-
-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = 0;
-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = 0;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG:
-			/* Request to set a parameter of the adapter, specified as an OID token */
-		
-			ResponseReady = true;
-			
-			RNDIS_Set_Message_t*  SET_Message  = (RNDIS_Set_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			RNDIS_Set_Complete_t* SET_Response = (RNDIS_Set_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			uint32_t              SET_Oid      = SET_Message->Oid;
-
-			SET_Response->MessageType       = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT;
-			SET_Response->MessageLength     = sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t);
-			SET_Response->RequestId         = SET_Message->RequestId;
-
-			void* SetData                   = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
-			                                                      SET_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
-						
-			if (ProcessNDISSet(SET_Oid, SetData, SET_Message->InformationBufferLength))
-			  SET_Response->Status        = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
-			else
-			  SET_Response->Status        = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
-
-			break;
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG:
-			/* Soft reset the adapter */
-		
-			ResponseReady = true;
-			
-			RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t* RESET_Response = (RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
-
-			RESET_Response->MessageType         = REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT;
-			RESET_Response->MessageLength       = sizeof(RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t);
-			RESET_Response->Status              = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
-			RESET_Response->AddressingReset     = 0;
-
-			break;
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG:
-			/* Keep alive message sent to the adapter every 5 seconds when idle to ensure it is still responding */
-		
-			ResponseReady = true;
-			
-			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*  KEEPALIVE_Message  = (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t* KEEPALIVE_Response = (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
-
-			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT;
-			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t);
-			KEEPALIVE_Response->RequestId       = KEEPALIVE_Message->RequestId;
-			KEEPALIVE_Response->Status          = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
-			
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Processes RNDIS query commands, retrieving information from the adapter and reporting it back to the host. The requested
- *  parameter is given as an OID value.
- *
- *  \param[in] OId            OId value of the parameter being queried
- *  \param[in] QueryData      Pointer to any extra query data being sent by the host to the device inside the RNDIS message buffer
- *  \param[in] QuerySize      Size in bytes of the extra query data being sent by the host
- *  \param[out] ResponseData  Pointer to the start of the query response inside the RNDIS message buffer
- *  \param[out] ResponseSize  Pointer to the size in bytes of the response data being sent to the host
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the query was handled, false otherwise
- */
-static bool ProcessNDISQuery(uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize,
-                             void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize)
-{
-	/* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG messages */
-
-	switch (OId)
-	{
-		case OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList);
-			
-			/* Copy the list of supported NDIS OID tokens to the response buffer */
-			memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterSupportedOIDList, sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList));
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate that the device is a true ethernet link */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Always indicate hardware ready */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = NdisHardwareStatusReady;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED:
-		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate 802.3 (Ethernet) supported by the adapter */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Vendor ID 0x0xFFFFFF is reserved for vendors who have not purchased a NDIS VID */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0x00FFFFFF;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE:
-		case OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE:
-		case OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate that the maximum frame size is the size of the ethernet frame buffer */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription);
-			
-			/* Copy vendor description string to the response buffer */
-			memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterVendorDescription, sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription));
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Always indicate that the adapter is connected to a network */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate 10Mb/s link speed */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 100000;
-
-			return true;
-		case OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS:
-		case OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(MAC_Address_t);
-			
-			/* Copy over the fixed adapter MAC to the response buffer */
-			memcpy_P(ResponseData, &AdapterMACAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
-
-			return true;
-		case OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate only one multicast address supported */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 1;
-		
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate the current packet filter mask */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CurrPacketFilter;
-		
-			return true;			
-		case OID_GEN_XMIT_OK:
-		case OID_GEN_RCV_OK:
-		case OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR:
-		case OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR:
-		case OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER:
-		case OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT:
-		case OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION:
-		case OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Unused statistic OIDs - always return 0 for each */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
-		
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate maximum overall buffer (Ethernet frame and RNDIS header) the adapter can handle */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = (sizeof(RNDISMessageBuffer) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
-		
-			return true;
-		default:
-			return false;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Processes RNDIS set commands, setting adapter parameters to values given by the host. The requested parameter is given 
- *  as an OID value.
- *
- *  \param[in] OId      OId value of the parameter being set
- *  \param[in] SetData  Pointer to the parameter value in the RNDIS message buffer
- *  \param[in] SetSize  Size in bytes of the parameter value being sent by the host
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the set was handled, false otherwise
- */
-static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize)
-{
-	/* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG messages */
-
-	switch (OId)
-	{
-		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
-			/* Save the packet filter mask in case the host queries it again later */
-			CurrPacketFilter = *((uint32_t*)SetData);
-		
-			/* Set the RNDIS state to initialized if the packet filter is non-zero */
-			CurrRNDISState = ((CurrPacketFilter) ? RNDIS_Data_Initialized : RNDIS_Data_Initialized);
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST:
-			/* Do nothing - throw away the value from the host as it is unused */
-		
-			return true;
-		default:
-			return false;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  RNDIS command handler functions. This handles RNDIS commands according to
+ *  the Microsoft RNDIS specification, creating a USB Ethernet network adapter.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C
+#include "RNDIS.h"
+
+/** Physical MAC address of the network adapter, which becomes the MAC address of the host for packets sent to the adapter. */
+static MAC_Address_t  PROGMEM AdapterMACAddress          = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Vendor description of the adapter. This is overridden by the INF file required to install the appropriate RNDIS drivers for
+ *  the device, but may still be used by the OS in some circumstances.
+ */
+static char           PROGMEM AdapterVendorDescription[] = "LUFA RNDIS Adapter";
+
+/** List of RNDIS OID commands supported by this adapter. */
+static const uint32_t PROGMEM AdapterSupportedOIDList[]  =
+							{
+								OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST,
+								OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM,
+								OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS,
+								OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED,
+								OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE,
+								OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE,
+								OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
+								OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED,
+								OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE,
+								OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE,
+								OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
+								OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION,
+								OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+								OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
+								OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS,
+								OID_GEN_XMIT_OK,
+								OID_GEN_RCV_OK,
+								OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR,
+								OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR,
+								OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER,
+								OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS,
+								OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
+								OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST,
+								OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE,
+								OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT,
+								OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION,
+								OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS,
+							};
+
+/** Buffer for RNDIS messages (as distinct from Ethernet frames sent through the adapter. This must be big enough to hold the entire
+ *  Supported OID list, plus the response header. The buffer is half-duplex, and is written to as it is read to save on SRAM - for this
+ *  reason, care must be taken when constructing RNDIS responses that unread data is not overwritten when writing in responses.
+ */
+uint8_t                 RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList) + sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)];
+
+/** Pointer to the RNDIS message header at the top of the RNDIS message buffer, for convenience. */
+RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+/** Indicates if a RNDIS message response is ready to be sent back to the host. */
+bool                    ResponseReady               = false;
+
+/** Current RNDIS adapter state, a value from the RNDIS_States_t enum. */
+uint8_t                 CurrRNDISState              = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
+
+/** Current Ethernet packet filter mask. This is non-zero when the adapter is initialized, or zero when disabled. */
+uint32_t                CurrPacketFilter            = 0;							
+
+
+/** Processes the RNDIS message received by the host and stored in the RNDISMessageBuffer global buffer. If a response is
+ *  created, the ResponseReady global is updated so that the response is written back to the host upon request.
+ */
+void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void)
+{
+	/* Note: Only a single buffer is used for both the received message and its response to save SRAM. Because of
+	         this, response bytes should be filled in order so that they do not clobber unread data in the buffer. */
+
+	switch (MessageHeader->MessageType)
+	{
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG:
+			/* Initialize the adapter - return information about the supported RNDIS version and buffer sizes */
+
+			ResponseReady = true;
+			
+			RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*  INITIALIZE_Message  = (RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t* INITIALIZE_Response = (RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageType           = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageLength         = sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->RequestId             = INITIALIZE_Message->RequestId;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->Status                = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+			
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MajorVersion          = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MinorVersion          = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;			
+			INITIALIZE_Response->DeviceFlags           = REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->Medium                = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxPacketsPerTransfer = 1;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxTransferSize       = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->PacketAlignmentFactor = 0;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListOffset          = 0;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListSize            = 0;
+			
+			CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Initialized;
+		
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG:
+			/* Halt the adapter, reset the adapter state - note that no response should be returned when completed */
+
+			ResponseReady = false;
+			MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
+
+			CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG:
+			/* Request for information about a parameter about the adapter, specified as an OID token */
+
+			ResponseReady = true;
+						
+			RNDIS_Query_Message_t*  QUERY_Message  = (RNDIS_Query_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Query_Complete_t* QUERY_Response = (RNDIS_Query_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			uint32_t                Query_Oid      = QUERY_Message->Oid;
+						
+			void*     QueryData                 = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
+			                                                          QUERY_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
+			void*     ResponseData              = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)];		
+			uint16_t  ResponseSize;
+
+			QUERY_Response->MessageType         = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT;
+			QUERY_Response->MessageLength       = sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t);
+						
+			if (ProcessNDISQuery(Query_Oid, QueryData, QUERY_Message->InformationBufferLength,
+			                     ResponseData, &ResponseSize))
+			{
+				QUERY_Response->Status                  = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+				QUERY_Response->MessageLength          += ResponseSize;
+							
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = ResponseSize;
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+			}
+			else
+			{				
+				QUERY_Response->Status                  = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = 0;
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = 0;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG:
+			/* Request to set a parameter of the adapter, specified as an OID token */
+		
+			ResponseReady = true;
+			
+			RNDIS_Set_Message_t*  SET_Message  = (RNDIS_Set_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Set_Complete_t* SET_Response = (RNDIS_Set_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			uint32_t              SET_Oid      = SET_Message->Oid;
+
+			SET_Response->MessageType       = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT;
+			SET_Response->MessageLength     = sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t);
+			SET_Response->RequestId         = SET_Message->RequestId;
+
+			void* SetData                   = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
+			                                                      SET_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
+						
+			if (ProcessNDISSet(SET_Oid, SetData, SET_Message->InformationBufferLength))
+			  SET_Response->Status        = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+			else
+			  SET_Response->Status        = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG:
+			/* Soft reset the adapter */
+		
+			ResponseReady = true;
+			
+			RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t* RESET_Response = (RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+			RESET_Response->MessageType         = REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT;
+			RESET_Response->MessageLength       = sizeof(RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t);
+			RESET_Response->Status              = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+			RESET_Response->AddressingReset     = 0;
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG:
+			/* Keep alive message sent to the adapter every 5 seconds when idle to ensure it is still responding */
+		
+			ResponseReady = true;
+			
+			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*  KEEPALIVE_Message  = (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t* KEEPALIVE_Response = (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT;
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t);
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->RequestId       = KEEPALIVE_Message->RequestId;
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->Status          = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+			
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes RNDIS query commands, retrieving information from the adapter and reporting it back to the host. The requested
+ *  parameter is given as an OID value.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] OId            OId value of the parameter being queried
+ *  \param[in] QueryData      Pointer to any extra query data being sent by the host to the device inside the RNDIS message buffer
+ *  \param[in] QuerySize      Size in bytes of the extra query data being sent by the host
+ *  \param[out] ResponseData  Pointer to the start of the query response inside the RNDIS message buffer
+ *  \param[out] ResponseSize  Pointer to the size in bytes of the response data being sent to the host
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the query was handled, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool ProcessNDISQuery(uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize,
+                             void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize)
+{
+	/* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG messages */
+
+	switch (OId)
+	{
+		case OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList);
+			
+			/* Copy the list of supported NDIS OID tokens to the response buffer */
+			memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterSupportedOIDList, sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList));
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate that the device is a true ethernet link */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Always indicate hardware ready */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = NdisHardwareStatusReady;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED:
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate 802.3 (Ethernet) supported by the adapter */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Vendor ID 0x0xFFFFFF is reserved for vendors who have not purchased a NDIS VID */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0x00FFFFFF;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE:
+		case OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE:
+		case OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate that the maximum frame size is the size of the ethernet frame buffer */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription);
+			
+			/* Copy vendor description string to the response buffer */
+			memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterVendorDescription, sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription));
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Always indicate that the adapter is connected to a network */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate 10Mb/s link speed */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 100000;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS:
+		case OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(MAC_Address_t);
+			
+			/* Copy over the fixed adapter MAC to the response buffer */
+			memcpy_P(ResponseData, &AdapterMACAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate only one multicast address supported */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 1;
+		
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate the current packet filter mask */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CurrPacketFilter;
+		
+			return true;			
+		case OID_GEN_XMIT_OK:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_OK:
+		case OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER:
+		case OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT:
+		case OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION:
+		case OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Unused statistic OIDs - always return 0 for each */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
+		
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate maximum overall buffer (Ethernet frame and RNDIS header) the adapter can handle */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = (sizeof(RNDISMessageBuffer) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+		
+			return true;
+		default:
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes RNDIS set commands, setting adapter parameters to values given by the host. The requested parameter is given 
+ *  as an OID value.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] OId      OId value of the parameter being set
+ *  \param[in] SetData  Pointer to the parameter value in the RNDIS message buffer
+ *  \param[in] SetSize  Size in bytes of the parameter value being sent by the host
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the set was handled, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize)
+{
+	/* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG messages */
+
+	switch (OId)
+	{
+		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
+			/* Save the packet filter mask in case the host queries it again later */
+			CurrPacketFilter = *((uint32_t*)SetData);
+		
+			/* Set the RNDIS state to initialized if the packet filter is non-zero */
+			CurrRNDISState = ((CurrPacketFilter) ? RNDIS_Data_Initialized : RNDIS_Data_Initialized);
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST:
+			/* Do nothing - throw away the value from the host as it is unused */
+		
+			return true;
+		default:
+			return false;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.h
index 003ab161b..f605158db 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.h
@@ -1,223 +1,223 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for RNDIS.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _RNDIS_H_
-#define _RNDIS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "RNDISEthernet.h"
-		#include "RNDISConstants.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Major */
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR             0x01
-
-		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor */
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR             0x00
-	
-		/** RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command */
-		#define REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand           0x00
-
-		/** RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response */
-		#define REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse           0x01
-		
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible NDIS adapter states. */
-		enum RNDIS_States_t
-		{
-			RNDIS_Uninitialized    = 0, /**< Adapter currently uninitialized */
-			RNDIS_Initialized      = 1, /**< Adapter currently initialized but not ready for data transfers */
-			RNDIS_Data_Initialized = 2, /**< Adapter currently initialized and ready for data transfers */
-		};
-
-		/** Enum for the NDIS hardware states */
-		enum NDIS_Hardware_Status_t
-		{
-			NdisHardwareStatusReady, /**< Hardware Ready to accept commands from the host */
-			NdisHardwareStatusInitializing, /**< Hardware busy initializing */
-			NdisHardwareStatusReset, /**< Hardware reset */
-			NdisHardwareStatusClosing, /**< Hardware currently closing */
-			NdisHardwareStatusNotReady /**< Hardware not ready to accept commands from the host */
-		};
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */
-			uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */
-		} RNDIS_Message_Header_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t DataOffset;
-			uint32_t DataLength;
-			uint32_t OOBDataOffset;
-			uint32_t OOBDataLength;
-			uint32_t NumOOBDataElements;
-			uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset;
-			uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength;
-			uint32_t VcHandle;
-			uint32_t Reserved;
-		} RNDIS_Packet_Message_t;
-	
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			
-			uint32_t MajorVersion;
-			uint32_t MinorVersion;
-			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
-		} RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize complete response message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-			
-			uint32_t MajorVersion;
-			uint32_t MinorVersion;
-			uint32_t DeviceFlags;
-			uint32_t Medium;
-			uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer;
-			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
-			uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor;
-			uint32_t AFListOffset;
-			uint32_t AFListSize;
-		} RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive command message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive complete message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Reset complete message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t Status;
-
-			uint32_t AddressingReset;
-		} RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Set command message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			
-			uint32_t Oid;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
-			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
-		} RNDIS_Set_Message_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Set complete response message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-		} RNDIS_Set_Complete_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Query command message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			
-			uint32_t Oid;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
-			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
-		} RNDIS_Query_Message_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Query complete response message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-			
-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
-		} RNDIS_Query_Complete_t;
-		
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern uint8_t                 RNDISMessageBuffer[];
-		extern RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader;
-		extern bool                    ResponseReady;
-		extern uint8_t                 CurrRNDISState;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C)
-			static bool ProcessNDISQuery(uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize,
-										 void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize);
-			static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize);	
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDIS.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_H_
+#define _RNDIS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "RNDISEthernet.h"
+		#include "RNDISConstants.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Major */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR             0x01
+
+		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR             0x00
+	
+		/** RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command */
+		#define REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand           0x00
+
+		/** RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response */
+		#define REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse           0x01
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible NDIS adapter states. */
+		enum RNDIS_States_t
+		{
+			RNDIS_Uninitialized    = 0, /**< Adapter currently uninitialized */
+			RNDIS_Initialized      = 1, /**< Adapter currently initialized but not ready for data transfers */
+			RNDIS_Data_Initialized = 2, /**< Adapter currently initialized and ready for data transfers */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the NDIS hardware states */
+		enum NDIS_Hardware_Status_t
+		{
+			NdisHardwareStatusReady, /**< Hardware Ready to accept commands from the host */
+			NdisHardwareStatusInitializing, /**< Hardware busy initializing */
+			NdisHardwareStatusReset, /**< Hardware reset */
+			NdisHardwareStatusClosing, /**< Hardware currently closing */
+			NdisHardwareStatusNotReady /**< Hardware not ready to accept commands from the host */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */
+			uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */
+		} RNDIS_Message_Header_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t DataOffset;
+			uint32_t DataLength;
+			uint32_t OOBDataOffset;
+			uint32_t OOBDataLength;
+			uint32_t NumOOBDataElements;
+			uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset;
+			uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength;
+			uint32_t VcHandle;
+			uint32_t Reserved;
+		} RNDIS_Packet_Message_t;
+	
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			
+			uint32_t MajorVersion;
+			uint32_t MinorVersion;
+			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
+		} RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize complete response message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+			
+			uint32_t MajorVersion;
+			uint32_t MinorVersion;
+			uint32_t DeviceFlags;
+			uint32_t Medium;
+			uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer;
+			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
+			uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor;
+			uint32_t AFListOffset;
+			uint32_t AFListSize;
+		} RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive command message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive complete message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Reset complete message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t Status;
+
+			uint32_t AddressingReset;
+		} RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Set command message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			
+			uint32_t Oid;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
+		} RNDIS_Set_Message_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Set complete response message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+		} RNDIS_Set_Complete_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Query command message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			
+			uint32_t Oid;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
+		} RNDIS_Query_Message_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Query complete response message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+			
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+		} RNDIS_Query_Complete_t;
+		
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint8_t                 RNDISMessageBuffer[];
+		extern RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader;
+		extern bool                    ResponseReady;
+		extern uint8_t                 CurrRNDISState;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C)
+			static bool ProcessNDISQuery(uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize,
+										 void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize);
+			static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize);	
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDISConstants.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDISConstants.h
index 67fa78a0d..efe22b699 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDISConstants.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDISConstants.h
@@ -1,112 +1,112 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  RNDIS specification related constants. For more information on these
- *  constants, please refer to the Microsoft RNDIS specification.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
-#define _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG                0x00000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG            0x00000002UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG                  0x00000003UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG                 0x00000004UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG                   0x00000005UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG                 0x00000006UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG       0x00000007UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG             0x00000008UL
-
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT          0x80000002UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT               0x80000004UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT                 0x80000005UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT               0x80000006UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT           0x80000008UL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS            0x00000000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE            0xC0000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA       0xC0010015UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED      0xC00000BBUL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT      0x4001000BUL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT   0x4001000CUL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED     0x00000000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED  0x00000001UL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3              0x00000000UL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS	      0x00000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED    0x00000002UL
-
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED           0x00000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MULTICAST          0x00000002UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST      0x00000004UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST          0x00000008UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SOURCE_ROUTING     0x00000010UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_PROMISCUOUS        0x00000020UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SMT                0x00000040UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_LOCAL          0x00000080UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_GROUP              0x00001000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_FUNCTIONAL     0x00002000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_FUNCTIONAL         0x00004000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MAC_FRAME          0x00008000UL	
-		
-		#define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST                0x00010101UL
-		#define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS               0x00010102UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED               0x00010103UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE                  0x00010104UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE            0x00010106UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
-		#define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED                    0x00010107UL
-		#define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE           0x0001010AUL
-		#define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE            0x0001010BUL
-		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID                     0x0001010CUL
-		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION            0x0001010DUL
-		#define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER         0x0001010EUL
-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS          0x00010114UL
-		#define OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM               0x00010202UL
-		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK                       0x00020101UL
-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_OK                        0x00020102UL
-		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR                    0x00020103UL
-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR                     0x00020104UL
-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER                 0x00020105UL
-		#define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS           0x01010101UL
-		#define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS             0x01010102UL
-		#define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST              0x01010103UL
-		#define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE           0x01010104UL
-		#define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT         0x01020101UL
-		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION          0x01020102UL
-		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS        0x01020103UL
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  RNDIS specification related constants. For more information on these
+ *  constants, please refer to the Microsoft RNDIS specification.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG                0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG            0x00000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG                  0x00000003UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG                 0x00000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG                   0x00000005UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG                 0x00000006UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG       0x00000007UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG             0x00000008UL
+
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT          0x80000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT               0x80000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT                 0x80000005UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT               0x80000006UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT           0x80000008UL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS            0x00000000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE            0xC0000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA       0xC0010015UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED      0xC00000BBUL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT      0x4001000BUL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT   0x4001000CUL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED     0x00000000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED  0x00000001UL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3              0x00000000UL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS	      0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED    0x00000002UL
+
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED           0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MULTICAST          0x00000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST      0x00000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST          0x00000008UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SOURCE_ROUTING     0x00000010UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_PROMISCUOUS        0x00000020UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SMT                0x00000040UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_LOCAL          0x00000080UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_GROUP              0x00001000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_FUNCTIONAL     0x00002000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_FUNCTIONAL         0x00004000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MAC_FRAME          0x00008000UL	
+		
+		#define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST                0x00010101UL
+		#define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS               0x00010102UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED               0x00010103UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE                  0x00010104UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE            0x00010106UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
+		#define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED                    0x00010107UL
+		#define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE           0x0001010AUL
+		#define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE            0x0001010BUL
+		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID                     0x0001010CUL
+		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION            0x0001010DUL
+		#define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER         0x0001010EUL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS          0x00010114UL
+		#define OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM               0x00010202UL
+		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK                       0x00020101UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_OK                        0x00020102UL
+		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR                    0x00020103UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR                     0x00020104UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER                 0x00020105UL
+		#define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS           0x01010101UL
+		#define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS             0x01010102UL
+		#define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST              0x01010103UL
+		#define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE           0x01010104UL
+		#define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT         0x01020101UL
+		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION          0x01020102UL
+		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS        0x01020103UL
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
index 74d3a78c3..8ec8fca1d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
@@ -1,618 +1,618 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission
- *  and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data
- *  delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C
-#include "TCP.h"
-
-/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are
- *  stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This
- *  allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired.
- */
-TCP_PortState_t        PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
-
-/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active
- *  (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections
- *  not present in the array are closed.
- */
-TCP_ConnectionState_t  ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS];
-
-
-/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application
- *  level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT
- *  buffer for later transmission.
- */
-void TCP_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Run each application in sequence, to process incoming and generate outgoing packets */
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */
-		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
-		{
-			/* Run the application handler for the port */
-			if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) && 
-			    (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open))
-			{
-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry],
-				                                               &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	
-	/* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */
-	if (FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer)
-	  return;
-	
-	/* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */
-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) &&
-		    (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready))
-		{
-			Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData;
-			IP_Header_t*             IPHeaderOUT    = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)];
-			TCP_Header_t*            TCPHeaderOUT   = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
-			                                                                             sizeof(IP_Header_t)];
-			void*                    TCPDataOUT     = &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
-			                                                              sizeof(IP_Header_t) +
-			                                                              sizeof(TCP_Header_t)];
-
-			uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length;
-
-			/* Fill out the TCP data */
-			TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port;
-			TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort;
-			TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut);
-			TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn);
-			TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
-			TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize           = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
-
-			TCPHeaderOUT->Flags                = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
-			TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
-			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
-			TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
-
-			memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize);
-			
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize;
-
-			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, ServerIPAddress,
-			                                                    ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress,
-			                                                    (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize));
-
-			PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
-
-			/* Fill out the response IP header */
-			IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize);
-			IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
-			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
-			IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
-			IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
-			IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
-			IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
-			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
-			IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = PROTOCOL_TCP;
-			IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
-			IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = ServerIPAddress;
-			IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress;
-			
-			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
-		
-			PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t);
-		
-			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
-			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
-			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}};
-			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4);
-
-			PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t);
-
-			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
-			FrameOUT.FrameLength            = PacketSize;
-			FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer          = true;
-			
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false;
-			
-			break;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are
- *  processed.
- */
-void TCP_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */
-	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
-	  PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed;
-
-	/* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	  ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed;
-}
-
-/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state.
- *
- *  \param[in] Port     Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian
- *  \param[in] State    New state of the port, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
- *  \param[in] Handler  Application callback handler for the port
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the port state was set, false otherwise (no more space in the port state table)
- */
-bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*))
-{
-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
-
-	/* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */
-	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */
-		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
-		{
-			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
-			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */
-	if (State == TCP_Port_Open)
-	{
-		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
-		{
-			/* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */
-			if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed)
-			{
-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  = Port;
-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
-				return true;
-			}
-		}
-		
-		/* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */
-		return false;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */
-		return true;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian.
- *
- *  \param[in] Port  TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian
- *
- *  \return A value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
- */
-uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port)
-{
-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
-
-	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */
-		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
-		  return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State;
-	}
-	
-	/* Port not in table, assume closed */
-	return TCP_Port_Closed;
-}
-
-/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the
- *  connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible.
- *
- *  \param[in] Port           TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian
- *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected device
- *  \param[in] RemotePort     TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian
- *  \param[in] State          TCP connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the connection was updated or created, false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table)
- */
-bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State)
-{
-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
-
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find port entry in the table */
-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
-		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
-			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
-		{
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find empty entry in the table */
-		if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed)
-		{
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port          = Port;
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = RemoteAddress;			
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort    = RemotePort;
-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State         = State;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host.
- *
- *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
- *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
- *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
- *
- *  \return A value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
- */
-uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
-{
-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
-
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find port entry in the table */
-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
-		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
-			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
-			 
-		{
-			return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return TCP_Connection_Closed;
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host.
- *
- *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
- *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
- *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
- *
- *  \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise
- */
-TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
-{
-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
-
-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
-	{
-		/* Find port entry in the table */
-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
-		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
-			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
-		{
-			return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return NULL;
-}
-
-/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler.
- *
- *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
- *  \param[in] TCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's TCP header
- *  \param[out] TCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
- *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
- *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
- */
-int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart)
-{
-	IP_Header_t*  IPHeaderIN   = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
-	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN  = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart;
-	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart;
-
-	TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo;
-	
-	DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart);
-
-	bool PacketResponse = false;
-		
-	/* Check if the destination port is open and allows incoming connections */
-	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open)
-	{
-		/* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */
-		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN)
-		  TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen);
-
-		/* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */
-		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST)
-		{
-			if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-			                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed))
-			{
-				TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
-				PacketResponse = true;			
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Process the incoming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */
-			switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort))
-			{
-				case TCP_Connection_Listen:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN)
-					{
-						/* SYN connection starts a connection with a peer */
-						if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-						                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_SYNReceived))
-						{
-							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);						
-
-							ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn  = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1);
-							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0;
-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse      = false;
-						}
-						else
-						{
-							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_RST;
-						}
-											   
-						PacketResponse      = true;
-					}
-					
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
-					{
-						/* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */
-
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established);
-
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-															   
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
-					}
-					
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_Established:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
-					{
-						/* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */
-					
-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
-						PacketResponse      = true;
-						
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait);
-
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
-					}
-					else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH)))
-					{
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-						/* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */		
-						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false))
-						{						
-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN;
-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse     = true;
-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    = 0;
-						}
-						
-						/* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */
-						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) &&
-							(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE))
-						{
-							uint16_t IPOffset   = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
-							uint16_t TCPOffset  = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
-							uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset);
-
-							/* Copy the packet data into the buffer */
-							memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length],
-								   &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset],
-								   DataLength);
-
-							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength;
-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    += DataLength;
-							
-							/* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */
-							if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH))
-							{
-								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
-								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true;
-
-								TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
-								PacketResponse      = true;
-							}
-						}
-						else
-						{
-							/* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incoming packet */
-							return NO_PROCESS;
-						}
-					}
-					
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_Closing:
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN);
-						PacketResponse      = true;
-						
-						ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
-						
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1);
-
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_FINWait1:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
-					{
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
-						PacketResponse      = true;
-
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
-						
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
-					}
-					else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
-					{
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2);
-					}
-					
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_FINWait2:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
-					{
-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
-						PacketResponse      = true;
-
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
-						
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
-					}
-				
-					break;
-				case TCP_Connection_CloseWait:
-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
-					{
-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
-					}
-					
-					break;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */
-		TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
-		PacketResponse      = true;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */
-	if (PacketResponse)
-	{
-		ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
-		                                       TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
-
-		TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
-		TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
-		TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut);
-		TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn);
-		TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
-		
-		if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse))
-		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
-		else
-		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length);
-
-		TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
-		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
-		TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
-		
-		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress,
-		                                                    IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t));					
-
-		return sizeof(TCP_Header_t);	
-	}
-
-	return NO_RESPONSE;
-}
-
-/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word,
- *  complimented.
- *
- *  \param[in] TCPHeaderOutStart   Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header
- *  \param[in] SourceAddress       Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
- *  \param[in] DestinationAddress  Destination protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
- *  \param[in] TCPOutSize          Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload
- *
- *  \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value
- */
-static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
-                               IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize)
-{
-	uint32_t Checksum = 0;
-	
-	/* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP pseudo-header,
-	   complimented */
-	
-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[0];
-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[1];
-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[0];
-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[1];
-	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP);
-	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize);
-
-	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++)
-	  Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord];
-	
-	if (TCPOutSize & 0x01)
-	  Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF);
-	  
-	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
-	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
-	
-	return ~Checksum;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission
+ *  and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data
+ *  delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C
+#include "TCP.h"
+
+/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are
+ *  stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This
+ *  allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired.
+ */
+TCP_PortState_t        PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
+
+/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active
+ *  (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections
+ *  not present in the array are closed.
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionState_t  ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS];
+
+
+/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application
+ *  level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT
+ *  buffer for later transmission.
+ */
+void TCP_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Run each application in sequence, to process incoming and generate outgoing packets */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */
+		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+		{
+			/* Run the application handler for the port */
+			if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) && 
+			    (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open))
+			{
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry],
+				                                               &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */
+	if (FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer)
+	  return;
+	
+	/* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) &&
+		    (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready))
+		{
+			Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData;
+			IP_Header_t*             IPHeaderOUT    = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)];
+			TCP_Header_t*            TCPHeaderOUT   = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+			                                                                             sizeof(IP_Header_t)];
+			void*                    TCPDataOUT     = &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+			                                                              sizeof(IP_Header_t) +
+			                                                              sizeof(TCP_Header_t)];
+
+			uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length;
+
+			/* Fill out the TCP data */
+			TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut);
+			TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn);
+			TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+			TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize           = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Flags                = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
+
+			memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize);
+			
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize;
+
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, ServerIPAddress,
+			                                                    ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress,
+			                                                    (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize));
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
+
+			/* Fill out the response IP header */
+			IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize);
+			IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+			IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = PROTOCOL_TCP;
+			IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
+			IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = ServerIPAddress;
+			IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress;
+			
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+		
+			PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t);
+		
+			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
+			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}};
+			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4);
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t);
+
+			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+			FrameOUT.FrameLength            = PacketSize;
+			FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer          = true;
+			
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false;
+			
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are
+ *  processed.
+ */
+void TCP_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+	  PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed;
+
+	/* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	  ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port     Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] State    New state of the port, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ *  \param[in] Handler  Application callback handler for the port
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the port state was set, false otherwise (no more space in the port state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*))
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	/* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */
+		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+		{
+			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */
+	if (State == TCP_Port_Open)
+	{
+		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+		{
+			/* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */
+			if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed)
+			{
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  = Port;
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+				return true;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		/* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */
+		return false;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */
+		return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port  TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */
+		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+		  return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State;
+	}
+	
+	/* Port not in table, assume closed */
+	return TCP_Port_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the
+ *  connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected device
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] State          TCP connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the connection was updated or created, false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+		{
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find empty entry in the table */
+		if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed)
+		{
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port          = Port;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = RemoteAddress;			
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort    = RemotePort;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State         = State;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+			 
+		{
+			return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ *  \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+		{
+			return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] TCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's TCP header
+ *  \param[out] TCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	IP_Header_t*  IPHeaderIN   = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN  = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart;
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart;
+
+	TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo;
+	
+	DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart);
+
+	bool PacketResponse = false;
+		
+	/* Check if the destination port is open and allows incoming connections */
+	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open)
+	{
+		/* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */
+		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+		  TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen);
+
+		/* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */
+		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST)
+		{
+			if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+			                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed))
+			{
+				TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
+				PacketResponse = true;			
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Process the incoming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */
+			switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort))
+			{
+				case TCP_Connection_Listen:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+					{
+						/* SYN connection starts a connection with a peer */
+						if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+						                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_SYNReceived))
+						{
+							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);						
+
+							ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn  = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1);
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse      = false;
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_RST;
+						}
+											   
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						/* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established);
+
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+															   
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_Established:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						/* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */
+					
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait);
+
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+					}
+					else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH)))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						/* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */		
+						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false))
+						{						
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse     = true;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    = 0;
+						}
+						
+						/* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */
+						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) &&
+							(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE))
+						{
+							uint16_t IPOffset   = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+							uint16_t TCPOffset  = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+							uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset);
+
+							/* Copy the packet data into the buffer */
+							memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length],
+								   &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset],
+								   DataLength);
+
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    += DataLength;
+							
+							/* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */
+							if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH))
+							{
+								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true;
+
+								TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+								PacketResponse      = true;
+							}
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							/* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incoming packet */
+							return NO_PROCESS;
+						}
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_Closing:
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN);
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+						
+						ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1);
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_FINWait1:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+					else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2);
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_FINWait2:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+				
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_CloseWait:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+					
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
+		PacketResponse      = true;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */
+	if (PacketResponse)
+	{
+		ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+		                                       TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut);
+		TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn);
+		TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+		
+		if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse))
+		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+		else
+		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length);
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
+		
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress,
+		                                                    IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t));					
+
+		return sizeof(TCP_Header_t);	
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word,
+ *  complimented.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] TCPHeaderOutStart   Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header
+ *  \param[in] SourceAddress       Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ *  \param[in] DestinationAddress  Destination protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ *  \param[in] TCPOutSize          Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload
+ *
+ *  \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value
+ */
+static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
+                               IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize)
+{
+	uint32_t Checksum = 0;
+	
+	/* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP pseudo-header,
+	   complimented */
+	
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[0];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[1];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[0];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[1];
+	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP);
+	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize);
+
+	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++)
+	  Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord];
+	
+	if (TCPOutSize & 0x01)
+	  Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF);
+	  
+	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+	
+	return ~Checksum;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
index 9bf64292b..40b1a85e9 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
@@ -1,249 +1,249 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for TCP.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _TCP_H_
-#define _TCP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time */
-		#define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS              1
-
-		/** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time */
-		#define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS             3
-
-		/** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time */
-		#define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE                 512
-		
-		/** Port number for HTTP transmissions */
-		#define TCP_PORT_HTTP                   SwapEndian_16(80)
-		
-		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device */
-		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN                false
-
-		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host */
-		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT               true
-		
-		/** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_CWR                    (1 << 7)
-
-		/** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_ECE                    (1 << 6)
-
-		/** Urgent TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_URG                    (1 << 5)
-
-		/** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_ACK                    (1 << 4)
-
-		/** Data Push TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_PSH                    (1 << 3)
-
-		/** Reset TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_RST                    (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Synchronize TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_SYN                    (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask */
-		#define TCP_FLAG_FIN                    (1 << 0)
-		
-		/** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
-		 *
-		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, false otherwise
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer)  (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN))
-
-		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
-		 *
-		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && \
-		                                              (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT))
-
-		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
-		 *
-		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)   Buffer->InUse
-
-		/** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be
-		 *  performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host.
-		 *
-		 *  \note The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER().
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to lock
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; }MACROE
-
-		/** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to release
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->InUse = false; }MACROE
-
-		/** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to send
-		 *  \param[in] Len     Length of data contained in the buffer
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len)     MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; }MACROE
-
-		/** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to clear
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer)         MACROS{ Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; }MACROE
-		
-		/** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Connection  Open TCP connection to close
-		 */
-		#define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection)  MACROS{ Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing;  }MACROE
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for possible TCP port states */
-		enum TCP_PortStates_t
-		{
-			TCP_Port_Closed            = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */
-			TCP_Port_Open              = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */
-		};
-	
-		/** Enum for possible TCP connection states */
-		enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t
-		{
-			TCP_Connection_Listen      = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */
-			TCP_Connection_SYNSent     = 1, /**< Unused */
-			TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */
-			TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */
-			TCP_Connection_FINWait1    = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
-			TCP_Connection_FINWait2    = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */
-			TCP_Connection_CloseWait   = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
-			TCP_Connection_Closing     = 7, /**< Unused */
-			TCP_Connection_LastACK     = 8, /**< Unused */
-			TCP_Connection_TimeWait    = 9, /**< Unused */
-			TCP_Connection_Closed      = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */			
-		};
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t               Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */
-			uint8_t                Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */
-			bool                   Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN  or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */
-			bool                   Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates
-			                               *   buffer ready to be sent to the host
-			                               */
-			bool                   InUse; /** Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */
-		} TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a TCP connection information structure */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t               SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */	
-			uint32_t               SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */
-			TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */
-		} TCP_ConnectionInfo_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a complete TCP connection state */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t               Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */
-			uint16_t               RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */
-			IP_Address_t           RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */
-			TCP_ConnectionInfo_t   Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */
-			uint8_t                State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */
-		} TCP_ConnectionState_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a TCP port state */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t               Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */
-			uint8_t                State; /**< Current port state, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum */
-			void                   (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState,
-			                                              TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */
-		} TCP_PortState_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a TCP packet header */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t               SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */
-			uint16_t               DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */
-			
-			uint32_t               SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */
-			uint32_t               AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */
-			
-			unsigned char          Reserved : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */
-			unsigned char          DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */
-			uint8_t                Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */
-			uint16_t               WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaining in reception buffer) */
-			
-			uint16_t               Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */
-			uint16_t               UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */
-		} TCP_Header_t;
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void                  TCP_Init(void);
-		void                  TCP_Task(void);
-		bool                  TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*));
-		uint8_t               TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port);
-		bool                  TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State);
-		uint8_t               TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
-		TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
-		int16_t               TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C)
-			static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
-										   IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TCP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TCP_H_
+#define _TCP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time */
+		#define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS              1
+
+		/** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time */
+		#define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS             3
+
+		/** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time */
+		#define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE                 512
+		
+		/** Port number for HTTP transmissions */
+		#define TCP_PORT_HTTP                   SwapEndian_16(80)
+		
+		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device */
+		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN                false
+
+		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host */
+		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT               true
+		
+		/** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_CWR                    (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_ECE                    (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Urgent TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_URG                    (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_ACK                    (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Data Push TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_PSH                    (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Reset TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_RST                    (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Synchronize TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_SYN                    (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_FIN                    (1 << 0)
+		
+		/** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer)  (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN))
+
+		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && \
+		                                              (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT))
+
+		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)   Buffer->InUse
+
+		/** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be
+		 *  performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host.
+		 *
+		 *  \note The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER().
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to lock
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; }MACROE
+
+		/** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to release
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->InUse = false; }MACROE
+
+		/** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to send
+		 *  \param[in] Len     Length of data contained in the buffer
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len)     MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; }MACROE
+
+		/** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to clear
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer)         MACROS{ Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; }MACROE
+		
+		/** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Connection  Open TCP connection to close
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection)  MACROS{ Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing;  }MACROE
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible TCP port states */
+		enum TCP_PortStates_t
+		{
+			TCP_Port_Closed            = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+			TCP_Port_Open              = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+		};
+	
+		/** Enum for possible TCP connection states */
+		enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t
+		{
+			TCP_Connection_Listen      = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */
+			TCP_Connection_SYNSent     = 1, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */
+			TCP_Connection_FINWait1    = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_FINWait2    = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_CloseWait   = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_Closing     = 7, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_LastACK     = 8, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_TimeWait    = 9, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_Closed      = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */			
+		};
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */
+			uint8_t                Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */
+			bool                   Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN  or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */
+			bool                   Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates
+			                               *   buffer ready to be sent to the host
+			                               */
+			bool                   InUse; /** Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */
+		} TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP connection information structure */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */	
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */
+			TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */
+		} TCP_ConnectionInfo_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a complete TCP connection state */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */
+			uint16_t               RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */
+			IP_Address_t           RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */
+			TCP_ConnectionInfo_t   Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */
+			uint8_t                State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */
+		} TCP_ConnectionState_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP port state */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */
+			uint8_t                State; /**< Current port state, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum */
+			void                   (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState,
+			                                              TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */
+		} TCP_PortState_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP packet header */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */
+			uint16_t               DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */
+			
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */
+			uint32_t               AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */
+			
+			unsigned char          Reserved : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */
+			unsigned char          DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */
+			uint8_t                Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */
+			uint16_t               WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaining in reception buffer) */
+			
+			uint16_t               Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */
+			uint16_t               UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */
+		} TCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void                  TCP_Init(void);
+		void                  TCP_Task(void);
+		bool                  TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*));
+		uint8_t               TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port);
+		bool                  TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State);
+		uint8_t               TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
+		TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
+		int16_t               TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C)
+			static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
+										   IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
index 47b0ab87a..c9c523f71 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low
- *  reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C
-#include "UDP.h"
-
-/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
- *  to the output Ethernet frame if a sub-protocol handler has created a response packet.
- *
- *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
- *  \param[in] UDPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's UDP header
- *  \param[out] UDPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header
- *
- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
- */
-int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart)
-{
-	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN  = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart;
-	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart;
-	
-	int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
-	
-	DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart);
-	
-	switch (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort))
-	{
-		case UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST:
-			RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart,
-			                                 &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)],
-		                                     &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
-	if (RetSize > 0)
-	{
-		/* Fill out the response UDP packet header */
-		UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort      = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
-		UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
-		UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum        = 0;
-		UDPHeaderOUT->Length          = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
-
-		/* Return the size of the response so far */
-		return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
-	}
-	
-	return NO_RESPONSE;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low
+ *  reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C
+#include "UDP.h"
+
+/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if a sub-protocol handler has created a response packet.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] UDPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's UDP header
+ *  \param[out] UDPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN  = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart;
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart;
+	
+	int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+	
+	DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart);
+	
+	switch (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort))
+	{
+		case UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST:
+			RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart,
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)],
+		                                     &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+	if (RetSize > 0)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the response UDP packet header */
+		UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort      = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum        = 0;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->Length          = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
index b22c85e85..25c33cf52 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for IP.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _UDP_H_
-#define _UDP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-	
-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
-		#include "Ethernet.h"
-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
-		#include "DHCP.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Source UDP port for a DHCP request */
-		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67
-
-		/** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply */
-		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY   68
-
-		/** Source UDP port for a DNS request/response */
-		#define UDP_PORT_DNS          53
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a UDP packet header */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */
-			uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */
-			uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */
-			uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */
-		} UDP_Header_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for IP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UDP_H_
+#define _UDP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+	
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "DHCP.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Source UDP port for a DHCP request */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67
+
+		/** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY   68
+
+		/** Source UDP port for a DNS request/response */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DNS          53
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a UDP packet header */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */
+			uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */
+			uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */
+			uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */
+		} UDP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
index 7ba192881..51a9fadec 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
@@ -1,200 +1,200 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This
- *  application will serve up a static HTTP webpage when requested by the host.
- */
-
-#include "Webserver.h"
-
-/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
- *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
- */
-char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
-                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
-                               "Content-type: text/html\r\n"
-                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
-							
-/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
- *  given URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
- */
-char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
-                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
-                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
-
-/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically
- *  broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run.
- */
-char PROGMEM HTTPPage[]   = 
-		"<html>"
-		"	<head>"
-		"		<title>"
-		"			LUFA Webserver Demo"
-		"		</title>"
-		"	</head>"
-		"	<body>"
-		"		<h1>Hello from your USB AVR!</h1>"
-		"		<p>"
-		"			Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack."
-		"			<br /><br />"
-		"			<small>Project Information: <a href=\"http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php\">http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php</a>.</small>"
-		"			<hr />"
-		"			<i>LUFA Version: </i>" LUFA_VERSION_STRING
-		"		</p>"
-		"	</body>"
-		"</html>";
-
-
-/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application
- *  callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port.
- */
-void Webserver_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */
-	TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback);
-}
-
-/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command.
- *
- *  \param[in] RequestHeader  HTTP request made by the host
- *  \param[in] Command        HTTP command to compare the request to
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command matches the request, false otherwise
- */
-static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader, char* Command)
-{
-	/* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */
-	return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0);
-}
-
-/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request
- *  has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses.
- *
- *  \param[in] ConnectionState  Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information
- *  \param[in,out] Buffer       Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer
- */
-void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer)
-{
-	char*          BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data;
-	static uint8_t PageBlock     = 0;
-	
-	/* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */
-	if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer))
-	{
-		if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET"))
-		{
-			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET / "))
-			{
-				PageBlock = 0;
-
-				/* Copy the HTTP 200 response header into the packet buffer */
-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
-				
-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
-
-				/* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */
-				TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Copy the HTTP 404 response header into the packet buffer */
-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
-				
-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
-				
-				/* All data sent, close the connection */
-				TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
-			}
-		}
-		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD"))
-		{
-			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD / "))
-			{
-				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
-
-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
-
-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));			
-			}
-			
-			/* All data sent, close the connection */
-			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
-		}
-		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE"))
-		{
-			/* Echo the host's query back to the host */
-			TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length);
-			
-			/* All data sent, close the connection */
-			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */
-			TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer);
-		}
-	}
-	else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer))
-	{
-		uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]);
-		uint16_t Length;
-	
-		/* Determine the length of the loaded block */
-		Length = ((RemLength > HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE) ? HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE : RemLength);
-
-		/* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */
-		strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length);
-		
-		/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
-		TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length);
-
-		/* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */
-		if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE))
-		{
-			/* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */
-			TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer);
-			
-			/* Close the connection to the host */
-			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
-		}
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This
+ *  application will serve up a static HTTP webpage when requested by the host.
+ */
+
+#include "Webserver.h"
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
+ *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
+                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+                               "Content-type: text/html\r\n"
+                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+							
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
+ *  given URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
+                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+
+/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically
+ *  broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTPPage[]   = 
+		"<html>"
+		"	<head>"
+		"		<title>"
+		"			LUFA Webserver Demo"
+		"		</title>"
+		"	</head>"
+		"	<body>"
+		"		<h1>Hello from your USB AVR!</h1>"
+		"		<p>"
+		"			Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack."
+		"			<br /><br />"
+		"			<small>Project Information: <a href=\"http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php\">http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php</a>.</small>"
+		"			<hr />"
+		"			<i>LUFA Version: </i>" LUFA_VERSION_STRING
+		"		</p>"
+		"	</body>"
+		"</html>";
+
+
+/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application
+ *  callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port.
+ */
+void Webserver_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */
+	TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback);
+}
+
+/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] RequestHeader  HTTP request made by the host
+ *  \param[in] Command        HTTP command to compare the request to
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command matches the request, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader, char* Command)
+{
+	/* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */
+	return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0);
+}
+
+/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request
+ *  has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ConnectionState  Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information
+ *  \param[in,out] Buffer       Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer
+ */
+void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer)
+{
+	char*          BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data;
+	static uint8_t PageBlock     = 0;
+	
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */
+	if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer))
+	{
+		if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET"))
+		{
+			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET / "))
+			{
+				PageBlock = 0;
+
+				/* Copy the HTTP 200 response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
+				
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+
+				/* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */
+				TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP 404 response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
+				
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+				
+				/* All data sent, close the connection */
+				TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+			}
+		}
+		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD"))
+		{
+			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD / "))
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));			
+			}
+			
+			/* All data sent, close the connection */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE"))
+		{
+			/* Echo the host's query back to the host */
+			TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length);
+			
+			/* All data sent, close the connection */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */
+			TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer);
+		}
+	}
+	else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer))
+	{
+		uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]);
+		uint16_t Length;
+	
+		/* Determine the length of the loaded block */
+		Length = ((RemLength > HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE) ? HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE : RemLength);
+
+		/* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */
+		strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length);
+		
+		/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+		TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length);
+
+		/* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */
+		if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE))
+		{
+			/* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */
+			TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+			
+			/* Close the connection to the host */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
index be96f7f34..3ba4186ea 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
@@ -1,55 +1,55 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Webserver.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
-#define _WEBSERVER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		
-		#include "TCP.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */
-		#define  HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE     128
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void Webserver_Init(void);
-		void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Webserver.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
+#define _WEBSERVER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		
+		#include "TCP.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */
+		#define  HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE     128
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Webserver_Init(void);
+		void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
index cb06bc333..d11829dd6 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
@@ -1,302 +1,302 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "RNDISEthernet.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	/* Webserver Initialization */
-	TCP_Init();
-	Webserver_Init();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Ethernet_Task();
-		TCP_Task();
-		RNDIS_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs and stops all the relevant tasks.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the RNDIS device endpoints and starts the relevant tasks.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}							   
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the RNDIS control commands,
- *  which set up the USB RNDIS network adapter), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Process RNDIS class commands */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				/* Clear the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Read in the RNDIS message into the message buffer */
-				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, USB_ControlRequest.wLength);
-
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-				/* Process the RNDIS message */
-				ProcessRNDISControlMessage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				/* Clear the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* Check if a response to the last message is ready */
-				if (!(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
-				{
-					/* Set the response to a single 0x00 byte to indicate that no response is ready */
-					RNDISMessageBuffer[0] = 0;
-					MessageHeader->MessageLength = 1;
-				}
-
-				/* Write the message response data to the endpoint */
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, MessageHeader->MessageLength);
-				
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-				/* Reset the message header once again after transmission */
-				MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
-			}
-	
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Task to manage the sending and receiving of encapsulated RNDIS data and notifications. This removes the RNDIS
- *  wrapper from received Ethernet frames and places them in the FrameIN global buffer, or adds the RNDIS wrapper
- *  to a frame in the FrameOUT global before sending the buffer contents to the host.
- */
-void RNDIS_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Select the notification endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM);
-
-	/* Check if a message response is ready for the host */
-	if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && ResponseReady)
-	{
-		USB_Notification_t Notification = (USB_Notification_t)
-			{
-				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-				.bNotification = NOTIF_RESPONSE_AVAILABLE,
-				.wValue        = 0,
-				.wIndex        = 0,
-				.wLength       = 0,
-			};
-		
-		/* Indicate that a message response is ready for the host */
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification));
-
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-		/* Indicate a response is no longer ready */
-		ResponseReady = false;
-	}
-	
-	/* Don't process the data endpoints until the system is in the data initialized state, and the buffer is free */
-	if ((CurrRNDISState == RNDIS_Data_Initialized) && !(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
-	{
-		/* Create a new packet header for reading/writing */
-		RNDIS_Packet_Message_t RNDISPacketHeader;
-
-		/* Select the data OUT endpoint */
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
-		
-		/* Check if the data OUT endpoint contains data, and that the IN buffer is empty */
-		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() && !(FrameIN.FrameInBuffer))
-		{
-			/* Read in the packet message header */
-			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
-
-			/* Stall the request if the data is too large */
-			if (RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength > ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX)
-			{
-				Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-				return;
-			}
-			
-			/* Read in the Ethernet frame into the buffer */
-			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(FrameIN.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength);
-
-			/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			
-			/* Store the size of the Ethernet frame */
-			FrameIN.FrameLength = RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength;
-
-			/* Indicate Ethernet IN buffer full */
-			FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = true;
-		}
-		
-		/* Select the data IN endpoint */
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
-		
-		/* Check if the data IN endpoint is ready for more data, and that the IN buffer is full */
-		if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer)
-		{
-			/* Clear the packet header with all 0s so that the relevant fields can be filled */
-			memset(&RNDISPacketHeader, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
-
-			/* Construct the required packet header fields in the buffer */
-			RNDISPacketHeader.MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG;
-			RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + FrameOUT.FrameLength);
-			RNDISPacketHeader.DataOffset    = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
-			RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength    = FrameOUT.FrameLength;
-
-			/* Send the packet header to the host */
-			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
-
-			/* Send the Ethernet frame data to the host */
-			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(FrameOUT.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength);
-			
-			/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			
-			/* Indicate Ethernet OUT buffer no longer full */
-			FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = false;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/** Ethernet frame processing task. This task checks to see if a frame has been received, and if so hands off the processing
- *  of the frame to the Ethernet processing routines.
- */
-void Ethernet_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Task for Ethernet processing. Incoming ethernet frames are loaded into the FrameIN structure, and
-	   outgoing frames should be loaded into the FrameOUT structure. Both structures can only hold a single
-	   Ethernet frame at a time, so the FrameInBuffer bool is used to indicate when the buffers contain data. */
-
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Check if a frame has been written to the IN frame buffer */
-	if (FrameIN.FrameInBuffer)
-	{
-		/* Indicate packet processing started */
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
-		/* Process the ethernet frame - replace this with your own Ethernet handler code as desired */
-		Ethernet_ProcessPacket();
-
-		/* Indicate packet processing complete */
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RNDISEthernet.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Webserver Initialization */
+	TCP_Init();
+	Webserver_Init();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Ethernet_Task();
+		TCP_Task();
+		RNDIS_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops all the relevant tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the RNDIS device endpoints and starts the relevant tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}							   
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the RNDIS control commands,
+ *  which set up the USB RNDIS network adapter), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process RNDIS class commands */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Clear the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Read in the RNDIS message into the message buffer */
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, USB_ControlRequest.wLength);
+
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Process the RNDIS message */
+				ProcessRNDISControlMessage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Clear the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Check if a response to the last message is ready */
+				if (!(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
+				{
+					/* Set the response to a single 0x00 byte to indicate that no response is ready */
+					RNDISMessageBuffer[0] = 0;
+					MessageHeader->MessageLength = 1;
+				}
+
+				/* Write the message response data to the endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, MessageHeader->MessageLength);
+				
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Reset the message header once again after transmission */
+				MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
+			}
+	
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to manage the sending and receiving of encapsulated RNDIS data and notifications. This removes the RNDIS
+ *  wrapper from received Ethernet frames and places them in the FrameIN global buffer, or adds the RNDIS wrapper
+ *  to a frame in the FrameOUT global before sending the buffer contents to the host.
+ */
+void RNDIS_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Select the notification endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Check if a message response is ready for the host */
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && ResponseReady)
+	{
+		USB_Notification_t Notification = (USB_Notification_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bNotification = NOTIF_RESPONSE_AVAILABLE,
+				.wValue        = 0,
+				.wIndex        = 0,
+				.wLength       = 0,
+			};
+		
+		/* Indicate that a message response is ready for the host */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification));
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Indicate a response is no longer ready */
+		ResponseReady = false;
+	}
+	
+	/* Don't process the data endpoints until the system is in the data initialized state, and the buffer is free */
+	if ((CurrRNDISState == RNDIS_Data_Initialized) && !(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
+	{
+		/* Create a new packet header for reading/writing */
+		RNDIS_Packet_Message_t RNDISPacketHeader;
+
+		/* Select the data OUT endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
+		
+		/* Check if the data OUT endpoint contains data, and that the IN buffer is empty */
+		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() && !(FrameIN.FrameInBuffer))
+		{
+			/* Read in the packet message header */
+			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
+
+			/* Stall the request if the data is too large */
+			if (RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength > ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX)
+			{
+				Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+				return;
+			}
+			
+			/* Read in the Ethernet frame into the buffer */
+			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(FrameIN.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength);
+
+			/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			
+			/* Store the size of the Ethernet frame */
+			FrameIN.FrameLength = RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength;
+
+			/* Indicate Ethernet IN buffer full */
+			FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = true;
+		}
+		
+		/* Select the data IN endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
+		
+		/* Check if the data IN endpoint is ready for more data, and that the IN buffer is full */
+		if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer)
+		{
+			/* Clear the packet header with all 0s so that the relevant fields can be filled */
+			memset(&RNDISPacketHeader, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
+
+			/* Construct the required packet header fields in the buffer */
+			RNDISPacketHeader.MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG;
+			RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + FrameOUT.FrameLength);
+			RNDISPacketHeader.DataOffset    = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+			RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength    = FrameOUT.FrameLength;
+
+			/* Send the packet header to the host */
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
+
+			/* Send the Ethernet frame data to the host */
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(FrameOUT.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength);
+			
+			/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			
+			/* Indicate Ethernet OUT buffer no longer full */
+			FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = false;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Ethernet frame processing task. This task checks to see if a frame has been received, and if so hands off the processing
+ *  of the frame to the Ethernet processing routines.
+ */
+void Ethernet_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Task for Ethernet processing. Incoming ethernet frames are loaded into the FrameIN structure, and
+	   outgoing frames should be loaded into the FrameOUT structure. Both structures can only hold a single
+	   Ethernet frame at a time, so the FrameInBuffer bool is used to indicate when the buffers contain data. */
+
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Check if a frame has been written to the IN frame buffer */
+	if (FrameIN.FrameInBuffer)
+	{
+		/* Indicate packet processing started */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		/* Process the ethernet frame - replace this with your own Ethernet handler code as desired */
+		Ethernet_ProcessPacket();
+
+		/* Indicate packet processing complete */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
index 478ed1a23..0caf953d2 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
@@ -1,101 +1,101 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for RNDISEthernet.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_
-#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/RNDIS.h"
-		#include "Lib/Ethernet.h"
-		#include "Lib/TCP.h"
-		#include "Lib/ARP.h"
-		#include "Lib/Webserver.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Notification value to indicate that a frame is ready to be read by the host. */
-		#define NOTIF_RESPONSE_AVAILABLE  0x01
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS notification message, for transmission to the RNDIS host via the notification
-		 *  Endpoint.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  bmRequestType; /**< Notification type, a mask of values from SrdRequestType.h */
-			uint8_t  bNotification; /**< Notification index, indicating what the RNDIS notification relates to */
-			uint16_t wValue; /**< Two byte notification value parameter */
-			uint16_t wIndex; /**< Two byte notification index parameter */
-			uint16_t wLength; /**< Size of data payload following the notification header */
-		} USB_Notification_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void RNDIS_Task(void);
-		void Ethernet_Task(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-	
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISEthernet.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/RNDIS.h"
+		#include "Lib/Ethernet.h"
+		#include "Lib/TCP.h"
+		#include "Lib/ARP.h"
+		#include "Lib/Webserver.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Notification value to indicate that a frame is ready to be read by the host. */
+		#define NOTIF_RESPONSE_AVAILABLE  0x01
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS notification message, for transmission to the RNDIS host via the notification
+		 *  Endpoint.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bmRequestType; /**< Notification type, a mask of values from SrdRequestType.h */
+			uint8_t  bNotification; /**< Notification index, indicating what the RNDIS notification relates to */
+			uint16_t wValue; /**< Two byte notification value parameter */
+			uint16_t wIndex; /**< Two byte notification index parameter */
+			uint16_t wLength; /**< Size of data payload following the notification header */
+		} USB_Notification_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void RNDIS_Task(void);
+		void Ethernet_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+	
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
index b897f1bb5..2175ecb7f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
@@ -1,122 +1,122 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet)
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application.
- *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
- *  a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for
- *  ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft
- *  standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually
- *  patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no
- *  manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels.
- *  
- *  Before running, you will need to install the INF file that
- *  is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will
- *  enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the
- *  need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install,
- *  right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If
- *  Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix
- *  will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and
- *  then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted.
- *  
- *  When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network
- *  adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received
- *  from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP
- *  stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be
- *  accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or
- *  through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports
- *  ping echos via the ICMP protocol.
- *  
- *  \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations
- *  and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor
- *  compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is 
- *  recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP
- *  stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_ETHERNET</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received Ethernet headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_ARP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received ARP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_IP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received IP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_ICMP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received ICMP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_TCP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received TCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_UDP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received UDP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_DECODE_DHCP</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, received DHCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet)
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for
+ *  ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft
+ *  standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually
+ *  patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no
+ *  manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels.
+ *  
+ *  Before running, you will need to install the INF file that
+ *  is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will
+ *  enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the
+ *  need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install,
+ *  right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If
+ *  Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix
+ *  will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and
+ *  then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted.
+ *  
+ *  When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network
+ *  adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received
+ *  from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP
+ *  stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be
+ *  accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or
+ *  through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports
+ *  ping echos via the ICMP protocol.
+ *  
+ *  \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations
+ *  and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor
+ *  compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is 
+ *  recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP
+ *  stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ETHERNET</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received Ethernet headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ARP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received ARP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_IP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received IP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ICMP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received ICMP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_TCP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received TCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_UDP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received UDP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_DHCP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received DHCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/makefile
index 5d0798457..96c73f723 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/makefile
@@ -1,750 +1,750 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = RNDISEthernet
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-      Descriptors.c                                               \
-      Lib/RNDIS.c                                                 \
-	  Lib/Ethernet.c                                              \
-	  Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c                                      \
-	  Lib/ICMP.c                                                  \
-	  Lib/TCP.c                                                   \
-	  Lib/UDP.c                                                   \
-	  Lib/DHCP.c                                                  \
-	  Lib/ARP.c                                                   \
-	  Lib/IP.c                                                    \
-	  Lib/Webserver.c                                             \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_ETHERNET -DNO_DECODE_ARP -DNO_DECODE_ICMP -DNO_DECODE_IP -DNO_DECODE_TCP -DNO_DECODE_UDP -DNO_DECODE_DHCP
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = RNDISEthernet
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+      Descriptors.c                                               \
+      Lib/RNDIS.c                                                 \
+	  Lib/Ethernet.c                                              \
+	  Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c                                      \
+	  Lib/ICMP.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/TCP.c                                                   \
+	  Lib/UDP.c                                                   \
+	  Lib/DHCP.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/ARP.c                                                   \
+	  Lib/IP.c                                                    \
+	  Lib/Webserver.c                                             \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_ETHERNET -DNO_DECODE_ARP -DNO_DECODE_ICMP -DNO_DECODE_IP -DNO_DECODE_TCP -DNO_DECODE_UDP -DNO_DECODE_DHCP
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
index 56385d467..57fa5f873 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,267 +1,267 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x02,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2044,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA CDC Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*          Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t       Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;		
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x02,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2044,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA CDC Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*          Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t       Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;		
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
index 8866752db..07a2cc0bd 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
-		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
-		 *  a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
-		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
-		 */
-		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
-		     struct                                        \
-		     {                                             \
-		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
-			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
-		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
-		     }
-			 
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16	
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
+		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
+		 *  a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
+		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
+		 */
+		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
+		     struct                                        \
+		     {                                             \
+		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
+			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
+		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
+		     }
+			 
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16	
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
index 0852113dc..5cabce223 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf
index a179053eb..cd9c3433a 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
-INSTDISK="LUFA CDC Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
+INSTDISK="LUFA CDC Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c
index 52ef28c6f..64b3a2cea 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c
@@ -1,275 +1,275 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the VirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
- *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "VirtualSerial.h"
-
-/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
- *  the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
- *  upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
- *
- *  These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
- *  It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
- *  serial link characteristics and instead sends and receives data in endpoint streams.
- */
-CDC_Line_Coding_t LineEncoding = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
-                                   .CharFormat  = OneStopBit,
-                                   .ParityType  = Parity_None,
-                                   .DataBits    = 8            };
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		CDC_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Joystick_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB not ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
- *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	
-	/* Reset line encoding baud rate so that the host knows to send new values */
-	LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS = 0;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
- *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands,
- *  which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{	
-				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				/* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
-				
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				/* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
-				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
-
-				/* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			}
-	
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetControlLineState:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				/* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake
-				         lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter in USB_ControlRequest, and can be masked against the
-						 CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code:
-				*/
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-	
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */
-void CDC_Task(void)
-{
-	char*       ReportString    = NULL;
-	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL   = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	static bool ActionSent      = false;
-	
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-	  
-#if 0
-	/* NOTE: Here you can use the notification endpoint to send back line state changes to the host, for the special RS-232
-	 *       handshake signal lines (and some error states), via the CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks and the following code:
-	 */
-	USB_Notification_Header_t Notification = (USB_Notification_Header_t)
-		{
-			.NotificationType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.Notification     = NOTIF_SerialState,
-			.wValue           = 0,
-			.wIndex           = 0,
-			.wLength          = sizeof(uint16_t),
-		};
-		
-	uint16_t LineStateMask;
-	
-	// Set LineStateMask here to a mask of CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks to set the input handshake line states to send to the host
-	
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification));
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&LineStateMask, sizeof(LineStateMask));
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-#endif
-
-	/* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
-	else
-	  ActionSent = false;
-
-	/* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */
-	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false) && LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS)
-	{
-		ActionSent = true;
-
-		/* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
-
-		/* Write the String to the Endpoint */
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString));
-		
-		/* Remember if the packet to send completely fills the endpoint */
-		bool IsFull = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE);
-
-		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-		/* If the last packet filled the endpoint, send an empty packet to release the buffer on 
-		 * the receiver (otherwise all data will be cached until a non-full packet is received) */
-		if (IsFull)
-		{
-			/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for another packet */
-			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
-			
-			/* Send an empty packet to ensure that the host does not buffer data sent to it */
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Throw away any received data from the host */
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "VirtualSerial.h"
+
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
+ *  the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
+ *  upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
+ *
+ *  These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
+ *  It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
+ *  serial link characteristics and instead sends and receives data in endpoint streams.
+ */
+CDC_Line_Coding_t LineEncoding = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
+                                   .CharFormat  = OneStopBit,
+                                   .ParityType  = Parity_None,
+                                   .DataBits    = 8            };
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CDC_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	
+	/* Reset line encoding baud rate so that the host knows to send new values */
+	LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS = 0;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlRequest event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands,
+ *  which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{	
+				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
+				
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
+
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+	
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetControlLineState:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake
+				         lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter in USB_ControlRequest, and can be masked against the
+						 CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code:
+				*/
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+	
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */
+void CDC_Task(void)
+{
+	char*       ReportString    = NULL;
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL   = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	static bool ActionSent      = false;
+	
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+	  
+#if 0
+	/* NOTE: Here you can use the notification endpoint to send back line state changes to the host, for the special RS-232
+	 *       handshake signal lines (and some error states), via the CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks and the following code:
+	 */
+	USB_Notification_Header_t Notification = (USB_Notification_Header_t)
+		{
+			.NotificationType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.Notification     = NOTIF_SerialState,
+			.wValue           = 0,
+			.wIndex           = 0,
+			.wLength          = sizeof(uint16_t),
+		};
+		
+	uint16_t LineStateMask;
+	
+	// Set LineStateMask here to a mask of CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks to set the input handshake line states to send to the host
+	
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification));
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&LineStateMask, sizeof(LineStateMask));
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+#endif
+
+	/* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+
+	/* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false) && LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS)
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+
+		/* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
+
+		/* Write the String to the Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString));
+		
+		/* Remember if the packet to send completely fills the endpoint */
+		bool IsFull = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* If the last packet filled the endpoint, send an empty packet to release the buffer on 
+		 * the receiver (otherwise all data will be cached until a non-full packet is received) */
+		if (IsFull)
+		{
+			/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for another packet */
+			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+			
+			/* Send an empty packet to ensure that the host does not buffer data sent to it */
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Throw away any received data from the host */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h
index 1ec261c41..650874c96 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h
@@ -1,184 +1,184 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for VirtualSerial.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
-#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
-		#define REQ_GetLineEncoding          0x21
-
-		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
-		#define REQ_SetLineEncoding          0x20
-
-		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
-		#define REQ_SetControlLineState      0x22
-		
-		/** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for
-		 *  use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC 
-		 *  notification endpoint.
-		 */
-		#define NOTIF_SerialState            0x20
-
-		/** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
-		 *  from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high.
-		 */
-		#define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR         (1 << 0)
-
-		/** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
-		 *  from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high.
-		 */
-		#define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS         (1 << 1)
-		
-		/** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high.
-		 */
-		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD          (1 << 0)
-
-		/** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high.
-		 */
-		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR          (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high.
-		 */
-		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK        (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high.
-		 */
-		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING         (1 << 3)
-
-		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
-		 *  to indicate that a framing error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
-		 */
-		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR   (1 << 4)
-
-		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
-		 *  to indicate that a parity error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
-		 */
-		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR  (1 << 5)
-
-		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
-		 *  to indicate that a data overrun error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
-		 */
-		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6)
-		
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY         LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration
-		 *  as set by the host via a class specific request.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
-			uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
-			                      *   CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
-			                      */
-			uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
-			                      *   CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
-			                      */
-			uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per character of the virtual serial port */
-		} CDC_Line_Coding_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a CDC notification, sent to the host via the CDC notification endpoint to indicate a
-		 *  change in the device state asynchronously.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  NotificationType; /**< Notification type, a mask of REQDIR_*, REQTYPE_* and REQREC_* constants
-			                            *   from the library StdRequestType.h header
-			                            */
-			uint8_t  Notification; /**< Notification value, a NOTIF_* constant */
-			uint16_t wValue; /**< Notification wValue, notification-specific */
-			uint16_t wIndex; /**< Notification wIndex, notification-specific */
-			uint16_t wLength; /**< Notification wLength, notification-specific */
-		} USB_Notification_Header_t;
-		
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
-		enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
-		{
-			OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */
-			OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */
-			TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */
-		};
-		
-		/** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
-		enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t
-		{
-			Parity_None         = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */
-			Parity_Odd          = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */
-			Parity_Even         = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */
-			Parity_Mark         = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */
-			Parity_Space        = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */
-		};
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void CDC_Task(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+		#define REQ_GetLineEncoding          0x21
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+		#define REQ_SetLineEncoding          0x20
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
+		#define REQ_SetControlLineState      0x22
+		
+		/** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for
+		 *  use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC 
+		 *  notification endpoint.
+		 */
+		#define NOTIF_SerialState            0x20
+
+		/** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
+		 *  from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR         (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
+		 *  from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS         (1 << 1)
+		
+		/** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD          (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR          (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK        (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING         (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a framing error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR   (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a parity error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR  (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a data overrun error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6)
+		
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY         LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration
+		 *  as set by the host via a class specific request.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
+			uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+			                      *   CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
+			                      */
+			uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+			                      *   CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
+			                      */
+			uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per character of the virtual serial port */
+		} CDC_Line_Coding_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a CDC notification, sent to the host via the CDC notification endpoint to indicate a
+		 *  change in the device state asynchronously.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  NotificationType; /**< Notification type, a mask of REQDIR_*, REQTYPE_* and REQREC_* constants
+			                            *   from the library StdRequestType.h header
+			                            */
+			uint8_t  Notification; /**< Notification value, a NOTIF_* constant */
+			uint16_t wValue; /**< Notification wValue, notification-specific */
+			uint16_t wIndex; /**< Notification wIndex, notification-specific */
+			uint16_t wLength; /**< Notification wLength, notification-specific */
+		} USB_Notification_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
+		enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
+		{
+			OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */
+			OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */
+			TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */
+		};
+		
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
+		enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t
+		{
+			Parity_None         = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Odd          = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Even         = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Mark         = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Space        = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */
+		};
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CDC_Task(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt
index 49837354c..a551379c3 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Communications Device Class demonstration application.
- *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
- *  a CDC device acting as a virtual serial port. Joystick
- *  actions are transmitted to the host as strings. The device
- *  does not respond to serial data sent from the host.
- *  
- *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
- *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
- *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
- *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
- *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
- *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
- *  CDC-ACM drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a CDC device acting as a virtual serial port. Joystick
+ *  actions are transmitted to the host as strings. The device
+ *  does not respond to serial data sent from the host.
+ *  
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/makefile b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/makefile
index fecbbc051..c9166e7bc 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = VirtualSerial
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = VirtualSerial
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.c b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.c
index 7a5fc349e..703051e84 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,251 +1,251 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)             */
-	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                            */
-	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                 */
-	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                        */
-	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Application)               */
-	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                     */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                      */
-	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                  */
-	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)             */
-	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)             */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                  */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                  */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)     */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                     */
-	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                      */
-	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                     */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                      */
-	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                     */
-	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */
-	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                              */
-	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                              */
-	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)               */
-	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                */
-	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)     */
-	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                         */
-	0xC0                 /* End Collection                           */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2041,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_MouseHID = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(15), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mouse Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration:
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String:
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00:
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01:
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02:
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;		
-	return Size;
-}
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)             */
+	0x09, 0x02,          /* Usage (Mouse)                            */
+	0xA1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                 */
+	0x09, 0x01,          /*   Usage (Pointer)                        */
+	0xA1, 0x00,          /*   Collection (Application)               */
+	0x95, 0x03,          /*     Report Count (3)                     */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*     Report Size (1)                      */
+	0x05, 0x09,          /*     Usage Page (Button)                  */
+	0x19, 0x01,          /*     Usage Minimum (Button 1)             */
+	0x29, 0x03,          /*     Usage Maximum (Button 3)             */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*     Logical Minimum (0)                  */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*     Logical Maximum (1)                  */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)     */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*     Report Count (1)                     */
+	0x75, 0x05,          /*     Report Size (5)                      */
+	0x81, 0x01,          /*     Input (Constant)                     */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*     Report Size (8)                      */
+	0x95, 0x02,          /*     Report Count (2)                     */
+	0x05, 0x01,          /*     Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */
+	0x09, 0x30,          /*     Usage X                              */
+	0x09, 0x31,          /*     Usage Y                              */
+	0x15, 0x81,          /*     Logical Minimum (-127)               */
+	0x25, 0x7F,          /*     Logical Maximum (127)                */
+	0x81, 0x06,          /*     Input (Data, Variable, Relative)     */
+	0xC0,                /*   End Collection                         */
+	0xC0                 /* End Collection                           */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2041,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_MouseHID = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(15), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Mouse Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&MouseReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;		
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.h b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.h
index f5364ce15..2c77d7841 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,69 +1,69 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_MouseHID;
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define MOUSE_EPNUM               1
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE              8
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_MouseHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPNUM               1
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.c b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.c
index 0ae28255c..e1a158dc3 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.c
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.c
@@ -1,146 +1,146 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Device Mode USB Mouse functionality for the MouseHostDevice demo. This file contains the Device mode
- *  USB Mouse related code of the demo and is responsible for all the Device mode Mouse functionality.
- */
-
-#include "DeviceFunctions.h"
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse Device HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Device_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber            = 0,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber     = MOUSE_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize       = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
-				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-
-				.PrevReportINBuffer         = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize     = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
-			},
-	};
-	
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB WakeUp event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Suspend event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface);
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
- *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
-{
-	USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
-		
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  MouseReport->Y = -1;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  MouseReport->Y =  1;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  MouseReport->X =  1;
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  MouseReport->X = -1;
-
-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
-	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
-	  
-	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 1);
-	
-	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
- *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
- *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
- */
-void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Device Mode USB Mouse functionality for the MouseHostDevice demo. This file contains the Device mode
+ *  USB Mouse related code of the demo and is responsible for all the Device mode Mouse functionality.
+ */
+
+#include "DeviceFunctions.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse Device HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Device_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber            = 0,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber     = MOUSE_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize       = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+
+				.PrevReportINBuffer         = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize     = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+	
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB WakeUp event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Suspend event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+		
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  MouseReport->Y = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  MouseReport->Y =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  MouseReport->X =  1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  MouseReport->X = -1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+	  
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 1);
+	
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
 }
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.h b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.h
index 5f830667f..b673f8a4f 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.h
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.h
@@ -1,57 +1,57 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DeviceFunctions.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MOUSE_DEVICE_FUNCTIONS_H_
-#define _MOUSE_DEVICE_FUNCTIONS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "MouseHostDevice.h"
-		
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Device_Interface;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
-		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
-		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DeviceFunctions.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_DEVICE_FUNCTIONS_H_
+#define _MOUSE_DEVICE_FUNCTIONS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "MouseHostDevice.h"
+		
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Device_Interface;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
+		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Doxygen.conf
index b2849ef17..f54c06bd8 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host/Device Dual Role Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host/Device Dual Role Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.c b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.c
index 22ebc559a..bb9286bbe 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.c
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.c
@@ -1,185 +1,185 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Host Mode USB Mouse functionality for the MouseHostDevice demo. This file contains the Host mode
- *  USB Mouse related code of the demo and is responsible for all the Host mode Mouse functionality.
- */
- 
-#include "HostFunctions.h"
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Host_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				
-				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
-			},
-	};
-
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Host state machine task. This task handles the enumeration and control of USB Mice while in USB Host mode,
- *  setting up the appropriate data pipes and processing reports from the attached device.
- */
-void MouseHostTask(void)
-{
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-		
-			uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-			uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-			if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-			                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-			{
-				printf("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n");
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface,
-			                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-			{
-				printf("Attached Device Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n");
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-				
-			if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n");
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			if (HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf("Could not Set Boot Protocol Mode.\r\n");
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-				
-			printf("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n");
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface))
-			{	
-				uint8_t LEDMask  = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-					
-				USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport;
-				HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface, &MouseReport);
-						
-				printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X,
-															  MouseReport.Y,
-															  MouseReport.Button);
-				if (MouseReport.X > 0)
-				  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
-				else if (MouseReport.X < 0)
-				  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
-							
-				if (MouseReport.Y > 0)
-				  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
-				else if (MouseReport.Y < 0)
-				  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
-
-				if (MouseReport.Button)
-				  LEDMask  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Host Mode USB Mouse functionality for the MouseHostDevice demo. This file contains the Host mode
+ *  USB Mouse related code of the demo and is responsible for all the Host mode Mouse functionality.
+ */
+ 
+#include "HostFunctions.h"
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Host_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Host state machine task. This task handles the enumeration and control of USB Mice while in USB Host mode,
+ *  setting up the appropriate data pipes and processing reports from the attached device.
+ */
+void MouseHostTask(void)
+{
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+		
+			uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+			uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+			if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+			                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+			{
+				printf("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n");
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface,
+			                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+			{
+				printf("Attached Device Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n");
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+				
+			if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n");
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			if (HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf("Could not Set Boot Protocol Mode.\r\n");
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+				
+			printf("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n");
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface))
+			{	
+				uint8_t LEDMask  = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+					
+				USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport;
+				HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface, &MouseReport);
+						
+				printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X,
+															  MouseReport.Y,
+															  MouseReport.Button);
+				if (MouseReport.X > 0)
+				  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+				else if (MouseReport.X < 0)
+				  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+							
+				if (MouseReport.Y > 0)
+				  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+				else if (MouseReport.Y < 0)
+				  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+				if (MouseReport.Button)
+				  LEDMask  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.h b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.h
index 2bbd7287b..63f64ffd3 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.h
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.h
@@ -1,54 +1,54 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for HostFunctions.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_FUNCTIONS_H_
-#define _MOUSE_HOST_FUNCTIONS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "MouseHostDevice.h"
-		
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Host_Interface;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void MouseHostTask(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HostFunctions.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_FUNCTIONS_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_FUNCTIONS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "MouseHostDevice.h"
+		
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Host_Interface;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void MouseHostTask(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.c b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.c
index 98bf50bff..cd6bf59ee 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.c
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.c
@@ -1,84 +1,84 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MouseHostDevice demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the overall control flow of the demo.
- */
- 
-#include "MouseHostDevice.h"
-	
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse Host/Device Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		/* Determine which USB mode we are currently in */
-		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
-		{
-			MouseHostTask();
-			HID_Host_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface);
-		}
-
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Joystick_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MouseHostDevice demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the overall control flow of the demo.
+ */
+ 
+#include "MouseHostDevice.h"
+	
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse Host/Device Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Determine which USB mode we are currently in */
+		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
+		{
+			MouseHostTask();
+			HID_Host_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface);
+		}
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.h b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.h
index 48035d624..1da4936ae 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.h
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.h
@@ -1,76 +1,76 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_DEVICE_H_
-#define _MOUSE_HOST_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-		
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "DeviceFunctions.h"
-		#include "HostFunctions.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_DEVICE_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+		
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DeviceFunctions.h"
+		#include "HostFunctions.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.txt b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.txt
index f65931185..cf3b0a434 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.txt
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.txt
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mouse Host/Device Dual Role Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Dual Mode Host/Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Mouse host/device dual role demonstration application. This gives a simple
- *  reference application for implementing a dual role USB Mouse, for USB mice
- *  using the standard mouse boot protocol HID profile.
- *  
- *  <b>When in host mode:</b>
- *  Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs,
- *  as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and
- *  button status information.
- *  
- *  This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
- *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
- *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
- *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
- *  MouseHostWithParser Host demo application.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.	
- *
- *  <b>When in device mode:</b>
- *  Upon enumeration the system will automatically enumerate and function
- *  as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
- *  the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the
- *  joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as
- *  the right mouse button.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host/Device Dual Role Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Dual Mode Host/Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Mouse host/device dual role demonstration application. This gives a simple
+ *  reference application for implementing a dual role USB Mouse, for USB mice
+ *  using the standard mouse boot protocol HID profile.
+ *  
+ *  <b>When in host mode:</b>
+ *  Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs,
+ *  as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and
+ *  button status information.
+ *  
+ *  This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ *  MouseHostWithParser Host demo application.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.	
+ *
+ *  <b>When in device mode:</b>
+ *  Upon enumeration the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
+ *  the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the
+ *  joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as
+ *  the right mouse button.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/makefile b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/makefile
index 8fee350cf..210748d59 100644
--- a/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/makefile
+++ b/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/makefile
@@ -1,742 +1,742 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MouseHostDevice
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  DeviceFunctions.c                                           \
-	  HostFunctions.c                                             \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MouseHostDevice
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  DeviceFunctions.c                                           \
+	  HostFunctions.c                                             \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
index 259f2ce01..996d1bd5e 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c
index 7be38dd85..8f0b40533 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c
@@ -1,281 +1,281 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the JoystickHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "JoystickHostWithParser.h"
-
-/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
-HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Joystick_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
-				
-				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
-				
-				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
-			},
-	};
-
-	
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Joystick Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Joystick_HID_Interface,
-				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Joystick.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Joystick_HID_Interface) != 0)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode or Not a Valid Joystick.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("Joystick Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Joystick_HID_Interface))
-				{
-					uint8_t JoystickReport[Joystick_HID_Interface.State.LargestReportSize];
-					HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Joystick_HID_Interface, &JoystickReport);
-
-					uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-
-					for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
-					{
-						HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
-						
-						/* Update the report item value if it is contained within the current report */
-						if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(JoystickReport, ReportItem)))
-						  continue;
-
-						/* Determine what report item is being tested, process updated value as needed */
-						if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
-							(ReportItem->ItemType                     == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-						{
-							if (ReportItem->Value)
-							  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-						}
-						else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
-								 ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
-								  (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
-								 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-						{
-							int16_t DeltaMovement = (int16_t)(ReportItem->Value << (16 - ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize));
-							
-							if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
-							{
-								if (DeltaMovement)
-								  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
-							}
-							else
-							{
-								if (DeltaMovement)
-								  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
-							}
-						}
-					}
-					
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-				}
-				
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		HID_Host_USBTask(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
- *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
- *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
- *  have occupied).
- *
- *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
-{
-	bool IsJoystick = false;
-
-	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
-	 * Joystick Usage is found - this prevents Mice, which use identical descriptors except for the Joystick usage
-	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a joystick by the demo
-	 */
-	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
-	{
-		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
-		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_JOYSTICK))
-		{
-			IsJoystick = true;
-			break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* If a collection with the joystick usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
-	if (!IsJoystick)
-	  return false;
-
-	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
-	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
-	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
-	 */
-	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
-	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the JoystickHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "JoystickHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Joystick_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+				
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
+				
+				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
+			},
+	};
+
+	
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Joystick Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Joystick_HID_Interface,
+				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Joystick.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Joystick_HID_Interface) != 0)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode or Not a Valid Joystick.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("Joystick Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Joystick_HID_Interface))
+				{
+					uint8_t JoystickReport[Joystick_HID_Interface.State.LargestReportSize];
+					HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Joystick_HID_Interface, &JoystickReport);
+
+					uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+					for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+					{
+						HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+						
+						/* Update the report item value if it is contained within the current report */
+						if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(JoystickReport, ReportItem)))
+						  continue;
+
+						/* Determine what report item is being tested, process updated value as needed */
+						if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
+							(ReportItem->ItemType                     == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+						{
+							if (ReportItem->Value)
+							  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+						}
+						else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+								 ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
+								  (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
+								 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+						{
+							int16_t DeltaMovement = (int16_t)(ReportItem->Value << (16 - ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize));
+							
+							if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
+							{
+								if (DeltaMovement)
+								  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+							}
+							else
+							{
+								if (DeltaMovement)
+								  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
+							}
+						}
+					}
+					
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+				}
+				
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
+{
+	bool IsJoystick = false;
+
+	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
+	 * Joystick Usage is found - this prevents Mice, which use identical descriptors except for the Joystick usage
+	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a joystick by the demo
+	 */
+	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
+	{
+		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_JOYSTICK))
+		{
+			IsJoystick = true;
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If a collection with the joystick usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
+	if (!IsJoystick)
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
+	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
+	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h
index 7ee7b80d7..9ba8c7cb4 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h
@@ -1,93 +1,93 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for JoystickHostWithParser.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
-#define _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY         LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */
-		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */
-		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Joystick */
-		#define USAGE_JOYSTICK              0x04
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */
-		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */
-		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for JoystickHostWithParser.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
+#define _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY         LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Joystick */
+		#define USAGE_JOYSTICK              0x04
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */
+		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */
+		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt
index 3a24de07b..5d002e4cc 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Joystick Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Joystick host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Joystick host, for USB joysticks using
- *  the standard joystick HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
- *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB joysticks. This
- *  demo supports joysticks with a single HID report.
- *  
- *  Joystick movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs.
- *  On connection to a USB joystick, the report items will be processed and
- *  printed as a formatted list through the USART before the joystick is
- *  fully enumerated.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Joystick Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Joystick host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Joystick host, for USB joysticks using
+ *  the standard joystick HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
+ *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB joysticks. This
+ *  demo supports joysticks with a single HID report.
+ *  
+ *  Joystick movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs.
+ *  On connection to a USB joystick, the report items will be processed and
+ *  printed as a formatted list through the USART before the joystick is
+ *  fully enumerated.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile
index fce088cd7..82f22a93a 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = JoystickHostWithParser
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = JoystickHostWithParser
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf
index 07f6920a1..3de7fb9ef 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
index c79c1005e..8ae7d8312 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
@@ -1,222 +1,222 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the KeyboardHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "KeyboardHost.h"
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
-				
-				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_BOOT_KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL,
-			},
-	};
-
-	
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_HID_Interface,
-				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Keyboard.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(&Keyboard_HID_Interface) != 0)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Could not Set Boot Protocol Mode.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Keyboard_HID_Interface))
-				{
-					USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport;					
-					HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Keyboard_HID_Interface, &KeyboardReport);
-
-					LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0);
-					
-					uint8_t PressedKeyCode = KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0];
-
-					if (PressedKeyCode)
-					{
-						char PressedKey = 0;
-
-						LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
-							  
-						/* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */
-						if ((PressedKeyCode >= 0x04) && (PressedKeyCode <= 0x1D))
-						  PressedKey = (PressedKeyCode - 0x04) + 'A';
-						else if ((PressedKeyCode >= 0x1E) && (PressedKeyCode <= 0x27))
-						  PressedKey = (PressedKeyCode - 0x1E) + '0';
-						else if (PressedKeyCode == 0x2C)
-						  PressedKey = ' ';						
-						else if (PressedKeyCode == 0x28)
-						  PressedKey = '\n';
-							 
-						if (PressedKey)
-						  putchar(PressedKey);
-					}
-				}
-				
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		HID_Host_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "KeyboardHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+				
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_BOOT_KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL,
+			},
+	};
+
+	
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_HID_Interface,
+				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Keyboard.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(&Keyboard_HID_Interface) != 0)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Could not Set Boot Protocol Mode.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Keyboard_HID_Interface))
+				{
+					USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport;					
+					HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Keyboard_HID_Interface, &KeyboardReport);
+
+					LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0);
+					
+					uint8_t PressedKeyCode = KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0];
+
+					if (PressedKeyCode)
+					{
+						char PressedKey = 0;
+
+						LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+							  
+						/* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */
+						if ((PressedKeyCode >= 0x04) && (PressedKeyCode <= 0x1D))
+						  PressedKey = (PressedKeyCode - 0x04) + 'A';
+						else if ((PressedKeyCode >= 0x1E) && (PressedKeyCode <= 0x27))
+						  PressedKey = (PressedKeyCode - 0x1E) + '0';
+						else if (PressedKeyCode == 0x2C)
+						  PressedKey = ' ';						
+						else if (PressedKeyCode == 0x28)
+						  PressedKey = '\n';
+							 
+						if (PressedKey)
+						  putchar(PressedKey);
+					}
+				}
+				
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
index 2e5f1caee..948ff6a99 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
@@ -1,76 +1,76 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for KeyboardHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
-#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for KeyboardHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
index 10406ec26..220d37f45 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB keyboard, for USB keyboards using
- *  the standard keyboard HID profile.
- *  
- *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
- *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1.
- *  
- *  This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
- *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
- *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
- *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
- *  KeyboardHostWithParser demo application.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB keyboard, for USB keyboards using
+ *  the standard keyboard HID profile.
+ *  
+ *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
+ *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1.
+ *  
+ *  This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ *  KeyboardHostWithParser demo application.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile
index 05e86bd96..487553d14 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = KeyboardHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = KeyboardHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
index 4677121a6..53806a0ef 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
index 91ca84477..dedf12fc4 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
@@ -1,266 +1,266 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the KeyboardHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
-
-/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
-HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
-				
-				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
-				
-				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
-			},
-	};
-
-	
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_HID_Interface,
-				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Keyboard.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Keyboard_HID_Interface) != 0)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode or Not a Valid Keyboard.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Keyboard_HID_Interface))
-				{
-					uint8_t KeyboardReport[Keyboard_HID_Interface.State.LargestReportSize];
-					HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Keyboard_HID_Interface, &KeyboardReport);
-					
-					for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
-					{
-						HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
-
-						/* Update the report item value if it is contained within the current report */
-						if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(KeyboardReport, ReportItem)))
-						  continue;
-
-						/* Determine what report item is being tested, process updated value as needed */
-						if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page      == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD) &&
-							(ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize         == 8)                   &&
-							(ReportItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum > 1)                    &&
-							(ReportItem->ItemType                   == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-						{
-							/* Key code is an unsigned char in length, cast to the appropriate type */
-							uint8_t KeyCode = (uint8_t)ReportItem->Value;
-
-							/* If scancode is non-zero, a key is being pressed */
-							if (KeyCode)
-							{
-								/* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
-								LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
-
-								char PressedKey = 0;
-
-								/* Convert scancode to printable character if alphanumeric */
-								if ((KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyCode <= 0x1D))
-								  PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A';
-								else if ((KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyCode <= 0x27))
-								  PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0';
-								else if (KeyCode == 0x2C)
-								  PressedKey = ' ';						
-								else if (KeyCode == 0x28)
-								  PressedKey = '\n';
-									 
-								/* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
-								if (PressedKey)
-								  putchar(PressedKey);
-							}
-							
-							/* Once a scancode is found, stop scanning through the report items */
-							break;
-						}
-					}
-				}
-				
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		HID_Host_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
- *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
- *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
- *  have occupied).
- *
- *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
-{
-	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
-	 * only store KEYBOARD usage page items into the Processed HID Report structure to
-	 * save RAM and ignore the rest
-	 */
-	return (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+				
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
+				
+				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
+			},
+	};
+
+	
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_HID_Interface,
+				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Keyboard.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Keyboard_HID_Interface) != 0)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode or Not a Valid Keyboard.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Keyboard_HID_Interface))
+				{
+					uint8_t KeyboardReport[Keyboard_HID_Interface.State.LargestReportSize];
+					HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Keyboard_HID_Interface, &KeyboardReport);
+					
+					for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+					{
+						HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+
+						/* Update the report item value if it is contained within the current report */
+						if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(KeyboardReport, ReportItem)))
+						  continue;
+
+						/* Determine what report item is being tested, process updated value as needed */
+						if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page      == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD) &&
+							(ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize         == 8)                   &&
+							(ReportItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum > 1)                    &&
+							(ReportItem->ItemType                   == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+						{
+							/* Key code is an unsigned char in length, cast to the appropriate type */
+							uint8_t KeyCode = (uint8_t)ReportItem->Value;
+
+							/* If scancode is non-zero, a key is being pressed */
+							if (KeyCode)
+							{
+								/* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
+								LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+
+								char PressedKey = 0;
+
+								/* Convert scancode to printable character if alphanumeric */
+								if ((KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyCode <= 0x1D))
+								  PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A';
+								else if ((KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyCode <= 0x27))
+								  PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0';
+								else if (KeyCode == 0x2C)
+								  PressedKey = ' ';						
+								else if (KeyCode == 0x28)
+								  PressedKey = '\n';
+									 
+								/* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
+								if (PressedKey)
+								  putchar(PressedKey);
+							}
+							
+							/* Once a scancode is found, stop scanning through the report items */
+							break;
+						}
+					}
+				}
+				
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
+{
+	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store KEYBOARD usage page items into the Processed HID Report structure to
+	 * save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
index 98d00fb3c..1027d3cb9 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for KeyboardHostWithParser.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
-#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a desktop keyboard */
-		#define USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD      0x07
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for KeyboardHostWithParser.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a desktop keyboard */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD      0x07
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
index 3fbe1b4e7..c1b180137 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Keyboard Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard host, for USB keyboards using
- *  the standard Keyboard HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID reports,
- *  allowing for correct operation across all USB keyboards. This demo supports
- *  keyboards with a single HID report.
- *  
- *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
- *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. On connection to a USB keyboard, the
- *  report items will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the
- *  USART before the keyboard is fully enumerated.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.	
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard host, for USB keyboards using
+ *  the standard Keyboard HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID reports,
+ *  allowing for correct operation across all USB keyboards. This demo supports
+ *  keyboards with a single HID report.
+ *  
+ *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
+ *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. On connection to a USB keyboard, the
+ *  report items will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the
+ *  USART before the keyboard is fully enumerated.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.	
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
index b5bc47b85..2062b76b3 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = KeyboardHostWithParser
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = KeyboardHostWithParser
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/Doxygen.conf
index 223f2e171..cad9141fe 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c
index 6f30fa3c5..108c807c6 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c
@@ -1,263 +1,263 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MIDIHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "MIDIHost.h"
-
-/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-				
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-	
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "MIDI Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface,
-				                             ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid MIDI Class Device.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("MIDI Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				CheckJoystickMovement();
-				
-				MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent;
-				if (MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &MIDIEvent))
-				{
-					bool NoteOnEvent  = ((MIDIEvent.Command & 0x0F) == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON  >> 4));
-					bool NoteOffEvent = ((MIDIEvent.Command & 0x0F) == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF >> 4));
-					
-					if (NoteOnEvent || NoteOffEvent)
-					{
-						printf_P(PSTR("MIDI Note %s - Channel %d, Pitch %d, Velocity %d\r\n"), NoteOnEvent ? "On" : "Off",
-																						       ((MIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) + 1),
-																						       MIDIEvent.Data2, MIDIEvent.Data3);
-					}
-				}
-		
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		MIDI_Host_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	Joystick_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
-{
-	static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
-
-	uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
-	uint8_t MIDIPitch;
-	
-	/* Get current joystick mask, XOR with previous to detect joystick changes */
-	uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
-		
-	/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
-	uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
-
-	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
-	{
-		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-		MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
-	}
-
-	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
-	{
-		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-		MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
-	}
-
-	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
-	{
-		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-		MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
-	}
-	
-	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
-	{
-		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-		MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
-	}
-
-	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
-	{
-		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-		MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
-	}
-	
-	if (MIDICommand)
-	{
-		MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (MIDI_EventPacket_t)
-			{
-				.CableNumber = 0,
-				.Command     = (MIDICommand >> 4),
-				
-				.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
-				.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
-				.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,			
-			};
-			
-		MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &MIDIEvent);
-		MIDI_Host_Flush(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
-	}
-
-	PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDIHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "MIDIHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+				
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+	
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "MIDI Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface,
+				                             ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid MIDI Class Device.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("MIDI Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				CheckJoystickMovement();
+				
+				MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent;
+				if (MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &MIDIEvent))
+				{
+					bool NoteOnEvent  = ((MIDIEvent.Command & 0x0F) == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON  >> 4));
+					bool NoteOffEvent = ((MIDIEvent.Command & 0x0F) == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF >> 4));
+					
+					if (NoteOnEvent || NoteOffEvent)
+					{
+						printf_P(PSTR("MIDI Note %s - Channel %d, Pitch %d, Velocity %d\r\n"), NoteOnEvent ? "On" : "Off",
+																						       ((MIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) + 1),
+																						       MIDIEvent.Data2, MIDIEvent.Data3);
+					}
+				}
+		
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		MIDI_Host_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
+
+	uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
+	uint8_t MIDIPitch;
+	
+	/* Get current joystick mask, XOR with previous to detect joystick changes */
+	uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
+		
+	/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
+	uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
+	}
+	
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
+	}
+	
+	if (MIDICommand)
+	{
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (MIDI_EventPacket_t)
+			{
+				.CableNumber = 0,
+				.Command     = (MIDICommand >> 4),
+				
+				.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
+				.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
+				.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,			
+			};
+			
+		MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &MIDIEvent);
+		MIDI_Host_Flush(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+	}
+
+	PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h
index 8da4a95ef..f33ecb750 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MIDIHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MIDI_HOST_H_
-#define _MIDI_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MIDIHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_HOST_H_
+#define _MIDI_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt
index afd95c9e6..269bf5b5b 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt
@@ -1,59 +1,59 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage MIDI Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Audio Class Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>MIDI Subclass</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF USB MIDI Audio Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  MIDI host demonstration application. This demo will enumerate an attached USB-MIDI device, and print incoming MIDI note
- *  on and off messages on any channel to the serial port. Pressing the board joystick will send note on and off messages to
- *  the attached MIDI device, with the board HWB controlling the note channel.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage MIDI Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>MIDI Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF USB MIDI Audio Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  MIDI host demonstration application. This demo will enumerate an attached USB-MIDI device, and print incoming MIDI note
+ *  on and off messages on any channel to the serial port. Pressing the board joystick will send note on and off messages to
+ *  the attached MIDI device, with the board HWB controlling the note channel.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/makefile
index 71a5bae93..78290dc0e 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/makefile
@@ -1,736 +1,736 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MIDIHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.c             \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MIDIHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.c             \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf
index 177859c05..ba337f97e 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
index beec0a76c..697da3420 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
@@ -1,300 +1,300 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MassStorageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "MassStorageHost.h"
-
-/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t FlashDisk_MS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-				
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-	
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mass Storage Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface,
-				                           ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Mass Storage Device.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("Mass Storage Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-				
-				uint8_t MaxLUNIndex;
-				if (MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, &MaxLUNIndex))
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving max LUN index.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				printf_P(PSTR("Total LUNs: %d - Using first LUN in device.\r\n"), (MaxLUNIndex + 1));
-				
-				if (MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface))
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error resetting Mass Storage interface.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData;
-				if (MS_Host_RequestSense(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, &SenseData) != 0)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving device sense.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-			
-				if (MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, true))
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error setting Prevent Device Removal bit.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData;
-				if (MS_Host_GetInquiryData(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, &InquiryData))
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving device Inquiry data.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;				
-				}
-
-				printf_P(PSTR("Vendor \"%.8s\", Product \"%.16s\"\r\n"), InquiryData.VendorID, InquiryData.ProductID);
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("Waiting until ready...\r\n"));
-
-				for (;;)
-				{
-					uint8_t ErrorCode = MS_Host_TestUnitReady(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0);
-					
-					if (!(ErrorCode))
-					  break;
-
-					/* Check if an error other than a logical command error (device busy) received */
-					if (ErrorCode != MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED)
-					{
-						puts_P(PSTR("Error waiting for device to be ready.\r\n"));
-						LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-						USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-						break;
-					}
-				}
-
-				puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Capacity...\r\n"));
-
-				SCSI_Capacity_t DiskCapacity;
-				if (MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, &DiskCapacity))
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving device capacity.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				printf_P(PSTR("%lu blocks of %lu bytes.\r\n"), DiskCapacity.Blocks, DiskCapacity.BlockSize);
-
-				uint8_t BlockBuffer[DiskCapacity.BlockSize];
-
-				if (MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, 0x00000000, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer))
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error reading device block.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-			
-				puts_P(PSTR("\r\nContents of first block:\r\n"));
-
-				for (uint16_t Chunk = 0; Chunk < (DiskCapacity.BlockSize >> 4); Chunk++)
-				{
-					uint8_t* ChunkPtr = &BlockBuffer[Chunk << 4];
-					
-					/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in HEX format */
-					for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
-					{
-						char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
-						printf_P(PSTR("%.2X "), CurrByte);
-					}
-					
-					printf_P(PSTR("    "));
-
-					/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in ASCII format */
-					for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
-					{
-						char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
-						putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
-					}
-					
-					printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
-				}
-
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		MS_Host_USBTask(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MassStorageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "MassStorageHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t FlashDisk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+				
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+	
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mass Storage Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface,
+				                           ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Mass Storage Device.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("Mass Storage Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+				
+				uint8_t MaxLUNIndex;
+				if (MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, &MaxLUNIndex))
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving max LUN index.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				printf_P(PSTR("Total LUNs: %d - Using first LUN in device.\r\n"), (MaxLUNIndex + 1));
+				
+				if (MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface))
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error resetting Mass Storage interface.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData;
+				if (MS_Host_RequestSense(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, &SenseData) != 0)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving device sense.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+			
+				if (MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, true))
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error setting Prevent Device Removal bit.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData;
+				if (MS_Host_GetInquiryData(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, &InquiryData))
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving device Inquiry data.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;				
+				}
+
+				printf_P(PSTR("Vendor \"%.8s\", Product \"%.16s\"\r\n"), InquiryData.VendorID, InquiryData.ProductID);
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("Waiting until ready...\r\n"));
+
+				for (;;)
+				{
+					uint8_t ErrorCode = MS_Host_TestUnitReady(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0);
+					
+					if (!(ErrorCode))
+					  break;
+
+					/* Check if an error other than a logical command error (device busy) received */
+					if (ErrorCode != MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED)
+					{
+						puts_P(PSTR("Error waiting for device to be ready.\r\n"));
+						LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+						USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+						break;
+					}
+				}
+
+				puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Capacity...\r\n"));
+
+				SCSI_Capacity_t DiskCapacity;
+				if (MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, &DiskCapacity))
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving device capacity.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				printf_P(PSTR("%lu blocks of %lu bytes.\r\n"), DiskCapacity.Blocks, DiskCapacity.BlockSize);
+
+				uint8_t BlockBuffer[DiskCapacity.BlockSize];
+
+				if (MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, 0x00000000, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer))
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error reading device block.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+			
+				puts_P(PSTR("\r\nContents of first block:\r\n"));
+
+				for (uint16_t Chunk = 0; Chunk < (DiskCapacity.BlockSize >> 4); Chunk++)
+				{
+					uint8_t* ChunkPtr = &BlockBuffer[Chunk << 4];
+					
+					/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in HEX format */
+					for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
+					{
+						char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
+						printf_P(PSTR("%.2X "), CurrByte);
+					}
+					
+					printf_P(PSTR("    "));
+
+					/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in ASCII format */
+					for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
+					{
+						char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
+						putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
+					}
+					
+					printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+				}
+
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		MS_Host_USBTask(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
index e97d1e3fe..0cd989781 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MassStorage.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_HOST_H_
-#define _MASS_STORAGE_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <ctype.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStorage.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_HOST_H_
+#define _MASS_STORAGE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <ctype.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
index bb494cfbe..74578b6e2 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
@@ -1,67 +1,67 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mass Storage Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Bulk Only</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
- *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
- *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
- *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Mass Storage host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Mass Storage host, for USB storage devices
- *  using the standard Mass Storage USB profile.
- *  
- *  The first 512 bytes (boot sector) of an attached disk's memory will be dumped
- *  out of the serial port in HEX and ASCII form when it is attached to the AT90USB1287
- *  AVR. The device will then wait for HWB to be pressed, whereupon the entire ASCII contents
- *  of the disk will be dumped to the serial port.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk Only</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Mass Storage host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mass Storage host, for USB storage devices
+ *  using the standard Mass Storage USB profile.
+ *  
+ *  The first 512 bytes (boot sector) of an attached disk's memory will be dumped
+ *  out of the serial port in HEX and ASCII form when it is attached to the AT90USB1287
+ *  AVR. The device will then wait for HWB to be pressed, whereupon the entire ASCII contents
+ *  of the disk will be dumped to the serial port.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile
index 95e147cef..33c5c80a7 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MassStorageHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY -Wextra
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS=5000
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MassStorageHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY -Wextra
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS=5000
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf
index d176939ef..47a8e19fd 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
index 2c42e6405..6edceb08d 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
@@ -1,218 +1,218 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MouseHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "MouseHost.h"
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-				
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
-				
-				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
-			},
-	};
-
-	
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Mouse_HID_Interface,
-				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(&Mouse_HID_Interface) != 0)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Could not Set Boot Protocol Mode.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Mouse_HID_Interface))
-				{
-					uint8_t LEDMask  = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-				
-					USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport;
-					HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Mouse_HID_Interface, &MouseReport);
-					
-					printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X,
-																  MouseReport.Y,
-																  MouseReport.Button);
-					if (MouseReport.X > 0)
-					  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
-					else if (MouseReport.X < 0)
-					  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
-						
-					if (MouseReport.Y > 0)
-					  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
-					else if (MouseReport.Y < 0)
-					  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
-
-					if (MouseReport.Button)
-					  LEDMask  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-				}
-				
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		HID_Host_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MouseHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "MouseHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+				
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+				
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
+			},
+	};
+
+	
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Mouse_HID_Interface,
+				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(&Mouse_HID_Interface) != 0)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Could not Set Boot Protocol Mode.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Mouse_HID_Interface))
+				{
+					uint8_t LEDMask  = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+				
+					USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport;
+					HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Mouse_HID_Interface, &MouseReport);
+					
+					printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X,
+																  MouseReport.Y,
+																  MouseReport.Button);
+					if (MouseReport.X > 0)
+					  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+					else if (MouseReport.X < 0)
+					  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+						
+					if (MouseReport.Y > 0)
+					  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+					else if (MouseReport.Y < 0)
+					  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+					if (MouseReport.Button)
+					  LEDMask  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+				}
+				
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
index bc64120f0..ccbaa8213 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
@@ -1,76 +1,76 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
-#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
index afe948fd9..6926e99b3 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
@@ -1,73 +1,73 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
- *  the standard mouse HID profile.
- *  
- *  Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs,
- *  as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and
- *  button status information.
- *  
- *  This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
- *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
- *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
- *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
- *  MouseHostWithParser demo application.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.	
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
+ *  the standard mouse HID profile.
+ *  
+ *  Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs,
+ *  as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and
+ *  button status information.
+ *  
+ *  This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ *  MouseHostWithParser demo application.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.	
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile
index 407f3b41f..0fd8754bd 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MouseHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MouseHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
index 95c37f325..3a3d0c9d3 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
index 40a74f511..ef7835e54 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
@@ -1,290 +1,290 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MouseHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
-
-/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
-HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
-				
-				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
-				
-				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
-			},
-	};
-
-	
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	sei();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Mouse_HID_Interface,
-				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Mouse_HID_Interface) != 0)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode or Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Mouse_HID_Interface))
-				{
-					uint8_t MouseReport[Mouse_HID_Interface.State.LargestReportSize];
-					HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Mouse_HID_Interface, &MouseReport);
-
-					uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-
-					for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
-					{
-						HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
-						
-						/* Update the report item value if it is contained within the current report */
-						if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem)))
-						  continue;
-						
-						/* Determine what report item is being tested, process updated value as needed */
-						if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
-							(ReportItem->ItemType                     == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-						{
-							if (ReportItem->Value)
-							  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-						}
-						else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
-								 (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage  == USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL)       &&
-								 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-						{
-							int16_t WheelDelta = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
-							
-							if (WheelDelta)
-							  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | ((WheelDelta > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4));
-						}
-						else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
-								 ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
-								  (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
-								 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-						{
-							int16_t DeltaMovement = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
-							
-							if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
-							{
-								if (DeltaMovement)
-								  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
-							}
-							else
-							{
-								if (DeltaMovement)
-								  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
-							}
-						}
-					}
-					
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-				}
-				
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		HID_Host_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
- *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
- *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
- *  have occupied).
- *
- *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
-{
-	bool IsMouse = false;
-
-	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
-	 * Mouse Usage is found - this prevents Joysticks, which use identical descriptors except for the Joystick usage
-	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a mouse by the demo
-	 */
-	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
-	{
-		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
-		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_MOUSE))
-		{
-			IsMouse = true;
-			break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* If a collection with the mouse usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
-	if (!IsMouse)
-	  return false;
-
-	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
-	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
-	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
-	 */
-	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
-	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MouseHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+				
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
+				
+				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
+			},
+	};
+
+	
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	sei();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Mouse_HID_Interface,
+				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Mouse_HID_Interface) != 0)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode or Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Mouse_HID_Interface))
+				{
+					uint8_t MouseReport[Mouse_HID_Interface.State.LargestReportSize];
+					HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Mouse_HID_Interface, &MouseReport);
+
+					uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+					for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+					{
+						HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+						
+						/* Update the report item value if it is contained within the current report */
+						if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem)))
+						  continue;
+						
+						/* Determine what report item is being tested, process updated value as needed */
+						if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
+							(ReportItem->ItemType                     == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+						{
+							if (ReportItem->Value)
+							  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+						}
+						else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+								 (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage  == USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL)       &&
+								 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+						{
+							int16_t WheelDelta = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
+							
+							if (WheelDelta)
+							  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | ((WheelDelta > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4));
+						}
+						else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+								 ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
+								  (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
+								 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+						{
+							int16_t DeltaMovement = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
+							
+							if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
+							{
+								if (DeltaMovement)
+								  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+							}
+							else
+							{
+								if (DeltaMovement)
+								  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
+							}
+						}
+					}
+					
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+				}
+				
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
+{
+	bool IsMouse = false;
+
+	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
+	 * Mouse Usage is found - this prevents Joysticks, which use identical descriptors except for the Joystick usage
+	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a mouse by the demo
+	 */
+	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
+	{
+		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_MOUSE))
+		{
+			IsMouse = true;
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If a collection with the mouse usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
+	if (!IsMouse)
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
+	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
+	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
index e88738d5a..05f6f76c1 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
@@ -1,96 +1,96 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
-#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY        LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */
-		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */
-		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Mouse */
-		#define USAGE_MOUSE                 0x02
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */
-		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */
-		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
-		
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Scroll Wheel movement */
-		#define USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL          0x38
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY        LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Mouse */
+		#define USAGE_MOUSE                 0x02
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */
+		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */
+		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
+		
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Scroll Wheel movement */
+		#define USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL          0x38
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
index 3eec2a57d..c2d04a05a 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mouse Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
- *  the standard mouse HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
- *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB mice. This
- *  demo supports mice with a single HID report.
- *  
- *  Mouse and scroll wheel movement and button presses are displayed
- *  on the board LEDs. On connection to a USB mouse, the report items
- *  will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the USART
- *  before the mouse is fully enumerated.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
+ *  the standard mouse HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
+ *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB mice. This
+ *  demo supports mice with a single HID report.
+ *  
+ *  Mouse and scroll wheel movement and button presses are displayed
+ *  on the board LEDs. On connection to a USB mouse, the report items
+ *  will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the USART
+ *  before the mouse is fully enumerated.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
index ffdee629f..7302f4cea 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MouseHostWithParser
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MouseHostWithParser
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/Doxygen.conf
index f5477f9bb..d63484a1f 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Printer Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Printer Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c
index df71f4cb2..9d5ca08d9 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c
@@ -1,222 +1,222 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the PrinterHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "PrinterHost.h"
-
-/** LUFA Printer Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Printer Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t Printer_PRNT_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-				
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Printer Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Printer_PRNT_Interface,
-				                             ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Printer Class Device.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(&Printer_PRNT_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Bidirectional Mode.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("Printer Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device ID...\r\n"));
-				
-				char DeviceIDString[300];
-				if (PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(&Printer_PRNT_Interface, DeviceIDString,
-				                          sizeof(DeviceIDString)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Getting Device ID.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				printf_P(PSTR("Device ID: %s.\r\n"), DeviceIDString);
-				
-				char  TestPageData[]    = "\033%-12345X\033E" "LUFA PCL Test Page" "\033E\033%-12345X";
-				uint16_t TestPageLength = strlen(TestPageData);
-			
-				printf_P(PSTR("Sending Test Page (%d bytes)...\r\n"), TestPageLength);
-
-				if (PRNT_Host_SendData(&Printer_PRNT_Interface, &TestPageData, TestPageLength) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Sending Page Data.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				puts_P(PSTR("Test Page Sent.\r\n"));
-
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		PRNT_Host_USBTask(&Printer_PRNT_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the PrinterHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "PrinterHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA Printer Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Printer Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t Printer_PRNT_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+				
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Printer Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Printer_PRNT_Interface,
+				                             ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Printer Class Device.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(&Printer_PRNT_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Bidirectional Mode.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("Printer Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device ID...\r\n"));
+				
+				char DeviceIDString[300];
+				if (PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(&Printer_PRNT_Interface, DeviceIDString,
+				                          sizeof(DeviceIDString)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Getting Device ID.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				printf_P(PSTR("Device ID: %s.\r\n"), DeviceIDString);
+				
+				char  TestPageData[]    = "\033%-12345X\033E" "LUFA PCL Test Page" "\033E\033%-12345X";
+				uint16_t TestPageLength = strlen(TestPageData);
+			
+				printf_P(PSTR("Sending Test Page (%d bytes)...\r\n"), TestPageLength);
+
+				if (PRNT_Host_SendData(&Printer_PRNT_Interface, &TestPageData, TestPageLength) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Sending Page Data.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				puts_P(PSTR("Test Page Sent.\r\n"));
+
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		PRNT_Host_USBTask(&Printer_PRNT_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h
index 2fb7c8cef..a4880577e 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for PrinterHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _PRINTER_HOST_H_
-#define _PRINTER_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Printer.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for PrinterHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PRINTER_HOST_H_
+#define _PRINTER_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Printer.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt
index c31fc9550..ca23cf578 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt
@@ -1,65 +1,65 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Printer Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Printer Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Bidirectional Protocol</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Printer Class Specification \n
- *        PCL Language Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Printer host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Printer host, for USB printers using
- *  the bidirectional data encapsulation protocol and PCL language.
- *  
- *  Upon connection of a compatible printer, the printer's device ID is sent
- *  to the AVR's serial port, and a simple test page is printed using the PCL
- *  printer language.
- *  
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Printer Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Printer Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bidirectional Protocol</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Printer Class Specification \n
+ *        PCL Language Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Printer host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Printer host, for USB printers using
+ *  the bidirectional data encapsulation protocol and PCL language.
+ *  
+ *  Upon connection of a compatible printer, the printer's device ID is sent
+ *  to the AVR's serial port, and a simple test page is printed using the PCL
+ *  printer language.
+ *  
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/makefile
index 1f7357003..484ac7ea3 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/makefile
@@ -1,735 +1,735 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = PrinterHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c          \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = PrinterHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c          \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/Doxygen.conf
index 03c736af4..b10cc508c 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c
index c4f2d0e21..67850fc57 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c
@@ -1,247 +1,247 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernetHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "RNDISEthernetHost.h"
-
-/** Buffer to hold incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets. */
-uint8_t PacketBuffer[1024];
-
-/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber           = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank       = false,
-
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber          = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank      = false,
-
-				.NotificationPipeNumber     = 3,
-				.NotificationPipeDoubleBank = false,
-				
-				.HostMaxPacketSize          = sizeof(PacketBuffer),
-			},
-	};
-	
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "RNDIS Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface,
-				                              ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid RNDIS Class Device.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Initializing Device.\r\n"));
-
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;			
-				}
-				
-				printf_P(PSTR("Device Max Transfer Size: %lu bytes.\r\n"), Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.DeviceMaxPacketSize);
-				
-				uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST);
-				if (RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
-				                                &PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Packet Filter.\r\n"));
-
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				uint32_t VendorID;
-				if (RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
-				                                  &VendorID, sizeof(VendorID)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Getting Vendor ID.\r\n"));
-
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				printf_P(PSTR("Device Vendor ID: 0x%08lX\r\n"), VendorID);
-
-				puts_P(PSTR("RNDIS Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				PrintIncomingPackets();
-			
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		RNDIS_Host_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Prints incoming packets from the attached RNDIS device to the serial port. */
-void PrintIncomingPackets(void)
-{
-	if (RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
-		uint16_t PacketLength;
-		RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, &PacketBuffer, &PacketLength);
-	
-		printf_P(PSTR("***PACKET (Size %d)***\r\n"), PacketLength);
-	
-		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < PacketLength; i++)
-		  printf("%02x ", PacketBuffer[i]);
-
-		printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\n"));
-		
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernetHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "RNDISEthernetHost.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets. */
+uint8_t PacketBuffer[1024];
+
+/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber           = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber          = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationPipeNumber     = 3,
+				.NotificationPipeDoubleBank = false,
+				
+				.HostMaxPacketSize          = sizeof(PacketBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+	
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "RNDIS Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface,
+				                              ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid RNDIS Class Device.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Initializing Device.\r\n"));
+
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;			
+				}
+				
+				printf_P(PSTR("Device Max Transfer Size: %lu bytes.\r\n"), Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.DeviceMaxPacketSize);
+				
+				uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST);
+				if (RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+				                                &PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Packet Filter.\r\n"));
+
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				uint32_t VendorID;
+				if (RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
+				                                  &VendorID, sizeof(VendorID)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Getting Vendor ID.\r\n"));
+
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				printf_P(PSTR("Device Vendor ID: 0x%08lX\r\n"), VendorID);
+
+				puts_P(PSTR("RNDIS Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				PrintIncomingPackets();
+			
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		RNDIS_Host_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Prints incoming packets from the attached RNDIS device to the serial port. */
+void PrintIncomingPackets(void)
+{
+	if (RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		uint16_t PacketLength;
+		RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, &PacketBuffer, &PacketLength);
+	
+		printf_P(PSTR("***PACKET (Size %d)***\r\n"), PacketLength);
+	
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < PacketLength; i++)
+		  printf("%02x ", PacketBuffer[i]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\n"));
+		
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h
index c0d0c6083..06f5ec2f0 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for RNDISEthernetHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _RNDIS_HOST_H_
-#define _RNDIS_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void PrintIncomingPackets(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISEthernetHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_HOST_H_
+#define _RNDIS_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void PrintIncomingPackets(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.txt
index cd1507710..cc3bbcab5 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.txt
@@ -1,62 +1,62 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage RNDIS Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  RNDIS host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a RNDIS Ethernet host, for USB devices such as
- *  modems.
- *  
- *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB RNDIS device, print out its vendor ID
- *  and any received packets in raw form through the serial USART.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage RNDIS Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  RNDIS host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a RNDIS Ethernet host, for USB devices such as
+ *  modems.
+ *  
+ *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB RNDIS device, print out its vendor ID
+ *  and any received packets in raw form through the serial USART.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile
index bc315a6c9..a8155907d 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile
@@ -1,736 +1,736 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = RNDISEthernetHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c          \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c            \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = RNDISEthernetHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c          \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c            \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf
index c64294fb9..4c00642a3 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Still Image Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Still Image Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
index 944b7fe17..8f91d81f1 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
@@ -1,216 +1,216 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the StillImageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "StillImageHost.h"
-
-/** LUFA Still Image Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Still Image Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t DigitalCamera_SI_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-				
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
-				
-				.EventsPipeNumber       = 3,
-				.EventsPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Still Image Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface,
-				                               ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != SI_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Still Image Class Device.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("Still Image Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				puts_P(PSTR("Opening Session...\r\n"));
-				
-				if (SImage_Host_OpenSession(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Could not open PIMA session.\r\n"));
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				puts_P(PSTR("Turning off Device...\r\n"));
-
-				SImage_Host_SendCommand(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface, 0x1013, 0, NULL);
-				if (SImage_Host_ReceiveResponse(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface))
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Could not turn off device.\r\n"));
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;					
-				}
-
-				puts_P(PSTR("Device Off.\r\n"));
-
-				puts_P(PSTR("Closing Session...\r\n"));
-
-				if (SImage_Host_CloseSession(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Could not close PIMA session.\r\n"));
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		SImage_Host_USBTask(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the StillImageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "StillImageHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA Still Image Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Still Image Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t DigitalCamera_SI_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+				
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+				
+				.EventsPipeNumber       = 3,
+				.EventsPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Still Image Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface,
+				                               ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != SI_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Still Image Class Device.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("Still Image Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				puts_P(PSTR("Opening Session...\r\n"));
+				
+				if (SImage_Host_OpenSession(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Could not open PIMA session.\r\n"));
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				puts_P(PSTR("Turning off Device...\r\n"));
+
+				SImage_Host_SendCommand(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface, 0x1013, 0, NULL);
+				if (SImage_Host_ReceiveResponse(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface))
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Could not turn off device.\r\n"));
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;					
+				}
+
+				puts_P(PSTR("Device Off.\r\n"));
+
+				puts_P(PSTR("Closing Session...\r\n"));
+
+				if (SImage_Host_CloseSession(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Could not close PIMA session.\r\n"));
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		SImage_Host_USBTask(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
index 4078238e0..5c163ef54 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
@@ -1,76 +1,76 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for StillImageHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
-#define _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImage.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for StillImageHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
+#define _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImage.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
index 10a99e111..6c27b8511 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
@@ -1,64 +1,64 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Still Image Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Still Image Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Still Image Class Specification \n
- *        PIMA 15740 Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Still Image host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a Still Image host, for USB devices such as
- *  digital cameras.
- *  
- *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB Still Image device, print out its
- *  information structure, open a session with the device and finally close the
- *  session.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Still Image Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Still Image Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Still Image Class Specification \n
+ *        PIMA 15740 Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Still Image host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a Still Image host, for USB devices such as
+ *  digital cameras.
+ *  
+ *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB Still Image device, print out its
+ *  information structure, open a session with the device and finally close the
+ *  session.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile
index e56a20738..892fc8265 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile
@@ -1,735 +1,735 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = StillImageHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c       \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = StillImageHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c       \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/Doxygen.conf
index b2d51b470..8aba73a8e 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c
index 041a534ff..e6403ecdf 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c
@@ -1,193 +1,193 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "VirtualSerialHost.h"
-
-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber           = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank       = false,
-
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber          = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank      = false,
-
-				.NotificationPipeNumber     = 3,
-				.NotificationPipeDoubleBank = false,
-			},
-	};
-	
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "CDC Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		switch (USB_HostState)
-		{
-			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-			
-				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				if (CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface,
-				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid CDC Class Device.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("CDC Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-				break;
-			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-				if (CDC_Host_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
-				{
-					/* Echo received bytes from the attached device through the USART */
-					while (CDC_Host_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
-					  putchar(CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface));
-					  
-					CDC_Host_Flush(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);  
-				}
-			
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		CDC_Host_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "VirtualSerialHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber           = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber          = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationPipeNumber     = 3,
+				.NotificationPipeDoubleBank = false,
+			},
+	};
+	
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "CDC Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		switch (USB_HostState)
+		{
+			case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+			
+				uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+				uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+				if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface,
+				                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid CDC Class Device.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("CDC Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+				break;
+			case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+				if (CDC_Host_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
+				{
+					/* Echo received bytes from the attached device through the USART */
+					while (CDC_Host_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
+					  putchar(CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface));
+					  
+					CDC_Host_Flush(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);  
+				}
+			
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		CDC_Host_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h
index a54e75f9f..bd5cd6ad6 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h
@@ -1,76 +1,76 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for VirtualSerialHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
-#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerialHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt
index 65999926c..3a7742248 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt
@@ -1,65 +1,65 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage CDC Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  CDC host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
- *  for implementing a USB CDC host, for CDC devices using the standard ACM profile.
- *  
- *  This demo prints out received CDC data through the serial port.
- *  
- *  Not that this demo is only compatible with devices which report the correct CDC
- *  and ACM class, subclass and protocol values. Most USB-Serial cables have vendor
- *  specific features, thus use vendor-specific class/subclass/protocol codes to force
- *  the user to use specialized drivers. This demo is not compatible with such devices.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage CDC Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  CDC host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a USB CDC host, for CDC devices using the standard ACM profile.
+ *  
+ *  This demo prints out received CDC data through the serial port.
+ *  
+ *  Not that this demo is only compatible with devices which report the correct CDC
+ *  and ACM class, subclass and protocol values. Most USB-Serial cables have vendor
+ *  specific features, thus use vendor-specific class/subclass/protocol codes to force
+ *  the user to use specialized drivers. This demo is not compatible with such devices.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/makefile
index 0fe017834..214659571 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/makefile
@@ -1,736 +1,736 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = VirtualSerialHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
-	  
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = VirtualSerialHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
+	  
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c
index e74d37749..585820d34 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c
@@ -1,297 +1,297 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the BluetoothHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "BluetoothHost.h"
-
-/** Bluetooth configuration structure. This structure configures the bluetooth stack's user alterable settings. */
-Bluetooth_Device_t Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration =
-	{
-		Class:   (DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_CAPTURING | DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_COMPUTER | DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_PALM),
-		PINCode: "0000",
-		Name:    "LUFA Bluetooth Demo"
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Bluetooth Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask();
-		Bluetooth_Host_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated. */
-void Bluetooth_Host_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Device Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessDeviceDescriptor()) != SuccessfulDeviceRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == DevControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Device).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Bluetooth Dongle Detected.\r\n"));
-
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-				
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Bluetooth Dongle Enumerated.\r\n"));
-			
-			/* Initialize the Bluetooth stack */
-			Bluetooth_Stack_Init();
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for when the Bluetooth stack has fully initialized using the attached
- *  Bluetooth dongle.
- */
-void Bluetooth_StackInitialized(void)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR("Stack initialized with local address %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"),
-	         Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[5], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[4], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[3],
-	         Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[2], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[1], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[0]);
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a Bluetooth connection request. When this callback fires, the
- *  user application must indicate if the connection is to be allowed or rejected.
- *
- *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Bluetooth address of the remote device attempting the connection
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to accept the connection, false to reject it
- */
-bool Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(const uint8_t* RemoteAddress)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR("Connection Request from Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"),
-	         RemoteAddress[5], RemoteAddress[4], RemoteAddress[3], RemoteAddress[2],
-	         RemoteAddress[1], RemoteAddress[0]);
-
-	/* Always accept connections from remote devices */
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a completed Bluetooth connection. When this callback is made,
- *  the connection information can be accessed through the global \ref Bluetooth_Connection structure.
- */
-void Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete(void)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR("Connection Complete to Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"), 
-	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[5], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[4],
-	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[3], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[2],
-	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[1], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[0]);
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a completed Bluetooth disconnection. When this callback is made,
- *  the connection information in the global \ref Bluetooth_Connection structure is invalidated with the
- *  exception of the RemoteAddress element, which can be used to determine the address of the device that
- *  was disconnected.
- */
-void Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete(void)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR("Disconnection Complete to Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"), 
-	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[5], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[4],
-	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[3], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[2],
-	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[1], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[0]);
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a Bluetooth ACL Channel connection request. When is callback fires,
- *  the user application must indicate if the channel connection should be rejected or not, based on the 
- *  protocol (PSM) value of the requested channel.
- *
- *  \param PSM  Protocol PSM value for the requested channel
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to accept the channel connection request, false to reject it
- */
-bool Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(const uint16_t PSM)
-{
-	/* Always accept channel connection requests regardless of PSM */
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a non-signal ACL packet reception. This callback fires once a connection
- *  to a remote Bluetooth device has been made, and the remote device has sent a non-signalling ACL packet.
- *
- *  \param[in] Data    Pointer to a buffer where the received data is stored
- *  \param[in] DataLen Length of the packet data, in bytes
- *  \param[in] Channel Bluetooth ACL data channel information structure for the packet's destination channel
- */
-void Bluetooth_PacketReceived(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel)
-{
-	switch (Channel->PSM)
-	{
-		case CHANNEL_PSM_SDP:
-			/* Service Discovery Protocol packet */
-			ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(Data, Channel);
-			break;
-		default:
-			/* Unknown Protocol packet */
-			printf_P(PSTR("Packet Received (Channel 0x%04X, PSM: 0x%02x):\r\n"), Channel->LocalNumber, Channel->PSM);
-			for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DataLen; Byte++)
-			  printf_P(PSTR("0x%02X "), ((uint8_t*)Data)[Byte]);
-			puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
-			
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the BluetoothHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "BluetoothHost.h"
+
+/** Bluetooth configuration structure. This structure configures the bluetooth stack's user alterable settings. */
+Bluetooth_Device_t Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration =
+	{
+		Class:   (DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_CAPTURING | DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_COMPUTER | DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_PALM),
+		PINCode: "0000",
+		Name:    "LUFA Bluetooth Demo"
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Bluetooth Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask();
+		Bluetooth_Host_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated. */
+void Bluetooth_Host_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Device Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessDeviceDescriptor()) != SuccessfulDeviceRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == DevControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Device).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Bluetooth Dongle Detected.\r\n"));
+
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+				
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Bluetooth Dongle Enumerated.\r\n"));
+			
+			/* Initialize the Bluetooth stack */
+			Bluetooth_Stack_Init();
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Bluetooth stack callback event for when the Bluetooth stack has fully initialized using the attached
+ *  Bluetooth dongle.
+ */
+void Bluetooth_StackInitialized(void)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR("Stack initialized with local address %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"),
+	         Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[5], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[4], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[3],
+	         Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[2], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[1], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[0]);
+}
+
+/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a Bluetooth connection request. When this callback fires, the
+ *  user application must indicate if the connection is to be allowed or rejected.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Bluetooth address of the remote device attempting the connection
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to accept the connection, false to reject it
+ */
+bool Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(const uint8_t* RemoteAddress)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR("Connection Request from Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"),
+	         RemoteAddress[5], RemoteAddress[4], RemoteAddress[3], RemoteAddress[2],
+	         RemoteAddress[1], RemoteAddress[0]);
+
+	/* Always accept connections from remote devices */
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a completed Bluetooth connection. When this callback is made,
+ *  the connection information can be accessed through the global \ref Bluetooth_Connection structure.
+ */
+void Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete(void)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR("Connection Complete to Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"), 
+	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[5], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[4],
+	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[3], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[2],
+	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[1], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[0]);
+}
+
+/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a completed Bluetooth disconnection. When this callback is made,
+ *  the connection information in the global \ref Bluetooth_Connection structure is invalidated with the
+ *  exception of the RemoteAddress element, which can be used to determine the address of the device that
+ *  was disconnected.
+ */
+void Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete(void)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR("Disconnection Complete to Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"), 
+	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[5], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[4],
+	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[3], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[2],
+	         Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[1], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[0]);
+}
+
+/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a Bluetooth ACL Channel connection request. When is callback fires,
+ *  the user application must indicate if the channel connection should be rejected or not, based on the 
+ *  protocol (PSM) value of the requested channel.
+ *
+ *  \param PSM  Protocol PSM value for the requested channel
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to accept the channel connection request, false to reject it
+ */
+bool Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(const uint16_t PSM)
+{
+	/* Always accept channel connection requests regardless of PSM */
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a non-signal ACL packet reception. This callback fires once a connection
+ *  to a remote Bluetooth device has been made, and the remote device has sent a non-signalling ACL packet.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Data    Pointer to a buffer where the received data is stored
+ *  \param[in] DataLen Length of the packet data, in bytes
+ *  \param[in] Channel Bluetooth ACL data channel information structure for the packet's destination channel
+ */
+void Bluetooth_PacketReceived(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel)
+{
+	switch (Channel->PSM)
+	{
+		case CHANNEL_PSM_SDP:
+			/* Service Discovery Protocol packet */
+			ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(Data, Channel);
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Unknown Protocol packet */
+			printf_P(PSTR("Packet Received (Channel 0x%04X, PSM: 0x%02x):\r\n"), Channel->LocalNumber, Channel->PSM);
+			for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DataLen; Byte++)
+			  printf_P(PSTR("0x%02X "), ((uint8_t*)Data)[Byte]);
+			puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+			
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h
index 8a2817cb7..266181db4 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for BluetoothHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_HOST_H_
-#define _BLUETOOTH_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include "Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h"
-		#include "Lib/BluetoothStack.h"
-
-		#include "DeviceDescriptor.h"
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Task Definitions: */
-		void Bluetooth_Host_Task(void);
-		
-	/* Event Handlers: */
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BluetoothHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_HOST_H_
+#define _BLUETOOTH_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h"
+		#include "Lib/BluetoothStack.h"
+
+		#include "DeviceDescriptor.h"
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Task Definitions: */
+		void Bluetooth_Host_Task(void);
+		
+	/* Event Handlers: */
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
index a69b7b353..db56f462b 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,162 +1,162 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a BT interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref BluetoothHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* The bluetooth USB transport addendum mandates that the data (not streaming voice) endpoints
-	   be in the first interface descriptor (interface 0) */
-	USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, DTYPE_Interface);
-	
-	/* Ensure that an interface was found, and the end of the descriptor was not reached */
-	if (!(CurrConfigBytesRem))
-	  return NoBTInterfaceFound;
-
-	/* Get the data IN, data OUT and event notification endpoints for the bluetooth interface */
-	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE) |
-	                          (1 << BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE)))
-	{
-		/* Fetch the next endpoint from the current bluetooth interface */
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-		                              DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint))
-		{
-			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-			return NoEndpointFound;
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk or interrupt type endpoint */
-		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
-		{
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				/* Configure the events IN pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
-				
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the events notification pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE);	
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				/* Configure the data IN pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-			}		
-		}
-
-	}
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, aborting the 
- *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a BT interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref BluetoothHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* The bluetooth USB transport addendum mandates that the data (not streaming voice) endpoints
+	   be in the first interface descriptor (interface 0) */
+	USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, DTYPE_Interface);
+	
+	/* Ensure that an interface was found, and the end of the descriptor was not reached */
+	if (!(CurrConfigBytesRem))
+	  return NoBTInterfaceFound;
+
+	/* Get the data IN, data OUT and event notification endpoints for the bluetooth interface */
+	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE) |
+	                          (1 << BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE)))
+	{
+		/* Fetch the next endpoint from the current bluetooth interface */
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint))
+		{
+			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+			return NoEndpointFound;
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk or interrupt type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+		{
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				/* Configure the events IN pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
+				
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the events notification pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE);	
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				/* Configure the data IN pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+			}		
+		}
+
+	}
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, aborting the 
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
index a54727d48..3b5b3adff 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,63 +1,63 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "BluetoothHost.h"
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum BluetoothHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			DevControlError                 = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoBTInterfaceFound              = 4, /**< A compatible Blutooth interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible set of Bluetooth endpoints were not found in the
-			                                      *   device's Bluetooth interface
-			                                      */
-		};
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
-		
-		uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "BluetoothHost.h"
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum BluetoothHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			DevControlError                 = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoBTInterfaceFound              = 4, /**< A compatible Blutooth interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible set of Bluetooth endpoints were not found in the
+			                                      *   device's Bluetooth interface
+			                                      */
+		};
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+		
+		uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c
index 65d5b3311..22a9c3506 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c
@@ -1,67 +1,67 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptor processing routines, to determine the overall device parameters. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine information about
- *  the attached device.
- */
-
-#include "DeviceDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's Device Descriptor, to determine compatibility
- *
- *  This routine checks to ensure that the attached device's class codes match those for Bluetooth devices.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref BluetoothHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void)
-{
-	USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor;
-
-	/* Send the request to retrieve the device descriptor */
-	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(&DeviceDescriptor) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return DevControlError;
-	  
-	/* Validate returned data - ensure the returned data is a device descriptor */
-	if (DeviceDescriptor.Header.Type != DTYPE_Device)
-	  return InvalidDeviceDataReturned;
-	
-	/* Validate returned device Class, SubClass and Protocol values against the Bluetooth spec values */
-	if ((DeviceDescriptor.Class    != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_CLASS)    ||
-	    (DeviceDescriptor.SubClass != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SUBCLASS) ||
-	    (DeviceDescriptor.Protocol != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_PROTOCOL))
-	{
-		return IncorrectBTDevice;
-	}
-	
-	return SuccessfulDeviceRead;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptor processing routines, to determine the overall device parameters. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine information about
+ *  the attached device.
+ */
+
+#include "DeviceDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's Device Descriptor, to determine compatibility
+ *
+ *  This routine checks to ensure that the attached device's class codes match those for Bluetooth devices.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref BluetoothHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor;
+
+	/* Send the request to retrieve the device descriptor */
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(&DeviceDescriptor) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return DevControlError;
+	  
+	/* Validate returned data - ensure the returned data is a device descriptor */
+	if (DeviceDescriptor.Header.Type != DTYPE_Device)
+	  return InvalidDeviceDataReturned;
+	
+	/* Validate returned device Class, SubClass and Protocol values against the Bluetooth spec values */
+	if ((DeviceDescriptor.Class    != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_CLASS)    ||
+	    (DeviceDescriptor.SubClass != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SUBCLASS) ||
+	    (DeviceDescriptor.Protocol != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_PROTOCOL))
+	{
+		return IncorrectBTDevice;
+	}
+	
+	return SuccessfulDeviceRead;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h
index a87085a3a..5dee7d996 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h
@@ -1,66 +1,66 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DeviceDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "BluetoothHost.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Device Class value for the Bluetooth Device class */
-		#define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_CLASS           0xE0
-
-		/** Device Subclass value for the Bluetooth Device class */
-		#define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SUBCLASS        0x01
-
-		/** Device Protocol value for the Bluetooth Device class */
-		#define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_PROTOCOL        0x01
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		enum BluetoothHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulDeviceRead            = 0, /**< Device Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			InvalidDeviceDataReturned       = 2, /**< The device returned an invalid Device Descriptor */
-			IncorrectBTDevice               = 3, /**< The attached device is not a Bluetooth class device */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void);	
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DeviceDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "BluetoothHost.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Device Class value for the Bluetooth Device class */
+		#define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_CLASS           0xE0
+
+		/** Device Subclass value for the Bluetooth Device class */
+		#define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SUBCLASS        0x01
+
+		/** Device Protocol value for the Bluetooth Device class */
+		#define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_PROTOCOL        0x01
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		enum BluetoothHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulDeviceRead            = 0, /**< Device Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			InvalidDeviceDataReturned       = 2, /**< The device returned an invalid Device Descriptor */
+			IncorrectBTDevice               = 3, /**< The attached device is not a Bluetooth class device */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void);	
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Doxygen.conf
index 582164a8f..6d0a2f6c0 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Bluetooth Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Bluetooth Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c
index 7c03a64cc..160aa3ac8 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c
@@ -1,756 +1,756 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/*
-	TODO: Make SendPacket respect receiver's MTU
-	TODO: Make ReceivePacket stitch together MTU fragments (?)
-	TODO: Add channel opened/closed callbacks
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_C
-#include "BluetoothACLPackets.h"
-
-/** Bluetooth ACL processing task. This task should be called repeatedly the main Bluetooth
- *  stack task to manage the ACL processing state.
- */
-void Bluetooth_ACLTask(void)
-{
-	/* Process incomming ACL packets, if any */
-	Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets();
-	
-	/* Check for any half-open channels, send configuration details to the remote device if found */
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
-	{
-		Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
-	
-		bool MustSendConfigReq = true;
-	
-		/* Check if we are in a channel state which requires a configuration request to be sent */
-		switch (ChannelData->State)
-		{
-			case Channel_Config_WaitConfig:
-				ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitReqResp;
-				break;
-			case Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig:
-				ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitResp;
-				break;
-			default:
-				MustSendConfigReq  = false;
-				break;
-		}
-		
-		/* Only send a configuration request if it the channel was in a state which required it */
-		if (MustSendConfigReq)
-		{
-			struct
-			{
-				BT_Signal_Header_t           SignalCommandHeader;
-				BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t ConfigurationRequest;
-				
-				struct
-				{
-					BT_Config_Option_Header_t Header;
-					uint16_t Value;
-				} Option_LocalMTU;
-			} PacketData;
-			
-			/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
-			PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code            = BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST;
-			PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier      = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier;
-			PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length          = sizeof(PacketData.ConfigurationRequest) +
-			                                                 sizeof(PacketData.Option_LocalMTU);
-
-			/* Fill out the Configuration Request in the response packet, including local MTU information */
-			PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
-			PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.Flags          = 0;
-			PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Header.Type         = BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU;
-			PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Header.Length       = sizeof(PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Value);
-			PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Value               = ChannelData->LocalMTU;
-
-			Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL);
-			
-			BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Configuration Request");
-			BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel);
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/** Incomming ACL packet processing task. This task is called by the main ACL processing task to read in and process
- *  any incomming ACL packets to the device, handling signal requests as they are received or passing along channel
- *  data to the user application.
- */
-static void Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets(void)
-{
-	BT_ACL_Header_t        ACLPacketHeader;
-	BT_DataPacket_Header_t DataHeader;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return;
-	}
-	  
-	/* Read in the received ACL packet headers when it has been discovered that a packet has been received */
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(ACLPacketHeader));
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DataHeader, sizeof(DataHeader));
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "Packet Received");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", (ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle & 0x0FFF));
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader.DataLength);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader.DestinationChannel);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader.PayloadLength);
-
-	/* Check the packet's destination channel - signalling channel should be processed by the stack internally */
-	if (DataHeader.DestinationChannel == BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING)
-	{
-		/* Read in the Signal Command header of the incomming packet */
-		BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
-		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&SignalCommandHeader, sizeof(SignalCommandHeader));
-		
-		/* Dispatch to the appropriate handler function based on the Signal message code */
-		switch (SignalCommandHeader.Code)
-		{
-			case BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST:
-				Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
-				break;
-			case BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE:
-				Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(&SignalCommandHeader);
-				break;
-			case BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST:
-				Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
-				break;
-			case BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE:
-				Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(&SignalCommandHeader);
-				break;
-			case BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST:
-				Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
-				break;
-			case BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE:
-				Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(&SignalCommandHeader);
-				break;
-			case BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_REQUEST:
-				Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
-				break;
-			case BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_REQUEST:
-				Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
-				break;
-			case BT_SIGNAL_COMMAND_REJECT:
-				BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Reject");
-				
-				uint16_t RejectReason;
-				Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&RejectReason, sizeof(RejectReason));
-				Pipe_Discard_Stream(ACLPacketHeader.DataLength - sizeof(RejectReason));
-				Pipe_ClearIN();
-				Pipe_Freeze();				
-			
-				BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Reason: %d", RejectReason);
-				break;
-			default:
-				BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< Unknown Signaling Command 0x%02X", SignalCommandHeader.Code);
-	
-				Pipe_Discard_Stream(ACLPacketHeader.DataLength);
-				Pipe_ClearIN();		
-				Pipe_Freeze();
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Non-signalling packet received, read in the packet contents and pass to the user application */
-		uint8_t PacketData[DataHeader.PayloadLength];
-		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PacketData, DataHeader.PayloadLength);
-		Pipe_ClearIN();
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-
-		Bluetooth_PacketReceived(PacketData, DataHeader.PayloadLength,
-		                         Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DataHeader.DestinationChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER));
-	}
-}
-
-/** Sends a packet to the remote device on the specified channel.
- *
- * \param[in] Data     Pointer to a buffer where the data is to be sourced from
- * \param[in] DataLen  Length of the data to send
- * \param[in] Channel  Channel information structure containing the destination channel's information, NULL to send
- *                     to the remote device's signalling channel
- *
- * \return A value from the \ref BT_SendPacket_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t Bluetooth_SendPacket(void* Data, const uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel)
-{
-	BT_ACL_Header_t        ACLPacketHeader;
-	BT_DataPacket_Header_t DataHeader;
-
-	/* A remote device must be connected before a packet transmission is attempted */
-	if (!(Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected))
-	  return BT_SENDPACKET_NotConnected;
-
-	/* If the destination channel is not the signalling channel and it is not currently fully open, abort */
-	if ((Channel != NULL) && (Channel->State != Channel_Open))
-	  return BT_SENDPACKET_ChannelNotOpen;
-
-	/* Fill out the packet's header from the remote device connection information structure */
-	ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle      = (Bluetooth_Connection.ConnectionHandle | BT_ACL_FIRST_AUTOFLUSH);
-	ACLPacketHeader.DataLength            = sizeof(DataHeader) + DataLen;
-	DataHeader.PayloadLength              = DataLen;
-	DataHeader.DestinationChannel         = (Channel == NULL) ? BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING : Channel->RemoteNumber;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	/* Write the packet contents to the pipe so that it can be sent to the remote device */
-	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(ACLPacketHeader));
-	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&DataHeader, sizeof(DataHeader));
-	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Data, DataLen);
-	Pipe_ClearOUT();
-	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "Packet Sent");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", (ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle & 0x0FFF));
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader.DataLength);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader.DestinationChannel);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader.PayloadLength);
-
-	return BT_SENDPACKET_NoError;
-}
-
-/** Opens a bluetooth channel to the currently connected remote device, so that data can be exchanged.
- *
- *  \note The channel is not immediately opened when this function returns - it must undergo a two way
- *        connection and configuration process first as the main Bluetooth stack processing task is
- *        repeatedly called. The returned channel is unusable by the user application until its State
- *        element has progressed to the Open state.
- *
- *  \param[in] PSM  PSM of the service that the channel is to be opened for
- *
- *  \return Pointer to the channel information structure of the opened channel, or NULL if no free channels
- */
-Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_OpenChannel(const uint16_t PSM)
-{
-	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = NULL;
-
-	/* Search through the channel information list for a free channel item */
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
-	{
-		if (Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i].State == Channel_Closed)
-		{
-			ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
-			
-			/* Set the new channel structure's local channel number to a unique value within the connection orientated
-			   channel address space */
-			ChannelData->LocalNumber = (BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET + i);
-			break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* If no free channel item was found in the list, all channels are occupied - abort */
-	if (ChannelData == NULL)
-	  return NULL;
-
-	/* Reset and fill out the allocated channel's information structure with defaults */
-	ChannelData->RemoteNumber = 0;
-	ChannelData->PSM          = PSM;
-	ChannelData->LocalMTU     = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU;
-	ChannelData->State        = Channel_WaitConnectRsp;
-	  
-	struct
-	{
-		BT_Signal_Header_t        SignalCommandHeader;
-		BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t ConnectionRequest;
-	} PacketData;
-
-	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
-	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code              = BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST;
-	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier        = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier;
-	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length            = sizeof(PacketData.ConnectionRequest);
-	
-	/* Fill out the Connection Request in the response packet */
-	PacketData.ConnectionRequest.PSM                 = PSM;
-	PacketData.ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel       = ChannelData->LocalNumber;
-	
-	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL);
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Connection Request");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- PSM 0x%04X", PacketData.ConnectionRequest.PSM);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel);
-
-	return ChannelData;
-}
-
-/** Closes a bluetooth channel that is open to the currently connected remote device, so that no further data
- *  can be exchanged.
- *
- *  \note The channel is not immediately closed when this function returns - it must undergo an asynchronous
- *        disconnection process first as the main Bluetooth stack processing task is repeatedly called. The
- *        returned channel is unusable by the user application upon return however the channel is not completely
- *        closed until its State element has progressed to the Closed state.
- *
- * \param[in,out] Channel  Channel information structure of the channel to close
- */
-void Bluetooth_CloseChannel(Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel)
-{
-	/* Don't try to close a non-existing or already closed channel */
-	if ((Channel == NULL) || (Channel->State == Channel_Closed))
-	  return;
-
-	/* Set the channel's state to the start of the teardown process */
-	Channel->State = Channel_WaitDisconnect;
-
-	struct
-	{
-		BT_Signal_Header_t           SignalCommandHeader;
-		BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t DisconnectionRequest;
-	} PacketData;
-	
-	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
-	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code            = BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST;
-	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier      = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier;
-	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length          = sizeof(PacketData.DisconnectionRequest);
-
-	/* Fill out the Disconnection Request in the response packet */
-	PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel = Channel->RemoteNumber;
-	PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel = Channel->LocalNumber;
-
-	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL);
-	
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Disconnection Request");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel);	
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel);	
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Connection Request command.
- *
- *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
-	BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t ConnectionRequest;
-	
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionRequest, sizeof(ConnectionRequest));
-
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Connection Request");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- PSM: 0x%04X", ConnectionRequest.PSM);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel);
-	
-	/* Try to retrieve the existing channel's information structure if it exists */
-	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
-
-	/* If an existing channel item with the correct remote channel number was not found, find a free channel entry */
-	if (ChannelData == NULL)
-	{
-		/* Look through the channel information list for a free entry */
-		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
-		{
-			if (Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i].State == Channel_Closed)
-			{
-				ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
-
-				/* Set the new channel structure's local channel number to a unique value within the connection orientated
-				   channel address space */
-				ChannelData->LocalNumber = (BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET + i);
-				break;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	
-	uint8_t ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_RESOURCES;
-
-	/* Reset the channel item contents only if a channel entry was found for it */
-	if (ChannelData != NULL)
-	{
-		/* Check if the user application will allow the connection based on its PSM */
-		if (Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(ConnectionRequest.PSM))
-		{
-			ChannelData->RemoteNumber = ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel;
-			ChannelData->PSM          = ConnectionRequest.PSM;
-			ChannelData->LocalMTU     = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU;
-			ChannelData->State        = Channel_Config_WaitConfig;
-			
-			ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_PSM;		
-		}
-	}
-	
-	struct
-	{
-		BT_Signal_Header_t         SignalCommandHeader;
-		BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t ConnectionResponse;
-	} ResponsePacket;
-
-	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code              = BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE;
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier        = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length            = sizeof(ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse);
-
-	/* Fill out the Connection Response in the response packet */
-	ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->LocalNumber;
-	ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel      = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
-	ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Result             = ChannelStatus;
-	ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Status             = 0x00;
-	
-	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Connection Response");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Result);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel);
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Connection Response command.
- *
- *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
-	BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t ConnectionResponse;
-	
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionResponse, sizeof(ConnectionResponse));
-
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Connection Response");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ConnectionResponse.Result);	
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel);	
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);	
-
-	/* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
-	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER);
-
-	/* Only progress if the referenced channel data was found */
-	if (ChannelData != NULL)
-	{
-		/* Set the channel structure's remote channel number to the channel allocated on the remote device */
-		ChannelData->RemoteNumber = ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel;
-		ChannelData->State        = (ConnectionResponse.Result == BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL) ?
-		                             Channel_Config_WaitConfig : Channel_Closed;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Configuration Request command.
- *
- *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
-	BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t ConfigurationRequest;
-	
-	/* Allocate a buffer large enough to hold the variable number of configuration options in the request */
-	uint8_t OptionsLen = (SignalCommandHeader->Length - sizeof(ConfigurationRequest));
-	uint8_t Options[OptionsLen];
-
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConfigurationRequest, sizeof(ConfigurationRequest));	
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&Options, sizeof(Options));
-
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	/* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
-	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER);
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Configuration Request");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Remote MTU: 0x%04X", ChannelData->RemoteMTU);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Options Len: 0x%04X", OptionsLen);
-
-	/* Only look at the channel configuration options if a valid channel entry for the local channel number was found */
-	if (ChannelData != NULL)
-	{
-		/* Iterate through each option in the configuration request to look for ones which can be processed */
-		uint8_t OptionPos = 0;
-		while (OptionPos < OptionsLen)
-		{
-			BT_Config_Option_Header_t* OptionHeader = (BT_Config_Option_Header_t*)&Options[OptionPos];
-			void*                      OptionData   = &Options[OptionPos + sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t)];
-
-			BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Option Type: 0x%04X", OptionHeader->Type);
-			BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Option Length: 0x%04X", (sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t) + OptionHeader->Length));
-			
-			/* Store the remote MTU option's value if present */
-			if (OptionHeader->Type == BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU)
-			  ChannelData->RemoteMTU = *((uint16_t*)OptionData);
-
-			/* Progress to the next option in the packet */
-			OptionPos += (sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t) + OptionHeader->Length);
-		}
-	}
-	
-	struct
-	{
-		BT_Signal_Header_t            SignalCommandHeader;
-		BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t ConfigurationResponse;
-	} ResponsePacket;
-
-	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code              = BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE;
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier        = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length            = sizeof(ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse);
-
-	/* Fill out the Configuration Response in the response packet */
-	ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel   = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
-	ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Flags           = 0x00;
-	ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Result          = (ChannelData != NULL) ? BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL : BT_CONFIGURATION_REJECTED;
-
-	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
-
-	if (ChannelData != NULL)
-	{
-		switch (ChannelData->State)
-		{
-			case Channel_Config_WaitConfig:
-				ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig;
-				break;
-			case Channel_Config_WaitReqResp:
-				ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitResp;
-				break;
-			case Channel_Config_WaitReq:
-				ChannelData->State = Channel_Open;
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Configuration Response");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Result);
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Configuration Response command.
- *
- *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
-	BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t ConfigurationResponse;
-
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConfigurationResponse, sizeof(ConfigurationResponse));
-
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Configuration Response");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ConfigurationResponse.Result);
-
-	/* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
-	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
-	
-	/* Only update the channel's state if it was found in the channel list */
-	if (ChannelData != NULL)
-	{
-		/* Check if the channel configuration completed successfuly */
-		if (ConfigurationResponse.Result == BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL)
-		{
-			switch (ChannelData->State)
-			{
-				case Channel_Config_WaitReqResp:
-					ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitReq;
-					break;
-				case Channel_Config_WaitResp:
-					ChannelData->State = Channel_Open;
-					break;
-			}	
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Configuration failed - close the channel */
-			ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Disconnection Request command.
- *
- *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
-	BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t DisconnectionRequest;
-	
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DisconnectionRequest, sizeof(DisconnectionRequest));
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Disconnection Request");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel);
-	
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	/* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
-	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
-
-	struct
-	{
-		BT_Signal_Header_t            SignalCommandHeader;
-		BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t DisconnectionResponse;
-	} ResponsePacket;
-
-	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code                 = BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE;
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier           = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length               = sizeof(ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse);
-
-	/* Fill out the Disconnection Response in the response packet */
-	ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
-	ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel      = ChannelData->LocalNumber;
-
-	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
-
-	/* If the channel was found in the channel list, close it */
-	if (ChannelData != NULL)
-	  ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed;
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Disconnection Response");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Disconnection Response command.
- *
- *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
-	BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t DisconnectionResponse;
-	
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DisconnectionResponse, sizeof(DisconnectionResponse));
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Disconnection Response");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel);
-	
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	/* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
-	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
-	
-	/* If the channel was found in the channel list, close it */	
-	if (ChannelData != NULL)
-	  ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed;
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for an Echo Request command.
- *
- *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Echo Request");
-	
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	struct
-	{
-		BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
-	} ResponsePacket;
-
-	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code                 = BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_RESPONSE;
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier           = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length               = 0;
-	
-	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Echo Response");
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for an Information Request command.
- *
- *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
-	BT_Signal_InformationReq_t InformationRequest;
-
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&InformationRequest, sizeof(InformationRequest));
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Information Request");
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Info Type: 0x%04X", InformationRequest.InfoType);
-	
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	struct
-	{
-		BT_Signal_Header_t          SignalCommandHeader;
-		BT_Signal_InformationResp_t InformationResponse;
-		
-		uint8_t Data[4];
-	} ResponsePacket;
-	
-	uint8_t DataLen = 0;
-	
-	/* Retrieve the requested information and store it in the outgoing packet, if found */
-	switch (InformationRequest.InfoType)
-	{
-		case BT_INFOREQ_MTU:		
-			ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL;
-			DataLen = 2;
-			
-			*((uint16_t*)&ResponsePacket.Data) = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU;
-			break;
-		case BT_INFOREQ_EXTENDEDFEATURES:
-			ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL;
-			DataLen = 4;
-			
-			*((uint32_t*)&ResponsePacket.Data) = 0;
-			break;
-		default:
-			ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_NOTSUPPORTED;
-			DataLen = 0;
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code                 = BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_RESPONSE;
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier           = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
-	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length               = sizeof(ResponsePacket.InformationResponse) + DataLen;
-
-	/* Fill out the Information Response in the response packet */
-	ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.InfoType = InformationRequest.InfoType;
-	
-	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, (sizeof(ResponsePacket) - sizeof(ResponsePacket.Data) + DataLen), NULL);
-
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Information Response");	
-	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+	TODO: Make SendPacket respect receiver's MTU
+	TODO: Make ReceivePacket stitch together MTU fragments (?)
+	TODO: Add channel opened/closed callbacks
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_C
+#include "BluetoothACLPackets.h"
+
+/** Bluetooth ACL processing task. This task should be called repeatedly the main Bluetooth
+ *  stack task to manage the ACL processing state.
+ */
+void Bluetooth_ACLTask(void)
+{
+	/* Process incomming ACL packets, if any */
+	Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets();
+	
+	/* Check for any half-open channels, send configuration details to the remote device if found */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
+	{
+		Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
+	
+		bool MustSendConfigReq = true;
+	
+		/* Check if we are in a channel state which requires a configuration request to be sent */
+		switch (ChannelData->State)
+		{
+			case Channel_Config_WaitConfig:
+				ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitReqResp;
+				break;
+			case Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig:
+				ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitResp;
+				break;
+			default:
+				MustSendConfigReq  = false;
+				break;
+		}
+		
+		/* Only send a configuration request if it the channel was in a state which required it */
+		if (MustSendConfigReq)
+		{
+			struct
+			{
+				BT_Signal_Header_t           SignalCommandHeader;
+				BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t ConfigurationRequest;
+				
+				struct
+				{
+					BT_Config_Option_Header_t Header;
+					uint16_t Value;
+				} Option_LocalMTU;
+			} PacketData;
+			
+			/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
+			PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code            = BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST;
+			PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier      = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier;
+			PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length          = sizeof(PacketData.ConfigurationRequest) +
+			                                                 sizeof(PacketData.Option_LocalMTU);
+
+			/* Fill out the Configuration Request in the response packet, including local MTU information */
+			PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
+			PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.Flags          = 0;
+			PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Header.Type         = BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU;
+			PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Header.Length       = sizeof(PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Value);
+			PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Value               = ChannelData->LocalMTU;
+
+			Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL);
+			
+			BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Configuration Request");
+			BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Incomming ACL packet processing task. This task is called by the main ACL processing task to read in and process
+ *  any incomming ACL packets to the device, handling signal requests as they are received or passing along channel
+ *  data to the user application.
+ */
+static void Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets(void)
+{
+	BT_ACL_Header_t        ACLPacketHeader;
+	BT_DataPacket_Header_t DataHeader;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return;
+	}
+	  
+	/* Read in the received ACL packet headers when it has been discovered that a packet has been received */
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(ACLPacketHeader));
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DataHeader, sizeof(DataHeader));
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "Packet Received");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", (ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle & 0x0FFF));
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader.DataLength);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader.DestinationChannel);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader.PayloadLength);
+
+	/* Check the packet's destination channel - signalling channel should be processed by the stack internally */
+	if (DataHeader.DestinationChannel == BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING)
+	{
+		/* Read in the Signal Command header of the incomming packet */
+		BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&SignalCommandHeader, sizeof(SignalCommandHeader));
+		
+		/* Dispatch to the appropriate handler function based on the Signal message code */
+		switch (SignalCommandHeader.Code)
+		{
+			case BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST:
+				Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
+				break;
+			case BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE:
+				Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(&SignalCommandHeader);
+				break;
+			case BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST:
+				Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
+				break;
+			case BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE:
+				Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(&SignalCommandHeader);
+				break;
+			case BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST:
+				Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
+				break;
+			case BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE:
+				Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(&SignalCommandHeader);
+				break;
+			case BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_REQUEST:
+				Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
+				break;
+			case BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_REQUEST:
+				Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
+				break;
+			case BT_SIGNAL_COMMAND_REJECT:
+				BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Reject");
+				
+				uint16_t RejectReason;
+				Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&RejectReason, sizeof(RejectReason));
+				Pipe_Discard_Stream(ACLPacketHeader.DataLength - sizeof(RejectReason));
+				Pipe_ClearIN();
+				Pipe_Freeze();				
+			
+				BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Reason: %d", RejectReason);
+				break;
+			default:
+				BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< Unknown Signaling Command 0x%02X", SignalCommandHeader.Code);
+	
+				Pipe_Discard_Stream(ACLPacketHeader.DataLength);
+				Pipe_ClearIN();		
+				Pipe_Freeze();
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Non-signalling packet received, read in the packet contents and pass to the user application */
+		uint8_t PacketData[DataHeader.PayloadLength];
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PacketData, DataHeader.PayloadLength);
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		Bluetooth_PacketReceived(PacketData, DataHeader.PayloadLength,
+		                         Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DataHeader.DestinationChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER));
+	}
+}
+
+/** Sends a packet to the remote device on the specified channel.
+ *
+ * \param[in] Data     Pointer to a buffer where the data is to be sourced from
+ * \param[in] DataLen  Length of the data to send
+ * \param[in] Channel  Channel information structure containing the destination channel's information, NULL to send
+ *                     to the remote device's signalling channel
+ *
+ * \return A value from the \ref BT_SendPacket_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t Bluetooth_SendPacket(void* Data, const uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel)
+{
+	BT_ACL_Header_t        ACLPacketHeader;
+	BT_DataPacket_Header_t DataHeader;
+
+	/* A remote device must be connected before a packet transmission is attempted */
+	if (!(Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected))
+	  return BT_SENDPACKET_NotConnected;
+
+	/* If the destination channel is not the signalling channel and it is not currently fully open, abort */
+	if ((Channel != NULL) && (Channel->State != Channel_Open))
+	  return BT_SENDPACKET_ChannelNotOpen;
+
+	/* Fill out the packet's header from the remote device connection information structure */
+	ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle      = (Bluetooth_Connection.ConnectionHandle | BT_ACL_FIRST_AUTOFLUSH);
+	ACLPacketHeader.DataLength            = sizeof(DataHeader) + DataLen;
+	DataHeader.PayloadLength              = DataLen;
+	DataHeader.DestinationChannel         = (Channel == NULL) ? BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING : Channel->RemoteNumber;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	/* Write the packet contents to the pipe so that it can be sent to the remote device */
+	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(ACLPacketHeader));
+	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&DataHeader, sizeof(DataHeader));
+	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Data, DataLen);
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "Packet Sent");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", (ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle & 0x0FFF));
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader.DataLength);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader.DestinationChannel);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader.PayloadLength);
+
+	return BT_SENDPACKET_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Opens a bluetooth channel to the currently connected remote device, so that data can be exchanged.
+ *
+ *  \note The channel is not immediately opened when this function returns - it must undergo a two way
+ *        connection and configuration process first as the main Bluetooth stack processing task is
+ *        repeatedly called. The returned channel is unusable by the user application until its State
+ *        element has progressed to the Open state.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] PSM  PSM of the service that the channel is to be opened for
+ *
+ *  \return Pointer to the channel information structure of the opened channel, or NULL if no free channels
+ */
+Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_OpenChannel(const uint16_t PSM)
+{
+	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = NULL;
+
+	/* Search through the channel information list for a free channel item */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
+	{
+		if (Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i].State == Channel_Closed)
+		{
+			ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
+			
+			/* Set the new channel structure's local channel number to a unique value within the connection orientated
+			   channel address space */
+			ChannelData->LocalNumber = (BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET + i);
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If no free channel item was found in the list, all channels are occupied - abort */
+	if (ChannelData == NULL)
+	  return NULL;
+
+	/* Reset and fill out the allocated channel's information structure with defaults */
+	ChannelData->RemoteNumber = 0;
+	ChannelData->PSM          = PSM;
+	ChannelData->LocalMTU     = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU;
+	ChannelData->State        = Channel_WaitConnectRsp;
+	  
+	struct
+	{
+		BT_Signal_Header_t        SignalCommandHeader;
+		BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t ConnectionRequest;
+	} PacketData;
+
+	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
+	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code              = BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST;
+	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier        = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier;
+	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length            = sizeof(PacketData.ConnectionRequest);
+	
+	/* Fill out the Connection Request in the response packet */
+	PacketData.ConnectionRequest.PSM                 = PSM;
+	PacketData.ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel       = ChannelData->LocalNumber;
+	
+	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL);
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Connection Request");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- PSM 0x%04X", PacketData.ConnectionRequest.PSM);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel);
+
+	return ChannelData;
+}
+
+/** Closes a bluetooth channel that is open to the currently connected remote device, so that no further data
+ *  can be exchanged.
+ *
+ *  \note The channel is not immediately closed when this function returns - it must undergo an asynchronous
+ *        disconnection process first as the main Bluetooth stack processing task is repeatedly called. The
+ *        returned channel is unusable by the user application upon return however the channel is not completely
+ *        closed until its State element has progressed to the Closed state.
+ *
+ * \param[in,out] Channel  Channel information structure of the channel to close
+ */
+void Bluetooth_CloseChannel(Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel)
+{
+	/* Don't try to close a non-existing or already closed channel */
+	if ((Channel == NULL) || (Channel->State == Channel_Closed))
+	  return;
+
+	/* Set the channel's state to the start of the teardown process */
+	Channel->State = Channel_WaitDisconnect;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		BT_Signal_Header_t           SignalCommandHeader;
+		BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t DisconnectionRequest;
+	} PacketData;
+	
+	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
+	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code            = BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST;
+	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier      = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier;
+	PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length          = sizeof(PacketData.DisconnectionRequest);
+
+	/* Fill out the Disconnection Request in the response packet */
+	PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel = Channel->RemoteNumber;
+	PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel = Channel->LocalNumber;
+
+	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL);
+	
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Disconnection Request");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel);	
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel);	
+}
+
+/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Connection Request command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
+ */
+static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
+{
+	BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t ConnectionRequest;
+	
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionRequest, sizeof(ConnectionRequest));
+
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Connection Request");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- PSM: 0x%04X", ConnectionRequest.PSM);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel);
+	
+	/* Try to retrieve the existing channel's information structure if it exists */
+	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
+
+	/* If an existing channel item with the correct remote channel number was not found, find a free channel entry */
+	if (ChannelData == NULL)
+	{
+		/* Look through the channel information list for a free entry */
+		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
+		{
+			if (Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i].State == Channel_Closed)
+			{
+				ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
+
+				/* Set the new channel structure's local channel number to a unique value within the connection orientated
+				   channel address space */
+				ChannelData->LocalNumber = (BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET + i);
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	
+	uint8_t ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_RESOURCES;
+
+	/* Reset the channel item contents only if a channel entry was found for it */
+	if (ChannelData != NULL)
+	{
+		/* Check if the user application will allow the connection based on its PSM */
+		if (Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(ConnectionRequest.PSM))
+		{
+			ChannelData->RemoteNumber = ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel;
+			ChannelData->PSM          = ConnectionRequest.PSM;
+			ChannelData->LocalMTU     = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU;
+			ChannelData->State        = Channel_Config_WaitConfig;
+			
+			ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_PSM;		
+		}
+	}
+	
+	struct
+	{
+		BT_Signal_Header_t         SignalCommandHeader;
+		BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t ConnectionResponse;
+	} ResponsePacket;
+
+	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code              = BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE;
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier        = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length            = sizeof(ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse);
+
+	/* Fill out the Connection Response in the response packet */
+	ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->LocalNumber;
+	ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel      = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
+	ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Result             = ChannelStatus;
+	ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Status             = 0x00;
+	
+	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Connection Response");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Result);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel);
+}
+
+/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Connection Response command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
+ */
+static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
+{
+	BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t ConnectionResponse;
+	
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionResponse, sizeof(ConnectionResponse));
+
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Connection Response");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ConnectionResponse.Result);	
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel);	
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);	
+
+	/* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
+	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER);
+
+	/* Only progress if the referenced channel data was found */
+	if (ChannelData != NULL)
+	{
+		/* Set the channel structure's remote channel number to the channel allocated on the remote device */
+		ChannelData->RemoteNumber = ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel;
+		ChannelData->State        = (ConnectionResponse.Result == BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL) ?
+		                             Channel_Config_WaitConfig : Channel_Closed;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Configuration Request command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
+ */
+static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
+{
+	BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t ConfigurationRequest;
+	
+	/* Allocate a buffer large enough to hold the variable number of configuration options in the request */
+	uint8_t OptionsLen = (SignalCommandHeader->Length - sizeof(ConfigurationRequest));
+	uint8_t Options[OptionsLen];
+
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConfigurationRequest, sizeof(ConfigurationRequest));	
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&Options, sizeof(Options));
+
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	/* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
+	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER);
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Configuration Request");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Remote MTU: 0x%04X", ChannelData->RemoteMTU);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Options Len: 0x%04X", OptionsLen);
+
+	/* Only look at the channel configuration options if a valid channel entry for the local channel number was found */
+	if (ChannelData != NULL)
+	{
+		/* Iterate through each option in the configuration request to look for ones which can be processed */
+		uint8_t OptionPos = 0;
+		while (OptionPos < OptionsLen)
+		{
+			BT_Config_Option_Header_t* OptionHeader = (BT_Config_Option_Header_t*)&Options[OptionPos];
+			void*                      OptionData   = &Options[OptionPos + sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t)];
+
+			BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Option Type: 0x%04X", OptionHeader->Type);
+			BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Option Length: 0x%04X", (sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t) + OptionHeader->Length));
+			
+			/* Store the remote MTU option's value if present */
+			if (OptionHeader->Type == BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU)
+			  ChannelData->RemoteMTU = *((uint16_t*)OptionData);
+
+			/* Progress to the next option in the packet */
+			OptionPos += (sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t) + OptionHeader->Length);
+		}
+	}
+	
+	struct
+	{
+		BT_Signal_Header_t            SignalCommandHeader;
+		BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t ConfigurationResponse;
+	} ResponsePacket;
+
+	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code              = BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE;
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier        = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length            = sizeof(ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse);
+
+	/* Fill out the Configuration Response in the response packet */
+	ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel   = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
+	ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Flags           = 0x00;
+	ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Result          = (ChannelData != NULL) ? BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL : BT_CONFIGURATION_REJECTED;
+
+	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
+
+	if (ChannelData != NULL)
+	{
+		switch (ChannelData->State)
+		{
+			case Channel_Config_WaitConfig:
+				ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig;
+				break;
+			case Channel_Config_WaitReqResp:
+				ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitResp;
+				break;
+			case Channel_Config_WaitReq:
+				ChannelData->State = Channel_Open;
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Configuration Response");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Result);
+}
+
+/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Configuration Response command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
+ */
+static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
+{
+	BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t ConfigurationResponse;
+
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConfigurationResponse, sizeof(ConfigurationResponse));
+
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Configuration Response");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ConfigurationResponse.Result);
+
+	/* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
+	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
+	
+	/* Only update the channel's state if it was found in the channel list */
+	if (ChannelData != NULL)
+	{
+		/* Check if the channel configuration completed successfuly */
+		if (ConfigurationResponse.Result == BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL)
+		{
+			switch (ChannelData->State)
+			{
+				case Channel_Config_WaitReqResp:
+					ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitReq;
+					break;
+				case Channel_Config_WaitResp:
+					ChannelData->State = Channel_Open;
+					break;
+			}	
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Configuration failed - close the channel */
+			ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Disconnection Request command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
+ */
+static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
+{
+	BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t DisconnectionRequest;
+	
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DisconnectionRequest, sizeof(DisconnectionRequest));
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Disconnection Request");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel);
+	
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	/* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
+	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
+
+	struct
+	{
+		BT_Signal_Header_t            SignalCommandHeader;
+		BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t DisconnectionResponse;
+	} ResponsePacket;
+
+	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code                 = BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE;
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier           = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length               = sizeof(ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse);
+
+	/* Fill out the Disconnection Response in the response packet */
+	ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
+	ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel      = ChannelData->LocalNumber;
+
+	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
+
+	/* If the channel was found in the channel list, close it */
+	if (ChannelData != NULL)
+	  ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed;
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Disconnection Response");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);
+}
+
+/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Disconnection Response command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
+ */
+static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
+{
+	BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t DisconnectionResponse;
+	
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DisconnectionResponse, sizeof(DisconnectionResponse));
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Disconnection Response");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel);
+	
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	/* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
+	Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
+	
+	/* If the channel was found in the channel list, close it */	
+	if (ChannelData != NULL)
+	  ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for an Echo Request command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
+ */
+static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
+{
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Echo Request");
+	
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	struct
+	{
+		BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
+	} ResponsePacket;
+
+	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code                 = BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_RESPONSE;
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier           = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length               = 0;
+	
+	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Echo Response");
+}
+
+/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for an Information Request command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  SignalCommandHeader  Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
+ */
+static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
+{
+	BT_Signal_InformationReq_t InformationRequest;
+
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&InformationRequest, sizeof(InformationRequest));
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Information Request");
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Info Type: 0x%04X", InformationRequest.InfoType);
+	
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	struct
+	{
+		BT_Signal_Header_t          SignalCommandHeader;
+		BT_Signal_InformationResp_t InformationResponse;
+		
+		uint8_t Data[4];
+	} ResponsePacket;
+	
+	uint8_t DataLen = 0;
+	
+	/* Retrieve the requested information and store it in the outgoing packet, if found */
+	switch (InformationRequest.InfoType)
+	{
+		case BT_INFOREQ_MTU:		
+			ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL;
+			DataLen = 2;
+			
+			*((uint16_t*)&ResponsePacket.Data) = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU;
+			break;
+		case BT_INFOREQ_EXTENDEDFEATURES:
+			ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL;
+			DataLen = 4;
+			
+			*((uint32_t*)&ResponsePacket.Data) = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_NOTSUPPORTED;
+			DataLen = 0;
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	/* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code                 = BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_RESPONSE;
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier           = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
+	ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length               = sizeof(ResponsePacket.InformationResponse) + DataLen;
+
+	/* Fill out the Information Response in the response packet */
+	ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.InfoType = InformationRequest.InfoType;
+	
+	Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, (sizeof(ResponsePacket) - sizeof(ResponsePacket.Data) + DataLen), NULL);
+
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Information Response");	
+	BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.h
index 1a72cede3..cc0160ff7 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.h
@@ -1,176 +1,176 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_
-#define _BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		
-		#include "BluetoothStack.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define BT_ACL_DEBUG(l, s, ...)           do { if (ACL_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(ACL) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
-		#define ACL_DEBUG_LEVEL                   0
-
-		#define BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET       0x0040
-
-		#define BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING              0x0001
-		#define BT_CHANNEL_CONNECTIONLESS         0x0002
-		
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_COMMAND_REJECT          0x01
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST      0x02
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE     0x03
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST   0x04
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE  0x05
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST   0x06
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE  0x07
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_REQUEST            0x08
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_RESPONSE           0x09
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_REQUEST     0x0A
-		#define BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_RESPONSE    0x0B
-		
-		#define BT_INFOREQ_MTU                    0x0001
-		#define BT_INFOREQ_EXTENDEDFEATURES       0x0002
-		
-		#define BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL         0x0000
-		#define BT_INFORMATION_NOTSUPPORTED       0x0001
-		
-		#define BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL          0x0000
-		#define BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_PSM         0x0002
-		#define BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_RESOURCES   0x0004
-		
-		#define BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL       0x0000
-		#define BT_CONFIGURATION_REJECTED         0x0002
-		#define BT_CONFIGURATION_UNKNOWNOPTIONS   0x0003
-		
-		#define BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU              1
-		
-		#define BT_ACL_FIRST_AUTOFLUSH            (1 << 13)
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t ConnectionHandle;
-			uint16_t DataLength;
-		} BT_ACL_Header_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t PayloadLength;
-			uint16_t DestinationChannel;
-		} BT_DataPacket_Header_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  Code;
-			uint8_t  Identifier;
-			uint16_t Length;
-		} BT_Signal_Header_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t PSM;
-			uint16_t SourceChannel;
-		} BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t DestinationChannel;
-			uint16_t SourceChannel;
-			uint16_t Result;
-			uint16_t Status;
-		} BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t DestinationChannel;
-			uint16_t SourceChannel;
-		} BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t DestinationChannel;
-			uint16_t SourceChannel;
-		} BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t;		
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t DestinationChannel;
-			uint16_t Flags;
-		} BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t SourceChannel;
-			uint16_t Flags;
-			uint16_t Result;
-		} BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t InfoType;
-		} BT_Signal_InformationReq_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t InfoType;
-			uint16_t Result;
-		} BT_Signal_InformationResp_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Type;
-			uint8_t Length;
-		} BT_Config_Option_Header_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void    Bluetooth_ACLTask(void);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_C)
-			static void Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets(void);
-
-			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
-			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
-			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
-			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
-			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
-			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
-			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
-			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_
+#define _BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		
+		#include "BluetoothStack.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define BT_ACL_DEBUG(l, s, ...)           do { if (ACL_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(ACL) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+		#define ACL_DEBUG_LEVEL                   0
+
+		#define BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET       0x0040
+
+		#define BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING              0x0001
+		#define BT_CHANNEL_CONNECTIONLESS         0x0002
+		
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_COMMAND_REJECT          0x01
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST      0x02
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE     0x03
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST   0x04
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE  0x05
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST   0x06
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE  0x07
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_REQUEST            0x08
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_RESPONSE           0x09
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_REQUEST     0x0A
+		#define BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_RESPONSE    0x0B
+		
+		#define BT_INFOREQ_MTU                    0x0001
+		#define BT_INFOREQ_EXTENDEDFEATURES       0x0002
+		
+		#define BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL         0x0000
+		#define BT_INFORMATION_NOTSUPPORTED       0x0001
+		
+		#define BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL          0x0000
+		#define BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_PSM         0x0002
+		#define BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_RESOURCES   0x0004
+		
+		#define BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL       0x0000
+		#define BT_CONFIGURATION_REJECTED         0x0002
+		#define BT_CONFIGURATION_UNKNOWNOPTIONS   0x0003
+		
+		#define BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU              1
+		
+		#define BT_ACL_FIRST_AUTOFLUSH            (1 << 13)
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t ConnectionHandle;
+			uint16_t DataLength;
+		} BT_ACL_Header_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t PayloadLength;
+			uint16_t DestinationChannel;
+		} BT_DataPacket_Header_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Code;
+			uint8_t  Identifier;
+			uint16_t Length;
+		} BT_Signal_Header_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t PSM;
+			uint16_t SourceChannel;
+		} BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t DestinationChannel;
+			uint16_t SourceChannel;
+			uint16_t Result;
+			uint16_t Status;
+		} BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t DestinationChannel;
+			uint16_t SourceChannel;
+		} BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t DestinationChannel;
+			uint16_t SourceChannel;
+		} BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t;		
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t DestinationChannel;
+			uint16_t Flags;
+		} BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t SourceChannel;
+			uint16_t Flags;
+			uint16_t Result;
+		} BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t InfoType;
+		} BT_Signal_InformationReq_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t InfoType;
+			uint16_t Result;
+		} BT_Signal_InformationResp_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Type;
+			uint8_t Length;
+		} BT_Config_Option_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    Bluetooth_ACLTask(void);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_C)
+			static void Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets(void);
+
+			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
+			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
+			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
+			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
+			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
+			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
+			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
+			static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothClassCodes.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothClassCodes.h
index 17e53c8e8..209256fd0 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothClassCodes.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothClassCodes.h
@@ -1,110 +1,110 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_CLASS_CODES_H_
-#define _BLUETOOTH_CLASS_CODES_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_POSITIONING               (1UL << 16)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_NETWORKING                (1UL << 17)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_RENDERING                 (1UL << 18)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_CAPTURING                 (1UL << 19)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_OBJECTTRANSFER            (1UL << 20)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_AUDIO                     (1UL << 21)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_TELEPHONY                 (1UL << 22)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_INFORMATION               (1UL << 23)
-		
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_MISC                        (0x00 << 8)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_COMPUTER                    (0x01 << 8)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_PHONE                       (0x02 << 8)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_LAN                         (0x03 << 8)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_AUDIOVIDEO                  (0x04 << 8)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_PERIPHERAL                  (0x05 << 8)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_IMAGING                     (0x06 << 8)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_UNCLASSIFIED                (0x1F << 8)
-
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_UNCATEGORIZED      (0x00 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_DESKTOP            (0x01 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_SERVER             (0x02 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_LAPTOP             (0x03 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_HANDHELD           (0x04 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_PALM               (0x05 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_WEARABLE           (0x06 << 2)
-		
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_UNCATEGORIZED         (0x00 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_CELLULAR              (0x01 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_CORDLESS              (0x02 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_SMARTPHONE            (0x03 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_WIREDMODEM            (0x04 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_ISDN                  (0x05 << 2)
-
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_FULLY_AVAILABLE         (0x00 << 5)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_1_TO_17_PC_UTILIZED     (0x01 << 5)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_17_TO_33_PC_UTILIZED    (0x02 << 5)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_33_TO_50_PC_UTILIZED    (0x03 << 5)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_50_TO_67_PC_UTILIZED    (0x04 << 5)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_67_TO_83_PC_UTILIZED    (0x05 << 5)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_83_TO_99_PC_UTILIZED    (0x06 << 5)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_NO_SERVICE_AVAILABLE        (0x07 << 5)
-		
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_UNCATEGORIZED            (0x00 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HEADSET                  (0x01 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HANDSFREE                (0x02 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_MICROPHONE               (0x04 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_LOUDSPEAKER              (0x05 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HEADPHONES               (0x06 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_PORTABLE_AUDIO           (0x07 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_CARAUDIO                 (0x08 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_SETTOP_BOX               (0x09 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HIFI                     (0x0A << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VCR                      (0x0B << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_CAMERA             (0x0C << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_CAMCORDER                (0x0D << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_MONITOR            (0x0E << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_DISPLAY_AND_LOUDSPEAKER  (0x0F << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_CONFERENCING       (0x10 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_GAMING_TOY               (0x12 << 2)
-		
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_KEYBOARD         (0x01 << 6)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_POINTING         (0x02 << 6)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_COMBO            (0x03 << 6)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_UNCATEGORIZED    (0x00 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_JOYSTICK         (0x01 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_GAMEPAD          (0x02 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_REMOTE_CONTROL   (0x03 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_SENSING_DEVICE   (0x04 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_DIGITIZER        (0x05 << 2)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_CARD_READER      (0x06 << 2)
-
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_DISPLAY             (1 << 4)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_CAMERA              (1 << 5)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_SCANNER             (1 << 6)
-		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_PRINTER             (1 << 7)
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_CLASS_CODES_H_
+#define _BLUETOOTH_CLASS_CODES_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_POSITIONING               (1UL << 16)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_NETWORKING                (1UL << 17)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_RENDERING                 (1UL << 18)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_CAPTURING                 (1UL << 19)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_OBJECTTRANSFER            (1UL << 20)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_AUDIO                     (1UL << 21)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_TELEPHONY                 (1UL << 22)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_INFORMATION               (1UL << 23)
+		
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_MISC                        (0x00 << 8)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_COMPUTER                    (0x01 << 8)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_PHONE                       (0x02 << 8)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_LAN                         (0x03 << 8)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_AUDIOVIDEO                  (0x04 << 8)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_PERIPHERAL                  (0x05 << 8)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_IMAGING                     (0x06 << 8)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_UNCLASSIFIED                (0x1F << 8)
+
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_UNCATEGORIZED      (0x00 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_DESKTOP            (0x01 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_SERVER             (0x02 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_LAPTOP             (0x03 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_HANDHELD           (0x04 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_PALM               (0x05 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_WEARABLE           (0x06 << 2)
+		
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_UNCATEGORIZED         (0x00 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_CELLULAR              (0x01 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_CORDLESS              (0x02 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_SMARTPHONE            (0x03 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_WIREDMODEM            (0x04 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_ISDN                  (0x05 << 2)
+
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_FULLY_AVAILABLE         (0x00 << 5)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_1_TO_17_PC_UTILIZED     (0x01 << 5)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_17_TO_33_PC_UTILIZED    (0x02 << 5)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_33_TO_50_PC_UTILIZED    (0x03 << 5)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_50_TO_67_PC_UTILIZED    (0x04 << 5)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_67_TO_83_PC_UTILIZED    (0x05 << 5)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_83_TO_99_PC_UTILIZED    (0x06 << 5)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_NO_SERVICE_AVAILABLE        (0x07 << 5)
+		
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_UNCATEGORIZED            (0x00 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HEADSET                  (0x01 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HANDSFREE                (0x02 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_MICROPHONE               (0x04 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_LOUDSPEAKER              (0x05 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HEADPHONES               (0x06 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_PORTABLE_AUDIO           (0x07 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_CARAUDIO                 (0x08 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_SETTOP_BOX               (0x09 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HIFI                     (0x0A << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VCR                      (0x0B << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_CAMERA             (0x0C << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_CAMCORDER                (0x0D << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_MONITOR            (0x0E << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_DISPLAY_AND_LOUDSPEAKER  (0x0F << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_CONFERENCING       (0x10 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_GAMING_TOY               (0x12 << 2)
+		
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_KEYBOARD         (0x01 << 6)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_POINTING         (0x02 << 6)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_COMBO            (0x03 << 6)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_UNCATEGORIZED    (0x00 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_JOYSTICK         (0x01 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_GAMEPAD          (0x02 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_REMOTE_CONTROL   (0x03 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_SENSING_DEVICE   (0x04 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_DIGITIZER        (0x05 << 2)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_CARD_READER      (0x06 << 2)
+
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_DISPLAY             (1 << 4)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_CAMERA              (1 << 5)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_SCANNER             (1 << 6)
+		#define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_PRINTER             (1 << 7)
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c
index 740ce6766..f678ecba5 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c
@@ -1,396 +1,396 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/*
-	TODO: Add local to remote device connections
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTHHCICOMMANDS_C
-#include "BluetoothHCICommands.h"
-
-/** Temporary Bluetooth Device Address, for HCI responses which much include the detination address */
-static uint8_t Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[6];
-
-/** Bluetooth HCI processing task. This task should be called repeatedly the main Bluetooth
- *  stack task to manage the HCI processing state.
- */
-void Bluetooth_HCITask(void)
-{
-	BT_HCICommand_Header_t HCICommandHeader;
-
-	switch (Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState)
-	{
-		case Bluetooth_ProcessEvents:
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE);
-			Pipe_Unfreeze();
-			
-			if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-			{
-				BT_HCIEvent_Header_t HCIEventHeader;
-
-				/* Read in the event header to fetch the event code and payload length */
-				Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&HCIEventHeader, sizeof(HCIEventHeader));
-				
-				/* Create a temporary buffer for the event parameters */
-				uint8_t EventParams[HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength];
-
-				/* Read in the event parameters into the temporary buffer */
-				Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&EventParams, HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength);
-				Pipe_ClearIN();
-				
-				BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "Event Received (0x%02X)", HCIEventHeader.EventCode);
-
-				switch (HCIEventHeader.EventCode)
-				{
-					case EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE:
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Complete");
-						
-						/* Check which operation was completed in case we need to process the even parameters */
-						switch (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t*)&EventParams)->Opcode)
-						{
-							case (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR):
-								/* A READ BDADDR command completed, copy over the local device's BDADDR from the response */
-								memcpy(Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR,
-								       &((BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ReturnParams[1],
-								       sizeof(Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR));
-								break;
-						}
-						
-						Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState;
-						break;
-					case EVENT_COMMAND_STATUS:
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Status");
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Status Code: 0x%02X", (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t*)&EventParams)->Status));
-
-						/* If the execution of a command failed, reset the stack */
-						if (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t*)&EventParams)->Status)
-						  Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init;
-						break;
-					case EVENT_CONNECTION_REQUEST:
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Connection Request");
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Link Type: 0x%02X", (((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->LinkType));
-
-						/* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
-						memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
-						       &((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
-						       sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));
-							   
-						bool IsACLConnection = (((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->LinkType == 0x01);
-
-						/* Only accept the connection if it is a ACL (data) connection, a device is not already connected
-						   and the user application has indicated that the connection should be allowed */
-						Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = (Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected || !(IsACLConnection) ||
-													      !(Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress))) ?
-													      Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection : Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection;
-
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection %S", (Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState == Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection) ?
-						                                     PSTR("REJECTED") : PSTR("ACCEPTED"));
-
-						break;
-					case EVENT_PIN_CODE_REQUEST:
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Pin Code Request");
-
-						/* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
-						memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
-						       &((BT_HCIEvent_PinCodeReq_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
-						       sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));
-
-						Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode;
-						break;
-					case EVENT_LINK_KEY_REQUEST:
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Link Key Request");
-						
-						/* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
-						memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
-						       &((BT_HCIEvent_LinkKeyReq_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
-						       sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));						
-						
-						Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK;
-						break;
-					case EVENT_CONNECTION_COMPLETE:
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Connection Complete");
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Handle: 0x%04X", ((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ConnectionHandle);
-
-						/* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
-						memcpy(Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress,
-						       &((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
-						       sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));
-
-						/* Store the created connection handle and indicate that the connection has been established */
-						Bluetooth_Connection.ConnectionHandle = ((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ConnectionHandle;
-						Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected      = true;
-						
-						Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete();						
-						break;
-					case EVENT_DISCONNECTION_COMPLETE:
-						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Disconnection Complete");
-
-						/* Device disconnected, indicate connection information no longer valid */
-						Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected = false;
-						
-						Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete();
-						
-						Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init;
-						break;
-				}
-			}
-			
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-			
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Init:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Init");
-
-			Bluetooth_State.IsInitialized = false;
-
-			/* Reset the connection information structure to destroy any previous connection state */
-			memset(&Bluetooth_Connection, 0x00, sizeof(Bluetooth_Connection));
-
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_Reset; 
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Init_Reset:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Reset");
-
-			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
-			{
-				OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_RESET),
-				ParameterLength: 0,
-			};
-
-			/* Send the command to reset the bluetooth dongle controller */
-			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0);
-			
-			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize;
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Read Buffer Size");
-		
-			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
-			{
-				OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBUFFERSIZE),
-				ParameterLength: 0,
-			};
-
-			/* Send the command to read the bluetooth buffer size (mandatory before device sends any data) */
-			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0);
-
-			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR;
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Get BDADDR");
-		
-			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
-			{
-				OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR),
-				ParameterLength: 0,
-			};
-
-			/* Send the command to retrieve the BDADDR of the inserted bluetooth dongle */
-			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0);
-
-			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName;
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Set Local Name");
-
-			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
-				{
-					OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_LOCAL_NAME),
-					ParameterLength: 248,
-				};
-
-			/* Send the command to set the bluetooth dongle's name for other devices to see */
-			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name, strlen(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name));
-
-			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass;
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Set Device Class");
-
-			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
-				{
-					OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_CLASS_OF_DEVICE),
-					ParameterLength: 3,
-				};
-
-			/* Send the command to set the class of the device for other devices to see */
-			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Class, 3);
-
-			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable;
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Write Scan Enable");
-
-			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
-			{
-				OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SCAN_ENABLE),
-				ParameterLength: 1,
-			};
-
-			uint8_t Interval = BT_SCANMODE_InquiryAndPageScans;
-			
-			/* Send the command to set the remote device scanning mode */
-			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &Interval, 1);
-			
-			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit;
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit:
-			Bluetooth_State.IsInitialized = true;
-
-			/* Fire the user application callback to indicate that the stack is now fully initialized */
-			Bluetooth_StackInitialized();
-
-			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Accept Connection");
-
-			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
-				{
-					OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST),
-					ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t),
-				};
-
-			/* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Connection Request event, indicate slave
-			   connection role */
-			BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t AcceptConnectionParams;
-			memcpy(AcceptConnectionParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
-			       sizeof(AcceptConnectionParams.RemoteAddress));
-			AcceptConnectionParams.SlaveRole = true;
-
-			/* Send the command to accept the remote connection request */
-			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &AcceptConnectionParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t));
-			
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Reject Connection");
-
-			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
-				{
-					OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REJECT_CONNECTION_REQUEST),
-					ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t),
-				};
-
-			/* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Connection Request event, indicate failure
-			   to accept the connection due to limited device resources or incorrect device address */
-			BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t RejectConnectionParams;
-			memcpy(RejectConnectionParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(RejectConnectionParams.RemoteAddress));
-			RejectConnectionParams.Reason = Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected ? ERROR_LIMITED_RESOURCES : ERROR_UNACCEPTABLE_BDADDR;
-
-			/* Send the command to reject the remote connection request */
-			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &RejectConnectionParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t));
-		
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Send Pin Code");
-
-			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
-				{
-					OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_REPLY),
-					ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t),
-				};
-
-			/* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the PIN Code Request event, copy over the
-			   local PIN authentication code to the response */
-			BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t PINCodeRequestParams;
-			memcpy(PINCodeRequestParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(PINCodeRequestParams.RemoteAddress));
-			PINCodeRequestParams.PINCodeLength = strlen(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode);
-			memcpy(PINCodeRequestParams.PINCode, Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode, sizeof(PINCodeRequestParams.PINCode));
-			
-			/* Send the command to transmit the device's local PIN number for authentication */
-			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &PINCodeRequestParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t));
-
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-		case Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK:
-			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Send Link Key NAK");
-
-			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
-				{
-					OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY),
-					ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t),
-				};
-
-			/* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Link Key Request event */
-			BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t LinkKeyNAKParams;
-			memcpy(LinkKeyNAKParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(LinkKeyNAKParams.RemoteAddress));
-
-			/* Send the command to transmit the link key NAK to the receiver */
-			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &LinkKeyNAKParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t));
-
-			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Sends a Bluetooth HCI control command to the attached Bluetooth device.
- *
- *  \param[in] HCICommandHeader  HCI command header to send to the attached device
- *  \param[in] Parameters        Pointer to the source of the control parameters (if any)
- *  \param[in] ParameterLength   Length of the parameters to send in bytes
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
- */
-static uint8_t Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(const BT_HCICommand_Header_t* const HCICommandHeader, const void* Parameters, const uint16_t ParameterLength)
-{
-	/* Need to reserve the amount of bytes given in the header for the complete payload */
-	uint8_t CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + HCICommandHeader->ParameterLength];
-
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_DEVICE),
-			.bRequest      = 0,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = sizeof(CommandBuffer)
-		};
-
-	/* Copy over the HCI command header to the allocated buffer */
-	memcpy(CommandBuffer, HCICommandHeader, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t));
-	
-	/* Zero out the parameter section of the response so that all padding bytes are known to be zero */
-	memset(&CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t)], 0x00, HCICommandHeader->ParameterLength);
-
-	/* Copy over the command parameters (if any) to the command buffer - note, the number of actual source parameter bytes
-	   may differ to those in the header; any difference in length is filled with 0x00 padding bytes */
-	memcpy(&CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t)], Parameters, ParameterLength);
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(CommandBuffer);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+	TODO: Add local to remote device connections
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTHHCICOMMANDS_C
+#include "BluetoothHCICommands.h"
+
+/** Temporary Bluetooth Device Address, for HCI responses which much include the detination address */
+static uint8_t Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[6];
+
+/** Bluetooth HCI processing task. This task should be called repeatedly the main Bluetooth
+ *  stack task to manage the HCI processing state.
+ */
+void Bluetooth_HCITask(void)
+{
+	BT_HCICommand_Header_t HCICommandHeader;
+
+	switch (Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState)
+	{
+		case Bluetooth_ProcessEvents:
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE);
+			Pipe_Unfreeze();
+			
+			if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+			{
+				BT_HCIEvent_Header_t HCIEventHeader;
+
+				/* Read in the event header to fetch the event code and payload length */
+				Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&HCIEventHeader, sizeof(HCIEventHeader));
+				
+				/* Create a temporary buffer for the event parameters */
+				uint8_t EventParams[HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength];
+
+				/* Read in the event parameters into the temporary buffer */
+				Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&EventParams, HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength);
+				Pipe_ClearIN();
+				
+				BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "Event Received (0x%02X)", HCIEventHeader.EventCode);
+
+				switch (HCIEventHeader.EventCode)
+				{
+					case EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE:
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Complete");
+						
+						/* Check which operation was completed in case we need to process the even parameters */
+						switch (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t*)&EventParams)->Opcode)
+						{
+							case (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR):
+								/* A READ BDADDR command completed, copy over the local device's BDADDR from the response */
+								memcpy(Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR,
+								       &((BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ReturnParams[1],
+								       sizeof(Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR));
+								break;
+						}
+						
+						Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState;
+						break;
+					case EVENT_COMMAND_STATUS:
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Status");
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Status Code: 0x%02X", (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t*)&EventParams)->Status));
+
+						/* If the execution of a command failed, reset the stack */
+						if (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t*)&EventParams)->Status)
+						  Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init;
+						break;
+					case EVENT_CONNECTION_REQUEST:
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Connection Request");
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Link Type: 0x%02X", (((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->LinkType));
+
+						/* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
+						memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
+						       &((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
+						       sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));
+							   
+						bool IsACLConnection = (((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->LinkType == 0x01);
+
+						/* Only accept the connection if it is a ACL (data) connection, a device is not already connected
+						   and the user application has indicated that the connection should be allowed */
+						Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = (Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected || !(IsACLConnection) ||
+													      !(Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress))) ?
+													      Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection : Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection;
+
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection %S", (Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState == Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection) ?
+						                                     PSTR("REJECTED") : PSTR("ACCEPTED"));
+
+						break;
+					case EVENT_PIN_CODE_REQUEST:
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Pin Code Request");
+
+						/* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
+						memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
+						       &((BT_HCIEvent_PinCodeReq_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
+						       sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));
+
+						Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode;
+						break;
+					case EVENT_LINK_KEY_REQUEST:
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Link Key Request");
+						
+						/* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
+						memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
+						       &((BT_HCIEvent_LinkKeyReq_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
+						       sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));						
+						
+						Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK;
+						break;
+					case EVENT_CONNECTION_COMPLETE:
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Connection Complete");
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Handle: 0x%04X", ((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ConnectionHandle);
+
+						/* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
+						memcpy(Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress,
+						       &((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
+						       sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));
+
+						/* Store the created connection handle and indicate that the connection has been established */
+						Bluetooth_Connection.ConnectionHandle = ((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ConnectionHandle;
+						Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected      = true;
+						
+						Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete();						
+						break;
+					case EVENT_DISCONNECTION_COMPLETE:
+						BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Disconnection Complete");
+
+						/* Device disconnected, indicate connection information no longer valid */
+						Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected = false;
+						
+						Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete();
+						
+						Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init;
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+			
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Init:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Init");
+
+			Bluetooth_State.IsInitialized = false;
+
+			/* Reset the connection information structure to destroy any previous connection state */
+			memset(&Bluetooth_Connection, 0x00, sizeof(Bluetooth_Connection));
+
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_Reset; 
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Init_Reset:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Reset");
+
+			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
+			{
+				OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_RESET),
+				ParameterLength: 0,
+			};
+
+			/* Send the command to reset the bluetooth dongle controller */
+			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0);
+			
+			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize;
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Read Buffer Size");
+		
+			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
+			{
+				OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBUFFERSIZE),
+				ParameterLength: 0,
+			};
+
+			/* Send the command to read the bluetooth buffer size (mandatory before device sends any data) */
+			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0);
+
+			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR;
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Get BDADDR");
+		
+			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
+			{
+				OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR),
+				ParameterLength: 0,
+			};
+
+			/* Send the command to retrieve the BDADDR of the inserted bluetooth dongle */
+			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0);
+
+			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName;
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Set Local Name");
+
+			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
+				{
+					OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_LOCAL_NAME),
+					ParameterLength: 248,
+				};
+
+			/* Send the command to set the bluetooth dongle's name for other devices to see */
+			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name, strlen(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name));
+
+			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass;
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Set Device Class");
+
+			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
+				{
+					OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_CLASS_OF_DEVICE),
+					ParameterLength: 3,
+				};
+
+			/* Send the command to set the class of the device for other devices to see */
+			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Class, 3);
+
+			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable;
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Write Scan Enable");
+
+			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
+			{
+				OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SCAN_ENABLE),
+				ParameterLength: 1,
+			};
+
+			uint8_t Interval = BT_SCANMODE_InquiryAndPageScans;
+			
+			/* Send the command to set the remote device scanning mode */
+			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &Interval, 1);
+			
+			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit;
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit:
+			Bluetooth_State.IsInitialized = true;
+
+			/* Fire the user application callback to indicate that the stack is now fully initialized */
+			Bluetooth_StackInitialized();
+
+			Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Accept Connection");
+
+			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
+				{
+					OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST),
+					ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t),
+				};
+
+			/* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Connection Request event, indicate slave
+			   connection role */
+			BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t AcceptConnectionParams;
+			memcpy(AcceptConnectionParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
+			       sizeof(AcceptConnectionParams.RemoteAddress));
+			AcceptConnectionParams.SlaveRole = true;
+
+			/* Send the command to accept the remote connection request */
+			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &AcceptConnectionParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t));
+			
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Reject Connection");
+
+			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
+				{
+					OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REJECT_CONNECTION_REQUEST),
+					ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t),
+				};
+
+			/* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Connection Request event, indicate failure
+			   to accept the connection due to limited device resources or incorrect device address */
+			BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t RejectConnectionParams;
+			memcpy(RejectConnectionParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(RejectConnectionParams.RemoteAddress));
+			RejectConnectionParams.Reason = Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected ? ERROR_LIMITED_RESOURCES : ERROR_UNACCEPTABLE_BDADDR;
+
+			/* Send the command to reject the remote connection request */
+			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &RejectConnectionParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t));
+		
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Send Pin Code");
+
+			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
+				{
+					OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_REPLY),
+					ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t),
+				};
+
+			/* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the PIN Code Request event, copy over the
+			   local PIN authentication code to the response */
+			BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t PINCodeRequestParams;
+			memcpy(PINCodeRequestParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(PINCodeRequestParams.RemoteAddress));
+			PINCodeRequestParams.PINCodeLength = strlen(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode);
+			memcpy(PINCodeRequestParams.PINCode, Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode, sizeof(PINCodeRequestParams.PINCode));
+			
+			/* Send the command to transmit the device's local PIN number for authentication */
+			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &PINCodeRequestParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t));
+
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+		case Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK:
+			BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Send Link Key NAK");
+
+			HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
+				{
+					OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY),
+					ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t),
+				};
+
+			/* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Link Key Request event */
+			BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t LinkKeyNAKParams;
+			memcpy(LinkKeyNAKParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(LinkKeyNAKParams.RemoteAddress));
+
+			/* Send the command to transmit the link key NAK to the receiver */
+			Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &LinkKeyNAKParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t));
+
+			Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Sends a Bluetooth HCI control command to the attached Bluetooth device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HCICommandHeader  HCI command header to send to the attached device
+ *  \param[in] Parameters        Pointer to the source of the control parameters (if any)
+ *  \param[in] ParameterLength   Length of the parameters to send in bytes
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+ */
+static uint8_t Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(const BT_HCICommand_Header_t* const HCICommandHeader, const void* Parameters, const uint16_t ParameterLength)
+{
+	/* Need to reserve the amount of bytes given in the header for the complete payload */
+	uint8_t CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + HCICommandHeader->ParameterLength];
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_DEVICE),
+			.bRequest      = 0,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(CommandBuffer)
+		};
+
+	/* Copy over the HCI command header to the allocated buffer */
+	memcpy(CommandBuffer, HCICommandHeader, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t));
+	
+	/* Zero out the parameter section of the response so that all padding bytes are known to be zero */
+	memset(&CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t)], 0x00, HCICommandHeader->ParameterLength);
+
+	/* Copy over the command parameters (if any) to the command buffer - note, the number of actual source parameter bytes
+	   may differ to those in the header; any difference in length is filled with 0x00 padding bytes */
+	memcpy(&CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t)], Parameters, ParameterLength);
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(CommandBuffer);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.h
index 6682619b3..5f98e34a9 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.h
@@ -1,206 +1,206 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_HCICOMMANDS_H_
-#define _BLUETOOTH_HCICOMMANDS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-
-		#include "BluetoothStack.h"
-		#include "BluetoothClassCodes.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define BT_HCI_DEBUG(l, s, ...)                        do { if (HCI_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(HCI) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
-		#define HCI_DEBUG_LEVEL                                0
-
-		#define OGF_LINK_CONTROL                              (0x01 << 10)
-		#define OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND                            (0x03 << 10)
-		#define OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL                       (0x04 << 10)
-
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_INQUIRY                       0x0001
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_INQUIRY_CANCEL                0x0002
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PERIODIC_INQUIRY              0x0003
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_EXIT_PERIODIC_INQUIRY         0x0004
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CREATE_CONNECTION             0x0005
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_DISCONNECT                    0x0006
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CREATE_CONNECTION_CANCEL      0x0008
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST     0x0009
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REJECT_CONNECTION_REQUEST     0x000A
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_REPLY        0x000B
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY    0x000C
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_REPLY        0x000D
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY    0x000E
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CHANGE_CONNECTION_PACKET_TYPE 0x000F
-		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REMOTE_NAME_REQUEST           0x0019
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_SET_EVENT_MASK              0x0001
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_RESET                       0x0003
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_PIN_TYPE              0x000A
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_LOCAL_NAME            0x0013
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_READ_LOCAL_NAME             0x0014
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SCAN_ENABLE           0x001A
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_CLASS_OF_DEVICE       0x0024
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SIMPLE_PAIRING_MODE   0x0056
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE 0x0020
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBUFFERSIZE         0x0005
-		#define OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR             0x0009
-		
-		#define EVENT_COMMAND_STATUS                           0x0F
-		#define EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE                         0x0E
-		#define EVENT_CONNECTION_COMPLETE                      0x03
-		#define EVENT_CONNECTION_REQUEST                       0x04
-		#define EVENT_DISCONNECTION_COMPLETE                   0x05
-		#define EVENT_REMOTE_NAME_REQUEST_COMPLETE             0x07
-		#define EVENT_PIN_CODE_REQUEST                         0x16
-		#define EVENT_LINK_KEY_REQUEST                         0x17
-		
-		#define ERROR_LIMITED_RESOURCES                        0x0D
-		#define ERROR_UNACCEPTABLE_BDADDR                      0x0F
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t OpCode;
-			uint8_t  ParameterLength;
-			uint8_t  Parameters[];
-		} BT_HCICommand_Header_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  EventCode;
-			uint8_t  ParameterLength;
-		} BT_HCIEvent_Header_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  Status;
-			uint8_t  Packets;
-			uint16_t OpCode;
-		} BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  HCIPacketsAllowable;
-			uint16_t Opcode;
-			uint8_t  ReturnParams[];
-		} BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
-			uint8_t  ClassOfDevice_Service;
-			uint16_t ClassOfDevice_MajorMinor;
-			uint8_t  LinkType;
-		} BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  Status;
-			uint16_t ConnectionHandle;
-			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
-			uint8_t  LinkType;
-			uint8_t  EncryptionEnabled;
-		} BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
-		} BT_HCIEvent_PinCodeReq_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
-		} BT_HCIEvent_LinkKeyReq_t;
-				
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
-		} BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
-			uint8_t  PINCodeLength;
-			char     PINCode[16];
-		} BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
-			uint8_t  SlaveRole;
-		} BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
-			uint8_t  Reason;
-		} BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t;		
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		enum BT_ScanEnable_Modes_t
-		{
-			BT_SCANMODE_NoScansEnabled       = 0,
-			BT_SCANMODE_InquiryScanOnly      = 1,
-			BT_SCANMODE_PageScanOnly         = 2,
-			BT_SCANMODE_InquiryAndPageScans  = 3,
-		};
-
-		enum BT_HCIStates_t
-		{
-			Bluetooth_ProcessEvents          = 0,
-			Bluetooth_Init                   = 1,
-			Bluetooth_Init_Reset             = 2,
-			Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize    = 3,
-			Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR         = 4,
-			Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName      = 5,
-			Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass    = 6,
-			Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable   = 7,
-			Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit      = 8,
-			Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection  = 9,
-			Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection  = 10,
-			Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode       = 11,
-			Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK    = 12,
-		};
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void Bluetooth_HCITask(void);
-			
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTHHCICOMMANDS_C)
-			static uint8_t Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(const BT_HCICommand_Header_t* const HCICommandHeader, const void* Parameters,
-			                                        const uint16_t ParameterLength);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_HCICOMMANDS_H_
+#define _BLUETOOTH_HCICOMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+
+		#include "BluetoothStack.h"
+		#include "BluetoothClassCodes.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define BT_HCI_DEBUG(l, s, ...)                        do { if (HCI_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(HCI) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+		#define HCI_DEBUG_LEVEL                                0
+
+		#define OGF_LINK_CONTROL                              (0x01 << 10)
+		#define OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND                            (0x03 << 10)
+		#define OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL                       (0x04 << 10)
+
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_INQUIRY                       0x0001
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_INQUIRY_CANCEL                0x0002
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PERIODIC_INQUIRY              0x0003
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_EXIT_PERIODIC_INQUIRY         0x0004
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CREATE_CONNECTION             0x0005
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_DISCONNECT                    0x0006
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CREATE_CONNECTION_CANCEL      0x0008
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST     0x0009
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REJECT_CONNECTION_REQUEST     0x000A
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_REPLY        0x000B
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY    0x000C
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_REPLY        0x000D
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY    0x000E
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CHANGE_CONNECTION_PACKET_TYPE 0x000F
+		#define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REMOTE_NAME_REQUEST           0x0019
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_SET_EVENT_MASK              0x0001
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_RESET                       0x0003
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_PIN_TYPE              0x000A
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_LOCAL_NAME            0x0013
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_READ_LOCAL_NAME             0x0014
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SCAN_ENABLE           0x001A
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_CLASS_OF_DEVICE       0x0024
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SIMPLE_PAIRING_MODE   0x0056
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE 0x0020
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBUFFERSIZE         0x0005
+		#define OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR             0x0009
+		
+		#define EVENT_COMMAND_STATUS                           0x0F
+		#define EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE                         0x0E
+		#define EVENT_CONNECTION_COMPLETE                      0x03
+		#define EVENT_CONNECTION_REQUEST                       0x04
+		#define EVENT_DISCONNECTION_COMPLETE                   0x05
+		#define EVENT_REMOTE_NAME_REQUEST_COMPLETE             0x07
+		#define EVENT_PIN_CODE_REQUEST                         0x16
+		#define EVENT_LINK_KEY_REQUEST                         0x17
+		
+		#define ERROR_LIMITED_RESOURCES                        0x0D
+		#define ERROR_UNACCEPTABLE_BDADDR                      0x0F
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t OpCode;
+			uint8_t  ParameterLength;
+			uint8_t  Parameters[];
+		} BT_HCICommand_Header_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  EventCode;
+			uint8_t  ParameterLength;
+		} BT_HCIEvent_Header_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Status;
+			uint8_t  Packets;
+			uint16_t OpCode;
+		} BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  HCIPacketsAllowable;
+			uint16_t Opcode;
+			uint8_t  ReturnParams[];
+		} BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
+			uint8_t  ClassOfDevice_Service;
+			uint16_t ClassOfDevice_MajorMinor;
+			uint8_t  LinkType;
+		} BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Status;
+			uint16_t ConnectionHandle;
+			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
+			uint8_t  LinkType;
+			uint8_t  EncryptionEnabled;
+		} BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
+		} BT_HCIEvent_PinCodeReq_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
+		} BT_HCIEvent_LinkKeyReq_t;
+				
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
+		} BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
+			uint8_t  PINCodeLength;
+			char     PINCode[16];
+		} BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
+			uint8_t  SlaveRole;
+		} BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  RemoteAddress[6];
+			uint8_t  Reason;
+		} BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t;		
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		enum BT_ScanEnable_Modes_t
+		{
+			BT_SCANMODE_NoScansEnabled       = 0,
+			BT_SCANMODE_InquiryScanOnly      = 1,
+			BT_SCANMODE_PageScanOnly         = 2,
+			BT_SCANMODE_InquiryAndPageScans  = 3,
+		};
+
+		enum BT_HCIStates_t
+		{
+			Bluetooth_ProcessEvents          = 0,
+			Bluetooth_Init                   = 1,
+			Bluetooth_Init_Reset             = 2,
+			Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize    = 3,
+			Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR         = 4,
+			Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName      = 5,
+			Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass    = 6,
+			Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable   = 7,
+			Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit      = 8,
+			Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection  = 9,
+			Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection  = 10,
+			Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode       = 11,
+			Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK    = 12,
+		};
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Bluetooth_HCITask(void);
+			
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTHHCICOMMANDS_C)
+			static uint8_t Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(const BT_HCICommand_Header_t* const HCICommandHeader, const void* Parameters,
+			                                        const uint16_t ParameterLength);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.c
index 6b434ba43..542a783c9 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.c
@@ -1,99 +1,99 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "BluetoothStack.h"
-
-/** Bluetooth device connection information structure. Once connected to a remote device, this structure tracks the
- *  connection state of the individual L2CAP channels.
- */
-Bluetooth_Connection_t Bluetooth_Connection = { IsConnected: false };
-
-/** Bluetooth device state information structure. This structure contains details on the current Bluetooth stack
- *  state.
- */
-Bluetooth_Stack_State_t Bluetooth_State     = { IsInitialized: false };
-
-/** Bluetooth stack initialization function. This function must be called once to initialize the Bluetooth stack,
- *  ready for connection to remote devices.
- *
- *  \note This function only begins the initialization process; the stack is initialized as the main Bluetooth stack
- *        management task is repeatedly called. The initialization process ends when the IsInitialized element of the
- *        \ref Bluetooth_State structure becomes true and the \ref Bluetooth_StackInitialized() callback fires.
- */
-void Bluetooth_Stack_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Reset the HCI state machine - this will eventually reset the adapter and stack when the Bluetooth stack task is called */
-	Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init;
-	Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init;
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack management task. This task must be repeatedly called to maintain the Bluetooth stack and any connection
- *  to remote Bluetooth devices, including both the HCI control layer and the ACL channel layer.
- */
-void Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask(void)
-{
-	Bluetooth_HCITask();
-	Bluetooth_ACLTask();
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the channel information structure with the given local or remote channel number from the channel list.
- *
- *  \param[in] SearchValue  Value to search for in the channel structure list
- *  \param[in] SearchKey    Key to search within the channel structure, a CHANNEL_SEARCH_* mask
- *
- *  \return Pointer to the matching channel information structure in the channel table if found, NULL otherwise
- */
-Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_GetChannelData(const uint16_t SearchValue, const uint8_t SearchKey)
-{
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
-	{
-		Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
-	
-		bool FoundMatch = false;
-		
-		switch (SearchKey)
-		{
-			case CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER:
-				FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->LocalNumber);
-				break;
-			case CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER:
-				FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->RemoteNumber);
-				break;
-			case CHANNEL_SEARCH_PSM:
-				FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->PSM);
-				break;
-		}
-	
-		if (FoundMatch)
-		  return ChannelData;
-	}
-
-	return NULL;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "BluetoothStack.h"
+
+/** Bluetooth device connection information structure. Once connected to a remote device, this structure tracks the
+ *  connection state of the individual L2CAP channels.
+ */
+Bluetooth_Connection_t Bluetooth_Connection = { IsConnected: false };
+
+/** Bluetooth device state information structure. This structure contains details on the current Bluetooth stack
+ *  state.
+ */
+Bluetooth_Stack_State_t Bluetooth_State     = { IsInitialized: false };
+
+/** Bluetooth stack initialization function. This function must be called once to initialize the Bluetooth stack,
+ *  ready for connection to remote devices.
+ *
+ *  \note This function only begins the initialization process; the stack is initialized as the main Bluetooth stack
+ *        management task is repeatedly called. The initialization process ends when the IsInitialized element of the
+ *        \ref Bluetooth_State structure becomes true and the \ref Bluetooth_StackInitialized() callback fires.
+ */
+void Bluetooth_Stack_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Reset the HCI state machine - this will eventually reset the adapter and stack when the Bluetooth stack task is called */
+	Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init;
+	Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState    = Bluetooth_Init;
+}
+
+/** Bluetooth stack management task. This task must be repeatedly called to maintain the Bluetooth stack and any connection
+ *  to remote Bluetooth devices, including both the HCI control layer and the ACL channel layer.
+ */
+void Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask(void)
+{
+	Bluetooth_HCITask();
+	Bluetooth_ACLTask();
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the channel information structure with the given local or remote channel number from the channel list.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] SearchValue  Value to search for in the channel structure list
+ *  \param[in] SearchKey    Key to search within the channel structure, a CHANNEL_SEARCH_* mask
+ *
+ *  \return Pointer to the matching channel information structure in the channel table if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_GetChannelData(const uint16_t SearchValue, const uint8_t SearchKey)
+{
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
+	{
+		Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
+	
+		bool FoundMatch = false;
+		
+		switch (SearchKey)
+		{
+			case CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER:
+				FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->LocalNumber);
+				break;
+			case CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER:
+				FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->RemoteNumber);
+				break;
+			case CHANNEL_SEARCH_PSM:
+				FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->PSM);
+				break;
+		}
+	
+		if (FoundMatch)
+		  return ChannelData;
+	}
+
+	return NULL;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.h
index aebdd96e2..ff1dec749 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.h
@@ -1,161 +1,161 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_STACK_
-#define _BLUETOOTH_STACK_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE         1
-		#define BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE        2
-		#define BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE          3
-
-		#define BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS    6
-		
-		#define CHANNEL_PSM_SDP                0x0001
-		#define CHANNEL_PSM_UDP                0x0002
-		#define CHANNEL_PSM_RFCOMM             0x0003
-		#define CHANNEL_PSM_TCP                0x0004
-		#define CHANNEL_PSM_IP                 0x0009
-		#define CHANNEL_PSM_FTP                0x000A
-		#define CHANNEL_PSM_HTTP               0x000C
-		#define CHANNEL_PSM_UPNP               0x0010
-		#define CHANNEL_PSM_HIDP               0x0011
-		
-		#define CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER     0
-		#define CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER    1
-		#define CHANNEL_SEARCH_PSM             2
-		
-		#define MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU            255
-		
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible states for a bluetooth ACL channel. */
-		enum BT_ChannelStates_t
-		{
-			Channel_Closed                = 0, /**< Channel is closed and inactive. No data may be sent or received. */
-			Channel_WaitConnect           = 1, /**< A connection request has been received, but a response has not been sent. */
-			Channel_WaitConnectRsp        = 2, /**< A connection request has been sent, but a response has not been received. */
-			Channel_Config_WaitConfig     = 3, /**< Channel has been connected, but not yet configured on either end. */
-			Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig = 4, /**< Channel configuration has been received and accepted, but not yet sent. */
-			Channel_Config_WaitReqResp    = 5, /**< Channel configuration has been sent but not responded to, and a configuration
-			                                        request from the remote end has not yet been received. */
-			Channel_Config_WaitResp       = 6, /**< Channel configuration has been sent but not accepted, but a configuration request
-			                                        from the remote end has been accepted. */
-			Channel_Config_WaitReq        = 7, /**< Channel configuration has been sent and accepted, but a configuration request
-			                                        from the remote end has not yet been accepted. */
-			Channel_Open                  = 8, /**< Channel is open and ready to send or receive data */
-			Channel_WaitDisconnect        = 9, /**< A disconnection request has been sent, but not yet acknowledged. */
-		};
-
-		/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref Bluetooth_SendPacket() function. */
-		enum BT_SendPacket_ErrorCodes_t
-		{
-			BT_SENDPACKET_NoError            = 0, /**< The packet was sent sucessfully. */
-			BT_SENDPACKET_NotConnected       = 1, /**< The bluetooth stack is not currently connected to a remote device. */
-			BT_SENDPACKET_ChannelNotOpen     = 2, /**< The given channel is not currently in the Open state. */
-		};
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a Bluetooth ACL channel information structure. This structure contains all the relevent
-		 *  information on an ACL channel for data transmission and reception by the stack.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  State;
-			uint16_t LocalNumber;
-			uint16_t RemoteNumber;
-			uint16_t PSM;
-			uint16_t LocalMTU;
-			uint16_t RemoteMTU;
-		} Bluetooth_Channel_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a Bluetooth device connection information structure. This structure contains all the
-		 *  information needed to maintain a connection to a remote Bluetooth device via the Bluetooth stack.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			bool                IsConnected; /**< Indicates if the stack is currently connected to a remote device - if this value is
-			                                  *   false, the remaining elements are invalid.
-											  */
-			uint16_t            ConnectionHandle; /**< Connection handle to the remote device, used internally in the stack. */
-			uint8_t             RemoteAddress[6]; /**< Bluetooth device address of the attached remote device. */
-			Bluetooth_Channel_t Channels[BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS]; /**< Channel information structures for the connection. */
-			uint8_t             SignallingIdentifier; /**< Next Signalling Channel unique command sequence identifier. */
-		} Bluetooth_Connection_t;
-		
-		/** Local Bluetooth device information structure, for the defining of local device characteristics for the Bluetooth stack. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t Class; /**< Class of the local device, a mask of DEVICE_CLASS_* masks. */
-			char     PINCode[16]; /**< Pin code required to send or receive in order to authenticate with a remote device. */
-			char     Name[]; /**< Name of the local bluetooth device, up to 248 characters. */
-		} Bluetooth_Device_t;
-		
-		/** Bluetooth stack state information structure, for the containment of the Bluetooth stack state. The values in
-		 *  this structure are set by the Bluetooth stack internally, and should all be treated as read only by the user
-		 *  application.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t CurrentHCIState; /**< Current HCI state machine state. */
-			uint8_t NextHCIState; /**< Next HCI state machine state to progress to once the currently issued command completes. */
-			bool    IsInitialized; /**< Indicates if the Bluetooth stack is currently initialized and ready for connections
-			                        *   to or from a remote Bluetooth device.
-			                        */
-			uint8_t LocalBDADDR[6]; /**< Local bluetooth adapter's BDADDR, valid when the stack is fully initialized. */
-		} Bluetooth_Stack_State_t;
-	
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "BluetoothHCICommands.h"
-		#include "BluetoothACLPackets.h"		
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */		
-		void Bluetooth_Stack_Init(void);
-		void Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask(void);
-
-		void                 Bluetooth_StackInitialized(void);
-		bool                 Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(const uint8_t* RemoteAddress);
-		void                 Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete(void);
-		void                 Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete(void);
-		bool                 Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(const uint16_t PSM);
-		void                 Bluetooth_PacketReceived(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel);
-		Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_GetChannelData(const uint16_t SearchValue, const uint8_t SearchKey);
-		Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_OpenChannel(const uint16_t PSM);
-		void                 Bluetooth_CloseChannel(Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel);
-		uint8_t              Bluetooth_SendPacket(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel);
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern Bluetooth_Device_t      Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration;
-		extern Bluetooth_Connection_t  Bluetooth_Connection;
-		extern Bluetooth_Stack_State_t Bluetooth_State;
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_STACK_
+#define _BLUETOOTH_STACK_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE         1
+		#define BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE        2
+		#define BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE          3
+
+		#define BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS    6
+		
+		#define CHANNEL_PSM_SDP                0x0001
+		#define CHANNEL_PSM_UDP                0x0002
+		#define CHANNEL_PSM_RFCOMM             0x0003
+		#define CHANNEL_PSM_TCP                0x0004
+		#define CHANNEL_PSM_IP                 0x0009
+		#define CHANNEL_PSM_FTP                0x000A
+		#define CHANNEL_PSM_HTTP               0x000C
+		#define CHANNEL_PSM_UPNP               0x0010
+		#define CHANNEL_PSM_HIDP               0x0011
+		
+		#define CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER     0
+		#define CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER    1
+		#define CHANNEL_SEARCH_PSM             2
+		
+		#define MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU            255
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible states for a bluetooth ACL channel. */
+		enum BT_ChannelStates_t
+		{
+			Channel_Closed                = 0, /**< Channel is closed and inactive. No data may be sent or received. */
+			Channel_WaitConnect           = 1, /**< A connection request has been received, but a response has not been sent. */
+			Channel_WaitConnectRsp        = 2, /**< A connection request has been sent, but a response has not been received. */
+			Channel_Config_WaitConfig     = 3, /**< Channel has been connected, but not yet configured on either end. */
+			Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig = 4, /**< Channel configuration has been received and accepted, but not yet sent. */
+			Channel_Config_WaitReqResp    = 5, /**< Channel configuration has been sent but not responded to, and a configuration
+			                                        request from the remote end has not yet been received. */
+			Channel_Config_WaitResp       = 6, /**< Channel configuration has been sent but not accepted, but a configuration request
+			                                        from the remote end has been accepted. */
+			Channel_Config_WaitReq        = 7, /**< Channel configuration has been sent and accepted, but a configuration request
+			                                        from the remote end has not yet been accepted. */
+			Channel_Open                  = 8, /**< Channel is open and ready to send or receive data */
+			Channel_WaitDisconnect        = 9, /**< A disconnection request has been sent, but not yet acknowledged. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref Bluetooth_SendPacket() function. */
+		enum BT_SendPacket_ErrorCodes_t
+		{
+			BT_SENDPACKET_NoError            = 0, /**< The packet was sent sucessfully. */
+			BT_SENDPACKET_NotConnected       = 1, /**< The bluetooth stack is not currently connected to a remote device. */
+			BT_SENDPACKET_ChannelNotOpen     = 2, /**< The given channel is not currently in the Open state. */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a Bluetooth ACL channel information structure. This structure contains all the relevent
+		 *  information on an ACL channel for data transmission and reception by the stack.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  State;
+			uint16_t LocalNumber;
+			uint16_t RemoteNumber;
+			uint16_t PSM;
+			uint16_t LocalMTU;
+			uint16_t RemoteMTU;
+		} Bluetooth_Channel_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a Bluetooth device connection information structure. This structure contains all the
+		 *  information needed to maintain a connection to a remote Bluetooth device via the Bluetooth stack.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			bool                IsConnected; /**< Indicates if the stack is currently connected to a remote device - if this value is
+			                                  *   false, the remaining elements are invalid.
+											  */
+			uint16_t            ConnectionHandle; /**< Connection handle to the remote device, used internally in the stack. */
+			uint8_t             RemoteAddress[6]; /**< Bluetooth device address of the attached remote device. */
+			Bluetooth_Channel_t Channels[BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS]; /**< Channel information structures for the connection. */
+			uint8_t             SignallingIdentifier; /**< Next Signalling Channel unique command sequence identifier. */
+		} Bluetooth_Connection_t;
+		
+		/** Local Bluetooth device information structure, for the defining of local device characteristics for the Bluetooth stack. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t Class; /**< Class of the local device, a mask of DEVICE_CLASS_* masks. */
+			char     PINCode[16]; /**< Pin code required to send or receive in order to authenticate with a remote device. */
+			char     Name[]; /**< Name of the local bluetooth device, up to 248 characters. */
+		} Bluetooth_Device_t;
+		
+		/** Bluetooth stack state information structure, for the containment of the Bluetooth stack state. The values in
+		 *  this structure are set by the Bluetooth stack internally, and should all be treated as read only by the user
+		 *  application.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t CurrentHCIState; /**< Current HCI state machine state. */
+			uint8_t NextHCIState; /**< Next HCI state machine state to progress to once the currently issued command completes. */
+			bool    IsInitialized; /**< Indicates if the Bluetooth stack is currently initialized and ready for connections
+			                        *   to or from a remote Bluetooth device.
+			                        */
+			uint8_t LocalBDADDR[6]; /**< Local bluetooth adapter's BDADDR, valid when the stack is fully initialized. */
+		} Bluetooth_Stack_State_t;
+	
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "BluetoothHCICommands.h"
+		#include "BluetoothACLPackets.h"		
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */		
+		void Bluetooth_Stack_Init(void);
+		void Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask(void);
+
+		void                 Bluetooth_StackInitialized(void);
+		bool                 Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(const uint8_t* RemoteAddress);
+		void                 Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete(void);
+		void                 Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete(void);
+		bool                 Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(const uint16_t PSM);
+		void                 Bluetooth_PacketReceived(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel);
+		Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_GetChannelData(const uint16_t SearchValue, const uint8_t SearchKey);
+		Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_OpenChannel(const uint16_t PSM);
+		void                 Bluetooth_CloseChannel(Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel);
+		uint8_t              Bluetooth_SendPacket(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel);
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern Bluetooth_Device_t      Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration;
+		extern Bluetooth_Connection_t  Bluetooth_Connection;
+		extern Bluetooth_Stack_State_t Bluetooth_State;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c
index 6dd3796f4..f79bb4239 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c
@@ -1,195 +1,195 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_C
-#include "ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h"
-
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(SDP_Attribute_Name,             "SDP");
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(SDP_Attribute_Description,      "BT Service Discovery");
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(SDP_Attribute_Availability, SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT, 1, {0xFF});
-const ServiceAttributeTable_t SDP_Attribute_Table[] PROGMEM =
-	{
-		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME        , .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Name},
-		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION , .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Description},
-		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY, .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Availability},
-		SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR
-	};
-
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(RFCOMM_Attribute_Name,             "RFCOMM");
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(RFCOMM_Attribute_Description,      "Virtual Serial");
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(RFCOMM_Attribute_Availability, SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT, 1, {0xFF});
-const ServiceAttributeTable_t RFCOMM_Attribute_Table[] PROGMEM =
-	{
-		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME        , .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Name},
-		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION , .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Description},
-		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY, .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Availability},
-		SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR
-	};
-	
-const ServiceTable_t SDP_Services_Table[] =
-	{
-		{   // 128-bit UUID for the SDP service
-			.UUID  = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x01, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00},
-			.AttributeTable = &SDP_Attribute_Table,
-		},
-		{   // 128-bit UUID for the RFCOMM service
-			.UUID  = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x03, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00},
-			.AttributeTable = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Table,
-		},
-	};
-
-
-void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(void* Data, Bluetooth_Channel_t* Channel)
-{
-	SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader = (SDP_PDUHeader_t*)Data;
-	SDPHeader->ParameterLength = SwapEndian_16(SDPHeader->ParameterLength);
-
-	BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "SDP Packet Received");
-	BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- PDU ID: 0x%02X", SDPHeader->PDU);
-	BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Param Length: 0x%04X", SDPHeader->ParameterLength);
-
-	switch (SDPHeader->PDU)
-	{
-		case SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHREQUEST:
-			ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDPHeader);
-			break;		
-		case SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTEREQUEST:
-			ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDPHeader);
-			break;
-		case SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTEREQUEST:
-			ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDPHeader);
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader)
-{
-	BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Search");
-}
-
-static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader)
-{
-	BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Attribute");
-}
-
-static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader)
-{
-	void* CurrentParameter = ((void*)SDPHeader + sizeof(SDP_PDUHeader_t));
-	
-	BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Search Attribute");
-	
-	uint8_t ElementHeaderSize;
-
-	uint16_t ServicePatternLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
-	BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Total UUID Length: 0x%04X", ServicePatternLength);
-	while (ServicePatternLength)
-	{
-		uint8_t UUIDLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
-		uint8_t UUID[16] = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00};
-
-		if (UUIDLength <= 32)
-		  memcpy(&UUID[sizeof(UUID) - sizeof(uint32_t)], CurrentParameter, UUIDLength);
-		else
-		  memcpy(UUID, CurrentParameter, UUIDLength);
-		
-		CurrentParameter += UUIDLength;
-		
-		BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- UUID (%d): 0x%02X%02X%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X",
-						UUIDLength,
-		                UUID[15], UUID[14], UUID[13], UUID[12], UUID[11], UUID[10], UUID[9], UUID[8],
-						UUID[7],  UUID[6],  UUID[5],  UUID[4],  UUID[3],  UUID[2],  UUID[1], UUID[0]);
-	
-		ServicePatternLength -= (UUIDLength + ElementHeaderSize);
-	}
-	
-	uint16_t MaxAttributeSize = ServiceDiscovery_Read16BitParameter(&CurrentParameter);
-	BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Max Return Attribute Bytes: 0x%04X", MaxAttributeSize);
-
-	uint16_t AttributeIDListLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
-	BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Total Attribute Length: 0x%04X", AttributeIDListLength);
-	while (AttributeIDListLength)
-	{
-		uint8_t  AttributeLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
-		uint32_t Attribute = 0;
-		
-		memcpy(&Attribute, CurrentParameter, AttributeLength);
-		CurrentParameter += AttributeLength;
-		
-		BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Attribute(%d): 0x%08lX", AttributeLength, Attribute);
-	
-		AttributeIDListLength -= (AttributeLength + ElementHeaderSize);
-	}
-}
-
-static uint32_t ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(void** DataElementHeader, uint8_t* ElementHeaderSize)
-{
-	uint8_t SizeIndex = (*((uint8_t*)*DataElementHeader) & 0x07);
-	*DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint8_t);
-	
-	*ElementHeaderSize = 1;
-	
-	uint32_t ElementValue;
-	
-	switch (SizeIndex)
-	{
-		case 0:
-			ElementValue = 1;
-			break;
-		case 1:
-			ElementValue = 2;
-			break;
-		case 2:
-			ElementValue = 4;
-			break;
-		case 3:
-			ElementValue = 8;
-			break;
-		case 4:
-			ElementValue = 16;
-			break;
-		case 5:
-			ElementValue = *((uint8_t*)*DataElementHeader);
-			*DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint8_t);
-			*ElementHeaderSize  = (1 + sizeof(uint8_t));
-			break;
-		case 6:
-			ElementValue = *((uint16_t*)*DataElementHeader);
-			*DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint16_t);
-			*ElementHeaderSize  = (1 + sizeof(uint16_t));
-			break;
-		default:
-			ElementValue = *((uint32_t*)*DataElementHeader);
-			*DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint32_t);
-			*ElementHeaderSize  = (1 + sizeof(uint32_t));
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	return ElementValue;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_C
+#include "ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h"
+
+SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(SDP_Attribute_Name,             "SDP");
+SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(SDP_Attribute_Description,      "BT Service Discovery");
+SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(SDP_Attribute_Availability, SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT, 1, {0xFF});
+const ServiceAttributeTable_t SDP_Attribute_Table[] PROGMEM =
+	{
+		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME        , .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Name},
+		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION , .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Description},
+		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY, .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Availability},
+		SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR
+	};
+
+SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(RFCOMM_Attribute_Name,             "RFCOMM");
+SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(RFCOMM_Attribute_Description,      "Virtual Serial");
+SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(RFCOMM_Attribute_Availability, SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT, 1, {0xFF});
+const ServiceAttributeTable_t RFCOMM_Attribute_Table[] PROGMEM =
+	{
+		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME        , .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Name},
+		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION , .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Description},
+		{.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY, .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Availability},
+		SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR
+	};
+	
+const ServiceTable_t SDP_Services_Table[] =
+	{
+		{   // 128-bit UUID for the SDP service
+			.UUID  = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x01, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00},
+			.AttributeTable = &SDP_Attribute_Table,
+		},
+		{   // 128-bit UUID for the RFCOMM service
+			.UUID  = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x03, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00},
+			.AttributeTable = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Table,
+		},
+	};
+
+
+void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(void* Data, Bluetooth_Channel_t* Channel)
+{
+	SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader = (SDP_PDUHeader_t*)Data;
+	SDPHeader->ParameterLength = SwapEndian_16(SDPHeader->ParameterLength);
+
+	BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "SDP Packet Received");
+	BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- PDU ID: 0x%02X", SDPHeader->PDU);
+	BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Param Length: 0x%04X", SDPHeader->ParameterLength);
+
+	switch (SDPHeader->PDU)
+	{
+		case SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHREQUEST:
+			ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDPHeader);
+			break;		
+		case SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTEREQUEST:
+			ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDPHeader);
+			break;
+		case SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTEREQUEST:
+			ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDPHeader);
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader)
+{
+	BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Search");
+}
+
+static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader)
+{
+	BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Attribute");
+}
+
+static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader)
+{
+	void* CurrentParameter = ((void*)SDPHeader + sizeof(SDP_PDUHeader_t));
+	
+	BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Search Attribute");
+	
+	uint8_t ElementHeaderSize;
+
+	uint16_t ServicePatternLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
+	BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Total UUID Length: 0x%04X", ServicePatternLength);
+	while (ServicePatternLength)
+	{
+		uint8_t UUIDLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
+		uint8_t UUID[16] = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00};
+
+		if (UUIDLength <= 32)
+		  memcpy(&UUID[sizeof(UUID) - sizeof(uint32_t)], CurrentParameter, UUIDLength);
+		else
+		  memcpy(UUID, CurrentParameter, UUIDLength);
+		
+		CurrentParameter += UUIDLength;
+		
+		BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- UUID (%d): 0x%02X%02X%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X",
+						UUIDLength,
+		                UUID[15], UUID[14], UUID[13], UUID[12], UUID[11], UUID[10], UUID[9], UUID[8],
+						UUID[7],  UUID[6],  UUID[5],  UUID[4],  UUID[3],  UUID[2],  UUID[1], UUID[0]);
+	
+		ServicePatternLength -= (UUIDLength + ElementHeaderSize);
+	}
+	
+	uint16_t MaxAttributeSize = ServiceDiscovery_Read16BitParameter(&CurrentParameter);
+	BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Max Return Attribute Bytes: 0x%04X", MaxAttributeSize);
+
+	uint16_t AttributeIDListLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
+	BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Total Attribute Length: 0x%04X", AttributeIDListLength);
+	while (AttributeIDListLength)
+	{
+		uint8_t  AttributeLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
+		uint32_t Attribute = 0;
+		
+		memcpy(&Attribute, CurrentParameter, AttributeLength);
+		CurrentParameter += AttributeLength;
+		
+		BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Attribute(%d): 0x%08lX", AttributeLength, Attribute);
+	
+		AttributeIDListLength -= (AttributeLength + ElementHeaderSize);
+	}
+}
+
+static uint32_t ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(void** DataElementHeader, uint8_t* ElementHeaderSize)
+{
+	uint8_t SizeIndex = (*((uint8_t*)*DataElementHeader) & 0x07);
+	*DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint8_t);
+	
+	*ElementHeaderSize = 1;
+	
+	uint32_t ElementValue;
+	
+	switch (SizeIndex)
+	{
+		case 0:
+			ElementValue = 1;
+			break;
+		case 1:
+			ElementValue = 2;
+			break;
+		case 2:
+			ElementValue = 4;
+			break;
+		case 3:
+			ElementValue = 8;
+			break;
+		case 4:
+			ElementValue = 16;
+			break;
+		case 5:
+			ElementValue = *((uint8_t*)*DataElementHeader);
+			*DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint8_t);
+			*ElementHeaderSize  = (1 + sizeof(uint8_t));
+			break;
+		case 6:
+			ElementValue = *((uint16_t*)*DataElementHeader);
+			*DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint16_t);
+			*ElementHeaderSize  = (1 + sizeof(uint16_t));
+			break;
+		default:
+			ElementValue = *((uint32_t*)*DataElementHeader);
+			*DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint32_t);
+			*ElementHeaderSize  = (1 + sizeof(uint32_t));
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	return ElementValue;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h
index fc0abae45..4dc80a8e8 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h
@@ -1,148 +1,148 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_H_
-#define _SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-
-		#include "BluetoothStack.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define BT_SDP_DEBUG(l, s, ...)                 do { if (SDP_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(SDP) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
-		#define SDP_DEBUG_LEVEL                         2
-		
-		#define SDP_PDU_ERRORRESPONSE                   0x01
-		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHREQUEST            0x02
-		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHRESPONSE           0x03
-		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTEREQUEST         0x04
-		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTERESPONSE        0x05
-		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTEREQUEST   0x06
-		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTERESPONSE  0x07
-		
-		#define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME                      0x0000
-		#define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION               0x0001
-		#define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_PROVIDER                  0x0002
-		#define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY              0x0008
-		
-		#define SDP_DATATYPE_NIL                        (0x00 << 3)
-		#define SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT               (0x01 << 3)
-		#define SDP_DATATYPE_SIGNED_INT                 (0x02 << 3)
-		#define SDP_DATATYPE_UUID                       (0x03 << 3)
-		#define SDP_DATATYPE_TEXT                       (0x04 << 3)
-		#define SDP_DATATYPE_BOOLEAN                    (0x05 << 3)
-		#define SDP_DATATYPE_ELEMENT_SEQUENCE           (0x06 << 3)
-		#define SDP_DATATYPE_ELEMENT_ALTERNATIVE        (0x07 << 3)
-		#define SDP_DATATYPE_URL                        (0x08 << 3)
-		
-		#define BASE_96BIT_UUID                         0xFB, 0x34, 0x9B, 0x5F, 0x80, 0x00, 0x00, 0x80, 0x00, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00
-		
-		#define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(name, string)    SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(name, SDP_DATATYPE_TEXT, sizeof(string), string)
-		#define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...)  const ServiceAttributeData8Bit_t  name PROGMEM = \
-		                                                {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__}
-		#define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_16BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...) const ServiceAttributeData16Bit_t name PROGMEM = \
-		                                                {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__}
-		#define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_32BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...) const ServiceAttributeData32Bit_t name PROGMEM = \
-		                                                {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__}
-		#define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR      {.AttributeData = NULL}
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  PDU;
-			uint16_t TransactionID;
-			uint16_t ParameterLength;
-		} SDP_PDUHeader_t;
-		
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t    AttributeID;
-			const void* AttributeData;
-		} ServiceAttributeTable_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t UUID[16];
-			const void* AttributeTable;
-		} ServiceTable_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  Header;
-			uint32_t Size;
-			uint8_t  Data[];
-		} ServiceAttributeData32Bit_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  Header;
-			uint16_t Size;
-			uint8_t  Data[];
-		} ServiceAttributeData16Bit_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Header;
-			uint8_t Size;
-			uint8_t Data[];
-		} ServiceAttributeData8Bit_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Header;
-			uint8_t Data[];
-		} ServiceAttributeData_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(void* Data, Bluetooth_Channel_t* Channel);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_C)
-			static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader);
-			static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader);
-			static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader);
-			
-			static inline uint16_t ServiceDiscovery_Read16BitParameter(void** AttributeHeader)
-			{
-				uint16_t ParamValue = *((uint16_t*)*AttributeHeader);
-				*AttributeHeader += sizeof(uint16_t);
-				return ParamValue;
-			}
-
-			static uint32_t ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(void** AttributeHeader, uint8_t* ElementHeaderSize);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_H_
+#define _SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+
+		#include "BluetoothStack.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define BT_SDP_DEBUG(l, s, ...)                 do { if (SDP_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(SDP) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+		#define SDP_DEBUG_LEVEL                         2
+		
+		#define SDP_PDU_ERRORRESPONSE                   0x01
+		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHREQUEST            0x02
+		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHRESPONSE           0x03
+		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTEREQUEST         0x04
+		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTERESPONSE        0x05
+		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTEREQUEST   0x06
+		#define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTERESPONSE  0x07
+		
+		#define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME                      0x0000
+		#define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION               0x0001
+		#define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_PROVIDER                  0x0002
+		#define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY              0x0008
+		
+		#define SDP_DATATYPE_NIL                        (0x00 << 3)
+		#define SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT               (0x01 << 3)
+		#define SDP_DATATYPE_SIGNED_INT                 (0x02 << 3)
+		#define SDP_DATATYPE_UUID                       (0x03 << 3)
+		#define SDP_DATATYPE_TEXT                       (0x04 << 3)
+		#define SDP_DATATYPE_BOOLEAN                    (0x05 << 3)
+		#define SDP_DATATYPE_ELEMENT_SEQUENCE           (0x06 << 3)
+		#define SDP_DATATYPE_ELEMENT_ALTERNATIVE        (0x07 << 3)
+		#define SDP_DATATYPE_URL                        (0x08 << 3)
+		
+		#define BASE_96BIT_UUID                         0xFB, 0x34, 0x9B, 0x5F, 0x80, 0x00, 0x00, 0x80, 0x00, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00
+		
+		#define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(name, string)    SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(name, SDP_DATATYPE_TEXT, sizeof(string), string)
+		#define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...)  const ServiceAttributeData8Bit_t  name PROGMEM = \
+		                                                {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__}
+		#define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_16BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...) const ServiceAttributeData16Bit_t name PROGMEM = \
+		                                                {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__}
+		#define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_32BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...) const ServiceAttributeData32Bit_t name PROGMEM = \
+		                                                {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__}
+		#define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR      {.AttributeData = NULL}
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  PDU;
+			uint16_t TransactionID;
+			uint16_t ParameterLength;
+		} SDP_PDUHeader_t;
+		
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t    AttributeID;
+			const void* AttributeData;
+		} ServiceAttributeTable_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t UUID[16];
+			const void* AttributeTable;
+		} ServiceTable_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Header;
+			uint32_t Size;
+			uint8_t  Data[];
+		} ServiceAttributeData32Bit_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Header;
+			uint16_t Size;
+			uint8_t  Data[];
+		} ServiceAttributeData16Bit_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Header;
+			uint8_t Size;
+			uint8_t Data[];
+		} ServiceAttributeData8Bit_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Header;
+			uint8_t Data[];
+		} ServiceAttributeData_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(void* Data, Bluetooth_Channel_t* Channel);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_C)
+			static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader);
+			static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader);
+			static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader);
+			
+			static inline uint16_t ServiceDiscovery_Read16BitParameter(void** AttributeHeader)
+			{
+				uint16_t ParamValue = *((uint16_t*)*AttributeHeader);
+				*AttributeHeader += sizeof(uint16_t);
+				return ParamValue;
+			}
+
+			static uint32_t ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(void** AttributeHeader, uint8_t* ElementHeaderSize);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/makefile
index 401cbc30b..cd3bc305d 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/makefile
@@ -1,748 +1,748 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb647
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#     Typical values are:
-#         F_CPU =  1000000
-#         F_CPU =  1843200
-#         F_CPU =  2000000
-#         F_CPU =  3686400
-#         F_CPU =  4000000
-#         F_CPU =  7372800
-#         F_CPU =  8000000
-#         F_CPU = 11059200
-#         F_CPU = 14745600
-#         F_CPU = 16000000
-#         F_CPU = 18432000
-#         F_CPU = 20000000
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = BluetoothHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  DeviceDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  Lib/BluetoothStack.c                                        \
-	  Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c                                  \
-	  Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c                                   \
-	  Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c                              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb647
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#     Typical values are:
+#         F_CPU =  1000000
+#         F_CPU =  1843200
+#         F_CPU =  2000000
+#         F_CPU =  3686400
+#         F_CPU =  4000000
+#         F_CPU =  7372800
+#         F_CPU =  8000000
+#         F_CPU = 11059200
+#         F_CPU = 14745600
+#         F_CPU = 16000000
+#         F_CPU = 18432000
+#         F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = BluetoothHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  DeviceDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  Lib/BluetoothStack.c                                        \
+	  Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c                                  \
+	  Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c                                   \
+	  Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c                              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
index ea228a60d..f5d8e5cd5 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,167 +1,167 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
-	{
-		/* Get the next HID interface's data endpoint descriptor */
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-		                              DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint - if we've reached the end of the HID descriptor
-			 * but only found the mandatory IN endpoint, it's safe to continue with the device enumeration */
-			if (FoundEndpoints == (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE))
-			  break;
-				
-			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-			return NoEndpointFound;
-		}
-		
-		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
-		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			
-			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Configure the HID data OUT pipe */
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			
-			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);		
-		}
-	}
-			
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct HID Class value.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	/* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the HID descriptor class, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
-		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == HID_CLASS)
-		{
-			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
- *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
+	{
+		/* Get the next HID interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint - if we've reached the end of the HID descriptor
+			 * but only found the mandatory IN endpoint, it's safe to continue with the device enumeration */
+			if (FoundEndpoints == (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE))
+			  break;
+				
+			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+			return NoEndpointFound;
+		}
+		
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			
+			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Configure the HID data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			
+			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);		
+		}
+	}
+			
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct HID Class value.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	/* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == HID_CLASS)
+		{
+			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
index 3f6591635..8f98df1c7 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,66 +1,66 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "GenericHIDHost.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
-		#define HID_CLASS                   0x03
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
-		};	
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
-
-		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "GenericHIDHost.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+		#define HID_CLASS                   0x03
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+		};	
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf
index 1d3ae1ea8..083f858a4 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c
index 3dc314e49..f477ac276 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c
@@ -1,279 +1,279 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the GenericHIDHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "GenericHIDHost.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Generic HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		HID_Host_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
- *  contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
- */
-void ReadNextReport(void)
-{
-	/* Select and unfreeze HID data IN pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
-	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
-	{
-		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-			
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
-	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{
-		uint8_t ReportINData[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
-
-		/* Read in HID report data */
-		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ReportINData, sizeof(ReportINData));
-	
-		/* Print report data through the serial port */
-		for (uint16_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < sizeof(ReportINData); CurrByte++)
-		  printf_P(PSTR("0x%02X "), ReportINData[CurrByte]);
-		
-		puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
-	}
-		
-	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-}
-
-/** Writes a report to the attached device.
- *
- *  \param[in] ReportOUTData  Buffer containing the report to send to the device
- *  \param[in] ReportIndex  Index of the report in the device (zero if the device does not use multiple reports)
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of report to send, either REPORT_TYPE_OUT or REPORT_TYPE_FEATURE
- *  \param[in] ReportLength  Length of the report to send
- */
-void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* ReportOUTData, uint8_t ReportIndex, uint8_t ReportType, uint16_t ReportLength)
-{
-	/* Select the HID data OUT pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-	
-	/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint (some require OUT reports to be sent over the
-	 * control endpoint instead) - check to see if the OUT endpoint has been initialized */
-	if (Pipe_IsConfigured() && (ReportType == REPORT_TYPE_OUT))
-	{
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		/* Ensure pipe is ready to be written to before continuing */
-		if (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
-		{
-			/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-			
-			return;
-		}
-		
-		/* If the report index is used, send it before the report data */
-		if (ReportIndex)
-		  Pipe_Write_Byte(ReportIndex);
-
-		/* Write out HID report data */
-		Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportLength);				
-			
-		/* Clear the OUT endpoint, send last data packet */
-		Pipe_ClearOUT();
-
-		/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Class specific request to send a HID report to the device */
-		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-			{
-				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-				.bRequest      = REQ_SetReport,
-				.wValue        = ((ReportType << 8) | ReportIndex),
-				.wIndex        = 0,
-				.wLength       = ReportLength,
-			};
-
-		/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-		/* Send the request to the device */
-		USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ReportOUTData);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
- *  HID reports from the device and to send reports if desired.
- */
-void HID_Host_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	/* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error status */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error status */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			puts_P(PSTR("HID Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			ReadNextReport();
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the GenericHIDHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "GenericHIDHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Generic HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Host_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
+ *  contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
+ */
+void ReadNextReport(void)
+{
+	/* Select and unfreeze HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+			
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
+	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		uint8_t ReportINData[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+		/* Read in HID report data */
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ReportINData, sizeof(ReportINData));
+	
+		/* Print report data through the serial port */
+		for (uint16_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < sizeof(ReportINData); CurrByte++)
+		  printf_P(PSTR("0x%02X "), ReportINData[CurrByte]);
+		
+		puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+	}
+		
+	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Writes a report to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ReportOUTData  Buffer containing the report to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] ReportIndex  Index of the report in the device (zero if the device does not use multiple reports)
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of report to send, either REPORT_TYPE_OUT or REPORT_TYPE_FEATURE
+ *  \param[in] ReportLength  Length of the report to send
+ */
+void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* ReportOUTData, uint8_t ReportIndex, uint8_t ReportType, uint16_t ReportLength)
+{
+	/* Select the HID data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	
+	/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint (some require OUT reports to be sent over the
+	 * control endpoint instead) - check to see if the OUT endpoint has been initialized */
+	if (Pipe_IsConfigured() && (ReportType == REPORT_TYPE_OUT))
+	{
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Ensure pipe is ready to be written to before continuing */
+		if (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+		{
+			/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			
+			return;
+		}
+		
+		/* If the report index is used, send it before the report data */
+		if (ReportIndex)
+		  Pipe_Write_Byte(ReportIndex);
+
+		/* Write out HID report data */
+		Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportLength);				
+			
+		/* Clear the OUT endpoint, send last data packet */
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Class specific request to send a HID report to the device */
+		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = REQ_SetReport,
+				.wValue        = ((ReportType << 8) | ReportIndex),
+				.wIndex        = 0,
+				.wLength       = ReportLength,
+			};
+
+		/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+		/* Send the request to the device */
+		USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ReportOUTData);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ *  HID reports from the device and to send reports if desired.
+ */
+void HID_Host_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error status */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error status */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			puts_P(PSTR("HID Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			ReadNextReport();
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h
index e8450511e..493d4f4c4 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h
@@ -1,99 +1,99 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _GENERICHID_HOST_H_
-#define _GENERICHID_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Pipe number for the HID data IN pipe */
-		#define HID_DATA_IN_PIPE          1
-		
-		/** Pipe number for the HID data OUT pipe */
-		#define HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE         2
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to send a HID report to the device. */
-		#define REQ_SetReport             0x09
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-		/** HID Report Type to indicate an IN report. */
-		#define REPORT_TYPE_IN           1
-
-		/** HID Report Type to indicate an OUT report. */
-		#define REPORT_TYPE_OUT          2
-
-		/** HID Report Type to indicate a FEATURE report. */
-		#define REPORT_TYPE_FEATURE      3
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void HID_Host_Task(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-		void ReadNextReport(void);
-		void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* ReportOUTData, uint8_t ReportIndex, uint8_t ReportType, uint16_t ReportLength);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _GENERICHID_HOST_H_
+#define _GENERICHID_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe number for the HID data IN pipe */
+		#define HID_DATA_IN_PIPE          1
+		
+		/** Pipe number for the HID data OUT pipe */
+		#define HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE         2
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to send a HID report to the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetReport             0x09
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+		/** HID Report Type to indicate an IN report. */
+		#define REPORT_TYPE_IN           1
+
+		/** HID Report Type to indicate an OUT report. */
+		#define REPORT_TYPE_OUT          2
+
+		/** HID Report Type to indicate a FEATURE report. */
+		#define REPORT_TYPE_FEATURE      3
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void HID_Host_Task(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ReadNextReport(void);
+		void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* ReportOUTData, uint8_t ReportIndex, uint8_t ReportType, uint16_t ReportLength);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt
index 1495558d6..fef45c377 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt
@@ -1,63 +1,63 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Generic HID Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Generic HID host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a Generic HID USB host, for any device implementing
- *  the HID profile.
- *
- *  Received reports from the attached device are printed to the serial port.
- *  
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Generic HID Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Generic HID host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a Generic HID USB host, for any device implementing
+ *  the HID profile.
+ *
+ *  Received reports from the attached device are printed to the serial port.
+ *  
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/makefile
index 12a354223..38d008d55 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = GenericHIDHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = GenericHIDHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
index 6171fe41f..80caeb656 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,166 +1,166 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref JoystickHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-
-	/* Get the joystick interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextJoystickInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the joystick interface's HID descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoHIDDescriptorFound;
-	}
-
-	/* Save the HID report size for later use */
-	HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength;
-	
-	/* Get the joystick interface's data endpoint descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextJoystickInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoEndpointFound;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-	/* Configure the joystick data pipe */
-	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(JOYSTICK_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-	                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Joystick HID Class and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == JOYSTICK_CLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == JOYSTICK_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
- *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID)
-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	else
-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;	  
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref JoystickHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	/* Get the joystick interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextJoystickInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the joystick interface's HID descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoHIDDescriptorFound;
+	}
+
+	/* Save the HID report size for later use */
+	HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength;
+	
+	/* Get the joystick interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextJoystickInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoEndpointFound;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+	/* Configure the joystick data pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(JOYSTICK_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+	                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Joystick HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == JOYSTICK_CLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == JOYSTICK_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;	  
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
index bb31cc131..6dad69067 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "HIDReport.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
-		#define JOYSTICK_CLASS              0x03
-
-		/** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */
-		#define JOYSTICK_PROTOCOL           0x02
-
-		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */
-		#define DTYPE_HID                   0x21
-
-		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */
-		#define DTYPE_Report                0x22
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum JoystickHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoHIDDescriptorFound            = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
-
-		uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+		#define JOYSTICK_CLASS              0x03
+
+		/** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */
+		#define JOYSTICK_PROTOCOL           0x02
+
+		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                   0x21
+
+		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */
+		#define DTYPE_Report                0x22
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum JoystickHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDDescriptorFound            = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
index 06e10874d..b1d7dad6c 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Host (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Host (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
index 1b4fe7e64..cc7c98bfc 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
@@ -1,110 +1,110 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "HIDReport.h"
-
-/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
-uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
-
-/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
-HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
-
-
-/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
- *  structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
- *
- *  \return  A value from the MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
-{
-	/* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
-	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
-	
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
-			.wValue        = (DTYPE_Report << 8),
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = HIDReportSize,
-		};
-
-	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	/* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
-	if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ParseControlError;
-
-	/* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
-	if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
-	  return ParseError;
-	
-	return ParseSuccessful;
-}
-
-/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
- *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
- *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
- *  have occupied).
- *
- *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
-{
-	bool IsJoystick = false;
-
-	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
-	 * Joystick Usage is found - this prevents Mice, which use identical descriptors except for the Mouse usage
-	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a joystick
-	 */
-	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
-	{
-		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
-		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_JOYSTICK))
-		{
-			IsJoystick = true;
-			break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* If a collection with the joystick usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
-	if (!IsJoystick)
-	  return false;
-  
-	/* Check the attributes of the current joystick item - see if we are interested in it or not;
-	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
-	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
-	 */
-	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
-	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
+uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+
+/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
+ *  structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \return  A value from the MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
+{
+	/* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
+	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
+	
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (DTYPE_Report << 8),
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = HIDReportSize,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	/* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
+	if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ParseControlError;
+
+	/* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
+	if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
+	  return ParseError;
+	
+	return ParseSuccessful;
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
+{
+	bool IsJoystick = false;
+
+	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
+	 * Joystick Usage is found - this prevents Mice, which use identical descriptors except for the Mouse usage
+	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a joystick
+	 */
+	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
+	{
+		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_JOYSTICK))
+		{
+			IsJoystick = true;
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If a collection with the joystick usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
+	if (!IsJoystick)
+	  return false;
+  
+	/* Check the attributes of the current joystick item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
+	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
+	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
index 5a12884a0..8fb0456ea 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
@@ -1,94 +1,94 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for HIDReport.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
-#define _HID_REPORT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h>
-		
-		#include "JoystickHostWithParser.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Joystick */
-		#define USAGE_JOYSTICK              0x04
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */
-		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */
-		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */
-		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */
-		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */
-		enum JoystickHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
-		{
-			ParseSuccessful         = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
-			ParseError              = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
-			ParseControlError       = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
-		};
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a HID descriptor. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t  Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-				
-			uint16_t                 HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */
-			uint8_t                  CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */
-		
-			uint8_t                  TotalHIDDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */
-
-			uint8_t                  HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */
-			uint16_t                 HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */
-		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
-		extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
-		
-		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HIDReport.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
+#define _HID_REPORT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h>
+		
+		#include "JoystickHostWithParser.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Joystick */
+		#define USAGE_JOYSTICK              0x04
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */
+		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */
+		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */
+		enum JoystickHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
+		{
+			ParseSuccessful         = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
+			ParseError              = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
+			ParseControlError       = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
+		};
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a HID descriptor. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t  Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+				
+			uint16_t                 HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */
+			uint8_t                  CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */
+		
+			uint8_t                  TotalHIDDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */
+
+			uint8_t                  HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */
+			uint16_t                 HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */
+		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+		extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
+		
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c
index 04870b10a..91bd28829 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c
@@ -1,306 +1,306 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the JoystickHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "JoystickHostWithParser.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Joystick HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Joystick_HID_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
- *  the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
- */
-void Joystick_HID_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	/* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-		
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			printf_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report (Size %d Bytes).\r\n"), HIDReportSize);
-
-			/* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
-			if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
-			{
-				puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
-
-				if (!(HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems))
-					puts_P(PSTR("Not a valid Joystick." ESC_FG_WHITE));
-				else
-					printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-			
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			printf("Total Reports: %d\r\n", HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports);
-
-			for (uint8_t i = 0; i < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; i++)
-			{
-				HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[i];
-				
-				uint8_t ReportSizeInBits      = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In];
-				uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits     = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out];
-				uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature];
-
-				/* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */
-				printf_P(PSTR("  + Report ID %d - In: %d bytes, Out: %d bytes, Feature: %d bytes\r\n"),
-				         CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID,
-				         ((ReportSizeInBits      >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits      & 0x07) != 0)),
-				         ((ReportSizeOutBits     >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits     & 0x07) != 0)),
-				         ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0)));
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Joystick Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			/* Select and unfreeze joystick data pipe */
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(JOYSTICK_DATAPIPE);	
-			Pipe_Unfreeze();
-			
-			/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
-			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
-			{
-				/* Check if data has been received from the attached joystick */
-				if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-				{
-					/* Create buffer big enough for the report */
-					uint8_t JoystickReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
-
-					/* Load in the joystick report */
-					Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(JoystickReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe());
-				
-					/* Process the read in joystick report from the device */
-					ProcessJoystickReport(JoystickReport);
-				}
-				
-				/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
-				Pipe_ClearIN();
-			}
-
-			/* Freeze joystick data pipe */
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Processes a read HID report from an attached joystick, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
- *  as required and displays movement and button presses on the board LEDs.
- *
- *  \param[in] JoystickReport  Pointer to a HID report from an attached joystick device
- */
-void ProcessJoystickReport(uint8_t* JoystickReport)
-{
-	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-
-	/* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for joystick X/Y/button reports */
-	for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
-	{
-		/* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
-		HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
-		
-		bool FoundData;
-
-		if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
-			(ReportItem->ItemType                     == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-		{
-			/* Get the joystick button value */
-			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(JoystickReport, ReportItem);
-			
-			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
-			if (!(FoundData))
-			  continue;
-
-			/* If button is pressed, all LEDs are turned on */
-			if (ReportItem->Value)
-			  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-		}
-		else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
-				 ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
-				  (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
-				 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-		{
-			/* Get the joystick relative position value */
-			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(JoystickReport, ReportItem);
-			
-			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
-			if (!(FoundData))
-			  continue;
-			  
-			int16_t DeltaMovement = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
-			
-			/* Determine if the report is for the X or Y delta movement */
-			if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
-			{
-				/* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */
-				if (DeltaMovement)
-				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */
-				if (DeltaMovement)
-				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	
-	/* Display the button information on the board LEDs */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the JoystickHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "JoystickHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Joystick HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Joystick_HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ *  the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void Joystick_HID_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+		
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			printf_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report (Size %d Bytes).\r\n"), HIDReportSize);
+
+			/* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
+			if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
+			{
+				puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
+
+				if (!(HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems))
+					puts_P(PSTR("Not a valid Joystick." ESC_FG_WHITE));
+				else
+					printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+			
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			printf("Total Reports: %d\r\n", HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports);
+
+			for (uint8_t i = 0; i < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; i++)
+			{
+				HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[i];
+				
+				uint8_t ReportSizeInBits      = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In];
+				uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits     = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out];
+				uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature];
+
+				/* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */
+				printf_P(PSTR("  + Report ID %d - In: %d bytes, Out: %d bytes, Feature: %d bytes\r\n"),
+				         CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID,
+				         ((ReportSizeInBits      >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits      & 0x07) != 0)),
+				         ((ReportSizeOutBits     >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits     & 0x07) != 0)),
+				         ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0)));
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Joystick Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			/* Select and unfreeze joystick data pipe */
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(JOYSTICK_DATAPIPE);	
+			Pipe_Unfreeze();
+			
+			/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+			{
+				/* Check if data has been received from the attached joystick */
+				if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+				{
+					/* Create buffer big enough for the report */
+					uint8_t JoystickReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+					/* Load in the joystick report */
+					Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(JoystickReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe());
+				
+					/* Process the read in joystick report from the device */
+					ProcessJoystickReport(JoystickReport);
+				}
+				
+				/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+				Pipe_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			/* Freeze joystick data pipe */
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes a read HID report from an attached joystick, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
+ *  as required and displays movement and button presses on the board LEDs.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] JoystickReport  Pointer to a HID report from an attached joystick device
+ */
+void ProcessJoystickReport(uint8_t* JoystickReport)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+	/* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for joystick X/Y/button reports */
+	for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+	{
+		/* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
+		HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+		
+		bool FoundData;
+
+		if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
+			(ReportItem->ItemType                     == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+		{
+			/* Get the joystick button value */
+			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(JoystickReport, ReportItem);
+			
+			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+			if (!(FoundData))
+			  continue;
+
+			/* If button is pressed, all LEDs are turned on */
+			if (ReportItem->Value)
+			  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+		}
+		else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+				 ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
+				  (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
+				 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+		{
+			/* Get the joystick relative position value */
+			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(JoystickReport, ReportItem);
+			
+			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+			if (!(FoundData))
+			  continue;
+			  
+			int16_t DeltaMovement = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
+			
+			/* Determine if the report is for the X or Y delta movement */
+			if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
+			{
+				/* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */
+				if (DeltaMovement)
+				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */
+				if (DeltaMovement)
+				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Display the button information on the board LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
 }
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h
index 2ac9d5cff..c37cf3f05 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h
@@ -1,84 +1,84 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for JoystickHostWithParser.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
-#define _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		#include "HIDReport.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Pipe number for the joystick report data pipe */
-		#define JOYSTICK_DATAPIPE         1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void Joystick_HID_Task(void);
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-		void ProcessJoystickReport(uint8_t* JoystickReport);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for JoystickHostWithParser.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
+#define _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe number for the joystick report data pipe */
+		#define JOYSTICK_DATAPIPE         1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Joystick_HID_Task(void);
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ProcessJoystickReport(uint8_t* JoystickReport);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt
index 3a24de07b..5d002e4cc 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Joystick Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Joystick host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Joystick host, for USB joysticks using
- *  the standard joystick HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
- *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB joysticks. This
- *  demo supports joysticks with a single HID report.
- *  
- *  Joystick movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs.
- *  On connection to a USB joystick, the report items will be processed and
- *  printed as a formatted list through the USART before the joystick is
- *  fully enumerated.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Joystick Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Joystick host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Joystick host, for USB joysticks using
+ *  the standard joystick HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
+ *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB joysticks. This
+ *  demo supports joysticks with a single HID report.
+ *  
+ *  Joystick movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs.
+ *  On connection to a USB joystick, the report items will be processed and
+ *  printed as a formatted list through the USART before the joystick is
+ *  fully enumerated.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile
index f6d2756c5..f07f168fd 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -1,738 +1,738 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = JoystickHostWithParser
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  HIDReport.c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = JoystickHostWithParser
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  HIDReport.c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
index a23d90491..0be2de18d 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,139 +1,139 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextKeyboardInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	/* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoEndpointFound;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-	/* Configure the keyboard data pipe */
-	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-	                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == KEYBOARD_CLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
- *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextKeyboardInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	/* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoEndpointFound;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+	/* Configure the keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+	                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == KEYBOARD_CLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
index 24ceeb541..6b0bf65ec 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,69 +1,69 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "KeyboardHost.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
-		#define KEYBOARD_CLASS                 0x03
-
-		/** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */
-		#define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL              0x01
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
-		
-		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "KeyboardHost.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+		#define KEYBOARD_CLASS                 0x03
+
+		/** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */
+		#define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL              0x01
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+		
+		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf
index 07f6920a1..3de7fb9ef 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
index 633094f13..debbf7651 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
@@ -1,268 +1,268 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the KeyboardHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "KeyboardHost.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Keyboard_HID_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
- *  contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
- */
-void ReadNextReport(void)
-{
-	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport;
-		
-	/* Select keyboard data pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE);	
-
-	/* Unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
-	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
-	{
-		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-			
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
-	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{
-		/* Read in keyboard report data */
-		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReport, sizeof(KeyboardReport));
-
-		/* Indicate if the modifier byte is non-zero (special key such as shift is being pressed) */
-		LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0);
-		
-		/* Check if a key has been pressed */
-		if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode)
-		{
-			/* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
-			LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
-				  
-			char PressedKey = 0;
-
-			/* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */
-			if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] >= 0x04) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] <= 0x1D))
-			  PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] - 0x04) + 'A';
-			else if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] >= 0x1E) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] <= 0x27))
-			  PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] - 0x1E) + '0';
-			else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] == 0x2C)
-			  PressedKey = ' ';						
-			else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] == 0x28)
-			  PressedKey = '\n';
-				 
-			/* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
-			if (PressedKey)
-			  putchar(PressedKey);
-		}
-	}
-		
-	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Refreeze keyboard data pipe */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
- *  HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
- */
-void Keyboard_HID_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error status */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-		
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error status */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-				
-			/* HID class request to set the keyboard protocol to the Boot Protocol */
-			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-				{
-					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-					.bRequest      = REQ_SetProtocol,
-					.wValue        = 0,
-					.wIndex        = 0,
-					.wLength       = 0,
-				};
-
-			/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-			/* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error status */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			/* If a report has been received, read and process it */
-			ReadNextReport();
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "KeyboardHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Keyboard_HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
+ *  contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
+ */
+void ReadNextReport(void)
+{
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport;
+		
+	/* Select keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE);	
+
+	/* Unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+			
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
+	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		/* Read in keyboard report data */
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReport, sizeof(KeyboardReport));
+
+		/* Indicate if the modifier byte is non-zero (special key such as shift is being pressed) */
+		LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0);
+		
+		/* Check if a key has been pressed */
+		if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode)
+		{
+			/* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
+			LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+				  
+			char PressedKey = 0;
+
+			/* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */
+			if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] >= 0x04) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] <= 0x1D))
+			  PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] - 0x04) + 'A';
+			else if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] >= 0x1E) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] <= 0x27))
+			  PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] - 0x1E) + '0';
+			else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] == 0x2C)
+			  PressedKey = ' ';						
+			else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0] == 0x28)
+			  PressedKey = '\n';
+				 
+			/* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
+			if (PressedKey)
+			  putchar(PressedKey);
+		}
+	}
+		
+	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Refreeze keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ *  HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void Keyboard_HID_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error status */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+		
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error status */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+				
+			/* HID class request to set the keyboard protocol to the Boot Protocol */
+			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+				{
+					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+					.bRequest      = REQ_SetProtocol,
+					.wValue        = 0,
+					.wIndex        = 0,
+					.wLength       = 0,
+				};
+
+			/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+			/* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error status */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			/* If a report has been received, read and process it */
+			ReadNextReport();
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
index d22223d90..1cdb9bc68 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
@@ -1,95 +1,95 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for KeyboardHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
-#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Pipe number for the keyboard data IN pipe */
-		#define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE           1
-
-		/** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */
-		#define REQ_SetProtocol             0x0B
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (such as Shift, Control, etc.) */
-			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */
-			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Key codes of the currently pressed keys */
-		} USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void Keyboard_HID_Task(void);
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-		void ReadNextReport(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for KeyboardHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe number for the keyboard data IN pipe */
+		#define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE           1
+
+		/** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */
+		#define REQ_SetProtocol             0x0B
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (such as Shift, Control, etc.) */
+			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */
+			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Key codes of the currently pressed keys */
+		} USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Keyboard_HID_Task(void);
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ReadNextReport(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
index c19620fc9..68ad1f260 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB keyboard, for USB keyboards using
- *  the standard keyboard HID profile.
- *  
- *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
- *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1.
- *  
- *  This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
- *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
- *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
- *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
- *  KeyboardHostWithParser demo application.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB keyboard, for USB keyboards using
+ *  the standard keyboard HID profile.
+ *  
+ *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
+ *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1.
+ *  
+ *  This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ *  KeyboardHostWithParser demo application.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/makefile
index 0fdbedf5f..a1d96f7fa 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/makefile
@@ -1,736 +1,736 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = KeyboardHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = KeyboardHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
index 40397e067..6eace565c 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,166 +1,166 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextKeyboardInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the keyboard interface's HID descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoHIDDescriptorFound;
-	}
-
-	/* Save the HID report size for later use */
-	HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength;
-
-	/* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoEndpointFound;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-	/* Configure the keyboard data pipe */
-	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-	                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == KEYBOARD_CLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
- *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID)
-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	else
-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;	  
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextKeyboardInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the keyboard interface's HID descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoHIDDescriptorFound;
+	}
+
+	/* Save the HID report size for later use */
+	HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength;
+
+	/* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoEndpointFound;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+	/* Configure the keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+	                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == KEYBOARD_CLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;	  
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
index 70d1c1055..854c14b63 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "HIDReport.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
-		#define KEYBOARD_CLASS                 0x03
-
-		/** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */
-		#define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL              0x01
-
-		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */
-		#define DTYPE_HID                      0x21
-
-		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */
-		#define DTYPE_Report                   0x22
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoHIDDescriptorFound            = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
-
-		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+		#define KEYBOARD_CLASS                 0x03
+
+		/** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */
+		#define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL              0x01
+
+		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                      0x21
+
+		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */
+		#define DTYPE_Report                   0x22
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDDescriptorFound            = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
index 398e0fffc..86ebf8fe5 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
index 5f3edb155..eb8ec59a8 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
@@ -1,89 +1,89 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "HIDReport.h"
-
-/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
-uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
-
-/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
-HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
-
-
-/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
- *  structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
- *
- *  \return  A value from the KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
-{
-	/* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
-	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
-	
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
-			.wValue        = (DTYPE_Report << 8),
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = HIDReportSize,
-		};
-
-	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	/* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
-	if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ParseControlError;
-
-	/* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
-	if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
-	  return ParseError;
-	
-	return ParseSuccessful;
-}
-
-/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
- *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
- *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
- *  have occupied).
- *
- *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
-{
-	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
-	 * only store KEYBOARD usage page items into the Processed HID Report structure to
-	 * save RAM and ignore the rest
-	 */
-	return (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
+uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+
+/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
+ *  structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \return  A value from the KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
+{
+	/* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
+	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
+	
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (DTYPE_Report << 8),
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = HIDReportSize,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	/* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
+	if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ParseControlError;
+
+	/* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
+	if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
+	  return ParseError;
+	
+	return ParseSuccessful;
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
+{
+	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store KEYBOARD usage page items into the Processed HID Report structure to
+	 * save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
index e79299bef..1ccf9fcf9 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
@@ -1,82 +1,82 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for HIDReport.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
-#define _HID_REPORT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h>
-		
-		#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a desktop keyboard */
-		#define USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD             0x07
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */
-		enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
-		{
-			ParseSuccessful         = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
-			ParseError              = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
-			ParseControlError       = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
-		};
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a HID descriptor. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t  Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-				
-			uint16_t                 HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */
-			uint8_t                  CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */
-		
-			uint8_t                  TotalHIDDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */
-
-			uint8_t                  HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */
-			uint16_t                 HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */
-		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
-		extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HIDReport.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
+#define _HID_REPORT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h>
+		
+		#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a desktop keyboard */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD             0x07
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */
+		enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
+		{
+			ParseSuccessful         = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
+			ParseError              = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
+			ParseControlError       = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
+		};
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a HID descriptor. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t  Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+				
+			uint16_t                 HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */
+			uint8_t                  CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */
+		
+			uint8_t                  TotalHIDDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */
+
+			uint8_t                  HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */
+			uint16_t                 HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */
+		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+		extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
index 431e76aea..301f6de3e 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
@@ -1,299 +1,299 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the KeyboardHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Keyboard_HID_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
- *  the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
- */
-void Keyboard_HID_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-
-			{
-				puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"));
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-				
-			printf_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report (Size %d Bytes).\r\n"), HIDReportSize);
-						
-			/* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
-			if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
-			{
-				puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
-
-				if (!(HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems))
-					puts_P(PSTR("Not a valid Keyboard." ESC_FG_WHITE));
-				else
-					printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-			
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;	
-			}
-
-			printf("Total Reports: %d\r\n", HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports);
-
-			for (uint8_t i = 0; i < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; i++)
-			{
-				HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[i];
-				
-				uint8_t ReportSizeInBits      = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In];
-				uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits     = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out];
-				uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature];
-
-				/* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */
-				printf_P(PSTR("  + Report ID %d - In: %d bytes, Out: %d bytes, Feature: %d bytes\r\n"),
-				         CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID,
-				         ((ReportSizeInBits      >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits      & 0x07) != 0)),
-				         ((ReportSizeOutBits     >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits     & 0x07) != 0)),
-				         ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0)));
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			/* Select and unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE);	
-			Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-			/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
-			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
-			{
-				/* Check if data has been received from the attached keyboard */
-				if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-				{
-					/* Create buffer big enough for the report */
-					uint8_t KeyboardReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
-
-					/* Load in the keyboard report */
-					Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(KeyboardReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe());
-				
-					/* Process the read in keyboard report from the device */
-					ProcessKeyboardReport(KeyboardReport);
-				}
-				
-				/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
-				Pipe_ClearIN();
-			}
-
-			/* Freeze keyboard data pipe */
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Processes a read HID report from an attached keyboard, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
- *  as required and prints pressed characters to the serial port. Each time a key is typed, a board LED is toggled.
- *
- *  \param[in] KeyboardReport  Pointer to a HID report from an attached keyboard device
- */
-void ProcessKeyboardReport(uint8_t* KeyboardReport)
-{
-	/* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for keyboard scan code reports */
-	for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
-	{
-		/* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
-		HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
-
-		/* Check if the current report item is a keyboard scancode */
-		if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page      == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD) &&
-			(ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize         == 8)                   &&
-			(ReportItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum > 1)                    &&
-			(ReportItem->ItemType                   == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-		{
-			/* Retrieve the keyboard scancode from the report data retrieved from the device */
-			bool FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(KeyboardReport, ReportItem);
-			
-			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
-			if (!(FoundData))
-			  continue;
-			
-			/* Key code is an unsigned char in length, cast to the appropriate type */
-			uint8_t KeyCode = (uint8_t)ReportItem->Value;
-
-			/* If scancode is non-zero, a key is being pressed */
-			if (KeyCode)
-			{
-				/* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
-				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
-
-				char PressedKey = 0;
-
-				/* Convert scancode to printable character if alphanumeric */
-				if ((KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyCode <= 0x1D))
-				  PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A';
-				else if ((KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyCode <= 0x27))
-				  PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0';
-				else if (KeyCode == 0x2C)
-				  PressedKey = ' ';						
-				else if (KeyCode == 0x28)
-				  PressedKey = '\n';
-					 
-				/* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
-				if (PressedKey)
-				  putchar(PressedKey);
-			}
-			
-			/* Once a scancode is found, stop scanning through the report items */
-			break;
-		}
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Keyboard_HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ *  the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void Keyboard_HID_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+
+			{
+				puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"));
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+				
+			printf_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report (Size %d Bytes).\r\n"), HIDReportSize);
+						
+			/* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
+			if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
+			{
+				puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
+
+				if (!(HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems))
+					puts_P(PSTR("Not a valid Keyboard." ESC_FG_WHITE));
+				else
+					printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+			
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;	
+			}
+
+			printf("Total Reports: %d\r\n", HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports);
+
+			for (uint8_t i = 0; i < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; i++)
+			{
+				HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[i];
+				
+				uint8_t ReportSizeInBits      = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In];
+				uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits     = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out];
+				uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature];
+
+				/* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */
+				printf_P(PSTR("  + Report ID %d - In: %d bytes, Out: %d bytes, Feature: %d bytes\r\n"),
+				         CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID,
+				         ((ReportSizeInBits      >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits      & 0x07) != 0)),
+				         ((ReportSizeOutBits     >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits     & 0x07) != 0)),
+				         ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0)));
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			/* Select and unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE);	
+			Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+			/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+			{
+				/* Check if data has been received from the attached keyboard */
+				if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+				{
+					/* Create buffer big enough for the report */
+					uint8_t KeyboardReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+					/* Load in the keyboard report */
+					Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(KeyboardReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe());
+				
+					/* Process the read in keyboard report from the device */
+					ProcessKeyboardReport(KeyboardReport);
+				}
+				
+				/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+				Pipe_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			/* Freeze keyboard data pipe */
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes a read HID report from an attached keyboard, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
+ *  as required and prints pressed characters to the serial port. Each time a key is typed, a board LED is toggled.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] KeyboardReport  Pointer to a HID report from an attached keyboard device
+ */
+void ProcessKeyboardReport(uint8_t* KeyboardReport)
+{
+	/* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for keyboard scan code reports */
+	for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+	{
+		/* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
+		HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+
+		/* Check if the current report item is a keyboard scancode */
+		if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page      == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD) &&
+			(ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize         == 8)                   &&
+			(ReportItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum > 1)                    &&
+			(ReportItem->ItemType                   == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+		{
+			/* Retrieve the keyboard scancode from the report data retrieved from the device */
+			bool FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(KeyboardReport, ReportItem);
+			
+			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+			if (!(FoundData))
+			  continue;
+			
+			/* Key code is an unsigned char in length, cast to the appropriate type */
+			uint8_t KeyCode = (uint8_t)ReportItem->Value;
+
+			/* If scancode is non-zero, a key is being pressed */
+			if (KeyCode)
+			{
+				/* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+
+				char PressedKey = 0;
+
+				/* Convert scancode to printable character if alphanumeric */
+				if ((KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyCode <= 0x1D))
+				  PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A';
+				else if ((KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyCode <= 0x27))
+				  PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0';
+				else if (KeyCode == 0x2C)
+				  PressedKey = ' ';						
+				else if (KeyCode == 0x28)
+				  PressedKey = '\n';
+					 
+				/* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
+				if (PressedKey)
+				  putchar(PressedKey);
+			}
+			
+			/* Once a scancode is found, stop scanning through the report items */
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
index 5df5622d7..bfe95b778 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
-#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		#include "HIDReport.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Pipe number for the keyboard report data pipe */
-		#define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE         1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void Keyboard_HID_Task(void);
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-		void ProcessKeyboardReport(uint8_t* KeyboardReport);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe number for the keyboard report data pipe */
+		#define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE         1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Keyboard_HID_Task(void);
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ProcessKeyboardReport(uint8_t* KeyboardReport);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
index 3fbe1b4e7..c1b180137 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Keyboard Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard host, for USB keyboards using
- *  the standard Keyboard HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID reports,
- *  allowing for correct operation across all USB keyboards. This demo supports
- *  keyboards with a single HID report.
- *  
- *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
- *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. On connection to a USB keyboard, the
- *  report items will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the
- *  USART before the keyboard is fully enumerated.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.	
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard host, for USB keyboards using
+ *  the standard Keyboard HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID reports,
+ *  allowing for correct operation across all USB keyboards. This demo supports
+ *  keyboards with a single HID report.
+ *  
+ *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
+ *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. On connection to a USB keyboard, the
+ *  report items will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the
+ *  USART before the keyboard is fully enumerated.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.	
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
index 5c4ae6919..a9fa55ccb 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -1,738 +1,738 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = KeyboardHostWithParser
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  HIDReport.c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = KeyboardHostWithParser
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  HIDReport.c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
index 55164b0e8..0c2ddfa92 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,164 +1,164 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
- 
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a MIDI interface descriptor pair containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref MIDIHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the MIDI Audio Streaming interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextMIDIStreamingInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the MIDI interface */
-	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << MIDI_DATAPIPE_IN) | (1 << MIDI_DATAPIPE_OUT)))
-	{
-		/* Fetch the next bulk endpoint from the current MIDI streaming interface */
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-		                              DComp_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-			return NoEndpointFound;
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */
-		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			/* Configure the data IN pipe */
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MIDI_DATAPIPE_IN, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			
-			/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
-			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MIDI_DATAPIPE_IN);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MIDI_DATAPIPE_OUT, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			
-			/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
-			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MIDI_DATAPIPE_OUT);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct MIDI Streaming Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the MIDI descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == MIDI_STREAMING_CLASS)    &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == MIDI_STREAMING_SUBCLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MIDI_STREAMING_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint within the current interface, aborting the search if
- *  another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-	
-		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */
-		if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a MIDI interface descriptor pair containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref MIDIHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the MIDI Audio Streaming interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextMIDIStreamingInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the MIDI interface */
+	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << MIDI_DATAPIPE_IN) | (1 << MIDI_DATAPIPE_OUT)))
+	{
+		/* Fetch the next bulk endpoint from the current MIDI streaming interface */
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+			return NoEndpointFound;
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */
+		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			/* Configure the data IN pipe */
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MIDI_DATAPIPE_IN, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			
+			/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
+			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MIDI_DATAPIPE_IN);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MIDI_DATAPIPE_OUT, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			
+			/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
+			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MIDI_DATAPIPE_OUT);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct MIDI Streaming Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the MIDI descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == MIDI_STREAMING_CLASS)    &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == MIDI_STREAMING_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MIDI_STREAMING_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint within the current interface, aborting the search if
+ *  another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+	
+		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */
+		if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
index 548d52694..933df79d9 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "MIDIHost.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the MIDI Audio class */
-		#define MIDI_STREAMING_CLASS           0x01
-		
-		/** Interface Class value for the MIDI Audio Streaming subclass */
-		#define MIDI_STREAMING_SUBCLASS        0x03
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the MIDI Audio Streaming protocol */
-		#define MIDI_STREAMING_PROTOCOL        0x00
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum MIDIHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoCDCInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< Compatible CDC endpoints were not found in the device's CDC interface */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);	
-		
-		uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "MIDIHost.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the MIDI Audio class */
+		#define MIDI_STREAMING_CLASS           0x01
+		
+		/** Interface Class value for the MIDI Audio Streaming subclass */
+		#define MIDI_STREAMING_SUBCLASS        0x03
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the MIDI Audio Streaming protocol */
+		#define MIDI_STREAMING_PROTOCOL        0x00
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum MIDIHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCDCInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< Compatible CDC endpoints were not found in the device's CDC interface */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);	
+		
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/Doxygen.conf
index 223f2e171..cad9141fe 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c
index cbbb0c565..9c8190286 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c
@@ -1,269 +1,269 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MIDIHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "MIDIHost.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "MIDI Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		MIDI_Host_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	Joystick_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in
- *  note on/off messages from the attached MIDI device and print it to the serial port. When the board
- *  joystick or buttons are pressed, note on/off messages are sent to the attached device.
- */
-void MIDI_Host_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("MIDI Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDI_DATAPIPE_IN);
-			
-			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
-			{
-				USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent;
-				
-				Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent));
-				
-				bool NoteOnEvent  = ((MIDIEvent.Command & 0x0F) == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON  >> 4));
-				bool NoteOffEvent = ((MIDIEvent.Command & 0x0F) == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF >> 4));
-				
-				if (NoteOnEvent || NoteOffEvent)
-				{
-					printf_P(PSTR("MIDI Note %s - Channel %d, Pitch %d, Velocity %d\r\n"), NoteOnEvent ? "On" : "Off",
-				                                                                           ((MIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) + 1),
-				                                                                           MIDIEvent.Data2, MIDIEvent.Data3);
-				}
-
-				Pipe_ClearIN();
-			}
-			
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDI_DATAPIPE_OUT);
-			
-			static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
-
-			if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())
-			{
-				uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
-				uint8_t MIDIPitch;
-			
-				uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
-				uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
-				
-				/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
-				uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
-
-				if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
-				{
-					MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-					MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
-				}
-
-				if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
-				{
-					MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-					MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
-				}
-
-				if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
-				{
-					MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-					MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
-				}
-				
-				if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
-				{
-					MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-					MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
-				}
-
-				if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
-				{
-					MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
-					MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
-				}
-
-				/* Check if a MIDI command is to be sent */
-				if (MIDICommand)
-				{
-					USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t)
-						{
-							.CableNumber = 0,
-							.Command     = (MIDICommand >> 4),
-							
-							.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
-							.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
-							.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,			
-						};
-						
-					/* Write the MIDI event packet to the pipe */
-					Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent));
-				
-					/* Send the data in the pipe to the device */
-					Pipe_ClearOUT();
-				}
-				
-				/* Save previous joystick value for next joystick change detection */
-				PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDIHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "MIDIHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "MIDI Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MIDI_Host_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in
+ *  note on/off messages from the attached MIDI device and print it to the serial port. When the board
+ *  joystick or buttons are pressed, note on/off messages are sent to the attached device.
+ */
+void MIDI_Host_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("MIDI Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDI_DATAPIPE_IN);
+			
+			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+			{
+				USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent;
+				
+				Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent));
+				
+				bool NoteOnEvent  = ((MIDIEvent.Command & 0x0F) == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON  >> 4));
+				bool NoteOffEvent = ((MIDIEvent.Command & 0x0F) == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF >> 4));
+				
+				if (NoteOnEvent || NoteOffEvent)
+				{
+					printf_P(PSTR("MIDI Note %s - Channel %d, Pitch %d, Velocity %d\r\n"), NoteOnEvent ? "On" : "Off",
+				                                                                           ((MIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) + 1),
+				                                                                           MIDIEvent.Data2, MIDIEvent.Data3);
+				}
+
+				Pipe_ClearIN();
+			}
+			
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDI_DATAPIPE_OUT);
+			
+			static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
+
+			if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())
+			{
+				uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
+				uint8_t MIDIPitch;
+			
+				uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
+				uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
+				
+				/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
+				uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
+
+				if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
+				{
+					MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+					MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
+				}
+
+				if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
+				{
+					MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+					MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
+				}
+
+				if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
+				{
+					MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+					MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
+				}
+				
+				if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
+				{
+					MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+					MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
+				}
+
+				if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
+				{
+					MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+					MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
+				}
+
+				/* Check if a MIDI command is to be sent */
+				if (MIDICommand)
+				{
+					USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t)
+						{
+							.CableNumber = 0,
+							.Command     = (MIDICommand >> 4),
+							
+							.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
+							.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
+							.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,			
+						};
+						
+					/* Write the MIDI event packet to the pipe */
+					Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent));
+				
+					/* Send the data in the pipe to the device */
+					Pipe_ClearOUT();
+				}
+				
+				/* Save previous joystick value for next joystick change detection */
+				PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h
index 576ad601e..2be4d4efb 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h
@@ -1,114 +1,114 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MIDIHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MIDI_HOST_H_
-#define _MIDI_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event */
-		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON      0x90
-
-		/** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event */
-		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF     0x80
-		
-		/** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events, as no pressure sensor is mounted */
-		#define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY    64
-		
-		/** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel
-		 *  addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] channel  MIDI channel number to address
-		 */
-		#define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel)     (channel - 1)
-
-		/** Pipe number for the MIDI data IN pipe */
-		#define MIDI_DATAPIPE_IN          1
-
-		/** Pipe number for the MIDI data OUT pipe */
-		#define MIDI_DATAPIPE_OUT         2
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a USB MIDI event packet, used to encapsulate sent and received MIDI messages from a USB MIDI interface. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			unsigned char Command     : 4; /**< MIDI command being sent or received in the event packet */
-			unsigned char CableNumber : 4; /**< Virtual cable number of the event being sent or received in the given MIDI interface */
-			
-			uint8_t Data1; /**< First byte of data in the MIDI event */
-			uint8_t Data2; /**< Second byte of data in the MIDI event */
-			uint8_t Data3; /**< Third byte of data in the MIDI event */		
-		} USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void MIDI_Host_Task(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MIDIHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_HOST_H_
+#define _MIDI_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON      0x90
+
+		/** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF     0x80
+		
+		/** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events, as no pressure sensor is mounted */
+		#define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY    64
+		
+		/** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel
+		 *  addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] channel  MIDI channel number to address
+		 */
+		#define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel)     (channel - 1)
+
+		/** Pipe number for the MIDI data IN pipe */
+		#define MIDI_DATAPIPE_IN          1
+
+		/** Pipe number for the MIDI data OUT pipe */
+		#define MIDI_DATAPIPE_OUT         2
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a USB MIDI event packet, used to encapsulate sent and received MIDI messages from a USB MIDI interface. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned char Command     : 4; /**< MIDI command being sent or received in the event packet */
+			unsigned char CableNumber : 4; /**< Virtual cable number of the event being sent or received in the given MIDI interface */
+			
+			uint8_t Data1; /**< First byte of data in the MIDI event */
+			uint8_t Data2; /**< Second byte of data in the MIDI event */
+			uint8_t Data3; /**< Third byte of data in the MIDI event */		
+		} USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MIDI_Host_Task(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt
index afd95c9e6..269bf5b5b 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt
@@ -1,59 +1,59 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage MIDI Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Audio Class Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>MIDI Subclass</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF USB MIDI Audio Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  MIDI host demonstration application. This demo will enumerate an attached USB-MIDI device, and print incoming MIDI note
- *  on and off messages on any channel to the serial port. Pressing the board joystick will send note on and off messages to
- *  the attached MIDI device, with the board HWB controlling the note channel.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage MIDI Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>MIDI Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF USB MIDI Audio Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  MIDI host demonstration application. This demo will enumerate an attached USB-MIDI device, and print incoming MIDI note
+ *  on and off messages on any channel to the serial port. Pressing the board joystick will send note on and off messages to
+ *  the attached MIDI device, with the board HWB controlling the note channel.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/makefile
index 2ae06ad48..9c7453f8e 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/makefile
@@ -1,736 +1,736 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MIDIHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MIDIHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
index d402d3600..8a808d751 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,166 +1,166 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
- 
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a MSD interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints     = 0;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the mass storage interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextMSInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	/* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the mass storage interface */
-	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
-	{
-		/* Fetch the next bulk endpoint from the current mass storage interface */
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-		                              DComp_NextMSInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-			return NoEndpointFound;
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint, set appropriate globals */
-		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			/* Configure the data IN pipe */
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-			                   PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
-
-			/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
-			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-			                   PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
-
-			/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
-			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-		}		
-	}
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mass Storage Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == MASS_STORE_CLASS)    &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the correct MSD interface, aborting the search if
- *  another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-
-		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */
-		if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a MSD interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints     = 0;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the mass storage interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextMSInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	/* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the mass storage interface */
+	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
+	{
+		/* Fetch the next bulk endpoint from the current mass storage interface */
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextMSInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+			return NoEndpointFound;
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint, set appropriate globals */
+		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			/* Configure the data IN pipe */
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+			                   PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+			/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
+			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+			                   PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+			/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
+			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+		}		
+	}
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mass Storage Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == MASS_STORE_CLASS)    &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the correct MSD interface, aborting the search if
+ *  another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */
+		if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
index fb1a2111b..1719a280d 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "MassStorageHost.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device class */
-		#define MASS_STORE_CLASS               0x08
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device subclass */
-		#define MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS            0x06
-
-		/** Interface Protocol value for the Bulk Only transport protocol */
-		#define MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL            0x50
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoInterfaceFound                = 4, /**< A compatible MSD interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< The correct MSD endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's MSD interface */
-		};
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);	
-
-		uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "MassStorageHost.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device class */
+		#define MASS_STORE_CLASS               0x08
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device subclass */
+		#define MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS            0x06
+
+		/** Interface Protocol value for the Bulk Only transport protocol */
+		#define MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL            0x50
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoInterfaceFound                = 4, /**< A compatible MSD interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< The correct MSD endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's MSD interface */
+		};
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);	
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf
index 177859c05..ba337f97e 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c
index be92d69c1..129c50af8 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c
@@ -1,701 +1,701 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Mass Storage Device commands, to issue MSD commands to the device for
- *  reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics. This file
- *  also contains block read and write functions, so that device blocks
- *  can be read and written. In general, these functions would be chained
- *  to a FAT library to give file-level access to an attached device's contents.
- *
- *  \note Many Mass Storage devices on the market are non-compliant to the
- *        specifications and thus can prove difficult to interface with. It
- *        may be necessary to retry the functions in the module several times
- *        after they have returned and error to successfully send the command
- *        to the device. Some devices may also need to have the stream function
- *        timeout period extended beyond 100ms (some badly designed devices exceeding
- *        1.5 seconds occasionally) by defining USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS to a
- *        larger value in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler
- *        via the -D switch.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C
-#include "MassStoreCommands.h"
-
-/** Current Tag value used in issued CBWs to the device. This is automatically incremented
- *  each time a command is sent, and is not externally accessible.
- */
-static uint32_t MassStore_Tag = 1;
-
-
-/** Routine to send the current CBW to the device, and increment the Tag value as needed.
- *
- *  \param[in] SCSICommandBlock  Pointer to a SCSI command block structure to send to the attached device
- *  \param[in,out] BufferPtr     Pointer to a buffer for the data to send or receive to/from the device, or NULL if no data
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(CommandBlockWrapper_t* SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-
-	/* Each transmission should have a unique tag value, increment before use */
-	SCSICommandBlock->Tag = ++MassStore_Tag;
-
-	/* Wrap Tag value when invalid - MS class defines tag values of 0 and 0xFFFFFFFF to be invalid */
-	if (MassStore_Tag == 0xFFFFFFFF)
-	  MassStore_Tag = 1;
-
-	/* Select the OUT data pipe for CBW transmission */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	/* Write the CBW command to the OUT pipe */
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(CommandBlockWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	/* Send the data in the OUT pipe to the attached device */
-	Pipe_ClearOUT();
-	
-	/* Wait until command has been sent */
-	Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
-
-	/* Freeze pipe after use */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	/* Send data if any */
-	if ((BufferPtr != NULL) &&
-	    ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(SCSICommandBlock, BufferPtr)) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError))
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-		
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Waits until the attached device is ready to accept data following a CBW, checking
- *  to ensure that the device has not stalled the transaction.
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void)
-{
-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
-
-	/* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	/* Wait until data received in the IN pipe */
-	while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
-	{
-		/* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */
-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
-		{
-			/* Clear the flag and decrement the timeout period counter */
-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-			TimeoutMSRem--;
-
-			/* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */
-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
-			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
-		}
-	
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
-		{
-			/* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */
-			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-
-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
-		}
-		
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
-		{
-			/* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */
-			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-
-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
-		}
-		  
-		/* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */
-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-	};
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-		
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-/** Sends or receives the transaction's data stage to or from the attached device, reading or
- *  writing to the nominated buffer.
- *
- *  \param[in] SCSICommandBlock  Pointer to a SCSI command block structure being sent to the attached device
- *  \param[in,out]  BufferPtr    Pointer to the data buffer to read from or write to
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(CommandBlockWrapper_t* SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t  ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-	uint16_t BytesRem  = SCSICommandBlock->DataTransferLength;
-
-	/* Check the direction of the SCSI command data stage */
-	if (SCSICommandBlock->Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN)
-	{
-		/* Wait until the device has replied with some data */
-		if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-	
-		/* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-		
-		/* Read in the block data from the pipe */
-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-
-		/* Acknowledge the packet */
-		Pipe_ClearIN();
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Select the OUT data pipe for data transmission */
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		/* Write the block data to the pipe */
-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-
-		/* Acknowledge the packet */
-		Pipe_ClearOUT();
-		
-		while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
-		{
-			if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	/* Freeze used pipe after use */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-/** Routine to receive the current CSW from the device.
- *
- *  \param[out] SCSICommandStatus  Pointer to a destination where the returned status data should be stored
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
- */
-static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(CommandStatusWrapper_t* SCSICommandStatus)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-
-	/* If an error in the command occurred, abort */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	/* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	/* Load in the CSW from the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatusWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	  
-	/* Clear the data ready for next reception */
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Freeze the IN pipe after use */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	/* Check to see if command failed */
-	if (SCSICommandStatus->Status != Command_Pass)
-	  ErrorCode = MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED;
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to reset the attached device's Mass Storage interface,
- *  readying the device for the next CBW.
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
- */
-uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_MassStorageReset,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = 0,
-		};
-	
-	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
-}
-
-/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to determine the index of the highest numbered Logical
- *  Unit in the attached device.
- *
- *  \note Some devices do not support this request, and will STALL it when issued. To get around this,
- *        on unsupported devices the max LUN index will be reported as zero and no error will be returned
- *        if the device STALLs the request.
- *
- *  \param[out] MaxLUNIndex  Pointer to the location that the maximum LUN index value should be stored
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
- */
-uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetMaxLUN,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = 1,
-		};
-		
-	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled)
-	{
-		/* Clear the pipe stall */
-		Pipe_ClearStall();
-	
-		/* Some faulty Mass Storage devices don't implement the GET_MAX_LUN request, so assume a single LUN */
-		*MaxLUNIndex = 0;
-		
-		/* Clear the error, and pretend the request executed correctly if the device STALLed it */
-		ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-	}
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Issues a SCSI Inquiry command to the attached device, to determine the device's information. This
- *  gives information on the device's capabilities.
- *
- *  \param[in] LUNIndex    Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
- *  \param[out] InquiryPtr  Pointer to the inquiry data structure where the inquiry data from the device is to be stored
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
- */
-uint8_t MassStore_Inquiry(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-
-	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue INQUIRY command */
-	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
-			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t),
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY,
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t), // Allocation Length
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, InquiryPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Issues a SCSI Request Sense command to the attached device, to determine the current SCSI sense information. This
- *  gives error codes for the last issued SCSI command to the device.
- *
- *  \param[in] LUNIndex   Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
- *  \param[out] SensePtr  Pointer to the sense data structure where the sense data from the device is to be stored
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
- */
-uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-
-	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue REQUEST SENSE command */
-	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
-			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t),
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
-			.SCSICommandData =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE,
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, SensePtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Read command to the attached device, to read in one or more data blocks from the
- *  storage medium into a buffer.
- *
- *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Start block address to read from
- *  \param[in] Blocks        Number of blocks to read from the device
- *  \param[in] BlockSize     Size in bytes of each block to read
- *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the buffer where the read data is to be written to
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
- */
-uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-                                  const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-
-	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to read in the given blocks from the device */
-	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
-			.DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_READ_10,
-					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
-					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
-					(BlockAddress >> 16),
-					(BlockAddress >> 8),
-					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
-					0x00,                   // Unused (reserved)
-					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Read
-					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Read
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Write command to the attached device, to write one or more data blocks to the
- *  storage medium from a buffer.
- *
- *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Start block address to write to
- *  \param[in] Blocks        Number of blocks to write to in the device
- *  \param[in] BlockSize     Size in bytes of each block to write
- *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the buffer where the write data is to be sourced from
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
- */
-uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-                                   const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-
-	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to write the given blocks to the device */
-	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
-			.DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10,
-					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
-					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
-					(BlockAddress >> 16),
-					(BlockAddress >> 8),
-					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
-					0x00,                   // Unused (reserved)
-					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Write
-					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Write
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Issues a SCSI Device Test Unit Ready command to the attached device, to determine if the device is ready to accept
- *  other commands.
- *
- *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
- */
-uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;	
-
-	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue TEST UNIT READY command */
-	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
-			.DataTransferLength = 0,
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY,
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Issues a SCSI Device Read Capacity command to the attached device, to determine the capacity of the
- *  given Logical Unit within the device.
- *
- *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
- *  \param[out] CapacityPtr  Device capacity structure where the capacity data is to be stored
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
- */
-uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-
-	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue READ CAPACITY command */
-	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
-			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Capacity_t),
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10,
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // MSB of Logical block address
-					0x00,
-					0x00,
-					0x00,                   // LSB of Logical block address
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Partial Medium Indicator
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, CapacityPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	  
-	/* Endian-correct the read data */
-	CapacityPtr->Blocks    = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->Blocks);
-	CapacityPtr->BlockSize = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->BlockSize);
-	
-	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Issues a SCSI Device Prevent/Allow Medium Removal command to the attached device, to lock the physical media from
- *  being removed. This is a legacy command for SCSI disks with removable storage (such as ZIP disks), but should still
- *  be issued before the first read or write command is sent.
- *
- *  \param[in] LUNIndex        Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
- *  \param[in] PreventRemoval  Whether or not the LUN media should be locked to prevent removal or not
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
- */
-uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-
-	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command */
-	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
-			.DataTransferLength = 0,
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL,
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					PreventRemoval,         // Prevent flag
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
-	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Mass Storage Device commands, to issue MSD commands to the device for
+ *  reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics. This file
+ *  also contains block read and write functions, so that device blocks
+ *  can be read and written. In general, these functions would be chained
+ *  to a FAT library to give file-level access to an attached device's contents.
+ *
+ *  \note Many Mass Storage devices on the market are non-compliant to the
+ *        specifications and thus can prove difficult to interface with. It
+ *        may be necessary to retry the functions in the module several times
+ *        after they have returned and error to successfully send the command
+ *        to the device. Some devices may also need to have the stream function
+ *        timeout period extended beyond 100ms (some badly designed devices exceeding
+ *        1.5 seconds occasionally) by defining USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS to a
+ *        larger value in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler
+ *        via the -D switch.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C
+#include "MassStoreCommands.h"
+
+/** Current Tag value used in issued CBWs to the device. This is automatically incremented
+ *  each time a command is sent, and is not externally accessible.
+ */
+static uint32_t MassStore_Tag = 1;
+
+
+/** Routine to send the current CBW to the device, and increment the Tag value as needed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] SCSICommandBlock  Pointer to a SCSI command block structure to send to the attached device
+ *  \param[in,out] BufferPtr     Pointer to a buffer for the data to send or receive to/from the device, or NULL if no data
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(CommandBlockWrapper_t* SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* Each transmission should have a unique tag value, increment before use */
+	SCSICommandBlock->Tag = ++MassStore_Tag;
+
+	/* Wrap Tag value when invalid - MS class defines tag values of 0 and 0xFFFFFFFF to be invalid */
+	if (MassStore_Tag == 0xFFFFFFFF)
+	  MassStore_Tag = 1;
+
+	/* Select the OUT data pipe for CBW transmission */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Write the CBW command to the OUT pipe */
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(CommandBlockWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Send the data in the OUT pipe to the attached device */
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	
+	/* Wait until command has been sent */
+	Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
+
+	/* Freeze pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	/* Send data if any */
+	if ((BufferPtr != NULL) &&
+	    ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(SCSICommandBlock, BufferPtr)) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError))
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+		
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Waits until the attached device is ready to accept data following a CBW, checking
+ *  to ensure that the device has not stalled the transaction.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void)
+{
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
+
+	/* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Wait until data received in the IN pipe */
+	while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		/* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			/* Clear the flag and decrement the timeout period counter */
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+			TimeoutMSRem--;
+
+			/* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
+		}
+	
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			/* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */
+			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+		
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			/* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */
+			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+		  
+		/* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	};
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+		
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Sends or receives the transaction's data stage to or from the attached device, reading or
+ *  writing to the nominated buffer.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] SCSICommandBlock  Pointer to a SCSI command block structure being sent to the attached device
+ *  \param[in,out]  BufferPtr    Pointer to the data buffer to read from or write to
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(CommandBlockWrapper_t* SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+	uint16_t BytesRem  = SCSICommandBlock->DataTransferLength;
+
+	/* Check the direction of the SCSI command data stage */
+	if (SCSICommandBlock->Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the device has replied with some data */
+		if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	
+		/* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+		
+		/* Read in the block data from the pipe */
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		/* Acknowledge the packet */
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Select the OUT data pipe for data transmission */
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Write the block data to the pipe */
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		/* Acknowledge the packet */
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+		
+		while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Freeze used pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Routine to receive the current CSW from the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] SCSICommandStatus  Pointer to a destination where the returned status data should be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(CommandStatusWrapper_t* SCSICommandStatus)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* If an error in the command occurred, abort */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	/* Load in the CSW from the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatusWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	  
+	/* Clear the data ready for next reception */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Freeze the IN pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	/* Check to see if command failed */
+	if (SCSICommandStatus->Status != Command_Pass)
+	  ErrorCode = MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED;
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to reset the attached device's Mass Storage interface,
+ *  readying the device for the next CBW.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_MassStorageReset,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+	
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to determine the index of the highest numbered Logical
+ *  Unit in the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \note Some devices do not support this request, and will STALL it when issued. To get around this,
+ *        on unsupported devices the max LUN index will be reported as zero and no error will be returned
+ *        if the device STALLs the request.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] MaxLUNIndex  Pointer to the location that the maximum LUN index value should be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetMaxLUN,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = 1,
+		};
+		
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled)
+	{
+		/* Clear the pipe stall */
+		Pipe_ClearStall();
+	
+		/* Some faulty Mass Storage devices don't implement the GET_MAX_LUN request, so assume a single LUN */
+		*MaxLUNIndex = 0;
+		
+		/* Clear the error, and pretend the request executed correctly if the device STALLed it */
+		ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	}
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Inquiry command to the attached device, to determine the device's information. This
+ *  gives information on the device's capabilities.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex    Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[out] InquiryPtr  Pointer to the inquiry data structure where the inquiry data from the device is to be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_Inquiry(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue INQUIRY command */
+	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t),
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t), // Allocation Length
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, InquiryPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Request Sense command to the attached device, to determine the current SCSI sense information. This
+ *  gives error codes for the last issued SCSI command to the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex   Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[out] SensePtr  Pointer to the sense data structure where the sense data from the device is to be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue REQUEST SENSE command */
+	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t),
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, SensePtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Read command to the attached device, to read in one or more data blocks from the
+ *  storage medium into a buffer.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Start block address to read from
+ *  \param[in] Blocks        Number of blocks to read from the device
+ *  \param[in] BlockSize     Size in bytes of each block to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the buffer where the read data is to be written to
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to read in the given blocks from the device */
+	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_READ_10,
+					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
+					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
+					(BlockAddress >> 16),
+					(BlockAddress >> 8),
+					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
+					0x00,                   // Unused (reserved)
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Read
+					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Read
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Write command to the attached device, to write one or more data blocks to the
+ *  storage medium from a buffer.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Start block address to write to
+ *  \param[in] Blocks        Number of blocks to write to in the device
+ *  \param[in] BlockSize     Size in bytes of each block to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the buffer where the write data is to be sourced from
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                   const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to write the given blocks to the device */
+	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10,
+					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
+					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
+					(BlockAddress >> 16),
+					(BlockAddress >> 8),
+					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
+					0x00,                   // Unused (reserved)
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Write
+					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Write
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Test Unit Ready command to the attached device, to determine if the device is ready to accept
+ *  other commands.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;	
+
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue TEST UNIT READY command */
+	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = 0,
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Read Capacity command to the attached device, to determine the capacity of the
+ *  given Logical Unit within the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[out] CapacityPtr  Device capacity structure where the capacity data is to be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue READ CAPACITY command */
+	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Capacity_t),
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Logical block address
+					0x00,
+					0x00,
+					0x00,                   // LSB of Logical block address
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Partial Medium Indicator
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, CapacityPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	  
+	/* Endian-correct the read data */
+	CapacityPtr->Blocks    = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->Blocks);
+	CapacityPtr->BlockSize = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->BlockSize);
+	
+	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Prevent/Allow Medium Removal command to the attached device, to lock the physical media from
+ *  being removed. This is a legacy command for SCSI disks with removable storage (such as ZIP disks), but should still
+ *  be issued before the first read or write command is sent.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex        Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[in] PreventRemoval  Whether or not the LUN media should be locked to prevent removal or not
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command */
+	CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = 0,
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					PreventRemoval,         // Prevent flag
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve status information from the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h
index 30b74a27f..546460607 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h
@@ -1,209 +1,209 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MassStoreCommands.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_
-#define _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "MassStorageHost.h"
-		#include "SCSI_Codes.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface of the attached device */
-		#define REQ_MassStorageReset                0xFF
-
-		/** Class specific request to retrieve the maximum Logical Unit Number (LUN) index of the attached device */
-		#define REQ_GetMaxLUN                       0xFE
-
-		/** Command Block Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CBW blocks */
-		#define CBW_SIGNATURE                       0x43425355UL
-
-		/** Command Static Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CSW blocks */
-		#define CSW_SIGNATURE                       0x53425355UL
-		
-		/** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Host-to-Device transfer direction */
-		#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT          (0 << 7)
-
-		/** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Device-to-Host transfer direction */
-		#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN           (1 << 7)
-		
-		/** Timeout period between the issuing of a CBW to a device, and the reception of the first packet */
-		#define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS             10000
-
-		/** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data IN pipe */
-		#define MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE             1
-
-		/** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data OUT pipe */
-		#define MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE            2
-		
-		/** Additional error code for Mass Storage functions when a device returns a logical command failure */
-		#define MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED      0xC0
-
-	/* Type defines: */
-		/** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Block Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI
-		 *  commands for transport over the USB bulk endpoints to the device.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, always equal to CBW_SIGNATURE */
-			uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW (filled automatically) */
-			uint32_t DataTransferLength; /**< Length of data to transfer, following the CBW */
-			uint8_t  Flags; /**< Block flags, equal to one of the COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_* macros */
-			uint8_t  LUN; /**< Logical Unit Number the CBW is addressed to in the device */
-			uint8_t  SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the SCSI command in the CBW */
-			uint8_t  SCSICommandData[16]; /**< SCSI command to issue to the device */
-		} CommandBlockWrapper_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Status Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI
-		 *  responses for transport over the USB bulk endpoints from the device.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t Signature; /**< Command status signature, always equal to CSW_SIGNATURE */
-			uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW */
-			uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Length of data not transferred */
-			uint8_t  Status; /**< Command status, a value from the MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */
-		} CommandStatusWrapper_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a SCSI Sense structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
-		 *  device via the MassStore_RequestSense() function, indicating the current sense data of the
-		 *  device (giving explicit error codes for the last issued command). For details of the
-		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       ResponseCode;
-
-			uint8_t       SegmentNumber;
-			
-			unsigned char SenseKey            : 4;
-			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 1;
-			unsigned char ILI                 : 1;
-			unsigned char EOM                 : 1;
-			unsigned char FileMark            : 1;
-			
-			uint8_t      Information[4];
-			uint8_t      AdditionalLength;
-			uint8_t      CmdSpecificInformation[4];
-			uint8_t      AdditionalSenseCode;
-			uint8_t      AdditionalSenseQualifier;
-			uint8_t      FieldReplaceableUnitCode;
-			uint8_t      SenseKeySpecific[3];
-		} SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a SCSI Inquiry structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
-		 *  device via the MassStore_Inquiry() function, retrieving the attached device's information.
-		 *  For details of the structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			unsigned char DeviceType          : 5;
-			unsigned char PeripheralQualifier : 3;
-			
-			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 7;
-			unsigned char Removable           : 1;
-			
-			uint8_t      Version;
-			
-			unsigned char ResponseDataFormat  : 4;
-			unsigned char _RESERVED2          : 1;
-			unsigned char NormACA             : 1;
-			unsigned char TrmTsk              : 1;
-			unsigned char AERC                : 1;
-
-			uint8_t      AdditionalLength;
-			uint8_t      _RESERVED3[2];
-
-			unsigned char SoftReset           : 1;
-			unsigned char CmdQue              : 1;
-			unsigned char _RESERVED4          : 1;
-			unsigned char Linked              : 1;
-			unsigned char Sync                : 1;
-			unsigned char WideBus16Bit        : 1;
-			unsigned char WideBus32Bit        : 1;
-			unsigned char RelAddr             : 1;
-			
-			uint8_t      VendorID[8];
-			uint8_t      ProductID[16];
-			uint8_t      RevisionID[4];
-		} SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t;
-		
-		/** SCSI capacity structure, to hold the total capacity of the device in both the number
-		 *  of blocks in the current LUN, and the size of each block. This structure is filled by
-		 *  the device when the MassStore_ReadCapacity() function is called.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t Blocks; /**< Number of blocks in the addressed LUN of the device */
-			uint32_t BlockSize; /**< Number of bytes in each block in the addressed LUN */
-		} SCSI_Capacity_t;
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** CSW status return codes, indicating the overall status of the issued CBW */
-		enum MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t
-		{
-			Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed successfully */
-			Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete successfully */
-			Phase_Error  = 2 /**< Phase error while processing the issued command */
-		};
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C)
-			static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(CommandBlockWrapper_t* SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr);
-			static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void);
-			static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(CommandBlockWrapper_t* SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(CommandStatusWrapper_t* SCSICommandStatus) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-		#endif
-		
-		uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void);
-		uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex);
-		uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr)
-		                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-		uint8_t MassStore_Inquiry(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryPtr)
-		                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-		uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                  const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
-		uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-                                           const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
-		uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr)
-		                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-		uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex);
-		uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStoreCommands.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "MassStorageHost.h"
+		#include "SCSI_Codes.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface of the attached device */
+		#define REQ_MassStorageReset                0xFF
+
+		/** Class specific request to retrieve the maximum Logical Unit Number (LUN) index of the attached device */
+		#define REQ_GetMaxLUN                       0xFE
+
+		/** Command Block Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CBW blocks */
+		#define CBW_SIGNATURE                       0x43425355UL
+
+		/** Command Static Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CSW blocks */
+		#define CSW_SIGNATURE                       0x53425355UL
+		
+		/** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Host-to-Device transfer direction */
+		#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT          (0 << 7)
+
+		/** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Device-to-Host transfer direction */
+		#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN           (1 << 7)
+		
+		/** Timeout period between the issuing of a CBW to a device, and the reception of the first packet */
+		#define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS             10000
+
+		/** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data IN pipe */
+		#define MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE             1
+
+		/** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data OUT pipe */
+		#define MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE            2
+		
+		/** Additional error code for Mass Storage functions when a device returns a logical command failure */
+		#define MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED      0xC0
+
+	/* Type defines: */
+		/** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Block Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI
+		 *  commands for transport over the USB bulk endpoints to the device.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, always equal to CBW_SIGNATURE */
+			uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW (filled automatically) */
+			uint32_t DataTransferLength; /**< Length of data to transfer, following the CBW */
+			uint8_t  Flags; /**< Block flags, equal to one of the COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_* macros */
+			uint8_t  LUN; /**< Logical Unit Number the CBW is addressed to in the device */
+			uint8_t  SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the SCSI command in the CBW */
+			uint8_t  SCSICommandData[16]; /**< SCSI command to issue to the device */
+		} CommandBlockWrapper_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Status Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI
+		 *  responses for transport over the USB bulk endpoints from the device.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t Signature; /**< Command status signature, always equal to CSW_SIGNATURE */
+			uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW */
+			uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Length of data not transferred */
+			uint8_t  Status; /**< Command status, a value from the MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */
+		} CommandStatusWrapper_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a SCSI Sense structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
+		 *  device via the MassStore_RequestSense() function, indicating the current sense data of the
+		 *  device (giving explicit error codes for the last issued command). For details of the
+		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       ResponseCode;
+
+			uint8_t       SegmentNumber;
+			
+			unsigned char SenseKey            : 4;
+			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 1;
+			unsigned char ILI                 : 1;
+			unsigned char EOM                 : 1;
+			unsigned char FileMark            : 1;
+			
+			uint8_t      Information[4];
+			uint8_t      AdditionalLength;
+			uint8_t      CmdSpecificInformation[4];
+			uint8_t      AdditionalSenseCode;
+			uint8_t      AdditionalSenseQualifier;
+			uint8_t      FieldReplaceableUnitCode;
+			uint8_t      SenseKeySpecific[3];
+		} SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a SCSI Inquiry structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
+		 *  device via the MassStore_Inquiry() function, retrieving the attached device's information.
+		 *  For details of the structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned char DeviceType          : 5;
+			unsigned char PeripheralQualifier : 3;
+			
+			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 7;
+			unsigned char Removable           : 1;
+			
+			uint8_t      Version;
+			
+			unsigned char ResponseDataFormat  : 4;
+			unsigned char _RESERVED2          : 1;
+			unsigned char NormACA             : 1;
+			unsigned char TrmTsk              : 1;
+			unsigned char AERC                : 1;
+
+			uint8_t      AdditionalLength;
+			uint8_t      _RESERVED3[2];
+
+			unsigned char SoftReset           : 1;
+			unsigned char CmdQue              : 1;
+			unsigned char _RESERVED4          : 1;
+			unsigned char Linked              : 1;
+			unsigned char Sync                : 1;
+			unsigned char WideBus16Bit        : 1;
+			unsigned char WideBus32Bit        : 1;
+			unsigned char RelAddr             : 1;
+			
+			uint8_t      VendorID[8];
+			uint8_t      ProductID[16];
+			uint8_t      RevisionID[4];
+		} SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t;
+		
+		/** SCSI capacity structure, to hold the total capacity of the device in both the number
+		 *  of blocks in the current LUN, and the size of each block. This structure is filled by
+		 *  the device when the MassStore_ReadCapacity() function is called.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t Blocks; /**< Number of blocks in the addressed LUN of the device */
+			uint32_t BlockSize; /**< Number of bytes in each block in the addressed LUN */
+		} SCSI_Capacity_t;
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** CSW status return codes, indicating the overall status of the issued CBW */
+		enum MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t
+		{
+			Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed successfully */
+			Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete successfully */
+			Phase_Error  = 2 /**< Phase error while processing the issued command */
+		};
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C)
+			static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(CommandBlockWrapper_t* SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr);
+			static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void);
+			static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(CommandBlockWrapper_t* SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(CommandStatusWrapper_t* SCSICommandStatus) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		#endif
+		
+		uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void);
+		uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex);
+		uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr)
+		                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+		uint8_t MassStore_Inquiry(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryPtr)
+		                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+		uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
+		uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                           const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
+		uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr)
+		                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+		uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex);
+		uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
index 62af9996f..5b6b76ac8 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to
- *  the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and
- *  the SENSE data.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_
-#define _SCSI_CODES_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                               0x12
-		#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE                         0x03
-		#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY                       0x00
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10                      0x25
-		#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC                       0x1D
-		#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL          0x1E
-		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10                              0x2A
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                               0x28
-		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                               0x0A
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                                0x08
-		#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10                             0x2F
-		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6                          0x1A
-		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10                         0x5A
-
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD                            0x00
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR                 0x01
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY                       0x02
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR                    0x03
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR                  0x04
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST                 0x05
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION                  0x06
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT                    0x07
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK                     0x08
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC                 0x09
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED                    0x0A
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND                 0x0B
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW                 0x0D
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE                      0x0E
-
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION          0x00
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY             0x04
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB               0x24
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED                    0x27
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR                       0x31
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND                    0x20
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT                 0x3A
-
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER                      0x00
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED             0x01
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED     0x02
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS             0x07
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to
+ *  the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and
+ *  the SENSE data.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_
+#define _SCSI_CODES_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                               0x12
+		#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE                         0x03
+		#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY                       0x00
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10                      0x25
+		#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC                       0x1D
+		#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL          0x1E
+		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10                              0x2A
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                               0x28
+		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                               0x0A
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                                0x08
+		#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10                             0x2F
+		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6                          0x1A
+		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10                         0x5A
+
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD                            0x00
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR                 0x01
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY                       0x02
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR                    0x03
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR                  0x04
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST                 0x05
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION                  0x06
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT                    0x07
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK                     0x08
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC                 0x09
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED                    0x0A
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND                 0x0B
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW                 0x0D
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE                      0x0E
+
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION          0x00
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY             0x04
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB               0x24
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED                    0x27
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR                       0x31
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND                    0x20
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT                 0x3A
+
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER                      0x00
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED             0x01
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED     0x02
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS             0x07
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
index 31d2c104d..2739fc99a 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
@@ -1,394 +1,394 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MassStorageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "MassStorageHost.h"
-
-/** Index of the highest available LUN (Logical Unit) in the attached Mass Storage Device */
-uint8_t MassStore_MaxLUNIndex;
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mass Storage Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		MassStorage_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in blocks from
- *  the device and print them to the serial port.
- */
-void MassStorage_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-				
-			puts_P(PSTR("Mass Storage Disk Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			/* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-			
-			/* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
-			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetMaxLUN(&MassStore_MaxLUNIndex)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{	
-				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Get Max LUN"), ErrorCode);
-
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Print number of LUNs detected in the attached device */
-			printf_P(PSTR("Total LUNs: %d - Using first LUN in device.\r\n"), (MassStore_MaxLUNIndex + 1));
-			
-			/* Reset the Mass Storage device interface, ready for use */
-			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_MassStorageReset()) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Mass Storage Reset"), ErrorCode);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Get sense data from the device - many devices will not accept any other commands until the sense data
-			 * is read - both on start-up and after a failed command */
-			SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData;
-			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_RequestSense(0, &SenseData)) != 0)
-			{
-				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Request Sense"), ErrorCode);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Set the prevent removal flag for the device, allowing it to be accessed */
-			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(0, true)) != 0)
-			{
-				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Prevent/Allow Medium Removal"), ErrorCode);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			/* Get inquiry data from the device */
-			SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData;
-			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_Inquiry(0, &InquiryData)) != 0)
-			{
-				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Inquiry"), ErrorCode);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			/* Print vendor and product names of attached device */
-			printf_P(PSTR("Vendor \"%.8s\", Product \"%.16s\"\r\n"), InquiryData.VendorID, InquiryData.ProductID);
-						
-			/* Wait until disk ready */
-			puts_P(PSTR("Waiting until ready.."));
-
-			for (;;)
-			{
-				Serial_TxByte('.');
-
-				/* Abort if device removed */
-				if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-				  break;
-
-				/* Check to see if the attached device is ready for new commands */
-				ErrorCode = MassStore_TestUnitReady(0);
-				  
-				/* If attached device is ready, abort the loop */
-				if (!(ErrorCode))
-				  break;
-
-				/* If an error other than a logical command failure (indicating device busy) returned, abort */
-				if (ErrorCode != MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED)
-				{
-					ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Test Unit Ready"), ErrorCode);
-
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("\r\nRetrieving Capacity... "));
-
-			/* Create new structure for the disk's capacity in blocks and block size */
-			SCSI_Capacity_t DiskCapacity;
-
-			/* Retrieve disk capacity */
-			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadCapacity(0, &DiskCapacity)) != 0)
-			{
-				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Capacity"), ErrorCode);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Display the disk capacity in blocks * block size bytes */
-			printf_P(PSTR("%lu blocks of %lu bytes.\r\n"), DiskCapacity.Blocks, DiskCapacity.BlockSize);
-
-			/* Create a new buffer capable of holding a single block from the device */
-			uint8_t BlockBuffer[DiskCapacity.BlockSize];
-
-			/* Read in the first 512 byte block from the device */
-			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, 0x00000000, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0)
-			{
-				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), ErrorCode);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			puts_P(PSTR("\r\nContents of first block:\r\n"));
-
-			/* Print out the first block in both HEX and ASCII, 16 bytes per line */
-			for (uint16_t Chunk = 0; Chunk < (DiskCapacity.BlockSize >> 4); Chunk++)
-			{
-				/* Pointer to the start of the current 16-byte chunk in the read block of data */
-				uint8_t* ChunkPtr = &BlockBuffer[Chunk << 4];
-				
-				/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in HEX format */
-				for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
-				{
-					char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
-				
-					printf_P(PSTR("%.2X "), CurrByte);
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("    "));
-
-				/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in ASCII format */
-				for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
-				{
-					char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
-				
-					putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
-				}
-				
-				puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
-			}
-			
-			puts_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nPress board button to read entire ASCII contents of disk...\r\n\r\n"));
-			
-			/* Wait for the board button to be pressed */
-			while (!(Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
-			{
-				/* Abort if device removed */
-				if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-				  break;
-			}
-
-			/* Abort if device removed */
-			if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-			  break;
-			
-			/* Print out the entire disk contents in ASCII format */
-			for (uint32_t CurrBlockAddress = 0; CurrBlockAddress < DiskCapacity.Blocks; CurrBlockAddress++)
-			{
-				/* Read in the next block of data from the device */
-				if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, CurrBlockAddress, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0)
-				{
-					ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), ErrorCode);
-					
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;
-				}
-
-				/* Send the ASCII data in the read in block to the serial port */
-				for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DiskCapacity.BlockSize; Byte++)
-				{
-					char CurrByte = BlockBuffer[Byte];
-					
-					putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
-				}
-
-				/* Abort if device removed */
-				if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-				  break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Indicate device no longer busy */
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-			
-			/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Indicates that a communication error has occurred with the attached Mass Storage Device,
- *  printing error codes to the serial port and waiting until the device is removed before
- *  continuing.
- *
- *  \param[in] CommandString  ASCII string located in PROGMEM space indicating what operation failed
- *  \param[in] ErrorCode      Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully
- */
-void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	if (ErrorCode == MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED)
-	{
-		/* Display the error code */
-		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "SCSI command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString);
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Display the error code */
-		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString);
-		printf_P(PSTR("  -- Error Code: %d" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);	
-	}
-
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	/* Indicate device error via the status LEDs */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MassStorageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MassStorageHost.h"
+
+/** Index of the highest available LUN (Logical Unit) in the attached Mass Storage Device */
+uint8_t MassStore_MaxLUNIndex;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mass Storage Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MassStorage_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in blocks from
+ *  the device and print them to the serial port.
+ */
+void MassStorage_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+				
+			puts_P(PSTR("Mass Storage Disk Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			/* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+			
+			/* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetMaxLUN(&MassStore_MaxLUNIndex)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{	
+				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Get Max LUN"), ErrorCode);
+
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Print number of LUNs detected in the attached device */
+			printf_P(PSTR("Total LUNs: %d - Using first LUN in device.\r\n"), (MassStore_MaxLUNIndex + 1));
+			
+			/* Reset the Mass Storage device interface, ready for use */
+			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_MassStorageReset()) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Mass Storage Reset"), ErrorCode);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Get sense data from the device - many devices will not accept any other commands until the sense data
+			 * is read - both on start-up and after a failed command */
+			SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData;
+			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_RequestSense(0, &SenseData)) != 0)
+			{
+				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Request Sense"), ErrorCode);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Set the prevent removal flag for the device, allowing it to be accessed */
+			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(0, true)) != 0)
+			{
+				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Prevent/Allow Medium Removal"), ErrorCode);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Get inquiry data from the device */
+			SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData;
+			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_Inquiry(0, &InquiryData)) != 0)
+			{
+				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Inquiry"), ErrorCode);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Print vendor and product names of attached device */
+			printf_P(PSTR("Vendor \"%.8s\", Product \"%.16s\"\r\n"), InquiryData.VendorID, InquiryData.ProductID);
+						
+			/* Wait until disk ready */
+			puts_P(PSTR("Waiting until ready.."));
+
+			for (;;)
+			{
+				Serial_TxByte('.');
+
+				/* Abort if device removed */
+				if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+				  break;
+
+				/* Check to see if the attached device is ready for new commands */
+				ErrorCode = MassStore_TestUnitReady(0);
+				  
+				/* If attached device is ready, abort the loop */
+				if (!(ErrorCode))
+				  break;
+
+				/* If an error other than a logical command failure (indicating device busy) returned, abort */
+				if (ErrorCode != MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED)
+				{
+					ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Test Unit Ready"), ErrorCode);
+
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("\r\nRetrieving Capacity... "));
+
+			/* Create new structure for the disk's capacity in blocks and block size */
+			SCSI_Capacity_t DiskCapacity;
+
+			/* Retrieve disk capacity */
+			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadCapacity(0, &DiskCapacity)) != 0)
+			{
+				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Capacity"), ErrorCode);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Display the disk capacity in blocks * block size bytes */
+			printf_P(PSTR("%lu blocks of %lu bytes.\r\n"), DiskCapacity.Blocks, DiskCapacity.BlockSize);
+
+			/* Create a new buffer capable of holding a single block from the device */
+			uint8_t BlockBuffer[DiskCapacity.BlockSize];
+
+			/* Read in the first 512 byte block from the device */
+			if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, 0x00000000, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0)
+			{
+				ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), ErrorCode);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			puts_P(PSTR("\r\nContents of first block:\r\n"));
+
+			/* Print out the first block in both HEX and ASCII, 16 bytes per line */
+			for (uint16_t Chunk = 0; Chunk < (DiskCapacity.BlockSize >> 4); Chunk++)
+			{
+				/* Pointer to the start of the current 16-byte chunk in the read block of data */
+				uint8_t* ChunkPtr = &BlockBuffer[Chunk << 4];
+				
+				/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in HEX format */
+				for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
+				{
+					char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
+				
+					printf_P(PSTR("%.2X "), CurrByte);
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("    "));
+
+				/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in ASCII format */
+				for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
+				{
+					char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
+				
+					putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
+				}
+				
+				puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+			}
+			
+			puts_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nPress board button to read entire ASCII contents of disk...\r\n\r\n"));
+			
+			/* Wait for the board button to be pressed */
+			while (!(Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
+			{
+				/* Abort if device removed */
+				if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+				  break;
+			}
+
+			/* Abort if device removed */
+			if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+			  break;
+			
+			/* Print out the entire disk contents in ASCII format */
+			for (uint32_t CurrBlockAddress = 0; CurrBlockAddress < DiskCapacity.Blocks; CurrBlockAddress++)
+			{
+				/* Read in the next block of data from the device */
+				if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, CurrBlockAddress, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0)
+				{
+					ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), ErrorCode);
+					
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				/* Send the ASCII data in the read in block to the serial port */
+				for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DiskCapacity.BlockSize; Byte++)
+				{
+					char CurrByte = BlockBuffer[Byte];
+					
+					putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
+				}
+
+				/* Abort if device removed */
+				if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+				  break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Indicate device no longer busy */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+			
+			/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Indicates that a communication error has occurred with the attached Mass Storage Device,
+ *  printing error codes to the serial port and waiting until the device is removed before
+ *  continuing.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CommandString  ASCII string located in PROGMEM space indicating what operation failed
+ *  \param[in] ErrorCode      Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully
+ */
+void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	if (ErrorCode == MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED)
+	{
+		/* Display the error code */
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "SCSI command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Display the error code */
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString);
+		printf_P(PSTR("  -- Error Code: %d" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);	
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	/* Indicate device error via the status LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
index 0d92fd533..14d8d9734 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
@@ -1,88 +1,88 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MassStoreHost.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
-#define _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		#include <ctype.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/MassStoreCommands.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void MassStorage_Task(void);
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-		void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, uint8_t ErrorCode);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStoreHost.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
+#define _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <ctype.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/MassStoreCommands.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void MassStorage_Task(void);
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, uint8_t ErrorCode);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
index bb494cfbe..74578b6e2 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
@@ -1,67 +1,67 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mass Storage Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Bulk Only</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
- *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
- *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
- *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Mass Storage host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Mass Storage host, for USB storage devices
- *  using the standard Mass Storage USB profile.
- *  
- *  The first 512 bytes (boot sector) of an attached disk's memory will be dumped
- *  out of the serial port in HEX and ASCII form when it is attached to the AT90USB1287
- *  AVR. The device will then wait for HWB to be pressed, whereupon the entire ASCII contents
- *  of the disk will be dumped to the serial port.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk Only</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Mass Storage host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mass Storage host, for USB storage devices
+ *  using the standard Mass Storage USB profile.
+ *  
+ *  The first 512 bytes (boot sector) of an attached disk's memory will be dumped
+ *  out of the serial port in HEX and ASCII form when it is attached to the AT90USB1287
+ *  AVR. The device will then wait for HWB to be pressed, whereupon the entire ASCII contents
+ *  of the disk will be dumped to the serial port.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/makefile
index c6835a68c..1495c71a7 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/makefile
@@ -1,738 +1,738 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MassStorageHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS=5000
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  Lib/MassStoreCommands.c                                     \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MassStorageHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS=5000
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  Lib/MassStoreCommands.c                                     \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
index 786aa1d00..816c23321 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,149 +1,149 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextMouseInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	/* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoEndpointFound;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-	/* Configure the mouse data pipe */
-	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-	                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	/* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == MOUSE_CLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
- *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		/* Check if the current Endpoint descriptor is of type IN */
-		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextMouseInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	/* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoEndpointFound;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+	/* Configure the mouse data pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+	                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	/* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == MOUSE_CLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		/* Check if the current Endpoint descriptor is of type IN */
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
index e092a4534..698bdbd33 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,69 +1,69 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "MouseHost.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
-		#define MOUSE_CLASS                 0x03
-
-		/** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */
-		#define MOUSE_PROTOCOL              0x02
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
-
-		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "MouseHost.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+		#define MOUSE_CLASS                 0x03
+
+		/** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */
+		#define MOUSE_PROTOCOL              0x02
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf
index d176939ef..47a8e19fd 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
index 5cf5e4485..6e7b284df 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
@@ -1,270 +1,270 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MouseHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "MouseHost.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Mouse_HID_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
- *  contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
- */
-void ReadNextReport(void)
-{
-	USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport;
-	uint8_t                LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-
-	/* Select mouse data pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE);	
-
-	/* Unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
-	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
-	{
-		/* No packet received (no movement), turn off LEDs */
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
-	
-		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-			
-		return;
-	}
-
-	/* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
-	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{
-		/* Read in mouse report data */
-		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MouseReport, sizeof(MouseReport));				
-
-		/* Alter status LEDs according to mouse X movement */
-		if (MouseReport.X > 0)
-		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
-		else if (MouseReport.X < 0)
-		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
-			
-		/* Alter status LEDs according to mouse Y movement */
-		if (MouseReport.Y > 0)
-		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
-		else if (MouseReport.Y < 0)
-		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
-
-		/* Alter status LEDs according to mouse button position */
-		if (MouseReport.Button)
-		  LEDMask  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-		
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-		
-		/* Print mouse report data through the serial port */
-		printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X,
-													  MouseReport.Y,
-													  MouseReport.Button);
-	}
-
-	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Refreeze mouse data pipe */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
- *  HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
- */
-void Mouse_HID_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	/* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error status */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error status */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* HID class request to set the mouse protocol to the Boot Protocol */
-			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-				{
-					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-					.bRequest      = REQ_SetProtocol,
-					.wValue        = 0,
-					.wIndex        = 0,
-					.wLength       = 0,
-				};
-
-			/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-			/* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error status */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			/* If a report has been received, read and process it */
-			ReadNextReport();
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MouseHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "MouseHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Mouse_HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
+ *  contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
+ */
+void ReadNextReport(void)
+{
+	USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport;
+	uint8_t                LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+	/* Select mouse data pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE);	
+
+	/* Unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		/* No packet received (no movement), turn off LEDs */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+	
+		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+			
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
+	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		/* Read in mouse report data */
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MouseReport, sizeof(MouseReport));				
+
+		/* Alter status LEDs according to mouse X movement */
+		if (MouseReport.X > 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+		else if (MouseReport.X < 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+			
+		/* Alter status LEDs according to mouse Y movement */
+		if (MouseReport.Y > 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+		else if (MouseReport.Y < 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+		/* Alter status LEDs according to mouse button position */
+		if (MouseReport.Button)
+		  LEDMask  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+		
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+		
+		/* Print mouse report data through the serial port */
+		printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X,
+													  MouseReport.Y,
+													  MouseReport.Button);
+	}
+
+	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Refreeze mouse data pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ *  HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void Mouse_HID_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error status */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error status */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* HID class request to set the mouse protocol to the Boot Protocol */
+			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+				{
+					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+					.bRequest      = REQ_SetProtocol,
+					.wValue        = 0,
+					.wIndex        = 0,
+					.wLength       = 0,
+				};
+
+			/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+			/* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error status */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			/* If a report has been received, read and process it */
+			ReadNextReport();
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
index dcf235e76..4bb8791dc 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
@@ -1,95 +1,95 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
-#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Pipe number for the mouse data IN pipe */
-		#define MOUSE_DATAPIPE            1
-		
-		/** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */
-		#define REQ_SetProtocol           0x0B
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse */
-			int8_t  X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse */
-			int8_t  Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse */
-		} USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void Mouse_HID_Task(void);
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-		void ReadNextReport(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe number for the mouse data IN pipe */
+		#define MOUSE_DATAPIPE            1
+		
+		/** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */
+		#define REQ_SetProtocol           0x0B
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse */
+			int8_t  X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse */
+			int8_t  Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse */
+		} USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Mouse_HID_Task(void);
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ReadNextReport(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
index afe948fd9..6926e99b3 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
@@ -1,73 +1,73 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
- *  the standard mouse HID profile.
- *  
- *  Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs,
- *  as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and
- *  button status information.
- *  
- *  This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
- *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
- *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
- *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
- *  MouseHostWithParser demo application.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.	
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
+ *  the standard mouse HID profile.
+ *  
+ *  Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs,
+ *  as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and
+ *  button status information.
+ *  
+ *  This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ *  MouseHostWithParser demo application.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.	
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/makefile
index 293579776..c76908c88 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/makefile
@@ -1,736 +1,736 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MouseHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MouseHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
index f383cb110..70766e9e4 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,166 +1,166 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref MouseHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-
-	/* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextMouseInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the mouse interface's HID descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoHIDDescriptorFound;
-	}
-
-	/* Save the HID report size for later use */
-	HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength;
-	
-	/* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoEndpointFound;
-	}
-	
-	/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-	/* Configure the mouse data pipe */
-	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-	                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == MOUSE_CLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
- *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID)
-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	else
-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;	  
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref MouseHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	/* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextMouseInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the mouse interface's HID descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoHIDDescriptorFound;
+	}
+
+	/* Save the HID report size for later use */
+	HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength;
+	
+	/* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoEndpointFound;
+	}
+	
+	/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+	/* Configure the mouse data pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+	                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == MOUSE_CLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;	  
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
index 69753aba7..a4ed974ec 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "HIDReport.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
-		#define MOUSE_CLASS                 0x03
-
-		/** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */
-		#define MOUSE_PROTOCOL              0x02
-		
-		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */
-		#define DTYPE_HID                   0x21
-
-		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */
-		#define DTYPE_Report                0x22
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum MouseHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoHIDDescriptorFound            = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
-
-		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+		#define MOUSE_CLASS                 0x03
+
+		/** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */
+		#define MOUSE_PROTOCOL              0x02
+		
+		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                   0x21
+
+		/** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */
+		#define DTYPE_Report                0x22
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum MouseHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDDescriptorFound            = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
index be3744aab..32c07056a 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
index cd8a0498f..f551f2f4c 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
@@ -1,110 +1,110 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "HIDReport.h"
-
-/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
-uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
-
-/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
-HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
-
-
-/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
- *  structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
- *
- *  \return  A value from the MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
-{
-	/* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
-	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
-	
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
-			.wValue        = (DTYPE_Report << 8),
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = HIDReportSize,
-		};
-
-	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	/* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
-	if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ParseControlError;
-
-	/* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
-	if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
-	  return ParseError;
-	
-	return ParseSuccessful;
-}
-
-/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
- *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
- *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
- *  have occupied).
- *
- *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
-{
-	bool IsMouse = false;
-
-	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
-	 * Mouse Usage is found - this prevents Joysticks, which use identical descriptors except for the Joystick usage
-	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a mouse
-	 */
-	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
-	{
-		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
-		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_MOUSE))
-		{
-			IsMouse = true;
-			break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* If a collection with the mouse usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
-	if (!IsMouse)
-	  return false;
-  
-	/* Check the attributes of the current mouse item - see if we are interested in it or not;
-	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
-	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
-	 */
-	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
-	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
+uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+
+/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
+ *  structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \return  A value from the MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
+{
+	/* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
+	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
+	
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (DTYPE_Report << 8),
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = HIDReportSize,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	/* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
+	if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ParseControlError;
+
+	/* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
+	if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
+	  return ParseError;
+	
+	return ParseSuccessful;
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem)
+{
+	bool IsMouse = false;
+
+	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
+	 * Mouse Usage is found - this prevents Joysticks, which use identical descriptors except for the Joystick usage
+	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a mouse
+	 */
+	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
+	{
+		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_MOUSE))
+		{
+			IsMouse = true;
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If a collection with the mouse usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
+	if (!IsMouse)
+	  return false;
+  
+	/* Check the attributes of the current mouse item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
+	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
+	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
index ec048909d..d471c5dc6 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for HIDReport.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
-#define _HID_REPORT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h>
-		
-		#include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Mouse */
-		#define USAGE_MOUSE                 0x02
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */
-		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */
-		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */
-		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */
-		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
-
-		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Scroll Wheel movement */
-		#define USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL          0x38
-		
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */
-		enum MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
-		{
-			ParseSuccessful         = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
-			ParseError              = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
-			ParseControlError       = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
-		};
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a HID descriptor. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t  Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-				
-			uint16_t                 HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */
-			uint8_t                  CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */
-		
-			uint8_t                  TotalHIDDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */
-
-			uint8_t                  HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */
-			uint16_t                 HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */
-		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
-		extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
-		
-		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HIDReport.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
+#define _HID_REPORT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h>
+		
+		#include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Mouse */
+		#define USAGE_MOUSE                 0x02
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */
+		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */
+		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Scroll Wheel movement */
+		#define USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL          0x38
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */
+		enum MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
+		{
+			ParseSuccessful         = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
+			ParseError              = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
+			ParseControlError       = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
+		};
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a HID descriptor. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t  Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+				
+			uint16_t                 HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */
+			uint8_t                  CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */
+		
+			uint8_t                  TotalHIDDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */
+
+			uint8_t                  HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */
+			uint16_t                 HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */
+		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+		extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
+		
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
index e13f5f48e..efe1421a2 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
@@ -1,321 +1,321 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MouseHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Mouse_HID_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
- *  the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
- */
-void Mouse_HID_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	/* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-		
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			printf_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report (Size %d Bytes).\r\n"), HIDReportSize);
-
-			/* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
-			if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
-			{
-				puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
-
-				if (!(HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems))
-					puts_P(PSTR("Not a valid Mouse." ESC_FG_WHITE));
-				else
-					printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-			
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			printf("Total Reports: %d\r\n", HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports);
-
-			for (uint8_t i = 0; i < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; i++)
-			{
-				HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[i];
-				
-				uint8_t ReportSizeInBits      = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In];
-				uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits     = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out];
-				uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature];
-
-				/* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */
-				printf_P(PSTR("  + Report ID %d - In: %d bytes, Out: %d bytes, Feature: %d bytes\r\n"),
-				         CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID,
-				         ((ReportSizeInBits      >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits      & 0x07) != 0)),
-				         ((ReportSizeOutBits     >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits     & 0x07) != 0)),
-				         ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0)));
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			/* Select and unfreeze mouse data pipe */
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE);	
-			Pipe_Unfreeze();
-			
-			/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
-			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
-			{
-				/* Check if data has been received from the attached mouse */
-				if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-				{
-					/* Create buffer big enough for the report */
-					uint8_t MouseReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
-
-					/* Load in the mouse report */
-					Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(MouseReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe());
-				
-					/* Process the read in mouse report from the device */
-					ProcessMouseReport(MouseReport);
-				}
-				
-				/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
-				Pipe_ClearIN();
-			}
-
-			/* Freeze mouse data pipe */
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Processes a read HID report from an attached mouse, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
- *  as required and displays movement and button presses on the board LEDs.
- *
- *  \param[in] MouseReport  Pointer to a HID report from an attached mouse device
- */
-void ProcessMouseReport(uint8_t* MouseReport)
-{
-	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
-
-	/* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for mouse X/Y/button reports */
-	for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
-	{
-		/* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
-		HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
-		
-		bool FoundData;
-
-		if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
-			(ReportItem->ItemType                     == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-		{
-			/* Get the mouse button value */
-			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem);
-			
-			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
-			if (!(FoundData))
-			  continue;
-
-			/* If button is pressed, all LEDs are turned on */
-			if (ReportItem->Value)
-			  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-		}
-		else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
-				 (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage  == USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL)       &&
-				 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-		{
-			/* Get the mouse wheel value if it is contained within the current 
-			 * report, if not, skip to the next item in the parser list
-			 */
-			if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem)))
-			  continue;							  
-
-			int16_t WheelDelta = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
-			
-			if (WheelDelta)
-			  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | ((WheelDelta > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4));
-		}
-		else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
-				 ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
-				  (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
-				 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
-		{
-			/* Get the mouse relative position value */
-			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem);
-			
-			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
-			if (!(FoundData))
-			  continue;
-			  
-			int16_t DeltaMovement = (int16_t)(ReportItem->Value << (16 - ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize));
-			
-			/* Determine if the report is for the X or Y delta movement */
-			if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
-			{
-				/* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */
-				if (DeltaMovement)
-				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */
-				if (DeltaMovement)
-				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	
-	/* Display the button information on the board LEDs */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MouseHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Mouse_HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ *  the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void Mouse_HID_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+		
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			printf_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report (Size %d Bytes).\r\n"), HIDReportSize);
+
+			/* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
+			if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
+			{
+				puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
+
+				if (!(HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems))
+					puts_P(PSTR("Not a valid Mouse." ESC_FG_WHITE));
+				else
+					printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+			
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			printf("Total Reports: %d\r\n", HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports);
+
+			for (uint8_t i = 0; i < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; i++)
+			{
+				HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[i];
+				
+				uint8_t ReportSizeInBits      = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In];
+				uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits     = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out];
+				uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature];
+
+				/* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */
+				printf_P(PSTR("  + Report ID %d - In: %d bytes, Out: %d bytes, Feature: %d bytes\r\n"),
+				         CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID,
+				         ((ReportSizeInBits      >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits      & 0x07) != 0)),
+				         ((ReportSizeOutBits     >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits     & 0x07) != 0)),
+				         ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0)));
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			/* Select and unfreeze mouse data pipe */
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE);	
+			Pipe_Unfreeze();
+			
+			/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+			{
+				/* Check if data has been received from the attached mouse */
+				if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+				{
+					/* Create buffer big enough for the report */
+					uint8_t MouseReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+					/* Load in the mouse report */
+					Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(MouseReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe());
+				
+					/* Process the read in mouse report from the device */
+					ProcessMouseReport(MouseReport);
+				}
+				
+				/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+				Pipe_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			/* Freeze mouse data pipe */
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes a read HID report from an attached mouse, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
+ *  as required and displays movement and button presses on the board LEDs.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MouseReport  Pointer to a HID report from an attached mouse device
+ */
+void ProcessMouseReport(uint8_t* MouseReport)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+	/* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for mouse X/Y/button reports */
+	for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+	{
+		/* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
+		HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+		
+		bool FoundData;
+
+		if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
+			(ReportItem->ItemType                     == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+		{
+			/* Get the mouse button value */
+			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem);
+			
+			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+			if (!(FoundData))
+			  continue;
+
+			/* If button is pressed, all LEDs are turned on */
+			if (ReportItem->Value)
+			  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+		}
+		else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+				 (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage  == USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL)       &&
+				 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+		{
+			/* Get the mouse wheel value if it is contained within the current 
+			 * report, if not, skip to the next item in the parser list
+			 */
+			if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem)))
+			  continue;							  
+
+			int16_t WheelDelta = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
+			
+			if (WheelDelta)
+			  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | ((WheelDelta > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4));
+		}
+		else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+				 ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
+				  (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
+				 (ReportItem->ItemType                == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+		{
+			/* Get the mouse relative position value */
+			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem);
+			
+			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+			if (!(FoundData))
+			  continue;
+			  
+			int16_t DeltaMovement = (int16_t)(ReportItem->Value << (16 - ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize));
+			
+			/* Determine if the report is for the X or Y delta movement */
+			if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
+			{
+				/* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */
+				if (DeltaMovement)
+				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */
+				if (DeltaMovement)
+				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Display the button information on the board LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
 }
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
index 10cd8ecef..bcfa8884f 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
@@ -1,84 +1,84 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MouseHostWithParser.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
-#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		#include "HIDReport.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Pipe number for the mouse report data pipe */
-		#define MOUSE_DATAPIPE            1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void Mouse_HID_Task(void);
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-		void ProcessMouseReport(uint8_t* MouseReport);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHostWithParser.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe number for the mouse report data pipe */
+		#define MOUSE_DATAPIPE            1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Mouse_HID_Task(void);
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ProcessMouseReport(uint8_t* MouseReport);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
index 3eec2a57d..c2d04a05a 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Mouse Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
- *  the standard mouse HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
- *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB mice. This
- *  demo supports mice with a single HID report.
- *  
- *  Mouse and scroll wheel movement and button presses are displayed
- *  on the board LEDs. On connection to a USB mouse, the report items
- *  will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the USART
- *  before the mouse is fully enumerated.
- *  
- *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
+ *  the standard mouse HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
+ *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB mice. This
+ *  demo supports mice with a single HID report.
+ *  
+ *  Mouse and scroll wheel movement and button presses are displayed
+ *  on the board LEDs. On connection to a USB mouse, the report items
+ *  will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the USART
+ *  before the mouse is fully enumerated.
+ *  
+ *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
index 66acc00b0..eb35435b7 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -1,738 +1,738 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MouseHostWithParser
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  HIDReport.c                                                 \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MouseHostWithParser
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  HIDReport.c                                                 \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
index f7fe2518b..1e0f1be74 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,169 +1,169 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Interface number for the bidirectional Printer interface found within the device. */
-uint8_t PrinterInterfaceNumber;
-
-/** Interface Alternate Setting number for the bidirectional Printer interface found within the device. */
-uint8_t PrinterAltSetting;
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a bidirectional Printer interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref PrinterHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the printer interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, DComp_NextBidirectionalPrinterInterface))
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoInterfaceFound;
-	}
-	
-	PrinterInterfaceNumber = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).InterfaceNumber;
-	PrinterAltSetting      = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).AlternateSetting;
-
-	/* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the printer interface */
-	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE) | (1 << PRINTER_DATA_IN_PIPE)))
-	{
-		/* Fetch the next bulk endpoint from the current printer interface */
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, DComp_NextPrinterInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint))
-		{
-			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-			return NoEndpointFound;
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint, set appropriate globals */
-		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			/* Configure the data IN pipe */
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PRINTER_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-			                   PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-			Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
-
-			/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
-			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << PRINTER_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-			                   PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-			/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
-			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-		}		
-	}
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Bidirectional Printer Interface descriptor of the current Printer interface,
- *  aborting the search if the end of the descriptors is found.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextBidirectionalPrinterInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == PRINTER_CLASS)    &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == PRINTER_SUBCLASS) &&
-			(DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == PRINTER_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the current Printer interface, aborting the
- *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextPrinterInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-
-		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */
-		if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Interface number for the bidirectional Printer interface found within the device. */
+uint8_t PrinterInterfaceNumber;
+
+/** Interface Alternate Setting number for the bidirectional Printer interface found within the device. */
+uint8_t PrinterAltSetting;
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a bidirectional Printer interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref PrinterHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the printer interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, DComp_NextBidirectionalPrinterInterface))
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoInterfaceFound;
+	}
+	
+	PrinterInterfaceNumber = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).InterfaceNumber;
+	PrinterAltSetting      = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).AlternateSetting;
+
+	/* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the printer interface */
+	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE) | (1 << PRINTER_DATA_IN_PIPE)))
+	{
+		/* Fetch the next bulk endpoint from the current printer interface */
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, DComp_NextPrinterInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint))
+		{
+			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+			return NoEndpointFound;
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint, set appropriate globals */
+		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			/* Configure the data IN pipe */
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PRINTER_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+			                   PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+			Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+			/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
+			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << PRINTER_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+			                   PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+			/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
+			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+		}		
+	}
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Bidirectional Printer Interface descriptor of the current Printer interface,
+ *  aborting the search if the end of the descriptors is found.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextBidirectionalPrinterInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == PRINTER_CLASS)    &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == PRINTER_SUBCLASS) &&
+			(DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == PRINTER_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the current Printer interface, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextPrinterInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */
+		if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
index 471cbb5f3..b28a3379f 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "PrinterHost.h"
-		#include "Lib/PrinterCommands.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the Printer Device class */
-		#define PRINTER_CLASS                    0x07
-
-		/** Interface Subclass value for the Printer Device class */
-		#define PRINTER_SUBCLASS                 0x01
-
-		/** Interface Protocol value for a Bidirectional communication encapsulation */
-		#define PRINTER_PROTOCOL                 0x02
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum PrinterHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoInterfaceFound                = 4, /**< A compatible printer interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< The printer data endpoints were not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-		};
-	
-	/* External Variables: */
-		/** Interface index of the Bidirectional Printer interface within the device, once the Configuration
-		 *  Descriptor has been processed.
-		 */
-		uint8_t PrinterInterfaceNumber;
-		
-		/** Interface Alternate Setting index of the Bidirectional Printer interface within the device, once
-		 *  the Configuration Descriptor has been processed.
-		 */
-		uint8_t PrinterAltSetting;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);	
-
-		uint8_t DComp_NextBidirectionalPrinterInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextPrinterInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "PrinterHost.h"
+		#include "Lib/PrinterCommands.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Printer Device class */
+		#define PRINTER_CLASS                    0x07
+
+		/** Interface Subclass value for the Printer Device class */
+		#define PRINTER_SUBCLASS                 0x01
+
+		/** Interface Protocol value for a Bidirectional communication encapsulation */
+		#define PRINTER_PROTOCOL                 0x02
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum PrinterHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoInterfaceFound                = 4, /**< A compatible printer interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< The printer data endpoints were not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+		};
+	
+	/* External Variables: */
+		/** Interface index of the Bidirectional Printer interface within the device, once the Configuration
+		 *  Descriptor has been processed.
+		 */
+		uint8_t PrinterInterfaceNumber;
+		
+		/** Interface Alternate Setting index of the Bidirectional Printer interface within the device, once
+		 *  the Configuration Descriptor has been processed.
+		 */
+		uint8_t PrinterAltSetting;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);	
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextBidirectionalPrinterInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextPrinterInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Doxygen.conf
index f5477f9bb..d63484a1f 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Printer Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Printer Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.c
index 79cfc0dec..5f3effa7b 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.c
@@ -1,163 +1,163 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Printer Device commands, to send/receive data to and from an attached USB
- *  printer, and to send and receive Printer Class control requests.
- */
-
-#include "PrinterCommands.h"
-
-/** Sends the given data directly to the printer via the data endpoints, for the sending of print commands in printer
- *  languages accepted by the attached printer (e.g. PCL).
- *
- *  \param[in] PrinterCommands  Pointer to the data to send to the attached printer
- *  \param[in] CommandSize  Size of the data to send to the attached printer
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t Printer_SendData(const void* const PrinterCommands, const uint16_t CommandSize)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(PrinterCommands, CommandSize)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_ClearOUT();
-	while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
-	{
-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-	}
-	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-/** Issues a Printer class Get Device ID command to the attached device, to retrieve the device ID string (which indicates
- *  the accepted printer languages, the printer's model and other pertinent information).
- *
- *  \param[out] DeviceIDString Pointer to the destination where the returned string should be stored
- *  \param[in] BufferSize  Size in bytes of the allocated buffer for the returned Device ID string
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t Printer_GetDeviceID(char* DeviceIDString, const uint16_t BufferSize)
-{
-	uint8_t  ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-	uint16_t DeviceIDStringLength = 0;
-
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDeviceID,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = sizeof(DeviceIDStringLength),
-		};
-		
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&DeviceIDStringLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	  
-	if (!(DeviceIDStringLength))
-	{
-		DeviceIDString[0] = 0x00;
-		return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-	}
-	
-	DeviceIDStringLength = SwapEndian_16(DeviceIDStringLength);
-
-	if (DeviceIDStringLength > BufferSize)
-	  DeviceIDStringLength = BufferSize;
-
-	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = DeviceIDStringLength;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DeviceIDString)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	  
-	/* Move string back two characters to remove the string length value from the start of the array */
-	memmove(&DeviceIDString[0], &DeviceIDString[2], DeviceIDStringLength - 2);
-
-	DeviceIDString[DeviceIDStringLength - 2] = 0x00;
-	
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-/** Issues a Printer class Get Port Status command to the attached device, to retrieve the current status flags of the
- *  printer.
- *
- *  \param[out] PortStatus  Pointer to the destination where the printer's status flag values should be stored
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t Printer_GetPortStatus(uint8_t* const PortStatus)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			bRequest:      REQ_GetPortStatus,
-			wValue:        0,
-			wIndex:        0,
-			wLength:       sizeof(uint8_t),
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(PortStatus);
-}
-
-/** Issues a Printer class Soft Reset command to the attached device, to reset the printer ready for new input without
- *  physically cycling the printer's power.
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t Printer_SoftReset(void)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_SoftReset,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = 0,
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
-}
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Printer Device commands, to send/receive data to and from an attached USB
+ *  printer, and to send and receive Printer Class control requests.
+ */
+
+#include "PrinterCommands.h"
+
+/** Sends the given data directly to the printer via the data endpoints, for the sending of print commands in printer
+ *  languages accepted by the attached printer (e.g. PCL).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] PrinterCommands  Pointer to the data to send to the attached printer
+ *  \param[in] CommandSize  Size of the data to send to the attached printer
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t Printer_SendData(const void* const PrinterCommands, const uint16_t CommandSize)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(PrinterCommands, CommandSize)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+	{
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	}
+	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Issues a Printer class Get Device ID command to the attached device, to retrieve the device ID string (which indicates
+ *  the accepted printer languages, the printer's model and other pertinent information).
+ *
+ *  \param[out] DeviceIDString Pointer to the destination where the returned string should be stored
+ *  \param[in] BufferSize  Size in bytes of the allocated buffer for the returned Device ID string
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t Printer_GetDeviceID(char* DeviceIDString, const uint16_t BufferSize)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	uint16_t DeviceIDStringLength = 0;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDeviceID,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(DeviceIDStringLength),
+		};
+		
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&DeviceIDStringLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	  
+	if (!(DeviceIDStringLength))
+	{
+		DeviceIDString[0] = 0x00;
+		return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	}
+	
+	DeviceIDStringLength = SwapEndian_16(DeviceIDStringLength);
+
+	if (DeviceIDStringLength > BufferSize)
+	  DeviceIDStringLength = BufferSize;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = DeviceIDStringLength;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DeviceIDString)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	  
+	/* Move string back two characters to remove the string length value from the start of the array */
+	memmove(&DeviceIDString[0], &DeviceIDString[2], DeviceIDStringLength - 2);
+
+	DeviceIDString[DeviceIDStringLength - 2] = 0x00;
+	
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Issues a Printer class Get Port Status command to the attached device, to retrieve the current status flags of the
+ *  printer.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] PortStatus  Pointer to the destination where the printer's status flag values should be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t Printer_GetPortStatus(uint8_t* const PortStatus)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			bRequest:      REQ_GetPortStatus,
+			wValue:        0,
+			wIndex:        0,
+			wLength:       sizeof(uint8_t),
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(PortStatus);
+}
+
+/** Issues a Printer class Soft Reset command to the attached device, to reset the printer ready for new input without
+ *  physically cycling the printer's power.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t Printer_SoftReset(void)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_SoftReset,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.h
index b7c0a9e02..d908aae6c 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.h
@@ -1,67 +1,67 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for PrinterCommands.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _PRINTER_COMMANDS_H_
-#define _PRINTER_COMMANDS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Printer class-specific request to retrieve the printer's ID string */
-		#define REQ_GetDeviceID              0
-
-		/** Printer class-specific request to retrieve the printer's virtual port status flags */
-		#define REQ_GetPortStatus            1
-
-		/** Printer class-specific request to soft-reset the device */
-		#define REQ_SoftReset                2
-
-		/** Pipe number of the Printer data IN pipe */
-		#define PRINTER_DATA_IN_PIPE         1
-
-		/** Pipe number of the Printer data OUT pipe */
-		#define PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE        2
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t Printer_SendData(const void* const PrinterCommands, const uint16_t CommandSize);
-		uint8_t Printer_GetDeviceID(char* DeviceIDString, const uint16_t BufferSize);
-		uint8_t Printer_GetPortStatus(uint8_t* PortStatus);
-		uint8_t Printer_SoftReset(void);
-	
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for PrinterCommands.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _PRINTER_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _PRINTER_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Printer class-specific request to retrieve the printer's ID string */
+		#define REQ_GetDeviceID              0
+
+		/** Printer class-specific request to retrieve the printer's virtual port status flags */
+		#define REQ_GetPortStatus            1
+
+		/** Printer class-specific request to soft-reset the device */
+		#define REQ_SoftReset                2
+
+		/** Pipe number of the Printer data IN pipe */
+		#define PRINTER_DATA_IN_PIPE         1
+
+		/** Pipe number of the Printer data OUT pipe */
+		#define PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE        2
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t Printer_SendData(const void* const PrinterCommands, const uint16_t CommandSize);
+		uint8_t Printer_GetDeviceID(char* DeviceIDString, const uint16_t BufferSize);
+		uint8_t Printer_GetPortStatus(uint8_t* PortStatus);
+		uint8_t Printer_SoftReset(void);
+	
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c
index a2c9fd863..b6f3efae3 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c
@@ -1,251 +1,251 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the PrinterHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "PrinterHost.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Printer Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		USB_Printer_Host();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(uint8_t ErrorCode, uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to send some test page
- *  data to the attached printer.
- */
-void USB_Printer_Host(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-			
-			/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);			
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-				
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Some printers use alternate settings to determine the communication protocol used - if so, send a SetInterface
-			 * request to switch to the interface alternate setting with the Bidirectional protocol */
-			if (PrinterAltSetting)
-			{
-				USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-					{
-						.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-						.bRequest      = REQ_SetInterface,
-						.wValue        = PrinterAltSetting,
-						.wIndex        = PrinterInterfaceNumber,
-						.wLength       = 0,
-					};
-					
-				if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				{
-					printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Interface).\r\n"
-					                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-					/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-					/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-					break;					
-				}
-			}
-			
-			puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device ID...\r\n"));
-		
-			char DeviceIDString[300];
-			if ((ErrorCode = Printer_GetDeviceID(DeviceIDString, sizeof(DeviceIDString))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Device ID).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			printf_P(PSTR("Printer Device ID: %s\r\n"), DeviceIDString);
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Printer Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			/* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-		
-			char  TestPageData[]    = "\033%-12345X\033E" "LUFA PCL Test Page" "\033E\033%-12345X";
-			uint16_t TestPageLength = strlen(TestPageData);
-		
-			printf_P(PSTR("Sending Test Page (%d bytes)...\r\n"), TestPageLength);
-
-			if ((ErrorCode = Printer_SendData(&TestPageData, TestPageLength)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Sending Test Page.\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Test Page Sent.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Indicate device no longer busy */
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the PrinterHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "PrinterHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Printer Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		USB_Printer_Host();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(uint8_t ErrorCode, uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to send some test page
+ *  data to the attached printer.
+ */
+void USB_Printer_Host(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+			
+			/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);			
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+				
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Some printers use alternate settings to determine the communication protocol used - if so, send a SetInterface
+			 * request to switch to the interface alternate setting with the Bidirectional protocol */
+			if (PrinterAltSetting)
+			{
+				USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+					{
+						.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+						.bRequest      = REQ_SetInterface,
+						.wValue        = PrinterAltSetting,
+						.wIndex        = PrinterInterfaceNumber,
+						.wLength       = 0,
+					};
+					
+				if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				{
+					printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Interface).\r\n"
+					                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+					/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+					LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+					/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+					USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+					break;					
+				}
+			}
+			
+			puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device ID...\r\n"));
+		
+			char DeviceIDString[300];
+			if ((ErrorCode = Printer_GetDeviceID(DeviceIDString, sizeof(DeviceIDString))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Device ID).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			printf_P(PSTR("Printer Device ID: %s\r\n"), DeviceIDString);
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Printer Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			/* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+		
+			char  TestPageData[]    = "\033%-12345X\033E" "LUFA PCL Test Page" "\033E\033%-12345X";
+			uint16_t TestPageLength = strlen(TestPageData);
+		
+			printf_P(PSTR("Sending Test Page (%d bytes)...\r\n"), TestPageLength);
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Printer_SendData(&TestPageData, TestPageLength)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Sending Test Page.\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Test Page Sent.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Indicate device no longer busy */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h
index 9b0bb5dda..99bbd4a66 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h
@@ -1,84 +1,84 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for PrinterHost.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
-#define _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		#include "Lib/PrinterCommands.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-	
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(uint8_t ErrorCode, uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void USB_Printer_Host(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for PrinterHost.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
+#define _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		#include "Lib/PrinterCommands.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+	
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(uint8_t ErrorCode, uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void USB_Printer_Host(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt
index 552a87828..04a3e0739 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt
@@ -1,62 +1,62 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Printer Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Printer Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Bidirectional Protocol</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Printer Class Specification \n
- *        PCL Language Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- *        Full Speed Mode</td>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Printer host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a USB Printer host, for USB printers using
- *  the bidirectional data encapsulation protocol and PCL language.
- *  
- *  Upon connection of a compatible printer, the printer's device ID is sent
- *  to the AVR's serial port, and a simple test page is printed using the PCL
- *  printer language.
- *  
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Printer Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Printer Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bidirectional Protocol</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Printer Class Specification \n
+ *        PCL Language Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Printer host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Printer host, for USB printers using
+ *  the bidirectional data encapsulation protocol and PCL language.
+ *  
+ *  Upon connection of a compatible printer, the printer's device ID is sent
+ *  to the AVR's serial port, and a simple test page is printed using the PCL
+ *  printer language.
+ *  
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/makefile
index 84178d552..38fd76d9f 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = PrinterHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  Lib/PrinterCommands.c                                       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = PrinterHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  Lib/PrinterCommands.c                                       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
index 5a173d6f4..97a38b4ac 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,245 +1,245 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
- 
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a RNDIS interface descriptor containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints, and an interrupt event endpoint.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref RNDISHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	/* Get the IN and OUT data and IN notification endpoints for the RNDIS interface */
-	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE) | (1 << RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN) | (1 << RNDIS_DATAPIPE_OUT)))
-	{
-		/* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current RNDIS interface */
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-		                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			/* Check to see if the control interface's notification pipe has been found, if so search for the data interface */
-			if (FoundEndpoints & (1 << RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE))
-			{
-				/* Get the next CDC data interface from the configuration descriptor (RNDIS class has two CDC interfaces) */
-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, 
-				                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-				{
-					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-					return NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
-				}
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Clear the found endpoints mask, since any already processed endpoints aren't in the CDC interface we need */
-				FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-				/* Disable any already configured pipes from the invalid RNDIS interfaces */
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDIS_DATAPIPE_OUT);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-			
-				/* Get the next CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */
-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-				                              DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-				{
-					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-					return NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
-				}
-			}
-
-			/* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */
-			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-			                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-			{
-				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-				return NoEndpointFound;
-			}
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		/* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
-		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
-		{
-			/* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{							   
-				/* Configure the notification pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
-				
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the notification pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				/* Configure the data IN pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-				
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDIS_DATAPIPE_OUT, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-				
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << RNDIS_DATAPIPE_OUT);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC control Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct control interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == CDC_CONTROL_CLASS)    &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC data Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == CDC_DATA_CLASS)    &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint, or interrupt IN endpoint within the current interface,
- *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint (so that it may be compared
- *  using a different comparator to determine if it is another CDC class interface).
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-	
-		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a RNDIS interface descriptor containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints, and an interrupt event endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref RNDISHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	/* Get the IN and OUT data and IN notification endpoints for the RNDIS interface */
+	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE) | (1 << RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN) | (1 << RNDIS_DATAPIPE_OUT)))
+	{
+		/* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current RNDIS interface */
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Check to see if the control interface's notification pipe has been found, if so search for the data interface */
+			if (FoundEndpoints & (1 << RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE))
+			{
+				/* Get the next CDC data interface from the configuration descriptor (RNDIS class has two CDC interfaces) */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, 
+				                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Clear the found endpoints mask, since any already processed endpoints aren't in the CDC interface we need */
+				FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+				/* Disable any already configured pipes from the invalid RNDIS interfaces */
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDIS_DATAPIPE_OUT);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+			
+				/* Get the next CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+				                              DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+
+			/* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+			                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoEndpointFound;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
+		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+		{
+			/* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{							   
+				/* Configure the notification pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
+				
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the notification pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				/* Configure the data IN pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+				
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDIS_DATAPIPE_OUT, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+				
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << RNDIS_DATAPIPE_OUT);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC control Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct control interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == CDC_CONTROL_CLASS)    &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC data Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == CDC_DATA_CLASS)    &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint, or interrupt IN endpoint within the current interface,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint (so that it may be compared
+ *  using a different comparator to determine if it is another CDC class interface).
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+	
+		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
index 520c048b7..02bfca2c0 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,82 +1,82 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "RNDISEthernetHost.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC class */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_CLASS              0x02
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC Communication Interface subclass */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS           0x02
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC RNDIS vendor specific protocol */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL           0xFF
-		
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data class */
-		#define CDC_DATA_CLASS                 0x0A
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data subclass */
-		#define CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS              0x00
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data protocol */
-		#define CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL              0x00
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum RNDISHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoRNDISInterfaceFound           = 4, /**< A compatible RNDIS interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< Compatible RNDIS endpoints were not found in the device's RNDIS interface */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);	
-		
-		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "RNDISEthernetHost.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC class */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_CLASS              0x02
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC Communication Interface subclass */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS           0x02
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC RNDIS vendor specific protocol */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL           0xFF
+		
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data class */
+		#define CDC_DATA_CLASS                 0x0A
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data subclass */
+		#define CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS              0x00
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data protocol */
+		#define CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL              0x00
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum RNDISHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoRNDISInterfaceFound           = 4, /**< A compatible RNDIS interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< Compatible RNDIS endpoints were not found in the device's RNDIS interface */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);	
+		
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Doxygen.conf
index 49274d89b..33cb82977 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.c
index 5e14e8e83..5200372e9 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.c
@@ -1,302 +1,302 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  RNDIS Device commands, to issue RNDIS commands to the device for
- *  the control and data transfer between the host and RNDIS device.
- */
-
-#include "RNDISCommands.h"
-
-/** Current RNDIS Request ID, for associating sent commands with received data */
-uint32_t RequestID = 0;
-
-
-/** Function to send the given encapsulated RNDIS command to the device.
- *
- *  \param[in] Buffer  Source command data buffer to send to the device
- *  \param[in] Length   Number of bytes to send
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Length)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = Length,
-		};
-
-	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
-}
-
-/** Function to receive the given encapsulated RNDIS response from the device.
- *
- *  \param[out] Buffer  Destination command data buffer to write read data from the device to
- *  \param[in] Length   Number of bytes to read
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Length)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = Length,
-		};
-	
-	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
-}
-
-/** Sends a RNDIS KEEPALIVE command to the device, to ensure that it does not enter standby mode after periods
- *  of long inactivity.
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
- *          logical command failure
- */
-uint8_t RNDIS_SendKeepAlive(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t  KeepAliveMessage;
-	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t KeepAliveMessageResponse;
-	
-	KeepAliveMessage.MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG;
-	KeepAliveMessage.MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t);
-	KeepAliveMessage.RequestId       = RequestID++;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&KeepAliveMessage,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&KeepAliveMessageResponse,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-/** Initializes the attached RNDIS device's RNDIS interface.
- *
- *  \param[in] HostMaxPacketSize  Size of the packet buffer on the host
- *  \param[out] DeviceMaxPacketSize   Pointer to where the packet buffer size of the device is to be stored
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
- *          logical command failure
- */
-uint8_t RNDIS_InitializeDevice(const uint16_t HostMaxPacketSize, uint16_t* const DeviceMaxPacketSize)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t  InitMessage;
-	RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t InitMessageResponse;
-
-	InitMessage.MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG;
-	InitMessage.MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t);
-	InitMessage.RequestId       = RequestID++;
-
-	InitMessage.MajorVersion    = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
-	InitMessage.MinorVersion    = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;
-	InitMessage.MaxTransferSize = HostMaxPacketSize;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&InitMessage,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&InitMessageResponse,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	if (InitMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
-	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
-	  
-	*DeviceMaxPacketSize = InitMessageResponse.MaxTransferSize;
-	
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-/** Sets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
- *
- *  \param[in] Oid  OID number of the parameter to set
- *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to where the property data is to be sourced from
- *  \param[in] Length  Length in bytes of the property data to sent to the device
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
- *          logical command failure
- */
-uint8_t RNDIS_SetRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, const uint16_t Length)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	struct
-	{
-		RNDIS_Set_Message_t SetMessage;
-		uint8_t             ContigiousBuffer[Length];
-	} SetMessageData;
-	
-	RNDIS_Set_Complete_t SetMessageResponse;
-	
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageType    = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG;
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength  = sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) + Length;
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.RequestId      = RequestID++;
-			
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.Oid            = Oid;
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferLength = Length;
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.DeviceVcHandle = 0;
-	
-	memcpy(&SetMessageData.ContigiousBuffer, Buffer, Length);
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&SetMessageData,
-	                                               SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&SetMessageResponse,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	if (SetMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
-	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
-	  
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-/** Gets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
- *
- *  \param[in] Oid  OID number of the parameter to get
- *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to where the property data is to be written to
- *  \param[in] MaxLength  Length in bytes of the destination buffer size
- *
- *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
- *          logical command failure
- */
-uint8_t RNDIS_QueryRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, const uint16_t MaxLength)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	RNDIS_Query_Message_t QueryMessage;
-
-	struct
-	{
-		RNDIS_Query_Complete_t QueryMessageResponse;
-		uint8_t                ContigiousBuffer[MaxLength];
-	} QueryMessageResponseData;
-
-	QueryMessage.MessageType    = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG;
-	QueryMessage.MessageLength  = sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t);
-	QueryMessage.RequestId      = RequestID++;
-			
-	QueryMessage.Oid            = Oid;
-	QueryMessage.InformationBufferLength = 0;
-	QueryMessage.InformationBufferOffset = 0;
-	QueryMessage.DeviceVcHandle = 0;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&QueryMessage,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&QueryMessageResponseData,
-	                                               sizeof(QueryMessageResponseData))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	if (QueryMessageResponseData.QueryMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
-	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
-
-	memcpy(Buffer, &QueryMessageResponseData.ContigiousBuffer, MaxLength);
-
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the size of a received packet, discarding the remainder of the RNDIS packet header to leave only the
- *  packet contents for processing by the host.
- *
- *  \param[out] PacketLength  Size of the packet currently in the pipe
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t RNDIS_GetPacketLength(uint16_t* const PacketLength)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN);
-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	{
-		*PacketLength = 0;
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-	}
-
-	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	*PacketLength = (uint16_t)DeviceMessage.DataLength;
-	
-	Pipe_Discard_Stream(DeviceMessage.DataOffset - (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)));
-	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  RNDIS Device commands, to issue RNDIS commands to the device for
+ *  the control and data transfer between the host and RNDIS device.
+ */
+
+#include "RNDISCommands.h"
+
+/** Current RNDIS Request ID, for associating sent commands with received data */
+uint32_t RequestID = 0;
+
+
+/** Function to send the given encapsulated RNDIS command to the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Buffer  Source command data buffer to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] Length   Number of bytes to send
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = Length,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+
+/** Function to receive the given encapsulated RNDIS response from the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] Buffer  Destination command data buffer to write read data from the device to
+ *  \param[in] Length   Number of bytes to read
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = Length,
+		};
+	
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+
+/** Sends a RNDIS KEEPALIVE command to the device, to ensure that it does not enter standby mode after periods
+ *  of long inactivity.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+ *          logical command failure
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_SendKeepAlive(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t  KeepAliveMessage;
+	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t KeepAliveMessageResponse;
+	
+	KeepAliveMessage.MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG;
+	KeepAliveMessage.MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t);
+	KeepAliveMessage.RequestId       = RequestID++;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&KeepAliveMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&KeepAliveMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Initializes the attached RNDIS device's RNDIS interface.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HostMaxPacketSize  Size of the packet buffer on the host
+ *  \param[out] DeviceMaxPacketSize   Pointer to where the packet buffer size of the device is to be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+ *          logical command failure
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_InitializeDevice(const uint16_t HostMaxPacketSize, uint16_t* const DeviceMaxPacketSize)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t  InitMessage;
+	RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t InitMessageResponse;
+
+	InitMessage.MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG;
+	InitMessage.MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t);
+	InitMessage.RequestId       = RequestID++;
+
+	InitMessage.MajorVersion    = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
+	InitMessage.MinorVersion    = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;
+	InitMessage.MaxTransferSize = HostMaxPacketSize;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&InitMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&InitMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (InitMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
+	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
+	  
+	*DeviceMaxPacketSize = InitMessageResponse.MaxTransferSize;
+	
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Sets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Oid  OID number of the parameter to set
+ *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to where the property data is to be sourced from
+ *  \param[in] Length  Length in bytes of the property data to sent to the device
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+ *          logical command failure
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_SetRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		RNDIS_Set_Message_t SetMessage;
+		uint8_t             ContigiousBuffer[Length];
+	} SetMessageData;
+	
+	RNDIS_Set_Complete_t SetMessageResponse;
+	
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageType    = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength  = sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) + Length;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.RequestId      = RequestID++;
+			
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.Oid            = Oid;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferLength = Length;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.DeviceVcHandle = 0;
+	
+	memcpy(&SetMessageData.ContigiousBuffer, Buffer, Length);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&SetMessageData,
+	                                               SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&SetMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (SetMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
+	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
+	  
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Gets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Oid  OID number of the parameter to get
+ *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to where the property data is to be written to
+ *  \param[in] MaxLength  Length in bytes of the destination buffer size
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+ *          logical command failure
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_QueryRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, const uint16_t MaxLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_Query_Message_t QueryMessage;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		RNDIS_Query_Complete_t QueryMessageResponse;
+		uint8_t                ContigiousBuffer[MaxLength];
+	} QueryMessageResponseData;
+
+	QueryMessage.MessageType    = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG;
+	QueryMessage.MessageLength  = sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t);
+	QueryMessage.RequestId      = RequestID++;
+			
+	QueryMessage.Oid            = Oid;
+	QueryMessage.InformationBufferLength = 0;
+	QueryMessage.InformationBufferOffset = 0;
+	QueryMessage.DeviceVcHandle = 0;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&QueryMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&QueryMessageResponseData,
+	                                               sizeof(QueryMessageResponseData))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (QueryMessageResponseData.QueryMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
+	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
+
+	memcpy(Buffer, &QueryMessageResponseData.ContigiousBuffer, MaxLength);
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the size of a received packet, discarding the remainder of the RNDIS packet header to leave only the
+ *  packet contents for processing by the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] PacketLength  Size of the packet currently in the pipe
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_GetPacketLength(uint16_t* const PacketLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN);
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		*PacketLength = 0;
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+	}
+
+	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	*PacketLength = (uint16_t)DeviceMessage.DataLength;
+	
+	Pipe_Discard_Stream(DeviceMessage.DataOffset - (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)));
+	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.h
index 8130b5ad8..62d1c0893 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.h
@@ -1,212 +1,212 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for RNDISCommands.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _RNDIS_COMMANDS_H_
-#define _RNDIS_COMMANDS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "RNDISConstants.h"
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */
-			uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */
-		} RNDIS_Message_Header_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t DataOffset;
-			uint32_t DataLength;
-			uint32_t OOBDataOffset;
-			uint32_t OOBDataLength;
-			uint32_t NumOOBDataElements;
-			uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset;
-			uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength;
-			uint32_t VcHandle;
-			uint32_t Reserved;
-		} RNDIS_Packet_Message_t;
-	
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			
-			uint32_t MajorVersion;
-			uint32_t MinorVersion;
-			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
-		} RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize complete response message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-			
-			uint32_t MajorVersion;
-			uint32_t MinorVersion;
-			uint32_t DeviceFlags;
-			uint32_t Medium;
-			uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer;
-			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
-			uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor;
-			uint32_t AFListOffset;
-			uint32_t AFListSize;
-		} RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive command message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive complete message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Reset complete message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t Status;
-
-			uint32_t AddressingReset;
-		} RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Set command message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			
-			uint32_t Oid;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
-			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
-		} RNDIS_Set_Message_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Set complete response message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-		} RNDIS_Set_Complete_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Query command message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			
-			uint32_t Oid;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
-			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
-		} RNDIS_Query_Message_t;
-		
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS Query complete response message */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-			
-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
-		} RNDIS_Query_Complete_t;
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command */
-		#define REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand           0x00
-
-		/** RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response */
-		#define REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse           0x01
-
-		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Major */
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR             0x01
-
-		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor */
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR             0x00
-
-		/** Pipe number for the RNDIS data IN pipe */
-		#define RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN                     1
-
-		/** Pipe number for the RNDIS data OUT pipe */
-		#define RNDIS_DATAPIPE_OUT                    2
-
-		/** Pipe number for the RNDIS notification pipe */
-		#define RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE                3
-		
-		/** Additional error code for RNDIS functions when a device returns a logical command failure */
-		#define RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED                  0xC0
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Length);
-		uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Length);
-
-		uint8_t RNDIS_SendKeepAlive(void);
-		uint8_t RNDIS_InitializeDevice(const uint16_t HostMaxPacketSize, uint16_t* const DeviceMaxPacketSize);
-		uint8_t RNDIS_SetRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, const uint16_t Length);
-		uint8_t RNDIS_QueryRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, const uint16_t MaxLength);
-		uint8_t RNDIS_GetPacketLength(uint16_t* const PacketLength);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISCommands.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _RNDIS_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "RNDISConstants.h"
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */
+			uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */
+		} RNDIS_Message_Header_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t DataOffset;
+			uint32_t DataLength;
+			uint32_t OOBDataOffset;
+			uint32_t OOBDataLength;
+			uint32_t NumOOBDataElements;
+			uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset;
+			uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength;
+			uint32_t VcHandle;
+			uint32_t Reserved;
+		} RNDIS_Packet_Message_t;
+	
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			
+			uint32_t MajorVersion;
+			uint32_t MinorVersion;
+			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
+		} RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize complete response message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+			
+			uint32_t MajorVersion;
+			uint32_t MinorVersion;
+			uint32_t DeviceFlags;
+			uint32_t Medium;
+			uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer;
+			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
+			uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor;
+			uint32_t AFListOffset;
+			uint32_t AFListSize;
+		} RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive command message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive complete message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Reset complete message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t Status;
+
+			uint32_t AddressingReset;
+		} RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Set command message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			
+			uint32_t Oid;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
+		} RNDIS_Set_Message_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Set complete response message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+		} RNDIS_Set_Complete_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Query command message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			
+			uint32_t Oid;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
+		} RNDIS_Query_Message_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS Query complete response message */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+			
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+		} RNDIS_Query_Complete_t;
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command */
+		#define REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand           0x00
+
+		/** RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response */
+		#define REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse           0x01
+
+		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Major */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR             0x01
+
+		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR             0x00
+
+		/** Pipe number for the RNDIS data IN pipe */
+		#define RNDIS_DATAPIPE_IN                     1
+
+		/** Pipe number for the RNDIS data OUT pipe */
+		#define RNDIS_DATAPIPE_OUT                    2
+
+		/** Pipe number for the RNDIS notification pipe */
+		#define RNDIS_NOTIFICATIONPIPE                3
+		
+		/** Additional error code for RNDIS functions when a device returns a logical command failure */
+		#define RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED                  0xC0
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Length);
+		uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Length);
+
+		uint8_t RNDIS_SendKeepAlive(void);
+		uint8_t RNDIS_InitializeDevice(const uint16_t HostMaxPacketSize, uint16_t* const DeviceMaxPacketSize);
+		uint8_t RNDIS_SetRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, const uint16_t Length);
+		uint8_t RNDIS_QueryRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, const uint16_t MaxLength);
+		uint8_t RNDIS_GetPacketLength(uint16_t* const PacketLength);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISConstants.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISConstants.h
index 67fa78a0d..efe22b699 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISConstants.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISConstants.h
@@ -1,112 +1,112 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  RNDIS specification related constants. For more information on these
- *  constants, please refer to the Microsoft RNDIS specification.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
-#define _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG                0x00000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG            0x00000002UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG                  0x00000003UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG                 0x00000004UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG                   0x00000005UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG                 0x00000006UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG       0x00000007UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG             0x00000008UL
-
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT          0x80000002UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT               0x80000004UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT                 0x80000005UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT               0x80000006UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT           0x80000008UL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS            0x00000000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE            0xC0000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA       0xC0010015UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED      0xC00000BBUL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT      0x4001000BUL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT   0x4001000CUL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED     0x00000000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED  0x00000001UL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3              0x00000000UL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS	      0x00000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED    0x00000002UL
-
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED           0x00000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MULTICAST          0x00000002UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST      0x00000004UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST          0x00000008UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SOURCE_ROUTING     0x00000010UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_PROMISCUOUS        0x00000020UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SMT                0x00000040UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_LOCAL          0x00000080UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_GROUP              0x00001000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_FUNCTIONAL     0x00002000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_FUNCTIONAL         0x00004000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MAC_FRAME          0x00008000UL	
-		
-		#define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST                0x00010101UL
-		#define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS               0x00010102UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED               0x00010103UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE                  0x00010104UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE            0x00010106UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
-		#define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED                    0x00010107UL
-		#define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE           0x0001010AUL
-		#define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE            0x0001010BUL
-		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID                     0x0001010CUL
-		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION            0x0001010DUL
-		#define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER         0x0001010EUL
-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS          0x00010114UL
-		#define OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM               0x00010202UL
-		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK                       0x00020101UL
-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_OK                        0x00020102UL
-		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR                    0x00020103UL
-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR                     0x00020104UL
-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER                 0x00020105UL
-		#define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS           0x01010101UL
-		#define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS             0x01010102UL
-		#define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST              0x01010103UL
-		#define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE           0x01010104UL
-		#define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT         0x01020101UL
-		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION          0x01020102UL
-		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS        0x01020103UL
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  RNDIS specification related constants. For more information on these
+ *  constants, please refer to the Microsoft RNDIS specification.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG                0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG            0x00000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG                  0x00000003UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG                 0x00000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG                   0x00000005UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG                 0x00000006UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG       0x00000007UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG             0x00000008UL
+
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT          0x80000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT               0x80000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT                 0x80000005UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT               0x80000006UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT           0x80000008UL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS            0x00000000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE            0xC0000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA       0xC0010015UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED      0xC00000BBUL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT      0x4001000BUL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT   0x4001000CUL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED     0x00000000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED  0x00000001UL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3              0x00000000UL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS	      0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED    0x00000002UL
+
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED           0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MULTICAST          0x00000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST      0x00000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST          0x00000008UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SOURCE_ROUTING     0x00000010UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_PROMISCUOUS        0x00000020UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SMT                0x00000040UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_LOCAL          0x00000080UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_GROUP              0x00001000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_FUNCTIONAL     0x00002000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_FUNCTIONAL         0x00004000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MAC_FRAME          0x00008000UL	
+		
+		#define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST                0x00010101UL
+		#define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS               0x00010102UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED               0x00010103UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE                  0x00010104UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE            0x00010106UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
+		#define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED                    0x00010107UL
+		#define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE           0x0001010AUL
+		#define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE            0x0001010BUL
+		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID                     0x0001010CUL
+		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION            0x0001010DUL
+		#define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER         0x0001010EUL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS          0x00010114UL
+		#define OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM               0x00010202UL
+		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK                       0x00020101UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_OK                        0x00020102UL
+		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR                    0x00020103UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR                     0x00020104UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER                 0x00020105UL
+		#define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS           0x01010101UL
+		#define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS             0x01010102UL
+		#define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST              0x01010103UL
+		#define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE           0x01010104UL
+		#define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT         0x01020101UL
+		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION          0x01020102UL
+		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS        0x01020103UL
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c
index 8e274302e..5628677d6 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c
@@ -1,272 +1,272 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernetHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "RNDISEthernetHost.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "RNDIS Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		RNDIS_Host_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-void PrintIncomingPackets(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
-	uint16_t PacketLength;
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetPacketLength(&PacketLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Packet Reception Error.\r\n"
-								 " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);		
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	if (!(PacketLength))
-	  return;
-	
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR("***PACKET (Size %d)***\r\n"), PacketLength);
-
-	if (PacketLength > 1024)
-	{
-		puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Packet too large.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-		Pipe_Discard_Stream(PacketLength);
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		uint8_t PacketBuffer[PacketLength];
-		
-		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PacketBuffer, PacketLength);
-		
-		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < PacketLength; i++)
-		  printf("%02x ", PacketBuffer[i]);
-	}
-	
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	printf("\r\n\r\n");
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in
- *  data received from the attached RNDIS device and print it to the serial port.
- */
-void RNDIS_Host_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			uint16_t DeviceMaxPacketSize;
-			if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_InitializeDevice(1024, &DeviceMaxPacketSize)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Initializing Device.\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;			
-			}
-			
-			printf_P(PSTR("Device Max Transfer Size: %lu bytes.\r\n"), DeviceMaxPacketSize);
-			
-			/* We set the default filter to only receive packets we would be interested in */
-			uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST);
-			if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SetRNDISProperty(OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
-			                                        &PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Setting Device Packet Filter.\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			uint32_t VendorID;
-			if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_QueryRNDISProperty(OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
-			                                          &VendorID, sizeof(VendorID))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Getting Vendor ID.\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			printf_P(PSTR("Device Vendor ID: 0x%08lX\r\n"), VendorID);
-			
-			puts_P(PSTR("RNDIS Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			PrintIncomingPackets();
-		
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernetHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "RNDISEthernetHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "RNDIS Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		RNDIS_Host_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+void PrintIncomingPackets(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	uint16_t PacketLength;
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetPacketLength(&PacketLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Packet Reception Error.\r\n"
+								 " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);		
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	if (!(PacketLength))
+	  return;
+	
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("***PACKET (Size %d)***\r\n"), PacketLength);
+
+	if (PacketLength > 1024)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Packet too large.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+		Pipe_Discard_Stream(PacketLength);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		uint8_t PacketBuffer[PacketLength];
+		
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PacketBuffer, PacketLength);
+		
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < PacketLength; i++)
+		  printf("%02x ", PacketBuffer[i]);
+	}
+	
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	printf("\r\n\r\n");
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in
+ *  data received from the attached RNDIS device and print it to the serial port.
+ */
+void RNDIS_Host_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			uint16_t DeviceMaxPacketSize;
+			if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_InitializeDevice(1024, &DeviceMaxPacketSize)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Initializing Device.\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;			
+			}
+			
+			printf_P(PSTR("Device Max Transfer Size: %lu bytes.\r\n"), DeviceMaxPacketSize);
+			
+			/* We set the default filter to only receive packets we would be interested in */
+			uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST);
+			if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SetRNDISProperty(OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+			                                        &PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Setting Device Packet Filter.\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			uint32_t VendorID;
+			if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_QueryRNDISProperty(OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
+			                                          &VendorID, sizeof(VendorID))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Getting Vendor ID.\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			printf_P(PSTR("Device Vendor ID: 0x%08lX\r\n"), VendorID);
+			
+			puts_P(PSTR("RNDIS Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			PrintIncomingPackets();
+		
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h
index 8e9215751..46b47f95c 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for RNDISEthernetHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _RNDIS_HOST_H_
-#define _RNDIS_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		
-		#include "Lib/RNDISCommands.h"
-
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-				
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a RNDIS notification message, for transmission to the RNDIS host via the notification
-		 *  Endpoint.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  bmRequestType; /**< Notification type, a mask of values from SrdRequestType.h */
-			uint8_t  bNotification; /**< Notification index, indicating what the RNDIS notification relates to */
-			uint16_t wValue; /**< Two byte notification value parameter */
-			uint16_t wIndex; /**< Two byte notification index parameter */
-			uint16_t wLength; /**< Size of data payload following the notification header */
-		} USB_Notification_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void PrintIncomingPackets(void);
-		void RNDIS_Host_Task(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISEthernetHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_HOST_H_
+#define _RNDIS_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		
+		#include "Lib/RNDISCommands.h"
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+				
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a RNDIS notification message, for transmission to the RNDIS host via the notification
+		 *  Endpoint.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bmRequestType; /**< Notification type, a mask of values from SrdRequestType.h */
+			uint8_t  bNotification; /**< Notification index, indicating what the RNDIS notification relates to */
+			uint16_t wValue; /**< Two byte notification value parameter */
+			uint16_t wIndex; /**< Two byte notification index parameter */
+			uint16_t wLength; /**< Size of data payload following the notification header */
+		} USB_Notification_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void PrintIncomingPackets(void);
+		void RNDIS_Host_Task(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISHost.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISHost.txt
index cd1507710..cc3bbcab5 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISHost.txt
@@ -1,62 +1,62 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage RNDIS Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  RNDIS host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a RNDIS Ethernet host, for USB devices such as
- *  modems.
- *  
- *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB RNDIS device, print out its vendor ID
- *  and any received packets in raw form through the serial USART.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage RNDIS Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  RNDIS host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a RNDIS Ethernet host, for USB devices such as
+ *  modems.
+ *  
+ *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB RNDIS device, print out its vendor ID
+ *  and any received packets in raw form through the serial USART.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile
index a072bf4a8..6164e3acc 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = RNDISEthernetHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  Lib/RNDISCommands.c                                         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = RNDISEthernetHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  Lib/RNDISCommands.c                                         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
index 7fb3cece1..9f740c1f0 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,185 +1,185 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a SI interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref StillImageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the Still Image interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextStillImageInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	/* Get the IN and OUT data and event endpoints for the Still Image interface */
-	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
-	{
-		/* Fetch the next endpoint from the current Still Image interface */
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-		                              DComp_NextStillImageInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-			return NoEndpointFound;
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		/* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
-		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
-		{
-			/* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				/* Configure the events pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);			
-
-				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
-				
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the events pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				/* Configure the data IN pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
-
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
-
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Still Image Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == SIMAGE_CLASS)    &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == SIMAGE_SUBCLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == SIMAGE_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interrupt or Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the current SI interface, aborting the
- *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-	
-		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a SI interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref StillImageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the Still Image interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextStillImageInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	/* Get the IN and OUT data and event endpoints for the Still Image interface */
+	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
+	{
+		/* Fetch the next endpoint from the current Still Image interface */
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextStillImageInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+			return NoEndpointFound;
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
+		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+		{
+			/* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				/* Configure the events pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);			
+
+				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
+				
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the events pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				/* Configure the data IN pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Still Image Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == SIMAGE_CLASS)    &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == SIMAGE_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == SIMAGE_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interrupt or Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the current SI interface, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+	
+		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
index ca3d32941..351b82583 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "StillImageHost.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device class */
-		#define SIMAGE_CLASS                   0x06
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device subclass */
-		#define SIMAGE_SUBCLASS                0x01
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device protocol */
-		#define SIMAGE_PROTOCOL                0x01
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum StillImageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoInterfaceFound                = 4, /**< A compatible SI interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< The correct SI endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's SI interface */
-		};
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
-
-		uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "StillImageHost.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device class */
+		#define SIMAGE_CLASS                   0x06
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device subclass */
+		#define SIMAGE_SUBCLASS                0x01
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device protocol */
+		#define SIMAGE_PROTOCOL                0x01
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum StillImageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoInterfaceFound                = 4, /**< A compatible SI interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< The correct SI endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's SI interface */
+		};
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf
index c64294fb9..4c00642a3 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Still Image Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Still Image Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h
index 41aa04daa..7bd8d4fe8 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h
@@ -1,51 +1,51 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header containing macros for possible PIMA commands. Refer to the PIMA standard
- *  documentation for more information on each PIMA command.
- */
-
-#ifndef _PIMA_CODES_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO         0x1001
-		#define PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION           0x1002
-		#define PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION          0x1003
-		
-		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_OK                     0x2001
-		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_GENERALERROR           0x2002
-		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_SESSIONNOTOPEN         0x2003
-		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_INVALIDTRANSACTIONID   0x2004
-		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_OPERATIONNOTSUPPORTED  0x2005
-		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_PARAMETERNOTSUPPORTED  0x2006
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header containing macros for possible PIMA commands. Refer to the PIMA standard
+ *  documentation for more information on each PIMA command.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PIMA_CODES_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO         0x1001
+		#define PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION           0x1002
+		#define PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION          0x1003
+		
+		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_OK                     0x2001
+		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_GENERALERROR           0x2002
+		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_SESSIONNOTOPEN         0x2003
+		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_INVALIDTRANSACTIONID   0x2004
+		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_OPERATIONNOTSUPPORTED  0x2005
+		#define PIMA_RESPONSE_PARAMETERNOTSUPPORTED  0x2006
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c
index d9fc68a77..530450988 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c
@@ -1,265 +1,265 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Still Image Device commands, to issue PIMA commands to the device for
- *  reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics as well as
- *  reading and writing of stored image data.
- */
-
-#include "StillImageCommands.h"
-
-/** PIMA block container for the block to send to the device */
-PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock;
-
-/** PIMA block container for the last received block from the device */
-PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock;
-
-/** PIMA block container for the last event block received from the device */
-PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock;
-
-
-/** Function to send the PIMA command container to the attached still image device. */
-void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void)
-{
-	/* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe ready for data transmission */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	/* Write the PIMA block to the data OUT pipe */
-	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
-	
-	/* If the block type is a command, send its parameters (if any) */
-	if (PIMA_SendBlock.Type == CType_CommandBlock)
-	{
-		/* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */
-		uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_SendBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
-
-		/* Check if any parameters in the command block */
-		if (ParamBytes)
-		{
-			/* Write the PIMA parameters to the data OUT pipe */
-			Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock.Params, ParamBytes);
-		}
-		
-		/* Send the PIMA command block to the attached device */
-		Pipe_ClearOUT();
-	}
-					
-	/* Freeze pipe after use */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-}
-
-/** Function to receive a PIMA event container from the attached still image device.
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t SImage_ReceiveEventHeader(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	/* Unfreeze the events pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	/* Read in the event data into the global structure */
-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_EventBlock, sizeof(PIMA_EventBlock));
-	
-	/* Clear the pipe after read complete to prepare for next event */
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Freeze the event pipe again after use */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Function to receive a PIMA response container from the attached still image device.
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader(void)
-{
-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
-
-	/* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	/* Wait until data received on the IN pipe */
-	while (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	{
-		/* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */
-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
-		{
-			/* Clear the flag and decrement the timeout period counter */
-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-			TimeoutMSRem--;
-
-			/* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */
-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
-			{
-				/* Return error code */
-				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
-			}
-		}
-		
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
-		{
-			/* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */
-			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-
-			/* Return error code and break out of the loop */
-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
-		}
-
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
-		{
-			/* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */
-			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-
-			/* Return error code */
-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
-		}
-		  
-		/* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */
-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-	}
-		
-	/* Load in the response from the attached device */
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
-	
-	/* Check if the returned block type is a response block */
-	if (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type == CType_ResponseBlock)
-	{
-		/* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */
-		uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
-
-		/* Check if the device has returned any parameters */
-		if (ParamBytes)
-		{
-			/* Read the PIMA parameters from the data IN pipe */
-			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Params, ParamBytes);
-		}
-		
-		/* Clear pipe bank after use */
-		Pipe_ClearIN();
-	}
-	
-	/* Freeze the IN pipe after use */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-/** Function to send the given data to the device, after a command block has been issued.
- *
- *  \param[in] Buffer  Source data buffer to send to the device
- *  \param[in] Bytes   Number of bytes to send
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t SImage_SendData(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	/* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	/* Write the data contents to the pipe */
-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes);
-
-	/* Send the last packet to the attached device */
-	Pipe_ClearOUT();
-
-	/* Freeze the pipe again after use */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Function to receive the given data to the device, after a response block has been received.
- *
- *  \param[out] Buffer  Destination data buffer to put read bytes from the device
- *  \param[in] Bytes    Number of bytes to receive
- *
- *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	/* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	/* Read in the data into the buffer */
-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes);
-
-	/* Freeze the pipe again after use */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-/** Function to test if a PIMA event block is waiting to be read in from the attached device.
- *
- *  \return True if an event is waiting to be read in from the device, false otherwise
- */
-bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void)
-{
-	bool IsEventReceived = false;
-
-	/* Unfreeze the Event pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	/* If the pipe contains data, an event has been received */
-	if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
-	  IsEventReceived = true;
-	
-	/* Freeze the pipe after use */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return IsEventReceived;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Still Image Device commands, to issue PIMA commands to the device for
+ *  reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics as well as
+ *  reading and writing of stored image data.
+ */
+
+#include "StillImageCommands.h"
+
+/** PIMA block container for the block to send to the device */
+PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock;
+
+/** PIMA block container for the last received block from the device */
+PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock;
+
+/** PIMA block container for the last event block received from the device */
+PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock;
+
+
+/** Function to send the PIMA command container to the attached still image device. */
+void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void)
+{
+	/* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe ready for data transmission */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Write the PIMA block to the data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+	
+	/* If the block type is a command, send its parameters (if any) */
+	if (PIMA_SendBlock.Type == CType_CommandBlock)
+	{
+		/* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */
+		uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_SendBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+		/* Check if any parameters in the command block */
+		if (ParamBytes)
+		{
+			/* Write the PIMA parameters to the data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock.Params, ParamBytes);
+		}
+		
+		/* Send the PIMA command block to the attached device */
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	}
+					
+	/* Freeze pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Function to receive a PIMA event container from the attached still image device.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t SImage_ReceiveEventHeader(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Unfreeze the events pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	/* Read in the event data into the global structure */
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_EventBlock, sizeof(PIMA_EventBlock));
+	
+	/* Clear the pipe after read complete to prepare for next event */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Freeze the event pipe again after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Function to receive a PIMA response container from the attached still image device.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader(void)
+{
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
+
+	/* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	/* Wait until data received on the IN pipe */
+	while (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		/* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			/* Clear the flag and decrement the timeout period counter */
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+			TimeoutMSRem--;
+
+			/* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
+			{
+				/* Return error code */
+				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			/* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */
+			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+
+			/* Return error code and break out of the loop */
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			/* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */
+			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+
+			/* Return error code */
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+		  
+		/* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	}
+		
+	/* Load in the response from the attached device */
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+	
+	/* Check if the returned block type is a response block */
+	if (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type == CType_ResponseBlock)
+	{
+		/* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */
+		uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+		/* Check if the device has returned any parameters */
+		if (ParamBytes)
+		{
+			/* Read the PIMA parameters from the data IN pipe */
+			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Params, ParamBytes);
+		}
+		
+		/* Clear pipe bank after use */
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+	
+	/* Freeze the IN pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Function to send the given data to the device, after a command block has been issued.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Buffer  Source data buffer to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] Bytes   Number of bytes to send
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t SImage_SendData(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	/* Write the data contents to the pipe */
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes);
+
+	/* Send the last packet to the attached device */
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Freeze the pipe again after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Function to receive the given data to the device, after a response block has been received.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] Buffer  Destination data buffer to put read bytes from the device
+ *  \param[in] Bytes    Number of bytes to receive
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Read in the data into the buffer */
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes);
+
+	/* Freeze the pipe again after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Function to test if a PIMA event block is waiting to be read in from the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \return True if an event is waiting to be read in from the device, false otherwise
+ */
+bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void)
+{
+	bool IsEventReceived = false;
+
+	/* Unfreeze the Event pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	/* If the pipe contains data, an event has been received */
+	if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
+	  IsEventReceived = true;
+	
+	/* Freeze the pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return IsEventReceived;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h
index c6d7f033a..f309abf1b 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h
@@ -1,115 +1,115 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for StillImageCommands.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_
-#define _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "PIMACodes.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Pipe number of the Still Image data IN pipe */
-		#define SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE            0x01
-
-		/** Pipe number of the Still Image data OUT pipe */
-		#define SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE           0x02
-
-		/** Pipe number of the Still Image events pipe */
-		#define SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE             0x03
-		
-		/** Length in bytes of a given Unicode string's character length
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] chars  Total number of Unicode characters in the string
-		 */
-		#define UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(chars)   ((chars) << 1)
-
-		/** Timeout period between the issuing of a command to a device, and the reception of the first packet */
-		#define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000
-		
-		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
-		 *  a command container.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] params  Number of parameters which are to be sent in the Param field of the container
-		 */
-		#define PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(params)      ((sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock) - sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params)) + \
-		                                        ((params) * sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params[0])))
-
-		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
-		 *  a data container.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] datalen  Length in bytes of the data in the container
-		 */
-		#define PIMA_DATA_SIZE(datalen)        ((sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock) - sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params)) + datalen)
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a PIMA container, use to send commands and receive responses to and from an
-		 *  attached Still Image device.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t DataLength; /**< Length of the container and data, in bytes */
-			uint16_t Type; /**< Container type, a value from the PIMA_Container_Types_t enum */
-			uint16_t Code; /**< Command, event or response code of the container */
-			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique container ID to link blocks together */
-			uint32_t Params[3]; /**< Block parameters to be issued along with the block code (command blocks only) */
-		} PIMA_Container_t;
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible PIMA contains types. */
-		enum PIMA_Container_Types_t
-		{
-			CType_Undefined         = 0, /**< Undefined container type */
-			CType_CommandBlock      = 1, /**< Command Block container type */
-			CType_DataBlock         = 2, /**< Data Block container type */
-			CType_ResponseBlock     = 3, /**< Response container type */
-			CType_EventBlock        = 4, /**< Event Block container type */
-		};
-	
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock;
-		extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock;
-		extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock;
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void    SImage_SendBlockHeader(void);
-		uint8_t SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader(void);
-		uint8_t SImage_ReceiveEventHeader(void);
-		uint8_t SImage_SendData(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes);
-		uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes);
-		bool    SImage_IsEventReceived(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for StillImageCommands.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "PIMACodes.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe number of the Still Image data IN pipe */
+		#define SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE            0x01
+
+		/** Pipe number of the Still Image data OUT pipe */
+		#define SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE           0x02
+
+		/** Pipe number of the Still Image events pipe */
+		#define SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE             0x03
+		
+		/** Length in bytes of a given Unicode string's character length
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] chars  Total number of Unicode characters in the string
+		 */
+		#define UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(chars)   ((chars) << 1)
+
+		/** Timeout period between the issuing of a command to a device, and the reception of the first packet */
+		#define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000
+		
+		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
+		 *  a command container.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] params  Number of parameters which are to be sent in the Param field of the container
+		 */
+		#define PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(params)      ((sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock) - sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params)) + \
+		                                        ((params) * sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params[0])))
+
+		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
+		 *  a data container.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] datalen  Length in bytes of the data in the container
+		 */
+		#define PIMA_DATA_SIZE(datalen)        ((sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock) - sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params)) + datalen)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a PIMA container, use to send commands and receive responses to and from an
+		 *  attached Still Image device.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t DataLength; /**< Length of the container and data, in bytes */
+			uint16_t Type; /**< Container type, a value from the PIMA_Container_Types_t enum */
+			uint16_t Code; /**< Command, event or response code of the container */
+			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique container ID to link blocks together */
+			uint32_t Params[3]; /**< Block parameters to be issued along with the block code (command blocks only) */
+		} PIMA_Container_t;
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible PIMA contains types. */
+		enum PIMA_Container_Types_t
+		{
+			CType_Undefined         = 0, /**< Undefined container type */
+			CType_CommandBlock      = 1, /**< Command Block container type */
+			CType_DataBlock         = 2, /**< Data Block container type */
+			CType_ResponseBlock     = 3, /**< Response container type */
+			CType_EventBlock        = 4, /**< Event Block container type */
+		};
+	
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock;
+		extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock;
+		extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock;
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    SImage_SendBlockHeader(void);
+		uint8_t SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader(void);
+		uint8_t SImage_ReceiveEventHeader(void);
+		uint8_t SImage_SendData(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes);
+		uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* const Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes);
+		bool    SImage_IsEventReceived(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
index 2daf3ef4b..686eb5ff4 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
@@ -1,375 +1,375 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the StillImageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "StillImageHost.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Still Image Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		StillImage_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable Clock Division */
-	CLKPR = (1 << CLKPCE);
-	CLKPR = 0;
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to print device information
- *  through the serial port.
- */
-void StillImage_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-				
-			puts_P(PSTR("Still Image Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			/* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-			
-			puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device Info...\r\n"));
-			
-			PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
-				{
-					.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0),
-					.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
-					.Code          = PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO,
-					.TransactionID = 0x00000000,
-					.Params        = {},
-				};
-			
-			/* Send the GETDEVICEINFO block */
-			SImage_SendBlockHeader();
-			
-			/* Receive the response data block */
-			if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-			{
-				ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Calculate the size of the returned device info data structure */
-			uint16_t DeviceInfoSize = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
-			
-			/* Create a buffer large enough to hold the entire device info */
-			uint8_t DeviceInfo[DeviceInfoSize];
-
-			/* Read in the data block data (containing device info) */
-			SImage_ReadData(DeviceInfo, DeviceInfoSize);
-			
-			/* Once all the data has been read, the pipe must be cleared before the response can be sent */
-			Pipe_ClearIN();
-			
-			/* Create a pointer for walking through the info dataset */
-			uint8_t* DeviceInfoPos = DeviceInfo;
-			
-			/* Skip over the data before the unicode device information strings */
-			DeviceInfoPos +=  8;                                          // Skip to VendorExtensionDesc String
-			DeviceInfoPos += (1 + UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(*DeviceInfoPos)); // Skip over VendorExtensionDesc String
-			DeviceInfoPos +=  2;                                          // Skip over FunctionalMode
-			DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Supported Operations Array
-			DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Supported Events Array
-			DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Supported Device Properties Array
-			DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Capture Formats Array
-			DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Image Formats Array
-			
-			/* Extract and convert the Manufacturer Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
-			char Manufacturer[*DeviceInfoPos];
-			UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Manufacturer);
-			printf_P(PSTR("   Manufacturer: %s\r\n"), Manufacturer);
-
-			DeviceInfoPos += 1 + UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(*DeviceInfoPos);   // Skip over Manufacturer String
-
-			/* Extract and convert the Model Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
-			char Model[*DeviceInfoPos];
-			UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Model);
-			printf_P(PSTR("   Model: %s\r\n"), Model);
-
-			DeviceInfoPos += 1 + UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(*DeviceInfoPos);   // Skip over Model String
-
-			/* Extract and convert the Device Version Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
-			char DeviceVersion[*DeviceInfoPos];
-			UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, DeviceVersion);
-			printf_P(PSTR("   Device Version: %s\r\n"), DeviceVersion);
-
-			/* Receive the final response block from the device */
-			if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-			{
-				ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Verify that the command completed successfully */
-			if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
-			{
-				ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			puts_P(PSTR("Opening Session...\r\n"));
-			
-			PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
-				{
-					.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
-					.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
-					.Code          = PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION,
-					.TransactionID = 0x00000000,
-					.Params        = {0x00000001},
-				};
-			
-			/* Send the OPENSESSION block, open a session with an ID of 0x0001 */
-			SImage_SendBlockHeader();
-			
-			/* Receive the response block from the device */
-			if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-			{
-				ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Verify that the command completed successfully */
-			if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
-			{
-				ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Closing Session...\r\n"));
-
-			PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
-				{
-					.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
-					.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
-					.Code          = PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION,
-					.TransactionID = 0x00000001,
-					.Params        = {0x00000001},
-				};
-			
-			/* Send the CLOSESESSION block, close the session with an ID of 0x0001 */
-			SImage_SendBlockHeader();
-			
-			/* Receive the response block from the device */
-			if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-			{
-				ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			/* Verify that the command completed successfully */
-			if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
-			{
-				ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("Done.\r\n"));
-
-			/* Indicate device no longer busy */
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-			
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Function to convert a given Unicode encoded string to ASCII. This function will only work correctly on Unicode
- *  strings which contain ASCII printable characters only.
- *
- *  \param[in] UnicodeString  Pointer to a Unicode encoded input string
- *  \param[out] Buffer        Pointer to a buffer where the converted ASCII string should be stored
- */
-void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* UnicodeString, char* Buffer)
-{
-	/* Get the number of characters in the string, skip to the start of the string data */
-	uint8_t CharactersRemaining = *(UnicodeString++);
-	
-	/* Loop through the entire unicode string */
-	while (CharactersRemaining--)
-	{
-		/* Load in the next unicode character (only the lower byte, as only Unicode coded ASCII is supported) */
-		*(Buffer++) = *UnicodeString;
-		
-		/* Jump to the next unicode character */
-		UnicodeString += 2;
-	}
-	
-	/* Null terminate the string */
-	*Buffer = 0;
-}
-
-/** Displays a PIMA command error via the device's serial port.
- *
- *  \param[in] ErrorCode          Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully
- *  \param[in] ResponseCodeError  Indicates if the error is due to a command failed indication from the device, or a communication failure
- */
-void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError)
-{
-	char* FailureType = ((ResponseCodeError) ? PSTR("Response Code != OK") : PSTR("Transaction Fail"));
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Command Error (%S).\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), FailureType, ErrorCode);
-			
-	/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the StillImageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "StillImageHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Still Image Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		StillImage_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable Clock Division */
+	CLKPR = (1 << CLKPCE);
+	CLKPR = 0;
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to print device information
+ *  through the serial port.
+ */
+void StillImage_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+				
+			puts_P(PSTR("Still Image Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			/* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+			
+			puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device Info...\r\n"));
+			
+			PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+				{
+					.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0),
+					.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
+					.Code          = PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO,
+					.TransactionID = 0x00000000,
+					.Params        = {},
+				};
+			
+			/* Send the GETDEVICEINFO block */
+			SImage_SendBlockHeader();
+			
+			/* Receive the response data block */
+			if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			{
+				ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Calculate the size of the returned device info data structure */
+			uint16_t DeviceInfoSize = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+			
+			/* Create a buffer large enough to hold the entire device info */
+			uint8_t DeviceInfo[DeviceInfoSize];
+
+			/* Read in the data block data (containing device info) */
+			SImage_ReadData(DeviceInfo, DeviceInfoSize);
+			
+			/* Once all the data has been read, the pipe must be cleared before the response can be sent */
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+			
+			/* Create a pointer for walking through the info dataset */
+			uint8_t* DeviceInfoPos = DeviceInfo;
+			
+			/* Skip over the data before the unicode device information strings */
+			DeviceInfoPos +=  8;                                          // Skip to VendorExtensionDesc String
+			DeviceInfoPos += (1 + UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(*DeviceInfoPos)); // Skip over VendorExtensionDesc String
+			DeviceInfoPos +=  2;                                          // Skip over FunctionalMode
+			DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Supported Operations Array
+			DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Supported Events Array
+			DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Supported Device Properties Array
+			DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Capture Formats Array
+			DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Image Formats Array
+			
+			/* Extract and convert the Manufacturer Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
+			char Manufacturer[*DeviceInfoPos];
+			UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Manufacturer);
+			printf_P(PSTR("   Manufacturer: %s\r\n"), Manufacturer);
+
+			DeviceInfoPos += 1 + UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(*DeviceInfoPos);   // Skip over Manufacturer String
+
+			/* Extract and convert the Model Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
+			char Model[*DeviceInfoPos];
+			UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Model);
+			printf_P(PSTR("   Model: %s\r\n"), Model);
+
+			DeviceInfoPos += 1 + UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(*DeviceInfoPos);   // Skip over Model String
+
+			/* Extract and convert the Device Version Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
+			char DeviceVersion[*DeviceInfoPos];
+			UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, DeviceVersion);
+			printf_P(PSTR("   Device Version: %s\r\n"), DeviceVersion);
+
+			/* Receive the final response block from the device */
+			if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			{
+				ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Verify that the command completed successfully */
+			if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
+			{
+				ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			puts_P(PSTR("Opening Session...\r\n"));
+			
+			PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+				{
+					.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
+					.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
+					.Code          = PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION,
+					.TransactionID = 0x00000000,
+					.Params        = {0x00000001},
+				};
+			
+			/* Send the OPENSESSION block, open a session with an ID of 0x0001 */
+			SImage_SendBlockHeader();
+			
+			/* Receive the response block from the device */
+			if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			{
+				ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Verify that the command completed successfully */
+			if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
+			{
+				ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Closing Session...\r\n"));
+
+			PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+				{
+					.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
+					.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
+					.Code          = PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION,
+					.TransactionID = 0x00000001,
+					.Params        = {0x00000001},
+				};
+			
+			/* Send the CLOSESESSION block, close the session with an ID of 0x0001 */
+			SImage_SendBlockHeader();
+			
+			/* Receive the response block from the device */
+			if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			{
+				ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Verify that the command completed successfully */
+			if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
+			{
+				ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("Done.\r\n"));
+
+			/* Indicate device no longer busy */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+			
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to convert a given Unicode encoded string to ASCII. This function will only work correctly on Unicode
+ *  strings which contain ASCII printable characters only.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] UnicodeString  Pointer to a Unicode encoded input string
+ *  \param[out] Buffer        Pointer to a buffer where the converted ASCII string should be stored
+ */
+void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* UnicodeString, char* Buffer)
+{
+	/* Get the number of characters in the string, skip to the start of the string data */
+	uint8_t CharactersRemaining = *(UnicodeString++);
+	
+	/* Loop through the entire unicode string */
+	while (CharactersRemaining--)
+	{
+		/* Load in the next unicode character (only the lower byte, as only Unicode coded ASCII is supported) */
+		*(Buffer++) = *UnicodeString;
+		
+		/* Jump to the next unicode character */
+		UnicodeString += 2;
+	}
+	
+	/* Null terminate the string */
+	*Buffer = 0;
+}
+
+/** Displays a PIMA command error via the device's serial port.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ErrorCode          Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully
+ *  \param[in] ResponseCodeError  Indicates if the error is due to a command failed indication from the device, or a communication failure
+ */
+void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError)
+{
+	char* FailureType = ((ResponseCodeError) ? PSTR("Response Code != OK") : PSTR("Transaction Fail"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Command Error (%S).\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), FailureType, ErrorCode);
+			
+	/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
index 92f007be9..d7b893ee2 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for StillImageHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
-#define _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/PIMACodes.h"
-		#include "Lib/StillImageCommands.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void StillImage_Task(void);
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-		void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* restrict UnicodeString, char* restrict Buffer);
-		void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for StillImageHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
+#define _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/PIMACodes.h"
+		#include "Lib/StillImageCommands.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void StillImage_Task(void);
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* restrict UnicodeString, char* restrict Buffer);
+		void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
index 10a99e111..6c27b8511 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
@@ -1,64 +1,64 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Still Image Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Still Image Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Still Image Class Specification \n
- *        PIMA 15740 Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Still Image host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
- *  application for implementing a Still Image host, for USB devices such as
- *  digital cameras.
- *  
- *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB Still Image device, print out its
- *  information structure, open a session with the device and finally close the
- *  session.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Still Image Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Still Image Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Still Image Class Specification \n
+ *        PIMA 15740 Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Still Image host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a Still Image host, for USB devices such as
+ *  digital cameras.
+ *  
+ *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB Still Image device, print out its
+ *  information structure, open a session with the device and finally close the
+ *  session.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/makefile
index 861e7ef0b..07dbf336d 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = StillImageHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  Lib/StillImageCommands.c                                    \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = StillImageHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  Lib/StillImageCommands.c                                    \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
index 853ad37e0..5707308ad 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,245 +1,245 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
- 
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a CDC interface descriptor containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints, and an interrupt event endpoint.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the \ref CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	/* Get the IN and OUT data and IN notification endpoints for the CDC interface */
-	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT)))
-	{
-		/* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-		                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			/* Check to see if the control interface's notification pipe has been found, if so search for the data interface */
-			if (FoundEndpoints & (1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE))
-			{
-				/* Get the next CDC data interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */
-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, 
-				                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-				{
-					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-					return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
-				}
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Clear the found endpoints mask, since any already processed endpoints aren't in the CDC interface we need */
-				FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-				/* Disable any already configured pipes from the invalid CDC interfaces */
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-			
-				/* Get the next CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */
-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-				                              DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-				{
-					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-					return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
-				}
-			}
-
-			/* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */
-			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-			                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-			{
-				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-				return NoEndpointFound;
-			}
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		/* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
-		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
-		{
-			/* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{							   
-				/* Configure the notification pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
-				
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the notification pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				/* Configure the data IN pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-				
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-				
-				/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
-				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC control Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct control interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == CDC_CONTROL_CLASS)    &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC data Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == CDC_DATA_CLASS)    &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS) &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint, or interrupt IN endpoint within the current interface,
- *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint (so that it may be compared
- *  using a different comparator to determine if it is another CDC class interface).
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-	
-		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a CDC interface descriptor containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints, and an interrupt event endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	/* Get the IN and OUT data and IN notification endpoints for the CDC interface */
+	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT)))
+	{
+		/* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Check to see if the control interface's notification pipe has been found, if so search for the data interface */
+			if (FoundEndpoints & (1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE))
+			{
+				/* Get the next CDC data interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, 
+				                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Clear the found endpoints mask, since any already processed endpoints aren't in the CDC interface we need */
+				FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+				/* Disable any already configured pipes from the invalid CDC interfaces */
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+			
+				/* Get the next CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+				                              DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+
+			/* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+			                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoEndpointFound;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
+		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+		{
+			/* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{							   
+				/* Configure the notification pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
+				
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the notification pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				/* Configure the data IN pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+				
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Configure the data OUT pipe */
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+				
+				/* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
+				FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC control Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct control interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == CDC_CONTROL_CLASS)    &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC data Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == CDC_DATA_CLASS)    &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint, or interrupt IN endpoint within the current interface,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint (so that it may be compared
+ *  using a different comparator to determine if it is another CDC class interface).
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+	
+		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
index b65ac0d2d..29b94edce 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,82 +1,82 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "VirtualSerialHost.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC class */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_CLASS              0x02
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC Communication Interface subclass */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS           0x02
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC protocol */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL           0x01
-		
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data class */
-		#define CDC_DATA_CLASS                 0x0A
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data subclass */
-		#define CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS              0x00
-
-		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data protocol */
-		#define CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL              0x00
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoCDCInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< Compatible CDC endpoints were not found in the device's CDC interface */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);	
-		
-		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "VirtualSerialHost.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC class */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_CLASS              0x02
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC Communication Interface subclass */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS           0x02
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC protocol */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL           0x01
+		
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data class */
+		#define CDC_DATA_CLASS                 0x0A
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data subclass */
+		#define CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS              0x00
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the CDC data protocol */
+		#define CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL              0x00
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCDCInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< Compatible CDC endpoints were not found in the device's CDC interface */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);	
+		
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/Doxygen.conf
index b2d51b470..8aba73a8e 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c
index 735ebba31..8bec8e562 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c
@@ -1,222 +1,222 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "VirtualSerialHost.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "CDC Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		CDC_Host_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
-	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
-	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in
- *  data received from the attached CDC device and print it to the serial port.
- */
-void CDC_Host_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-		
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
-				else
-				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
-				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-				
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
-				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
-				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			puts_P(PSTR("CDC Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			/* Select the data IN pipe */
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN);
-			Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-			/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
-			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
-			{
-				/* Re-freeze IN pipe after the packet has been received */
-				Pipe_Freeze();
-
-				/* Check if data is in the pipe */
-				if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-				{
-					/* Get the length of the pipe data, and create a new buffer to hold it */
-					uint16_t BufferLength = Pipe_BytesInPipe();
-					uint8_t  Buffer[BufferLength];
-					
-					/* Read in the pipe data to the temporary buffer */
-					Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, BufferLength);
-									
-					/* Print out the buffer contents to the USART */
-					for (uint16_t BufferByte = 0; BufferByte < BufferLength; BufferByte++)
-					  putchar(Buffer[BufferByte]);
-				}
-
-				/* Clear the pipe after it is read, ready for the next packet */
-				Pipe_ClearIN();
-			}
-
-			/* Re-freeze IN pipe after use */
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-
-			/* Select and unfreeze the notification pipe */
-			Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
-			Pipe_Unfreeze();
-			
-			/* Check if a packet has been received */
-			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
-			{
-				/* Discard the unused event notification */
-				Pipe_ClearIN();
-			}
-			
-			/* Freeze notification IN pipe after use */
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-						
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "VirtualSerialHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "CDC Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CDC_Host_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in
+ *  data received from the attached CDC device and print it to the serial port.
+ */
+void CDC_Host_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+		
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+				else
+				  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+				printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+				
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+				                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+				/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			puts_P(PSTR("CDC Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			/* Select the data IN pipe */
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN);
+			Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+			/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+			{
+				/* Re-freeze IN pipe after the packet has been received */
+				Pipe_Freeze();
+
+				/* Check if data is in the pipe */
+				if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+				{
+					/* Get the length of the pipe data, and create a new buffer to hold it */
+					uint16_t BufferLength = Pipe_BytesInPipe();
+					uint8_t  Buffer[BufferLength];
+					
+					/* Read in the pipe data to the temporary buffer */
+					Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, BufferLength);
+									
+					/* Print out the buffer contents to the USART */
+					for (uint16_t BufferByte = 0; BufferByte < BufferLength; BufferByte++)
+					  putchar(Buffer[BufferByte]);
+				}
+
+				/* Clear the pipe after it is read, ready for the next packet */
+				Pipe_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			/* Re-freeze IN pipe after use */
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+
+			/* Select and unfreeze the notification pipe */
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
+			Pipe_Unfreeze();
+			
+			/* Check if a packet has been received */
+			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+			{
+				/* Discard the unused event notification */
+				Pipe_ClearIN();
+			}
+			
+			/* Freeze notification IN pipe after use */
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+						
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h
index ecf35229d..eceb0d670 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h
@@ -1,87 +1,87 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for VirtualSerialHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
-#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Pipe number for the CDC data IN pipe */
-		#define CDC_DATAPIPE_IN           1
-
-		/** Pipe number for the CDC data OUT pipe */
-		#define CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT          2
-
-		/** Pipe number for the CDC notification pipe */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE      3
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-				
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void CDC_Host_Task(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerialHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe number for the CDC data IN pipe */
+		#define CDC_DATAPIPE_IN           1
+
+		/** Pipe number for the CDC data OUT pipe */
+		#define CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT          2
+
+		/** Pipe number for the CDC notification pipe */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE      3
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+				
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CDC_Host_Task(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt
index 65999926c..3a7742248 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt
@@ -1,65 +1,65 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage CDC Host Demo
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  CDC host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
- *  for implementing a USB CDC host, for CDC devices using the standard ACM profile.
- *  
- *  This demo prints out received CDC data through the serial port.
- *  
- *  Not that this demo is only compatible with devices which report the correct CDC
- *  and ACM class, subclass and protocol values. Most USB-Serial cables have vendor
- *  specific features, thus use vendor-specific class/subclass/protocol codes to force
- *  the user to use specialized drivers. This demo is not compatible with such devices.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage CDC Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  CDC host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a USB CDC host, for CDC devices using the standard ACM profile.
+ *  
+ *  This demo prints out received CDC data through the serial port.
+ *  
+ *  Not that this demo is only compatible with devices which report the correct CDC
+ *  and ACM class, subclass and protocol values. Most USB-Serial cables have vendor
+ *  specific features, thus use vendor-specific class/subclass/protocol codes to force
+ *  the user to use specialized drivers. This demo is not compatible with such devices.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/makefile
index a4bde214a..41eca29e1 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/makefile
@@ -1,736 +1,736 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = VirtualSerialHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = VirtualSerialHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/Common/Attributes.h b/LUFA/Common/Attributes.h
index fed511a50..a3247b0c7 100644
--- a/LUFA/Common/Attributes.h
+++ b/LUFA/Common/Attributes.h
@@ -1,138 +1,138 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief AVR-GCC special function/variable attribute macros.
- *
- *  This file contains macros for applying GCC specific attributes to functions and variables to control various
- *  optimizer and code generation features of the compiler. Attributes may be placed in the function prototype 
- *  or variable declaration in any order, and multiple attributes can be specified for a single item via a space
- *  separated list.
- *
- *  On incompatible versions of GCC or on other compilers, these macros evaluate to nothing unless they are
- *  critical to the code's function and thus must throw a compiler error when used.
- *
- *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
- *        functionality.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_Common
- *  @defgroup Group_GCCAttr Function/Variable Attributes
- *
- *  Macros for easy access GCC function and variable attributes, which can be applied to function prototypes or
- *  variable attributes.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __FUNCATTR_H__
-#define __FUNCATTR_H__
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__COMMON_H__)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			#if (__GNUC__ >= 3) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Indicates to the compiler that the function can not ever return, so that any stack restoring or
-				 *  return code may be omitted by the compiler in the resulting binary.
-				 */
-				#define ATTR_NO_RETURN              __attribute__ ((noreturn))
-				
-				/** Indicates that the function returns a value which should not be ignored by the user code. When
-				 *  applied, any ignored return value from calling the function will produce a compiler warning.
-				 */
-				#define ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT     __attribute__ ((warn_unused_result))
-
-				/** Indicates that the specified parameters of the function are pointers which should never be NULL.
-				 *  When applied as a 1-based comma separated list the compiler will emit a warning if the specified
-				 *  parameters are known at compiler time to be NULL at the point of calling the function.
-				 */
-				#define ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(...)  __attribute__ ((nonnull (__VA_ARGS__)))
-
-				/** Removes any preamble or postamble from the function. When used, the function will not have any
-				 *  register or stack saving code. This should be used with caution, and when used the programmer
-				 *  is responsible for maintaining stack and register integrity.
-				 */
-				#define ATTR_NAKED                  __attribute__ ((naked))
-				
-				/** Prevents the compiler from considering a specified function for inlining. When applied, the given
-				 *  function will not be inlined under any circumstances.
-				 */
-				#define ATTR_NO_INLINE              __attribute__ ((noinline))
-
-				/** Forces the compiler to inline the specified function. When applied, the given function will be
-				 *  inlined under all circumstances.
-				 */
-				#define ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE          __attribute__ ((always_inline))
-				
-				/** Indicates that the specified function is pure, in that it has no side-effects other than global
-				 *  or parameter variable access.
-				 */
-				#define ATTR_PURE                   __attribute__ ((pure))
-				
-				/** Indicates that the specified function is constant, in that it has no side effects other than
-				 *  parameter access.
-				 */
-				#define ATTR_CONST                  __attribute__ ((const))
-				
-				/** Marks a given function as deprecated, which produces a warning if the function is called. */
-				#define ATTR_DEPRECATED             __attribute__ ((deprecated))
-				
-				/** Marks a function as a weak reference, which can be overridden by other functions with an
-				 *  identical name (in which case the weak reference is discarded at link time).
-				 */
-				#define ATTR_WEAK                   __attribute__ ((weak))
-				
-				/** Forces the compiler to not automatically zero the given global variable on startup, so that the
-				 *  current RAM contents is retained. Under most conditions this value will be random due to the
-				 *  behaviour of volatile memory once power is removed, but may be used in some specific circumstances,
-				 *  like the passing of values back after a system watchdog reset.
-				 */
-				#define ATTR_NO_INIT                __attribute__ ((section (".noinit")))
-			#endif
-
-			/** Places the function in one of the initialization sections, which execute before the main function
-			 *  of the application. Refer to the avr-libc manual for more information on the initialization sections.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] x  Initialization section number where the function should be placed
-			 */
-			#define ATTR_INIT_SECTION(x)        __attribute__ ((naked, section (".init" #x )))
-			
-			/** Marks a function as an alias for another function.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] x  Name of the function which the given function name should alias
-			 */
-			#define ATTR_ALIAS(x)               __attribute__ ((alias( #x )))
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief AVR-GCC special function/variable attribute macros.
+ *
+ *  This file contains macros for applying GCC specific attributes to functions and variables to control various
+ *  optimizer and code generation features of the compiler. Attributes may be placed in the function prototype 
+ *  or variable declaration in any order, and multiple attributes can be specified for a single item via a space
+ *  separated list.
+ *
+ *  On incompatible versions of GCC or on other compilers, these macros evaluate to nothing unless they are
+ *  critical to the code's function and thus must throw a compiler error when used.
+ *
+ *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
+ *        functionality.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_Common
+ *  @defgroup Group_GCCAttr Function/Variable Attributes
+ *
+ *  Macros for easy access GCC function and variable attributes, which can be applied to function prototypes or
+ *  variable attributes.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __FUNCATTR_H__
+#define __FUNCATTR_H__
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__COMMON_H__)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if (__GNUC__ >= 3) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates to the compiler that the function can not ever return, so that any stack restoring or
+				 *  return code may be omitted by the compiler in the resulting binary.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_NO_RETURN              __attribute__ ((noreturn))
+				
+				/** Indicates that the function returns a value which should not be ignored by the user code. When
+				 *  applied, any ignored return value from calling the function will produce a compiler warning.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT     __attribute__ ((warn_unused_result))
+
+				/** Indicates that the specified parameters of the function are pointers which should never be NULL.
+				 *  When applied as a 1-based comma separated list the compiler will emit a warning if the specified
+				 *  parameters are known at compiler time to be NULL at the point of calling the function.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(...)  __attribute__ ((nonnull (__VA_ARGS__)))
+
+				/** Removes any preamble or postamble from the function. When used, the function will not have any
+				 *  register or stack saving code. This should be used with caution, and when used the programmer
+				 *  is responsible for maintaining stack and register integrity.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_NAKED                  __attribute__ ((naked))
+				
+				/** Prevents the compiler from considering a specified function for inlining. When applied, the given
+				 *  function will not be inlined under any circumstances.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_NO_INLINE              __attribute__ ((noinline))
+
+				/** Forces the compiler to inline the specified function. When applied, the given function will be
+				 *  inlined under all circumstances.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE          __attribute__ ((always_inline))
+				
+				/** Indicates that the specified function is pure, in that it has no side-effects other than global
+				 *  or parameter variable access.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_PURE                   __attribute__ ((pure))
+				
+				/** Indicates that the specified function is constant, in that it has no side effects other than
+				 *  parameter access.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_CONST                  __attribute__ ((const))
+				
+				/** Marks a given function as deprecated, which produces a warning if the function is called. */
+				#define ATTR_DEPRECATED             __attribute__ ((deprecated))
+				
+				/** Marks a function as a weak reference, which can be overridden by other functions with an
+				 *  identical name (in which case the weak reference is discarded at link time).
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_WEAK                   __attribute__ ((weak))
+				
+				/** Forces the compiler to not automatically zero the given global variable on startup, so that the
+				 *  current RAM contents is retained. Under most conditions this value will be random due to the
+				 *  behaviour of volatile memory once power is removed, but may be used in some specific circumstances,
+				 *  like the passing of values back after a system watchdog reset.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_NO_INIT                __attribute__ ((section (".noinit")))
+			#endif
+
+			/** Places the function in one of the initialization sections, which execute before the main function
+			 *  of the application. Refer to the avr-libc manual for more information on the initialization sections.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] x  Initialization section number where the function should be placed
+			 */
+			#define ATTR_INIT_SECTION(x)        __attribute__ ((naked, section (".init" #x )))
+			
+			/** Marks a function as an alias for another function.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] x  Name of the function which the given function name should alias
+			 */
+			#define ATTR_ALIAS(x)               __attribute__ ((alias( #x )))
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h b/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h
index 700da980c..4849384fc 100644
--- a/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h
+++ b/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h
@@ -1,120 +1,120 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Supported board hardware defines.
- *
- *  This file contains constants which can be passed to the compiler (via setting the macro BOARD) in the
- *  user project makefile using the -D option to configure the library board-specific drivers.
- *
- *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
- *        functionality.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Common
- *  @defgroup Group_BoardTypes Board Types
- *
- *  Macros for indicating the chosen physical board hardware to the library. These macros should be used when
- *  defining the BOARD token to the chosen hardware via the -D switch in the project makefile.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-	
-#ifndef __BOARDTYPES_H__
-#define __BOARDTYPES_H__
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__COMMON_H__)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Selects the USBKEY specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
-			#define BOARD_USBKEY        0
-
-			/** Selects the STK525 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
-			#define BOARD_STK525        1
-
-			/** Selects the STK526 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
-			#define BOARD_STK526        2
-
-			/** Selects the RZUSBSTICK specific board drivers, including the driver for the boards LEDs. */
-			#define BOARD_RZUSBSTICK    3
-			
-			/** Selects the ATAVRUSBRF01 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
-			#define BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01  4
-
-			/** Selects the user-defined board drivers, which should be placed in the user project's folder
-			 *  under a directory named /Board/. Each board driver should be named identically to the LUFA
-			 *  master board driver (i.e., driver in the LUFA/Drivers/Board director) so that the library
-			 *  can correctly identify it.
-			 */
-			#define BOARD_USER          5
-
-			/** Selects the BUMBLEB specific board drivers, using the officially recommended peripheral layout. */
-			#define BOARD_BUMBLEB       6
-			
-			/** Selects the XPLAIN (Revision 2 or newer) specific board drivers, including LED and Dataflash driver. */
-			#define BOARD_XPLAIN        7
-
-			/** Selects the XPLAIN (Revision 1) specific board drivers, including LED and Dataflash driver. */
-			#define BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1   8
-
-			/** Selects the EVK527 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
-			#define BOARD_EVK527        9
-			
-			/** Disables board drivers when operation will not be adversely affected (e.g. LEDs) - use of board drivers
-			 *  such as the Joystick driver, where the removal would adversely affect the code's operation is still disallowed. */
-			#define BOARD_NONE          10
-			
-			/** Selects the Teensy (all versions) specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
-			#define BOARD_TEENSY        11
-			
-			/** Selects the USBTINY MKII specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
-			#define BOARD_USBTINYMKII   12
-			
-			/** Selects the Benito specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
-			#define BOARD_BENITO        13
-			
-			/** Selects the JM-DB-U2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
-			#define BOARD_JMDBU2        14
-
-			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				#define BOARD_          BOARD_NONE
-				
-				#if !defined(BOARD)
-					#define BOARD       BOARD_NONE
-				#endif
-			#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Supported board hardware defines.
+ *
+ *  This file contains constants which can be passed to the compiler (via setting the macro BOARD) in the
+ *  user project makefile using the -D option to configure the library board-specific drivers.
+ *
+ *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
+ *        functionality.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Common
+ *  @defgroup Group_BoardTypes Board Types
+ *
+ *  Macros for indicating the chosen physical board hardware to the library. These macros should be used when
+ *  defining the BOARD token to the chosen hardware via the -D switch in the project makefile.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+	
+#ifndef __BOARDTYPES_H__
+#define __BOARDTYPES_H__
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__COMMON_H__)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Selects the USBKEY specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_USBKEY        0
+
+			/** Selects the STK525 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_STK525        1
+
+			/** Selects the STK526 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_STK526        2
+
+			/** Selects the RZUSBSTICK specific board drivers, including the driver for the boards LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_RZUSBSTICK    3
+			
+			/** Selects the ATAVRUSBRF01 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01  4
+
+			/** Selects the user-defined board drivers, which should be placed in the user project's folder
+			 *  under a directory named /Board/. Each board driver should be named identically to the LUFA
+			 *  master board driver (i.e., driver in the LUFA/Drivers/Board director) so that the library
+			 *  can correctly identify it.
+			 */
+			#define BOARD_USER          5
+
+			/** Selects the BUMBLEB specific board drivers, using the officially recommended peripheral layout. */
+			#define BOARD_BUMBLEB       6
+			
+			/** Selects the XPLAIN (Revision 2 or newer) specific board drivers, including LED and Dataflash driver. */
+			#define BOARD_XPLAIN        7
+
+			/** Selects the XPLAIN (Revision 1) specific board drivers, including LED and Dataflash driver. */
+			#define BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1   8
+
+			/** Selects the EVK527 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_EVK527        9
+			
+			/** Disables board drivers when operation will not be adversely affected (e.g. LEDs) - use of board drivers
+			 *  such as the Joystick driver, where the removal would adversely affect the code's operation is still disallowed. */
+			#define BOARD_NONE          10
+			
+			/** Selects the Teensy (all versions) specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_TEENSY        11
+			
+			/** Selects the USBTINY MKII specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_USBTINYMKII   12
+			
+			/** Selects the Benito specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_BENITO        13
+			
+			/** Selects the JM-DB-U2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_JMDBU2        14
+
+			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#define BOARD_          BOARD_NONE
+				
+				#if !defined(BOARD)
+					#define BOARD       BOARD_NONE
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Common/Common.h b/LUFA/Common/Common.h
index a59a213a8..308897e6d 100644
--- a/LUFA/Common/Common.h
+++ b/LUFA/Common/Common.h
@@ -1,185 +1,185 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Common library convenience macros and functions.
- *
- *  This file contains macros which are common to all library elements, and which may be useful in user code. It
- *  also includes other common headers, such as Atomic.h, Attributes.h and BoardTypes.h.
- */
- 
-/** @defgroup Group_Common Common Utility Headers - LUFA/Drivers/Common/Common.h
- *
- *  Common utility headers containing macros, functions, enums and types which are common to all
- *  aspects of the library.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-/** @defgroup Group_Debugging Debugging Macros
- *
- *  Macros for debugging use.
- */
- 
-/** @defgroup Group_BitManip Endian and Bit Macros
- *
- *  Functions for swapping endianness and reversing bit orders.
- */
-
-#ifndef __COMMON_H__
-#define __COMMON_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-	
-		#include "Attributes.h"
-		#include "BoardTypes.h"
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */		
-			/** Macro for encasing other multi-statement macros. This should be used along with an opening brace
-			 *  before the start of any multi-statement macro, so that the macros contents as a whole are treated
-			 *  as a discrete block and not as a list of separate statements which may cause problems when used as
-			 *  a block (such as inline IF statements).
-			 */
-			#define MACROS                  do
-
-			/** Macro for encasing other multi-statement macros. This should be used along with a preceding closing
-			 *  brace at the end of any multi-statement macro, so that the macros contents as a whole are treated
-			 *  as a discrete block and not as a list of separate statements which may cause problems when used as
-			 *  a block (such as inline IF statements).
-			 */
-			#define MACROE                  while (0)
-			
-			/** Defines a volatile NOP statement which cannot be optimized out by the compiler, and thus can always
-			 *  be set as a breakpoint in the resulting code. Useful for debugging purposes, where the optimizer
-			 *  removes/reorders code to the point where break points cannot reliably be set.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_Debugging
-			 */
-			#define JTAG_DEBUG_POINT()      asm volatile ("NOP" ::)
-
-			/** Defines an explicit JTAG break point in the resulting binary via the ASM BREAK statement. When
-			 *  a JTAG is used, this causes the program execution to halt when reached until manually resumed.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_Debugging
-			 */
-			#define JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK()      asm volatile ("BREAK" ::)
-			
-			/** Macro for testing condition "x" and breaking via JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK() if the condition is false.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_Debugging
-			*/
-			#define JTAG_DEBUG_ASSERT(x)    MACROS{ if (!(x)) { JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK(); } }MACROE
-
-			/** Macro for testing condition "x" and writing debug data to the serial stream if false. As a
-			 *  prerequisite for this macro, the serial stream should be configured via the Peripheral/SerialStream driver.
-			 *
-			 *  The serial output takes the form "{FILENAME}: Function {FUNCTION NAME}, Line {LINE NUMBER}: Assertion
-			 *  {x} failed."
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_Debugging
-			 */
-			#define SERIAL_STREAM_ASSERT(x) MACROS{ if (!(x)) { printf_P(PSTR("%s: Function \"%s\", Line %d: "   \
-																"Assertion \"%s\" failed.\r\n"),   \
-																__FILE__, __func__, __LINE__, #x); \
-			                                } }MACROE
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Function to reverse the individual bits in a byte - i.e. bit 7 is moved to bit 0, bit 6 to bit 1,
-			 *  etc.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_BitManip
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Byte   Byte of data whose bits are to be reversed
-			 */
-			static inline uint8_t BitReverse(uint8_t Byte) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
-			static inline uint8_t BitReverse(uint8_t Byte)
-			{
-				Byte = (((Byte & 0xF0) >> 4) | ((Byte & 0x0F) << 4));
-				Byte = (((Byte & 0xCC) >> 2) | ((Byte & 0x33) << 2));
-				Byte = (((Byte & 0xAA) >> 1) | ((Byte & 0x55) << 1));
-
-				return Byte;
-			}
-			
-			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 16 bit number.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_BitManip
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Word   Word of data whose bytes are to be swapped
-			 */
-			static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(uint16_t Word) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
-			static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(uint16_t Word)
-			{
-				return ((Word >> 8) | (Word << 8));				
-			}
-
-			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 32 bit number.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_BitManip
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] DWord   Double word of data whose bytes are to be swapped
-			 */
-			static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(uint32_t DWord) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
-			static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(uint32_t DWord)
-			{
-				return (((DWord & 0xFF000000) >> 24) |
-				        ((DWord & 0x00FF0000) >> 8)  |
-						((DWord & 0x0000FF00) << 8)  |
-						((DWord & 0x000000FF) << 24));
-			}
-
-			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a n byte number.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_BitManip
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] Data  Pointer to a number containing an even number of bytes to be reversed
-			 *  \param[in] Bytes  Length of the data in bytes
-			 */
-			static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* Data, uint8_t Bytes);
-			static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* Data, uint8_t Bytes)
-			{
-				uint8_t* CurrDataPos = Data;
-			
-				while (Bytes)
-				{
-					uint8_t Temp = *CurrDataPos;
-					*CurrDataPos = *(CurrDataPos + Bytes - 1);
-					*(CurrDataPos + Bytes - 1) = Temp;
-
-					CurrDataPos++;
-					Bytes -= 2;
-				}
-			}
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common library convenience macros and functions.
+ *
+ *  This file contains macros which are common to all library elements, and which may be useful in user code. It
+ *  also includes other common headers, such as Atomic.h, Attributes.h and BoardTypes.h.
+ */
+ 
+/** @defgroup Group_Common Common Utility Headers - LUFA/Drivers/Common/Common.h
+ *
+ *  Common utility headers containing macros, functions, enums and types which are common to all
+ *  aspects of the library.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup Group_Debugging Debugging Macros
+ *
+ *  Macros for debugging use.
+ */
+ 
+/** @defgroup Group_BitManip Endian and Bit Macros
+ *
+ *  Functions for swapping endianness and reversing bit orders.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __COMMON_H__
+#define __COMMON_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+	
+		#include "Attributes.h"
+		#include "BoardTypes.h"
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */		
+			/** Macro for encasing other multi-statement macros. This should be used along with an opening brace
+			 *  before the start of any multi-statement macro, so that the macros contents as a whole are treated
+			 *  as a discrete block and not as a list of separate statements which may cause problems when used as
+			 *  a block (such as inline IF statements).
+			 */
+			#define MACROS                  do
+
+			/** Macro for encasing other multi-statement macros. This should be used along with a preceding closing
+			 *  brace at the end of any multi-statement macro, so that the macros contents as a whole are treated
+			 *  as a discrete block and not as a list of separate statements which may cause problems when used as
+			 *  a block (such as inline IF statements).
+			 */
+			#define MACROE                  while (0)
+			
+			/** Defines a volatile NOP statement which cannot be optimized out by the compiler, and thus can always
+			 *  be set as a breakpoint in the resulting code. Useful for debugging purposes, where the optimizer
+			 *  removes/reorders code to the point where break points cannot reliably be set.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_Debugging
+			 */
+			#define JTAG_DEBUG_POINT()      asm volatile ("NOP" ::)
+
+			/** Defines an explicit JTAG break point in the resulting binary via the ASM BREAK statement. When
+			 *  a JTAG is used, this causes the program execution to halt when reached until manually resumed.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_Debugging
+			 */
+			#define JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK()      asm volatile ("BREAK" ::)
+			
+			/** Macro for testing condition "x" and breaking via JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK() if the condition is false.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_Debugging
+			*/
+			#define JTAG_DEBUG_ASSERT(x)    MACROS{ if (!(x)) { JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK(); } }MACROE
+
+			/** Macro for testing condition "x" and writing debug data to the serial stream if false. As a
+			 *  prerequisite for this macro, the serial stream should be configured via the Peripheral/SerialStream driver.
+			 *
+			 *  The serial output takes the form "{FILENAME}: Function {FUNCTION NAME}, Line {LINE NUMBER}: Assertion
+			 *  {x} failed."
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_Debugging
+			 */
+			#define SERIAL_STREAM_ASSERT(x) MACROS{ if (!(x)) { printf_P(PSTR("%s: Function \"%s\", Line %d: "   \
+																"Assertion \"%s\" failed.\r\n"),   \
+																__FILE__, __func__, __LINE__, #x); \
+			                                } }MACROE
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Function to reverse the individual bits in a byte - i.e. bit 7 is moved to bit 0, bit 6 to bit 1,
+			 *  etc.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_BitManip
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte   Byte of data whose bits are to be reversed
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t BitReverse(uint8_t Byte) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
+			static inline uint8_t BitReverse(uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				Byte = (((Byte & 0xF0) >> 4) | ((Byte & 0x0F) << 4));
+				Byte = (((Byte & 0xCC) >> 2) | ((Byte & 0x33) << 2));
+				Byte = (((Byte & 0xAA) >> 1) | ((Byte & 0x55) << 1));
+
+				return Byte;
+			}
+			
+			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 16 bit number.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_BitManip
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Word   Word of data whose bytes are to be swapped
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(uint16_t Word) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
+			static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(uint16_t Word)
+			{
+				return ((Word >> 8) | (Word << 8));				
+			}
+
+			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 32 bit number.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_BitManip
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DWord   Double word of data whose bytes are to be swapped
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(uint32_t DWord) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
+			static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(uint32_t DWord)
+			{
+				return (((DWord & 0xFF000000) >> 24) |
+				        ((DWord & 0x00FF0000) >> 8)  |
+						((DWord & 0x0000FF00) << 8)  |
+						((DWord & 0x000000FF) << 24));
+			}
+
+			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a n byte number.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_BitManip
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] Data  Pointer to a number containing an even number of bytes to be reversed
+			 *  \param[in] Bytes  Length of the data in bytes
+			 */
+			static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* Data, uint8_t Bytes);
+			static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* Data, uint8_t Bytes)
+			{
+				uint8_t* CurrDataPos = Data;
+			
+				while (Bytes)
+				{
+					uint8_t Temp = *CurrDataPos;
+					*CurrDataPos = *(CurrDataPos + Bytes - 1);
+					*(CurrDataPos + Bytes - 1) = Temp;
+
+					CurrDataPos++;
+					Bytes -= 2;
+				}
+			}
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Doxygen.conf b/LUFA/Doxygen.conf
index ee8d9291f..812f23985 100644
--- a/LUFA/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/LUFA/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1562 +1,1562 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA (Formerly MyUSB) Library"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 000000
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = NO
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = NO
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = YES
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 1
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           = ../
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             = ./
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        = Doxygen.css
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               = ../LUFA.chm
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           = 
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 300
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = YES
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = __CALLBACK_PARAM
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = YES
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = YES
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = YES
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = YES
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA (Formerly MyUSB) Library"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 000000
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = NO
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = NO
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = YES
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 1
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           = ../
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             = ./
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        = Doxygen.css
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               = ../LUFA.chm
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           = 
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 300
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = YES
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = __CALLBACK_PARAM
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = YES
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = YES
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = YES
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = YES
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/LUFA/Doxygen.css b/LUFA/Doxygen.css
index b04ba60de..f8731907e 100644
--- a/LUFA/Doxygen.css
+++ b/LUFA/Doxygen.css
@@ -1,547 +1,547 @@
-/* The standard CSS for doxygen */
-
-body, table, div, p, dl {
-	font-family: Lucida Grande, Verdana, Geneva, Arial, sans-serif;
-	font-size: 12px;
-}
-
-/* @group Heading Levels */
-
-h1 {
-	text-align: center;
-	font-size: 150%;
-}
-
-h2 {
-	font-size: 120%;
-}
-
-h3 {
-	font-size: 100%;
-}
-
-dt {
-	font-weight: bold;
-}
-
-div.multicol {
-	-moz-column-gap: 1em;
-	-webkit-column-gap: 1em;
-	-moz-column-count: 3;
-	-webkit-column-count: 3;
-}
-
-p.startli, p.startdd, p.starttd {
-	margin-top: 2px;
-}
-
-p.endli {
-	margin-bottom: 0px;
-}
-
-p.enddd {
-	margin-bottom: 4px;
-}
-
-p.endtd {
-	margin-bottom: 2px;
-}
-
-/* @end */
-
-caption {
-	font-weight: bold;
-}
-
-span.legend {
-        font-size: 70%;
-        text-align: center;
-}
-
-h3.version {
-        font-size: 90%;
-        text-align: center;
-}
-
-div.qindex, div.navtab{
-	background-color: #e8eef2;
-	border: 1px solid #84b0c7;
-	text-align: center;
-	margin: 2px;
-	padding: 2px;
-}
-
-div.qindex, div.navpath {
-	width: 100%;
-	line-height: 140%;
-}
-
-div.navtab {
-	margin-right: 15px;
-}
-
-/* @group Link Styling */
-
-a {
-	color: #153788;
-	font-weight: normal;
-	text-decoration: none;
-}
-
-.contents a:visited {
-	color: #1b77c5;
-}
-
-a:hover {
-	text-decoration: underline;
-}
-
-a.qindex {
-	font-weight: bold;
-}
-
-a.qindexHL {
-	font-weight: bold;
-	background-color: #6666cc;
-	color: #ffffff;
-	border: 1px double #9295C2;
-}
-
-.contents a.qindexHL:visited {
-        color: #ffffff;
-}
-
-a.el {
-	font-weight: bold;
-}
-
-a.elRef {
-}
-
-a.code {
-	color: #3030f0;
-}
-
-a.codeRef {
-	color: #3030f0;
-}
-
-/* @end */
-
-dl.el {
-	margin-left: -1cm;
-}
-
-.fragment {
-	font-family: monospace, fixed;
-	font-size: 105%;
-}
-
-pre.fragment {
-	border: 1px solid #CCCCCC;
-	background-color: #f5f5f5;
-	padding: 4px 6px;
-	margin: 4px 8px 4px 2px;
-	overflow: auto;
-	word-wrap: break-word;
-	font-size:  9pt;
-	line-height: 125%;
-}
-
-div.ah {
-	background-color: black;
-	font-weight: bold;
-	color: #ffffff;
-	margin-bottom: 3px;
-	margin-top: 3px
-}
-
-div.groupHeader {
-	margin-left: 16px;
-	margin-top: 12px;
-	margin-bottom: 6px;
-	font-weight: bold;
-}
-
-div.groupText {
-	margin-left: 16px;
-	font-style: italic;
-}
-
-body {
-	background: white;
-	color: black;
-	margin-right: 20px;
-	margin-left: 20px;
-}
-
-td.indexkey {
-	background-color: #e8eef2;
-	font-weight: bold;
-	border: 1px solid #CCCCCC;
-	margin: 2px 0px 2px 0;
-	padding: 2px 10px;
-}
-
-td.indexvalue {
-	background-color: #e8eef2;
-	border: 1px solid #CCCCCC;
-	padding: 2px 10px;
-	margin: 2px 0px;
-}
-
-tr.memlist {
-	background-color: #f0f0f0;
-}
-
-p.formulaDsp {
-	text-align: center;
-}
-
-img.formulaDsp {
-	
-}
-
-img.formulaInl {
-	vertical-align: middle;
-}
-
-div.center {
-	text-align: center;
-        margin-top: 0px;
-        margin-bottom: 0px;
-        padding: 0px;
-}
-
-div.center img {
-	border: 0px;
-}
-
-img.footer {
-	border: 0px;
-	vertical-align: middle;
-}
-
-/* @group Code Colorization */
-
-span.keyword {
-	color: #008000
-}
-
-span.keywordtype {
-	color: #604020
-}
-
-span.keywordflow {
-	color: #e08000
-}
-
-span.comment {
-	color: #800000
-}
-
-span.preprocessor {
-	color: #806020
-}
-
-span.stringliteral {
-	color: #002080
-}
-
-span.charliteral {
-	color: #008080
-}
-
-span.vhdldigit { 
-	color: #ff00ff 
-}
-
-span.vhdlchar { 
-	color: #000000 
-}
-
-span.vhdlkeyword { 
-	color: #700070 
-}
-
-span.vhdllogic { 
-	color: #ff0000 
-}
-
-/* @end */
-
-.search {
-	color: #003399;
-	font-weight: bold;
-}
-
-form.search {
-	margin-bottom: 0px;
-	margin-top: 0px;
-}
-
-input.search {
-	font-size: 75%;
-	color: #000080;
-	font-weight: normal;
-	background-color: #e8eef2;
-}
-
-td.tiny {
-	font-size: 75%;
-}
-
-.dirtab {
-	padding: 4px;
-	border-collapse: collapse;
-	border: 1px solid #84b0c7;
-}
-
-th.dirtab {
-	background: #e8eef2;
-	font-weight: bold;
-}
-
-hr {
-	height: 0px;
-	border: none;
-	border-top: 1px solid #666;
-}
-
-hr.footer {
-	height: 1px;
-}
-
-/* @group Member Descriptions */
-
-.mdescLeft, .mdescRight,
-.memItemLeft, .memItemRight,
-.memTemplItemLeft, .memTemplItemRight, .memTemplParams {
-	background-color: #FAFAFA;
-	border: none;
-	margin: 4px;
-	padding: 1px 0 0 8px;
-}
-
-.mdescLeft, .mdescRight {
-	padding: 0px 8px 4px 8px;
-	color: #555;
-}
-
-.memItemLeft, .memItemRight, .memTemplParams {
-	border-top: 1px solid #ccc;
-}
-
-.memItemLeft, .memTemplItemLeft {
-        white-space: nowrap;
-}
-
-.memTemplParams {
-	color: #606060;
-        white-space: nowrap;
-}
-
-/* @end */
-
-/* @group Member Details */
-
-/* Styles for detailed member documentation */
-
-.memtemplate {
-	font-size: 80%;
-	color: #606060;
-	font-weight: normal;
-	margin-left: 3px;
-}
-
-.memnav {
-	background-color: #e8eef2;
-	border: 1px solid #84b0c7;
-	text-align: center;
-	margin: 2px;
-	margin-right: 15px;
-	padding: 2px;
-}
-
-.memitem {
-	padding: 0;
-	margin-bottom: 10px;
-}
-
-.memname {
-        white-space: nowrap;
-        font-weight: bold;
-        margin-left: 6px;
-}
-
-.memproto {
-        border-top: 1px solid #84b0c7;          
-        border-left: 1px solid #84b0c7;         
-        border-right: 1px solid #84b0c7; 
-        padding: 0;
-        background-color: #d5e1e8;
-        font-weight: bold;
-        /* firefox specific markup */
-        background-image: -moz-linear-gradient(rgba(228, 233, 245, 1.0) 0%, rgba(193, 205, 232, 1.0) 100%);
-        -moz-box-shadow: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15) 5px 5px 5px;
-        -moz-border-radius-topright: 8px;
-        -moz-border-radius-topleft: 8px;
-        /* webkit specific markup */
-        background-image: -webkit-gradient(linear, 0% 0%, 0% 100%, from(rgba(228, 233, 245, 1.0)), to(rgba(193, 205, 232, 1.0)));
-        -webkit-box-shadow: 5px 5px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15);
-        -webkit-border-top-right-radius: 8px;
-        -webkit-border-top-left-radius: 8px;
-
-}
-
-.memdoc {
-        border-bottom: 1px solid #84b0c7;      
-        border-left: 1px solid #84b0c7;      
-        border-right: 1px solid #84b0c7; 
-        padding: 2px 5px;
-        background-color: #eef3f5;
-        border-top-width: 0;
-        /* firefox specific markup */
-        -moz-border-radius-bottomleft: 8px;
-        -moz-border-radius-bottomright: 8px;
-        -moz-box-shadow: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15) 5px 5px 5px;
-        /* webkit specific markup */
-        -webkit-border-bottom-left-radius: 8px;
-        -webkit-border-bottom-right-radius: 8px;
-        -webkit-box-shadow: 5px 5px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15);
-}
-
-.paramkey {
-	text-align: right;
-}
-
-.paramtype {
-	white-space: nowrap;
-}
-
-.paramname {
-	color: #602020;
-	white-space: nowrap;
-}
-.paramname em {
-	font-style: normal;
-}
-
-/* @end */
-
-/* @group Directory (tree) */
-
-/* for the tree view */
-
-.ftvtree {
-	font-family: sans-serif;
-	margin: 0.5em;
-}
-
-/* these are for tree view when used as main index */
-
-.directory {
-	font-size: 9pt;
-	font-weight: bold;
-}
-
-.directory h3 {
-	margin: 0px;
-	margin-top: 1em;
-	font-size: 11pt;
-}
-
-/*
-The following two styles can be used to replace the root node title
-with an image of your choice.  Simply uncomment the next two styles,
-specify the name of your image and be sure to set 'height' to the
-proper pixel height of your image.
-*/
-
-/*
-.directory h3.swap {
-	height: 61px;
-	background-repeat: no-repeat;
-	background-image: url("yourimage.gif");
-}
-.directory h3.swap span {
-	display: none;
-}
-*/
-
-.directory > h3 {
-	margin-top: 0;
-}
-
-.directory p {
-	margin: 0px;
-	white-space: nowrap;
-}
-
-.directory div {
-	display: none;
-	margin: 0px;
-}
-
-.directory img {
-	vertical-align: -30%;
-}
-
-/* these are for tree view when not used as main index */
-
-.directory-alt {
-	font-size: 100%;
-	font-weight: bold;
-}
-
-.directory-alt h3 {
-	margin: 0px;
-	margin-top: 1em;
-	font-size: 11pt;
-}
-
-.directory-alt > h3 {
-	margin-top: 0;
-}
-
-.directory-alt p {
-	margin: 0px;
-	white-space: nowrap;
-}
-
-.directory-alt div {
-	display: none;
-	margin: 0px;
-}
-
-.directory-alt img {
-	vertical-align: -30%;
-}
-
-/* @end */
-
-address {
-	font-style: normal;
-	color: #333;
-}
-
-table.doxtable {
-	border-collapse:collapse;
-}
-
-table.doxtable td, table.doxtable th {
-	border: 1px solid #153788;
-	padding: 3px 7px 2px;
-}
-
-table.doxtable th {
-	background-color: #254798;
-	color: #FFFFFF;
-	font-size: 110%;
-	padding-bottom: 4px;
-	padding-top: 5px;
-	text-align:left;
-}
-
-
+/* The standard CSS for doxygen */
+
+body, table, div, p, dl {
+	font-family: Lucida Grande, Verdana, Geneva, Arial, sans-serif;
+	font-size: 12px;
+}
+
+/* @group Heading Levels */
+
+h1 {
+	text-align: center;
+	font-size: 150%;
+}
+
+h2 {
+	font-size: 120%;
+}
+
+h3 {
+	font-size: 100%;
+}
+
+dt {
+	font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+div.multicol {
+	-moz-column-gap: 1em;
+	-webkit-column-gap: 1em;
+	-moz-column-count: 3;
+	-webkit-column-count: 3;
+}
+
+p.startli, p.startdd, p.starttd {
+	margin-top: 2px;
+}
+
+p.endli {
+	margin-bottom: 0px;
+}
+
+p.enddd {
+	margin-bottom: 4px;
+}
+
+p.endtd {
+	margin-bottom: 2px;
+}
+
+/* @end */
+
+caption {
+	font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+span.legend {
+        font-size: 70%;
+        text-align: center;
+}
+
+h3.version {
+        font-size: 90%;
+        text-align: center;
+}
+
+div.qindex, div.navtab{
+	background-color: #e8eef2;
+	border: 1px solid #84b0c7;
+	text-align: center;
+	margin: 2px;
+	padding: 2px;
+}
+
+div.qindex, div.navpath {
+	width: 100%;
+	line-height: 140%;
+}
+
+div.navtab {
+	margin-right: 15px;
+}
+
+/* @group Link Styling */
+
+a {
+	color: #153788;
+	font-weight: normal;
+	text-decoration: none;
+}
+
+.contents a:visited {
+	color: #1b77c5;
+}
+
+a:hover {
+	text-decoration: underline;
+}
+
+a.qindex {
+	font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+a.qindexHL {
+	font-weight: bold;
+	background-color: #6666cc;
+	color: #ffffff;
+	border: 1px double #9295C2;
+}
+
+.contents a.qindexHL:visited {
+        color: #ffffff;
+}
+
+a.el {
+	font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+a.elRef {
+}
+
+a.code {
+	color: #3030f0;
+}
+
+a.codeRef {
+	color: #3030f0;
+}
+
+/* @end */
+
+dl.el {
+	margin-left: -1cm;
+}
+
+.fragment {
+	font-family: monospace, fixed;
+	font-size: 105%;
+}
+
+pre.fragment {
+	border: 1px solid #CCCCCC;
+	background-color: #f5f5f5;
+	padding: 4px 6px;
+	margin: 4px 8px 4px 2px;
+	overflow: auto;
+	word-wrap: break-word;
+	font-size:  9pt;
+	line-height: 125%;
+}
+
+div.ah {
+	background-color: black;
+	font-weight: bold;
+	color: #ffffff;
+	margin-bottom: 3px;
+	margin-top: 3px
+}
+
+div.groupHeader {
+	margin-left: 16px;
+	margin-top: 12px;
+	margin-bottom: 6px;
+	font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+div.groupText {
+	margin-left: 16px;
+	font-style: italic;
+}
+
+body {
+	background: white;
+	color: black;
+	margin-right: 20px;
+	margin-left: 20px;
+}
+
+td.indexkey {
+	background-color: #e8eef2;
+	font-weight: bold;
+	border: 1px solid #CCCCCC;
+	margin: 2px 0px 2px 0;
+	padding: 2px 10px;
+}
+
+td.indexvalue {
+	background-color: #e8eef2;
+	border: 1px solid #CCCCCC;
+	padding: 2px 10px;
+	margin: 2px 0px;
+}
+
+tr.memlist {
+	background-color: #f0f0f0;
+}
+
+p.formulaDsp {
+	text-align: center;
+}
+
+img.formulaDsp {
+	
+}
+
+img.formulaInl {
+	vertical-align: middle;
+}
+
+div.center {
+	text-align: center;
+        margin-top: 0px;
+        margin-bottom: 0px;
+        padding: 0px;
+}
+
+div.center img {
+	border: 0px;
+}
+
+img.footer {
+	border: 0px;
+	vertical-align: middle;
+}
+
+/* @group Code Colorization */
+
+span.keyword {
+	color: #008000
+}
+
+span.keywordtype {
+	color: #604020
+}
+
+span.keywordflow {
+	color: #e08000
+}
+
+span.comment {
+	color: #800000
+}
+
+span.preprocessor {
+	color: #806020
+}
+
+span.stringliteral {
+	color: #002080
+}
+
+span.charliteral {
+	color: #008080
+}
+
+span.vhdldigit { 
+	color: #ff00ff 
+}
+
+span.vhdlchar { 
+	color: #000000 
+}
+
+span.vhdlkeyword { 
+	color: #700070 
+}
+
+span.vhdllogic { 
+	color: #ff0000 
+}
+
+/* @end */
+
+.search {
+	color: #003399;
+	font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+form.search {
+	margin-bottom: 0px;
+	margin-top: 0px;
+}
+
+input.search {
+	font-size: 75%;
+	color: #000080;
+	font-weight: normal;
+	background-color: #e8eef2;
+}
+
+td.tiny {
+	font-size: 75%;
+}
+
+.dirtab {
+	padding: 4px;
+	border-collapse: collapse;
+	border: 1px solid #84b0c7;
+}
+
+th.dirtab {
+	background: #e8eef2;
+	font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+hr {
+	height: 0px;
+	border: none;
+	border-top: 1px solid #666;
+}
+
+hr.footer {
+	height: 1px;
+}
+
+/* @group Member Descriptions */
+
+.mdescLeft, .mdescRight,
+.memItemLeft, .memItemRight,
+.memTemplItemLeft, .memTemplItemRight, .memTemplParams {
+	background-color: #FAFAFA;
+	border: none;
+	margin: 4px;
+	padding: 1px 0 0 8px;
+}
+
+.mdescLeft, .mdescRight {
+	padding: 0px 8px 4px 8px;
+	color: #555;
+}
+
+.memItemLeft, .memItemRight, .memTemplParams {
+	border-top: 1px solid #ccc;
+}
+
+.memItemLeft, .memTemplItemLeft {
+        white-space: nowrap;
+}
+
+.memTemplParams {
+	color: #606060;
+        white-space: nowrap;
+}
+
+/* @end */
+
+/* @group Member Details */
+
+/* Styles for detailed member documentation */
+
+.memtemplate {
+	font-size: 80%;
+	color: #606060;
+	font-weight: normal;
+	margin-left: 3px;
+}
+
+.memnav {
+	background-color: #e8eef2;
+	border: 1px solid #84b0c7;
+	text-align: center;
+	margin: 2px;
+	margin-right: 15px;
+	padding: 2px;
+}
+
+.memitem {
+	padding: 0;
+	margin-bottom: 10px;
+}
+
+.memname {
+        white-space: nowrap;
+        font-weight: bold;
+        margin-left: 6px;
+}
+
+.memproto {
+        border-top: 1px solid #84b0c7;          
+        border-left: 1px solid #84b0c7;         
+        border-right: 1px solid #84b0c7; 
+        padding: 0;
+        background-color: #d5e1e8;
+        font-weight: bold;
+        /* firefox specific markup */
+        background-image: -moz-linear-gradient(rgba(228, 233, 245, 1.0) 0%, rgba(193, 205, 232, 1.0) 100%);
+        -moz-box-shadow: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15) 5px 5px 5px;
+        -moz-border-radius-topright: 8px;
+        -moz-border-radius-topleft: 8px;
+        /* webkit specific markup */
+        background-image: -webkit-gradient(linear, 0% 0%, 0% 100%, from(rgba(228, 233, 245, 1.0)), to(rgba(193, 205, 232, 1.0)));
+        -webkit-box-shadow: 5px 5px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15);
+        -webkit-border-top-right-radius: 8px;
+        -webkit-border-top-left-radius: 8px;
+
+}
+
+.memdoc {
+        border-bottom: 1px solid #84b0c7;      
+        border-left: 1px solid #84b0c7;      
+        border-right: 1px solid #84b0c7; 
+        padding: 2px 5px;
+        background-color: #eef3f5;
+        border-top-width: 0;
+        /* firefox specific markup */
+        -moz-border-radius-bottomleft: 8px;
+        -moz-border-radius-bottomright: 8px;
+        -moz-box-shadow: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15) 5px 5px 5px;
+        /* webkit specific markup */
+        -webkit-border-bottom-left-radius: 8px;
+        -webkit-border-bottom-right-radius: 8px;
+        -webkit-box-shadow: 5px 5px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15);
+}
+
+.paramkey {
+	text-align: right;
+}
+
+.paramtype {
+	white-space: nowrap;
+}
+
+.paramname {
+	color: #602020;
+	white-space: nowrap;
+}
+.paramname em {
+	font-style: normal;
+}
+
+/* @end */
+
+/* @group Directory (tree) */
+
+/* for the tree view */
+
+.ftvtree {
+	font-family: sans-serif;
+	margin: 0.5em;
+}
+
+/* these are for tree view when used as main index */
+
+.directory {
+	font-size: 9pt;
+	font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+.directory h3 {
+	margin: 0px;
+	margin-top: 1em;
+	font-size: 11pt;
+}
+
+/*
+The following two styles can be used to replace the root node title
+with an image of your choice.  Simply uncomment the next two styles,
+specify the name of your image and be sure to set 'height' to the
+proper pixel height of your image.
+*/
+
+/*
+.directory h3.swap {
+	height: 61px;
+	background-repeat: no-repeat;
+	background-image: url("yourimage.gif");
+}
+.directory h3.swap span {
+	display: none;
+}
+*/
+
+.directory > h3 {
+	margin-top: 0;
+}
+
+.directory p {
+	margin: 0px;
+	white-space: nowrap;
+}
+
+.directory div {
+	display: none;
+	margin: 0px;
+}
+
+.directory img {
+	vertical-align: -30%;
+}
+
+/* these are for tree view when not used as main index */
+
+.directory-alt {
+	font-size: 100%;
+	font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+.directory-alt h3 {
+	margin: 0px;
+	margin-top: 1em;
+	font-size: 11pt;
+}
+
+.directory-alt > h3 {
+	margin-top: 0;
+}
+
+.directory-alt p {
+	margin: 0px;
+	white-space: nowrap;
+}
+
+.directory-alt div {
+	display: none;
+	margin: 0px;
+}
+
+.directory-alt img {
+	vertical-align: -30%;
+}
+
+/* @end */
+
+address {
+	font-style: normal;
+	color: #333;
+}
+
+table.doxtable {
+	border-collapse:collapse;
+}
+
+table.doxtable td, table.doxtable th {
+	border: 1px solid #153788;
+	padding: 3px 7px 2px;
+}
+
+table.doxtable th {
+	background-color: #254798;
+	color: #FFFFFF;
+	font-size: 110%;
+	padding-bottom: 4px;
+	padding-top: 5px;
+	text-align:left;
+}
+
+
 p {padding-left: 20px;}
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/DriverStubs/Buttons.h b/LUFA/DriverStubs/Buttons.h
index deab56e9e..c92577a44 100644
--- a/LUFA/DriverStubs/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/DriverStubs/Buttons.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/*
-   This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
-   layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
-   the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
-   driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
-   inside the application's folder.
-
-   This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Buttons driver,
-   for the control of physical board-mounted GPIO pushbuttons.
-*/
- 
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_USER_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_USER_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		// TODO: Add any required includes here
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1          // TODO: Add mask for first board button here
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
-			{
-				// TODO: Initialize the appropriate port pins as an inputs here, with pull-ups
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				// TODO: Return current button status here, debounced if required
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+   This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+   layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+   the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+   driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+   inside the application's folder.
+
+   This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Buttons driver,
+   for the control of physical board-mounted GPIO pushbuttons.
+*/
+ 
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_USER_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1          // TODO: Add mask for first board button here
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Initialize the appropriate port pins as an inputs here, with pull-ups
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Return current button status here, debounced if required
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h b/LUFA/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h
index 10eafa2a3..d00d3ef6e 100644
--- a/LUFA/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h
+++ b/LUFA/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h
@@ -1,117 +1,117 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/*
-   This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
-   layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
-   the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
-   driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
-   inside the application's folder.
-
-   This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Dataflash
-   driver.
-*/
-
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USER_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_USER_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		// TODO: Add any required includes here
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                // TODO: Replace this with a mask of all the /CS pins of all dataflashes
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 // TODO: Replace with the DDR register name for the board's Dataflash ICs
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                // TODO: Replace with the PORT register name for the board's Dataflash ICs
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 // TODO: Replace with the number of dataflashes on the board, max 2
-
-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
-
-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      // TODO: Replace with mask to select the first Dataflash chip
-
-			/** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP2                      // TODO: Replace with mask to select the second Dataflash chip, if available
-			
-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  // TODO: Replace with the page size for the Dataflash ICs
-
-			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      // TODO: Replace with the total number of pages inside one of the Dataflash ICs
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
-			 *  are deselected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
-			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
-			{
-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-				
-				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  return;
-
-				// TODO: If more than one dataflash chip, select the correct chip from the page address here
-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-			}
-
-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
-			{	
-				// TODO: If more than one dataflash chip, adjust absolute page address to be correct for the current chip,
-				//       also the shifts may need to be altered to suit the dataflash model being used				
-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
-			}
-			
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+   This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+   layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+   the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+   driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+   inside the application's folder.
+
+   This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Dataflash
+   driver.
+*/
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USER_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                // TODO: Replace this with a mask of all the /CS pins of all dataflashes
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 // TODO: Replace with the DDR register name for the board's Dataflash ICs
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                // TODO: Replace with the PORT register name for the board's Dataflash ICs
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 // TODO: Replace with the number of dataflashes on the board, max 2
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      // TODO: Replace with mask to select the first Dataflash chip
+
+			/** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP2                      // TODO: Replace with mask to select the second Dataflash chip, if available
+			
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  // TODO: Replace with the page size for the Dataflash ICs
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      // TODO: Replace with the total number of pages inside one of the Dataflash ICs
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				
+				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  return;
+
+				// TODO: If more than one dataflash chip, select the correct chip from the page address here
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{	
+				// TODO: If more than one dataflash chip, adjust absolute page address to be correct for the current chip,
+				//       also the shifts may need to be altered to suit the dataflash model being used				
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+			
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/DriverStubs/Joystick.h b/LUFA/DriverStubs/Joystick.h
index 21e306f1e..4e7040a42 100644
--- a/LUFA/DriverStubs/Joystick.h
+++ b/LUFA/DriverStubs/Joystick.h
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/*
-   This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
-   layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
-   the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
-   driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
-   inside the application's folder.
-
-   This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Joystick
-   driver, a small surface mount four-way (plus button) digital joystick
-   on most USB AVR boards.
-*/
- 
-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USER_H__
-#define __JOYSTICK_USER_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		// TODO: Add any required includes here
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
-		#endif
-	
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
-			#define JOY_LEFT                  // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick left position here
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
-			#define JOY_RIGHT                 // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick right position here
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
-			#define JOY_UP                    // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick up position here
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
-			#define JOY_DOWN                  // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick down position here
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
-			#define JOY_PRESS                 // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick pressed position here
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
-			{
-				// TODO: Initialize joystick port pins as inputs with pull-ups
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				// TODO: Return current joystick position data which can be obtained by masking against the JOY_* macros
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+   This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+   layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+   the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+   driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+   inside the application's folder.
+
+   This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Joystick
+   driver, a small surface mount four-way (plus button) digital joystick
+   on most USB AVR boards.
+*/
+ 
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USER_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+	
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick left position here
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick right position here
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick up position here
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                  // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick down position here
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick pressed position here
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Initialize joystick port pins as inputs with pull-ups
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Return current joystick position data which can be obtained by masking against the JOY_* macros
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/DriverStubs/LEDs.h b/LUFA/DriverStubs/LEDs.h
index 6bdc847d1..3d70211b3 100644
--- a/LUFA/DriverStubs/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/DriverStubs/LEDs.h
@@ -1,124 +1,124 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/*
-   This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
-   layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
-   the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
-   driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
-   inside the application's folder.
-
-   This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA LEDs driver,
-   for the LEDs (up to four) mounted on most USB AVR boards.
-*/
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_USER_H__
-#define __LEDS_USER_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		// TODO: Add any required includes here
-
-/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        // TODO: Add mask for first board LED here
-
-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2        // TODO: Add mask for second board LED here
-
-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED3        // TODO: Add mask for third board LED here
-
-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED4        // TODO: Add mask for fourth board LED here
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				// TODO: Add code to initialize LED port pins as outputs here
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				// TODO: Add code to turn on LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, leave others as-is
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				// TODO: Add code to turn off LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, leave others as-is
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				// TODO: Add code to turn on only LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, all others off
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				// TODO: Add code to set the Leds in the given LEDMask to the status given in ActiveMask here
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				// TODO: Add code to toggle the Leds in the given LEDMask, ignoring all others
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				// TODO: Add code to return the current LEDs status' here which can be masked against LED_LED* macros
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+   This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+   layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+   the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+   driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+   inside the application's folder.
+
+   This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA LEDs driver,
+   for the LEDs (up to four) mounted on most USB AVR boards.
+*/
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_USER_H__
+#define __LEDS_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        // TODO: Add mask for first board LED here
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        // TODO: Add mask for second board LED here
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        // TODO: Add mask for third board LED here
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        // TODO: Add mask for fourth board LED here
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to initialize LED port pins as outputs here
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to turn on LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, leave others as-is
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to turn off LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, leave others as-is
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to turn on only LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, all others off
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to set the Leds in the given LEDMask to the status given in ActiveMask here
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to toggle the Leds in the given LEDMask, ignoring all others
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to return the current LEDs status' here which can be masked against LED_LED* macros
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h
index 84810478e..8859d3959 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_ATAVRUSBRF01 ATAVRUSBRF01
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_ATAVRUSBRF01 ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h
index 749e57ab4..eb8a1c44a 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h
@@ -1,139 +1,139 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_ATAVRUSBRF01 ATAVRUSBRF01
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __LEDS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
-#define __LEDS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-			
-			#define LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT 4
-	#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1             (1 << 0)
-
-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2             (1 << 1)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS          0
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_ATAVRUSBRF01 ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __LEDS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
+#define __LEDS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+			
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT 4
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1             (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2             (1 << 1)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS          0
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BENITO/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BENITO/Buttons.h
index fcc268bc8..079f4e2c1 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BENITO/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BENITO/Buttons.h
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Bentio.
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_BENITO BENITO
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Bentio (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_BENITO_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_BENITO_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Bentio.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_BENITO BENITO
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Bentio (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_BENITO_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_BENITO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BENITO/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BENITO/LEDs.h
index 9139d9267..c16482b85 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BENITO/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BENITO/LEDs.h
@@ -1,128 +1,128 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Benito.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_BENITO BENITO
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_BENITO_H__
-#define __LEDS_BENITO_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 7)
-
-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRC  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTC |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTC |= LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTC = ((PORTC | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTC = ((PORTC | ActiveMask) & ~LEDMask);
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTC ^= LEDMask;
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Benito.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_BENITO BENITO
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_BENITO_H__
+#define __LEDS_BENITO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = ((PORTC | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = ((PORTC | ActiveMask) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC ^= LEDMask;
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h
index 828c23b4b..4494d928a 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h
@@ -1,102 +1,102 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the BUMBLEB.
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b).
- *
- *  The BUMBLEB third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended
- *  external peripheral layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB
- *
- *  Board specific buttons driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB third-party
- *  board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external peripheral layout
- *  for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_BUMBLEB_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_BUMBLEB_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the BUMBLEB.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b).
+ *
+ *  The BUMBLEB third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended
+ *  external peripheral layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB
+ *
+ *  Board specific buttons driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB third-party
+ *  board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external peripheral layout
+ *  for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_BUMBLEB_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_BUMBLEB_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h
index 184112e27..94465c89c 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h
@@ -1,119 +1,119 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the BUMLEB.
- *
- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b).
- *
- *  The BUMBLEB third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended
- *  external peripheral layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
- *  @defgroup Group_Joystick_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB
- *
- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB third-party
- *  board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external peripheral layout
- *  for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_BUMBLEB_H__
-#define __JOYSTICK_BUMBLEB_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define JOY_MASK                 ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1) | (1 << 2) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 4))
-	#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 2)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
-			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 3)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
-			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 0)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
-			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1 << 1)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 4)
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  &= ~JOY_MASK;
-				PORTD |= JOY_MASK;
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return (uint8_t)(~PIND & JOY_MASK);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the BUMLEB.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b).
+ *
+ *  The BUMBLEB third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended
+ *  external peripheral layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  @defgroup Group_Joystick_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB third-party
+ *  board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external peripheral layout
+ *  for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_BUMBLEB_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_BUMBLEB_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_MASK                 ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1) | (1 << 2) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 4))
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 3)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 0)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 4)
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~JOY_MASK;
+				PORTD |= JOY_MASK;
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (uint8_t)(~PIND & JOY_MASK);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h
index 25360c0fa..d94c039c6 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h
@@ -1,136 +1,136 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the BUMBLEB.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b).
- *
- *  The BUMBLEB third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended
- *  external peripheral layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB third-party board
- *  does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external peripheral layout for
- *  buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_BUMBLEB_H__
-#define __LEDS_BUMBLEB_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
-
-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
-
-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)
-
-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 7)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
-			{
-				PORTB |= LedMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
-			{
-				PORTB &= ~LedMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
-			{
-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask);
-			}
-		
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the BUMBLEB.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b).
+ *
+ *  The BUMBLEB third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended
+ *  external peripheral layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB third-party board
+ *  does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external peripheral layout for
+ *  buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_BUMBLEB_H__
+#define __LEDS_BUMBLEB_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= LedMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~LedMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask);
+			}
+		
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h
index 0077df36b..ec25f5fd6 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h
@@ -1,118 +1,118 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the board digital button driver.
- *
- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Buttons driver, for boards containing
- *  physical pushbuttons connected to the AVR's GPIO pins.
- *
- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct Button driver header file for the
- *  currently selected board.
- *
- *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Buttons.h file in the user project
- *  directory.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_Buttons Buttons Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - None
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Hardware buttons driver. This provides an easy to use driver for the hardware buttons present on many boards.
- *  It provides a way to easily configure and check the status of all the buttons on the board so that appropriate
- *  actions can be taken.
- *
- *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
- *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_H__
-
-	/* Macros: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H
-		#define INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H
-	#endif
-
-	/* Includes: */
-	#include "../../Common/Common.h"
-	
-	#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
-		#error The Board Buttons driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
-		#include "USBKEY/Buttons.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
-		#include "STK525/Buttons.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
-		#include "STK526/Buttons.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01)
-		#include "ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)
-		#include "BUMBLEB/Buttons.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
-		#include "EVK527/Buttons.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)
-		#include "USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h"		
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BENITO)
-		#include "BENITO/Buttons.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_JMDBU2)
-		#include "JMDBU2/Buttons.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER)
-		#include "Board/Buttons.h"
-	#else
-		#error The selected board does not contain any GPIO buttons.
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
-	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/** Initializes the BUTTONS driver, so that the current button position can be read. This sets the appropriate
-		 *  I/O pins to an inputs with pull-ups enabled.
-		 *
-		 *  This must be called before any Button driver functions are used.
-		 */
-		static inline void Buttons_Init(void);
-		
-		/** Returns a mask indicating which board buttons are currently pressed.
-		 *
-		 *  \return Mask indicating which board buttons are currently pressed
-		 */
-		static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-	#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the board digital button driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Buttons driver, for boards containing
+ *  physical pushbuttons connected to the AVR's GPIO pins.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct Button driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected board.
+ *
+ *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Buttons.h file in the user project
+ *  directory.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_Buttons Buttons Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Hardware buttons driver. This provides an easy to use driver for the hardware buttons present on many boards.
+ *  It provides a way to easily configure and check the status of all the buttons on the board so that appropriate
+ *  actions can be taken.
+ *
+ *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
+ *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H
+		#define INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H
+	#endif
+
+	/* Includes: */
+	#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+	
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
+		#error The Board Buttons driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
+		#include "USBKEY/Buttons.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
+		#include "STK525/Buttons.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
+		#include "STK526/Buttons.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01)
+		#include "ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)
+		#include "BUMBLEB/Buttons.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
+		#include "EVK527/Buttons.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)
+		#include "USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h"		
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BENITO)
+		#include "BENITO/Buttons.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_JMDBU2)
+		#include "JMDBU2/Buttons.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER)
+		#include "Board/Buttons.h"
+	#else
+		#error The selected board does not contain any GPIO buttons.
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
+	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/** Initializes the BUTTONS driver, so that the current button position can be read. This sets the appropriate
+		 *  I/O pins to an inputs with pull-ups enabled.
+		 *
+		 *  This must be called before any Button driver functions are used.
+		 */
+		static inline void Buttons_Init(void);
+		
+		/** Returns a mask indicating which board buttons are currently pressed.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Mask indicating which board buttons are currently pressed
+		 */
+		static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+	#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h
index d55774d87..5281a1936 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h
@@ -1,233 +1,233 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the board dataflash IC driver.
- *
- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific dataflash driver, for boards containing
- *  dataflash ICs for external non-volatile storage.
- *
- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct dataflash driver header file for
- *  the currently selected board.
- *
- *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
- *  directory.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash Dataflash Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - None
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Dataflash driver. This module provides an easy to use interface for the Dataflash ICs located on many boards,
- *  for the storage of large amounts of data into the Dataflash's non-volatile memory.
- *
- *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
- *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_H__
-
-	/* Macros: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H
-		#define INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H
-	#endif
-
-	/* Includes: */
-	#include "../Peripheral/SPI.h"
-	#include "../../Common/Common.h"
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				#define __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK2(x, y) x ## y
-				#define __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK(x)     __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK2(DATAFLASH_CHIP,x)
-			#endif
-	
-			/** Retrieves the Dataflash chip select mask for the given Dataflash chip index.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] index  Index of the dataflash chip mask to retrieve
-			 *
-			 *  \return Mask for the given Dataflash chip's /CS pin
-			 */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(index)      __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK(index)
-			
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
-				 *  or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
-				 */
-				static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void);
-
-				/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
-				 *              the chip number).
-				 */
-				static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(uint8_t ChipMask);
-
-				/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
-				static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void);
-			#else
-				#define Dataflash_GetSelectedChip()          (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK)
-
-				#define Dataflash_SelectChip(mask)   MACROS{ DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT \
-															 & ~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) | (mask));            }MACROE
-				
-				#define Dataflash_DeselectChip()             Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP)
-			#endif
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Byte of data to send to the dataflash
-			 *
-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
-			 */
-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
-			{
-				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);
-			}
-
-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Byte of data to send to the dataflash
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
-			{
-				SPI_SendByte(Byte);
-			}
-			
-			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
-			 *
-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
-			 */
-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
-			{
-				return SPI_ReceiveByte();
-			}
-
-		/* Includes: */
-			#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
-				#error The Board Buttons driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.
-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
-				#include "USBKEY/Dataflash.h"
-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
-				#include "STK525/Dataflash.h"
-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
-				#include "STK526/Dataflash.h"
-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN)
-				#include "XPLAIN/Dataflash.h"
-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)
-				#include "XPLAIN/Dataflash.h"
-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
-				#include "EVK527/Dataflash.h"
-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER)
-				#include "Board/Dataflash.h"
-			#else
-				#error The selected board does not contain a dataflash IC.
-			#endif
-		
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
-			 *  The AVR's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
-			{
-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
-			}
-			
-			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
-			 *  a new command.
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
-			{
-				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
-					
-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);
-			}
-
-			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
-			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
-			{
-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));
-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();				
-			}
-
-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
-			 *  are deselected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
-			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress);
-
-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte);
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the board dataflash IC driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific dataflash driver, for boards containing
+ *  dataflash ICs for external non-volatile storage.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct dataflash driver header file for
+ *  the currently selected board.
+ *
+ *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
+ *  directory.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash Dataflash Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Dataflash driver. This module provides an easy to use interface for the Dataflash ICs located on many boards,
+ *  for the storage of large amounts of data into the Dataflash's non-volatile memory.
+ *
+ *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
+ *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H
+		#define INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H
+	#endif
+
+	/* Includes: */
+	#include "../Peripheral/SPI.h"
+	#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#define __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK2(x, y) x ## y
+				#define __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK(x)     __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK2(DATAFLASH_CHIP,x)
+			#endif
+	
+			/** Retrieves the Dataflash chip select mask for the given Dataflash chip index.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] index  Index of the dataflash chip mask to retrieve
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask for the given Dataflash chip's /CS pin
+			 */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(index)      __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK(index)
+			
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+				 *  or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+				 */
+				static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void);
+
+				/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+				 *              the chip number).
+				 */
+				static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(uint8_t ChipMask);
+
+				/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+				static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void);
+			#else
+				#define Dataflash_GetSelectedChip()          (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK)
+
+				#define Dataflash_SelectChip(mask)   MACROS{ DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT \
+															 & ~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) | (mask));            }MACROE
+				
+				#define Dataflash_DeselectChip()             Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP)
+			#endif
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPI_SendByte(Byte);
+			}
+			
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				return SPI_ReceiveByte();
+			}
+
+		/* Includes: */
+			#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
+				#error The Board Buttons driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
+				#include "USBKEY/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
+				#include "STK525/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
+				#include "STK526/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN)
+				#include "XPLAIN/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)
+				#include "XPLAIN/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
+				#include "EVK527/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER)
+				#include "Board/Dataflash.h"
+			#else
+				#error The selected board does not contain a dataflash IC.
+			#endif
+		
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *  The AVR's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+			}
+			
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
+					
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();				
+			}
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress);
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte);
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/AT45DB321C.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/AT45DB321C.h
index d4b1da222..7f34c77d8 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/AT45DB321C.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/AT45DB321C.h
@@ -1,98 +1,98 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the EVK527.
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the EVK527.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash_EVK527
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_EVK527_AT45DB321C AT45DB321C
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the EVK527.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
-			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
-			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
-			
-			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
-		
-			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
-
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
-			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0xE8
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD4
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD6
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
-			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
-
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0xCF})
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0xCF
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash_EVK527
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_EVK527_AT45DB321C AT45DB321C
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
+			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
+			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
+			
+			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
+		
+			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
+
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
+			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0xE8
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD4
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD6
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
+			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
+
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0xCF})
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0xCF
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Buttons.h
index 41fd7c1fc..d37d4de27 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Buttons.h
@@ -1,103 +1,103 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK527 EVK527
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK527_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_EVK527_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK527 EVK527
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK527_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_EVK527_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Dataflash.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Dataflash.h
index 012c9ace0..034ee2b4e 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Dataflash.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Dataflash.h
@@ -1,122 +1,122 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_EVK527 EVK527
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_EVK527_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_EVK527_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "AT45DB321C.h"		
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 6)
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRE
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTE
-	#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
-
-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
-
-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0
-			
-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  512
-
-			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
-			 *  are deselected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
-			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
-			{
-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-				
-				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
-				  return;
-
-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-			}
-
-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
-			{	
-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
-			}
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_EVK527 EVK527
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_EVK527_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_EVK527_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "AT45DB321C.h"		
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 6)
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRE
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTE
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0
+			
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  512
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				
+				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
+				  return;
+
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{	
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Joystick.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Joystick.h
index cc47e7811..855270564 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Joystick.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/Joystick.h
@@ -1,118 +1,118 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
- *  @defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK527 EVK527
- *
- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK527_H__
-#define __JOYSTICK_EVK527_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define JOY_FMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
-			#define JOY_CMASK                 (1 << 6))
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 4)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
-			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 7)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
-			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 5)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
-			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 6) >> 3)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 6)
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRF  &= ~(JOY_FMASK);
-				DDRC  &= ~(JOY_CMASK);
-
-				PORTF |= JOY_FMASK;
-				PORTC |= JOY_CMASK;				
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return (((uint8_t)~PINF & JOY_FMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINC & JOY_CMASK) >> 3));
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  @defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK527 EVK527
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK527_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_EVK527_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_FMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
+			#define JOY_CMASK                 (1 << 6))
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 4)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 7)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 5)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 6) >> 3)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 6)
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRF  &= ~(JOY_FMASK);
+				DDRC  &= ~(JOY_CMASK);
+
+				PORTF |= JOY_FMASK;
+				PORTC |= JOY_CMASK;				
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (((uint8_t)~PINF & JOY_FMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINC & JOY_CMASK) >> 3));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/LEDs.h
index 079fdfa18..2f0e91d99 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527/LEDs.h
@@ -1,133 +1,133 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK527 EVK527
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the EVK527.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_EVK527_H__
-#define __LEDS_EVK527_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 5)
-
-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)
-
-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD |= LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK527 EVK527
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the EVK527.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_EVK527_H__
+#define __LEDS_EVK527_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/JMDBU2/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/JMDBU2/Buttons.h
index fd4be2596..ac2954ce4 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/JMDBU2/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/JMDBU2/Buttons.h
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the JM-DB-U2.
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_JMDBU2 JMDBU2
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_JMDBU2_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_JMDBU2_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the JM-DB-U2.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_JMDBU2 JMDBU2
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_JMDBU2_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_JMDBU2_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/JMDBU2/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/JMDBU2/LEDs.h
index 7061c091b..a5b31449e 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/JMDBU2/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/JMDBU2/LEDs.h
@@ -1,127 +1,127 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the JM-DB-U2.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_JMDBU2 JMDBU2
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_JMDBU2_H__
-#define __LEDS_JMDBU2_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD |= LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the JM-DB-U2.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_JMDBU2 JMDBU2
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_JMDBU2_H__
+#define __LEDS_JMDBU2_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h
index 18993c5f7..cbbaf0ea5 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h
@@ -1,109 +1,109 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the board digital joystick driver.
- *
- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Joystick driver, for boards containing a
- *  5-way joystick.
- *
- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct joystick driver header file for the
- *  currently selected board.
- *
- *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Joystick.h file in the user project
- *  directory.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_Joystick Joystick Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - None
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Hardware Joystick driver. This module provides an easy to use interface to control the hardware digital Joystick
- *  located on many boards.
- *
- *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
- *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_H__
-#define __JOYSTICK_H__
-
-	/* Macros: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H
-		#define INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H
-	#endif
-
-	/* Includes: */
-	#include "../../Common/Common.h"
-	
-	#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
-		#error The Board Joystick driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
-		#include "USBKEY/Joystick.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
-		#include "STK525/Joystick.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
-		#include "STK526/Joystick.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)
-		#include "BUMBLEB/Joystick.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
-		#include "EVK527/Joystick.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER)
-		#include "Board/Joystick.h"
-	#else
-		#error The selected board does not contain a joystick.
-	#endif
-
-	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
-	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/** Initializes the joystick driver so that the joystick position can be read. This sets the appropriate
-		 *  I/O pins to inputs with their pull-ups enabled.
-		 */
-		static inline void Joystick_Init(void);
-
-		/** Returns the current status of the joystick, as a mask indicating the direction the joystick is
-		 *  currently facing in (multiple bits can be set).
-		 *
-		 *  \return Mask indicating the joystick direction - see corresponding board specific Joystick.h file
-		 *          for direction masks
-		 */
-		static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-	#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the board digital joystick driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Joystick driver, for boards containing a
+ *  5-way joystick.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct joystick driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected board.
+ *
+ *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Joystick.h file in the user project
+ *  directory.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_Joystick Joystick Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Hardware Joystick driver. This module provides an easy to use interface to control the hardware digital Joystick
+ *  located on many boards.
+ *
+ *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
+ *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H
+		#define INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H
+	#endif
+
+	/* Includes: */
+	#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+	
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
+		#error The Board Joystick driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
+		#include "USBKEY/Joystick.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
+		#include "STK525/Joystick.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
+		#include "STK526/Joystick.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)
+		#include "BUMBLEB/Joystick.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
+		#include "EVK527/Joystick.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER)
+		#include "Board/Joystick.h"
+	#else
+		#error The selected board does not contain a joystick.
+	#endif
+
+	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
+	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/** Initializes the joystick driver so that the joystick position can be read. This sets the appropriate
+		 *  I/O pins to inputs with their pull-ups enabled.
+		 */
+		static inline void Joystick_Init(void);
+
+		/** Returns the current status of the joystick, as a mask indicating the direction the joystick is
+		 *  currently facing in (multiple bits can be set).
+		 *
+		 *  \return Mask indicating the joystick direction - see corresponding board specific Joystick.h file
+		 *          for direction masks
+		 */
+		static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+	#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h
index c44612522..5e6a4cd36 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h
@@ -1,184 +1,184 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the board LEDs driver.
- *
- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific LED driver, for boards containing user
- *  controllable LEDs.
- *
- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct LED driver header file for the
- *  currently selected board.
- *
- *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/LEDs.h file in the user project
- *  directory.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs LEDs Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - None
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Hardware LEDs driver. This provides an easy to use driver for the hardware LEDs present on many boards. It
- *  provides an interface to configure, test and change the status of all the board LEDs.
- *
- *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
- *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file. If the BOARD value
- *  is set to BOARD_NONE, this driver is silently disabled.
- *
- *  \note To make code as compatible as possible, it is assumed that all boards carry a minimum of four LEDs. If
- *        a board contains less than four LEDs, the remaining LED masks are defined to 0 so as to have no effect.
- *        If other behaviour is desired, either alias the remaining LED masks to existing LED masks via the -D 
- *        switch in the project makefile, or alias them to nothing in the makefile to cause compilation errors when
- *        a non-existing LED is referenced in application code. Note that this means that it is possible to make
- *        compatible code for a board with no LEDs by making a board LED driver (see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)
- *        which contains only stub functions and defines no LEDs.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_H__
-#define __LEDS_H__
-
-	/* Macros: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H
-		#define INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Includes: */
-	#include "../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
-		static inline void LEDs_Init(void) {};
-		static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) {};
-		static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) {};
-		static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) {};
-		static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask) {};
-		static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) {};
-		static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) { return 0; }
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
-		#include "USBKEY/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
-		#include "STK525/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
-		#include "STK526/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_RZUSBSTICK)
-		#include "RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01)
-		#include "ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h"
-	#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
-		#include "XPLAIN/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)
-		#include "BUMBLEB/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
-		#include "EVK527/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY)
-		#include "TEENSY/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)
-		#include "USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BENITO)
-		#include "BENITO/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_JMDBU2)
-		#include "JMDBU2/LEDs.h"
-	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER)
-		#include "Board/LEDs.h"
-	#endif
-	
-	#if !defined(LEDS_LED1)
-		#define LEDS_LED1      0
-	#endif
-
-	#if !defined(LEDS_LED2)
-		#define LEDS_LED2      0
-	#endif
-
-	#if !defined(LEDS_LED3)
-		#define LEDS_LED3      0
-	#endif
-
-	#if !defined(LEDS_LED4)
-		#define LEDS_LED4      0
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
-	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/** Initializes the board LED driver so that the LEDs can be controlled. This sets the appropriate port
-		 *  I/O pins as outputs, and sets the LEDs to default to off.
-		 */
-		static inline void LEDs_Init(void);
-
-		/** Turns on the LEDs specified in the given LED mask.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file)
-		 */
-		static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask);
-
-		/** Turns off the LEDs specified in the given LED mask.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file)
-		 */
-		static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask);
-
-		/** Turns off all LEDs not specified in the given LED mask, and turns on all the LEDs in the given LED
-		 *  mask.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file)
-		 */
-		static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask);
-
-		/** Turns off all LEDs in the LED mask that are not set in the active mask, and turns on all the LEDs
-		 *  specified in both the LED and active masks.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] LEDMask     Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file)
-		 *  \param[in] ActiveMask  Mask of whether the LEDs in the LED mask should be turned on or off
-		 */
-		static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask);
-		
-		/** Toggles all LEDs in the LED mask, leaving all others in their current states.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] LEDMask Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file)
-		 */
-		static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask);
-
-		/** Returns the status of all the board LEDs; set LED masks in the return value indicate that the
-		 *  corresponding LED is on.
-		 *
-		 *  \return Mask of the board LEDs which are currently turned on
-		 */
-		static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-	#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the board LEDs driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific LED driver, for boards containing user
+ *  controllable LEDs.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct LED driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected board.
+ *
+ *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/LEDs.h file in the user project
+ *  directory.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs LEDs Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Hardware LEDs driver. This provides an easy to use driver for the hardware LEDs present on many boards. It
+ *  provides an interface to configure, test and change the status of all the board LEDs.
+ *
+ *  If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
+ *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file. If the BOARD value
+ *  is set to BOARD_NONE, this driver is silently disabled.
+ *
+ *  \note To make code as compatible as possible, it is assumed that all boards carry a minimum of four LEDs. If
+ *        a board contains less than four LEDs, the remaining LED masks are defined to 0 so as to have no effect.
+ *        If other behaviour is desired, either alias the remaining LED masks to existing LED masks via the -D 
+ *        switch in the project makefile, or alias them to nothing in the makefile to cause compilation errors when
+ *        a non-existing LED is referenced in application code. Note that this means that it is possible to make
+ *        compatible code for a board with no LEDs by making a board LED driver (see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)
+ *        which contains only stub functions and defines no LEDs.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_H__
+#define __LEDS_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H
+		#define INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Includes: */
+	#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
+		static inline void LEDs_Init(void) {};
+		static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) {};
+		static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) {};
+		static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) {};
+		static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask) {};
+		static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) {};
+		static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) { return 0; }
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
+		#include "USBKEY/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
+		#include "STK525/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
+		#include "STK526/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_RZUSBSTICK)
+		#include "RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01)
+		#include "ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h"
+	#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+		#include "XPLAIN/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)
+		#include "BUMBLEB/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
+		#include "EVK527/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY)
+		#include "TEENSY/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)
+		#include "USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BENITO)
+		#include "BENITO/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_JMDBU2)
+		#include "JMDBU2/LEDs.h"
+	#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER)
+		#include "Board/LEDs.h"
+	#endif
+	
+	#if !defined(LEDS_LED1)
+		#define LEDS_LED1      0
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(LEDS_LED2)
+		#define LEDS_LED2      0
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(LEDS_LED3)
+		#define LEDS_LED3      0
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(LEDS_LED4)
+		#define LEDS_LED4      0
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
+	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/** Initializes the board LED driver so that the LEDs can be controlled. This sets the appropriate port
+		 *  I/O pins as outputs, and sets the LEDs to default to off.
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_Init(void);
+
+		/** Turns on the LEDs specified in the given LED mask.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file)
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask);
+
+		/** Turns off the LEDs specified in the given LED mask.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file)
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask);
+
+		/** Turns off all LEDs not specified in the given LED mask, and turns on all the LEDs in the given LED
+		 *  mask.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file)
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask);
+
+		/** Turns off all LEDs in the LED mask that are not set in the active mask, and turns on all the LEDs
+		 *  specified in both the LED and active masks.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] LEDMask     Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file)
+		 *  \param[in] ActiveMask  Mask of whether the LEDs in the LED mask should be turned on or off
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask);
+		
+		/** Toggles all LEDs in the LED mask, leaving all others in their current states.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] LEDMask Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file)
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask);
+
+		/** Returns the status of all the board LEDs; set LED masks in the return value indicate that the
+		 *  corresponding LED is on.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Mask of the board LEDs which are currently turned on
+		 */
+		static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+	#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h
index b45d664e1..45f938751 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h
@@ -1,161 +1,161 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the RZUSBSTICK.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the RZUSBSTICK.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_RZUSBSTICK RZUSBSTICK
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the RZUSBSTICK.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __LEDS_RZUSBSTICK_H__
-#define __LEDS_RZUSBSTICK_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-			
-			#define LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT 4
-	#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1             (1 << 7)
-
-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2             (1 << 5)
-
-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED3             ((1 << 6) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
-
-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED4             ((1 << 7) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS          0
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_LED1;
-				PORTD |=  LEDS_LED2;
-
-				DDRE  |=  (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
-				PORTE |=  (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED1);
-				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED2);			
-				PORTE &= ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED1);
-				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED2);
-				PORTE |=  ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (((PORTD & ~LEDS_LED1) |  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED1)) |
-				         ((PORTD |  LEDS_LED2) & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED2)));
-				PORTE = ((PORTE | (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) &
-				        ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED1)) |  (ActiveMask & LEDS_LED1)) |
-				         ((PORTD |  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED2)) & ~(ActiveMask & LEDS_LED2)));
-				PORTE = ((PORTE | ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) &
-				        ~((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
-				PORTE = (PORTE ^ ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (((PORTD & LEDS_LED1) | (~PORTD & LEDS_LED2)) |
-				        ((~PORTE & (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the RZUSBSTICK.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the RZUSBSTICK.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_RZUSBSTICK RZUSBSTICK
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the RZUSBSTICK.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __LEDS_RZUSBSTICK_H__
+#define __LEDS_RZUSBSTICK_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+			
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT 4
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1             (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2             (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3             ((1 << 6) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4             ((1 << 7) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS          0
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_LED1;
+				PORTD |=  LEDS_LED2;
+
+				DDRE  |=  (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+				PORTE |=  (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED1);
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED2);			
+				PORTE &= ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED1);
+				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED2);
+				PORTE |=  ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (((PORTD & ~LEDS_LED1) |  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED1)) |
+				         ((PORTD |  LEDS_LED2) & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED2)));
+				PORTE = ((PORTE | (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) &
+				        ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED1)) |  (ActiveMask & LEDS_LED1)) |
+				         ((PORTD |  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED2)) & ~(ActiveMask & LEDS_LED2)));
+				PORTE = ((PORTE | ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) &
+				        ~((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+				PORTE = (PORTE ^ ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (((PORTD & LEDS_LED1) | (~PORTD & LEDS_LED2)) |
+				        ((~PORTE & (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/AT45DB321C.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/AT45DB321C.h
index b56bb21d0..de1f73ee9 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/AT45DB321C.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/AT45DB321C.h
@@ -1,98 +1,98 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the STK525.
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash_STK525
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK525_AT45DB321C AT45DB321C
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
-			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
-			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
-			
-			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
-		
-			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
-
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
-			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0xE8
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD4
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD6
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
-			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
-
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0xCF})
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0xCF
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash_STK525
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK525_AT45DB321C AT45DB321C
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
+			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
+			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
+			
+			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
+		
+			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
+
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
+			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0xE8
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD4
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD6
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
+			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
+
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0xCF})
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0xCF
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Buttons.h
index 062192efb..208f8caca 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Buttons.h
@@ -1,103 +1,103 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_STK525 STK525
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_STK525_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_STK525_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_STK525 STK525
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_STK525_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_STK525_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Dataflash.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Dataflash.h
index 8719c2aad..e64c9bcfa 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Dataflash.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Dataflash.h
@@ -1,122 +1,122 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK525 STK525
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_STK525_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_STK525_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "AT45DB321C.h"		
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 4)
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRB
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTB
-	#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
-
-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
-
-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0
-			
-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  512
-
-			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
-			 *  are deselected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
-			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
-			{
-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-				
-				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
-				  return;
-
-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-			}
-
-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
-			{	
-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 6);
-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 2) | (BufferByte >> 8));
-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
-			}
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK525 STK525
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_STK525_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_STK525_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "AT45DB321C.h"		
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 4)
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRB
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTB
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0
+			
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  512
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				
+				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
+				  return;
+
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{	
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 6);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 2) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Joystick.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Joystick.h
index 0436dc811..dd775b73b 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Joystick.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Joystick.h
@@ -1,118 +1,118 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
- *  @defgroup Group_Joystick_STK525 STK525
- *
- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_STK525_H__
-#define __JOYSTICK_STK525_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
-			#define JOY_EMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5))
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 6)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
-			#define JOY_RIGHT                ((1 << 4) >> 1)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
-			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 7)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
-			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 5) >> 1)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 5)
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRB  &= ~(JOY_BMASK);
-				DDRE  &= ~(JOY_EMASK);
-
-				PORTB |= JOY_BMASK;
-				PORTE |= JOY_EMASK;				
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return (((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINE & JOY_EMASK) >> 1));
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  @defgroup Group_Joystick_STK525 STK525
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_STK525_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_STK525_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
+			#define JOY_EMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5))
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 6)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                ((1 << 4) >> 1)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 7)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 5) >> 1)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 5)
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~(JOY_BMASK);
+				DDRE  &= ~(JOY_EMASK);
+
+				PORTB |= JOY_BMASK;
+				PORTE |= JOY_EMASK;				
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINE & JOY_EMASK) >> 1));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/LEDs.h
index 61bc97a72..a58afc84f 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/LEDs.h
@@ -1,136 +1,136 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_STK525 STK525
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __LEDS_STK525_H__
-#define __LEDS_STK525_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
-
-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
-
-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
-
-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 6)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS          0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD |= LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_STK525 STK525
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __LEDS_STK525_H__
+#define __LEDS_STK525_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS          0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/AT45DB642D.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/AT45DB642D.h
index 73b9149cf..1913cde09 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/AT45DB642D.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/AT45DB642D.h
@@ -1,108 +1,108 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the STK526.
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the STK526.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash_STK526
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK526_AT45DB642D AT45DB642D
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the STK526.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
-			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
-			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
-			#define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON             (1 << 0)
-			
-			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
-		
-			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
-			#define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN                        0xB9
-			#define DF_CMD_WAKEUP                           0xAB
-
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
-			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0x03
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD1
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD3
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
-			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE                      0x7C
-
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE                        ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A})
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1                  0xC7
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2                  0x94
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3                  0x80
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4                  0x9A
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A})
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0x9A
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the STK526.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the STK526.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash_STK526
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK526_AT45DB642D AT45DB642D
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the STK526.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
+			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
+			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
+			#define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON             (1 << 0)
+			
+			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
+		
+			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
+			#define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN                        0xB9
+			#define DF_CMD_WAKEUP                           0xAB
+
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
+			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0x03
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD1
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD3
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
+			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE                      0x7C
+
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE                        ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A})
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1                  0xC7
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2                  0x94
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3                  0x80
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4                  0x9A
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A})
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0x9A
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Buttons.h
index 2b69b7bcb..0ab686cbd 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Buttons.h
@@ -1,103 +1,103 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK526.
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK526.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_STK526 STK526
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK526.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_STK526_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_STK526_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK526.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK526.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_STK526 STK526
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the STK526.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_STK526_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_STK526_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Dataflash.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Dataflash.h
index f8804ddd7..bba04f37f 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Dataflash.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Dataflash.h
@@ -1,122 +1,122 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK526 STK526
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_STK526_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_STK526_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "AT45DB642D.h"
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 2)
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRC
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTC
-	#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
-
-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
-
-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0
-			
-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024
-
-			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
-			 *  are deselected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
-			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
-			{
-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-				
-				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
-				  return;
-
-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-			}
-
-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
-			{	
-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
-			}
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK526 STK526
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the STK525.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_STK526_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_STK526_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "AT45DB642D.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 2)
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRC
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTC
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0
+			
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				
+				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
+				  return;
+
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{	
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Joystick.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Joystick.h
index fee685acb..4cea565cd 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Joystick.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Joystick.h
@@ -1,115 +1,115 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the STK526.
- *
- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the STK526.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
- *  @defgroup Group_Joystick_STK526 STK526
- *
- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the STK526.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_STK526_H__
-#define __JOYSTICK_STK526_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 0) | (1 << 4) | (1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 4)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
-			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 6)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
-			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 5)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
-			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1 << 7)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 0)
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;
-
-				PORTB |= JOY_BMASK;
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return ((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the STK526.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the STK526.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  @defgroup Group_Joystick_STK526 STK526
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the STK526.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_STK526_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_STK526_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 0) | (1 << 4) | (1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 4)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 6)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 5)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1 << 7)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 0)
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;
+
+				PORTB |= JOY_BMASK;
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/LEDs.h
index 79382f633..1b4e113d9 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/LEDs.h
@@ -1,136 +1,136 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the STK526.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the STK526.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_STK526 STK526
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the STK526.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __LEDS_STK526_H__
-#define __LEDS_STK526_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 1)
-
-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 0)
-
-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 5)
-
-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 4)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD |= LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the STK526.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the STK526.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_STK526 STK526
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the STK526.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __LEDS_STK526_H__
+#define __LEDS_STK526_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 1)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/TEENSY/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/TEENSY/LEDs.h
index 7f58fc023..2e532aeaa 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/TEENSY/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/TEENSY/LEDs.h
@@ -1,127 +1,127 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy boards.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy boards (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_TEENSY TEENSY
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy boards (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __LEDS_TEENSY_H__
-#define __LEDS_TEENSY_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1             (1 << 6)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS         (1 << 6)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS          0
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD |= LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD ^= LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy boards.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy boards (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_TEENSY TEENSY
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy boards (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __LEDS_TEENSY_H__
+#define __LEDS_TEENSY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1             (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS         (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS          0
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD ^= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c
index ea12bf766..a5e82a2a1 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c
@@ -1,60 +1,60 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "Temperature.h"
-
-static const uint16_t PROGMEM Temperature_Lookup[] = {
-   0x3B4, 0x3B0, 0x3AB, 0x3A6, 0x3A0, 0x39A, 0x394, 0x38E, 0x388, 0x381, 0x37A, 0x373,
-   0x36B, 0x363, 0x35B, 0x353, 0x34A, 0x341, 0x338, 0x32F, 0x325, 0x31B, 0x311, 0x307,
-   0x2FC, 0x2F1, 0x2E6, 0x2DB, 0x2D0, 0x2C4, 0x2B8, 0x2AC, 0x2A0, 0x294, 0x288, 0x27C,
-   0x26F, 0x263, 0x256, 0x24A, 0x23D, 0x231, 0x225, 0x218, 0x20C, 0x200, 0x1F3, 0x1E7,
-   0x1DB, 0x1CF, 0x1C4, 0x1B8, 0x1AC, 0x1A1, 0x196, 0x18B, 0x180, 0x176, 0x16B, 0x161,
-   0x157, 0x14D, 0x144, 0x13A, 0x131, 0x128, 0x11F, 0x117, 0x10F, 0x106, 0x0FE, 0x0F7,
-   0x0EF, 0x0E8, 0x0E1, 0x0DA, 0x0D3, 0x0CD, 0x0C7, 0x0C0, 0x0BA, 0x0B5, 0x0AF, 0x0AA,
-   0x0A4, 0x09F, 0x09A, 0x096, 0x091, 0x08C, 0x088, 0x084, 0x080, 0x07C, 0x078, 0x074,
-   0x071, 0x06D, 0x06A, 0x067, 0x064, 0x061, 0x05E, 0x05B, 0x058, 0x055, 0x053, 0x050,
-   0x04E, 0x04C, 0x049, 0x047, 0x045, 0x043, 0x041, 0x03F, 0x03D, 0x03C, 0x03A, 0x038
-   };
-
-int8_t Temperature_GetTemperature(void)
-{
-	uint16_t Temp_ADC = ADC_GetChannelReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK);
-
-	if (Temp_ADC > pgm_read_word(&Temperature_Lookup[0]))
-	  return TEMP_MIN_TEMP;
-
-	for (uint16_t Index = 0; Index < TEMP_TABLE_SIZE; Index++)
-	{
-		if (Temp_ADC > pgm_read_word(&Temperature_Lookup[Index]))
-		  return (Index + TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET);
-	}
-
-	return TEMP_MAX_TEMP;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "Temperature.h"
+
+static const uint16_t PROGMEM Temperature_Lookup[] = {
+   0x3B4, 0x3B0, 0x3AB, 0x3A6, 0x3A0, 0x39A, 0x394, 0x38E, 0x388, 0x381, 0x37A, 0x373,
+   0x36B, 0x363, 0x35B, 0x353, 0x34A, 0x341, 0x338, 0x32F, 0x325, 0x31B, 0x311, 0x307,
+   0x2FC, 0x2F1, 0x2E6, 0x2DB, 0x2D0, 0x2C4, 0x2B8, 0x2AC, 0x2A0, 0x294, 0x288, 0x27C,
+   0x26F, 0x263, 0x256, 0x24A, 0x23D, 0x231, 0x225, 0x218, 0x20C, 0x200, 0x1F3, 0x1E7,
+   0x1DB, 0x1CF, 0x1C4, 0x1B8, 0x1AC, 0x1A1, 0x196, 0x18B, 0x180, 0x176, 0x16B, 0x161,
+   0x157, 0x14D, 0x144, 0x13A, 0x131, 0x128, 0x11F, 0x117, 0x10F, 0x106, 0x0FE, 0x0F7,
+   0x0EF, 0x0E8, 0x0E1, 0x0DA, 0x0D3, 0x0CD, 0x0C7, 0x0C0, 0x0BA, 0x0B5, 0x0AF, 0x0AA,
+   0x0A4, 0x09F, 0x09A, 0x096, 0x091, 0x08C, 0x088, 0x084, 0x080, 0x07C, 0x078, 0x074,
+   0x071, 0x06D, 0x06A, 0x067, 0x064, 0x061, 0x05E, 0x05B, 0x058, 0x055, 0x053, 0x050,
+   0x04E, 0x04C, 0x049, 0x047, 0x045, 0x043, 0x041, 0x03F, 0x03D, 0x03C, 0x03A, 0x038
+   };
+
+int8_t Temperature_GetTemperature(void)
+{
+	uint16_t Temp_ADC = ADC_GetChannelReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK);
+
+	if (Temp_ADC > pgm_read_word(&Temperature_Lookup[0]))
+	  return TEMP_MIN_TEMP;
+
+	for (uint16_t Index = 0; Index < TEMP_TABLE_SIZE; Index++)
+	{
+		if (Temp_ADC > pgm_read_word(&Temperature_Lookup[Index]))
+		  return (Index + TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET);
+	}
+
+	return TEMP_MAX_TEMP;
+}
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h
index 7cfdb13bc..4c5d642e6 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h
@@ -1,124 +1,124 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the board temperature sensor driver.
- *
- *  Master include file for the board temperature sensor driver, for the USB boards which contain a temperature sensor.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_Temperature Temperature Sensor Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Temperature sensor driver. This provides an easy to use interface for the hardware temperature sensor located
- *  on many boards. It provides an interface to configure the sensor and appropriate ADC channel, plus read out the
- *  current temperature in degrees C. It is designed for and will only work with the temperature sensor located on the
- *  official Atmel USB AVR boards, as each sensor has different characteristics.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __TEMPERATURE_H__
-#define __TEMPERATURE_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
-		#include "../Peripheral/ADC.h"
-	
-		#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
-			#error The Board Temperature Sensor driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.
-		#elif ((BOARD != BOARD_USBKEY) && (BOARD != BOARD_STK525) && \
-		       (BOARD != BOARD_STK526) && (BOARD != BOARD_USER) &&   \
-			   (BOARD != BOARD_EVK527))
-			#error The selected board does not contain a temperature sensor.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** ADC channel number for the temperature sensor. */
-			#define TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL       0
-			
-			/** ADC channel MUX mask for the temperature sensor. */
-			#define TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK  ADC_CHANNEL0
-
-			/** Minimum returnable temperature from the \ref Temperature_GetTemperature() function. */
-			#define TEMP_MIN_TEMP          TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET
-
-			/** Maximum returnable temperature from the \ref Temperature_GetTemperature() function. */
-			#define TEMP_MAX_TEMP          ((TEMP_TABLE_SIZE - 1) + TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET)
-		
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Initializes the temperature sensor driver, including setting up the appropriate ADC channel.
-				 *  This must be called before any other temperature sensor routines.
-				 *
-				 *  \note The ADC itself (not the ADC channel) must be configured separately before calling the
-				 *        temperature sensor functions.
-				 */
-				static inline void Temperature_Init(void);
-			#else
-				#define Temperature_Init() ADC_SetupChannel(TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL);
-			#endif
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Performs a complete ADC on the temperature sensor channel, and converts the result into a
-			 *  valid temperature between \ref TEMP_MIN_TEMP and \ref TEMP_MAX_TEMP in degrees Celsius.
-			 *
-			 *  \return Signed temperature in degrees Celsius
-			 */
-			int8_t Temperature_GetTemperature(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define TEMP_TABLE_SIZE   (sizeof(Temperature_Lookup) / sizeof(Temperature_Lookup[0]))
-			#define TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET -21
-	#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the board temperature sensor driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the board temperature sensor driver, for the USB boards which contain a temperature sensor.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_Temperature Temperature Sensor Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Temperature sensor driver. This provides an easy to use interface for the hardware temperature sensor located
+ *  on many boards. It provides an interface to configure the sensor and appropriate ADC channel, plus read out the
+ *  current temperature in degrees C. It is designed for and will only work with the temperature sensor located on the
+ *  official Atmel USB AVR boards, as each sensor has different characteristics.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __TEMPERATURE_H__
+#define __TEMPERATURE_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../Peripheral/ADC.h"
+	
+		#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
+			#error The Board Temperature Sensor driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.
+		#elif ((BOARD != BOARD_USBKEY) && (BOARD != BOARD_STK525) && \
+		       (BOARD != BOARD_STK526) && (BOARD != BOARD_USER) &&   \
+			   (BOARD != BOARD_EVK527))
+			#error The selected board does not contain a temperature sensor.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** ADC channel number for the temperature sensor. */
+			#define TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL       0
+			
+			/** ADC channel MUX mask for the temperature sensor. */
+			#define TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK  ADC_CHANNEL0
+
+			/** Minimum returnable temperature from the \ref Temperature_GetTemperature() function. */
+			#define TEMP_MIN_TEMP          TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET
+
+			/** Maximum returnable temperature from the \ref Temperature_GetTemperature() function. */
+			#define TEMP_MAX_TEMP          ((TEMP_TABLE_SIZE - 1) + TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET)
+		
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Initializes the temperature sensor driver, including setting up the appropriate ADC channel.
+				 *  This must be called before any other temperature sensor routines.
+				 *
+				 *  \note The ADC itself (not the ADC channel) must be configured separately before calling the
+				 *        temperature sensor functions.
+				 */
+				static inline void Temperature_Init(void);
+			#else
+				#define Temperature_Init() ADC_SetupChannel(TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL);
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Performs a complete ADC on the temperature sensor channel, and converts the result into a
+			 *  valid temperature between \ref TEMP_MIN_TEMP and \ref TEMP_MAX_TEMP in degrees Celsius.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Signed temperature in degrees Celsius
+			 */
+			int8_t Temperature_GetTemperature(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define TEMP_TABLE_SIZE   (sizeof(Temperature_Lookup) / sizeof(Temperature_Lookup[0]))
+			#define TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET -21
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/AT45DB642D.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/AT45DB642D.h
index 85b85252a..a37ddf68a 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/AT45DB642D.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/AT45DB642D.h
@@ -1,108 +1,108 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the USBKEY.
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the USBKEY.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash_USBKEY
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_USBKEY_AT45DB642D AT45DB642D
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the USBKEY.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
-			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
-			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
-			#define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON             (1 << 0)
-			
-			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
-		
-			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
-			#define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN                        0xB9
-			#define DF_CMD_WAKEUP                           0xAB
-
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
-			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0x03
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD1
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD3
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
-			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE                      0x7C
-
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE                        ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A})
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1                  0xC7
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2                  0x94
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3                  0x80
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4                  0x9A
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A})
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0x9A
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash_USBKEY
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_USBKEY_AT45DB642D AT45DB642D
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
+			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
+			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
+			#define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON             (1 << 0)
+			
+			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
+		
+			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
+			#define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN                        0xB9
+			#define DF_CMD_WAKEUP                           0xAB
+
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
+			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0x03
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD1
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD3
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
+			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE                      0x7C
+
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE                        ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A})
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1                  0xC7
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2                  0x94
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3                  0x80
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4                  0x9A
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A})
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0x9A
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Buttons.h
index 1b7b757aa..e926fe623 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Buttons.h
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_USBKEY USBKEY
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_USBKEY_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_USBKEY_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_USBKEY USBKEY
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_USBKEY_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_USBKEY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Dataflash.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Dataflash.h
index 75bf28932..25d209079 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Dataflash.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Dataflash.h
@@ -1,130 +1,130 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_USBKEY USBKEY
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the USBKEY board.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h. 
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USBKEY_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_USBKEY_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "AT45DB642D.h"
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                ((1 << 1) | (1 << 0))
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRE
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTE
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 2
-
-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
-
-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 1)
-
-			/** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP2                      (1 << 0)
-			
-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024
-
-			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
-			 *  are deselected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
-			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
-			{
-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-				
-				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  return;
-
-				if (PageAddress & 0x01)
-				  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-				else
-				  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-			}
-
-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
-			{	
-				PageAddress >>= 1;
-				
-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
-			}		
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_USBKEY USBKEY
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the USBKEY board.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h. 
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USBKEY_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_USBKEY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "AT45DB642D.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                ((1 << 1) | (1 << 0))
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRE
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTE
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 2
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP2                      (1 << 0)
+			
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				
+				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  return;
+
+				if (PageAddress & 0x01)
+				  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+				else
+				  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{	
+				PageAddress >>= 1;
+				
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}		
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Joystick.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Joystick.h
index 62a6d5093..0b2fa456e 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Joystick.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Joystick.h
@@ -1,118 +1,118 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
- *  @defgroup Group_Joystick_USBKEY USBKEY
- *
- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USBKEY_H__
-#define __JOYSTICK_USBKEY_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
-			#define JOY_EMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5))
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 6)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
-			#define JOY_RIGHT                ((1 << 4) >> 1)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
-			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 7)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
-			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 5) >> 1)
-
-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 5)
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRB  &= ~(JOY_BMASK);
-				DDRE  &= ~(JOY_EMASK);
-
-				PORTB |= JOY_BMASK;
-				PORTE |= JOY_EMASK;				
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return (((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINE & JOY_EMASK) >> 1));
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  @defgroup Group_Joystick_USBKEY USBKEY
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USBKEY_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_USBKEY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
+			#define JOY_EMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5))
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 6)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                ((1 << 4) >> 1)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 7)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 5) >> 1)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 5)
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~(JOY_BMASK);
+				DDRE  &= ~(JOY_EMASK);
+
+				PORTB |= JOY_BMASK;
+				PORTE |= JOY_EMASK;				
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINE & JOY_EMASK) >> 1));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/LEDs.h
index 03d393350..51d937535 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/LEDs.h
@@ -1,136 +1,136 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_USBKEY USBKEY
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the USBKEY.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_USBKEY_H__
-#define __LEDS_USBKEY_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
-
-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
-
-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
-
-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 6)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD |= LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_USBKEY USBKEY
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_USBKEY_H__
+#define __LEDS_USBKEY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h
index e35935a3e..c922518a3 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBTINY MKII.
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_USBTINYMKII USBTINYMKII
- *
- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_USBTINYMKII_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_USBTINYMKII_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
-			}
-
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBTINY MKII.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  @defgroup Group_Buttons_USBTINYMKII USBTINYMKII
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_USBTINYMKII_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_USBTINYMKII_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h
index 9c2b86816..5797b8254 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h
@@ -1,123 +1,123 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the USBTINY MKII.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_USBTINYMKII USBTINYMKII
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_USBTINYMKII_H__
-#define __LEDS_USBTINYMKII_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
-
-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 7)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
-			{
-				PORTB |= LedMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
-			{
-				PORTB &= ~LedMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
-			{
-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask);
-			}
-		
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the USBTINY MKII.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_USBTINYMKII USBTINYMKII
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_USBTINYMKII_H__
+#define __LEDS_USBTINYMKII_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= LedMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~LedMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask);
+			}
+		
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/AT45DB642D.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/AT45DB642D.h
index 677212d69..97f94e051 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/AT45DB642D.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/AT45DB642D.h
@@ -1,108 +1,108 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the XPLAIN.
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the XPLAIN.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN_AT45DB642D AT45DB642D
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the XPLAIN.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
-			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
-			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
-			#define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON             (1 << 0)
-			
-			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
-		
-			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
-			#define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN                        0xB9
-			#define DF_CMD_WAKEUP                           0xAB
-
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
-			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0x03
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD1
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD3
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
-			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE                      0x7C
-
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE                        ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A})
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1                  0xC7
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2                  0x94
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3                  0x80
-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4                  0x9A
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A})
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0x9A
-			
-			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN_AT45DB642D AT45DB642D
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
+			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
+			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
+			#define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON             (1 << 0)
+			
+			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
+		
+			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
+			#define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN                        0xB9
+			#define DF_CMD_WAKEUP                           0xAB
+
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
+			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0x03
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD1
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD3
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
+			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE                      0x7C
+
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE                        ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A})
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1                  0xC7
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2                  0x94
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3                  0x80
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4                  0x9A
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A})
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0x9A
+			
+			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h
index 28feb58d0..8ca50b3e8 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h
@@ -1,128 +1,128 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the XPLAIN.
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the XPLAIN.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
- *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN XPLAIN
- *
- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the XPLAIN.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_XPLAIN_H__
-#define __DATAFLASH_XPLAIN_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "AT45DB642D.h"
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 5)
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRB
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTB
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
-
-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
-
-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0
-
-			#if (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)
-				#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE              256
-
-				#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                  2048							
-			#else
-				/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
-				#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE              1024
-
-				/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
-				#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                  8192			
-			#endif
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
-			 *  are deselected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
-			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
-			{
-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-				
-				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
-				  return;
-
-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-			}
-
-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
-			{
-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
-			}		
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  @defgroup Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN XPLAIN
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_XPLAIN_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_XPLAIN_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "AT45DB642D.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 5)
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRB
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTB
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0
+
+			#if (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)
+				#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE              256
+
+				#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                  2048							
+			#else
+				/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
+				#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE              1024
+
+				/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
+				#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                  8192			
+			#endif
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				
+				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
+				  return;
+
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}		
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/LEDs.h
index c498071e9..daca76602 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/LEDs.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN/LEDs.h
@@ -1,127 +1,127 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the XPLAIN.
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the XPLAIN.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_XPLAIN XPLAIN
- *
- *  Board specific LED driver header for the XPLAIN.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __LEDS_XPLAIN_H__
-#define __LEDS_XPLAIN_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRB  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-				PORTB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTB &= ~LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTB |= LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTB = ((PORTB | (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS)) & (~ActiveMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTD = (PORTB ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (~PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  @defgroup Group_LEDs_XPLAIN XPLAIN
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __LEDS_XPLAIN_H__
+#define __LEDS_XPLAIN_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB | (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS)) & (~ActiveMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTB ^ (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS));
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h
index a5f397aeb..05762858d 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h
@@ -1,192 +1,192 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief ANSI terminal special escape code macros.
- *
- *  ANSI terminal compatible escape sequences. These escape sequences are designed to be concatenated with existing
- *  strings to modify their display on a compatible terminal application.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_Terminal ANSI Terminal Escape Codes - LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - None
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Escape code macros for ANSI compliant text terminals.
- *
- *  \note If desired, the macro DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES can be defined in the project makefile and passed to the GCC
- *        compiler via the -D switch to disable the terminal codes without modifying the source, for use with non
- *        compatible terminals (any terminal codes then equate to empty strings).
- *
- *  Example Usage:
- *  \code
- *      printf("Some String, " ESC_BOLD_ON " Some bold string");
- *  \endcode
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __TERMINALCODES_H__
-#define __TERMINALCODES_H__
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			#if !defined(DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES)
-				/** Creates an ANSII escape sequence with the payload specified by "c". */
-				#define ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(c)  "\33[" c
-			#else
-				#define ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(c)
-			#endif
-
-			/** Resets any escape sequence modifiers back to their defaults. */
-			#define ESC_RESET                ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("0m")
-
-			/** Turns on bold so that any following text is printed to the terminal in bold. */
-			#define ESC_BOLD_ON              ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("1m")
-
-			/** Turns on italics so that any following text is printed to the terminal in italics. */
-			#define ESC_ITALICS_ON           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("3m")
-
-			/** Turns on underline so that any following text is printed to the terminal underlined. */
-			#define ESC_UNDERLINE_ON         ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("4m")
-
-			/** Turns on inverse so that any following text is printed to the terminal in inverted colours. */
-			#define ESC_INVERSE_ON           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("7m")
-
-			/** Turns on strikethrough so that any following text is printed to the terminal with a line through the
-			 *  center.
-			 */
-			#define ESC_STRIKETHROUGH_ON     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("9m")
-
-			/** Turns off bold so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non bold. */
-			#define ESC_BOLD_OFF             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("22m")
-
-			/** Turns off italics so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non italics. */
-			#define ESC_ITALICS_OFF          ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("23m")
-			
-			/** Turns off underline so that any following text is printed to the terminal non underlined. */			
-			#define ESC_UNDERLINE_OFF        ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("24m")
-
-			/** Turns off inverse so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non inverted colours. */
-			#define ESC_INVERSE_OFF          ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("27m")
-
-			/** Turns off strikethrough so that any following text is printed to the terminal without a line through
-			 *  the center.
-			 */
-			#define ESC_STRIKETHROUGH_OFF    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("29m")
-
-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to black. */
-			#define ESC_FG_BLACK             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("30m")
-
-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to red. */
-			#define ESC_FG_RED               ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("31m")
-
-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to green. */
-			#define ESC_FG_GREEN             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("32m")
-
-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to yellow. */
-			#define ESC_FG_YELLOW            ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("33m")
-
-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to blue. */
-			#define ESC_FG_BLUE              ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("34m")
-
-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to magenta. */
-			#define ESC_FG_MAGENTA           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("35m")
-
-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to cyan. */
-			#define ESC_FG_CYAN              ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("36m")
-
-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to white. */
-			#define ESC_FG_WHITE             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("37m")
-
-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to the terminal's default. */
-			#define ESC_FG_DEFAULT           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("39m")
-
-			/** Sets the text background colour to black. */
-			#define ESC_BG_BLACK             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("40m")
-
-			/** Sets the text background colour to red. */
-			#define ESC_BG_RED               ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("41m")
-
-			/** Sets the text background colour to green. */
-			#define ESC_BG_GREEN             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("42m")
-
-			/** Sets the text background colour to yellow. */
-			#define ESC_BG_YELLOW            ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("43m")
-
-			/** Sets the text background colour to blue. */
-			#define ESC_BG_BLUE              ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("44m")
-
-			/** Sets the text background colour to magenta. */
-			#define ESC_BG_MAGENTA           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("45m")
-
-			/** Sets the text background colour to cyan. */
-			#define ESC_BG_CYAN              ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("46m")
-
-			/** Sets the text background colour to white. */
-			#define ESC_BG_WHITE             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("47m")
-
-			/** Sets the text background colour to the terminal's default. */
-			#define ESC_BG_DEFAULT           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("49m")
-			
-			/** Sets the cursor position to the given line and column. */
-			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS(L, C)     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#L ";" #C "H")
-
-			/** Moves the cursor up the given number of lines. */
-			#define ESC_CURSOR_UP(L)         ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#L "A")
-
-			/** Moves the cursor down the given number of lines. */
-			#define ESC_CURSOR_DOWN(L)       ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#L "B")
-
-			/** Moves the cursor to the right the given number of columns. */
-			#define ESC_CURSOR_FORWARD(C)    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#C "C")
-
-			/** Moves the cursor to the left the given number of columns. */
-			#define ESC_CURSOR_BACKWARD(C)   ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#C "D")
-
-			/** Saves the current cursor position so that it may be restored with \ref ESC_CURSOR_POS_RESTORE. */
-			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS_SAVE      ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("s")
-
-			/** Restores the cursor position to the last position saved with \ref ESC_CURSOR_POS_SAVE. */
-			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS_RESTORE   ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("u")
-			
-			/** Erases the entire display, returning the cursor to the top left. */
-			#define ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY        ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("2J")
-
-			/** Erases the current line, returning the cursor to the far left. */
-			#define ESC_ERASE_LINE           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("K")
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief ANSI terminal special escape code macros.
+ *
+ *  ANSI terminal compatible escape sequences. These escape sequences are designed to be concatenated with existing
+ *  strings to modify their display on a compatible terminal application.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_Terminal ANSI Terminal Escape Codes - LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Escape code macros for ANSI compliant text terminals.
+ *
+ *  \note If desired, the macro DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES can be defined in the project makefile and passed to the GCC
+ *        compiler via the -D switch to disable the terminal codes without modifying the source, for use with non
+ *        compatible terminals (any terminal codes then equate to empty strings).
+ *
+ *  Example Usage:
+ *  \code
+ *      printf("Some String, " ESC_BOLD_ON " Some bold string");
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __TERMINALCODES_H__
+#define __TERMINALCODES_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if !defined(DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES)
+				/** Creates an ANSII escape sequence with the payload specified by "c". */
+				#define ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(c)  "\33[" c
+			#else
+				#define ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(c)
+			#endif
+
+			/** Resets any escape sequence modifiers back to their defaults. */
+			#define ESC_RESET                ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("0m")
+
+			/** Turns on bold so that any following text is printed to the terminal in bold. */
+			#define ESC_BOLD_ON              ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("1m")
+
+			/** Turns on italics so that any following text is printed to the terminal in italics. */
+			#define ESC_ITALICS_ON           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("3m")
+
+			/** Turns on underline so that any following text is printed to the terminal underlined. */
+			#define ESC_UNDERLINE_ON         ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("4m")
+
+			/** Turns on inverse so that any following text is printed to the terminal in inverted colours. */
+			#define ESC_INVERSE_ON           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("7m")
+
+			/** Turns on strikethrough so that any following text is printed to the terminal with a line through the
+			 *  center.
+			 */
+			#define ESC_STRIKETHROUGH_ON     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("9m")
+
+			/** Turns off bold so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non bold. */
+			#define ESC_BOLD_OFF             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("22m")
+
+			/** Turns off italics so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non italics. */
+			#define ESC_ITALICS_OFF          ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("23m")
+			
+			/** Turns off underline so that any following text is printed to the terminal non underlined. */			
+			#define ESC_UNDERLINE_OFF        ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("24m")
+
+			/** Turns off inverse so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non inverted colours. */
+			#define ESC_INVERSE_OFF          ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("27m")
+
+			/** Turns off strikethrough so that any following text is printed to the terminal without a line through
+			 *  the center.
+			 */
+			#define ESC_STRIKETHROUGH_OFF    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("29m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to black. */
+			#define ESC_FG_BLACK             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("30m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to red. */
+			#define ESC_FG_RED               ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("31m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to green. */
+			#define ESC_FG_GREEN             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("32m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to yellow. */
+			#define ESC_FG_YELLOW            ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("33m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to blue. */
+			#define ESC_FG_BLUE              ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("34m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to magenta. */
+			#define ESC_FG_MAGENTA           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("35m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to cyan. */
+			#define ESC_FG_CYAN              ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("36m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to white. */
+			#define ESC_FG_WHITE             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("37m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to the terminal's default. */
+			#define ESC_FG_DEFAULT           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("39m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to black. */
+			#define ESC_BG_BLACK             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("40m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to red. */
+			#define ESC_BG_RED               ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("41m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to green. */
+			#define ESC_BG_GREEN             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("42m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to yellow. */
+			#define ESC_BG_YELLOW            ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("43m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to blue. */
+			#define ESC_BG_BLUE              ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("44m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to magenta. */
+			#define ESC_BG_MAGENTA           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("45m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to cyan. */
+			#define ESC_BG_CYAN              ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("46m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to white. */
+			#define ESC_BG_WHITE             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("47m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to the terminal's default. */
+			#define ESC_BG_DEFAULT           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("49m")
+			
+			/** Sets the cursor position to the given line and column. */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS(L, C)     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#L ";" #C "H")
+
+			/** Moves the cursor up the given number of lines. */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_UP(L)         ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#L "A")
+
+			/** Moves the cursor down the given number of lines. */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_DOWN(L)       ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#L "B")
+
+			/** Moves the cursor to the right the given number of columns. */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_FORWARD(C)    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#C "C")
+
+			/** Moves the cursor to the left the given number of columns. */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_BACKWARD(C)   ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#C "D")
+
+			/** Saves the current cursor position so that it may be restored with \ref ESC_CURSOR_POS_RESTORE. */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS_SAVE      ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("s")
+
+			/** Restores the cursor position to the last position saved with \ref ESC_CURSOR_POS_SAVE. */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS_RESTORE   ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("u")
+			
+			/** Erases the entire display, returning the cursor to the top left. */
+			#define ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY        ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("2J")
+
+			/** Erases the current line, returning the cursor to the far left. */
+			#define ESC_ERASE_LINE           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("K")
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h
index e3840fe84..24997f583 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h
@@ -1,71 +1,71 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the ADC peripheral driver.
- *
- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific ADC driver, for AVRs containing an ADC.
- *
- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the
- *  currently selected AVR model.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_ADC ADC Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - None
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Hardware ADC driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the hardware
- *  ADC present on many AVR models, for the conversion of analogue signals into the
- *  digital domain.
- */
- 
-#ifndef __ADC_H__
-#define __ADC_H__
-
-	/* Macros: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_ADC_H
-	#endif
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \
-		     defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
-			 defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || \
-			 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))
-			#include "AVRU4U6U7/ADC.h"
-		#else
-			#error "ADC is not available for the currently selected AVR model."
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the ADC peripheral driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific ADC driver, for AVRs containing an ADC.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected AVR model.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_ADC ADC Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Hardware ADC driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the hardware
+ *  ADC present on many AVR models, for the conversion of analogue signals into the
+ *  digital domain.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __ADC_H__
+#define __ADC_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_ADC_H
+	#endif
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \
+		     defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
+			 defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || \
+			 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))
+			#include "AVRU4U6U7/ADC.h"
+		#else
+			#error "ADC is not available for the currently selected AVR model."
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVRU4U6U7/ADC.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVRU4U6U7/ADC.h
index 5bf840b5a..00c18e786 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVRU4U6U7/ADC.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVRU4U6U7/ADC.h
@@ -1,340 +1,340 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief ADC peripheral driver for the U7, U6 and U4 USB AVRs.
- *
- *  ADC driver for the AT90USB1287, AT90USB1286, AT90USB647, AT90USB646, ATMEGA16U4 and ATMEGA32U4 AVRs.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_ADC
- *  @defgroup Group_ADC_AVRU4U6U7 Series U4, U6 and U7 Model ADC Driver
- *
- *  ADC driver for the AT90USB1287, AT90USB1286, AT90USB647, AT90USB646, ATMEGA16U4 and ATMEGA32U4 AVRs.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __ADC_AVRU4U6U7_H__
-#define __ADC_AVRU4U6U7_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-		
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_ADC_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */			
-			/** Reference mask, for using the voltage present at the AVR's AREF pin for the ADC reference. */
-			#define  ADC_REFERENCE_AREF              0
-
-			/** Reference mask, for using the voltage present at the AVR's AVCC pin for the ADC reference. */
-			#define  ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC              (1 << REFS0)
-
-			/** Reference mask, for using the internally generated 2.56V reference voltage as the ADC reference. */
-			#define  ADC_REFERENCE_INT2560MV         ((1 << REFS1)| (1 << REFS0))
-			
-			/** Left-adjusts the 10-bit ADC result, so that the upper 8 bits of the value returned by the
-			 *  ADC_GetResult() macro contain the 8 most significant bits of the result. */
-			#define  ADC_LEFT_ADJUSTED               (1 << ADLAR)
-
-			/** Right-adjusts the 10-bit ADC result, so that the lower 8 bits of the value returned by the
-			 *  ADC_GetResult() macro contain the 8 least significant bits of the result. */
-			#define  ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED              (0 << ADLAR)
-			
-			/** Sets the ADC mode to free running, so that conversions take place continuously as fast as the ADC
-			 *  is capable of at the given input clock speed. */
-			#define  ADC_FREE_RUNNING                (1 << ADATE)
-
-			/** Sets the ADC mode to single conversion, so that only a single conversion will take place before
-			 *  the ADC returns to idle. */
-			#define  ADC_SINGLE_CONVERSION           (0 << ADATE)
-			
-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 2 the AVR's system clock. */
-			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_2                  (1 << ADPS0)
-
-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 4 the AVR's system clock. */
-			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_4                  (1 << ADPS1)
-
-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 8 the AVR's system clock. */
-			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_8                  ((1 << ADPS0) | (1 << ADPS1))
-
-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 16 the AVR's system clock. */
-			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_16                 (1 << ADPS2)
-
-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 32 the AVR's system clock. */
-			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_32                 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS0))
-
-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 64 the AVR's system clock. */
-			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_64                 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS1))
-
-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 128 the AVR's system clock. */
-			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_128                ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS1) | (1 << ADPS0))
-			
-			//@{
-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC0 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
-			#define  ADC_CHANNEL0                    (0x00 << MUX0)
-
-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC1 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
-			#define  ADC_CHANNEL1                    (0x01 << MUX0)
-
-			#if !(defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC2 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
-				 */
-				#define  ADC_CHANNEL2                (0x02 << MUX0)
-
-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC3 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
-				 */
-				#define  ADC_CHANNEL3                (0x03 << MUX0)
-			#endif
-
-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC4 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
-			#define  ADC_CHANNEL4                    (0x04 << MUX0)
-
-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC5 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
-			#define  ADC_CHANNEL5                    (0x05 << MUX0)
-
-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC6 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
-			#define  ADC_CHANNEL6                    (0x06 << MUX0)
-
-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC7 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
-			#define  ADC_CHANNEL7                    (0x07 << MUX0)
-
-			/** MUX mask define for the internal 1.1V bandgap channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
-			#define  ADC_1100MV_BANDGAP              (0x1E << MUX0)
-			
-			#if (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC8 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
-				 */
-				#define  ADC_CHANNEL8                ((1 << 8) | (0x00 << MUX0))
-
-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC9 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
-				 */
-				#define  ADC_CHANNEL9                ((1 << 8) | (0x01 << MUX0))
-
-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC10 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
-				 */
-				#define  ADC_CHANNEL10               ((1 << 8) | (0x02 << MUX0))
-
-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC11 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
-				 */
-				#define  ADC_CHANNEL11               ((1 << 8) | (0x03 << MUX0))
-
-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC12 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
-				 */
-				#define  ADC_CHANNEL12               ((1 << 8) | (0x04 << MUX0))
-
-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC13 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
-				 */
-				#define  ADC_CHANNEL13               ((1 << 8) | (0x05 << MUX0))
-
-				/** MUX mask define for the internal temperature sensor channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and
-				 *  \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
-				 */
-				#define  ADC_INT_TEMP_SENS           ((1 << 8) | (0x07 << MUX0))
-			#endif
-			//@}
-		
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Initializes the ADC, ready for conversions. This must be called before any other ADC operations.
-				 *  The "mode" parameter should be a mask comprised of a conversion mode (free running or single) and
-				 *  prescaler masks.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] Mode  Mask of ADC settings, including adjustment, prescale, mode and reference
-				 */
-				static inline void ADC_Init(uint8_t Mode);
-
-				/** Turns off the ADC. If this is called, any further ADC operations will require a call to
-				 *  \ref ADC_Init() before the ADC can be used again.
-				 */
-				static inline void ADC_ShutDown(void);
-				
-				/** Indicates if the ADC is currently enabled.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the ADC subsystem is currently enabled, false otherwise.
-				 */
-				static inline bool ADC_GetStatus(void);
-				
-				/** Indicates if the current ADC conversion is completed, or still in progress.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean false if the reading is still taking place, or true if the conversion is
-				 *          complete and ready to be read out with \ref ADC_GetResult()
-				 */
-				static inline bool ADC_IsReadingComplete(void);
-				
-				/** Retrieves the conversion value of the last completed ADC conversion and clears the reading
-				 *  completion flag.
-				 *
-				 *  \return The result of the last ADC conversion
-				 */
-				static inline uint16_t ADC_GetResult(void);
-			#else
-				#define  ADC_Init(mode)          MACROS{ ADCSRA = ((1 << ADEN) | mode);         }MACROE
-
-				#define  ADC_ShutDown()          MACROS{ ADCSRA = 0;                            }MACROE
-				
-				#define  ADC_GetStatus()               ((ADCSRA & (1 << ADEN)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define  ADC_IsReadingComplete()       ((ADCSRA & (1 << ADIF)) ? true : false)
-				
-				#define  ADC_GetResult()                (ADCSRA |= (1 << ADIF), ADC)
-			#endif
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Configures the given ADC channel, ready for ADC conversions. This function sets the
-			 *  associated port pin as an input and disables the digital portion of the I/O to reduce
-			 *  power consumption.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This must only be called for ADC channels with are connected to a physical port
-			 *        pin of the AVR, denoted by its special alternative function ADCx.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note The channel number must be specified as an integer, and NOT a ADC_CHANNELx mask.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Channel  ADC channel number to set up for conversions
-			 */
-			static inline void ADC_SetupChannel(const uint8_t Channel)
-			{
-				#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \
-					 defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
-					 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))				
-				DDRF  &= ~(1 << Channel);
-				DIDR0 |=  (1 << Channel);
-				#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
-				if (Channel < 8)
-				{
-					DDRF  &= ~(1 << Channel);
-					DIDR0 |=  (1 << Channel);
-				}
-				else if (Channel == 8)
-				{
-					DDRD  &= ~(1 << 4);
-					DIDR2 |=  (1 << 0);
-				}
-				else if (Channel < 11)
-				{
-					DDRD  &= ~(1 << (Channel - 3));
-					DIDR2 |=  (1 << (Channel - 8));
-				}
-				else
-				{
-					DDRB  &= ~(1 << (Channel - 7));
-					DIDR2 |=  (1 << (Channel - 8));
-				}
-				#endif
-			}
-			
-			/** Starts the reading of the given channel, but does not wait until the conversion has completed.
-			 *  Once executed, the conversion status can be determined via the \ref ADC_IsReadingComplete() macro and
-			 *  the result read via the \ref ADC_GetResult() macro.
-			 *
-			 *  If the ADC has been initialized in free running mode, calling this function once will begin the repeated
-			 *  conversions. If the ADC is in single conversion mode (or the channel to convert from is to be changed),
-			 *  this function must be called each time a conversion is to take place.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] MUXMask  Mask comprising of an ADC channel mask, reference mask and adjustment mask
-			 */
-			static inline void ADC_StartReading(const uint16_t MUXMask)
-			{
-				ADMUX = MUXMask;
-				
-				#if (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
-				if (MUXMask & (1 << 8))
-				  ADCSRB |=  (1 << MUX5);
-				else
-				  ADCSRB &= ~(1 << MUX5);
-				#endif
-			
-				ADCSRA |= (1 << ADSC);
-			}
-
-			/** Performs a complete single reading from channel, including a polling spin-loop to wait for the
-			 *  conversion to complete, and the returning of the converted value.
-			 *
-			 *  \note For free running mode, the automated conversions should be initialized with a single call
-			 *        to \ref ADC_StartReading() to select the channel and begin the automated conversions, and
-			 *        the results read directly from the \ref ADC_GetResult() instead to reduce overhead.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] MUXMask  Mask comprising of an ADC channel mask, reference mask and adjustment mask
-			 */
-			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetChannelReading(const uint16_t MUXMask) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetChannelReading(const uint16_t MUXMask)
-			{
-				ADC_StartReading(MUXMask);
-	
-				while (!(ADC_IsReadingComplete()));
-	
-				return ADC_GetResult();
-			}
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief ADC peripheral driver for the U7, U6 and U4 USB AVRs.
+ *
+ *  ADC driver for the AT90USB1287, AT90USB1286, AT90USB647, AT90USB646, ATMEGA16U4 and ATMEGA32U4 AVRs.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_ADC
+ *  @defgroup Group_ADC_AVRU4U6U7 Series U4, U6 and U7 Model ADC Driver
+ *
+ *  ADC driver for the AT90USB1287, AT90USB1286, AT90USB647, AT90USB646, ATMEGA16U4 and ATMEGA32U4 AVRs.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __ADC_AVRU4U6U7_H__
+#define __ADC_AVRU4U6U7_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_ADC_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */			
+			/** Reference mask, for using the voltage present at the AVR's AREF pin for the ADC reference. */
+			#define  ADC_REFERENCE_AREF              0
+
+			/** Reference mask, for using the voltage present at the AVR's AVCC pin for the ADC reference. */
+			#define  ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC              (1 << REFS0)
+
+			/** Reference mask, for using the internally generated 2.56V reference voltage as the ADC reference. */
+			#define  ADC_REFERENCE_INT2560MV         ((1 << REFS1)| (1 << REFS0))
+			
+			/** Left-adjusts the 10-bit ADC result, so that the upper 8 bits of the value returned by the
+			 *  ADC_GetResult() macro contain the 8 most significant bits of the result. */
+			#define  ADC_LEFT_ADJUSTED               (1 << ADLAR)
+
+			/** Right-adjusts the 10-bit ADC result, so that the lower 8 bits of the value returned by the
+			 *  ADC_GetResult() macro contain the 8 least significant bits of the result. */
+			#define  ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED              (0 << ADLAR)
+			
+			/** Sets the ADC mode to free running, so that conversions take place continuously as fast as the ADC
+			 *  is capable of at the given input clock speed. */
+			#define  ADC_FREE_RUNNING                (1 << ADATE)
+
+			/** Sets the ADC mode to single conversion, so that only a single conversion will take place before
+			 *  the ADC returns to idle. */
+			#define  ADC_SINGLE_CONVERSION           (0 << ADATE)
+			
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 2 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_2                  (1 << ADPS0)
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 4 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_4                  (1 << ADPS1)
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 8 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_8                  ((1 << ADPS0) | (1 << ADPS1))
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 16 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_16                 (1 << ADPS2)
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 32 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_32                 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS0))
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 64 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_64                 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS1))
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 128 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define  ADC_PRESCALE_128                ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS1) | (1 << ADPS0))
+			
+			//@{
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC0 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
+			#define  ADC_CHANNEL0                    (0x00 << MUX0)
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC1 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
+			#define  ADC_CHANNEL1                    (0x01 << MUX0)
+
+			#if !(defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC2 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define  ADC_CHANNEL2                (0x02 << MUX0)
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC3 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define  ADC_CHANNEL3                (0x03 << MUX0)
+			#endif
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC4 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
+			#define  ADC_CHANNEL4                    (0x04 << MUX0)
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC5 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
+			#define  ADC_CHANNEL5                    (0x05 << MUX0)
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC6 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
+			#define  ADC_CHANNEL6                    (0x06 << MUX0)
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC7 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
+			#define  ADC_CHANNEL7                    (0x07 << MUX0)
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the internal 1.1V bandgap channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
+			#define  ADC_1100MV_BANDGAP              (0x1E << MUX0)
+			
+			#if (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC8 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define  ADC_CHANNEL8                ((1 << 8) | (0x00 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC9 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define  ADC_CHANNEL9                ((1 << 8) | (0x01 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC10 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define  ADC_CHANNEL10               ((1 << 8) | (0x02 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC11 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define  ADC_CHANNEL11               ((1 << 8) | (0x03 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC12 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define  ADC_CHANNEL12               ((1 << 8) | (0x04 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC13 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define  ADC_CHANNEL13               ((1 << 8) | (0x05 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the internal temperature sensor channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and
+				 *  \ref ADC_GetChannelReading.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define  ADC_INT_TEMP_SENS           ((1 << 8) | (0x07 << MUX0))
+			#endif
+			//@}
+		
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Initializes the ADC, ready for conversions. This must be called before any other ADC operations.
+				 *  The "mode" parameter should be a mask comprised of a conversion mode (free running or single) and
+				 *  prescaler masks.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] Mode  Mask of ADC settings, including adjustment, prescale, mode and reference
+				 */
+				static inline void ADC_Init(uint8_t Mode);
+
+				/** Turns off the ADC. If this is called, any further ADC operations will require a call to
+				 *  \ref ADC_Init() before the ADC can be used again.
+				 */
+				static inline void ADC_ShutDown(void);
+				
+				/** Indicates if the ADC is currently enabled.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the ADC subsystem is currently enabled, false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline bool ADC_GetStatus(void);
+				
+				/** Indicates if the current ADC conversion is completed, or still in progress.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean false if the reading is still taking place, or true if the conversion is
+				 *          complete and ready to be read out with \ref ADC_GetResult()
+				 */
+				static inline bool ADC_IsReadingComplete(void);
+				
+				/** Retrieves the conversion value of the last completed ADC conversion and clears the reading
+				 *  completion flag.
+				 *
+				 *  \return The result of the last ADC conversion
+				 */
+				static inline uint16_t ADC_GetResult(void);
+			#else
+				#define  ADC_Init(mode)          MACROS{ ADCSRA = ((1 << ADEN) | mode);         }MACROE
+
+				#define  ADC_ShutDown()          MACROS{ ADCSRA = 0;                            }MACROE
+				
+				#define  ADC_GetStatus()               ((ADCSRA & (1 << ADEN)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define  ADC_IsReadingComplete()       ((ADCSRA & (1 << ADIF)) ? true : false)
+				
+				#define  ADC_GetResult()                (ADCSRA |= (1 << ADIF), ADC)
+			#endif
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Configures the given ADC channel, ready for ADC conversions. This function sets the
+			 *  associated port pin as an input and disables the digital portion of the I/O to reduce
+			 *  power consumption.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This must only be called for ADC channels with are connected to a physical port
+			 *        pin of the AVR, denoted by its special alternative function ADCx.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The channel number must be specified as an integer, and NOT a ADC_CHANNELx mask.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Channel  ADC channel number to set up for conversions
+			 */
+			static inline void ADC_SetupChannel(const uint8_t Channel)
+			{
+				#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \
+					 defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
+					 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))				
+				DDRF  &= ~(1 << Channel);
+				DIDR0 |=  (1 << Channel);
+				#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
+				if (Channel < 8)
+				{
+					DDRF  &= ~(1 << Channel);
+					DIDR0 |=  (1 << Channel);
+				}
+				else if (Channel == 8)
+				{
+					DDRD  &= ~(1 << 4);
+					DIDR2 |=  (1 << 0);
+				}
+				else if (Channel < 11)
+				{
+					DDRD  &= ~(1 << (Channel - 3));
+					DIDR2 |=  (1 << (Channel - 8));
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					DDRB  &= ~(1 << (Channel - 7));
+					DIDR2 |=  (1 << (Channel - 8));
+				}
+				#endif
+			}
+			
+			/** Starts the reading of the given channel, but does not wait until the conversion has completed.
+			 *  Once executed, the conversion status can be determined via the \ref ADC_IsReadingComplete() macro and
+			 *  the result read via the \ref ADC_GetResult() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the ADC has been initialized in free running mode, calling this function once will begin the repeated
+			 *  conversions. If the ADC is in single conversion mode (or the channel to convert from is to be changed),
+			 *  this function must be called each time a conversion is to take place.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] MUXMask  Mask comprising of an ADC channel mask, reference mask and adjustment mask
+			 */
+			static inline void ADC_StartReading(const uint16_t MUXMask)
+			{
+				ADMUX = MUXMask;
+				
+				#if (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				if (MUXMask & (1 << 8))
+				  ADCSRB |=  (1 << MUX5);
+				else
+				  ADCSRB &= ~(1 << MUX5);
+				#endif
+			
+				ADCSRA |= (1 << ADSC);
+			}
+
+			/** Performs a complete single reading from channel, including a polling spin-loop to wait for the
+			 *  conversion to complete, and the returning of the converted value.
+			 *
+			 *  \note For free running mode, the automated conversions should be initialized with a single call
+			 *        to \ref ADC_StartReading() to select the channel and begin the automated conversions, and
+			 *        the results read directly from the \ref ADC_GetResult() instead to reduce overhead.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] MUXMask  Mask comprising of an ADC channel mask, reference mask and adjustment mask
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetChannelReading(const uint16_t MUXMask) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetChannelReading(const uint16_t MUXMask)
+			{
+				ADC_StartReading(MUXMask);
+	
+				while (!(ADC_IsReadingComplete()));
+	
+				return ADC_GetResult();
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVRU4U6U7/TWI.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVRU4U6U7/TWI.h
index 990b44d14..f6a251710 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVRU4U6U7/TWI.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVRU4U6U7/TWI.h
@@ -1,149 +1,149 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief TWI peripheral driver for the U7, U6 and U4 USB AVRs.
- *
- *  Master mode TWI driver for the AT90USB1287, AT90USB1286, AT90USB647, AT90USB646, ATMEGA16U4 and ATMEGA32U4 AVRs.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the TWI driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_TWI
- *  @defgroup Group_TWI_AVRU4U6U7 Series U4, U6 and U7 Model TWI Driver
- *
- *  Master mode TWI driver for the AT90USB1287, AT90USB1286, AT90USB647, AT90USB646, ATMEGA16U4 and ATMEGA32U4 AVRs.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the TWI driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __TWI_AVRU4U6U7_H__
-#define __TWI_AVRU4U6U7_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-		
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <util/twi.h>
-		#include <util/delay.h>
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Initializes the TWI hardware into master mode, ready for data transmission and reception. This must be
-				 *  before any other TWI operations.
-				 */
-				static inline void TWI_Init(void);
-				
-				/** Turns off the TWI driver hardware. If this is called, any further TWI operations will require a call to
-				 *  \ref TWI_Init() before the TWI can be used again.
-				 */				
-				static inline void TWI_ShutDown(void);
-			#else
-				#define TWI_Init()        MACROS{ TWCR |=  (1 << TWEN); }MACROE
-				#define TWI_ShutDown()    MACROS{ TWCR &= ~(1 << TWEN); }MACROE
-			#endif
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Sends a TWI STOP onto the TWI bus, terminating communication with the currently addressed device. */
-			static inline void TWI_StopTransmission(void)
-			{
-				TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTO) | (1 << TWEN));
-			}
-
-			/** Sends a byte to the currently addressed device on the TWI bus.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send to the currently addressed device
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the recipient ACKed the byte, false otherwise
-			 */
-			static inline bool TWI_SendByte(uint8_t Byte)
-			{
-				TWDR = Byte;
-				TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));	
-				while (!(TWCR & (1 << TWINT)));
-
-				return ((TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK) == TW_MT_DATA_ACK);
-			}
-
-			/** Receives a byte from the currently addressed device on the TWI bus.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Location where the read byte is to be stored
-			 *  \param[in] LastByte  Indicates if the byte should be ACKed if false, NAKed if true
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the byte reception sucessfully completed, false otherwise
-			 */
-			static inline bool TWI_ReceiveByte(uint8_t* Byte, bool LastByte)
-			{
-				uint8_t TWCRMask = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));
-				
-				if (!(LastByte))
-				  TWCRMask |= (1 << TWEA);
-
-				TWCR = TWCRMask;
-				while (!(TWCR & (1 << TWINT)));
-				*Byte = TWDR;
-
-				return ((TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK) == TW_MR_DATA_ACK);
-			}
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Begins a master mode TWI bus communication with the given slave device address.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress  Address of the slave TWI device to communicate with
-			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS     Timeout period within which the slave must respond, in milliseconds
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the device is ready for data, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool TWI_StartTransmission(uint8_t SlaveAddress, uint8_t TimeoutMS);
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief TWI peripheral driver for the U7, U6 and U4 USB AVRs.
+ *
+ *  Master mode TWI driver for the AT90USB1287, AT90USB1286, AT90USB647, AT90USB646, ATMEGA16U4 and ATMEGA32U4 AVRs.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the TWI driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_TWI
+ *  @defgroup Group_TWI_AVRU4U6U7 Series U4, U6 and U7 Model TWI Driver
+ *
+ *  Master mode TWI driver for the AT90USB1287, AT90USB1286, AT90USB647, AT90USB646, ATMEGA16U4 and ATMEGA32U4 AVRs.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the TWI driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __TWI_AVRU4U6U7_H__
+#define __TWI_AVRU4U6U7_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <util/twi.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Initializes the TWI hardware into master mode, ready for data transmission and reception. This must be
+				 *  before any other TWI operations.
+				 */
+				static inline void TWI_Init(void);
+				
+				/** Turns off the TWI driver hardware. If this is called, any further TWI operations will require a call to
+				 *  \ref TWI_Init() before the TWI can be used again.
+				 */				
+				static inline void TWI_ShutDown(void);
+			#else
+				#define TWI_Init()        MACROS{ TWCR |=  (1 << TWEN); }MACROE
+				#define TWI_ShutDown()    MACROS{ TWCR &= ~(1 << TWEN); }MACROE
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Sends a TWI STOP onto the TWI bus, terminating communication with the currently addressed device. */
+			static inline void TWI_StopTransmission(void)
+			{
+				TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTO) | (1 << TWEN));
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently addressed device on the TWI bus.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send to the currently addressed device
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the recipient ACKed the byte, false otherwise
+			 */
+			static inline bool TWI_SendByte(uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				TWDR = Byte;
+				TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));	
+				while (!(TWCR & (1 << TWINT)));
+
+				return ((TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK) == TW_MT_DATA_ACK);
+			}
+
+			/** Receives a byte from the currently addressed device on the TWI bus.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Location where the read byte is to be stored
+			 *  \param[in] LastByte  Indicates if the byte should be ACKed if false, NAKed if true
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the byte reception sucessfully completed, false otherwise
+			 */
+			static inline bool TWI_ReceiveByte(uint8_t* Byte, bool LastByte)
+			{
+				uint8_t TWCRMask = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));
+				
+				if (!(LastByte))
+				  TWCRMask |= (1 << TWEA);
+
+				TWCR = TWCRMask;
+				while (!(TWCR & (1 << TWINT)));
+				*Byte = TWDR;
+
+				return ((TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK) == TW_MR_DATA_ACK);
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Begins a master mode TWI bus communication with the given slave device address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress  Address of the slave TWI device to communicate with
+			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS     Timeout period within which the slave must respond, in milliseconds
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the device is ready for data, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool TWI_StartTransmission(uint8_t SlaveAddress, uint8_t TimeoutMS);
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h
index 041c0788e..9e6475351 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h
@@ -1,185 +1,185 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the SPI peripheral driver.
- *
- *  Hardware SPI subsystem driver for the supported USB AVRs models.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_SPI SPI Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - None
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Driver for the hardware SPI port available on most AVR models. This module provides
- *  an easy to use driver for the setup of and transfer of data over the AVR's SPI port.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __SPI_H__
-#define __SPI_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED            (1 << SPE)
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 2. */
-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2           SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED
-
-			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 4. */
-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4           0
-
-			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 8. */
-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8           (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR0))
-
-			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 16. */
-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16          (1 << SPR0)
-
-			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 32. */
-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32          (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR1))
-
-			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 64. */
-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64          (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0))
-
-			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 128. */
-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128         ((1 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0))
-			
-			/** SPI clock polarity mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the rising edge. */
-			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING            (0 << CPOL)
-
-			/** SPI clock polarity mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the falling edge. */
-			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING           (1 << CPOL)
-
-			/** SPI data sample mode mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should sampled on the leading edge. */
-			#define SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING             (0 << CPHA)
-
-			/** SPI data sample mode mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should be sampled on the trailing edge. */
-			#define SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING            (1 << CPHA)
-			
-			/** SPI mode mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into slave mode. */
-			#define SPI_MODE_SLAVE                 (0 << MSTR)
-
-			/** SPI mode mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into master mode. */
-			#define SPI_MODE_MASTER                (1 << MSTR)
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Initializes the SPI subsystem, ready for transfers. Must be called before calling any other
-			 *  SPI routines.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] SPIOptions  SPI Options, a mask consisting of one of each of the SPI_SPEED_*,
-			 *                         SPI_SCK_*, SPI_SAMPLE_* and SPI_MODE_* masks
-			 */
-			static inline void SPI_Init(const uint8_t SPIOptions)
-			{
-				DDRB  |= ((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));
-				PORTB |= ((1 << 0) | (1 << 3));
-				
-				SPCR   = ((1 << SPE) | SPIOptions);
-				
-				if (SPIOptions & SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED)
-				  SPSR |= (1 << SPI2X);
-				else
-				  SPSR &= ~(1 << SPI2X);
-			}
-			
-			/** Turns off the SPI driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration. */
-			static inline void SPI_ShutDown(void)
-			{
-				DDRB  &= ~((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));
-				PORTB &= ~((1 << 0) | (1 << 3));
-				
-				SPCR   = 0;
-				SPSR   = 0;
-			}
-			
-			/** Sends and receives a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send through the SPI interface
-			 *
-			 *  \return Response byte from the attached SPI device
-			 */
-			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
-			{
-				SPDR = Byte;
-				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
-				return SPDR;
-			}
-
-			/** Sends a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
-			 *  byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Byte Byte to send through the SPI interface
-			 */
-			static inline void SPI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void SPI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
-			{
-				SPDR = Byte;
-				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
-			}
-
-			/** Sends a dummy byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
-			 *  byte from the attached SPI device is returned.
-			 *
-			 *  \return The response byte from the attached SPI device
-			 */
-			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(void)
-			{
-				SPDR = 0x00;
-				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
-				return SPDR;
-			}
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the SPI peripheral driver.
+ *
+ *  Hardware SPI subsystem driver for the supported USB AVRs models.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_SPI SPI Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Driver for the hardware SPI port available on most AVR models. This module provides
+ *  an easy to use driver for the setup of and transfer of data over the AVR's SPI port.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SPI_H__
+#define __SPI_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED            (1 << SPE)
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 2. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2           SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 4. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4           0
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 8. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8           (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR0))
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 16. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16          (1 << SPR0)
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 32. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32          (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR1))
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 64. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64          (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0))
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 128. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128         ((1 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0))
+			
+			/** SPI clock polarity mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the rising edge. */
+			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING            (0 << CPOL)
+
+			/** SPI clock polarity mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the falling edge. */
+			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING           (1 << CPOL)
+
+			/** SPI data sample mode mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should sampled on the leading edge. */
+			#define SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING             (0 << CPHA)
+
+			/** SPI data sample mode mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should be sampled on the trailing edge. */
+			#define SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING            (1 << CPHA)
+			
+			/** SPI mode mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into slave mode. */
+			#define SPI_MODE_SLAVE                 (0 << MSTR)
+
+			/** SPI mode mask for SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into master mode. */
+			#define SPI_MODE_MASTER                (1 << MSTR)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the SPI subsystem, ready for transfers. Must be called before calling any other
+			 *  SPI routines.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] SPIOptions  SPI Options, a mask consisting of one of each of the SPI_SPEED_*,
+			 *                         SPI_SCK_*, SPI_SAMPLE_* and SPI_MODE_* masks
+			 */
+			static inline void SPI_Init(const uint8_t SPIOptions)
+			{
+				DDRB  |= ((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));
+				PORTB |= ((1 << 0) | (1 << 3));
+				
+				SPCR   = ((1 << SPE) | SPIOptions);
+				
+				if (SPIOptions & SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED)
+				  SPSR |= (1 << SPI2X);
+				else
+				  SPSR &= ~(1 << SPI2X);
+			}
+			
+			/** Turns off the SPI driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration. */
+			static inline void SPI_ShutDown(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));
+				PORTB &= ~((1 << 0) | (1 << 3));
+				
+				SPCR   = 0;
+				SPSR   = 0;
+			}
+			
+			/** Sends and receives a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send through the SPI interface
+			 *
+			 *  \return Response byte from the attached SPI device
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPDR = Byte;
+				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+				return SPDR;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
+			 *  byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte Byte to send through the SPI interface
+			 */
+			static inline void SPI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void SPI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPDR = Byte;
+				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
+			 *  byte from the attached SPI device is returned.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The response byte from the attached SPI device
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				SPDR = 0x00;
+				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+				return SPDR;
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c
index 918a1a372..0d97e28b8 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c
@@ -1,53 +1,53 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "Serial.h"
-
-void Serial_TxString_P(const char *FlashStringPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t CurrByte;
-
-	while ((CurrByte = pgm_read_byte(FlashStringPtr)) != 0x00)
-	{
-		Serial_TxByte(CurrByte);
-		FlashStringPtr++;
-	}
-}
-
-void Serial_TxString(const char *StringPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t CurrByte;
-
-	while ((CurrByte = *StringPtr) != 0x00)
-	{
-		Serial_TxByte(CurrByte);
-		StringPtr++;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "Serial.h"
+
+void Serial_TxString_P(const char *FlashStringPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t CurrByte;
+
+	while ((CurrByte = pgm_read_byte(FlashStringPtr)) != 0x00)
+	{
+		Serial_TxByte(CurrByte);
+		FlashStringPtr++;
+	}
+}
+
+void Serial_TxString(const char *StringPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t CurrByte;
+
+	while ((CurrByte = *StringPtr) != 0x00)
+	{
+		Serial_TxByte(CurrByte);
+		StringPtr++;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h
index 662d7f270..5abc6e00f 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h
@@ -1,162 +1,162 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the USART peripheral driver.
- *
- *  Driver for the USART subsystem on supported USB AVRs.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_Serial Serial USART Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Hardware serial USART driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for
- *  the setup of and transfer of data over the AVR's USART port.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __SERIAL_H__
-#define __SERIAL_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
-		#include "../Misc/TerminalCodes.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the U2X (double speed) bit is
-			 *  not set.
-			 */
-			#define SERIAL_UBBRVAL(baud)    ((((F_CPU / 16) + (baud / 2)) / (baud)) - 1)
-
-			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the U2X (double speed) bit is
-			 *  set.
-			 */
-			#define SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(baud) ((((F_CPU / 8) + (baud / 2)) / (baud)) - 1)
-
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Indicates whether a character has been received through the USART.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if a character has been received, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Serial_IsCharReceived(void);
-			#else
-				#define Serial_IsCharReceived() ((UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)) ? true : false)
-			#endif
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Transmits a given string located in program space (FLASH) through the USART.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] FlashStringPtr  Pointer to a string located in program space
-			 */
-			void Serial_TxString_P(const char *FlashStringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Transmits a given string located in SRAM memory through the USART.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] StringPtr  Pointer to a string located in SRAM space
-			 */
-			void Serial_TxString(const char *StringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Initializes the USART, ready for serial data transmission and reception. This initializes the interface to
-			 *  standard 8-bit, no parity, 1 stop bit settings suitable for most applications.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] BaudRate     Serial baud rate, in bits per second
-			 *  \param[in] DoubleSpeed  Enables double speed mode when set, halving the sample time to double the baud rate
-			 */
-			static inline void Serial_Init(const uint32_t BaudRate, const bool DoubleSpeed)
-			{
-				UCSR1A = (DoubleSpeed ? (1 << U2X1) : 0);
-				UCSR1B = ((1 << TXEN1)  | (1 << RXEN1));
-				UCSR1C = ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
-				
-				DDRD  |= (1 << 3);	
-				PORTD |= (1 << 2);
-				
-				UBRR1  = (DoubleSpeed ? SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(BaudRate) : SERIAL_UBBRVAL(BaudRate));
-			}
-
-			/** Turns off the USART driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration. */
-			static inline void Serial_ShutDown(void)
-			{
-				UCSR1A = 0;
-				UCSR1B = 0;
-				UCSR1C = 0;
-				
-				DDRD  &= ~(1 << 3);	
-				PORTD &= ~(1 << 2);
-				
-				UBRR1  = 0;
-			}
-			
-			/** Transmits a given byte through the USART.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] DataByte  Byte to transmit through the USART
-			 */
-			static inline void Serial_TxByte(const char DataByte)
-			{
-				while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)));
-				UDR1 = DataByte;
-			}
-
-			/** Receives a byte from the USART.
-			 *
-			 *  \return Byte received from the USART
-			 */
-			static inline char Serial_RxByte(void)
-			{
-				while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)));
-				return UDR1; 
-			}
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the USART peripheral driver.
+ *
+ *  Driver for the USART subsystem on supported USB AVRs.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_Serial Serial USART Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Hardware serial USART driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for
+ *  the setup of and transfer of data over the AVR's USART port.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __SERIAL_H__
+#define __SERIAL_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../Misc/TerminalCodes.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the U2X (double speed) bit is
+			 *  not set.
+			 */
+			#define SERIAL_UBBRVAL(baud)    ((((F_CPU / 16) + (baud / 2)) / (baud)) - 1)
+
+			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the U2X (double speed) bit is
+			 *  set.
+			 */
+			#define SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(baud) ((((F_CPU / 8) + (baud / 2)) / (baud)) - 1)
+
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates whether a character has been received through the USART.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if a character has been received, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Serial_IsCharReceived(void);
+			#else
+				#define Serial_IsCharReceived() ((UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)) ? true : false)
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Transmits a given string located in program space (FLASH) through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] FlashStringPtr  Pointer to a string located in program space
+			 */
+			void Serial_TxString_P(const char *FlashStringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Transmits a given string located in SRAM memory through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] StringPtr  Pointer to a string located in SRAM space
+			 */
+			void Serial_TxString(const char *StringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the USART, ready for serial data transmission and reception. This initializes the interface to
+			 *  standard 8-bit, no parity, 1 stop bit settings suitable for most applications.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] BaudRate     Serial baud rate, in bits per second
+			 *  \param[in] DoubleSpeed  Enables double speed mode when set, halving the sample time to double the baud rate
+			 */
+			static inline void Serial_Init(const uint32_t BaudRate, const bool DoubleSpeed)
+			{
+				UCSR1A = (DoubleSpeed ? (1 << U2X1) : 0);
+				UCSR1B = ((1 << TXEN1)  | (1 << RXEN1));
+				UCSR1C = ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
+				
+				DDRD  |= (1 << 3);	
+				PORTD |= (1 << 2);
+				
+				UBRR1  = (DoubleSpeed ? SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(BaudRate) : SERIAL_UBBRVAL(BaudRate));
+			}
+
+			/** Turns off the USART driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration. */
+			static inline void Serial_ShutDown(void)
+			{
+				UCSR1A = 0;
+				UCSR1B = 0;
+				UCSR1C = 0;
+				
+				DDRD  &= ~(1 << 3);	
+				PORTD &= ~(1 << 2);
+				
+				UBRR1  = 0;
+			}
+			
+			/** Transmits a given byte through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DataByte  Byte to transmit through the USART
+			 */
+			static inline void Serial_TxByte(const char DataByte)
+			{
+				while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)));
+				UDR1 = DataByte;
+			}
+
+			/** Receives a byte from the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Byte received from the USART
+			 */
+			static inline char Serial_RxByte(void)
+			{
+				while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)));
+				return UDR1; 
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c
index 867160a3e..998f4734d 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c
@@ -1,52 +1,52 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SERIALSTREAM_C
-#include "SerialStream.h"
-
-FILE USARTStream = FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(SerialStream_TxByte, SerialStream_RxByte, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
-
-static int SerialStream_TxByte(char DataByte, FILE *Stream)
-{
-	(void)Stream;
-	
-	Serial_TxByte(DataByte);
-	return 0;
-}
-
-static int SerialStream_RxByte(FILE *Stream)
-{
-	(void)Stream;
-	
-	if (!(Serial_IsCharReceived()))
-	  return _FDEV_EOF;
-
-	return Serial_RxByte();
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SERIALSTREAM_C
+#include "SerialStream.h"
+
+FILE USARTStream = FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(SerialStream_TxByte, SerialStream_RxByte, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+
+static int SerialStream_TxByte(char DataByte, FILE *Stream)
+{
+	(void)Stream;
+	
+	Serial_TxByte(DataByte);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+static int SerialStream_RxByte(FILE *Stream)
+{
+	(void)Stream;
+	
+	if (!(Serial_IsCharReceived()))
+	  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+	return Serial_RxByte();
+}
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h
index 85bdf9085..83c3036d3 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h
@@ -1,113 +1,113 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Standard avr-libc character stream driver for the USART.
- *
- *  Serial stream driver for the USART subsystem on supported USB AVRs. This makes use of the functions in the
- *  regular USART driver (see \ref Group_Serial), but allows the avr-libc standard stream functions (printf,
- *  puts, etc.) to work with the
- *  USART.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_SerialStream Serial Stream Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Serial stream driver for the USART subsystem on supported USB AVRs. This makes use of the functions in the
- *  regular USART driver (see \ref Group_Serial), but allows the avr-libc standard stream functions (printf,
- *  puts, etc.) to work with the
- *  USART.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __SERIAL_STREAM_H__
-#define __SERIAL_STREAM_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		
-		#include "Serial.h"
-	
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */	
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* External Variables: */
-			extern FILE USARTStream;
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-		#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIALSTREAM_C)
-			static int SerialStream_TxByte(char DataByte, FILE *Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-			static int SerialStream_RxByte(FILE *Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-		#endif
-	#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Initializes the serial stream (and regular USART driver) so that both the stream and regular
-			 *  USART driver functions can be used. Must be called before any stream or regular USART functions.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] BaudRate     Baud rate to configure the USART to
-			 *  \param[in] DoubleSpeed  Enables double speed mode when set, halving the sample time to double the baud rate
-			 */
-			static inline void SerialStream_Init(const uint32_t BaudRate, const bool DoubleSpeed)
-			{
-				Serial_Init(BaudRate, DoubleSpeed);
-				
-				stdout = &USARTStream;
-				stdin  = &USARTStream;
-			}
-			
-			/** Turns off the serial stream (and regular USART driver), disabling and returning used hardware to
-			 *  their default configuration.
-			 */
-			static inline void SerialStream_ShutDown(void)
-			{
-				Serial_ShutDown();
-			}			
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Standard avr-libc character stream driver for the USART.
+ *
+ *  Serial stream driver for the USART subsystem on supported USB AVRs. This makes use of the functions in the
+ *  regular USART driver (see \ref Group_Serial), but allows the avr-libc standard stream functions (printf,
+ *  puts, etc.) to work with the
+ *  USART.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_SerialStream Serial Stream Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Serial stream driver for the USART subsystem on supported USB AVRs. This makes use of the functions in the
+ *  regular USART driver (see \ref Group_Serial), but allows the avr-libc standard stream functions (printf,
+ *  puts, etc.) to work with the
+ *  USART.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SERIAL_STREAM_H__
+#define __SERIAL_STREAM_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		
+		#include "Serial.h"
+	
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */	
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* External Variables: */
+			extern FILE USARTStream;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIALSTREAM_C)
+			static int SerialStream_TxByte(char DataByte, FILE *Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			static int SerialStream_RxByte(FILE *Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the serial stream (and regular USART driver) so that both the stream and regular
+			 *  USART driver functions can be used. Must be called before any stream or regular USART functions.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] BaudRate     Baud rate to configure the USART to
+			 *  \param[in] DoubleSpeed  Enables double speed mode when set, halving the sample time to double the baud rate
+			 */
+			static inline void SerialStream_Init(const uint32_t BaudRate, const bool DoubleSpeed)
+			{
+				Serial_Init(BaudRate, DoubleSpeed);
+				
+				stdout = &USARTStream;
+				stdin  = &USARTStream;
+			}
+			
+			/** Turns off the serial stream (and regular USART driver), disabling and returning used hardware to
+			 *  their default configuration.
+			 */
+			static inline void SerialStream_ShutDown(void)
+			{
+				Serial_ShutDown();
+			}			
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.c b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.c
index 9e0c20dc0..bd6e85384 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.c
@@ -1,73 +1,73 @@
-/*
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-#include "TWI.h"
-
-bool TWI_StartTransmission(uint8_t SlaveAddress, uint8_t TimeoutMS)
-{
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		bool     BusCaptured = false;
-		uint16_t TimeoutRemaining;
-
-		TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTA) | (1 << TWEN));	
-
-		TimeoutRemaining = (TimeoutMS * 100);
-		while (TimeoutRemaining-- && !(BusCaptured))
-		{
-			if (TWCR & (1 << TWINT))
-			{
-				switch (TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK)
-				{
-					case TW_START:
-					case TW_REP_START:
-						BusCaptured = true;
-						break;
-					case TW_MT_ARB_LOST:
-						TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTA) | (1 << TWEN));	
-						continue;
-					default:
-						TWCR = (1 << TWEN);
-						return false;
-				}
-			}
-			
-			_delay_us(10);
-		}
-		
-		if (!(BusCaptured))
-		{
-			TWCR = (1 << TWEN);
-			return false;
-		}
-		
-		TWDR = SlaveAddress;
-		TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));
-		
-		TimeoutRemaining = (TimeoutMS * 100);
-		while (TimeoutRemaining--)
-		{
-			if (TWCR & (1 << TWINT))
-			  break;
-			  
-			_delay_us(10);
-		}
-		
-		if (!(TimeoutRemaining))
-		  return false;
-
-		switch (TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK)
-		{
-			case TW_MT_SLA_ACK:
-			case TW_MR_SLA_ACK:
-				return true;
-			default:
-				TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTO) | (1 << TWEN));
-				return false;
-		}
-	}
-}
+/*
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+#include "TWI.h"
+
+bool TWI_StartTransmission(uint8_t SlaveAddress, uint8_t TimeoutMS)
+{
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		bool     BusCaptured = false;
+		uint16_t TimeoutRemaining;
+
+		TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTA) | (1 << TWEN));	
+
+		TimeoutRemaining = (TimeoutMS * 100);
+		while (TimeoutRemaining-- && !(BusCaptured))
+		{
+			if (TWCR & (1 << TWINT))
+			{
+				switch (TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK)
+				{
+					case TW_START:
+					case TW_REP_START:
+						BusCaptured = true;
+						break;
+					case TW_MT_ARB_LOST:
+						TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTA) | (1 << TWEN));	
+						continue;
+					default:
+						TWCR = (1 << TWEN);
+						return false;
+				}
+			}
+			
+			_delay_us(10);
+		}
+		
+		if (!(BusCaptured))
+		{
+			TWCR = (1 << TWEN);
+			return false;
+		}
+		
+		TWDR = SlaveAddress;
+		TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));
+		
+		TimeoutRemaining = (TimeoutMS * 100);
+		while (TimeoutRemaining--)
+		{
+			if (TWCR & (1 << TWINT))
+			  break;
+			  
+			_delay_us(10);
+		}
+		
+		if (!(TimeoutRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		switch (TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK)
+		{
+			case TW_MT_SLA_ACK:
+			case TW_MR_SLA_ACK:
+				return true;
+			default:
+				TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTO) | (1 << TWEN));
+				return false;
+		}
+	}
+}
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h
index 8e2127d47..87637505f 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the TWI peripheral driver.
- *
- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific ADC driver, for AVRs containing an ADC.
- *
- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the
- *  currently selected AVR model.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_TWI TWI Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Master Mode Hardware TWI driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the hardware
- *  TWI present on many AVR models, for the transmission and reception of data on a TWI bus.
- */
- 
-#ifndef __TWI_H__
-#define __TWI_H__
-
-	/* Macros: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_H
-	#endif
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \
-		     defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
-			 defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || \
-			 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))
-			#include "AVRU4U6U7/TWI.h"
-		#else
-			#error "TWI is not available for the currently selected AVR model."
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the TWI peripheral driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific ADC driver, for AVRs containing an ADC.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected AVR model.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_TWI TWI Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Master Mode Hardware TWI driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the hardware
+ *  TWI present on many AVR models, for the transmission and reception of data on a TWI bus.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __TWI_H__
+#define __TWI_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_H
+	#endif
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \
+		     defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
+			 defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || \
+			 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))
+			#include "AVRU4U6U7/TWI.h"
+		#else
+			#error "TWI is not available for the currently selected AVR model."
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h
index ba6d87944..49d637263 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h
@@ -1,78 +1,78 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Audio Class driver.
- *
- *  Master include file for the library USB Audio Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
- *
- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassAudio Audio Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/Audio.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Audio Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Audio Class, for Device
- *  USB mode only. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Audio class manually via 
- *  the low-level LUFA APIs.
- *
- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
- *  Hosts or Devices using the USB Audio Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_H_
-#define _AUDIO_CLASS_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-		
-		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			#include "Device/Audio.h"
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Audio Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB Audio Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassAudio Audio Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/Audio.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Audio Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Audio Class, for Device
+ *  USB mode only. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Audio class manually via 
+ *  the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts or Devices using the USB Audio Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_H_
+#define _AUDIO_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+		
+		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/Audio.h"
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h
index c5205aa1b..ca99e3cc7 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB CDC-ACM Class driver.
- *
- *  Master include file for the library USB CDC Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
- *
- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassCDC CDC-ACM (Virtual Serial) Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/CDC.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  CDC Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB CDC-ACM class Virtual Serial
- *  Ports, for both Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the
- *  CDC class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
- *
- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
- *  Hosts or Devices using the USB CDC Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_H_
-#define _CDC_CLASS_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			#include "Device/CDC.h"
-		#endif
-		
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-			#include "Host/CDC.h"
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB CDC-ACM Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB CDC Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassCDC CDC-ACM (Virtual Serial) Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/CDC.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  CDC Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB CDC-ACM class Virtual Serial
+ *  Ports, for both Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the
+ *  CDC class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts or Devices using the USB CDC Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_H_
+#define _CDC_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/CDC.h"
+		#endif
+		
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/CDC.h"
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/Audio.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/Audio.h
index 512758866..7b9e9f5da 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/Audio.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/Audio.h
@@ -1,406 +1,406 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Audio Class driver.
- *
- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Audio Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAudio
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassAudioCommon  Common Class Definitions
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
- *  Audio Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-#define _AUDIO_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/Audio.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#if !defined(AUDIO_TOTAL_SAMPLE_RATES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			/** Total number of discrete audio sample rates supported by the device. This value can be overridden by defining this
-			 *  token in the project makefile to the desired value, and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
-			 */
-			#define AUDIO_TOTAL_SAMPLE_RATES    1
-		#endif
-		
-		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_AudioInterface         0x24
-
-		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint          0x25
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_Header              0x01
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal       0x02
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal      0x03
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit         0x06
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_General             0x01
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_Format              0x02
-		
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT           (1 << 0)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT          (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT         (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE     (1 << 3)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND        (1 << 4)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND       (1 << 5)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER       (1 << 6)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER      (1 << 7)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_SURROUND             (1 << 8)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT            (1 << 9)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT           (1 << 10)
-
-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define CHANNEL_TOP                  (1 << 11)
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define FEATURE_MUTE                 (1 << 0)
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define FEATURE_VOLUME               (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define FEATURE_BASS                 (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define FEATURE_MID                  (1 << 3)
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define FEATURE_TREBLE               (1 << 4)
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER    (1 << 5)
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN       (1 << 6)
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define FEATURE_DELAY                (1 << 7)
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST           (1 << 8)
-
-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
-		#define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS        (1 << 9)
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED           0x0100
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_STREAMING           0x0101
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_VENDOR              0x01FF
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED        0x0200
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC              0x0201
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC      0x0202
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC     0x0203
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC      0x0204
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY        0x0205
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC   0x0206
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED    0x0300
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER         0x0301
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES      0x0302
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED    0x0303
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP         0x0304
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM            0x0305
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION   0x0306
-
-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
-		#define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ         0x0307
-
-		/** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] freq  Required audio sampling frequency in HZ
-		 */
-		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(freq)  {LowWord: ((uint32_t)freq & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)freq >> 16) & 0x0000FF)}
-		
-		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
-		 *  accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
-		 */
-		#define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7)
-
-		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
-		 *  will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
-		 */
-		#define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS     (0 << 7)
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Interface Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
-		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
-		 *  details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint16_t                  ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
-			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
-			
-			uint8_t                   InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
-			uint8_t                   InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */
-		} USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t;
-		
-		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Feature Unit Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features
-		 *  are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio
-		 *  specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint8_t                   UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */
-			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */
-			
-			uint8_t                   ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */
-			uint8_t                   ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each separate audio channel */
-			
-			uint8_t                   FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_Audio_FeatureUnit_t;
-
-		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Input Terminal Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
-		 *  contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
-		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-		
-			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
-			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
-			uint8_t                   AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals
-			                                                     *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
-			                                                     */
-			uint8_t                   TotalChannels; /**< Total number of separate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */
-			uint16_t                  ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */
-			
-			uint8_t                   ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */
-			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t;
-
-		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Output Terminal Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
-		 *  contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
-		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-		
-			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
-			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
-			uint8_t                   AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals
-			                                                    *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
-			                                                    */
-			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */
-			
-			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t;
-		
-		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Streaming Audio Interface Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
-		 *  how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint8_t                   TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */
-			
-			uint8_t                   FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */
-			uint16_t                  AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
-		} USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t;
-		
-		/** \brief 24-Bit Audio Frequency Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype,
-		 *  this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint16_t                  LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */
-			uint8_t                   HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */
-		} USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t;
-
-		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Format Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details
-		 *  about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used
-		 *  in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint8_t                   FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
-			uint8_t                   Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */
-			
-			uint8_t                   SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */
-			uint8_t                   BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */
-
-			uint8_t                   SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */			
-			USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t    SampleFrequencies[AUDIO_TOTAL_SAMPLE_RATES]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */
-		} USB_Audio_Format_t;
-		
-		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Streaming Endpoint Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint 
-		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
-
-			uint8_t                   Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
-			uint8_t                   SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
-		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;
-					
-		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Extended Endpoint Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
-		 *  on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
-		 *  class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint8_t                   Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */
-
-			uint8_t                   LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */
-			uint16_t                  LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */
-		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t;
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Audio Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Audio Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAudio
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassAudioCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  Audio Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _AUDIO_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/Audio.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if !defined(AUDIO_TOTAL_SAMPLE_RATES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Total number of discrete audio sample rates supported by the device. This value can be overridden by defining this
+			 *  token in the project makefile to the desired value, and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+			 */
+			#define AUDIO_TOTAL_SAMPLE_RATES    1
+		#endif
+		
+		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_AudioInterface         0x24
+
+		/** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint          0x25
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_Header              0x01
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal       0x02
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal      0x03
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit         0x06
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_General             0x01
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_Format              0x02
+		
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT           (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT          (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT         (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE     (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND        (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND       (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER       (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER      (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_SURROUND             (1 << 8)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT            (1 << 9)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT           (1 << 10)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define CHANNEL_TOP                  (1 << 11)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define FEATURE_MUTE                 (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define FEATURE_VOLUME               (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define FEATURE_BASS                 (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define FEATURE_MID                  (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define FEATURE_TREBLE               (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER    (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN       (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define FEATURE_DELAY                (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST           (1 << 8)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS        (1 << 9)
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED           0x0100
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_STREAMING           0x0101
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_VENDOR              0x01FF
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED        0x0200
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC              0x0201
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC      0x0202
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC     0x0203
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC      0x0204
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY        0x0205
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC   0x0206
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED    0x0300
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER         0x0301
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES      0x0302
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED    0x0303
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP         0x0304
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM            0x0305
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION   0x0306
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */		
+		#define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ         0x0307
+
+		/** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] freq  Required audio sampling frequency in HZ
+		 */
+		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(freq)  {LowWord: ((uint32_t)freq & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)freq >> 16) & 0x0000FF)}
+		
+		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+		 *  accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+		 */
+		#define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+		 *  will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+		 */
+		#define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS     (0 << 7)
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Interface Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
+		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
+		 *  details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint16_t                  ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
+			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
+			
+			uint8_t                   InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
+			uint8_t                   InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */
+		} USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t;
+		
+		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Feature Unit Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features
+		 *  are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio
+		 *  specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint8_t                   UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */
+			
+			uint8_t                   ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */
+			uint8_t                   ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each separate audio channel */
+			
+			uint8_t                   FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_Audio_FeatureUnit_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Input Terminal Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+		
+			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
+			uint8_t                   AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+			                                                     *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
+			                                                     */
+			uint8_t                   TotalChannels; /**< Total number of separate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */
+			uint16_t                  ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */
+			
+			uint8_t                   ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */
+			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_Audio_InputTerminal_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Output Terminal Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+		
+			uint8_t                   TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+			uint16_t                  TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
+			uint8_t                   AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+			                                                    *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
+			                                                    */
+			uint8_t                   SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */
+			
+			uint8_t                   TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_Audio_OutputTerminal_t;
+		
+		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Streaming Audio Interface Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+		 *  how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint8_t                   TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */
+			
+			uint8_t                   FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */
+			uint16_t                  AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
+		} USB_Audio_Interface_AS_t;
+		
+		/** \brief 24-Bit Audio Frequency Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype,
+		 *  this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t                  LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */
+			uint8_t                   HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */
+		} USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Format Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details
+		 *  about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used
+		 *  in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint8_t                   FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
+			uint8_t                   Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */
+			
+			uint8_t                   SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */
+			uint8_t                   BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */
+
+			uint8_t                   SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */			
+			USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t    SampleFrequencies[AUDIO_TOTAL_SAMPLE_RATES]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */
+		} USB_Audio_Format_t;
+		
+		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Streaming Endpoint Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint 
+		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
+
+			uint8_t                   Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
+			uint8_t                   SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
+		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;
+					
+		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Extended Endpoint Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+		 *  on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+		 *  class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint8_t                   Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */
+
+			uint8_t                   LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */
+			uint16_t                  LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */
+		} USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t;
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDC.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDC.h
index 9fb1202bc..b6ab82a81 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDC.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDC.h
@@ -1,179 +1,179 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB CDC Class driver.
- *
- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB CDC Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassCDCCommon  Common Class Definitions
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
- *  CDC Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-#define _CDC_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/CDC.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
-		#define REQ_GetLineEncoding              0x21
-
-		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
-		#define REQ_SetLineEncoding              0x20
-
-		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
-		#define REQ_SetControlLineState          0x22
-
-		/** CDC Class specific request to send a break to the receiver via the carrier channel. */
-		#define REQ_SendBreak                    0x23
-
-		/** CDC Class specific request to send an encapsulated command to the device. */
-		#define REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand      0x00
-
-		/** CDC Class specific request to retrieve an encapsulated command response from the device. */
-		#define REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse      0x01
-		
-		/** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for
-		 *  use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC 
-		 *  notification endpoint.
-		 */
-		#define NOTIF_SerialState                0x20
-
-		/** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
-		 *  from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high.
-		 */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR         (1 << 0)
-
-		/** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
-		 *  from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high.
-		 */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS         (1 << 1)
-		
-		/** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high.
-		 */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD          (1 << 0)
-
-		/** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high.
-		 */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR          (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high.
-		 */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK        (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high.
-		 */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING         (1 << 3)
-
-		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
-		 *  to indicate that a framing error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
-		 */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR   (1 << 4)
-
-		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
-		 *  to indicate that a parity error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
-		 */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR  (1 << 5)
-
-		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
-		 *  to indicate that a data overrun error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
-		 */
-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6)
-		
-		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
-		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
-		 *  a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
-		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
-		 */
-		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
-		     struct                                        \
-		     {                                             \
-		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
-			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
-		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
-		     }
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
-		enum CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
-		{
-			CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */
-			CDC_LINEENCODING_OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */
-			CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */
-		};
-		
-		/** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
-		enum CDC_LineCodingParity_t
-		{
-			CDC_PARITY_None    = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */
-			CDC_PARITY_Odd     = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */
-			CDC_PARITY_Even    = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */
-			CDC_PARITY_Mark    = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */
-			CDC_PARITY_Space   = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */
-		};
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassCDCCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  CDC Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _CDC_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/CDC.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+		#define REQ_GetLineEncoding              0x21
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+		#define REQ_SetLineEncoding              0x20
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
+		#define REQ_SetControlLineState          0x22
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to send a break to the receiver via the carrier channel. */
+		#define REQ_SendBreak                    0x23
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to send an encapsulated command to the device. */
+		#define REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand      0x00
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to retrieve an encapsulated command response from the device. */
+		#define REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse      0x01
+		
+		/** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for
+		 *  use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC 
+		 *  notification endpoint.
+		 */
+		#define NOTIF_SerialState                0x20
+
+		/** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
+		 *  from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR         (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
+		 *  from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS         (1 << 1)
+		
+		/** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD          (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR          (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK        (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING         (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a framing error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR   (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a parity error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR  (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a data overrun error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6)
+		
+		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
+		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
+		 *  a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
+		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
+		 */
+		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
+		     struct                                        \
+		     {                                             \
+		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
+			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
+		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
+		     }
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
+		enum CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
+		{
+			CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */
+			CDC_LINEENCODING_OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */
+			CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */
+		};
+		
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
+		enum CDC_LineCodingParity_t
+		{
+			CDC_PARITY_None    = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */
+			CDC_PARITY_Odd     = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */
+			CDC_PARITY_Even    = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */
+			CDC_PARITY_Mark    = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */
+			CDC_PARITY_Space   = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */
+		};
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HID.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HID.h
index 0c908c5b5..d7b6983b6 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HID.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HID.h
@@ -1,195 +1,195 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB HID Class driver.
- *
- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB HID Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassHIDCommon  Common Class Definitions
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
- *  HID Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef _HID_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-#define _HID_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/HID.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** HID Class Specific Request to get the current HID report from the device. */
-		#define REQ_GetReport                   0x01
-
-		/** HID Class Specific Request to get the current device idle count. */
-		#define REQ_GetIdle                     0x02
-
-		/** HID Class Specific Request to set the current HID report to the device. */
-		#define REQ_SetReport                   0x09
-
-		/** HID Class Specific Request to set the device's idle count. */
-		#define REQ_SetIdle                     0x0A
-
-		/** HID Class Specific Request to get the current HID report protocol mode. */
-		#define REQ_GetProtocol                 0x03
-
-		/** HID Class Specific Request to set the current HID report protocol mode. */
-		#define REQ_SetProtocol                 0x0B
-
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_HID                       0x21
-		
-		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
-		#define DTYPE_Report                    0x22
-		
-		/** Constant for the protocol value of a HID interface descriptor, indicating that the interface does not support
-		 *  any HID class boot protocol (see HID Class Specification).
-		 */
-		#define HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL           0x00
-
-		/** Constant for the protocol value of a HID interface descriptor, indicating that the interface supports the
-		 *  HID class Keyboard boot protocol (see HID Class Specification).
-		 */
-		#define HID_BOOT_KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL      0x01
-
-		/** Constant for the protocol value of a HID interface descriptor, indicating that the interface supports the
-		 *  HID class Mouse boot protocol (see HID Class Specification).
-		 */
-		#define HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL         0x02
-		
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left control key is currently pressed. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTCTRL   (1 << 0)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left shift key is currently pressed. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT  (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left alt key is currently pressed. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTALT    (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left GUI key is currently pressed. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTGUI    (1 << 3)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right control key is currently pressed. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTCTRL  (1 << 4)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right shift key is currently pressed. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTSHIFT (1 << 5)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right alt key is currently pressed. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTALT   (1 << 6)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right GUI key is currently pressed. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTGUI   (1 << 7)
-		
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's NUM LOCK mode is currently set. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK        (1 << 0)
-		
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's CAPS LOCK mode is currently set. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK       (1 << 1)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's SCROLL LOCK mode is currently set. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK     (1 << 2)
-
-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's KATANA mode is currently set. */
-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_KATANA         (1 << 3)
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Enum for the different types of HID reports. */
-		enum HID_ReportItemTypes_t
-		{
-			REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In                   = 0, /**< Indicates that the item is an IN report type. */
-			REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out                  = 1, /**< Indicates that the item is an OUT report type. */
-			REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature              = 2, /**< Indicates that the item is a FEATURE report type. */
-		};
-
-		/** \brief HID Class Specific HID Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
-		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t  Header;
-				
-			uint16_t                 HIDSpec;
-			uint8_t                  CountryCode;
-		
-			uint8_t                  TotalReportDescriptors;
-
-			uint8_t                  HIDReportType;
-			uint16_t                 HIDReportLength;
-		} USB_HID_Descriptor_t;
-
-		/** \brief Standard HID Boot Protocol Mouse Report.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse */
-			int8_t  X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse */
-			int8_t  Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse */
-		} USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
-		
-		/** \brief Standard HID Boot Protocol Keyboard Report.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (a combination of
-			                   *   HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_* masks)
-			                   */
-			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */
-			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Key codes of the currently pressed keys */
-		} USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
-
-		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
-		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassHIDCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  HID Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _HID_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _HID_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/HID.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to get the current HID report from the device. */
+		#define REQ_GetReport                   0x01
+
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to get the current device idle count. */
+		#define REQ_GetIdle                     0x02
+
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to set the current HID report to the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetReport                   0x09
+
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to set the device's idle count. */
+		#define REQ_SetIdle                     0x0A
+
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to get the current HID report protocol mode. */
+		#define REQ_GetProtocol                 0x03
+
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to set the current HID report protocol mode. */
+		#define REQ_SetProtocol                 0x0B
+
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                       0x21
+		
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_Report                    0x22
+		
+		/** Constant for the protocol value of a HID interface descriptor, indicating that the interface does not support
+		 *  any HID class boot protocol (see HID Class Specification).
+		 */
+		#define HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL           0x00
+
+		/** Constant for the protocol value of a HID interface descriptor, indicating that the interface supports the
+		 *  HID class Keyboard boot protocol (see HID Class Specification).
+		 */
+		#define HID_BOOT_KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL      0x01
+
+		/** Constant for the protocol value of a HID interface descriptor, indicating that the interface supports the
+		 *  HID class Mouse boot protocol (see HID Class Specification).
+		 */
+		#define HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL         0x02
+		
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left control key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTCTRL   (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left shift key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTSHIFT  (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left alt key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTALT    (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left GUI key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_LEFTGUI    (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right control key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTCTRL  (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right shift key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTSHIFT (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right alt key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTALT   (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right GUI key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_RIGHTGUI   (1 << 7)
+		
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's NUM LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK        (1 << 0)
+		
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's CAPS LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK       (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's SCROLL LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK     (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's KATANA mode is currently set. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_KATANA         (1 << 3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Enum for the different types of HID reports. */
+		enum HID_ReportItemTypes_t
+		{
+			REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In                   = 0, /**< Indicates that the item is an IN report type. */
+			REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out                  = 1, /**< Indicates that the item is an OUT report type. */
+			REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature              = 2, /**< Indicates that the item is a FEATURE report type. */
+		};
+
+		/** \brief HID Class Specific HID Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t  Header;
+				
+			uint16_t                 HIDSpec;
+			uint8_t                  CountryCode;
+		
+			uint8_t                  TotalReportDescriptors;
+
+			uint8_t                  HIDReportType;
+			uint16_t                 HIDReportLength;
+		} USB_HID_Descriptor_t;
+
+		/** \brief Standard HID Boot Protocol Mouse Report.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse */
+			int8_t  X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse */
+			int8_t  Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse */
+		} USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
+		
+		/** \brief Standard HID Boot Protocol Keyboard Report.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (a combination of
+			                   *   HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_* masks)
+			                   */
+			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */
+			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Key codes of the currently pressed keys */
+		} USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDI.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDI.h
index aa843827b..6910d50f1 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDI.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDI.h
@@ -1,189 +1,189 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
- *
- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMIDICommon  Common Class Definitions
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
- *  MIDI Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-#define _MIDI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "Audio.h"
-
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MIDI.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI input jack descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_InputJack          0x02
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI output jack descriptor. */
-		#define DSUBTYPE_OutputJack         0x03
-		
-		/** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an embedded (logical) MIDI input or output jack. */
-		#define MIDI_JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED      0x01
-
-		/** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an external (physical) MIDI input or output jack. */
-		#define MIDI_JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL      0x02
-
-		/** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event */
-		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON        0x90
-
-		/** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event */
-		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF       0x80
-
-		/** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events */
-		#define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY      64
-		
-		/** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel
-		 *  addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] channel  MIDI channel number to address
-		 */
-		#define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel)        ((channel) - 1)
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** \brief MIDI Class Specific Streaming Interface Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
-		 *  how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class specific descriptors.
-		 *  See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-			
-			uint16_t                  AudioSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
-			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
-		} USB_MIDI_AudioInterface_AS_t;
-		
-		/** \brief MIDI Class Specific Input Jack Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either
-		 *  a physical input jack, or a logical jack (receiving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint).
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint8_t                   JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */
-			uint8_t                   JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */
-			
-			uint8_t                   JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t;
-
-		/** \brief MIDI Class Specific Output Jack Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either
-		 *  a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint).
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint8_t                   JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */
-			uint8_t                   JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */
-			
-			uint8_t                   NumberOfPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical */
-			uint8_t                   SourceJackID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack */
-			uint8_t                   SourcePinID[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data */
-			
-			uint8_t                   JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
-		} USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t;
-		
-		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Jack Endpoint Descriptor.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
-		 *  on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
-		 *  class specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
-
-			uint8_t                   TotalEmbeddedJacks; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint */
-			uint8_t                   AssociatedJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint */
-		} USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t;
-
-		/** \brief MIDI Class Driver Event Packet.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a USB MIDI event packet, used to encapsulate sent and received MIDI messages from a USB MIDI interface.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			unsigned char Command     : 4; /**< Upper nibble of the MIDI command being sent or received in the event packet */
-			unsigned char CableNumber : 4; /**< Virtual cable number of the event being sent or received in the given MIDI interface */
-			
-			uint8_t Data1; /**< First byte of data in the MIDI event */
-			uint8_t Data2; /**< Second byte of data in the MIDI event */
-			uint8_t Data3; /**< Third byte of data in the MIDI event */		
-		} MIDI_EventPacket_t;
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMIDICommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  MIDI Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _MIDI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "Audio.h"
+
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MIDI.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI input jack descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_InputJack          0x02
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI output jack descriptor. */
+		#define DSUBTYPE_OutputJack         0x03
+		
+		/** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an embedded (logical) MIDI input or output jack. */
+		#define MIDI_JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED      0x01
+
+		/** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an external (physical) MIDI input or output jack. */
+		#define MIDI_JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL      0x02
+
+		/** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON        0x90
+
+		/** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF       0x80
+
+		/** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events */
+		#define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY      64
+		
+		/** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel
+		 *  addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] channel  MIDI channel number to address
+		 */
+		#define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel)        ((channel) - 1)
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief MIDI Class Specific Streaming Interface Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+		 *  how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class specific descriptors.
+		 *  See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+			
+			uint16_t                  AudioSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
+			uint16_t                  TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
+		} USB_MIDI_AudioInterface_AS_t;
+		
+		/** \brief MIDI Class Specific Input Jack Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either
+		 *  a physical input jack, or a logical jack (receiving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint).
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint8_t                   JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */
+			uint8_t                   JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */
+			
+			uint8_t                   JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t;
+
+		/** \brief MIDI Class Specific Output Jack Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either
+		 *  a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint).
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint8_t                   JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */
+			uint8_t                   JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */
+			
+			uint8_t                   NumberOfPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical */
+			uint8_t                   SourceJackID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack */
+			uint8_t                   SourcePinID[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data */
+			
+			uint8_t                   JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+		} USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t;
+		
+		/** \brief Audio Class Specific Jack Endpoint Descriptor.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+		 *  on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+		 *  class specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+			uint8_t                   TotalEmbeddedJacks; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint */
+			uint8_t                   AssociatedJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint */
+		} USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t;
+
+		/** \brief MIDI Class Driver Event Packet.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a USB MIDI event packet, used to encapsulate sent and received MIDI messages from a USB MIDI interface.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned char Command     : 4; /**< Upper nibble of the MIDI command being sent or received in the event packet */
+			unsigned char CableNumber : 4; /**< Virtual cable number of the event being sent or received in the given MIDI interface */
+			
+			uint8_t Data1; /**< First byte of data in the MIDI event */
+			uint8_t Data2; /**< Second byte of data in the MIDI event */
+			uint8_t Data3; /**< Third byte of data in the MIDI event */		
+		} MIDI_EventPacket_t;
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorage.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorage.h
index b5e590ea3..bc56f2239 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorage.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorage.h
@@ -1,318 +1,318 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
- *
- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMSCommon  Common Class Definitions
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
- *  Mass Storage Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _MS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-#define _MS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MassStorage.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Mass Storage Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface, ready for the next command. */
-		#define REQ_MassStorageReset       0xFF
-
-		/** Mass Storage Class specific request to retrieve the total number of Logical Units (drives) in the SCSI device. */
-		#define REQ_GetMaxLUN              0xFE
-		
-		/** Magic signature for a Command Block Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
-		#define MS_CBW_SIGNATURE           0x43425355UL
-
-		/** Magic signature for a Command Status Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
-		#define MS_CSW_SIGNATURE           0x53425355UL
-		
-		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from host-to-device. */
-		#define MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_OUT    (0 << 7)
-
-		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from device-to-host. */
-		#define MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN     (1 << 7)
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for an INQUIRY command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                               0x12
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a REQUEST SENSE command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE                         0x03
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a TEST UNIT READY command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY                       0x00
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ CAPACITY (10) command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10                      0x25
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC                       0x1D
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL          0x1E
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a WRITE (10) command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10                              0x2A
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ (10) command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                               0x28
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a WRITE (6) command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                               0x0A
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ (6) command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                                0x08
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a VERIFY (10) command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10                             0x2F
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a MODE SENSE (6) command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6                          0x1A
-
-		/** SCSI Command Code for a MODE SENSE (10) command. */
-		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10                         0x5A
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate no error has occurred. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD                            0x00
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device has recovered from an error. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR                 0x01
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device is not ready for a new command. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY                       0x02
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an error whilst accessing the medium. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR                    0x03
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate a hardware has occurred. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR                  0x04
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that an illegal request has been issued. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST                 0x05
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the unit requires attention from the host to indicate
-		 *  a reset event, medium removal or other condition.
-		 */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION                  0x06
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that a write attempt on a protected block has been made. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT                    0x07
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an error while trying to write to a write-once medium. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK                     0x08
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate a vendor specific error has occurred. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC                 0x09
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that an EXTENDED COPY command has aborted due to an error. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED                    0x0A
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device has aborted the issued command. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND                 0x0B
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an attempt to write past the end of a partition has been made. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW                 0x0D
-
-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the source data did not match the data read from the medium. */
-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE                      0x0E
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate no additional sense information is available. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION          0x00
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that the logical unit (LUN) addressed is not ready. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY             0x04
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an invalid field was encountered while processing the issued command. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB               0x24
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that an attempt to write to a protected area was made. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED                    0x27
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an error whilst formatting the device medium. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR                       0x31
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an invalid command was issued. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND                    0x20
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate a write to a block out outside of the medium's range was issued. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that no removable medium is inserted into the device. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT                 0x3A
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate no additional sense qualifier information is available. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER                      0x00
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that a medium format command failed to complete. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED             0x01
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that an initializing command must be issued before the issued
-		 *  command can be executed.
-		 */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED     0x02
-
-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that an operation is currently in progress. */
-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS             0x07
-		
-	/* Type defines: */
-		/** \brief Mass Storage Class Command Block Wrapper.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a Command Block Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, must be CBW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Block */
-			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */
-			uint32_t DataTransferLength; /** Length of the optional data portion of the issued command, in bytes */
-			uint8_t  Flags; /**< Command block flags, indicating command data direction */
-			uint8_t  LUN; /**< Logical Unit number this command is issued to */
-			uint8_t  SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the issued SCSI command within the SCSI command data array */
-			uint8_t  SCSICommandData[16]; /**< Issued SCSI command in the Command Block */
-		} MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t;
-		
-		/** \brief Mass Storage Class Command Status Wrapper.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a Command Status Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t Signature; /**< Status block signature, must be CSW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Status */
-			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */
-			uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Number of bytes of data not processed in the SCSI command */
-			uint8_t  Status; /**< Status code of the issued command - a value from the MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */
-		} MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t;
-		
-		/** \brief Mass Storage Class SCSI Sense Structure
-		 *  
-		 *  Type define for a SCSI Sense structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
-		 *  device via the MassStore_RequestSense() function, indicating the current sense data of the
-		 *  device (giving explicit error codes for the last issued command). For details of the
-		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       ResponseCode;
-
-			uint8_t       SegmentNumber;
-			
-			unsigned char SenseKey            : 4;
-			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 1;
-			unsigned char ILI                 : 1;
-			unsigned char EOM                 : 1;
-			unsigned char FileMark            : 1;
-			
-			uint8_t      Information[4];
-			uint8_t      AdditionalLength;
-			uint8_t      CmdSpecificInformation[4];
-			uint8_t      AdditionalSenseCode;
-			uint8_t      AdditionalSenseQualifier;
-			uint8_t      FieldReplaceableUnitCode;
-			uint8_t      SenseKeySpecific[3];
-		} SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;
-
-		/** \brief Mass Storage Class SCSI Inquiry Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a SCSI Inquiry structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
-		 *  device via the MassStore_Inquiry() function, retrieving the attached device's information.
-		 *  For details of the structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			unsigned char DeviceType          : 5;
-			unsigned char PeripheralQualifier : 3;
-			
-			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 7;
-			unsigned char Removable           : 1;
-			
-			uint8_t      Version;
-			
-			unsigned char ResponseDataFormat  : 4;
-			unsigned char _RESERVED2          : 1;
-			unsigned char NormACA             : 1;
-			unsigned char TrmTsk              : 1;
-			unsigned char AERC                : 1;
-
-			uint8_t      AdditionalLength;
-			uint8_t      _RESERVED3[2];
-
-			unsigned char SoftReset           : 1;
-			unsigned char CmdQue              : 1;
-			unsigned char _RESERVED4          : 1;
-			unsigned char Linked              : 1;
-			unsigned char Sync                : 1;
-			unsigned char WideBus16Bit        : 1;
-			unsigned char WideBus32Bit        : 1;
-			unsigned char RelAddr             : 1;
-			
-			uint8_t      VendorID[8];
-			uint8_t      ProductID[16];
-			uint8_t      RevisionID[4];
-		} SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t;
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible command status wrapper return status codes. */
-		enum MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t
-		{
-			SCSI_Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed with no error */
-			SCSI_Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete - host may check the exact error via a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command */
-			SCSI_Phase_Error  = 2  /**< Command failed due to being invalid in the current phase */
-		};
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMSCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  Mass Storage Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _MS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MassStorage.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Mass Storage Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface, ready for the next command. */
+		#define REQ_MassStorageReset       0xFF
+
+		/** Mass Storage Class specific request to retrieve the total number of Logical Units (drives) in the SCSI device. */
+		#define REQ_GetMaxLUN              0xFE
+		
+		/** Magic signature for a Command Block Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
+		#define MS_CBW_SIGNATURE           0x43425355UL
+
+		/** Magic signature for a Command Status Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
+		#define MS_CSW_SIGNATURE           0x53425355UL
+		
+		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from host-to-device. */
+		#define MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_OUT    (0 << 7)
+
+		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from device-to-host. */
+		#define MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN     (1 << 7)
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for an INQUIRY command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                               0x12
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a REQUEST SENSE command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE                         0x03
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a TEST UNIT READY command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY                       0x00
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ CAPACITY (10) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10                      0x25
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC                       0x1D
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL          0x1E
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a WRITE (10) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10                              0x2A
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ (10) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                               0x28
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a WRITE (6) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                               0x0A
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ (6) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                                0x08
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a VERIFY (10) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10                             0x2F
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a MODE SENSE (6) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6                          0x1A
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a MODE SENSE (10) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10                         0x5A
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate no error has occurred. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD                            0x00
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device has recovered from an error. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR                 0x01
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device is not ready for a new command. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY                       0x02
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an error whilst accessing the medium. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR                    0x03
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate a hardware has occurred. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR                  0x04
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that an illegal request has been issued. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST                 0x05
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the unit requires attention from the host to indicate
+		 *  a reset event, medium removal or other condition.
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION                  0x06
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that a write attempt on a protected block has been made. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT                    0x07
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an error while trying to write to a write-once medium. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK                     0x08
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate a vendor specific error has occurred. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC                 0x09
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that an EXTENDED COPY command has aborted due to an error. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED                    0x0A
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device has aborted the issued command. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND                 0x0B
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an attempt to write past the end of a partition has been made. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW                 0x0D
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the source data did not match the data read from the medium. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE                      0x0E
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate no additional sense information is available. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION          0x00
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that the logical unit (LUN) addressed is not ready. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY             0x04
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an invalid field was encountered while processing the issued command. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB               0x24
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that an attempt to write to a protected area was made. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED                    0x27
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an error whilst formatting the device medium. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR                       0x31
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an invalid command was issued. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND                    0x20
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate a write to a block out outside of the medium's range was issued. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that no removable medium is inserted into the device. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT                 0x3A
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate no additional sense qualifier information is available. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER                      0x00
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that a medium format command failed to complete. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED             0x01
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that an initializing command must be issued before the issued
+		 *  command can be executed.
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED     0x02
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that an operation is currently in progress. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS             0x07
+		
+	/* Type defines: */
+		/** \brief Mass Storage Class Command Block Wrapper.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a Command Block Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, must be CBW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Block */
+			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */
+			uint32_t DataTransferLength; /** Length of the optional data portion of the issued command, in bytes */
+			uint8_t  Flags; /**< Command block flags, indicating command data direction */
+			uint8_t  LUN; /**< Logical Unit number this command is issued to */
+			uint8_t  SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the issued SCSI command within the SCSI command data array */
+			uint8_t  SCSICommandData[16]; /**< Issued SCSI command in the Command Block */
+		} MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t;
+		
+		/** \brief Mass Storage Class Command Status Wrapper.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a Command Status Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t Signature; /**< Status block signature, must be CSW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Status */
+			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */
+			uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Number of bytes of data not processed in the SCSI command */
+			uint8_t  Status; /**< Status code of the issued command - a value from the MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */
+		} MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t;
+		
+		/** \brief Mass Storage Class SCSI Sense Structure
+		 *  
+		 *  Type define for a SCSI Sense structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
+		 *  device via the MassStore_RequestSense() function, indicating the current sense data of the
+		 *  device (giving explicit error codes for the last issued command). For details of the
+		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       ResponseCode;
+
+			uint8_t       SegmentNumber;
+			
+			unsigned char SenseKey            : 4;
+			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 1;
+			unsigned char ILI                 : 1;
+			unsigned char EOM                 : 1;
+			unsigned char FileMark            : 1;
+			
+			uint8_t      Information[4];
+			uint8_t      AdditionalLength;
+			uint8_t      CmdSpecificInformation[4];
+			uint8_t      AdditionalSenseCode;
+			uint8_t      AdditionalSenseQualifier;
+			uint8_t      FieldReplaceableUnitCode;
+			uint8_t      SenseKeySpecific[3];
+		} SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;
+
+		/** \brief Mass Storage Class SCSI Inquiry Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a SCSI Inquiry structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
+		 *  device via the MassStore_Inquiry() function, retrieving the attached device's information.
+		 *  For details of the structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned char DeviceType          : 5;
+			unsigned char PeripheralQualifier : 3;
+			
+			unsigned char _RESERVED1          : 7;
+			unsigned char Removable           : 1;
+			
+			uint8_t      Version;
+			
+			unsigned char ResponseDataFormat  : 4;
+			unsigned char _RESERVED2          : 1;
+			unsigned char NormACA             : 1;
+			unsigned char TrmTsk              : 1;
+			unsigned char AERC                : 1;
+
+			uint8_t      AdditionalLength;
+			uint8_t      _RESERVED3[2];
+
+			unsigned char SoftReset           : 1;
+			unsigned char CmdQue              : 1;
+			unsigned char _RESERVED4          : 1;
+			unsigned char Linked              : 1;
+			unsigned char Sync                : 1;
+			unsigned char WideBus16Bit        : 1;
+			unsigned char WideBus32Bit        : 1;
+			unsigned char RelAddr             : 1;
+			
+			uint8_t      VendorID[8];
+			uint8_t      ProductID[16];
+			uint8_t      RevisionID[4];
+		} SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t;
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible command status wrapper return status codes. */
+		enum MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t
+		{
+			SCSI_Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed with no error */
+			SCSI_Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete - host may check the exact error via a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command */
+			SCSI_Phase_Error  = 2  /**< Command failed due to being invalid in the current phase */
+		};
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/Printer.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/Printer.h
index eba7c3ad0..87cf67695 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/Printer.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/Printer.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Printer Class driver.
- *
- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Printer Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Printer.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassPrinterCommon  Common Class Definitions
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
- *  Printer Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _PRINTER_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-#define _PRINTER_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/Printer.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that an error has *not* occurred. */
-		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_NOTERROR    (1 << 3)
-
-		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that the device is currently selected. */
-		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_SELECT      (1 << 4)
-
-		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that the device is currently out of paper. */
-		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_PAPEREMPTY  (1 << 5)
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Printer.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassPrinterCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  Printer Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PRINTER_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _PRINTER_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/Printer.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that an error has *not* occurred. */
+		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_NOTERROR    (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that the device is currently selected. */
+		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_SELECT      (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that the device is currently out of paper. */
+		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_PAPEREMPTY  (1 << 5)
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDIS.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDIS.h
index 74e22bd56..ecbff5122 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDIS.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDIS.h
@@ -1,303 +1,303 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
- *
- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISCommon  Common Class Definitions
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
- *  RNDIS Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-#define _RNDIS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "RNDISConstants.h"
-		#include "CDC.h"
-		
-		#include <string.h>
-	
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/RNDIS.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Major */
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR             0x01
-
-		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor */
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR             0x00
-	
-		/** RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command */
-		#define REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand           0x00
-
-		/** RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response */
-		#define REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse           0x01
-		
-		/** Maximum size in bytes of a RNDIS control message which can be sent or received */
-		#define RNDIS_MESSAGE_BUFFER_SIZE             128
-
-		/** Maximum size in bytes of an Ethernet frame according to the Ethernet standard */
-		#define ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX               1500
-		
-		/** Notification request value for a RNDIS Response Available notification */
-		#define NOTIF_ResponseAvailable               1
-		
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible NDIS adapter states. */
-		enum RNDIS_States_t
-		{
-			RNDIS_Uninitialized    = 0, /**< Adapter currently uninitialized */
-			RNDIS_Initialized      = 1, /**< Adapter currently initialized but not ready for data transfers */
-			RNDIS_Data_Initialized = 2, /**< Adapter currently initialized and ready for data transfers */
-		};
-
-		/** Enum for the NDIS hardware states */
-		enum NDIS_Hardware_Status_t
-		{
-			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Ready, /**< Hardware Ready to accept commands from the host */
-			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Initializing, /**< Hardware busy initializing */
-			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Reset, /**< Hardware reset */
-			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Closing, /**< Hardware currently closing */
-			NDIS_HardwareStatus_NotReady /**< Hardware not ready to accept commands from the host */
-		};
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** \brief MAC Address Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a physical MAC address of a device on a network
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       Octets[6]; /**< Individual bytes of a MAC address */
-		} MAC_Address_t;
-
-		/** \brief RNDIS Ethernet Frame Packet Information Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for an Ethernet frame buffer data and information structure.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t       FrameData[ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX]; /**< Ethernet frame contents */
-			uint16_t      FrameLength; /**< Length in bytes of the Ethernet frame stored in the buffer */
-			bool          FrameInBuffer; /**< Indicates if a frame is currently stored in the buffer */
-		} Ethernet_Frame_Info_t;
-
-		/** \brief RNDIS Common Message Header Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */
-			uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */
-		} RNDIS_Message_Header_t;
-
-		/** \brief RNDIS Message Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t DataOffset;
-			uint32_t DataLength;
-			uint32_t OOBDataOffset;
-			uint32_t OOBDataLength;
-			uint32_t NumOOBDataElements;
-			uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset;
-			uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength;
-			uint32_t VcHandle;
-			uint32_t Reserved;
-		} RNDIS_Packet_Message_t;
-
-		/** \brief RNDIS Initialization Message Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			
-			uint32_t MajorVersion;
-			uint32_t MinorVersion;
-			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
-		} RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t;
-		
-		/** \brief RNDIS Initialize Complete Message Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Initialize Complete response message.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-			
-			uint32_t MajorVersion;
-			uint32_t MinorVersion;
-			uint32_t DeviceFlags;
-			uint32_t Medium;
-			uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer;
-			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
-			uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor;
-			uint32_t AFListOffset;
-			uint32_t AFListSize;
-		} RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t;
-		
-		/** \brief RNDIS Keep Alive Message Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Keep Alive command message.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t;
-
-		/** \brief RNDIS Keep Alive Complete Message Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Keep Alive Complete response message.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t;
-
-		/** \brief RNDIS Reset Complete Message Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Reset Complete response message.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t Status;
-
-			uint32_t AddressingReset;
-		} RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t;
-		
-		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Set Message Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Set command message.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			
-			uint32_t Oid;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
-			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
-		} RNDIS_Set_Message_t;
-
-		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Set Complete Message Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Set Complete response message.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-		} RNDIS_Set_Complete_t;
-		
-		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Query Message Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Query command message.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			
-			uint32_t Oid;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
-			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
-		} RNDIS_Query_Message_t;
-		
-		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Query Complete Message Structure.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Query Complete response message.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t MessageType;
-			uint32_t MessageLength;
-			uint32_t RequestId;
-			uint32_t Status;
-			
-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
-		} RNDIS_Query_Complete_t;
-				
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  RNDIS Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _RNDIS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "RNDISConstants.h"
+		#include "CDC.h"
+		
+		#include <string.h>
+	
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/RNDIS.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Major */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR             0x01
+
+		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR             0x00
+	
+		/** RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command */
+		#define REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand           0x00
+
+		/** RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response */
+		#define REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse           0x01
+		
+		/** Maximum size in bytes of a RNDIS control message which can be sent or received */
+		#define RNDIS_MESSAGE_BUFFER_SIZE             128
+
+		/** Maximum size in bytes of an Ethernet frame according to the Ethernet standard */
+		#define ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX               1500
+		
+		/** Notification request value for a RNDIS Response Available notification */
+		#define NOTIF_ResponseAvailable               1
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible NDIS adapter states. */
+		enum RNDIS_States_t
+		{
+			RNDIS_Uninitialized    = 0, /**< Adapter currently uninitialized */
+			RNDIS_Initialized      = 1, /**< Adapter currently initialized but not ready for data transfers */
+			RNDIS_Data_Initialized = 2, /**< Adapter currently initialized and ready for data transfers */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the NDIS hardware states */
+		enum NDIS_Hardware_Status_t
+		{
+			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Ready, /**< Hardware Ready to accept commands from the host */
+			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Initializing, /**< Hardware busy initializing */
+			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Reset, /**< Hardware reset */
+			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Closing, /**< Hardware currently closing */
+			NDIS_HardwareStatus_NotReady /**< Hardware not ready to accept commands from the host */
+		};
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief MAC Address Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a physical MAC address of a device on a network
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Octets[6]; /**< Individual bytes of a MAC address */
+		} MAC_Address_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Ethernet Frame Packet Information Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Ethernet frame buffer data and information structure.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       FrameData[ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX]; /**< Ethernet frame contents */
+			uint16_t      FrameLength; /**< Length in bytes of the Ethernet frame stored in the buffer */
+			bool          FrameInBuffer; /**< Indicates if a frame is currently stored in the buffer */
+		} Ethernet_Frame_Info_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Common Message Header Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */
+			uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */
+		} RNDIS_Message_Header_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t DataOffset;
+			uint32_t DataLength;
+			uint32_t OOBDataOffset;
+			uint32_t OOBDataLength;
+			uint32_t NumOOBDataElements;
+			uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset;
+			uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength;
+			uint32_t VcHandle;
+			uint32_t Reserved;
+		} RNDIS_Packet_Message_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Initialization Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			
+			uint32_t MajorVersion;
+			uint32_t MinorVersion;
+			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
+		} RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t;
+		
+		/** \brief RNDIS Initialize Complete Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Initialize Complete response message.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+			
+			uint32_t MajorVersion;
+			uint32_t MinorVersion;
+			uint32_t DeviceFlags;
+			uint32_t Medium;
+			uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer;
+			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
+			uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor;
+			uint32_t AFListOffset;
+			uint32_t AFListSize;
+		} RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t;
+		
+		/** \brief RNDIS Keep Alive Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Keep Alive command message.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Keep Alive Complete Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Keep Alive Complete response message.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+		} RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Reset Complete Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Reset Complete response message.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t Status;
+
+			uint32_t AddressingReset;
+		} RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t;
+		
+		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Set Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Set command message.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			
+			uint32_t Oid;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
+		} RNDIS_Set_Message_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Set Complete Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Set Complete response message.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+		} RNDIS_Set_Complete_t;
+		
+		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Query Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Query command message.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			
+			uint32_t Oid;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
+		} RNDIS_Query_Message_t;
+		
+		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Query Complete Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Query Complete response message.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+			
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+		} RNDIS_Query_Complete_t;
+				
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISConstants.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISConstants.h
index c940a034f..7cd80aba7 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISConstants.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISConstants.h
@@ -1,121 +1,121 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Common RNDIS class constant definitions.
- *
- *  Common RNDIS class constant definitions.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h.
- */
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  RNDIS specification related constants. For more information on these
- *  constants, please refer to the Microsoft RNDIS specification.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
-#define _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG                0x00000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG            0x00000002UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG                  0x00000003UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG                 0x00000004UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG                   0x00000005UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG                 0x00000006UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG       0x00000007UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG             0x00000008UL
-
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT          0x80000002UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT               0x80000004UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT                 0x80000005UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT               0x80000006UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT           0x80000008UL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS            0x00000000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE            0xC0000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA       0xC0010015UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED      0xC00000BBUL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT      0x4001000BUL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT   0x4001000CUL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED     0x00000000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED  0x00000001UL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3              0x00000000UL
-		
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS	      0x00000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED    0x00000002UL
-
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED           0x00000001UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MULTICAST          0x00000002UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST      0x00000004UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST          0x00000008UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SOURCE_ROUTING     0x00000010UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_PROMISCUOUS        0x00000020UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SMT                0x00000040UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_LOCAL          0x00000080UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_GROUP              0x00001000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_FUNCTIONAL     0x00002000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_FUNCTIONAL         0x00004000UL
-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MAC_FRAME          0x00008000UL	
-		
-		#define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST                0x00010101UL
-		#define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS               0x00010102UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED               0x00010103UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE                  0x00010104UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE            0x00010106UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
-		#define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED                    0x00010107UL
-		#define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE           0x0001010AUL
-		#define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE            0x0001010BUL
-		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID                     0x0001010CUL
-		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION            0x0001010DUL
-		#define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER         0x0001010EUL
-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS          0x00010114UL
-		#define OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM               0x00010202UL
-		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK                       0x00020101UL
-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_OK                        0x00020102UL
-		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR                    0x00020103UL
-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR                     0x00020104UL
-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER                 0x00020105UL
-		#define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS           0x01010101UL
-		#define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS             0x01010102UL
-		#define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST              0x01010103UL
-		#define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE           0x01010104UL
-		#define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT         0x01020101UL
-		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION          0x01020102UL
-		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS        0x01020103UL
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common RNDIS class constant definitions.
+ *
+ *  Common RNDIS class constant definitions.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h.
+ */
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  RNDIS specification related constants. For more information on these
+ *  constants, please refer to the Microsoft RNDIS specification.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG                0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG            0x00000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG                  0x00000003UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG                 0x00000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG                   0x00000005UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG                 0x00000006UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG       0x00000007UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG             0x00000008UL
+
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT          0x80000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT               0x80000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT                 0x80000005UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT               0x80000006UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT           0x80000008UL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS            0x00000000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE            0xC0000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA       0xC0010015UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED      0xC00000BBUL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT      0x4001000BUL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT   0x4001000CUL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED     0x00000000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED  0x00000001UL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3              0x00000000UL
+		
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS	      0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED    0x00000002UL
+
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED           0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MULTICAST          0x00000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST      0x00000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST          0x00000008UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SOURCE_ROUTING     0x00000010UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_PROMISCUOUS        0x00000020UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SMT                0x00000040UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_LOCAL          0x00000080UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_GROUP              0x00001000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_FUNCTIONAL     0x00002000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_FUNCTIONAL         0x00004000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MAC_FRAME          0x00008000UL	
+		
+		#define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST                0x00010101UL
+		#define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS               0x00010102UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED               0x00010103UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE                  0x00010104UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE            0x00010106UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
+		#define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED                    0x00010107UL
+		#define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE           0x0001010AUL
+		#define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE            0x0001010BUL
+		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID                     0x0001010CUL
+		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION            0x0001010DUL
+		#define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER         0x0001010EUL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS          0x00010114UL
+		#define OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM               0x00010202UL
+		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK                       0x00020101UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_OK                        0x00020102UL
+		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR                    0x00020103UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR                     0x00020104UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER                 0x00020105UL
+		#define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS           0x01010101UL
+		#define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS             0x01010102UL
+		#define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST              0x01010103UL
+		#define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE           0x01010104UL
+		#define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT         0x01020101UL
+		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION          0x01020102UL
+		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS        0x01020103UL
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImage.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImage.h
index 1648431d6..7be75067d 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImage.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImage.h
@@ -1,146 +1,146 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
- *
- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImage.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassSI
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassSICommon  Common Class Definitions
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
- *  Still Image Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _SI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-#define _SI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/StillImage.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Length in bytes of a given Unicode string's character length
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] chars  Total number of Unicode characters in the string
-		 *
-		 *  \return Number of bytes of the given unicode string
-		 */
-		#define UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(chars)   ((chars) << 1)
-		
-		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
-		 *  a command container.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] params  Number of parameters which are to be sent in the Param field of the container
-		 */
-		#define PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(params)      ((sizeof(SI_PIMA_Container_t) - 12) + \
-		                                        ((params) * sizeof(uint32_t)))
-
-		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
-		 *  a data container.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] datalen  Length in bytes of the data in the container
-		 */
-		#define PIMA_DATA_SIZE(datalen)        ((sizeof(SI_PIMA_Container_t) - 12) + \
-		                                        (datalen))
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible PIMA contains types. */
-		enum SI_PIMA_Container_Types_t
-		{
-			CType_Undefined         = 0, /**< Undefined container type */
-			CType_CommandBlock      = 1, /**< Command Block container type */
-			CType_DataBlock         = 2, /**< Data Block container type */
-			CType_ResponseBlock     = 3, /**< Response container type */
-			CType_EventBlock        = 4, /**< Event Block container type */
-		};	
-		
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enums for the possible status codes of a returned Response Block from an attached PIMA compliant Still Image device. */
-		enum SI_PIMA_ResponseCodes_t
-		{
-			PIMA_RESPONSE_OK                     = 1, /**< Response code indicating no error in the issued command */
-			PIMA_RESPONSE_GeneralError           = 2, /**< Response code indicating a general error while processing the
-			                                            *  issued command
-			                                            */
-			PIMA_RESPONSE_SessionNotOpen         = 3, /**< Response code indicating that the sent command requires an open
-			                                           *   session before being issued
-			                                           */
-			PIMA_RESPONSE_InvalidTransaction     = 4, /**< Response code indicating an invalid transaction occurred */
-			PIMA_RESPONSE_OperationNotSupported  = 5, /**< Response code indicating that the issued command is not supported
-			                                           *   by the attached device
-			                                           */
-			PIMA_RESPONSE_ParameterNotSupported  = 6, /**< Response code indicating that one or more of the issued command's
-			                                           *   parameters are not supported by the device
-			                                           */
-		};
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** \brief PIMA Still Image Device Command/Response Container.
-		 *
-		 *  Type define for a PIMA container, use to send commands and receive responses to and from an
-		 *  attached Still Image device.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint32_t DataLength; /**< Length of the container and data, in bytes */
-			uint16_t Type; /**< Container type, a value from the PIMA_Container_Types_t enum */
-			uint16_t Code; /**< Command, event or response code of the container */
-			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique container ID to link blocks together */
-			uint32_t Params[3]; /**< Block parameters to be issued along with the block code (command blocks only) */
-		} SI_PIMA_Container_t;
-		
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImage.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassSI
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassSICommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  Still Image Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _SI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/StillImage.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Length in bytes of a given Unicode string's character length
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] chars  Total number of Unicode characters in the string
+		 *
+		 *  \return Number of bytes of the given unicode string
+		 */
+		#define UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(chars)   ((chars) << 1)
+		
+		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
+		 *  a command container.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] params  Number of parameters which are to be sent in the Param field of the container
+		 */
+		#define PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(params)      ((sizeof(SI_PIMA_Container_t) - 12) + \
+		                                        ((params) * sizeof(uint32_t)))
+
+		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
+		 *  a data container.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] datalen  Length in bytes of the data in the container
+		 */
+		#define PIMA_DATA_SIZE(datalen)        ((sizeof(SI_PIMA_Container_t) - 12) + \
+		                                        (datalen))
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible PIMA contains types. */
+		enum SI_PIMA_Container_Types_t
+		{
+			CType_Undefined         = 0, /**< Undefined container type */
+			CType_CommandBlock      = 1, /**< Command Block container type */
+			CType_DataBlock         = 2, /**< Data Block container type */
+			CType_ResponseBlock     = 3, /**< Response container type */
+			CType_EventBlock        = 4, /**< Event Block container type */
+		};	
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enums for the possible status codes of a returned Response Block from an attached PIMA compliant Still Image device. */
+		enum SI_PIMA_ResponseCodes_t
+		{
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_OK                     = 1, /**< Response code indicating no error in the issued command */
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_GeneralError           = 2, /**< Response code indicating a general error while processing the
+			                                            *  issued command
+			                                            */
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_SessionNotOpen         = 3, /**< Response code indicating that the sent command requires an open
+			                                           *   session before being issued
+			                                           */
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_InvalidTransaction     = 4, /**< Response code indicating an invalid transaction occurred */
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_OperationNotSupported  = 5, /**< Response code indicating that the issued command is not supported
+			                                           *   by the attached device
+			                                           */
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_ParameterNotSupported  = 6, /**< Response code indicating that one or more of the issued command's
+			                                           *   parameters are not supported by the device
+			                                           */
+		};
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief PIMA Still Image Device Command/Response Container.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a PIMA container, use to send commands and receive responses to and from an
+		 *  attached Still Image device.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t DataLength; /**< Length of the container and data, in bytes */
+			uint16_t Type; /**< Container type, a value from the PIMA_Container_Types_t enum */
+			uint16_t Code; /**< Command, event or response code of the container */
+			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique container ID to link blocks together */
+			uint32_t Params[3]; /**< Block parameters to be issued along with the block code (command blocks only) */
+		} SI_PIMA_Container_t;
+		
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c
index a10e6a5ae..241fd7f7e 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c
@@ -1,89 +1,89 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER
-#include "Audio.h"
-
-void Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
-	  return;
-	  
-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.StreamingInterfaceNumber)
-	  return;
-
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_SetInterface:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF) != 0);
-				  
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-bool Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* AudioInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	memset(&AudioInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(AudioInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber)
-	{
-		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS,
-										 ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize,
-										 ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE)))
-		{
-			return false;
-		}
-	}
-
-	if (AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber)
-	{
-		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS,
-										 ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointSize,
-										 ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE)))
-		{
-			return false;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER
+#include "Audio.h"
+
+void Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+	  
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.StreamingInterfaceNumber)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_SetInterface:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF) != 0);
+				  
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* AudioInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&AudioInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(AudioInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS,
+										 ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize,
+										 ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE)))
+		{
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS,
+										 ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointSize,
+										 ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE)))
+		{
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
 #endif
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.h
index fd821e90c..45e267923 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.h
@@ -1,319 +1,319 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB Audio Class driver.
- *
- *  Device mode driver for the library USB Audio Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAudio
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassAudioDevice Audio Class Device Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Audio USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-#define _AUDIO_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/Audio.h"
-		
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/Audio.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief Audio Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each Audio interface
-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the Audio class driver functions as the
-			 *  AudioInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each Audio interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  StreamingInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the Audio Streaming interface within the device this
-														*   structure controls
-														*/
-
-					uint8_t  DataINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the incoming Audio Streaming data, if available
-													*   (zero if unused)
-													*/
-					uint16_t DataINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the incoming Audio Streaming data endpoint, if available
-												  *   (zero if unused)
-												  */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the outgoing Audio Streaming data, if available
-													 *   (zero if unused)
-													 */
-					uint16_t DataOUTEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the outgoing Audio Streaming data endpoint, if available
-												   *   (zero if unused)
-												   */			
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					bool     InterfaceEnabled; /**< Set and cleared by the class driver to indicate if the host has enabled the streaming endpoints
-												*   of the Audio Streaming interface.
-												*/
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
-				          */				
-			} USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t;
-		
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given Audio interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration containing the
-			 *  given Audio interface is selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given Audio class interface. This should be
-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			void Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */		
-			/** General management task for a given Audio class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			static inline void Audio_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo);
-			static inline void Audio_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
-			}
-
-			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready for a sample to be read from it, and selects the streaming
-			 *  OUT endpoint ready for reading.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
-			 *        the call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the given Audio interface has a sample to be read, false otherwise
-			 */		
-			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled))
-				  return false;
-				
-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);	
-				return Endpoint_IsOUTReceived();
-			}
-
-			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready to accept the next sample to be written to it, and selects
-			 *  the streaming IN endpoint ready for writing.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
-			 *        the call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the given Audio interface is ready to accept the next sample, false otherwise
-			 */
-			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled))
-				  return false;
-				
-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-				return Endpoint_IsINReady();
-			}
-
-			/** Reads the next 8-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure that
-			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return  Signed 8-bit audio sample from the audio interface
-			 */
-			static inline int8_t Audio_Device_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline int8_t Audio_Device_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				int8_t Sample;
-				
-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
-
-				Sample = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-
-				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-				
-				return Sample;
-			}
-
-			/** Reads the next 16-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure that
-			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return  Signed 16-bit audio sample from the audio interface
-			 */
-			static inline int16_t Audio_Device_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline int16_t Audio_Device_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				int16_t Sample;
-
-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
-
-				Sample = (int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
-					  
-				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-				return Sample;
-			}
-
-			/** Reads the next 24-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure that
-			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return  Signed 24-bit audio sample from the audio interface
-			 */
-			static inline int32_t Audio_Device_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline int32_t Audio_Device_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				int32_t Sample;
-
-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
-
-				Sample = (((uint32_t)Endpoint_Read_Byte() << 16) | Endpoint_Read_Word_LE());
-					  
-				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-				return Sample;
-			}
-
-			/** Writes the next 8-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsReadyForNextSample() function to ensure that
-			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Sample  Signed 8-bit audio sample
-			 */
-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
-			                                             const int8_t Sample) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
-			                                             const int8_t Sample)
-			{
-				Endpoint_Write_Byte(Sample);
-
-				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize)
-				  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			}
-
-			/** Writes the next 16-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsReadyForNextSample() function to ensure that
-			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Sample  Signed 16-bit audio sample
-			 */
-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
-			                                              const int16_t Sample) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
-			                                              const int16_t Sample)
-			{
-				Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(Sample);
-
-				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize)
-				  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			}
-
-			/** Writes the next 24-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsReadyForNextSample() function to ensure that
-			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Sample  Signed 24-bit audio sample
-			 */
-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
-			                                              const int32_t Sample) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
-			                                              const int32_t Sample)
-			{
-				Endpoint_Write_Byte(Sample >> 16);
-				Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(Sample);
-
-				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize)
-				  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			}
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB Audio Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB Audio Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Audio.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAudio
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassAudioDevice Audio Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Audio USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _AUDIO_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/Audio.h"
+		
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/Audio.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Audio Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each Audio interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the Audio class driver functions as the
+			 *  AudioInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each Audio interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  StreamingInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the Audio Streaming interface within the device this
+														*   structure controls
+														*/
+
+					uint8_t  DataINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the incoming Audio Streaming data, if available
+													*   (zero if unused)
+													*/
+					uint16_t DataINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the incoming Audio Streaming data endpoint, if available
+												  *   (zero if unused)
+												  */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the outgoing Audio Streaming data, if available
+													 *   (zero if unused)
+													 */
+					uint16_t DataOUTEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the outgoing Audio Streaming data endpoint, if available
+												   *   (zero if unused)
+												   */			
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool     InterfaceEnabled; /**< Set and cleared by the class driver to indicate if the host has enabled the streaming endpoints
+												*   of the Audio Streaming interface.
+												*/
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */				
+			} USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t;
+		
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given Audio interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration containing the
+			 *  given Audio interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given Audio class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			void Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */		
+			/** General management task for a given Audio class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo);
+			static inline void Audio_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready for a sample to be read from it, and selects the streaming
+			 *  OUT endpoint ready for reading.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *        the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the given Audio interface has a sample to be read, false otherwise
+			 */		
+			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled))
+				  return false;
+				
+				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);	
+				return Endpoint_IsOUTReceived();
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready to accept the next sample to be written to it, and selects
+			 *  the streaming IN endpoint ready for writing.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *        the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the given Audio interface is ready to accept the next sample, false otherwise
+			 */
+			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled))
+				  return false;
+				
+				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+				return Endpoint_IsINReady();
+			}
+
+			/** Reads the next 8-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure that
+			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return  Signed 8-bit audio sample from the audio interface
+			 */
+			static inline int8_t Audio_Device_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline int8_t Audio_Device_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				int8_t Sample;
+				
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Sample = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+
+				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				
+				return Sample;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads the next 16-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure that
+			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return  Signed 16-bit audio sample from the audio interface
+			 */
+			static inline int16_t Audio_Device_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline int16_t Audio_Device_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				int16_t Sample;
+
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Sample = (int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+					  
+				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				return Sample;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads the next 24-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure that
+			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return  Signed 24-bit audio sample from the audio interface
+			 */
+			static inline int32_t Audio_Device_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline int32_t Audio_Device_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				int32_t Sample;
+
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Sample = (((uint32_t)Endpoint_Read_Byte() << 16) | Endpoint_Read_Word_LE());
+					  
+				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				return Sample;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes the next 8-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsReadyForNextSample() function to ensure that
+			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Sample  Signed 8-bit audio sample
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                             const int8_t Sample) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                             const int8_t Sample)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(Sample);
+
+				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize)
+				  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			/** Writes the next 16-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsReadyForNextSample() function to ensure that
+			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Sample  Signed 16-bit audio sample
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                              const int16_t Sample) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                              const int16_t Sample)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(Sample);
+
+				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize)
+				  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			/** Writes the next 24-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This should be preceded immediately by a call to the USB_Audio_IsReadyForNextSample() function to ensure that
+			 *        the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Sample  Signed 24-bit audio sample
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                              const int32_t Sample) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                              const int32_t Sample)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(Sample >> 16);
+				Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(Sample);
+
+				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize)
+				  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c
index f0c6edb12..69295e5e4 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c
@@ -1,299 +1,299 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
-#include "CDC.h"
-
-void CDC_Device_Event_Stub(void)
-{
-
-}
-
-void CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
-	  return;
-	  
-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.ControlInterfaceNumber)
-	  return;
-
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding));
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding));
-				EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			}
-	
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetControlLineState:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{				
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice = USB_ControlRequest.wValue;
-				EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-	
-			break;
-		case REQ_SendBreak:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{				
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(CDCInterfaceInfo, (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue);
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-bool CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	memset(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-							         ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize,
-							         CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointSize,
-	                                 CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointSize,
-	                                 CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-void CDC_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
-	  return;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
-
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() && !(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	  
-	CDC_Device_Flush(CDCInterfaceInfo);
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Device_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, char* const Data, const uint16_t Length)
-{
-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-	
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-	return Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Data, Length, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Device_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Data)
-{
-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	{	
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-		uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(Data);
-	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-	  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
-	
-	bool BankFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	
-	if (BankFull)
-	{
-		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	}
-	
-	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
-}
-
-uint16_t CDC_Device_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
-	  return 0;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
-
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-	{
-		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-		{
-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			return 0;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			return Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
-		}
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		return 0;
-	}
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
-	  return 0;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
-	
-	uint8_t DataByte = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-	
-	if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	  
-	return DataByte;
-}
-
-void CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
-	  return;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointNumber);
-	
-	USB_Request_Header_t Notification = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = NOTIF_SerialState,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost),
-		};
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost,
-	                         sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost),
-	                         NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-void CDC_Device_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream)
-{
-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Device_putchar, CDC_Device_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
-	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
-}
-
-void CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream)
-{
-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Device_putchar, CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
-	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
-}
-
-static int CDC_Device_putchar(char c, FILE* Stream)
-{
-	return CDC_Device_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;
-}
-
-static int CDC_Device_getchar(FILE* Stream)
-{
-	if (!(CDC_Device_BytesReceived((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))))
-	  return _FDEV_EOF;
-
-	return CDC_Device_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
-}
-
-static int CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)
-{
-	while (!(CDC_Device_BytesReceived((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))))
-	{
-		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return _FDEV_EOF;
-	
-		CDC_Device_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-
-	return CDC_Device_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
+#include "CDC.h"
+
+void CDC_Device_Event_Stub(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+void CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+	  
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.ControlInterfaceNumber)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding));
+				EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+	
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetControlLineState:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{				
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice = USB_ControlRequest.wValue;
+				EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+	
+			break;
+		case REQ_SendBreak:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{				
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(CDCInterfaceInfo, (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+							         ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize,
+							         CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointSize,
+	                                 CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointSize,
+	                                 CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void CDC_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() && !(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	  
+	CDC_Device_Flush(CDCInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Device_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, char* const Data, const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+	return Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Data, Length, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Device_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Data)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{	
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(Data);
+	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+	  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+	
+	bool BankFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	
+	if (BankFull)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+	
+	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint16_t CDC_Device_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return 0;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			return 0;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			return Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		return 0;
+	}
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return 0;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
+	
+	uint8_t DataByte = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+	
+	if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	  
+	return DataByte;
+}
+
+void CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointNumber);
+	
+	USB_Request_Header_t Notification = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = NOTIF_SerialState,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost),
+		};
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost,
+	                         sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost),
+	                         NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+void CDC_Device_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Device_putchar, CDC_Device_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+void CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Device_putchar, CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+static int CDC_Device_putchar(char c, FILE* Stream)
+{
+	return CDC_Device_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;
+}
+
+static int CDC_Device_getchar(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	if (!(CDC_Device_BytesReceived((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))))
+	  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+	return CDC_Device_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+}
+
+static int CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	while (!(CDC_Device_BytesReceived((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))))
+	{
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return _FDEV_EOF;
+	
+		CDC_Device_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	return CDC_Device_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.h
index 0b2c4c034..f0351f5d9 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.h
@@ -1,331 +1,331 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
- *
- *  Device mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassCDCDevice CDC Class Device Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the CDC USB Class driver.
- *
- *  \note There are several major drawbacks to the CDC-ACM standard USB class, however
- *        it is very standardized and thus usually available as a built-in driver on
- *        most platforms, and so is a better choice than a proprietary serial class.
- *        
- *        One major issue with CDC-ACM is that it requires two Interface descriptors,
- *        which will upset most hosts when part of a multi-function "Composite" USB
- *        device, as each interface will be loaded into a separate driver instance. To
- *        conbat this, you should use the "Interface Association Descriptor" addendum to
- *        the USB standard which is available on most OSes when creating Composite devices.
- *
- *        Another major oversight is that there is no mechanism for the host to notify the
- *        device that there is a data sink on the host side ready to accept data. This
- *        means that the device may try to send data while the host isn't listening, causing
- *        lengthy blocking timeouts in the transmission routines. To combat this, it is
- *        recommended that the virtual serial line DTR (Data Terminal Ready) be used where
- *        possible to determine if a host application is ready for data.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-#define _CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/CDC.h"
-
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/CDC.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief CDC Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each CDC interface
-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the CDC class driver functions as the
-			 *  CDCInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each CDC interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the CDC control interface within the device */
-
-					uint8_t  DataINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's IN data endpoint */
-					uint16_t DataINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN data endpoint */
-					bool     DataINEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's IN data endpoint should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's OUT data endpoint */
-					uint16_t DataOUTEndpointSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's OUT data endpoint */
-					bool     DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's OUT data endpoint should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  NotificationEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */
-					uint16_t NotificationEndpointSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */
-					bool     NotificationEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's notification endpoint should use double banking */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					struct
-					{
-						uint8_t HostToDevice; /**< Control line states from the host to device, as a set of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_*
-											   *   masks. This value is updated each time \ref CDC_Device_USBTask() is called.
-											   */
-						uint8_t DeviceToHost; /**< Control line states from the device to host, as a set of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_*
-											   *   masks - to notify the host of changes to these values, call the
-											   *   \ref CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange() function.
-											   */
-					} ControlLineStates; /**< Current states of the virtual serial port's control lines between the device and host. */
-
-					struct
-					{
-						uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
-						uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
-											  *   CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
-											  */
-						uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
-											  *   CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
-											  */
-						uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per character of the virtual serial port */
-					} LineEncoding;	/** Line encoding used in the virtual serial port, for the device's information. This is generally
-					                 *  only used if the virtual serial port data is to be reconstructed on a physical UART.
-					                 */		
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
-				          */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t;
-		
-		/* Function Prototypes: */		
-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given CDC interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration containing
-			 *  the given CDC interface is selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given CDC class interface. This should be
-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			void CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** General management task for a given CDC class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			void CDC_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** CDC class driver event for a line encoding change on a CDC interface. This event fires each time the host requests a
-			 *  line encoding change (containing the serial parity, baud and other configuration information) and may be hooked in the
-			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new line encoding
-			 *  settings are available in the LineEncoding structure inside the CDC interface structure passed as a parameter.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** CDC class driver event for a control line state change on a CDC interface. This event fires each time the host requests a
-			 *  control line state change (containing the virtual serial control line states, such as DTR) and may be hooked in the
-			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new control line states
-			 *  are available in the ControlLineStates.HostToDevice value inside the CDC interface structure passed as a parameter, set as
-			 *  a mask of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** CDC class driver event for a send break request sent to the device from the host. This is generally used to seperate
-			 *  data or to indicate a special condition to the receiving device.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in]     Duration          Duration of the break that has been sent by the host, in milliseconds
-			 */
-			void EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, uint8_t Duration) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Sends a given string to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when the function is called, the
-			 *  string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either the endpoint bank becomes full, or the
-			 *  \ref CDC_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be 
-			 *  packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
-			 *        the call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Data  Pointer to the string to send to the host
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Size in bytes of the string to send to the host
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Device_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, char* const Data, const uint16_t Length)
-			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-			
-			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when the function is called, the
-			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either the endpoint bank becomes full, or the
-			 *  \ref CDC_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be 
-			 *  packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
-			 *        the call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Data  Byte of data to send to the host
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Device_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the CDC interface from the host, waiting to be read.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
-			 *        the call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the host
-			 */
-			uint16_t CDC_Device_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Reads a byte of data from the host. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB host is not connected, the function
-			 *  returns 0. The \ref CDC_Device_BytesReceived() function should be queried before data is received to ensure that no data
-			 *  underflow occurs.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
-			 *        the call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next received byte from the host, or 0 if no data received
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
-			 *        the call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Sends a Serial Control Line State Change notification to the host. This should be called when the virtual serial
-			 *  control lines (DCD, DSR, etc.) have changed states, or to give BREAK notifications to the host. Line states persist
-			 *  until they are cleared via a second notification. This should be called each time the CDC class driver's 
-			 *  ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost value is updated to push the new states to the USB host.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
-			 *        the call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			void CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Creates a standard characer stream for the given CDC Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular
-			 *  functions in the avr-libc <stdio.h> library that accept a FILE stream as a destination (e.g. fprintf). The created
-			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.
-			 *
-			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single
-			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may
-			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via getc()) or when the user application will implement its own
-			 *  line buffering.
-			 *
-			 *  \note The created stream can be given as stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all <stdio.h> functions
-			 *        to the given CDC interface.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed
-			 */
-			void CDC_Device_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream);
-
-			/** Identical to CDC_Device_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates
-			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and CDC service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed
-			 */
-			void CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream);
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_C)
-				static int CDC_Device_putchar(char c, FILE* Stream);
-				static int CDC_Device_getchar(FILE* Stream);
-				static int CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream);
-				
-				void CDC_Device_Event_Stub(void);
-				void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-														  ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);
-				void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-															 ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);
-				void EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, uint8_t Duration)
-				                                ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);
-			#endif
-
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassCDCDevice CDC Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the CDC USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note There are several major drawbacks to the CDC-ACM standard USB class, however
+ *        it is very standardized and thus usually available as a built-in driver on
+ *        most platforms, and so is a better choice than a proprietary serial class.
+ *        
+ *        One major issue with CDC-ACM is that it requires two Interface descriptors,
+ *        which will upset most hosts when part of a multi-function "Composite" USB
+ *        device, as each interface will be loaded into a separate driver instance. To
+ *        conbat this, you should use the "Interface Association Descriptor" addendum to
+ *        the USB standard which is available on most OSes when creating Composite devices.
+ *
+ *        Another major oversight is that there is no mechanism for the host to notify the
+ *        device that there is a data sink on the host side ready to accept data. This
+ *        means that the device may try to send data while the host isn't listening, causing
+ *        lengthy blocking timeouts in the transmission routines. To combat this, it is
+ *        recommended that the virtual serial line DTR (Data Terminal Ready) be used where
+ *        possible to determine if a host application is ready for data.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/CDC.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/CDC.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief CDC Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each CDC interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the CDC class driver functions as the
+			 *  CDCInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each CDC interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the CDC control interface within the device */
+
+					uint8_t  DataINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's IN data endpoint */
+					uint16_t DataINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN data endpoint */
+					bool     DataINEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's IN data endpoint should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's OUT data endpoint */
+					uint16_t DataOUTEndpointSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's OUT data endpoint */
+					bool     DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's OUT data endpoint should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  NotificationEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */
+					uint16_t NotificationEndpointSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */
+					bool     NotificationEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's notification endpoint should use double banking */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					struct
+					{
+						uint8_t HostToDevice; /**< Control line states from the host to device, as a set of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_*
+											   *   masks. This value is updated each time \ref CDC_Device_USBTask() is called.
+											   */
+						uint8_t DeviceToHost; /**< Control line states from the device to host, as a set of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_*
+											   *   masks - to notify the host of changes to these values, call the
+											   *   \ref CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange() function.
+											   */
+					} ControlLineStates; /**< Current states of the virtual serial port's control lines between the device and host. */
+
+					struct
+					{
+						uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
+						uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+											  *   CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
+											  */
+						uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+											  *   CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
+											  */
+						uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per character of the virtual serial port */
+					} LineEncoding;	/** Line encoding used in the virtual serial port, for the device's information. This is generally
+					                 *  only used if the virtual serial port data is to be reconstructed on a physical UART.
+					                 */		
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t;
+		
+		/* Function Prototypes: */		
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given CDC interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration containing
+			 *  the given CDC interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given CDC class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			void CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** General management task for a given CDC class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			void CDC_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** CDC class driver event for a line encoding change on a CDC interface. This event fires each time the host requests a
+			 *  line encoding change (containing the serial parity, baud and other configuration information) and may be hooked in the
+			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new line encoding
+			 *  settings are available in the LineEncoding structure inside the CDC interface structure passed as a parameter.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** CDC class driver event for a control line state change on a CDC interface. This event fires each time the host requests a
+			 *  control line state change (containing the virtual serial control line states, such as DTR) and may be hooked in the
+			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new control line states
+			 *  are available in the ControlLineStates.HostToDevice value inside the CDC interface structure passed as a parameter, set as
+			 *  a mask of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** CDC class driver event for a send break request sent to the device from the host. This is generally used to seperate
+			 *  data or to indicate a special condition to the receiving device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in]     Duration          Duration of the break that has been sent by the host, in milliseconds
+			 */
+			void EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, uint8_t Duration) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a given string to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when the function is called, the
+			 *  string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either the endpoint bank becomes full, or the
+			 *  \ref CDC_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be 
+			 *  packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *        the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Pointer to the string to send to the host
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Size in bytes of the string to send to the host
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Device_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, char* const Data, const uint16_t Length)
+			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			
+			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when the function is called, the
+			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either the endpoint bank becomes full, or the
+			 *  \ref CDC_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be 
+			 *  packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *        the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Byte of data to send to the host
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Device_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the CDC interface from the host, waiting to be read.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *        the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the host
+			 */
+			uint16_t CDC_Device_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Reads a byte of data from the host. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB host is not connected, the function
+			 *  returns 0. The \ref CDC_Device_BytesReceived() function should be queried before data is received to ensure that no data
+			 *  underflow occurs.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *        the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next received byte from the host, or 0 if no data received
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *        the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Sends a Serial Control Line State Change notification to the host. This should be called when the virtual serial
+			 *  control lines (DCD, DSR, etc.) have changed states, or to give BREAK notifications to the host. Line states persist
+			 *  until they are cleared via a second notification. This should be called each time the CDC class driver's 
+			 *  ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost value is updated to push the new states to the USB host.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *        the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			void CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Creates a standard characer stream for the given CDC Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular
+			 *  functions in the avr-libc <stdio.h> library that accept a FILE stream as a destination (e.g. fprintf). The created
+			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.
+			 *
+			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single
+			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may
+			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via getc()) or when the user application will implement its own
+			 *  line buffering.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The created stream can be given as stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all <stdio.h> functions
+			 *        to the given CDC interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed
+			 */
+			void CDC_Device_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream);
+
+			/** Identical to CDC_Device_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates
+			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and CDC service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed
+			 */
+			void CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_C)
+				static int CDC_Device_putchar(char c, FILE* Stream);
+				static int CDC_Device_getchar(FILE* Stream);
+				static int CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream);
+				
+				void CDC_Device_Event_Stub(void);
+				void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+														  ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);
+				void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+															 ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);
+				void EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, uint8_t Duration)
+				                                ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);
+			#endif
+
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c
index 676650976..88bb60993 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c
@@ -1,194 +1,194 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
-#include "HID.h"
-
-void HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
-	  return;
-	  
-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.InterfaceNumber)
-	  return;
-
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetReport:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();	
-
-				uint16_t ReportINSize = 0;
-				uint8_t  ReportID     = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF);
-				uint8_t  ReportType   = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8) - 1;
-				uint8_t  ReportINData[HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize];
-
-				memset(ReportINData, 0, sizeof(ReportINData));
-
-				CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, &ReportID, ReportType,
-				                                    HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, &ReportINSize);
-				
-				if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer != NULL)
-				  memcpy(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINData, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize);
-
-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINSize);
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			}
-		
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetReport:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				uint16_t ReportOUTSize = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
-				uint8_t  ReportOUTData[ReportOUTSize];
-				uint8_t  ReportID = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF);
-
-				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportOUTSize);
-				CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, ReportID, ReportOUTData, ReportOUTSize);
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();				
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetProtocol:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				Endpoint_Write_Byte(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol);
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetProtocol:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF) != 0x00);
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetIdle:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-					
-				HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF00) >> 6);
-					
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetIdle:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{		
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-				
-				Endpoint_Write_Byte(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount >> 2);
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-bool HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	memset(&HIDInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(HIDInterfaceInfo->State));
-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol = true;
-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount = 500;
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-									 ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpointSize,
-									 HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-	
-	return true;
-}
-		
-void HID_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpointNumber);
-	
-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{
-		uint8_t  ReportINData[HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize];
-		uint8_t  ReportID     = 0;
-		uint16_t ReportINSize = 0;
-
-		memset(ReportINData, 0, sizeof(ReportINData));
-
-		bool ForceSend         = CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, &ReportID, REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In,
-		                                                             ReportINData, &ReportINSize);
-		bool StatesChanged     = false;
-		bool IdlePeriodElapsed = (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount && !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining));
-		
-		if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer != NULL)
-		{
-			StatesChanged = (memcmp(ReportINData, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINSize) != 0);
-			memcpy(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINData, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize);
-		}
-
-		if (ReportINSize && (ForceSend || StatesChanged || IdlePeriodElapsed))
-		{
-			HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount;
-
-			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpointNumber);
-
-			if (ReportID)
-			  Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReportID);
-
-			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportINData, ReportINSize, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-			
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
+#include "HID.h"
+
+void HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+	  
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.InterfaceNumber)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();	
+
+				uint16_t ReportINSize = 0;
+				uint8_t  ReportID     = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF);
+				uint8_t  ReportType   = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8) - 1;
+				uint8_t  ReportINData[HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize];
+
+				memset(ReportINData, 0, sizeof(ReportINData));
+
+				CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, &ReportID, ReportType,
+				                                    HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, &ReportINSize);
+				
+				if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer != NULL)
+				  memcpy(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINData, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize);
+
+				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINSize);
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+		
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				uint16_t ReportOUTSize = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+				uint8_t  ReportOUTData[ReportOUTSize];
+				uint8_t  ReportID = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF);
+
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportOUTSize);
+				CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, ReportID, ReportOUTData, ReportOUTSize);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();				
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF) != 0x00);
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+					
+				HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF00) >> 6);
+					
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{		
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount >> 2);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&HIDInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(HIDInterfaceInfo->State));
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol = true;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount = 500;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+									 ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpointSize,
+									 HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+	
+	return true;
+}
+		
+void HID_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpointNumber);
+	
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		uint8_t  ReportINData[HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize];
+		uint8_t  ReportID     = 0;
+		uint16_t ReportINSize = 0;
+
+		memset(ReportINData, 0, sizeof(ReportINData));
+
+		bool ForceSend         = CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, &ReportID, REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In,
+		                                                             ReportINData, &ReportINSize);
+		bool StatesChanged     = false;
+		bool IdlePeriodElapsed = (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount && !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining));
+		
+		if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer != NULL)
+		{
+			StatesChanged = (memcmp(ReportINData, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINSize) != 0);
+			memcpy(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINData, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize);
+		}
+
+		if (ReportINSize && (ForceSend || StatesChanged || IdlePeriodElapsed))
+		{
+			HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount;
+
+			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpointNumber);
+
+			if (ReportID)
+			  Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReportID);
+
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportINData, ReportINSize, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+			
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.h
index 92751241b..ac6ee4cb7 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.h
@@ -1,206 +1,206 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
- *
- *  Device mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassHIDDevice HID Class Device Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the HID USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef _HID_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-#define _HID_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/HID.h"
-
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/HID.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief HID Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each HID interface
-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the HID class driver functions as the
-			 *  HIDInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each HID interface's configuration and state information.
-			 *
-			 *  \note Due to technical limitations, the HID device class driver does not utilize a separate OUT
-			 *        endpoint for host->device communications. Instead, the host->device data (if any) is sent to
-			 *        the device via the control endpoint.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the HID interface within the device */
-
-					uint8_t  ReportINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the HID interface's IN report endpoint */
-					uint16_t ReportINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the HID interface's IN report endpoint */					
-					bool     ReportINEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the HID interface's IN report endpoint should use double banking */
-					
-					void*    PrevReportINBuffer; /**< Pointer to a buffer where the previously created HID input report can be
-					                              *  stored by the driver, for comparison purposes to detect report changes that
-					                              *  must be sent immediately to the host. This should point to a buffer big enough
-					                              *  to hold the largest HID input report sent from the HID interface. If this is set
-												  *  to NULL, it is up to the user to force transfers when needed in the 
-												  *  \ref CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() callback function.
-												  *
-												  *  \note Due to the single buffer, the internal driver can only correctly compare
-												  *        subsequent reports with identical report IDs. In multiple report devices,
-												  *        this buffer should be set to NULL and the decision to send reports made
-												  *        by the user application instead.
-					                              */
-					uint8_t  PrevReportINBufferSize; /**< Size in bytes of the given input report buffer. This is used to create a
-					                                  *  second buffer of the same size within the driver so that subsequent reports
-					                                  *  can be compared. If the user app is to determine when reports are to be sent
-					                                  *  exclusively (i.e. \ref PrevReportINBuffer is NULL) this value must still be
-													  *  set to the size of the largest report the device can issue to the host.
-					                                  */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */										 
-				struct
-				{
-					bool     UsingReportProtocol; /**< Indicates if the HID interface is set to Boot or Report protocol mode */
-					uint16_t IdleCount; /**< Report idle period, in milliseconds, set by the host */
-					uint16_t IdleMSRemaining; /**< Total number of milliseconds remaining before the idle period elapsed - this 
-											   *   should be decremented by the user application if non-zero each millisecond */	
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
-				          */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t;
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given HID interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
-			 *  containing the given HID interface is selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given HID class interface. This should be
-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
-			 */		
-			void HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** General management task for a given HID class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			void HID_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** HID class driver callback for the user creation of a HID IN report. This callback may fire in response to either
-			 *  HID class control requests from the host, or by the normal HID endpoint polling procedure. Inside this callback the
-			 *  user is responsible for the creation of the next HID input report to be sent to the host.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in,out] ReportID  If preset to a non-zero value, this is the report ID being requested by the host. If zero, this should
-			 *                 be set to the report ID of the generated HID input report (if any). If multiple reports are not sent via the
-			 *                 given HID interface, this parameter should be ignored.
-			 *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of HID report to generate, either \ref REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or \ref REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
-			 *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the generated HID report should be stored
-			 *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes in the generated input report, or zero if no report is to be sent
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report even if it is identical to the previous report and still within
-			 *          the idle period (useful for devices which report relative movement), false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                     const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
-			                                         ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
-			
-			/** HID class driver callback for the user processing of a received HID OUT report. This callback may fire in response to
-			 *  either HID class control requests from the host, or by the normal HID endpoint polling procedure. Inside this callback
-			 *  the user is responsible for the processing of the received HID output report from the host.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received output report. If multiple reports are not received via the given HID
-			 *                   interface, this parameter should be ignored.
-			 *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received HID report is stored.
-			 *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received report from the host.
-			 */
-			void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-			                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
-			                                          ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Indicates that a millisecond of idle time has elapsed on the given HID interface, and the interface's idle count should be
-			 *  decremented. This should be called once per millisecond so that hardware key-repeats function correctly. It is recommended
-			 *  that this be called by the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event, once SOF events have been enabled via
-			 *  \ref USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			static inline void HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* HIDInterfaceInfo);
-			static inline void HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* HIDInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining)
-				  HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining--;
-			}
-			
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassHIDDevice HID Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the HID USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _HID_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _HID_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/HID.h"
+
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/HID.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief HID Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each HID interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the HID class driver functions as the
+			 *  HIDInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each HID interface's configuration and state information.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Due to technical limitations, the HID device class driver does not utilize a separate OUT
+			 *        endpoint for host->device communications. Instead, the host->device data (if any) is sent to
+			 *        the device via the control endpoint.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the HID interface within the device */
+
+					uint8_t  ReportINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the HID interface's IN report endpoint */
+					uint16_t ReportINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the HID interface's IN report endpoint */					
+					bool     ReportINEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the HID interface's IN report endpoint should use double banking */
+					
+					void*    PrevReportINBuffer; /**< Pointer to a buffer where the previously created HID input report can be
+					                              *  stored by the driver, for comparison purposes to detect report changes that
+					                              *  must be sent immediately to the host. This should point to a buffer big enough
+					                              *  to hold the largest HID input report sent from the HID interface. If this is set
+												  *  to NULL, it is up to the user to force transfers when needed in the 
+												  *  \ref CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() callback function.
+												  *
+												  *  \note Due to the single buffer, the internal driver can only correctly compare
+												  *        subsequent reports with identical report IDs. In multiple report devices,
+												  *        this buffer should be set to NULL and the decision to send reports made
+												  *        by the user application instead.
+					                              */
+					uint8_t  PrevReportINBufferSize; /**< Size in bytes of the given input report buffer. This is used to create a
+					                                  *  second buffer of the same size within the driver so that subsequent reports
+					                                  *  can be compared. If the user app is to determine when reports are to be sent
+					                                  *  exclusively (i.e. \ref PrevReportINBuffer is NULL) this value must still be
+													  *  set to the size of the largest report the device can issue to the host.
+					                                  */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */										 
+				struct
+				{
+					bool     UsingReportProtocol; /**< Indicates if the HID interface is set to Boot or Report protocol mode */
+					uint16_t IdleCount; /**< Report idle period, in milliseconds, set by the host */
+					uint16_t IdleMSRemaining; /**< Total number of milliseconds remaining before the idle period elapsed - this 
+											   *   should be decremented by the user application if non-zero each millisecond */	
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t;
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given HID interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
+			 *  containing the given HID interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given HID class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
+			 */		
+			void HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** General management task for a given HID class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			void HID_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** HID class driver callback for the user creation of a HID IN report. This callback may fire in response to either
+			 *  HID class control requests from the host, or by the normal HID endpoint polling procedure. Inside this callback the
+			 *  user is responsible for the creation of the next HID input report to be sent to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in,out] ReportID  If preset to a non-zero value, this is the report ID being requested by the host. If zero, this should
+			 *                 be set to the report ID of the generated HID input report (if any). If multiple reports are not sent via the
+			 *                 given HID interface, this parameter should be ignored.
+			 *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of HID report to generate, either \ref REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or \ref REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+			 *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the generated HID report should be stored
+			 *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes in the generated input report, or zero if no report is to be sent
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report even if it is identical to the previous report and still within
+			 *          the idle period (useful for devices which report relative movement), false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                     const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                         ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
+			
+			/** HID class driver callback for the user processing of a received HID OUT report. This callback may fire in response to
+			 *  either HID class control requests from the host, or by the normal HID endpoint polling procedure. Inside this callback
+			 *  the user is responsible for the processing of the received HID output report from the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received output report. If multiple reports are not received via the given HID
+			 *                   interface, this parameter should be ignored.
+			 *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received HID report is stored.
+			 *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received report from the host.
+			 */
+			void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+			                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                          ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Indicates that a millisecond of idle time has elapsed on the given HID interface, and the interface's idle count should be
+			 *  decremented. This should be called once per millisecond so that hardware key-repeats function correctly. It is recommended
+			 *  that this be called by the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event, once SOF events have been enabled via
+			 *  \ref USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			static inline void HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* HIDInterfaceInfo);
+			static inline void HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* HIDInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining)
+				  HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining--;
+			}
+			
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c
index 1a66dc867..bf0f23c0d 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c
@@ -1,124 +1,124 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER
-#include "MIDI.h"
-
-bool MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	memset(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber)
-	{
-		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-										 ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize,
-										 MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-		{
-			return false;
-		}
-	}
-
-	if (MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber)
-	{
-		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-										 ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointSize,
-										 MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-		{
-			return false;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-uint8_t MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
-{
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-	
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-
-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
-	{
-		uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-
-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-		  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	}
-	
-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t MIDI_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-	
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-
-	if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
-	{
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
-}
-
-bool MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
-{
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return false;
-	
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  return false;
-
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER
+#include "MIDI.h"
+
+bool MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+										 ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize,
+										 MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+		{
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+										 ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointSize,
+										 MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+		{
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+uint8_t MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+	{
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+	
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MIDI_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+
+	if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+bool MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return false;
+	
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  return false;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.h
index 00d34e000..c4b871528 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.h
@@ -1,184 +1,184 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
- *
- *  Device mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMIDIDevice MIDI Class Device Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the MIDI USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-#define _MIDI_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/MIDI.h"
-
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MIDI.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Type Define: */
-			/** \brief MIDI Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each MIDI interface
-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the MIDI class driver functions as the
-			 *  MIDIInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each MIDI interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  StreamingInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the Audio Streaming interface within the device this structure controls */
-
-					uint8_t  DataINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the incoming MIDI data, if available (zero if unused) */
-					uint16_t DataINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the incoming MIDI data endpoint, if available (zero if unused) */
-					bool     DataINEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the MIDI interface's IN data endpoint should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the outgoing MIDI data, if available (zero if unused) */
-					uint16_t DataOUTEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the outgoing MIDI data endpoint, if available (zero if unused) */
-					bool     DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the MIDI interface's IN data endpoint should use double banking */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */									 
-				struct
-				{
-					// No state information for this class yet
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
-				          */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t;	
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given MIDI interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
-			 *  containing the given MIDI interface is selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Sends a MIDI event packet to the host. If no host is connected, the event packet is discarded. Events are queued into the
-			 *  endpoint bank until either the endpoint bank is full, or \ref MIDI_Device_Flush() is called. This allows for multiple
-			 *  MIDI events to be packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
-			 *        the call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Event  Pointer to a populated USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure containing the MIDI event to send
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum			 
-			 */
-			uint8_t MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
-			                                    MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-
-			/** Flushes the MIDI send buffer, sending any queued MIDI events to the host. This should be called to override the
-			 *  \ref MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket() function's packing behaviour, to flush queued events.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t MIDI_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo);
-
-			/** Receives a MIDI event packet from the host. Events are unpacked from the endpoint, thus if the endpoint bank contains
-			 *  multiple MIDI events from the host in the one packet, multiple calls to this function will return each individual event.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
-			 *        the call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[out] Event  Pointer to a USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure where the received MIDI event is to be placed
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if a MIDI event packet was received, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
-			                                    MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** General management task for a given MIDI class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			static inline void MIDI_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo);
-			static inline void MIDI_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				(void)MIDIInterfaceInfo;
-			}
-			
-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given MIDI class interface. This should be
-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
-			 */		
-			static inline void MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			static inline void MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				(void)MIDIInterfaceInfo;
-			}
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMIDIDevice MIDI Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the MIDI USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _MIDI_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/MIDI.h"
+
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MIDI.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Define: */
+			/** \brief MIDI Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each MIDI interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the MIDI class driver functions as the
+			 *  MIDIInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each MIDI interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  StreamingInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the Audio Streaming interface within the device this structure controls */
+
+					uint8_t  DataINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the incoming MIDI data, if available (zero if unused) */
+					uint16_t DataINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the incoming MIDI data endpoint, if available (zero if unused) */
+					bool     DataINEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the MIDI interface's IN data endpoint should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the outgoing MIDI data, if available (zero if unused) */
+					uint16_t DataOUTEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the outgoing MIDI data endpoint, if available (zero if unused) */
+					bool     DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the MIDI interface's IN data endpoint should use double banking */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */									 
+				struct
+				{
+					// No state information for this class yet
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t;	
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given MIDI interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
+			 *  containing the given MIDI interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Sends a MIDI event packet to the host. If no host is connected, the event packet is discarded. Events are queued into the
+			 *  endpoint bank until either the endpoint bank is full, or \ref MIDI_Device_Flush() is called. This allows for multiple
+			 *  MIDI events to be packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *        the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Event  Pointer to a populated USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure containing the MIDI event to send
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum			 
+			 */
+			uint8_t MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                    MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+
+			/** Flushes the MIDI send buffer, sending any queued MIDI events to the host. This should be called to override the
+			 *  \ref MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket() function's packing behaviour, to flush queued events.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t MIDI_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo);
+
+			/** Receives a MIDI event packet from the host. Events are unpacked from the endpoint, thus if the endpoint bank contains
+			 *  multiple MIDI events from the host in the one packet, multiple calls to this function will return each individual event.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *        the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[out] Event  Pointer to a USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure where the received MIDI event is to be placed
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if a MIDI event packet was received, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                    MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given MIDI class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			static inline void MIDI_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo);
+			static inline void MIDI_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)MIDIInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+			
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given MIDI class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
+			 */		
+			static inline void MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)MIDIInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c
index a5ebab029..c31eb86cb 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c
@@ -1,230 +1,230 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_CLASS_DEVICE_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER
-#include "MassStorage.h"
-
-static volatile bool* CallbackIsResetSource;
-
-void MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
-	  return;
-	  
-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != MSInterfaceInfo->Config.InterfaceNumber)
-	  return;
-
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_MassStorageReset:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset = true;			
-
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetMaxLUN:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				Endpoint_Write_Byte(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.TotalLUNs - 1);				
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-				
-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-bool MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	memset(&MSInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MSInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-							         ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize,
-							         MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointSize,
-	                                 MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-void MS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
-		
-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{
-		if (MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(MSInterfaceInfo))
-		{
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Flags & MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN)
-			  Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-			  
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Status = CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(MSInterfaceInfo) ?
-			                                                                 SCSI_Command_Pass : SCSI_Command_Fail;
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Signature           = MS_CSW_SIGNATURE;
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Tag                 = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Tag;
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength;
-
-			if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Status == SCSI_Command_Fail) &&
-			    (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue))
-			{
-				Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-			}
-			
-			MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(MSInterfaceInfo);
-		}
-	}
-	
-	if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-	{
-		Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
-		Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-		
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
-		Endpoint_ClearStall();
-		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-		Endpoint_ClearStall();
-		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
-
-		MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset = false;
-	}
-}
-
-static bool MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
-
-	CallbackIsResetSource = &MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset;
-	if (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock,
-	                            (sizeof(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t) - 16),
-	                            StreamCallback_MS_Device_AbortOnMassStoreReset))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-	
-	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Signature         != MS_CBW_SIGNATURE)                  ||
-	    (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN               >= MSInterfaceInfo->Config.TotalLUNs) ||
-		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Flags              & 0x1F)                              ||
-		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength == 0)                                 ||
-		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength >  16))
-	{
-		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-		
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	CallbackIsResetSource = &MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset;
-	if (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData,
-	                            MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength,
-	                            StreamCallback_MS_Device_AbortOnMassStoreReset))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-static void MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
-
-	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
-	{
-		#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
-		USB_USBTask();
-		#endif
-
-		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-		  return;
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-
-	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
-	{
-		#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
-		USB_USBTask();
-		#endif
-		
-		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-		  return;
-	}
-	
-	CallbackIsResetSource = &MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset;
-	if (Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus, sizeof(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t),
-	                             StreamCallback_MS_Device_AbortOnMassStoreReset))
-	{
-		return;
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-static uint8_t StreamCallback_MS_Device_AbortOnMassStoreReset(void)
-{
-	#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
-	USB_USBTask();
-	#endif
-
-	if (*CallbackIsResetSource)
-	  return STREAMCALLBACK_Abort;
-	else
-	  return STREAMCALLBACK_Continue;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_CLASS_DEVICE_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER
+#include "MassStorage.h"
+
+static volatile bool* CallbackIsResetSource;
+
+void MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+	  
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != MSInterfaceInfo->Config.InterfaceNumber)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_MassStorageReset:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset = true;			
+
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetMaxLUN:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.TotalLUNs - 1);				
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&MSInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MSInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+							         ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize,
+							         MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointSize,
+	                                 MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void MS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
+		
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		if (MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(MSInterfaceInfo))
+		{
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Flags & MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN)
+			  Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+			  
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Status = CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(MSInterfaceInfo) ?
+			                                                                 SCSI_Command_Pass : SCSI_Command_Fail;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Signature           = MS_CSW_SIGNATURE;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Tag                 = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Tag;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength;
+
+			if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Status == SCSI_Command_Fail) &&
+			    (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue))
+			{
+				Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+			}
+			
+			MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(MSInterfaceInfo);
+		}
+	}
+	
+	if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+	{
+		Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
+		Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+		
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
+		Endpoint_ClearStall();
+		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+		Endpoint_ClearStall();
+		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+
+		MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset = false;
+	}
+}
+
+static bool MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
+
+	CallbackIsResetSource = &MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset;
+	if (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock,
+	                            (sizeof(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t) - 16),
+	                            StreamCallback_MS_Device_AbortOnMassStoreReset))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+	
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Signature         != MS_CBW_SIGNATURE)                  ||
+	    (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN               >= MSInterfaceInfo->Config.TotalLUNs) ||
+		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Flags              & 0x1F)                              ||
+		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength == 0)                                 ||
+		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength >  16))
+	{
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+		
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	CallbackIsResetSource = &MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset;
+	if (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData,
+	                            MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength,
+	                            StreamCallback_MS_Device_AbortOnMassStoreReset))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
+
+	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+	{
+		#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+		USB_USBTask();
+		#endif
+
+		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+
+	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+	{
+		#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+		USB_USBTask();
+		#endif
+		
+		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return;
+	}
+	
+	CallbackIsResetSource = &MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset;
+	if (Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus, sizeof(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t),
+	                             StreamCallback_MS_Device_AbortOnMassStoreReset))
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+static uint8_t StreamCallback_MS_Device_AbortOnMassStoreReset(void)
+{
+	#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+	USB_USBTask();
+	#endif
+
+	if (*CallbackIsResetSource)
+	  return STREAMCALLBACK_Abort;
+	else
+	  return STREAMCALLBACK_Continue;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.h
index 8eb150be9..00fd2e251 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.h
@@ -1,168 +1,168 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
- *
- *  Device mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMSDevice Mass Storage Class Device Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Mass Storage USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _MS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-#define _MS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/MassStorage.h"
-		
-		#include <string.h>
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MassStorage.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Type Defines: */										
-			/** \brief Mass Storage Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each Mass Storage interface
-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the Mass Storage class driver functions as the
-			 *  MSInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each Mass Storage interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the Mass Storage interface within the device */
-
-					uint8_t  DataINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the Mass Storage interface's IN data endpoint */
-					uint16_t DataINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the Mass Storage interface's IN data endpoint */
-					bool     DataINEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Mass Storage interface's IN data endpoint should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the Mass Storage interface's OUT data endpoint */
-					uint16_t DataOUTEndpointSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the Mass Storage interface's OUT data endpoint */
-					bool     DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Mass Storage interface's OUT data endpoint should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  TotalLUNs; /**< Total number of logical drives in the Mass Storage interface */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t  CommandBlock; /**< Mass Storage class command block structure, stores the received SCSI
-															 *   command from the host which is to be processed
-															 */
-					MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus; /**< Mass Storage class command status structure, set elements to indicate
-															  *   the issued command's success or failure to the host
-															  */
-					volatile bool IsMassStoreReset; /**< Flag indicating that the host has requested that the Mass Storage interface be reset
-											         *   and that all current Mass Storage operations should immediately abort
-											         */
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
-				          */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t;
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given Mass Storage interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
-			 *  containing the given Mass Storage interface is selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given Mass Storage class interface. This should be
-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
-			 */		
-			void MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** General management task for a given Mass Storage class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage configuration and state
-			 */
-			void MS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Mass Storage class driver callback for the user processing of a received SCSI command. This callback will fire each time the
-			 *  host sends a SCSI command which requires processing by the user application. Inside this callback the user is responsible
-			 *  for the processing of the received SCSI command from the host. The SCSI command is available in the CommandBlock structure
-			 *  inside the Mass Storage class state structure passed as a parameter to the callback function.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the SCSI command was successfully processed, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-		
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_CLASS_DEVICE_C)
-				static void    MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static bool    MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static uint8_t StreamCallback_MS_Device_AbortOnMassStoreReset(void);
-			#endif
-		
-	#endif
-		
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMSDevice Mass Storage Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Mass Storage USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _MS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/MassStorage.h"
+		
+		#include <string.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MassStorage.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */										
+			/** \brief Mass Storage Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each Mass Storage interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the Mass Storage class driver functions as the
+			 *  MSInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each Mass Storage interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the Mass Storage interface within the device */
+
+					uint8_t  DataINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the Mass Storage interface's IN data endpoint */
+					uint16_t DataINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the Mass Storage interface's IN data endpoint */
+					bool     DataINEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Mass Storage interface's IN data endpoint should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the Mass Storage interface's OUT data endpoint */
+					uint16_t DataOUTEndpointSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the Mass Storage interface's OUT data endpoint */
+					bool     DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Mass Storage interface's OUT data endpoint should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  TotalLUNs; /**< Total number of logical drives in the Mass Storage interface */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t  CommandBlock; /**< Mass Storage class command block structure, stores the received SCSI
+															 *   command from the host which is to be processed
+															 */
+					MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus; /**< Mass Storage class command status structure, set elements to indicate
+															  *   the issued command's success or failure to the host
+															  */
+					volatile bool IsMassStoreReset; /**< Flag indicating that the host has requested that the Mass Storage interface be reset
+											         *   and that all current Mass Storage operations should immediately abort
+											         */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given Mass Storage interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
+			 *  containing the given Mass Storage interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given Mass Storage class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+			 */		
+			void MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** General management task for a given Mass Storage class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage configuration and state
+			 */
+			void MS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Mass Storage class driver callback for the user processing of a received SCSI command. This callback will fire each time the
+			 *  host sends a SCSI command which requires processing by the user application. Inside this callback the user is responsible
+			 *  for the processing of the received SCSI command from the host. The SCSI command is available in the CommandBlock structure
+			 *  inside the Mass Storage class state structure passed as a parameter to the callback function.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the SCSI command was successfully processed, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_CLASS_DEVICE_C)
+				static void    MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static bool    MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t StreamCallback_MS_Device_AbortOnMassStoreReset(void);
+			#endif
+		
+	#endif
+		
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c
index 69e8e677d..d71533bb4 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c
@@ -1,472 +1,472 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER
-#include "RNDIS.h"
-
-static const uint32_t PROGMEM AdapterSupportedOIDList[]  =
-	{
-		OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST,
-		OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM,
-		OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS,
-		OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED,
-		OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE,
-		OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE,
-		OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
-		OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED,
-		OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE,
-		OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE,
-		OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
-		OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION,
-		OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
-		OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
-		OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS,
-		OID_GEN_XMIT_OK,
-		OID_GEN_RCV_OK,
-		OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR,
-		OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR,
-		OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER,
-		OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS,
-		OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
-		OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST,
-		OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE,
-		OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT,
-		OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION,
-		OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS,
-	};
-
-void RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
-	  return;
-	  
-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.ControlInterfaceNumber)
-	  return;
-
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer, USB_ControlRequest.wLength);
-				RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(RNDISInterfaceInfo);
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-
-				if (!(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
-				{
-					RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[0] = 0;
-					MessageHeader->MessageLength = 1;
-				}
-
-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer, MessageHeader->MessageLength);				
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-				MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
-			}
-	
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-bool RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	memset(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-							         ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize,
-							         RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointSize,
-	                                 RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointSize,
-	                                 RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-void RNDIS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointNumber);
-
-	if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady)
-	{
-		USB_Request_Header_t Notification = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-			{
-				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-				.bRequest      = NOTIF_ResponseAvailable,
-				.wValue        = 0,
-				.wIndex        = 0,
-				.wLength       = 0,
-			};
-		
-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-		RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = false;
-	}
-	
-	if ((RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState == RNDIS_Data_Initialized) && !(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
-	{
-		RNDIS_Packet_Message_t RNDISPacketHeader;
-
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
-
-		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() && !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameIN.FrameInBuffer))
-		{
-			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-			if (RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength > ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX)
-			{
-				Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-				return;
-			}
-			
-			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameIN.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameIN.FrameLength = RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength;
-
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = true;
-		}
-		
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
-		
-		if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer)
-		{
-			memset(&RNDISPacketHeader, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
-
-			RNDISPacketHeader.MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG;
-			RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT.FrameLength);
-			RNDISPacketHeader.DataOffset    = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
-			RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength    = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT.FrameLength;
-
-			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = false;
-		}
-	}
-}							
-
-void RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Note: Only a single buffer is used for both the received message and its response to save SRAM. Because of
-	         this, response bytes should be filled in order so that they do not clobber unread data in the buffer. */
-
-	RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-
-	switch (MessageHeader->MessageType)
-	{
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG:
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = true;
-			
-			RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*  INITIALIZE_Message  =
-			               (RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t* INITIALIZE_Response =
-			               (RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageType           = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageLength         = sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t);
-			INITIALIZE_Response->RequestId             = INITIALIZE_Message->RequestId;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->Status                = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
-			
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MajorVersion          = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MinorVersion          = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;			
-			INITIALIZE_Response->DeviceFlags           = REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->Medium                = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxPacketsPerTransfer = 1;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxTransferSize       = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
-			INITIALIZE_Response->PacketAlignmentFactor = 0;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListOffset          = 0;
-			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListSize            = 0;
-			
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Initialized;
-		
-			break;
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG:
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = false;
-			MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
-
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
-
-			break;
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG:
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = true;
-						
-			RNDIS_Query_Message_t*  QUERY_Message  = (RNDIS_Query_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			RNDIS_Query_Complete_t* QUERY_Response = (RNDIS_Query_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			uint32_t                Query_Oid      = QUERY_Message->Oid;
-						
-			void*     QueryData = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
-			                                                                    QUERY_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
-			void*     ResponseData = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)];		
-			uint16_t  ResponseSize;
-
-			QUERY_Response->MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT;
-			QUERY_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t);
-						
-			if (RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(RNDISInterfaceInfo, Query_Oid, QueryData, QUERY_Message->InformationBufferLength,
-			                                  ResponseData, &ResponseSize))
-			{
-				QUERY_Response->Status                  = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
-				QUERY_Response->MessageLength          += ResponseSize;
-							
-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = ResponseSize;
-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
-			}
-			else
-			{				
-				QUERY_Response->Status                  = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
-
-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = 0;
-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = 0;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG:
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = true;
-			
-			RNDIS_Set_Message_t*  SET_Message  = (RNDIS_Set_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			RNDIS_Set_Complete_t* SET_Response = (RNDIS_Set_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			uint32_t              SET_Oid      = SET_Message->Oid;
-
-			SET_Response->MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT;
-			SET_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t);
-			SET_Response->RequestId     = SET_Message->RequestId;
-
-			void* SetData = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
-			                                                              SET_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
-						
-			SET_Response->Status = RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(RNDISInterfaceInfo, SET_Oid, SetData,
-			                                                   SET_Message->InformationBufferLength) ?
-			                                                   REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS : REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
-			break;
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG:
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = true;
-			
-			RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t* RESET_Response = (RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-
-			RESET_Response->MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT;
-			RESET_Response->MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t);
-			RESET_Response->Status          = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
-			RESET_Response->AddressingReset = 0;
-
-			break;
-		case REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG:
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = true;
-			
-			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*  KEEPALIVE_Message  =
-			                (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t* KEEPALIVE_Response =
-			                (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
-
-			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT;
-			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t);
-			KEEPALIVE_Response->RequestId     = KEEPALIVE_Message->RequestId;
-			KEEPALIVE_Response->Status        = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
-			
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
-                                          const uint32_t OId, void* const QueryData, const uint16_t QuerySize,
-                                          void* ResponseData, uint16_t* const ResponseSize)
-{
-	(void)QueryData;
-	(void)QuerySize;
-
-	switch (OId)
-	{
-		case OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList);
-			
-			memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterSupportedOIDList, sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList));
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate that the device is a true ethernet link */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = NDIS_HardwareStatus_Ready;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED:
-		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Vendor ID 0x0xFFFFFF is reserved for vendors who have not purchased a NDIS VID */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0x00FFFFFF;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE:
-		case OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE:
-		case OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION:
-			*ResponseSize = (strlen(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterVendorDescription) + 1);
-			
-			memcpy(ResponseData, RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterVendorDescription, *ResponseSize);
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED;
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate 10Mb/s link speed */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 100000;
-
-			return true;
-		case OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS:
-		case OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(MAC_Address_t);
-			
-			memcpy(ResponseData, &RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterMACAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
-
-			return true;
-		case OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate only one multicast address supported */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 1;
-		
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter;
-		
-			return true;			
-		case OID_GEN_XMIT_OK:
-		case OID_GEN_RCV_OK:
-		case OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR:
-		case OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR:
-		case OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER:
-		case OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT:
-		case OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION:
-		case OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Unused statistic OIDs - always return 0 for each */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
-		
-			return true;
-		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE:
-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
-			
-			/* Indicate maximum overall buffer (Ethernet frame and RNDIS header) the adapter can handle */
-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = (RNDIS_MESSAGE_BUFFER_SIZE + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
-		
-			return true;
-		default:
-			return false;
-	}
-}
-
-static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t OId,
-                                        void* SetData, const uint16_t SetSize)
-{
-	(void)SetSize;
-
-	switch (OId)
-	{
-		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter = *((uint32_t*)SetData);
-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState = ((RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter) ?
-			                                      RNDIS_Data_Initialized : RNDIS_Data_Initialized);
-			
-			return true;
-		case OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST:
-			/* Do nothing - throw away the value from the host as it is unused */
-		
-			return true;
-		default:
-			return false;
-	}
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER
+#include "RNDIS.h"
+
+static const uint32_t PROGMEM AdapterSupportedOIDList[]  =
+	{
+		OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST,
+		OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM,
+		OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS,
+		OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED,
+		OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE,
+		OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE,
+		OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
+		OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED,
+		OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE,
+		OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE,
+		OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
+		OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION,
+		OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+		OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
+		OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS,
+		OID_GEN_XMIT_OK,
+		OID_GEN_RCV_OK,
+		OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR,
+		OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR,
+		OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER,
+		OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS,
+		OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
+		OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST,
+		OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE,
+		OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT,
+		OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION,
+		OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS,
+	};
+
+void RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+	  
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.ControlInterfaceNumber)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer, USB_ControlRequest.wLength);
+				RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(RNDISInterfaceInfo);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+				if (!(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
+				{
+					RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[0] = 0;
+					MessageHeader->MessageLength = 1;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer, MessageHeader->MessageLength);				
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
+			}
+	
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+							         ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointSize,
+							         RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointSize,
+	                                 RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointSize,
+	                                 RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank ? ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE : ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void RNDIS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpointNumber);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady)
+	{
+		USB_Request_Header_t Notification = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = NOTIF_ResponseAvailable,
+				.wValue        = 0,
+				.wIndex        = 0,
+				.wLength       = 0,
+			};
+		
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = false;
+	}
+	
+	if ((RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState == RNDIS_Data_Initialized) && !(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
+	{
+		RNDIS_Packet_Message_t RNDISPacketHeader;
+
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpointNumber);
+
+		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() && !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameIN.FrameInBuffer))
+		{
+			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+			if (RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength > ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX)
+			{
+				Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+				return;
+			}
+			
+			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameIN.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameIN.FrameLength = RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength;
+
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = true;
+		}
+		
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpointNumber);
+		
+		if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer)
+		{
+			memset(&RNDISPacketHeader, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
+
+			RNDISPacketHeader.MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG;
+			RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT.FrameLength);
+			RNDISPacketHeader.DataOffset    = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+			RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength    = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT.FrameLength;
+
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = false;
+		}
+	}
+}							
+
+void RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Note: Only a single buffer is used for both the received message and its response to save SRAM. Because of
+	         this, response bytes should be filled in order so that they do not clobber unread data in the buffer. */
+
+	RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+	switch (MessageHeader->MessageType)
+	{
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = true;
+			
+			RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*  INITIALIZE_Message  =
+			               (RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t* INITIALIZE_Response =
+			               (RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageType           = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageLength         = sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->RequestId             = INITIALIZE_Message->RequestId;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->Status                = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+			
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MajorVersion          = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MinorVersion          = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;			
+			INITIALIZE_Response->DeviceFlags           = REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->Medium                = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxPacketsPerTransfer = 1;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxTransferSize       = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->PacketAlignmentFactor = 0;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListOffset          = 0;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListSize            = 0;
+			
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Initialized;
+		
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = false;
+			MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
+
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = true;
+						
+			RNDIS_Query_Message_t*  QUERY_Message  = (RNDIS_Query_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Query_Complete_t* QUERY_Response = (RNDIS_Query_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			uint32_t                Query_Oid      = QUERY_Message->Oid;
+						
+			void*     QueryData = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
+			                                                                    QUERY_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
+			void*     ResponseData = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)];		
+			uint16_t  ResponseSize;
+
+			QUERY_Response->MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT;
+			QUERY_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t);
+						
+			if (RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(RNDISInterfaceInfo, Query_Oid, QueryData, QUERY_Message->InformationBufferLength,
+			                                  ResponseData, &ResponseSize))
+			{
+				QUERY_Response->Status                  = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+				QUERY_Response->MessageLength          += ResponseSize;
+							
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = ResponseSize;
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+			}
+			else
+			{				
+				QUERY_Response->Status                  = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = 0;
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = 0;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = true;
+			
+			RNDIS_Set_Message_t*  SET_Message  = (RNDIS_Set_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Set_Complete_t* SET_Response = (RNDIS_Set_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			uint32_t              SET_Oid      = SET_Message->Oid;
+
+			SET_Response->MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT;
+			SET_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t);
+			SET_Response->RequestId     = SET_Message->RequestId;
+
+			void* SetData = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
+			                                                              SET_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
+						
+			SET_Response->Status = RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(RNDISInterfaceInfo, SET_Oid, SetData,
+			                                                   SET_Message->InformationBufferLength) ?
+			                                                   REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS : REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = true;
+			
+			RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t* RESET_Response = (RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+			RESET_Response->MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT;
+			RESET_Response->MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t);
+			RESET_Response->Status          = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+			RESET_Response->AddressingReset = 0;
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = true;
+			
+			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*  KEEPALIVE_Message  =
+			                (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t* KEEPALIVE_Response =
+			                (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT;
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t);
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->RequestId     = KEEPALIVE_Message->RequestId;
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->Status        = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+			
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint32_t OId, void* const QueryData, const uint16_t QuerySize,
+                                          void* ResponseData, uint16_t* const ResponseSize)
+{
+	(void)QueryData;
+	(void)QuerySize;
+
+	switch (OId)
+	{
+		case OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList);
+			
+			memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterSupportedOIDList, sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList));
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate that the device is a true ethernet link */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = NDIS_HardwareStatus_Ready;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED:
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Vendor ID 0x0xFFFFFF is reserved for vendors who have not purchased a NDIS VID */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0x00FFFFFF;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE:
+		case OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE:
+		case OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION:
+			*ResponseSize = (strlen(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterVendorDescription) + 1);
+			
+			memcpy(ResponseData, RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterVendorDescription, *ResponseSize);
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED;
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate 10Mb/s link speed */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 100000;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS:
+		case OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(MAC_Address_t);
+			
+			memcpy(ResponseData, &RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterMACAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate only one multicast address supported */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 1;
+		
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter;
+		
+			return true;			
+		case OID_GEN_XMIT_OK:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_OK:
+		case OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER:
+		case OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT:
+		case OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION:
+		case OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Unused statistic OIDs - always return 0 for each */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
+		
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+			
+			/* Indicate maximum overall buffer (Ethernet frame and RNDIS header) the adapter can handle */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = (RNDIS_MESSAGE_BUFFER_SIZE + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+		
+			return true;
+		default:
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
+static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t OId,
+                                        void* SetData, const uint16_t SetSize)
+{
+	(void)SetSize;
+
+	switch (OId)
+	{
+		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter = *((uint32_t*)SetData);
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState = ((RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter) ?
+			                                      RNDIS_Data_Initialized : RNDIS_Data_Initialized);
+			
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST:
+			/* Do nothing - throw away the value from the host as it is unused */
+		
+			return true;
+		default:
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.h
index 5408ec70a..865eb0203 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.h
@@ -1,171 +1,171 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
- *
- *  Device mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISDevice RNDIS Class Device Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the RNDIS USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-#define _RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/RNDIS.h"
-		
-		#include <string.h>
-	
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/RNDIS.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Type Defines: */					 
-			/** \brief RNDIS Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each RNDIS interface
-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the RNDIS class driver functions as the
-			 *  RNDISInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each RNDIS interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the CDC control interface within the device */
-
-					uint8_t  DataINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's IN data endpoint */
-					uint16_t DataINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN data endpoint */
-					bool     DataINEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's IN data endpoint should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's OUT data endpoint */
-					uint16_t DataOUTEndpointSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's OUT data endpoint */
-					bool     DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's OUT data endpoint should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  NotificationEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */
-					uint16_t NotificationEndpointSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */
-					bool     NotificationEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's notification endpoint should use double banking */
-					
-					char*         AdapterVendorDescription; /**< String description of the adapter vendor */
-					MAC_Address_t AdapterMACAddress; /**< MAC address of the adapter */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  RNDISMessageBuffer[RNDIS_MESSAGE_BUFFER_SIZE]; /**< Buffer to hold RNDIS messages to and from the host,
-																			 *   managed by the class driver
-																			 */
-					bool     ResponseReady; /**< Internal flag indicating if a RNDIS message is waiting to be returned to the host */
-					uint8_t  CurrRNDISState; /**< Current RNDIS state of the adapter, a value from the RNDIS_States_t enum */
-					uint32_t CurrPacketFilter; /**< Current packet filter mode, used internally by the class driver */
-					Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN; /**< Structure holding the last received Ethernet frame from the host, for user
-													*   processing
-													*/
-					Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT; /**< Structure holding the next Ethernet frame to send to the host, populated by the
-													 *   user application
-													 */
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
-				          */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t;
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given RNDIS interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
-			 *  containing the given HID interface is selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given RNDIS class interface. This should be
-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state
-			 */		
-			void RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** General management task for a given HID class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state
-			 */
-			void RNDIS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-		
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-		#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_C)
-			static void RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
-			                                                    ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, 
-			                                          const uint32_t OId, void* const QueryData, const uint16_t QuerySize,
-										              void* ResponseData, uint16_t* const ResponseSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
-			                                          ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);
-			static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t OId,
-			                                        void* SetData, const uint16_t SetSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
-			                                        ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		#endif
-		
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISDevice RNDIS Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the RNDIS USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/RNDIS.h"
+		
+		#include <string.h>
+	
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/RNDIS.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */					 
+			/** \brief RNDIS Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each RNDIS interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the RNDIS class driver functions as the
+			 *  RNDISInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each RNDIS interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the CDC control interface within the device */
+
+					uint8_t  DataINEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's IN data endpoint */
+					uint16_t DataINEndpointSize; /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN data endpoint */
+					bool     DataINEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's IN data endpoint should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's OUT data endpoint */
+					uint16_t DataOUTEndpointSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's OUT data endpoint */
+					bool     DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's OUT data endpoint should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  NotificationEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint number of the CDC interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */
+					uint16_t NotificationEndpointSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */
+					bool     NotificationEndpointDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's notification endpoint should use double banking */
+					
+					char*         AdapterVendorDescription; /**< String description of the adapter vendor */
+					MAC_Address_t AdapterMACAddress; /**< MAC address of the adapter */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  RNDISMessageBuffer[RNDIS_MESSAGE_BUFFER_SIZE]; /**< Buffer to hold RNDIS messages to and from the host,
+																			 *   managed by the class driver
+																			 */
+					bool     ResponseReady; /**< Internal flag indicating if a RNDIS message is waiting to be returned to the host */
+					uint8_t  CurrRNDISState; /**< Current RNDIS state of the adapter, a value from the RNDIS_States_t enum */
+					uint32_t CurrPacketFilter; /**< Current packet filter mode, used internally by the class driver */
+					Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN; /**< Structure holding the last received Ethernet frame from the host, for user
+													*   processing
+													*/
+					Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT; /**< Structure holding the next Ethernet frame to send to the host, populated by the
+													 *   user application
+													 */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t;
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given RNDIS interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
+			 *  containing the given HID interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the endpoints were successfully configured, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given RNDIS class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state
+			 */		
+			void RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** General management task for a given HID class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state
+			 */
+			void RNDIS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_C)
+			static void RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+			                                                    ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, 
+			                                          const uint32_t OId, void* const QueryData, const uint16_t QuerySize,
+										              void* ResponseData, uint16_t* const ResponseSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                          ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);
+			static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t OId,
+			                                        void* SetData, const uint16_t SetSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                        ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		#endif
+		
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h
index 728b01aa3..539fa4c6d 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h
@@ -1,84 +1,84 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB HID Class driver.
- *
- *  Master include file for the library USB HID Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
- *
- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassHID HID Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/HID.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  HID Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB HID Class, for both Device 
- *  and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the HID class manually 
- *  via the low-level LUFA APIs.
- *
- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
- *  Hosts or Devices using the USB HID Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef _HID_CLASS_H_
-#define _HID_CLASS_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-		
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			#include "Device/HID.h"
-		#endif
-		
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-			#include "Host/HID.h"
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB HID Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassHID HID Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/HID.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  HID Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB HID Class, for both Device 
+ *  and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the HID class manually 
+ *  via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts or Devices using the USB HID Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _HID_CLASS_H_
+#define _HID_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/HID.h"
+		#endif
+		
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/HID.h"
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c
index 8a00616b4..3d158fb75 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c
@@ -1,446 +1,446 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_CLASS_HOST_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
-#include "CDC.h"
-
-uint8_t CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)
-{
-	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	memset(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
-	  return CDC_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
-	
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-	                              DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCDCInterfaceFound;
-	}
-	
-	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).InterfaceNumber;
-
-	while (FoundEndpoints != (CDC_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN | CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
-	{
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-		                              DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			if (FoundEndpoints & CDC_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN)
-			{
-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, 
-				                              DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-				{
-					return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCDCInterfaceFound;
-				}
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeNumber);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-			
-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                              DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-				{
-					return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCDCInterfaceFound;
-				}
-			}
-
-			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-			                              DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-			{
-				return CDC_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
-			}
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
-		{
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.NotificationPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
-				
-				FoundEndpoints |= CDC_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN;
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-				                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, 
-				                   CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-				FoundEndpoints |= CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, 
-								   CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			
-				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-				
-				FoundEndpoints |= CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice = (CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS | CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR);
-	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost = (CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD  | CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR);
-	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
-	return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
-	
-		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == CDC_CONTROL_CLASS)    &&
-		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) &&
-			(CurrentInterface->Protocol == CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
-	
-		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == CDC_DATA_CLASS)    &&
-		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS) &&
-			(CurrentInterface->Protocol == CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-	
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (CurrentEndpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-	
-		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&
-		    !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress)))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-void CDC_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return;
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
-	{
-		USB_Request_Header_t Notification;
-		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-		
-		if ((Notification.bRequest      == NOTIF_SerialState) &&
-		    (Notification.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)))
-		{
-			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost,
-			                    sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost),
-			                    NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-			
-		}
-
-		Pipe_ClearIN();
-
-		EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);
-	}
-	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-	{
-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-		.bRequest      = REQ_SetLineEncoding,
-		.wValue        = 0,
-		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
-		.wLength       = sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding),
-	};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding);
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-	{
-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-		.bRequest      = REQ_SetControlLineState,
-		.wValue        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice,
-		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
-		.wLength       = 0,
-	};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Host_SendBreak(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Duration)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-	{
-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-		.bRequest      = REQ_SendBreak,
-		.wValue        = Duration,
-		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
-		.wLength       = 0,
-	};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, char* Data, const uint16_t Length)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);	
-
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Data, Length, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Data)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
-	  
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);	
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	{
-		Pipe_ClearOUT();
-
-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	Pipe_Write_Byte(Data);	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
-}
-
-uint16_t CDC_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return 0;
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
-	{
-		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
-		{
-			Pipe_ClearIN();
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-			return 0;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-			return Pipe_BytesInPipe();
-		}
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		
-		return 0;
-	}
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t ReceivedByte = 0;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return 0;
-	  
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	ReceivedByte = Pipe_Read_Byte();
-	
-	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
-	  Pipe_ClearIN();
-	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return ReceivedByte;
-}
-
-uint8_t CDC_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
-	  
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);	
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
-
-	bool BankFull = !(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed());
-
-	Pipe_ClearOUT();
-
-	if (BankFull)
-	{
-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-
-		Pipe_ClearOUT();
-	}
-
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
-}
-
-void CDC_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream)
-{
-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Host_putchar, CDC_Host_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
-	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
-}
-
-void CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream)
-{
-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Host_putchar, CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
-	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
-}
-
-static int CDC_Host_putchar(char c, FILE* Stream)
-{
-	return CDC_Host_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;
-}
-
-static int CDC_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream)
-{
-	if (!(CDC_Host_BytesReceived((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))))
-	  return _FDEV_EOF;
-
-	return CDC_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
-}
-
-static int CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)
-{
-	while (!(CDC_Host_BytesReceived((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))))
-	{
-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return _FDEV_EOF;
-
-		CDC_Host_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-
-	return CDC_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
-}
-
-void CDC_Host_Event_Stub(void)
-{
-
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_CLASS_HOST_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
+#include "CDC.h"
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	memset(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return CDC_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+	
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                              DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCDCInterfaceFound;
+	}
+	
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).InterfaceNumber;
+
+	while (FoundEndpoints != (CDC_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN | CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
+	{
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (FoundEndpoints & CDC_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN)
+			{
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, 
+				                              DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCDCInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeNumber);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+			
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                              DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCDCInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+			                              DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				return CDC_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+		{
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.NotificationPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
+				
+				FoundEndpoints |= CDC_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+				                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, 
+				                   CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+				FoundEndpoints |= CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, 
+								   CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			
+				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+				
+				FoundEndpoints |= CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice = (CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS | CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR);
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost = (CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD  | CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR);
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+	return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+	
+		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == CDC_CONTROL_CLASS)    &&
+		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) &&
+			(CurrentInterface->Protocol == CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+	
+		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == CDC_DATA_CLASS)    &&
+		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS) &&
+			(CurrentInterface->Protocol == CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+	
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (CurrentEndpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+	
+		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&
+		    !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress)))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+void CDC_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return;
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		USB_Request_Header_t Notification;
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+		
+		if ((Notification.bRequest      == NOTIF_SerialState) &&
+		    (Notification.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)))
+		{
+			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost,
+			                    sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost),
+			                    NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+			
+		}
+
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+		EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);
+	}
+	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+		.bRequest      = REQ_SetLineEncoding,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
+		.wLength       = sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding),
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding);
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+		.bRequest      = REQ_SetControlLineState,
+		.wValue        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice,
+		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
+		.wLength       = 0,
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SendBreak(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Duration)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+		.bRequest      = REQ_SendBreak,
+		.wValue        = Duration,
+		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
+		.wLength       = 0,
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, char* Data, const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);	
+
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Data, Length, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Data)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+	  
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);	
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Write_Byte(Data);	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint16_t CDC_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return 0;
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return 0;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return Pipe_BytesInPipe();
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		
+		return 0;
+	}
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ReceivedByte = 0;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return 0;
+	  
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	ReceivedByte = Pipe_Read_Byte();
+	
+	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+	  Pipe_ClearIN();
+	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+	  
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);	
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+
+	bool BankFull = !(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	if (BankFull)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+void CDC_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Host_putchar, CDC_Host_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+void CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Host_putchar, CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+static int CDC_Host_putchar(char c, FILE* Stream)
+{
+	return CDC_Host_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;
+}
+
+static int CDC_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	if (!(CDC_Host_BytesReceived((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))))
+	  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+	return CDC_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+}
+
+static int CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	while (!(CDC_Host_BytesReceived((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))))
+	{
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+		CDC_Host_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	return CDC_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+}
+
+void CDC_Host_Event_Stub(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.h
index 3ea2d51d7..9c59ad343 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.h
@@ -1,336 +1,336 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
- *
- *  Host mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassCDCHost CDC Class Host Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the CDC USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __CDC_CLASS_HOST_H__
-#define __CDC_CLASS_HOST_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/CDC.h"
-
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/CDC.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief CDC Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
-			 *  and passed to each of the CDC class driver functions as the CDCInterfaceInfo parameter. This
-			 *  stores each CDC interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the CDC interface's IN data pipe */
-					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the CDC interface's OUT data pipe */
-					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  NotificationPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the CDC interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */			
-					bool     NotificationPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's notification pipe should use double banking */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
-					                *   after \ref CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
-					                *   Configured state
-					                */
-					uint8_t ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the CDC-ACM control interface within the attached device */
-				
-					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN data pipe */
-					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's OUT data pipe */
-					uint16_t NotificationPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN notification pipe, if used */
-					
-					struct
-					{
-						uint8_t HostToDevice; /**< Control line states from the host to device, as a set of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_*
-											   *   masks - to notify the device of changes to these values, call the
-											   *   \ref CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange() function.
-											   */
-						uint8_t DeviceToHost; /**< Control line states from the device to host, as a set of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_*
-											   *   masks. This value is updated each time \ref CDC_Host_USBTask() is called.
-											   */
-					} ControlLineStates; /**< Current states of the virtual serial port's control lines between the device and host. */
-					
-					struct
-					{
-						uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
-						uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
-											  *   CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
-											  */
-						uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
-											  *   CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
-											  */
-						uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per character of the virtual serial port */
-					} LineEncoding; /** Line encoding used in the virtual serial port, for the device's information. This is generally
-					                 *  only used if the virtual serial port data is to be reconstructed on a physical UART. When set
-					                 *  by the host application, the \ref CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding() function must be called to push
-					                 *  the changes to the device.
-					                 */
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
-						  *   the interface is enumerated.
-						  */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t;
-			
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
-			enum CDCHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-				CDC_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-				CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCDCInterfaceFound        = 2, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-				CDC_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible CDC endpoints were not found in the device's CDC interface */
-			};
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** General management task for a given CDC host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 */
-			void CDC_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given CDC host interface instance using the Configuration
-			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given CDC Host instance's
-			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.
-			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in
-			 *  the Addressed state.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref CDCHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-			                                void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-			
-			/** Sets the line encoding for the attached device's virtual serial port. This should be called when the LineEncoding
-			 *  values of the interface have been changed to push the new settings to the USB device.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Sends a Serial Control Line State Change notification to the device. This should be called when the virtual serial
-			 *  control lines (DTR, RTS, etc.) have changed states. Line states persist until they are cleared via a second
-			 *  notification. This should be called each time the CDC class driver's ControlLineStates.HostToDevice value is updated
-			 *  to push the new states to the USB device.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Sends a Send Break request to the device. This is generally used to seperate data data or to indicate a special condition
-			 *  to the receiving device.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in]     Duration          Duration of the break, in milliseconds
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendBreak(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Duration) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Sends a given string to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is called, the
-			 *  string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank becomes full, or the
-			 *  \ref CDC_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be 
-			 *  packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Data  Pointer to the string to send to the device
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Size in bytes of the string to send to the device
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, char* Data, const uint16_t Length)
-			                            ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-			
-			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is called, the
-			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank becomes full, or the
-			 *  \ref CDC_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be 
-			 *  packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Data  Byte of data to send to the device
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the CDC interface from the device, waiting to be read.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the device
-			 */
-			uint16_t CDC_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Reads a byte of data from the device. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB device is not connected, the function
-			 *  returns 0. The \ref CDC_Host_BytesReceived() function should be queried before data is received to ensure that no data
-			 *  underflow occurs.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next received byte from the device, or 0 if no data received
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t CDC_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Creates a standard characer stream for the given CDC Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular
-			 *  functions in the avr-libc <stdio.h> library that accept a FILE stream as a destination (e.g. fprintf). The created
-			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.
-			 *
-			 *  \note The created stream can be given as stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all <stdio.h> functions
-			 *        to the given CDC interface.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed
-			 */
-			void CDC_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream);
-
-			/** Identical to CDC_Host_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates
-			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and CDC service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed
-			 */
-			void CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream);
-
-			/** CDC class driver event for a control line state change on a CDC host interface. This event fires each time the device notifies
-			 *  the host of a control line state change (containing the virtual serial control line states, such as DCD) and may be hooked in the
-			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new control line states
-			 *  are available in the ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost value inside the CDC host interface structure passed as a parameter, set as
-			 *  a mask of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
-			 */
-			void EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define CDC_CONTROL_CLASS               0x02
-			#define CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS            0x02
-			#define CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL            0x01
-			#define CDC_DATA_CLASS                  0x0A
-			#define CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS               0x00
-			#define CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL               0x00
-			
-			#define CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 0)
-			#define CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 1)
-			#define CDC_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN       (1 << 2)
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_CLASS_HOST_C)
-				static int CDC_Host_putchar(char c, FILE* Stream);
-				static int CDC_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream);
-				static int CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream);
-
-				void CDC_Host_Event_Stub(void);
-				void EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-				                                           ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Host_Event_Stub);
-				static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
-			#endif	
-	#endif
-				
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassCDCHost CDC Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the CDC USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __CDC_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __CDC_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/CDC.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/CDC.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief CDC Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the CDC class driver functions as the CDCInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each CDC interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the CDC interface's IN data pipe */
+					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the CDC interface's OUT data pipe */
+					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  NotificationPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the CDC interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */			
+					bool     NotificationPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the CDC interface's notification pipe should use double banking */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state
+					                */
+					uint8_t ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the CDC-ACM control interface within the attached device */
+				
+					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN data pipe */
+					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's OUT data pipe */
+					uint16_t NotificationPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the CDC interface's IN notification pipe, if used */
+					
+					struct
+					{
+						uint8_t HostToDevice; /**< Control line states from the host to device, as a set of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_*
+											   *   masks - to notify the device of changes to these values, call the
+											   *   \ref CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange() function.
+											   */
+						uint8_t DeviceToHost; /**< Control line states from the device to host, as a set of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_*
+											   *   masks. This value is updated each time \ref CDC_Host_USBTask() is called.
+											   */
+					} ControlLineStates; /**< Current states of the virtual serial port's control lines between the device and host. */
+					
+					struct
+					{
+						uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
+						uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+											  *   CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
+											  */
+						uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+											  *   CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
+											  */
+						uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per character of the virtual serial port */
+					} LineEncoding; /** Line encoding used in the virtual serial port, for the device's information. This is generally
+					                 *  only used if the virtual serial port data is to be reconstructed on a physical UART. When set
+					                 *  by the host application, the \ref CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding() function must be called to push
+					                 *  the changes to the device.
+					                 */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t;
+			
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum CDCHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+				CDC_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+				CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCDCInterfaceFound        = 2, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+				CDC_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible CDC endpoints were not found in the device's CDC interface */
+			};
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** General management task for a given CDC host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 */
+			void CDC_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given CDC host interface instance using the Configuration
+			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given CDC Host instance's
+			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.
+			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in
+			 *  the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref CDCHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+			
+			/** Sets the line encoding for the attached device's virtual serial port. This should be called when the LineEncoding
+			 *  values of the interface have been changed to push the new settings to the USB device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a Serial Control Line State Change notification to the device. This should be called when the virtual serial
+			 *  control lines (DTR, RTS, etc.) have changed states. Line states persist until they are cleared via a second
+			 *  notification. This should be called each time the CDC class driver's ControlLineStates.HostToDevice value is updated
+			 *  to push the new states to the USB device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Sends a Send Break request to the device. This is generally used to seperate data data or to indicate a special condition
+			 *  to the receiving device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in]     Duration          Duration of the break, in milliseconds
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendBreak(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Duration) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Sends a given string to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is called, the
+			 *  string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank becomes full, or the
+			 *  \ref CDC_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be 
+			 *  packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Pointer to the string to send to the device
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Size in bytes of the string to send to the device
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, char* Data, const uint16_t Length)
+			                            ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			
+			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is called, the
+			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank becomes full, or the
+			 *  \ref CDC_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be 
+			 *  packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Byte of data to send to the device
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the CDC interface from the device, waiting to be read.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the device
+			 */
+			uint16_t CDC_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads a byte of data from the device. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB device is not connected, the function
+			 *  returns 0. The \ref CDC_Host_BytesReceived() function should be queried before data is received to ensure that no data
+			 *  underflow occurs.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next received byte from the device, or 0 if no data received
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Creates a standard characer stream for the given CDC Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular
+			 *  functions in the avr-libc <stdio.h> library that accept a FILE stream as a destination (e.g. fprintf). The created
+			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The created stream can be given as stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all <stdio.h> functions
+			 *        to the given CDC interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed
+			 */
+			void CDC_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream);
+
+			/** Identical to CDC_Host_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates
+			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and CDC service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed
+			 */
+			void CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* CDCInterfaceInfo, FILE* Stream);
+
+			/** CDC class driver event for a control line state change on a CDC host interface. This event fires each time the device notifies
+			 *  the host of a control line state change (containing the virtual serial control line states, such as DCD) and may be hooked in the
+			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new control line states
+			 *  are available in the ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost value inside the CDC host interface structure passed as a parameter, set as
+			 *  a mask of CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state
+			 */
+			void EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define CDC_CONTROL_CLASS               0x02
+			#define CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS            0x02
+			#define CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL            0x01
+			#define CDC_DATA_CLASS                  0x0A
+			#define CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS               0x00
+			#define CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL               0x00
+			
+			#define CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 0)
+			#define CDC_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 1)
+			#define CDC_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN       (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_CLASS_HOST_C)
+				static int CDC_Host_putchar(char c, FILE* Stream);
+				static int CDC_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream);
+				static int CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream);
+
+				void CDC_Host_Event_Stub(void);
+				void EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+				                                           ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Host_Event_Stub);
+				static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DComp_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
+			#endif	
+	#endif
+				
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c
index 24dcceb4d..f7292d742 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c
@@ -1,362 +1,362 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_CLASS_HOST_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
-#include "HID.h"
-
-uint8_t HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)
-{
-	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	memset(&HIDInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(HIDInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
-	  return HID_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
-	
-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentHIDInterface;
-	
-	do
-	{
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-									  DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			return HID_ENUMERROR_NoHIDInterfaceFound;
-		}
-		
-		CurrentHIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
-	} while (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDInterfaceProtocol &&
-	         (CurrentHIDInterface->Protocol != HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDInterfaceProtocol));
-
-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber      = CurrentHIDInterface->InterfaceNumber;
-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.SupportsBootProtocol = (CurrentHIDInterface->SubClass != HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL);
-
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		return HID_ENUMERROR_NoHIDDescriptorFound;
-	}
-
-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_HID_Descriptor_t).HIDReportLength;
-
-	while (FoundEndpoints != (HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
-	{
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-		                              DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			if (FoundEndpoints & HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN)
-			  break;
-				
-			return HID_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-							   HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			HIDInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-			
-			FoundEndpoints |= HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-							   HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			HIDInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-			
-			HIDInterfaceInfo->State.DeviceUsesOUTPipe = true;
-			
-			FoundEndpoints |= HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;		
-		}
-	}
-
-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize = 8;
-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
-	return HID_ENUMERROR_NoError;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
-	
-		if (CurrentInterface->Class == HID_INTERFACE_CLASS)
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID)
-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	else
-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;	  
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);	
-
-		if (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress)))
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, void* Buffer)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-	{
-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-		.bRequest      = REQ_SetReport,
-		.wValue        = ((REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In + 1) << 8) | ReportID,
-		.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-		.wLength       = USB_GetHIDReportSize(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData, ReportID, REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In),
-	};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
-}											   
-#endif
-										   
-uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	uint16_t ReportSize;
-	uint8_t* BufferPos = Buffer;
-
-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-	if (!(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol))
-	{
-		uint8_t ReportID = 0;
-	
-		if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData->UsingReportIDs)
-		{
-			ReportID = Pipe_Read_Byte();
-			*(BufferPos++) = ReportID;
-		}
-		
-		ReportSize = USB_GetHIDReportSize(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData, ReportID, REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In);
-	}
-	else
-#endif
-	{
-		ReportSize = Pipe_BytesInPipe();
-	}
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPos, ReportSize, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	 
-	Pipe_ClearIN();		
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t HID_Host_SendReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-                                const uint8_t ReportID,
-#endif
-                                void* Buffer, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return false;
-
-	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.DeviceUsesOUTPipe)
-	{
-		uint8_t ErrorCode;
-	
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-		
-		if (ReportID)
-		  Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&ReportID, sizeof(ReportID), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-		
-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, ReportSize, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-		
-		Pipe_ClearOUT();
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		
-		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-	}
-	else
-#endif
-	{
-		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_SetReport,
-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-			.wValue        = ((REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out + 1) << 8) | ReportID,
-#else
-			.wValue        = ((REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out + 1) << 8),
-#endif
-			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-			.wLength       = ReportSize,
-		};
-
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-		
-		return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
-	}
-}
-
-bool HID_Host_IsReportReceived(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return false;
-
-	bool ReportReceived;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	ReportReceived = Pipe_IsINReceived();
-	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return ReportReceived;
-}
-
-uint8_t HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_SetProtocol,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-			.wLength       = 0,
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	
-	if (!(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.SupportsBootProtocol))
-	  return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize = 8;
-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol = true;
-	
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-uint8_t HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize];
-	
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
-			.wValue        = (DTYPE_Report << 8),
-			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-			.wLength       = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize,
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	  
-	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol)
-	{
-		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-			{
-				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-				.bRequest      = REQ_SetProtocol,
-				.wValue        = 1,
-				.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-				.wLength       = 0,
-			};
-
-		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-
-		HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol = false;
-	}
-	
-	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData == NULL)
-	  return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL;
-		
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize,
-	                                      HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData)) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
-	{
-		return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL | ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	uint8_t LargestReportSizeBits = HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData->LargestReportSizeBits;
-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize = (LargestReportSizeBits >> 3) + ((LargestReportSizeBits & 0x07) != 0);
-
-	return 0;
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_CLASS_HOST_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
+#include "HID.h"
+
+uint8_t HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	memset(&HIDInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(HIDInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return HID_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+	
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentHIDInterface;
+	
+	do
+	{
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+									  DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			return HID_ENUMERROR_NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+		}
+		
+		CurrentHIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+	} while (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDInterfaceProtocol &&
+	         (CurrentHIDInterface->Protocol != HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDInterfaceProtocol));
+
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber      = CurrentHIDInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.SupportsBootProtocol = (CurrentHIDInterface->SubClass != HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL);
+
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		return HID_ENUMERROR_NoHIDDescriptorFound;
+	}
+
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_HID_Descriptor_t).HIDReportLength;
+
+	while (FoundEndpoints != (HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
+	{
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (FoundEndpoints & HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN)
+			  break;
+				
+			return HID_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+							   HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			HIDInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+			
+			FoundEndpoints |= HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+							   HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			HIDInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+			
+			HIDInterfaceInfo->State.DeviceUsesOUTPipe = true;
+			
+			FoundEndpoints |= HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;		
+		}
+	}
+
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize = 8;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+	return HID_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+	
+		if (CurrentInterface->Class == HID_INTERFACE_CLASS)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;	  
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);	
+
+		if (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress)))
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, void* Buffer)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+		.bRequest      = REQ_SetReport,
+		.wValue        = ((REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In + 1) << 8) | ReportID,
+		.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+		.wLength       = USB_GetHIDReportSize(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData, ReportID, REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In),
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}											   
+#endif
+										   
+uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	uint16_t ReportSize;
+	uint8_t* BufferPos = Buffer;
+
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+	if (!(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol))
+	{
+		uint8_t ReportID = 0;
+	
+		if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData->UsingReportIDs)
+		{
+			ReportID = Pipe_Read_Byte();
+			*(BufferPos++) = ReportID;
+		}
+		
+		ReportSize = USB_GetHIDReportSize(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData, ReportID, REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In);
+	}
+	else
+#endif
+	{
+		ReportSize = Pipe_BytesInPipe();
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPos, ReportSize, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	 
+	Pipe_ClearIN();		
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t HID_Host_SendReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+                                const uint8_t ReportID,
+#endif
+                                void* Buffer, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return false;
+
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.DeviceUsesOUTPipe)
+	{
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+	
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+		
+		if (ReportID)
+		  Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&ReportID, sizeof(ReportID), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+		
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, ReportSize, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+		
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		
+		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+	}
+	else
+#endif
+	{
+		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_SetReport,
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+			.wValue        = ((REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out + 1) << 8) | ReportID,
+#else
+			.wValue        = ((REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out + 1) << 8),
+#endif
+			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = ReportSize,
+		};
+
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+		
+		return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+	}
+}
+
+bool HID_Host_IsReportReceived(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return false;
+
+	bool ReportReceived;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	ReportReceived = Pipe_IsINReceived();
+	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return ReportReceived;
+}
+
+uint8_t HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_SetProtocol,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	
+	if (!(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.SupportsBootProtocol))
+	  return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize = 8;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol = true;
+	
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+uint8_t HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize];
+	
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (DTYPE_Report << 8),
+			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	  
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol)
+	{
+		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = REQ_SetProtocol,
+				.wValue        = 1,
+				.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+				.wLength       = 0,
+			};
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol = false;
+	}
+	
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData == NULL)
+	  return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL;
+		
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize,
+	                                      HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData)) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
+	{
+		return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL | ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	uint8_t LargestReportSizeBits = HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData->LargestReportSizeBits;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize = (LargestReportSizeBits >> 3) + ((LargestReportSizeBits & 0x07) != 0);
+
+	return 0;
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.h
index 9c0400640..1291bd2cf 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.h
@@ -1,312 +1,312 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
- *
- *  Host mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassHIDHost HID Class Host Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the HID USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __HID_CLASS_HOST_H__
-#define __HID_CLASS_HOST_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/HID.h"
-		#include "HIDParser.h"
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/HID.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Error code for some HID Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error */
-			#define HID_ERROR_LOGICAL              0x80
-	
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief HID Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
-			 *  and passed to each of the HID class driver functions as the HIDInterfaceInfo parameter. This
-			 *  stores each HID interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the HID interface's IN data pipe */
-					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the HID interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the HID interface's OUT data pipe */
-					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the HID interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  HIDInterfaceProtocol; /**< HID interface protocol value to match against if a specific
-					                                *   boot subclass protocol is required, either \ref HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
-													*   \ref HID_BOOT_KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL or \ref HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL if any
-													*   HID device should be enumerated by the interface
-					                                */
-					#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-					HID_ReportInfo_t* HIDParserData; /**< HID parser data to store the parsed HID report data, when boot protocol
-					                                  *   is not used
-													  *
-					                                  *  \note When the HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined,
-					                                  *        this method is unavailable.
-					                                  */
-					#endif
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
-					                *   after \ref HID_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
-					                *   Configured state
-					                */
-					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the HID interface within the attached device */
-
-					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the HID interface's IN data pipe */
-					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the HID interface's OUT data pipe */
-					
-					bool SupportsBootProtocol; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance supports the HID Boot
-					                            *   Protocol when enabled via \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol()
-					                            */
-					bool DeviceUsesOUTPipe; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance uses a separate OUT data pipe for
-					                         *   OUT reports, or if OUT reports are sent via the control pipe instead.
-					                         */
-					bool UsingBootProtocol; /**< Indicates that the interface is currently initialized in Boot Protocol mode */
-					uint16_t HIDReportSize; /**< Size in bytes of the HID report descriptor in the device */
-					
-					uint8_t LargestReportSize; /**< Largest report the device will send, in bytes */
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
-						  *   the interface is enumerated.
-						  */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t;
-
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref HID_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
-			enum HIDHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				HID_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-				HID_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-				HID_ENUMERROR_NoHIDInterfaceFound        = 2, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-				HID_ENUMERROR_NoHIDDescriptorFound       = 3, /**< The HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
-				HID_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 4, /**< Compatible HID endpoints were not found in the device's HID interface */
-			};
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given HID host interface instance using the Configuration
-			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given HID Host instance's
-			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the
-			 *  device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state
-			 *  machine is in the Addressed state.
-			 *
-			 *  \note Once the device pipes are configured, the HID device's reporting protocol <b>must</b> be set via a call
-			 *        to either the \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol() or \ref HID_Host_SetReportProtocol() function.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref HIDHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-			                                void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-
-			/** Receives a HID IN report from the attached HID device, when a report has been received on the HID IN Data pipe.
-			 *  
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note The destination buffer should be large enough to accommodate the largest report that the attached device
-			 *        can generate.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Buffer to store the received report into
-			 *
-			 *  \return An error code from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer)
-			                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-			/** Receives a HID IN report from the attached device, by the report ID.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note When the HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method is unavailable.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report if ControlRequest is false, set by the to the Report ID to fetch
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Buffer to store the received report into
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-			                                   void* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-			#endif
-			
-			/** Sends an OUT report to the currently attached HID device, using the device's OUT pipe if available or the device's
-			 *  Control pipe if not.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note When the HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, the ReportID parameter is removed
-			 *        from the parameter list of this function.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the report to send to the device, or 0 if the device does not use report IDs
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Buffer containing the report to send to the attached device
-			 *  \param[in] ReportSize  Report size in bytes to send to the attached device
-			 *
-			 *  \return An error code from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum if the DeviceUsesOUTPipe flag is set in
-			 *          the interface's state structure, a value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum otherwise
-			 */
-			uint8_t HID_Host_SendReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
-			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-			                                const uint8_t ReportID,
-			#endif
-			                                void* Buffer, const uint16_t ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
-			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-			#else
-			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-			#endif
-
-			/** Determines if a HID IN report has been received from the attached device on the data IN pipe.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if a report has been received, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool HID_Host_IsReportReceived(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Switches the attached HID device's reporting protocol over to the Boot Report protocol mode, on supported devices.
-			 *
-			 *  \note When the HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method must still be called
-			 *        to explicitly place the attached device into boot protocol mode before use.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL if the device does not support Boot Protocol mode, a value from the
-			 *          \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum otherwise
-			 */
-			uint8_t HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
-			/** Switches the attached HID device's reporting protocol over to the standard Report protocol mode. This also retrieves
-			 *  and parses the device's HID report descriptor, so that the size of each report can be determined in advance.
-			 *
-			 *  \note Whether this function is used or not, the \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() callback from the HID
-			 *        Report Parser this function references <b>must</b> be implemented in the user code.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note When the HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method is unavailable.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum if an error occurs while retrieving the HID
-			 *          Report descriptor or the setting of the Report protocol, \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL if the HID interface does
-			 *          not have a valid \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure set in its configuration, a mask of \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL
-			 *          and a value from the \ref HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t otherwise
-			 */
-			uint8_t HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			#endif
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** General management task for a given Human Interface Class host class interface, required for the correct operation of
-			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
-			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
-			 */
-			static inline void HID_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo);
-			static inline void HID_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				(void)HIDInterfaceInfo;
-			}		
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define HID_INTERFACE_CLASS             0x03
-			
-			#define HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 0)
-			#define HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 1)
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_CLASS_HOST_C)
-				static uint8_t DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static uint8_t DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			#endif	
-	#endif	
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassHIDHost HID Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the HID USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __HID_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __HID_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/HID.h"
+		#include "HIDParser.h"
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/HID.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Error code for some HID Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error */
+			#define HID_ERROR_LOGICAL              0x80
+	
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief HID Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the HID class driver functions as the HIDInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each HID interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the HID interface's IN data pipe */
+					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the HID interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the HID interface's OUT data pipe */
+					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the HID interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  HIDInterfaceProtocol; /**< HID interface protocol value to match against if a specific
+					                                *   boot subclass protocol is required, either \ref HID_BOOT_MOUSE_PROTOCOL,
+													*   \ref HID_BOOT_KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL or \ref HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL if any
+													*   HID device should be enumerated by the interface
+					                                */
+					#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+					HID_ReportInfo_t* HIDParserData; /**< HID parser data to store the parsed HID report data, when boot protocol
+					                                  *   is not used
+													  *
+					                                  *  \note When the HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined,
+					                                  *        this method is unavailable.
+					                                  */
+					#endif
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref HID_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state
+					                */
+					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the HID interface within the attached device */
+
+					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the HID interface's IN data pipe */
+					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the HID interface's OUT data pipe */
+					
+					bool SupportsBootProtocol; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance supports the HID Boot
+					                            *   Protocol when enabled via \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol()
+					                            */
+					bool DeviceUsesOUTPipe; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance uses a separate OUT data pipe for
+					                         *   OUT reports, or if OUT reports are sent via the control pipe instead.
+					                         */
+					bool UsingBootProtocol; /**< Indicates that the interface is currently initialized in Boot Protocol mode */
+					uint16_t HIDReportSize; /**< Size in bytes of the HID report descriptor in the device */
+					
+					uint8_t LargestReportSize; /**< Largest report the device will send, in bytes */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref HID_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum HIDHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HID_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+				HID_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+				HID_ENUMERROR_NoHIDInterfaceFound        = 2, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+				HID_ENUMERROR_NoHIDDescriptorFound       = 3, /**< The HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
+				HID_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 4, /**< Compatible HID endpoints were not found in the device's HID interface */
+			};
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given HID host interface instance using the Configuration
+			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given HID Host instance's
+			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the
+			 *  device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state
+			 *  machine is in the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Once the device pipes are configured, the HID device's reporting protocol <b>must</b> be set via a call
+			 *        to either the \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol() or \ref HID_Host_SetReportProtocol() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref HIDHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+
+			/** Receives a HID IN report from the attached HID device, when a report has been received on the HID IN Data pipe.
+			 *  
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The destination buffer should be large enough to accommodate the largest report that the attached device
+			 *        can generate.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Buffer to store the received report into
+			 *
+			 *  \return An error code from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer)
+			                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+			/** Receives a HID IN report from the attached device, by the report ID.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note When the HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method is unavailable.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report if ControlRequest is false, set by the to the Report ID to fetch
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Buffer to store the received report into
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+			                                   void* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+			#endif
+			
+			/** Sends an OUT report to the currently attached HID device, using the device's OUT pipe if available or the device's
+			 *  Control pipe if not.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note When the HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, the ReportID parameter is removed
+			 *        from the parameter list of this function.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the report to send to the device, or 0 if the device does not use report IDs
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Buffer containing the report to send to the attached device
+			 *  \param[in] ReportSize  Report size in bytes to send to the attached device
+			 *
+			 *  \return An error code from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum if the DeviceUsesOUTPipe flag is set in
+			 *          the interface's state structure, a value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum otherwise
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_SendReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+			                                const uint8_t ReportID,
+			#endif
+			                                void* Buffer, const uint16_t ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+			#else
+			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			#endif
+
+			/** Determines if a HID IN report has been received from the attached device on the data IN pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if a report has been received, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool HID_Host_IsReportReceived(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Switches the attached HID device's reporting protocol over to the Boot Report protocol mode, on supported devices.
+			 *
+			 *  \note When the HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method must still be called
+			 *        to explicitly place the attached device into boot protocol mode before use.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL if the device does not support Boot Protocol mode, a value from the
+			 *          \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum otherwise
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+			/** Switches the attached HID device's reporting protocol over to the standard Report protocol mode. This also retrieves
+			 *  and parses the device's HID report descriptor, so that the size of each report can be determined in advance.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Whether this function is used or not, the \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() callback from the HID
+			 *        Report Parser this function references <b>must</b> be implemented in the user code.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note When the HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method is unavailable.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum if an error occurs while retrieving the HID
+			 *          Report descriptor or the setting of the Report protocol, \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL if the HID interface does
+			 *          not have a valid \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure set in its configuration, a mask of \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL
+			 *          and a value from the \ref HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t otherwise
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given Human Interface Class host class interface, required for the correct operation of
+			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
+			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state
+			 */
+			static inline void HID_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo);
+			static inline void HID_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)HIDInterfaceInfo;
+			}		
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define HID_INTERFACE_CLASS             0x03
+			
+			#define HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 0)
+			#define HID_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 1)
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_CLASS_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DComp_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif	
+	#endif	
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c
index 386c3b937..7116ed866 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c
@@ -1,353 +1,353 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#include "HIDParser.h"
-
-uint8_t USB_ProcessHIDReport(const uint8_t* ReportData, uint16_t ReportSize, HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData)
-{
-	HID_StateTable_t      StateTable[HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH];
-	HID_StateTable_t*     CurrStateTable          = &StateTable[0];
-	HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrCollectionPath      = NULL;
-	HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo        = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[0];			
-	uint16_t              UsageList[HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH];
-	uint8_t               UsageListSize           = 0;
-	HID_MinMax_t          UsageMinMax             = {0, 0};
-
-	memset(ParserData,       0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportInfo_t));
-	memset(CurrStateTable,   0x00, sizeof(HID_StateTable_t));
-	memset(CurrReportIDInfo, 0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportSizeInfo_t));
-
-	ParserData->TotalDeviceReports = 1;	
-
-	while (ReportSize)
-	{
-		uint8_t  HIDReportItem  = *ReportData;
-		uint32_t ReportItemData = 0;
-		
-		ReportData++;
-		ReportSize--;
-		
-		switch (HIDReportItem & DATA_SIZE_MASK)
-		{
-			case DATA_SIZE_4:
-				ReportItemData  = *((uint32_t*)ReportData);
-				ReportSize     -= 4;
-				ReportData     += 4;
-				break;
-			case DATA_SIZE_2:
-				ReportItemData  = *((uint16_t*)ReportData);
-				ReportSize     -= 2;
-				ReportData     += 2;
-				break;
-			case DATA_SIZE_1:
-				ReportItemData  = *((uint8_t*)ReportData);
-				ReportSize     -= 1;
-				ReportData     += 1;
-				break;
-		}
-
-		switch (HIDReportItem & (TYPE_MASK | TAG_MASK))
-		{
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PUSH):
-				if (CurrStateTable == &StateTable[HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH - 1])
-				  return HID_PARSE_HIDStackOverflow;
-	
-				memcpy((CurrStateTable + 1),
-				       CurrStateTable,
-				       sizeof(HID_ReportItem_t));
-
-				CurrStateTable++;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_POP):
-				if (CurrStateTable == &StateTable[0])
-				  return HID_PARSE_HIDStackUnderflow;
-				  
-				CurrStateTable--;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_USAGEPAGE):
-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page       = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMIN):
-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Logical.Minimum  = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMAX):
-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Logical.Maximum  = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMIN):
-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Physical.Minimum = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMAX):
-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Physical.Maximum = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_UNITEXP):
-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Unit.Exponent    = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_UNIT):
-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Unit.Type        = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTSIZE):
-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize          = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTCOUNT):
-				CurrStateTable->ReportCount                 = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTID):
-				CurrStateTable->ReportID                    = ReportItemData;
-
-				if (ParserData->UsingReportIDs)
-				{
-					CurrReportIDInfo = NULL;
-
-					for (uint8_t i = 0; i < ParserData->TotalDeviceReports; i++)
-					{
-						if (ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportID == CurrStateTable->ReportID)
-						{
-							CurrReportIDInfo = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i];
-							break;
-						}
-					}
-					
-					if (CurrReportIDInfo == NULL)
-					{
-						if (ParserData->TotalDeviceReports == HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS)
-						  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportIDItems;
-					
-						CurrReportIDInfo = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[ParserData->TotalDeviceReports++];
-						memset(CurrReportIDInfo, 0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportSizeInfo_t));
-					}
-				}
-
-				ParserData->UsingReportIDs = true;				
-
-				CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID = CurrStateTable->ReportID;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGE):
-				if (UsageListSize == HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH)
-				  return HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow;
-			
-				UsageList[UsageListSize++] = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMIN):
-				UsageMinMax.Minimum = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMAX):
-				UsageMinMax.Maximum = ReportItemData;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_COLLECTION):
-				if (CurrCollectionPath == NULL)
-				{
-					CurrCollectionPath = &ParserData->CollectionPaths[0];
-				}
-				else
-				{
-					HID_CollectionPath_t* ParentCollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath;
-			
-					CurrCollectionPath = &ParserData->CollectionPaths[1];
-
-					while (CurrCollectionPath->Parent != NULL)
-					{
-						if (CurrCollectionPath == &ParserData->CollectionPaths[HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS - 1])
-						  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientCollectionPaths;
-					
-						CurrCollectionPath++;
-					}
-
-					CurrCollectionPath->Parent = ParentCollectionPath;
-				}
-				
-				CurrCollectionPath->Type = ReportItemData;
-				CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Page = CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page;
-				
-				if (UsageListSize)
-				{
-					CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Usage = UsageList[0];
-
-					for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UsageListSize; i++)
-					  UsageList[i] = UsageList[i + 1];
-					
-					UsageListSize--;
-				}
-				else if (UsageMinMax.Minimum <= UsageMinMax.Maximum)
-				{
-					CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Usage = UsageMinMax.Minimum++;
-				}
-				
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_ENDCOLLECTION):
-				if (CurrCollectionPath == NULL)
-				  return HID_PARSE_UnexpectedEndCollection;
-		
-				CurrCollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath->Parent;
-				break;
-			case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_INPUT):
-			case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT):
-			case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_FEATURE):
-				for (uint8_t ReportItemNum = 0; ReportItemNum < CurrStateTable->ReportCount; ReportItemNum++)
-				{
-					HID_ReportItem_t NewReportItem;
-				  
-					memcpy(&NewReportItem.Attributes,
-					       &CurrStateTable->Attributes,
-					       sizeof(HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t));
-
-					NewReportItem.ItemFlags      = ReportItemData;
-					NewReportItem.CollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath;
-					NewReportItem.ReportID       = CurrStateTable->ReportID;
-
-					if (UsageListSize)
-					{
-						NewReportItem.Attributes.Usage.Usage = UsageList[0];
-
-						for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UsageListSize; i++)
-						  UsageList[i] = UsageList[i + 1];
-						  
-						UsageListSize--;
-					}
-					else if (UsageMinMax.Minimum <= UsageMinMax.Maximum)
-					{
-						NewReportItem.Attributes.Usage.Usage = UsageMinMax.Minimum++;
-					}
-					
-					uint8_t ItemTag = (HIDReportItem & TAG_MASK);
-
-					if (ItemTag == TAG_MAIN_INPUT)
-					  NewReportItem.ItemType = REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In;
-					else if (ItemTag == TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT)
-					  NewReportItem.ItemType = REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out;
-					else
-					  NewReportItem.ItemType = REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature;
-					
-					NewReportItem.BitOffset = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[NewReportItem.ItemType];
-
-					CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[NewReportItem.ItemType] += CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize;
-
-					if (ParserData->LargestReportSizeBits < NewReportItem.BitOffset)
-					  ParserData->LargestReportSizeBits = NewReportItem.BitOffset;
-					
-					if (!(ReportItemData & IOF_CONSTANT) && CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(&NewReportItem))
-					{					
-						if (ParserData->TotalReportItems == HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS)
-						  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportItems;
-					
-						memcpy(&ParserData->ReportItems[ParserData->TotalReportItems],
-						       &NewReportItem, sizeof(HID_ReportItem_t));
-					
-						ParserData->TotalReportItems++;
-					}
-				}
-				
-				break;
-		}
-	  
-		if ((HIDReportItem & TYPE_MASK) == TYPE_MAIN)
-		{
-			UsageMinMax.Minimum = 0;
-			UsageMinMax.Maximum = 0;
-			UsageListSize   = 0;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	if (!(ParserData->TotalReportItems))
-	  return HID_PARSE_NoUnfilteredReportItems;
-	
-	return HID_PARSE_Successful;
-}
-
-bool USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(const uint8_t* ReportData, HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)
-{
-	uint16_t DataBitsRem  = ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize;
-	uint16_t CurrentBit   = ReportItem->BitOffset;
-	uint32_t BitMask      = (1 << 0);
-
-	ReportItem->PreviousValue = ReportItem->Value;
-	ReportItem->Value = 0;
-	
-	if (ReportItem->ReportID)
-	{
-		if (ReportItem->ReportID != ReportData[0])
-		  return false;
-
-		ReportData++;
-	}
-
-	while (DataBitsRem--)
-	{
-		if (ReportData[CurrentBit / 8] & (1 << (CurrentBit % 8)))
-		  ReportItem->Value |= BitMask;
-		
-		CurrentBit++;
-		BitMask <<= 1;
-	}
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-void USB_SetHIDReportItemInfo(uint8_t* ReportData, HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)
-{
-	uint16_t DataBitsRem  = ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize;
-	uint16_t CurrentBit   = ReportItem->BitOffset;
-	uint32_t BitMask      = (1 << 0);
-
-	if (ReportItem->ReportID)
-	{
-		ReportData[0] = ReportItem->ReportID;
-		ReportData++;
-	}
-
-	ReportItem->PreviousValue = ReportItem->Value;
-
-	while (DataBitsRem--)
-	{
-		if (ReportItem->Value & (1 << (CurrentBit % 8)))
-		  ReportData[CurrentBit / 8] |= BitMask;
-
-		CurrentBit++;
-		BitMask <<= 1;
-	}
-}
-
-uint16_t USB_GetHIDReportSize(HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData, const uint8_t ReportID, const uint8_t ReportType)
-{
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS; i++)
-	{
-		uint16_t ReportSizeBits = ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportSizeBits[ReportType];
-	
-		if (ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportID == ReportID)
-		  return ((ReportSizeBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeBits & 0x07) ? 1 : 0));
-	}
-
-	return 0;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#include "HIDParser.h"
+
+uint8_t USB_ProcessHIDReport(const uint8_t* ReportData, uint16_t ReportSize, HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData)
+{
+	HID_StateTable_t      StateTable[HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH];
+	HID_StateTable_t*     CurrStateTable          = &StateTable[0];
+	HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrCollectionPath      = NULL;
+	HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo        = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[0];			
+	uint16_t              UsageList[HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH];
+	uint8_t               UsageListSize           = 0;
+	HID_MinMax_t          UsageMinMax             = {0, 0};
+
+	memset(ParserData,       0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportInfo_t));
+	memset(CurrStateTable,   0x00, sizeof(HID_StateTable_t));
+	memset(CurrReportIDInfo, 0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportSizeInfo_t));
+
+	ParserData->TotalDeviceReports = 1;	
+
+	while (ReportSize)
+	{
+		uint8_t  HIDReportItem  = *ReportData;
+		uint32_t ReportItemData = 0;
+		
+		ReportData++;
+		ReportSize--;
+		
+		switch (HIDReportItem & DATA_SIZE_MASK)
+		{
+			case DATA_SIZE_4:
+				ReportItemData  = *((uint32_t*)ReportData);
+				ReportSize     -= 4;
+				ReportData     += 4;
+				break;
+			case DATA_SIZE_2:
+				ReportItemData  = *((uint16_t*)ReportData);
+				ReportSize     -= 2;
+				ReportData     += 2;
+				break;
+			case DATA_SIZE_1:
+				ReportItemData  = *((uint8_t*)ReportData);
+				ReportSize     -= 1;
+				ReportData     += 1;
+				break;
+		}
+
+		switch (HIDReportItem & (TYPE_MASK | TAG_MASK))
+		{
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PUSH):
+				if (CurrStateTable == &StateTable[HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH - 1])
+				  return HID_PARSE_HIDStackOverflow;
+	
+				memcpy((CurrStateTable + 1),
+				       CurrStateTable,
+				       sizeof(HID_ReportItem_t));
+
+				CurrStateTable++;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_POP):
+				if (CurrStateTable == &StateTable[0])
+				  return HID_PARSE_HIDStackUnderflow;
+				  
+				CurrStateTable--;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_USAGEPAGE):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page       = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMIN):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Logical.Minimum  = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMAX):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Logical.Maximum  = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMIN):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Physical.Minimum = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMAX):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Physical.Maximum = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_UNITEXP):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Unit.Exponent    = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_UNIT):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Unit.Type        = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTSIZE):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize          = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTCOUNT):
+				CurrStateTable->ReportCount                 = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTID):
+				CurrStateTable->ReportID                    = ReportItemData;
+
+				if (ParserData->UsingReportIDs)
+				{
+					CurrReportIDInfo = NULL;
+
+					for (uint8_t i = 0; i < ParserData->TotalDeviceReports; i++)
+					{
+						if (ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportID == CurrStateTable->ReportID)
+						{
+							CurrReportIDInfo = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i];
+							break;
+						}
+					}
+					
+					if (CurrReportIDInfo == NULL)
+					{
+						if (ParserData->TotalDeviceReports == HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS)
+						  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportIDItems;
+					
+						CurrReportIDInfo = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[ParserData->TotalDeviceReports++];
+						memset(CurrReportIDInfo, 0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportSizeInfo_t));
+					}
+				}
+
+				ParserData->UsingReportIDs = true;				
+
+				CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID = CurrStateTable->ReportID;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGE):
+				if (UsageListSize == HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH)
+				  return HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow;
+			
+				UsageList[UsageListSize++] = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMIN):
+				UsageMinMax.Minimum = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMAX):
+				UsageMinMax.Maximum = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_COLLECTION):
+				if (CurrCollectionPath == NULL)
+				{
+					CurrCollectionPath = &ParserData->CollectionPaths[0];
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					HID_CollectionPath_t* ParentCollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath;
+			
+					CurrCollectionPath = &ParserData->CollectionPaths[1];
+
+					while (CurrCollectionPath->Parent != NULL)
+					{
+						if (CurrCollectionPath == &ParserData->CollectionPaths[HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS - 1])
+						  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientCollectionPaths;
+					
+						CurrCollectionPath++;
+					}
+
+					CurrCollectionPath->Parent = ParentCollectionPath;
+				}
+				
+				CurrCollectionPath->Type = ReportItemData;
+				CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Page = CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page;
+				
+				if (UsageListSize)
+				{
+					CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Usage = UsageList[0];
+
+					for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UsageListSize; i++)
+					  UsageList[i] = UsageList[i + 1];
+					
+					UsageListSize--;
+				}
+				else if (UsageMinMax.Minimum <= UsageMinMax.Maximum)
+				{
+					CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Usage = UsageMinMax.Minimum++;
+				}
+				
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_ENDCOLLECTION):
+				if (CurrCollectionPath == NULL)
+				  return HID_PARSE_UnexpectedEndCollection;
+		
+				CurrCollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath->Parent;
+				break;
+			case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_INPUT):
+			case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT):
+			case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_FEATURE):
+				for (uint8_t ReportItemNum = 0; ReportItemNum < CurrStateTable->ReportCount; ReportItemNum++)
+				{
+					HID_ReportItem_t NewReportItem;
+				  
+					memcpy(&NewReportItem.Attributes,
+					       &CurrStateTable->Attributes,
+					       sizeof(HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t));
+
+					NewReportItem.ItemFlags      = ReportItemData;
+					NewReportItem.CollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath;
+					NewReportItem.ReportID       = CurrStateTable->ReportID;
+
+					if (UsageListSize)
+					{
+						NewReportItem.Attributes.Usage.Usage = UsageList[0];
+
+						for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UsageListSize; i++)
+						  UsageList[i] = UsageList[i + 1];
+						  
+						UsageListSize--;
+					}
+					else if (UsageMinMax.Minimum <= UsageMinMax.Maximum)
+					{
+						NewReportItem.Attributes.Usage.Usage = UsageMinMax.Minimum++;
+					}
+					
+					uint8_t ItemTag = (HIDReportItem & TAG_MASK);
+
+					if (ItemTag == TAG_MAIN_INPUT)
+					  NewReportItem.ItemType = REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In;
+					else if (ItemTag == TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT)
+					  NewReportItem.ItemType = REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out;
+					else
+					  NewReportItem.ItemType = REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature;
+					
+					NewReportItem.BitOffset = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[NewReportItem.ItemType];
+
+					CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[NewReportItem.ItemType] += CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize;
+
+					if (ParserData->LargestReportSizeBits < NewReportItem.BitOffset)
+					  ParserData->LargestReportSizeBits = NewReportItem.BitOffset;
+					
+					if (!(ReportItemData & IOF_CONSTANT) && CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(&NewReportItem))
+					{					
+						if (ParserData->TotalReportItems == HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS)
+						  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportItems;
+					
+						memcpy(&ParserData->ReportItems[ParserData->TotalReportItems],
+						       &NewReportItem, sizeof(HID_ReportItem_t));
+					
+						ParserData->TotalReportItems++;
+					}
+				}
+				
+				break;
+		}
+	  
+		if ((HIDReportItem & TYPE_MASK) == TYPE_MAIN)
+		{
+			UsageMinMax.Minimum = 0;
+			UsageMinMax.Maximum = 0;
+			UsageListSize   = 0;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	if (!(ParserData->TotalReportItems))
+	  return HID_PARSE_NoUnfilteredReportItems;
+	
+	return HID_PARSE_Successful;
+}
+
+bool USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(const uint8_t* ReportData, HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)
+{
+	uint16_t DataBitsRem  = ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize;
+	uint16_t CurrentBit   = ReportItem->BitOffset;
+	uint32_t BitMask      = (1 << 0);
+
+	ReportItem->PreviousValue = ReportItem->Value;
+	ReportItem->Value = 0;
+	
+	if (ReportItem->ReportID)
+	{
+		if (ReportItem->ReportID != ReportData[0])
+		  return false;
+
+		ReportData++;
+	}
+
+	while (DataBitsRem--)
+	{
+		if (ReportData[CurrentBit / 8] & (1 << (CurrentBit % 8)))
+		  ReportItem->Value |= BitMask;
+		
+		CurrentBit++;
+		BitMask <<= 1;
+	}
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+void USB_SetHIDReportItemInfo(uint8_t* ReportData, HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)
+{
+	uint16_t DataBitsRem  = ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize;
+	uint16_t CurrentBit   = ReportItem->BitOffset;
+	uint32_t BitMask      = (1 << 0);
+
+	if (ReportItem->ReportID)
+	{
+		ReportData[0] = ReportItem->ReportID;
+		ReportData++;
+	}
+
+	ReportItem->PreviousValue = ReportItem->Value;
+
+	while (DataBitsRem--)
+	{
+		if (ReportItem->Value & (1 << (CurrentBit % 8)))
+		  ReportData[CurrentBit / 8] |= BitMask;
+
+		CurrentBit++;
+		BitMask <<= 1;
+	}
+}
+
+uint16_t USB_GetHIDReportSize(HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData, const uint8_t ReportID, const uint8_t ReportType)
+{
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS; i++)
+	{
+		uint16_t ReportSizeBits = ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportSizeBits[ReportType];
+	
+		if (ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportID == ReportID)
+		  return ((ReportSizeBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeBits & 0x07) ? 1 : 0));
+	}
+
+	return 0;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h
index 13f68a045..6630750e6 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h
@@ -1,355 +1,355 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB Human Interface Device (HID) Class report descriptor parser.
- *
- *  This file allows for the easy parsing of complex HID report descriptors, which describes the data that
- *  a HID device transmits to the host. It also provides an easy API for extracting and processing the data
- *  elements inside a HID report sent from an attached HID device.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_HIDParser HID Report Parser
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the parsing of HID class device report descriptors.
- *
- *  The processed HID report is presented back to the user application as a flat structure containing each report
- *  item's IN, OUT and FEATURE items along with each item's attributes.
- *
- *  This library portion also allows for easy setting and retrieval of data from a HID report, including devices
- *  with multiple reports on the one HID interface.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __HIDPARSER_H__
-#define __HIDPARSER_H__
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "HIDReportData.h"
-		#include "../Common/HID.h"
-
-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#if !defined(HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			/** Constant indicating the maximum stack depth of the state table. A larger state table
-			 *  allows for more PUSH/POP report items to be nested, but consumes more memory. By default
-			 *  this is set to 2 levels (allowing non-nested PUSH items) but this can be overridden by
-			 *  defining HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH to another value in the user project makefile, passing the
-			 *  define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.
-			 */
-			#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH    2
-		#endif
-		
-		#if !defined(HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			/** Constant indicating the maximum stack depth of the usage table. A larger usage table
-			 *  allows for more USAGE items to be indicated sequentially for REPORT COUNT entries of more than
-			 *  one, but requires more stack space. By default this is set to 8 levels (allowing for a report
-			 *  item with a count of 8) but this can be overridden by defining HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH to another
-			 *  value in the user project makefile, passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler
-			 *  switch.
-			 */
-			#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH         8
-		#endif
-
-		#if !defined(HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of COLLECTION items (nested or unnested) that can be
-			 *  processed in the report item descriptor. A large value allows for more COLLECTION items to be
-			 *  processed, but consumes more memory. By default this is set to 5 collections, but this can be
-			 *  overridden by defining HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS to another value in the user project makefile, passing
-			 *  the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.
-			 */
-			#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS           10
-		#endif
-		
-		#if !defined(HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of report items (IN, OUT or FEATURE) that can be processed 
-			 *  in the report item descriptor and stored in the user HID Report Info structure. A large value allows
-			 *  for more report items to be stored, but consumes more memory. By default this is set to 20 items, 
-			 *  but this can be overridden by defining HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS to another value in the user project
-			 *  makefile, and passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.
-			 */
-			#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS           20
-		#endif
-		
-		#if !defined(HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of unique report IDs that can be processed in the report item
-			 *  descriptor for the report size information array in the user HID Report Info structure. A large value
-			 *  allows for more report ID report sizes to be stored, but consumes more memory. By default this is set
-			 *  to 5 items, but this can be overridden by defining HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS to another value in the user project
-			 *  makefile, and passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch. Note that IN, OUT and FEATURE
-			 *  items sharing the same report ID consume only one size item in the array.
-			 */
-			#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS            10
-		#endif
-
-		/** Returns the value a given HID report item (once its value has been fetched via \ref USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo())
-		 *  left-aligned to the given data type. This allows for signed data to be interpreted correctly, by shifting the data
-		 *  leftwards until the data's sign bit is in the correct position.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] reportitem  HID Report Item whose retrieved value is to be aligned
-		 *  \param[in] type  Data type to align the HID report item's value to
-		 *
-		 *  \return Left-aligned data of the given report item's pre-retrived value for the given datatype
-		 */
-		#define HID_ALIGN_DATA(reportitem, type) ((type)(reportitem->Value << ((8 * sizeof(type)) - reportitem->Attributes.BitSize)))
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Enums: */			
-			/** Enum for the possible error codes in the return value of the \ref USB_ProcessHIDReport() function */
-			enum HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				HID_PARSE_Successful                  = 0, /**< Successful parse of the HID report descriptor, no error. */
-				HID_PARSE_HIDStackOverflow            = 1, /**< More than \ref HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH nested PUSHes in the report. */ 
-				HID_PARSE_HIDStackUnderflow           = 2, /**< A POP was found when the state table stack was empty. */
-				HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportItems     = 3, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS report items in the report. */
-				HID_PARSE_UnexpectedEndCollection     = 4, /**< An END COLLECTION item found without matching COLLECTION item. */
-				HID_PARSE_InsufficientCollectionPaths = 5, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS collections in the report. */
-				HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow           = 6, /**< More than \ref HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH usages listed in a row. */
-				HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportIDItems   = 7, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS report IDs in the device. */
-				HID_PARSE_NoUnfilteredReportItems     = 8, /**< All report items from the device were filtered by the filtering callback routine. */
-			};
-		
-		/* Type Defines: */		
-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Min/Max Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for an attribute with both minimum and maximum values (e.g. Logical Min/Max).
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint32_t                     Minimum; /**< Minimum value for the attribute. */
-				uint32_t                     Maximum; /**< Maximum value for the attribute. */
-			} HID_MinMax_t;
-
-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Unit Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for the Unit attributes of a report item.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint32_t                     Type;     /**< Unit type (refer to HID specifications for details). */
-				uint8_t                      Exponent; /**< Unit exponent (refer to HID specifications for details). */
-			} HID_Unit_t;
-			
-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Usage Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for the Usage attributes of a report item.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint16_t                     Page;   /**< Usage page of the report item. */
-				uint16_t                     Usage;  /**< Usage of the report item. */
-			} HID_Usage_t;
-
-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Collection Path Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a COLLECTION object. Contains the collection attributes and a reference to the
-			 *  parent collection if any.
-			 */
-			typedef struct CollectionPath
-			{
-				uint8_t                      Type;   /**< Collection type (e.g. "Generic Desktop"). */
-				HID_Usage_t                  Usage;  /**< Collection usage. */
-				struct CollectionPath*       Parent; /**< Reference to parent collection, or NULL if root collection. */
-			} HID_CollectionPath_t;
-
-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Attributes Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for all the data attributes of a report item, except flags.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t                      BitSize;  /**< Size in bits of the report item's data. */
-				
-				HID_Usage_t                  Usage;    /**< Usage of the report item. */
-				HID_Unit_t                   Unit;     /**< Unit type and exponent of the report item. */
-				HID_MinMax_t                 Logical;  /**< Logical minimum and maximum of the report item. */
-				HID_MinMax_t                 Physical; /**< Physical minimum and maximum of the report item. */
-			} HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t;
-			
-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Details Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a report item (IN, OUT or FEATURE) layout attributes and other details.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint16_t                     BitOffset;      /**< Bit offset in the IN, OUT or FEATURE report of the item. */
-				uint8_t                      ItemType;       /**< Report item type, a value in HID_ReportItemTypes_t. */
-				uint16_t                     ItemFlags;      /**< Item data flags, such as constant/variable, etc. */
-				uint8_t                      ReportID;       /**< Report ID this item belongs to, or 0x00 if device has only one report */
-				HID_CollectionPath_t*        CollectionPath; /**< Collection path of the item. */
-
-				HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t  Attributes;     /**< Report item attributes. */
-							
-				uint32_t                     Value;          /**< Current value of the report item - use \ref HID_ALIGN_DATA() when processing
-				                                              *   a retrieved value so that it is aligned to a specific type.
-				                                              */
-				uint32_t                     PreviousValue;  /**< Previous value of the report item. */ 
-			} HID_ReportItem_t;
-			
-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Size Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a report item size information structure, to retain the size of a device's reports by ID.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t                      ReportID; /** Report ID of the report within the HID interface */
-				uint16_t                     ReportSizeBits[3]; /** Total number of bits in each report type for the given Report ID,
-				                                                 *  indexed by the \ref HID_ReportItemTypes_t enum
-																 */
-			} HID_ReportSizeInfo_t;
-
-			/** \brief HID Parser State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a complete processed HID report, including all report item data and collections.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t                      TotalReportItems; /**< Total number of report items stored in the
-				                                                *   ReportItems array.
-				                                                */
-				HID_ReportItem_t             ReportItems[HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS]; /**< Report items array, including
-			                                                                    *   all IN, OUT and FEATURE items.
-				                                                                */
-				HID_CollectionPath_t         CollectionPaths[HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS]; /**< All collection items, referenced
-				                                                                    *   by the report items.
-				                                                                    */
-				uint8_t                      TotalDeviceReports; /**< Number of reports within the HID interface */
-				HID_ReportSizeInfo_t         ReportIDSizes[HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS]; /**< Report sizes for each report in the interface */
-				uint16_t                     LargestReportSizeBits; /**< Largest report that the attached device will generate, in bits */
-				bool                         UsingReportIDs; /**< Indicates if the device has at least one REPORT ID
-				                                              *   element in its HID report descriptor.
-				                                              */
-			} HID_ReportInfo_t;
-			
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Function to process a given HID report returned from an attached device, and store it into a given
-			 *  \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] ReportData  Buffer containing the device's HID report table
-			 *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the HID report table
-			 *  \param[out] ParserData  Pointer to a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t instance for the parser output
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value in the \ref HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t USB_ProcessHIDReport(const uint8_t* ReportData, uint16_t ReportSize, HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData)
-			                             ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-			/** Extracts the given report item's value out of the given HID report and places it into the Value
-			 *  member of the report item's \ref HID_ReportItem_t structure.
-			 *
-			 *  When called, this copies the report item's Value element to it's PreviousValue element for easy
-			 *  checking to see if an item's value has changed before processing a report.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] ReportData  Buffer containing an IN or FEATURE report from an attached device
-			 *  \param[in,out] ReportItem  Pointer to the report item of interest in a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array
-			 *
-			 *  \returns Boolean true if the item to retrieve was located in the given report, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(const uint8_t* ReportData, HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)
-			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-			/** Retrieves the given report item's value out of the Value member of the report item's
-			 *  \ref HID_ReportItem_t structure and places it into the correct position in the HID report
-			 *  buffer. The report buffer is assumed to have the appropriate bits cleared before calling
-			 *  this function (i.e., the buffer should be explicitly cleared before report values are added).
-			 *
-			 *  When called, this copies the report item's Value element to it's PreviousValue element for easy
-			 *  checking to see if an item's value has changed before sending a report.
-			 *
-			 *  If the device has multiple HID reports, the first byte in the report is set to the report ID of the given item.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] ReportData  Buffer holding the current OUT or FEATURE report data
-			 *  \param[in] ReportItem  Pointer to the report item of interest in a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array
-			 */
-			void USB_SetHIDReportItemInfo(uint8_t* ReportData, HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)
-			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-										  
-			/** Retrieves the size of a given HID report in bytes from it's Report ID.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] ParserData  Pointer to a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t instance containing the parser output
-			 *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the report whose size is to be retrieved
-			 *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report whose size is to be determined, a valued from the
-			 *                         \ref HID_ReportItemTypes_t enum
-			 *
-			 *  \return Size of the report in bytes, or 0 if the report does not exist
-			 */
-			uint16_t USB_GetHIDReportSize(HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData, const uint8_t ReportID,
-			                              const uint8_t ReportType) ATTR_CONST ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Callback routine for the HID Report Parser. This callback <b>must</b> be implemented by the user code when
-			 *  the parser is used, to determine what report IN, OUT and FEATURE item's information is stored into the user
-			 *  HID_ReportInfo_t structure. This can be used to filter only those items the application will be using, so that
-			 *  no RAM is wasted storing the attributes for report items which will never be referenced by the application.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the current report item for user checking
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID_ReportInfo_t structure, false if it should be ignored
-			 */
-			bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				 HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t Attributes;
-				 uint8_t                     ReportCount;
-				 uint8_t                     ReportID;
-			} HID_StateTable_t;
-	#endif
-			
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Human Interface Device (HID) Class report descriptor parser.
+ *
+ *  This file allows for the easy parsing of complex HID report descriptors, which describes the data that
+ *  a HID device transmits to the host. It also provides an easy API for extracting and processing the data
+ *  elements inside a HID report sent from an attached HID device.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_HIDParser HID Report Parser
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the parsing of HID class device report descriptors.
+ *
+ *  The processed HID report is presented back to the user application as a flat structure containing each report
+ *  item's IN, OUT and FEATURE items along with each item's attributes.
+ *
+ *  This library portion also allows for easy setting and retrieval of data from a HID report, including devices
+ *  with multiple reports on the one HID interface.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __HIDPARSER_H__
+#define __HIDPARSER_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "HIDReportData.h"
+		#include "../Common/HID.h"
+
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if !defined(HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Constant indicating the maximum stack depth of the state table. A larger state table
+			 *  allows for more PUSH/POP report items to be nested, but consumes more memory. By default
+			 *  this is set to 2 levels (allowing non-nested PUSH items) but this can be overridden by
+			 *  defining HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH to another value in the user project makefile, passing the
+			 *  define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.
+			 */
+			#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH    2
+		#endif
+		
+		#if !defined(HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Constant indicating the maximum stack depth of the usage table. A larger usage table
+			 *  allows for more USAGE items to be indicated sequentially for REPORT COUNT entries of more than
+			 *  one, but requires more stack space. By default this is set to 8 levels (allowing for a report
+			 *  item with a count of 8) but this can be overridden by defining HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH to another
+			 *  value in the user project makefile, passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler
+			 *  switch.
+			 */
+			#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH         8
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of COLLECTION items (nested or unnested) that can be
+			 *  processed in the report item descriptor. A large value allows for more COLLECTION items to be
+			 *  processed, but consumes more memory. By default this is set to 5 collections, but this can be
+			 *  overridden by defining HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS to another value in the user project makefile, passing
+			 *  the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.
+			 */
+			#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS           10
+		#endif
+		
+		#if !defined(HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of report items (IN, OUT or FEATURE) that can be processed 
+			 *  in the report item descriptor and stored in the user HID Report Info structure. A large value allows
+			 *  for more report items to be stored, but consumes more memory. By default this is set to 20 items, 
+			 *  but this can be overridden by defining HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS to another value in the user project
+			 *  makefile, and passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.
+			 */
+			#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS           20
+		#endif
+		
+		#if !defined(HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of unique report IDs that can be processed in the report item
+			 *  descriptor for the report size information array in the user HID Report Info structure. A large value
+			 *  allows for more report ID report sizes to be stored, but consumes more memory. By default this is set
+			 *  to 5 items, but this can be overridden by defining HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS to another value in the user project
+			 *  makefile, and passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch. Note that IN, OUT and FEATURE
+			 *  items sharing the same report ID consume only one size item in the array.
+			 */
+			#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS            10
+		#endif
+
+		/** Returns the value a given HID report item (once its value has been fetched via \ref USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo())
+		 *  left-aligned to the given data type. This allows for signed data to be interpreted correctly, by shifting the data
+		 *  leftwards until the data's sign bit is in the correct position.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] reportitem  HID Report Item whose retrieved value is to be aligned
+		 *  \param[in] type  Data type to align the HID report item's value to
+		 *
+		 *  \return Left-aligned data of the given report item's pre-retrived value for the given datatype
+		 */
+		#define HID_ALIGN_DATA(reportitem, type) ((type)(reportitem->Value << ((8 * sizeof(type)) - reportitem->Attributes.BitSize)))
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Enums: */			
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes in the return value of the \ref USB_ProcessHIDReport() function */
+			enum HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HID_PARSE_Successful                  = 0, /**< Successful parse of the HID report descriptor, no error. */
+				HID_PARSE_HIDStackOverflow            = 1, /**< More than \ref HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH nested PUSHes in the report. */ 
+				HID_PARSE_HIDStackUnderflow           = 2, /**< A POP was found when the state table stack was empty. */
+				HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportItems     = 3, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS report items in the report. */
+				HID_PARSE_UnexpectedEndCollection     = 4, /**< An END COLLECTION item found without matching COLLECTION item. */
+				HID_PARSE_InsufficientCollectionPaths = 5, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS collections in the report. */
+				HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow           = 6, /**< More than \ref HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH usages listed in a row. */
+				HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportIDItems   = 7, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS report IDs in the device. */
+				HID_PARSE_NoUnfilteredReportItems     = 8, /**< All report items from the device were filtered by the filtering callback routine. */
+			};
+		
+		/* Type Defines: */		
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Min/Max Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for an attribute with both minimum and maximum values (e.g. Logical Min/Max).
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint32_t                     Minimum; /**< Minimum value for the attribute. */
+				uint32_t                     Maximum; /**< Maximum value for the attribute. */
+			} HID_MinMax_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Unit Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for the Unit attributes of a report item.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint32_t                     Type;     /**< Unit type (refer to HID specifications for details). */
+				uint8_t                      Exponent; /**< Unit exponent (refer to HID specifications for details). */
+			} HID_Unit_t;
+			
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Usage Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for the Usage attributes of a report item.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint16_t                     Page;   /**< Usage page of the report item. */
+				uint16_t                     Usage;  /**< Usage of the report item. */
+			} HID_Usage_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Collection Path Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a COLLECTION object. Contains the collection attributes and a reference to the
+			 *  parent collection if any.
+			 */
+			typedef struct CollectionPath
+			{
+				uint8_t                      Type;   /**< Collection type (e.g. "Generic Desktop"). */
+				HID_Usage_t                  Usage;  /**< Collection usage. */
+				struct CollectionPath*       Parent; /**< Reference to parent collection, or NULL if root collection. */
+			} HID_CollectionPath_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Attributes Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for all the data attributes of a report item, except flags.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t                      BitSize;  /**< Size in bits of the report item's data. */
+				
+				HID_Usage_t                  Usage;    /**< Usage of the report item. */
+				HID_Unit_t                   Unit;     /**< Unit type and exponent of the report item. */
+				HID_MinMax_t                 Logical;  /**< Logical minimum and maximum of the report item. */
+				HID_MinMax_t                 Physical; /**< Physical minimum and maximum of the report item. */
+			} HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t;
+			
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Details Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a report item (IN, OUT or FEATURE) layout attributes and other details.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint16_t                     BitOffset;      /**< Bit offset in the IN, OUT or FEATURE report of the item. */
+				uint8_t                      ItemType;       /**< Report item type, a value in HID_ReportItemTypes_t. */
+				uint16_t                     ItemFlags;      /**< Item data flags, such as constant/variable, etc. */
+				uint8_t                      ReportID;       /**< Report ID this item belongs to, or 0x00 if device has only one report */
+				HID_CollectionPath_t*        CollectionPath; /**< Collection path of the item. */
+
+				HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t  Attributes;     /**< Report item attributes. */
+							
+				uint32_t                     Value;          /**< Current value of the report item - use \ref HID_ALIGN_DATA() when processing
+				                                              *   a retrieved value so that it is aligned to a specific type.
+				                                              */
+				uint32_t                     PreviousValue;  /**< Previous value of the report item. */ 
+			} HID_ReportItem_t;
+			
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Size Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a report item size information structure, to retain the size of a device's reports by ID.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t                      ReportID; /** Report ID of the report within the HID interface */
+				uint16_t                     ReportSizeBits[3]; /** Total number of bits in each report type for the given Report ID,
+				                                                 *  indexed by the \ref HID_ReportItemTypes_t enum
+																 */
+			} HID_ReportSizeInfo_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a complete processed HID report, including all report item data and collections.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t                      TotalReportItems; /**< Total number of report items stored in the
+				                                                *   ReportItems array.
+				                                                */
+				HID_ReportItem_t             ReportItems[HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS]; /**< Report items array, including
+			                                                                    *   all IN, OUT and FEATURE items.
+				                                                                */
+				HID_CollectionPath_t         CollectionPaths[HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS]; /**< All collection items, referenced
+				                                                                    *   by the report items.
+				                                                                    */
+				uint8_t                      TotalDeviceReports; /**< Number of reports within the HID interface */
+				HID_ReportSizeInfo_t         ReportIDSizes[HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS]; /**< Report sizes for each report in the interface */
+				uint16_t                     LargestReportSizeBits; /**< Largest report that the attached device will generate, in bits */
+				bool                         UsingReportIDs; /**< Indicates if the device has at least one REPORT ID
+				                                              *   element in its HID report descriptor.
+				                                              */
+			} HID_ReportInfo_t;
+			
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Function to process a given HID report returned from an attached device, and store it into a given
+			 *  \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ReportData  Buffer containing the device's HID report table
+			 *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the HID report table
+			 *  \param[out] ParserData  Pointer to a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t instance for the parser output
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value in the \ref HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_ProcessHIDReport(const uint8_t* ReportData, uint16_t ReportSize, HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData)
+			                             ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Extracts the given report item's value out of the given HID report and places it into the Value
+			 *  member of the report item's \ref HID_ReportItem_t structure.
+			 *
+			 *  When called, this copies the report item's Value element to it's PreviousValue element for easy
+			 *  checking to see if an item's value has changed before processing a report.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ReportData  Buffer containing an IN or FEATURE report from an attached device
+			 *  \param[in,out] ReportItem  Pointer to the report item of interest in a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array
+			 *
+			 *  \returns Boolean true if the item to retrieve was located in the given report, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(const uint8_t* ReportData, HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)
+			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Retrieves the given report item's value out of the Value member of the report item's
+			 *  \ref HID_ReportItem_t structure and places it into the correct position in the HID report
+			 *  buffer. The report buffer is assumed to have the appropriate bits cleared before calling
+			 *  this function (i.e., the buffer should be explicitly cleared before report values are added).
+			 *
+			 *  When called, this copies the report item's Value element to it's PreviousValue element for easy
+			 *  checking to see if an item's value has changed before sending a report.
+			 *
+			 *  If the device has multiple HID reports, the first byte in the report is set to the report ID of the given item.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] ReportData  Buffer holding the current OUT or FEATURE report data
+			 *  \param[in] ReportItem  Pointer to the report item of interest in a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array
+			 */
+			void USB_SetHIDReportItemInfo(uint8_t* ReportData, HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)
+			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+										  
+			/** Retrieves the size of a given HID report in bytes from it's Report ID.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ParserData  Pointer to a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t instance containing the parser output
+			 *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the report whose size is to be retrieved
+			 *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report whose size is to be determined, a valued from the
+			 *                         \ref HID_ReportItemTypes_t enum
+			 *
+			 *  \return Size of the report in bytes, or 0 if the report does not exist
+			 */
+			uint16_t USB_GetHIDReportSize(HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData, const uint8_t ReportID,
+			                              const uint8_t ReportType) ATTR_CONST ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Callback routine for the HID Report Parser. This callback <b>must</b> be implemented by the user code when
+			 *  the parser is used, to determine what report IN, OUT and FEATURE item's information is stored into the user
+			 *  HID_ReportInfo_t structure. This can be used to filter only those items the application will be using, so that
+			 *  no RAM is wasted storing the attributes for report items which will never be referenced by the application.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the current report item for user checking
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID_ReportInfo_t structure, false if it should be ignored
+			 */
+			bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* CurrentItem);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				 HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t Attributes;
+				 uint8_t                     ReportCount;
+				 uint8_t                     ReportID;
+			} HID_StateTable_t;
+	#endif
+			
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDReportData.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDReportData.h
index 4f328c964..dca1ebb3a 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDReportData.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDReportData.h
@@ -1,141 +1,141 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Constants for HID report item attributes.
- *
- *  HID report item constants for report item attributes. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  details on each flag's meaning when applied to an IN, OUT or FEATURE item.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_HIDParser
- *  @defgroup Group_HIDIOFConst Input/Output/Feature Masks
- *
- *  Masks indicating the type of Input, Output of Feature HID report item.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __HIDREPORTDATA_H__
-#define __HIDREPORTDATA_H__
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for constant data. */
-			#define IOF_CONSTANT             (1 << 0)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for data. */
-			#define IOF_DATA                 (0 << 0)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for variable data. */
-			#define IOF_VARIABLE             (1 << 1)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for array data. */
-			#define IOF_ARRAY                (0 << 1)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for relative data. */
-			#define IOF_RELATIVE             (1 << 2)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for absolute data. */
-			#define IOF_ABSOLUTE             (0 << 2)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for wrapped value data. */
-			#define IOF_WRAP                 (1 << 3)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for non-wrapped value data. */
-			#define IOF_NOWRAP               (0 << 3)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for non linear data. */
-			#define IOF_NONLINEAR            (1 << 4)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for linear data. */
-			#define IOF_LINEAR               (0 << 4)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for no preferred state. */
-			#define IOF_NOPREFERRED          (1 << 5)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for preferred state items. */
-			#define IOF_PREFERREDSTATE       (0 << 5)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for null state items. */
-			#define IOF_NULLSTATE            (1 << 6)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for no null position data. */
-			#define IOF_NONULLPOSITION       (0 << 6)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for buffered bytes. */
-			#define IOF_BUFFEREDBYTES        (1 << 8)
-
-			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for bit field data. */
-			#define IOF_BITFIELD             (0 << 8)
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define DATA_SIZE_MASK           0x03
-			#define TYPE_MASK                0x0C
-			#define TAG_MASK                 0xF0
-
-			#define DATA_SIZE_0              0x00
-			#define DATA_SIZE_1              0x01
-			#define DATA_SIZE_2              0x02
-			#define DATA_SIZE_4              0x03
-			
-			#define TYPE_MAIN                0x00
-			#define TYPE_GLOBAL              0x04
-			#define TYPE_LOCAL               0x08
-			
-			#define TAG_MAIN_INPUT           0x80
-			#define TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT          0x90
-			#define TAG_MAIN_COLLECTION      0xA0
-			#define TAG_MAIN_FEATURE         0xB0
-			#define TAG_MAIN_ENDCOLLECTION   0xC0
-
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_USAGEPAGE     0x00
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMIN    0x10
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMAX    0x20
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMIN       0x30
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMAX       0x40
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_UNITEXP       0x50
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_UNIT          0x60
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTSIZE    0x70
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTID      0x80
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTCOUNT   0x90
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_PUSH          0xA0
-			#define TAG_GLOBAL_POP           0xB0
-			
-			#define TAG_LOCAL_USAGE          0x00
-			#define TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMIN       0x10
-			#define TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMAX       0x20
-	#endif
-
-/** @} */
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Constants for HID report item attributes.
+ *
+ *  HID report item constants for report item attributes. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  details on each flag's meaning when applied to an IN, OUT or FEATURE item.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_HIDParser
+ *  @defgroup Group_HIDIOFConst Input/Output/Feature Masks
+ *
+ *  Masks indicating the type of Input, Output of Feature HID report item.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __HIDREPORTDATA_H__
+#define __HIDREPORTDATA_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for constant data. */
+			#define IOF_CONSTANT             (1 << 0)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for data. */
+			#define IOF_DATA                 (0 << 0)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for variable data. */
+			#define IOF_VARIABLE             (1 << 1)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for array data. */
+			#define IOF_ARRAY                (0 << 1)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for relative data. */
+			#define IOF_RELATIVE             (1 << 2)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for absolute data. */
+			#define IOF_ABSOLUTE             (0 << 2)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for wrapped value data. */
+			#define IOF_WRAP                 (1 << 3)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for non-wrapped value data. */
+			#define IOF_NOWRAP               (0 << 3)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for non linear data. */
+			#define IOF_NONLINEAR            (1 << 4)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for linear data. */
+			#define IOF_LINEAR               (0 << 4)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for no preferred state. */
+			#define IOF_NOPREFERRED          (1 << 5)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for preferred state items. */
+			#define IOF_PREFERREDSTATE       (0 << 5)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for null state items. */
+			#define IOF_NULLSTATE            (1 << 6)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for no null position data. */
+			#define IOF_NONULLPOSITION       (0 << 6)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for buffered bytes. */
+			#define IOF_BUFFEREDBYTES        (1 << 8)
+
+			/** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for bit field data. */
+			#define IOF_BITFIELD             (0 << 8)
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATA_SIZE_MASK           0x03
+			#define TYPE_MASK                0x0C
+			#define TAG_MASK                 0xF0
+
+			#define DATA_SIZE_0              0x00
+			#define DATA_SIZE_1              0x01
+			#define DATA_SIZE_2              0x02
+			#define DATA_SIZE_4              0x03
+			
+			#define TYPE_MAIN                0x00
+			#define TYPE_GLOBAL              0x04
+			#define TYPE_LOCAL               0x08
+			
+			#define TAG_MAIN_INPUT           0x80
+			#define TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT          0x90
+			#define TAG_MAIN_COLLECTION      0xA0
+			#define TAG_MAIN_FEATURE         0xB0
+			#define TAG_MAIN_ENDCOLLECTION   0xC0
+
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_USAGEPAGE     0x00
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMIN    0x10
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMAX    0x20
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMIN       0x30
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMAX       0x40
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_UNITEXP       0x50
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_UNIT          0x60
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTSIZE    0x70
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTID      0x80
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTCOUNT   0x90
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_PUSH          0xA0
+			#define TAG_GLOBAL_POP           0xB0
+			
+			#define TAG_LOCAL_USAGE          0x00
+			#define TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMIN       0x10
+			#define TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMAX       0x20
+	#endif
+
+/** @} */
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.c
index c2e6257c4..f5505959a 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.c
@@ -1,186 +1,186 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_CLASS_HOST_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER
-#include "MIDI.h"
-
-uint8_t MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-                                 void* ConfigDescriptorData)
-{
-	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	memset(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
-	  return MIDI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
-	
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-	                              DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		return MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoStreamingInterfaceFound;
-	}
-	
-	while (FoundEndpoints != (MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
-	{
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-		                              DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			return MIDI_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-							   MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-			
-			FoundEndpoints |= MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-							   MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-			FoundEndpoints |= MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
-	return MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
-
-		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == MIDI_STREAMING_CLASS)    &&
-		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == MIDI_STREAMING_SUBCLASS) &&
-		    (CurrentInterface->Protocol == MIDI_STREAMING_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-	
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (CurrentEndpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-	
-		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) && !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress)))
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-uint8_t MIDI_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-	
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-
-	if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
-	{
-		Pipe_ClearOUT();
-
-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-
-	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
-	{
-		uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-
-		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-		  Pipe_ClearOUT();
-	}
-	
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-bool MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-
-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  return false;
-
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Pipe_ClearIN();
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_CLASS_HOST_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER
+#include "MIDI.h"
+
+uint8_t MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                 void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	memset(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return MIDI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+	
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                              DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		return MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoStreamingInterfaceFound;
+	}
+	
+	while (FoundEndpoints != (MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
+	{
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			return MIDI_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+							   MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+			
+			FoundEndpoints |= MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+							   MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+			FoundEndpoints |= MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+	return MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == MIDI_STREAMING_CLASS)    &&
+		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == MIDI_STREAMING_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (CurrentInterface->Protocol == MIDI_STREAMING_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+	
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (CurrentEndpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+	
+		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) && !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress)))
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+uint8_t MIDI_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+
+	if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
+	{
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+
+	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		  Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	}
+	
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+bool MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  return false;
+
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Pipe_ClearIN();
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.h
index 0cd99bcca..dd064af19 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.h
@@ -1,204 +1,204 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
- *
- *  Host mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMIDIHost MIDI Class Host Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the MIDI USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __MIDI_CLASS_HOST_H__
-#define __MIDI_CLASS_HOST_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/MIDI.h"
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MIDI.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief MIDI Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
-			 *  and passed to each of the MIDI class driver functions as the MIDIInterfaceInfo parameter. This
-			 *  stores each MIDI interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the MIDI interface's streaming IN data pipe */
-					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the MIDI interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
-					
-					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the MIDI interface's streaming OUT data pipe */
-					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the MIDI interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
-					                *   after \ref MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
-					                *   Configured state
-					                */
-
-					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the MIDI Streaming Data interface's IN data pipe */
-					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the MIDI Streaming Data interface's OUT data pipe */
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
-						  *   the interface is enumerated.
-						  */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t;
-			
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
-			enum MIDIHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-				MIDI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-				MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoStreamingInterfaceFound  = 2, /**< A compatible MIDI interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-				MIDI_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible MIDI data endpoints were not found in the device's MIDI interface */
-			};
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given MIDI host interface instance using the Configuration
-			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given MIDI Host instance's
-			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.
-			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in
-			 *  the Addressed state.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an MIDI Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref MIDIHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-			                                 void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-			/** Sends a MIDI event packet to the device. If no device is connected, the event packet is discarded.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Event  Pointer to a populated USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure containing the MIDI event to send
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum			 
-			 */
-			uint8_t MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
-			                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-			/** Flushes the MIDI send buffer, sending any queued MIDI events to the device. This should be called to override the
-			 *  \ref MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket() function's packing behaviour, to flush queued events. Events are queued into the
-			 *  pipe bank until either the pipe bank is full, or \ref MIDI_Host_Flush() is called. This allows for multiple MIDI
-			 *  events to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			 uint8_t MIDI_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo);
-			 
-			/** Receives a MIDI event packet from the device.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
-			 *  \param[out] Event  Pointer to a USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure where the received MIDI event is to be placed
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if a MIDI event packet was received, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
-			                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** General management task for a given MIDI host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an MIDI Class host configuration and state
-			 */
-			static inline void MIDI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo);
-			static inline void MIDI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				(void)MIDIInterfaceInfo;
-			}
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define MIDI_STREAMING_CLASS           0x01
-			#define MIDI_STREAMING_SUBCLASS        0x03
-			#define MIDI_STREAMING_PROTOCOL        0x00
-			
-			#define MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 0)
-			#define MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 1)
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_CLASS_HOST_C)
-				static uint8_t DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static uint8_t DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			#endif	
-	#endif
-				
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMIDIHost MIDI Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the MIDI USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __MIDI_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __MIDI_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/MIDI.h"
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MIDI.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief MIDI Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the MIDI class driver functions as the MIDIInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each MIDI interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the MIDI interface's streaming IN data pipe */
+					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the MIDI interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
+					
+					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the MIDI interface's streaming OUT data pipe */
+					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the MIDI interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state
+					                */
+
+					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the MIDI Streaming Data interface's IN data pipe */
+					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the MIDI Streaming Data interface's OUT data pipe */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t;
+			
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum MIDIHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+				MIDI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+				MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoStreamingInterfaceFound  = 2, /**< A compatible MIDI interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+				MIDI_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible MIDI data endpoints were not found in the device's MIDI interface */
+			};
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given MIDI host interface instance using the Configuration
+			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given MIDI Host instance's
+			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.
+			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in
+			 *  the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an MIDI Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref MIDIHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                 void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Sends a MIDI event packet to the device. If no device is connected, the event packet is discarded.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Event  Pointer to a populated USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure containing the MIDI event to send
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum			 
+			 */
+			uint8_t MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Flushes the MIDI send buffer, sending any queued MIDI events to the device. This should be called to override the
+			 *  \ref MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket() function's packing behaviour, to flush queued events. Events are queued into the
+			 *  pipe bank until either the pipe bank is full, or \ref MIDI_Host_Flush() is called. This allows for multiple MIDI
+			 *  events to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			 uint8_t MIDI_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo);
+			 
+			/** Receives a MIDI event packet from the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state
+			 *  \param[out] Event  Pointer to a USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure where the received MIDI event is to be placed
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if a MIDI event packet was received, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given MIDI host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an MIDI Class host configuration and state
+			 */
+			static inline void MIDI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo);
+			static inline void MIDI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)MIDIInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define MIDI_STREAMING_CLASS           0x01
+			#define MIDI_STREAMING_SUBCLASS        0x03
+			#define MIDI_STREAMING_PROTOCOL        0x00
+			
+			#define MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 0)
+			#define MIDI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 1)
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_CLASS_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DComp_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif	
+	#endif
+				
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c
index f148f4ecc..6e84d07b8 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c
@@ -1,594 +1,594 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_CLASS_HOST_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER
-#include "MassStorage.h"
-
-uint8_t MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-							   void* DeviceConfigDescriptor)
-{
-	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
-	
-	memset(&MSInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MSInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DeviceConfigDescriptor) != DTYPE_Configuration)
-	  return MS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
-	
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
-	                              DComp_NextMSInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		return MS_ENUMERROR_NoMSInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DeviceConfigDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t)->InterfaceNumber;
-	
-	while (FoundEndpoints != (MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
-	{
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
-		                              DComp_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			return MS_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DeviceConfigDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-			                   MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-			FoundEndpoints |= MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-			                   MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-			FoundEndpoints |= MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
-		}		
-	}
-
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
-	return MS_ENUMERROR_NoError;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
-
-		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == MASS_STORE_CLASS)    &&
-		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS) &&
-		    (CurrentInterface->Protocol == MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (CurrentEndpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-
-		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) &&
-		    (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress))))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-static uint8_t MS_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
-                                   const void* const BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-
-	SCSICommandBlock->Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE;
-	SCSICommandBlock->Tag       = ++MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag;
-
-	if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag == 0xFFFFFFFF)
-	  MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag = 1;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t),
-	                                      NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_ClearOUT();
-	Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
-
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	if ((BufferPtr != NULL) &&
-	    ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendReceiveData(MSInterfaceInfo, SCSICommandBlock, (void*)BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError))
-	{
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-static uint8_t MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
-	{
-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
-		{
-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-			TimeoutMSRem--;
-
-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
-			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
-		}
-	
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
-		{
-			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-
-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
-		}
-		
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
-		{
-			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-
-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
-		}
-		  
-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-	};
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-		
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-static uint8_t MS_Host_SendReceiveData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
-                                       MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t  ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-	uint16_t BytesRem  = SCSICommandBlock->DataTransferLength;
-
-	if (SCSICommandBlock->Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN)
-	{
-		if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(MSInterfaceInfo)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-		{
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-			return ErrorCode;
-		}
-
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-		
-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-
-		Pipe_ClearIN();
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-
-		Pipe_ClearOUT();
-		
-		while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
-		{
-			if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-		}
-	}
-
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-static uint8_t MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
-                                         MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t* const SCSICommandStatus)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(MSInterfaceInfo)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t),
-	                                     NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	if (SCSICommandStatus->Status != SCSI_Command_Pass)
-	  ErrorCode = MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-uint8_t MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_MassStorageReset,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-			.wLength       = 0,
-		};
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
-}
-
-uint8_t MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetMaxLUN,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-			.wLength       = 1,
-		};
-		
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		*MaxLUNIndex = 0;
-		ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-	}
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-uint8_t MS_Host_GetInquiryData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
-                               SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryData)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-	  
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t),
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY,
-					0x00,                            // Reserved
-					0x00,                            // Reserved
-					0x00,                            // Reserved
-					sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t), // Allocation Length
-					0x00                             // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, InquiryData)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;	
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t MS_Host_TestUnitReady(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;	
-
-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.DataTransferLength = 0,
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY,
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;	
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
-                                   SCSI_Capacity_t* const DeviceCapacity)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Capacity_t),
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10,
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // MSB of Logical block address
-					0x00,
-					0x00,
-					0x00,                   // LSB of Logical block address
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Partial Medium Indicator
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, DeviceCapacity)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	SwapEndian_n(&DeviceCapacity->Blocks,    sizeof(DeviceCapacity->Blocks));
-	SwapEndian_n(&DeviceCapacity->BlockSize, sizeof(DeviceCapacity->BlockSize));
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t MS_Host_RequestSense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
-                             SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SenseData)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t),
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE,
-					0x00,                                  // Reserved
-					0x00,                                  // Reserved
-					0x00,                                  // Reserved
-					sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length
-					0x00                                   // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, SenseData)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
-                                          const bool PreventRemoval)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.DataTransferLength = 0,
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL,
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					PreventRemoval,         // Prevent flag
-					0x00,                   // Reserved
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-	
-	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-                                 const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BlockBuffer)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_READ_10,
-					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
-					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
-					(BlockAddress >> 16),
-					(BlockAddress >> 8),
-					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
-					0x00,                   // Unused (reserved)
-					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Read
-					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Read
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-
-	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, BlockBuffer)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t MS_Host_WriteDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-                                  const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, const void* BlockBuffer)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
-		{
-			.DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
-			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT,
-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
-			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
-			.SCSICommandData    =
-				{
-					SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10,
-					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
-					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
-					(BlockAddress >> 16),
-					(BlockAddress >> 8),
-					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
-					0x00,                   // Unused (reserved)
-					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Write
-					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Write
-					0x00                    // Unused (control)
-				}
-		};
-
-	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, BlockBuffer)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_CLASS_HOST_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER
+#include "MassStorage.h"
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+							   void* DeviceConfigDescriptor)
+{
+	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
+	
+	memset(&MSInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MSInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DeviceConfigDescriptor) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return MS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+	
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
+	                              DComp_NextMSInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		return MS_ENUMERROR_NoMSInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DeviceConfigDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t)->InterfaceNumber;
+	
+	while (FoundEndpoints != (MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
+	{
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
+		                              DComp_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			return MS_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DeviceConfigDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+			                   MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+			FoundEndpoints |= MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+			                   MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+			FoundEndpoints |= MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
+		}		
+	}
+
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+	return MS_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == MASS_STORE_CLASS)    &&
+		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (CurrentInterface->Protocol == MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (CurrentEndpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) &&
+		    (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress))))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t MS_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
+                                   const void* const BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	SCSICommandBlock->Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE;
+	SCSICommandBlock->Tag       = ++MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag;
+
+	if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag == 0xFFFFFFFF)
+	  MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag = 1;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t),
+	                                      NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	if ((BufferPtr != NULL) &&
+	    ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendReceiveData(MSInterfaceInfo, SCSICommandBlock, (void*)BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError))
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+static uint8_t MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+			TimeoutMSRem--;
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
+		}
+	
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+		
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+		  
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	};
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+		
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t MS_Host_SendReceiveData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                       MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+	uint16_t BytesRem  = SCSICommandBlock->DataTransferLength;
+
+	if (SCSICommandBlock->Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(MSInterfaceInfo)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		{
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return ErrorCode;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+		
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+		
+		while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		}
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+static uint8_t MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                         MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t* const SCSICommandStatus)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(MSInterfaceInfo)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t),
+	                                     NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	if (SCSICommandStatus->Status != SCSI_Command_Pass)
+	  ErrorCode = MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_MassStorageReset,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetMaxLUN,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = 1,
+		};
+		
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		*MaxLUNIndex = 0;
+		ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	}
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_GetInquiryData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                               SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryData)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+	  
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t),
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY,
+					0x00,                            // Reserved
+					0x00,                            // Reserved
+					0x00,                            // Reserved
+					sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t), // Allocation Length
+					0x00                             // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, InquiryData)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;	
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_TestUnitReady(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;	
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = 0,
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;	
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                                   SCSI_Capacity_t* const DeviceCapacity)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Capacity_t),
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Logical block address
+					0x00,
+					0x00,
+					0x00,                   // LSB of Logical block address
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Partial Medium Indicator
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, DeviceCapacity)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	SwapEndian_n(&DeviceCapacity->Blocks,    sizeof(DeviceCapacity->Blocks));
+	SwapEndian_n(&DeviceCapacity->BlockSize, sizeof(DeviceCapacity->BlockSize));
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_RequestSense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                             SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SenseData)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t),
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE,
+					0x00,                                  // Reserved
+					0x00,                                  // Reserved
+					0x00,                                  // Reserved
+					sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length
+					0x00                                   // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, SenseData)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                                          const bool PreventRemoval)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = 0,
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					PreventRemoval,         // Prevent flag
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+	
+	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BlockBuffer)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_READ_10,
+					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
+					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
+					(BlockAddress >> 16),
+					(BlockAddress >> 8),
+					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
+					0x00,                   // Unused (reserved)
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Read
+					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Read
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, BlockBuffer)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_WriteDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, const void* BlockBuffer)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
+			.Flags              = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10,
+					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
+					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
+					(BlockAddress >> 16),
+					(BlockAddress >> 8),
+					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
+					0x00,                   // Unused (reserved)
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Write
+					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Write
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, BlockBuffer)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandStatus)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.h
index d2ab97009..992c5a0a6 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.h
@@ -1,339 +1,339 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
- *
- *  Host mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMassStorageHost Mass Storage Class Host Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Mass Storage USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __MS_CLASS_HOST_H__
-#define __MS_CLASS_HOST_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/MassStorage.h"
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MassStorage.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Error code for some Mass Storage Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error */
-			#define MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED              0x80
-	
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief Mass Storage Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
-			 *  and passed to each of the Mass Storage class driver functions as the MSInterfaceInfo parameter. This
-			 *  stores each Mass Storage interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Mass Storage interface's IN data pipe */
-					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Mass Storage interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Mass Storage interface's OUT data pipe */
-					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Mass Storage interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
-					                *   after \ref MS_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
-					                *   Configured state
-					                */
-					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Mass Storage interface within the attached device */
-
-					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the Mass Storage interface's IN data pipe */
-					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the Mass Storage interface's OUT data pipe */
-					
-					uint32_t TransactionTag; /**< Current transaction tag for data synchronizing of packets */
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
-						  *   the interface is enumerated.
-						  */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t;
-			
-			/** \brief SCSI Device LUN Capacity Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  SCSI capacity structure, to hold the total capacity of the device in both the number
-			 *  of blocks in the current LUN, and the size of each block. This structure is filled by
-			 *  the device when the MassStore_ReadCapacity() function is called.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint32_t Blocks; /**< Number of blocks in the addressed LUN of the device */
-				uint32_t BlockSize; /**< Number of bytes in each block in the addressed LUN */
-			} SCSI_Capacity_t;
-
-		/* Enums: */
-			enum MSHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				MS_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-				MS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-				MS_ENUMERROR_NoMSInterfaceFound         = 2, /**< A compatible Mass Storage interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-				MS_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible Mass Storage endpoints were not found in the device's interfaces */
-			};
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Mass Storage host interface instance using the
-			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Mass
-			 *  Storage Host instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it
-			 *  is found within the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while
-			 *  the host state machine is in the Addressed state.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an MS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref MSHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-			                               void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-			/** Sends a MASS STORAGE RESET control request to the attached device, resetting the Mass Storage Interface
-			 *  and readying it for the next Mass Storage command.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Sends a GET MAX LUN control request to the attached device, retrieving the index of the highest LUN (Logical
-			 *  UNit, a logical drive) in the device. This value can then be used in the other functions of the Mass Storage
-			 *  Host mode Class driver to address a specific LUN within the device.
-			 *
-			 *  \note Some devices do not support this request, and will STALL it when issued. To get around this,
-			 *        on unsupported devices the max LUN index will be reported as zero and no error will be returned
-			 *        if the device STALLs the request.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[out] MaxLUNIndex  Pointer to a location where the highest LUN index value should be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex)
-			                          ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-			/** Retrieves the Mass Storage device's inquiry data for the specified LUN, indicating the device characteristics and
-			 *  properties.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
-			 *  \param[out] InquiryData  Location where the read inquiry data should be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED
-			 */
-			uint8_t MS_Host_GetInquiryData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
-			                               SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
-			                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-			/** Sends a TEST UNIT READY command to the device, to determine if it is ready to accept other SCSI commands.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
-			 */
-			uint8_t MS_Host_TestUnitReady(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex)
-			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Retrieves the total capacity of the attached USB Mass Storage device, in blocks, and block size.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
-			 *  \param[out] DeviceCapacity  Pointer to the location where the capacity information should be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
-			 */
-			uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
-			                                   SCSI_Capacity_t* const DeviceCapacity) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
-			                                   ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		
-			/** Retrieves the device sense data, indicating the current device state and error codes for the previously
-			 *  issued command.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
-			 *  \param[out] SenseData  Pointer to the location where the sense information should be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
-			 */
-			uint8_t MS_Host_RequestSense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
-			                             SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SenseData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
-			                             ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		
-			/** Issues a PREVENT MEDIUM REMOVAL command, to logically (or, depending on the type of device, physically) lock
-			 *  the device from removal so that blocks of data on the medium can be read or altered.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
-			 *  \param[in] PreventRemoval  Boolean true if the device should be locked from removal, false otherwise
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
-			 */
-			uint8_t MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
-			                                          const bool PreventRemoval) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Reads blocks of data from the attached Mass Storage device's medium.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
-			 *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Starting block address within the device to read from
-			 *  \param[in] Blocks  Total number of blocks to read
-			 *  \param[in] BlockSize  Size in bytes of each block within the device
-			 *  \param[out] BlockBuffer  Pointer to where the read data from the device should be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
-			 */
-			uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
-			                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress, const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize,
-			                                 void* BlockBuffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);
-		
-			/** Writes blocks of data to the attached Mass Storage device's medium.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
-			 *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Starting block address within the device to write to
-			 *  \param[in] Blocks  Total number of blocks to read
-			 *  \param[in] BlockSize  Size in bytes of each block within the device
-			 *  \param[in] BlockBuffer  Pointer to where the data to write should be sourced from
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
-			 */
-			uint8_t MS_Host_WriteDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
-			                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress, const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize,
-			                                  const void* BlockBuffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** General management task for a given Mass Storage host class interface, required for the correct operation of
-			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
-			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an MS Class host configuration and state
-			 */
-			static inline void MS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static inline void MS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				(void)MSInterfaceInfo;
-			}
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define MASS_STORE_CLASS               0x08
-			#define MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS            0x06
-			#define MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL            0x50
-
-			#define REQ_MassStorageReset           0xFF
-			#define REQ_GetMaxLUN                  0xFE
-
-			#define CBW_SIGNATURE                  0x43425355UL
-			#define CSW_SIGNATURE                  0x53425355UL
-			
-			#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT     (0 << 7)
-			#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN      (1 << 7)
-			
-			#define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000
-
-			#define MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 0)
-			#define MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 1)
-			
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_CLASS_HOST_C)		
-				static uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
-				static uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
-				
-				static uint8_t MS_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
-				                                   MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
-				                                   const void* const BufferPtr);
-				static uint8_t MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-				static uint8_t MS_Host_SendReceiveData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, 
-                                                       MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr);
-				static uint8_t MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
-				                                         MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t* const SCSICommandStatus);
-			#endif
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMassStorageHost Mass Storage Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Mass Storage USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __MS_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __MS_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/MassStorage.h"
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/MassStorage.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Error code for some Mass Storage Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error */
+			#define MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED              0x80
+	
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Mass Storage Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the Mass Storage class driver functions as the MSInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each Mass Storage interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Mass Storage interface's IN data pipe */
+					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Mass Storage interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Mass Storage interface's OUT data pipe */
+					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Mass Storage interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref MS_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state
+					                */
+					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Mass Storage interface within the attached device */
+
+					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the Mass Storage interface's IN data pipe */
+					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the Mass Storage interface's OUT data pipe */
+					
+					uint32_t TransactionTag; /**< Current transaction tag for data synchronizing of packets */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t;
+			
+			/** \brief SCSI Device LUN Capacity Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  SCSI capacity structure, to hold the total capacity of the device in both the number
+			 *  of blocks in the current LUN, and the size of each block. This structure is filled by
+			 *  the device when the MassStore_ReadCapacity() function is called.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint32_t Blocks; /**< Number of blocks in the addressed LUN of the device */
+				uint32_t BlockSize; /**< Number of bytes in each block in the addressed LUN */
+			} SCSI_Capacity_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			enum MSHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				MS_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+				MS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+				MS_ENUMERROR_NoMSInterfaceFound         = 2, /**< A compatible Mass Storage interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+				MS_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible Mass Storage endpoints were not found in the device's interfaces */
+			};
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Mass Storage host interface instance using the
+			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Mass
+			 *  Storage Host instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it
+			 *  is found within the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while
+			 *  the host state machine is in the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an MS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref MSHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                               void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Sends a MASS STORAGE RESET control request to the attached device, resetting the Mass Storage Interface
+			 *  and readying it for the next Mass Storage command.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a GET MAX LUN control request to the attached device, retrieving the index of the highest LUN (Logical
+			 *  UNit, a logical drive) in the device. This value can then be used in the other functions of the Mass Storage
+			 *  Host mode Class driver to address a specific LUN within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Some devices do not support this request, and will STALL it when issued. To get around this,
+			 *        on unsupported devices the max LUN index will be reported as zero and no error will be returned
+			 *        if the device STALLs the request.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[out] MaxLUNIndex  Pointer to a location where the highest LUN index value should be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex)
+			                          ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Retrieves the Mass Storage device's inquiry data for the specified LUN, indicating the device characteristics and
+			 *  properties.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
+			 *  \param[out] InquiryData  Location where the read inquiry data should be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_GetInquiryData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                               SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Sends a TEST UNIT READY command to the device, to determine if it is ready to accept other SCSI commands.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_TestUnitReady(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex)
+			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Retrieves the total capacity of the attached USB Mass Storage device, in blocks, and block size.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
+			 *  \param[out] DeviceCapacity  Pointer to the location where the capacity information should be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                                   SCSI_Capacity_t* const DeviceCapacity) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                   ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		
+			/** Retrieves the device sense data, indicating the current device state and error codes for the previously
+			 *  issued command.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
+			 *  \param[out] SenseData  Pointer to the location where the sense information should be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_RequestSense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                             SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SenseData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                             ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		
+			/** Issues a PREVENT MEDIUM REMOVAL command, to logically (or, depending on the type of device, physically) lock
+			 *  the device from removal so that blocks of data on the medium can be read or altered.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
+			 *  \param[in] PreventRemoval  Boolean true if the device should be locked from removal, false otherwise
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                                          const bool PreventRemoval) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Reads blocks of data from the attached Mass Storage device's medium.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
+			 *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Starting block address within the device to read from
+			 *  \param[in] Blocks  Total number of blocks to read
+			 *  \param[in] BlockSize  Size in bytes of each block within the device
+			 *  \param[out] BlockBuffer  Pointer to where the read data from the device should be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress, const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize,
+			                                 void* BlockBuffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);
+		
+			/** Writes blocks of data to the attached Mass Storage device's medium.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] LUNIndex  LUN index within the device the command is being issued to
+			 *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Starting block address within the device to write to
+			 *  \param[in] Blocks  Total number of blocks to read
+			 *  \param[in] BlockSize  Size in bytes of each block within the device
+			 *  \param[in] BlockBuffer  Pointer to where the data to write should be sourced from
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_WriteDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress, const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize,
+			                                  const void* BlockBuffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given Mass Storage host class interface, required for the correct operation of
+			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
+			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an MS Class host configuration and state
+			 */
+			static inline void MS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static inline void MS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)MSInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define MASS_STORE_CLASS               0x08
+			#define MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS            0x06
+			#define MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL            0x50
+
+			#define REQ_MassStorageReset           0xFF
+			#define REQ_GetMaxLUN                  0xFE
+
+			#define CBW_SIGNATURE                  0x43425355UL
+			#define CSW_SIGNATURE                  0x53425355UL
+			
+			#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT     (0 << 7)
+			#define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN      (1 << 7)
+			
+			#define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000
+
+			#define MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 0)
+			#define MS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 1)
+			
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_CLASS_HOST_C)		
+				static uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
+				static uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
+				
+				static uint8_t MS_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+				                                   MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
+				                                   const void* const BufferPtr);
+				static uint8_t MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+				static uint8_t MS_Host_SendReceiveData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, 
+                                                       MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock, void* BufferPtr);
+				static uint8_t MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+				                                         MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t* const SCSICommandStatus);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c
index 2d41a0c39..e291ae398 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c
@@ -1,250 +1,250 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER
-#include "Printer.h"
-
-uint8_t PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-							     void* DeviceConfigDescriptor)
-{
-	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
-	
-	memset(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DeviceConfigDescriptor) != DTYPE_Configuration)
-	  return PRNT_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
-	
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
-	                              DComp_NextPRNTInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		return PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoPrinterInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* PrinterInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DeviceConfigDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
-
-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber  = PrinterInterface->InterfaceNumber;
-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting = PrinterInterface->AlternateSetting;
-	
-	while (FoundEndpoints != (PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
-	{
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
-		                              DComp_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			return PRNT_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DeviceConfigDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-			                   PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-			FoundEndpoints |= PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-			                   PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-			FoundEndpoints |= PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
-		}		
-	}
-
-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
-	return PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_NextPRNTInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == PRINTER_CLASS)    &&
-		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == PRINTER_SUBCLASS) &&
-			(DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == PRINTER_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-
-		if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)
-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-uint8_t PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if (PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting)
-	{
-		uint8_t ErrorCode;
-	
-		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-			{
-				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-				.bRequest      = REQ_SetInterface,
-				.wValue        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting,
-				.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-				.wLength       = 0,
-			};
-		
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-		
-		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetPortStatus(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const PortStatus)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetPortStatus,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-			.wLength       = sizeof(uint8_t),
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(PortStatus);
-}
-
-uint8_t PRNT_Host_SoftReset(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest     = REQ_SoftReset,
-			.wValue       = 0,
-			.wIndex       = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-			.wLength      = 0,
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
-}
-
-uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, void* PrinterCommands, uint16_t CommandSize)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(PrinterCommands, CommandSize, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	Pipe_ClearOUT();
-	while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
-	{
-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-	}
-	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, char* DeviceIDString, uint16_t BufferSize)
-{
-	uint8_t  ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-	uint16_t DeviceIDStringLength = 0;
-
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      =  REQ_GetDeviceID,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
-			.wLength       = sizeof(DeviceIDStringLength),
-		};
-		
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&DeviceIDStringLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	  
-	if (!(DeviceIDStringLength))
-	{
-		DeviceIDString[0] = 0x00;
-		return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-	}
-	
-	DeviceIDStringLength = SwapEndian_16(DeviceIDStringLength);
-
-	if (DeviceIDStringLength > BufferSize)
-	  DeviceIDStringLength = BufferSize;
-
-	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = DeviceIDStringLength;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DeviceIDString)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	  
-	memmove(&DeviceIDString[0], &DeviceIDString[2], DeviceIDStringLength - 2);
-
-	DeviceIDString[DeviceIDStringLength - 2] = 0x00;
-	
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER
+#include "Printer.h"
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+							     void* DeviceConfigDescriptor)
+{
+	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
+	
+	memset(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DeviceConfigDescriptor) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return PRNT_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+	
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
+	                              DComp_NextPRNTInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		return PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoPrinterInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* PrinterInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DeviceConfigDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber  = PrinterInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting = PrinterInterface->AlternateSetting;
+	
+	while (FoundEndpoints != (PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
+	{
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
+		                              DComp_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			return PRNT_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DeviceConfigDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+			                   PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+			FoundEndpoints |= PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+			                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+			                   PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+			FoundEndpoints |= PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
+		}		
+	}
+
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+	return PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_NextPRNTInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class    == PRINTER_CLASS)    &&
+		    (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == PRINTER_SUBCLASS) &&
+			(DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == PRINTER_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting)
+	{
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+	
+		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = REQ_SetInterface,
+				.wValue        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting,
+				.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+				.wLength       = 0,
+			};
+		
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+		
+		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetPortStatus(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const PortStatus)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetPortStatus,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(uint8_t),
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(PortStatus);
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_SoftReset(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest     = REQ_SoftReset,
+			.wValue       = 0,
+			.wIndex       = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength      = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, void* PrinterCommands, uint16_t CommandSize)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(PrinterCommands, CommandSize, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+	{
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	}
+	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, char* DeviceIDString, uint16_t BufferSize)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	uint16_t DeviceIDStringLength = 0;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      =  REQ_GetDeviceID,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(DeviceIDStringLength),
+		};
+		
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&DeviceIDStringLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	  
+	if (!(DeviceIDStringLength))
+	{
+		DeviceIDString[0] = 0x00;
+		return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	}
+	
+	DeviceIDStringLength = SwapEndian_16(DeviceIDStringLength);
+
+	if (DeviceIDStringLength > BufferSize)
+	  DeviceIDStringLength = BufferSize;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = DeviceIDStringLength;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DeviceIDString)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	  
+	memmove(&DeviceIDString[0], &DeviceIDString[2], DeviceIDStringLength - 2);
+
+	DeviceIDString[DeviceIDStringLength - 2] = 0x00;
+	
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.h
index 04286ca32..92f1f22ae 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.h
@@ -1,233 +1,233 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Printer Class driver.
- *
- *  Host mode driver for the library USB Printer Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Printer.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassPrinter
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassPrinterHost Printer Class Host Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Printer USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_H__
-#define __PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/Printer.h"
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/Printer.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief Printer Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
-			 *  and passed to each of the Printer class driver functions as the PRNTInterfaceInfo parameter. This
-			 *  stores each Printer interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Printer interface's IN data pipe */
-					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Printer interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Printer interface's OUT data pipe */
-					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Printer interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
-					                *   after \ref PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
-					                *   Configured state
-					                */
-					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Printer interface within the attached device */
-					uint8_t AlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting within the Printer Interface in the attached device */
-
-					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the Printer interface's IN data pipe */
-					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the Printer interface's OUT data pipe */
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
-						  *   the interface is enumerated.
-						  */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t;
-
-		/* Enums: */
-			enum PRNTHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-				PRNT_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-				PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoPrinterInterfaceFound    = 2, /**< A compatible Printer interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-				PRNT_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible Printer endpoints were not found in the device's interfaces */
-			};
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Printer host interface instance using the
-			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Printer
-			 *  instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within
-			 *  the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state
-			 *  machine is in the Addressed state.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref PRNTHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-			                                 void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-			
-			/** Configures the printer to enable Bidirectional mode, if it is not already in this mode. This should be called
-			 *  once the connected device's configuration has been set, to ensure the printer is ready to accept commands.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Retrieves the status of the virtual Printer port's inbound status lines. The result can then be masked against the
-			 *  PRNT_PORTSTATUS_* macros to determine the printer port's status.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[out]  PortStatus  Location where the retrieved port status should be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetPortStatus(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const PortStatus)
-			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-			/** Soft-resets the attached printer, readying it for new commands.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SoftReset(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Sends the given raw data stream to the attached printer's input endpoint. This should contain commands that the
-			 *  printer is able to understand - for example, PCL data. Not all printers accept all printer languages; see
-			 *  \ref PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID() for details on determining acceptable languages for an attached printer.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] PrinterCommands  Pointer to a buffer containing the raw command stream to send to the printer
-			 *  \param[in] CommandSize  Size in bytes of the command stream to be sent
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, void* PrinterCommands, 
-			                           uint16_t CommandSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-			/** Retrieves the attached printer device's ID string, formatted according to IEEE 1284. This string is sent as a
-			 *  Unicode string from the device and is automatically converted to an ASCII encoded C string by this function, thus
-			 *  the maximum reportable string length is two less than the size given (to accommodate the Unicode string length
-			 *  bytes which are removed).
-			 *
-			 *  This string, when supported, contains the model, manufacturer and acceptable printer languages for the attached device.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[out] DeviceIDString  Pointer to a buffer where the Device ID string should be stored, in ASCII format
-			 *  \param[in] BufferSize  Size in bytes of the buffer allocated for the Device ID string
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, char* DeviceIDString,
-			                              uint16_t BufferSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** General management task for a given Printer host class interface, required for the correct operation of
-			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
-			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
-			 */
-			static inline void PRNT_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo);
-			static inline void PRNT_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				(void)PRNTInterfaceInfo;
-			}
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define PRINTER_CLASS                  0x07
-			#define PRINTER_SUBCLASS               0x01
-			#define PRINTER_PROTOCOL               0x02
-
-			#define REQ_GetDeviceID                0
-			#define REQ_GetPortStatus              1
-			#define REQ_SoftReset                  2
-		
-			#define PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN         (1 << 0)
-			#define PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT        (1 << 1)
-			
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_C)		
-				static uint8_t DComp_NextPRNTInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
-				static uint8_t DComp_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
-			#endif
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Printer.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassPrinter
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassPrinterHost Printer Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Printer USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/Printer.h"
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/Printer.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Printer Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the Printer class driver functions as the PRNTInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each Printer interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Printer interface's IN data pipe */
+					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Printer interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Printer interface's OUT data pipe */
+					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Printer interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state
+					                */
+					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Printer interface within the attached device */
+					uint8_t AlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting within the Printer Interface in the attached device */
+
+					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the Printer interface's IN data pipe */
+					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the Printer interface's OUT data pipe */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			enum PRNTHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+				PRNT_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+				PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoPrinterInterfaceFound    = 2, /**< A compatible Printer interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+				PRNT_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible Printer endpoints were not found in the device's interfaces */
+			};
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Printer host interface instance using the
+			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Printer
+			 *  instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within
+			 *  the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state
+			 *  machine is in the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref PRNTHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                 void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+			
+			/** Configures the printer to enable Bidirectional mode, if it is not already in this mode. This should be called
+			 *  once the connected device's configuration has been set, to ensure the printer is ready to accept commands.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Retrieves the status of the virtual Printer port's inbound status lines. The result can then be masked against the
+			 *  PRNT_PORTSTATUS_* macros to determine the printer port's status.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[out]  PortStatus  Location where the retrieved port status should be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetPortStatus(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const PortStatus)
+			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Soft-resets the attached printer, readying it for new commands.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SoftReset(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends the given raw data stream to the attached printer's input endpoint. This should contain commands that the
+			 *  printer is able to understand - for example, PCL data. Not all printers accept all printer languages; see
+			 *  \ref PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID() for details on determining acceptable languages for an attached printer.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] PrinterCommands  Pointer to a buffer containing the raw command stream to send to the printer
+			 *  \param[in] CommandSize  Size in bytes of the command stream to be sent
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, void* PrinterCommands, 
+			                           uint16_t CommandSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Retrieves the attached printer device's ID string, formatted according to IEEE 1284. This string is sent as a
+			 *  Unicode string from the device and is automatically converted to an ASCII encoded C string by this function, thus
+			 *  the maximum reportable string length is two less than the size given (to accommodate the Unicode string length
+			 *  bytes which are removed).
+			 *
+			 *  This string, when supported, contains the model, manufacturer and acceptable printer languages for the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[out] DeviceIDString  Pointer to a buffer where the Device ID string should be stored, in ASCII format
+			 *  \param[in] BufferSize  Size in bytes of the buffer allocated for the Device ID string
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo, char* DeviceIDString,
+			                              uint16_t BufferSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given Printer host class interface, required for the correct operation of
+			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
+			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state
+			 */
+			static inline void PRNT_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo);
+			static inline void PRNT_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)PRNTInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define PRINTER_CLASS                  0x07
+			#define PRINTER_SUBCLASS               0x01
+			#define PRINTER_PROTOCOL               0x02
+
+			#define REQ_GetDeviceID                0
+			#define REQ_GetPortStatus              1
+			#define REQ_SoftReset                  2
+		
+			#define PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN         (1 << 0)
+			#define PRNT_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT        (1 << 1)
+			
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_C)		
+				static uint8_t DComp_NextPRNTInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
+				static uint8_t DComp_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c
index b81c6af58..06175d237 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c
@@ -1,467 +1,467 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER
-#include "RNDIS.h"
-
-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)
-{
-	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	memset(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State));
-
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
-	  return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
-	
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-	                              DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
-	}
-	
-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).InterfaceNumber;
-
-	while (FoundEndpoints != (RNDIS_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN | RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
-	{
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-		                              DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			if (FoundEndpoints & RNDIS_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN)
-			{
-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, 
-				                              DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-				{
-					return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
-				}
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeNumber);
-				Pipe_DisablePipe();
-			
-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-				                              DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-				{
-					return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
-				}
-			}
-
-			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
-			                              DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-			{
-				return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
-			}
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
-		{
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-				RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.NotificationPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
-				
-				FoundEndpoints |= RNDIS_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN;
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-				                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, 
-				                   RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-				RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-				FoundEndpoints |= RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-				                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, 
-				                   RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-				RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-				
-				FoundEndpoints |= RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
-	return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
-	
-		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == RNDIS_CONTROL_CLASS)    &&
-		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == RNDIS_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) &&
-			(CurrentInterface->Protocol == RNDIS_CONTROL_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
-	
-		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == RNDIS_DATA_CLASS)    &&
-		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == RNDIS_DATA_SUBCLASS) &&
-			(CurrentInterface->Protocol == RNDIS_DATA_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-	
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (CurrentEndpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-	
-		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&
-		    !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress)))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-static uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
-                                             void* Buffer, uint16_t Length)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
-			.wLength       = Length,
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
-}
-
-static uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
-                                             void* Buffer, uint16_t Length)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse,
-			.wValue        = 0,
-			.wIndex        = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
-			.wLength       = Length,
-		};
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
-}
-
-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendKeepAlive(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t  KeepAliveMessage;
-	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t KeepAliveMessageResponse;
-	
-	KeepAliveMessage.MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG;
-	KeepAliveMessage.MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t);
-	KeepAliveMessage.RequestId       = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &KeepAliveMessage,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &KeepAliveMessageResponse,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t  InitMessage;
-	RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t InitMessageResponse;
-
-	InitMessage.MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG;
-	InitMessage.MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t);
-	InitMessage.RequestId       = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++;
-
-	InitMessage.MajorVersion    = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
-	InitMessage.MinorVersion    = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;
-	InitMessage.MaxTransferSize = RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.HostMaxPacketSize;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &InitMessage,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &InitMessageResponse,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	if (InitMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
-	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
-	  
-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.DeviceMaxPacketSize = InitMessageResponse.MaxTransferSize;
-	
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, uint16_t Length)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	struct
-	{
-		RNDIS_Set_Message_t SetMessage;
-		uint8_t             ContigiousBuffer[Length];
-	} SetMessageData;
-	
-	RNDIS_Set_Complete_t SetMessageResponse;
-	
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageType    = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG;
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength  = sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) + Length;
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.RequestId      = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++;
-			
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.Oid            = Oid;
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferLength = Length;
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.DeviceVcHandle = 0;
-	
-	memcpy(&SetMessageData.ContigiousBuffer, Buffer, Length);
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &SetMessageData,
-	                                               SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &SetMessageResponse,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	if (SetMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
-	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
-	  
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, uint16_t MaxLength)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	RNDIS_Query_Message_t QueryMessage;
-
-	struct
-	{
-		RNDIS_Query_Complete_t QueryMessageResponse;
-		uint8_t                ContigiousBuffer[MaxLength];
-	} QueryMessageResponseData;
-
-	QueryMessage.MessageType    = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG;
-	QueryMessage.MessageLength  = sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t);
-	QueryMessage.RequestId      = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++;
-			
-	QueryMessage.Oid            = Oid;
-	QueryMessage.InformationBufferLength = 0;
-	QueryMessage.InformationBufferOffset = 0;
-	QueryMessage.DeviceVcHandle = 0;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &QueryMessage,
-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &QueryMessageResponseData,
-	                                               sizeof(QueryMessageResponseData))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	if (QueryMessageResponseData.QueryMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
-	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
-
-	memcpy(Buffer, &QueryMessageResponseData.ContigiousBuffer, MaxLength);
-
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-bool RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool PacketWaiting;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return false;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
-	
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	PacketWaiting = Pipe_IsINReceived();
-	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return PacketWaiting;
-}
-
-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, uint16_t* PacketLength)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	{
-		if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
-		  Pipe_ClearIN();
-	
-		*PacketLength = 0;
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-	}
-
-	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t),
-	                                     NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	*PacketLength = (uint16_t)DeviceMessage.DataLength;
-	
-	Pipe_Discard_Stream(DeviceMessage.DataOffset - (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)),
-	                    NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-						
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, *PacketLength, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	
-	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
-	  Pipe_ClearIN();
-
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, uint16_t PacketLength)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;
-
-	memset(&DeviceMessage, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
-	DeviceMessage.MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG;
-	DeviceMessage.MessageLength = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + PacketLength);
-	DeviceMessage.DataOffset    = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
-	DeviceMessage.DataLength    = PacketLength;
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t),
-	                                      NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	{
-		return ErrorCode;
-	}
-
-	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, PacketLength, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Pipe_ClearOUT();
-
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER
+#include "RNDIS.h"
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	memset(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+	
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                              DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
+	}
+	
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).InterfaceNumber;
+
+	while (FoundEndpoints != (RNDIS_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN | RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
+	{
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (FoundEndpoints & RNDIS_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN)
+			{
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, 
+				                              DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeNumber);
+				Pipe_DisablePipe();
+			
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                              DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoRNDISInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+			                              DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+		{
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+				RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.NotificationPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
+				
+				FoundEndpoints |= RNDIS_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+				                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, 
+				                   RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+				RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+				FoundEndpoints |= RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+				                   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, 
+				                   RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+				RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+				
+				FoundEndpoints |= RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+	return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+	
+		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == RNDIS_CONTROL_CLASS)    &&
+		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == RNDIS_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) &&
+			(CurrentInterface->Protocol == RNDIS_CONTROL_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+	
+		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == RNDIS_DATA_CLASS)    &&
+		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == RNDIS_DATA_SUBCLASS) &&
+			(CurrentInterface->Protocol == RNDIS_DATA_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+	
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (CurrentEndpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+	
+		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&
+		    !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress)))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                             void* Buffer, uint16_t Length)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = Length,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+
+static uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                             void* Buffer, uint16_t Length)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = Length,
+		};
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendKeepAlive(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t  KeepAliveMessage;
+	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t KeepAliveMessageResponse;
+	
+	KeepAliveMessage.MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG;
+	KeepAliveMessage.MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t);
+	KeepAliveMessage.RequestId       = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &KeepAliveMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &KeepAliveMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t  InitMessage;
+	RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t InitMessageResponse;
+
+	InitMessage.MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG;
+	InitMessage.MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t);
+	InitMessage.RequestId       = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++;
+
+	InitMessage.MajorVersion    = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
+	InitMessage.MinorVersion    = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;
+	InitMessage.MaxTransferSize = RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.HostMaxPacketSize;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &InitMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &InitMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (InitMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
+	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
+	  
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.DeviceMaxPacketSize = InitMessageResponse.MaxTransferSize;
+	
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		RNDIS_Set_Message_t SetMessage;
+		uint8_t             ContigiousBuffer[Length];
+	} SetMessageData;
+	
+	RNDIS_Set_Complete_t SetMessageResponse;
+	
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageType    = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength  = sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) + Length;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.RequestId      = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++;
+			
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.Oid            = Oid;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferLength = Length;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.DeviceVcHandle = 0;
+	
+	memcpy(&SetMessageData.ContigiousBuffer, Buffer, Length);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &SetMessageData,
+	                                               SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &SetMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (SetMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
+	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
+	  
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer, uint16_t MaxLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_Query_Message_t QueryMessage;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		RNDIS_Query_Complete_t QueryMessageResponse;
+		uint8_t                ContigiousBuffer[MaxLength];
+	} QueryMessageResponseData;
+
+	QueryMessage.MessageType    = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG;
+	QueryMessage.MessageLength  = sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t);
+	QueryMessage.RequestId      = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++;
+			
+	QueryMessage.Oid            = Oid;
+	QueryMessage.InformationBufferLength = 0;
+	QueryMessage.InformationBufferOffset = 0;
+	QueryMessage.DeviceVcHandle = 0;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &QueryMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &QueryMessageResponseData,
+	                                               sizeof(QueryMessageResponseData))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (QueryMessageResponseData.QueryMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
+	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
+
+	memcpy(Buffer, &QueryMessageResponseData.ContigiousBuffer, MaxLength);
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+bool RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool PacketWaiting;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return false;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+	
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	PacketWaiting = Pipe_IsINReceived();
+	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return PacketWaiting;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, uint16_t* PacketLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+		  Pipe_ClearIN();
+	
+		*PacketLength = 0;
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+	}
+
+	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t),
+	                                     NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	*PacketLength = (uint16_t)DeviceMessage.DataLength;
+	
+	Pipe_Discard_Stream(DeviceMessage.DataOffset - (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)),
+	                    NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+						
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, *PacketLength, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	
+	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+	  Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, uint16_t PacketLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;
+
+	memset(&DeviceMessage, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
+	DeviceMessage.MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG;
+	DeviceMessage.MessageLength = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + PacketLength);
+	DeviceMessage.DataOffset    = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+	DeviceMessage.DataLength    = PacketLength;
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t),
+	                                      NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, PacketLength, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.h
index f64710d5b..7daaca869 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.h
@@ -1,283 +1,283 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
- *
- *  Host mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISHost RNDIS Class Host Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Microsoft RNDIS Ethernet
- *  USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_H__
-#define __RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/RNDIS.h"
-
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/RNDIS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief RNDIS Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
-			 *  and passed to each of the RNDIS class driver functions as the RNDISInterfaceInfo parameter. This
-			 *  stores each RNDIS interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the RNDIS interface's IN data pipe */
-					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the RNDIS interface's OUT data pipe */
-					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  NotificationPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the RNDIS interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */			
-					bool     NotificationPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's notification pipe should use double banking */
-					
-					uint32_t HostMaxPacketSize; /**< Maximum size of a packet which can be buffered by the host */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
-					                *   after \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
-					                *   Configured state
-					                */
-					uint8_t ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the RNDIS control interface within the attached device */
-				
-					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the RNDIS interface's IN data pipe */
-					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the RNDIS interface's OUT data pipe */
-					uint16_t NotificationPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the RNDIS interface's IN notification pipe, if used */					
-
-					uint32_t DeviceMaxPacketSize; /**< Maximum size of a packet which can be buffered by the attached RNDIS device */
-					
-					uint32_t RequestID; /**< Request ID counter to give a unique ID for each command/response pair */
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
-						  *   the interface is enumerated.
-						  */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t;
-			
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
-			enum RNDISHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoRNDISInterfaceFound      = 2, /**< A compatible RNDIS interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible RNDIS endpoints were not found in the device's RNDIS interface */
-			};
-
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Additional error code for RNDIS functions when a device returns a logical command failure */
-			#define RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED                  0xC0	
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given RNDIS host interface instance using the Configuration
-			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given RNDIS Host instance's
-			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.
-			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in
-			 *  the Addressed state.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref RNDISHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-			                                void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-			/** Sends a RNDIS KEEPALIVE command to the device, to ensure that it does not enter standby mode after periods
-			 *  of long inactivity.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
-			 *          logical command failure
-			 */
-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendKeepAlive(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Initializes the attached RNDIS device's RNDIS interface. This should be called after the device's pipes have been
-			 *  configured via the call to \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
-			 *          logical command failure
-			 */
-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Sets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Oid  OID number of the parameter to set
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to where the property data is to be sourced from
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Length in bytes of the property data to sent to the device
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
-			 *          logical command failure
-			 */
-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer,
-			                                    uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)  ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-			/** Gets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Oid  OID number of the parameter to get
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to where the property data is to be written to
-			 *  \param[in] MaxLength  Length in bytes of the destination buffer size
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
-			 *          logical command failure
-			 */
-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer,
-			                                      uint16_t MaxLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-			/** Determines if a packet is currently waiting for the host to read in and process.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if a packet is waiting to be read in by the host, false otherwise
-			 */
-
-			bool RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo);
-			
-			/** Retrieves the next pending packet from the device, discarding the remainder of the RNDIS packet header to leave
-			 *  only the packet contents for processing by the host in the nominated buffer.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be written to
-			 *  \param[out] PacketLength  Pointer to where the length in bytes of the read packet is to be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, uint16_t* PacketLength)
-			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-			/** Sends the given packet to the attached RNDIS device, after adding a RNDIS packet message header.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be read from
-			 *  \param[in] PacketLength  Length in bytes of the packet to send
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, uint16_t PacketLength)
-			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** General management task for a given RNDIS host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
-			 */
-			static inline void RNDIS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo);
-			static inline void RNDIS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				(void)RNDISInterfaceInfo;
-			}
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define RNDIS_CONTROL_CLASS               0x02
-			#define RNDIS_CONTROL_SUBCLASS            0x02
-			#define RNDIS_CONTROL_PROTOCOL            0xFF
-			#define RNDIS_DATA_CLASS                  0x0A
-			#define RNDIS_DATA_SUBCLASS               0x00
-			#define RNDIS_DATA_PROTOCOL               0x00
-			
-			#define RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 0)
-			#define RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 1)
-			#define RNDIS_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN       (1 << 2)
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_C)
-				static uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, 
-				                                             void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
-				                                             void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-				static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
-			#endif	
-	#endif
-				
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISHost RNDIS Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Microsoft RNDIS Ethernet
+ *  USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/RNDIS.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/RNDIS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief RNDIS Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the RNDIS class driver functions as the RNDISInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each RNDIS interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the RNDIS interface's IN data pipe */
+					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the RNDIS interface's OUT data pipe */
+					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  NotificationPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the RNDIS interface's IN notification endpoint, if used */			
+					bool     NotificationPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the RNDIS interface's notification pipe should use double banking */
+					
+					uint32_t HostMaxPacketSize; /**< Maximum size of a packet which can be buffered by the host */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state
+					                */
+					uint8_t ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the RNDIS control interface within the attached device */
+				
+					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the RNDIS interface's IN data pipe */
+					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the RNDIS interface's OUT data pipe */
+					uint16_t NotificationPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the RNDIS interface's IN notification pipe, if used */					
+
+					uint32_t DeviceMaxPacketSize; /**< Maximum size of a packet which can be buffered by the attached RNDIS device */
+					
+					uint32_t RequestID; /**< Request ID counter to give a unique ID for each command/response pair */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t;
+			
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum RNDISHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoRNDISInterfaceFound      = 2, /**< A compatible RNDIS interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible RNDIS endpoints were not found in the device's RNDIS interface */
+			};
+
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Additional error code for RNDIS functions when a device returns a logical command failure */
+			#define RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED                  0xC0	
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given RNDIS host interface instance using the Configuration
+			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given RNDIS Host instance's
+			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.
+			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in
+			 *  the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref RNDISHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Sends a RNDIS KEEPALIVE command to the device, to ensure that it does not enter standby mode after periods
+			 *  of long inactivity.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+			 *          logical command failure
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendKeepAlive(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Initializes the attached RNDIS device's RNDIS interface. This should be called after the device's pipes have been
+			 *  configured via the call to \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+			 *          logical command failure
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Oid  OID number of the parameter to set
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to where the property data is to be sourced from
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Length in bytes of the property data to sent to the device
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+			 *          logical command failure
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer,
+			                                    uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)  ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Gets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Oid  OID number of the parameter to get
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to where the property data is to be written to
+			 *  \param[in] MaxLength  Length in bytes of the destination buffer size
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+			 *          logical command failure
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, uint32_t Oid, void* Buffer,
+			                                      uint16_t MaxLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Determines if a packet is currently waiting for the host to read in and process.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if a packet is waiting to be read in by the host, false otherwise
+			 */
+
+			bool RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo);
+			
+			/** Retrieves the next pending packet from the device, discarding the remainder of the RNDIS packet header to leave
+			 *  only the packet contents for processing by the host in the nominated buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be written to
+			 *  \param[out] PacketLength  Pointer to where the length in bytes of the read packet is to be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, uint16_t* PacketLength)
+			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Sends the given packet to the attached RNDIS device, after adding a RNDIS packet message header.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be read from
+			 *  \param[in] PacketLength  Length in bytes of the packet to send
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, uint16_t PacketLength)
+			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given RNDIS host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state
+			 */
+			static inline void RNDIS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo);
+			static inline void RNDIS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)RNDISInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define RNDIS_CONTROL_CLASS               0x02
+			#define RNDIS_CONTROL_SUBCLASS            0x02
+			#define RNDIS_CONTROL_PROTOCOL            0xFF
+			#define RNDIS_DATA_CLASS                  0x0A
+			#define RNDIS_DATA_SUBCLASS               0x00
+			#define RNDIS_DATA_PROTOCOL               0x00
+			
+			#define RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 0)
+			#define RNDIS_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 1)
+			#define RNDIS_FOUND_NOTIFICATION_IN       (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo, 
+				                                             void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+				                                             void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+				static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DComp_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
+			#endif	
+	#endif
+				
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c
index 50be7d6d2..4b2c6eab7 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c
@@ -1,413 +1,413 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SI_CLASS_HOST_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER
-#include "StillImage.h"
-
-uint8_t SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-                                   void* DeviceConfigDescriptor)
-{
-	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
-	
-	memset(&SIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(SIInterfaceInfo->State));
-	
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DeviceConfigDescriptor) != DTYPE_Configuration)
-	  return SI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
-	
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
-	                              DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		return SI_ENUMERROR_NoSIInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	while (FoundEndpoints != (SI_FOUND_EVENTS_IN | SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
-	{
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
-		                              DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			return SI_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
-		}
-		
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DeviceConfigDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
-		{
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);			
-				SIInterfaceInfo->State.EventsPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
-				
-				FoundEndpoints |= SI_FOUND_EVENTS_IN;
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-			{
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-				SIInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-				FoundEndpoints |= SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
-								   SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-				SIInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
-
-				FoundEndpoints |= SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
-	return SI_ENUMERROR_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
-
-		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == STILL_IMAGE_CLASS)    &&
-		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == STILL_IMAGE_SUBCLASS) &&
-		    (CurrentInterface->Protocol == STILL_IMAGE_PROTOCOL))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-uint8_t DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
-		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-	
-		uint8_t EndpointType = (CurrentEndpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
-
-		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&
-		    (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress))))
-		{
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-uint8_t SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-	
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	if (SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen)
-	  PIMAHeader->TransactionID = SIInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionID++;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	
-	uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMAHeader->DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
-
-	if (ParamBytes)
-	{
-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMAHeader->Params, ParamBytes, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-	}
-	
-	Pipe_ClearOUT();	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)
-{
-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	while (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	{
-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
-		{
-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-			TimeoutMSRem--;
-
-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
-			{
-				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
-			}
-		}
-		
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
-		{
-			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
-		}
-
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
-		{
-			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
-		}
-		  
-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-	}
-	
-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	
-	if (PIMAHeader->Type == CType_ResponseBlock)
-	{
-		uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMAHeader->DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
-
-		if (ParamBytes)
-		  Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMAHeader->Params, ParamBytes, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-		
-		Pipe_ClearIN();
-	}
-	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t SImage_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	Pipe_ClearOUT();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-uint8_t SImage_Host_ReadData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-bool SImage_Host_IsEventReceived(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* SIInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool IsEventReceived = false;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return false;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
-	  IsEventReceived = true;
-	
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return IsEventReceived;
-}
-
-uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveEventHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipeNumber);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-	
-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, sizeof(SI_PIMA_Container_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-uint8_t SImage_Host_OpenSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionID = 0;
-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = false;
-
-	SI_PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (SI_PIMA_Container_t)
-							{
-								.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
-								.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
-								.Code          = 0x1002,
-								.Params        = {1},
-							};
-							
-	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	  
-	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	  
-	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMABlock.Code != 0x2001))
-	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
-	  
-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = true;
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t SImage_Host_CloseSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	SI_PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (SI_PIMA_Container_t)
-							{
-								.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
-								.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
-								.Code          = 0x1003,
-								.Params        = {1},
-							};
-							
-	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-	  
-	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = false;
-
-	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMABlock.Code != 0x2001))
-	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t SImage_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, const uint16_t Operation,
-                                const uint8_t TotalParams, uint32_t* Params)
-{
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	SI_PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (SI_PIMA_Container_t)
-							{
-								.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(TotalParams),
-								.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
-								.Code          = Operation,
-							};
-							
-	memcpy(&PIMABlock.Params, Params, sizeof(uint32_t) * TotalParams);
-							
-	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveResponse(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-	SI_PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock;
-
-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMABlock.Code != 0x2001))
-	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
-	  
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SI_CLASS_HOST_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER
+#include "StillImage.h"
+
+uint8_t SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                   void* DeviceConfigDescriptor)
+{
+	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
+	
+	memset(&SIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(SIInterfaceInfo->State));
+	
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DeviceConfigDescriptor) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return SI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+	
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
+	                              DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		return SI_ENUMERROR_NoSIInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	while (FoundEndpoints != (SI_FOUND_EVENTS_IN | SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN | SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT))
+	{
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &DeviceConfigDescriptor,
+		                              DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			return SI_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound;
+		}
+		
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DeviceConfigDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+		{
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);			
+				SIInterfaceInfo->State.EventsPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+				Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
+				
+				FoundEndpoints |= SI_FOUND_EVENTS_IN;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+			{
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+				SIInterfaceInfo->State.DataINPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+				FoundEndpoints |= SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+								   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+								   SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank ? PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE : PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+				SIInterfaceInfo->State.DataOUTPipeSize = EndpointData->EndpointSize;
+
+				FoundEndpoints |= SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+	return SI_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CurrentInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                                USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((CurrentInterface->Class    == STILL_IMAGE_CLASS)    &&
+		    (CurrentInterface->SubClass == STILL_IMAGE_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (CurrentInterface->Protocol == STILL_IMAGE_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+uint8_t DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* CurrentEndpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                              USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+	
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (CurrentEndpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&
+		    (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(CurrentEndpoint->EndpointAddress))))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+uint8_t SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+	
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	if (SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen)
+	  PIMAHeader->TransactionID = SIInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionID++;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	
+	uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMAHeader->DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+	if (ParamBytes)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMAHeader->Params, ParamBytes, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+	
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)
+{
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	while (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+			TimeoutMSRem--;
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
+			{
+				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+		  
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	}
+	
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	
+	if (PIMAHeader->Type == CType_ResponseBlock)
+	{
+		uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMAHeader->DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+		if (ParamBytes)
+		  Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMAHeader->Params, ParamBytes, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+		
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t SImage_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t SImage_Host_ReadData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer, const uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+bool SImage_Host_IsEventReceived(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* SIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool IsEventReceived = false;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return false;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
+	  IsEventReceived = true;
+	
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return IsEventReceived;
+}
+
+uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveEventHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipeNumber);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, sizeof(SI_PIMA_Container_t), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t SImage_Host_OpenSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionID = 0;
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = false;
+
+	SI_PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (SI_PIMA_Container_t)
+							{
+								.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
+								.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
+								.Code          = 0x1002,
+								.Params        = {1},
+							};
+							
+	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	  
+	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	  
+	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMABlock.Code != 0x2001))
+	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+	  
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = true;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t SImage_Host_CloseSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	SI_PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (SI_PIMA_Container_t)
+							{
+								.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
+								.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
+								.Code          = 0x1003,
+								.Params        = {1},
+							};
+							
+	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+	  
+	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = false;
+
+	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMABlock.Code != 0x2001))
+	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t SImage_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, const uint16_t Operation,
+                                const uint8_t TotalParams, uint32_t* Params)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	SI_PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (SI_PIMA_Container_t)
+							{
+								.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(TotalParams),
+								.Type          = CType_CommandBlock,
+								.Code          = Operation,
+							};
+							
+	memcpy(&PIMABlock.Params, Params, sizeof(uint32_t) * TotalParams);
+							
+	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveResponse(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+	SI_PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMABlock.Code != 0x2001))
+	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+	  
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.h
index 4a5ccfabd..be3357969 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.h
@@ -1,323 +1,323 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
- *
- *  Host mode driver for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImage.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassSI
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassStillImageHost Still Image Class Host Mode Driver
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Still Image USB Class driver.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __SI_CLASS_HOST_H__
-#define __SI_CLASS_HOST_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../../USB.h"
-		#include "../Common/StillImage.h"
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/StillImage.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Error code for some Still Image Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error */
-			#define SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED              0x80
-
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief Still Image Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
-			 *  and passed to each of the Still Image class driver functions as the SIInterfaceInfo parameter. This
-			 *  stores each Still Image interface's configuration and state information.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				const struct
-				{
-					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Still Image interface's IN data pipe */
-					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Still Image interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Still Image interface's OUT data pipe */
-					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Still Image interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
-
-					uint8_t  EventsPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Still Image interface's IN events endpoint, if used */			
-					bool     EventsPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Still Image interface's events data pipe should use double banking */
-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
-				           */
-				struct
-				{
-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
-					                *   after \ref SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
-					                *   Configured state
-					                */
-
-					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the Still Image interface's IN data pipe */
-					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the Still Image interface's OUT data pipe */
-					uint16_t EventsPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the Still Image interface's IN events pipe */
-					
-					bool IsSessionOpen; /**< Indicates if a PIMA session is currently open with the attached device */
-					uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Transaction ID for the next transaction to send to the device */
-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
-						  *   the interface is enumerated.
-						  */
-			} USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t;
-	
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
-			enum SIHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				SI_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-				SI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-				SI_ENUMERROR_NoSIInterfaceFound         = 2, /**< A compatible Still Image interface was not found in the device's
-				                                             *   Configuration Descriptor
-				                                             */
-				SI_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible Still Image data endpoints were not found in the
-				                                              *   device's Still Image interface
-				                                              */
-			};
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Still Image host interface instance using the
-			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Still
-			 *  Image Host instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is
-			 *  found within the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while
-			 *  the host state machine is in the Addressed state.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref SIHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
-                                               void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-			/** Opens a new PIMA session with the attached device. This should be used before any session-orientated PIMA commands
-			 *  are issued to the device. Only one session can be open at the one time.
-			 *	
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
-			 *          returned a logical command failure
-			 */
-			uint8_t SImage_Host_OpenSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Closes an already opened PIMA session with the attached device. This should be used after all session-orientated
-			 *  PIMA commands have been issued to the device.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
-			 *          returned a logical command failure
-			 */
-			uint8_t SImage_Host_CloseSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Sends a raw PIMA block header to the device, filling out the transaction ID automatically. This can be used to send
-			 *  arbitrary PIMA blocks to the device with or without parameters.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] PIMAHeader  Pointer to a PIMA container structure that is to be sent
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader);
-			
-			/** Receives a raw PIMA block header to the device. This can be used to receive arbitrary PIMA blocks from the device with
-			 *  or without parameters.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[out] PIMAHeader  Pointer to a PIMA container structure where the received block is to be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader);
-
-			/** Sends a given PIMA command to the attached device, filling out the PIMA command header's Transaction ID automatically.
-			 *	
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Operation  PIMA operation code to issue to the device
-			 *  \param[in] TotalParams  Total number of 32-bit parameters to send to the device in the issued command block
-			 *  \param[in] Params  Pointer to an array of 32-bit values containing the parameters to send in the command block
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
-			 *          returned a logical command failure
-			 */
-			uint8_t SImage_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, const uint16_t Operation,
-			                                const uint8_t TotalParams, uint32_t* Params) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Receives and checks a response block from the attached PIMA device, once a command has been issued and all data
-			 *  associated with the command has been transferred.
-			 *	
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
-			 *          returned a logical command failure
-			 */
-			uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveResponse(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Indicates if the device has issued a PIMA event block to the host via the asynchronous events pipe.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if an event is waiting to be read, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool SImage_Host_IsEventReceived(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Receives an asynchronous event block from the device via the asynchronous events pipe.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[out] PIMAHeader  Pointer to a PIMA container structure where the event should be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
-			 *          returned a logical command failure
-			 */
-			uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveEventHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
-				                                   SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
-			                                       ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-			
-			/** Sends arbitrary data to the attached device, for use in the data phase of PIMA commands which require data
-			 *  transfer beyond the regular PIMA command block parameters.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to a buffer where the data to send has been stored
-			 *  \param[in] Bytes  Length in bytes of the data in the buffer to send to the attached device
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t SImage_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer,
-			                             const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-			/** Receives arbitrary data from the attached device, for use in the data phase of PIMA commands which require data
-			 *  transfer beyond the regular PIMA command block parameters.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
-			 *        call will fail.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to a buffer where the received data is to be stored
-			 *  \param[in] Bytes  Length in bytes of the data to read
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t SImage_Host_ReadData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer,
-			                             const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-		
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** General management task for a given Still Image host class interface, required for the correct operation of the
-			 *  interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
-			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
-			 */
-			static inline void SImage_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo);
-			static inline void SImage_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
-			{
-				(void)SIInterfaceInfo;
-			}		
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define STILL_IMAGE_CLASS              0x06
-			#define STILL_IMAGE_SUBCLASS           0x01
-			#define STILL_IMAGE_PROTOCOL           0x01
-
-			#define SI_FOUND_EVENTS_IN             (1 << 0)
-			#define SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 1)
-			#define SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 2)
-
-			#define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000
-		
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SI_CLASS_HOST_C)
-				static uint8_t DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-				static uint8_t DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			#endif
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the class driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImage.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassSI
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassStillImageHost Still Image Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Still Image USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SI_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __SI_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/StillImage.h"
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Class/StillImage.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Error code for some Still Image Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error */
+			#define SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED              0x80
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Still Image Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the Still Image class driver functions as the SIInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each Still Image interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				const struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  DataINPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Still Image interface's IN data pipe */
+					bool     DataINPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Still Image interface's IN data pipe should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  DataOUTPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Still Image interface's OUT data pipe */
+					bool     DataOUTPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Still Image interface's OUT data pipe should use double banking */
+
+					uint8_t  EventsPipeNumber; /**< Pipe number of the Still Image interface's IN events endpoint, if used */			
+					bool     EventsPipeDoubleBank; /** Indicates if the Still Image interface's events data pipe should use double banking */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state
+					                */
+
+					uint16_t DataINPipeSize; /**< Size in bytes of the Still Image interface's IN data pipe */
+					uint16_t DataOUTPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the Still Image interface's OUT data pipe */
+					uint16_t EventsPipeSize;  /**< Size in bytes of the Still Image interface's IN events pipe */
+					
+					bool IsSessionOpen; /**< Indicates if a PIMA session is currently open with the attached device */
+					uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Transaction ID for the next transaction to send to the device */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t;
+	
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum SIHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				SI_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+				SI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+				SI_ENUMERROR_NoSIInterfaceFound         = 2, /**< A compatible Still Image interface was not found in the device's
+				                                             *   Configuration Descriptor
+				                                             */
+				SI_ENUMERROR_EndpointsNotFound          = 3, /**< Compatible Still Image data endpoints were not found in the
+				                                              *   device's Still Image interface
+				                                              */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Still Image host interface instance using the
+			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Still
+			 *  Image Host instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is
+			 *  found within the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while
+			 *  the host state machine is in the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *  \param[in] DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref SIHost_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                               void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Opens a new PIMA session with the attached device. This should be used before any session-orientated PIMA commands
+			 *  are issued to the device. Only one session can be open at the one time.
+			 *	
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
+			 *          returned a logical command failure
+			 */
+			uint8_t SImage_Host_OpenSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Closes an already opened PIMA session with the attached device. This should be used after all session-orientated
+			 *  PIMA commands have been issued to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
+			 *          returned a logical command failure
+			 */
+			uint8_t SImage_Host_CloseSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a raw PIMA block header to the device, filling out the transaction ID automatically. This can be used to send
+			 *  arbitrary PIMA blocks to the device with or without parameters.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] PIMAHeader  Pointer to a PIMA container structure that is to be sent
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader);
+			
+			/** Receives a raw PIMA block header to the device. This can be used to receive arbitrary PIMA blocks from the device with
+			 *  or without parameters.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[out] PIMAHeader  Pointer to a PIMA container structure where the received block is to be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader);
+
+			/** Sends a given PIMA command to the attached device, filling out the PIMA command header's Transaction ID automatically.
+			 *	
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Operation  PIMA operation code to issue to the device
+			 *  \param[in] TotalParams  Total number of 32-bit parameters to send to the device in the issued command block
+			 *  \param[in] Params  Pointer to an array of 32-bit values containing the parameters to send in the command block
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
+			 *          returned a logical command failure
+			 */
+			uint8_t SImage_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, const uint16_t Operation,
+			                                const uint8_t TotalParams, uint32_t* Params) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Receives and checks a response block from the attached PIMA device, once a command has been issued and all data
+			 *  associated with the command has been transferred.
+			 *	
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
+			 *          returned a logical command failure
+			 */
+			uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveResponse(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Indicates if the device has issued a PIMA event block to the host via the asynchronous events pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if an event is waiting to be read, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool SImage_Host_IsEventReceived(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Receives an asynchronous event block from the device via the asynchronous events pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[out] PIMAHeader  Pointer to a PIMA container structure where the event should be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
+			 *          returned a logical command failure
+			 */
+			uint8_t SImage_Host_ReceiveEventHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+				                                   SI_PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                       ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			
+			/** Sends arbitrary data to the attached device, for use in the data phase of PIMA commands which require data
+			 *  transfer beyond the regular PIMA command block parameters.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to a buffer where the data to send has been stored
+			 *  \param[in] Bytes  Length in bytes of the data in the buffer to send to the attached device
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t SImage_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer,
+			                             const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Receives arbitrary data from the attached device, for use in the data phase of PIMA commands which require data
+			 *  transfer beyond the regular PIMA command block parameters.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *        call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to a buffer where the received data is to be stored
+			 *  \param[in] Bytes  Length in bytes of the data to read
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t SImage_Host_ReadData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo, void* Buffer,
+			                             const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+		
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given Still Image host class interface, required for the correct operation of the
+			 *  interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
+			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state
+			 */
+			static inline void SImage_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo);
+			static inline void SImage_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)SIInterfaceInfo;
+			}		
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define STILL_IMAGE_CLASS              0x06
+			#define STILL_IMAGE_SUBCLASS           0x01
+			#define STILL_IMAGE_PROTOCOL           0x01
+
+			#define SI_FOUND_EVENTS_IN             (1 << 0)
+			#define SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_IN           (1 << 1)
+			#define SI_FOUND_DATAPIPE_OUT          (1 << 2)
+
+			#define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000
+		
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SI_CLASS_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DComp_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h
index 582f61c66..44b80edb9 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h
@@ -1,86 +1,86 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
- *
- *  Master include file for the library USB MIDI Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
- *
- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMIDI MIDI Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/MIDI.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  MIDI Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB MIDI Class, for both Device
- *  and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the MIDI class manually
- *  via the low-level LUFA APIs.
- *
- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
- *  Hosts or Devices using the USB MIDI Class.
- *
- *  \note The USB MIDI class is actually a special case of the regular Audio class, thus this module depends on
- *        structure definitions from the \ref Group_USBClassAudioDevice class driver module.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_H_
-#define _MIDI_CLASS_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-		
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			#include "Device/MIDI.h"
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-			#include "Host/MIDI.h"
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB MIDI Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMIDI MIDI Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/MIDI.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDI.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  MIDI Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB MIDI Class, for both Device
+ *  and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the MIDI class manually
+ *  via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts or Devices using the USB MIDI Class.
+ *
+ *  \note The USB MIDI class is actually a special case of the regular Audio class, thus this module depends on
+ *        structure definitions from the \ref Group_USBClassAudioDevice class driver module.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_H_
+#define _MIDI_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/MIDI.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/MIDI.h"
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h
index 50ce0e5f3..77c163858 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
- *
- *  Master include file for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
- *
- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMS Mass Storage Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/MassStorage.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Mass Storage Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Mass Storage Class, for both
- *  Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Mass Storage class
- *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
- *
- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
- *  Hosts or Devices using the USB Mass Storage Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _MS_CLASS_H_
-#define _MS_CLASS_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-		
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			#include "Device/MassStorage.h"
-		#endif
-		
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-			#include "Host/MassStorage.h"
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassMS Mass Storage Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/MassStorage.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Mass Storage Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Mass Storage Class, for both
+ *  Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Mass Storage class
+ *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts or Devices using the USB Mass Storage Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MS_CLASS_H_
+#define _MS_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/MassStorage.h"
+		#endif
+		
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/MassStorage.h"
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Printer.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Printer.h
index 64206068f..0cd13eec1 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Printer.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Printer.h
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Printer Class driver.
- *
- *  Master include file for the library USB Printer Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
- *
- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassPrinter Printer Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/Printer.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Printer Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Printer Class, for the base
- *  USB Printer transport layer for USB Host mode only. Note that printers are free to implement whatever printer language
- *  they choose on top of this (e.g. Postscript), and so this driver exposes low level data transport functions only rather
- *  than high level raster or text functions. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Printer
- *  class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
- *
- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
- *  Devices using the USB Printer Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _PRINTER_CLASS_H_
-#define _PRINTER_CLASS_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-		
-		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-			#include "Host/Printer.h"
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB Printer Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassPrinter Printer Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/Printer.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Printer Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Printer Class, for the base
+ *  USB Printer transport layer for USB Host mode only. Note that printers are free to implement whatever printer language
+ *  they choose on top of this (e.g. Postscript), and so this driver exposes low level data transport functions only rather
+ *  than high level raster or text functions. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Printer
+ *  class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Devices using the USB Printer Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PRINTER_CLASS_H_
+#define _PRINTER_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+		
+		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/Printer.h"
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h
index dfbe6b582..e0fd4615f 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
- *
- *  Master include file for the library USB RNDIS Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
- *
- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassRNDIS RNDIS (Networking) Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/RNDIS.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  RNDIS Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the Microsoft USB RNDIS Networking
- *  Class, for both Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the
- *  RNDIS class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
- *
- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
- *  Hosts using the USB RNDIS Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_H_
-#define _RNDIS_CLASS_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-		
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			#include "Device/RNDIS.h"
-		#endif
-		
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-			#include "Host/RNDIS.h"
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB RNDIS Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassRNDIS RNDIS (Networking) Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/RNDIS.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  RNDIS Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the Microsoft USB RNDIS Networking
+ *  Class, for both Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the
+ *  RNDIS class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts using the USB RNDIS Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_H_
+#define _RNDIS_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/RNDIS.h"
+		#endif
+		
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/RNDIS.h"
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImage.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImage.h
index a7febf44c..d635f88f1 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImage.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImage.h
@@ -1,78 +1,78 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
- *
- *  Master include file for the library USB Still Image Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
- *
- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassSI Still Image Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/StillImage.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Still Image Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Still Image Class,
- *  for USB Host mode only. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Still Image class
- *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
- *
- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
- *  Devices using the USB Still Image Class.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _SI_CLASS_H_
-#define _SI_CLASS_H_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER
-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-		
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-		
-		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-			#include "Host/StillImage.h"
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB Still Image Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassSI Still Image Class Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Class/StillImage.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Still Image Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Still Image Class,
+ *  for USB Host mode only. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Still Image class
+ *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Devices using the USB Still Image Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SI_CLASS_H_
+#define _SI_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+		
+		#if defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			#error The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option cannot be used in projects using the library Class drivers.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/StillImage.h"
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c
index 270a98aeb..f6a6e5ebe 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,141 +1,141 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(uint8_t ConfigNumber, uint16_t* const ConfigSizePtr,
-                                           void* BufferPtr, uint16_t BufferSize)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-	uint8_t ConfigHeader[sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t)];
-
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
-			.wValue        = ((DTYPE_Configuration << 8) | (ConfigNumber - 1)),
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t),
-		};
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ConfigHeader)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	*ConfigSizePtr = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigHeader, USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t).TotalConfigurationSize;
-
-	if (*ConfigSizePtr > BufferSize)
-	  return HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow;
-	  
-	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = *ConfigSizePtr;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(BufferPtr)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(BufferPtr) != DTYPE_Configuration)
-	  return HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData;
-	
-	return HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful;
-}
-#endif
-
-void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
-                                 void** const CurrConfigLoc,
-                                 const uint8_t Type)
-{
-	while (*BytesRem)
-	{
-		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);	  
-
-		if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == Type)
-		  return;
-	}
-}
-
-void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
-                                       void** const CurrConfigLoc,
-                                       const uint8_t Type,
-                                       const uint8_t BeforeType)
-{
-	while (*BytesRem)
-	{
-		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);
-
-		if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == Type)
-		{
-			return;
-		}
-		else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == BeforeType)
-		{
-			*BytesRem = 0;
-			return;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
-                                      void** const CurrConfigLoc,
-                                      const uint8_t Type,
-                                      const uint8_t AfterType)
-{
-	USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc, AfterType);
-	
-	if (*BytesRem)
-	  USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc, Type);
-}
-			
-uint8_t USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(uint16_t* BytesRem, void** CurrConfigLoc, ConfigComparatorPtr_t ComparatorRoutine)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-		
-	while (*BytesRem)
-	{
-		uint8_t*  PrevDescLoc  = *CurrConfigLoc;
-		uint16_t  PrevBytesRem = *BytesRem;
-
-		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);
-
-		if ((ErrorCode = ComparatorRoutine(*CurrConfigLoc)) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound)
-		{
-			if (ErrorCode == DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail)
-			{
-				*CurrConfigLoc = PrevDescLoc;
-				*BytesRem      = PrevBytesRem;
-			}
-		
-			return ErrorCode;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_EndOfDescriptor;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(uint8_t ConfigNumber, uint16_t* const ConfigSizePtr,
+                                           void* BufferPtr, uint16_t BufferSize)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+	uint8_t ConfigHeader[sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t)];
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = ((DTYPE_Configuration << 8) | (ConfigNumber - 1)),
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t),
+		};
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ConfigHeader)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	*ConfigSizePtr = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigHeader, USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t).TotalConfigurationSize;
+
+	if (*ConfigSizePtr > BufferSize)
+	  return HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow;
+	  
+	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = *ConfigSizePtr;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(BufferPtr)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(BufferPtr) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData;
+	
+	return HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful;
+}
+#endif
+
+void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+                                 void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+                                 const uint8_t Type)
+{
+	while (*BytesRem)
+	{
+		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);	  
+
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == Type)
+		  return;
+	}
+}
+
+void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+                                       void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+                                       const uint8_t Type,
+                                       const uint8_t BeforeType)
+{
+	while (*BytesRem)
+	{
+		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);
+
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == Type)
+		{
+			return;
+		}
+		else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == BeforeType)
+		{
+			*BytesRem = 0;
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+                                      void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+                                      const uint8_t Type,
+                                      const uint8_t AfterType)
+{
+	USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc, AfterType);
+	
+	if (*BytesRem)
+	  USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc, Type);
+}
+			
+uint8_t USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(uint16_t* BytesRem, void** CurrConfigLoc, ConfigComparatorPtr_t ComparatorRoutine)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+		
+	while (*BytesRem)
+	{
+		uint8_t*  PrevDescLoc  = *CurrConfigLoc;
+		uint16_t  PrevBytesRem = *BytesRem;
+
+		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = ComparatorRoutine(*CurrConfigLoc)) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound)
+		{
+			if (ErrorCode == DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail)
+			{
+				*CurrConfigLoc = PrevDescLoc;
+				*BytesRem      = PrevBytesRem;
+			}
+		
+			return ErrorCode;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_EndOfDescriptor;
+}
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.h
index 232a9d111..099553335 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,286 +1,286 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Configuration descriptor parser API.
- *
- *  This section of the library gives a friendly API which can be used in host applications to easily
- *  parse an attached device's configuration descriptor so that endpoint, interface and other descriptor
- *  data can be extracted and used as needed.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Descriptors
- *  @defgroup Group_ConfigDescriptorParser Configuration Descriptor Parser
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the parsing of Configuration Descriptors.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H__
-#define __CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-		#include "../LowLevel/HostChapter9.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h"
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */	
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask for determining the type of an endpoint from an endpoint descriptor. This should then be compared
-			 *  with the EP_TYPE_* masks to determine the exact type of the endpoint.
-			 */
-			#define EP_TYPE_MASK                       0x03
-
-			/** Casts a pointer to a descriptor inside the configuration descriptor into a pointer to the given
-			 *  descriptor type.
-			 *
-			 *  Usage Example:
-			 *  \code
-			 *  uint8_t* CurrDescriptor = &ConfigDescriptor[0]; // Pointing to the configuration header
-			 *  USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t* ConfigHeaderPtr = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrDescriptor,
-			 *                                                           USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t);
-			 *
-			 *  // Can now access elements of the configuration header struct using the -> indirection operator
-			 *  \endcode
-			 */
-			#define DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, Type) ((Type*)(DescriptorPtr))
-
-			/** Casts a pointer to a descriptor inside the configuration descriptor into the given descriptor
-			 *  type (as an actual struct instance rather than a pointer to a struct).
-			 *
-			 *  Usage Example:
-			 *  \code
-			 *  uint8_t* CurrDescriptor = &ConfigDescriptor[0]; // Pointing to the configuration header
-			 *  USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t ConfigHeader = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrDescriptor,
-			 *                                                       USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t);
-			 *
-			 *  // Can now access elements of the configuration header struct using the . operator
-			 *  \endcode
-			 */
-			#define DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, Type)  (*DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, Type))
-
-			/** Returns the descriptor's type, expressed as the 8-bit type value in the header of the descriptor.
-			 *  This value's meaning depends on the descriptor's placement in the descriptor, but standard type
-			 *  values can be accessed in the \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t enum.
-			 */
-			#define DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DescriptorPtr)    DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Type
-			
-			/** Returns the descriptor's size, expressed as the 8-bit value indicating the number of bytes. */
-			#define DESCRIPTOR_SIZE(DescriptorPtr)    DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Size
-
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** Type define for a Configuration Descriptor comparator function (function taking a pointer to an array
-			 *  of type void, returning a uint8_t value).
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_GetNextDescriptorComp function for more details
-			 */
-			typedef uint8_t (* const ConfigComparatorPtr_t)(void*);
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Searches for the next descriptor in the given configuration descriptor using a premade comparator
-			 *  function. The routine updates the position and remaining configuration descriptor bytes values
-			 *  automatically. If a comparator routine fails a search, the descriptor pointer is retreated back
-			 *  so that the next descriptor search invocation will start from the descriptor which first caused the
-			 *  original search to fail. This behaviour allows for one comparator to be used immediately after another
-			 *  has failed, starting the second search from the descriptor which failed the first.
-			 *
-			 *  Comparator functions should be standard functions which accept a pointer to the header of the current
-			 *  descriptor inside the configuration descriptor which is being compared, and should return a value from
-			 *  the \ref DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum as a uint8_t value.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function is available in USB Host mode only.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in,out] BytesRem  Pointer to an int storing the remaining bytes in the configuration descriptor
-			 *  \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current position in the configuration descriptor
-			 *  \param[in] ComparatorRoutine  Name of the comparator search function to use on the configuration descriptor
-			 *
-			 *  \return Value of one of the members of the \ref DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 *
-			 *  Usage Example:
-			 *  \code
-			 *  uint8_t EndpointSearcher(void* CurrentDescriptor); // Comparator Prototype
-			 *
-			 *  uint8_t EndpointSearcher(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-			 *  {
-			 *     if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-			 *         return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-			 *     else
-			 *         return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-			 *  }
-			 *
-			 *  //...
-			 *  // After retrieving configuration descriptor:
-			 *  if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&BytesRemaining, &CurrentConfigLoc, EndpointSearcher) ==
-			 *      Descriptor_Search_Comp_Found)
-			 *  {
-			 *      // Do something with the endpoint descriptor
-			 *  }
-			 *  \endcode
-			 */
-			uint8_t USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(uint16_t* BytesRem, void** CurrConfigLoc, ConfigComparatorPtr_t ComparatorRoutine);
-			
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function. */
-			enum USB_Host_GetConfigDescriptor_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful       = 0, /**< No error occurred while retrieving the configuration descriptor */
-				HOST_GETCONFIG_DeviceDisconnect = 1, /**< The attached device was disconnected while retrieving the configuration
-				                                        * descriptor
-				                                        */
-				HOST_GETCONFIG_PipeError        = 2, /**< An error occurred in the pipe while sending the request */
-				HOST_GETCONFIG_SetupStalled     = 3, /**< The attached device stalled the request to retrieve the configuration
-				                                        * descriptor
-				                                        */
-				HOST_GETCONFIG_SoftwareTimeOut  = 4, /**< The request or data transfer timed out */
-				HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow     = 5, /**< The device's configuration descriptor is too large to fit into the allocated
-				                                        * buffer
-				                                        */
-				HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData      = 6, /**< The device returned invalid configuration descriptor data */
-			};
-		
-			/** Enum for return values of a descriptor comparator function. */
-			enum DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found                = 0, /**< Current descriptor matches comparator criteria. */
-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail                 = 1, /**< No further descriptor could possibly match criteria, fail the search. */
-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound             = 2, /**< Current descriptor does not match comparator criteria. */
-			};
-
-			/** Enum for return values of \ref USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(). */
-			enum DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found           = 0, /**< Configuration descriptor now points to descriptor which matches
-				                                             *   search criteria of the given comparator function. */
-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Fail            = 1, /**< Comparator function returned Descriptor_Search_Fail. */
-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_EndOfDescriptor = 2, /**< End of configuration descriptor reached before match found. */
-			};
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Retrieves the configuration descriptor data from an attached device via a standard request into a buffer,
-			 *  including validity and size checking to prevent a buffer overflow.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] ConfigNumber  Device configuration descriptor number to fetch from the device (usually set to 1 for
-			 *                           single configuration devices)
-			 *  \param[in,out] ConfigSizePtr  Pointer to a uint16_t for storing the retrieved configuration descriptor size
-			 *  \param[out] BufferPtr  Pointer to the buffer for storing the configuration descriptor data.
-			 *  \param[out] BufferSize  Size of the allocated buffer where the configuration descriptor is to be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_GetConfigDescriptor_ErrorCodes_t enum
-			 */
-			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(uint8_t ConfigNumber, uint16_t* const ConfigSizePtr, void* BufferPtr,
-			                                           uint16_t BufferSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value.
-			 *  The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.
-			 *
-			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem  Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor
-			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor
-			 * \param[in] Type  Descriptor type value to search for
-			 */
-			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
-			                                 void** const CurrConfigLoc,
-			                                 const uint8_t Type)
-			                                 ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value,
-			 *  which must come before a descriptor of the second given type value. If the BeforeType type
-			 *  descriptor is reached first, the number of bytes remaining to process is set to zero and the
-			 *  function exits. The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.
-			 *
-			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem  Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor
-			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor
-			 * \param[in] Type  Descriptor type value to search for
-			 * \param[in] BeforeType  Descriptor type value which must not be reached before the given Type descriptor
-			 */
-			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
-			                                       void** const CurrConfigLoc,
-			                                       const uint8_t Type,
-			                                       const uint8_t BeforeType)
-			                                       ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value,
-			 *  which must come after a descriptor of the second given type value. The bytes remaining value is
-			 *  automatically decremented.
-			 *
-			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem  Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor
-			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor
-			 * \param[in] Type  Descriptor type value to search for
-			 * \param[in] AfterType  Descriptor type value which must be reached before the given Type descriptor
-			 */
-			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
-			                                      void** const CurrConfigLoc,
-			                                      const uint8_t Type,
-			                                      const uint8_t AfterType)
-			                                      ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Skips over the current sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor, so that the pointer then
-			    points to the next sub-descriptor. The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.
-			 *
-			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem  Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor
-			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor
-			 */
-			static inline void USB_GetNextDescriptor(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
-			                                         void** const CurrConfigLoc) 
-			                                         ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);									  
-			static inline void USB_GetNextDescriptor(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
-			                                         void** const CurrConfigLoc)
-			{
-				uint16_t CurrDescriptorSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(*CurrConfigLoc, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Size;
-
-				*CurrConfigLoc += CurrDescriptorSize;
-				*BytesRem      -= CurrDescriptorSize;
-			}
-			
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Configuration descriptor parser API.
+ *
+ *  This section of the library gives a friendly API which can be used in host applications to easily
+ *  parse an attached device's configuration descriptor so that endpoint, interface and other descriptor
+ *  data can be extracted and used as needed.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Descriptors
+ *  @defgroup Group_ConfigDescriptorParser Configuration Descriptor Parser
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the parsing of Configuration Descriptors.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H__
+#define __CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+		#include "../LowLevel/HostChapter9.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h"
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */	
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for determining the type of an endpoint from an endpoint descriptor. This should then be compared
+			 *  with the EP_TYPE_* masks to determine the exact type of the endpoint.
+			 */
+			#define EP_TYPE_MASK                       0x03
+
+			/** Casts a pointer to a descriptor inside the configuration descriptor into a pointer to the given
+			 *  descriptor type.
+			 *
+			 *  Usage Example:
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t* CurrDescriptor = &ConfigDescriptor[0]; // Pointing to the configuration header
+			 *  USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t* ConfigHeaderPtr = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrDescriptor,
+			 *                                                           USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t);
+			 *
+			 *  // Can now access elements of the configuration header struct using the -> indirection operator
+			 *  \endcode
+			 */
+			#define DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, Type) ((Type*)(DescriptorPtr))
+
+			/** Casts a pointer to a descriptor inside the configuration descriptor into the given descriptor
+			 *  type (as an actual struct instance rather than a pointer to a struct).
+			 *
+			 *  Usage Example:
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t* CurrDescriptor = &ConfigDescriptor[0]; // Pointing to the configuration header
+			 *  USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t ConfigHeader = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrDescriptor,
+			 *                                                       USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t);
+			 *
+			 *  // Can now access elements of the configuration header struct using the . operator
+			 *  \endcode
+			 */
+			#define DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, Type)  (*DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, Type))
+
+			/** Returns the descriptor's type, expressed as the 8-bit type value in the header of the descriptor.
+			 *  This value's meaning depends on the descriptor's placement in the descriptor, but standard type
+			 *  values can be accessed in the \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t enum.
+			 */
+			#define DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DescriptorPtr)    DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Type
+			
+			/** Returns the descriptor's size, expressed as the 8-bit value indicating the number of bytes. */
+			#define DESCRIPTOR_SIZE(DescriptorPtr)    DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Size
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** Type define for a Configuration Descriptor comparator function (function taking a pointer to an array
+			 *  of type void, returning a uint8_t value).
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_GetNextDescriptorComp function for more details
+			 */
+			typedef uint8_t (* const ConfigComparatorPtr_t)(void*);
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Searches for the next descriptor in the given configuration descriptor using a premade comparator
+			 *  function. The routine updates the position and remaining configuration descriptor bytes values
+			 *  automatically. If a comparator routine fails a search, the descriptor pointer is retreated back
+			 *  so that the next descriptor search invocation will start from the descriptor which first caused the
+			 *  original search to fail. This behaviour allows for one comparator to be used immediately after another
+			 *  has failed, starting the second search from the descriptor which failed the first.
+			 *
+			 *  Comparator functions should be standard functions which accept a pointer to the header of the current
+			 *  descriptor inside the configuration descriptor which is being compared, and should return a value from
+			 *  the \ref DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum as a uint8_t value.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is available in USB Host mode only.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] BytesRem  Pointer to an int storing the remaining bytes in the configuration descriptor
+			 *  \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current position in the configuration descriptor
+			 *  \param[in] ComparatorRoutine  Name of the comparator search function to use on the configuration descriptor
+			 *
+			 *  \return Value of one of the members of the \ref DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 *
+			 *  Usage Example:
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t EndpointSearcher(void* CurrentDescriptor); // Comparator Prototype
+			 *
+			 *  uint8_t EndpointSearcher(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+			 *  {
+			 *     if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+			 *         return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+			 *     else
+			 *         return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  //...
+			 *  // After retrieving configuration descriptor:
+			 *  if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&BytesRemaining, &CurrentConfigLoc, EndpointSearcher) ==
+			 *      Descriptor_Search_Comp_Found)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Do something with the endpoint descriptor
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(uint16_t* BytesRem, void** CurrConfigLoc, ConfigComparatorPtr_t ComparatorRoutine);
+			
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function. */
+			enum USB_Host_GetConfigDescriptor_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful       = 0, /**< No error occurred while retrieving the configuration descriptor */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_DeviceDisconnect = 1, /**< The attached device was disconnected while retrieving the configuration
+				                                        * descriptor
+				                                        */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_PipeError        = 2, /**< An error occurred in the pipe while sending the request */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_SetupStalled     = 3, /**< The attached device stalled the request to retrieve the configuration
+				                                        * descriptor
+				                                        */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_SoftwareTimeOut  = 4, /**< The request or data transfer timed out */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow     = 5, /**< The device's configuration descriptor is too large to fit into the allocated
+				                                        * buffer
+				                                        */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData      = 6, /**< The device returned invalid configuration descriptor data */
+			};
+		
+			/** Enum for return values of a descriptor comparator function. */
+			enum DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found                = 0, /**< Current descriptor matches comparator criteria. */
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail                 = 1, /**< No further descriptor could possibly match criteria, fail the search. */
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound             = 2, /**< Current descriptor does not match comparator criteria. */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for return values of \ref USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(). */
+			enum DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found           = 0, /**< Configuration descriptor now points to descriptor which matches
+				                                             *   search criteria of the given comparator function. */
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Fail            = 1, /**< Comparator function returned Descriptor_Search_Fail. */
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_EndOfDescriptor = 2, /**< End of configuration descriptor reached before match found. */
+			};
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Retrieves the configuration descriptor data from an attached device via a standard request into a buffer,
+			 *  including validity and size checking to prevent a buffer overflow.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ConfigNumber  Device configuration descriptor number to fetch from the device (usually set to 1 for
+			 *                           single configuration devices)
+			 *  \param[in,out] ConfigSizePtr  Pointer to a uint16_t for storing the retrieved configuration descriptor size
+			 *  \param[out] BufferPtr  Pointer to the buffer for storing the configuration descriptor data.
+			 *  \param[out] BufferSize  Size of the allocated buffer where the configuration descriptor is to be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_GetConfigDescriptor_ErrorCodes_t enum
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(uint8_t ConfigNumber, uint16_t* const ConfigSizePtr, void* BufferPtr,
+			                                           uint16_t BufferSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value.
+			 *  The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.
+			 *
+			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem  Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor
+			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor
+			 * \param[in] Type  Descriptor type value to search for
+			 */
+			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                 void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+			                                 const uint8_t Type)
+			                                 ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value,
+			 *  which must come before a descriptor of the second given type value. If the BeforeType type
+			 *  descriptor is reached first, the number of bytes remaining to process is set to zero and the
+			 *  function exits. The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.
+			 *
+			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem  Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor
+			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor
+			 * \param[in] Type  Descriptor type value to search for
+			 * \param[in] BeforeType  Descriptor type value which must not be reached before the given Type descriptor
+			 */
+			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                       void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+			                                       const uint8_t Type,
+			                                       const uint8_t BeforeType)
+			                                       ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value,
+			 *  which must come after a descriptor of the second given type value. The bytes remaining value is
+			 *  automatically decremented.
+			 *
+			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem  Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor
+			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor
+			 * \param[in] Type  Descriptor type value to search for
+			 * \param[in] AfterType  Descriptor type value which must be reached before the given Type descriptor
+			 */
+			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                      void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+			                                      const uint8_t Type,
+			                                      const uint8_t AfterType)
+			                                      ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Skips over the current sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor, so that the pointer then
+			    points to the next sub-descriptor. The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.
+			 *
+			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem  Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor
+			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_GetNextDescriptor(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                         void** const CurrConfigLoc) 
+			                                         ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);									  
+			static inline void USB_GetNextDescriptor(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                         void** const CurrConfigLoc)
+			{
+				uint16_t CurrDescriptorSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(*CurrConfigLoc, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Size;
+
+				*CurrConfigLoc += CurrDescriptorSize;
+				*BytesRem      -= CurrDescriptorSize;
+			}
+			
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c
index 4d9990788..ee2030e1a 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c
@@ -1,38 +1,38 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "Events.h"
-
-void USB_Event_Stub(void)
-{
-
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "Events.h"
+
+void USB_Event_Stub(void)
+{
+
+}
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.h
index 8daa8ea2b..edc7a8b36 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.h
@@ -1,362 +1,362 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB controller events manager.
- *
- *  This file contains macros and functions relating to the management of library events, which are small
- *  pieces of code similar to ISRs which are run when a given condition is met. Each event can be fired from
- *  multiple places in the user or library code, which may or may not be inside an ISR, thus each handler
- *  should be written to be as small and fast as possible to prevent possible problems.
- *
- *  Events can be hooked by the user application by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters
- *  listed here. If an event with no user-associated handler is fired within the library, it by default maps to an
- *  internal empty stub function.
- *
- *  Each event must only have one associated event handler, but can be raised by multiple sources by calling the
- *  event handler function (with any required event parameters).
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_Events USB Events
- *
- *  This module contains macros and functions relating to the management of library events, which are small
- *  pieces of code similar to ISRs which are run when a given condition is met. Each event can be fired from
- *  multiple places in the user or library code, which may or may not be inside an ISR, thus each handler
- *  should be written to be as small and fast as possible to prevent possible problems.
- *
- *  Events can be hooked by the user application by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters
- *  listed here. If an event with no user-associated handler is fired within the library, it by default maps to an
- *  internal empty stub function.
- *
- *  Each event must only have one associated event handler, but can be raised by multiple sources by calling the
- *  event handler function (with any required event parameters).
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __USBEVENTS_H__
-#define __USBEVENTS_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-		#include "USBMode.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */			
-		/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			/** Event for USB stack initialization failure. This event fires when the USB interface fails to
-			 *  initialize correctly due to a hardware or software fault.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which support dual role modes.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] ErrorCode  Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in \ref USB_InitErrorCodes_t
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_InitFailure(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-
-			/** Event for USB mode pin level change. This event fires when the USB interface is set to dual role
-			 *  mode, and the UID pin level has changed to indicate a new mode (device or host). This event fires
-			 *  before the mode is switched to the newly indicated mode but after the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect
-			 *  event has fired (if connected before the role change).
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which support dual role modes.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY or USB_HOST_ONLY tokens have been supplied
-			 *        to the compiler (see \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void);
-
-			/** Event for USB host error. This event fires when a hardware fault has occurred whilst the USB
-			 *  interface is in host mode.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] ErrorCode  Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in \ref USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-			
-			/** Event for USB device attachment. This event fires when a the USB interface is in host mode, and
-			 *  a USB device has been connected to the USB interface. This is interrupt driven, thus fires before
-			 *  the standard \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() event and so can be used to programmatically start the USB
-			 *  management task to reduce CPU consumption.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_USBTask() for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-
-			/** Event for USB device removal. This event fires when a the USB interface is in host mode, and
-			 *  a USB device has been removed the USB interface whether or not it has been enumerated. This
-			 *  can be used to programmatically stop the USB management task to reduce CPU consumption.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_USBTask() for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-			
-			/** Event for USB device enumeration failure. This event fires when a the USB interface is
-			 *  in host mode, and an attached USB device has failed to enumerate completely.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] ErrorCode  Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in 
-			 *                        \ref USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] SubErrorCode  Sub error code indicating the reason for failure - for example, if the
-			 *                           ErrorCode parameter indicates a control error, this will give the error
-			 *                           code returned by the \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-
-			/** Event for USB device enumeration completion. This event fires when a the USB interface is
-			 *  in host mode and an attached USB device has been completely enumerated and is ready to be
-			 *  controlled by the user application.
-			 *
-			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
-			 *  1 second) when a transaction is waiting to be processed by the device will prevent break communications
-			 *  and cause the host to reset the USB bus.
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-			/** Event for USB device connection. This event fires when the AVR in device mode and the device is connected
-			 *  to a host, beginning the enumeration process, measured by a rising level on the AVR's VBUS pin.
-			 *
-			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
-			 *  two seconds) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.
-			 *
-			 *  \note For the smaller series 2 USB AVRs with limited USB controllers, VBUS is not available to the USB controller.
-			 *        this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default,
-			 *        which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state
-			 *        needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behaviour turned off by
-			 *        passing the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection
-			 *        and disconnection events may be manually fired, and the \ref USB_DeviceState global changed manually.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event may fire multiple times during device enumeration on the series 2 USB AVRs with limited USB controllers
-			 *        if NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is not defined.
-			 *
-			 *  \see USBTask.h for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-
-			/** Event for USB device disconnection. This event fires when the AVR in device mode and the device is disconnected
-			 *  from a host, measured by a falling level on the AVR's VBUS pin.
-			 *
-			 *  \note For the smaller series 2 USB AVRs with limited USB controllers, VBUS is not available to the USB controller.
-			 *        this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default,
-			 *        which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state
-			 *        needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behaviour turned off by
-			 *        passing the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection
-			 *        and disconnection events may be manually fired, and the \ref USB_DeviceState global changed manually.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event may fire multiple times during device enumeration on the series 2 USB AVRs with limited USB controllers
-			 *        if NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is not defined.
-			 *
-			 *  \see USBTask.h for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-
-			/** Event for unhandled control requests. This event fires when a the USB host issues a control
-			 *  request to the control endpoint (address 0) that the library does not handle. This may either
-			 *  be a standard request that the library has no handler code for, or a class specific request
-			 *  issued to the device which must be handled appropriately.
-			 *
-			 *  This event is time-critical; each packet within the request transaction must be acknowledged or
-			 *  sent within 50ms or the host will abort the transfer.
-			 *
-			 *  The library interally handles all standard control requests with the exceptions of SYNC FRAME,
-			 *  SET DESCRIPTOR and SET INTERFACE. These and all other non-standard control requests will be left
-			 *  for the user to process via this event if desired. If not handled in the user application, requests
-			 *  are automatically STALLed.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note Requests should be handled in the same manner as described in the USB 2.0 Specification,
-			 *        or appropriate class specification. In all instances, the library has already read the
-			 *        request SETUP parameters into the \ref USB_ControlRequest structure which should then be used
-			 *        by the application to determine how to handle the issued request.
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-			/** Event for USB configuration number changed. This event fires when a the USB host changes the
-			 *  selected configuration number while in device mode. This event should be hooked in device
-			 *  applications to create the endpoints and configure the device for the selected configuration.
-			 *
-			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
-			 *  one second) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.
-			 *
-			 *  This event fires after the value of \ref USB_ConfigurationNumber has been changed.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-
-			/** Event for USB suspend. This event fires when a the USB host suspends the device by halting its
-			 *  transmission of Start Of Frame pulses to the device. This is generally hooked in order to move
-			 *  the device over to a low power state until the host wakes up the device. If the USB interface is
-			 *  enumerated with the \ref USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL option set, the library will automatically suspend the
-			 *  USB PLL before the event is fired to save power.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist on the series 2 USB AVRs when the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
-			 *        compile time token is not set - see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp() event for accompanying Wake Up event.
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend(void);
-
-			/** Event for USB wake up. This event fires when a the USB interface is suspended while in device
-			 *  mode, and the host wakes up the device by supplying Start Of Frame pulses. This is generally
-			 *  hooked to pull the user application out of a low power state and back into normal operating
-			 *  mode. If the USB interface is enumerated with the \ref USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL option set, the library
-			 *  will automatically restart the USB PLL before the event is fired.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist on the series 2 USB AVRs when the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
-			 *        compile time token is not set - see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend() event for accompanying Suspend event.
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp(void);
-
-			/** Event for USB interface reset. This event fires when the USB interface is in device mode, and
-			 *  a the USB host requests that the device reset its interface. This event fires after the control
-			 *  endpoint has been automatically configured by the library.
-			 *
-			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
-			 *  two seconds) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_Reset(void);
-
-			/** Event for USB Start Of Frame detection, when enabled. This event fires at the start of each USB
-			 *  frame, once per millisecond, and is synchronized to the USB bus. This can be used as an accurate
-			 *  millisecond timer source when the USB bus is enumerated in device mode to a USB host.
-			 *
-			 *  This event is time-critical; it is run once per millisecond and thus long handlers will significantly
-			 *  degrade device performance. This event should only be enabled when needed to reduce device wakeups.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event is not normally active - it must be manually enabled and disabled via the
-			 *        \ref USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents() and \ref USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents() commands after enumeration.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
-			 */
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C)
-				void USB_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;
-					
-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-					void EVENT_USB_InitFailure(const uint8_t ErrorCode) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-				#endif
-				
-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-					void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-					                                       ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-				#endif
-
-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-					void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Device_Reset(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-					void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
-				#endif
-			#endif
-	#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB controller events manager.
+ *
+ *  This file contains macros and functions relating to the management of library events, which are small
+ *  pieces of code similar to ISRs which are run when a given condition is met. Each event can be fired from
+ *  multiple places in the user or library code, which may or may not be inside an ISR, thus each handler
+ *  should be written to be as small and fast as possible to prevent possible problems.
+ *
+ *  Events can be hooked by the user application by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters
+ *  listed here. If an event with no user-associated handler is fired within the library, it by default maps to an
+ *  internal empty stub function.
+ *
+ *  Each event must only have one associated event handler, but can be raised by multiple sources by calling the
+ *  event handler function (with any required event parameters).
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_Events USB Events
+ *
+ *  This module contains macros and functions relating to the management of library events, which are small
+ *  pieces of code similar to ISRs which are run when a given condition is met. Each event can be fired from
+ *  multiple places in the user or library code, which may or may not be inside an ISR, thus each handler
+ *  should be written to be as small and fast as possible to prevent possible problems.
+ *
+ *  Events can be hooked by the user application by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters
+ *  listed here. If an event with no user-associated handler is fired within the library, it by default maps to an
+ *  internal empty stub function.
+ *
+ *  Each event must only have one associated event handler, but can be raised by multiple sources by calling the
+ *  event handler function (with any required event parameters).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __USBEVENTS_H__
+#define __USBEVENTS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */			
+		/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Event for USB stack initialization failure. This event fires when the USB interface fails to
+			 *  initialize correctly due to a hardware or software fault.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which support dual role modes.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ErrorCode  Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in \ref USB_InitErrorCodes_t
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_InitFailure(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+
+			/** Event for USB mode pin level change. This event fires when the USB interface is set to dual role
+			 *  mode, and the UID pin level has changed to indicate a new mode (device or host). This event fires
+			 *  before the mode is switched to the newly indicated mode but after the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect
+			 *  event has fired (if connected before the role change).
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which support dual role modes.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY or USB_HOST_ONLY tokens have been supplied
+			 *        to the compiler (see \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB host error. This event fires when a hardware fault has occurred whilst the USB
+			 *  interface is in host mode.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ErrorCode  Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in \ref USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+			
+			/** Event for USB device attachment. This event fires when a the USB interface is in host mode, and
+			 *  a USB device has been connected to the USB interface. This is interrupt driven, thus fires before
+			 *  the standard \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() event and so can be used to programmatically start the USB
+			 *  management task to reduce CPU consumption.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_USBTask() for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB device removal. This event fires when a the USB interface is in host mode, and
+			 *  a USB device has been removed the USB interface whether or not it has been enumerated. This
+			 *  can be used to programmatically stop the USB management task to reduce CPU consumption.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_USBTask() for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+			
+			/** Event for USB device enumeration failure. This event fires when a the USB interface is
+			 *  in host mode, and an attached USB device has failed to enumerate completely.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ErrorCode  Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in 
+			 *                        \ref USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] SubErrorCode  Sub error code indicating the reason for failure - for example, if the
+			 *                           ErrorCode parameter indicates a control error, this will give the error
+			 *                           code returned by the \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+
+			/** Event for USB device enumeration completion. This event fires when a the USB interface is
+			 *  in host mode and an attached USB device has been completely enumerated and is ready to be
+			 *  controlled by the user application.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
+			 *  1 second) when a transaction is waiting to be processed by the device will prevent break communications
+			 *  and cause the host to reset the USB bus.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB device connection. This event fires when the AVR in device mode and the device is connected
+			 *  to a host, beginning the enumeration process, measured by a rising level on the AVR's VBUS pin.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
+			 *  two seconds) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \note For the smaller series 2 USB AVRs with limited USB controllers, VBUS is not available to the USB controller.
+			 *        this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default,
+			 *        which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state
+			 *        needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behaviour turned off by
+			 *        passing the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection
+			 *        and disconnection events may be manually fired, and the \ref USB_DeviceState global changed manually.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event may fire multiple times during device enumeration on the series 2 USB AVRs with limited USB controllers
+			 *        if NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is not defined.
+			 *
+			 *  \see USBTask.h for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB device disconnection. This event fires when the AVR in device mode and the device is disconnected
+			 *  from a host, measured by a falling level on the AVR's VBUS pin.
+			 *
+			 *  \note For the smaller series 2 USB AVRs with limited USB controllers, VBUS is not available to the USB controller.
+			 *        this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default,
+			 *        which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state
+			 *        needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behaviour turned off by
+			 *        passing the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection
+			 *        and disconnection events may be manually fired, and the \ref USB_DeviceState global changed manually.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event may fire multiple times during device enumeration on the series 2 USB AVRs with limited USB controllers
+			 *        if NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is not defined.
+			 *
+			 *  \see USBTask.h for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+
+			/** Event for unhandled control requests. This event fires when a the USB host issues a control
+			 *  request to the control endpoint (address 0) that the library does not handle. This may either
+			 *  be a standard request that the library has no handler code for, or a class specific request
+			 *  issued to the device which must be handled appropriately.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; each packet within the request transaction must be acknowledged or
+			 *  sent within 50ms or the host will abort the transfer.
+			 *
+			 *  The library interally handles all standard control requests with the exceptions of SYNC FRAME,
+			 *  SET DESCRIPTOR and SET INTERFACE. These and all other non-standard control requests will be left
+			 *  for the user to process via this event if desired. If not handled in the user application, requests
+			 *  are automatically STALLed.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note Requests should be handled in the same manner as described in the USB 2.0 Specification,
+			 *        or appropriate class specification. In all instances, the library has already read the
+			 *        request SETUP parameters into the \ref USB_ControlRequest structure which should then be used
+			 *        by the application to determine how to handle the issued request.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB configuration number changed. This event fires when a the USB host changes the
+			 *  selected configuration number while in device mode. This event should be hooked in device
+			 *  applications to create the endpoints and configure the device for the selected configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
+			 *  one second) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  This event fires after the value of \ref USB_ConfigurationNumber has been changed.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB suspend. This event fires when a the USB host suspends the device by halting its
+			 *  transmission of Start Of Frame pulses to the device. This is generally hooked in order to move
+			 *  the device over to a low power state until the host wakes up the device. If the USB interface is
+			 *  enumerated with the \ref USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL option set, the library will automatically suspend the
+			 *  USB PLL before the event is fired to save power.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist on the series 2 USB AVRs when the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+			 *        compile time token is not set - see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp() event for accompanying Wake Up event.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB wake up. This event fires when a the USB interface is suspended while in device
+			 *  mode, and the host wakes up the device by supplying Start Of Frame pulses. This is generally
+			 *  hooked to pull the user application out of a low power state and back into normal operating
+			 *  mode. If the USB interface is enumerated with the \ref USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL option set, the library
+			 *  will automatically restart the USB PLL before the event is fired.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist on the series 2 USB AVRs when the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+			 *        compile time token is not set - see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend() event for accompanying Suspend event.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB interface reset. This event fires when the USB interface is in device mode, and
+			 *  a the USB host requests that the device reset its interface. This event fires after the control
+			 *  endpoint has been automatically configured by the library.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
+			 *  two seconds) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_Reset(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB Start Of Frame detection, when enabled. This event fires at the start of each USB
+			 *  frame, once per millisecond, and is synchronized to the USB bus. This can be used as an accurate
+			 *  millisecond timer source when the USB bus is enumerated in device mode to a USB host.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; it is run once per millisecond and thus long handlers will significantly
+			 *  degrade device performance. This event should only be enabled when needed to reduce device wakeups.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event is not normally active - it must be manually enabled and disabled via the
+			 *        \ref USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents() and \ref USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents() commands after enumeration.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C)
+				void USB_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;
+					
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					void EVENT_USB_InitFailure(const uint8_t ErrorCode) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+				#endif
+				
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+					                                       ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+				#endif
+
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_Reset(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+				#endif
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h
index 5f54561dc..9764b45ad 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h
@@ -1,651 +1,651 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB standard descriptor definitions.
- *
- *  This file contains structures and macros for the easy creation of standard USB descriptors in USB device projects.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_Descriptors USB Descriptors
- *
- *  Standard USB device descriptor defines and retrieval routines, for USB devices. This module contains
- *  structures and macros for the easy creation of standard USB descriptors in USB device projects.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __USBDESCRIPTORS_H__
-#define __USBDESCRIPTORS_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <stddef.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-		#include "USBMode.h"
-		#include "Events.h"
-		
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			#include "../LowLevel/Device.h"
-		#endif
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Indicates that a given descriptor does not exist in the device. This can be used inside descriptors
-			 *  for string descriptor indexes, or may be use as a return value for GetDescriptor when the specified
-			 *  descriptor does not exist.
-			 */
-			#define NO_DESCRIPTOR                     0
-
-			#if (!defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device.
-				 *  This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port
-				 *  number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some USB AVRs contain
-				 *  a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value
-				 *  will cause it to use the internal serial number.
-				 *
-				 *  On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial
-				 *  number for the device.
-				 */
-				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL           0xDC
-			#else
-				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL           NO_DESCRIPTOR
-			#endif
-			
-			/** Macro to calculate the power value for the configuration descriptor, from a given number of milliamps. */
-			#define USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(mA)           ((mA) >> 1)
-
-			/** Macro to calculate the Unicode length of a string with a given number of Unicode characters.
-			 *  Should be used in string descriptor's headers for giving the string descriptor's byte length.
-			 */
-			#define USB_STRING_LEN(str)               (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Header_t) + ((str) << 1))
-			
-			/** Macro to encode a given four digit floating point version number (e.g. 01.23) into Binary Coded
-			 *  Decimal format for descriptor fields requiring BCD encoding, such as the USB version number in the
-			 *  standard device descriptor.
-			 */
-			#define VERSION_BCD(x)                    ((((VERSION_TENS(x) << 4) | VERSION_ONES(x)) << 8) | \
-			                                          ((VERSION_TENTHS(x) << 4) | VERSION_HUNDREDTHS(x)))
-
-			/** String language ID for the English language. Should be used in \ref USB_Descriptor_String_t descriptors
-			 *  to indicate that the English language is supported by the device in its string descriptors.
-			 */
-			#define LANGUAGE_ID_ENG                   0x0409
-
-			/** Can be masked with an endpoint address for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t endpoint descriptor's
-			 *  EndpointAddress value to indicate to the host that the endpoint is of the IN direction (i.e, from
-			 *  device to host).
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN        0x80
-
-			/** Can be masked with an endpoint address for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t endpoint descriptor's
-			 *  EndpointAddress value to indicate to the host that the endpoint is of the OUT direction (i.e, from
-			 *  host to device).
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT       0x00		
-
-			/** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t
-			 *  descriptor's ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration can draw its power
-			 *  from the host's VBUS line.
-			 */
-			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED        0x80
-
-			/** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t
-			 *  descriptor's ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration can draw its power
-			 *  from the device's own power source.
-			 */
-			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED       0x40
-
-			/** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t
-			 *  descriptor's ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration supports the
-			 *  remote wakeup feature of the USB standard, allowing a suspended USB device to wake up the host upon
-			 *  request.
-			 */
-			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_REMOTEWAKEUP      0x20
-
-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
-			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is not synchronized.
-			 *
-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC             (0 << 2)
-
-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
-			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is asynchronous.
-			 *
-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_ASYNC               (1 << 2)
-
-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
-			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is adaptive.
-			 *
-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_ADAPTIVE            (2 << 2)
-
-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
-			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is synchronized.
-			 *
-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC                (3 << 2)
-			
-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
-			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for data transfers.
-			 *
-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA               (0 << 4)
-
-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
-			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for feedback.
-			 *
-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_FEEDBACK           (1 << 4)
-
-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
-			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for implicit feedback.
-			 *
-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_IMPLICIT_FEEDBACK  (2 << 4)
-
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the possible standard descriptor types, as given in each descriptor's header. */
-			enum USB_DescriptorTypes_t
-			{
-				DTYPE_Device               = 0x01, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a device descriptor. */
-				DTYPE_Configuration        = 0x02, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a configuration descriptor. */
-				DTYPE_String               = 0x03, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a string descriptor. */
-				DTYPE_Interface            = 0x04, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface descriptor. */
-				DTYPE_Endpoint             = 0x05, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an endpoint descriptor. */
-				DTYPE_DeviceQualifier      = 0x06, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a device qualifier descriptor. */
-				DTYPE_Other                = 0x07, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is of other type. */
-				DTYPE_InterfacePower       = 0x08, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface power descriptor. */
-				DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation = 0x0B, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface association descriptor. */
-			};
-
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief Standard USB Descriptor Header (LUFA naming conventions).
-			 *
-             *  Type define for all descriptors' standard header, indicating the descriptor's length and type. This structure
-			 *  uses LUFA-specific element names to make each element's purpose clearer.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Header_t for the version of this define with standard element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t     Size; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
-				uint8_t     Type; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
-				                   *   given by the specific class.
-				                   */
-			} USB_Descriptor_Header_t;
-			
-			/** \brief Standard USB Descriptor Header (USB-IF naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for all descriptors' standard header, indicating the descriptor's length and type. This structure
-			 *  uses the relevant standard's given element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Header_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
-				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
-				                              *   given by the specific class.
-				                              */
-			} USB_StdDescriptor_Header_t;
-			
-			/** \brief Standard USB Device Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard Device Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names to make each
-			 *  element's purpose clearer.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Device_t for the version of this define with standard element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
-
-				uint16_t    USBSpecification; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification. */
-				uint8_t     Class; /**< USB device class. */
-				uint8_t     SubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */
-				uint8_t     Protocol; /**< USB device protocol. */
-				
-				uint8_t     Endpoint0Size; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */
-				
-				uint16_t    VendorID; /**< Vendor ID for the USB product. */
-				uint16_t    ProductID; /**< Unique product ID for the USB product. */
-				uint16_t    ReleaseNumber; /**< Product release (version) number. */
-				
-				uint8_t     ManufacturerStrIndex; /**< String index for the manufacturer's name. The
-				                                   *   host will request this string via a separate
-				                                   *   control request for the string descriptor.
-				                                   *
-				                                   *   \note If no string supplied, use \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR.
-				                                   */
-				uint8_t     ProductStrIndex; /**< String index for the product name/details.
-				                              *
-				                              *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
-				                              */
-				uint8_t     SerialNumStrIndex; /**< String index for the product's globally unique hexadecimal
-				                                *   serial number, in uppercase Unicode ASCII.
-				                                *
-				                                *  \note On some AVR models, there is an embedded serial number
-				                                *        in the chip which can be used for the device serial number.
-				                                *        To use this serial number, set this to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
-				                                *        On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to 0 and will cause
-				                                *        the host to generate a pseudo-unique value for the device upon
-				                                *        insertion.
-				                                *
-				                                *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
-				                                */
-				uint8_t     NumberOfConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by
-				                                     *   the device.
-				                                     */
-			} USB_Descriptor_Device_t;
-
-			/** \brief Standard USB Device Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard Device Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names
-			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Device_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
-				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
-				                              *   given by the specific class.
-				                              */
-				uint16_t    bcdUSB; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification. */
-				uint8_t     bDeviceClass; /**< USB device class. */
-				uint8_t     bDeviceSubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */
-				uint8_t     bDeviceProtocol; /**< USB device protocol. */
-				uint8_t     bMaxPacketSize0; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */
-				uint16_t    idVendor; /**< Vendor ID for the USB product. */
-				uint16_t    idProduct; /**< Unique product ID for the USB product. */
-				uint16_t    bcdDevice; /**< Product release (version) number. */
-				uint8_t     iManufacturer; /**< String index for the manufacturer's name. The
-				                            *   host will request this string via a separate
-				                            *   control request for the string descriptor.
-				                            *
-				                            *   \note If no string supplied, use \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR.
-				                            */
-				uint8_t     iProduct; /**< String index for the product name/details.
-				                       *
-				                       *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
-				                       */
-				uint8_t     iSerialNumber; /**< String index for the product's globally unique hexadecimal
-				                            *   serial number, in uppercase Unicode ASCII.
-				                            *
-				                            *  \note On some AVR models, there is an embedded serial number
-				                            *        in the chip which can be used for the device serial number.
-				                            *        To use this serial number, set this to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
-				                            *        On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to 0 and will cause
-				                            *        the host to generate a pseudo-unique value for the device upon
-				                            *        insertion.
-				                            *
-				                            *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
-				                             */
-				uint8_t     bNumConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by
-				                                 *   the device.
-				                                 */
-			} USB_StdDescriptor_Device_t;
-
-			/** \brief Standard USB Configuration Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard Configuration Descriptor header. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
-			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Configuration_Header_t for the version of this define with standard element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
-			
-				uint16_t    TotalConfigurationSize; /**< Size of the configuration descriptor header,
-				                                     *   and all sub descriptors inside the configuration.
-				                                     */
-				uint8_t     TotalInterfaces; /**< Total number of interfaces in the configuration. */
-
-				uint8_t     ConfigurationNumber; /**< Configuration index of the current configuration. */
-				uint8_t     ConfigurationStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing the configuration. */
-				
-				uint8_t     ConfigAttributes; /**< Configuration attributes, comprised of a mask of zero or
-				                               *   more USB_CONFIG_ATTR_* masks.
-				                               */
-				
-				uint8_t     MaxPowerConsumption; /**< Maximum power consumption of the device while in the
-				                                  *   current configuration, calculated by the \ref USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA()
-				                                  *   macro.
-				                                  */
-			} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t;
-			
-			/** \brief Standard USB Configuration Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard Configuration Descriptor header. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names
-			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Device_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
-				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
-				                              *   given by the specific class.
-				                              */
-				uint16_t    wTotalLength; /**< Size of the configuration descriptor header,
-				                           *   and all sub descriptors inside the configuration.
-				                           */
-				uint8_t     bNumInterfaces; /**< Total number of interfaces in the configuration. */
-				uint8_t     bConfigurationValue; /**< Configuration index of the current configuration. */
-				uint8_t     iConfiguration; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing the configuration. */
-				uint8_t     bmAttributes; /**< Configuration attributes, comprised of a mask of zero or
-				                           *   more USB_CONFIG_ATTR_* masks.
-				                           */
-				uint8_t     bMaxPower; /**< Maximum power consumption of the device while in the
-				                        *   current configuration, calculated by the \ref USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA()
-				                        *   macro.
-				                        */
-			} USB_StdDescriptor_Configuration_Header_t;
-
-			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
-			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_t for the version of this define with standard element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
-
-				uint8_t     InterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the interface in the current configuration. */
-				uint8_t     AlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting for the interface number. The same
-				                               *   interface number can have multiple alternate settings
-				                               *   with different endpoint configurations, which can be
-				                               *   selected by the host.
-				                               */
-				uint8_t     TotalEndpoints; /**< Total number of endpoints in the interface. */
-				
-				uint8_t     Class; /**< Interface class ID. */
-				uint8_t     SubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
-				uint8_t     Protocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
-
-				uint8_t     InterfaceStrIndex; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
-				                                *   interface.
-				                                */
-			} USB_Descriptor_Interface_t;
-			
-			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names
-			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Interface_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
-				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
-				                              *   given by the specific class.
-				                              */
-				uint8_t     bInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the interface in the current configuration. */
-				uint8_t     bAlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting for the interface number. The same
-				                                *   interface number can have multiple alternate settings
-				                                *   with different endpoint configurations, which can be
-				                                *   selected by the host.
-				                                */
-				uint8_t     bNumEndpoints; /**< Total number of endpoints in the interface. */
-				uint8_t     bInterfaceClass; /**< Interface class ID. */
-				uint8_t     bInterfaceSubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
-				uint8_t     bInterfaceProtocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
-				uint8_t     iInterface; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
-				                         *   interface.
-				                         */
-			} USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_t;
-
-			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Association Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Association Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
-			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
-			 *
-			 *  This descriptor has been added as a supplement to the USB2.0 standard, in the ECN located at
-			 *  <a>http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/InterfaceAssociationDescriptor_ecn.pdf</a>. It allows compound
-			 *  devices with multiple interfaces related to the same function to have the multiple interfaces bound
-			 *  together at the point of enumeration, loading one generic driver for all the interfaces in the single
-			 *  function. Read the ECN for more information.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_Association_t for the version of this define with standard element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
-				
-				uint8_t     FirstInterfaceIndex; /**< Index of the first associated interface. */
-				uint8_t     TotalInterfaces; /** Total number of associated interfaces. */
-
-				uint8_t     Class; /**< Interface class ID. */
-				uint8_t     SubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
-				uint8_t     Protocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
-
-				uint8_t     IADStrIndex; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
-				                          *   interface association.
-				                          */
-			} USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t;
-				
-			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Association Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Association Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given
-			 *  element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
-			 *
-			 *  This descriptor has been added as a supplement to the USB2.0 standard, in the ECN located at
-			 *  <a>http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/InterfaceAssociationDescriptor_ecn.pdf</a>. It allows compound
-			 *  devices with multiple interfaces related to the same function to have the multiple interfaces bound
-			 *  together at the point of enumeration, loading one generic driver for all the interfaces in the single
-			 *  function. Read the ECN for more information.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific
-			 *       element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
-				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
-				                              *   given by the specific class.
-				                              */
-				uint8_t     bFirstInterface; /**< Index of the first associated interface. */
-				uint8_t     bInterfaceCount; /** Total number of associated interfaces. */
-				uint8_t     bFunctionClass; /**< Interface class ID. */
-				uint8_t     bFunctionSubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
-				uint8_t     bFunctionProtocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
-				uint8_t     iFunction; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
-				                        *   interface association.
-				                        */
-			} USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_Association_t;
-
-			/** \brief Standard USB Endpoint Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard Endpoint Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
-			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Endpoint_t for the version of this define with standard element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
-
-				uint8_t     EndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device
-				                              *   for the current configuration, including direction
-				                              *   mask.
-				                              */
-				uint8_t     Attributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the
-				                         *   endpoint type (EP_TYPE_*) and attributes (ENDPOINT_ATTR_*)
-				                         *   masks.
-				                         */
-				uint16_t    EndpointSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the
-				                           *   maximum packet size that the endpoint can receive at a time.
-				                           */
-				
-				uint8_t     PollingIntervalMS; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpoint
-				                                *   if it is an INTERRUPT or ISOCHRONOUS type.
-				                                */
-			} USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t;
-				
-			/** \brief Standard USB Endpoint Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard Endpoint Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given
-			 *  element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific
-			 *       element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
-				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
-				                              *   given by the specific class.
-				                              */
-				uint8_t     bEndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device
-				                               *   for the current configuration, including direction
-				                               *   mask.
-				                               */
-				uint8_t     bmAttributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the
-				                           *   endpoint type (EP_TYPE_*) and attributes (ENDPOINT_ATTR_*)
-				                           *   masks.
-				                           */
-				uint16_t    wMaxPacketSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the
-				                             *   maximum packet size that the endpoint can receive at a time.
-				                             */
-				uint8_t     bInterval; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpoint
-				                        *   if it is an INTERRUPT or ISOCHRONOUS type.
-				                        */
-			} USB_StdDescriptor_Endpoint_t;
-
-			/** \brief Standard USB String Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard string descriptor. Unlike other standard descriptors, the length
-			 *  of the descriptor for placement in the descriptor header must be determined by the \ref USB_STRING_LEN()
-			 *  macro rather than by the size of the descriptor structure, as the length is not fixed.
-			 *
-			 *  This structure should also be used for string index 0, which contains the supported language IDs for
-			 *  the device as an array.
-			 *
-			 *  This structure uses LUFA-specific element names to make each element's purpose clearer.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_String_t for the version of this define with standard element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
-				
-				wchar_t UnicodeString[];  /**< String data, as unicode characters (alternatively,
-				                           *   string language IDs). If normal ASCII characters are
-				                           *   to be used, they must be added as an array of characters
-				                           *   rather than a normal C string so that they are widened to
-				                           *   Unicode size.
-				                           *
-				                           *   Under GCC, strings prefixed with the "L" character (before
-				                           *   the opening string quotation mark) are considered to be
-				                           *   Unicode strings, and may be used instead of an explicit
-				                           *   array of ASCII characters.
-				                           */
-			} USB_Descriptor_String_t;
-
-			/** \brief Standard USB String Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard string descriptor. Unlike other standard descriptors, the length
-			 *  of the descriptor for placement in the descriptor header must be determined by the \ref USB_STRING_LEN()
-			 *  macro rather than by the size of the descriptor structure, as the length is not fixed.
-			 *
-			 *  This structure should also be used for string index 0, which contains the supported language IDs for
-			 *  the device as an array.
-			 *
-			 *  This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_String_t for the version of this define with with non-standard LUFA specific
-			 *       element names
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-					uint8_t                 bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
-					uint8_t                 bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in
-					                                          *   \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
-				                                              *   given by the specific class.
-				                                              */
-					int16_t                 bString[]; /**< String data, as unicode characters (alternatively,
-				                                        *   string language IDs). If normal ASCII characters are
-				                                        *   to be used, they must be added as an array of characters
-				                                        *   rather than a normal C string so that they are widened to
-				                                        *   Unicode size.
-				                                        *
-				                                        *   Under GCC, strings prefixed with the "L" character (before
-				                                        *   the opening string quotation mark) are considered to be
-				                                        *   Unicode strings, and may be used instead of an explicit
-				                                        *   array of ASCII characters.
-				                                        */
-			} USB_StdDescriptor_String_t;
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define VERSION_TENS(x)                   (int)((x) / 10)
-			#define VERSION_ONES(x)                   (int)((x) - (10 * VERSION_TENS(x)))
-			#define VERSION_TENTHS(x)                 (int)(((x) - (int)(x)) * 10)
-			#define VERSION_HUNDREDTHS(x)             (int)((((x) - (int)(x)) * 100) - (10 * VERSION_TENTHS(x)))
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB standard descriptor definitions.
+ *
+ *  This file contains structures and macros for the easy creation of standard USB descriptors in USB device projects.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_Descriptors USB Descriptors
+ *
+ *  Standard USB device descriptor defines and retrieval routines, for USB devices. This module contains
+ *  structures and macros for the easy creation of standard USB descriptors in USB device projects.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __USBDESCRIPTORS_H__
+#define __USBDESCRIPTORS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <stddef.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+		#include "Events.h"
+		
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "../LowLevel/Device.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates that a given descriptor does not exist in the device. This can be used inside descriptors
+			 *  for string descriptor indexes, or may be use as a return value for GetDescriptor when the specified
+			 *  descriptor does not exist.
+			 */
+			#define NO_DESCRIPTOR                     0
+
+			#if (!defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device.
+				 *  This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port
+				 *  number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some USB AVRs contain
+				 *  a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value
+				 *  will cause it to use the internal serial number.
+				 *
+				 *  On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial
+				 *  number for the device.
+				 */
+				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL           0xDC
+			#else
+				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL           NO_DESCRIPTOR
+			#endif
+			
+			/** Macro to calculate the power value for the configuration descriptor, from a given number of milliamps. */
+			#define USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(mA)           ((mA) >> 1)
+
+			/** Macro to calculate the Unicode length of a string with a given number of Unicode characters.
+			 *  Should be used in string descriptor's headers for giving the string descriptor's byte length.
+			 */
+			#define USB_STRING_LEN(str)               (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Header_t) + ((str) << 1))
+			
+			/** Macro to encode a given four digit floating point version number (e.g. 01.23) into Binary Coded
+			 *  Decimal format for descriptor fields requiring BCD encoding, such as the USB version number in the
+			 *  standard device descriptor.
+			 */
+			#define VERSION_BCD(x)                    ((((VERSION_TENS(x) << 4) | VERSION_ONES(x)) << 8) | \
+			                                          ((VERSION_TENTHS(x) << 4) | VERSION_HUNDREDTHS(x)))
+
+			/** String language ID for the English language. Should be used in \ref USB_Descriptor_String_t descriptors
+			 *  to indicate that the English language is supported by the device in its string descriptors.
+			 */
+			#define LANGUAGE_ID_ENG                   0x0409
+
+			/** Can be masked with an endpoint address for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t endpoint descriptor's
+			 *  EndpointAddress value to indicate to the host that the endpoint is of the IN direction (i.e, from
+			 *  device to host).
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN        0x80
+
+			/** Can be masked with an endpoint address for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t endpoint descriptor's
+			 *  EndpointAddress value to indicate to the host that the endpoint is of the OUT direction (i.e, from
+			 *  host to device).
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT       0x00		
+
+			/** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t
+			 *  descriptor's ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration can draw its power
+			 *  from the host's VBUS line.
+			 */
+			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED        0x80
+
+			/** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t
+			 *  descriptor's ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration can draw its power
+			 *  from the device's own power source.
+			 */
+			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED       0x40
+
+			/** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t
+			 *  descriptor's ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration supports the
+			 *  remote wakeup feature of the USB standard, allowing a suspended USB device to wake up the host upon
+			 *  request.
+			 */
+			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_REMOTEWAKEUP      0x20
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is not synchronized.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC             (0 << 2)
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is asynchronous.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_ASYNC               (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is adaptive.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_ADAPTIVE            (2 << 2)
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is synchronized.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC                (3 << 2)
+			
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for data transfers.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA               (0 << 4)
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for feedback.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_FEEDBACK           (1 << 4)
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for implicit feedback.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_IMPLICIT_FEEDBACK  (2 << 4)
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible standard descriptor types, as given in each descriptor's header. */
+			enum USB_DescriptorTypes_t
+			{
+				DTYPE_Device               = 0x01, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a device descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_Configuration        = 0x02, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a configuration descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_String               = 0x03, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a string descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_Interface            = 0x04, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_Endpoint             = 0x05, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an endpoint descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_DeviceQualifier      = 0x06, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a device qualifier descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_Other                = 0x07, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is of other type. */
+				DTYPE_InterfacePower       = 0x08, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface power descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation = 0x0B, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface association descriptor. */
+			};
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Standard USB Descriptor Header (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+             *  Type define for all descriptors' standard header, indicating the descriptor's length and type. This structure
+			 *  uses LUFA-specific element names to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Header_t for the version of this define with standard element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t     Size; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t     Type; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                   *   given by the specific class.
+				                   */
+			} USB_Descriptor_Header_t;
+			
+			/** \brief Standard USB Descriptor Header (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for all descriptors' standard header, indicating the descriptor's length and type. This structure
+			 *  uses the relevant standard's given element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Header_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                              *   given by the specific class.
+				                              */
+			} USB_StdDescriptor_Header_t;
+			
+			/** \brief Standard USB Device Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Device Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names to make each
+			 *  element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Device_t for the version of this define with standard element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+
+				uint16_t    USBSpecification; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification. */
+				uint8_t     Class; /**< USB device class. */
+				uint8_t     SubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */
+				uint8_t     Protocol; /**< USB device protocol. */
+				
+				uint8_t     Endpoint0Size; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */
+				
+				uint16_t    VendorID; /**< Vendor ID for the USB product. */
+				uint16_t    ProductID; /**< Unique product ID for the USB product. */
+				uint16_t    ReleaseNumber; /**< Product release (version) number. */
+				
+				uint8_t     ManufacturerStrIndex; /**< String index for the manufacturer's name. The
+				                                   *   host will request this string via a separate
+				                                   *   control request for the string descriptor.
+				                                   *
+				                                   *   \note If no string supplied, use \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR.
+				                                   */
+				uint8_t     ProductStrIndex; /**< String index for the product name/details.
+				                              *
+				                              *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
+				                              */
+				uint8_t     SerialNumStrIndex; /**< String index for the product's globally unique hexadecimal
+				                                *   serial number, in uppercase Unicode ASCII.
+				                                *
+				                                *  \note On some AVR models, there is an embedded serial number
+				                                *        in the chip which can be used for the device serial number.
+				                                *        To use this serial number, set this to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+				                                *        On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to 0 and will cause
+				                                *        the host to generate a pseudo-unique value for the device upon
+				                                *        insertion.
+				                                *
+				                                *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
+				                                */
+				uint8_t     NumberOfConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by
+				                                     *   the device.
+				                                     */
+			} USB_Descriptor_Device_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Device Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Device Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names
+			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Device_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                              *   given by the specific class.
+				                              */
+				uint16_t    bcdUSB; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification. */
+				uint8_t     bDeviceClass; /**< USB device class. */
+				uint8_t     bDeviceSubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */
+				uint8_t     bDeviceProtocol; /**< USB device protocol. */
+				uint8_t     bMaxPacketSize0; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */
+				uint16_t    idVendor; /**< Vendor ID for the USB product. */
+				uint16_t    idProduct; /**< Unique product ID for the USB product. */
+				uint16_t    bcdDevice; /**< Product release (version) number. */
+				uint8_t     iManufacturer; /**< String index for the manufacturer's name. The
+				                            *   host will request this string via a separate
+				                            *   control request for the string descriptor.
+				                            *
+				                            *   \note If no string supplied, use \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR.
+				                            */
+				uint8_t     iProduct; /**< String index for the product name/details.
+				                       *
+				                       *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
+				                       */
+				uint8_t     iSerialNumber; /**< String index for the product's globally unique hexadecimal
+				                            *   serial number, in uppercase Unicode ASCII.
+				                            *
+				                            *  \note On some AVR models, there is an embedded serial number
+				                            *        in the chip which can be used for the device serial number.
+				                            *        To use this serial number, set this to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+				                            *        On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to 0 and will cause
+				                            *        the host to generate a pseudo-unique value for the device upon
+				                            *        insertion.
+				                            *
+				                            *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
+				                             */
+				uint8_t     bNumConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by
+				                                 *   the device.
+				                                 */
+			} USB_StdDescriptor_Device_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Configuration Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Configuration Descriptor header. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
+			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Configuration_Header_t for the version of this define with standard element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+			
+				uint16_t    TotalConfigurationSize; /**< Size of the configuration descriptor header,
+				                                     *   and all sub descriptors inside the configuration.
+				                                     */
+				uint8_t     TotalInterfaces; /**< Total number of interfaces in the configuration. */
+
+				uint8_t     ConfigurationNumber; /**< Configuration index of the current configuration. */
+				uint8_t     ConfigurationStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing the configuration. */
+				
+				uint8_t     ConfigAttributes; /**< Configuration attributes, comprised of a mask of zero or
+				                               *   more USB_CONFIG_ATTR_* masks.
+				                               */
+				
+				uint8_t     MaxPowerConsumption; /**< Maximum power consumption of the device while in the
+				                                  *   current configuration, calculated by the \ref USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA()
+				                                  *   macro.
+				                                  */
+			} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t;
+			
+			/** \brief Standard USB Configuration Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Configuration Descriptor header. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names
+			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Device_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                              *   given by the specific class.
+				                              */
+				uint16_t    wTotalLength; /**< Size of the configuration descriptor header,
+				                           *   and all sub descriptors inside the configuration.
+				                           */
+				uint8_t     bNumInterfaces; /**< Total number of interfaces in the configuration. */
+				uint8_t     bConfigurationValue; /**< Configuration index of the current configuration. */
+				uint8_t     iConfiguration; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing the configuration. */
+				uint8_t     bmAttributes; /**< Configuration attributes, comprised of a mask of zero or
+				                           *   more USB_CONFIG_ATTR_* masks.
+				                           */
+				uint8_t     bMaxPower; /**< Maximum power consumption of the device while in the
+				                        *   current configuration, calculated by the \ref USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA()
+				                        *   macro.
+				                        */
+			} USB_StdDescriptor_Configuration_Header_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
+			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_t for the version of this define with standard element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+
+				uint8_t     InterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the interface in the current configuration. */
+				uint8_t     AlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting for the interface number. The same
+				                               *   interface number can have multiple alternate settings
+				                               *   with different endpoint configurations, which can be
+				                               *   selected by the host.
+				                               */
+				uint8_t     TotalEndpoints; /**< Total number of endpoints in the interface. */
+				
+				uint8_t     Class; /**< Interface class ID. */
+				uint8_t     SubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
+				uint8_t     Protocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
+
+				uint8_t     InterfaceStrIndex; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
+				                                *   interface.
+				                                */
+			} USB_Descriptor_Interface_t;
+			
+			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names
+			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Interface_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                              *   given by the specific class.
+				                              */
+				uint8_t     bInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the interface in the current configuration. */
+				uint8_t     bAlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting for the interface number. The same
+				                                *   interface number can have multiple alternate settings
+				                                *   with different endpoint configurations, which can be
+				                                *   selected by the host.
+				                                */
+				uint8_t     bNumEndpoints; /**< Total number of endpoints in the interface. */
+				uint8_t     bInterfaceClass; /**< Interface class ID. */
+				uint8_t     bInterfaceSubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
+				uint8_t     bInterfaceProtocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
+				uint8_t     iInterface; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
+				                         *   interface.
+				                         */
+			} USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Association Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Association Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
+			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  This descriptor has been added as a supplement to the USB2.0 standard, in the ECN located at
+			 *  <a>http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/InterfaceAssociationDescriptor_ecn.pdf</a>. It allows compound
+			 *  devices with multiple interfaces related to the same function to have the multiple interfaces bound
+			 *  together at the point of enumeration, loading one generic driver for all the interfaces in the single
+			 *  function. Read the ECN for more information.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_Association_t for the version of this define with standard element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+				
+				uint8_t     FirstInterfaceIndex; /**< Index of the first associated interface. */
+				uint8_t     TotalInterfaces; /** Total number of associated interfaces. */
+
+				uint8_t     Class; /**< Interface class ID. */
+				uint8_t     SubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
+				uint8_t     Protocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
+
+				uint8_t     IADStrIndex; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
+				                          *   interface association.
+				                          */
+			} USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t;
+				
+			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Association Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Association Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given
+			 *  element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  This descriptor has been added as a supplement to the USB2.0 standard, in the ECN located at
+			 *  <a>http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/InterfaceAssociationDescriptor_ecn.pdf</a>. It allows compound
+			 *  devices with multiple interfaces related to the same function to have the multiple interfaces bound
+			 *  together at the point of enumeration, loading one generic driver for all the interfaces in the single
+			 *  function. Read the ECN for more information.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific
+			 *       element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                              *   given by the specific class.
+				                              */
+				uint8_t     bFirstInterface; /**< Index of the first associated interface. */
+				uint8_t     bInterfaceCount; /** Total number of associated interfaces. */
+				uint8_t     bFunctionClass; /**< Interface class ID. */
+				uint8_t     bFunctionSubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
+				uint8_t     bFunctionProtocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
+				uint8_t     iFunction; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
+				                        *   interface association.
+				                        */
+			} USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_Association_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Endpoint Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Endpoint Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
+			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Endpoint_t for the version of this define with standard element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+
+				uint8_t     EndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device
+				                              *   for the current configuration, including direction
+				                              *   mask.
+				                              */
+				uint8_t     Attributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the
+				                         *   endpoint type (EP_TYPE_*) and attributes (ENDPOINT_ATTR_*)
+				                         *   masks.
+				                         */
+				uint16_t    EndpointSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the
+				                           *   maximum packet size that the endpoint can receive at a time.
+				                           */
+				
+				uint8_t     PollingIntervalMS; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpoint
+				                                *   if it is an INTERRUPT or ISOCHRONOUS type.
+				                                */
+			} USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t;
+				
+			/** \brief Standard USB Endpoint Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Endpoint Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given
+			 *  element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t for the version of this define with non-standard LUFA specific
+			 *       element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t     bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t     bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                              *   given by the specific class.
+				                              */
+				uint8_t     bEndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device
+				                               *   for the current configuration, including direction
+				                               *   mask.
+				                               */
+				uint8_t     bmAttributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the
+				                           *   endpoint type (EP_TYPE_*) and attributes (ENDPOINT_ATTR_*)
+				                           *   masks.
+				                           */
+				uint16_t    wMaxPacketSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the
+				                             *   maximum packet size that the endpoint can receive at a time.
+				                             */
+				uint8_t     bInterval; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpoint
+				                        *   if it is an INTERRUPT or ISOCHRONOUS type.
+				                        */
+			} USB_StdDescriptor_Endpoint_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB String Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard string descriptor. Unlike other standard descriptors, the length
+			 *  of the descriptor for placement in the descriptor header must be determined by the \ref USB_STRING_LEN()
+			 *  macro rather than by the size of the descriptor structure, as the length is not fixed.
+			 *
+			 *  This structure should also be used for string index 0, which contains the supported language IDs for
+			 *  the device as an array.
+			 *
+			 *  This structure uses LUFA-specific element names to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_String_t for the version of this define with standard element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+				
+				wchar_t UnicodeString[];  /**< String data, as unicode characters (alternatively,
+				                           *   string language IDs). If normal ASCII characters are
+				                           *   to be used, they must be added as an array of characters
+				                           *   rather than a normal C string so that they are widened to
+				                           *   Unicode size.
+				                           *
+				                           *   Under GCC, strings prefixed with the "L" character (before
+				                           *   the opening string quotation mark) are considered to be
+				                           *   Unicode strings, and may be used instead of an explicit
+				                           *   array of ASCII characters.
+				                           */
+			} USB_Descriptor_String_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB String Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard string descriptor. Unlike other standard descriptors, the length
+			 *  of the descriptor for placement in the descriptor header must be determined by the \ref USB_STRING_LEN()
+			 *  macro rather than by the size of the descriptor structure, as the length is not fixed.
+			 *
+			 *  This structure should also be used for string index 0, which contains the supported language IDs for
+			 *  the device as an array.
+			 *
+			 *  This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_String_t for the version of this define with with non-standard LUFA specific
+			 *       element names
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+					uint8_t                 bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+					uint8_t                 bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in
+					                                          *   \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                                              *   given by the specific class.
+				                                              */
+					int16_t                 bString[]; /**< String data, as unicode characters (alternatively,
+				                                        *   string language IDs). If normal ASCII characters are
+				                                        *   to be used, they must be added as an array of characters
+				                                        *   rather than a normal C string so that they are widened to
+				                                        *   Unicode size.
+				                                        *
+				                                        *   Under GCC, strings prefixed with the "L" character (before
+				                                        *   the opening string quotation mark) are considered to be
+				                                        *   Unicode strings, and may be used instead of an explicit
+				                                        *   array of ASCII characters.
+				                                        */
+			} USB_StdDescriptor_String_t;
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define VERSION_TENS(x)                   (int)((x) / 10)
+			#define VERSION_ONES(x)                   (int)((x) - (10 * VERSION_TENS(x)))
+			#define VERSION_TENTHS(x)                 (int)(((x) - (int)(x)) * 10)
+			#define VERSION_HUNDREDTHS(x)             (int)((((x) - (int)(x)) * 100) - (10 * VERSION_TENTHS(x)))
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdRequestType.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdRequestType.h
index 164340bdc..505ccd3c2 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdRequestType.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdRequestType.h
@@ -1,226 +1,226 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB control endpoint request definitions.
- *
- *  This file contains structures and macros for the easy creation and parsing of standard USB control requests.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_StdRequest Standard USB Requests
- *
- *  This module contains definitions for the various control request parameters, so that the request
- *  details (such as data direction, request recipient, etc.) can be extracted via masking.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __STDREQTYPE_H__
-#define __STDREQTYPE_H__
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the direction of the request data (Host to Device
-			 *  or Device to Host). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request direction masks.
-			 *
-			 *  \see REQDIR_* macros for masks indicating the request data direction.
-			 */
-			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION  0x80
-
-			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the type of request (Device, Class or Vendor
-			 *  Specific). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request type masks.
-			 *
-			 *  \see REQTYPE_* macros for masks indicating the request type.
-			 */
-			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE       0x60
-
-			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the recipient of the request (Standard, Class
-			 *  or Vendor Specific). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request recipient
-			 *  masks.
-			 *
-			 *  \see REQREC_* macros for masks indicating the request recipient.
-			 */
-			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT  0x1F
-
-			/** Request data direction mask, indicating that the request data will flow from host to device.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION macro.
-			 */
-			#define REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE        (0 << 7)
-
-			/** Request data direction mask, indicating that the request data will flow from device to host.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION macro.
-			 */
-			#define REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST        (1 << 7)
-
-			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a standard request.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.
-			 */
-			#define REQTYPE_STANDARD           (0 << 5)
-
-			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a class-specific request.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.
-			 */
-			#define REQTYPE_CLASS              (1 << 5)
-
-			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a vendor specific request.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.
-			 */
-			#define REQTYPE_VENDOR             (2 << 5)
-
-			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to the device as a whole.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
-			 */
-			#define REQREC_DEVICE              (0 << 0)
-
-			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an interface in the
-			 *  currently selected configuration.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
-			 */
-			#define REQREC_INTERFACE           (1 << 0)
-
-			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an endpoint in the
-			 *  currently selected configuration.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
-			 */
-			#define REQREC_ENDPOINT            (2 << 0)
-
-			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an unspecified element
-			 *  in the currently selected configuration.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
-			 */
-			#define REQREC_OTHER               (3 << 0)
-			
-			/** Feature indicator for Clear Feature or Set Feature commands. When used in a Clear Feature
-			 *  request this indicates that an endpoint (whose address is given elsewhere in the request
-			 *  should have its stall condition cleared. If used in a similar manner inside a Set Feature
-			 *  request, this stalls an endpoint.
-			 */
-			#define FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT           0x00
-
-			/** Feature indicator for Clear Feature or Set Feature commands. When used in a Clear Feature
-			 *  request this indicates that the remote wakeup enabled device should not issue remote
-			 *  wakeup requests until further notice. If used in a similar manner inside a Set Feature
-			 *  request, this re-enabled the remote wakeup feature on the device.
-			 */
-			#define FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP           0x01
-
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** \brief Standard USB Control Request
-			 *
-			 *  Type define for a standard USB control request.
-			 *
-			 *  \see The USB 2.0 specification for more information on standard control requests.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				uint8_t  bmRequestType; /**< Type of the request. */
-				uint8_t  bRequest; /**< Request command code. */
-				uint16_t wValue; /**< wValue parameter of the request. */
-				uint16_t wIndex; /**< wIndex parameter of the request. */
-				uint16_t wLength; /**< Length of the data to transfer in bytes. */
-			} USB_Request_Header_t;
-
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enumeration for the various standard request commands. These commands are applicable when the
-			 *  request type is \ref REQTYPE_STANDARD (with the exception of \ref REQ_GetDescriptor, which is always
-			 *  handled regardless of the request type value).
-			 *
-			 *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 Specification.
-			 */
-			enum USB_Control_Request_t
-			{
-				REQ_GetStatus           = 0, /**< Implemented in the library for device, endpoint and interface
-				                              *   recipients. Passed to the user application for other recipients
-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
-				                              *   device mode. */
-				REQ_ClearFeature        = 1, /**< Implemented in the library for device, endpoint and interface
-				                              *   recipients. Passed to the user application for other recipients
-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
-				                              *   device mode. */
-				REQ_SetFeature          = 3, /**< Implemented in the library for device, endpoint and interface
-				                              *   recipients. Passed to the user application for other recipients
-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
-				                              *   device mode. */
-				REQ_SetAddress          = 5, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed
-				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
-				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
-				                              *   device mode. */
-				REQ_GetDescriptor       = 6, /**< Implemented in the library for all recipients and all request
-				                              *   types. */
-				REQ_SetDescriptor       = 7, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
-				                              *   device mode. */
-				REQ_GetConfiguration    = 8, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed
-				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
-				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
-				                              *   device mode. */
-				REQ_SetConfiguration    = 9, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed
-				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
-				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
-				                              *   device mode. */
-				REQ_GetInterface        = 10, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
-				                              *   device mode. */
-				REQ_SetInterface        = 11, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
-				                              *   device mode. */
-				REQ_SynchFrame          = 12, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
-				                              *   device mode. */
-			};
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			/* Macros: */
-				#define FEATURE_SELFPOWERED_ENABLED     (1 << 0)
-				#define FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP_ENABLED   (1 << 1)
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB control endpoint request definitions.
+ *
+ *  This file contains structures and macros for the easy creation and parsing of standard USB control requests.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_StdRequest Standard USB Requests
+ *
+ *  This module contains definitions for the various control request parameters, so that the request
+ *  details (such as data direction, request recipient, etc.) can be extracted via masking.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __STDREQTYPE_H__
+#define __STDREQTYPE_H__
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the direction of the request data (Host to Device
+			 *  or Device to Host). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request direction masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \see REQDIR_* macros for masks indicating the request data direction.
+			 */
+			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION  0x80
+
+			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the type of request (Device, Class or Vendor
+			 *  Specific). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request type masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \see REQTYPE_* macros for masks indicating the request type.
+			 */
+			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE       0x60
+
+			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the recipient of the request (Standard, Class
+			 *  or Vendor Specific). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request recipient
+			 *  masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \see REQREC_* macros for masks indicating the request recipient.
+			 */
+			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT  0x1F
+
+			/** Request data direction mask, indicating that the request data will flow from host to device.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE        (0 << 7)
+
+			/** Request data direction mask, indicating that the request data will flow from device to host.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a standard request.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQTYPE_STANDARD           (0 << 5)
+
+			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a class-specific request.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQTYPE_CLASS              (1 << 5)
+
+			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a vendor specific request.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQTYPE_VENDOR             (2 << 5)
+
+			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to the device as a whole.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQREC_DEVICE              (0 << 0)
+
+			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an interface in the
+			 *  currently selected configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQREC_INTERFACE           (1 << 0)
+
+			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an endpoint in the
+			 *  currently selected configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQREC_ENDPOINT            (2 << 0)
+
+			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an unspecified element
+			 *  in the currently selected configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQREC_OTHER               (3 << 0)
+			
+			/** Feature indicator for Clear Feature or Set Feature commands. When used in a Clear Feature
+			 *  request this indicates that an endpoint (whose address is given elsewhere in the request
+			 *  should have its stall condition cleared. If used in a similar manner inside a Set Feature
+			 *  request, this stalls an endpoint.
+			 */
+			#define FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT           0x00
+
+			/** Feature indicator for Clear Feature or Set Feature commands. When used in a Clear Feature
+			 *  request this indicates that the remote wakeup enabled device should not issue remote
+			 *  wakeup requests until further notice. If used in a similar manner inside a Set Feature
+			 *  request, this re-enabled the remote wakeup feature on the device.
+			 */
+			#define FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP           0x01
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Standard USB Control Request
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard USB control request.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB 2.0 specification for more information on standard control requests.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  bmRequestType; /**< Type of the request. */
+				uint8_t  bRequest; /**< Request command code. */
+				uint16_t wValue; /**< wValue parameter of the request. */
+				uint16_t wIndex; /**< wIndex parameter of the request. */
+				uint16_t wLength; /**< Length of the data to transfer in bytes. */
+			} USB_Request_Header_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enumeration for the various standard request commands. These commands are applicable when the
+			 *  request type is \ref REQTYPE_STANDARD (with the exception of \ref REQ_GetDescriptor, which is always
+			 *  handled regardless of the request type value).
+			 *
+			 *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 Specification.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Control_Request_t
+			{
+				REQ_GetStatus           = 0, /**< Implemented in the library for device, endpoint and interface
+				                              *   recipients. Passed to the user application for other recipients
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_ClearFeature        = 1, /**< Implemented in the library for device, endpoint and interface
+				                              *   recipients. Passed to the user application for other recipients
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SetFeature          = 3, /**< Implemented in the library for device, endpoint and interface
+				                              *   recipients. Passed to the user application for other recipients
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SetAddress          = 5, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed
+				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
+				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_GetDescriptor       = 6, /**< Implemented in the library for all recipients and all request
+				                              *   types. */
+				REQ_SetDescriptor       = 7, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_GetConfiguration    = 8, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed
+				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
+				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SetConfiguration    = 9, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed
+				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
+				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_GetInterface        = 10, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SetInterface        = 11, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SynchFrame          = 12, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+			};
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/* Macros: */
+				#define FEATURE_SELFPOWERED_ENABLED     (1 << 0)
+				#define FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP_ENABLED   (1 << 1)
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StreamCallbacks.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StreamCallbacks.h
index 228669e33..9b627e6cf 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StreamCallbacks.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StreamCallbacks.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB endpoint/pipe stream callback management.
- *
- *  This file contains definitions for the creation of optional callback routines which can be passed to the
- *  endpoint and/or pipe stream APIs, to abort the transfer currently in progress when a condition is met.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_StreamCallbacks Endpoint and Pipe Stream Callbacks
- *
- *  Macros and enums for the stream callback routines. This module contains the code required to easily set up
- *  stream callback functions which can be used to force early abort of a stream read/write process. Each callback
- *  should take no arguments, and return a value from the \ref StreamCallback_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __STREAMCALLBACK_H__
-#define __STREAMCALLBACK_H__
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Used with the Endpoint and Pipe stream functions as the callback function parameter, indicating that the stream
-			 *  call has no callback function to be called between USB packets.
-			 */
-			#define NO_STREAM_CALLBACK    NULL
-			
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of a stream callback function */
-			enum StreamCallback_Return_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				STREAMCALLBACK_Continue            = 0, /**< Continue sending or receiving the stream. */
-				STREAMCALLBACK_Abort               = 1, /**< Abort the stream send or receiving process. */
-			};
-
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** Type define for a Stream Callback function (function taking no arguments and retuning a
-			 *  uint8_t value). Stream callback functions should have an identical function signature if they
-			 *  are to be used as the callback parameter of the stream functions.
-			 */
-			typedef uint8_t (* const StreamCallbackPtr_t)(void);
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB endpoint/pipe stream callback management.
+ *
+ *  This file contains definitions for the creation of optional callback routines which can be passed to the
+ *  endpoint and/or pipe stream APIs, to abort the transfer currently in progress when a condition is met.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_StreamCallbacks Endpoint and Pipe Stream Callbacks
+ *
+ *  Macros and enums for the stream callback routines. This module contains the code required to easily set up
+ *  stream callback functions which can be used to force early abort of a stream read/write process. Each callback
+ *  should take no arguments, and return a value from the \ref StreamCallback_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __STREAMCALLBACK_H__
+#define __STREAMCALLBACK_H__
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Used with the Endpoint and Pipe stream functions as the callback function parameter, indicating that the stream
+			 *  call has no callback function to be called between USB packets.
+			 */
+			#define NO_STREAM_CALLBACK    NULL
+			
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of a stream callback function */
+			enum StreamCallback_Return_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				STREAMCALLBACK_Continue            = 0, /**< Continue sending or receiving the stream. */
+				STREAMCALLBACK_Abort               = 1, /**< Abort the stream send or receiving process. */
+			};
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** Type define for a Stream Callback function (function taking no arguments and retuning a
+			 *  uint8_t value). Stream callback functions should have an identical function signature if they
+			 *  are to be used as the callback parameter of the stream functions.
+			 */
+			typedef uint8_t (* const StreamCallbackPtr_t)(void);
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBMode.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBMode.h
index d894bbad7..1de2ef9bb 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBMode.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBMode.h
@@ -1,138 +1,138 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB mode and capability macros.
- *
- *  This file defines macros indicating the type of USB controller the library is being compiled for, and its
- *  capabilities. These macros may then be referenced in the user application to selectively enable or disable
- *  code sections depending on if they are defined or not.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_USBMode USB Mode Tokens
- *
- *  After the inclusion of the master USB driver header, one or more of the following
- *  tokens may be defined, to allow the user code to conditionally enable or disable
- *  code based on the USB controller family and allowable USB modes. These tokens may
- *  be tested against to eliminate code relating to a USB mode which is not enabled for
- *  the given compilation.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBMODE_H__
-#define __USBMODE_H__
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 2 USB controller
-		 *  (i.e. AT90USBXXX2 or ATMEGAXXU2) when defined.
-		 */
-		#define USB_SERIES_2_AVR
-
-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 4 USB controller
-		 *  (i.e. ATMEGAXXU4) when defined.
-		 */
-		#define USB_SERIES_4_AVR
-
-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 6 USB controller
-		 *  (i.e. AT90USBXXX6) when defined.
-		 */
-		#define USB_SERIES_6_AVR
-
-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 7 USB controller
-		 *  (i.e. AT90USBXXX7) when defined.
-		 */
-		#define USB_SERIES_7_AVR
-
-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the
-		 *  target to be configured in USB Device mode when defined.
-		 */
-		#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
-
-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the
-		 *  target to be configured in USB Host mode when defined.
-		 */
-		#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
-
-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the
-		 *  target to be configured in either USB Device or Host mode when defined.
-		 */
-		#define USB_CAN_BE_BOTH
-	#else
-		/* Macros: */			
-			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)  || \
-			     defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__))
-				#define USB_SERIES_2_AVR
-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__))
-				#define USB_SERIES_4_AVR
-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__))
-				#define USB_SERIES_6_AVR
-			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
-				#define USB_SERIES_7_AVR
-			#endif			
-
-			#if !defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)		
-				#if defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
-					#error USB_HOST_ONLY is not available for the currently selected USB AVR model.
-				#endif
-				
-				#if !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
-					#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-				#endif
-			#endif
-
-			#if (!defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) && !defined(USB_HOST_ONLY))
-				#define USB_CAN_BE_BOTH
-				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
-			#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
-				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
-			#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
-			#endif
-			
-			#if (defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))
-				#error USB_HOST_ONLY and USB_DEVICE_ONLY are mutually exclusive.
-			#endif
-	#endif
-	
-#endif
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB mode and capability macros.
+ *
+ *  This file defines macros indicating the type of USB controller the library is being compiled for, and its
+ *  capabilities. These macros may then be referenced in the user application to selectively enable or disable
+ *  code sections depending on if they are defined or not.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBMode USB Mode Tokens
+ *
+ *  After the inclusion of the master USB driver header, one or more of the following
+ *  tokens may be defined, to allow the user code to conditionally enable or disable
+ *  code based on the USB controller family and allowable USB modes. These tokens may
+ *  be tested against to eliminate code relating to a USB mode which is not enabled for
+ *  the given compilation.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBMODE_H__
+#define __USBMODE_H__
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 2 USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT90USBXXX2 or ATMEGAXXU2) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_2_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 4 USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. ATMEGAXXU4) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_4_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 6 USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT90USBXXX6) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_6_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 7 USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT90USBXXX7) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_7_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the
+		 *  target to be configured in USB Device mode when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the
+		 *  target to be configured in USB Host mode when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the
+		 *  target to be configured in either USB Device or Host mode when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_CAN_BE_BOTH
+	#else
+		/* Macros: */			
+			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)  || \
+			     defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_2_AVR
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_4_AVR
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_6_AVR
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_7_AVR
+			#endif			
+
+			#if !defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)		
+				#if defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
+					#error USB_HOST_ONLY is not available for the currently selected USB AVR model.
+				#endif
+				
+				#if !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
+					#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+			#if (!defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) && !defined(USB_HOST_ONLY))
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_BOTH
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+			#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#endif
+			
+			#if (defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))
+				#error USB_HOST_ONLY and USB_DEVICE_ONLY are mutually exclusive.
+			#endif
+	#endif
+	
+#endif
+
 /** @} */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c
index afddcc1e5..5ec1746fd 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c
@@ -1,88 +1,88 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USBTASK_C
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "USBTask.h"
-
-volatile bool        USB_IsInitialized;
-USB_Request_Header_t USB_ControlRequest;
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) && !defined(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
-volatile uint8_t     USB_HostState;
-#endif
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && !defined(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
-volatile uint8_t     USB_DeviceState;
-#endif
-
-void USB_USBTask(void)
-{
-	#if defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
-		USB_HostTask();
-	#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
-		USB_DeviceTask();
-	#else
-		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)
-		  USB_DeviceTask();
-		else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
-		  USB_HostTask();
-	#endif
-}
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-static void USB_DeviceTask(void)
-{
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-	{
-		uint8_t PrevEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
-	
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
-
-		if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
-		  USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest();
-		
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevEndpoint);
-	}
-}
-#endif
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-static void USB_HostTask(void)
-{
-	uint8_t PrevPipe = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState();
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipe);
-}
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USBTASK_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "USBTask.h"
+
+volatile bool        USB_IsInitialized;
+USB_Request_Header_t USB_ControlRequest;
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) && !defined(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
+volatile uint8_t     USB_HostState;
+#endif
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && !defined(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
+volatile uint8_t     USB_DeviceState;
+#endif
+
+void USB_USBTask(void)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
+		USB_HostTask();
+	#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
+		USB_DeviceTask();
+	#else
+		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)
+		  USB_DeviceTask();
+		else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
+		  USB_HostTask();
+	#endif
+}
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+static void USB_DeviceTask(void)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+	{
+		uint8_t PrevEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
+	
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+		if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest();
+		
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevEndpoint);
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+static void USB_HostTask(void)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevPipe = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState();
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipe);
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.h
index 5246bf60e..1637fb416 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.h
@@ -1,204 +1,204 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Main USB service task management.
- *
- *  This file contains the function definitions required for the main USB service task, which must be called
- *  from the user application to ensure that the USB connection to or from a connected USB device is maintained.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBTASK_H__
-#define __USBTASK_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "../LowLevel/LowLevel.h"
-		#include "Events.h"
-		#include "StdRequestType.h"
-		#include "StdDescriptors.h"
-		#include "USBMode.h"
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			#include "../LowLevel/DevChapter9.h"
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-			#include "../LowLevel/HostChapter9.h"
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Global Variables: */
-			/** Indicates if the USB interface is currently initialized but not necessarily connected to a host
-			 *  or device (i.e. if \ref USB_Init() has been run). If this is false, all other library globals are invalid.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
-			 *        changed in value.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement
-			 */
-			extern volatile bool USB_IsInitialized;
-
-			/** Structure containing the last received Control request when in Device mode (for use in user-applications
-			 *  inside of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event, or for filling up with a control request to issue when
-			 *  in Host mode before calling \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement
-			 */
-			 extern USB_Request_Header_t USB_ControlRequest;
-			
-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				#if !defined(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-					/** Indicates the current host state machine state. When in host mode, this indicates the state
-					 *  via one of the values of the \ref USB_Host_States_t enum values.
-					 *
-					 *  This value may be altered by the user application to implement the \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed,
-					 *  \ref HOST_STATE_Configured and \ref HOST_STATE_Suspended states which are not implemented by
-					 *  the library.
-					 *
-					 *  To reduce program size and speed up checks of this global, it can be placed into one of the AVR's
-					 *  GPIOR hardware registers instead of RAM by defining the HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR token to a value 
-					 *  between 0 and 2 in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch. When
-					 *  defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used in the user application except
-					 *  implicitly via the library APIs.
-					 *
-					 *  \note This global is only present if the user application can be a USB host.
-					 *
-					 *  \see \ref USB_Host_States_t for a list of possible device states
-					 *
-					 *  \ingroup Group_Host
-					 */
-					extern volatile uint8_t USB_HostState;
-				#else
-					#define _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME2(y) GPIOR ## y
-					#define _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME(x)  _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME2(x)
-					#define USB_HostState            _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
-				#endif
-			#endif
-
-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				#if !defined(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-					/** Indicates the current device state machine state. When in device mode, this indicates the state
-					 *  via one of the values of the \ref USB_Device_States_t enum values.
-					 *
-					 *  This value should not be altered by the user application as it is handled automatically by the
-					 *  library. The only exception to this rule is if the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token is used
-					 *  (see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() and \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() events).
-					 *
-					 *  To reduce program size and speed up checks of this global, it can be placed into one of the AVR's
-					 *  GPIOR hardware registers instead of RAM by defining the DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR token to a value 
-					 *  between 0 and 2 in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch. When
-					 *  defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used in the user application except
-					 *  implicitly via the library APIs.
-					 *
-					 *  \note This global is only present if the user application can be a USB device.
-					 *        \n\n
-					 *
-					 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
-					 *        changed in value except in the circumstances outlined above.
-					 *
-					 *  \see \ref USB_Device_States_t for a list of possible device states
-					 *
-					 *  \ingroup Group_Device
-					 */
-					extern volatile uint8_t USB_DeviceState;
-				#else
-					#define _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME2(y) GPIOR ## y
-					#define _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME(x)  _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME2(x)
-					#define USB_DeviceState            _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
-				#endif
-			#endif
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** This is the main USB management task. The USB driver requires that this task be executed
-			 *  continuously when the USB system is active (device attached in host mode, or attached to a host
-			 *  in device mode) in order to manage USB communications. This task may be executed inside an RTOS,
-			 *  fast timer ISR or the main user application loop.
-			 *
-			 *  The USB task must be serviced within 30ms while in device mode, or within 1ms while in host mode.
-			 *  The task may be serviced at all times, or (for minimum CPU consumption):
-			 *
-			 *    - In device mode, it may be disabled at start-up, enabled on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() 
-			 *      event and disabled again on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() event.
-			 *
-			 *    - In host mode, it may be disabled at start-up, enabled on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached()
-			 *      event and disabled again on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete() or
-			 *      \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() events.
-			 *
-			 *  If in device mode (only), the control endpoint can instead be managed via interrupts entirely by the library
-			 *  by defining the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on the USB events.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement
-			 */
-			void USB_USBTask(void);
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USBTASK_C)
-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-					static void USB_HostTask(void);
-				#endif
-				
-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-					static void USB_DeviceTask(void);
-				#endif
-			#endif
-			
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(duration, nextstate) MACROS{ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice; \
-			                                                             WaitMSRemaining = (duration);             \
-			                                                             PostWaitState = (nextstate);        }MACROE
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Main USB service task management.
+ *
+ *  This file contains the function definitions required for the main USB service task, which must be called
+ *  from the user application to ensure that the USB connection to or from a connected USB device is maintained.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBTASK_H__
+#define __USBTASK_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "../LowLevel/LowLevel.h"
+		#include "Events.h"
+		#include "StdRequestType.h"
+		#include "StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "../LowLevel/DevChapter9.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "../LowLevel/HostChapter9.h"
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Global Variables: */
+			/** Indicates if the USB interface is currently initialized but not necessarily connected to a host
+			 *  or device (i.e. if \ref USB_Init() has been run). If this is false, all other library globals are invalid.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *        changed in value.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement
+			 */
+			extern volatile bool USB_IsInitialized;
+
+			/** Structure containing the last received Control request when in Device mode (for use in user-applications
+			 *  inside of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event, or for filling up with a control request to issue when
+			 *  in Host mode before calling \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement
+			 */
+			 extern USB_Request_Header_t USB_ControlRequest;
+			
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#if !defined(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+					/** Indicates the current host state machine state. When in host mode, this indicates the state
+					 *  via one of the values of the \ref USB_Host_States_t enum values.
+					 *
+					 *  This value may be altered by the user application to implement the \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed,
+					 *  \ref HOST_STATE_Configured and \ref HOST_STATE_Suspended states which are not implemented by
+					 *  the library.
+					 *
+					 *  To reduce program size and speed up checks of this global, it can be placed into one of the AVR's
+					 *  GPIOR hardware registers instead of RAM by defining the HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR token to a value 
+					 *  between 0 and 2 in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch. When
+					 *  defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used in the user application except
+					 *  implicitly via the library APIs.
+					 *
+					 *  \note This global is only present if the user application can be a USB host.
+					 *
+					 *  \see \ref USB_Host_States_t for a list of possible device states
+					 *
+					 *  \ingroup Group_Host
+					 */
+					extern volatile uint8_t USB_HostState;
+				#else
+					#define _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME2(y) GPIOR ## y
+					#define _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME(x)  _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME2(x)
+					#define USB_HostState            _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#if !defined(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+					/** Indicates the current device state machine state. When in device mode, this indicates the state
+					 *  via one of the values of the \ref USB_Device_States_t enum values.
+					 *
+					 *  This value should not be altered by the user application as it is handled automatically by the
+					 *  library. The only exception to this rule is if the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token is used
+					 *  (see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() and \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() events).
+					 *
+					 *  To reduce program size and speed up checks of this global, it can be placed into one of the AVR's
+					 *  GPIOR hardware registers instead of RAM by defining the DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR token to a value 
+					 *  between 0 and 2 in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch. When
+					 *  defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used in the user application except
+					 *  implicitly via the library APIs.
+					 *
+					 *  \note This global is only present if the user application can be a USB device.
+					 *        \n\n
+					 *
+					 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+					 *        changed in value except in the circumstances outlined above.
+					 *
+					 *  \see \ref USB_Device_States_t for a list of possible device states
+					 *
+					 *  \ingroup Group_Device
+					 */
+					extern volatile uint8_t USB_DeviceState;
+				#else
+					#define _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME2(y) GPIOR ## y
+					#define _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME(x)  _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME2(x)
+					#define USB_DeviceState            _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** This is the main USB management task. The USB driver requires that this task be executed
+			 *  continuously when the USB system is active (device attached in host mode, or attached to a host
+			 *  in device mode) in order to manage USB communications. This task may be executed inside an RTOS,
+			 *  fast timer ISR or the main user application loop.
+			 *
+			 *  The USB task must be serviced within 30ms while in device mode, or within 1ms while in host mode.
+			 *  The task may be serviced at all times, or (for minimum CPU consumption):
+			 *
+			 *    - In device mode, it may be disabled at start-up, enabled on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() 
+			 *      event and disabled again on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() event.
+			 *
+			 *    - In host mode, it may be disabled at start-up, enabled on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached()
+			 *      event and disabled again on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete() or
+			 *      \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() events.
+			 *
+			 *  If in device mode (only), the control endpoint can instead be managed via interrupts entirely by the library
+			 *  by defining the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on the USB events.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement
+			 */
+			void USB_USBTask(void);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USBTASK_C)
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					static void USB_HostTask(void);
+				#endif
+				
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					static void USB_DeviceTask(void);
+				#endif
+			#endif
+			
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(duration, nextstate) MACROS{ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice; \
+			                                                             WaitMSRemaining = (duration);             \
+			                                                             PostWaitState = (nextstate);        }MACROE
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c
index b7f811b5e..f44cf0ba4 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c
@@ -1,398 +1,398 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_DEVCHAPTER9_C
-#include "DevChapter9.h"
-
-uint8_t USB_ConfigurationNumber;
-
-#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
-bool    USB_CurrentlySelfPowered;
-#endif
-
-#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
-bool    USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled;
-#endif
-
-void USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest(void)
-{
-	bool     RequestHandled = false;
-	uint8_t* RequestHeader  = (uint8_t*)&USB_ControlRequest;
-	
-	for (uint8_t RequestHeaderByte = 0; RequestHeaderByte < sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t); RequestHeaderByte++)
-	  *(RequestHeader++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-	  
-	uint8_t bmRequestType = USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType;
-	
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case REQ_GetStatus:
-			if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||
-			    (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))
-			{
-				USB_Device_GetStatus();
-				RequestHandled = true;
-			}
-
-			break;
-		case REQ_ClearFeature:
-		case REQ_SetFeature:
-			if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||
-			    (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))
-			{
-				USB_Device_ClearSetFeature();
-				RequestHandled = true;
-			}
-
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetAddress:
-			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))
-			{
-				USB_Device_SetAddress();
-				RequestHandled = true;
-			}
-
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetDescriptor:
-			if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||
-			    (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE)))
-			{
-				USB_Device_GetDescriptor();
-				RequestHandled = true;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case REQ_GetConfiguration:
-			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))
-			{
-				USB_Device_GetConfiguration();
-				RequestHandled = true;
-			}
-
-			break;
-		case REQ_SetConfiguration:
-			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))
-			{
-				USB_Device_SetConfiguration();
-				RequestHandled = true;
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-
-	if (!(RequestHandled))
-	  EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest();
-	  
-	if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
-	{
-		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-		Endpoint_ClearSETUP();		
-	}
-}
-
-static void USB_Device_SetAddress(void)
-{
-	uint8_t DeviceAddress = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0x7F);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-	
-	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
-	{
-		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return;
-	}
-
-	USB_DeviceState = (DeviceAddress) ? DEVICE_STATE_Addressed : DEVICE_STATE_Default;
-
-	UDADDR = ((1 << ADDEN) | DeviceAddress);
-
-	return;
-}
-
-static void USB_Device_SetConfiguration(void)
-{
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Addressed)
-	  return;
-	
-#if defined(FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS)
-	if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS)
-	  return;
-#else
-	#if defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)
-		#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_FLASH
-	#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
-		#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_EEPROM
-	#elif defined(USE_SRAM_DESCRIPTORS)
-		#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_SRAM
-	#else
-		uint8_t MemoryAddressSpace;
-	#endif
-	
-	USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DevDescriptorPtr;
-
-	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DevDescriptorPtr
-	#if !defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
-	                               , &MemoryAddressSpace
-	#endif
-	                               ) == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	{
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	if (MemoryAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)
-	{
-		if (((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > pgm_read_byte(&DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)))
-		  return;
-	}
-	else if (MemoryAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)
-	{
-		if (((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > eeprom_read_byte(&DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)))
-		  return;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)
-		  return;
-	}
-#endif
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-	USB_ConfigurationNumber = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue;
-
-	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-
-	USB_DeviceState = (USB_ConfigurationNumber) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Addressed;
-
-	EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged();
-}
-
-void USB_Device_GetConfiguration(void)
-{
-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(USB_ConfigurationNumber);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-}
-
-#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
-static char USB_Device_NibbleToASCII(uint8_t Nibble)
-{
-	Nibble = ((Nibble & 0x0F) + '0');
-	return (Nibble > '9') ? (Nibble + ('A' - '9' - 1)) : Nibble;
-}
-
-static void USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor(void)
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
-		int16_t                 UnicodeString[20];
-	} SignatureDescriptor;
-
-	SignatureDescriptor.Header.Type = DTYPE_String;
-	SignatureDescriptor.Header.Size = sizeof(SignatureDescriptor);
-	
-	uint8_t SigReadAddress = 0x0E;
-
-	ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
-	{
-		for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < 20; SerialCharNum++)
-		{
-			uint8_t SerialByte = boot_signature_byte_get(SigReadAddress);
-			
-			if (SerialCharNum & 0x01)
-			{
-				SerialByte >>= 4;
-				SigReadAddress++;
-			}
-			
-			SignatureDescriptor.UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = USB_Device_NibbleToASCII(SerialByte);
-		}
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&SignatureDescriptor, sizeof(SignatureDescriptor));
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-}
-#endif
-
-static void USB_Device_GetDescriptor(void)
-{
-	void*    DescriptorPointer;
-	uint16_t DescriptorSize;
-	
-	#if !defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
-	uint8_t  DescriptorAddressSpace;
-	#endif
-	
-	#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue == ((DTYPE_String << 8) | USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL))
-	{
-		USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor();
-		return;
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	if ((DescriptorSize = CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(USB_ControlRequest.wValue, USB_ControlRequest.wIndex,
-	                                                 &DescriptorPointer
-	#if !defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
-	                                                 , &DescriptorAddressSpace
-	#endif
-													 )) == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	{
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-	#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
-	Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
-	#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
-	Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
-	#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)
-	Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);	
-	#else
-	if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)
-	  Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);	
-	else if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)
-	  Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
-	else
-	  Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);	
-	#endif
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-}
-
-static void USB_Device_GetStatus(void)
-{
-	uint8_t CurrentStatus = 0;
-
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType)
-	{
-#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER) || !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)	
-		case (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE):
-	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
-			if (USB_CurrentlySelfPowered)
-			  CurrentStatus |= FEATURE_SELFPOWERED_ENABLED;
-	#endif
-
-	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)			
-			if (USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled)
-			  CurrentStatus |= FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP_ENABLED;
-	#endif
-			break;
-#endif
-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-		case (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT):
-			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
-
-			CurrentStatus = Endpoint_IsStalled();
-
-			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);			  
-
-			break;
-#endif
-		default:
-			return;
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(CurrentStatus);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-}
-
-static void USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(void)
-{
-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)
-	{
-#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)			
-		case REQREC_DEVICE:
-			if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue == FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
-			  USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled = (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest == REQ_SetFeature);
-			else
-			  return;
-			
-			break;			
-#endif
-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-		case REQREC_ENDPOINT:
-			if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue == FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT)
-			{
-				uint8_t EndpointIndex = ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
-				
-				if (EndpointIndex == ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)
-				  return;
-
-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EndpointIndex);
-
-				if (!(Endpoint_IsEnabled()))
-				  return;
-
-				if (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest == REQ_SetFeature)
-				{
-					Endpoint_StallTransaction();
-				}
-				else
-				{
-					Endpoint_ClearStall();
-					Endpoint_ResetFIFO(EndpointIndex);
-					Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
-				}
-			}
-			
-			break;
-#endif
-		default:
-			return;
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_DEVCHAPTER9_C
+#include "DevChapter9.h"
+
+uint8_t USB_ConfigurationNumber;
+
+#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
+bool    USB_CurrentlySelfPowered;
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+bool    USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled;
+#endif
+
+void USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest(void)
+{
+	bool     RequestHandled = false;
+	uint8_t* RequestHeader  = (uint8_t*)&USB_ControlRequest;
+	
+	for (uint8_t RequestHeaderByte = 0; RequestHeaderByte < sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t); RequestHeaderByte++)
+	  *(RequestHeader++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+	  
+	uint8_t bmRequestType = USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType;
+	
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetStatus:
+			if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||
+			    (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))
+			{
+				USB_Device_GetStatus();
+				RequestHandled = true;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case REQ_ClearFeature:
+		case REQ_SetFeature:
+			if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||
+			    (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))
+			{
+				USB_Device_ClearSetFeature();
+				RequestHandled = true;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetAddress:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))
+			{
+				USB_Device_SetAddress();
+				RequestHandled = true;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetDescriptor:
+			if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||
+			    (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE)))
+			{
+				USB_Device_GetDescriptor();
+				RequestHandled = true;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetConfiguration:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))
+			{
+				USB_Device_GetConfiguration();
+				RequestHandled = true;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetConfiguration:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))
+			{
+				USB_Device_SetConfiguration();
+				RequestHandled = true;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if (!(RequestHandled))
+	  EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest();
+	  
+	if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+	{
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+		Endpoint_ClearSETUP();		
+	}
+}
+
+static void USB_Device_SetAddress(void)
+{
+	uint8_t DeviceAddress = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0x7F);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+	
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+	{
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	USB_DeviceState = (DeviceAddress) ? DEVICE_STATE_Addressed : DEVICE_STATE_Default;
+
+	UDADDR = ((1 << ADDEN) | DeviceAddress);
+
+	return;
+}
+
+static void USB_Device_SetConfiguration(void)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Addressed)
+	  return;
+	
+#if defined(FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS)
+	if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS)
+	  return;
+#else
+	#if defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)
+		#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_FLASH
+	#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+		#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_EEPROM
+	#elif defined(USE_SRAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+		#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_SRAM
+	#else
+		uint8_t MemoryAddressSpace;
+	#endif
+	
+	USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DevDescriptorPtr;
+
+	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DevDescriptorPtr
+	#if !defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+	                               , &MemoryAddressSpace
+	#endif
+	                               ) == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	if (MemoryAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)
+	{
+		if (((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > pgm_read_byte(&DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)))
+		  return;
+	}
+	else if (MemoryAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)
+	{
+		if (((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > eeprom_read_byte(&DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)))
+		  return;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)
+		  return;
+	}
+#endif
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	USB_ConfigurationNumber = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue;
+
+	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+	USB_DeviceState = (USB_ConfigurationNumber) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Addressed;
+
+	EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged();
+}
+
+void USB_Device_GetConfiguration(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(USB_ConfigurationNumber);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+}
+
+#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+static char USB_Device_NibbleToASCII(uint8_t Nibble)
+{
+	Nibble = ((Nibble & 0x0F) + '0');
+	return (Nibble > '9') ? (Nibble + ('A' - '9' - 1)) : Nibble;
+}
+
+static void USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
+		int16_t                 UnicodeString[20];
+	} SignatureDescriptor;
+
+	SignatureDescriptor.Header.Type = DTYPE_String;
+	SignatureDescriptor.Header.Size = sizeof(SignatureDescriptor);
+	
+	uint8_t SigReadAddress = 0x0E;
+
+	ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
+	{
+		for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < 20; SerialCharNum++)
+		{
+			uint8_t SerialByte = boot_signature_byte_get(SigReadAddress);
+			
+			if (SerialCharNum & 0x01)
+			{
+				SerialByte >>= 4;
+				SigReadAddress++;
+			}
+			
+			SignatureDescriptor.UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = USB_Device_NibbleToASCII(SerialByte);
+		}
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&SignatureDescriptor, sizeof(SignatureDescriptor));
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+}
+#endif
+
+static void USB_Device_GetDescriptor(void)
+{
+	void*    DescriptorPointer;
+	uint16_t DescriptorSize;
+	
+	#if !defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+	uint8_t  DescriptorAddressSpace;
+	#endif
+	
+	#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue == ((DTYPE_String << 8) | USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL))
+	{
+		USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor();
+		return;
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	if ((DescriptorSize = CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(USB_ControlRequest.wValue, USB_ControlRequest.wIndex,
+	                                                 &DescriptorPointer
+	#if !defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+	                                                 , &DescriptorAddressSpace
+	#endif
+													 )) == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+	Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
+	#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+	Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
+	#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)
+	Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);	
+	#else
+	if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)
+	  Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);	
+	else if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)
+	  Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
+	else
+	  Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);	
+	#endif
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+}
+
+static void USB_Device_GetStatus(void)
+{
+	uint8_t CurrentStatus = 0;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType)
+	{
+#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER) || !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)	
+		case (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE):
+	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
+			if (USB_CurrentlySelfPowered)
+			  CurrentStatus |= FEATURE_SELFPOWERED_ENABLED;
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)			
+			if (USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled)
+			  CurrentStatus |= FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP_ENABLED;
+	#endif
+			break;
+#endif
+#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+		case (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT):
+			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
+
+			CurrentStatus = Endpoint_IsStalled();
+
+			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);			  
+
+			break;
+#endif
+		default:
+			return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(CurrentStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+}
+
+static void USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(void)
+{
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)
+	{
+#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)			
+		case REQREC_DEVICE:
+			if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue == FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+			  USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled = (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest == REQ_SetFeature);
+			else
+			  return;
+			
+			break;			
+#endif
+#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+		case REQREC_ENDPOINT:
+			if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue == FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT)
+			{
+				uint8_t EndpointIndex = ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
+				
+				if (EndpointIndex == ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)
+				  return;
+
+				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EndpointIndex);
+
+				if (!(Endpoint_IsEnabled()))
+				  return;
+
+				if (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest == REQ_SetFeature)
+				{
+					Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					Endpoint_ClearStall();
+					Endpoint_ResetFIFO(EndpointIndex);
+					Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+				}
+			}
+			
+			break;
+#endif
+		default:
+			return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.h
index 868c3fab2..7bafcbfb3 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.h
@@ -1,164 +1,164 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB device standard request management.
- *
- *  This file contains the function prototypes neccesary for the processing of incomming standard control requests
- *  when the library is in USB device mode.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-#ifndef __DEVCHAPTER9_H__
-#define __DEVCHAPTER9_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
-		#include <avr/boot.h>
-		#include <util/atomic.h>
-		
-		#include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/Events.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/StdRequestType.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h"
-		#include "LowLevel.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			#if defined(USE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION)
-				#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS           1
-			#endif
-	
-		/* Enums: */
-			#if !defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
-				/** Enum for the possible descriptor memory spaces, for the MemoryAddressSpace of the
-				 *  \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function. This can be used when none of the USE_*_DESCRIPTORS
-				 *  compile time options are used, to indicate in which memory space the descriptor is stored.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_Device
-				 */
-				enum USB_DescriptorMemorySpaces_t
-				{
-					MEMSPACE_FLASH    = 0, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in FLASH memory */
-					MEMSPACE_EEPROM   = 1, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in EEPROM memory */
-					MEMSPACE_RAM      = 2, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in RAM memory */
-				};
-			#endif
-	
-		/* Global Variables: */
-			/** Indicates the currently set configuration number of the device. USB devices may have several
-			 *  different configurations which the host can select between; this indicates the currently selected
-			 *  value, or 0 if no configuration has been selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
-			 *        changed in value.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_Device
-			 */
-			extern uint8_t USB_ConfigurationNumber;
-			
-			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
-				/** Indicates if the host is currently allowing the device to issue remote wakeup events. If this
-				 *  flag is cleared, the device should not issue remote wakeup events to the host.
-				 *
-				 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
-				 *        changed in value.
-				 *        \n\n
-				 *
-				 *  \note To reduce FLASH usage of the compiled applications where Remote Wakeup is not supported,
-				 *        this global and the underlying management code can be disabled by defining the 
-				 *        NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP token in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler via
-				 *        the -D switch.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_Device
-				 */
-				extern bool USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled;
-			#endif
-			
-			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
-				/** Indicates if the device is currently being powered by its own power supply, rather than being
-				 *  powered by the host's USB supply. This flag should remain cleared if the device does not
-				 *  support self powered mode, as indicated in the device descriptors.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_Device
-				 */
-				extern bool USB_CurrentlySelfPowered;
-			#endif
-	
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
-			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
-		#elif defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)
-			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
-		#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
-			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
-		#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
-			#error Only one of the USE_*_DESCRIPTORS modes should be selected.
-		#endif
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			void USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest(void);
-			
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DEVCHAPTER9_C)
-				static void USB_Device_SetAddress(void);
-				static void USB_Device_SetConfiguration(void);
-				static void USB_Device_GetConfiguration(void);
-				static void USB_Device_GetDescriptor(void);
-				static void USB_Device_GetStatus(void);
-				static void USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(void);
-				
-				#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
-					static char USB_Device_NibbleToASCII(uint8_t Nibble) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-					static void USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor(void);
-				#endif				
-			#endif
-	#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB device standard request management.
+ *
+ *  This file contains the function prototypes neccesary for the processing of incomming standard control requests
+ *  when the library is in USB device mode.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DEVCHAPTER9_H__
+#define __DEVCHAPTER9_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <util/atomic.h>
+		
+		#include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/Events.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/StdRequestType.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h"
+		#include "LowLevel.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if defined(USE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION)
+				#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS           1
+			#endif
+	
+		/* Enums: */
+			#if !defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+				/** Enum for the possible descriptor memory spaces, for the MemoryAddressSpace of the
+				 *  \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function. This can be used when none of the USE_*_DESCRIPTORS
+				 *  compile time options are used, to indicate in which memory space the descriptor is stored.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_Device
+				 */
+				enum USB_DescriptorMemorySpaces_t
+				{
+					MEMSPACE_FLASH    = 0, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in FLASH memory */
+					MEMSPACE_EEPROM   = 1, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in EEPROM memory */
+					MEMSPACE_RAM      = 2, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in RAM memory */
+				};
+			#endif
+	
+		/* Global Variables: */
+			/** Indicates the currently set configuration number of the device. USB devices may have several
+			 *  different configurations which the host can select between; this indicates the currently selected
+			 *  value, or 0 if no configuration has been selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *        changed in value.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_Device
+			 */
+			extern uint8_t USB_ConfigurationNumber;
+			
+			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+				/** Indicates if the host is currently allowing the device to issue remote wakeup events. If this
+				 *  flag is cleared, the device should not issue remote wakeup events to the host.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+				 *        changed in value.
+				 *        \n\n
+				 *
+				 *  \note To reduce FLASH usage of the compiled applications where Remote Wakeup is not supported,
+				 *        this global and the underlying management code can be disabled by defining the 
+				 *        NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP token in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler via
+				 *        the -D switch.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_Device
+				 */
+				extern bool USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled;
+			#endif
+			
+			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
+				/** Indicates if the device is currently being powered by its own power supply, rather than being
+				 *  powered by the host's USB supply. This flag should remain cleared if the device does not
+				 *  support self powered mode, as indicated in the device descriptors.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_Device
+				 */
+				extern bool USB_CurrentlySelfPowered;
+			#endif
+	
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#elif defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#error Only one of the USE_*_DESCRIPTORS modes should be selected.
+		#endif
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest(void);
+			
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DEVCHAPTER9_C)
+				static void USB_Device_SetAddress(void);
+				static void USB_Device_SetConfiguration(void);
+				static void USB_Device_GetConfiguration(void);
+				static void USB_Device_GetDescriptor(void);
+				static void USB_Device_GetStatus(void);
+				static void USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(void);
+				
+				#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+					static char USB_Device_NibbleToASCII(uint8_t Nibble) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+					static void USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor(void);
+				#endif				
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.h
index 5ef4fc08a..d8e7739b3 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.h
@@ -1,226 +1,226 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB device mode definitions.
- *
- *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to USB device mode.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_Device Device Management
- *
- *  USB Device mode related macros and enums. This module contains macros and enums which are used when
- *  the USB controller is initialized in device mode.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBDEVICE_H__
-#define __USBDEVICE_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"	
-		#include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h"
-		#include "Endpoint.h"
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if (defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))
-			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
-		#endif
-
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-			
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
-				 *  USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Low Speed mode is not available on all USB AVR models.
-				 *        \n\n
-				 *
-				 *  \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used
-				 *        when running in low speed mode -- refer to the USB 2.0 standard.
-				 */
-				#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED            (1 << 0)
-			#endif
-			
-			/** Mask for the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
-			 *  USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode.
-			 */
-			#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED               (0 << 0)
-			
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should
-				 *  be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume.
-				 *
-				 *  Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the
-				 *  host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state.
-				 *
-				 *  \note This macro should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it
-				 *        supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be
-				 *        issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e.,
-				 *        the \ref USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP compile
-				 *        time option is used, this macro is unavailable.
-				 *
-				 *  \see \ref Group_Descriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void);
-				
-				/** Indicates if a Remote Wakeup request is being sent to the host. This returns true if a
-				 *  remote wakeup is currently being sent, false otherwise.
-				 *
-				 *  This can be used in conjunction with the \ref USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended() macro to determine if
-				 *  a sent RMWAKEUP request was accepted or rejected by the host.
-				 *
-				 *  \note This macro should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it
-				 *        supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors. When the NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
-				 *        compile time option is used, this macro is unavailable.
-				 *
-				 *  \see \ref Group_Descriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if no Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void);
-				
-				/** Indicates if the device is currently suspended by the host. Whilst suspended, the device is
-				 *  to enter a low power state until resumed by the host. No USB traffic to or from the device
-				 *  can occur (except for Remote Wakeup requests) during suspension by the host.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the USB communications have been suspended by the host, false otherwise.
-				 */
-				static inline bool USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended(void);
-				
-				/** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the
-				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,
-				 *  at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode.
-				 */
-				static inline bool USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void);
-				
-				/** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stop the firing of the
-				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode.
-				 */
-				static inline bool USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void);
-			#else
-				#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
-					#define USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup()   MACROS{ UDCON |= (1 << RMWKUP); }MACROE
-
-					#define USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent()       ((UDCON &  (1 << RMWKUP)) ? false : true)
-				#endif
-				
-				#define USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended()           ((UDINT &  (1 << SUSPI)) ? true : false)
-				
-				#define USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents()    MACROS{ USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SOFI); }MACROE
-
-				#define USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents()   MACROS{ USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SOFI); }MACROE
-			#endif
-			
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			enum USB_Device_States_t
-			{
-				DEVICE_STATE_Unattached                   = 0, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                                *   that the device is not currently connected to a host.
-				                                                */
-				DEVICE_STATE_Powered                      = 1, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                                *   that the device is connected to a host, but enumeration has not
-				                                                *   yet begun.
-				                                                */
-				DEVICE_STATE_Default                      = 2, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                                *   that the device's USB bus has been reset by the host and it is
-				                                                *   now waiting for the host to begin the enumeration process.
-				                                                */
-				DEVICE_STATE_Addressed                    = 3, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                                *   that the device has been addressed by the USB Host, but is not
-				                                                *   yet configured.
-				                                                */
-				DEVICE_STATE_Configured                   = 4, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates
-				                                                *   that the device has been enumerated by the host and is ready
-				                                                *   for USB communications to begin.
-				                                                */
-				DEVICE_STATE_Suspended                    = 5, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates
-				                                                *   that the USB bus has been suspended by the host, and the device
-				                                                *   should power down to a minimal power level until the bus is
-				                                                *   resumed.
-				                                                */
-			};
-			
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Function to retrieve a given descriptor's size and memory location from the given descriptor type value,
-			 *  index and language ID. This function MUST be overridden in the user application (added with full, identical  
-			 *  prototype and name so that the library can call it to retrieve descriptor data.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] wValue  The type of the descriptor to retrieve in the upper byte, and the index in the 
-			 *                     lower byte (when more than one descriptor of the given type exists, such as the
-			 *                     case of string descriptors). The type may be one of the standard types defined
-			 *                     in the DescriptorTypes_t enum, or may be a class-specific descriptor type value.
-			 *  \param[in] wIndex  The language ID of the string to return if the wValue type indicates DTYPE_String,
-			 *                     otherwise zero for standard descriptors, or as defined in a class-specific
-			 *                     standards.
-			 *  \param[out] DescriptorAddress  Pointer to the descriptor in memory. This should be set by the routine to
-			 *                                 the address of the descriptor.
-			 *  \param[out] MemoryAddressSpace A value from the \ref USB_DescriptorMemorySpaces_t enum to indicate the memory
-			 *                                 space in which the descriptor is stored. This parameter does not exist when one
-			 *                                 of the USE_*_DESCRIPTORS compile time options is used.
-			 *
-			 *  \note By default, the library expects all descriptors to be located in flash memory via the PROGMEM attribute.
-			 *        If descriptors should be located in RAM or EEPROM instead (to speed up access in the case of RAM, or to
-			 *        allow the descriptors to be changed dynamically at runtime) either the USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS or the 
-			 *        USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS tokens may be defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler by the -D
-			 *        switch.
-			 *
-			 *  \return Size in bytes of the descriptor if it exists, zero or \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR otherwise
-			 */
-			uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress
-			#if !defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
-			                                    , uint8_t* MemoryAddressSpace
-			#endif			
-			                                    )
-									            ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */		
-			#define USB_Device_SetLowSpeed()        MACROS{ UDCON |=  (1 << LSM);   }MACROE
-			#define USB_Device_SetFullSpeed()       MACROS{ UDCON &= ~(1 << LSM);   }MACROE
-	#endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB device mode definitions.
+ *
+ *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to USB device mode.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_Device Device Management
+ *
+ *  USB Device mode related macros and enums. This module contains macros and enums which are used when
+ *  the USB controller is initialized in device mode.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBDEVICE_H__
+#define __USBDEVICE_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"	
+		#include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "Endpoint.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))
+			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+			
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+				 *  USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Low Speed mode is not available on all USB AVR models.
+				 *        \n\n
+				 *
+				 *  \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used
+				 *        when running in low speed mode -- refer to the USB 2.0 standard.
+				 */
+				#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED            (1 << 0)
+			#endif
+			
+			/** Mask for the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+			 *  USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode.
+			 */
+			#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED               (0 << 0)
+			
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should
+				 *  be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume.
+				 *
+				 *  Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the
+				 *  host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it
+				 *        supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be
+				 *        issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e.,
+				 *        the \ref USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP compile
+				 *        time option is used, this macro is unavailable.
+				 *
+				 *  \see \ref Group_Descriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void);
+				
+				/** Indicates if a Remote Wakeup request is being sent to the host. This returns true if a
+				 *  remote wakeup is currently being sent, false otherwise.
+				 *
+				 *  This can be used in conjunction with the \ref USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended() macro to determine if
+				 *  a sent RMWAKEUP request was accepted or rejected by the host.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it
+				 *        supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors. When the NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+				 *        compile time option is used, this macro is unavailable.
+				 *
+				 *  \see \ref Group_Descriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if no Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void);
+				
+				/** Indicates if the device is currently suspended by the host. Whilst suspended, the device is
+				 *  to enter a low power state until resumed by the host. No USB traffic to or from the device
+				 *  can occur (except for Remote Wakeup requests) during suspension by the host.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the USB communications have been suspended by the host, false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline bool USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended(void);
+				
+				/** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the
+				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,
+				 *  at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode.
+				 */
+				static inline bool USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void);
+				
+				/** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stop the firing of the
+				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode.
+				 */
+				static inline bool USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void);
+			#else
+				#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+					#define USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup()   MACROS{ UDCON |= (1 << RMWKUP); }MACROE
+
+					#define USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent()       ((UDCON &  (1 << RMWKUP)) ? false : true)
+				#endif
+				
+				#define USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended()           ((UDINT &  (1 << SUSPI)) ? true : false)
+				
+				#define USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents()    MACROS{ USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SOFI); }MACROE
+
+				#define USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents()   MACROS{ USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SOFI); }MACROE
+			#endif
+			
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			enum USB_Device_States_t
+			{
+				DEVICE_STATE_Unattached                   = 0, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the device is not currently connected to a host.
+				                                                */
+				DEVICE_STATE_Powered                      = 1, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the device is connected to a host, but enumeration has not
+				                                                *   yet begun.
+				                                                */
+				DEVICE_STATE_Default                      = 2, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the device's USB bus has been reset by the host and it is
+				                                                *   now waiting for the host to begin the enumeration process.
+				                                                */
+				DEVICE_STATE_Addressed                    = 3, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the device has been addressed by the USB Host, but is not
+				                                                *   yet configured.
+				                                                */
+				DEVICE_STATE_Configured                   = 4, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the device has been enumerated by the host and is ready
+				                                                *   for USB communications to begin.
+				                                                */
+				DEVICE_STATE_Suspended                    = 5, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the USB bus has been suspended by the host, and the device
+				                                                *   should power down to a minimal power level until the bus is
+				                                                *   resumed.
+				                                                */
+			};
+			
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Function to retrieve a given descriptor's size and memory location from the given descriptor type value,
+			 *  index and language ID. This function MUST be overridden in the user application (added with full, identical  
+			 *  prototype and name so that the library can call it to retrieve descriptor data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] wValue  The type of the descriptor to retrieve in the upper byte, and the index in the 
+			 *                     lower byte (when more than one descriptor of the given type exists, such as the
+			 *                     case of string descriptors). The type may be one of the standard types defined
+			 *                     in the DescriptorTypes_t enum, or may be a class-specific descriptor type value.
+			 *  \param[in] wIndex  The language ID of the string to return if the wValue type indicates DTYPE_String,
+			 *                     otherwise zero for standard descriptors, or as defined in a class-specific
+			 *                     standards.
+			 *  \param[out] DescriptorAddress  Pointer to the descriptor in memory. This should be set by the routine to
+			 *                                 the address of the descriptor.
+			 *  \param[out] MemoryAddressSpace A value from the \ref USB_DescriptorMemorySpaces_t enum to indicate the memory
+			 *                                 space in which the descriptor is stored. This parameter does not exist when one
+			 *                                 of the USE_*_DESCRIPTORS compile time options is used.
+			 *
+			 *  \note By default, the library expects all descriptors to be located in flash memory via the PROGMEM attribute.
+			 *        If descriptors should be located in RAM or EEPROM instead (to speed up access in the case of RAM, or to
+			 *        allow the descriptors to be changed dynamically at runtime) either the USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS or the 
+			 *        USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS tokens may be defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler by the -D
+			 *        switch.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Size in bytes of the descriptor if it exists, zero or \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR otherwise
+			 */
+			uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress
+			#if !defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && !defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			                                    , uint8_t* MemoryAddressSpace
+			#endif			
+			                                    )
+									            ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */		
+			#define USB_Device_SetLowSpeed()        MACROS{ UDCON |=  (1 << LSM);   }MACROE
+			#define USB_Device_SetFullSpeed()       MACROS{ UDCON &= ~(1 << LSM);   }MACROE
+	#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c
index 5560c8092..c704ac7c5 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c
@@ -1,338 +1,338 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_ENDPOINT_C
-#include "Endpoint.h"
-
-#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
-uint8_t USB_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE;
-#endif
-
-uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMaskDynamic(const uint16_t Size)
-{
-	return Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size);
-}
-
-bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t UECFG0XData, const uint8_t UECFG1XData)
-{
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);
-	Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();
-
-	UECFG1X = 0;
-
-	UECFG0X = UECFG0XData;
-	UECFG1X = UECFG1XData;
-
-	return Endpoint_IsConfigured();
-}
-
-void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void)
-{
-	UEINT = 0;
-
-	for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)
-	{
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);	
-		UEIENX = 0;
-		UEINTX = 0;
-		Endpoint_DeallocateMemory();
-		Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();
-	}
-}
-
-void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void)
-{
-	if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)
-	{
-		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-		{
-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-			  return;
-		}
-
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
-		{
-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-			  return;
-		}
-		
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	}
-}
-
-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void)
-{
-	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
-	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;	
-	#else
-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
-	#endif
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		if (Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection() == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;		
-		}
-		
-		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
-		else if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended;
-		else if (Endpoint_IsStalled())
-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled;
-			  
-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI))
-		{
-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);
-
-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length
-#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-                                , StreamCallbackPtr_t Callback
-#endif
-								)
-{
-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	#if defined(FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS)
-	uint8_t BytesRemToAlignment = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() & 0x07);
-
-	if (Length >= 8)
-	{
-		Length -= BytesRemToAlignment;
-
-		switch (BytesRemToAlignment)
-		{
-			default:
-				do
-				{
-					if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-					{
-						Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-						#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-						if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
-						  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
-						#endif
-
-						if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
-						  return ErrorCode;
-					}
-
-					Length -= 8;
-					
-					Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
-			case 7: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
-			case 6: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
-			case 5: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
-			case 4: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
-			case 3: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
-			case 2: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
-			case 1:	Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
-				} while (Length >= 8);	
-		}
-	}
-	#endif
-
-	while (Length)
-	{
-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-		{
-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
-			  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
-			#endif
-
-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
-			  return ErrorCode;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
-			Length--;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-past common code with slight alterations,
- * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte()
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++, Endpoint_Read_Byte())
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--) = Endpoint_Read_Byte()
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--, Endpoint_Read_Byte())
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
-
-#endif
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte()
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++, Endpoint_Read_Byte())
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--) = Endpoint_Read_Byte()
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--, Endpoint_Read_Byte())
-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_ENDPOINT_C
+#include "Endpoint.h"
+
+#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+uint8_t USB_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE;
+#endif
+
+uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMaskDynamic(const uint16_t Size)
+{
+	return Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size);
+}
+
+bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t UECFG0XData, const uint8_t UECFG1XData)
+{
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);
+	Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();
+
+	UECFG1X = 0;
+
+	UECFG0X = UECFG0XData;
+	UECFG1X = UECFG1XData;
+
+	return Endpoint_IsConfigured();
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void)
+{
+	UEINT = 0;
+
+	for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)
+	{
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);	
+		UEIENX = 0;
+		UEINTX = 0;
+		Endpoint_DeallocateMemory();
+		Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();
+	}
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void)
+{
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)
+	{
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+		
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
+
+#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void)
+{
+	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
+	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;	
+	#else
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#endif
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection() == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;		
+		}
+		
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled;
+			  
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI))
+		{
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length
+#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+                                , StreamCallbackPtr_t Callback
+#endif
+								)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	#if defined(FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS)
+	uint8_t BytesRemToAlignment = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() & 0x07);
+
+	if (Length >= 8)
+	{
+		Length -= BytesRemToAlignment;
+
+		switch (BytesRemToAlignment)
+		{
+			default:
+				do
+				{
+					if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+					{
+						Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+						#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+						if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
+						  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
+						#endif
+
+						if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+						  return ErrorCode;
+					}
+
+					Length -= 8;
+					
+					Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
+			case 7: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
+			case 6: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
+			case 5: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
+			case 4: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
+			case 3: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
+			case 2: Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
+			case 1:	Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
+				} while (Length >= 8);	
+		}
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
+			  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
+			#endif
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Endpoint_Discard_Byte();
+			Length--;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-past common code with slight alterations,
+ * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++, Endpoint_Read_Byte())
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--) = Endpoint_Read_Byte()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--, Endpoint_Read_Byte())
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#endif
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++, Endpoint_Read_Byte())
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--) = Endpoint_Read_Byte()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--, Endpoint_Read_Byte())
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.h
index 93412f500..68413b819 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.h
@@ -1,1264 +1,1264 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB device endpoint management definitions.
- *
- *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to the management of the device's
- *  data endpoints when the library is initialized in USB device mode.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_EndpointManagement Endpoint Management
- *
- *  Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This
- *  module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data
- *  send/receive functions for various data types.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-/** @defgroup Group_EndpointRW Endpoint Data Reading and Writing
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW  
- *  @defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
- *  from and to endpoints.
- */ 
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW  
- *  @defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
- *  and to endpoints.
- */ 
-
-/** @defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement Endpoint Packet Management
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.
- */
-
-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_H__
-#define __ENDPOINT_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h"
-
-		#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			#include "../HighLevel/StreamCallbacks.h"
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint
-			 *  should be initialized in the OUT direction - i.e. data flows from host to device.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT                      (0 << EPDIR)
-
-			/** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint
-			 *  should be initialized in the IN direction - i.e. data flows from device to host.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_DIR_IN                       (1 << EPDIR)
-
-			/** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates
-			 *  that the endpoint should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results
-			 *  in slower transfers as only one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access the endpoint's
-			 *  bank at the one time.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE                  (0 << EPBK0)
-
-			/** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates
-			 *  that the endpoint should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results
-			 *  in faster transfers as one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access one bank while the other
-			 *  accesses the second bank.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE                  (1 << EPBK0)
-			
-			/** Endpoint address for the default control endpoint, which always resides in address 0. This is
-			 *  defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the endpoint macros.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP                    0
-
-			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
-				/** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value 
-				 *  in the device descriptor. Not available if the FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined.
-				 */
-				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE   8
-			#endif
-			
-			/** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
-			 *  numerical address in the device.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK                   0x07
-
-			/** Endpoint direction mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
-			 *  direction for comparing with the ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_* masks.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_EPDIR_MASK                   0x80
-
-			/** Endpoint bank size mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
-			 *  bank size in the device.
-			 */
-			#define ENDPOINT_EPSIZE_MASK                  0x7FF
-			
-			/** Maximum size in bytes of a given endpoint.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] n  Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1)
-			 */				
-			#define ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(n)                  _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(n)
-
-			/** Indicates if the given endpoint supports double banking.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] n  Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1)
-			 */				
-			#define ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED(n)      _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK(n)
-
-			#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-				#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-					/** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may
-					 *  be used in the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of endpoints,
-					 *  this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model.
-					 */
-					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS          7
-				#else
-					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS          5			
-				#endif
-			#else
-				#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS              1
-			#endif
-			
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank.
-				 *
-				 *  \note The return width of this function may differ, depending on the maximum endpoint bank size
-				 *        of the selected AVR model.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
-				 *
-				 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer
-				 */
-				static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void);
-			
-				/** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save
-				 *  the currently selected endpoint number so that it can be restored after another endpoint has
-				 *  been manipulated.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Index of the currently selected endpoint
-				 */
-				static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void);
-				
-				/** Selects the given endpoint number. If the address from the device descriptors is used, the
-				 *  value should be masked with the \ref ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK constant to extract only the endpoint
-				 *  number (and discarding the endpoint direction bit).
-				 *
-				 *  Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint number to be indicated will operate on
-				 *  the currently selected endpoint.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number to select
-				 */
-				static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(uint8_t EndpointNumber);
-				
-				/** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's
-				 *  In and Out pointers to the bank's contents.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number whose FIFO buffers are to be reset
-				 */
-				static inline void Endpoint_ResetFIFO(uint8_t EndpointNumber);
-				
-				/** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to
-				 *  and from a host.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Endpoints must first be configured properly via \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint().
-				 */
-				static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void);
-
-				/** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it
-				 *  to and from a host.
-				 */
-				static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
-				 *
-				 * \return Boolean True if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint
-				 *  bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN
-				 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint
-				 *  is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN
-				 *  direction and the endpoint bank is full.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending on its direction
-				 */
-				static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void);
-				
-				/** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their
-				 *  interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by
-				 *  masking the return value against (1 << {Endpoint Number}).
-				 *
-				 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which endpoints have interrupted
-				 */
-				static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
-				 *  endpoints).
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] EndpointNumber  Index of the endpoint whose interrupt flag should be tested
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the specified endpoint has interrupted, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(uint8_t EndpointNumber);
-				
-				/** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, false otherwise.
-				 */
-				static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, false otherwise.
-				 */
-				static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, false otherwise.
-				 */
-				static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void);
-				
-				/** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the
-				 *  endpoint for the next packet.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints.			 
-				 */
-				static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void);
-				
-				/** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the
-				 *  next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
-				 */
-				static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void);
-				
-				/** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint
-				 *  for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
-				 */
-				static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void);
-				
-				/** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the
-				 *  indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a
-				 *  way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be
-				 *  aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence.
-				 *
-				 *  The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro
-				 *  is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected
-				 *  endpoint.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
-				 */
-				static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void);
-				
-				/** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
-				 */
-				static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void);
-				
-				/** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */
-				static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void);
-				
-				/** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction.
-				 *
-				 *  \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
-				 */
-				static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void);
-
-				/** Sets the direction of the currently selected endpoint.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] DirectionMask  New endpoint direction, as a ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
-				 */
-				static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(uint8_t DirectionMask);
-			#else
-				#if defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-					#define Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()        UEBCX
-				#elif defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)
-					#define Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()        (((uint16_t)UEBCHX << 8) | UEBCLX)				
-				#elif defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR)
-					#define Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()        UEBCLX
-				#endif
-				
-				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-					#define Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint()     (UENUM & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK)
-				#else
-					#define Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint()     ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP
-				#endif
-				
-				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-					#define Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(epnum)    MACROS{ UENUM = (epnum); }MACROE
-				#else
-					#define Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(epnum)    (void)(epnum)
-				#endif
-
-				#define Endpoint_ResetFIFO(epnum)             MACROS{ UERST = (1 << (epnum)); UERST = 0; }MACROE
-
-				#define Endpoint_EnableEndpoint()             MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << EPEN); }MACROE
-
-				#define Endpoint_DisableEndpoint()            MACROS{ UECONX &= ~(1 << EPEN); }MACROE
-
-				#define Endpoint_IsEnabled()                  ((UECONX & (1 << EPEN)) ? true : false)
-
-				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-					#define Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()     ((UEINTX & (1 << RWAL)) ? true : false)
-				#endif
-				
-				#define Endpoint_IsConfigured()               ((UESTA0X & (1 << CFGOK)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts()      UEINT
-
-				#define Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(n)    ((UEINT & (1 << (n))) ? true : false)
-				
-				#define Endpoint_IsINReady()                  ((UEINTX & (1 << TXINI))  ? true : false)
-				
-				#define Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()              ((UEINTX & (1 << RXOUTI)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()            ((UEINTX & (1 << RXSTPI)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Endpoint_ClearSETUP()                 MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTPI); }MACROE
-
-				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-					#define Endpoint_ClearIN()                MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~((1 << TXINI) | (1 << FIFOCON)); }MACROE
-				#else
-					#define Endpoint_ClearIN()                MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~(1 << TXINI); }MACROE
-				#endif
-
-				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-					#define Endpoint_ClearOUT()               MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~((1 << RXOUTI) | (1 << FIFOCON)); }MACROE
-				#else
-					#define Endpoint_ClearOUT()               MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXOUTI); }MACROE			
-				#endif
-
-				#define Endpoint_StallTransaction()           MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << STALLRQ); }MACROE
-
-				#define Endpoint_ClearStall()                 MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << STALLRQC); }MACROE
-
-				#define Endpoint_IsStalled()                  ((UECONX & (1 << STALLRQ)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Endpoint_ResetDataToggle()            MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << RSTDT); }MACROE
-				
-				#define Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection()       (UECFG0X & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
-				
-				#define Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(dir)    MACROS{ UECFG0X = ((UECFG0X & ~ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) | (dir)); }MACROE
-			#endif
-
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
-			 */
-			enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */
-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled         = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
-				                                                 *   transfer by the host or device.
-				                                                 */
-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while
-				                                                 *   waiting for the endpoint to become ready.
-				                                                 */
-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended            = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
-				                                                 *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
-				                                                 *   has resumed.
-				                                                 */
-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
-				                                                 *   within the software timeout period set by the
-				                                                 *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
-				                                                 */
-			};
-		
-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Endpoint_*_Stream_* functions.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 */
-			enum Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_EndpointStalled    = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
-				                                           *   transfer by the host or device.
-				                                           */
-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
-				                                           *   the transfer.
-				                                           */
-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_BusSuspended       = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
-				                                           *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
-				                                           *   has resumed.
-				                                           */
-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_Timeout            = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
-				                                           *   within the software timeout period set by the
-				                                           *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
-				                                           */
-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted    = 5, /**< Indicates that the stream's callback function
-			                                               *   aborted the transfer early.
-				                                           */
-			};
-			
-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Endpoint_*_Control_Stream_* functions..
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 */
-			enum Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
-				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted        = 1, /**< The aborted the transfer prematurely. */
-				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
-				                                            *   the transfer.
-				                                            */
-				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended       = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
-				                                            *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
-				                                            *   has resumed.
-				                                            */
-			};
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Byte(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Byte(void)
-			{
-				return UEDATX;
-			}
-
-			/** Writes one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Next byte to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Byte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Byte(const uint8_t Byte)
-			{
-				UEDATX = Byte;
-			}
-
-			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 */
-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_Byte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_Byte(void)
-			{
-				uint8_t Dummy;
-				
-				Dummy = UEDATX;
-			}
-			
-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
-			 *  direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next word in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(void)
-			{
-				union
-				{
-					uint16_t Word;
-					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
-				} Data;
-				
-				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
-			
-				return Data.Word;
-			}
-
-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
-			 *  direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next word in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_BE(void)
-			{
-				union
-				{
-					uint16_t Word;
-					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
-				} Data;
-				
-				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
-			
-				return Data.Word;
-			}
-
-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
-			 *  direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Word  Next word to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(const uint16_t Word)
-			{
-				UEDATX = (Word & 0xFF);
-				UEDATX = (Word >> 8);
-			}
-			
-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
-			 *  direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Word  Next word to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Word_BE(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Word_BE(const uint16_t Word)
-			{
-				UEDATX = (Word >> 8);
-				UEDATX = (Word & 0xFF);
-			}
-
-			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 */
-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_Word(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_Word(void)
-			{
-				uint8_t Dummy;
-				
-				Dummy = UEDATX;
-				Dummy = UEDATX;
-			}
-
-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
-			 *  direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next double word in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_LE(void)
-			{
-				union
-				{
-					uint32_t DWord;
-					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
-				} Data;
-				
-				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[2] = UEDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[3] = UEDATX;
-			
-				return Data.DWord;
-			}
-
-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
-			 *  direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next double word in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_BE(void)
-			{
-				union
-				{
-					uint32_t DWord;
-					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
-				} Data;
-				
-				Data.Bytes[3] = UEDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[2] = UEDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
-			
-				return Data.DWord;
-			}
-
-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
-			 *  direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] DWord  Next double word to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(const uint32_t DWord)
-			{
-				UEDATX = (DWord &  0xFF);
-				UEDATX = (DWord >> 8);
-				UEDATX = (DWord >> 16);
-				UEDATX = (DWord >> 24);
-			}
-			
-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
-			 *  direction endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] DWord  Next double word to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(const uint32_t DWord)
-			{
-				UEDATX = (DWord >> 24);
-				UEDATX = (DWord >> 16);
-				UEDATX = (DWord >> 8);
-				UEDATX = (DWord &  0xFF);
-			}
-
-			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.	
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
-			 */
-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_DWord(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_DWord(void)
-			{
-				uint8_t Dummy;
-				
-				Dummy = UEDATX;
-				Dummy = UEDATX;
-				Dummy = UEDATX;
-				Dummy = UEDATX;
-			}
-
-		/* External Variables: */
-			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address
-			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user
-			 *  project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode.
-			 *
-			 *  If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control
-			 *  endpoint size in the FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile
-			 *  via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically
-			 *  read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is
-			 *  important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the
-			 *  FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token
-			 *  be used in the descriptors to ensure this.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
-			 *        changed in value.
-			 */
-			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
-				extern uint8_t USB_ControlEndpointSize;
-			#else
-				#define USB_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE
-			#endif
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				#define __CALLBACK_PARAM     , StreamCallbackPtr_t Callback
-			#else
-				#define __CALLBACK_PARAM			
-			#endif
-		
-			/** Configures the specified endpoint number with the given endpoint type, direction, bank size
-			 *  and banking mode. Endpoints should be allocated in ascending order by their address in the
-			 *  device (i.e. endpoint 1 should be configured before endpoint 2 and so on) to prevent fragmentation
-			 *  of the USB FIFO memory.
-			 *
-			 *  The endpoint type may be one of the EP_TYPE_* macros listed in LowLevel.h and the direction
-			 *  may be either \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT or \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_IN.
-			 *
-			 *  The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that the endpoint can handle. Different
-			 *  endpoint numbers can handle different maximum packet sizes - refer to the chosen USB AVR's
-			 *  datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint.
-			 *
-			 *  The banking mode may be either \ref ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE or \ref ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE.
-			 *
-			 *  \note The default control endpoint does not have to be manually configured, as it is automatically
-			 *        configured by the library internally.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine will select the specified endpoint, and the endpoint will remain selected
-			 *        once the routine completes regardless of if the endpoint configuration succeeds.
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the configuration succeeded, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t  Number, const uint8_t Type, const uint8_t Direction,
-			                                const uint16_t Size, const uint8_t Banks);
-
-			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data
-			 *  to be read or written to it.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void);
-			
-			/** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically,
-			 *  with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to
-			 *  simplify user control request handling.
-			 */
-			void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void);
-
-			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer,
-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro. Between
-			 *  each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the next
-			 *  packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
-			 *
-			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
-			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
-			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM);
-
-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function
-			 *  is executed repeatedly until the endpoint is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early
-			 *  aborts of stream transfers.
-			 *
-			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
-			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
-			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().
-			 *
-			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function
-			 *  is executed repeatedly until the endpoint is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early
-			 *  aborts of stream transfers.
-			 *
-			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
-			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
-			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().
-			 *
-			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro. Between
-			 *  each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the endpoint
-			 *  is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
-			 *
-			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
-			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
-			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro. Between
-			 *  each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the endpoint
-			 *  is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
-			 *
-			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
-			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
-			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer    Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared
-			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the setup OUT to
-			 *  finalize the transfer via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE().
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared
-			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the setup OUT to
-			 *  finalize the transfer via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not
-			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the
-			 *  setup IN to finalize the transfer via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE().
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not
-			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the
-			 *  setup IN to finalize the transfer via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);		
-			
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE().
-			 *
-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
-			 *
-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);		
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define Endpoint_AllocateMemory()              MACROS{ UECFG1X |=  (1 << ALLOC); }MACROE
-			#define Endpoint_DeallocateMemory()            MACROS{ UECFG1X &= ~(1 << ALLOC); }MACROE
-			
-			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(n)               _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE2(ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP ## n)
-			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE2(details)        _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE3(details)
-			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE3(maxsize, db)    maxsize
-
-			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK(n)            _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK2(ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP ## n)
-			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK2(details)     _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK3(details)
-			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK3(maxsize, db) db
-			
-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0               64,  true
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1               256, true
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2               64,  true
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3               64,  true
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4               64,  true
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP5               64,  true
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP6               64,  true
-			#else
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0               64,  true
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1               64,  false
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2               64,  false
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3               64,  true
-				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4               64,  true			
-			#endif
-
-			#define Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(Number, Type, Direction, Size, Banks)            \
-			                                    Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv((Number),        \
-			                                              (((Type) << EPTYPE0) | (Direction)),  \
-			                                              ((1 << ALLOC) | (Banks) |             \
-			                                                (__builtin_constant_p(Size) ?       \
-			                                                 Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size) : \
-			                                                 Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMaskDynamic(Size))))
-													
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			void    Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void);
-			uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMaskDynamic(const uint16_t Size);
-			bool    Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t UECFG0XData, const uint8_t UECFG1XData);
-			
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)
-			{
-				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;
-				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;
-				
-				while (CheckBytes < Bytes)
-				{
-					MaskVal++;
-					CheckBytes <<= 1;
-				}
-				
-				return (MaskVal << EPSIZE0);
-			}
-
-	#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB device endpoint management definitions.
+ *
+ *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to the management of the device's
+ *  data endpoints when the library is initialized in USB device mode.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_EndpointManagement Endpoint Management
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This
+ *  module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data
+ *  send/receive functions for various data types.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup Group_EndpointRW Endpoint Data Reading and Writing
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW  
+ *  @defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
+ *  from and to endpoints.
+ */ 
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW  
+ *  @defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
+ *  and to endpoints.
+ */ 
+
+/** @defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement Endpoint Packet Management
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ENDPOINT_H__
+#define __ENDPOINT_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h"
+
+		#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "../HighLevel/StreamCallbacks.h"
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint
+			 *  should be initialized in the OUT direction - i.e. data flows from host to device.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT                      (0 << EPDIR)
+
+			/** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint
+			 *  should be initialized in the IN direction - i.e. data flows from device to host.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_DIR_IN                       (1 << EPDIR)
+
+			/** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates
+			 *  that the endpoint should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results
+			 *  in slower transfers as only one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access the endpoint's
+			 *  bank at the one time.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE                  (0 << EPBK0)
+
+			/** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates
+			 *  that the endpoint should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results
+			 *  in faster transfers as one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access one bank while the other
+			 *  accesses the second bank.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE                  (1 << EPBK0)
+			
+			/** Endpoint address for the default control endpoint, which always resides in address 0. This is
+			 *  defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the endpoint macros.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP                    0
+
+			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				/** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value 
+				 *  in the device descriptor. Not available if the FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined.
+				 */
+				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE   8
+			#endif
+			
+			/** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
+			 *  numerical address in the device.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK                   0x07
+
+			/** Endpoint direction mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
+			 *  direction for comparing with the ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_* masks.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_EPDIR_MASK                   0x80
+
+			/** Endpoint bank size mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
+			 *  bank size in the device.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_EPSIZE_MASK                  0x7FF
+			
+			/** Maximum size in bytes of a given endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] n  Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1)
+			 */				
+			#define ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(n)                  _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(n)
+
+			/** Indicates if the given endpoint supports double banking.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] n  Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1)
+			 */				
+			#define ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED(n)      _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK(n)
+
+			#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+				#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+					/** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may
+					 *  be used in the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of endpoints,
+					 *  this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model.
+					 */
+					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS          7
+				#else
+					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS          5			
+				#endif
+			#else
+				#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS              1
+			#endif
+			
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank.
+				 *
+				 *  \note The return width of this function may differ, depending on the maximum endpoint bank size
+				 *        of the selected AVR model.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
+				 *
+				 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer
+				 */
+				static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void);
+			
+				/** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save
+				 *  the currently selected endpoint number so that it can be restored after another endpoint has
+				 *  been manipulated.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Index of the currently selected endpoint
+				 */
+				static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void);
+				
+				/** Selects the given endpoint number. If the address from the device descriptors is used, the
+				 *  value should be masked with the \ref ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK constant to extract only the endpoint
+				 *  number (and discarding the endpoint direction bit).
+				 *
+				 *  Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint number to be indicated will operate on
+				 *  the currently selected endpoint.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number to select
+				 */
+				static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(uint8_t EndpointNumber);
+				
+				/** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's
+				 *  In and Out pointers to the bank's contents.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number whose FIFO buffers are to be reset
+				 */
+				static inline void Endpoint_ResetFIFO(uint8_t EndpointNumber);
+				
+				/** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to
+				 *  and from a host.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Endpoints must first be configured properly via \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint().
+				 */
+				static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void);
+
+				/** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it
+				 *  to and from a host.
+				 */
+				static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
+				 *
+				 * \return Boolean True if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint
+				 *  bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN
+				 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint
+				 *  is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN
+				 *  direction and the endpoint bank is full.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending on its direction
+				 */
+				static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void);
+				
+				/** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their
+				 *  interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by
+				 *  masking the return value against (1 << {Endpoint Number}).
+				 *
+				 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which endpoints have interrupted
+				 */
+				static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
+				 *  endpoints).
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] EndpointNumber  Index of the endpoint whose interrupt flag should be tested
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the specified endpoint has interrupted, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(uint8_t EndpointNumber);
+				
+				/** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void);
+				
+				/** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the
+				 *  endpoint for the next packet.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints.			 
+				 */
+				static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void);
+				
+				/** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the
+				 *  next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+				 */
+				static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void);
+				
+				/** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint
+				 *  for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+				 */
+				static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void);
+				
+				/** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the
+				 *  indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a
+				 *  way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be
+				 *  aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence.
+				 *
+				 *  The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro
+				 *  is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected
+				 *  endpoint.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+				 */
+				static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void);
+				
+				/** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+				 */
+				static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void);
+				
+				/** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */
+				static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void);
+				
+				/** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction.
+				 *
+				 *  \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
+				 */
+				static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void);
+
+				/** Sets the direction of the currently selected endpoint.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] DirectionMask  New endpoint direction, as a ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
+				 */
+				static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(uint8_t DirectionMask);
+			#else
+				#if defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+					#define Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()        UEBCX
+				#elif defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)
+					#define Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()        (((uint16_t)UEBCHX << 8) | UEBCLX)				
+				#elif defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR)
+					#define Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()        UEBCLX
+				#endif
+				
+				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+					#define Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint()     (UENUM & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK)
+				#else
+					#define Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint()     ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP
+				#endif
+				
+				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+					#define Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(epnum)    MACROS{ UENUM = (epnum); }MACROE
+				#else
+					#define Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(epnum)    (void)(epnum)
+				#endif
+
+				#define Endpoint_ResetFIFO(epnum)             MACROS{ UERST = (1 << (epnum)); UERST = 0; }MACROE
+
+				#define Endpoint_EnableEndpoint()             MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << EPEN); }MACROE
+
+				#define Endpoint_DisableEndpoint()            MACROS{ UECONX &= ~(1 << EPEN); }MACROE
+
+				#define Endpoint_IsEnabled()                  ((UECONX & (1 << EPEN)) ? true : false)
+
+				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+					#define Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()     ((UEINTX & (1 << RWAL)) ? true : false)
+				#endif
+				
+				#define Endpoint_IsConfigured()               ((UESTA0X & (1 << CFGOK)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts()      UEINT
+
+				#define Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(n)    ((UEINT & (1 << (n))) ? true : false)
+				
+				#define Endpoint_IsINReady()                  ((UEINTX & (1 << TXINI))  ? true : false)
+				
+				#define Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()              ((UEINTX & (1 << RXOUTI)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()            ((UEINTX & (1 << RXSTPI)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Endpoint_ClearSETUP()                 MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTPI); }MACROE
+
+				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+					#define Endpoint_ClearIN()                MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~((1 << TXINI) | (1 << FIFOCON)); }MACROE
+				#else
+					#define Endpoint_ClearIN()                MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~(1 << TXINI); }MACROE
+				#endif
+
+				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+					#define Endpoint_ClearOUT()               MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~((1 << RXOUTI) | (1 << FIFOCON)); }MACROE
+				#else
+					#define Endpoint_ClearOUT()               MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXOUTI); }MACROE			
+				#endif
+
+				#define Endpoint_StallTransaction()           MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << STALLRQ); }MACROE
+
+				#define Endpoint_ClearStall()                 MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << STALLRQC); }MACROE
+
+				#define Endpoint_IsStalled()                  ((UECONX & (1 << STALLRQ)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Endpoint_ResetDataToggle()            MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << RSTDT); }MACROE
+				
+				#define Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection()       (UECFG0X & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+				
+				#define Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(dir)    MACROS{ UECFG0X = ((UECFG0X & ~ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) | (dir)); }MACROE
+			#endif
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
+			 */
+			enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled         = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
+				                                                 *   transfer by the host or device.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while
+				                                                 *   waiting for the endpoint to become ready.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended            = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
+				                                                 *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
+				                                                 *   has resumed.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                                 *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                                 *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                                 */
+			};
+		
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Endpoint_*_Stream_* functions.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 */
+			enum Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_EndpointStalled    = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
+				                                           *   transfer by the host or device.
+				                                           */
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
+				                                           *   the transfer.
+				                                           */
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_BusSuspended       = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
+				                                           *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
+				                                           *   has resumed.
+				                                           */
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_Timeout            = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                           *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                           *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                           */
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted    = 5, /**< Indicates that the stream's callback function
+			                                               *   aborted the transfer early.
+				                                           */
+			};
+			
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Endpoint_*_Control_Stream_* functions..
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 */
+			enum Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
+				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted        = 1, /**< The aborted the transfer prematurely. */
+				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
+				                                            *   the transfer.
+				                                            */
+				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended       = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
+				                                            *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
+				                                            *   has resumed.
+				                                            */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Byte(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Byte(void)
+			{
+				return UEDATX;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Next byte to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Byte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Byte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				UEDATX = Byte;
+			}
+
+			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_Byte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_Byte(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+				
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+			}
+			
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next word in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint16_t Word;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+				} Data;
+				
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
+			
+				return Data.Word;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next word in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_BE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint16_t Word;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+				} Data;
+				
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
+			
+				return Data.Word;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Word  Next word to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(const uint16_t Word)
+			{
+				UEDATX = (Word & 0xFF);
+				UEDATX = (Word >> 8);
+			}
+			
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Word  Next word to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Word_BE(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_Word_BE(const uint16_t Word)
+			{
+				UEDATX = (Word >> 8);
+				UEDATX = (Word & 0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_Word(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_Word(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+				
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next double word in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_LE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint32_t DWord;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
+				} Data;
+				
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[2] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[3] = UEDATX;
+			
+				return Data.DWord;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next double word in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_BE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint32_t DWord;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
+				} Data;
+				
+				Data.Bytes[3] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[2] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
+			
+				return Data.DWord;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DWord  Next double word to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(const uint32_t DWord)
+			{
+				UEDATX = (DWord &  0xFF);
+				UEDATX = (DWord >> 8);
+				UEDATX = (DWord >> 16);
+				UEDATX = (DWord >> 24);
+			}
+			
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DWord  Next double word to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(const uint32_t DWord)
+			{
+				UEDATX = (DWord >> 24);
+				UEDATX = (DWord >> 16);
+				UEDATX = (DWord >> 8);
+				UEDATX = (DWord &  0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.	
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_DWord(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_DWord(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+				
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+			}
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address
+			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user
+			 *  project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode.
+			 *
+			 *  If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control
+			 *  endpoint size in the FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile
+			 *  via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically
+			 *  read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is
+			 *  important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the
+			 *  FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token
+			 *  be used in the descriptors to ensure this.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *        changed in value.
+			 */
+			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				extern uint8_t USB_ControlEndpointSize;
+			#else
+				#define USB_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#define __CALLBACK_PARAM     , StreamCallbackPtr_t Callback
+			#else
+				#define __CALLBACK_PARAM			
+			#endif
+		
+			/** Configures the specified endpoint number with the given endpoint type, direction, bank size
+			 *  and banking mode. Endpoints should be allocated in ascending order by their address in the
+			 *  device (i.e. endpoint 1 should be configured before endpoint 2 and so on) to prevent fragmentation
+			 *  of the USB FIFO memory.
+			 *
+			 *  The endpoint type may be one of the EP_TYPE_* macros listed in LowLevel.h and the direction
+			 *  may be either \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT or \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_IN.
+			 *
+			 *  The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that the endpoint can handle. Different
+			 *  endpoint numbers can handle different maximum packet sizes - refer to the chosen USB AVR's
+			 *  datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  The banking mode may be either \ref ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE or \ref ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The default control endpoint does not have to be manually configured, as it is automatically
+			 *        configured by the library internally.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine will select the specified endpoint, and the endpoint will remain selected
+			 *        once the routine completes regardless of if the endpoint configuration succeeds.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the configuration succeeded, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t  Number, const uint8_t Type, const uint8_t Direction,
+			                                const uint16_t Size, const uint8_t Banks);
+
+			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data
+			 *  to be read or written to it.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void);
+			
+			/** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically,
+			 *  with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to
+			 *  simplify user control request handling.
+			 */
+			void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void);
+
+			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro. Between
+			 *  each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the next
+			 *  packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
+			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
+			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function
+			 *  is executed repeatedly until the endpoint is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early
+			 *  aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
+			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
+			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function
+			 *  is executed repeatedly until the endpoint is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early
+			 *  aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
+			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
+			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro. Between
+			 *  each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the endpoint
+			 *  is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
+			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
+			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro. Between
+			 *  each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the endpoint
+			 *  is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
+			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
+			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer    Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared
+			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the setup OUT to
+			 *  finalize the transfer via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
+			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
+			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
+			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared
+			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the setup OUT to
+			 *  finalize the transfer via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
+			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
+			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
+			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not
+			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the
+			 *  setup IN to finalize the transfer via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
+			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
+			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not
+			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the
+			 *  setup IN to finalize the transfer via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
+			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);		
+			
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt
+			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);		
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define Endpoint_AllocateMemory()              MACROS{ UECFG1X |=  (1 << ALLOC); }MACROE
+			#define Endpoint_DeallocateMemory()            MACROS{ UECFG1X &= ~(1 << ALLOC); }MACROE
+			
+			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(n)               _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE2(ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP ## n)
+			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE2(details)        _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE3(details)
+			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE3(maxsize, db)    maxsize
+
+			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK(n)            _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK2(ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP ## n)
+			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK2(details)     _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK3(details)
+			#define _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK3(maxsize, db) db
+			
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0               64,  true
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1               256, true
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2               64,  true
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3               64,  true
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4               64,  true
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP5               64,  true
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP6               64,  true
+			#else
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0               64,  true
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1               64,  false
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2               64,  false
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3               64,  true
+				#define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4               64,  true			
+			#endif
+
+			#define Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(Number, Type, Direction, Size, Banks)            \
+			                                    Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv((Number),        \
+			                                              (((Type) << EPTYPE0) | (Direction)),  \
+			                                              ((1 << ALLOC) | (Banks) |             \
+			                                                (__builtin_constant_p(Size) ?       \
+			                                                 Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size) : \
+			                                                 Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMaskDynamic(Size))))
+													
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void    Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void);
+			uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMaskDynamic(const uint16_t Size);
+			bool    Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t UECFG0XData, const uint8_t UECFG1XData);
+			
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)
+			{
+				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;
+				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;
+				
+				while (CheckBytes < Bytes)
+				{
+					MaskVal++;
+					CheckBytes <<= 1;
+				}
+				
+				return (MaskVal << EPSIZE0);
+			}
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c
index e43972ac9..37ad0adc5 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c
@@ -1,347 +1,347 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C
-#include "Host.h"
-
-void USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;
-	uint8_t SubErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;
-
-	static uint16_t WaitMSRemaining;
-	static uint8_t  PostWaitState;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice:
-			if (WaitMSRemaining)
-			{
-				if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
-				{
-					USB_HostState = PostWaitState;
-					ErrorCode     = HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage;
-					break;
-				}
-				
-				if (!(--WaitMSRemaining))
-				  USB_HostState = PostWaitState;
-			}
-		
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Powered:
-			WaitMSRemaining = HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS;
-		
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle:
-			if (WaitMSRemaining--)
-			{
-				_delay_ms(1);
-				break;
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();
-
-				USB_OTGPAD_On();
-				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable();
-				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On();
-				
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect:		
-			if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI))
-			{	
-				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
-				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-
-				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);
-				USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBERRI);
-					
-				USB_Host_ResumeBus();
-				Pipe_ClearPipes();
-				
-				HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset);
-			}
-
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset:
-			USB_Host_ResetDevice();
-
-			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe);
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe:
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
-							   PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP,
-							   PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);		
-		
-			if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
-			{
-				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;
-				SubErrorCode = 0;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Default;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Default:
-			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-				{
-					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
-					.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
-					.wValue        = (DTYPE_Device << 8),
-					.wIndex        = 0,
-					.wLength       = 8,
-				};
-
-			uint8_t DataBuffer[8];
-
-			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DataBuffer)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			USB_ControlPipeSize = DataBuffer[offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, Endpoint0Size)];
-	
-			USB_Host_ResetDevice();
-			
-			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset);
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset:
-			Pipe_DisablePipe();
-			Pipe_DeallocateMemory();		
-			Pipe_ResetPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-			
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
-			                   PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP,
-			                   USB_ControlPipeSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-			if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
-			{
-				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;
-				SubErrorCode = 0;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-				{
-					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
-					.bRequest      = REQ_SetAddress,
-					.wValue        = USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS,
-					.wIndex        = 0,
-					.wLength       = 0,
-				};
-
-			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet);
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet:
-			USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS);
-
-			EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete();
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Addressed;
-			break;
-	}
-
-	if ((ErrorCode != HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError) && (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached))
-	{
-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(ErrorCode, SubErrorCode);
-
-		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
-
-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
-
-		USB_ResetInterface();
-	}
-}
-
-uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS)
-{
-	bool    BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
-	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_WAITERROR_Successful;
-	
-	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
-
-	while (MS)
-	{
-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
-		{
-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-			MS--;
-		}
-					
-		if ((USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached) || (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE))
-		{
-			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect;
-			
-			break;
-		}
-
-		if (Pipe_IsError() == true)
-		{
-			Pipe_ClearError();
-			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError;
-			
-			break;
-		}
-		
-		if (Pipe_IsStalled() == true)
-		{
-			Pipe_ClearStall();
-			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled;
-			
-			break;			
-		}
-	}
-
-	if (BusSuspended)
-	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
-
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void)
-{
-	bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
-
-	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-	
-	USB_Host_ResetBus();
-	while (!(USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete()));
-
-	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
-
-	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-
-	for (uint8_t MSRem = 10; MSRem != 0; MSRem--)
-	{
-		/* Workaround for powerless-pull-up devices. After a USB bus reset,
-		   all disconnection interrupts are suppressed while a USB frame is
-		   looked for - if it is found within 10ms, the device is still
-		   present.                                                        */
-
-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
-		{
-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-			break;
-		}
-		
-		_delay_ms(1);
-	}
-
-	if (BusSuspended)
-	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
-
-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-}
-
-uint8_t USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(const uint8_t ConfigNumber)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_SetConfiguration,
-			.wValue        = ConfigNumber,
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = 0,
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
-}
-
-uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(void* const DeviceDescriptorPtr)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
-			.wValue        = (DTYPE_Device << 8),
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t),
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DeviceDescriptorPtr);
-}
-
-uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor(const uint8_t Index, void* const Buffer, const uint8_t BufferLength)
-{
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
-			.wValue        = (DTYPE_String << 8) | Index,
-			.wIndex        = 0,
-			.wLength       = BufferLength,
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
-}
-
-uint8_t USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(uint8_t EndpointNum)
-{
-	if (Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN)
-	  EndpointNum |= ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN;
-
-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-		{
-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT),
-			.bRequest      = REQ_ClearFeature,
-			.wValue        = FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT,
-			.wIndex        = EndpointNum,
-			.wLength       = 0,
-		};
-
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-	
-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C
+#include "Host.h"
+
+void USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+	uint8_t SubErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+
+	static uint16_t WaitMSRemaining;
+	static uint8_t  PostWaitState;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice:
+			if (WaitMSRemaining)
+			{
+				if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+				{
+					USB_HostState = PostWaitState;
+					ErrorCode     = HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage;
+					break;
+				}
+				
+				if (!(--WaitMSRemaining))
+				  USB_HostState = PostWaitState;
+			}
+		
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered:
+			WaitMSRemaining = HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS;
+		
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle:
+			if (WaitMSRemaining--)
+			{
+				_delay_ms(1);
+				break;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();
+
+				USB_OTGPAD_On();
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable();
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On();
+				
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect:		
+			if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI))
+			{	
+				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
+				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+
+				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);
+				USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBERRI);
+					
+				USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+				Pipe_ClearPipes();
+				
+				HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset:
+			USB_Host_ResetDevice();
+
+			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe);
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe:
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
+							   PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP,
+							   PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);		
+		
+			if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
+			{
+				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;
+				SubErrorCode = 0;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Default;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Default:
+			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+				{
+					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+					.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+					.wValue        = (DTYPE_Device << 8),
+					.wIndex        = 0,
+					.wLength       = 8,
+				};
+
+			uint8_t DataBuffer[8];
+
+			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DataBuffer)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			USB_ControlPipeSize = DataBuffer[offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, Endpoint0Size)];
+	
+			USB_Host_ResetDevice();
+			
+			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset);
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset:
+			Pipe_DisablePipe();
+			Pipe_DeallocateMemory();		
+			Pipe_ResetPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+			
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
+			                   PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP,
+			                   USB_ControlPipeSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+			if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
+			{
+				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;
+				SubErrorCode = 0;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+				{
+					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+					.bRequest      = REQ_SetAddress,
+					.wValue        = USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS,
+					.wIndex        = 0,
+					.wLength       = 0,
+				};
+
+			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet);
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet:
+			USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS);
+
+			EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete();
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Addressed;
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode != HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError) && (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached))
+	{
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(ErrorCode, SubErrorCode);
+
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+	}
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS)
+{
+	bool    BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
+	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_WAITERROR_Successful;
+	
+	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+
+	while (MS)
+	{
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+			MS--;
+		}
+					
+		if ((USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached) || (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE))
+		{
+			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect;
+			
+			break;
+		}
+
+		if (Pipe_IsError() == true)
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearError();
+			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError;
+			
+			break;
+		}
+		
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled() == true)
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearStall();
+			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled;
+			
+			break;			
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (BusSuspended)
+	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void)
+{
+	bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
+
+	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+	
+	USB_Host_ResetBus();
+	while (!(USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete()));
+
+	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+
+	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	for (uint8_t MSRem = 10; MSRem != 0; MSRem--)
+	{
+		/* Workaround for powerless-pull-up devices. After a USB bus reset,
+		   all disconnection interrupts are suppressed while a USB frame is
+		   looked for - if it is found within 10ms, the device is still
+		   present.                                                        */
+
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+			break;
+		}
+		
+		_delay_ms(1);
+	}
+
+	if (BusSuspended)
+	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
+
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(const uint8_t ConfigNumber)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_SetConfiguration,
+			.wValue        = ConfigNumber,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(void* const DeviceDescriptorPtr)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (DTYPE_Device << 8),
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t),
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DeviceDescriptorPtr);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor(const uint8_t Index, void* const Buffer, const uint8_t BufferLength)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (DTYPE_String << 8) | Index,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = BufferLength,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(uint8_t EndpointNum)
+{
+	if (Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN)
+	  EndpointNum |= ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_ClearFeature,
+			.wValue        = FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT,
+			.wIndex        = EndpointNum,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.h
index 97d908dea..1ef023908 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.h
@@ -1,428 +1,428 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB host mode definitions.
- *
- *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to USB host mode.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_Host Host Management
- *
- *  USB Host mode related macros and enums. This module contains macros and enums which are used when
- *  the USB controller is initialized in host mode.
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __USBHOST_H__
-#define __USBHOST_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <util/delay.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h"
-		#include "Pipe.h"
-		#include "USBInterrupt.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Indicates the fixed USB device address which any attached device is enumerated to when in
-			 *  host mode. As only one USB device may be attached to the AVR in host mode at any one time
-			 *  and that the address used is not important (other than the fact that it is non-zero), a
-			 *  fixed value is specified by the library.
-			 */
-			#define USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS                 1
-
-			#if !defined(USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of sent USB control transactions to an attached
-				 *  device. If a device fails to respond to a sent control request within this period, the
-				 *  library will return a timeout error code.
-				 *
-				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the 
-				 *  \ref USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
-				 */
-				#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS                1000
-			#endif
-			
-			#if !defined(HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Constant for the delay in milliseconds after a device is connected before the library
-				 *  will start the enumeration process. Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds
-				 *  after connection before the enumeration process can start or incorrect operation will
-				 *  occur.
-				 *
-				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the 
-				 *  HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
-				 */
-				#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS        1500
-			#endif
-		
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Resets the USB bus, including the endpoints in any attached device and pipes on the AVR host.
-				 *  USB bus resets leave the default control pipe configured (if already configured).
-				 *
-				 *  If the USB bus has been suspended prior to issuing a bus reset, the attached device will be
-				 *  woken up automatically and the bus resumed after the reset has been correctly issued.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void);
-
-				/** Determines if a previously issued bus reset (via the \ref USB_Host_ResetBus() macro) has
-				 *  completed.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if no bus reset is currently being sent, false otherwise.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void);
-
-				/** Resumes USB communications with an attached and enumerated device, by resuming the transmission
-				 *  of the 1MS Start Of Frame messages to the device. When resumed, USB communications between the
-				 *  host and attached device may occur.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void);
-
-				/** Suspends the USB bus, preventing any communications from occurring between the host and attached
-				 *  device until the bus has been resumed. This stops the transmission of the 1MS Start Of Frame
-				 *  messages to the device.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the USB bus has been suspended via the use of the \ref USB_Host_SuspendBus() macro,
-				 *  false otherwise. While suspended, no USB communications can occur until the bus is resumed,
-				 *  except for the Remote Wakeup event from the device if supported.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the bus is currently suspended, false otherwise
-				 */
-				 static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void);
-				 
-				/** Determines if the attached device is currently enumerated in Full Speed mode (12Mb/s), or
-				 *  false if the attached device is enumerated in Low Speed mode (1.5Mb/s).
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the attached device is enumerated in Full Speed mode, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void);
-
-				/** Determines if the attached device is currently issuing a Remote Wakeup request, requesting
-				 *  that the host resume the USB bus and wake up the device, false otherwise.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the attached device has sent a Remote Wakeup request, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void);
-
-				/** Clears the flag indicating that a Remote Wakeup request has been issued by an attached device. */
-				static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void);
-
-				/** Accepts a Remote Wakeup request from an attached device. This must be issued in response to
-				 *  a device's Remote Wakeup request within 2ms for the request to be accepted and the bus to
-				 *  be resumed.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if a resume from Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent to an attached
-				 *  device.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if no resume request is currently being sent, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void);
-			#else
-				#define USB_Host_ResetBus()                MACROS{ UHCON |=  (1 << RESET);          }MACROE
-
-				#define USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete()      ((UHCON &   (1 << RESET)) ? false : true)
-
-				#define USB_Host_ResumeBus()               MACROS{ UHCON |=  (1 << SOFEN);          }MACROE 
-
-				#define USB_Host_SuspendBus()              MACROS{ UHCON &= ~(1 << SOFEN);          }MACROE 
-				
-				#define USB_Host_IsBusSuspended()                ((UHCON &   (1 << SOFEN)) ? false : true)
-			
-				#define USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed()             ((USBSTA &  (1 << SPEED)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent()            ((UHINT &   (1 << RXRSMI)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent()   MACROS{ UHINT &= ~(1 << RXRSMI);         }MACROE
-
-				#define USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest() MACROS{ UHCON |=  (1 << RESUME);         }MACROE
-				
-				#define USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent() ((UHCON &   (1 << RESUME)) ? false : true)
-			#endif
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Convenience function. This routine sends a SetConfiguration standard request to the attached
-			 *  device, with the given configuration index. This can be used to easily set the device
-			 *  configuration without creating and sending the request manually.
-			 *
-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] ConfigNumber  Configuration index to send to the device
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
-			 */
-			uint8_t USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(const uint8_t ConfigNumber);
-			
-			/** Convenience function. This routine sends a GetDescriptor standard request to the attached
-			 *  device, requesting the device descriptor. This can be used to easily retrieve information
-			 *  about the device such as its VID, PID and power requirements.
-			 *
-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] DeviceDescriptorPtr  Pointer to the destination device descriptor structure where
-			 *                                   the read data is to be stored
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
-			 */
-			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(void* const DeviceDescriptorPtr);
-			
-			/** Convenience function. This routine sends a GetDescriptor standard request to the attached
-			 *  device, requesting the string descriptor of the specified index. This can be used to easily
-			 *  retrieve string descriptors from the device by index, after the index is obtained from the
-			 *  Device or Configuration descriptors.
-			 *
-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Index  Index of the string index to retrieve
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination buffer where the retrieved string decriptor is
-			 *                      to be stored
-			 *  \param[in] BufferLength  Maximum size of the string descriptor which can be stored into the buffer
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
-			 */
-			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor(const uint8_t Index, void* const Buffer, const uint8_t BufferLength);
-			
-			/** Clears a stall condition on the given pipe, via a ClearFeature request to the attached device.
-			 *
-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] EndpointIndex  Index of the endpoint to clear
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
-			 */			
-			uint8_t USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(uint8_t EndpointIndex);
-
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the various states of the USB Host state machine. Only some states are
-			 *  implemented in the LUFA library - other states are left to the user to implement.
-			 *
-			 *  For information on each possible USB host state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
-			 *  Several of the USB host states are broken up further into multiple smaller sub-states,
-			 *  so that they can be internally implemented inside the library in an efficient manner.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref USB_HostState, which stores the current host state machine state.
-			 */
-			enum USB_Host_States_t
-			{
-				HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval         = 0,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state can be
-				                                               *   used by the library to wait until the attached device is
-				                                               *   removed by the user - useful for when an error occurs or
-				                                               *   further communication with the device is not needed. This
-				                                               *   allows for other code to run while the state machine is
-				                                               *   effectively disabled.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice                = 1,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                               *   that the stack is waiting for an interval to elapse before
-				                                               *   continuing with the next step of the device enumeration
-				                                               *   process.
-				                                               *
-				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Unattached                   = 2,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                               *   that the host state machine is waiting for a device to be
-				                                               *   attached so that it can start the enumeration process.
-				                                               *   
-				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Powered                      = 3,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                               *   that a device has been attached, and the library's internals
-				                                               *   are being configured to begin the enumeration process.
-				                                               *   
-				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle = 4,   /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                               *   that the stack is waiting for the initial settling period to
-				                                               *   elapse before beginning the enumeration process.
-				                                               *   
-				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect      = 5,   /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                               *   that the stack is waiting for a connection event from the USB
-				                                               *   controller to indicate a valid USB device has been attached to
-				                                               *   the bus and is ready to be enumerated.
-				                                               *   
-				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset             = 6,   /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                               *   that a valid USB device has been attached, and that it is
-				                                               *   will now be reset to ensure it is ready for enumeration.
-				                                               *   
-				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe           = 7,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                               *   that the attached device is currently powered and reset, and
-				                                               *   that the control pipe is now being configured by the stack.
-				                                               *   
-				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Default                      = 8,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
-				                                               *   that the stack is currently retrieving the control endpoint's
-				                                               *   size from the device, so that the control pipe can be altered
-				                                               *   to match.
-				                                               *   
-				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset            = 9,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates that
-				                                               *   the control pipe is being reconfigured to match the retrieved
-				                                               *   control endpoint size from the device, and the device's USB bus
-				                                               *   address is being set.
-				                                               *   
-				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet       = 10, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates that
-				                                               *   the device's address has now been set, and the stack is has now
-				                                               *   completed the device enumeration process. This state causes the
-				                                               *   stack to change the current USB device address to that set for
-				                                               *   the connected device, before progressing to the user-implemented
-				                                               *   HOST_STATE_Addressed state for further communications.
-				                                               *   
-				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Addressed                    = 11, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state should
-				                                               *   set the device configuration before progressing to the
-				                                               *   HOST_STATE_Configured state. Other processing (such as the
-				                                               *   retrieval and processing of the device descriptor) should also
-				                                               *   be placed in this state.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Configured                   = 12, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state should implement the
-				                                               *   actual work performed on the attached device and changed to the
-				                                               *   HOST_STATE_Suspended or HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval states as needed.
-				                                               */
-				HOST_STATE_Suspended                    = 15, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state should be maintained
-				                                               *   while the bus is suspended, and changed to either the HOST_STATE_Configured
-				                                               *   (after resuming the bus with the USB_Host_ResumeBus() macro) or the
-				                                               *   HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval states as needed.
-				                                               */
-			};
-			
-			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_HostError() event.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.
-			 */
-			enum USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip       = 0, /**< VBUS voltage dipped to an unacceptable level. This
-				                                      *   error may be the result of an attached device drawing
-				                                      *   too much current from the VBUS line, or due to the
-				                                      *   AVR's power source being unable to supply sufficient
-				                                      *   current.
-				                                      */
-			};
-			
-			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() event.
-			 *
-			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.
-			 */
-			enum USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError          = 0, /**< No error occurred. Used internally, this is not a valid
-				                                      *   ErrorCode parameter value for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed()
-				                                      *   event.
-				                                      */
-				HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage        = 1, /**< One of the delays between enumeration steps failed
-				                                      *   to complete successfully, due to a timeout or other
-				                                      *   error.
-				                                      */
-				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected = 2, /**< No device was detected, despite the USB data lines
-				                                      *   indicating the attachment of a device.
-				                                      */
-				HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError     = 3, /**< One of the enumeration control requests failed to
-				                                      *   complete successfully.
-													  */
-				HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError  = 4, /**< The default control pipe (address 0) failed to
-				                                      *   configure correctly.
-				                                      */
-			};
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define USB_Host_HostMode_On()          MACROS{ USBCON |=  (1 << HOST);           }MACROE
-			#define USB_Host_HostMode_Off()         MACROS{ USBCON &= ~(1 << HOST);           }MACROE
-
-			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable()     MACROS{ OTGCON &= ~(1 << VBUSHWC); UHWCON |=  (1 << UVCONE);                   }MACROE
-			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable()   MACROS{ OTGCON |=  (1 << VBUSHWC); UHWCON &= ~(1 << UVCONE); DDRE |= (1 << 7); }MACROE
-
-			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On()         MACROS{ OTGCON |= (1 << VBUSREQ);         }MACROE
-			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On()       MACROS{ PORTE  |= (1 << 7);               }MACROE
-
-			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off()        MACROS{ OTGCON |=  (1 << VBUSRQC);        }MACROE
-			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off()      MACROS{ PORTE  &= ~(1 << 7);              }MACROE
-
-			#define USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(addr) MACROS{ UHADDR  =  ((addr) & 0x7F);       }MACROE
-
-		/* Enums: */
-			enum USB_Host_WaitMSErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				HOST_WAITERROR_Successful       = 0,
-				HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect = 1,
-				HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError        = 2,
-				HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled     = 3,
-			};
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			void    USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void);
-			uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS);
-			
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C)
-				static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void);
-			#endif
-	#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB host mode definitions.
+ *
+ *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to USB host mode.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_Host Host Management
+ *
+ *  USB Host mode related macros and enums. This module contains macros and enums which are used when
+ *  the USB controller is initialized in host mode.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __USBHOST_H__
+#define __USBHOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "Pipe.h"
+		#include "USBInterrupt.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the fixed USB device address which any attached device is enumerated to when in
+			 *  host mode. As only one USB device may be attached to the AVR in host mode at any one time
+			 *  and that the address used is not important (other than the fact that it is non-zero), a
+			 *  fixed value is specified by the library.
+			 */
+			#define USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS                 1
+
+			#if !defined(USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of sent USB control transactions to an attached
+				 *  device. If a device fails to respond to a sent control request within this period, the
+				 *  library will return a timeout error code.
+				 *
+				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the 
+				 *  \ref USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
+				 */
+				#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS                1000
+			#endif
+			
+			#if !defined(HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Constant for the delay in milliseconds after a device is connected before the library
+				 *  will start the enumeration process. Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds
+				 *  after connection before the enumeration process can start or incorrect operation will
+				 *  occur.
+				 *
+				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the 
+				 *  HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
+				 */
+				#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS        1500
+			#endif
+		
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Resets the USB bus, including the endpoints in any attached device and pipes on the AVR host.
+				 *  USB bus resets leave the default control pipe configured (if already configured).
+				 *
+				 *  If the USB bus has been suspended prior to issuing a bus reset, the attached device will be
+				 *  woken up automatically and the bus resumed after the reset has been correctly issued.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void);
+
+				/** Determines if a previously issued bus reset (via the \ref USB_Host_ResetBus() macro) has
+				 *  completed.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if no bus reset is currently being sent, false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void);
+
+				/** Resumes USB communications with an attached and enumerated device, by resuming the transmission
+				 *  of the 1MS Start Of Frame messages to the device. When resumed, USB communications between the
+				 *  host and attached device may occur.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void);
+
+				/** Suspends the USB bus, preventing any communications from occurring between the host and attached
+				 *  device until the bus has been resumed. This stops the transmission of the 1MS Start Of Frame
+				 *  messages to the device.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the USB bus has been suspended via the use of the \ref USB_Host_SuspendBus() macro,
+				 *  false otherwise. While suspended, no USB communications can occur until the bus is resumed,
+				 *  except for the Remote Wakeup event from the device if supported.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the bus is currently suspended, false otherwise
+				 */
+				 static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void);
+				 
+				/** Determines if the attached device is currently enumerated in Full Speed mode (12Mb/s), or
+				 *  false if the attached device is enumerated in Low Speed mode (1.5Mb/s).
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the attached device is enumerated in Full Speed mode, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void);
+
+				/** Determines if the attached device is currently issuing a Remote Wakeup request, requesting
+				 *  that the host resume the USB bus and wake up the device, false otherwise.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the attached device has sent a Remote Wakeup request, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void);
+
+				/** Clears the flag indicating that a Remote Wakeup request has been issued by an attached device. */
+				static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void);
+
+				/** Accepts a Remote Wakeup request from an attached device. This must be issued in response to
+				 *  a device's Remote Wakeup request within 2ms for the request to be accepted and the bus to
+				 *  be resumed.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if a resume from Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent to an attached
+				 *  device.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if no resume request is currently being sent, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void);
+			#else
+				#define USB_Host_ResetBus()                MACROS{ UHCON |=  (1 << RESET);          }MACROE
+
+				#define USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete()      ((UHCON &   (1 << RESET)) ? false : true)
+
+				#define USB_Host_ResumeBus()               MACROS{ UHCON |=  (1 << SOFEN);          }MACROE 
+
+				#define USB_Host_SuspendBus()              MACROS{ UHCON &= ~(1 << SOFEN);          }MACROE 
+				
+				#define USB_Host_IsBusSuspended()                ((UHCON &   (1 << SOFEN)) ? false : true)
+			
+				#define USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed()             ((USBSTA &  (1 << SPEED)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent()            ((UHINT &   (1 << RXRSMI)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent()   MACROS{ UHINT &= ~(1 << RXRSMI);         }MACROE
+
+				#define USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest() MACROS{ UHCON |=  (1 << RESUME);         }MACROE
+				
+				#define USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent() ((UHCON &   (1 << RESUME)) ? false : true)
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Convenience function. This routine sends a SetConfiguration standard request to the attached
+			 *  device, with the given configuration index. This can be used to easily set the device
+			 *  configuration without creating and sending the request manually.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ConfigNumber  Configuration index to send to the device
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(const uint8_t ConfigNumber);
+			
+			/** Convenience function. This routine sends a GetDescriptor standard request to the attached
+			 *  device, requesting the device descriptor. This can be used to easily retrieve information
+			 *  about the device such as its VID, PID and power requirements.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] DeviceDescriptorPtr  Pointer to the destination device descriptor structure where
+			 *                                   the read data is to be stored
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(void* const DeviceDescriptorPtr);
+			
+			/** Convenience function. This routine sends a GetDescriptor standard request to the attached
+			 *  device, requesting the string descriptor of the specified index. This can be used to easily
+			 *  retrieve string descriptors from the device by index, after the index is obtained from the
+			 *  Device or Configuration descriptors.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Index  Index of the string index to retrieve
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination buffer where the retrieved string decriptor is
+			 *                      to be stored
+			 *  \param[in] BufferLength  Maximum size of the string descriptor which can be stored into the buffer
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor(const uint8_t Index, void* const Buffer, const uint8_t BufferLength);
+			
+			/** Clears a stall condition on the given pipe, via a ClearFeature request to the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] EndpointIndex  Index of the endpoint to clear
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */			
+			uint8_t USB_Host_ClearPipeStall(uint8_t EndpointIndex);
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the various states of the USB Host state machine. Only some states are
+			 *  implemented in the LUFA library - other states are left to the user to implement.
+			 *
+			 *  For information on each possible USB host state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+			 *  Several of the USB host states are broken up further into multiple smaller sub-states,
+			 *  so that they can be internally implemented inside the library in an efficient manner.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_HostState, which stores the current host state machine state.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Host_States_t
+			{
+				HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval         = 0,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state can be
+				                                               *   used by the library to wait until the attached device is
+				                                               *   removed by the user - useful for when an error occurs or
+				                                               *   further communication with the device is not needed. This
+				                                               *   allows for other code to run while the state machine is
+				                                               *   effectively disabled.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice                = 1,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                               *   that the stack is waiting for an interval to elapse before
+				                                               *   continuing with the next step of the device enumeration
+				                                               *   process.
+				                                               *
+				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Unattached                   = 2,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                               *   that the host state machine is waiting for a device to be
+				                                               *   attached so that it can start the enumeration process.
+				                                               *   
+				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Powered                      = 3,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                               *   that a device has been attached, and the library's internals
+				                                               *   are being configured to begin the enumeration process.
+				                                               *   
+				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle = 4,   /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                               *   that the stack is waiting for the initial settling period to
+				                                               *   elapse before beginning the enumeration process.
+				                                               *   
+				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect      = 5,   /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                               *   that the stack is waiting for a connection event from the USB
+				                                               *   controller to indicate a valid USB device has been attached to
+				                                               *   the bus and is ready to be enumerated.
+				                                               *   
+				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset             = 6,   /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                               *   that a valid USB device has been attached, and that it is
+				                                               *   will now be reset to ensure it is ready for enumeration.
+				                                               *   
+				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe           = 7,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                               *   that the attached device is currently powered and reset, and
+				                                               *   that the control pipe is now being configured by the stack.
+				                                               *   
+				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Default                      = 8,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                               *   that the stack is currently retrieving the control endpoint's
+				                                               *   size from the device, so that the control pipe can be altered
+				                                               *   to match.
+				                                               *   
+				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset            = 9,  /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates that
+				                                               *   the control pipe is being reconfigured to match the retrieved
+				                                               *   control endpoint size from the device, and the device's USB bus
+				                                               *   address is being set.
+				                                               *   
+				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet       = 10, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates that
+				                                               *   the device's address has now been set, and the stack is has now
+				                                               *   completed the device enumeration process. This state causes the
+				                                               *   stack to change the current USB device address to that set for
+				                                               *   the connected device, before progressing to the user-implemented
+				                                               *   HOST_STATE_Addressed state for further communications.
+				                                               *   
+				                                               *   \note Do not manually change to this state in the user code.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Addressed                    = 11, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state should
+				                                               *   set the device configuration before progressing to the
+				                                               *   HOST_STATE_Configured state. Other processing (such as the
+				                                               *   retrieval and processing of the device descriptor) should also
+				                                               *   be placed in this state.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Configured                   = 12, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state should implement the
+				                                               *   actual work performed on the attached device and changed to the
+				                                               *   HOST_STATE_Suspended or HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval states as needed.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Suspended                    = 15, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state should be maintained
+				                                               *   while the bus is suspended, and changed to either the HOST_STATE_Configured
+				                                               *   (after resuming the bus with the USB_Host_ResumeBus() macro) or the
+				                                               *   HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval states as needed.
+				                                               */
+			};
+			
+			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_HostError() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip       = 0, /**< VBUS voltage dipped to an unacceptable level. This
+				                                      *   error may be the result of an attached device drawing
+				                                      *   too much current from the VBUS line, or due to the
+				                                      *   AVR's power source being unable to supply sufficient
+				                                      *   current.
+				                                      */
+			};
+			
+			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError          = 0, /**< No error occurred. Used internally, this is not a valid
+				                                      *   ErrorCode parameter value for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed()
+				                                      *   event.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage        = 1, /**< One of the delays between enumeration steps failed
+				                                      *   to complete successfully, due to a timeout or other
+				                                      *   error.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected = 2, /**< No device was detected, despite the USB data lines
+				                                      *   indicating the attachment of a device.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError     = 3, /**< One of the enumeration control requests failed to
+				                                      *   complete successfully.
+													  */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError  = 4, /**< The default control pipe (address 0) failed to
+				                                      *   configure correctly.
+				                                      */
+			};
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define USB_Host_HostMode_On()          MACROS{ USBCON |=  (1 << HOST);           }MACROE
+			#define USB_Host_HostMode_Off()         MACROS{ USBCON &= ~(1 << HOST);           }MACROE
+
+			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable()     MACROS{ OTGCON &= ~(1 << VBUSHWC); UHWCON |=  (1 << UVCONE);                   }MACROE
+			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable()   MACROS{ OTGCON |=  (1 << VBUSHWC); UHWCON &= ~(1 << UVCONE); DDRE |= (1 << 7); }MACROE
+
+			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On()         MACROS{ OTGCON |= (1 << VBUSREQ);         }MACROE
+			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On()       MACROS{ PORTE  |= (1 << 7);               }MACROE
+
+			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off()        MACROS{ OTGCON |=  (1 << VBUSRQC);        }MACROE
+			#define USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off()      MACROS{ PORTE  &= ~(1 << 7);              }MACROE
+
+			#define USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(addr) MACROS{ UHADDR  =  ((addr) & 0x7F);       }MACROE
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			enum USB_Host_WaitMSErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_WAITERROR_Successful       = 0,
+				HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect = 1,
+				HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError        = 2,
+				HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled     = 3,
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void    USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void);
+			uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS);
+			
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C)
+				static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c
index e5072c8a8..69575f18b 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c
@@ -1,179 +1,179 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HOSTCHAPTER9_C
-#include "HostChapter9.h"
-
-uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest(void* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint8_t* HeaderStream   = (uint8_t*)&USB_ControlRequest;
-	uint8_t* DataStream     = (uint8_t*)BufferPtr;
-	bool     BusSuspended   = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
-	uint8_t  ReturnStatus   = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-	uint16_t DataLen        = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
-
-	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
-	
-	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
-	  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
-
-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP);
-	Pipe_ClearErrorFlags();
-
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	for (uint8_t HeaderByte = 0; HeaderByte < sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t); HeaderByte++)
-	  Pipe_Write_Byte(*(HeaderStream++));
-
-	Pipe_ClearSETUP();
-	
-	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
-
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-
-	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
-	  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
-
-	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION) == REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)
-	{
-		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
-		
-		if (DataStream != NULL)
-		{
-			while (DataLen)
-			{
-				Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-				if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
-							
-				if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
-				  DataLen = 0;
-				
-				while (Pipe_BytesInPipe() && DataLen)
-				{
-					*(DataStream++) = Pipe_Read_Byte();
-					DataLen--;
-				}
-
-				Pipe_Freeze();
-				Pipe_ClearIN();
-			}
-		}
-
-		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-		
-		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-		  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
-
-		Pipe_ClearOUT();
-
-		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-		  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		if (DataStream != NULL)
-		{
-			Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);
-			Pipe_Unfreeze();	
-
-			while (DataLen)
-			{
-				if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-				  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
-
-				while (DataLen && (Pipe_BytesInPipe() < USB_ControlPipeSize))
-				{					
-					Pipe_Write_Byte(*(DataStream++));
-					DataLen--;
-				}
-				
-				Pipe_ClearOUT();
-			}
-
-			if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
-
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-		}
-		
-		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-		  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
-
-		Pipe_ClearIN();
-	}
-
-End_Of_Control_Send:
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-	
-	if (BusSuspended)
-	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
-
-	Pipe_ResetPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-	return ReturnStatus;
-}
-
-static uint8_t USB_Host_WaitForIOS(const uint8_t WaitType)
-{
-	#if (USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
-	uint8_t  TimeoutCounter = USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS;	
-	#else
-	uint16_t TimeoutCounter = USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS;
-	#endif
-	
-	while (!(((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent)  && Pipe_IsSETUPSent())  ||
-	         ((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived) && Pipe_IsINReceived()) ||
-	         ((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)   && Pipe_IsOUTReady())))
-	{
-		uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
-		  return ErrorCode;
-			
-		if (!(TimeoutCounter--))
-		  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_SoftwareTimeOut;
-	}
-
-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HOSTCHAPTER9_C
+#include "HostChapter9.h"
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest(void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t* HeaderStream   = (uint8_t*)&USB_ControlRequest;
+	uint8_t* DataStream     = (uint8_t*)BufferPtr;
+	bool     BusSuspended   = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
+	uint8_t  ReturnStatus   = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	uint16_t DataLen        = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+
+	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+	
+	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+	  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
+
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP);
+	Pipe_ClearErrorFlags();
+
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	for (uint8_t HeaderByte = 0; HeaderByte < sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t); HeaderByte++)
+	  Pipe_Write_Byte(*(HeaderStream++));
+
+	Pipe_ClearSETUP();
+	
+	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+	  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
+
+	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION) == REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)
+	{
+		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+		
+		if (DataStream != NULL)
+		{
+			while (DataLen)
+			{
+				Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+				if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
+							
+				if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+				  DataLen = 0;
+				
+				while (Pipe_BytesInPipe() && DataLen)
+				{
+					*(DataStream++) = Pipe_Read_Byte();
+					DataLen--;
+				}
+
+				Pipe_Freeze();
+				Pipe_ClearIN();
+			}
+		}
+
+		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+		
+		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
+
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		if (DataStream != NULL)
+		{
+			Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);
+			Pipe_Unfreeze();	
+
+			while (DataLen)
+			{
+				if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
+
+				while (DataLen && (Pipe_BytesInPipe() < USB_ControlPipeSize))
+				{					
+					Pipe_Write_Byte(*(DataStream++));
+					DataLen--;
+				}
+				
+				Pipe_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
+
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+		}
+		
+		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		  goto End_Of_Control_Send;
+
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+End_Of_Control_Send:
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	
+	if (BusSuspended)
+	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
+
+	Pipe_ResetPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return ReturnStatus;
+}
+
+static uint8_t USB_Host_WaitForIOS(const uint8_t WaitType)
+{
+	#if (USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
+	uint8_t  TimeoutCounter = USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS;	
+	#else
+	uint16_t TimeoutCounter = USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#endif
+	
+	while (!(((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent)  && Pipe_IsSETUPSent())  ||
+	         ((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived) && Pipe_IsINReceived()) ||
+	         ((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)   && Pipe_IsOUTReady())))
+	{
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+			
+		if (!(TimeoutCounter--))
+		  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_SoftwareTimeOut;
+	}
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h
index e38c67e6c..ab8348d4c 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h
@@ -1,117 +1,117 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB host standard request management.
- *
- *  This file contains the function prototypes neccesary for the issuing of outgoing standard control requests
- *  when the library is in USB host mode.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-#ifndef __HOSTCHAPTER9_H__
-#define __HOSTCHAPTER9_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "LowLevel.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/StdRequestType.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest() return code, indicating the reason for the error
-			 *  if the transfer of the request is unsuccessful.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
-			 */
-			enum USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful         = 0, /**< No error occurred in the request transfer. */
-				HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected = 1, /**< The attached device was disconnected during the
-				                                        *   request transfer.
-				                                        */
-				HOST_SENDCONTROL_PipeError          = 2, /**< An error occurred in the pipe while sending the request. */
-				HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled       = 3, /**< The attached device stalled the request, usually
-				                                        *   indicating that the request is unsupported on the device.
-				                                        */
-				HOST_SENDCONTROL_SoftwareTimeOut    = 4, /**< The request or data transfer timed out. */
-			};
-			
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Sends the request stored in the \ref USB_ControlRequest global structure to the attached device,
-			 *  and transfers the data stored in the buffer to the device, or from the device to the buffer
-			 *  as requested. The transfer is made on the currently selected pipe.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] BufferPtr  Pointer to the start of the data buffer if the request has a data stage, or
-			 *                        NULL if the request transfers no data to or from the device.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
-			 */
-			uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest(void* BufferPtr);
-			
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Enums: */
-			enum USB_WaitForTypes_t
-			{
-				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent,
-				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived,
-				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady,
-			};
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOSTCHAPTER9_C)
-				static uint8_t USB_Host_WaitForIOS(const uint8_t WaitType);
-			#endif
-	#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB host standard request management.
+ *
+ *  This file contains the function prototypes neccesary for the issuing of outgoing standard control requests
+ *  when the library is in USB host mode.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __HOSTCHAPTER9_H__
+#define __HOSTCHAPTER9_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "LowLevel.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/StdRequestType.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest() return code, indicating the reason for the error
+			 *  if the transfer of the request is unsuccessful.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 */
+			enum USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful         = 0, /**< No error occurred in the request transfer. */
+				HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected = 1, /**< The attached device was disconnected during the
+				                                        *   request transfer.
+				                                        */
+				HOST_SENDCONTROL_PipeError          = 2, /**< An error occurred in the pipe while sending the request. */
+				HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled       = 3, /**< The attached device stalled the request, usually
+				                                        *   indicating that the request is unsupported on the device.
+				                                        */
+				HOST_SENDCONTROL_SoftwareTimeOut    = 4, /**< The request or data transfer timed out. */
+			};
+			
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Sends the request stored in the \ref USB_ControlRequest global structure to the attached device,
+			 *  and transfers the data stored in the buffer to the device, or from the device to the buffer
+			 *  as requested. The transfer is made on the currently selected pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] BufferPtr  Pointer to the start of the data buffer if the request has a data stage, or
+			 *                        NULL if the request transfers no data to or from the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest(void* BufferPtr);
+			
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Enums: */
+			enum USB_WaitForTypes_t
+			{
+				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent,
+				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived,
+				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady,
+			};
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOSTCHAPTER9_C)
+				static uint8_t USB_Host_WaitForIOS(const uint8_t WaitType);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c
index a088654f7..4c742102b 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c
@@ -1,271 +1,271 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "LowLevel.h"
-
-#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))
-volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_NONE;
-#endif
-
-#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
-volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
-#endif
-
-void USB_Init(
-               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-               const uint8_t Mode
-               #endif
-
-               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
-               ,
-               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
-               void
-               #endif
-			   
-               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
-               const uint8_t Options
-               #endif
-               )
-{
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-	USB_CurrentMode = Mode;
-	#endif
-
-	#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
-	USB_Options = Options;
-	#endif
-
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-	USB_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;
-	#endif
-	
-	#if defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) && (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
-	UHWCON |= (1 << UIMOD);
-	#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
-	UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIMOD);
-	#elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-	if (Mode == USB_MODE_UID)
-	{
-		UHWCON |=  (1 << UIDE);
-
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);
-		
-		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
-	}
-	else if (Mode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)
-	{
-		UHWCON |=  (1 << UIMOD);
-	}
-	else if (Mode == USB_MODE_HOST)			
-	{
-		UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIMOD);
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		EVENT_USB_InitFailure(USB_INITERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified);
-		return;
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	USB_ResetInterface();
-
-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-	USB_OTGPAD_On();
-	#endif
-
-	USB_IsInitialized = true;
-}
-
-void USB_ShutDown(void)
-{
-	USB_ResetInterface();
-	USB_Detach();
-	USB_Controller_Disable();
-	
-	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
-	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
-
-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-	UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIMOD);
-	#endif
-	
-	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
-	  USB_PLL_Off();
-	
-	USB_REG_Off();
-
-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-	USB_OTGPAD_Off();
-	#endif
-
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-	UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIDE);
-	#endif
-
-	USB_IsInitialized = false;
-
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-	USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_NONE;
-	#endif
-}
-
-void USB_ResetInterface(void)
-{
-	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
-	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
-	
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-	USB_HostState   = HOST_STATE_Unattached;
-	#endif
-	
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-	USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
-	USB_ConfigurationNumber  = 0;
-
-	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
-	USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled  = false;
-	#endif
-	
-	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
-	USB_CurrentlySelfPowered = false;
-	#endif
-	#endif
-	
-	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
-	{
-		#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)
-		PLLFRQ = ((1 << PLLUSB) | (1 << PDIV3) | (1 << PDIV1));
-		#endif
-
-		USB_PLL_On();
-		while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));
-	}
-	
-	USB_Controller_Reset();
-	
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-	if (UHWCON & (1 << UIDE))
-	{
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);
-		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
-	}
-	#endif
-		
-	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED))
-	  USB_REG_On();
-	else
-	  USB_REG_Off();
-	
-	USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
-
-	#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)))
-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)
-	{
-		if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
-		  USB_Device_SetLowSpeed();
-		else
-		  USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE))
-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)
-	{
-		USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr;
-
-		if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-		{		  
-			#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
-			USB_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;
-			#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
-			USB_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
-			#else
-			USB_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
-			#endif
-		}
-	}
-	#endif
-
-	USB_Attach();
-	
-	#if defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
-	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
-	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);
-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI);
-
-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUS);
-	#endif
-	#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
-	USB_Host_HostMode_On();
-	
-	USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
-	USB_OTGPAD_Off();
-
-	USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable();
-	USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On();
-	
-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SRPI);
-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI);
-	#else
-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)
-	{
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI);
-
-		#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUS);
-		#endif
-
-		#if defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-		UENUM = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP;
-		#endif
-	}
-	else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
-	{
-		USB_Host_HostMode_On();
-		
-		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
-		USB_OTGPAD_Off();
-
-		USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable();
-		USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On();
-		
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SRPI);
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI);
-	}
-	#endif
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "LowLevel.h"
+
+#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))
+volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_NONE;
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
+#endif
+
+void USB_Init(
+               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+               const uint8_t Mode
+               #endif
+
+               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+               ,
+               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+               void
+               #endif
+			   
+               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+               const uint8_t Options
+               #endif
+               )
+{
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	USB_CurrentMode = Mode;
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+	USB_Options = Options;
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+	USB_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;
+	#endif
+	
+	#if defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) && (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+	UHWCON |= (1 << UIMOD);
+	#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
+	UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIMOD);
+	#elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	if (Mode == USB_MODE_UID)
+	{
+		UHWCON |=  (1 << UIDE);
+
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);
+		
+		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
+	}
+	else if (Mode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)
+	{
+		UHWCON |=  (1 << UIMOD);
+	}
+	else if (Mode == USB_MODE_HOST)			
+	{
+		UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIMOD);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		EVENT_USB_InitFailure(USB_INITERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified);
+		return;
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	USB_ResetInterface();
+
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	USB_OTGPAD_On();
+	#endif
+
+	USB_IsInitialized = true;
+}
+
+void USB_ShutDown(void)
+{
+	USB_ResetInterface();
+	USB_Detach();
+	USB_Controller_Disable();
+	
+	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
+	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
+
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIMOD);
+	#endif
+	
+	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+	  USB_PLL_Off();
+	
+	USB_REG_Off();
+
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	USB_OTGPAD_Off();
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIDE);
+	#endif
+
+	USB_IsInitialized = false;
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_NONE;
+	#endif
+}
+
+void USB_ResetInterface(void)
+{
+	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
+	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
+	
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+	USB_HostState   = HOST_STATE_Unattached;
+	#endif
+	
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+	USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
+	USB_ConfigurationNumber  = 0;
+
+	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+	USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled  = false;
+	#endif
+	
+	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
+	USB_CurrentlySelfPowered = false;
+	#endif
+	#endif
+	
+	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+	{
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)
+		PLLFRQ = ((1 << PLLUSB) | (1 << PDIV3) | (1 << PDIV1));
+		#endif
+
+		USB_PLL_On();
+		while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));
+	}
+	
+	USB_Controller_Reset();
+	
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	if (UHWCON & (1 << UIDE))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);
+		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
+	}
+	#endif
+		
+	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED))
+	  USB_REG_On();
+	else
+	  USB_REG_Off();
+	
+	USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
+
+	#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)))
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)
+	{
+		if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
+		  USB_Device_SetLowSpeed();
+		else
+		  USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE))
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr;
+
+		if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+		{		  
+			#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			USB_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;
+			#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			USB_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
+			#else
+			USB_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
+			#endif
+		}
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	USB_Attach();
+	
+	#if defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
+	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
+	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI);
+
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUS);
+	#endif
+	#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
+	USB_Host_HostMode_On();
+	
+	USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
+	USB_OTGPAD_Off();
+
+	USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable();
+	USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On();
+	
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SRPI);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI);
+	#else
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI);
+
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUS);
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+		UENUM = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP;
+		#endif
+	}
+	else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
+	{
+		USB_Host_HostMode_On();
+		
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
+		USB_OTGPAD_Off();
+
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable();
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On();
+		
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SRPI);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI);
+	}
+	#endif
+}
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.h
index efa605b72..df9d3bb1c 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.h
@@ -1,389 +1,389 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB low level USB controller definitions.
- *
- *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to the low level configutation of the
- *  USB controller, to start, stop and reset the USB library core.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_USBManagement USB Interface Management
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBLOWLEVEL_H__
-#define __USBLOWLEVEL_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/Events.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h"
-		#include "USBInterrupt.h"
-		
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			#include "Host.h"
-			#include "Pipe.h"
-			#include "OTG.h"
-		#endif
-		
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			#include "Device.h"
-			#include "Endpoint.h"
-			#include "DevChapter9.h"
-		#endif
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-		#if !defined(F_CLOCK)
-			#error F_CLOCK is not defined. You must define F_CLOCK to the frequency of the unprescaled input clock in your project makefile.
-		#endif
-	
-		#if (F_CLOCK == 8000000)
-			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || \
-			     defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || \
-				 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__))
-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                0
-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                0
-			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)  || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))
-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP1) | (1 << PLLP0))
-			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)  || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP1) | (1 << PLLP0))
-			#endif
-		#elif (F_CLOCK == 16000000)
-			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || \
-			     defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || \
-				 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__))
-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                (1 << PLLP0)
-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                (1 << PINDIV)
-			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))
-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP2) | (1 << PLLP1))
-			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP2) | (1 << PLLP0))
-			#endif
-		#endif
-		
-		#if !defined(USB_PLL_PSC)
-			#error No PLL prescale value available for chosen F_CPU value and AVR model.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mode mask for the \ref USB_CurrentMode global. This indicates that the USB interface is currently not
-			 *  initialized into any mode.
-			 */
-			#define USB_MODE_NONE                      0
-
-			/** Mode mask for the \ref USB_CurrentMode global and the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
-			 *  USB interface is or should be initialized in the USB device mode.
-			 */
-			#define USB_MODE_DEVICE                    1
-			
-			/** Mode mask for the \ref USB_CurrentMode global and the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
-			 *  USB interface is or should be initialized in the USB host mode.
-			 */
-			#define USB_MODE_HOST                      2
-			
-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Mode mask for the the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the USB interface should be
-				 *  initialized into whatever mode the UID pin of the USB AVR indicates, and that the device
-				 *  should swap over its mode when the level of the UID pin changes during operation.
-				 *
-				 *  \note This token is not available on AVR models which do not support both host and device modes.
-				 */
-				#define USB_MODE_UID                       3
-			#endif
-			
-			/** Regulator disable option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates that the internal 3.3V USB data pad
-			 *  regulator should be enabled to regulate the data pin voltages to within the USB standard.
-			 *
-			 *  \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator.
-			 */
-			#define USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED               (1 << 1)
-
-			/** Regulator enable option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates that the internal 3.3V USB data pad
-			 *  regulator should be disabled and the AVR's VCC level used for the data pads.
-			 *
-			 *  \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator.
-			 */
-			#define USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED                (0 << 1)
-			
-			/** Manual PLL control option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates to the library that the user application
-			 *  will take full responsibility for controlling the AVR's PLL (used to generate the high frequency clock
-			 *  that the USB controller requires) and ensuring that it is locked at the correct frequency for USB operations.
-			 */
-			#define USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL                 (1 << 2)
-
-			/** Automatic PLL control option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates to the library that the library should
-			 *  take full responsibility for controlling the AVR's PLL (used to generate the high frequency clock
-			 *  that the USB controller requires) and ensuring that it is locked at the correct frequency for USB operations.
-			 */
-			#define USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL                   (0 << 2)
-
-			/** Mask for a CONTROL type endpoint or pipe.
-			 *
-			 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
-			 */
-			#define EP_TYPE_CONTROL                    0x00
-
-			/** Mask for an ISOCHRONOUS type endpoint or pipe.
-			 *
-			 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
-			 */
-			#define EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS                0x01
-
-			/** Mask for a BULK type endpoint or pipe.
-			 *
-			 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
-			 */
-			#define EP_TYPE_BULK                       0x02
-
-			/** Mask for an INTERRUPT type endpoint or pipe.
-			 *
-			 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
-			 */
-			#define EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT                  0x03
-
-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Returns boolean true if the VBUS line is currently high (i.e. the USB host is supplying power),
-				 *  otherwise returns false.
-				 *
-				 *  \note This token is not available on some AVR models which do not support hardware VBUS monitoring.
-				 */
-				#define USB_VBUS_GetStatus()             ((USBSTA & (1 << VBUS)) ? true : false)
-			#endif
-
-			/** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any
-			 *  attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from
-			 *  enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called.
-			 */
-			#define USB_Detach()                    MACROS{ UDCON  |=  (1 << DETACH);  }MACROE
-
-			/** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached
-			 *  USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device
-			 *  will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device.
-			 *
-			 *  This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the
-			 *  attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode
-			 *  register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode.
-			 */
-			#define USB_Attach()                    MACROS{ UDCON  &= ~(1 << DETACH);  }MACROE
-			
-			#if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions
-				 *  (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream
-				 *  is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail.
-				 *
-				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the 
-				 *  \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
-				 */
-				#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS       100
-			#endif
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will
-			 *  allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in
-			 *  host mode.
-			 *
-			 *  As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes,
-			 *  the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In
-			 *  device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure
-			 *  that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be
-			 *  enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device
-			 *  until after this has occurred.
-			 *
-			 *  Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB
-			 *  interface reset and re-enumeration.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Mode     This is a mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to.
-			 *                      Valid mode masks are \ref USB_MODE_DEVICE, \ref USB_MODE_HOST or \ref USB_MODE_UID.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Options  Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB
-			 *                      interface to control the USB interface's behaviour. This should be comprised of
-			 *                      a USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the
-			 *                      PLL, and a USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device
-			 *                      mode speed.
-			 *
-			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required, 
-			 *        the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-			 *        (for device mode) or USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler 
-			 *        via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the
-			 *        function prototype.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are are required,
-			 *        the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of 
-			 *        this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token,
-			 *        defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this
-			 *        parameter does not exist in the function prototype.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *        
-			 *  \note The mode parameter does not exist on devices where only one mode is possible, such as USB 
-			 *        AVR models which only implement the USB device mode in hardware.
-			 *
-			 *  \see Device.h for the USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks.
-			 */
-			void USB_Init(
-			               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			               const uint8_t Mode
-						   #endif
-
-			               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			               ,
-						   #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
-						   void
-			               #endif
-						   
-			               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			               const uint8_t Options
-			               #endif
-			               );
-			
-			/** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO
-			 *  memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface
-			 *  is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function.
-			 */
-			void USB_ShutDown(void);
-
-			/** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected
-			 *  to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode.
-			 */
-			void USB_ResetInterface(void);
-
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for error codes relating to the powering on of the USB interface. These error codes are
-			 *  used in the ErrorCode parameter value of the \ref EVENT_USB_InitFailure() event.
-			 */
-			enum USB_InitErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				USB_INITERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified       = 0, /**< Indicates that \ref USB_Init() was called with an
-			                                                 *   invalid or missing Mode parameter.
-			                                                 */
-			};
-
-		/* Global Variables: */
-			#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to. This value will be
-				 *  one of the USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.
-				 *
-				 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
-				 *        changed in value.
-				 */
-				extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode;
-			#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
-				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_HOST
-			#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
-				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_DEVICE
-			#endif
-			
-			#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init()
-				 *  was called. This value will be one of the USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.
-				 *
-				 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
-				 *        changed in value.
-				 */
-				extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
-			#elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
-				#define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
-			#endif
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define USB_PLL_On()               MACROS{ PLLCSR   =  USB_PLL_PSC; PLLCSR |= (1 << PLLE); }MACROE
-			#define USB_PLL_Off()              MACROS{ PLLCSR   =  0;                           }MACROE
-			#define USB_PLL_IsReady()                ((PLLCSR  &   (1 << PLOCK)) ? true : false)
-
-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-				#define USB_REG_On()           MACROS{ UHWCON  |=  (1 << UVREGE);               }MACROE
-				#define USB_REG_Off()          MACROS{ UHWCON  &= ~(1 << UVREGE);               }MACROE
-			#else
-				#define USB_REG_On()           MACROS{ REGCR   &= ~(1 << REGDIS);               }MACROE
-				#define USB_REG_Off()          MACROS{ REGCR   |=  (1 << REGDIS);               }MACROE			
-			#endif
-			
-			#define USB_OTGPAD_On()            MACROS{ USBCON  |=  (1 << OTGPADE);              }MACROE
-			#define USB_OTGPAD_Off()           MACROS{ USBCON  &= ~(1 << OTGPADE);              }MACROE
-
-			#define USB_CLK_Freeze()           MACROS{ USBCON  |=  (1 << FRZCLK);               }MACROE
-			#define USB_CLK_Unfreeze()         MACROS{ USBCON  &= ~(1 << FRZCLK);               }MACROE
-
-			#define USB_Controller_Enable()    MACROS{ USBCON  |=  (1 << USBE);                 }MACROE
-			#define USB_Controller_Disable()   MACROS{ USBCON  &= ~(1 << USBE);                 }MACROE
-			#define USB_Controller_Reset()     MACROS{ const uint8_t Temp = USBCON; USBCON = (Temp & ~(1 << USBE)); \
-			                                           USBCON = (Temp | (1 << USBE));           }MACROE
-	
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void)
-			{
-				if (USBSTA & (1 << ID))
-				  return USB_MODE_DEVICE;
-				else
-				  return USB_MODE_HOST;
-			}
-			#endif
-			
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-			
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB low level USB controller definitions.
+ *
+ *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to the low level configutation of the
+ *  USB controller, to start, stop and reset the USB library core.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBManagement USB Interface Management
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBLOWLEVEL_H__
+#define __USBLOWLEVEL_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/Events.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h"
+		#include "USBInterrupt.h"
+		
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "Host.h"
+			#include "Pipe.h"
+			#include "OTG.h"
+		#endif
+		
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "Device.h"
+			#include "Endpoint.h"
+			#include "DevChapter9.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(F_CLOCK)
+			#error F_CLOCK is not defined. You must define F_CLOCK to the frequency of the unprescaled input clock in your project makefile.
+		#endif
+	
+		#if (F_CLOCK == 8000000)
+			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || \
+			     defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || \
+				 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                0
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                0
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)  || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP1) | (1 << PLLP0))
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)  || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP1) | (1 << PLLP0))
+			#endif
+		#elif (F_CLOCK == 16000000)
+			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || \
+			     defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || \
+				 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                (1 << PLLP0)
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                (1 << PINDIV)
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP2) | (1 << PLLP1))
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP2) | (1 << PLLP0))
+			#endif
+		#endif
+		
+		#if !defined(USB_PLL_PSC)
+			#error No PLL prescale value available for chosen F_CPU value and AVR model.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mode mask for the \ref USB_CurrentMode global. This indicates that the USB interface is currently not
+			 *  initialized into any mode.
+			 */
+			#define USB_MODE_NONE                      0
+
+			/** Mode mask for the \ref USB_CurrentMode global and the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+			 *  USB interface is or should be initialized in the USB device mode.
+			 */
+			#define USB_MODE_DEVICE                    1
+			
+			/** Mode mask for the \ref USB_CurrentMode global and the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+			 *  USB interface is or should be initialized in the USB host mode.
+			 */
+			#define USB_MODE_HOST                      2
+			
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Mode mask for the the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the USB interface should be
+				 *  initialized into whatever mode the UID pin of the USB AVR indicates, and that the device
+				 *  should swap over its mode when the level of the UID pin changes during operation.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This token is not available on AVR models which do not support both host and device modes.
+				 */
+				#define USB_MODE_UID                       3
+			#endif
+			
+			/** Regulator disable option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates that the internal 3.3V USB data pad
+			 *  regulator should be enabled to regulate the data pin voltages to within the USB standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED               (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Regulator enable option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates that the internal 3.3V USB data pad
+			 *  regulator should be disabled and the AVR's VCC level used for the data pads.
+			 *
+			 *  \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED                (0 << 1)
+			
+			/** Manual PLL control option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates to the library that the user application
+			 *  will take full responsibility for controlling the AVR's PLL (used to generate the high frequency clock
+			 *  that the USB controller requires) and ensuring that it is locked at the correct frequency for USB operations.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL                 (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Automatic PLL control option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates to the library that the library should
+			 *  take full responsibility for controlling the AVR's PLL (used to generate the high frequency clock
+			 *  that the USB controller requires) and ensuring that it is locked at the correct frequency for USB operations.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL                   (0 << 2)
+
+			/** Mask for a CONTROL type endpoint or pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
+			 */
+			#define EP_TYPE_CONTROL                    0x00
+
+			/** Mask for an ISOCHRONOUS type endpoint or pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
+			 */
+			#define EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS                0x01
+
+			/** Mask for a BULK type endpoint or pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
+			 */
+			#define EP_TYPE_BULK                       0x02
+
+			/** Mask for an INTERRUPT type endpoint or pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
+			 */
+			#define EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT                  0x03
+
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Returns boolean true if the VBUS line is currently high (i.e. the USB host is supplying power),
+				 *  otherwise returns false.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This token is not available on some AVR models which do not support hardware VBUS monitoring.
+				 */
+				#define USB_VBUS_GetStatus()             ((USBSTA & (1 << VBUS)) ? true : false)
+			#endif
+
+			/** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any
+			 *  attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from
+			 *  enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called.
+			 */
+			#define USB_Detach()                    MACROS{ UDCON  |=  (1 << DETACH);  }MACROE
+
+			/** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached
+			 *  USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device
+			 *  will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the
+			 *  attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode
+			 *  register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode.
+			 */
+			#define USB_Attach()                    MACROS{ UDCON  &= ~(1 << DETACH);  }MACROE
+			
+			#if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions
+				 *  (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream
+				 *  is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail.
+				 *
+				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the 
+				 *  \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
+				 */
+				#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS       100
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will
+			 *  allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in
+			 *  host mode.
+			 *
+			 *  As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes,
+			 *  the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In
+			 *  device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure
+			 *  that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be
+			 *  enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device
+			 *  until after this has occurred.
+			 *
+			 *  Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB
+			 *  interface reset and re-enumeration.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Mode     This is a mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to.
+			 *                      Valid mode masks are \ref USB_MODE_DEVICE, \ref USB_MODE_HOST or \ref USB_MODE_UID.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Options  Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB
+			 *                      interface to control the USB interface's behaviour. This should be comprised of
+			 *                      a USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the
+			 *                      PLL, and a USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device
+			 *                      mode speed.
+			 *
+			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required, 
+			 *        the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+			 *        (for device mode) or USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler 
+			 *        via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the
+			 *        function prototype.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are are required,
+			 *        the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of 
+			 *        this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token,
+			 *        defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this
+			 *        parameter does not exist in the function prototype.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *        
+			 *  \note The mode parameter does not exist on devices where only one mode is possible, such as USB 
+			 *        AVR models which only implement the USB device mode in hardware.
+			 *
+			 *  \see Device.h for the USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks.
+			 */
+			void USB_Init(
+			               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               const uint8_t Mode
+						   #endif
+
+			               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               ,
+						   #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+						   void
+			               #endif
+						   
+			               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               const uint8_t Options
+			               #endif
+			               );
+			
+			/** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO
+			 *  memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface
+			 *  is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function.
+			 */
+			void USB_ShutDown(void);
+
+			/** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected
+			 *  to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode.
+			 */
+			void USB_ResetInterface(void);
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for error codes relating to the powering on of the USB interface. These error codes are
+			 *  used in the ErrorCode parameter value of the \ref EVENT_USB_InitFailure() event.
+			 */
+			enum USB_InitErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				USB_INITERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified       = 0, /**< Indicates that \ref USB_Init() was called with an
+			                                                 *   invalid or missing Mode parameter.
+			                                                 */
+			};
+
+		/* Global Variables: */
+			#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to. This value will be
+				 *  one of the USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+				 *        changed in value.
+				 */
+				extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode;
+			#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
+				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_HOST
+			#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
+				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_DEVICE
+			#endif
+			
+			#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init()
+				 *  was called. This value will be one of the USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+				 *        changed in value.
+				 */
+				extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
+			#elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+				#define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define USB_PLL_On()               MACROS{ PLLCSR   =  USB_PLL_PSC; PLLCSR |= (1 << PLLE); }MACROE
+			#define USB_PLL_Off()              MACROS{ PLLCSR   =  0;                           }MACROE
+			#define USB_PLL_IsReady()                ((PLLCSR  &   (1 << PLOCK)) ? true : false)
+
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+				#define USB_REG_On()           MACROS{ UHWCON  |=  (1 << UVREGE);               }MACROE
+				#define USB_REG_Off()          MACROS{ UHWCON  &= ~(1 << UVREGE);               }MACROE
+			#else
+				#define USB_REG_On()           MACROS{ REGCR   &= ~(1 << REGDIS);               }MACROE
+				#define USB_REG_Off()          MACROS{ REGCR   |=  (1 << REGDIS);               }MACROE			
+			#endif
+			
+			#define USB_OTGPAD_On()            MACROS{ USBCON  |=  (1 << OTGPADE);              }MACROE
+			#define USB_OTGPAD_Off()           MACROS{ USBCON  &= ~(1 << OTGPADE);              }MACROE
+
+			#define USB_CLK_Freeze()           MACROS{ USBCON  |=  (1 << FRZCLK);               }MACROE
+			#define USB_CLK_Unfreeze()         MACROS{ USBCON  &= ~(1 << FRZCLK);               }MACROE
+
+			#define USB_Controller_Enable()    MACROS{ USBCON  |=  (1 << USBE);                 }MACROE
+			#define USB_Controller_Disable()   MACROS{ USBCON  &= ~(1 << USBE);                 }MACROE
+			#define USB_Controller_Reset()     MACROS{ const uint8_t Temp = USBCON; USBCON = (Temp & ~(1 << USBE)); \
+			                                           USBCON = (Temp | (1 << USBE));           }MACROE
+	
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void)
+			{
+				if (USBSTA & (1 << ID))
+				  return USB_MODE_DEVICE;
+				else
+				  return USB_MODE_HOST;
+			}
+			#endif
+			
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+			
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/OTG.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/OTG.h
index ef3ab38d1..944fd72ac 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/OTG.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/OTG.h
@@ -1,141 +1,141 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
- 
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB OTG mode definitions.
- *
- *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to USB OTG mode, where two USB devices
- *  may be linked directly together and exchange host/device roles as needed.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_OTG USB On The Go (OTG) Management
- *
- *  This module contains macros for embedded USB hosts with dual role On The Go capabilities, for managing role
- *  exchange. OTG is a way for two USB dual role devices to talk to one another directly without fixed device/host
- *  roles.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBOTG_H__
-#define __USBOTG_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask for the VBUS pulsing method of SRP, supported by some OTG devices.
-			 *
-			 *  \see USB_OTG_DEV_Initiate_SRP()
-			 */			 
-			#define USB_OTG_SRP_VBUS                   (1 << SRPSEL)
-
-			/** Mask for the Data + pulsing method of SRP, supported by some OTG devices.
-			 *
-			 *  \see USB_OTG_DEV_Initiate_SRP()
-			 */			 
-			#define USB_OTG_STP_DATA                   0
-
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Initiate a Host Negotiation Protocol request. This indicates to the other connected device
-				 *  that the device wishes to change device/host roles.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_OTG_Device_RequestHNP(void);
-				
-				/** Cancel a Host Negotiation Protocol request. This stops a pending HNP request to the other
-				 *  connected device.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_OTG_Device_CancelHNPRequest(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the device is currently sending a HNP to an attached host.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if currently sending a HNP to the other connected device, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool USB_OTG_Device_IsSendingHNP(void);
-				
-				/** Accepts a HNP from a connected device, indicating that both devices should exchange
-				 *  device/host roles.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_OTG_Host_AcceptHNP(void);
-				
-				/** Rejects a HNP from a connected device, indicating that both devices should remain in their
-				 *  current device/host roles.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_OTG_Host_RejectHNP(void);
-				
-				/** Indicates if the connected device is not currently sending a HNP request.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if a HNP is currently being issued by the connected device, false otherwise.
-				 */
-				static inline bool USB_OTG_Host_IsHNPReceived(void);
-				
-				/** Initiates a Session Request Protocol request. Most OTG devices turn off VBUS when the USB
-				 *  interface is not in use, to conserve power. Sending a SRP to a USB OTG device running in
-				 *  host mode indicates that VBUS should be applied and a session started.
-				 *
-				 *  There are two different methods of sending a SRP - either pulses on the VBUS line, or by
-				 *  pulsing the Data + line via the internal pull-up resistor.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] SRPTypeMask  Mask indicating the type of SRP to use, either \ref USB_OTG_SRP_VBUS or \ref USB_OTG_STP_DATA.
-				 */
-				static inline void USB_OTG_Dev_InitiateSRP(uint8_t SRPTypeMask);
-			#else
-				#define USB_OTG_Device_RequestHNP()         MACROS{ OTGCON |=  (1 << HNPREQ); }MACROE
-
-				#define USB_OTG_Device_CancelHNPRequest()   MACROS{ OTGCON &= ~(1 << HNPREQ); }MACROE
-
-				#define USB_OTG_Device_IsSendingHNP()             ((OTGCON &   (1 << HNPREQ)) ? true : false)
-				
-				#define USB_OTG_Host_AcceptHNP()            MACROS{ OTGCON |=  (1 << HNPREQ); }MACROE
-
-				#define USB_OTG_Host_RejectHNP()            MACROS{ OTGCON &= ~(1 << HNPREQ); }MACROE
-				
-				#define USB_OTG_Host_IsHNPReceived()              ((OTGCON &   (1 << HNPREQ)) ? true : false)
-				
-				#define USB_OTG_Device_InitiateSRP(type)    MACROS{ OTGCON = ((OTGCON & ~(1 << SRPSEL)) | ((type) | (1 << SRPREQ))); }MACROE
-			#endif
-	
-#endif
-			
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+ 
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB OTG mode definitions.
+ *
+ *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to USB OTG mode, where two USB devices
+ *  may be linked directly together and exchange host/device roles as needed.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_OTG USB On The Go (OTG) Management
+ *
+ *  This module contains macros for embedded USB hosts with dual role On The Go capabilities, for managing role
+ *  exchange. OTG is a way for two USB dual role devices to talk to one another directly without fixed device/host
+ *  roles.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBOTG_H__
+#define __USBOTG_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the VBUS pulsing method of SRP, supported by some OTG devices.
+			 *
+			 *  \see USB_OTG_DEV_Initiate_SRP()
+			 */			 
+			#define USB_OTG_SRP_VBUS                   (1 << SRPSEL)
+
+			/** Mask for the Data + pulsing method of SRP, supported by some OTG devices.
+			 *
+			 *  \see USB_OTG_DEV_Initiate_SRP()
+			 */			 
+			#define USB_OTG_STP_DATA                   0
+
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Initiate a Host Negotiation Protocol request. This indicates to the other connected device
+				 *  that the device wishes to change device/host roles.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_OTG_Device_RequestHNP(void);
+				
+				/** Cancel a Host Negotiation Protocol request. This stops a pending HNP request to the other
+				 *  connected device.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_OTG_Device_CancelHNPRequest(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the device is currently sending a HNP to an attached host.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if currently sending a HNP to the other connected device, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool USB_OTG_Device_IsSendingHNP(void);
+				
+				/** Accepts a HNP from a connected device, indicating that both devices should exchange
+				 *  device/host roles.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_OTG_Host_AcceptHNP(void);
+				
+				/** Rejects a HNP from a connected device, indicating that both devices should remain in their
+				 *  current device/host roles.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_OTG_Host_RejectHNP(void);
+				
+				/** Indicates if the connected device is not currently sending a HNP request.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if a HNP is currently being issued by the connected device, false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline bool USB_OTG_Host_IsHNPReceived(void);
+				
+				/** Initiates a Session Request Protocol request. Most OTG devices turn off VBUS when the USB
+				 *  interface is not in use, to conserve power. Sending a SRP to a USB OTG device running in
+				 *  host mode indicates that VBUS should be applied and a session started.
+				 *
+				 *  There are two different methods of sending a SRP - either pulses on the VBUS line, or by
+				 *  pulsing the Data + line via the internal pull-up resistor.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] SRPTypeMask  Mask indicating the type of SRP to use, either \ref USB_OTG_SRP_VBUS or \ref USB_OTG_STP_DATA.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_OTG_Dev_InitiateSRP(uint8_t SRPTypeMask);
+			#else
+				#define USB_OTG_Device_RequestHNP()         MACROS{ OTGCON |=  (1 << HNPREQ); }MACROE
+
+				#define USB_OTG_Device_CancelHNPRequest()   MACROS{ OTGCON &= ~(1 << HNPREQ); }MACROE
+
+				#define USB_OTG_Device_IsSendingHNP()             ((OTGCON &   (1 << HNPREQ)) ? true : false)
+				
+				#define USB_OTG_Host_AcceptHNP()            MACROS{ OTGCON |=  (1 << HNPREQ); }MACROE
+
+				#define USB_OTG_Host_RejectHNP()            MACROS{ OTGCON &= ~(1 << HNPREQ); }MACROE
+				
+				#define USB_OTG_Host_IsHNPReceived()              ((OTGCON &   (1 << HNPREQ)) ? true : false)
+				
+				#define USB_OTG_Device_InitiateSRP(type)    MACROS{ OTGCON = ((OTGCON & ~(1 << SRPSEL)) | ((type) | (1 << SRPREQ))); }MACROE
+			#endif
+	
+#endif
+			
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c
index 8784bea0c..013193064 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c
@@ -1,292 +1,292 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PIPE_C
-#include "Pipe.h"
-
-uint8_t USB_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;
-
-bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t Type, const uint8_t Token, const uint8_t EndpointNumber,
-						const uint16_t Size, const uint8_t Banks)
-{
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);
-	Pipe_EnablePipe();
-
-	UPCFG1X = 0;
-	
-	UPCFG0X = ((Type << EPTYPE0) | Token | ((EndpointNumber & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) << PEPNUM0));
-	UPCFG1X = ((1 << ALLOC) | Banks | Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size));
-
-	Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
-
-	return Pipe_IsConfigured();
-}
-
-void Pipe_ClearPipes(void)
-{
-	UPINT = 0;
-
-	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
-	{
-		Pipe_ResetPipe(PNum);
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
-		UPIENX = 0;
-		UPINTX = 0;
-		Pipe_ClearError();
-		Pipe_ClearErrorFlags();
-		Pipe_DeallocateMemory();
-		Pipe_DisablePipe();
-	}
-}
-
-bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress)
-{
-	uint8_t PrevPipeNumber = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
-
-	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
-	{
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
-		
-		uint8_t PipeToken = Pipe_GetPipeToken();
-		bool    PipeTokenCorrect = true;
-
-		if (PipeToken != PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP)
-		  PipeTokenCorrect = (PipeToken == ((EndpointAddress & PIPE_EPDIR_MASK) ? PIPE_TOKEN_IN : PIPE_TOKEN_OUT));
-		
-		if (Pipe_IsConfigured() && PipeTokenCorrect && (Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber() == (EndpointAddress & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK)))
-		  return true;
-	}
-	
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipeNumber);
-	return false;
-}
-
-uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void)
-{
-	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
-	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;	
-	#else
-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
-	#endif
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		if (Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN)
-		{
-			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
-			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())
-			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;		
-		}
-
-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
-		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled;
-		else if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
-			  
-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
-		{
-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-
-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
-			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length
-#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-                                 , StreamCallbackPtr_t Callback
-#endif
-								 )
-{
-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
-	
-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	#if defined(FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS)
-	uint8_t BytesRemToAlignment = (Pipe_BytesInPipe() & 0x07);
-
-	if (Length >= 8)
-	{
-		Length -= BytesRemToAlignment;
-
-		switch (BytesRemToAlignment)
-		{
-			default:
-				do
-				{
-					if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-					{
-						Pipe_ClearIN();
-							
-						#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-						if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
-						  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
-						#endif
-
-						if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
-						  return ErrorCode;
-					}
-
-					Length -= 8;
-					
-					Pipe_Discard_Byte();
-			case 7: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
-			case 6: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
-			case 5: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
-			case 4: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
-			case 3: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
-			case 2: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
-			case 1:	Pipe_Discard_Byte();
-				} while (Length >= 8);	
-		}
-	}
-	#endif
-
-	while (Length)
-	{
-		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-		{
-			Pipe_ClearIN();
-				
-			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
-			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
-			#endif
-
-			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
-			  return ErrorCode;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Pipe_Discard_Byte();
-			Length--;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-past common code with slight alterations,
- * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_PStream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_EStream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_PStream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_EStream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++) = Pipe_Read_Byte()
-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_EStream_LE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++, Pipe_Read_Byte())
-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--) = Pipe_Read_Byte()
-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
-
-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_EStream_BE
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--, Pipe_Read_Byte())
-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PIPE_C
+#include "Pipe.h"
+
+uint8_t USB_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;
+
+bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t Type, const uint8_t Token, const uint8_t EndpointNumber,
+						const uint16_t Size, const uint8_t Banks)
+{
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);
+	Pipe_EnablePipe();
+
+	UPCFG1X = 0;
+	
+	UPCFG0X = ((Type << EPTYPE0) | Token | ((EndpointNumber & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) << PEPNUM0));
+	UPCFG1X = ((1 << ALLOC) | Banks | Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size));
+
+	Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+	return Pipe_IsConfigured();
+}
+
+void Pipe_ClearPipes(void)
+{
+	UPINT = 0;
+
+	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
+	{
+		Pipe_ResetPipe(PNum);
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
+		UPIENX = 0;
+		UPINTX = 0;
+		Pipe_ClearError();
+		Pipe_ClearErrorFlags();
+		Pipe_DeallocateMemory();
+		Pipe_DisablePipe();
+	}
+}
+
+bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevPipeNumber = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
+
+	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
+	{
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
+		
+		uint8_t PipeToken = Pipe_GetPipeToken();
+		bool    PipeTokenCorrect = true;
+
+		if (PipeToken != PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP)
+		  PipeTokenCorrect = (PipeToken == ((EndpointAddress & PIPE_EPDIR_MASK) ? PIPE_TOKEN_IN : PIPE_TOKEN_OUT));
+		
+		if (Pipe_IsConfigured() && PipeTokenCorrect && (Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber() == (EndpointAddress & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK)))
+		  return true;
+	}
+	
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipeNumber);
+	return false;
+}
+
+uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void)
+{
+	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
+	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;	
+	#else
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#endif
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN)
+		{
+			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())
+			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;		
+		}
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled;
+		else if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+			  
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
+			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length
+#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+                                 , StreamCallbackPtr_t Callback
+#endif
+								 )
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	#if defined(FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS)
+	uint8_t BytesRemToAlignment = (Pipe_BytesInPipe() & 0x07);
+
+	if (Length >= 8)
+	{
+		Length -= BytesRemToAlignment;
+
+		switch (BytesRemToAlignment)
+		{
+			default:
+				do
+				{
+					if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+					{
+						Pipe_ClearIN();
+							
+						#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+						if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
+						  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
+						#endif
+
+						if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+						  return ErrorCode;
+					}
+
+					Length -= 8;
+					
+					Pipe_Discard_Byte();
+			case 7: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
+			case 6: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
+			case 5: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
+			case 4: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
+			case 3: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
+			case 2: Pipe_Discard_Byte();
+			case 1:	Pipe_Discard_Byte();
+				} while (Length >= 8);	
+		}
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+				
+			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
+			#endif
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_Discard_Byte();
+			Length--;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-past common code with slight alterations,
+ * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_PStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_EStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++))
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_PStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_EStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--))
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++) = Pipe_Read_Byte()
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_EStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr++, Pipe_Read_Byte())
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--) = Pipe_Read_Byte()
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_EStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)BufferPtr--, Pipe_Read_Byte())
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.h
index c16822b0d..02f882dc5 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.h
@@ -1,1065 +1,1065 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
- 
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB host pipe management definitions.
- *
- *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to the management of the device's
- *  data pipes when the library is initialized in USB host mode.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */ 
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_PipeManagement Pipe Management
- *
- *  This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This
- *  module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions
- *  for various data types.
- *
- *  @{
- */
-
-/** @defgroup Group_PipeRW Pipe Data Reading and Writing
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes.
- */
- 
-/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW  
- *  @defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
- *  from and to pipes.
- */ 
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW  
- *  @defgroup Group_PipeStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
- *  and to pipes.
- */ 
- 
-/** @defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement Pipe Packet Management
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes.
- */
- 
-/** @defgroup Group_PipeControlReq Pipe Control Request Management
- *
- *  Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and
- *  vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode.
- *
- *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification.
- */ 
-
-#ifndef __PIPE_H__
-#define __PIPE_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h"
-
-		#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			#include "../HighLevel/StreamCallbacks.h"
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an overflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW         (1 << 6)
-
-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an underflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_UNDERFLOW        (1 << 5)
-
-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a CRC error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16            (1 << 4)
-
-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware timeout error occurred in the pipe. */
-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT          (1 << 3)
-
-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware PID error occurred in the pipe. */
-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID              (1 << 2)
-
-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data PID error occurred in the pipe. */
-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID          (1 << 1)
-
-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data toggle error occurred in the pipe. */
-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL          (1 << 0)
-
-			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a SETUP token (for CONTROL type pipes),
-			 *  which will trigger a control request on the attached device when data is written to the pipe.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP                (0 << PTOKEN0)
-
-			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a IN token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),
-			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from device to host.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_TOKEN_IN                   (1 << PTOKEN0)
-
-			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a OUT token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),
-			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from host to device.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_TOKEN_OUT                  (2 << PTOKEN0)
-
-			/** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the pipe
-			 *  should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results in slower transfers as
-			 *  only one USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access the pipe's bank at the one time.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_BANK_SINGLE                (0 << EPBK0)
-
-			/** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the pipe
-			 *  should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results in faster transfers as one
-			 *  USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access one bank while the other accesses the second
-			 *  bank.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE                (1 << EPBK0)
-			
-			/** Pipe address for the default control pipe, which always resides in address 0. This is
-			 *  defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the pipe macros.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE                0
-
-			/** Default size of the default control pipe's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value 
-			 *  in the device descriptor of the attached device.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE   64
-			
-			/** Pipe number mask, for masking against pipe addresses to retrieve the pipe's numerical address
-			 *  in the device.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK               0x07
-
-			/** Total number of pipes (including the default control pipe at address 0) which may be used in
-			 *  the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of pipes, this value reflects
-			 *  the maximum number of pipes for the currently selected AVR model.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES                7
-
-			/** Size in bytes of the largest pipe bank size possible in the device. Not all banks on each AVR
-			 *  model supports the largest bank size possible on the device; different pipe numbers support
-			 *  different maximum bank sizes. This value reflects the largest possible bank of any pipe on the
-			 *  currently selected USB AVR model.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_MAX_SIZE                   256
-
-			/** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
-			 *  numerical address in the attached device.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_EPNUM_MASK                 0x0F
-
-			/** Endpoint direction mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
-			 *  direction for comparing with the ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_* masks.
-			 */
-			#define PIPE_EPDIR_MASK                 0x80
-
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current pipes's selected bank.
-				 *
-				 *  \note The return width of this function may differ, depending on the maximum pipe bank size
-				 *        of the selected AVR model.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW
-				 *
-				 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Pipe's FIFO buffer
-				 */
-				static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void);
-				
-				/** Returns the pipe address of the currently selected pipe. This is typically used to save the
-				 *  currently selected pipe number so that it can be restored after another pipe has been manipulated.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Index of the currently selected pipe
-				 */
-				static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void);
-
-				/** Selects the given pipe number. Any pipe operations which do not require the pipe number to be
-				 *  indicated will operate on the currently selected pipe.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] PipeNumber  Index of the pipe to select
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(uint8_t PipeNumber);
-				
-				/** Resets the desired pipe, including the pipe banks and flags.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] PipeNumber  Index of the pipe to reset
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(uint8_t PipeNumber);
-				
-				/** Enables the currently selected pipe so that data can be sent and received through it to and from
-				 *  an attached device.
-				 *
-				 *  \note Pipes must first be configured properly via \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe().
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void);
-
-				/** Disables the currently selected pipe so that data cannot be sent and received through it to and
-				 *  from an attached device.
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void);
-
-				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
-				 *
-				 * \return Boolean True if the currently selected pipe is enabled, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void);
-				
-				/** Gets the current pipe token, indicating the pipe's data direction and type.
-				 *
-				 *  \return The current pipe token, as a PIPE_TOKEN_* mask
-				 */
-				static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void);
-				
-				/** Sets the token for the currently selected pipe to one of the tokens specified by the PIPE_TOKEN_*
-				 *  masks. This can be used on CONTROL type pipes, to allow for bidirectional transfer of data during
-				 *  control requests, or on regular pipes to allow for half-duplex bidirectional data transfer to devices
-				 *  which have two endpoints of opposite direction sharing the same endpoint address within the device.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] Token  New pipe token to set the selected pipe to, as a PIPE_TOKEN_* mask
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(uint8_t Token);
-				
-				/** Configures the currently selected pipe to allow for an unlimited number of IN requests. */
-				static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void);
-				
-				/** Configures the currently selected pipe to only allow the specified number of IN requests to be
-				 *  accepted by the pipe before it is automatically frozen.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] TotalINRequests  Total number of IN requests that the pipe may receive before freezing
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(uint8_t TotalINRequests);
-
-				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is configured.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the selected pipe is configured, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void);
-				
-				/** Retrieves the endpoint number of the endpoint within the attached device that the currently selected
-				 *  pipe is bound to.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Endpoint number the currently selected pipe is bound to
-				 */
-				static inline uint8_t Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber(void);
-
-				/** Sets the period between interrupts for an INTERRUPT type pipe to a specified number of milliseconds.
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] Milliseconds  Number of milliseconds between each pipe poll
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(uint8_t Milliseconds);
-				
-				/** Returns a mask indicating which pipe's interrupt periods have elapsed, indicating that the pipe should
-				 *  be serviced.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which pipes have interrupted
-				 */
-				static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the specified pipe number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
-				 *  pipes).
-				 *
-				 *  \param[in] PipeNumber  Index of the pipe whose interrupt flag should be tested
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the specified pipe has interrupted, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(uint8_t PipeNumber);
-				
-				/** Unfreezes the selected pipe, allowing it to communicate with an attached device. */
-				static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void);
-				
-				/** Freezes the selected pipe, preventing it from communicating with an attached device. */
-				static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void);
-
-				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is frozen, and not able to accept data.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the currently selected pipe is frozen, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void);
-				
-				/** Clears the master pipe error flag. */
-				static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the master pipe error flag is set for the currently selected pipe, indicating that
-				 *  some sort of hardware error has occurred on the pipe.
-				 *
-				 *  \see \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags() macro for information on retrieving the exact error flag.
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if an error has occurred on the selected pipe, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void);
-				
-				/** Clears all the currently selected pipe's hardware error flags, but does not clear the master error
-				 *  flag for the pipe.
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_ClearErrorFlags(void);
-				
-				/** Gets a mask of the hardware error flags which have occurred on the currently selected pipe. This
-				 *  value can then be masked against the PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* masks to determine what error has occurred.
-				 *
-				 *  \return  Mask comprising of PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* bits indicating what error has occurred on the selected pipe
-				 */
-				static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe may be read from (if data is waiting in the pipe
-				 *  bank and the pipe is an IN direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the pipe is an OUT
-				 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the pipe, or if the pipe
-				 *  is an IN direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the pipe is an OUT
-				 *  direction and the pipe bank is full.
-				 *
-				 *  \note This function is not valid on CONTROL type pipes.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
-				 *  
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the currently selected pipe may be read from or written to, depending on its direction
-				 */
-				static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if an IN request has been received on the currently selected pipe.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the current pipe has received an IN packet, false otherwise.
-				 */
-				static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void);
-				
-				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is ready to send an OUT request.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the current pipe is ready for an OUT packet, false otherwise.
-				 */
-				static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void);
-
-				/** Determines if no SETUP request is currently being sent to the attached device on the selected
-				 *  CONTROL type pipe.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the current pipe is ready for a SETUP packet, false otherwise.
-				 */
-				static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void);
-				
-				/** Sends the currently selected CONTROL type pipe's contents to the device as a SETUP packet.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement		
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void);
-
-				/** Acknowledges the reception of a setup IN request from the attached device on the currently selected
-				 *  pipe, freeing the bank ready for the next packet.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void);
-
-				/** Sends the currently selected pipe's contents to the device as an OUT packet on the selected pipe, freeing
-				 *  the bank ready for the next packet.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void);
-
-				/** Determines if the device sent a NAK (Negative Acknowledge) in response to the last sent packet on
-				 *  the currently selected pipe. This occurs when the host sends a packet to the device, but the device
-				 *  is not currently ready to handle the packet (i.e. its endpoint banks are full). Once a NAK has been
-				 *  received, it must be cleared using \ref Pipe_ClearNAKReceived() before the previous (or any other) packet
-				 *  can be re-sent.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if an NAK has been received on the current pipe, false otherwise
-				 */
-				static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void);
-
-				/** Clears the NAK condition on the currently selected pipe.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \see \ref Pipe_IsNAKReceived() for more details.
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void);
-				 
-				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe has had the STALL condition set by the attached device.
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
-				 *
-				 *  \return Boolean true if the current pipe has been stalled by the attached device, false otherwise
-				*/
-				static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void);
-				
-				/** Clears the STALL condition detection flag on the currently selected pipe, but does not clear the
-				 *  STALL condition itself (this must be done via a ClearFeature control request to the device).
-				 *
-				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
-				 */
-				static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void);
-			#else
-				#define Pipe_BytesInPipe()             UPBCX
-
-				#define Pipe_GetCurrentPipe()          (UPNUM & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK)
-
-				#define Pipe_SelectPipe(pipenum)       MACROS{ UPNUM = (pipenum); }MACROE
-				
-				#define Pipe_ResetPipe(pipenum)        MACROS{ UPRST = (1 << (pipenum)); UPRST = 0; }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_EnablePipe()              MACROS{ UPCONX |= (1 << PEN); }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_DisablePipe()             MACROS{ UPCONX &= ~(1 << PEN); }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_IsEnabled()               ((UPCONX & (1 << PEN)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Pipe_GetPipeToken()            (UPCFG0X & PIPE_TOKEN_MASK)
-
-				#define Pipe_SetPipeToken(token)       MACROS{ UPCFG0X = ((UPCFG0X & ~PIPE_TOKEN_MASK) | (token)); }MACROE
-				
-				#define Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests()   MACROS{ UPCONX |= (1 << INMODE); }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(n)    MACROS{ UPCONX &= ~(1 << INMODE); UPINRQX = (n); }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_IsConfigured()            ((UPSTAX  & (1 << CFGOK)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber()     ((UPCFG0X >> PEPNUM0) & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK)
-				
-				#define Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(ms)    MACROS{ UPCFG2X = (ms); }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts()       UPINT
-
-				#define Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(n)     ((UPINT & (1 << (n))) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Pipe_Unfreeze()                MACROS{ UPCONX &= ~(1 << PFREEZE); }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_Freeze()                  MACROS{ UPCONX |= (1 << PFREEZE); }MACROE
-				
-				#define Pipe_IsFrozen()                ((UPCONX & (1 << PFREEZE)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Pipe_ClearError()              MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << PERRI); }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_IsError()                 ((UPINTX & (1 << PERRI)) ? true : false)
-				
-				#define Pipe_ClearErrorFlags()         MACROS{ UPERRX = 0; }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_GetErrorFlags()           ((UPERRX & (PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT | \
-				                                                   PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID   | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID | \
-				                                                   PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL))                      | \
-				                                        (UPSTAX & PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_UNDERFLOW))
-
-				#define Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()      ((UPINTX & (1 << RWAL)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Pipe_IsINReceived()            ((UPINTX & (1 << RXINI)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Pipe_IsOUTReady()              ((UPINTX & (1 << TXOUTI)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Pipe_IsSETUPSent()             ((UPINTX & (1 << TXSTPI)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Pipe_ClearIN()                 MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~((1 << RXINI) | (1 << FIFOCON)); }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_ClearOUT()                MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~((1 << TXOUTI) | (1 << FIFOCON)); }MACROE
-				
-				#define Pipe_ClearSETUP()              MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~((1 << TXSTPI) | (1 << FIFOCON)); }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_IsNAKReceived()           ((UPINTX & (1 << NAKEDI)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Pipe_ClearNAKReceived()        MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << NAKEDI); }MACROE
-
-				#define Pipe_IsStalled()               ((UPINTX & (1 << RXSTALLI)) ? true : false)
-
-				#define Pipe_ClearStall()              MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTALLI); }MACROE
-			#endif
-
-		/* Enums: */
-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Pipe_WaitUntilReady function
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW
-			 */
-			enum Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Pipe ready for next packet, no error */
-				PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled             = 1,	/**< The device stalled the pipe while waiting. */			
-				PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while waiting. */
-				PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet
-				                                             *   within the software timeout period set by the
-				                                             *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
-				                                             */
-			};
-
-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Pipe_*_Stream_* functions.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW
-			 */
-			enum Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
-			{
-				PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
-				PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled        = 1, /**< The device stalled the pipe during the transfer. */		
-				PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
-			                                           *   the transfer.
-			                                           */		
-				PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout            = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet
-				                                       *   within the software timeout period set by the
-				                                       *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
-				                                       */
-				PIPE_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted    = 4, /**< Indicates that the stream's callback function aborted
-			                                           *   the transfer early.
-				                                       */
-			};
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_Byte(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_Byte(void)
-			{
-				return UPDATX;
-			}
-
-			/** Writes one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for IN direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Next byte to write into the the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Pipe_Write_Byte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Pipe_Write_Byte(const uint8_t Byte)
-			{
-				UPDATX = Byte;
-			}
-
-			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 */
-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_Byte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_Byte(void)
-			{
-				uint8_t Dummy;
-				
-				Dummy = UPDATX;
-			}
-			
-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT
-			 *  direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next word in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_LE(void)
-			{
-				union
-				{
-					uint16_t Word;
-					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
-				} Data;
-				
-				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
-			
-				return Data.Word;
-			}
-
-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT
-			 *  direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next word in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_BE(void)
-			{
-				union
-				{
-					uint16_t Word;
-					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
-				} Data;
-				
-				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
-			
-				return Data.Word;
-			}
-			
-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN
-			 *  direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Word  Next word to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Pipe_Write_Word_LE(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Pipe_Write_Word_LE(const uint16_t Word)
-			{
-				UPDATX = (Word & 0xFF);
-				UPDATX = (Word >> 8);
-			}
-			
-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN
-			 *  direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Word  Next word to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Pipe_Write_Word_BE(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Pipe_Write_Word_BE(const uint16_t Word)
-			{
-				UPDATX = (Word >> 8);
-				UPDATX = (Word & 0xFF);
-			}
-
-			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 */
-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_Word(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_Word(void)
-			{
-				uint8_t Dummy;
-				
-				Dummy = UPDATX;
-				Dummy = UPDATX;
-			}
-
-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT
-			 *  direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next double word in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_LE(void)
-			{
-				union
-				{
-					uint32_t DWord;
-					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
-				} Data;
-				
-				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[2] = UPDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[3] = UPDATX;
-			
-				return Data.DWord;
-			}
-
-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT
-			 *  direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return Next double word in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_BE(void)
-			{
-				union
-				{
-					uint32_t DWord;
-					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
-				} Data;
-				
-				Data.Bytes[3] = UPDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[2] = UPDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
-				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
-			
-				return Data.DWord;
-			}
-
-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN
-			 *  direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] DWord  Next double word to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Pipe_Write_DWord_LE(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Pipe_Write_DWord_LE(const uint32_t DWord)
-			{
-				UPDATX = (DWord &  0xFF);
-				UPDATX = (DWord >> 8);
-				UPDATX = (DWord >> 16);
-				UPDATX = (DWord >> 24);
-			}
-			
-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN
-			 *  direction pipes.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] DWord  Next double word to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
-			 */
-			static inline void Pipe_Write_DWord_BE(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Pipe_Write_DWord_BE(const uint32_t DWord)
-			{
-				UPDATX = (DWord >> 24);
-				UPDATX = (DWord >> 16);
-				UPDATX = (DWord >> 8);
-				UPDATX = (DWord &  0xFF);
-			}			
-			
-			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.	
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
-			 */
-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_DWord(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_DWord(void)
-			{
-				uint8_t Dummy;
-				
-				Dummy = UPDATX;
-				Dummy = UPDATX;
-				Dummy = UPDATX;
-				Dummy = UPDATX;
-			}
-
-		/* External Variables: */
-			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control pipe located at address
-			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the attached device's device
-		     *  descriptor once the USB interface is initialized into host mode and a device is attached
-			 *  to the USB bus.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
-			 *        changed in value.
-			 */
-			extern uint8_t USB_ControlPipeSize;
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				#define __CALLBACK_PARAM     , StreamCallbackPtr_t Callback
-			#else
-				#define __CALLBACK_PARAM			
-			#endif
-
-			/** Configures the specified pipe number with the given pipe type, token, target endpoint number in the
-			 *  attached device, bank size and banking mode. Pipes should be allocated in ascending order by their
-			 *  address in the device (i.e. pipe 1 should be configured before pipe 2 and so on) to prevent fragmentation
-			 *  of the USB FIFO memory.
-			 *
-			 *  The pipe type may be one of the EP_TYPE_* macros listed in LowLevel.h, the token may be one of the
-			 *  PIPE_TOKEN_* masks.
-			 *
-			 *  The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that the pipe can handle. Different pipe
-			 *  numbers can handle different maximum packet sizes - refer to the chosen USB AVR's datasheet to
-			 *  determine the maximum bank size for each pipe.
-			 *
-			 *  The banking mode may be either \ref PIPE_BANK_SINGLE or \ref PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE.
-			 *
-			 *  A newly configured pipe is frozen by default, and must be unfrozen before use via the \ref Pipe_Unfreeze()
-			 *  before being used. Pipes should be kept frozen unless waiting for data from a device while in IN mode, or
-			 *  sending data to the device in OUT mode. IN type pipes are also automatically configured to accept infinite
-			 *  numbers of IN requests without automatic freezing - this can be overridden by a call to
-			 *  \ref Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests().
-			 *
-			 *  \note The default control pipe does not have to be manually configured, as it is automatically
-			 *        configured by the library internally.
-			 *        \n\n
-			 *
-			 *  \note This routine will select the specified pipe, and the pipe will remain selected once the
-			 *        routine completes regardless of if the pipe configuration succeeds.
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the configuration is successful, false otherwise
-			 */
-			bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t  Number, const uint8_t Type, const uint8_t Token, const uint8_t EndpointNumber,
-			                        const uint16_t Size, const uint8_t Banks);
-
-			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control pipe is ready for the next packed of data to be read 
-			 *  or written to it, aborting in the case of an error condition (such as a timeout or device disconnect).
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void);
-			
-			/** Determines if a pipe has been bound to the given device endpoint address. If a pipe which is bound to the given
-			 *  endpoint is found, it is automatically selected.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress Address and direction mask of the endpoint within the attached device to check
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if a pipe bound to the given endpoint address of the specified direction is found, false
-			 *          otherwise
-			 */
-			bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress);
-		
-			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the pipe, discarding fully read packets from the host
-			 *  as needed. The last packet is not automatically discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the
-			 *  user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the device via the \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro.
-			 *  Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready,
-			 *  allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
-			 *
-			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
-			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
-			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
-			 *
-			 *  The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
-			 *  having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected pipe.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM);
-
-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in little endian,
-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
-			 *
-			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
-			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
-			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
-			 *
-			 *  The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
-			 *  having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);				
-
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_LE().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_EStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_LE().
-			 *
-			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_PStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-						
-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in big endian,
-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
-			 *
-			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
-			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
-			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
-			 *
-			 *  The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
-			 *  having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_BE().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_EStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_BE().
-			 *
-			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_PStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in little endian,
-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
-			 *
-			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
-			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
-			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
-			 *
-			 *  The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
-			 *  having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Read_Stream_LE().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Read_EStream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in big endian,
-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
-			 *
-			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
-			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
-			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
-			 *
-			 *  The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
-			 *  having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-			
-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Read_Stream_BE().
-			 *
-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
-			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
-			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
-			 *
-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
-			 */
-			uint8_t Pipe_Read_EStream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define PIPE_TOKEN_MASK                (0x03 << PTOKEN0)
-
-			#if !defined(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)
-				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP         0
-			#endif
-			
-			#define Pipe_AllocateMemory()          MACROS{ UPCFG1X |=  (1 << ALLOC); }MACROE
-			#define Pipe_DeallocateMemory()        MACROS{ UPCFG1X &= ~(1 << ALLOC); }MACROE
-
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			void Pipe_ClearPipes(void);
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(uint16_t Bytes)
-			{
-				if (Bytes <= 8)
-				  return (0 << EPSIZE0);
-				else if (Bytes <= 16)
-				  return (1 << EPSIZE0);
-				else if (Bytes <= 32)
-				  return (2 << EPSIZE0);
-				else if (Bytes <= 64)
-				  return (3 << EPSIZE0);
-				else if (Bytes <= 128)
-				  return (4 << EPSIZE0);
-				else
-				  return (5 << EPSIZE0);
-			}
-
-	#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-	
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+ 
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB host pipe management definitions.
+ *
+ *  This file contains structures, function prototypes and macros related to the management of the device's
+ *  data pipes when the library is initialized in USB host mode.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */ 
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_PipeManagement Pipe Management
+ *
+ *  This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This
+ *  module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions
+ *  for various data types.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup Group_PipeRW Pipe Data Reading and Writing
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes.
+ */
+ 
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW  
+ *  @defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
+ *  from and to pipes.
+ */ 
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW  
+ *  @defgroup Group_PipeStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
+ *  and to pipes.
+ */ 
+ 
+/** @defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement Pipe Packet Management
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes.
+ */
+ 
+/** @defgroup Group_PipeControlReq Pipe Control Request Management
+ *
+ *  Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and
+ *  vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode.
+ *
+ *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification.
+ */ 
+
+#ifndef __PIPE_H__
+#define __PIPE_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h"
+
+		#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "../HighLevel/StreamCallbacks.h"
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an overflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW         (1 << 6)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an underflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_UNDERFLOW        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a CRC error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16            (1 << 4)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware timeout error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT          (1 << 3)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware PID error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID              (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data PID error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID          (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data toggle error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL          (1 << 0)
+
+			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a SETUP token (for CONTROL type pipes),
+			 *  which will trigger a control request on the attached device when data is written to the pipe.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP                (0 << PTOKEN0)
+
+			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a IN token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),
+			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from device to host.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOKEN_IN                   (1 << PTOKEN0)
+
+			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a OUT token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),
+			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from host to device.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOKEN_OUT                  (2 << PTOKEN0)
+
+			/** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the pipe
+			 *  should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results in slower transfers as
+			 *  only one USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access the pipe's bank at the one time.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_BANK_SINGLE                (0 << EPBK0)
+
+			/** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the pipe
+			 *  should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results in faster transfers as one
+			 *  USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access one bank while the other accesses the second
+			 *  bank.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE                (1 << EPBK0)
+			
+			/** Pipe address for the default control pipe, which always resides in address 0. This is
+			 *  defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the pipe macros.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE                0
+
+			/** Default size of the default control pipe's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value 
+			 *  in the device descriptor of the attached device.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE   64
+			
+			/** Pipe number mask, for masking against pipe addresses to retrieve the pipe's numerical address
+			 *  in the device.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK               0x07
+
+			/** Total number of pipes (including the default control pipe at address 0) which may be used in
+			 *  the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of pipes, this value reflects
+			 *  the maximum number of pipes for the currently selected AVR model.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES                7
+
+			/** Size in bytes of the largest pipe bank size possible in the device. Not all banks on each AVR
+			 *  model supports the largest bank size possible on the device; different pipe numbers support
+			 *  different maximum bank sizes. This value reflects the largest possible bank of any pipe on the
+			 *  currently selected USB AVR model.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_MAX_SIZE                   256
+
+			/** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
+			 *  numerical address in the attached device.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_EPNUM_MASK                 0x0F
+
+			/** Endpoint direction mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
+			 *  direction for comparing with the ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_* masks.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_EPDIR_MASK                 0x80
+
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current pipes's selected bank.
+				 *
+				 *  \note The return width of this function may differ, depending on the maximum pipe bank size
+				 *        of the selected AVR model.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW
+				 *
+				 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Pipe's FIFO buffer
+				 */
+				static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void);
+				
+				/** Returns the pipe address of the currently selected pipe. This is typically used to save the
+				 *  currently selected pipe number so that it can be restored after another pipe has been manipulated.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Index of the currently selected pipe
+				 */
+				static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void);
+
+				/** Selects the given pipe number. Any pipe operations which do not require the pipe number to be
+				 *  indicated will operate on the currently selected pipe.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] PipeNumber  Index of the pipe to select
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(uint8_t PipeNumber);
+				
+				/** Resets the desired pipe, including the pipe banks and flags.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] PipeNumber  Index of the pipe to reset
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(uint8_t PipeNumber);
+				
+				/** Enables the currently selected pipe so that data can be sent and received through it to and from
+				 *  an attached device.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Pipes must first be configured properly via \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe().
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void);
+
+				/** Disables the currently selected pipe so that data cannot be sent and received through it to and
+				 *  from an attached device.
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void);
+
+				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
+				 *
+				 * \return Boolean True if the currently selected pipe is enabled, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void);
+				
+				/** Gets the current pipe token, indicating the pipe's data direction and type.
+				 *
+				 *  \return The current pipe token, as a PIPE_TOKEN_* mask
+				 */
+				static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void);
+				
+				/** Sets the token for the currently selected pipe to one of the tokens specified by the PIPE_TOKEN_*
+				 *  masks. This can be used on CONTROL type pipes, to allow for bidirectional transfer of data during
+				 *  control requests, or on regular pipes to allow for half-duplex bidirectional data transfer to devices
+				 *  which have two endpoints of opposite direction sharing the same endpoint address within the device.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] Token  New pipe token to set the selected pipe to, as a PIPE_TOKEN_* mask
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(uint8_t Token);
+				
+				/** Configures the currently selected pipe to allow for an unlimited number of IN requests. */
+				static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void);
+				
+				/** Configures the currently selected pipe to only allow the specified number of IN requests to be
+				 *  accepted by the pipe before it is automatically frozen.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] TotalINRequests  Total number of IN requests that the pipe may receive before freezing
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(uint8_t TotalINRequests);
+
+				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is configured.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the selected pipe is configured, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void);
+				
+				/** Retrieves the endpoint number of the endpoint within the attached device that the currently selected
+				 *  pipe is bound to.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endpoint number the currently selected pipe is bound to
+				 */
+				static inline uint8_t Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber(void);
+
+				/** Sets the period between interrupts for an INTERRUPT type pipe to a specified number of milliseconds.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] Milliseconds  Number of milliseconds between each pipe poll
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(uint8_t Milliseconds);
+				
+				/** Returns a mask indicating which pipe's interrupt periods have elapsed, indicating that the pipe should
+				 *  be serviced.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which pipes have interrupted
+				 */
+				static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the specified pipe number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
+				 *  pipes).
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] PipeNumber  Index of the pipe whose interrupt flag should be tested
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the specified pipe has interrupted, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(uint8_t PipeNumber);
+				
+				/** Unfreezes the selected pipe, allowing it to communicate with an attached device. */
+				static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void);
+				
+				/** Freezes the selected pipe, preventing it from communicating with an attached device. */
+				static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void);
+
+				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is frozen, and not able to accept data.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the currently selected pipe is frozen, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void);
+				
+				/** Clears the master pipe error flag. */
+				static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the master pipe error flag is set for the currently selected pipe, indicating that
+				 *  some sort of hardware error has occurred on the pipe.
+				 *
+				 *  \see \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags() macro for information on retrieving the exact error flag.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if an error has occurred on the selected pipe, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void);
+				
+				/** Clears all the currently selected pipe's hardware error flags, but does not clear the master error
+				 *  flag for the pipe.
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_ClearErrorFlags(void);
+				
+				/** Gets a mask of the hardware error flags which have occurred on the currently selected pipe. This
+				 *  value can then be masked against the PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* masks to determine what error has occurred.
+				 *
+				 *  \return  Mask comprising of PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* bits indicating what error has occurred on the selected pipe
+				 */
+				static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe may be read from (if data is waiting in the pipe
+				 *  bank and the pipe is an IN direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the pipe is an OUT
+				 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the pipe, or if the pipe
+				 *  is an IN direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the pipe is an OUT
+				 *  direction and the pipe bank is full.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This function is not valid on CONTROL type pipes.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+				 *  
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the currently selected pipe may be read from or written to, depending on its direction
+				 */
+				static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if an IN request has been received on the currently selected pipe.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the current pipe has received an IN packet, false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void);
+				
+				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is ready to send an OUT request.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the current pipe is ready for an OUT packet, false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void);
+
+				/** Determines if no SETUP request is currently being sent to the attached device on the selected
+				 *  CONTROL type pipe.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the current pipe is ready for a SETUP packet, false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void);
+				
+				/** Sends the currently selected CONTROL type pipe's contents to the device as a SETUP packet.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement		
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void);
+
+				/** Acknowledges the reception of a setup IN request from the attached device on the currently selected
+				 *  pipe, freeing the bank ready for the next packet.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void);
+
+				/** Sends the currently selected pipe's contents to the device as an OUT packet on the selected pipe, freeing
+				 *  the bank ready for the next packet.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void);
+
+				/** Determines if the device sent a NAK (Negative Acknowledge) in response to the last sent packet on
+				 *  the currently selected pipe. This occurs when the host sends a packet to the device, but the device
+				 *  is not currently ready to handle the packet (i.e. its endpoint banks are full). Once a NAK has been
+				 *  received, it must be cleared using \ref Pipe_ClearNAKReceived() before the previous (or any other) packet
+				 *  can be re-sent.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if an NAK has been received on the current pipe, false otherwise
+				 */
+				static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void);
+
+				/** Clears the NAK condition on the currently selected pipe.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \see \ref Pipe_IsNAKReceived() for more details.
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void);
+				 
+				/** Determines if the currently selected pipe has had the STALL condition set by the attached device.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean true if the current pipe has been stalled by the attached device, false otherwise
+				*/
+				static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void);
+				
+				/** Clears the STALL condition detection flag on the currently selected pipe, but does not clear the
+				 *  STALL condition itself (this must be done via a ClearFeature control request to the device).
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+				 */
+				static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void);
+			#else
+				#define Pipe_BytesInPipe()             UPBCX
+
+				#define Pipe_GetCurrentPipe()          (UPNUM & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK)
+
+				#define Pipe_SelectPipe(pipenum)       MACROS{ UPNUM = (pipenum); }MACROE
+				
+				#define Pipe_ResetPipe(pipenum)        MACROS{ UPRST = (1 << (pipenum)); UPRST = 0; }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_EnablePipe()              MACROS{ UPCONX |= (1 << PEN); }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_DisablePipe()             MACROS{ UPCONX &= ~(1 << PEN); }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_IsEnabled()               ((UPCONX & (1 << PEN)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Pipe_GetPipeToken()            (UPCFG0X & PIPE_TOKEN_MASK)
+
+				#define Pipe_SetPipeToken(token)       MACROS{ UPCFG0X = ((UPCFG0X & ~PIPE_TOKEN_MASK) | (token)); }MACROE
+				
+				#define Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests()   MACROS{ UPCONX |= (1 << INMODE); }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(n)    MACROS{ UPCONX &= ~(1 << INMODE); UPINRQX = (n); }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_IsConfigured()            ((UPSTAX  & (1 << CFGOK)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber()     ((UPCFG0X >> PEPNUM0) & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK)
+				
+				#define Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(ms)    MACROS{ UPCFG2X = (ms); }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts()       UPINT
+
+				#define Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(n)     ((UPINT & (1 << (n))) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Pipe_Unfreeze()                MACROS{ UPCONX &= ~(1 << PFREEZE); }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_Freeze()                  MACROS{ UPCONX |= (1 << PFREEZE); }MACROE
+				
+				#define Pipe_IsFrozen()                ((UPCONX & (1 << PFREEZE)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Pipe_ClearError()              MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << PERRI); }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_IsError()                 ((UPINTX & (1 << PERRI)) ? true : false)
+				
+				#define Pipe_ClearErrorFlags()         MACROS{ UPERRX = 0; }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_GetErrorFlags()           ((UPERRX & (PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT | \
+				                                                   PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID   | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID | \
+				                                                   PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL))                      | \
+				                                        (UPSTAX & PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_UNDERFLOW))
+
+				#define Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()      ((UPINTX & (1 << RWAL)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Pipe_IsINReceived()            ((UPINTX & (1 << RXINI)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Pipe_IsOUTReady()              ((UPINTX & (1 << TXOUTI)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Pipe_IsSETUPSent()             ((UPINTX & (1 << TXSTPI)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Pipe_ClearIN()                 MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~((1 << RXINI) | (1 << FIFOCON)); }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_ClearOUT()                MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~((1 << TXOUTI) | (1 << FIFOCON)); }MACROE
+				
+				#define Pipe_ClearSETUP()              MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~((1 << TXSTPI) | (1 << FIFOCON)); }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_IsNAKReceived()           ((UPINTX & (1 << NAKEDI)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Pipe_ClearNAKReceived()        MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << NAKEDI); }MACROE
+
+				#define Pipe_IsStalled()               ((UPINTX & (1 << RXSTALLI)) ? true : false)
+
+				#define Pipe_ClearStall()              MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTALLI); }MACROE
+			#endif
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Pipe_WaitUntilReady function
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW
+			 */
+			enum Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Pipe ready for next packet, no error */
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled             = 1,	/**< The device stalled the pipe while waiting. */			
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while waiting. */
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                             *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                             *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                             */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Pipe_*_Stream_* functions.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW
+			 */
+			enum Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
+				PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled        = 1, /**< The device stalled the pipe during the transfer. */		
+				PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
+			                                           *   the transfer.
+			                                           */		
+				PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout            = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                       *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                       *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                       */
+				PIPE_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted    = 4, /**< Indicates that the stream's callback function aborted
+			                                           *   the transfer early.
+				                                       */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_Byte(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_Byte(void)
+			{
+				return UPDATX;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for IN direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Next byte to write into the the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_Byte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_Byte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				UPDATX = Byte;
+			}
+
+			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_Byte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_Byte(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+				
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+			}
+			
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next word in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_LE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint16_t Word;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+				} Data;
+				
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
+			
+				return Data.Word;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next word in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_BE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint16_t Word;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+				} Data;
+				
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
+			
+				return Data.Word;
+			}
+			
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Word  Next word to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_Word_LE(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_Word_LE(const uint16_t Word)
+			{
+				UPDATX = (Word & 0xFF);
+				UPDATX = (Word >> 8);
+			}
+			
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Word  Next word to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_Word_BE(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_Word_BE(const uint16_t Word)
+			{
+				UPDATX = (Word >> 8);
+				UPDATX = (Word & 0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_Word(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_Word(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+				
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next double word in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_LE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint32_t DWord;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
+				} Data;
+				
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[2] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[3] = UPDATX;
+			
+				return Data.DWord;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next double word in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_BE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint32_t DWord;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
+				} Data;
+				
+				Data.Bytes[3] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[2] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
+			
+				return Data.DWord;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DWord  Next double word to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_DWord_LE(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_DWord_LE(const uint32_t DWord)
+			{
+				UPDATX = (DWord &  0xFF);
+				UPDATX = (DWord >> 8);
+				UPDATX = (DWord >> 16);
+				UPDATX = (DWord >> 24);
+			}
+			
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DWord  Next double word to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_DWord_BE(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_DWord_BE(const uint32_t DWord)
+			{
+				UPDATX = (DWord >> 24);
+				UPDATX = (DWord >> 16);
+				UPDATX = (DWord >> 8);
+				UPDATX = (DWord &  0xFF);
+			}			
+			
+			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.	
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_DWord(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_DWord(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+				
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+			}
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control pipe located at address
+			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the attached device's device
+		     *  descriptor once the USB interface is initialized into host mode and a device is attached
+			 *  to the USB bus.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *        changed in value.
+			 */
+			extern uint8_t USB_ControlPipeSize;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#define __CALLBACK_PARAM     , StreamCallbackPtr_t Callback
+			#else
+				#define __CALLBACK_PARAM			
+			#endif
+
+			/** Configures the specified pipe number with the given pipe type, token, target endpoint number in the
+			 *  attached device, bank size and banking mode. Pipes should be allocated in ascending order by their
+			 *  address in the device (i.e. pipe 1 should be configured before pipe 2 and so on) to prevent fragmentation
+			 *  of the USB FIFO memory.
+			 *
+			 *  The pipe type may be one of the EP_TYPE_* macros listed in LowLevel.h, the token may be one of the
+			 *  PIPE_TOKEN_* masks.
+			 *
+			 *  The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that the pipe can handle. Different pipe
+			 *  numbers can handle different maximum packet sizes - refer to the chosen USB AVR's datasheet to
+			 *  determine the maximum bank size for each pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  The banking mode may be either \ref PIPE_BANK_SINGLE or \ref PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE.
+			 *
+			 *  A newly configured pipe is frozen by default, and must be unfrozen before use via the \ref Pipe_Unfreeze()
+			 *  before being used. Pipes should be kept frozen unless waiting for data from a device while in IN mode, or
+			 *  sending data to the device in OUT mode. IN type pipes are also automatically configured to accept infinite
+			 *  numbers of IN requests without automatic freezing - this can be overridden by a call to
+			 *  \ref Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests().
+			 *
+			 *  \note The default control pipe does not have to be manually configured, as it is automatically
+			 *        configured by the library internally.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine will select the specified pipe, and the pipe will remain selected once the
+			 *        routine completes regardless of if the pipe configuration succeeds.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the configuration is successful, false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t  Number, const uint8_t Type, const uint8_t Token, const uint8_t EndpointNumber,
+			                        const uint16_t Size, const uint8_t Banks);
+
+			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control pipe is ready for the next packed of data to be read 
+			 *  or written to it, aborting in the case of an error condition (such as a timeout or device disconnect).
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void);
+			
+			/** Determines if a pipe has been bound to the given device endpoint address. If a pipe which is bound to the given
+			 *  endpoint is found, it is automatically selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress Address and direction mask of the endpoint within the attached device to check
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if a pipe bound to the given endpoint address of the specified direction is found, false
+			 *          otherwise
+			 */
+			bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress);
+		
+			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the pipe, discarding fully read packets from the host
+			 *  as needed. The last packet is not automatically discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the
+			 *  user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the device via the \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *  Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready,
+			 *  allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
+			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
+			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
+			 *
+			 *  The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *  having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected pipe.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
+			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
+			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
+			 *
+			 *  The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *  having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);				
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_EStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_PStream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+						
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
+			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
+			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
+			 *
+			 *  The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *  having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_EStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer    Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_PStream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
+			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
+			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
+			 *
+			 *  The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *  having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Read_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Read_EStream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *	The callback routine should be created according to the information in \ref Group_StreamCallbacks.
+			 *  If the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are
+			 *  disabled and this function has the Callback parameter omitted.
+			 *
+			 *  The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *  having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Read_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in] Length    Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Callback  Name of a callback routine to call between successive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Read_EStream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define PIPE_TOKEN_MASK                (0x03 << PTOKEN0)
+
+			#if !defined(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)
+				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP         0
+			#endif
+			
+			#define Pipe_AllocateMemory()          MACROS{ UPCFG1X |=  (1 << ALLOC); }MACROE
+			#define Pipe_DeallocateMemory()        MACROS{ UPCFG1X &= ~(1 << ALLOC); }MACROE
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void Pipe_ClearPipes(void);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(uint16_t Bytes)
+			{
+				if (Bytes <= 8)
+				  return (0 << EPSIZE0);
+				else if (Bytes <= 16)
+				  return (1 << EPSIZE0);
+				else if (Bytes <= 32)
+				  return (2 << EPSIZE0);
+				else if (Bytes <= 64)
+				  return (3 << EPSIZE0);
+				else if (Bytes <= 128)
+				  return (4 << EPSIZE0);
+				else
+				  return (5 << EPSIZE0);
+			}
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+	
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
index 92b5396d7..db976440a 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
@@ -1,44 +1,44 @@
-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (void* Buffer, uint16_t Length)
-{
-	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
-	
-	if (!(Length))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	
-	while (Length)
-	{
-		if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
-
-		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-		else if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
-		  
-		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-		{
-			while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
-			{
-				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-				Length--;
-			}
-			
-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-		}		  
-	}
-	
-	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
-	{
-		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-		else if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
-	}
-	
-	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (void* Buffer, uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	
+	if (!(Length))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		  
+		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+		{
+			while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
+			{
+				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+				Length--;
+			}
+			
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		}		  
+	}
+	
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+	{
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+	}
+	
+	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
 #undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
index 8a5be11f1..91f4e963b 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
@@ -1,53 +1,53 @@
-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length)
-{
-	uint8_t* DataStream     = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
-	bool     LastPacketFull = false;
-	
-	if (Length > USB_ControlRequest.wLength)
-	  Length = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
-	else if (!(Length))
-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	while (Length || LastPacketFull)
-	{
-		if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
-
-		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-		  break;
-		
-		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-		else if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
-		  
-		if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
-		{
-			uint8_t BytesInEndpoint = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
-		
-			while (Length && (BytesInEndpoint < USB_ControlEndpointSize))
-			{
-				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-				Length--;
-				BytesInEndpoint++;
-			}
-			
-			LastPacketFull = (BytesInEndpoint == USB_ControlEndpointSize);
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		}
-	}
-	
-	while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
-	{
-		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
-		else if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
-	}
-
-	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream     = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	bool     LastPacketFull = false;
+	
+	if (Length > USB_ControlRequest.wLength)
+	  Length = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+	else if (!(Length))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	while (Length || LastPacketFull)
+	{
+		if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+
+		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+		  break;
+		
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		  
+		if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+		{
+			uint8_t BytesInEndpoint = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
+		
+			while (Length && (BytesInEndpoint < USB_ControlEndpointSize))
+			{
+				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+				Length--;
+				BytesInEndpoint++;
+			}
+			
+			LastPacketFull = (BytesInEndpoint == USB_ControlEndpointSize);
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+	
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+	{
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
 #undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
index 9e86eed3a..4e9c32407 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM)
-{
-	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
-	
-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	#if defined(FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS)
-	uint8_t BytesRemToAlignment = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() & 0x07);
-
-	if (Length >= 8)
-	{
-		Length -= BytesRemToAlignment;
-
-		switch (BytesRemToAlignment)
-		{
-			default:
-				do
-				{
-					if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-					{
-						TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();
-
-						#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-						if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
-						  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
-						#endif
-
-						if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
-						  return ErrorCode;
-					}
-
-					Length -= 8;
-					
-					TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 7: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 6: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 5: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 4: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 3: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 2: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 1:	TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-				} while (Length >= 8);	
-		}
-	}
-	#endif
-
-	while (Length)
-	{
-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-		{
-			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();
-
-			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
-			  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
-			#endif
-
-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
-			  return ErrorCode;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			Length--;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE
-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
-#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	#if defined(FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS)
+	uint8_t BytesRemToAlignment = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() & 0x07);
+
+	if (Length >= 8)
+	{
+		Length -= BytesRemToAlignment;
+
+		switch (BytesRemToAlignment)
+		{
+			default:
+				do
+				{
+					if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+					{
+						TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();
+
+						#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+						if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
+						  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
+						#endif
+
+						if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+						  return ErrorCode;
+					}
+
+					Length -= 8;
+					
+					TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 7: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 6: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 5: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 4: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 3: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 2: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 1:	TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+				} while (Length >= 8);	
+		}
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();
+
+			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
+			  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
+			#endif
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			Length--;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT
 #undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
index ef8035d50..4fa83f5c5 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM)
-{
-	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
-	
-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(TEMPLATE_TOKEN);
-
-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
-	  return ErrorCode;
-
-	#if defined(FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS)
-	uint8_t BytesRemToAlignment = (Pipe_BytesInPipe() & 0x07);
-
-	if (Length >= 8)
-	{
-		Length -= BytesRemToAlignment;
-
-		switch (BytesRemToAlignment)
-		{
-			default:
-				do
-				{
-					if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-					{
-						TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE();
-
-						#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-						if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
-						  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
-						#endif
-
-						if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
-						  return ErrorCode;
-					}
-
-					Length -= 8;
-					
-					TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 7: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 6: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 5: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 4: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 3: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 2: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			case 1:	TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-				} while (Length >= 8);	
-		}
-	}
-	#endif
-
-	while (Length)
-	{
-		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-		{
-			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE();
-
-			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
-			if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
-			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
-			#endif
-
-			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
-			  return ErrorCode;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
-			Length--;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE
-#undef TEMPLATE_TOKEN
-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
-#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE Buffer, uint16_t Length __CALLBACK_PARAM)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(TEMPLATE_TOKEN);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	#if defined(FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS)
+	uint8_t BytesRemToAlignment = (Pipe_BytesInPipe() & 0x07);
+
+	if (Length >= 8)
+	{
+		Length -= BytesRemToAlignment;
+
+		switch (BytesRemToAlignment)
+		{
+			default:
+				do
+				{
+					if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+					{
+						TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE();
+
+						#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+						if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
+						  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
+						#endif
+
+						if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+						  return ErrorCode;
+					}
+
+					Length -= 8;
+					
+					TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 7: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 6: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 5: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 4: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 3: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 2: TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			case 1:	TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+				} while (Length >= 8);	
+		}
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE();
+
+			#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS)
+			if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort))
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_CallbackAborted;
+			#endif
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			Length--;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE
+#undef TEMPLATE_TOKEN
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c
index 2d9e35b72..7edd3ce6a 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c
@@ -1,247 +1,247 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "USBInterrupt.h"
-
-void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void)
-{
-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-	USBCON &= ~((1 << VBUSTE) | (1 << IDTE));				
-	#elif defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)
-	USBCON &= ~(1 << VBUSTE);
-	#endif
-	
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-	UHIEN   = 0;
-	OTGIEN  = 0;
-	#endif
-	
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-	UDIEN   = 0;
-	#endif
-}
-
-void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void)
-{
-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-	USBINT  = 0;
-	#endif
-	
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-	UHINT   = 0;
-	OTGINT  = 0;
-	#endif
-	
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-	UDINT   = 0;
-	#endif
-}
-
-ISR(USB_GEN_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
-{
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBUS) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBUS))
-	{
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBUS);
-
-		if (USB_VBUS_GetStatus())
-		{
-			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
-			EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;		
-			EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
-		}
-	}
-	#endif
-
-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SUSPEND) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SUSPEND))
-	{
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
-
-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUP);
-		
-		USB_CLK_Freeze();
-		
-		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
-		  USB_PLL_Off();
-
-		#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) && !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)
-		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
-		EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
-		#else
-		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended;
-		EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend();
-		#endif
-	}
-
-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_WAKEUP) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_WAKEUP))
-	{
-		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
-		{
-			USB_PLL_On();
-			while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));
-		}
-
-		USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
-
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_WAKEUP);
-
-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_WAKEUP);
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
-		
-		#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) && !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)
-		USB_DeviceState = (USB_ConfigurationNumber) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
-		EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();
-		#else
-		USB_DeviceState = (USB_ConfigurationNumber) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Addressed;
-		EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp();		
-		#endif
-	}
-   
-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_EORSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_EORSTI))
-	{
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);
-
-		USB_DeviceState         = DEVICE_STATE_Default;
-		USB_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
-
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUP);
-
-		Endpoint_ClearEndpoints();
-
-		Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
-		                           ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_ControlEndpointSize,
-		                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-		#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
-		#endif
-
-		EVENT_USB_Device_Reset();
-	}
-	
-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI))
-	{
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);
-		
-		EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame();
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DDISCI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DDISCI))
-	{
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-			
-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
-
-		USB_ResetInterface();
-	}
-	
-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBERRI))
-	{
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);
-
-		USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();
-		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
-
-		EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip);
-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
-
-		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached;
-	}
-
-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SRPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SRPI))
-	{
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SRPI);
-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SRPI);
-	
-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached();
-
-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-		
-		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered;
-	}
-
-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BCERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_BCERRI))
-	{
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BCERRI);
-		
-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected, 0);
-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
-
-		USB_ResetInterface();
-	}
-	#endif
-
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_IDTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_IDTI))
-	{		
-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);
-
-		if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-		  EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
-
-		if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached)
-		  EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
-		
-		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
-		EVENT_USB_UIDChange();
-
-		USB_ResetInterface();
-	}
-	#endif
-}
-
-#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT) && defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-ISR(USB_COM_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
-{
-	uint8_t PrevSelectedEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
-
-	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
-	sei();
-	USB_USBTask();
-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
-
-	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
-	
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevSelectedEndpoint);
-}
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "USBInterrupt.h"
+
+void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	USBCON &= ~((1 << VBUSTE) | (1 << IDTE));				
+	#elif defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)
+	USBCON &= ~(1 << VBUSTE);
+	#endif
+	
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+	UHIEN   = 0;
+	OTGIEN  = 0;
+	#endif
+	
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+	UDIEN   = 0;
+	#endif
+}
+
+void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	USBINT  = 0;
+	#endif
+	
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+	UHINT   = 0;
+	OTGINT  = 0;
+	#endif
+	
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+	UDINT   = 0;
+	#endif
+}
+
+ISR(USB_GEN_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBUS) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBUS))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBUS);
+
+		if (USB_VBUS_GetStatus())
+		{
+			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
+			EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;		
+			EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
+		}
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SUSPEND) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SUSPEND))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
+
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUP);
+		
+		USB_CLK_Freeze();
+		
+		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+		  USB_PLL_Off();
+
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) && !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)
+		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
+		#else
+		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended;
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend();
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_WAKEUP) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_WAKEUP))
+	{
+		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+		{
+			USB_PLL_On();
+			while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));
+		}
+
+		USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
+
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_WAKEUP);
+
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_WAKEUP);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
+		
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) && !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)
+		USB_DeviceState = (USB_ConfigurationNumber) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();
+		#else
+		USB_DeviceState = (USB_ConfigurationNumber) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Addressed;
+		EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp();		
+		#endif
+	}
+   
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_EORSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_EORSTI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);
+
+		USB_DeviceState         = DEVICE_STATE_Default;
+		USB_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
+
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPEND);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUP);
+
+		Endpoint_ClearEndpoints();
+
+		Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
+		                           ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_ControlEndpointSize,
+		                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+		#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
+		#endif
+
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Reset();
+	}
+	
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);
+		
+		EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame();
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DDISCI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DDISCI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+			
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+	}
+	
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBERRI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);
+
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip);
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SRPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SRPI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SRPI);
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SRPI);
+	
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached();
+
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+		
+		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BCERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_BCERRI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BCERRI);
+		
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected, 0);
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_IDTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_IDTI))
+	{		
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
+
+		if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+		
+		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
+		EVENT_USB_UIDChange();
+
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+	}
+	#endif
+}
+
+#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT) && defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+ISR(USB_COM_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevSelectedEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
+
+	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
+	sei();
+	USB_USBTask();
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
+
+	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
+	
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevSelectedEndpoint);
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.h
index e46e7597b..a191a2994 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.h
@@ -1,103 +1,103 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief USB controller interrupt service routine management.
- *
- *  This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts
- *  from the USB controller.
- *
- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
- 
-#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_H__
-#define __USBINTERRUPT_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-		#include "../HighLevel/Events.h"
-		#include "LowLevel.h"
-		
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define USB_INT_Enable(int)              MACROS{ USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(int)   |=   USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(int);   }MACROE
-			#define USB_INT_Disable(int)             MACROS{ USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(int)   &= ~(USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(int));  }MACROE
-			#define USB_INT_Clear(int)               MACROS{ USB_INT_GET_INT_REG(int)  &= ~(USB_INT_GET_INT_MASK(int)); }MACROE
-			#define USB_INT_IsEnabled(int)                 ((USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(int)   &    USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(int)) ? true : false)
-			#define USB_INT_HasOccurred(int)               ((USB_INT_GET_INT_REG(int)  &    USB_INT_GET_INT_MASK(int)) ? true : false)
-
-			#define USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(a, b, c, d)           a
-			#define USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(a, b, c, d)          b
-			#define USB_INT_GET_INT_REG(a, b, c, d)          c
-			#define USB_INT_GET_INT_MASK(a, b, c, d)         d
-
-			#define USB_INT_VBUS                             USBCON, (1 << VBUSTE) , USBINT, (1 << VBUSTI)
-			#define USB_INT_IDTI                             USBCON, (1 << IDTE)   , USBINT, (1 << IDTI)
-			#define USB_INT_WAKEUP                           UDIEN , (1 << WAKEUPE), UDINT , (1 << WAKEUPI)
-			#define USB_INT_SUSPEND                          UDIEN , (1 << SUSPE)  , UDINT , (1 << SUSPI)
-			#define USB_INT_EORSTI                           UDIEN , (1 << EORSTE) , UDINT , (1 << EORSTI)
-			#define USB_INT_DCONNI                           UHIEN , (1 << DCONNE) , UHINT , (1 << DCONNI)
-			#define USB_INT_DDISCI                           UHIEN , (1 << DDISCE) , UHINT , (1 << DDISCI)
-			#define USB_INT_BCERRI                           OTGIEN, (1 << BCERRE) , OTGINT, (1 << BCERRI)
-			#define USB_INT_VBERRI                           OTGIEN, (1 << VBERRE) , OTGINT, (1 << VBERRI)
-			#define USB_INT_SOFI                             UDIEN,  (1 << SOFE)   , UDINT , (1 << SOFI)
-			#define USB_INT_HSOFI                            UHIEN,  (1 << HSOFE)  , UHINT , (1 << HSOFI)
-			#define USB_INT_RSTI                             UHIEN , (1 << RSTE)   , UHINT , (1 << RSTI)
-			#define USB_INT_SRPI                             OTGIEN, (1 << SRPE)   , OTGINT, (1 << SRPI)
-			#define USB_INT_RXSTPI                           UEIENX, (1 << RXSTPE) , UEINTX, (1 << RXSTPI)
-	
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void);
-			void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void);
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB controller interrupt service routine management.
+ *
+ *  This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts
+ *  from the USB controller.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_H__
+#define __USBINTERRUPT_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+		#include "../HighLevel/Events.h"
+		#include "LowLevel.h"
+		
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define USB_INT_Enable(int)              MACROS{ USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(int)   |=   USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(int);   }MACROE
+			#define USB_INT_Disable(int)             MACROS{ USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(int)   &= ~(USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(int));  }MACROE
+			#define USB_INT_Clear(int)               MACROS{ USB_INT_GET_INT_REG(int)  &= ~(USB_INT_GET_INT_MASK(int)); }MACROE
+			#define USB_INT_IsEnabled(int)                 ((USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(int)   &    USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(int)) ? true : false)
+			#define USB_INT_HasOccurred(int)               ((USB_INT_GET_INT_REG(int)  &    USB_INT_GET_INT_MASK(int)) ? true : false)
+
+			#define USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(a, b, c, d)           a
+			#define USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(a, b, c, d)          b
+			#define USB_INT_GET_INT_REG(a, b, c, d)          c
+			#define USB_INT_GET_INT_MASK(a, b, c, d)         d
+
+			#define USB_INT_VBUS                             USBCON, (1 << VBUSTE) , USBINT, (1 << VBUSTI)
+			#define USB_INT_IDTI                             USBCON, (1 << IDTE)   , USBINT, (1 << IDTI)
+			#define USB_INT_WAKEUP                           UDIEN , (1 << WAKEUPE), UDINT , (1 << WAKEUPI)
+			#define USB_INT_SUSPEND                          UDIEN , (1 << SUSPE)  , UDINT , (1 << SUSPI)
+			#define USB_INT_EORSTI                           UDIEN , (1 << EORSTE) , UDINT , (1 << EORSTI)
+			#define USB_INT_DCONNI                           UHIEN , (1 << DCONNE) , UHINT , (1 << DCONNI)
+			#define USB_INT_DDISCI                           UHIEN , (1 << DDISCE) , UHINT , (1 << DDISCI)
+			#define USB_INT_BCERRI                           OTGIEN, (1 << BCERRE) , OTGINT, (1 << BCERRI)
+			#define USB_INT_VBERRI                           OTGIEN, (1 << VBERRE) , OTGINT, (1 << VBERRI)
+			#define USB_INT_SOFI                             UDIEN,  (1 << SOFE)   , UDINT , (1 << SOFI)
+			#define USB_INT_HSOFI                            UHIEN,  (1 << HSOFE)  , UHINT , (1 << HSOFI)
+			#define USB_INT_RSTI                             UHIEN , (1 << RSTE)   , UHINT , (1 << RSTI)
+			#define USB_INT_SRPI                             OTGIEN, (1 << SRPE)   , OTGINT, (1 << SRPI)
+			#define USB_INT_RXSTPI                           UEIENX, (1 << RXSTPE) , UEINTX, (1 << RXSTPI)
+	
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void);
+			void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void);
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h
index cb59cc6ac..8b151b59f 100644
--- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h
+++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h
@@ -1,395 +1,395 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB functionality.
- *
- *  Master include file for the library USB functionality.
- *
- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of the USB portions of the library, instead of
- *  including any headers in the USB/LowLevel/ or USB/HighLevel/ subdirectories.
- */
-
-/** @defgroup Group_USB USB - LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c
- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Driver and framework for the USB controller hardware on the USB series of AVR microcontrollers. This module
- *  consists of many submodules, and is designed to provide an easy way to configure and control USB host, device
- *  or OTG mode USB applications.
- *
- *  The USB stack requires the sole control over the USB controller in the microcontroller only; i.e. it does not
- *  require any additional AVR timers, etc. to operate. This ensures that the USB stack requires as few resources
- *  as possible.
- *
- *  The USB stack can be used in Device Mode for connections to USB Hosts (see \ref Group_Device), in Host mode for
- *  hosting of other USB devices (see \ref Group_Host), or as a dual role device which can either act as a USB host
- *  or device depending on what peripheral is connected (see \ref Group_OTG). Both modes also require a common set
- *  of USB management functions found \ref Group_USBManagement.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- *  @defgroup Group_USBClassDrivers USB Class Drivers
- *
- *  Drivers for both host and device mode of the standard USB classes, for rapid application development.
- *  Class drivers give a framework which sits on top of the low level library API, allowing for standard
- *  USB classes to be implemented in a project with minimal user code. These drivers can be used in
- *  conjunction with the library low level APIs to implement interfaces both via the class drivers and via
- *  the standard library APIs.
- *
- *  Multiple device mode class drivers can be used within a project, including multiple instances of the
- *  same class driver. In this way, USB Hosts and Devices can be made quickly using the internal class drivers
- *  so that more time and effort can be put into the end application instead of the USB protocol.
- *
- *  The available class drivers and their modes are listed below.
- *
- *  <table>
- *  <tr>
- *   <th width="100px">USB Class</th> 
- *   <th width="90px">Device Mode</th> 
- *   <th width="90px">Host Mode</th> 
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td>Audio</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td>CDC</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td>HID</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td>MIDI</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td>Mass Storage</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td>Printer</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
-*    <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td>RNDIS</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td>Still Image</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *
- *  \section Sec_UsingClassDrivers Using the Class Drivers
- *  To make the Class drivers easy to integrate into a user application, they all implement a standardized
- *  design with similarly named/used function, enums, defines and types. The two different modes are implemented
- *  slightly differently, and thus will be explained separately. For information on a specific class driver, read
- *  the class driver's module documentation.
- *
- *  \subsection SSec_ClassDriverDevice Device Mode Class Drivers
- *  Implementing a Device Mode Class Driver in a user application requires a number of steps to be followed. Firstly,
- *  the module configuration and state structure must be added to the project source. These structures are named in a 
- *  similar manner between classes, that of <i>USB_ClassInfo_<b>{Class Name}</b>_Device_t</i>, and are used to hold the
- *  complete state and configuration for each class instance. Multiple class instances is where the power of the class 
- *  drivers lie; multiple interfaces of the same class simply require more instances of the Class Driver's ClassInfo 
- *  structure.
- *
- *  Inside the ClassInfo structure lies two sections, a <i>Config</i> section, and a <i>State</i> section. The Config
- *  section contains the instance's configuration parameters, and <b>must have all fields set by the user application</b>
- *  before the class driver is used. Each Device mode Class driver typically contains a set of configuration parameters
- *  for the endpoint size/number of the associated logical USB interface, plus any class-specific configuration parameters.
- *
- *  The <i>State</i> section of the ClassInfo structures are designed to be controlled by the Class Drivers only for
- *  maintaining the Class Driver instance's state, and should not normally be set by the user application.
- *
- *  The following is an example of a properly initialized instance of the Audio Class Driver structure:
- *
- *  \code
- *  USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t My_Audio_Interface =
- *  {
- *      .Config =
- *          {
- *              .StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
- *              
- *              .DataINEndpointNumber     = 1,
- *              .DataINEndpointSize       = 256,
- *          },
- *  };
- *  \endcode
- *
- *  \note The class driver's configuration parameters should match those used in the device's descriptors that are
- *  sent to the host.
- *
- *  To initialize the Class driver instance, the driver's <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_Device_ConfigureEndpoints()</i> function
- *  should be called in response to the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event. This function will return a
- *  boolean value if the driver sucessfully initialized the instance. Like all the class driver functions, this function
- *  takes in the address of the specific instance you wish to initialize - in this manner, multiple seperate instances of
- *  the same class type can be initialized like thus:
- *
- *  \code
- *  void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
- *  {
- *  	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
- *  	
- *  	if (!(Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&My_Audio_Interface)))
- *  	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
- *  }
- *  \endcode
- * 
- *  Once initialized, it is important to maintain the class driver's state by repeatedly calling the Class Driver's
- *  <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_Device_USBTask()</i> function in the main program loop. The exact implementation of this
- *  function varies between class drivers, and can be used for any internal class driver purpose to maintain each
- *  instance. Again, this function uses the address of the instance to operate on, and thus needs to be called for each
- *  seperate instance, just like the main USB maintenance routine \ref USB_USBTask():
- *
- *  \code
- *  int main(void)
- *  {
- *      SetupHardware();
- *  
- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
- *  
- *      for (;;)
- *      {
- *          Create_And_Process_Samples();
- *      
- *          Audio_Device_USBTask(&My_Audio_Interface);
- *          USB_USBTask();
- *      }
- *  }
- *  \endcode
- *
- *  The final standardized Device Class Driver function is the Control Request handler function
- *  <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_Device_ProcessControlRequest()</i>, which should be called when the
- *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event fires. This function should also be
- *  called for each class driver instance, using the address of the instance to operate on as
- *  the function's parameter. The request handler will abort if it is determined that the current
- *  request is not targeted at the given class driver instance, thus these methods can safely be
- *  called one-after-another in the event handler with no form of error checking:
- *
- *  \code
- *  void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
- *  {
- *      Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&My_Audio_Interface);
- *  }
- *  \endcode
- *
- *  Each class driver may also define a set of callback functions (which are prefixed by "CALLBACK_"
- *  in the function's name) which <b>must</b> also be added to the user application - refer to each
- *  individual class driver's documentation for mandatory callbacks. In addition, each class driver may
- *  also define a set of events (identifiable by their prefix of "EVENT_" in the function's name), which
- *  the user application <b>may</b> choose to implement, or ignore if not needed.
- *
- *  The individual Device Mode Class Driver documentation contains more information on the non-standardized,
- *  class-specific functions which the user application can then use on the driver instances, such as data
- *  read and write routines. See each driver's individual documentation for more information on the
- *  class-specific functions.
- *
- *  \subsection SSec_ClassDriverHost Host Mode Class Drivers
- *  Implementing a Host Mode Class Driver in a user application requires a number of steps to be followed. Firstly,
- *  the module configuration and state structure must be added to the project source. These structures are named in a 
- *  similar manner between classes, that of <i>USB_ClassInfo_<b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_t</i>, and are used to hold the
- *  complete state and configuration for each class instance. Multiple class instances is where the power of the class 
- *  drivers lie; multiple interfaces of the same class simply require more instances of the Class Driver's ClassInfo 
- *  structure.
- *
- *  Inside the ClassInfo structure lies two sections, a <i>Config</i> section, and a <i>State</i> section. The Config
- *  section contains the instance's configuration parameters, and <b>must have all fields set by the user application</b>
- *  before the class driver is used. Each Device mode Class driver typically contains a set of configuration parameters
- *  for the endpoint size/number of the associated logical USB interface, plus any class-specific configuration parameters.
- *
- *  The <i>State</i> section of the ClassInfo structures are designed to be controlled by the Class Drivers only for
- *  maintaining the Class Driver instance's state, and should not normally be set by the user application.
- *
- *  The following is an example of a properly initialized instance of the MIDI Class Driver structure:
- *
- *  \code
- *  USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t My_MIDI_Interface =
- *  {
- *      .Config =
- *          {
- *              .DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
- *              .DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
- *              
- *              .DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
- *              .DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
- *          },
- *  };
- *  \endcode
- *
- *  To initialize the Class driver instance, the driver's <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_ConfigurePipes()</i> function
- *  should be called in response to the host state machine entering the \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed state. This function
- *  will return an error code from the class driver's <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t</i> enum
- *  to indicate if the driver sucessfully initialized the instance and bound it to an interface in the attached device.
- *  Like all the class driver functions, this function takes in the address of the specific instance you wish to initialize
- *  - in this manner, multiple seperate instances of the same class type can be initialized. A fragment of a Class Driver
- *  based Host mode application may look like the following:
- *
- *  \code
- *      switch (USB_HostState)
- *      {
- *          case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
- *              LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
- *          
- *              uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
- *              uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
- *
- *              if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
- *                                                     sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
- *              {
- *                  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
- *                  USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
- *                  break;
- *              }
- *
- *              if (MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(&My_MIDI_Interface,
- *                                           ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError)
- *              {
- *                  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
- *                  USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
- *                  break;
- *              }
- *
- *              // Other state handler code here
- *  \endcode
- *
- *  Note that the function also required the device's configuration descriptor so that it can determine which interface
- *  in the device to bind to - this can be retrieved as shown in the above fragment using the
- *  \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function. If the device does not implement the interface the class driver
- *  is looking for, if all the matching interfaces are already bound to class driver instances or if an error occurs while
- *  binding to a device interface (for example, a device endpoint bank larger that the maximum supported bank size is used)
- *  the configuration will fail.
- *
- *  Once initialized, it is important to maintain the class driver's state by repeatedly calling the Class Driver's
- *  <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_USBTask()</i> function in the main program loop. The exact implementation of this
- *  function varies between class drivers, and can be used for any internal class driver purpose to maintain each
- *  instance. Again, this function uses the address of the instance to operate on, and thus needs to be called for each
- *  seperate instance, just like the main USB maintenance routine \ref USB_USBTask():
- *
- *  \code
- *  int main(void)
- *  {
- *      SetupHardware();
- *  
- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
- *  
- *      for (;;)
- *      {
- *          switch (USB_HostState)
- *          {
- *             // Host state machine handling here
- *          } 
- *      
- *          MIDI_Host_USBTask(&My_Audio_Interface);
- *          USB_USBTask();
- *      }
- *  }
- *  \endcode
- *
- *  Each class driver may also define a set of callback functions (which are prefixed by "CALLBACK_"
- *  in the function's name) which <b>must</b> also be added to the user application - refer to each
- *  individual class driver's documentation for mandatory callbacks. In addition, each class driver may
- *  also define a set of events (identifiable by their prefix of "EVENT_" in the function's name), which
- *  the user application <b>may</b> choose to implement, or ignore if not needed.
- *
- *  The individual Host Mode Class Driver documentation contains more information on the non-standardized,
- *  class-specific functions which the user application can then use on the driver instances, such as data
- *  read and write routines. See each driver's individual documentation for more information on the
- *  class-specific functions.
- */
- 
-#ifndef __USB_H__
-#define __USB_H__
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-		#endif
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "HighLevel/USBMode.h"
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */		
-		#if (!defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) && !defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) && \
-		     !defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) && !defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
-			#error The currently selected AVR model is not supported under the USB component of the LUFA library.
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include "HighLevel/USBTask.h"
-		#include "HighLevel/Events.h"
-		#include "HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h"
-		#include "HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-		#include "LowLevel/LowLevel.h"
-		#include "LowLevel/USBInterrupt.h"
-	
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			#include "LowLevel/Host.h"
-			#include "LowLevel/HostChapter9.h"
-			#include "LowLevel/Pipe.h"
-		#endif
-		
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			#include "LowLevel/Device.h"
-			#include "LowLevel/DevChapter9.h"
-			#include "LowLevel/Endpoint.h"
-		#endif
-		
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			#include "LowLevel/OTG.h"
-		#endif
-				
-#endif
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB functionality.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB functionality.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of the USB portions of the library, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/LowLevel/ or USB/HighLevel/ subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup Group_USB USB - LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Driver and framework for the USB controller hardware on the USB series of AVR microcontrollers. This module
+ *  consists of many submodules, and is designed to provide an easy way to configure and control USB host, device
+ *  or OTG mode USB applications.
+ *
+ *  The USB stack requires the sole control over the USB controller in the microcontroller only; i.e. it does not
+ *  require any additional AVR timers, etc. to operate. This ensures that the USB stack requires as few resources
+ *  as possible.
+ *
+ *  The USB stack can be used in Device Mode for connections to USB Hosts (see \ref Group_Device), in Host mode for
+ *  hosting of other USB devices (see \ref Group_Host), or as a dual role device which can either act as a USB host
+ *  or device depending on what peripheral is connected (see \ref Group_OTG). Both modes also require a common set
+ *  of USB management functions found \ref Group_USBManagement.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  @defgroup Group_USBClassDrivers USB Class Drivers
+ *
+ *  Drivers for both host and device mode of the standard USB classes, for rapid application development.
+ *  Class drivers give a framework which sits on top of the low level library API, allowing for standard
+ *  USB classes to be implemented in a project with minimal user code. These drivers can be used in
+ *  conjunction with the library low level APIs to implement interfaces both via the class drivers and via
+ *  the standard library APIs.
+ *
+ *  Multiple device mode class drivers can be used within a project, including multiple instances of the
+ *  same class driver. In this way, USB Hosts and Devices can be made quickly using the internal class drivers
+ *  so that more time and effort can be put into the end application instead of the USB protocol.
+ *
+ *  The available class drivers and their modes are listed below.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <th width="100px">USB Class</th> 
+ *   <th width="90px">Device Mode</th> 
+ *   <th width="90px">Host Mode</th> 
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Audio</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>CDC</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>HID</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>MIDI</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Mass Storage</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Printer</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+*    <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>RNDIS</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Still Image</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_UsingClassDrivers Using the Class Drivers
+ *  To make the Class drivers easy to integrate into a user application, they all implement a standardized
+ *  design with similarly named/used function, enums, defines and types. The two different modes are implemented
+ *  slightly differently, and thus will be explained separately. For information on a specific class driver, read
+ *  the class driver's module documentation.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ClassDriverDevice Device Mode Class Drivers
+ *  Implementing a Device Mode Class Driver in a user application requires a number of steps to be followed. Firstly,
+ *  the module configuration and state structure must be added to the project source. These structures are named in a 
+ *  similar manner between classes, that of <i>USB_ClassInfo_<b>{Class Name}</b>_Device_t</i>, and are used to hold the
+ *  complete state and configuration for each class instance. Multiple class instances is where the power of the class 
+ *  drivers lie; multiple interfaces of the same class simply require more instances of the Class Driver's ClassInfo 
+ *  structure.
+ *
+ *  Inside the ClassInfo structure lies two sections, a <i>Config</i> section, and a <i>State</i> section. The Config
+ *  section contains the instance's configuration parameters, and <b>must have all fields set by the user application</b>
+ *  before the class driver is used. Each Device mode Class driver typically contains a set of configuration parameters
+ *  for the endpoint size/number of the associated logical USB interface, plus any class-specific configuration parameters.
+ *
+ *  The <i>State</i> section of the ClassInfo structures are designed to be controlled by the Class Drivers only for
+ *  maintaining the Class Driver instance's state, and should not normally be set by the user application.
+ *
+ *  The following is an example of a properly initialized instance of the Audio Class Driver structure:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t My_Audio_Interface =
+ *  {
+ *      .Config =
+ *          {
+ *              .StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
+ *              
+ *              .DataINEndpointNumber     = 1,
+ *              .DataINEndpointSize       = 256,
+ *          },
+ *  };
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  \note The class driver's configuration parameters should match those used in the device's descriptors that are
+ *  sent to the host.
+ *
+ *  To initialize the Class driver instance, the driver's <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_Device_ConfigureEndpoints()</i> function
+ *  should be called in response to the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event. This function will return a
+ *  boolean value if the driver sucessfully initialized the instance. Like all the class driver functions, this function
+ *  takes in the address of the specific instance you wish to initialize - in this manner, multiple seperate instances of
+ *  the same class type can be initialized like thus:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+ *  {
+ *  	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+ *  	
+ *  	if (!(Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&My_Audio_Interface)))
+ *  	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ * 
+ *  Once initialized, it is important to maintain the class driver's state by repeatedly calling the Class Driver's
+ *  <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_Device_USBTask()</i> function in the main program loop. The exact implementation of this
+ *  function varies between class drivers, and can be used for any internal class driver purpose to maintain each
+ *  instance. Again, this function uses the address of the instance to operate on, and thus needs to be called for each
+ *  seperate instance, just like the main USB maintenance routine \ref USB_USBTask():
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  int main(void)
+ *  {
+ *      SetupHardware();
+ *  
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+ *  
+ *      for (;;)
+ *      {
+ *          Create_And_Process_Samples();
+ *      
+ *          Audio_Device_USBTask(&My_Audio_Interface);
+ *          USB_USBTask();
+ *      }
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  The final standardized Device Class Driver function is the Control Request handler function
+ *  <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_Device_ProcessControlRequest()</i>, which should be called when the
+ *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event fires. This function should also be
+ *  called for each class driver instance, using the address of the instance to operate on as
+ *  the function's parameter. The request handler will abort if it is determined that the current
+ *  request is not targeted at the given class driver instance, thus these methods can safely be
+ *  called one-after-another in the event handler with no form of error checking:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+ *  {
+ *      Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&My_Audio_Interface);
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Each class driver may also define a set of callback functions (which are prefixed by "CALLBACK_"
+ *  in the function's name) which <b>must</b> also be added to the user application - refer to each
+ *  individual class driver's documentation for mandatory callbacks. In addition, each class driver may
+ *  also define a set of events (identifiable by their prefix of "EVENT_" in the function's name), which
+ *  the user application <b>may</b> choose to implement, or ignore if not needed.
+ *
+ *  The individual Device Mode Class Driver documentation contains more information on the non-standardized,
+ *  class-specific functions which the user application can then use on the driver instances, such as data
+ *  read and write routines. See each driver's individual documentation for more information on the
+ *  class-specific functions.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ClassDriverHost Host Mode Class Drivers
+ *  Implementing a Host Mode Class Driver in a user application requires a number of steps to be followed. Firstly,
+ *  the module configuration and state structure must be added to the project source. These structures are named in a 
+ *  similar manner between classes, that of <i>USB_ClassInfo_<b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_t</i>, and are used to hold the
+ *  complete state and configuration for each class instance. Multiple class instances is where the power of the class 
+ *  drivers lie; multiple interfaces of the same class simply require more instances of the Class Driver's ClassInfo 
+ *  structure.
+ *
+ *  Inside the ClassInfo structure lies two sections, a <i>Config</i> section, and a <i>State</i> section. The Config
+ *  section contains the instance's configuration parameters, and <b>must have all fields set by the user application</b>
+ *  before the class driver is used. Each Device mode Class driver typically contains a set of configuration parameters
+ *  for the endpoint size/number of the associated logical USB interface, plus any class-specific configuration parameters.
+ *
+ *  The <i>State</i> section of the ClassInfo structures are designed to be controlled by the Class Drivers only for
+ *  maintaining the Class Driver instance's state, and should not normally be set by the user application.
+ *
+ *  The following is an example of a properly initialized instance of the MIDI Class Driver structure:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t My_MIDI_Interface =
+ *  {
+ *      .Config =
+ *          {
+ *              .DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+ *              .DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+ *              
+ *              .DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+ *              .DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+ *          },
+ *  };
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  To initialize the Class driver instance, the driver's <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_ConfigurePipes()</i> function
+ *  should be called in response to the host state machine entering the \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed state. This function
+ *  will return an error code from the class driver's <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t</i> enum
+ *  to indicate if the driver sucessfully initialized the instance and bound it to an interface in the attached device.
+ *  Like all the class driver functions, this function takes in the address of the specific instance you wish to initialize
+ *  - in this manner, multiple seperate instances of the same class type can be initialized. A fragment of a Class Driver
+ *  based Host mode application may look like the following:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      switch (USB_HostState)
+ *      {
+ *          case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+ *              LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+ *          
+ *              uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+ *              uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+ *
+ *              if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+ *                                                     sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+ *              {
+ *                  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ *                  USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+ *                  break;
+ *              }
+ *
+ *              if (MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(&My_MIDI_Interface,
+ *                                           ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+ *              {
+ *                  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ *                  USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+ *                  break;
+ *              }
+ *
+ *              // Other state handler code here
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Note that the function also required the device's configuration descriptor so that it can determine which interface
+ *  in the device to bind to - this can be retrieved as shown in the above fragment using the
+ *  \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function. If the device does not implement the interface the class driver
+ *  is looking for, if all the matching interfaces are already bound to class driver instances or if an error occurs while
+ *  binding to a device interface (for example, a device endpoint bank larger that the maximum supported bank size is used)
+ *  the configuration will fail.
+ *
+ *  Once initialized, it is important to maintain the class driver's state by repeatedly calling the Class Driver's
+ *  <i><b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_USBTask()</i> function in the main program loop. The exact implementation of this
+ *  function varies between class drivers, and can be used for any internal class driver purpose to maintain each
+ *  instance. Again, this function uses the address of the instance to operate on, and thus needs to be called for each
+ *  seperate instance, just like the main USB maintenance routine \ref USB_USBTask():
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  int main(void)
+ *  {
+ *      SetupHardware();
+ *  
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+ *  
+ *      for (;;)
+ *      {
+ *          switch (USB_HostState)
+ *          {
+ *             // Host state machine handling here
+ *          } 
+ *      
+ *          MIDI_Host_USBTask(&My_Audio_Interface);
+ *          USB_USBTask();
+ *      }
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Each class driver may also define a set of callback functions (which are prefixed by "CALLBACK_"
+ *  in the function's name) which <b>must</b> also be added to the user application - refer to each
+ *  individual class driver's documentation for mandatory callbacks. In addition, each class driver may
+ *  also define a set of events (identifiable by their prefix of "EVENT_" in the function's name), which
+ *  the user application <b>may</b> choose to implement, or ignore if not needed.
+ *
+ *  The individual Host Mode Class Driver documentation contains more information on the non-standardized,
+ *  class-specific functions which the user application can then use on the driver instances, such as data
+ *  read and write routines. See each driver's individual documentation for more information on the
+ *  class-specific functions.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __USB_H__
+#define __USB_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#endif
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "HighLevel/USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */		
+		#if (!defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) && !defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) && \
+		     !defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) && !defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+			#error The currently selected AVR model is not supported under the USB component of the LUFA library.
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "HighLevel/USBTask.h"
+		#include "HighLevel/Events.h"
+		#include "HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+		#include "LowLevel/LowLevel.h"
+		#include "LowLevel/USBInterrupt.h"
+	
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "LowLevel/Host.h"
+			#include "LowLevel/HostChapter9.h"
+			#include "LowLevel/Pipe.h"
+		#endif
+		
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "LowLevel/Device.h"
+			#include "LowLevel/DevChapter9.h"
+			#include "LowLevel/Endpoint.h"
+		#endif
+		
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "LowLevel/OTG.h"
+		#endif
+				
+#endif
+
diff --git a/LUFA/License.txt b/LUFA/License.txt
index ea3b5d2dd..82e3f74ec 100644
--- a/LUFA/License.txt
+++ b/LUFA/License.txt
@@ -1,17 +1,17 @@
-Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
-and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without
-fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
-copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-this software.
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without
+fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+this software.
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/AboutLUFA.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/AboutLUFA.txt
index 78900d369..cd0ed059c 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/AboutLUFA.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/AboutLUFA.txt
@@ -1,20 +1,20 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/**
- *  \page Page_AboutLUFA About LUFA
- *
- *  This section of the manual contains information about the library as a whole, including its supported targets,
- *  past and planned changes, and links to other projects incorporating LUFA.
- *
- *  <b>Subsections:</b>
- *  - \subpage Page_DeviceSupport Current Device and Hardware Support
- *  - \subpage Page_Resources LUFA and USB Related Resources
- *  - \subpage Page_ChangeLog Project Changelog
- *  - \subpage Page_FutureChanges Planned Changes to the Library
- *  - \subpage Page_LUFAPoweredProjects Other Projects Using LUFA
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_AboutLUFA About LUFA
+ *
+ *  This section of the manual contains information about the library as a whole, including its supported targets,
+ *  past and planned changes, and links to other projects incorporating LUFA.
+ *
+ *  <b>Subsections:</b>
+ *  - \subpage Page_DeviceSupport Current Device and Hardware Support
+ *  - \subpage Page_Resources LUFA and USB Related Resources
+ *  - \subpage Page_ChangeLog Project Changelog
+ *  - \subpage Page_FutureChanges Planned Changes to the Library
+ *  - \subpage Page_LUFAPoweredProjects Other Projects Using LUFA
+ */
  
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/AlternativeStacks.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/AlternativeStacks.txt
index 0ce9150f5..a0a7a415e 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/AlternativeStacks.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/AlternativeStacks.txt
@@ -1,62 +1,62 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/**
- *  \page Page_AlternativeStacks Alternative USB AVR Stacks
- *
- *  LUFA is not the only stack available for the USB AVRs, although it is perhaps the best (see \ref Page_WhyUseLUFA).
- *  In the interests of completeness and user choice, other known USB AVR stacks are listed here.
- *
- *  \section Sec_HardwareStacks Hardware USB AVR Stacks
- *  These are the known alternative USB stacks which are designed for and run exclusively on the USB AVR series microcontrollers,
- *  which contain on-chip USB controller hardware for maximum features and speed.
- *
- *  - <b>Name:</b> Atmel USB AVR Stack (<i>Atmel Inc.</i>) \n
- *    <b>Cost:</b> Free \n
- *    <b>License:</b> Atmel Limited License (see Atmel download for details) \n
- *    <b>Website:</b> http://atmel.com/dyn/products/app_notes.asp?family_id=607#USB \n
- *    <b>Description:</b> This is the official Atmel USB AVR stack, for their 8-bit USB AVR lineup. Each series of
- *                        USB AVR is seperated into a seperate download stack, which is both AVR-GCC and IAR compatible.
- *
- *  - <b>Name:</b> Dr. Stefan Salewski's AT90USB1287 Stack (<i>Dr. Stefan Salewski</i>) \n
- *    <b>Cost:</b> Free \n
- *    <b>License:</b> GPL \n
- *    <b>Website:</b> http://www.ssalewski.de/AT90USB_firmware.html.en \n
- *    <b>Description:</b> This is a GPL'd library specifically designed for the AT90USB1287, by Dr. Stefan Salewski, a
- *                        German Physicist. It compiles for AVR-GCC and can potentially be modified to work on other USB
- *                        AVR models.
- *
- *  - <b>Name:</b> PJRC Teensy Stack (<i>Paul Stoffregen</i>) \n
- *    <b>Cost:</b> Free \n
- *    <b>License:</b> BSD \n
- *    <b>Website:</b> http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/usb_debug_only.html \n
- *    <b>Description:</b> Not so much a complete stack as a collection of USB enabled demos, this library is specifically
- *                        designed for the PJRC Teensy line of USB AVRs, and thus may need to be modified for other USB AVR
- *                        chips. These minimal code samples shows the inner workings of the USB controller, without all the 
- *                        abstraction present in most other USB AVR stacks. 
- *
- *  \section Sec_SoftwareStacks Software AVR Stacks
- *  These are the known alternative USB stacks which can run on regular AVR models, lacking dedicated hardware USB controllers
- *  via a bit-banged (emulated) version of the USB protocol. They are limited in their capabilities due to the cycles required
- *  to be dedicated to managing the USB bus, but offer a cheap way to implement USB functionality into a design.
- *
- *  - <b>Name:</b> AVR309: Software USB (<i>Atmel</i>) \n
- *    <b>Cost:</b> Free \n
- *    <b>License:</b> None Stated \n
- *    <b>Website:</b> http://www.atmel.com/dyn/Products/app_notes.asp?family_id=607 \n
- *    <b>Description:</b> Atmel's official software USB implementation, an Application Note containing work by Igor Cesko. This
- *                        is a minimal assembly-only implementation of software USB, providing HID functionality. Less compile
- *                        options than V-USB (see below).
- *
- *  - <b>Name:</b> V-USB (<i>Objective Development</i>) \n
- *    <b>Cost:</b> Free for some uses, see website for licensing \n
- *    <b>License:</b> Dual GPL2/Custom \n
- *    <b>Website:</b> http://www.obdev.at/products/vusb/index.html \n
- *    <b>Description:</b> Well regarded and complete USB 1.1 software stack for several AVR models, implementing Low Speed HID.
- *                        Used in many commercial and non-commercial designs, with user-submitted projects available for viewing
- *                        on the company's website. Uses C language code mixed with assembly for time-critical sections.
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_AlternativeStacks Alternative USB AVR Stacks
+ *
+ *  LUFA is not the only stack available for the USB AVRs, although it is perhaps the best (see \ref Page_WhyUseLUFA).
+ *  In the interests of completeness and user choice, other known USB AVR stacks are listed here.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HardwareStacks Hardware USB AVR Stacks
+ *  These are the known alternative USB stacks which are designed for and run exclusively on the USB AVR series microcontrollers,
+ *  which contain on-chip USB controller hardware for maximum features and speed.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Name:</b> Atmel USB AVR Stack (<i>Atmel Inc.</i>) \n
+ *    <b>Cost:</b> Free \n
+ *    <b>License:</b> Atmel Limited License (see Atmel download for details) \n
+ *    <b>Website:</b> http://atmel.com/dyn/products/app_notes.asp?family_id=607#USB \n
+ *    <b>Description:</b> This is the official Atmel USB AVR stack, for their 8-bit USB AVR lineup. Each series of
+ *                        USB AVR is seperated into a seperate download stack, which is both AVR-GCC and IAR compatible.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Name:</b> Dr. Stefan Salewski's AT90USB1287 Stack (<i>Dr. Stefan Salewski</i>) \n
+ *    <b>Cost:</b> Free \n
+ *    <b>License:</b> GPL \n
+ *    <b>Website:</b> http://www.ssalewski.de/AT90USB_firmware.html.en \n
+ *    <b>Description:</b> This is a GPL'd library specifically designed for the AT90USB1287, by Dr. Stefan Salewski, a
+ *                        German Physicist. It compiles for AVR-GCC and can potentially be modified to work on other USB
+ *                        AVR models.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Name:</b> PJRC Teensy Stack (<i>Paul Stoffregen</i>) \n
+ *    <b>Cost:</b> Free \n
+ *    <b>License:</b> BSD \n
+ *    <b>Website:</b> http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/usb_debug_only.html \n
+ *    <b>Description:</b> Not so much a complete stack as a collection of USB enabled demos, this library is specifically
+ *                        designed for the PJRC Teensy line of USB AVRs, and thus may need to be modified for other USB AVR
+ *                        chips. These minimal code samples shows the inner workings of the USB controller, without all the 
+ *                        abstraction present in most other USB AVR stacks. 
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SoftwareStacks Software AVR Stacks
+ *  These are the known alternative USB stacks which can run on regular AVR models, lacking dedicated hardware USB controllers
+ *  via a bit-banged (emulated) version of the USB protocol. They are limited in their capabilities due to the cycles required
+ *  to be dedicated to managing the USB bus, but offer a cheap way to implement USB functionality into a design.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Name:</b> AVR309: Software USB (<i>Atmel</i>) \n
+ *    <b>Cost:</b> Free \n
+ *    <b>License:</b> None Stated \n
+ *    <b>Website:</b> http://www.atmel.com/dyn/Products/app_notes.asp?family_id=607 \n
+ *    <b>Description:</b> Atmel's official software USB implementation, an Application Note containing work by Igor Cesko. This
+ *                        is a minimal assembly-only implementation of software USB, providing HID functionality. Less compile
+ *                        options than V-USB (see below).
+ *
+ *  - <b>Name:</b> V-USB (<i>Objective Development</i>) \n
+ *    <b>Cost:</b> Free for some uses, see website for licensing \n
+ *    <b>License:</b> Dual GPL2/Custom \n
+ *    <b>Website:</b> http://www.obdev.at/products/vusb/index.html \n
+ *    <b>Description:</b> Well regarded and complete USB 1.1 software stack for several AVR models, implementing Low Speed HID.
+ *                        Used in many commercial and non-commercial designs, with user-submitted projects available for viewing
+ *                        on the company's website. Uses C language code mixed with assembly for time-critical sections.
+ */
  
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt
index 51fb973b3..70919c0a2 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt
@@ -1,22 +1,22 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \page Page_BuildLibrary Building as a Linkable Library
- *
- *  The LUFA library can be built as a proper linkable library (with the extention .a) under AVR-GCC, so that
- *  the library does not need to be recompiled with each revision of a user project. Instructions for creating
- *  a library from a given source tree can be found in the AVR-GCC user manual included in the WinAVR install
- *  /Docs/ directory.
- *
- *  However, building the library is <b>not recommended</b>, as the static (compile-time) options will be
- *  unable to be changed without a recompilation of the LUFA code. Therefore, if the library is to be built
- *  from the LUFA source, it should be made to be application-specific and compiled with the static options
- *  that are required for each project (which should be recorded along with the library).
- *
- *  Normal library use has the library components compiled in at the same point as the application code, as
- *  demonstrated in the library demos and applications. This is the preferred method, as the library is recompiled
- *  each time to ensure that all static options for a particular application are applied.
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_BuildLibrary Building as a Linkable Library
+ *
+ *  The LUFA library can be built as a proper linkable library (with the extention .a) under AVR-GCC, so that
+ *  the library does not need to be recompiled with each revision of a user project. Instructions for creating
+ *  a library from a given source tree can be found in the AVR-GCC user manual included in the WinAVR install
+ *  /Docs/ directory.
+ *
+ *  However, building the library is <b>not recommended</b>, as the static (compile-time) options will be
+ *  unable to be changed without a recompilation of the LUFA code. Therefore, if the library is to be built
+ *  from the LUFA source, it should be made to be application-specific and compiled with the static options
+ *  that are required for each project (which should be recorded along with the library).
+ *
+ *  Normal library use has the library components compiled in at the same point as the application code, as
+ *  demonstrated in the library demos and applications. This is the preferred method, as the library is recompiled
+ *  each time to ensure that all static options for a particular application are applied.
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/ChangeLog.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/ChangeLog.txt
index 4de0473a2..02b629609 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/ChangeLog.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/ChangeLog.txt
@@ -1,918 +1,918 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
- /** \page Page_ChangeLog Project Changelog
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLogXXXXXX Version XXXXXX
-  *
-  *  <b>New:</b>
-  *  - Added incomplete MIDIToneGenerator project
-  *  - Added new Relay Controller Board project (thanks to OBinou)
-  *  - Added board hardware driver support for the Teensy, USBTINY MKII, Benito and JM-DB-U2 lines of third party USB AVR boards
-  *  - Added new ATTR_NO_INIT variable attribute for global variables that should not be automatically cleared on startup
-  *  - Added new ENDPOINT_*_BusSuspended error code to the Endpoint function, so that the stream functions early-abort if the bus
-  *    is suspended before or during a transfer
-  *  - Added new EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent() event and CDC_Host_SendBreak() function to the Device and Host CDC Class drivers
-  *
-  *  <b>Changed:</b>
-  *  - AVRISP programmer project now has a more robust timeout system
-  *  - Added a timeout value to the TWI_StartTransmission() function, within which the addressed device must respond
-  *  - Webserver project now uses the board LEDs to indicate the current IP configuration state
-  *  - Added ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER compile time option to the Webserver project to disable the TELNET server if desired
-  *  - Increased throughput of the USBtoSerial demo on systems that send multiple bytes per packet (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
-  *  - Double bank CDC endpoints in the XPLAIN Bridge project, re-enable JTAG once the mode selection pin has been sampled.
-  *  - Standardized the naming scheme given to configuration descriptor sub-elements in the Device mode demos, bootloaders
-  *    and projects
-  *  - All Class Driver Host mode demos now correctly set the board LEDs to READY once the enumeration process has completed
-  *  - Added LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT compile time option to the AVRISP programmer project to make the code compatible with Windows
-  *    builds of avrdude at the expense of AVRStudio compatibility
-  *  - Removed two-step endpoint/pipe bank clear and switch sequence for smaller, faster endpoint/pipe code
-  *  - The USB_Init() function no longer calls sei() - the user is now responsible for enabling interrupts when they are ready
-  *    for them to be enabled (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
-  *  - The Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived() and Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample() functions are now inline, to reduce overhead
-  *  - Removed the cast to uint16_t on the set baud rate in the USBtoSerial project, so that the higher >1M baud rates can be
-  *    selected (thanks to Steffan Woltjer)
-  *  - Removed software PDI and TPI emulation from the AVRISP-MKII clone project as it was very buggy and slow - PDI and TPI must
-  *    now be implemented via seperate programming headers
-  *  - The CDC class bootloader now uses a watchdog reset rather than a soft-reset when exited to ensure that all hardware is
-  *    properly reset to their defaults
-  *  - Device mode class driver callbacks are now fired before the control request status stage is sent to prevent the host from
-  *    timing out if another request is immediately fired and the device has a lengthy callback routine
-  *
-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
-  *  - Fixed software PDI/TPI programming mode in the AVRISP project not correctly toggling just the clock pin
-  *  - Fixed TWI_StartTransmission() corrupting the contents of the GPIOR0 register
-  *  - Fixed TWI driver not aborting when faced with no response after attempting to address a device on the bus
-  *  - Fixed ADC routines not correctly returning the last result when multiple channels were read
-  *  - Fixed ADC routines failing to read the extended channels (Channels 8 to 13, Internal Temperature Sensor) on the
-  *    U4 series USB AVR parts
-  *  - Fixed LowLevel MassStorage demo broken on the U2 series USB AVRs due to unsupported double-banked endpoint modes used
-  *  - Fixed compilation error in the AudioInput demos when MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL is defined (thanks to C. Scott Ananian)
-  *  - Fixed incorrect definition of HID_ALIGN_DATA() causing incorrect HID report item data alignment
-  *  - Fixed Still Image Host class driver not resetting the transaction ID when a new session is opened, fixed driver not sending
-  *    a valid session ID to the device
-  *  - Removed invalid dfu and flip related targets from the bootloaders - bootloaders can only be replaced with an external programmer
-  *  - Fixed Set/Clear Feature requests directed to a non-configured endpoint not returning a stall to the host
-  *  - Fixed HID Device Class Driver not allocating a temporary buffer when the host requests a report via the control endpoint and the
-  *    user has set the PrevReportINBuffer driver configuration element to NULL (thanks to Lars Noschinski)
-  *  - Fixed device state not being reset to DEVICE_STATE_Default if the host sets a 0x00 device address
-  *  - Fixed device not stalling configuration requests before the device's address has been set
-  *  - Fixed possibility of internal signature retrieval being corrupted if an interrupt occurs during a signature byte
-  *    read (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
-  *  - Fixed device state not being reset back to the default state if the host sets the address to 0
-  *  - Fixed Set Configuration requests not being stalled until the host has set the device's address
-  *  - Fixed Host mode HID class driver not sending the correct report type when HID_Host_SendReportByID() was called and the 
-  *    HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time option is set
-  *  - Fixed INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT compile time option preventing other interrupts from occuring while the control endpoint
-  *    request is being processed, causing possible lockups if a USB interrupt occurs during a transfer
-  *  - Fixed TeensyHID bootloader not working on some USB AVR models with the official TeensyLoader GUI application
-  *  - Remove incorrect Abstract Call Management class specific descriptor from the CDC demos, bootloaders and projects
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog100219 Version 100219
-  *
-  *  <b>New:</b>
-  *  - Added TPI programming support for 6-pin ATTINY devices to the AVRISP programmer project (thanks to Tom Light)
-  *  - Added command timeout counter to the AVRISP project so that the device no longer freezes when incorrectly connected
-  *    to a target
-  *  - Added new TemperatureDataLogger application, a USB data logger which writes to the device's dataflash and appears to
-  *    the host as a standard Mass Storage device when inserted
-  *  - Added MIDI event packing support to the MIDI Device and Host mode Class drivers, allowing for multiple MIDI events to
-  *    sent or received in packed form in a single USB packet
-  *  - Added new MIDI send buffer flush routines to the MIDI Device and Host mode Class drivers, to flush packed events
-  *  - Added master mode hardware TWI driver for easy TWI peripheral control
-  *  - Added ADC MUX masks for the standard ADC input channels on all AVR models with an ADC, altered demos to use these masks
-  *    as on some models, the channel number is not identical to its single-ended ADC MUX mask
-  *  - New Webserver project, a RNDIS host USB webserver using the open source uIP TCP/IP network stack and FatFS library
-  *  - New BOARD value option BOARD_NONE (equivelent to not specifying BOARD) which will remove all board hardware drivers which
-  *    do not adversely affect the code operation (currently only the LEDs driver)
-  *  - Added keyboard modifier masks (HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_*) and LED report masks (KEYBOARD_LED_*) to the HID class driver and
-  *    Keyboard demos
-  *  - Added .5MHz recovery clock to the AVRISP programmer project when in ISP programming mode to correct mis-set fuses
-  *
-  *  <b>Changed:</b>
-  *  - Slowed down software USART carried PDI programming in the AVRISP project to prevent transmission errors
-  *  - Renamed the AVRISP project folder to AVRISP-MKII to reduce confusion
-  *  - Renamed the RESET_LINE_* makefile tokens in the AVRISP MKII Project to AUX_LINE_*, as they are not always used for target
-  *    reset
-  *  - Changed over the MassStorageKeyboard Class driver device demo to use Start of Frame events rather than a timer to keep track
-  *    of elapsed milliseconds
-  *  - Inlined currently unused (but standardized) maintenance functions in the Device and Host Class drivers to save space
-  *  - The XPLAINBridge project now selects between a USB to Serial bridge and a PDI programmer on startup, reading the JTAG port's
-  *    TDI pin to determine which mode to use
-  *  - Removed the stream example code from the Low Level VirtualSerial demos, as they were buggy and only served to add clutter
-  *
-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
-  *  - Fixed AVRISP project not able to enter programming mode when ISP protocol is used
-  *  - Fixed AVRISP PDI race condition where the guard time between direction changes could be interpreted as a start bit
-  *  - Fixed ADC_IsReadingComplete() returning an inverted result
-  *  - Fixed blocking CDC streams not aborting when the host is disconnected
-  *  - Fixed XPLAIN board Dataflash driver broken due to incorrect preprocessor commands
-  *  - Fixed inverted XPLAIN LED driver output (LED turned on when it was supposed to be turned off, and vice-versa)
-  *  - Fixed Class Driver struct interface numbers in the KeyboardMouse and VirtualSerialMouse demos (thanks to Renaud Cerrato)
-  *  - Fixed invalid USB controller PLL prescaler values for the ATMEGAxxU2 controllers
-  *  - Fixed lack of support for the ATMEGA32U2 in the DFU and CDC class bootloaders
-  *  - Fixed Benito project not resetting the target AVR automatically when programming has completed
-  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader programming not discarding the correct number of filler bytes from the host when non-aligned programming
-  *    ranges are specified (thanks to Thomas Bleeker)
-  *  - Fixed CDC and RNDIS host demos and class drivers - bidirectional endpoints should use two seperate pipes, not one half-duplex pipe
-  *  - Fixed Pipe_IsEndpointBound() not taking the endpoint's direction into account
-  *  - Fixed EEPROM and FLASH ISP programming in the AVRISP project
-  *  - Fixed incorrect values of USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED and USB_CONFIG_ATTR_REMOTEWAKEUP tokens (thanks to Claus Christensen)
-  *  - Fixed SerialStream driver blocking while waiting for characters to be received instead of returning EOF
-  *  - Fixed SerialStream driver not setting stdin to the created serial stream (thanks to Mike Alexander)
-  *  - Fixed USB_GetHIDReportSize() returning the number of bits in the specified report instead of bytes
-  *  - Fixed AVRISP project not extending the command delay after each successful page/word/byte program
-  *  - Fixed accuracy of the SERIAL_UBBRVAL() and SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL() macros for higher baudrates (thanks to Renaud Cerrato)
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog091223 Version 091223
-  *
-  *  <b>New:</b>
-  *  - Added activity LED indicators to the AVRISP project to indicate when the device is busy processing a command
-  *  - The USB target family and allowable USB mode tokens are now public and documented (USB_CAN_BE_*, USB_SERIES_*_AVR)
-  *  - Added new XPLAIN USB to Serial Bridge project (thanks to John Steggall for initial proof-of-concept, David Prentice
-  *    and Peter Danneger for revised software USART code)
-  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host LowLevel demo
-  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host Class Driver
-  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host ClassDriver demo
-  *  - Added CDC_Host_Flush() function to the CDC Host Class driver to flush sent data to the attached device
-  *  - Added PDI programming support for XMEGA devices to the AVRISP programmer project (thanks to Justin Mattair)
-  *  - Added support for the XPLAIN board Dataflash, with new XPLAIN_REV1 board target for the different dataflash used
-  *    on the first revision boards compared to the one mounted on later revisions
-  *  - Added new HID_ALIGN_DATA() macro to return the pre-retrieved value of a HID report item, left-aligned to a given datatype
-  *  - Added new PreviousValue to the HID Report Parser report item structure, for easy monitoring of previous report item values
-  *  - Added new EVK527 board target
-  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor() convenience function
-  *  - Added new LEDNotification project to the library, to give a visual LED notification on new events from the host
-  *  - Added new NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP and NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER compile time options
-  *
-  *  <b>Changed:</b>
-  *  - Removed code in the Keyboard demos to send zeroed reports between two reports with differing numbers of keycodes
-  *    as this relied on non-standard OS driver behaviour to repeat key groups
-  *  - The SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t and SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t type defines are now part of the Mass Storage Class
-  *    driver common defines, rather than being defined in the Host mode Class driver section only
-  *  - The USB_MODE_HOST token is now defined even when host mode is not available
-  *  - The CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() HID Device Class driver callback now has a new ReportType parameter to
-  *    indicate the report type to generate
-  *  - All Class Drivers now return false or the "DeviceDisconnected" error code of their respective error enums when a function
-  *    is called when no host/device is connected where possible
-  *  - The HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnect enum value has been renamed to HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected to be in line
-  *    with the rest of the library errorcodes
-  *  - Make MIDI device demos also turn off the on board LEDs if MIDI Note On messages are sent with a velocity of zero,
-  *    which some devices use instead of Note Off messages (thanks to Robin Green)
-  *  - The CDC demos are now named "VirtualSerial" instead to indicate the demos' function rather than its implemented USB class,
-  *    to reduce confusion and to be in line with the rest of the LUFA demos
-  *  - The SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader() and SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader() Still Image Host Class driver functions are now public
-  *
-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
-  *  - Added missing CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream() function code to the CDC Host Class driver
-  *  - Fixed incorrect values for REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_* enum values causing corrupt data in the HID Host Parser
-  *  - Fixed misnamed SI_Host_USBTask() and SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() functions
-  *  - Fixed broken USB_GetNextDescriptor() function causing the descriptor to jump ahead double the expected amount
-  *  - Fixed Pipe_IsEndpointBound() not masking the given Endpoint Address against PIPE_EPNUM_MASK
-  *  - Fixed host state machine not enabling Auto VBUS mode when HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS is set to zero
-  *  - Fixed misnamed Pipe_SetPipeToken() macro for setting a pipe's direction
-  *  - Fixed CDCHost failing on devices with bidirectional endpoints
-  *  - Fixed USB driver failing to define the PLL prescaler mask for the ATMEGA8U2 and ATMEGA16U2
-  *  - Fixed HID Parser not distributing the Usage Min and Usage Max values across an array of report items
-  *  - Fixed Mass Storage Host Class driver and Low Level demo not clearing the error condition if an attached device returns a
-  *    STALL to a GET MAX LUN request (thanks to Martin Luxen)
-  *  - Fixed TeensyHID bootloader not properly shutting down the USB interface to trigger a disconnection on the host before resetting
-  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost Class driver demo not having USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS compile time option set properly to prevent slow 
-  *    devices from timing out the data pipes
-  *  - Fixed the definition of the Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() macro for the U4 series AVR parts
-  *  - Fixed MIDI host Class driver MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket() routine not properly checking for Pipe ready before writing
-  *  - Fixed use of deprecated struct initializers, removed library unused parameter warnings when compiled with -Wextra enabled
-  *  - Fixed Still Image Host Class driver truncating the PIMA response code (thanks to Daniel Seibert)
-  *  - Fixed USB_CurrentMode not being reset to USB_MODE_NONE when the USB interface is shut down and both Host and Device modes can be
-  *    used (thanks to Daniel Levy)
-  *  - Fixed TeensyHID bootloader not enumerating to the host correctly (thanks to Clint Fisher)
-  *  - Fixed AVRISP project timeouts not checking for the correct timeout period (thanks to Carl Ott)
-  *  - Fixed STK525 Dataflash driver using incorrect bit-shifting for Dataflash addresses (thanks to Tim Mitchell)
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog091122 Version 091122
-  *
-  *  <b>New:</b>
-  *  - Added new Dual Role Keyboard/Mouse demo
-  *  - Added new HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token to reduce the size of the HID Host Class driver when
-  *    Report protocol is not needed
-  *  - Added new MIDI LowLevel and ClassDriver Host demo, add new MIDI Host Class driver
-  *  - Added new CDC/Mouse ClassDriver device demo
-  *  - Added new Joystick Host ClassDriver and LowLevel demos
-  *  - Added new Printer Host mode Class driver
-  *  - Added new Printer Host mode ClassDriver demo
-  *  - Added optional support for double banked endpoints and pipes in the Device and Host mode Class drivers
-  *  - Added new stream creation function to the CDC Class drivers, to easily make standard I/O streams from CDC Class driver instances
-  *
-  *  <b>Changed:</b>
-  *  - Removed mostly useless "TestApp" demo, as it was mainly useful only for checking for sytax errors in the library
-  *  - MIDI device demos now receive MIDI events from the host and display note ON messages via the board LEDs
-  *  - Cleanups to the Device mode Mass Storage demo application SCSI routines
-  *  - Changed Audio Class driver sample read/write functions to be inline, to reduce the number of cycles needed to transfer
-  *    samples to and from the device (allowing more time for sample processing and output)
-  *  - Audio class Device mode demos now work at both 16MHz and 8MHz, rather than just at 8MHz
-  *  - The previous USBtoSerial demo has been moved into the projects directory, as it was just a modified CDC demo
-  *  - The Endpoint/Pipe functions now use the const qualifier on the input buffer
-  *  - Changed the CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() callback to pass a HID_ReportItem_t rather than just the current
-  *    item's attributes, to expose more information on the item (including it's type, collection path, etc.)
-  *  - Changed MouseHostWithParser demos to check that the report items have a Mouse usage collection as a parent at some point,
-  *    to prevent Joysticks from enumerating with the demo
-  *  - Corrected the name of the misnamed USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function to USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor().
-  *  - Keyboard LowLevel/ClassDriver demos now support multiple simultaneous keypresses (up to 6) per report
-  *
-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
-  *  - Fixed PrinterHost demo returning invalid Device ID data when the attached device does not have a
-  *    device ID (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
-  *  - Changed LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER define to use BCD values, to make comparisons eaiser
-  *  - Fixed issue in the HID Host class driver's HID_Host_SendReportByID() routine using the incorrect mode (control/pipe)
-  *    to send report to the attached device
-  *  - Fixed ClassDriver AudioOutput device demo not selecting an audio output mode
-  *  - Fixed incorrect SampleFrequencyType value in the AudioInput and AudioOutput ClassDriver demos' descriptors
-  *  - Fixed incorrect event name rule in demo/project/bootloader makefiles
-  *  - Fixed HID device class driver not reselecting the correct endpoint once the user callback routines have been called
-  *  - Corrected HID descriptor in the Joystick Device demos - buttons should be placed outside the pointer collection
-  *  - Fixed HID report parser collection paths invalid due to misplaced semicolon in the free path item search loop
-  *  - Fixed HID host Class driver report send/receive report broken when issued through the control pipe
-  *  - Fixed HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR compile time option being ignored when in host mode (thanks to David Lyons)
-  *  - Fixed LowLevel Keyboard demo not saving the issues report only after it has been sent to the host
-  *  - Fixed Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_* functions not sending a terminating IN when given data Length is zero
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090924 Version 090924
-  *
-  *  <b>New:</b>
-  *  - Added new host mode class drivers and matching demos to the library for rapid application development
-  *  - Added flag to the HID report parser to indicate if a device has multiple reports
-  *  - Added new EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event, controlled by the new USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents() and
-  *    USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents() macros to give bus-synchronised millisecond interrupts when in USB device mode
-  *  - Added new Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection() macro for bidirectional endpoints
-  *  - Added new AVRISP project, a LUFA powered clone of the Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer
-  *  - Added ShutDown() functions for all hardware peripheral drivers, so that peripherals can be turned off after use
-  *  - Added new CDC_Device_Flush() command to the device mode CDC Class driver to flush Device->Host data
-  *  - Added extra masks to the SPI driver, changed SPI_Init() so that the clock polarity and sample modes can be set
-  *  - Added new callback to the HID report parser, so that the user application can filter only the items it is interested
-  *    in to be stored into the HIDReportInfo structure to save RAM
-  *  - Added support for the officially recommended external peripheral layout for the BUMBLEB board (thanks to Dave Fletcher)
-  *  - Added new Pipe_IsFrozen() macro to determine if the currently selected pipe is frozen
-  *  - Added new USB_GetHIDReportSize() function to the HID report parser to retrieve the size of a given report by its ID
-  *  - Added new combined Mass Storage and Keyboard demo (thanks to Matthias Hullin)
-  *  
-  *  <b>Changed:</b>
-  *  - SetIdle requests to the HID device driver with a 0 idle period (send changes only) now only affect the requested
-  *    HID interface within the device, not all HID interfaces
-  *  - Added explicit attribute masks to the device mode demos' descriptors
-  *  - Added return values to the CDC and MIDI class driver transmit functions
-  *  - Optimized Endpoint_Read_Word_* and Pipe_Read_Word_* macros to reduce compiled size
-  *  - Added non-null function parameter pointer restrictions to USB Class drivers to improve user code reliability
-  *  - Added new "Common" section to the class drivers, to hold all mode-independant definitions for clarity
-  *  - Moved SCSI command/sense constants into the Mass Storage Class driver, instead of the user-code
-  *  - Altered the SCSI commands in the LowLevel Mass Storage Host to save on FLASH space by reducing function calls
-  *  - Changed the parameters and behaviour of the USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function so that it now performs size checks
-  *    and data validations internally, to simplify user code
-  *  - Changed HIDParser to only zero out important values in the Parsed HID Report Item Information structure to save cycles
-  *  - The HID report parser now always processed FEATURE items - HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING token now has no effect
-  *  - The HID report parser now always ignores constant-data items, HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS token now has no effect
-  *  - The Benito Programmer project now has its own unique VID/PID pair allocated from the Atmel donated LUFA VID/PID pool
-  *  - Add in new invalid event hook check targets to project makefiles to produce compilation errors when invalid event names
-  *    are used in a project
-  *  - The HID Report Parser now gives information on the total length of each report within a HID interface
-  *  - The USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now seperate USB_Descriptor_* and
-  *    USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so both may be used
-  *
-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
-  *  - Fixed possible lockup in the CDC device class driver, when the host sends data that is a multiple of the
-  *    endpoint's bank
-  *  - Fixed swapped parameters in the HID state memory copy call while processing a HID PUSH item in the HID report parser
-  *  - Fixed memory corruption HID report parser when too many COLLECTION or PUSH items were processed
-  *  - Fixed HID report parser not resetting the FEATURE item count when a REPORT ID item is encountered
-  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demos not reading in UDR1 when the USART receives data but the USB interface is not enumerated,
-  *    causing continuous USART receive interrupts
-  *  - Fixed misspelt event name in the Class driver USBtoSerial demo, preventing correct operation
-  *  - Fixed invalid data being returned when a GetStatus request is issued in Device mode with an unhandled data recipient
-  *  - Added hardware USART receive interrupt and software buffering to the Benito project to ensure received data is not
-  *    missed or corrupted
-  *  - Fixed Device mode HID Class driver always sending IN packets, even when nothing to report
-  *  - Fixed Device mode HID Class driver not explicitly initializing the ReportSize parameter to zero before calling callback
-  *    routine, so that ignored callbacks don't cause incorrect data to be sent
-  *  - Fixed StillImageHost not correctly freezing and unfreezing data pipes while waiting for a response block header
-  *  - Fixed error in the PrinterHost demo preventing the full page data from being sent to the attached device (thanks to John Andrews)
-  *  - Fixed CDC based demos and projects' INF driver files under 64 bit versions of Windows (thanks to Ronny Hanson, Thomas Bleeker)
-  *  - Re-add in missing flip, flip-ee, dfu and dfu-ee targets to project makefiles (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
-  *  - Fix allowable F_CPU values comment in project makefiles to more accurately reflect the allowable values on the USB AVRs
-  *  - Fixed DFU and CDC class bootloaders on the series 2 USB AVRs, corrected invalid signatures, added support for the new
-  *    ATMEGAxx2 series 2 variant AVRs to the DFU bootloader
-  *  - Fixed Low Level USBtoSerial demo not storing received characters (thanks to Michael Cooper)
-  *  - Fixed MIDI Device Class driver not sending/receiving MIDI packets of the correct size (thanks to Thomas Bleeker)
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090810 Version 090810
-  *
-  *  <b>New:</b>
-  *  - Added new device class drivers and matching demos to the library for rapid application development
-  *  - Added new PrinterHost demo (thanks to John Andrews)
-  *  - Added USB Missle Launcher project, submitted by Dave Fletcher
-  *  - Added new Benito Arduino Programmer project
-  *  - Added incomplete device and host mode demos for later enhancement
-  *  - Updated MassStorage device block write routines to use ping-pong Dataflash buffering to increase throughput by around 30%
-  *  - Error status LEDs shown when device endpoint configuration fails to complete in all demos and projects
-  *  - Added new USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration() convenience function for easy configuration selection of devices while in USB
-  *    host mode
-  *  - Added new USB_Host_ClearPipeStall() convenience function to clear a stall condition on an attached device's endpoint
-  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor() convenience function to retrieve the attached device's Device descriptor
-  *  - Added new Endpoint_ClearStatusStage() convenience function to assist with the status stages of control transfers
-  *  - Added new USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL define for using the unique serial numbers in some AVR models as the USB device's serial number,
-  *    added NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL compile time option to turn off new serial number reading code
-  *  - Added new DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK() macro to the Dataflash driver, which returns the Dataflash select mask for the given chip index
-  *  - Added new HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval host state machine state for non-blocking disabling of device communications until the
-  *    device has been removed (for use when an error occurs or communications with the device have completed)
-  *  - Added new FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS compile time option for faster stream transfers via multiple bytes copied per stream loop
-  *  - Added stdio stream demo code to the CDC device demos, to show how to create standard streams out of the virtual serial ports
-  *  - Added new EEPROM and FLASH buffer versions of the Endpoint and Pipe stream functions
-  *  - Added new USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS compile time options
-  *  - Added support for the new ATMEGA32U2, ATMEGA16U2 and ATMEGA8U2 AVR models
-  *  - Added new USB_DeviceState variable to keep track of the current Device mode USB state
-  *  - Added new LEDs_ToggleLEDs() function to the LEDs driver
-  *  - Added new Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber() and Pipe_IsEndpointBound() functions
-  *  - Added new DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR and HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR compile time options
-  *  - Added 404 Not Found errors to the webserver in the RNDIS demos to indicate invalid URLs
-  *  
-  *  <b>Changed:</b>
-  *  - Deprecated psuedo-scheduler and removed dynamic memory allocator from the library (first no longer needed and second unused)
-  *  - The device-mode CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function now has an extra parameter so that the memory space in which the requested
-  *    descriptor is located can be specified. This means that descriptors can now be located in multiple memory spaces within a device.
-  *  - Removed vague USB_IsConnected global - test USB_DeviceState or USB_HostState explicitly to gain previous functionality
-  *  - Removed USB_IsSuspended global - test USB_DeviceState against DEVICE_STATE_Suspended instead
-  *  - Extended USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() routine to require the configuration number within the device to fetch
-  *  - Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy() now always ensures that the dataflash is ready for the next command immediately after returning,
-  *    no need to call Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS() afterwards
-  *  - Low level API MIDI device demo no longer blocks if a note change event is sent while the endpoint is not ready
-  *  - Pipe_GetErrorFlags() now returns additional error flags for overflow and underflow errors
-  *  - Pipe stream functions now automatically set the correct pipe token, so that bidirectional pipes can be used
-  *  - Pipe_ConfigurePipe() now automatically defaults IN pipes to accepting infinite IN requests, this can still be changed by calling
-  *    the existing Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests() function
-  *  - Changed F_CLOCK entries in project makefiles to alias to F_CPU by default, as this is the most common case
-  *  - Host mode demos now use sane terminal escape codes, so that text is always readable and events/program output is visually distinguished
-  *    from oneanother using foreground colours
-  *  - Internal per-device preprocessing conditions changed to per-device series rather than per-controller group for finer-grain
-  *    internal control
-  *  - Interrupts are no longer disabled during the processing of Control Requests on the default endpoint while in device mode
-  *  - AudioOutput demos now always output to board LEDs, regardless of output mode (removed AUDIO_OUT_LEDS project option)
-  *  - Removed SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION compile time option in favour of the new FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS option so that the exact number
-  *    of device configurations can be defined statically
-  *  - Removed VBUS events, as they are already exposed to the user application via the regular device connection and disconnection events
-  *  - Renamed and altered existing events to properly seperate out Host and Device mode events
-  *
-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
-  *  - Changed bootloaders to use FLASHEND rather than the existence of RAMPZ to determine if far FLASH pointers are needed to fix
-  *    bootloaders on some of the USB AVR devices where avr-libc erronously defines RAMPZ
-  *  - Fixes to MassStorageHost for better device compatibility (increase command timeout, change MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()
-  *    to only unfreeze and check one data pipe at a time) to prevent incorrect device enumerations and freezes while trasferring data
-  *  - Make Pipe_ConfigurePipe() mask the given endpoint number against PIPE_EPNUM_MASK to ensure the endpoint IN direction bit is
-  *    cleared to prevent endpoint type corruption
-  *  - Fixed issue opening CDC-ACM ports on hosts when the CDC device tries to send data before the host has set the line encoding
-  *  - Fixed USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option being ignored during device disconnects on some models (thanks to Brian Dickman)
-  *  - Fixed documentation mentioning Pipe_GetCurrentToken() function when correct function name is Pipe_GetPipeToken()
-  *  - Fixed ADC driver for the ATMEGA32U4 and ATMEGA16U4 (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
-  *  - Fixed CDCHost demo unfreezing the pipes at the point of configuration, rather than use
-  *  - Fixed MassStorage demo not clearing the reset flag when a Mass Storage Reset is issued while not processing a command
-  *  - Fixed USB_Host_SendControlRequest() not re-suspending the USB bus when initial device ready-wait fails
-  *  - Fixed USB Pad regulator not being disabled on some AVR models when the USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED option is used
-  *  - Fixed Host mode to Device mode UID change not causing a USB Disconnect event when a device was connected
-  *  - Fixed Mouse/Keyboard demos not performing the correct arithmetic on the Idle period at the right times (thanks to Brian Dickman)
-  *  - Fixed GenericHID failing HID class tests due to incorrect Logical Minimum and Logical Maximum values (thanks to S�ren Greiner)
-  *  - Fixed incorrect PIPE_EPNUM_MASK mask causing pipe failures on devices with endpoint addresses of 8 and above (thanks to John Andrews)
-  *  - Fixed report data alignment issues in the MouseHostWithParser demo when X and Y movement data size is not a multiple of 8 bits
-  *  - Fixed HID Report Descriptor Parser not correctly resetting internal states when a REPORT ID element is encountered
-  *  - Fixed incorrect BUTTONS_BUTTON1 for the STK526 target
-  *  - Fixed RNDIS demos freezing when more than one connection was attempted simultaneously, causing memory corruption
-  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo receiving noise from the USART due to pullup not being enabled
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090605 Version 090605
-  *
-  *  - Fixed bug in RNDISEthernet and DualCDC demos not using the correct USB_ControlRequest structure for control request data
-  *  - Fixed documentation showing incorrect USB mode support on the supported AVRs list
-  *  - Fixed RNDISEthernet not working under Linux due to Linux requiring an "optional" RNDIS request which was unhandled
-  *  - Fixed Mouse and Keyboard device demos not acting in accordance with the HID specification for idle periods (thanks to Brian Dickman)
-  *  - Removed support for endpoint/pipe non-control interrupts; these did not act in the way users expected, and had many subtle issues
-  *  - Fixed Device Mode not handling Set Feature and Clear Feature Chapter 9 requests that are addressed to the device (thanks to Brian Dickman)
-  *  - Moved control endpoint interrupt handling into the library itself, enable via the new INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token
-  *  - Fixed CDCHost not clearing configured pipes and resetting configured pipes mask when a partially enumerated invalid CDC
-  *    interface is skipped
-  *  - Clarified the size of library tokens which accept integer values in the Compile Time Tokens page, values now use the smallest datatype
-  *    inside the library that is able to hold their defined value to save space
-  *  - Removed DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS() macro as it was largely supurflous and only served to obfuscate code
-  *  - Rewritten event system to remove all macros, to make user code clearer
-  *  - Fixed incorrect ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK mask preventing endpoints above EP3 from being selected (thanks to Jonathan Oakley)
-  *  - Removed STREAM_CALLBACK() macro - callbacks now use regular function definitions to clarify user code
-  *  - Removed DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR() macro - comparators should now use regular function definitions to clarify user code
-  *  - USB_IsConnected is now cleared before the USB_Disconnect() event is fired in response to VBUS being removed
-  *  - Fixed incorrect PID value being used in the USBtoSerial project (thanks to Phill)
-  *  - Deleted StdDescriptors.c, renamed USB_GetDescriptor() to CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor, moved ConfigDescriptor.c/.h from the
-  *    LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ directory to LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ in preperation for the new USB class APIs
-  *  - Moved out each demos' functionality library files (e.g. Ring Buffer library) to /Lib directories for a better directory structure
-  *  - Removed Tx interrupt from the USBtoSerial demo; now sends characters via polling to ensure more time for the Rx interrupt
-  *  - Fixed possible enumeration errors from spinloops which may fail to exit if the USB connection is severed before the exit condition
-  *    becomes true
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090510 Version 090510
-  *
-  *  - Added new GenericHIDHost demo
-  *  - Corrections to the KeyboardHost and MouseHost demos' pipe handling to freeze and unfreeze the data pipes at the point of use
-  *  - KeyboardHost, MouseHost and GenericHIDHost demos now save and restore the currently selected pipe inside the pipe ISR
-  *  - Changed GenericHID device demo to use the LUFA scheduler, added INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT and INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT compile
-  *    time options
-  *  - All comments in the library, bootloaders, demos and projects have now been spell-checked and spelling mistakes/typos corrected
-  *  - Added new PIMA_DATA_SIZE() define to the Still Image Host demo
-  *  - Add call to MassStore_WaitForDataReceived() in MassStore_GetReturnedStatus() to ensure that the CSW has been received in the
-  *    extended MSC timeout period before continuing, to prevent long processing delays from causing the MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()
-  *    to early-abort (thanks to Dmitry Maksimov)
-  *  - Move StdRequestType.h, StreamCallbacks.h, USBMode.h from the LowLevel USB driver directory to the HighLevel USB driver directory,
-  *    where they are more suited
-  *  - Removed all binary constants and replaced with decimal or hexadecimal constants so that unpatched GCC compilers can still build the
-  *    code without having to be itself patched and recompiled first
-  *  - Added preprocessor checks and documentation to the bootloaders giving information about missing SIGNATURE_x defines due to
-  *    outdated avr-libc versions.
-  *  - Added support to the CDCHost demo for devices with multiple CDC interfaces which are not the correct ACM type preceding the desired
-  *    ACM CDC interface
-  *  - Fixed GenericHID demo not starting USB and HID management tasks when not using interrupt driven modes (thanks to Carl Kjeldsen)
-  *  - Fixed RNDISEthenet demo checking the incorrect message field for packet size constraints (thanks to Jonathan Oakley)
-  *  - Fixed WriteNextReport code in the GenericHIDHost demo using incorrect parameter types and not selecting the correct endpoint
-  *  - Adjusted sample CTC timer calculations in the AudioOutput and AudioInput demos to match the CTC calculations in the AVR datasheet,
-  *    and to fix instances where rounding caused the endpoint to underflow (thanks to Robin Theunis)
-  *  - The USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function no longer automatically selects the Control pipe (pipe 0), so that other control type
-  *    pipes can be used with the function
-  *  - The USB Host management task now saves and restores the currently selected pipe before and after the task completes
-  *  - Fixed GenericHIDHost demo report write routine incorrect for control type requests (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
-  *  - Removed Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() and Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() in favour of new Endpoint_ClearIN(), Endpoint_ClearOUT(),
-  *    Pipe_ClearIN() and Pipe_ClearOUT() macros (done to allow for the detection of packets of zero length)
-  *  - Renamed *_ReadWriteAllowed() macros to *_IsReadWriteAllowed() to remain consistent with the rest of the LUFA API
-  *  - Endpoint_IsSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(), Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived() macro has been
-  *    renamed to Endpoint_ClearSETUP(), the Pipe_IsSetupSent() macro has been renamed to Pipe_IsSETUPSent() and the
-  *    Pipe_ClearSetupSent() macro is no longer applicable and should be removed - changes made to compliment the new endpoint and pipe
-  *    bank management API
-  *  - Updated all demos, bootloaders and projects to use the new endpoint and pipe management APIs (thanks to Roman Thiel from Curetis AG)
-  *  - Updated library doxygen documentation, added groups, changed documentation macro functions to real functions for clarity
-  *  - Removed old endpoint and pipe aliased read/write/discard routines which did not have an explicit endian specifier for clarity
-  *  - Removed the ButtLoadTag.h header file, as no one used for its intended purpose anyway
-  *  - Renamed the main Drivers/AT90USBXXX directory to Drivers/Peripheral, renamed the Serial_Stream driver to SerialStream
-  *  - Fixed CDC and USBtoSerial demos freezing where buffers were full while still transmitting or receiving (thanks to Peter Hand)
-  *  - Removed "Host_" section of the function names in ConfigDescriptor.h, as most of the routines can now be used in device mode on the
-  *    device descriptor
-  *  - Renamed functions in the HID parser to have a "USB_" prefix and the acronym "HID" in the name
-  *  - Fixed incorrect HID interface class and subclass values in the Mouse and KeyboardMouse demos (thanks to Brian Dickman)
-  *  - Capitalised the "Descriptor_Search" and "Descriptor_Search_Comp" prefixes of the values in the DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t and
-  *    DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enums
-  *  - Removed "ERROR" from the enum names in the endpoint and pipe stream error code enums
-  *  - Renamed the USB_PowerOnErrorCodes_t enum to USB_InitErrorCodes_t, renamed the POWERON_ERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified enum value to
-  *    USB_INITERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified
-  *  - Renamed USB_PowerOnFail event to USB_InitFailure
-  *  - Renamed OTG.h header functions to be more consistent with the rest of the library API
-  *  - Changed over all deprecated GCC structure tag initializers to the standardized C99 format (thanks to Mike Alexander)
-  *  - USB_HostRequest renamed to USB_ControlRequest, entire control request header is now read into USB_ControlRequest in Device mode
-  *    rather than having the library pass only partially read header data to the application
-  *  - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event has had its parameters removed, in favour of accessing the new USB_ControlRequest structure
-  *  - The Endpoint control stream functions now correctly send a ZLP to the host when less data than requested is sent
-  *  - Fixed USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag never being set (the REMOTE WAKEUP Set Feature request was not being handled)
-  *  - Renamed the FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE compile-time token to CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
-  *  - Endpoint configuration is now refined to give better output when all configurations have static inputs - removed the now useless
-  *    STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION compile time token
-  *  - Fixed SPI driver init function not clearing SPI2X bit when not needed
-  *  - Fixed PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command issuing in the MassStorageHost demo using incorrect parameters (thanks to Mike Alex)
-  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo broken due to an incorrect if statement test in MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()
-  *  - Fixed reversed signature byte ordering in the CDC bootloader (thanks to Johannes Raschke)
-  *  - Changed PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE from 8 to 64 to try to prevent problems with faulty devices which do not respect the given
-  *    wLength value when reading in the device descriptor
-  *  - Fixed missing semicolon in the ATAVRUSBRF01 LED board driver code (thanks to Morten Lund)
-  *  - Changed LED board driver code to define dummy LED masks for the first four board LEDs, so that user code can be compiled for boards
-  *    with less than four LEDs without code modifications (thanks to Morten Lund)
-  *  - Changed HWB board driver to Buttons driver, to allow for the support of future boards with more than one mounted GPIO button
-  *  - Serial driver now correctly calculates the baud register value when in double speed mode
-  *  - Init function of the Serial driver is now static inline to product smaller code for the common-case of static init values
-  *    
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090401 Version 090401
-  *
-  *  - Fixed MagStripe project configuration descriptor containing an unused (blank) endpoint descriptor
-  *  - Incorporated makefile changes by Denver Gingerich to retain compatibility with stock (non-WinAVR) AVR-GCC installations
-  *  - Fixed makefile EEPROM programming targets programming FLASH data in addition to EEPROM data
-  *  - LUFA devices now enumerate correctly with LUFA hosts
-  *  - Fixed Configuration Descriptor search routine freezing when a comparator returned a failure
-  *  - Removed HID report item serial dump in the MouseHostWithParser and KeyboardHostWithParser - useful only for debugging, and
-  *    slowed down the enumeration of HID devices too much
-  *  - Increased the number of bits per track which can be read in the MagStripe project to 8192 when compiled for the AT90USBXXX6/7
-  *  - Fixed KeyboardMouse demo discarding the wIndex value in the REQ_GetReport request
-  *  - USBtoSerial demo now discards all Rx data when not connected to a USB host, rather than buffering characters for transmission
-  *    next time the device is attached to a host.
-  *  - Added new F_CLOCK compile time constant to the library and makefiles, to give the raw input clock (used to feed the PLL before any
-  *    clock prescaling is performed) frequency, so that the PLL prescale mask can be determined
-  *  - Changed stream wait timeout counter to be 16-bit, so that very long timeout periods can be set for correct communications with
-  *    badly designed hosts or devices which greatly exceed the USB specification limits
-  *  - Mass Storage Host demo now uses a USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS of two seconds to maintain compatibility with poorly designed devices
-  *  - Function attribute ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE renamed to ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE to match other function attribute macro naming conventions
-  *  - Added ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE attribute to several key inlined library components, to ensure they are inlined in all circumstances
-  *  - Removed SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro, the clock_prescale_set() avr-libc macro has been corrected in recent avr-libc versions
-  *  - Fixed incorrect/missing control status stage transfers on demos, bootloaders and applications (thanks to Nate Lawson)
-  *  - The NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token has been renamed to FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE, and its function expanded
-  *    to also remove parts of the Get Status chapter 9 request to further reduce code usage
-  *  - Makefile updated to include output giving the currently selected BOARD parameter value
-  *  - Board Dataflash driver now allows for dataflash ICs which use different shifts for setting the current page/byte address (thanks
-  *    to Kenneth Clubb)
-  *  - Added DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM() and DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM() functions to the MassStorage demo, to allow for easy
-  *    interfacing with a FAT library for dataflash file level access
-  *  - Corrected CDC class bootloader to fix a few bugs, changed address counter to store x2 addresses for convenience
-  *  - Fixed typos in the SPI driver SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64 and SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128 masks (thanks to Markus Zocholl)
-  *  - Keyboard and Mouse device demos (normal, data interrupt and fully interrupt driven) combined into unified keyboard and mouse demos
-  *  - Keyboard and Mouse host demos (normal and data interrupt driven) combined into unified keyboard and mouse demos
-  *  - Removed AVRISP_Programmer project due to code quality concerns
-  *  - Fixed CDC demo not sending an empty packet after each transfer to prevent the host from buffering incoming data
-  *  - Fixed documentation typos and preprocessor checks relating to misspellings of the USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS token (thanks to Ian Gregg)
-  *  - Fixed USBTask.h not conditionally including HostChapter9.h only when USB_CAN_BE_HOST is defined (thanks to Ian Gregg)
-  *  - Fixed incorrect ADC driver init register manipulation (thanks to Tobias)
-  *  - Added new GenericHID device demo application
-  *  - Fixed Still Image Host SImage_SendData() function not clearing the pipe bank after sending data
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090209 Version 090209
-  *
-  *  - PWM timer mode in AudioOut demo changed to Fast PWM for speed
-  *  - Updated Magstripe project to work with the latest hardware revision
-  *  - Fixed library not responding to the BCERRI flag correctly in host mode, leading to device lockups
-  *  - Fixed library handling Get Descriptor requests when not addressed as standard requests to the device or interface (thanks to
-  *    Nate Lawson)
-  *  - Fixed serious data corruption issue in MassStorage demo dataflash write routine
-  *  - Added new NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token
-  *  - USB task now restores previous global interrupt state after execution, rather than forcing global interrupts to be enabled
-  *  - Fixed USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event firing after each configuration change, rather than once after the initial configuration
-  *  - Added ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED() macros to Endpoint.h, altered ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE() to allow user to specify endpoint
-  *  - ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINTS changed to ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS, PIPE_MAX_PIPES changed to PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES
-  *  - Endpoint and Pipe non-control stream functions now ensure endpoint or pipe is ready before reading or writing
-  *  - Changed Teensy bootloader to use a watchdog reset when exiting rather than a software jump
-  *  - Fixed integer promotion error in MassStorage and MassStorageHost demos, corrupting read/write transfers
-  *  - SPI_SendByte is now SPI_TransferByte, added new SPI_SendByte and SPI_ReceiveByte functions for fast one-way transfer
-  *  - MassStorage demo changed to use new fast one-way SPI transfers to increase throughput
-  *  - MassStorage handling of Mass Storage Reset class request improved
-  *  - Altered MassStorage demo dataflash block read code for speed
-  *  - Added USB_IsSuspended global flag
-  *  - Simplified internal Dual Mode (OTG) USB library code to reduce code size
-  *  - Extended stream timeout period to 100ms from 50ms
-  *  - Mass Storage Host demo commands now all return an error code from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
-  *  - Added SubErrorCode parameter to the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event
-  *  - VBUS drop interrupt now disabled during the manual-to-auto VBUS delivery handoff
-  *  - Simplified low level backend so that device/host mode initialization uses the same code paths
-  *  - Added workaround for faulty Mass Storage devices which do not implement the required GET_MAX_LUN request
-  *  - Removed buggy Telnet application from the RNDIS demo
-  *  - Moved Mass Storage class requests in the Mass Storage Host demo to wrapper functions in MassStoreCommands.c
-  *  - Fixed incorrect SCSI command size value in the Request Sense command in MassStoreCommands.c
-  *  - Added SetProtocol request to HID class non-parser Mouse and Keyboard demos to force devices to use the correct Boot Protocol
-  *  - Added new "dfu" and "flip" programming targets to project makefiles
-  *  - HID_PARSE_Sucessful enum member typo corrected to HID_PARSE_Successful
-  *  - Changed COLLECTION item structures in the HID descriptor parser to include the collection's Usage Page value
-  *  - Serial driver now sets Tx line as output, enables pullup on Rx line
-  *  - Fixed smaller USB AVRs raising multiple connection and disconnection events when NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is disabled
-  *  - Added HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS to give the host delay after a device is connected before it is enumerated
-  *  - Fixed KeyboardHostWithParser demo linking against the wrong global variables
-  *  - Completed doxygen documentation of remaining library bootloaders, demos and projects
-  *  - Fixed incorrect bootloader start address in the TeensyHID bootloader
-  *  - Added HWB button whole-disk ASCII dump functionality to MassStoreHost demo
-  *  - Replaced printf_P(PSTR("%c"), {Variable}) calls with putchar(<Variable>) for speed and size savings
-  *  - Serial driver now accepts baud rates over 16-bits in size, added double speed flag option
-  *  - Fixed incorrect callback abort return value in Pipe.c
-  *  - Added new flip-ee and dfu-ee makefile targets (courtesy of Opendous Inc.)
-  *  - Removed reboot-on-disconnect code from the TeensyHID bootloader, caused problems on some systems
-  *  - Fixed AudioOutput and AudioInput demos looping on the endpoint data, rather than processing a sample at a time and returning
-  *    each time the task runs to allow for other tasks to execute
-  *  - Added support for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01 board
-  *  - Added AVRISP Programmer Project, courtesy of Opendous Inc.
-  *  - Fixed CDC Host demo not searching through both CDC interfaces for endpoints
-  *  - Fixed incorrect Product String descriptor length in the DFU class bootloader
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog081224 Version 081224
-  *
-  *  - MyUSB name changed to LUFA, the Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs
-  *  - Fixed Mass Storage Host demo's MassStore_SendCommand() delay in the incorrect place
-  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo not calling ReconfigureUSART() after a change in the line encoding
-  *  - Fixed infinite loop in host mode Host-to-Device control transfers with data stages
-  *  - HID report parser now supports devices with multiple reports in one interface via Report IDs
-  *  - Fixed RZUSBSTICK board LED driver header incorrect macro definition order causing compile errors
-  *  - Calling USB_Init() when the USB interface is already configured now forces a complete interface reset
-  *    and re-enumeration - fixes MyUSB DFU bootloader not switching to app code correctly when soft reset used
-  *  - Fixed "No newline at end of file" warning when stream callbacks are enabled
-  *  - DFU bootloader now uses fixed signature bytes per device, rather than reading them out dynamically for size
-  *  - Added new FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE and USE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION switches to statically define certain values to
-  *    reduce compiled binary size
-  *  - Added new NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT switch to prevent the library from trying to determine bus connection
-  *    state from the suspension and wake up events on the smaller USB AVRs
-  *  - Added summary of all library compile time tokens to the documentation
-  *  - Added overview of the LUFA scheduler to the documentation
-  *  - Removed MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token, replaced with a mask for the USB_Init() Options parameter
-  *  - CDC bootloader now uses the correct non-far or far versions of the pgm_* functions depending on if RAMPZ is defined
-  *  - Doxygen documentation now contains documentation on all the projects, bootloaders and most demos included with the library
-  *  - CDC bootloader now runs user application when USB disconnected rather than waiting for a hard reset
-  *  - MouseHostWithParser and KeyboardHostWithParser now support multiple-report devices
-  *  - RNDIS demo can now close connections correctly using the new TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION() macro - used in Webserver  
-  *  - Fixed the DFU bootloader, no longer freezes up when certain files are programmed into an AVR, made reading/writing faster
-  *  - Fixed mouse/joystick up/down movements reversed - HID mouse X/Y coordinates use a left-handed coordinate system, not a normal 
-  *    right-handed system
-  *  - Added stub code to the CDC and USBtoSerial demos showing how to read and set the RS-232 handshake lines - not currently used in
-  *    the demos, but the example code and supporting defines are now in place
-  *  - Interrupts are now disabled when processing a control request in device mode, to avoid exceeding the strict control request
-  *    timing requirements.
-  *  - All demos now use a central StatusUpdate() function rather than direct calls to the board LED functions, so that the demos can
-  *    easily be altered to show different LED combinations (or do something else entirely) as the demo's status changes
-  *  - Removed LED commands from the CDC bootloader, unused by most AVR910 programming software
-  *  - Fixed RNDIS demo ICMP ping requests echoing back incorrect data
-  *  - Added DHCP server code to RNDIS demo, allowing for hands-free auto configuration on any PC
-  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader PID value for the ATMEGA16U4 AVR
-  *  - Endpoint and Pipe configuration functions now return an error code indicating success or failure
-  *  - USB Reset in device mode now resets and disables all device endpoints
-  *  - Added intermediate states to the host mode state machine, reducing the USB task blocking time to no more than 1ms explicitly per
-  *    invocation when in host mode
-  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA32U6 microcontroller
-  *  - Added STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION compile time option, enabled in the bootloaders to minimize space usage
-  *  - Removed redundant code from the USB device GetStatus() chapter 9 processing routine
-  *  - Added new TeensyHID bootloader, compatible with the Teensy HID protocol (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/)
-  *  - Versions are now numbered by release dates, rather than arbitrary major/minor revision numbers
-  *  - USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled is now correctly set and cleared by SetFeature and ClearFeature requests from the host
-  *  - Changed prototype of GetDescriptor, so that it now returns the descriptor size (or zero if the descriptor doesn't exist)
-  *    rather than passing the size back to the caller through a parameter and returning a boolean
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog153 Version 1.5.3 - Released 2nd October, 2008
-  *
-  *  - Fixed CDC bootloader using pgmspace macros for some descriptors inappropriately
-  *  - Updated all Mouse and Keyboard device demos to include boot protocol support (now works in BIOS)
-  *  - Renamed bootloader directories to remove spaces, which were causing build problems on several OSes
-  *  - Removed serial number strings from all but the MassStore demo where it is required - users were not
-  *    modifying the code to either omit the descriptor or use a unique serial per device causing problems
-  *    when multiple units of the same device were plugged in at the same time
-  *  - AudioOutput and AudioInput demos now correctly silence endpoints when not enabled by the host
-  *  - Added KeyboardMouse demo (Keyboard and Mouse functionality combined into a single demo)
-  *  - Added DriverStubs directory to house board level driver templates, to make MyUSB compatible custom board
-  *    driver creation easier
-  *  - Extended MassStorage demo to support multiple LUNs, 2 by default
-  *  - Fixed incorrect device address mask, preventing the device from enumerating with addresses larger than 63
-  *  - Fixed incorrect data direction mask in the GetStatus standard request, preventing it from being handled
-  *  - Fixed incorrect GetStatus standard request for endpoints, now returns the endpoint STALL status correctly
-  *  - Added in new USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and USB_CurrentlySelfPowered flags rather than using fixed values
-  *  - Added DualCDC demo to demonstrate the use of Interface Association Descriptors
-  *  - Added pipe NAK detection and clearing API
-  *  - Added pipe status change (NAK, STALL, etc.) interrupt API
-  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo so that it no longer freezes randomly when issuing several commands in a row
-  *  - Host demos configuration descriptor routines now return a unique error code when the returned data does
-  *    not have a valid configuration descriptor header
-  *  - Added Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() and Pipe_WaitUntilReady() functions
-  *  - Stream functions now have software timeouts, timeout period can be set by the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token
-  *  - All demos now pass the USB.org automated Chapter 9 device compliance tests
-  *  - All HID demos now pass the USB.org automated HID compliance tests
-  *  - Polling interval of the interrupt endpoint in the CDC based demos changed to 0xFF to fix problems on Linux systems
-  *  - Changed stream functions to accept a new callback function, with NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS used to disable all callbacks
-  *  - Mass Storage demo dataflash management routines changed to use the endpoint stream functions		
-  *  - Added AVRStudio project files for each demo in addition to the existing Programmer's Notepad master project file
-  *  - Re-added call to ReconfigureUSART() in USBtoSerial SetLineCoding request, so that baud rate changes
-  *    are reflected in the hardware (change was previously lost)
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog152 Version 1.5.2 - Released 31st July, 2008
-  *
-  *  - Fixed SwapEndian_32() function in Common.h so that it now works correctly (wrong parameter types)
-  *  - Updated RNDIS demo - notification endpoint is no longer blocking so that it works with faulty Linux RNDIS
-  *    implementations (where the notification endpoint is ignored in favour of polling the control endpoint)
-  *  - Fixed incorrect Vendor Description string return size in RNDIS demo for the OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION OID token
-  *  - Added very basic TCP/IP stack and HTTP/TELNET servers to RNDIS demo
-  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader exit causing programming software to complain about failed writes
-  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader EEPROM programming mode wiping first flash page
-  *  - Fixed Clear/Set Feature device standard request processing code (fixing MassStorage demo in the process)
-  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA16U4 AVR microcontroller
-  *  - Library licence changed from LGPLv3 to MIT license
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog151 Version 1.5.1 - Released 31st July, 2008
-  *
-  *  - Changed host demos to enable the host function task on the firing of the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event
-  *    rather than the USB_DeviceAttached event
-  *  - HID Usage Stack now forcefully cleared after an IN/OUT/FEATURE item has been completely processed to remove
-  *    any referenced but not created usages
-  *  - Changed USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts() and USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(), USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfType(),
-  *    USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(), USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter() to normal functions (from inline)
-  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo not sending data, only receiving
-  *  - Fixed main makefile to make all by default, fixed MagStripe directory case to prevent case-sensitive path problems
-  *  - ConfigDescriptor functions made normal, instead of static inline
-  *  - Pipe/Endpoint *_Ignore_* functions changed to *_Discard_*, old names still present as aliases
-  *  - Fixed ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE define to be correct on limited USB controller AVRs
-  *  - Changed endpoint and pipe size translation routines to use previous IF/ELSE IF cascade code, new algorithmic
-  *    approach was buggy and caused problems
-  *  - Bootloaders now compile with -fno-inline-small-functions option to reduce code size
-  *  - Audio demos now use correct endpoint sizes for full and limited controller USB AVRs, double banking in all cases
-  *    to be in line with the specification (isochronous endpoints MUST be double banked)
-  *  - Added Interface Association descriptor to StdDescriptors.h, based on the relevant USB2.0 ECN
-  *  - Fixed MIDI demo, corrected Audio Streaming descriptor to follow the MIDI-specific AS structure
-  *  - Fixed HID class demo descriptors so that the HID interface's protocol is 0x00 (required for non-boot protocol HID
-  *    devices) to prevent problems on hosts expecting the boot protocol functions to be supported
-  *  - Added read/write control stream functions to Endpoint.h
-  *  - Fixed AudioOut demo not setting port pins to inputs on USB disconnect properly
-  *  - Added RNDISEthernet demo application
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog150 Version 1.5.0 - Released 10 June, 2008
-  *
-  *  - Fixed MIDI demo, now correctly waits for the endpoint to be ready between multiple note messages
-  *  - Added CDC Host demo application
-  *  - Added KeyboardFullInt demo application
-  *  - Endpoint and Pipe creation routines now mask endpoint/pipe size with the size mask, to remove transaction
-  *    size bits not required for the routines (improves compatibility with devices)
-  *  - Fixed AudioInput demo - now correctly sends sampled audio to the host PC
-  *  - Fixed AudioOutput demo once more -- apparently Windows requires endpoint packets to be >=192 bytes
-  *  - Shrunk round-robbin scheduler code slightly via the use of struct pointers rather than array indexes
-  *  - Fixed off-by-one error when determining if the Usage Stack is full inside the HID Report parser
-  *  - Renamed Magstripe.h to MagstripeHW.h and moved driver out of the library and into the MagStripe demo folder
-  *  - Added preprocessor checks to enable C linkage on the library components when used with a C++ compiler
-  *  - Added Still Image Host demo application
-  *  - The USB device task now restores the previously selected endpoint, allowing control requests to be transparently
-  *    handled via interrupts while other endpoints are serviced through polling
-  *  - Fixed device signature being sent in reverse order in the CDC bootloader
-  *  - Host demos now have a separate ConfigDescriptor.c/.h file for configuration descriptor processing
-  *  - HostWithParser demos now have a separate HIDReport.c/.h file for HID report processing and dumping
-  *  - Removed non-mandatory commands from MassStorage demo to save space, fixed SENSE ResponseCode value
-  *  - CDC demos now send empty packets after sending a full one to prevent buffering issues on the host
-  *  - Updated demo descriptors to use VID/PID values donated by Atmel
-  *  - Added DoxyGen documentation to the source files
-  *  - Fixed Serial_IsCharReceived() definition, was previously reversed
-  *  - Removed separate USB_Descriptor_Language_t descriptor, USB_Descriptor_String_t is used instead
-  *  - Removed unused Device Qualifier descriptor structure
-  *  - Renamed the USB_CreateEndpoints event to the more appropriate USB_ConfigurationChanged
-  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo reading in the block data in reverse
-  *  - Removed outdated typedefs in StdRequestType.h, superseded by the macro masks
-  *  - Corrected OTG.h is now included when the AVR supports both Host and Device modes, for creating OTG products
-  *  - USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event is now also fired when in device mode and the host has finished its enumeration
-  *  - Interrupt driven demos now properly restore previously selected endpoint when ISR is complete
-  *  - USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS is now overridable in the user project makefile to a custom fixed timeout value
-  *  - Renamed USB_Host_SOFGeneration_* macros to more friendly USB_Host_SuspendBus(), USB_Host_ResumeBus()
-  *    and USB_Host_IsBusSuspended()
-  *  - Renamed *_*_Is* macros to *_Is* to make all flag checking macros consistent, Pipe_SetInterruptFreq() is now
-  *    Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod() to use the correct terminology
-  *  - UnicodeString member of USB_Descriptor_String_t struct changed to an ordinary int array type, so that the GCC
-  *    Unicode strings (prefixed with an L before the opening quotation mark) can be used instead of explicit arrays
-  *    of ASCII characters
-  *  - Fixed Endpoint/Pipes being configured incorrectly if the maximum endpoint/pipe size for the selected USB AVR
-  *    model was given as the bank size
-  *  - HID device demos now use a true raw array for the HID report descriptor rather than a struct wrapped array
-  *  - Added VERSION_BCD() macro, fixed reported HID and USB version numbers in demo descriptors
-  *  - Cleaned up GetDescriptor device chapter 9 handler function
-  *  - Added GET_REPORT class specific request to HID demos to make them complaint to the HID class
-  *  - Cleaned up setting of USB_IsInitialized and USB_IsConnected values to only when needed
-  *  - Removed Atomic.c and ISRMacro.h; the library was already only compatible with recent avr-lib-c for other reasons
-  *  - All demos and library functions now use USB standardized names for the USB data (bRequest, wLength, etc.)
-  *  - Added USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token to switch back to the non-standard descriptor element names
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog141 Version 1.4.1 - Released 5 May, 2008
-  *
-  *  - Enhanced KeyboardWithParser demo, now prints out pressed alphanumeric characters like the standard demo
-  *  - Fixed MassStorage demo, read/writes using non mode-10 commands now work correctly
-  *  - Corrected version number in Version.h
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog140 Version 1.4.0 - Released 5 May, 2008
-  *
-  *  - Added HID Report Parser API to the library
-  *  - Added Mouse and Keyboard host demo applications, using the new HID report parser engine
-  *  - Added MouseFullInt demo, which demonstrates a fully interrupt (including control requests) mouse device
-  *  - Fixed incorrect length value in the audio control descriptor of the AudioOutput and AudioInput demos
-  *  - Added MIDI device demo application to the library
-  *  - Fixed problem preventing USB devices from being resumed from a suspended state
-  *  - Added new CDC class bootloader to the library, based on the AVR109 bootloader protocol
-  *  - Added header to each demo application indicating the mode, class, subclass, standards used and supported speed
-  *  - Functions expecting endpoint/pipe numbers are no longer automatically masked against ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK or
-  *    PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK - this should be manually added to code which requires it
-  *  - Fixed DFU class bootloader - corrected frequency of flash page writes, greatly reducing programming time
-  *  - Renamed AVR_HOST_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() to USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() and AVR_HOST_GetNextDescriptor()
-  *    to USB_Host_GetNextDescriptor()
-  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore() and USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter() routines
-  *  - Moved configuration descriptor routines to MyUSB/Drivers/USB/Class/, new accompanying ConfigDescriptors.c file
-  *  - Added new configuration descriptor comparator API for more powerful descriptor parsing, updated host demos to use the
-  *    new comparator API
-  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo capacity printout, and changed data read/write mode from little-endian to the correct
-  *    big-endian for SCSI devices
-  *  - Fixed macro/function naming consistency; USB_HOST is now USB_Host, USB_DEV is now USB_Device
-  *  - Added better error reporting to host demos
-  *  - Added 10 microsecond delay after addressing devices in host mode, to prevent control stalls
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog132 Version 1.3.2 - Released April 1st, 2008
-  *
-  *  - Added call to ReconfigureUSART() in USBtoSerial SetLineCoding request, so that baud rate changes
-  *    are reflected in the hardware
-  *  - Fixed CDC and USBtoSerial demos - Stream commands do not work for control endpoints, and the 
-  *    GetLineCoding request had an incorrect RequestType mask preventing it from being processed
-  *  - Improved reliability of the USBtoSerial demo, adding a busy wait while the buffer is full
-  *  - Device control endpoint size is now determined from the device's descriptors rather than being fixed
-  *  - Separated out SPI code into new SPI driver in AT90USBXXX driver directory
-  *  - Bootloader now returns correct PID for the selected USB AVR model, not just the AT90USB128X PID
-  *  - Added support for the RZUSBSTICK board
-  *  - Bicolour driver removed in favour of generic LEDs driver
-  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA32U4 AVR
-  *  - Added MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time option to prevent the USB library from manipulating the PLL
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog131 Version 1.3.1 - Released March 19th 2008
-  *
-  *  - Fixed USB to Serial demo - class value in the descriptors was incorrect
-  *  - Control endpoint size changed from 64 bytes to 8 bytes to save on USB FIFO RAM and to allow low
-  *    speed mode devices to enumerate properly
-  *  - USB to Serial demo data endpoints changed to dual-banked 16 byte to allow the demo to work
-  *    on USB AVRs with limited USB FIFO RAM
-  *  - Changed demo endpoint numbers to use endpoints 3 and 4 for double banking, to allow limited
-  *    USB device controller AVRs (AT90USB162, AT90USB82) to function correctly
-  *  - Updated Audio Out demo to use timer 1 for AVRs lacking a timer 3 for the PWM output
-  *  - Fixed incorrect USB_DEV_OPT_HIGHSPEED entry in the Mass Storage device demo makefile
-  *  - Optimized Mass Storage demo for a little extra transfer speed
-  *  - Added LED indicators to the Keyboard demo for Caps Lock, Num Lock and Scroll Lock
-  *  - Added Endpoint_Read_Stream, Endpoint_Write_Stream, Pipe_Read_Stream and Pipe_Write_Stream functions
-  *    (including Big and Little Endian variants)
-  *  - Made Dataflash functions inline for speed, removed now empty Dataflash.c driver file
-  *  - Added new SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro (thanks to Joerg Wunsch)
-  *  - Fixed Endpoint_ClearStall() to function correctly on full USB controller AVRs (AT90USBXXX6/7)
-  *  - Endpoint_Setup_In_Clear() and Endpoint_Setup_Out_Clear() no longer set FIFOCON, in line with the
-  *    directives in the datasheet
-  *  - Fixed PLL prescaler defines for all AVR models and frequencies
-  *  - Fixed ENDPOINT_INT_IN and ENDPOINT_INT_OUT definitions
-  *  - Added interrupt driven keyboard and mouse device demos
-  *  - Combined USB_Device_ClearFeature and USB_Device_SetFeature requests into a single routine for code
-  *    size savings
-  *  - Added missing Pipe_GetCurrentPipe() macro to Pipe.h
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog130 Version 1.3.0 - Released March 7th 2008
-  *
-  *  - Unnecessary control endpoint config removed from device mode
-  *  - Fixed device standard request interpreter accidentally processing some class-specific requests
-  *  - Added USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS compile time options to instruct the library
-  *    to use descriptors stored in RAM or EEPROM rather than flash memory
-  *  - All demos now disable watchdog on startup, in case it has been enabled by fuses or the bootloader
-  *  - USB_DEV_OPT_LOWSPEED option now works correctly
-  *  - Added ability to set the USB options statically for a binary size reduction via the USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
-  *    compile time define
-  *  - USB_Init no longer takes a Mode parameter if compiled for a USB device with no host mode option, or
-  *    if forced to a particular mode via the USB_HOST_ONLY or USB_DEVICE_ONLY compile time options
-  *  - USB_Init no longer takes an Options parameter if options statically configured by USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
-  *  - Endpoint_Ignore_* and Pipe_Ignore_* made smaller by making the dummy variable non-volatile so that the
-  *    compiler can throw away the result more efficiently
-  *  - Added in an optional GroupID value to each scheduler entry, so that groups of tasks can once again be
-  *    controlled by the new Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode() routine
-  *  - Added support for AT90USB162 and AT90USB82 AVR models
-  *  - Added support for the STK525 and STK526 boards
-  *  - Added support for custom board drivers to be supplied by selecting the board type as BOARD_USER, and
-  *    placing board drivers in {Application Directory}/Board/
-  *  - PLL is now stopped and USB clock is frozen when detached from host in device mode, to save power
-  *  - Joystick defines are now in synch with the schematics - orientation will be rotated for the USBKEY
-  *  - Fixed USB_DEV_IsUSBSuspended() - now checks the correct register
-  *  - Fixed data transfers to devices when in host mode
-  *  - Renamed USB_DEV_OPT_HIGHSPEED to USB_DEV_OPT_FULLSPEED and USB_HOST_IsDeviceHighSpeed() to
-  *    USB_HOST_IsDeviceFullSpeed() to be in line with the official USB speed names (to avoid confusion with
-  *    the real high speed mode, which is unavailable on the USB AVRs)
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog120 Version 1.2.0 - Released February 4th, 2008
-  *
-  *  - Added USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event for host mode
-  *  - Added new Scheduler_Init routine to preprepare the scheduler, so that tasks can be started and
-  *    stopped before the scheduler has been started (via Scheduler_Start)
-  *  - Connection events in both Device and Host mode are now interrupt-driven, allowing the USB management
-  *    task to be stopped when the USB is not connected to a host or device
-  *  - All demos updated to stop the USB task when not in use via the appropriate USB events
-  *  - Mass Storage Host demo application updated to function correctly with all USB flash disks
-  *  - Mass Storage Host demo application now prints out the capacity and number of LUNs in the attached
-  *    device, and prints the first block as hexadecimal numbers rather than ASCII characters
-  *  - Endpoint and Pipe clearing routines now clear the Endpoint/Pipe interrupt and status flags
-  *  - Shifted error handling code in the host enum state machine to a single block, to reduce code complexity
-  *  - Added in DESCRIPTOR_TYPE, DESCRIPTOR_SIZE and DESCRIPTOR_CAST macros to make config descriptor processing
-  *    clearer in USB hosts and DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS for convenience in USB devices
-  *  - Added in alloca macro to common.h, in case the user is using an old version of avr-lib-c missing the macro
-  *
-  *
-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog130 Version 1.1.0 - Released January 25th 2008
-  *
-  *  - Fixed DCONNI interrupt being enabled accidentally after a USB reset
-  *  - Fixed DDISCI interrupt not being disabled when a device is not connected
-  *  - Added workaround for powerless pullup devices causing false disconnect interrupts
-  *  - Added USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event for Host mode
-  *  - AVR_HOST_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor routine no longer modifies ConfigSizePtr if a valid buffer
-  *    pointer is passed
-  *  - Added ALLOCABLE_BYTES to DynAlloc, and added code to make the size of key storage variables
-  *    dependant on size of memory parameters passed in via the user project's makefile
-  *  - Fixed incorrect device reset routine being called in USBTask
-  *  - Devices which do not connect within the standard 300mS are now supported
-  *  - Removed incorrect ATTR_PURE from Scheduler_SetTaskMode(), which was preventing tasks from being
-  *    started/stopped, as well as USB_InitTaskPointer(), which was breaking dual device/host USB projects
-  *  - Changed scheduler to use the task name rather than IDs for setting the task mode, eliminating the
-  *    need to have a task ID list
-  *  - ID transistion interrupt now raises the appropriate device/host disconnect event if device attached
-  *  - Fixed double VBUS change (and VBUS -) event when detatching in device mode
-  *  - Added ability to disable ANSI terminal codes by the defining of DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES in makefile
-  *  - Removed return from ConfigurePipe and ConfigureEndpoint functions - use Pipe_IsConfigured() and 
-  *    Endpoint_IsConfigured() after calling the config functions to determine success
-  */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+ /** \page Page_ChangeLog Project Changelog
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLogXXXXXX Version XXXXXX
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added incomplete MIDIToneGenerator project
+  *  - Added new Relay Controller Board project (thanks to OBinou)
+  *  - Added board hardware driver support for the Teensy, USBTINY MKII, Benito and JM-DB-U2 lines of third party USB AVR boards
+  *  - Added new ATTR_NO_INIT variable attribute for global variables that should not be automatically cleared on startup
+  *  - Added new ENDPOINT_*_BusSuspended error code to the Endpoint function, so that the stream functions early-abort if the bus
+  *    is suspended before or during a transfer
+  *  - Added new EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent() event and CDC_Host_SendBreak() function to the Device and Host CDC Class drivers
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - AVRISP programmer project now has a more robust timeout system
+  *  - Added a timeout value to the TWI_StartTransmission() function, within which the addressed device must respond
+  *  - Webserver project now uses the board LEDs to indicate the current IP configuration state
+  *  - Added ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER compile time option to the Webserver project to disable the TELNET server if desired
+  *  - Increased throughput of the USBtoSerial demo on systems that send multiple bytes per packet (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
+  *  - Double bank CDC endpoints in the XPLAIN Bridge project, re-enable JTAG once the mode selection pin has been sampled.
+  *  - Standardized the naming scheme given to configuration descriptor sub-elements in the Device mode demos, bootloaders
+  *    and projects
+  *  - All Class Driver Host mode demos now correctly set the board LEDs to READY once the enumeration process has completed
+  *  - Added LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT compile time option to the AVRISP programmer project to make the code compatible with Windows
+  *    builds of avrdude at the expense of AVRStudio compatibility
+  *  - Removed two-step endpoint/pipe bank clear and switch sequence for smaller, faster endpoint/pipe code
+  *  - The USB_Init() function no longer calls sei() - the user is now responsible for enabling interrupts when they are ready
+  *    for them to be enabled (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
+  *  - The Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived() and Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample() functions are now inline, to reduce overhead
+  *  - Removed the cast to uint16_t on the set baud rate in the USBtoSerial project, so that the higher >1M baud rates can be
+  *    selected (thanks to Steffan Woltjer)
+  *  - Removed software PDI and TPI emulation from the AVRISP-MKII clone project as it was very buggy and slow - PDI and TPI must
+  *    now be implemented via seperate programming headers
+  *  - The CDC class bootloader now uses a watchdog reset rather than a soft-reset when exited to ensure that all hardware is
+  *    properly reset to their defaults
+  *  - Device mode class driver callbacks are now fired before the control request status stage is sent to prevent the host from
+  *    timing out if another request is immediately fired and the device has a lengthy callback routine
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Fixed software PDI/TPI programming mode in the AVRISP project not correctly toggling just the clock pin
+  *  - Fixed TWI_StartTransmission() corrupting the contents of the GPIOR0 register
+  *  - Fixed TWI driver not aborting when faced with no response after attempting to address a device on the bus
+  *  - Fixed ADC routines not correctly returning the last result when multiple channels were read
+  *  - Fixed ADC routines failing to read the extended channels (Channels 8 to 13, Internal Temperature Sensor) on the
+  *    U4 series USB AVR parts
+  *  - Fixed LowLevel MassStorage demo broken on the U2 series USB AVRs due to unsupported double-banked endpoint modes used
+  *  - Fixed compilation error in the AudioInput demos when MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL is defined (thanks to C. Scott Ananian)
+  *  - Fixed incorrect definition of HID_ALIGN_DATA() causing incorrect HID report item data alignment
+  *  - Fixed Still Image Host class driver not resetting the transaction ID when a new session is opened, fixed driver not sending
+  *    a valid session ID to the device
+  *  - Removed invalid dfu and flip related targets from the bootloaders - bootloaders can only be replaced with an external programmer
+  *  - Fixed Set/Clear Feature requests directed to a non-configured endpoint not returning a stall to the host
+  *  - Fixed HID Device Class Driver not allocating a temporary buffer when the host requests a report via the control endpoint and the
+  *    user has set the PrevReportINBuffer driver configuration element to NULL (thanks to Lars Noschinski)
+  *  - Fixed device state not being reset to DEVICE_STATE_Default if the host sets a 0x00 device address
+  *  - Fixed device not stalling configuration requests before the device's address has been set
+  *  - Fixed possibility of internal signature retrieval being corrupted if an interrupt occurs during a signature byte
+  *    read (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
+  *  - Fixed device state not being reset back to the default state if the host sets the address to 0
+  *  - Fixed Set Configuration requests not being stalled until the host has set the device's address
+  *  - Fixed Host mode HID class driver not sending the correct report type when HID_Host_SendReportByID() was called and the 
+  *    HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time option is set
+  *  - Fixed INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT compile time option preventing other interrupts from occuring while the control endpoint
+  *    request is being processed, causing possible lockups if a USB interrupt occurs during a transfer
+  *  - Fixed TeensyHID bootloader not working on some USB AVR models with the official TeensyLoader GUI application
+  *  - Remove incorrect Abstract Call Management class specific descriptor from the CDC demos, bootloaders and projects
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog100219 Version 100219
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added TPI programming support for 6-pin ATTINY devices to the AVRISP programmer project (thanks to Tom Light)
+  *  - Added command timeout counter to the AVRISP project so that the device no longer freezes when incorrectly connected
+  *    to a target
+  *  - Added new TemperatureDataLogger application, a USB data logger which writes to the device's dataflash and appears to
+  *    the host as a standard Mass Storage device when inserted
+  *  - Added MIDI event packing support to the MIDI Device and Host mode Class drivers, allowing for multiple MIDI events to
+  *    sent or received in packed form in a single USB packet
+  *  - Added new MIDI send buffer flush routines to the MIDI Device and Host mode Class drivers, to flush packed events
+  *  - Added master mode hardware TWI driver for easy TWI peripheral control
+  *  - Added ADC MUX masks for the standard ADC input channels on all AVR models with an ADC, altered demos to use these masks
+  *    as on some models, the channel number is not identical to its single-ended ADC MUX mask
+  *  - New Webserver project, a RNDIS host USB webserver using the open source uIP TCP/IP network stack and FatFS library
+  *  - New BOARD value option BOARD_NONE (equivelent to not specifying BOARD) which will remove all board hardware drivers which
+  *    do not adversely affect the code operation (currently only the LEDs driver)
+  *  - Added keyboard modifier masks (HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_*) and LED report masks (KEYBOARD_LED_*) to the HID class driver and
+  *    Keyboard demos
+  *  - Added .5MHz recovery clock to the AVRISP programmer project when in ISP programming mode to correct mis-set fuses
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Slowed down software USART carried PDI programming in the AVRISP project to prevent transmission errors
+  *  - Renamed the AVRISP project folder to AVRISP-MKII to reduce confusion
+  *  - Renamed the RESET_LINE_* makefile tokens in the AVRISP MKII Project to AUX_LINE_*, as they are not always used for target
+  *    reset
+  *  - Changed over the MassStorageKeyboard Class driver device demo to use Start of Frame events rather than a timer to keep track
+  *    of elapsed milliseconds
+  *  - Inlined currently unused (but standardized) maintenance functions in the Device and Host Class drivers to save space
+  *  - The XPLAINBridge project now selects between a USB to Serial bridge and a PDI programmer on startup, reading the JTAG port's
+  *    TDI pin to determine which mode to use
+  *  - Removed the stream example code from the Low Level VirtualSerial demos, as they were buggy and only served to add clutter
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP project not able to enter programming mode when ISP protocol is used
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP PDI race condition where the guard time between direction changes could be interpreted as a start bit
+  *  - Fixed ADC_IsReadingComplete() returning an inverted result
+  *  - Fixed blocking CDC streams not aborting when the host is disconnected
+  *  - Fixed XPLAIN board Dataflash driver broken due to incorrect preprocessor commands
+  *  - Fixed inverted XPLAIN LED driver output (LED turned on when it was supposed to be turned off, and vice-versa)
+  *  - Fixed Class Driver struct interface numbers in the KeyboardMouse and VirtualSerialMouse demos (thanks to Renaud Cerrato)
+  *  - Fixed invalid USB controller PLL prescaler values for the ATMEGAxxU2 controllers
+  *  - Fixed lack of support for the ATMEGA32U2 in the DFU and CDC class bootloaders
+  *  - Fixed Benito project not resetting the target AVR automatically when programming has completed
+  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader programming not discarding the correct number of filler bytes from the host when non-aligned programming
+  *    ranges are specified (thanks to Thomas Bleeker)
+  *  - Fixed CDC and RNDIS host demos and class drivers - bidirectional endpoints should use two seperate pipes, not one half-duplex pipe
+  *  - Fixed Pipe_IsEndpointBound() not taking the endpoint's direction into account
+  *  - Fixed EEPROM and FLASH ISP programming in the AVRISP project
+  *  - Fixed incorrect values of USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED and USB_CONFIG_ATTR_REMOTEWAKEUP tokens (thanks to Claus Christensen)
+  *  - Fixed SerialStream driver blocking while waiting for characters to be received instead of returning EOF
+  *  - Fixed SerialStream driver not setting stdin to the created serial stream (thanks to Mike Alexander)
+  *  - Fixed USB_GetHIDReportSize() returning the number of bits in the specified report instead of bytes
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP project not extending the command delay after each successful page/word/byte program
+  *  - Fixed accuracy of the SERIAL_UBBRVAL() and SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL() macros for higher baudrates (thanks to Renaud Cerrato)
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog091223 Version 091223
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added activity LED indicators to the AVRISP project to indicate when the device is busy processing a command
+  *  - The USB target family and allowable USB mode tokens are now public and documented (USB_CAN_BE_*, USB_SERIES_*_AVR)
+  *  - Added new XPLAIN USB to Serial Bridge project (thanks to John Steggall for initial proof-of-concept, David Prentice
+  *    and Peter Danneger for revised software USART code)
+  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host LowLevel demo
+  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host Class Driver
+  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host ClassDriver demo
+  *  - Added CDC_Host_Flush() function to the CDC Host Class driver to flush sent data to the attached device
+  *  - Added PDI programming support for XMEGA devices to the AVRISP programmer project (thanks to Justin Mattair)
+  *  - Added support for the XPLAIN board Dataflash, with new XPLAIN_REV1 board target for the different dataflash used
+  *    on the first revision boards compared to the one mounted on later revisions
+  *  - Added new HID_ALIGN_DATA() macro to return the pre-retrieved value of a HID report item, left-aligned to a given datatype
+  *  - Added new PreviousValue to the HID Report Parser report item structure, for easy monitoring of previous report item values
+  *  - Added new EVK527 board target
+  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor() convenience function
+  *  - Added new LEDNotification project to the library, to give a visual LED notification on new events from the host
+  *  - Added new NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP and NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER compile time options
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Removed code in the Keyboard demos to send zeroed reports between two reports with differing numbers of keycodes
+  *    as this relied on non-standard OS driver behaviour to repeat key groups
+  *  - The SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t and SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t type defines are now part of the Mass Storage Class
+  *    driver common defines, rather than being defined in the Host mode Class driver section only
+  *  - The USB_MODE_HOST token is now defined even when host mode is not available
+  *  - The CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() HID Device Class driver callback now has a new ReportType parameter to
+  *    indicate the report type to generate
+  *  - All Class Drivers now return false or the "DeviceDisconnected" error code of their respective error enums when a function
+  *    is called when no host/device is connected where possible
+  *  - The HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnect enum value has been renamed to HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected to be in line
+  *    with the rest of the library errorcodes
+  *  - Make MIDI device demos also turn off the on board LEDs if MIDI Note On messages are sent with a velocity of zero,
+  *    which some devices use instead of Note Off messages (thanks to Robin Green)
+  *  - The CDC demos are now named "VirtualSerial" instead to indicate the demos' function rather than its implemented USB class,
+  *    to reduce confusion and to be in line with the rest of the LUFA demos
+  *  - The SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader() and SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader() Still Image Host Class driver functions are now public
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Added missing CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream() function code to the CDC Host Class driver
+  *  - Fixed incorrect values for REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_* enum values causing corrupt data in the HID Host Parser
+  *  - Fixed misnamed SI_Host_USBTask() and SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() functions
+  *  - Fixed broken USB_GetNextDescriptor() function causing the descriptor to jump ahead double the expected amount
+  *  - Fixed Pipe_IsEndpointBound() not masking the given Endpoint Address against PIPE_EPNUM_MASK
+  *  - Fixed host state machine not enabling Auto VBUS mode when HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS is set to zero
+  *  - Fixed misnamed Pipe_SetPipeToken() macro for setting a pipe's direction
+  *  - Fixed CDCHost failing on devices with bidirectional endpoints
+  *  - Fixed USB driver failing to define the PLL prescaler mask for the ATMEGA8U2 and ATMEGA16U2
+  *  - Fixed HID Parser not distributing the Usage Min and Usage Max values across an array of report items
+  *  - Fixed Mass Storage Host Class driver and Low Level demo not clearing the error condition if an attached device returns a
+  *    STALL to a GET MAX LUN request (thanks to Martin Luxen)
+  *  - Fixed TeensyHID bootloader not properly shutting down the USB interface to trigger a disconnection on the host before resetting
+  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost Class driver demo not having USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS compile time option set properly to prevent slow 
+  *    devices from timing out the data pipes
+  *  - Fixed the definition of the Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() macro for the U4 series AVR parts
+  *  - Fixed MIDI host Class driver MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket() routine not properly checking for Pipe ready before writing
+  *  - Fixed use of deprecated struct initializers, removed library unused parameter warnings when compiled with -Wextra enabled
+  *  - Fixed Still Image Host Class driver truncating the PIMA response code (thanks to Daniel Seibert)
+  *  - Fixed USB_CurrentMode not being reset to USB_MODE_NONE when the USB interface is shut down and both Host and Device modes can be
+  *    used (thanks to Daniel Levy)
+  *  - Fixed TeensyHID bootloader not enumerating to the host correctly (thanks to Clint Fisher)
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP project timeouts not checking for the correct timeout period (thanks to Carl Ott)
+  *  - Fixed STK525 Dataflash driver using incorrect bit-shifting for Dataflash addresses (thanks to Tim Mitchell)
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog091122 Version 091122
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added new Dual Role Keyboard/Mouse demo
+  *  - Added new HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token to reduce the size of the HID Host Class driver when
+  *    Report protocol is not needed
+  *  - Added new MIDI LowLevel and ClassDriver Host demo, add new MIDI Host Class driver
+  *  - Added new CDC/Mouse ClassDriver device demo
+  *  - Added new Joystick Host ClassDriver and LowLevel demos
+  *  - Added new Printer Host mode Class driver
+  *  - Added new Printer Host mode ClassDriver demo
+  *  - Added optional support for double banked endpoints and pipes in the Device and Host mode Class drivers
+  *  - Added new stream creation function to the CDC Class drivers, to easily make standard I/O streams from CDC Class driver instances
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Removed mostly useless "TestApp" demo, as it was mainly useful only for checking for sytax errors in the library
+  *  - MIDI device demos now receive MIDI events from the host and display note ON messages via the board LEDs
+  *  - Cleanups to the Device mode Mass Storage demo application SCSI routines
+  *  - Changed Audio Class driver sample read/write functions to be inline, to reduce the number of cycles needed to transfer
+  *    samples to and from the device (allowing more time for sample processing and output)
+  *  - Audio class Device mode demos now work at both 16MHz and 8MHz, rather than just at 8MHz
+  *  - The previous USBtoSerial demo has been moved into the projects directory, as it was just a modified CDC demo
+  *  - The Endpoint/Pipe functions now use the const qualifier on the input buffer
+  *  - Changed the CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() callback to pass a HID_ReportItem_t rather than just the current
+  *    item's attributes, to expose more information on the item (including it's type, collection path, etc.)
+  *  - Changed MouseHostWithParser demos to check that the report items have a Mouse usage collection as a parent at some point,
+  *    to prevent Joysticks from enumerating with the demo
+  *  - Corrected the name of the misnamed USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function to USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor().
+  *  - Keyboard LowLevel/ClassDriver demos now support multiple simultaneous keypresses (up to 6) per report
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Fixed PrinterHost demo returning invalid Device ID data when the attached device does not have a
+  *    device ID (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
+  *  - Changed LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER define to use BCD values, to make comparisons eaiser
+  *  - Fixed issue in the HID Host class driver's HID_Host_SendReportByID() routine using the incorrect mode (control/pipe)
+  *    to send report to the attached device
+  *  - Fixed ClassDriver AudioOutput device demo not selecting an audio output mode
+  *  - Fixed incorrect SampleFrequencyType value in the AudioInput and AudioOutput ClassDriver demos' descriptors
+  *  - Fixed incorrect event name rule in demo/project/bootloader makefiles
+  *  - Fixed HID device class driver not reselecting the correct endpoint once the user callback routines have been called
+  *  - Corrected HID descriptor in the Joystick Device demos - buttons should be placed outside the pointer collection
+  *  - Fixed HID report parser collection paths invalid due to misplaced semicolon in the free path item search loop
+  *  - Fixed HID host Class driver report send/receive report broken when issued through the control pipe
+  *  - Fixed HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR compile time option being ignored when in host mode (thanks to David Lyons)
+  *  - Fixed LowLevel Keyboard demo not saving the issues report only after it has been sent to the host
+  *  - Fixed Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_* functions not sending a terminating IN when given data Length is zero
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090924 Version 090924
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added new host mode class drivers and matching demos to the library for rapid application development
+  *  - Added flag to the HID report parser to indicate if a device has multiple reports
+  *  - Added new EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event, controlled by the new USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents() and
+  *    USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents() macros to give bus-synchronised millisecond interrupts when in USB device mode
+  *  - Added new Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection() macro for bidirectional endpoints
+  *  - Added new AVRISP project, a LUFA powered clone of the Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer
+  *  - Added ShutDown() functions for all hardware peripheral drivers, so that peripherals can be turned off after use
+  *  - Added new CDC_Device_Flush() command to the device mode CDC Class driver to flush Device->Host data
+  *  - Added extra masks to the SPI driver, changed SPI_Init() so that the clock polarity and sample modes can be set
+  *  - Added new callback to the HID report parser, so that the user application can filter only the items it is interested
+  *    in to be stored into the HIDReportInfo structure to save RAM
+  *  - Added support for the officially recommended external peripheral layout for the BUMBLEB board (thanks to Dave Fletcher)
+  *  - Added new Pipe_IsFrozen() macro to determine if the currently selected pipe is frozen
+  *  - Added new USB_GetHIDReportSize() function to the HID report parser to retrieve the size of a given report by its ID
+  *  - Added new combined Mass Storage and Keyboard demo (thanks to Matthias Hullin)
+  *  
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - SetIdle requests to the HID device driver with a 0 idle period (send changes only) now only affect the requested
+  *    HID interface within the device, not all HID interfaces
+  *  - Added explicit attribute masks to the device mode demos' descriptors
+  *  - Added return values to the CDC and MIDI class driver transmit functions
+  *  - Optimized Endpoint_Read_Word_* and Pipe_Read_Word_* macros to reduce compiled size
+  *  - Added non-null function parameter pointer restrictions to USB Class drivers to improve user code reliability
+  *  - Added new "Common" section to the class drivers, to hold all mode-independant definitions for clarity
+  *  - Moved SCSI command/sense constants into the Mass Storage Class driver, instead of the user-code
+  *  - Altered the SCSI commands in the LowLevel Mass Storage Host to save on FLASH space by reducing function calls
+  *  - Changed the parameters and behaviour of the USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function so that it now performs size checks
+  *    and data validations internally, to simplify user code
+  *  - Changed HIDParser to only zero out important values in the Parsed HID Report Item Information structure to save cycles
+  *  - The HID report parser now always processed FEATURE items - HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING token now has no effect
+  *  - The HID report parser now always ignores constant-data items, HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS token now has no effect
+  *  - The Benito Programmer project now has its own unique VID/PID pair allocated from the Atmel donated LUFA VID/PID pool
+  *  - Add in new invalid event hook check targets to project makefiles to produce compilation errors when invalid event names
+  *    are used in a project
+  *  - The HID Report Parser now gives information on the total length of each report within a HID interface
+  *  - The USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now seperate USB_Descriptor_* and
+  *    USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so both may be used
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Fixed possible lockup in the CDC device class driver, when the host sends data that is a multiple of the
+  *    endpoint's bank
+  *  - Fixed swapped parameters in the HID state memory copy call while processing a HID PUSH item in the HID report parser
+  *  - Fixed memory corruption HID report parser when too many COLLECTION or PUSH items were processed
+  *  - Fixed HID report parser not resetting the FEATURE item count when a REPORT ID item is encountered
+  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demos not reading in UDR1 when the USART receives data but the USB interface is not enumerated,
+  *    causing continuous USART receive interrupts
+  *  - Fixed misspelt event name in the Class driver USBtoSerial demo, preventing correct operation
+  *  - Fixed invalid data being returned when a GetStatus request is issued in Device mode with an unhandled data recipient
+  *  - Added hardware USART receive interrupt and software buffering to the Benito project to ensure received data is not
+  *    missed or corrupted
+  *  - Fixed Device mode HID Class driver always sending IN packets, even when nothing to report
+  *  - Fixed Device mode HID Class driver not explicitly initializing the ReportSize parameter to zero before calling callback
+  *    routine, so that ignored callbacks don't cause incorrect data to be sent
+  *  - Fixed StillImageHost not correctly freezing and unfreezing data pipes while waiting for a response block header
+  *  - Fixed error in the PrinterHost demo preventing the full page data from being sent to the attached device (thanks to John Andrews)
+  *  - Fixed CDC based demos and projects' INF driver files under 64 bit versions of Windows (thanks to Ronny Hanson, Thomas Bleeker)
+  *  - Re-add in missing flip, flip-ee, dfu and dfu-ee targets to project makefiles (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
+  *  - Fix allowable F_CPU values comment in project makefiles to more accurately reflect the allowable values on the USB AVRs
+  *  - Fixed DFU and CDC class bootloaders on the series 2 USB AVRs, corrected invalid signatures, added support for the new
+  *    ATMEGAxx2 series 2 variant AVRs to the DFU bootloader
+  *  - Fixed Low Level USBtoSerial demo not storing received characters (thanks to Michael Cooper)
+  *  - Fixed MIDI Device Class driver not sending/receiving MIDI packets of the correct size (thanks to Thomas Bleeker)
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090810 Version 090810
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added new device class drivers and matching demos to the library for rapid application development
+  *  - Added new PrinterHost demo (thanks to John Andrews)
+  *  - Added USB Missle Launcher project, submitted by Dave Fletcher
+  *  - Added new Benito Arduino Programmer project
+  *  - Added incomplete device and host mode demos for later enhancement
+  *  - Updated MassStorage device block write routines to use ping-pong Dataflash buffering to increase throughput by around 30%
+  *  - Error status LEDs shown when device endpoint configuration fails to complete in all demos and projects
+  *  - Added new USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration() convenience function for easy configuration selection of devices while in USB
+  *    host mode
+  *  - Added new USB_Host_ClearPipeStall() convenience function to clear a stall condition on an attached device's endpoint
+  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor() convenience function to retrieve the attached device's Device descriptor
+  *  - Added new Endpoint_ClearStatusStage() convenience function to assist with the status stages of control transfers
+  *  - Added new USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL define for using the unique serial numbers in some AVR models as the USB device's serial number,
+  *    added NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL compile time option to turn off new serial number reading code
+  *  - Added new DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK() macro to the Dataflash driver, which returns the Dataflash select mask for the given chip index
+  *  - Added new HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval host state machine state for non-blocking disabling of device communications until the
+  *    device has been removed (for use when an error occurs or communications with the device have completed)
+  *  - Added new FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS compile time option for faster stream transfers via multiple bytes copied per stream loop
+  *  - Added stdio stream demo code to the CDC device demos, to show how to create standard streams out of the virtual serial ports
+  *  - Added new EEPROM and FLASH buffer versions of the Endpoint and Pipe stream functions
+  *  - Added new USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS compile time options
+  *  - Added support for the new ATMEGA32U2, ATMEGA16U2 and ATMEGA8U2 AVR models
+  *  - Added new USB_DeviceState variable to keep track of the current Device mode USB state
+  *  - Added new LEDs_ToggleLEDs() function to the LEDs driver
+  *  - Added new Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber() and Pipe_IsEndpointBound() functions
+  *  - Added new DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR and HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR compile time options
+  *  - Added 404 Not Found errors to the webserver in the RNDIS demos to indicate invalid URLs
+  *  
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Deprecated psuedo-scheduler and removed dynamic memory allocator from the library (first no longer needed and second unused)
+  *  - The device-mode CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function now has an extra parameter so that the memory space in which the requested
+  *    descriptor is located can be specified. This means that descriptors can now be located in multiple memory spaces within a device.
+  *  - Removed vague USB_IsConnected global - test USB_DeviceState or USB_HostState explicitly to gain previous functionality
+  *  - Removed USB_IsSuspended global - test USB_DeviceState against DEVICE_STATE_Suspended instead
+  *  - Extended USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() routine to require the configuration number within the device to fetch
+  *  - Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy() now always ensures that the dataflash is ready for the next command immediately after returning,
+  *    no need to call Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS() afterwards
+  *  - Low level API MIDI device demo no longer blocks if a note change event is sent while the endpoint is not ready
+  *  - Pipe_GetErrorFlags() now returns additional error flags for overflow and underflow errors
+  *  - Pipe stream functions now automatically set the correct pipe token, so that bidirectional pipes can be used
+  *  - Pipe_ConfigurePipe() now automatically defaults IN pipes to accepting infinite IN requests, this can still be changed by calling
+  *    the existing Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests() function
+  *  - Changed F_CLOCK entries in project makefiles to alias to F_CPU by default, as this is the most common case
+  *  - Host mode demos now use sane terminal escape codes, so that text is always readable and events/program output is visually distinguished
+  *    from oneanother using foreground colours
+  *  - Internal per-device preprocessing conditions changed to per-device series rather than per-controller group for finer-grain
+  *    internal control
+  *  - Interrupts are no longer disabled during the processing of Control Requests on the default endpoint while in device mode
+  *  - AudioOutput demos now always output to board LEDs, regardless of output mode (removed AUDIO_OUT_LEDS project option)
+  *  - Removed SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION compile time option in favour of the new FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS option so that the exact number
+  *    of device configurations can be defined statically
+  *  - Removed VBUS events, as they are already exposed to the user application via the regular device connection and disconnection events
+  *  - Renamed and altered existing events to properly seperate out Host and Device mode events
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Changed bootloaders to use FLASHEND rather than the existence of RAMPZ to determine if far FLASH pointers are needed to fix
+  *    bootloaders on some of the USB AVR devices where avr-libc erronously defines RAMPZ
+  *  - Fixes to MassStorageHost for better device compatibility (increase command timeout, change MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()
+  *    to only unfreeze and check one data pipe at a time) to prevent incorrect device enumerations and freezes while trasferring data
+  *  - Make Pipe_ConfigurePipe() mask the given endpoint number against PIPE_EPNUM_MASK to ensure the endpoint IN direction bit is
+  *    cleared to prevent endpoint type corruption
+  *  - Fixed issue opening CDC-ACM ports on hosts when the CDC device tries to send data before the host has set the line encoding
+  *  - Fixed USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option being ignored during device disconnects on some models (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Fixed documentation mentioning Pipe_GetCurrentToken() function when correct function name is Pipe_GetPipeToken()
+  *  - Fixed ADC driver for the ATMEGA32U4 and ATMEGA16U4 (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
+  *  - Fixed CDCHost demo unfreezing the pipes at the point of configuration, rather than use
+  *  - Fixed MassStorage demo not clearing the reset flag when a Mass Storage Reset is issued while not processing a command
+  *  - Fixed USB_Host_SendControlRequest() not re-suspending the USB bus when initial device ready-wait fails
+  *  - Fixed USB Pad regulator not being disabled on some AVR models when the USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED option is used
+  *  - Fixed Host mode to Device mode UID change not causing a USB Disconnect event when a device was connected
+  *  - Fixed Mouse/Keyboard demos not performing the correct arithmetic on the Idle period at the right times (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Fixed GenericHID failing HID class tests due to incorrect Logical Minimum and Logical Maximum values (thanks to S�ren Greiner)
+  *  - Fixed incorrect PIPE_EPNUM_MASK mask causing pipe failures on devices with endpoint addresses of 8 and above (thanks to John Andrews)
+  *  - Fixed report data alignment issues in the MouseHostWithParser demo when X and Y movement data size is not a multiple of 8 bits
+  *  - Fixed HID Report Descriptor Parser not correctly resetting internal states when a REPORT ID element is encountered
+  *  - Fixed incorrect BUTTONS_BUTTON1 for the STK526 target
+  *  - Fixed RNDIS demos freezing when more than one connection was attempted simultaneously, causing memory corruption
+  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo receiving noise from the USART due to pullup not being enabled
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090605 Version 090605
+  *
+  *  - Fixed bug in RNDISEthernet and DualCDC demos not using the correct USB_ControlRequest structure for control request data
+  *  - Fixed documentation showing incorrect USB mode support on the supported AVRs list
+  *  - Fixed RNDISEthernet not working under Linux due to Linux requiring an "optional" RNDIS request which was unhandled
+  *  - Fixed Mouse and Keyboard device demos not acting in accordance with the HID specification for idle periods (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Removed support for endpoint/pipe non-control interrupts; these did not act in the way users expected, and had many subtle issues
+  *  - Fixed Device Mode not handling Set Feature and Clear Feature Chapter 9 requests that are addressed to the device (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Moved control endpoint interrupt handling into the library itself, enable via the new INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token
+  *  - Fixed CDCHost not clearing configured pipes and resetting configured pipes mask when a partially enumerated invalid CDC
+  *    interface is skipped
+  *  - Clarified the size of library tokens which accept integer values in the Compile Time Tokens page, values now use the smallest datatype
+  *    inside the library that is able to hold their defined value to save space
+  *  - Removed DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS() macro as it was largely supurflous and only served to obfuscate code
+  *  - Rewritten event system to remove all macros, to make user code clearer
+  *  - Fixed incorrect ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK mask preventing endpoints above EP3 from being selected (thanks to Jonathan Oakley)
+  *  - Removed STREAM_CALLBACK() macro - callbacks now use regular function definitions to clarify user code
+  *  - Removed DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR() macro - comparators should now use regular function definitions to clarify user code
+  *  - USB_IsConnected is now cleared before the USB_Disconnect() event is fired in response to VBUS being removed
+  *  - Fixed incorrect PID value being used in the USBtoSerial project (thanks to Phill)
+  *  - Deleted StdDescriptors.c, renamed USB_GetDescriptor() to CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor, moved ConfigDescriptor.c/.h from the
+  *    LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ directory to LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ in preperation for the new USB class APIs
+  *  - Moved out each demos' functionality library files (e.g. Ring Buffer library) to /Lib directories for a better directory structure
+  *  - Removed Tx interrupt from the USBtoSerial demo; now sends characters via polling to ensure more time for the Rx interrupt
+  *  - Fixed possible enumeration errors from spinloops which may fail to exit if the USB connection is severed before the exit condition
+  *    becomes true
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090510 Version 090510
+  *
+  *  - Added new GenericHIDHost demo
+  *  - Corrections to the KeyboardHost and MouseHost demos' pipe handling to freeze and unfreeze the data pipes at the point of use
+  *  - KeyboardHost, MouseHost and GenericHIDHost demos now save and restore the currently selected pipe inside the pipe ISR
+  *  - Changed GenericHID device demo to use the LUFA scheduler, added INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT and INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT compile
+  *    time options
+  *  - All comments in the library, bootloaders, demos and projects have now been spell-checked and spelling mistakes/typos corrected
+  *  - Added new PIMA_DATA_SIZE() define to the Still Image Host demo
+  *  - Add call to MassStore_WaitForDataReceived() in MassStore_GetReturnedStatus() to ensure that the CSW has been received in the
+  *    extended MSC timeout period before continuing, to prevent long processing delays from causing the MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()
+  *    to early-abort (thanks to Dmitry Maksimov)
+  *  - Move StdRequestType.h, StreamCallbacks.h, USBMode.h from the LowLevel USB driver directory to the HighLevel USB driver directory,
+  *    where they are more suited
+  *  - Removed all binary constants and replaced with decimal or hexadecimal constants so that unpatched GCC compilers can still build the
+  *    code without having to be itself patched and recompiled first
+  *  - Added preprocessor checks and documentation to the bootloaders giving information about missing SIGNATURE_x defines due to
+  *    outdated avr-libc versions.
+  *  - Added support to the CDCHost demo for devices with multiple CDC interfaces which are not the correct ACM type preceding the desired
+  *    ACM CDC interface
+  *  - Fixed GenericHID demo not starting USB and HID management tasks when not using interrupt driven modes (thanks to Carl Kjeldsen)
+  *  - Fixed RNDISEthenet demo checking the incorrect message field for packet size constraints (thanks to Jonathan Oakley)
+  *  - Fixed WriteNextReport code in the GenericHIDHost demo using incorrect parameter types and not selecting the correct endpoint
+  *  - Adjusted sample CTC timer calculations in the AudioOutput and AudioInput demos to match the CTC calculations in the AVR datasheet,
+  *    and to fix instances where rounding caused the endpoint to underflow (thanks to Robin Theunis)
+  *  - The USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function no longer automatically selects the Control pipe (pipe 0), so that other control type
+  *    pipes can be used with the function
+  *  - The USB Host management task now saves and restores the currently selected pipe before and after the task completes
+  *  - Fixed GenericHIDHost demo report write routine incorrect for control type requests (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
+  *  - Removed Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() and Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() in favour of new Endpoint_ClearIN(), Endpoint_ClearOUT(),
+  *    Pipe_ClearIN() and Pipe_ClearOUT() macros (done to allow for the detection of packets of zero length)
+  *  - Renamed *_ReadWriteAllowed() macros to *_IsReadWriteAllowed() to remain consistent with the rest of the LUFA API
+  *  - Endpoint_IsSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(), Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived() macro has been
+  *    renamed to Endpoint_ClearSETUP(), the Pipe_IsSetupSent() macro has been renamed to Pipe_IsSETUPSent() and the
+  *    Pipe_ClearSetupSent() macro is no longer applicable and should be removed - changes made to compliment the new endpoint and pipe
+  *    bank management API
+  *  - Updated all demos, bootloaders and projects to use the new endpoint and pipe management APIs (thanks to Roman Thiel from Curetis AG)
+  *  - Updated library doxygen documentation, added groups, changed documentation macro functions to real functions for clarity
+  *  - Removed old endpoint and pipe aliased read/write/discard routines which did not have an explicit endian specifier for clarity
+  *  - Removed the ButtLoadTag.h header file, as no one used for its intended purpose anyway
+  *  - Renamed the main Drivers/AT90USBXXX directory to Drivers/Peripheral, renamed the Serial_Stream driver to SerialStream
+  *  - Fixed CDC and USBtoSerial demos freezing where buffers were full while still transmitting or receiving (thanks to Peter Hand)
+  *  - Removed "Host_" section of the function names in ConfigDescriptor.h, as most of the routines can now be used in device mode on the
+  *    device descriptor
+  *  - Renamed functions in the HID parser to have a "USB_" prefix and the acronym "HID" in the name
+  *  - Fixed incorrect HID interface class and subclass values in the Mouse and KeyboardMouse demos (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Capitalised the "Descriptor_Search" and "Descriptor_Search_Comp" prefixes of the values in the DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t and
+  *    DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enums
+  *  - Removed "ERROR" from the enum names in the endpoint and pipe stream error code enums
+  *  - Renamed the USB_PowerOnErrorCodes_t enum to USB_InitErrorCodes_t, renamed the POWERON_ERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified enum value to
+  *    USB_INITERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified
+  *  - Renamed USB_PowerOnFail event to USB_InitFailure
+  *  - Renamed OTG.h header functions to be more consistent with the rest of the library API
+  *  - Changed over all deprecated GCC structure tag initializers to the standardized C99 format (thanks to Mike Alexander)
+  *  - USB_HostRequest renamed to USB_ControlRequest, entire control request header is now read into USB_ControlRequest in Device mode
+  *    rather than having the library pass only partially read header data to the application
+  *  - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event has had its parameters removed, in favour of accessing the new USB_ControlRequest structure
+  *  - The Endpoint control stream functions now correctly send a ZLP to the host when less data than requested is sent
+  *  - Fixed USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag never being set (the REMOTE WAKEUP Set Feature request was not being handled)
+  *  - Renamed the FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE compile-time token to CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+  *  - Endpoint configuration is now refined to give better output when all configurations have static inputs - removed the now useless
+  *    STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION compile time token
+  *  - Fixed SPI driver init function not clearing SPI2X bit when not needed
+  *  - Fixed PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command issuing in the MassStorageHost demo using incorrect parameters (thanks to Mike Alex)
+  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo broken due to an incorrect if statement test in MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()
+  *  - Fixed reversed signature byte ordering in the CDC bootloader (thanks to Johannes Raschke)
+  *  - Changed PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE from 8 to 64 to try to prevent problems with faulty devices which do not respect the given
+  *    wLength value when reading in the device descriptor
+  *  - Fixed missing semicolon in the ATAVRUSBRF01 LED board driver code (thanks to Morten Lund)
+  *  - Changed LED board driver code to define dummy LED masks for the first four board LEDs, so that user code can be compiled for boards
+  *    with less than four LEDs without code modifications (thanks to Morten Lund)
+  *  - Changed HWB board driver to Buttons driver, to allow for the support of future boards with more than one mounted GPIO button
+  *  - Serial driver now correctly calculates the baud register value when in double speed mode
+  *  - Init function of the Serial driver is now static inline to product smaller code for the common-case of static init values
+  *    
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090401 Version 090401
+  *
+  *  - Fixed MagStripe project configuration descriptor containing an unused (blank) endpoint descriptor
+  *  - Incorporated makefile changes by Denver Gingerich to retain compatibility with stock (non-WinAVR) AVR-GCC installations
+  *  - Fixed makefile EEPROM programming targets programming FLASH data in addition to EEPROM data
+  *  - LUFA devices now enumerate correctly with LUFA hosts
+  *  - Fixed Configuration Descriptor search routine freezing when a comparator returned a failure
+  *  - Removed HID report item serial dump in the MouseHostWithParser and KeyboardHostWithParser - useful only for debugging, and
+  *    slowed down the enumeration of HID devices too much
+  *  - Increased the number of bits per track which can be read in the MagStripe project to 8192 when compiled for the AT90USBXXX6/7
+  *  - Fixed KeyboardMouse demo discarding the wIndex value in the REQ_GetReport request
+  *  - USBtoSerial demo now discards all Rx data when not connected to a USB host, rather than buffering characters for transmission
+  *    next time the device is attached to a host.
+  *  - Added new F_CLOCK compile time constant to the library and makefiles, to give the raw input clock (used to feed the PLL before any
+  *    clock prescaling is performed) frequency, so that the PLL prescale mask can be determined
+  *  - Changed stream wait timeout counter to be 16-bit, so that very long timeout periods can be set for correct communications with
+  *    badly designed hosts or devices which greatly exceed the USB specification limits
+  *  - Mass Storage Host demo now uses a USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS of two seconds to maintain compatibility with poorly designed devices
+  *  - Function attribute ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE renamed to ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE to match other function attribute macro naming conventions
+  *  - Added ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE attribute to several key inlined library components, to ensure they are inlined in all circumstances
+  *  - Removed SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro, the clock_prescale_set() avr-libc macro has been corrected in recent avr-libc versions
+  *  - Fixed incorrect/missing control status stage transfers on demos, bootloaders and applications (thanks to Nate Lawson)
+  *  - The NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token has been renamed to FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE, and its function expanded
+  *    to also remove parts of the Get Status chapter 9 request to further reduce code usage
+  *  - Makefile updated to include output giving the currently selected BOARD parameter value
+  *  - Board Dataflash driver now allows for dataflash ICs which use different shifts for setting the current page/byte address (thanks
+  *    to Kenneth Clubb)
+  *  - Added DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM() and DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM() functions to the MassStorage demo, to allow for easy
+  *    interfacing with a FAT library for dataflash file level access
+  *  - Corrected CDC class bootloader to fix a few bugs, changed address counter to store x2 addresses for convenience
+  *  - Fixed typos in the SPI driver SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64 and SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128 masks (thanks to Markus Zocholl)
+  *  - Keyboard and Mouse device demos (normal, data interrupt and fully interrupt driven) combined into unified keyboard and mouse demos
+  *  - Keyboard and Mouse host demos (normal and data interrupt driven) combined into unified keyboard and mouse demos
+  *  - Removed AVRISP_Programmer project due to code quality concerns
+  *  - Fixed CDC demo not sending an empty packet after each transfer to prevent the host from buffering incoming data
+  *  - Fixed documentation typos and preprocessor checks relating to misspellings of the USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS token (thanks to Ian Gregg)
+  *  - Fixed USBTask.h not conditionally including HostChapter9.h only when USB_CAN_BE_HOST is defined (thanks to Ian Gregg)
+  *  - Fixed incorrect ADC driver init register manipulation (thanks to Tobias)
+  *  - Added new GenericHID device demo application
+  *  - Fixed Still Image Host SImage_SendData() function not clearing the pipe bank after sending data
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090209 Version 090209
+  *
+  *  - PWM timer mode in AudioOut demo changed to Fast PWM for speed
+  *  - Updated Magstripe project to work with the latest hardware revision
+  *  - Fixed library not responding to the BCERRI flag correctly in host mode, leading to device lockups
+  *  - Fixed library handling Get Descriptor requests when not addressed as standard requests to the device or interface (thanks to
+  *    Nate Lawson)
+  *  - Fixed serious data corruption issue in MassStorage demo dataflash write routine
+  *  - Added new NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token
+  *  - USB task now restores previous global interrupt state after execution, rather than forcing global interrupts to be enabled
+  *  - Fixed USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event firing after each configuration change, rather than once after the initial configuration
+  *  - Added ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED() macros to Endpoint.h, altered ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE() to allow user to specify endpoint
+  *  - ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINTS changed to ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS, PIPE_MAX_PIPES changed to PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES
+  *  - Endpoint and Pipe non-control stream functions now ensure endpoint or pipe is ready before reading or writing
+  *  - Changed Teensy bootloader to use a watchdog reset when exiting rather than a software jump
+  *  - Fixed integer promotion error in MassStorage and MassStorageHost demos, corrupting read/write transfers
+  *  - SPI_SendByte is now SPI_TransferByte, added new SPI_SendByte and SPI_ReceiveByte functions for fast one-way transfer
+  *  - MassStorage demo changed to use new fast one-way SPI transfers to increase throughput
+  *  - MassStorage handling of Mass Storage Reset class request improved
+  *  - Altered MassStorage demo dataflash block read code for speed
+  *  - Added USB_IsSuspended global flag
+  *  - Simplified internal Dual Mode (OTG) USB library code to reduce code size
+  *  - Extended stream timeout period to 100ms from 50ms
+  *  - Mass Storage Host demo commands now all return an error code from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+  *  - Added SubErrorCode parameter to the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event
+  *  - VBUS drop interrupt now disabled during the manual-to-auto VBUS delivery handoff
+  *  - Simplified low level backend so that device/host mode initialization uses the same code paths
+  *  - Added workaround for faulty Mass Storage devices which do not implement the required GET_MAX_LUN request
+  *  - Removed buggy Telnet application from the RNDIS demo
+  *  - Moved Mass Storage class requests in the Mass Storage Host demo to wrapper functions in MassStoreCommands.c
+  *  - Fixed incorrect SCSI command size value in the Request Sense command in MassStoreCommands.c
+  *  - Added SetProtocol request to HID class non-parser Mouse and Keyboard demos to force devices to use the correct Boot Protocol
+  *  - Added new "dfu" and "flip" programming targets to project makefiles
+  *  - HID_PARSE_Sucessful enum member typo corrected to HID_PARSE_Successful
+  *  - Changed COLLECTION item structures in the HID descriptor parser to include the collection's Usage Page value
+  *  - Serial driver now sets Tx line as output, enables pullup on Rx line
+  *  - Fixed smaller USB AVRs raising multiple connection and disconnection events when NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is disabled
+  *  - Added HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS to give the host delay after a device is connected before it is enumerated
+  *  - Fixed KeyboardHostWithParser demo linking against the wrong global variables
+  *  - Completed doxygen documentation of remaining library bootloaders, demos and projects
+  *  - Fixed incorrect bootloader start address in the TeensyHID bootloader
+  *  - Added HWB button whole-disk ASCII dump functionality to MassStoreHost demo
+  *  - Replaced printf_P(PSTR("%c"), {Variable}) calls with putchar(<Variable>) for speed and size savings
+  *  - Serial driver now accepts baud rates over 16-bits in size, added double speed flag option
+  *  - Fixed incorrect callback abort return value in Pipe.c
+  *  - Added new flip-ee and dfu-ee makefile targets (courtesy of Opendous Inc.)
+  *  - Removed reboot-on-disconnect code from the TeensyHID bootloader, caused problems on some systems
+  *  - Fixed AudioOutput and AudioInput demos looping on the endpoint data, rather than processing a sample at a time and returning
+  *    each time the task runs to allow for other tasks to execute
+  *  - Added support for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01 board
+  *  - Added AVRISP Programmer Project, courtesy of Opendous Inc.
+  *  - Fixed CDC Host demo not searching through both CDC interfaces for endpoints
+  *  - Fixed incorrect Product String descriptor length in the DFU class bootloader
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog081224 Version 081224
+  *
+  *  - MyUSB name changed to LUFA, the Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs
+  *  - Fixed Mass Storage Host demo's MassStore_SendCommand() delay in the incorrect place
+  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo not calling ReconfigureUSART() after a change in the line encoding
+  *  - Fixed infinite loop in host mode Host-to-Device control transfers with data stages
+  *  - HID report parser now supports devices with multiple reports in one interface via Report IDs
+  *  - Fixed RZUSBSTICK board LED driver header incorrect macro definition order causing compile errors
+  *  - Calling USB_Init() when the USB interface is already configured now forces a complete interface reset
+  *    and re-enumeration - fixes MyUSB DFU bootloader not switching to app code correctly when soft reset used
+  *  - Fixed "No newline at end of file" warning when stream callbacks are enabled
+  *  - DFU bootloader now uses fixed signature bytes per device, rather than reading them out dynamically for size
+  *  - Added new FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE and USE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION switches to statically define certain values to
+  *    reduce compiled binary size
+  *  - Added new NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT switch to prevent the library from trying to determine bus connection
+  *    state from the suspension and wake up events on the smaller USB AVRs
+  *  - Added summary of all library compile time tokens to the documentation
+  *  - Added overview of the LUFA scheduler to the documentation
+  *  - Removed MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token, replaced with a mask for the USB_Init() Options parameter
+  *  - CDC bootloader now uses the correct non-far or far versions of the pgm_* functions depending on if RAMPZ is defined
+  *  - Doxygen documentation now contains documentation on all the projects, bootloaders and most demos included with the library
+  *  - CDC bootloader now runs user application when USB disconnected rather than waiting for a hard reset
+  *  - MouseHostWithParser and KeyboardHostWithParser now support multiple-report devices
+  *  - RNDIS demo can now close connections correctly using the new TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION() macro - used in Webserver  
+  *  - Fixed the DFU bootloader, no longer freezes up when certain files are programmed into an AVR, made reading/writing faster
+  *  - Fixed mouse/joystick up/down movements reversed - HID mouse X/Y coordinates use a left-handed coordinate system, not a normal 
+  *    right-handed system
+  *  - Added stub code to the CDC and USBtoSerial demos showing how to read and set the RS-232 handshake lines - not currently used in
+  *    the demos, but the example code and supporting defines are now in place
+  *  - Interrupts are now disabled when processing a control request in device mode, to avoid exceeding the strict control request
+  *    timing requirements.
+  *  - All demos now use a central StatusUpdate() function rather than direct calls to the board LED functions, so that the demos can
+  *    easily be altered to show different LED combinations (or do something else entirely) as the demo's status changes
+  *  - Removed LED commands from the CDC bootloader, unused by most AVR910 programming software
+  *  - Fixed RNDIS demo ICMP ping requests echoing back incorrect data
+  *  - Added DHCP server code to RNDIS demo, allowing for hands-free auto configuration on any PC
+  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader PID value for the ATMEGA16U4 AVR
+  *  - Endpoint and Pipe configuration functions now return an error code indicating success or failure
+  *  - USB Reset in device mode now resets and disables all device endpoints
+  *  - Added intermediate states to the host mode state machine, reducing the USB task blocking time to no more than 1ms explicitly per
+  *    invocation when in host mode
+  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA32U6 microcontroller
+  *  - Added STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION compile time option, enabled in the bootloaders to minimize space usage
+  *  - Removed redundant code from the USB device GetStatus() chapter 9 processing routine
+  *  - Added new TeensyHID bootloader, compatible with the Teensy HID protocol (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/)
+  *  - Versions are now numbered by release dates, rather than arbitrary major/minor revision numbers
+  *  - USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled is now correctly set and cleared by SetFeature and ClearFeature requests from the host
+  *  - Changed prototype of GetDescriptor, so that it now returns the descriptor size (or zero if the descriptor doesn't exist)
+  *    rather than passing the size back to the caller through a parameter and returning a boolean
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog153 Version 1.5.3 - Released 2nd October, 2008
+  *
+  *  - Fixed CDC bootloader using pgmspace macros for some descriptors inappropriately
+  *  - Updated all Mouse and Keyboard device demos to include boot protocol support (now works in BIOS)
+  *  - Renamed bootloader directories to remove spaces, which were causing build problems on several OSes
+  *  - Removed serial number strings from all but the MassStore demo where it is required - users were not
+  *    modifying the code to either omit the descriptor or use a unique serial per device causing problems
+  *    when multiple units of the same device were plugged in at the same time
+  *  - AudioOutput and AudioInput demos now correctly silence endpoints when not enabled by the host
+  *  - Added KeyboardMouse demo (Keyboard and Mouse functionality combined into a single demo)
+  *  - Added DriverStubs directory to house board level driver templates, to make MyUSB compatible custom board
+  *    driver creation easier
+  *  - Extended MassStorage demo to support multiple LUNs, 2 by default
+  *  - Fixed incorrect device address mask, preventing the device from enumerating with addresses larger than 63
+  *  - Fixed incorrect data direction mask in the GetStatus standard request, preventing it from being handled
+  *  - Fixed incorrect GetStatus standard request for endpoints, now returns the endpoint STALL status correctly
+  *  - Added in new USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and USB_CurrentlySelfPowered flags rather than using fixed values
+  *  - Added DualCDC demo to demonstrate the use of Interface Association Descriptors
+  *  - Added pipe NAK detection and clearing API
+  *  - Added pipe status change (NAK, STALL, etc.) interrupt API
+  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo so that it no longer freezes randomly when issuing several commands in a row
+  *  - Host demos configuration descriptor routines now return a unique error code when the returned data does
+  *    not have a valid configuration descriptor header
+  *  - Added Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() and Pipe_WaitUntilReady() functions
+  *  - Stream functions now have software timeouts, timeout period can be set by the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token
+  *  - All demos now pass the USB.org automated Chapter 9 device compliance tests
+  *  - All HID demos now pass the USB.org automated HID compliance tests
+  *  - Polling interval of the interrupt endpoint in the CDC based demos changed to 0xFF to fix problems on Linux systems
+  *  - Changed stream functions to accept a new callback function, with NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS used to disable all callbacks
+  *  - Mass Storage demo dataflash management routines changed to use the endpoint stream functions		
+  *  - Added AVRStudio project files for each demo in addition to the existing Programmer's Notepad master project file
+  *  - Re-added call to ReconfigureUSART() in USBtoSerial SetLineCoding request, so that baud rate changes
+  *    are reflected in the hardware (change was previously lost)
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog152 Version 1.5.2 - Released 31st July, 2008
+  *
+  *  - Fixed SwapEndian_32() function in Common.h so that it now works correctly (wrong parameter types)
+  *  - Updated RNDIS demo - notification endpoint is no longer blocking so that it works with faulty Linux RNDIS
+  *    implementations (where the notification endpoint is ignored in favour of polling the control endpoint)
+  *  - Fixed incorrect Vendor Description string return size in RNDIS demo for the OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION OID token
+  *  - Added very basic TCP/IP stack and HTTP/TELNET servers to RNDIS demo
+  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader exit causing programming software to complain about failed writes
+  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader EEPROM programming mode wiping first flash page
+  *  - Fixed Clear/Set Feature device standard request processing code (fixing MassStorage demo in the process)
+  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA16U4 AVR microcontroller
+  *  - Library licence changed from LGPLv3 to MIT license
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog151 Version 1.5.1 - Released 31st July, 2008
+  *
+  *  - Changed host demos to enable the host function task on the firing of the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event
+  *    rather than the USB_DeviceAttached event
+  *  - HID Usage Stack now forcefully cleared after an IN/OUT/FEATURE item has been completely processed to remove
+  *    any referenced but not created usages
+  *  - Changed USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts() and USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(), USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfType(),
+  *    USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(), USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter() to normal functions (from inline)
+  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo not sending data, only receiving
+  *  - Fixed main makefile to make all by default, fixed MagStripe directory case to prevent case-sensitive path problems
+  *  - ConfigDescriptor functions made normal, instead of static inline
+  *  - Pipe/Endpoint *_Ignore_* functions changed to *_Discard_*, old names still present as aliases
+  *  - Fixed ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE define to be correct on limited USB controller AVRs
+  *  - Changed endpoint and pipe size translation routines to use previous IF/ELSE IF cascade code, new algorithmic
+  *    approach was buggy and caused problems
+  *  - Bootloaders now compile with -fno-inline-small-functions option to reduce code size
+  *  - Audio demos now use correct endpoint sizes for full and limited controller USB AVRs, double banking in all cases
+  *    to be in line with the specification (isochronous endpoints MUST be double banked)
+  *  - Added Interface Association descriptor to StdDescriptors.h, based on the relevant USB2.0 ECN
+  *  - Fixed MIDI demo, corrected Audio Streaming descriptor to follow the MIDI-specific AS structure
+  *  - Fixed HID class demo descriptors so that the HID interface's protocol is 0x00 (required for non-boot protocol HID
+  *    devices) to prevent problems on hosts expecting the boot protocol functions to be supported
+  *  - Added read/write control stream functions to Endpoint.h
+  *  - Fixed AudioOut demo not setting port pins to inputs on USB disconnect properly
+  *  - Added RNDISEthernet demo application
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog150 Version 1.5.0 - Released 10 June, 2008
+  *
+  *  - Fixed MIDI demo, now correctly waits for the endpoint to be ready between multiple note messages
+  *  - Added CDC Host demo application
+  *  - Added KeyboardFullInt demo application
+  *  - Endpoint and Pipe creation routines now mask endpoint/pipe size with the size mask, to remove transaction
+  *    size bits not required for the routines (improves compatibility with devices)
+  *  - Fixed AudioInput demo - now correctly sends sampled audio to the host PC
+  *  - Fixed AudioOutput demo once more -- apparently Windows requires endpoint packets to be >=192 bytes
+  *  - Shrunk round-robbin scheduler code slightly via the use of struct pointers rather than array indexes
+  *  - Fixed off-by-one error when determining if the Usage Stack is full inside the HID Report parser
+  *  - Renamed Magstripe.h to MagstripeHW.h and moved driver out of the library and into the MagStripe demo folder
+  *  - Added preprocessor checks to enable C linkage on the library components when used with a C++ compiler
+  *  - Added Still Image Host demo application
+  *  - The USB device task now restores the previously selected endpoint, allowing control requests to be transparently
+  *    handled via interrupts while other endpoints are serviced through polling
+  *  - Fixed device signature being sent in reverse order in the CDC bootloader
+  *  - Host demos now have a separate ConfigDescriptor.c/.h file for configuration descriptor processing
+  *  - HostWithParser demos now have a separate HIDReport.c/.h file for HID report processing and dumping
+  *  - Removed non-mandatory commands from MassStorage demo to save space, fixed SENSE ResponseCode value
+  *  - CDC demos now send empty packets after sending a full one to prevent buffering issues on the host
+  *  - Updated demo descriptors to use VID/PID values donated by Atmel
+  *  - Added DoxyGen documentation to the source files
+  *  - Fixed Serial_IsCharReceived() definition, was previously reversed
+  *  - Removed separate USB_Descriptor_Language_t descriptor, USB_Descriptor_String_t is used instead
+  *  - Removed unused Device Qualifier descriptor structure
+  *  - Renamed the USB_CreateEndpoints event to the more appropriate USB_ConfigurationChanged
+  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo reading in the block data in reverse
+  *  - Removed outdated typedefs in StdRequestType.h, superseded by the macro masks
+  *  - Corrected OTG.h is now included when the AVR supports both Host and Device modes, for creating OTG products
+  *  - USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event is now also fired when in device mode and the host has finished its enumeration
+  *  - Interrupt driven demos now properly restore previously selected endpoint when ISR is complete
+  *  - USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS is now overridable in the user project makefile to a custom fixed timeout value
+  *  - Renamed USB_Host_SOFGeneration_* macros to more friendly USB_Host_SuspendBus(), USB_Host_ResumeBus()
+  *    and USB_Host_IsBusSuspended()
+  *  - Renamed *_*_Is* macros to *_Is* to make all flag checking macros consistent, Pipe_SetInterruptFreq() is now
+  *    Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod() to use the correct terminology
+  *  - UnicodeString member of USB_Descriptor_String_t struct changed to an ordinary int array type, so that the GCC
+  *    Unicode strings (prefixed with an L before the opening quotation mark) can be used instead of explicit arrays
+  *    of ASCII characters
+  *  - Fixed Endpoint/Pipes being configured incorrectly if the maximum endpoint/pipe size for the selected USB AVR
+  *    model was given as the bank size
+  *  - HID device demos now use a true raw array for the HID report descriptor rather than a struct wrapped array
+  *  - Added VERSION_BCD() macro, fixed reported HID and USB version numbers in demo descriptors
+  *  - Cleaned up GetDescriptor device chapter 9 handler function
+  *  - Added GET_REPORT class specific request to HID demos to make them complaint to the HID class
+  *  - Cleaned up setting of USB_IsInitialized and USB_IsConnected values to only when needed
+  *  - Removed Atomic.c and ISRMacro.h; the library was already only compatible with recent avr-lib-c for other reasons
+  *  - All demos and library functions now use USB standardized names for the USB data (bRequest, wLength, etc.)
+  *  - Added USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token to switch back to the non-standard descriptor element names
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog141 Version 1.4.1 - Released 5 May, 2008
+  *
+  *  - Enhanced KeyboardWithParser demo, now prints out pressed alphanumeric characters like the standard demo
+  *  - Fixed MassStorage demo, read/writes using non mode-10 commands now work correctly
+  *  - Corrected version number in Version.h
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog140 Version 1.4.0 - Released 5 May, 2008
+  *
+  *  - Added HID Report Parser API to the library
+  *  - Added Mouse and Keyboard host demo applications, using the new HID report parser engine
+  *  - Added MouseFullInt demo, which demonstrates a fully interrupt (including control requests) mouse device
+  *  - Fixed incorrect length value in the audio control descriptor of the AudioOutput and AudioInput demos
+  *  - Added MIDI device demo application to the library
+  *  - Fixed problem preventing USB devices from being resumed from a suspended state
+  *  - Added new CDC class bootloader to the library, based on the AVR109 bootloader protocol
+  *  - Added header to each demo application indicating the mode, class, subclass, standards used and supported speed
+  *  - Functions expecting endpoint/pipe numbers are no longer automatically masked against ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK or
+  *    PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK - this should be manually added to code which requires it
+  *  - Fixed DFU class bootloader - corrected frequency of flash page writes, greatly reducing programming time
+  *  - Renamed AVR_HOST_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() to USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() and AVR_HOST_GetNextDescriptor()
+  *    to USB_Host_GetNextDescriptor()
+  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore() and USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter() routines
+  *  - Moved configuration descriptor routines to MyUSB/Drivers/USB/Class/, new accompanying ConfigDescriptors.c file
+  *  - Added new configuration descriptor comparator API for more powerful descriptor parsing, updated host demos to use the
+  *    new comparator API
+  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo capacity printout, and changed data read/write mode from little-endian to the correct
+  *    big-endian for SCSI devices
+  *  - Fixed macro/function naming consistency; USB_HOST is now USB_Host, USB_DEV is now USB_Device
+  *  - Added better error reporting to host demos
+  *  - Added 10 microsecond delay after addressing devices in host mode, to prevent control stalls
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog132 Version 1.3.2 - Released April 1st, 2008
+  *
+  *  - Added call to ReconfigureUSART() in USBtoSerial SetLineCoding request, so that baud rate changes
+  *    are reflected in the hardware
+  *  - Fixed CDC and USBtoSerial demos - Stream commands do not work for control endpoints, and the 
+  *    GetLineCoding request had an incorrect RequestType mask preventing it from being processed
+  *  - Improved reliability of the USBtoSerial demo, adding a busy wait while the buffer is full
+  *  - Device control endpoint size is now determined from the device's descriptors rather than being fixed
+  *  - Separated out SPI code into new SPI driver in AT90USBXXX driver directory
+  *  - Bootloader now returns correct PID for the selected USB AVR model, not just the AT90USB128X PID
+  *  - Added support for the RZUSBSTICK board
+  *  - Bicolour driver removed in favour of generic LEDs driver
+  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA32U4 AVR
+  *  - Added MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time option to prevent the USB library from manipulating the PLL
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog131 Version 1.3.1 - Released March 19th 2008
+  *
+  *  - Fixed USB to Serial demo - class value in the descriptors was incorrect
+  *  - Control endpoint size changed from 64 bytes to 8 bytes to save on USB FIFO RAM and to allow low
+  *    speed mode devices to enumerate properly
+  *  - USB to Serial demo data endpoints changed to dual-banked 16 byte to allow the demo to work
+  *    on USB AVRs with limited USB FIFO RAM
+  *  - Changed demo endpoint numbers to use endpoints 3 and 4 for double banking, to allow limited
+  *    USB device controller AVRs (AT90USB162, AT90USB82) to function correctly
+  *  - Updated Audio Out demo to use timer 1 for AVRs lacking a timer 3 for the PWM output
+  *  - Fixed incorrect USB_DEV_OPT_HIGHSPEED entry in the Mass Storage device demo makefile
+  *  - Optimized Mass Storage demo for a little extra transfer speed
+  *  - Added LED indicators to the Keyboard demo for Caps Lock, Num Lock and Scroll Lock
+  *  - Added Endpoint_Read_Stream, Endpoint_Write_Stream, Pipe_Read_Stream and Pipe_Write_Stream functions
+  *    (including Big and Little Endian variants)
+  *  - Made Dataflash functions inline for speed, removed now empty Dataflash.c driver file
+  *  - Added new SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro (thanks to Joerg Wunsch)
+  *  - Fixed Endpoint_ClearStall() to function correctly on full USB controller AVRs (AT90USBXXX6/7)
+  *  - Endpoint_Setup_In_Clear() and Endpoint_Setup_Out_Clear() no longer set FIFOCON, in line with the
+  *    directives in the datasheet
+  *  - Fixed PLL prescaler defines for all AVR models and frequencies
+  *  - Fixed ENDPOINT_INT_IN and ENDPOINT_INT_OUT definitions
+  *  - Added interrupt driven keyboard and mouse device demos
+  *  - Combined USB_Device_ClearFeature and USB_Device_SetFeature requests into a single routine for code
+  *    size savings
+  *  - Added missing Pipe_GetCurrentPipe() macro to Pipe.h
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog130 Version 1.3.0 - Released March 7th 2008
+  *
+  *  - Unnecessary control endpoint config removed from device mode
+  *  - Fixed device standard request interpreter accidentally processing some class-specific requests
+  *  - Added USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS compile time options to instruct the library
+  *    to use descriptors stored in RAM or EEPROM rather than flash memory
+  *  - All demos now disable watchdog on startup, in case it has been enabled by fuses or the bootloader
+  *  - USB_DEV_OPT_LOWSPEED option now works correctly
+  *  - Added ability to set the USB options statically for a binary size reduction via the USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
+  *    compile time define
+  *  - USB_Init no longer takes a Mode parameter if compiled for a USB device with no host mode option, or
+  *    if forced to a particular mode via the USB_HOST_ONLY or USB_DEVICE_ONLY compile time options
+  *  - USB_Init no longer takes an Options parameter if options statically configured by USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
+  *  - Endpoint_Ignore_* and Pipe_Ignore_* made smaller by making the dummy variable non-volatile so that the
+  *    compiler can throw away the result more efficiently
+  *  - Added in an optional GroupID value to each scheduler entry, so that groups of tasks can once again be
+  *    controlled by the new Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode() routine
+  *  - Added support for AT90USB162 and AT90USB82 AVR models
+  *  - Added support for the STK525 and STK526 boards
+  *  - Added support for custom board drivers to be supplied by selecting the board type as BOARD_USER, and
+  *    placing board drivers in {Application Directory}/Board/
+  *  - PLL is now stopped and USB clock is frozen when detached from host in device mode, to save power
+  *  - Joystick defines are now in synch with the schematics - orientation will be rotated for the USBKEY
+  *  - Fixed USB_DEV_IsUSBSuspended() - now checks the correct register
+  *  - Fixed data transfers to devices when in host mode
+  *  - Renamed USB_DEV_OPT_HIGHSPEED to USB_DEV_OPT_FULLSPEED and USB_HOST_IsDeviceHighSpeed() to
+  *    USB_HOST_IsDeviceFullSpeed() to be in line with the official USB speed names (to avoid confusion with
+  *    the real high speed mode, which is unavailable on the USB AVRs)
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog120 Version 1.2.0 - Released February 4th, 2008
+  *
+  *  - Added USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event for host mode
+  *  - Added new Scheduler_Init routine to preprepare the scheduler, so that tasks can be started and
+  *    stopped before the scheduler has been started (via Scheduler_Start)
+  *  - Connection events in both Device and Host mode are now interrupt-driven, allowing the USB management
+  *    task to be stopped when the USB is not connected to a host or device
+  *  - All demos updated to stop the USB task when not in use via the appropriate USB events
+  *  - Mass Storage Host demo application updated to function correctly with all USB flash disks
+  *  - Mass Storage Host demo application now prints out the capacity and number of LUNs in the attached
+  *    device, and prints the first block as hexadecimal numbers rather than ASCII characters
+  *  - Endpoint and Pipe clearing routines now clear the Endpoint/Pipe interrupt and status flags
+  *  - Shifted error handling code in the host enum state machine to a single block, to reduce code complexity
+  *  - Added in DESCRIPTOR_TYPE, DESCRIPTOR_SIZE and DESCRIPTOR_CAST macros to make config descriptor processing
+  *    clearer in USB hosts and DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS for convenience in USB devices
+  *  - Added in alloca macro to common.h, in case the user is using an old version of avr-lib-c missing the macro
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog130 Version 1.1.0 - Released January 25th 2008
+  *
+  *  - Fixed DCONNI interrupt being enabled accidentally after a USB reset
+  *  - Fixed DDISCI interrupt not being disabled when a device is not connected
+  *  - Added workaround for powerless pullup devices causing false disconnect interrupts
+  *  - Added USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event for Host mode
+  *  - AVR_HOST_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor routine no longer modifies ConfigSizePtr if a valid buffer
+  *    pointer is passed
+  *  - Added ALLOCABLE_BYTES to DynAlloc, and added code to make the size of key storage variables
+  *    dependant on size of memory parameters passed in via the user project's makefile
+  *  - Fixed incorrect device reset routine being called in USBTask
+  *  - Devices which do not connect within the standard 300mS are now supported
+  *  - Removed incorrect ATTR_PURE from Scheduler_SetTaskMode(), which was preventing tasks from being
+  *    started/stopped, as well as USB_InitTaskPointer(), which was breaking dual device/host USB projects
+  *  - Changed scheduler to use the task name rather than IDs for setting the task mode, eliminating the
+  *    need to have a task ID list
+  *  - ID transistion interrupt now raises the appropriate device/host disconnect event if device attached
+  *  - Fixed double VBUS change (and VBUS -) event when detatching in device mode
+  *  - Added ability to disable ANSI terminal codes by the defining of DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES in makefile
+  *  - Removed return from ConfigurePipe and ConfigureEndpoint functions - use Pipe_IsConfigured() and 
+  *    Endpoint_IsConfigured() after calling the config functions to determine success
+  */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/CompileTimeTokens.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/CompileTimeTokens.txt
index 9beeecebe..046101e76 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/CompileTimeTokens.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/CompileTimeTokens.txt
@@ -1,200 +1,200 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \page Page_TokenSummary Summary of Compile Tokens
- *
- *  The following lists all the possible tokens which can be defined in a project makefile, and passed to the
- *  compiler via the -D switch, to alter the LUFA library code. These tokens may alter the library behaviour,
- *  or remove features unused by a given application in order to save flash space.
- *
- *
- *  \section Sec_SummaryNonUSBTokens Non USB Related Tokens
- *  This section describes compile tokens which affect non-USB sections of the LUFA library.
- *
- *  <b>DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES</b> - ( \ref Group_Terminal ) \n
- *  If an application contains ANSI terminal control codes listed in TerminalCodes.h, it might be desired to remove them
- *  at compile time for use with a terminal which is non-ANSI control code aware, without modifying the source code. If
- *  this token is defined, all ANSI control codes in the application code from the TerminalCodes.h header are removed from
- *  the source code at compile time.
- *
- *
- *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBClassTokens USB Class Driver Related Tokens
- *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB class-specific drivers in the LUFA library.
- *
- *  <b>HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY</b> - ( \ref Group_USBClassHIDHost ) \n
- *  By default, the USB HID Host class driver is designed to work with HID devices using either the Boot or Report HID
- *  communication protocols. On devices where the Report protocol is not used (i.e. in applications where only basic
- *  Mouse or Keyboard operation is desired, using boot compatible devices), the code responsible for the Report protocol
- *  mode can be removed to save space in the compiled application by defining this token. When defined, it is still neccesary
- *  to explicitly put the attached device into Boot protocol mode via a call to \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol().
- * 
- *  <b>HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_HIDParser ) \n
- *  HID reports may contain PUSH and POP elements, to store and retrieve the current HID state table onto a stack. This
- *  allows for reports to save the state table before modifying it slightly for a data item, and then restore the previous
- *  state table in a compact manner. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to give the maximum depth of the state
- *  table stack. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.
- *
- *  <b>HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_HIDParser ) \n
- *  HID reports generally contain many USAGE elements, which are assigned to INPUT, OUTPUT and FEATURE items in succession
- *  when multiple items are defined at once (via REPORT COUNT elements). This allows for several items to be defined with
- *  different usages in a compact manner. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum depth of the
- *  usage stack, indicating the maximum number of USAGE items which can be stored temporarily until the next INPUT, OUTPUT
- *  and FEATURE item. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.
- *
- *  <b>HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_HIDParser ) \n
- *  HID reports generally contain several COLLECTION elements, used to group related data items together. Collection information
- *  is stored separately in the processed usage structure (and referred to by the data elements in the structure) to save space.
- *  This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of COLLECTION items which can be processed by the
- *  parser into the resultant processed report structure. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file
- *  documentation.
- *
- *  <b>HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_HIDParser ) \n
- *  All HID reports contain one or more INPUT, OUTPUT and/or FEATURE items describing the data which can be sent to and from the HID
- *  device. Each item has associated usages, bit offsets in the item reports and other associated data indicating the manner in which
- *  the report data should be interpreted by the host. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of
- *  data elements which can be stored in the processed HID report structure, including INPUT, OUTPUT and (if enabled) FEATURE items.
- *  If a item has a multiple count (i.e. a REPORT COUNT of more than 1), each item in the report count is placed separately in the
- *  processed HID report table. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.
- *
- *  <b>HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_HIDParser ) \n
- *  HID reports may contain several report IDs, to logically distinguish grouped device data from one another - for example, a combination
- *  keyboard and mouse might use report IDs to seperate the keyboard reports from the mouse reports. In order to determine the size of each
- *  report, and thus know how many bytes must be read or written, the size of each report (IN, OUT and FEATURE) must be calculated and
- *  stored. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of report IDs in a device which can be processed
- *  and their sizes calculated/stored into the resultant processed report structure. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in
- *  the HID.h file documentation.
- *
- *
- *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBTokens General USB Driver Related Tokens
- *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack as a whole in the LUFA library.
- *
- *  <b>NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS</b> - ( \ref Group_EndpointPacketManagement , \ref Group_PipePacketManagement )\n
- *  Both the endpoint and the pipe driver code contains stream functions, allowing for arrays of data to be sent to or from the
- *  host easily via a single function call (rather than complex routines worrying about sending full packets, waiting for the endpoint/
- *  pipe to become ready, etc.). By default, these stream functions require a callback function which is executed after each byte processed,
- *  allowing for early-aborts of stream transfers by the application. If callbacks are not required in an application, they can be removed
- *  by defining this token, reducing the compiled binary size. When removed, the stream functions no longer accept a callback function as
- *  a parameter.
- *
- *  <b>FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS</b> - ( \ref Group_EndpointPacketManagement , \ref Group_PipePacketManagement )\n
- *  By default, streams are transferred internally via a loop, sending or receiving one byte per iteration before checking for a bank full
- *  or empty condition. This allows for multiple stream functions to be chained together easily, as there are no alignment issues. However,
- *  this can lead to heavy performance penalties in applications where large streams are used frequently. When this compile time option is
- *  used, bytes are sent or recevied in groups of 8 bytes at a time increasing performance at the expense of a larger flash memory consumption
- *  due to the extra code required to deal with byte alignment.
- *
- *  <b>USE_STATIC_OPTIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_USBManagement ) \n
- *  By default, the USB_Init() function accepts dynamic options at runtime to alter the library behaviour, including whether the USB pad
- *  voltage regulator is enabled, and the device speed when in device mode. By defining this token to a mask comprised of the USB options
- *  mask defines usually passed as the Options parameter to USB_Init(), the resulting compiled binary can be decreased in size by removing
- *  the dynamic options code, and replacing it with the statically set options. When defined, the USB_Init() function no longer accepts an
- *  Options parameter.
- *
- *  <b>USB_DEVICE_ONLY</b> - ( \ref Group_USBManagement ) \n
- *  For the USB AVR models supporting both device and host USB modes, the USB_Init() function contains a Mode parameter which specifies the
- *  mode the library should be initialized to. If only device mode is required, the code for USB host mode can be removed from the binary to
- *  save space. When defined, the USB_Init() function no longer accepts a Mode parameter. This define is irrelevant on smaller USB AVRs which
- *  do not support host mode.
- *
- *  <b>USB_HOST_ONLY</b> - ( \ref Group_USBManagement ) \n
- *  Same as USB_DEVICE_ONLY, except the library is fixed to USB host mode rather than USB device mode. Not available on some USB AVR models.
- *
- *  <b>USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_USBManagement ) \n
- *  When endpoint and/or pipe stream functions are used, by default there is a timeout between each transfer which the connected device or host
- *  must satisfy, or the stream function aborts the remaining data transfer. This token may be defined to a non-zero 16-bit value to set the timeout
- *  period for stream transfers, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in LowLevel.h is used instead.
- *
- *  <b>NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT</b> - ( \ref Group_Events ) \n
- *  On the smaller USB AVRs, the USB controller lacks VBUS events to determine the physical connection state of the USB bus to a host. In lieu of
- *  VBUS events, the library attempts to determine the connection state via the bus suspension and wake up events instead. This however may be
- *  slightly inaccurate due to the possibility of the host suspending the bus while the device is still connected. If accurate connection status is
- *  required, the VBUS line of the USB connector should be routed to an AVR pin to detect its level, so that the USB_DeviceState global
- *  can be accurately set and the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() and \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() events manually raised by the RAISE_EVENT macro.
- *  When defined, this token disables the library's auto-detection of the connection state by the aforementioned suspension and wake up events.
- *
- *
- *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBDeviceTokens USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens
- *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack of the LUFA library when used in Device mode.
- *
- *  <b>USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS</b> - ( \ref Group_Descriptors ) \n
- *  Define this token to indicate to the USB driver that all device descriptors are stored in RAM, rather than being located in any one
- *  of the AVR's memory spaces. RAM descriptors may be desirable in applications where the descriptors need to be modified at runtime.
- *
- *  <b>USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS</b> - ( \ref Group_Descriptors ) \n
- *  Similar to USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS, but all descriptors are stored in the AVR's FLASH memory rather than RAM.
- *
- *  <b>USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS</b> - ( \ref Group_Descriptors ) \n
- *  Similar to USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS, but all descriptors are stored in the AVR's EEPROM memory rather than RAM.
- *
- *  <b>NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL</b> - ( \ref Group_Descriptors ) \n
- *  Some AVR models contain a unique 20-digit serial number which can be used as the device serial number, while in device mode. This
- *  allows the host to uniquely identify the device regardless of if it is moved between USB ports on the same computer, allowing
- *  allocated resources (such as drivers, COM Port number allocations) to be preserved. This is not needed in many apps, and so the
- *  code that performs this task can be disabled by defining this option and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
- *
- *  <b>FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_EndpointManagement ) \n
- *  By default, the library determines the size of the control endpoint (when in device mode) by reading the device descriptor.
- *  Normally this reduces the amount of configuration required for the library, allows the value to change dynamically (if
- *  descriptors are stored in EEPROM or RAM rather than flash memory) and reduces code maintenance. However, this token can be
- *  defined to a non-zero value instead to give the size in bytes of the control endpoint, to reduce the size of the compiled
- *  binary.
- *
- *  <b>DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR</b> - ( \ref Group_Device ) \n
- *  One of the most frequenty used global variables in the stack is the USB_DeviceState global, which indicates the current state of
- *  the Device State Machine. To reduce the amount of code and time required to access and modify this global in an application, this token
- *  may be defined to a value between 0 and 2 to fix the state variable into one of the three general purpose IO registers inside the AVR
- *  reserved for application use. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used within the user application except
- *  implicitly via the library APIs.
- *
- *  <b>FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_Device ) \n
- *  By default, the library determines the number of configurations a USB device supports by reading the device descriptor. This reduces
- *  the amount of configuration required to set up the library, and allows the value to change dynamically (if descriptors are stored in
- *  EEPROM or RAM rather than flash memory) and reduces code maintenance. However, this value may be fixed via this token in the project
- *  makefile to reduce the compiled size of the binary at the expense of flexibility.
- *
- *  <b>CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE</b> \n
- *  In some limited USB device applications, there are no device endpoints other than the control endpoint; i.e. all device communication
- *  is through control endpoint requests. Defining this token will remove several features related to the selection and control of device
- *  endpoints internally, saving space. Generally, this is usually only useful in (some) bootloaders and is best avoided.
- *
- *  <b>INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT</b> - ( \ref Group_USBManagement ) \n
- *  Some applications prefer to not call the USB_USBTask() management task reguarly while in device mode, as it can complicate code significantly.
- *  Instead, when device mode is used this token can be passed to the library via the -D switch to allow the library to manage the USB control
- *  endpoint entirely via USB controller interrupts asynchronously to the user application. When defined, USB_USBTask() does not need to be called
- *  when in USB device mode.
- *
- *  <b>NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP</b> - (\ref Group_Device ) \n
- *  Many devices do not require the use of the Remote Wakeup features of USB, used to wake up the USB host when suspended. On these devices,
- *  the code required to manage device Remote Wakeup can be disabled by defining this token and passing it to the library via the -D switch.
- *
- *  <b>NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER</b> - (\ref Group_Device ) \n
- *  USB devices may be bus powered, self powered, or a combination of both. When a device can be both bus powered and self powered, the host may
- *  query the device to determine the current power source, via \ref USB_CurrentlySelfPowered. For solely bus powered devices, this global and the
- *  code required to manage it may be disabled by passing this token to the library via the -D switch.
- *
- *
- *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBHostTokens USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens
- *
- *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack of the LUFA library when used in Host mode.
- *
- *  <b>HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR</b> - ( \ref Group_Host ) \n
- *  One of the most frequenty used global variables in the stack is the USB_HostState global, which indicates the current state of
- *  the Host State Machine. To reduce the amount of code and time required to access and modify this global in an application, this token
- *  may be defined to a value between 0 and 2 to fix the state variable into one of the three general purpose IO registers inside the AVR
- *  reserved for application use. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used within the user application except
- *  implicitly via the library APIs.
- *
- *  <b>USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_Host ) \n
- *  When a control transfer is initiated in host mode to an attached device, a timeout is used to abort the transfer if the attached
- *  device fails to respond within the timeout period. This token may be defined to a non-zero 16-bit value to set the timeout period for
- *  control transfers, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in Host.h is used instead.
- *
- *  <b>HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_Host ) \n
- *  Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds after they are connected to VBUS before the enumeration process can be started, or
- *  they will fail to enumerate correctly. By placing a delay before the enumeration process, it can be ensured that the bus has settled
- *  back to a known idle state before communications occur with the device. This token may be defined to a 16-bit value to set the device
- *  settle period, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in Host.h is used instead.
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_TokenSummary Summary of Compile Tokens
+ *
+ *  The following lists all the possible tokens which can be defined in a project makefile, and passed to the
+ *  compiler via the -D switch, to alter the LUFA library code. These tokens may alter the library behaviour,
+ *  or remove features unused by a given application in order to save flash space.
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SummaryNonUSBTokens Non USB Related Tokens
+ *  This section describes compile tokens which affect non-USB sections of the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  <b>DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES</b> - ( \ref Group_Terminal ) \n
+ *  If an application contains ANSI terminal control codes listed in TerminalCodes.h, it might be desired to remove them
+ *  at compile time for use with a terminal which is non-ANSI control code aware, without modifying the source code. If
+ *  this token is defined, all ANSI control codes in the application code from the TerminalCodes.h header are removed from
+ *  the source code at compile time.
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBClassTokens USB Class Driver Related Tokens
+ *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB class-specific drivers in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  <b>HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY</b> - ( \ref Group_USBClassHIDHost ) \n
+ *  By default, the USB HID Host class driver is designed to work with HID devices using either the Boot or Report HID
+ *  communication protocols. On devices where the Report protocol is not used (i.e. in applications where only basic
+ *  Mouse or Keyboard operation is desired, using boot compatible devices), the code responsible for the Report protocol
+ *  mode can be removed to save space in the compiled application by defining this token. When defined, it is still neccesary
+ *  to explicitly put the attached device into Boot protocol mode via a call to \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol().
+ * 
+ *  <b>HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_HIDParser ) \n
+ *  HID reports may contain PUSH and POP elements, to store and retrieve the current HID state table onto a stack. This
+ *  allows for reports to save the state table before modifying it slightly for a data item, and then restore the previous
+ *  state table in a compact manner. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to give the maximum depth of the state
+ *  table stack. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.
+ *
+ *  <b>HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_HIDParser ) \n
+ *  HID reports generally contain many USAGE elements, which are assigned to INPUT, OUTPUT and FEATURE items in succession
+ *  when multiple items are defined at once (via REPORT COUNT elements). This allows for several items to be defined with
+ *  different usages in a compact manner. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum depth of the
+ *  usage stack, indicating the maximum number of USAGE items which can be stored temporarily until the next INPUT, OUTPUT
+ *  and FEATURE item. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.
+ *
+ *  <b>HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_HIDParser ) \n
+ *  HID reports generally contain several COLLECTION elements, used to group related data items together. Collection information
+ *  is stored separately in the processed usage structure (and referred to by the data elements in the structure) to save space.
+ *  This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of COLLECTION items which can be processed by the
+ *  parser into the resultant processed report structure. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file
+ *  documentation.
+ *
+ *  <b>HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_HIDParser ) \n
+ *  All HID reports contain one or more INPUT, OUTPUT and/or FEATURE items describing the data which can be sent to and from the HID
+ *  device. Each item has associated usages, bit offsets in the item reports and other associated data indicating the manner in which
+ *  the report data should be interpreted by the host. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of
+ *  data elements which can be stored in the processed HID report structure, including INPUT, OUTPUT and (if enabled) FEATURE items.
+ *  If a item has a multiple count (i.e. a REPORT COUNT of more than 1), each item in the report count is placed separately in the
+ *  processed HID report table. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.
+ *
+ *  <b>HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_HIDParser ) \n
+ *  HID reports may contain several report IDs, to logically distinguish grouped device data from one another - for example, a combination
+ *  keyboard and mouse might use report IDs to seperate the keyboard reports from the mouse reports. In order to determine the size of each
+ *  report, and thus know how many bytes must be read or written, the size of each report (IN, OUT and FEATURE) must be calculated and
+ *  stored. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of report IDs in a device which can be processed
+ *  and their sizes calculated/stored into the resultant processed report structure. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in
+ *  the HID.h file documentation.
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBTokens General USB Driver Related Tokens
+ *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack as a whole in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  <b>NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS</b> - ( \ref Group_EndpointPacketManagement , \ref Group_PipePacketManagement )\n
+ *  Both the endpoint and the pipe driver code contains stream functions, allowing for arrays of data to be sent to or from the
+ *  host easily via a single function call (rather than complex routines worrying about sending full packets, waiting for the endpoint/
+ *  pipe to become ready, etc.). By default, these stream functions require a callback function which is executed after each byte processed,
+ *  allowing for early-aborts of stream transfers by the application. If callbacks are not required in an application, they can be removed
+ *  by defining this token, reducing the compiled binary size. When removed, the stream functions no longer accept a callback function as
+ *  a parameter.
+ *
+ *  <b>FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS</b> - ( \ref Group_EndpointPacketManagement , \ref Group_PipePacketManagement )\n
+ *  By default, streams are transferred internally via a loop, sending or receiving one byte per iteration before checking for a bank full
+ *  or empty condition. This allows for multiple stream functions to be chained together easily, as there are no alignment issues. However,
+ *  this can lead to heavy performance penalties in applications where large streams are used frequently. When this compile time option is
+ *  used, bytes are sent or recevied in groups of 8 bytes at a time increasing performance at the expense of a larger flash memory consumption
+ *  due to the extra code required to deal with byte alignment.
+ *
+ *  <b>USE_STATIC_OPTIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_USBManagement ) \n
+ *  By default, the USB_Init() function accepts dynamic options at runtime to alter the library behaviour, including whether the USB pad
+ *  voltage regulator is enabled, and the device speed when in device mode. By defining this token to a mask comprised of the USB options
+ *  mask defines usually passed as the Options parameter to USB_Init(), the resulting compiled binary can be decreased in size by removing
+ *  the dynamic options code, and replacing it with the statically set options. When defined, the USB_Init() function no longer accepts an
+ *  Options parameter.
+ *
+ *  <b>USB_DEVICE_ONLY</b> - ( \ref Group_USBManagement ) \n
+ *  For the USB AVR models supporting both device and host USB modes, the USB_Init() function contains a Mode parameter which specifies the
+ *  mode the library should be initialized to. If only device mode is required, the code for USB host mode can be removed from the binary to
+ *  save space. When defined, the USB_Init() function no longer accepts a Mode parameter. This define is irrelevant on smaller USB AVRs which
+ *  do not support host mode.
+ *
+ *  <b>USB_HOST_ONLY</b> - ( \ref Group_USBManagement ) \n
+ *  Same as USB_DEVICE_ONLY, except the library is fixed to USB host mode rather than USB device mode. Not available on some USB AVR models.
+ *
+ *  <b>USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_USBManagement ) \n
+ *  When endpoint and/or pipe stream functions are used, by default there is a timeout between each transfer which the connected device or host
+ *  must satisfy, or the stream function aborts the remaining data transfer. This token may be defined to a non-zero 16-bit value to set the timeout
+ *  period for stream transfers, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in LowLevel.h is used instead.
+ *
+ *  <b>NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT</b> - ( \ref Group_Events ) \n
+ *  On the smaller USB AVRs, the USB controller lacks VBUS events to determine the physical connection state of the USB bus to a host. In lieu of
+ *  VBUS events, the library attempts to determine the connection state via the bus suspension and wake up events instead. This however may be
+ *  slightly inaccurate due to the possibility of the host suspending the bus while the device is still connected. If accurate connection status is
+ *  required, the VBUS line of the USB connector should be routed to an AVR pin to detect its level, so that the USB_DeviceState global
+ *  can be accurately set and the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() and \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() events manually raised by the RAISE_EVENT macro.
+ *  When defined, this token disables the library's auto-detection of the connection state by the aforementioned suspension and wake up events.
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBDeviceTokens USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens
+ *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack of the LUFA library when used in Device mode.
+ *
+ *  <b>USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS</b> - ( \ref Group_Descriptors ) \n
+ *  Define this token to indicate to the USB driver that all device descriptors are stored in RAM, rather than being located in any one
+ *  of the AVR's memory spaces. RAM descriptors may be desirable in applications where the descriptors need to be modified at runtime.
+ *
+ *  <b>USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS</b> - ( \ref Group_Descriptors ) \n
+ *  Similar to USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS, but all descriptors are stored in the AVR's FLASH memory rather than RAM.
+ *
+ *  <b>USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS</b> - ( \ref Group_Descriptors ) \n
+ *  Similar to USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS, but all descriptors are stored in the AVR's EEPROM memory rather than RAM.
+ *
+ *  <b>NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL</b> - ( \ref Group_Descriptors ) \n
+ *  Some AVR models contain a unique 20-digit serial number which can be used as the device serial number, while in device mode. This
+ *  allows the host to uniquely identify the device regardless of if it is moved between USB ports on the same computer, allowing
+ *  allocated resources (such as drivers, COM Port number allocations) to be preserved. This is not needed in many apps, and so the
+ *  code that performs this task can be disabled by defining this option and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+ *
+ *  <b>FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_EndpointManagement ) \n
+ *  By default, the library determines the size of the control endpoint (when in device mode) by reading the device descriptor.
+ *  Normally this reduces the amount of configuration required for the library, allows the value to change dynamically (if
+ *  descriptors are stored in EEPROM or RAM rather than flash memory) and reduces code maintenance. However, this token can be
+ *  defined to a non-zero value instead to give the size in bytes of the control endpoint, to reduce the size of the compiled
+ *  binary.
+ *
+ *  <b>DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR</b> - ( \ref Group_Device ) \n
+ *  One of the most frequenty used global variables in the stack is the USB_DeviceState global, which indicates the current state of
+ *  the Device State Machine. To reduce the amount of code and time required to access and modify this global in an application, this token
+ *  may be defined to a value between 0 and 2 to fix the state variable into one of the three general purpose IO registers inside the AVR
+ *  reserved for application use. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used within the user application except
+ *  implicitly via the library APIs.
+ *
+ *  <b>FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_Device ) \n
+ *  By default, the library determines the number of configurations a USB device supports by reading the device descriptor. This reduces
+ *  the amount of configuration required to set up the library, and allows the value to change dynamically (if descriptors are stored in
+ *  EEPROM or RAM rather than flash memory) and reduces code maintenance. However, this value may be fixed via this token in the project
+ *  makefile to reduce the compiled size of the binary at the expense of flexibility.
+ *
+ *  <b>CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE</b> \n
+ *  In some limited USB device applications, there are no device endpoints other than the control endpoint; i.e. all device communication
+ *  is through control endpoint requests. Defining this token will remove several features related to the selection and control of device
+ *  endpoints internally, saving space. Generally, this is usually only useful in (some) bootloaders and is best avoided.
+ *
+ *  <b>INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT</b> - ( \ref Group_USBManagement ) \n
+ *  Some applications prefer to not call the USB_USBTask() management task reguarly while in device mode, as it can complicate code significantly.
+ *  Instead, when device mode is used this token can be passed to the library via the -D switch to allow the library to manage the USB control
+ *  endpoint entirely via USB controller interrupts asynchronously to the user application. When defined, USB_USBTask() does not need to be called
+ *  when in USB device mode.
+ *
+ *  <b>NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP</b> - (\ref Group_Device ) \n
+ *  Many devices do not require the use of the Remote Wakeup features of USB, used to wake up the USB host when suspended. On these devices,
+ *  the code required to manage device Remote Wakeup can be disabled by defining this token and passing it to the library via the -D switch.
+ *
+ *  <b>NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER</b> - (\ref Group_Device ) \n
+ *  USB devices may be bus powered, self powered, or a combination of both. When a device can be both bus powered and self powered, the host may
+ *  query the device to determine the current power source, via \ref USB_CurrentlySelfPowered. For solely bus powered devices, this global and the
+ *  code required to manage it may be disabled by passing this token to the library via the -D switch.
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBHostTokens USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens
+ *
+ *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack of the LUFA library when used in Host mode.
+ *
+ *  <b>HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR</b> - ( \ref Group_Host ) \n
+ *  One of the most frequenty used global variables in the stack is the USB_HostState global, which indicates the current state of
+ *  the Host State Machine. To reduce the amount of code and time required to access and modify this global in an application, this token
+ *  may be defined to a value between 0 and 2 to fix the state variable into one of the three general purpose IO registers inside the AVR
+ *  reserved for application use. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used within the user application except
+ *  implicitly via the library APIs.
+ *
+ *  <b>USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_Host ) \n
+ *  When a control transfer is initiated in host mode to an attached device, a timeout is used to abort the transfer if the attached
+ *  device fails to respond within the timeout period. This token may be defined to a non-zero 16-bit value to set the timeout period for
+ *  control transfers, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in Host.h is used instead.
+ *
+ *  <b>HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - ( \ref Group_Host ) \n
+ *  Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds after they are connected to VBUS before the enumeration process can be started, or
+ *  they will fail to enumerate correctly. By placing a delay before the enumeration process, it can be ensured that the bus has settled
+ *  back to a known idle state before communications occur with the device. This token may be defined to a 16-bit value to set the device
+ *  settle period, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in Host.h is used instead.
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/CompilingApps.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/CompilingApps.txt
index b4ee17171..60c5a8ae2 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/CompilingApps.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/CompilingApps.txt
@@ -1,30 +1,30 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \page Page_CompilingApps Compiling the Demos, Bootloaders and Projects
- *
- *  The following details how to compile the included LUFA demos, applications and bootloaders using AVR-GCC.
- *
- *  \section Sec_Prerequisites Prerequisites
- *  Before you can compile any of the LUFA library code or demos, you will need a recent distribution of avr-libc (1.6.2+)
- *  and the AVR-GCC (4.2+) compiler. For Windows users, the best way to obtain these is the WinAVR project
- *  (<a>http://winavr.sourceforge.net</a>) as this provides a single-file setup for everything required to compile your
- *  own AVR projects.
- *
- *  \section Sec_Compiling Compiling a LUFA Application
- *  Compiling the LUFA demos, applications and/or bootloaders is very simple. LUFA comes with makefile scripts for
- *  each individual demo, bootloader and project folder, as well as scripts in the /Demos/, /Bootloaders/, /Projects/
- *  and the LUFA root directory. This means that compilation can be started from any of the above directories, with
- *  a build started from an upper directory in the directory structure executing build of all child directories under it.
- *  This means that while a build inside a particular demo directory will build only that particular demo, a build stated
- *  from the /Demos/ directory will build all LUFA demo projects sequentially.
- *
- *  To build a project from the source via the command line, the command <b>"make all"</b> should be executed from the command line in the directory
- *  of interest. To remove compiled files (including the binary output, all intermediately files and all diagnostic output
- *  files), execute <b>"make clean"</b>. Once a "make all" has been run and no errors were encountered, the resulting binary will
- *  be located in the generated ".HEX" file. If your project makes use of pre-initialized EEPROM variables, the generated ".EEP"
- *  file will contain the project's EEPROM data.
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \page Page_CompilingApps Compiling the Demos, Bootloaders and Projects
+ *
+ *  The following details how to compile the included LUFA demos, applications and bootloaders using AVR-GCC.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Prerequisites Prerequisites
+ *  Before you can compile any of the LUFA library code or demos, you will need a recent distribution of avr-libc (1.6.2+)
+ *  and the AVR-GCC (4.2+) compiler. For Windows users, the best way to obtain these is the WinAVR project
+ *  (<a>http://winavr.sourceforge.net</a>) as this provides a single-file setup for everything required to compile your
+ *  own AVR projects.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compiling Compiling a LUFA Application
+ *  Compiling the LUFA demos, applications and/or bootloaders is very simple. LUFA comes with makefile scripts for
+ *  each individual demo, bootloader and project folder, as well as scripts in the /Demos/, /Bootloaders/, /Projects/
+ *  and the LUFA root directory. This means that compilation can be started from any of the above directories, with
+ *  a build started from an upper directory in the directory structure executing build of all child directories under it.
+ *  This means that while a build inside a particular demo directory will build only that particular demo, a build stated
+ *  from the /Demos/ directory will build all LUFA demo projects sequentially.
+ *
+ *  To build a project from the source via the command line, the command <b>"make all"</b> should be executed from the command line in the directory
+ *  of interest. To remove compiled files (including the binary output, all intermediately files and all diagnostic output
+ *  files), execute <b>"make clean"</b>. Once a "make all" has been run and no errors were encountered, the resulting binary will
+ *  be located in the generated ".HEX" file. If your project makes use of pre-initialized EEPROM variables, the generated ".EEP"
+ *  file will contain the project's EEPROM data.
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/ConfiguringApps.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/ConfiguringApps.txt
index fb9da7094..058d79b1f 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/ConfiguringApps.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/ConfiguringApps.txt
@@ -1,87 +1,87 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \page Page_ConfiguringApps Configuring the Demos, Bootloaders and Projects
- *
- *  If the target AVR model, clock speed, board or other settings are different to the current settings, they must be changed
- *  and the project recompiled from the source code before being programmed into the AVR microcontroller. Most project
- *  configuration options are located in the "makefile" build script inside each LUFA application's folder, however some
- *  demo or application-specific configuration settings (such as the output format in the AudioOut demo) are located in the
- *  main .c source file of the project. See each project's individual documentation for application-specific configuration
- *  values.
- *
- *  Each project "makefile" contains all the script and configuration data required to compile each project. When opened with
- *  any regular basic text editor such as Notepad or WordPad (ensure that the save format is a pure ASCII text format) the
- *  build configuration settings may be altered.
- *
- *  Inside each makefile, a number of configuration variables are located, with the format "<VARIABLE NAME> = <VALUE>". For
- *  each application, the important variables which should be altered are:
- *
- *    - <b>MCU</b>, the target AVR processor.
- *    - <b>BOARD</b>, the target board hardware
- *    - <b>F_CLOCK</b>, the target raw master clock frequency, before any prescaling is performed
- *    - <b>F_CPU</b>, the target AVR CPU master clock frequency, after any prescaling
- *    - <b>CDEFS</b>, the C preprocessor defines which configure options the source code
- *    - <b>LUFA_PATH</b>, the path to the LUFA library source code
- *    - <b>LUFA_OPTS</b>, the compile time LUFA options which configure the library features
- *
- *  These values should be changed to reflect the build hardware.
- *
- *  \section Sec_MCU The MCU Parameter
- *  This parameter indicates the target AVR model for the compiled application. This should be set to the model of the target AVR
- *  (such as the AT90USB1287, or the ATMEGA32U4), in all lower-case (e.g. "at90usb1287"). Note that not all demos support all the
- *  USB AVR models, as they may make use of peripherals or modes only present in some devices.
- *
- *  For supported library AVR models, see main documentation page.
- *
- *  \section Sec_BOARD The BOARD Parameter
- *  This parameter indicates the target AVR board hardware for the compiled application. Some LUFA library drivers are board-specific,
- *  such as the LED driver, and the library needs to know the layout of the target board. If you are using one of the board models listed
- *  on the main library page, change this parameter to the board name in all UPPER-case.
- *
- *  If you are not using any board-specific drivers in the LUFA library, or you are using a custom board layout, change this to read
- *  "USER" (no quotes) instead of a standard board name. If the USER board type is selected and the application makes use of one or more
- *  board-specific hardware drivers inside the LUFA library, then the appropriate stub drives files should be copied from the /BoardStubs/
- *  directory into a /Board/ folder inside the application directory, and the stub driver completed with the appropriate code to drive the
- *  custom board's hardware.
- *
- *  \section Sec_F_CLOCK The F_CLOCK Parameter
- *  This parameter indicates the target AVR's input clock frequency, in Hz. This is the actual clock input, before any prescaling is performed. In the
- *  USB AVR architecture, the input clock before any prescaling is fed directly to the PLL subsystem, and thus the PLL is derived directly from the
- *  clock input. The PLL then feeds the USB and other sections of the AVR with the correct upscaled frequencies required for those sections to function.
- *
- *  <b>Note that this value does not actually *alter* the AVR's input clock frequency</b>, it is just a way to indicate to the library the clock frequency
- *  of the AVR as set by the AVR's fuses. If this value does not reflect the actual running frequency of the AVR, incorrect operation of one of more
- *  library components will occur.
- *
- *  \section Sec_F_CPU The F_CPU Parameter
- *  This parameter indicates the target AVR's master CPU clock frequency, in Hz.
- *
- *  <b>Note that this value does not actually *alter* the AVR's CPU clock frequency</b>, it is just a way to indicate to the library the clock frequency
- *  of the AVR core as set by the AVR's fuses. If this value does not reflect the actual running frequency of the AVR, incorrect operation of one of more
- *  library components will occur.
- *
- *  \section Sec_CDEFS The CDEFS Parameter
- *  Many applications have features which can be controlled by the defining of specially named preprocessor tokens at the point of compilation - for example,
- *  an application might use a compile time token to turn on or off optional or mutually exclusive portions of code. Preprocessor tokens can be
- *  defined here by listing each one with the -D command line switch, and each token can optionally be defined to a specific value. When defined in the
- *  project makefile, these behave as if they were defined in every source file via a normal preprocessor define statement.
- *
- *  Most applications will actually have multiple CDEF lines, which are concatenated together with the "+=" operator. This ensures that large
- *  numbers of configuration options remain readable by splitting up groups of options into separate lines.
- *
- *  \section Sec_LUFA_PATH The LUFA_PATH Parameter
- *  As each LUFA program requires the LUFA library source code to compile correctly, the application must know where the LUFA library is located. This
- *  value specifies the path to the LUFA library base relative to the path of the project makefile.
- *
- *  \section Sec_LUFA_OPTS The LUFA_OPTS Parameter
- *  This value is similar to the CDEFS parameter listed elsewhere -- indeed, it is simply a convenient place to group LUFA related tokens away from the
- *  application's compile time tokens. Normally, these options do not need to be altered to allow an application to compile and run correctly on a
- *  different board or AVR to the current configuration - if the options are incorrect, then the demo is most likely incompatible with the chosen USB AVR
- *  model and cannot be made to function through the altering of the makefile settings alone (or at all). Settings such as the USB mode (device, host or both),
- *  the USB interface speed (Low or Full speed) and other LUFA configuration options can be set here - see \ref Page_TokenSummary documentation for details
- *  on the available LUFA compile time configuration options.
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \page Page_ConfiguringApps Configuring the Demos, Bootloaders and Projects
+ *
+ *  If the target AVR model, clock speed, board or other settings are different to the current settings, they must be changed
+ *  and the project recompiled from the source code before being programmed into the AVR microcontroller. Most project
+ *  configuration options are located in the "makefile" build script inside each LUFA application's folder, however some
+ *  demo or application-specific configuration settings (such as the output format in the AudioOut demo) are located in the
+ *  main .c source file of the project. See each project's individual documentation for application-specific configuration
+ *  values.
+ *
+ *  Each project "makefile" contains all the script and configuration data required to compile each project. When opened with
+ *  any regular basic text editor such as Notepad or WordPad (ensure that the save format is a pure ASCII text format) the
+ *  build configuration settings may be altered.
+ *
+ *  Inside each makefile, a number of configuration variables are located, with the format "<VARIABLE NAME> = <VALUE>". For
+ *  each application, the important variables which should be altered are:
+ *
+ *    - <b>MCU</b>, the target AVR processor.
+ *    - <b>BOARD</b>, the target board hardware
+ *    - <b>F_CLOCK</b>, the target raw master clock frequency, before any prescaling is performed
+ *    - <b>F_CPU</b>, the target AVR CPU master clock frequency, after any prescaling
+ *    - <b>CDEFS</b>, the C preprocessor defines which configure options the source code
+ *    - <b>LUFA_PATH</b>, the path to the LUFA library source code
+ *    - <b>LUFA_OPTS</b>, the compile time LUFA options which configure the library features
+ *
+ *  These values should be changed to reflect the build hardware.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_MCU The MCU Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the target AVR model for the compiled application. This should be set to the model of the target AVR
+ *  (such as the AT90USB1287, or the ATMEGA32U4), in all lower-case (e.g. "at90usb1287"). Note that not all demos support all the
+ *  USB AVR models, as they may make use of peripherals or modes only present in some devices.
+ *
+ *  For supported library AVR models, see main documentation page.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_BOARD The BOARD Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the target AVR board hardware for the compiled application. Some LUFA library drivers are board-specific,
+ *  such as the LED driver, and the library needs to know the layout of the target board. If you are using one of the board models listed
+ *  on the main library page, change this parameter to the board name in all UPPER-case.
+ *
+ *  If you are not using any board-specific drivers in the LUFA library, or you are using a custom board layout, change this to read
+ *  "USER" (no quotes) instead of a standard board name. If the USER board type is selected and the application makes use of one or more
+ *  board-specific hardware drivers inside the LUFA library, then the appropriate stub drives files should be copied from the /BoardStubs/
+ *  directory into a /Board/ folder inside the application directory, and the stub driver completed with the appropriate code to drive the
+ *  custom board's hardware.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_F_CLOCK The F_CLOCK Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the target AVR's input clock frequency, in Hz. This is the actual clock input, before any prescaling is performed. In the
+ *  USB AVR architecture, the input clock before any prescaling is fed directly to the PLL subsystem, and thus the PLL is derived directly from the
+ *  clock input. The PLL then feeds the USB and other sections of the AVR with the correct upscaled frequencies required for those sections to function.
+ *
+ *  <b>Note that this value does not actually *alter* the AVR's input clock frequency</b>, it is just a way to indicate to the library the clock frequency
+ *  of the AVR as set by the AVR's fuses. If this value does not reflect the actual running frequency of the AVR, incorrect operation of one of more
+ *  library components will occur.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_F_CPU The F_CPU Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the target AVR's master CPU clock frequency, in Hz.
+ *
+ *  <b>Note that this value does not actually *alter* the AVR's CPU clock frequency</b>, it is just a way to indicate to the library the clock frequency
+ *  of the AVR core as set by the AVR's fuses. If this value does not reflect the actual running frequency of the AVR, incorrect operation of one of more
+ *  library components will occur.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_CDEFS The CDEFS Parameter
+ *  Many applications have features which can be controlled by the defining of specially named preprocessor tokens at the point of compilation - for example,
+ *  an application might use a compile time token to turn on or off optional or mutually exclusive portions of code. Preprocessor tokens can be
+ *  defined here by listing each one with the -D command line switch, and each token can optionally be defined to a specific value. When defined in the
+ *  project makefile, these behave as if they were defined in every source file via a normal preprocessor define statement.
+ *
+ *  Most applications will actually have multiple CDEF lines, which are concatenated together with the "+=" operator. This ensures that large
+ *  numbers of configuration options remain readable by splitting up groups of options into separate lines.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LUFA_PATH The LUFA_PATH Parameter
+ *  As each LUFA program requires the LUFA library source code to compile correctly, the application must know where the LUFA library is located. This
+ *  value specifies the path to the LUFA library base relative to the path of the project makefile.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LUFA_OPTS The LUFA_OPTS Parameter
+ *  This value is similar to the CDEFS parameter listed elsewhere -- indeed, it is simply a convenient place to group LUFA related tokens away from the
+ *  application's compile time tokens. Normally, these options do not need to be altered to allow an application to compile and run correctly on a
+ *  different board or AVR to the current configuration - if the options are incorrect, then the demo is most likely incompatible with the chosen USB AVR
+ *  model and cannot be made to function through the altering of the makefile settings alone (or at all). Settings such as the USB mode (device, host or both),
+ *  the USB interface speed (Low or Full speed) and other LUFA configuration options can be set here - see \ref Page_TokenSummary documentation for details
+ *  on the available LUFA compile time configuration options.
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/DevelopingWithLUFA.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/DevelopingWithLUFA.txt
index eb079baab..1981a4990 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/DevelopingWithLUFA.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/DevelopingWithLUFA.txt
@@ -1,22 +1,22 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/**
- *  \page Page_DevelopingWithLUFA Developing With LUFA
- *
- *  This section of the manual contains information on LUFA development, such as Getting Started information,
- *  information on compile-time tuning of the library and other developer-related sections.
- *
- *  <b>Subsections:</b>
- *  - \subpage Page_TokenSummary Summary of Compile Time Tokens
- *  - \subpage Page_Migration Migrating from an Older LUFA Version
- *  - \subpage Page_VIDPID Allocated USB VID and PID Values
- *  - \subpage Page_BuildLibrary Building as a Linkable Library
- *  - \subpage Page_WritingBoardDrivers How to Write Custom Board Drivers
- *  - \subpage Page_SoftwareBootloaderStart How to jump to the bootloader in software
- *  - \subpage Page_SchedulerOverview Overview of the Simple LUFA Scheduler (DEPRECATED)
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_DevelopingWithLUFA Developing With LUFA
+ *
+ *  This section of the manual contains information on LUFA development, such as Getting Started information,
+ *  information on compile-time tuning of the library and other developer-related sections.
+ *
+ *  <b>Subsections:</b>
+ *  - \subpage Page_TokenSummary Summary of Compile Time Tokens
+ *  - \subpage Page_Migration Migrating from an Older LUFA Version
+ *  - \subpage Page_VIDPID Allocated USB VID and PID Values
+ *  - \subpage Page_BuildLibrary Building as a Linkable Library
+ *  - \subpage Page_WritingBoardDrivers How to Write Custom Board Drivers
+ *  - \subpage Page_SoftwareBootloaderStart How to jump to the bootloader in software
+ *  - \subpage Page_SchedulerOverview Overview of the Simple LUFA Scheduler (DEPRECATED)
+ */
  
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/DeviceSupport.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/DeviceSupport.txt
index c16def7b4..47cfc4ad7 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/DeviceSupport.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/DeviceSupport.txt
@@ -1,41 +1,41 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/**
- *  \page Page_DeviceSupport Device and Hardware Support
- *
- *  Currently supported AVR models:
- *   - AT90USB82 (USB Device Only)
- *   - ATMEGA8U2 (USB Device Only)
- *   - AT90USB162 (USB Device Only)
- *   - ATMEGA16U2 (USB Device Only)
- *   - ATMEGA16U4 (USB Device Only)
- *   - ATMEGA32U2 (USB Device Only)
- *   - ATMEGA32U4 (USB Device Only)
- *   - ATMEGA32U6 (USB Device Only)
- *   - AT90USB646 (USB Device Only)
- *   - AT90USB647 (USB Host and Device)
- *   - AT90USB1286 (USB Device Only)
- *   - AT90USB1287 (USB Host and Device)
- *
- *  Currently supported Atmel boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes):
- *   - AT90USBKEY
- *   - ATAVRUSBRF01
- *   - EVK527
- *   - RZUSBSTICK
- *   - STK525
- *   - STK526
- *   - XPLAIN (Both original first revision board, and newer boards with a different Dataflash model)
- *
- *  Currently supported third-party boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes):
- *   - Bumble-B (using officially recommended peripheral layout)
- *   - Benito
- *   - JM-DB-U2
- *   - Teensy (all revisions and versions)
- *   - USBTINY MKII (all revisions and versions)
- *   - Any Other Custom User Boards (with Board Drivers if desired, see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_DeviceSupport Device and Hardware Support
+ *
+ *  Currently supported AVR models:
+ *   - AT90USB82 (USB Device Only)
+ *   - ATMEGA8U2 (USB Device Only)
+ *   - AT90USB162 (USB Device Only)
+ *   - ATMEGA16U2 (USB Device Only)
+ *   - ATMEGA16U4 (USB Device Only)
+ *   - ATMEGA32U2 (USB Device Only)
+ *   - ATMEGA32U4 (USB Device Only)
+ *   - ATMEGA32U6 (USB Device Only)
+ *   - AT90USB646 (USB Device Only)
+ *   - AT90USB647 (USB Host and Device)
+ *   - AT90USB1286 (USB Device Only)
+ *   - AT90USB1287 (USB Host and Device)
+ *
+ *  Currently supported Atmel boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes):
+ *   - AT90USBKEY
+ *   - ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *   - EVK527
+ *   - RZUSBSTICK
+ *   - STK525
+ *   - STK526
+ *   - XPLAIN (Both original first revision board, and newer boards with a different Dataflash model)
+ *
+ *  Currently supported third-party boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes):
+ *   - Bumble-B (using officially recommended peripheral layout)
+ *   - Benito
+ *   - JM-DB-U2
+ *   - Teensy (all revisions and versions)
+ *   - USBTINY MKII (all revisions and versions)
+ *   - Any Other Custom User Boards (with Board Drivers if desired, see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)
+ */
  
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/DirectorySummaries.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/DirectorySummaries.txt
index 3d4995b49..25f2db064 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/DirectorySummaries.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/DirectorySummaries.txt
@@ -1,171 +1,171 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \dir LUFA/Common
- *  \brief Common library header files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains header files which are common to all parts of the LUFA library. They may be used freely in
- *  user applications.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers
- *  \brief Library hardware and software drivers.
- *  
- *  This folder contains all the library hardware and software drivers for each supported board and USB AVR
- *  microcontroller model.
- * 
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Misc
- *  \brief Miscellaneous driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for aspects other than the USB interface, board hardware or AVR peripherals.
- * 
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral
- *  \brief USB AVR peripheral driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for several of the AVR internal peripherals such as the USART, compatible with
- *  all USB AVR models.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVRU4U6U7
- *  \brief AT90USBXXX6, AT90USBXXX7 and ATMEGAXXU4 AVR model peripheral driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for several of the AVR internal peripherals such as the USART, compatible only with
- *  the AT90USBXXX6, AT90USBXXX7 and ATMEGAXXU4 USB AVR models, such as the AT90USB1287. Its contents should <b>not</b> be
- *  included by the user application - the dispatch header file located in the parent directory should be used
- *  instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB
- *  \brief USB controller peripheral driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains the main header files required to implement the USB interface in the USB supporting AVR models.
- *  The header files contained directly in this folder should be included in the user application in order to gain USB
- *  functionality, and the appropriate C source files in the LowLevel and HighLevel driver folders added to the compile
- *  and link stages.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel
- *  \brief Low level USB driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains low level USB driver source files required to implement USB functionality on the USB AVR microcontrollers.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel
- *  \brief High level USB driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains high level USB driver source files required to implement USB functionality on the USB AVR microcontrollers.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class
- *  \brief USB Class helper driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for implementing functionality of standardized USB classes. These are not used directly by the library,
- *  but provide a standard and library-maintained way of implementing functionality from some of the defined USB classes without extensive
- *  development effort. Is is recommended that these drivers be used where possible to reduce maintenance of user applications.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device
- *  \brief USB Device Class helper driver files.
- *  
- *  Device mode drivers for the standard USB classes.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host
- *  \brief USB Host Class helper driver files.
- *  
- *  Host mode drivers for the standard USB classes.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board
- *  \brief Board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for interfacing with the physical hardware on supported commercial boards, primarily from
- *  the Atmel corporation. Header files in this folder should be included in user applications requiring the functionality of
- *  hardware placed on supported boards.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY
- *  \brief USBKEY board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel USBKEY demonstration board. The header files in this folder should
- *  not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory
- *  should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526
- *  \brief STK526 board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel STK526 development board. The header files in this folder should
- *  not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory
- *  should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525
- *  \brief STK525 board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel STK525 development board. The header files in this folder should
- *  not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory
- *  should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK
- *  \brief RZUSBSTICK board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel RZUSBSTICK board, as used in the Atmel "Raven" wireless kits. The header
- *  files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in
- *  the parent Board directory should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01
- *  \brief ATAVRUSBRF01 board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01 board, as used in several Atmel wireless demo kits. The header
- *  files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in
- *  the parent Board directory should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB
- *  \brief BUMBLEB board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Fletchtronics Bumble-B board (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The header
- *  files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in
- *  the parent Board directory should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN
- *  \brief XPLAIN board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel XPLAIN board (all hardware revisions). The header files in this folder 
- *  should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board 
- *  directory should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527
- *  \brief XPLAIN board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel EVK527 development board. The header files in this folder should
- *  not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory
- *  should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/TEENSY
- *  \brief TEENSY board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on all revisions of the PJRC Teensy boards (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/). The header
- *  files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located
- *  in the parent Board directory should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBTINYMKII
- *  \brief USBTINY-MKII board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on all revisions of the USBTINY-MKII boards (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
- *  The header files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files
- *  located in the parent Board directory should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/BENITO
- *  \brief BENITO board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Benito boards (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito). The header files in this
- *  folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent
- *  Board directory should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/JMDBU2
- *  \brief JM-DB-U2 board hardware driver files.
- *  
- *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the JM-DB-U2 boards (http://u2.mattair.net/). The header files in this folder
- *  should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board
- *  directory should be included instead.
- *
- *  \dir LUFA/DriverStubs
- *  \brief Driver stub header files for custom boards, to allow the LUFA board drivers to operate.
- *  
- *  This contains stub files for the LUFA board drivers. If the LUFA board drivers are used with board hardware other than those
- *  directly supported by the library, the BOARD parameter of the application's makefile can be set to "USER", and these stub files
- *  copied to the "/Board/" directory of the application's folder. When fleshed out with working driver code for the custom board,
- *  the corresponding LUFA board APIs will work correctly with the non-standard board hardware.
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \dir LUFA/Common
+ *  \brief Common library header files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains header files which are common to all parts of the LUFA library. They may be used freely in
+ *  user applications.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers
+ *  \brief Library hardware and software drivers.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains all the library hardware and software drivers for each supported board and USB AVR
+ *  microcontroller model.
+ * 
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Misc
+ *  \brief Miscellaneous driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for aspects other than the USB interface, board hardware or AVR peripherals.
+ * 
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral
+ *  \brief USB AVR peripheral driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for several of the AVR internal peripherals such as the USART, compatible with
+ *  all USB AVR models.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVRU4U6U7
+ *  \brief AT90USBXXX6, AT90USBXXX7 and ATMEGAXXU4 AVR model peripheral driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for several of the AVR internal peripherals such as the USART, compatible only with
+ *  the AT90USBXXX6, AT90USBXXX7 and ATMEGAXXU4 USB AVR models, such as the AT90USB1287. Its contents should <b>not</b> be
+ *  included by the user application - the dispatch header file located in the parent directory should be used
+ *  instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB
+ *  \brief USB controller peripheral driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains the main header files required to implement the USB interface in the USB supporting AVR models.
+ *  The header files contained directly in this folder should be included in the user application in order to gain USB
+ *  functionality, and the appropriate C source files in the LowLevel and HighLevel driver folders added to the compile
+ *  and link stages.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel
+ *  \brief Low level USB driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains low level USB driver source files required to implement USB functionality on the USB AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel
+ *  \brief High level USB driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains high level USB driver source files required to implement USB functionality on the USB AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class
+ *  \brief USB Class helper driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for implementing functionality of standardized USB classes. These are not used directly by the library,
+ *  but provide a standard and library-maintained way of implementing functionality from some of the defined USB classes without extensive
+ *  development effort. Is is recommended that these drivers be used where possible to reduce maintenance of user applications.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device
+ *  \brief USB Device Class helper driver files.
+ *  
+ *  Device mode drivers for the standard USB classes.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host
+ *  \brief USB Host Class helper driver files.
+ *  
+ *  Host mode drivers for the standard USB classes.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board
+ *  \brief Board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for interfacing with the physical hardware on supported commercial boards, primarily from
+ *  the Atmel corporation. Header files in this folder should be included in user applications requiring the functionality of
+ *  hardware placed on supported boards.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY
+ *  \brief USBKEY board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel USBKEY demonstration board. The header files in this folder should
+ *  not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory
+ *  should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526
+ *  \brief STK526 board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel STK526 development board. The header files in this folder should
+ *  not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory
+ *  should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525
+ *  \brief STK525 board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel STK525 development board. The header files in this folder should
+ *  not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory
+ *  should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK
+ *  \brief RZUSBSTICK board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel RZUSBSTICK board, as used in the Atmel "Raven" wireless kits. The header
+ *  files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in
+ *  the parent Board directory should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *  \brief ATAVRUSBRF01 board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01 board, as used in several Atmel wireless demo kits. The header
+ *  files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in
+ *  the parent Board directory should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/BUMBLEB
+ *  \brief BUMBLEB board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Fletchtronics Bumble-B board (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The header
+ *  files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in
+ *  the parent Board directory should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/XPLAIN
+ *  \brief XPLAIN board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel XPLAIN board (all hardware revisions). The header files in this folder 
+ *  should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board 
+ *  directory should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/EVK527
+ *  \brief XPLAIN board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel EVK527 development board. The header files in this folder should
+ *  not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory
+ *  should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/TEENSY
+ *  \brief TEENSY board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on all revisions of the PJRC Teensy boards (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/). The header
+ *  files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located
+ *  in the parent Board directory should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBTINYMKII
+ *  \brief USBTINY-MKII board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on all revisions of the USBTINY-MKII boards (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
+ *  The header files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files
+ *  located in the parent Board directory should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/BENITO
+ *  \brief BENITO board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Benito boards (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito). The header files in this
+ *  folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent
+ *  Board directory should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/Drivers/Board/JMDBU2
+ *  \brief JM-DB-U2 board hardware driver files.
+ *  
+ *  This folder contains drivers for hardware on the JM-DB-U2 boards (http://u2.mattair.net/). The header files in this folder
+ *  should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board
+ *  directory should be included instead.
+ *
+ *  \dir LUFA/DriverStubs
+ *  \brief Driver stub header files for custom boards, to allow the LUFA board drivers to operate.
+ *  
+ *  This contains stub files for the LUFA board drivers. If the LUFA board drivers are used with board hardware other than those
+ *  directly supported by the library, the BOARD parameter of the application's makefile can be set to "USER", and these stub files
+ *  copied to the "/Board/" directory of the application's folder. When fleshed out with working driver code for the custom board,
+ *  the corresponding LUFA board APIs will work correctly with the non-standard board hardware.
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/Donating.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/Donating.txt
index ed778eaf2..a3f99ee2d 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/Donating.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/Donating.txt
@@ -1,24 +1,24 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/**
- *  \page Page_Donating Donating to Support This Project
- *
- *  \image html Author.jpg "Dean Camera, LUFA Developer"
- *
- *  I am a 20 year old University student studying for a double degree in Computer Science and Electronics Engineering.
- *  The development and support of this library requires much effort from myself, as I am the sole developer, maintainer
- *  and supporter. Please consider donating a small amount to support this and my future Open Source projects - All
- *  donations are <i>greatly</i> appreciated.
- *
- *  Note that commercial entities can remove the attribution portion of the LUFA licence by a one-time fee - see
- *  \ref Page_LicenceInfo for more details (<b>Note: Please do NOT pay this in advance through the donation link below -
- *  contact author for payment details.</b>).
- *
- *  \image html "http://www.pledgie.com/campaigns/6927.png?skin_name=chrome"
- *  <a href='http://www.pledgie.com/campaigns/6927'>Donate to this project via PayPal</a> - Thanks in Advance!
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_Donating Donating to Support This Project
+ *
+ *  \image html Author.jpg "Dean Camera, LUFA Developer"
+ *
+ *  I am a 20 year old University student studying for a double degree in Computer Science and Electronics Engineering.
+ *  The development and support of this library requires much effort from myself, as I am the sole developer, maintainer
+ *  and supporter. Please consider donating a small amount to support this and my future Open Source projects - All
+ *  donations are <i>greatly</i> appreciated.
+ *
+ *  Note that commercial entities can remove the attribution portion of the LUFA licence by a one-time fee - see
+ *  \ref Page_LicenceInfo for more details (<b>Note: Please do NOT pay this in advance through the donation link below -
+ *  contact author for payment details.</b>).
+ *
+ *  \image html "http://www.pledgie.com/campaigns/6927.png?skin_name=chrome"
+ *  <a href='http://www.pledgie.com/campaigns/6927'>Donate to this project via PayPal</a> - Thanks in Advance!
+ */
  
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/FutureChanges.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/FutureChanges.txt
index 04a5fc6c2..2a7b39e33 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/FutureChanges.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/FutureChanges.txt
@@ -1,40 +1,40 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
- /** \page Page_FutureChanges Future Changes
-  *
-  *  Below is a list of future changes which are proposed for the LUFA library, but not yet started/complete.
-  *  This gives an unordered list of future changes which will be available in future releases of the library.
-  *  If you have an item to add to this list, please contact the library author via email, the LUFA mailing list,
-  *  or post your suggestion as an enhancement request to the project bug tracker.
-  *
-  *  <b>Targeted for Future Releases:</b>
-  *  - Code Features
-  *      -# Add hub support when in Host mode for multiple devices
-  *      -# Add ability to get number of bytes not written with pipe/endpoint write routines after an error
-  *      -# Add standardized descriptor names to class driver structures
-  *      -# Correct mishandling of error cases in Mass Storage demos
-  *  - Documentation/Support
-  *      -# Remake AVRStudio project files
-  *      -# Add detailed overviews of how each demo works
-  *      -# Master LUFA include file rather than per-module includes
-  *      -# Change makefiles to allow for absolute LUFA location to be used
-  *      -# Add board overviews
-  *      -# Write LUFA tutorials
-  *  - Demos/Projects
-  *      -# Multiple-Report HID device
-  *      -# Device/Host USB bridge
-  *      -# Alternative (USB-IF endorsed) USB-CDC Ethernet Class
-  *      -# USB Test and Measurement Class
-  *      -# Finish BluetoothHost demo
-  *      -# Finish SideShow demo
-  *      -# Finish StandaloneProgrammer project
-  *      -# Finish MIDIToneGenerator project
-  *  - Ports
-  *      -# AVR32 UC3B series microcontrollers
-  *      -# Atmel ARM7 series microcontrollers
-  *      -# Other (commercial) C compilers
-  */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+ /** \page Page_FutureChanges Future Changes
+  *
+  *  Below is a list of future changes which are proposed for the LUFA library, but not yet started/complete.
+  *  This gives an unordered list of future changes which will be available in future releases of the library.
+  *  If you have an item to add to this list, please contact the library author via email, the LUFA mailing list,
+  *  or post your suggestion as an enhancement request to the project bug tracker.
+  *
+  *  <b>Targeted for Future Releases:</b>
+  *  - Code Features
+  *      -# Add hub support when in Host mode for multiple devices
+  *      -# Add ability to get number of bytes not written with pipe/endpoint write routines after an error
+  *      -# Add standardized descriptor names to class driver structures
+  *      -# Correct mishandling of error cases in Mass Storage demos
+  *  - Documentation/Support
+  *      -# Remake AVRStudio project files
+  *      -# Add detailed overviews of how each demo works
+  *      -# Master LUFA include file rather than per-module includes
+  *      -# Change makefiles to allow for absolute LUFA location to be used
+  *      -# Add board overviews
+  *      -# Write LUFA tutorials
+  *  - Demos/Projects
+  *      -# Multiple-Report HID device
+  *      -# Device/Host USB bridge
+  *      -# Alternative (USB-IF endorsed) USB-CDC Ethernet Class
+  *      -# USB Test and Measurement Class
+  *      -# Finish BluetoothHost demo
+  *      -# Finish SideShow demo
+  *      -# Finish StandaloneProgrammer project
+  *      -# Finish MIDIToneGenerator project
+  *  - Ports
+  *      -# AVR32 UC3B series microcontrollers
+  *      -# Atmel ARM7 series microcontrollers
+  *      -# Other (commercial) C compilers
+  */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/GettingStarted.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/GettingStarted.txt
index a1e5e1f4b..b33a3b5e7 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/GettingStarted.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/GettingStarted.txt
@@ -1,26 +1,26 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \page Page_GettingStarted Getting Started
- *
- *  Out of the box, LUFA contains a large number of pre-made class demos for you to test, experiment with and
- *  ultimately build upon for your own projects. All the demos (where possible) come pre-configured to build and
- *  run correctly on the AT90USB1287 AVR microcontroller, mounted on the Atmel USBKEY board and running at an 8MHz
- *  master clock. This is due to two reasons; one, it is the hardware the author possesses, and two, it is the most
- *  popular Atmel USB demonstration board to date. To learn how to reconfigure, recompile and program the included
- *  LUFA applications using different settings, see the subsections below.
- *
- *  Most of the included demos in the /Demos/ folder come in both ClassDriver and LowLevel varieties. If you are new
- *  to LUFA, it is highly recommended that you look at the ClassDriver versions first, which use the premade USB
- *  Class Drivers (\ref Group_USBClassDrivers) to simplify the use of the standard USB classes in user applications.
- *
- *  For an overview of the included library applications, bootloaders and demos, see \ref Page_LibraryApps.
- *
- *  <b>Subsections:</b>
- *  - \subpage Page_ConfiguringApps How to Configure the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders
- *  - \subpage Page_CompilingApps How to Compile the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders
- *  - \subpage Page_ProgrammingApps How to Program an AVR with the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_GettingStarted Getting Started
+ *
+ *  Out of the box, LUFA contains a large number of pre-made class demos for you to test, experiment with and
+ *  ultimately build upon for your own projects. All the demos (where possible) come pre-configured to build and
+ *  run correctly on the AT90USB1287 AVR microcontroller, mounted on the Atmel USBKEY board and running at an 8MHz
+ *  master clock. This is due to two reasons; one, it is the hardware the author possesses, and two, it is the most
+ *  popular Atmel USB demonstration board to date. To learn how to reconfigure, recompile and program the included
+ *  LUFA applications using different settings, see the subsections below.
+ *
+ *  Most of the included demos in the /Demos/ folder come in both ClassDriver and LowLevel varieties. If you are new
+ *  to LUFA, it is highly recommended that you look at the ClassDriver versions first, which use the premade USB
+ *  Class Drivers (\ref Group_USBClassDrivers) to simplify the use of the standard USB classes in user applications.
+ *
+ *  For an overview of the included library applications, bootloaders and demos, see \ref Page_LibraryApps.
+ *
+ *  <b>Subsections:</b>
+ *  - \subpage Page_ConfiguringApps How to Configure the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders
+ *  - \subpage Page_CompilingApps How to Compile the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders
+ *  - \subpage Page_ProgrammingApps How to Program an AVR with the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/Groups.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/Groups.txt
index 530ce28b4..a204412e1 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/Groups.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/Groups.txt
@@ -1,20 +1,20 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** @defgroup Group_BoardDrivers Board Drivers
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the control of physical board hardware.
- */
-
-/** @defgroup Group_PeripheralDrivers On-chip Peripheral Drivers
- *
- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the control of AVR subsystems.
- */
- 
-/** @defgroup Group_MiscDrivers Miscellaneous Drivers
- *
- *  Miscellaneous driver Functions, macros, variables, enums and types.
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup Group_BoardDrivers Board Drivers
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the control of physical board hardware.
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup Group_PeripheralDrivers On-chip Peripheral Drivers
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the control of AVR subsystems.
+ */
+ 
+/** @defgroup Group_MiscDrivers Miscellaneous Drivers
+ *
+ *  Miscellaneous driver Functions, macros, variables, enums and types.
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/LUFAPoweredProjects.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/LUFAPoweredProjects.txt
index 41a41ae90..4fb8c3425 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/LUFAPoweredProjects.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/LUFAPoweredProjects.txt
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \page Page_LUFAPoweredProjects User Projects Powered by LUFA
- *
- *  LUFA is currently in use all around the world, in many applications both commercial and non-commercial. Below is a
- *  list of known public LUFA powered projects, which all use the LUFA library in some way. Feel free to visit each project's
- *  home page for more information on each project.
- *
- *  If you have a project that you would like to add to this list, please contact me via the details on the main page of this
- *  documentation.
- *
- *  \section Sec_BoardsUsingLUFA AVR-USB Development Boards Using LUFA
- *
- *  The following is a list of known AVR USB development boards, which recommend using LUFA for the USB stack. Some of these
- *  are open design, and all are available for purchase as completed development boards suitable for project development.
- *
- *  - AT90USB162 Breadboard PCB (Russian): http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/
- *  - Benito #7, a no-frills USB board: http://www.dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito
- *  - Bumble-B, yet another AT90USB162 development board: http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b
- *  - JM-DB-U2, an ATMEGA32U2 development board: http://u2.mattair.net/index.html
- *  - Micropendous, an open design/source set of AVR USB development boards: http://micropendous.org/
- *  - Nanduino, a do-it-yourself AT90USB162 board: http://www.makestuff.eu/wordpress/?page_id=569
- *  - Teensy and Teensy++, two other AVR USB development boards: http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html
- *  - U2DIL/U4DIL, a set of DIP layout USB AVR boards: http://www.reworld.eu/re/en/products/u2dil/
- *  - USB10 AKA "The Ferret", a AT90USB162 development board: http://www.soc-machines.com
- * 
- *  \section Sec_LUFAProjects Projects Using LUFA (Hobbyist)
- *
- *  The following are known hobbyist projects using LUFA. Most are open source, and show off interesting ways that the LUFA library
- *  can be incorporated into many different applications.
- *
- *  - Accelerometer Game Joystick: http://www.crictor.co.il/he/episodes/joystick/
- *  - Arcade Controller: http://fletchtronics.net/arcade-controller-made-petunia
- *  - AVR USB Modem, a 3G Wireless Modem host: http://code.google.com/p/avrusbmodem/
- *  - Bicycle POV: http://www.code.google.com/p/bicycleledpov/
- *  - CAMTRIG, a remote Camera Trigger device: http://code.astraw.com/projects/motmot/camtrig
- *  - CD Driver Emulator Dongle for ISO Files: http://cdemu.blogspot.com/
- *  - ClockTamer, a configurable clock generator: http://code.google.com/p/clock-tamer/
- *  - EMUCOMBOX, a USB-RS422 adapter for E-Mu Emax samplers: http://users.skynet.be/emxp/EMUCOMBOX.htm
- *  - "Fingerlicking Wingdinger" (WARNING: Bad Language if no Javascript), a MIDI controller: http://noisybox.net/electronics/wingdinger/
- *  - Garmin GPS USB to NMEA standard serial sentence translator: http://github.com/nall/garmin-transmogrifier/tree/master
- *  - Generic HID Device Creator: http://generichid.sourceforge.net/
- *  - IR Remote to Keyboard decoder: http://netzhansa.blogspot.com/2010/04/our-living-room-hi-fi-setup-needs-mp3.html
- *  - LED Panel controller: http://projects.peterpolidoro.net/caltech/panelscontroller/panelscontroller.htm
- *  - Linux Secure Storage Dongle: http://github.com/TomMD/teensy
- *  - MakeTV Episode Dispenser: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BkWUi18hl3g
- *  - MidiMonster, a USB-to-MIDI gateway board: http://www.dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/midimonster
- *  - NES Controller USB modification: http://projects.peterpolidoro.net/video/NESUSB.htm
- *  - Opendous-JTAG, an open source JTAG device: http://code.google.com/p/opendous-jtag/
- *  - Openkubus, an open source hardware-based authentication dongle: http://code.google.com/p/openkubus/
- *  - Orbee, a USB connected RGB Orb for notifications: http://www.franksworkshop.com.au/Electronics/Orbee/Orbee.htm
- *  - Programmable XBOX controller: http://richard-burke.dyndns.org/wordpress/pan-galactic-gargantuan-gargle-brain-aka-xbox-360-usb-controller/
- *  - Reprap with LUFA, a LUFA powered 3D printer: http://code.google.com/p/at90usb1287-code-for-arduino-and-eclipse/
- *  - SD Card reader: http://elasticsheep.com/2010/04/teensy2-usb-mass-storage-with-an-sd-card/
- *  - SEGA Megadrive/Genesis Development Cartridge: http://www.makestuff.eu/wordpress/?page_id=398
- *  - Stripe Snoop, a Magnetic Card reader: http://www.ossguy.com/ss_usb/
- *  - USB Interface for Playstation Portable Devices: http://forums.ps2dev.org/viewtopic.php?t=11001
- *  - Userial, a USB to Serial converter with SPI, I2C and other protocols: http://www.tty1.net/userial/
- *  - XUM1541, a Commodore 64 floppy drive to USB adapter: http://www.root.org/~nate/c64/xum1541/
- * 
- *  \section Sec_LUFACommercialProjects Projects Using LUFA (Commercial)
- *
- *  The following is a list of known commercial products using LUFA. Some of these are open source, although many are "black-box"
- *  solutions with no source code given.
- *
- *  - ARPS Locator: http://la3t.hamradio.no/lab//?id=tracker_en
- *  - Digital Survey Instruments Magnetometer and Pointer: http://www.digitalsurveyinstruments.com/
- *  - Penguino, an Arduino Board With On-Board LUFA Powered Debugger/Programmer: http://wiki.icy.com.au/PenguinoAVR
- *  - Many of Busware's Products: http://www.busware.de/
- *  - MIDIFighter, a USB-MIDI controller: http://www.midifighter.com/
- *  - Mobo 4.3, a USB controlled all band (160-10m) HF SDR transceiver: http://sites.google.com/site/lofturj/mobo4_3
- *  - Retrode, a USB Games Console Cartridge Reader: http://www.retrode.org
- *  - XMEGA Development Board, using LUFA as an On-Board Programmer: http://xmega.mattair.net/
- *
- *  \section Sec_LUFAPublications Publications Mentioning LUFA
- *  - Elektor Magazine, "My First AVR-USB" by Antoine Authier (feature), January 2010 Issue
- *  - Elektor Magazine, "USB is Cool/Sucks" by Jerry Jacobs and Chris Vossen (minor mention), January 2010 Issue
- *  - Elektor Magazine, "20 x Open Source" by Jens Nickel, March 2010 Issue
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_LUFAPoweredProjects User Projects Powered by LUFA
+ *
+ *  LUFA is currently in use all around the world, in many applications both commercial and non-commercial. Below is a
+ *  list of known public LUFA powered projects, which all use the LUFA library in some way. Feel free to visit each project's
+ *  home page for more information on each project.
+ *
+ *  If you have a project that you would like to add to this list, please contact me via the details on the main page of this
+ *  documentation.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_BoardsUsingLUFA AVR-USB Development Boards Using LUFA
+ *
+ *  The following is a list of known AVR USB development boards, which recommend using LUFA for the USB stack. Some of these
+ *  are open design, and all are available for purchase as completed development boards suitable for project development.
+ *
+ *  - AT90USB162 Breadboard PCB (Russian): http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/
+ *  - Benito #7, a no-frills USB board: http://www.dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito
+ *  - Bumble-B, yet another AT90USB162 development board: http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b
+ *  - JM-DB-U2, an ATMEGA32U2 development board: http://u2.mattair.net/index.html
+ *  - Micropendous, an open design/source set of AVR USB development boards: http://micropendous.org/
+ *  - Nanduino, a do-it-yourself AT90USB162 board: http://www.makestuff.eu/wordpress/?page_id=569
+ *  - Teensy and Teensy++, two other AVR USB development boards: http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html
+ *  - U2DIL/U4DIL, a set of DIP layout USB AVR boards: http://www.reworld.eu/re/en/products/u2dil/
+ *  - USB10 AKA "The Ferret", a AT90USB162 development board: http://www.soc-machines.com
+ * 
+ *  \section Sec_LUFAProjects Projects Using LUFA (Hobbyist)
+ *
+ *  The following are known hobbyist projects using LUFA. Most are open source, and show off interesting ways that the LUFA library
+ *  can be incorporated into many different applications.
+ *
+ *  - Accelerometer Game Joystick: http://www.crictor.co.il/he/episodes/joystick/
+ *  - Arcade Controller: http://fletchtronics.net/arcade-controller-made-petunia
+ *  - AVR USB Modem, a 3G Wireless Modem host: http://code.google.com/p/avrusbmodem/
+ *  - Bicycle POV: http://www.code.google.com/p/bicycleledpov/
+ *  - CAMTRIG, a remote Camera Trigger device: http://code.astraw.com/projects/motmot/camtrig
+ *  - CD Driver Emulator Dongle for ISO Files: http://cdemu.blogspot.com/
+ *  - ClockTamer, a configurable clock generator: http://code.google.com/p/clock-tamer/
+ *  - EMUCOMBOX, a USB-RS422 adapter for E-Mu Emax samplers: http://users.skynet.be/emxp/EMUCOMBOX.htm
+ *  - "Fingerlicking Wingdinger" (WARNING: Bad Language if no Javascript), a MIDI controller: http://noisybox.net/electronics/wingdinger/
+ *  - Garmin GPS USB to NMEA standard serial sentence translator: http://github.com/nall/garmin-transmogrifier/tree/master
+ *  - Generic HID Device Creator: http://generichid.sourceforge.net/
+ *  - IR Remote to Keyboard decoder: http://netzhansa.blogspot.com/2010/04/our-living-room-hi-fi-setup-needs-mp3.html
+ *  - LED Panel controller: http://projects.peterpolidoro.net/caltech/panelscontroller/panelscontroller.htm
+ *  - Linux Secure Storage Dongle: http://github.com/TomMD/teensy
+ *  - MakeTV Episode Dispenser: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BkWUi18hl3g
+ *  - MidiMonster, a USB-to-MIDI gateway board: http://www.dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/midimonster
+ *  - NES Controller USB modification: http://projects.peterpolidoro.net/video/NESUSB.htm
+ *  - Opendous-JTAG, an open source JTAG device: http://code.google.com/p/opendous-jtag/
+ *  - Openkubus, an open source hardware-based authentication dongle: http://code.google.com/p/openkubus/
+ *  - Orbee, a USB connected RGB Orb for notifications: http://www.franksworkshop.com.au/Electronics/Orbee/Orbee.htm
+ *  - Programmable XBOX controller: http://richard-burke.dyndns.org/wordpress/pan-galactic-gargantuan-gargle-brain-aka-xbox-360-usb-controller/
+ *  - Reprap with LUFA, a LUFA powered 3D printer: http://code.google.com/p/at90usb1287-code-for-arduino-and-eclipse/
+ *  - SD Card reader: http://elasticsheep.com/2010/04/teensy2-usb-mass-storage-with-an-sd-card/
+ *  - SEGA Megadrive/Genesis Development Cartridge: http://www.makestuff.eu/wordpress/?page_id=398
+ *  - Stripe Snoop, a Magnetic Card reader: http://www.ossguy.com/ss_usb/
+ *  - USB Interface for Playstation Portable Devices: http://forums.ps2dev.org/viewtopic.php?t=11001
+ *  - Userial, a USB to Serial converter with SPI, I2C and other protocols: http://www.tty1.net/userial/
+ *  - XUM1541, a Commodore 64 floppy drive to USB adapter: http://www.root.org/~nate/c64/xum1541/
+ * 
+ *  \section Sec_LUFACommercialProjects Projects Using LUFA (Commercial)
+ *
+ *  The following is a list of known commercial products using LUFA. Some of these are open source, although many are "black-box"
+ *  solutions with no source code given.
+ *
+ *  - ARPS Locator: http://la3t.hamradio.no/lab//?id=tracker_en
+ *  - Digital Survey Instruments Magnetometer and Pointer: http://www.digitalsurveyinstruments.com/
+ *  - Penguino, an Arduino Board With On-Board LUFA Powered Debugger/Programmer: http://wiki.icy.com.au/PenguinoAVR
+ *  - Many of Busware's Products: http://www.busware.de/
+ *  - MIDIFighter, a USB-MIDI controller: http://www.midifighter.com/
+ *  - Mobo 4.3, a USB controlled all band (160-10m) HF SDR transceiver: http://sites.google.com/site/lofturj/mobo4_3
+ *  - Retrode, a USB Games Console Cartridge Reader: http://www.retrode.org
+ *  - XMEGA Development Board, using LUFA as an On-Board Programmer: http://xmega.mattair.net/
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LUFAPublications Publications Mentioning LUFA
+ *  - Elektor Magazine, "My First AVR-USB" by Antoine Authier (feature), January 2010 Issue
+ *  - Elektor Magazine, "USB is Cool/Sucks" by Jerry Jacobs and Chris Vossen (minor mention), January 2010 Issue
+ *  - Elektor Magazine, "20 x Open Source" by Jens Nickel, March 2010 Issue
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/LUFAvsAtmelStack.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/LUFAvsAtmelStack.txt
index 8f39b7239..582bb9e0f 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/LUFAvsAtmelStack.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/LUFAvsAtmelStack.txt
@@ -1,46 +1,46 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/**
- *  \page Page_LUFAvsAtmelStack LUFA vs the Atmel Stack
- *
- *  Atmel offers an official USB AVR stack, which may be incorporated into user projects and products. As LUFA and the Atmel
- *  stack aims to give roughly the same functionality to a design, it is often asked what advantages LUFA carries over the
- *  official Atmel USB stack. Below are just some of the advantages to choosing LUFA over the official stack.
- *
- *  - <b>Licensing:</b>
- *    LUFA is released under a very permissive MIT license (see \ref Page_LicenceInfo), while the Atmel stack carries several
- *    restrictions as to how and where it can be used. LUFA's licensing should be suitable for both Commercial and Non-Commercial
- *    entities alike.
- *
- *  - <b>Demos and Projects:</b>
- *    Unlike the Atmel stack, LUFA comes with many different Device and Host mode Demos and Projects ready to run out of the box.
- *    Atmel favours separate downloads for each of their (small set) of USB AVR demos, which requires more time and offers less
- *    to the end-user. LUFA also contains several open source Bootloaders, which can be modified as the user wishes to suit his or
- *    her application, instead of being forced to use Atmel's single prebuilt (closed-source) DFU bootloader.
- *
- *  - <b>Central Library Code:</b>
- *    LUFA is designed to allow the central library core code to be shared amongst several projects, so long as the compiled object
- *    files are cleaned between different projects. This is in direct contrast to the Atmel library, which is strongly coupled to the
- *    project it is integrated with. Using LUFA allows for only one copy of the library core to be needed for all applications, and
- *    makes updating the library used in all projects a trivial copy-and-paste process.
- *
- *  - <b>Clean API:</b>
- *    One of the main design goals of LUFA is to make the API easy to use. While LUFA is a fluid project which has undergone many
- *    API improvements, the API is arguably much nicer to use and easier to understand than the equivelent Atmel stack code. LUFA's
- *    API is also more complete than the Atmel stack, and contains many features to speed up application development.
- *
- *  - <b>Full Hardware Support:</b>
- *    LUFA supports the full range of Atmel's USB AVR microcontrollers (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport), with porting between chips being
- *    as simple as a single compile switch in many cases. Atmel's stack requires different libraries to be used based on the USB AVR
- *    microcontroller series, complicating the process of moving between USB AVR models. In addition, LUFA contains drivers for all the
- *    hardware contained on Atmel's USB AVR based boards, so you can get started quickly and easily.
- *
- *  - <b>Better Library Support:</b>
- *    As many people are now using LUFA, there is a community being built around it. You can get answers to your LUFA related questions
- *    quickly by either emailing the library author (subject to author's schedule) or by posting to the official LUFA support mailing list.
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_LUFAvsAtmelStack LUFA vs the Atmel Stack
+ *
+ *  Atmel offers an official USB AVR stack, which may be incorporated into user projects and products. As LUFA and the Atmel
+ *  stack aims to give roughly the same functionality to a design, it is often asked what advantages LUFA carries over the
+ *  official Atmel USB stack. Below are just some of the advantages to choosing LUFA over the official stack.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Licensing:</b>
+ *    LUFA is released under a very permissive MIT license (see \ref Page_LicenceInfo), while the Atmel stack carries several
+ *    restrictions as to how and where it can be used. LUFA's licensing should be suitable for both Commercial and Non-Commercial
+ *    entities alike.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Demos and Projects:</b>
+ *    Unlike the Atmel stack, LUFA comes with many different Device and Host mode Demos and Projects ready to run out of the box.
+ *    Atmel favours separate downloads for each of their (small set) of USB AVR demos, which requires more time and offers less
+ *    to the end-user. LUFA also contains several open source Bootloaders, which can be modified as the user wishes to suit his or
+ *    her application, instead of being forced to use Atmel's single prebuilt (closed-source) DFU bootloader.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Central Library Code:</b>
+ *    LUFA is designed to allow the central library core code to be shared amongst several projects, so long as the compiled object
+ *    files are cleaned between different projects. This is in direct contrast to the Atmel library, which is strongly coupled to the
+ *    project it is integrated with. Using LUFA allows for only one copy of the library core to be needed for all applications, and
+ *    makes updating the library used in all projects a trivial copy-and-paste process.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Clean API:</b>
+ *    One of the main design goals of LUFA is to make the API easy to use. While LUFA is a fluid project which has undergone many
+ *    API improvements, the API is arguably much nicer to use and easier to understand than the equivelent Atmel stack code. LUFA's
+ *    API is also more complete than the Atmel stack, and contains many features to speed up application development.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Full Hardware Support:</b>
+ *    LUFA supports the full range of Atmel's USB AVR microcontrollers (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport), with porting between chips being
+ *    as simple as a single compile switch in many cases. Atmel's stack requires different libraries to be used based on the USB AVR
+ *    microcontroller series, complicating the process of moving between USB AVR models. In addition, LUFA contains drivers for all the
+ *    hardware contained on Atmel's USB AVR based boards, so you can get started quickly and easily.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Better Library Support:</b>
+ *    As many people are now using LUFA, there is a community being built around it. You can get answers to your LUFA related questions
+ *    quickly by either emailing the library author (subject to author's schedule) or by posting to the official LUFA support mailing list.
+ */
  
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/LibraryApps.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/LibraryApps.txt
index 2217740e2..2f0728127 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/LibraryApps.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/LibraryApps.txt
@@ -1,116 +1,116 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \page Page_LibraryApps Included Library Applications
- *
- *  The LUFA library ships with several different host and device demos, located in the /Demos/ subdirectory. Within this
- *  directory the demos are seperated by USB mode (Device, Host, OTG) and further seperated by the use or non-use of the
- *  library USB Class drivers (which abstract out the actual implementation of the USB classes to simplify development even
- *  further at the expense of a loss of flexibility).
- *
- *  With one or two exceptions (e.g. proprietary classes such as RNDIS) all the included demos will work across all OSes without
- *  the need for special drivers. On Windows, some demos require the supplied .INF file to be used as the device driver, which
- *  directs the OS to use its inbuilt class drivers for the device.
- *
- *  Also included with the library are three fully functional bootloaders, located in the /Bootloaders/ subdirectory.
- *  The DFU class bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP software or the open source dfu-programmer project, the
- *  CDC class (AVR109 protocol) is compatible with such open source software as AVRDUDE and AVR-OSP, and the TeensyLoader
- *  HID class bootloader is compatible with the software from PJRC (<a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html</a>).
- *
- *  User-submitted projects are located in the /Projects/ subdirectory. If you wish to have your LUFA project included,
- *  please email it to the Library author.
- *
- *  \section Sec_AppOverview Overview of Included Library Applications
- *  The following shows the folder structure of the included library applications, including demos, bootloaders and user-submitted
- *  open source projects.
- *
- *  <small>
- *
- *  - <b>Demos</b>
- *    - <b>Device</b>
- *      - <b>ClassDriver</b>
- *        - <b>AudioInput</b> - Audio In (microphone) demo, using the library USB Audio Class driver framework
- *        - <b>AudioOutput</b> - Audio Out (speaker) demo, using the library USB Audio Class driver framework
- *        - <b>DualVirtualSerial</b> - Dual Virtual Serial Port demo, using the library USB CDC Class driver framework
- *        - <b>GenericHID</b> - Generic Human Interface Class demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
- *        - <b>Joystick</b> - USB Joystick demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
- *        - <b>Keyboard</b> - USB Keyboard demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
- *        - <b>KeyboardMouse</b> - Dual Keyboard/Mouse demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
- *        - <b>MassStorage</b> - Dual Drive Mass Storage demo, using the library USB Mass Storage Class driver framework
- *        - <b>MassStorageKeyboard</b> - Mass Storage and Keyboard demo, using the library USB Mass Storage/HID Class driver frameworks
- *        - <b>MIDI</b> - MIDI In demo, using the library USB MIDI-Audio Class driver framework
- *        - <b>Mouse</b> - USB Mouse demo, using the library USB HID driver framework
- *        - <b>RNDISEthernet</b> - RNDIS Ethernet Webserver demo, using the library USB RNDIS driver framework
- *        - <b>VirtualSerial</b> - Virtual Serial Port demo, using the library USB CDC Class driver framework
- *        - <b>VirtualSerialMouse</b> - Virtual Serial Port and Mouse demo, using the library USB CDC and HID Class driver frameworks
- *      - <b>LowLevel</b>
- *        - <b>AudioInput</b> - Audio In (microphone) demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Audio class
- *        - <b>AudioOutput</b> - Audio Out (speaker) demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Audio class
- *        - <b>DualVirtualSerial</b> - Dual Virtual Serial Port demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB CDC class
- *        - <b>GenericHID</b> - Generic Human Interface Class demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
- *        - <b>Joystick</b> - USB Joystick demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
- *        - <b>Keyboard</b> - USB Keyboard demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
- *        - <b>KeyboardMouse</b> - Dual Keyboard/Mouse demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
- *        - <b>MassStorage</b> - Dual Drive Mass Storage demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Mass Storage class
- *        - <b>MIDI</b> - MIDI In demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB MIDI-Audio class
- *        - <b>Mouse</b> - USB Mouse demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
- *        - <b>RNDISEthernet</b> - RNDIS Ethernet Webserver demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB RNDIS class
- *        - <b>VirtualSerial</b> - Virtual Serial Port demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB CDC class
- *      - <b>Incomplete</b>
- *        - <b>SideShow</b> - Incomplete Windows SideShow demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB SideShow class
- *    - <b>Host</b>
- *      - <b>ClassDriver</b>
- *        - <b>JoystickHostWithParser</b> - Joystick host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
- *        - <b>KeyboardHost</b> - USB Keyboard host demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
- *        - <b>KeyboardHostWithParser</b> - USB Keyboard host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the library USB HID Class
- *                                          driver framework
- *        - <b>MassStorageHost</b> - Mass Storage host demo, using the library USB Mass Storage Class driver framework
- *        - <b>MouseHost</b> - Mouse host demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
- *        - <b>MouseHostWithParser</b> - Mouse host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
- *        - <b>RNDISHost</b> - RNDIS Ethernet host demo, using the library USB RNDIS Class driver framework
- *        - <b>StillImageHost</b> - Still Image Camera host demo, using the library USB Still Image Class driver framework
- *        - <b>VirtualSerialHost</b> - Virtual Serial Port host demo, using the library USB CDC Class driver framework
- *      - <b>LowLevel</b>
- *        - <b>JoystickHostWithParser</b> - Joystick host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement 
- *                                          the USB HID class
- *        - <b>GenericHIDHost</b> - Generic HID host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
- *        - <b>KeyboardHost</b> - USB Keyboard host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
- *        - <b>KeyboardHostWithParser</b> - USB Keyboard host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the low level LUFA APIs to
- *                                          implement the USB HID class
- *        - <b>MassStorageHost</b> - Mass Storage host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Mass Storage class
- *        - <b>MouseHost</b> - Mouse host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
- *        - <b>MouseHostWithParser</b> - Mouse host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the
- *                                       USB HID class
- *        - <b>PrinterHost</b> - Printer host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Printer class
- *        - <b>RNDISHost</b> - RNDIS Ethernet host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the RNDIS class
- *        - <b>StillImageHost</b> - Still Image Camera host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Still Image class
- *        - <b>VirtualSerialHost</b> - Virtual Serial Port host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB CDC class
- *      - <b>Incomplete</b>
- *        - <b>BluetoothHost</b> - Incomplete Bluetooth host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Bluetooth class
- *    - <b>DualRole</b>
- *      - <b>ClassDriver</b>
- *        - <b>MouseHostDevice</b> - Dual role Mouse Host and Mouse Device demo, using the library USB CDC Class driver framework
- *  - <b>Bootloaders</b>
- *    - <b>DFU</b> - DFU Class USB bootloader, compatible with Atmel's FLIP and the open source dfu-programmer software
- *    - <b>CDC</b> - CDC Class USB bootloader, compatible with any AVR910 protocol programming software such as AVRDude
- *    - <b>TeensyHID</b> - HID Class bootloader, compatible with the PJRC TeensyLoader software
- *  - <b>Projects</b>
- *    - <b>AVRISP-MKII</b> - AVRISP-MKII Programmer Clone project
- *    - <b>Benito</b> - Benito Board Arduino Programmer project
- *    - <b>LEDNotifier</b> - USB LED Notification project
- *    - <b>Magstripe</b> - Magnetic Stripe Card Reader project
- *    - <b>MissileLaucher</b> - Toy Missile Launcher Host project
- *    - <b>RelayBoard</b> - Relay board controller, controllable via the "sismpctl" Linux application
- *    - <b>TemperatureDataLogger</b> - Temperature Datalogging project, using the FatFS library
- *    - <b>USBtoSerial</b> - USB to USART Serial Converter project
- *    - <b>Webserver</b> - RNDIS Host Webserver with DHCP client, powered by uIP TCP/IP stack project and FatFS library
- *    - <b>XPLAINBridge</b> - XPLAIN alternative PDI Programmer/USB to Serial Bridge firmware project
- *    - <b>Incomplete</b>
- *      - <b>MIDIToneGenerator</b> - Incomplete MIDI Tone Generator application, to convert MIDI note messages into audio tones
- *      - <b>StandaloneProgrammer</b> - Incomplete Standalone AVR Programmer application, to program AVRs directly from a Mass Storage disk
- *
- *  </small>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_LibraryApps Included Library Applications
+ *
+ *  The LUFA library ships with several different host and device demos, located in the /Demos/ subdirectory. Within this
+ *  directory the demos are seperated by USB mode (Device, Host, OTG) and further seperated by the use or non-use of the
+ *  library USB Class drivers (which abstract out the actual implementation of the USB classes to simplify development even
+ *  further at the expense of a loss of flexibility).
+ *
+ *  With one or two exceptions (e.g. proprietary classes such as RNDIS) all the included demos will work across all OSes without
+ *  the need for special drivers. On Windows, some demos require the supplied .INF file to be used as the device driver, which
+ *  directs the OS to use its inbuilt class drivers for the device.
+ *
+ *  Also included with the library are three fully functional bootloaders, located in the /Bootloaders/ subdirectory.
+ *  The DFU class bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP software or the open source dfu-programmer project, the
+ *  CDC class (AVR109 protocol) is compatible with such open source software as AVRDUDE and AVR-OSP, and the TeensyLoader
+ *  HID class bootloader is compatible with the software from PJRC (<a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html</a>).
+ *
+ *  User-submitted projects are located in the /Projects/ subdirectory. If you wish to have your LUFA project included,
+ *  please email it to the Library author.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_AppOverview Overview of Included Library Applications
+ *  The following shows the folder structure of the included library applications, including demos, bootloaders and user-submitted
+ *  open source projects.
+ *
+ *  <small>
+ *
+ *  - <b>Demos</b>
+ *    - <b>Device</b>
+ *      - <b>ClassDriver</b>
+ *        - <b>AudioInput</b> - Audio In (microphone) demo, using the library USB Audio Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>AudioOutput</b> - Audio Out (speaker) demo, using the library USB Audio Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>DualVirtualSerial</b> - Dual Virtual Serial Port demo, using the library USB CDC Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>GenericHID</b> - Generic Human Interface Class demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>Joystick</b> - USB Joystick demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>Keyboard</b> - USB Keyboard demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>KeyboardMouse</b> - Dual Keyboard/Mouse demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>MassStorage</b> - Dual Drive Mass Storage demo, using the library USB Mass Storage Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>MassStorageKeyboard</b> - Mass Storage and Keyboard demo, using the library USB Mass Storage/HID Class driver frameworks
+ *        - <b>MIDI</b> - MIDI In demo, using the library USB MIDI-Audio Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>Mouse</b> - USB Mouse demo, using the library USB HID driver framework
+ *        - <b>RNDISEthernet</b> - RNDIS Ethernet Webserver demo, using the library USB RNDIS driver framework
+ *        - <b>VirtualSerial</b> - Virtual Serial Port demo, using the library USB CDC Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>VirtualSerialMouse</b> - Virtual Serial Port and Mouse demo, using the library USB CDC and HID Class driver frameworks
+ *      - <b>LowLevel</b>
+ *        - <b>AudioInput</b> - Audio In (microphone) demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Audio class
+ *        - <b>AudioOutput</b> - Audio Out (speaker) demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Audio class
+ *        - <b>DualVirtualSerial</b> - Dual Virtual Serial Port demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB CDC class
+ *        - <b>GenericHID</b> - Generic Human Interface Class demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
+ *        - <b>Joystick</b> - USB Joystick demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
+ *        - <b>Keyboard</b> - USB Keyboard demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
+ *        - <b>KeyboardMouse</b> - Dual Keyboard/Mouse demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
+ *        - <b>MassStorage</b> - Dual Drive Mass Storage demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Mass Storage class
+ *        - <b>MIDI</b> - MIDI In demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB MIDI-Audio class
+ *        - <b>Mouse</b> - USB Mouse demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
+ *        - <b>RNDISEthernet</b> - RNDIS Ethernet Webserver demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB RNDIS class
+ *        - <b>VirtualSerial</b> - Virtual Serial Port demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB CDC class
+ *      - <b>Incomplete</b>
+ *        - <b>SideShow</b> - Incomplete Windows SideShow demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB SideShow class
+ *    - <b>Host</b>
+ *      - <b>ClassDriver</b>
+ *        - <b>JoystickHostWithParser</b> - Joystick host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>KeyboardHost</b> - USB Keyboard host demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>KeyboardHostWithParser</b> - USB Keyboard host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the library USB HID Class
+ *                                          driver framework
+ *        - <b>MassStorageHost</b> - Mass Storage host demo, using the library USB Mass Storage Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>MouseHost</b> - Mouse host demo, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>MouseHostWithParser</b> - Mouse host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the library USB HID Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>RNDISHost</b> - RNDIS Ethernet host demo, using the library USB RNDIS Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>StillImageHost</b> - Still Image Camera host demo, using the library USB Still Image Class driver framework
+ *        - <b>VirtualSerialHost</b> - Virtual Serial Port host demo, using the library USB CDC Class driver framework
+ *      - <b>LowLevel</b>
+ *        - <b>JoystickHostWithParser</b> - Joystick host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement 
+ *                                          the USB HID class
+ *        - <b>GenericHIDHost</b> - Generic HID host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
+ *        - <b>KeyboardHost</b> - USB Keyboard host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
+ *        - <b>KeyboardHostWithParser</b> - USB Keyboard host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the low level LUFA APIs to
+ *                                          implement the USB HID class
+ *        - <b>MassStorageHost</b> - Mass Storage host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Mass Storage class
+ *        - <b>MouseHost</b> - Mouse host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB HID class
+ *        - <b>MouseHostWithParser</b> - Mouse host demo with HID Descriptor parser, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the
+ *                                       USB HID class
+ *        - <b>PrinterHost</b> - Printer host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Printer class
+ *        - <b>RNDISHost</b> - RNDIS Ethernet host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the RNDIS class
+ *        - <b>StillImageHost</b> - Still Image Camera host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Still Image class
+ *        - <b>VirtualSerialHost</b> - Virtual Serial Port host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB CDC class
+ *      - <b>Incomplete</b>
+ *        - <b>BluetoothHost</b> - Incomplete Bluetooth host demo, using the low level LUFA APIs to implement the USB Bluetooth class
+ *    - <b>DualRole</b>
+ *      - <b>ClassDriver</b>
+ *        - <b>MouseHostDevice</b> - Dual role Mouse Host and Mouse Device demo, using the library USB CDC Class driver framework
+ *  - <b>Bootloaders</b>
+ *    - <b>DFU</b> - DFU Class USB bootloader, compatible with Atmel's FLIP and the open source dfu-programmer software
+ *    - <b>CDC</b> - CDC Class USB bootloader, compatible with any AVR910 protocol programming software such as AVRDude
+ *    - <b>TeensyHID</b> - HID Class bootloader, compatible with the PJRC TeensyLoader software
+ *  - <b>Projects</b>
+ *    - <b>AVRISP-MKII</b> - AVRISP-MKII Programmer Clone project
+ *    - <b>Benito</b> - Benito Board Arduino Programmer project
+ *    - <b>LEDNotifier</b> - USB LED Notification project
+ *    - <b>Magstripe</b> - Magnetic Stripe Card Reader project
+ *    - <b>MissileLaucher</b> - Toy Missile Launcher Host project
+ *    - <b>RelayBoard</b> - Relay board controller, controllable via the "sismpctl" Linux application
+ *    - <b>TemperatureDataLogger</b> - Temperature Datalogging project, using the FatFS library
+ *    - <b>USBtoSerial</b> - USB to USART Serial Converter project
+ *    - <b>Webserver</b> - RNDIS Host Webserver with DHCP client, powered by uIP TCP/IP stack project and FatFS library
+ *    - <b>XPLAINBridge</b> - XPLAIN alternative PDI Programmer/USB to Serial Bridge firmware project
+ *    - <b>Incomplete</b>
+ *      - <b>MIDIToneGenerator</b> - Incomplete MIDI Tone Generator application, to convert MIDI note messages into audio tones
+ *      - <b>StandaloneProgrammer</b> - Incomplete Standalone AVR Programmer application, to program AVRs directly from a Mass Storage disk
+ *
+ *  </small>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/LibraryResources.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/LibraryResources.txt
index f189d0a97..4ccdf1e37 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/LibraryResources.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/LibraryResources.txt
@@ -1,34 +1,34 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/**
- *  \page Page_Resources Library Resources
- *
- *  \section Sec_ProjectPages LUFA Related Webpages
- *  Project Homepage: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php \n
- *  Author's Website: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com \n
- *  Development Blog: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/blog \n
- *  Commercial Licences: http://fourwalledcubicle.com/PurchaseLUFA.php \n
- *
- *  \section Sec_ProjectHelp Assistance With LUFA
- *  Discussion Group: http://groups.google.com/group/myusb-support-list \n
- *  Author's Email: dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- *  Author's Skype: abcminiuser
- *
- *  \section Sec_InDevelopment Latest In-Development Source Code
- *  Official Releases, SVN Access, Issue Tracker: http://code.google.com/p/lufa-lib/ \n
- *  Git Access: http://github.com/abcminiuser/lufa-lib \n
- *  Development Source Archives: http://github.com/abcminiuser/lufa-lib/archives/master \n
- *  Commit RSS Feed: http://github.com/feeds/abcminiuser/commits/lufa-lib/master \n
- *
- *  \section Sec_Toolchain AVR Toolchain
- *  WinAVR Website: http://winavr.sourceforge.net \n
- *  avr-libc Website: http://www.nongnu.org/avr-libc/ \n
- *
- *  \section Sec_USBResources USB Resources
- *  USB-IF Website: http://www.usb.org \n
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/**
+ *  \page Page_Resources Library Resources
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ProjectPages LUFA Related Webpages
+ *  Project Homepage: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php \n
+ *  Author's Website: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com \n
+ *  Development Blog: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/blog \n
+ *  Commercial Licences: http://fourwalledcubicle.com/PurchaseLUFA.php \n
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ProjectHelp Assistance With LUFA
+ *  Discussion Group: http://groups.google.com/group/myusb-support-list \n
+ *  Author's Email: dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ *  Author's Skype: abcminiuser
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_InDevelopment Latest In-Development Source Code
+ *  Official Releases, SVN Access, Issue Tracker: http://code.google.com/p/lufa-lib/ \n
+ *  Git Access: http://github.com/abcminiuser/lufa-lib \n
+ *  Development Source Archives: http://github.com/abcminiuser/lufa-lib/archives/master \n
+ *  Commit RSS Feed: http://github.com/feeds/abcminiuser/commits/lufa-lib/master \n
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Toolchain AVR Toolchain
+ *  WinAVR Website: http://winavr.sourceforge.net \n
+ *  avr-libc Website: http://www.nongnu.org/avr-libc/ \n
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBResources USB Resources
+ *  USB-IF Website: http://www.usb.org \n
+ */
  
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/LicenceInfo.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/LicenceInfo.txt
index f105db7dc..3dd1d0918 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/LicenceInfo.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/LicenceInfo.txt
@@ -1,20 +1,20 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/**
- *  \page Page_LicenceInfo Source Code Licence
- *
- *  The LUFA library is currently released under the MIT licence, included below.
- *
- *  Commercial entities can opt out of the public disclosure clause in this license
- *  for a one-time US$1500 payment. This provides a non-exclusive modified MIT licensed which
- *  allows for the free use of the LUFA library, bootloaders and (where the sole copyright
- *  is attributed to Dean Camera) demos without public disclosure within an organisation, in
- *  addition to three free hours of consultation with the library author, and priority support.
- *  Please contact the author for more information via the address shown on on \ref Page_Resources.
- *
- *  \verbinclude License.txt
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_LicenceInfo Source Code Licence
+ *
+ *  The LUFA library is currently released under the MIT licence, included below.
+ *
+ *  Commercial entities can opt out of the public disclosure clause in this license
+ *  for a one-time US$1500 payment. This provides a non-exclusive modified MIT licensed which
+ *  allows for the free use of the LUFA library, bootloaders and (where the sole copyright
+ *  is attributed to Dean Camera) demos without public disclosure within an organisation, in
+ *  addition to three free hours of consultation with the library author, and priority support.
+ *  Please contact the author for more information via the address shown on on \ref Page_Resources.
+ *
+ *  \verbinclude License.txt
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/MainPage.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/MainPage.txt
index c67ba6483..e1fe98341 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/MainPage.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/MainPage.txt
@@ -1,45 +1,45 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/**
- *  \mainpage
- *
- *  \image html LUFA.png
- *  <div align="center"><small><i>Logo design by <b>Ryo</b> - http://ryophotography.wordpress.com</i></small></div>
- *  \n
- *
- *  <b>LUFA is donationware. For author and donation information, see \ref Page_Donating.</b>
- *
- *  LUFA is an open-source USB library for the USB-enabled AVR microcontrollers, released under the MIT license (see \ref Page_LicenceInfo).
- *  It supports a large number of USB AVR models and boards (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport). It is designed to provide an easy to use,
- *  feature rich framework for the development of USB peripherals and hosts.
- *
- *  LUFA focuses on the microcontroller side of USB development only; it includes no PC host USB driver development facilities - other projects
- *  such as the Windows Driver Development Kit, Windows USB Device Mode Framework and libusb may be of interest for developing custom OS drivers.
- *  While custom USB devices can be made with LUFA using such tools, the included demos all use the inbuilt OS drivers for each USB class for
- *  simplicity.
- *
- *  The library is currently in a stable release, suitable for download and incorporation into user projects for
- *  both host and device modes. For information about the project progression, see the blog link at \ref Page_Resources.
- *
- *  LUFA is written specifically for the free AVR-GCC compiler, and uses several GCC-only extensions to make the
- *  library API more streamlined and robust. You can download AVR-GCC for free in a convenient windows package, 
- *  from the the WinAVR website (see \ref Page_Resources).
- *
- *  The only required AVR peripherals for LUFA is the USB controller itself and interrupts - LUFA does not require the use of the
- *  microcontroller's timers or other hardware, leaving more hardware to the application developer.
- *
- *  Accompanying LUFA in the download package is a set of example demo applications, plus several Bootloaders of different classes
- *  and open source LUFA powered projects.
- *
- *  <b>Subsections:</b>
- *  - \subpage Page_WhyUseLUFA What are the advantages of using LUFA?
- *  - \subpage Page_LUFAvsAtmelStack How does LUFA compare to the Atmel USB AVR stack?
- *  - \subpage Page_AlternativeStacks Alternative USB AVR Stacks
- *  - \subpage Page_LicenceInfo Project source licence and commercial use information
- *  - \subpage Page_Donating Donating to support this project
- *  - \subpage Page_LibraryApps Overview of included Demos, Bootloaders and Projects
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \mainpage
+ *
+ *  \image html LUFA.png
+ *  <div align="center"><small><i>Logo design by <b>Ryo</b> - http://ryophotography.wordpress.com</i></small></div>
+ *  \n
+ *
+ *  <b>LUFA is donationware. For author and donation information, see \ref Page_Donating.</b>
+ *
+ *  LUFA is an open-source USB library for the USB-enabled AVR microcontrollers, released under the MIT license (see \ref Page_LicenceInfo).
+ *  It supports a large number of USB AVR models and boards (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport). It is designed to provide an easy to use,
+ *  feature rich framework for the development of USB peripherals and hosts.
+ *
+ *  LUFA focuses on the microcontroller side of USB development only; it includes no PC host USB driver development facilities - other projects
+ *  such as the Windows Driver Development Kit, Windows USB Device Mode Framework and libusb may be of interest for developing custom OS drivers.
+ *  While custom USB devices can be made with LUFA using such tools, the included demos all use the inbuilt OS drivers for each USB class for
+ *  simplicity.
+ *
+ *  The library is currently in a stable release, suitable for download and incorporation into user projects for
+ *  both host and device modes. For information about the project progression, see the blog link at \ref Page_Resources.
+ *
+ *  LUFA is written specifically for the free AVR-GCC compiler, and uses several GCC-only extensions to make the
+ *  library API more streamlined and robust. You can download AVR-GCC for free in a convenient windows package, 
+ *  from the the WinAVR website (see \ref Page_Resources).
+ *
+ *  The only required AVR peripherals for LUFA is the USB controller itself and interrupts - LUFA does not require the use of the
+ *  microcontroller's timers or other hardware, leaving more hardware to the application developer.
+ *
+ *  Accompanying LUFA in the download package is a set of example demo applications, plus several Bootloaders of different classes
+ *  and open source LUFA powered projects.
+ *
+ *  <b>Subsections:</b>
+ *  - \subpage Page_WhyUseLUFA What are the advantages of using LUFA?
+ *  - \subpage Page_LUFAvsAtmelStack How does LUFA compare to the Atmel USB AVR stack?
+ *  - \subpage Page_AlternativeStacks Alternative USB AVR Stacks
+ *  - \subpage Page_LicenceInfo Project source licence and commercial use information
+ *  - \subpage Page_Donating Donating to support this project
+ *  - \subpage Page_LibraryApps Overview of included Demos, Bootloaders and Projects
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/MigrationInformation.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/MigrationInformation.txt
index 11dd346e4..8db33b401 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/MigrationInformation.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/MigrationInformation.txt
@@ -1,491 +1,491 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \page Page_Migration Migrating from Older Versions
- *
- *  Below is migration information for updating existing projects based on previous versions of the LUFA library
- *  to the next version released. It does not indicate all new additions to the library in each version change, only
- *  areas relevant to making older projects compatible with the API changes of each new release.
- *
- * \section Sec_MigrationXXXXXX Migrating from 100219 to XXXXXX
- *
- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
- *    - The \ref TWI_StartTransmission() function now takes in a timeout period, expressed in milliseconds, within which the addressed
- *      device must respond or the function will abort.
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The \ref USB_Init() function no longer calls sei() to enable global interrupts, as the user application may need
- *      to perform other initialization before it is ready to handle global interrupts. The user application is now responsible
- *      for enabling global interrupts before or shortly after calling \ref USB_Init() to ensure that the enumeration process
- *      functions correctly.
- *    - The USBInterrupt.c USB driver source file has been relocated from LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ to LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel.
- *      Projects must update their makefile SRC values accordingly.
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The \ref USB_Init() function no longer calls sei() to enable global interrupts, as the user application may need
- *      to perform other initialization before it is ready to handle global interrupts. The user application is now responsible
- *      for enabling global interrupts before or shortly after calling \ref USB_Init() to ensure that the enumeration process
- *      functions correctly.
- *    - The USBInterrupt.c USB driver source file has been relocated from LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ to LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel.
- *      Projects must update their makefile SRC values accordingly.
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration100219 Migrating from 091223 to 100219
- *
- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
- *    - Due to some ADC channels not being identical to their ADC MUX selection masks for single-ended conversions on some AVR models,
- *      the ADC driver now has explicit masks for each of the standard ADC channels (see \ref Group_ADC). These masks should be used 
- *      when calling the ADC functions to ensure proper operation across all AVR models. Note that the \ref ADC_SetupChannel() function 
- *      is an exception, and should always be called with a channel number rather than a channel mask.
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The MIDI Host Class driver send and receive routines now operate on packed events, where multiple MIDI events may be
- *      packed into a single USB packet. This means that the sending of MIDI events will now be delayed until the MIDI send
- *      pipe bank is full. To override this new behaviour and revert to the previous behaviour, the user application may manually
- *      flush the queued event(s) to the device by calling \ref MIDI_Host_Flush().
- *    - The Pipe_IsEndpointBound() function now takes the endpoint's direction into account, by checking if the MSB of the endpoint's address
- *      is set to denote IN endpoints. If the previous functionality where the direction is to be discounted is required, mask the endpoint
- *      address against the \ref PIPE_EPNUM_MASK token before calling Pipe_IsEndpointBound().
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The MIDI Device Class driver send and receive routines now operate on packed events, where multiple MIDI events may be
- *      packed into a single USB packet. This means that the sending of MIDI events will now be delayed until the MIDI send
- *      endpoint bank is full. To override this new behaviour and revert to the previous behaviour, the user application may manually
- *      flush the queued event(s) to the host by calling \ref MIDI_Device_Flush().
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration091223 Migrating from 091122 to 091223
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The Still Image Host Class driver SI_Host_USBTask() and SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() functions were misnamed, and are
- *      now named \ref SImage_Host_USBTask() and \ref SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes() respectively.
- *    - The HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnect enum value has been renamed to \ref HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected to be in
- *      line with the rest of the library error codes.
- *    - The HID Parser item usages no longer contain seperate minimum and maximum values, as this was a violation of the HID
- *      specification. Instead, the values are distributed evenly across each item as its usage value, to ensure that all items
- *      can be distinguished from oneanother.
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() HID Device Class driver callback now has a new ReportType parameter to
- *      indicate the report type to generate. Existing applications may simply add and ignore this additional parameter.
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration091122 Migrating from 090924 to 091122
- *  
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The HID_PARSE_UsageStackOverflow HID parser error constant is now named \ref HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow
- *    - The \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() HID Parser callback now passes a complete HID_ReportItem_t to the
- *      user application, instead of just its attributes.
- *    - The USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function was incorrectly named and is now called \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor().
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration090924 Migrating from 090810 to 090924
- *
- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
- *    - The ADC_Off() function has been renamed to \ref ADC_ShutDown() to be consistent with the rest of the library.
- *    - The \ref SPI_Init() routine's parameters have changed, so that the clock polarity and data sampling modes can be set. See
- *      the \ref SPI_Init() function documentation for more details
- *    - The \ref Dataflash_Init() routine no longer initializes the SPI bus - the SPI bus should be initialized manually via a
- *      call to SPI_Init() before using the Dataflash driver
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function's parameters and behaviour has changed; the user is required to
- *      preallocate the largest allowable buffer, and pass the size of the buffer to the function. This allows for a single
- *      call to the function to retrieve, size check and validate the Configuration Descriptor rather than having the user
- *      application perform these intermediatary steps.
- *    - The HID report parser now requires a mandatory callback in the user code, to filter only the items the application
- *      is interested in into the processed HID report item structure to save RAM. See \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem().
- *    - The HID report parser now always parses FEATURE and always ignores constant-data items - the HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING
- *      and HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS compile time tokens now have no effect.
- *    - The USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now seperate USB_Descriptor_*
- *      and USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so that both may be used in
- *      the one project. For existing projects using the standardized names, change all code to use the USB_StdDescriptor_* variants.
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now seperate USB_Descriptor_*
- *      and USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so that both may be used in
- *      the one project. For existing projects using the standardized names, change all code to use the USB_StdDescriptor_* variants.
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration090810 Migrating from 090605 to 090810
- *
- *  <b>All</b>
- *    - The "Simple Scheduler" has been <i>deprecated</i>, as it was little more than an abtracted loop and caused much confusion.
- *      User applications using the scheduler should switch to regular loops instead. The scheduler code will be removed in a future
- *      release.
- *    - The "Dynamic Memory Block Allocator" has been removed, as it was unused in (and unrelated to) the LUFA library and never
- *      used in user applications. The library is available from the author's website for those wishing to still use it in their
- *      applications.
- *
- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
- *    - The ATTR_NOINLINE function attribute macro has been renamed to ATTR_NO_INLINE to be in line with the rest of the function attribute
- *      macro names.
- *
- *  <b>Library Demos</b>
- *    - Most demos now have a corresponding Class Driver implementation, which uses the new internal library class drivers for the standard
- *      USB classes. This allows for more rapid device and host development, and so should be used in preference to the low level APIs where
- *      possible so that fixes to the class drivers propagate to all applications which use them automatically with each new LUFA release.
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The HIDParser.c module has moved from LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ to LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/.
- *    - The USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function now requires the desired configuration index within the device as its first
- *      parameter, to add support for multi-configuration devices. Existing code should use a configuration index of 1 to indicate the
- *      first configuration descriptor within the device.
- *    - The non-standard "Ready" host state has been removed. Existing \ref HOST_STATE_Configured code should be moved to the end of
- *      the existing \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed state, and the existing HOST_STATE_Ready state code should be moved to the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured
- *      state.
- *    - The USB_IsConnected global has been removed, as it is too vague for general use. Test \ref USB_HostState explicitly to ensure the host is
- *      in the desired state instead.
- *    - The USB event names have been changed and their firing conditions changed to properly seperate out Host mode events from Device mode
- *      events. See the \ref Group_Events page for details on the new event names and firing conditions.
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function now takes an extra parameter to specify the descriptor's memory space so that
- *      descriptors in mixed memory spaces can be used. The previous functionality can be returned by defining the USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
- *      token in the project makefile to fix all descriptors into FLASH space and remove the extra function parameter.
- *    - The USB_IsSuspended global has been removed - test \ref USB_DeviceState against \ref DEVICE_STATE_Suspended instead.
- *    - The USB_IsConnected global has been removed, as it is too vague for general use. Test \ref USB_DeviceState explicitly to ensure the device
- *      is in the desired state instead.
- *    - The VBUS events have been removed, as they are already exposed to the user via the USB_Connect and USB_Disconnect events.
- *    - The USB event names have been changed and their firing conditions changed to properly seperate out Host mode events from Device mode
- *      events. See the \ref Group_Events page for details on the new event names and firing conditions. *
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration090605 Migrating from 090510 to 090605
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - Support for non-control data endpoint interrupts has been dropped due to many issues in the implementation. All existing
- *      projects using interrupts on non-control endpoints should switch to polling. For control interrupts, the library can
- *      manage the control endpoint via interrupts automatically by compiling with the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token defined.
- *    - The DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS() macro has been removed. User applications should use normal casts to obtain a descriptor's memory
- *      address.
- *    - The library events system has been rewritten, so that all macros have been removed to allow for clearer user code. See
- *      \ref Group_Events for new API details.
- *    - The STREAM_CALLBACK() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with regular
- *      function signatures of a function accepting no arguments and returning a uint8_t value.
- *    - The Event_DeviceError() event no longer exists, as its sole caller (unlinked USB_GetDescriptor() function) now produces a
- *      compilation error rather than a runtime error. The StdDescriptors.c file no longer exists as a result, and should be removed
- *      from project makefiles.
- *    - The USB_GetDescriptor() function has been renamed to CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() to be in line with the new CALLBACK_ function
- *      prefixes for functions which *must* be implemented in the user application.
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - Support for non-control data pipe interrupts has been dropped due to many issues in the implementation. All existing
- *      projects using interrupts on non-control pipes should switch to polling.
- *    - The library events system has been rewritten, so that all macros have been removed to allow for clearer user code. See
- *      \ref Group_Events for new API details.
- *    - The STREAM_CALLBACK() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with regular
- *      function signatures of a function accepting no arguments and returning a uint8_t value.
- *    - The DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with
- *      regular function signatures of a function accepting a void pointer to the descriptor to test, and returning a uint8_t value.
- *
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration090510 Migrating from 090401 to 090510
- *
- *  <b>All</b>
- *    - The ButtLoadTag.h header has been removed, as it was never used for its intended purpose. Projects should either remove all
- *      BUTTLOADTAG elements, or download and extract ButtLoadTag.h header from the ButtLoad project.
- *    - The Drivers/AT90USBXXX directory has been renamed to Drivers/Peripheral.
- *    - The Serial_Stream driver has been renamed to SerialStream to remain consistent with the rest of the library naming scheme.
- *    - The HWB driver has changed to the Buttons driver. See the board Buttons driver documentation for the new API.
- *
- *  <b>Dual Role Mode</b>
- *    - The USB_PowerOnFail even has been renamed to USB_InitFailure.
- *    - The functions in OTG.h have been renamed to remain more consistent with the library API. See the functions in OTG.h for more
- *      details.
- *
- *  <b>Library Demos</b>
- *    - Most demos, bootloaders and applications have had significant changes from previous versions. Applications built off of any
- *      library demos should update to the latest versions.
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() macro has been removed, and is now replaced with the Endpoint_ClearIN(), Endpoint_ClearOUT() 
- *      macros. See Endpoint.h documentation for more details on the new endpoint management macros.
- *    - The Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() macro has been renamed to Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed() to be more consistent with the rest of
- *      the API naming scheme.
- *    - The Endpoint_IsSetupINReady() and Endpoint_IsSetupOutReceived() macros have been renamed to Endpoint_IsINReady() and
- *      Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() respectively.
- *    - The Endpoint_IsSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived().
- *    - The Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to Endpoint_ClearSETUP().
- *    - All endpoint read/write/discard aliases which did not have an explicitly endianness specifier (such as Endpoint_Read_Word()) have
- *      been removed for clarity. Existing projects should use the "_LE" suffix on such calls to use the explicit Little Endian versions.
- *    - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event no longer has any parameters. User code should no longer attempt to read in the remainder of
- *      the Control Request header as all Control Request header data is now preloaded by the library and made available in the
- *      USB_ControlRequest structure.
- *    - The FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE token has been renamed to CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE.
- *    - The STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION is no longer applicable as the library will apply this optimization when appropriate automatically.
- *    - The values of the Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t and Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enums have had the "ERROR_" portion
- *      of their names removed.
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function no longer automatically selects the Control pipe (pipe 0) to allow it to be used on
- *      other control type pipes. Care should be taken to ensure that the Control pipe is always selected before the function is called
- *      in existing projects where the Control pipe is to be operated on.
- *    - The USB Host management task now saves and restores the currently selected pipe before and after the task runs. Projects no longer
- *      need to manage this manually when calling the USB management task.
- *    - The Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() macro has been removed, and is now replaced with the Pipe_ClearIN(), Pipe_ClearOUT() macros. See
- *      Pipe.h documentation for more details on the new pipe management macros.
- *    - The Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed() macro has been renamed to Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed() to be more consistent with the rest of the API
- *      naming scheme.
- *    - The Pipe_IsSetupINReceived() and Pipe_IsOutReady() macros have been renamed to Pipe_IsINReceived() and Pipe_IsOUTReady()
- *      respectively.
- *    - The new Pipe_ClearSETUP() macro should be used to send SETUP transactions, rather than the previous Pipe_ClearSetupOUT() macro.
- *    - The Pipe_IsSetupSent() macro has been renamed to Pipe_IsSETUPSent().
- *    - The Pipe_ClearSetupSent() macro is no longer applicable and should be removed.
- *    - All pipe read/write/discard aliases which did not have an explicitly endianness specifier (such as Pipe_Read_Word()) have
- *      been removed for clarity. Existing projects should use the "_LE" suffix on such calls to use the explicit Little Endian versions.
- *    - The Host_IsResetBusDone() macro has been renamed to Host_IsBusResetComplete().
- *    - The Pipe_Ignore_Word() and Pipe_Ignore_DWord() functions have been renamed to Pipe_Discard_Word() and Pipe_Discard_DWord() to remain
- *      consistent with the rest of the pipe API.
- *    - It is no longer needed to manually include the headers from LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class, as they are now included along with the rest
- *      of the USB headers when LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h is included.
- *    - Functions in the ConfigDescriptor.h header file no longer have "Host_" as part of their names.
- *    - The ProcessHIDReport() has been renamed to USB_ProcessHIDReport(), GetReportItemInfo() has been renamed to USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo()
- *      and SetReportItemInfo() has been renamed to USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo().
- *    - The values of the DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t and DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enums have had their respective "Descriptor_Search"
- *      and "Descriptor_Search_Comp" prefixes changed to all caps.
- *    - The USB_HostRequest global has been renamed to USB_ControlRequest, and is used in Device mode also. The USB_Host_Request_Header_t
- *      structure type has been renamed to USB_Request_Header_t.
- *    - The values of the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum have had the "ERROR_" portion of their names removed.
- *
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration090401 Migrating from 090209 to 090401
- *
- *  <b>All</b>
- *    - LUFA projects must now give the raw input clock frequency (before any prescaling) as a compile time constant "F_CLOCK",
- *      defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler via the -D switch.
- *    - The makefile EEPROM programming targets for FLIP and dfu-programmer no longer program in the FLASH data in addition to the
- *      EEPROM data into the device. If both are to be programmed, both the EEPROM and FLASH programming targets must be called.
- *    - As the avr-libc macro has been corrected in recent avr-libc distributions, the SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro has been removed.
- *      Include <avr/power.h> and call clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); instead on recent avr-libc distributions.
- *
- *  <b>Library Demos</b>
- *    - The USBtoSerial demo now discards all data when not connected to a host, rather than buffering it for later transmission.
- *    - Most demos, bootloaders and applications have had their control request handling code corrected, to properly send the status
- *      stage in all handled requests. If you are using code based off one of the library demos, bootloaders or applications, you should
- *      update to the latest revisions.
- *
- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
- *    - The ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE function attribute macro has been renamed to ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE.
- *    - Custom board Dataflash drivers now require the implementation of Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage() and Dataflash_SendAddressBytes().
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token has been renamed to FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE, and its function expanded
- *      to also remove parts of the Get Status chapter 9 request to further reduce code usage. On all applications currently using the 
- *      NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token, it can be replaced with the FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE token with no further
- *      modifications required.
- *
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration090209 Migrating from 081217 to 090209
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINTS constant has been renamed to the more appropriate name of ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS.
- *    - The USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS stream timeout default period has been extended to 100ms. This can be overridden in the user
- *      makefile if desired to restore the previous 50ms timeout.
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The PIPE_MAX_ENDPOINTS constant has been renamed to the more appropriate name of PIPE_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS.
- *    - The USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS stream timeout default period has been extended to 100ms. This can be overridden in the user
- *      makefile if desired to restore the previous 50ms timeout.
- *    - The USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event now contains a second "SubErrorCode" parameter, giving the error code of the function
- *      which failed.
- *    - The HID_PARSE_Sucessful enum member constant has been corrected to HID_PARSE_Successful.
- *
- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
- *    - The previous SPI_SendByte() functionality is now located in SPI_TransferByte(). SPI_SendByte() now discards the return byte
- *      for speed, to compliment the new SPI_ReceiveByte() function. If two-way SPI transfers are required, calls to SPI_SendByte()
- *      should be changed to SPI_TransferByte().
- *    - The serial driver now sets the Tx line as an output explicitly, and enables the pullup of the Rx line.
- *    - The Serial_Init() and SerialStream_Init() functions now take a second DoubleSpeed parameter, which indicates if the USART
- *      should be initialized in double speed mode - useful in some circumstances for attaining baud rates not usually possible at
- *      the given AVR clock speed.
- *
- *  <b>Library Demos</b>
- *    - Most library demos have been enhanced and/or had errors corrected. All users of all demos should upgrade their codebase to
- *      the latest demo versions.
- *
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration171208 Migrating from V1.5.3 to 081217
- *
- *  <b>All</b>
- *    - The MyUSB project name has been changed to LUFA (Lightweight Framework for USB AVRs). All references to MyUSB, including macro names,
- *      have been changed to LUFA.
- *
- *  <b>Library Demos</b>
- *    - The ReconfigureUSART() routine in the USBtoSerial demo was not being called after new line encoding
- *      parameters were set by the host. Projects built on the USBtoSerial code should update to the latest version.
- *    - The HID Parser now supports multiple report (on a single endpoint) HID devices. The MouseHostWithParser and
- *      KeyboardHostWithPaser demos use the updated API functions to function correctly on such devices. Projects
- *      built on either "WithParser" demo should update to the latest code.
- *    - The RNDIS demo TCP stack has been modified so that connections can be properly closed. It is still not
- *      recommended that the MyUSB RNDIS demo TCP/IP stack be used for anything other than demonstration purposes,
- *      as it is neither a full nor a standards compliant implementation.
- *
- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
- *    - The Serial_IsCharReceived() macro has been changed to the correct spelling of Serial_IsCharReceived() in Serial.h.
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token has been removed, and replaced with a USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL mask
- *      to be used in the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function.
- *    - Calling USB_Init() now forces a complete USB interface reset and enumeration, even if the USB interface is
- *      currently initialized.
- *    - Interrupts are now disabled when processing control requests, to avoid problems with interrupts causing the library
- *      or user request processing code to exceed the strict USB timing requirements on control transfers.
- *    - The USB Reset event now resets and disables all device endpoints. If user code depends on endpoints remaining configured
- *      after a Reset event, it should be altered to explicitly re-initialize all user endpoints.
- *    - The prototype for the GetDescriptor function has been changed, as the return value was redundant. The function now
- *      returns the size of the descriptor, rather than passing it back via a parameter, or returns NO_DESCRIPTOR if the specified
- *      descriptor does not exist.
- *    - The NO_DESCRIPTOR_STRING macro has been renamed NO_DESCRIPTOR, and is now also used as a possible return value for the
- *      GetDescriptor function.
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token has been removed, and replaced with a USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL mask
- *      to be used in the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function.
- *    - The HID report parser now supports multiple Report IDs. The HID report parser GetReportItemInfo() and
- *      SetReportItemInfo() routines now return a boolean, set if the requested report item was located in the
- *      current report. If sending a report to a multi-report device, the first byte of the report is automatically
- *      set to the report ID of the given report item.
- *    - Calling USB_Init() now forces a complete USB interface reset and enumeration, even if the USB interface is
- *      currently initialized.
- *
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration152 Migrating from V1.5.2 to V1.5.3
- *
- *  <b>Library Demos</b>
- *    - Previously, all demos contained a serial number string descriptor, filled with all zeros. A serial number
- *      string is required in Mass Storage devices, or devices which are to retain settings when moved between
- *      ports on a machine. As people were not changing the serial number value, this was causing conflicts and so
- *      the serial number descriptor has been removed from all but the Mass Storage demo, which requires it.
- *    - The AudioOut and AudioIn demos did not previously silence their endpoints when the host has deactivated
- *      them. Projects built upon either demo should upgrade to the latest code.
- *    - The FEATURE_ENDPOINT macro has been renamed FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, and is now correctly documented.
- *    - The MassStoreHost demo contained errors which caused it to lock up randomly on certain devices. Projects built
- *      on the MassStoreDemo code should update to the latest version.
- *    - The Interrupt type endpoint in the CDC based demos previously had a polling interval of 0x02, which caused
- *      problems on some Linux systems. This has been changed to 0xFF, projects built on the CDC demos should upgrade
- *      to the latest code.
- *    - The HID keyboard and mouse demos were not previously boot mode compatible. To enable boot mode support, projects
- *      built on the keyboard or mouse demos (or derivatives) should upgrade to the latest code.
- *    - The Mass Storage demo was not previously standards compliant. Projects built on the Mass Storage demo should
- *      upgrade to the latest code.
- *    - The USART was not being reconfigured after the host sent new encoding settings in the USBtoSerial demo. This was
- *      previously discovered and fixed, but the change was lost. Projects built on the USBtoSerial demo should update
- *      to the latest code.
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The endpoint non-control stream functions now have a default timeout of 50ms between packets in the stream.
- *      If this timeout is exceeded, the function returns the new ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout error value. The
- *      timeout value can be overridden by defining the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS in the project makefile to the desired
- *      timeout duration in ms.
- *    - Rather than returning fixed values, the flags indicating if the device has Remote Wakeup currently enabled
- *      and/or is self-powered are now accessed and set through the new USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and
- *      USB_CurrentlySelfPowered macros. See the DevChapter9.h documentation for more details.
- *    - All endpoint stream functions now require an extra Callback function parameter. Existing code may be updated
- *      to either supply NO_STREAM_CALLBACK as the extra parameter, or disable stream callbacks altogether by passing
- *      the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS to the compiler using the -D switch.
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The pipe non-control stream functions now have a default timeout of 50ms between packets in the stream.
- *      If this timeout is exceeded, the function returns the new PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout error value. The
- *      timeout value can be overridden by defining the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS in the project makefile to the desired
- *      timeout duration in ms.
- *    - CollectionPath_t has been renamed to HID_CollectionPath_t to be more in line with the other HID parser structures.
- *    - All pipe stream functions now require an extra Callback function parameter. Existing code may be updated
- *      to either supply NO_STREAM_CALLBACK as the extra parameter, or disable stream callbacks altogether by passing
- *      the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS to the compiler using the -D switch.
- *
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration151 Migrating from V1.5.1 to V1.5.2
- *
- *  <b>Library Demos</b>
- *    - The RNDIS demo application has been updated so that it is functional on Linux under earlier implementations
- *      of the RNDIS specification, which had non-standard behaviour. Projects built upon the demo should upgrade
- *      to the latest code.
- *    - The DFU class bootloader has had several bugs corrected in this release. It is recommended that where
- *      possible any existing devices upgrade to the latest bootloader code.
- *
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration150 Migrating from V1.5.0 to V1.5.1
- *
- *  <b>Library Demos</b>
- *    - The USBtoSerial demo was broken in the 1.5.0 release, due to incorrect register polling in place of the
- *      global "Transmitting" flag. The change has been reverted in this release. Projects built upon the demo
- *      should upgrade to the latest code.
- *    - The HID class demos did not implement the mandatory GetReport HID class request. Projects built upon the HID
- *      demos should upgrade to the latest code.
- *    - The HID class demos incorrectly reported themselves as boot-protocol enabled HID devices in their descriptors.
- *      Projects built upon the HID demos should upgrade to the latest code.
- *    - The MIDI device demo had incorrect AudioStreaming interface descriptors. Projects built upon the MIDI demo
- *      should upgrade to the latest code.
- *    - The AudioOut demo did not correctly tristate the speaker pins when USB was disconnected, wasting power.
- *      Projects built upon the AudioOut demo should upgrade to the latest code.
- *
- *
- * \section Sec_Migration141 Migrating from V1.4.1 to V1.5.0
- *
- *  <b>Library Demos</b>
- *    - Previous versions of the library demos had incorrectly encoded BCD version numbers in the descriptors. To
- *      avoid such mistakes in the future, the VERSION_BCD macro has been added to StdDescriptors.h. Existing
- *      projects should at least manually correct the BCD version numbers, or preferably update the descriptors to
- *      encode the version number in BCD format using the new macro.
- *    - The mandatory GetReport class-specific request was accidentally omitted from previous versions of the demos
- *      based on the Human Interface Device (HID) class. This has been corrected, and any user projects based on the
- *      HID demos should also be updated accordingly.
- *    - The CDC demos now correctly send an empty packet directly after a full packet, to end the transmission.
- *      Failure to do this on projects which always or frequently send full packets will cause buffering issues on
- *      the host OS. All CDC user projects are advised to update their transmission routines in the same manner as
- *      the library CDC demos.
- *    - The previous interrupt-driven Endpoint/Pipe demos did not properly save and restore the currently selected
- *      Endpoint/Pipe when the ISR fired. This has been corrected - user projects based on the interrupt driven
- *      demos should also update to properly save and restore the selected Endpoint/Pipe.
- *
- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
- *    - The Atomic.h and ISRMacro.h header files in MyUSB/Common have been removed, as the library is now only
- *      compatible with avr-libc library versions newer than the time before the functionality of the deleted
- *      headers was available.
- *
- *  <b>Device Mode</b>
- *    - The GetDescriptor function (see StdDescriptors.h) now has a new prototype, with altered parameter names and
- *      functions. Existing projects will need to update the GetDescriptor implementation to reflect the new API.
- *      The previously split Type and Index parameters are now passed as the original wValue parameter to the
- *      function, to make way for the USB specification wIndex parameter which is <i>not</i> the same as the
- *      previous Index parameter.
- *    - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event (see Events.h) now has new parameter names, to be in line with the
- *      official USB specification. Existing code will need to be altered to use the new parameter names.
- *    - The USB_CreateEndpoints event (see Events.h) has been renamed to USB_ConfigurationChanged, which is more
- *      appropriate. It fires in an identical manner to the previously named event, thus the only change to be made
- *      is the event name itself in the user project.
- *    - The USB_Descriptor_Language_t structure no longer exists in StdDescriptors.h, as this was a
- *      pseudo-descriptor modelled on the string descriptor. It is replaced by the true USB_Descriptor_String_t type
- *      descriptor as indicated in the USB specification, thus all device code must be updated accordingly.
- *    - The names of several Endpoint macros have been changed to be more consistent with the rest of the library,
- *      with no implementation changes. This means that existing code can be altered to use the new macro names
- *      with no other considerations required. See Endpoint.h for the new macro names.
- *    - The previous version of the MassStorage demo had an incorrect value in the SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t
- *      structure named SenseData in SCSI.c which caused some problems with some hosts. User projects based on this
- *      demo should correct the structure value to maintain compatibility across multiple OS platforms.
- *    - By default, the descriptor structures use the official USB specification names for the elements. Previous
- *      versions of the library used non-standard (but more verbose) names, which are still usable in the current
- *      and future releases when the correct compile time option is enabled. See the StdDescriptors.h file
- *      documentation for more details.
- *
- *  <b>Host Mode</b>
- *    - The USB_Host_Request_Header_t structure in HostChapter9.h (used for issuing control requests) has had its
- *      members renamed to the official USB specification names for requests. Existing code will need to be updated
- *      to use the new names.
- *    - The names of several Pipe macros have been changed to be more consistent with the rest of the library,
- *      with no implementation changes. This means that existing code can be altered to use the new macro names
- *      with no other considerations required. See Pipe.h for the new macro names.
- *    - By default, the descriptor structures use the official USB specification names for the elements. Previous
- *      versions of the library used non-standard (but more verbose) names, which are still usable in the current
- *      and future releases when the correct compile time option is enabled. See the StdDescriptors.h file
- *      documentation for more details.
- *    - The names of the macros in Host.h for controlling the SOF generation have been renamed, see the Host.h
- *      module documentation for the new macro names.
- *
- *  <b>Dual Role Mode</b>
- *    - The OTG.h header file has been corrected so that the macros now perform their stated functions. Any existing
- *      projects using custom headers to fix the broken OTG header should now be altered to once again use the OTG
- *      header inside the library.
- *    - The USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event (see Events.h) now also fires in Device mode, when the host has
- *      finished enumerating the device. Projects relying on the event only firing in Host mode should be updated
- *      so that the event action only occurs when the USB_Mode global is set to USB_MODE_HOST.
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_Migration Migrating from Older Versions
+ *
+ *  Below is migration information for updating existing projects based on previous versions of the LUFA library
+ *  to the next version released. It does not indicate all new additions to the library in each version change, only
+ *  areas relevant to making older projects compatible with the API changes of each new release.
+ *
+ * \section Sec_MigrationXXXXXX Migrating from 100219 to XXXXXX
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The \ref TWI_StartTransmission() function now takes in a timeout period, expressed in milliseconds, within which the addressed
+ *      device must respond or the function will abort.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref USB_Init() function no longer calls sei() to enable global interrupts, as the user application may need
+ *      to perform other initialization before it is ready to handle global interrupts. The user application is now responsible
+ *      for enabling global interrupts before or shortly after calling \ref USB_Init() to ensure that the enumeration process
+ *      functions correctly.
+ *    - The USBInterrupt.c USB driver source file has been relocated from LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ to LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel.
+ *      Projects must update their makefile SRC values accordingly.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref USB_Init() function no longer calls sei() to enable global interrupts, as the user application may need
+ *      to perform other initialization before it is ready to handle global interrupts. The user application is now responsible
+ *      for enabling global interrupts before or shortly after calling \ref USB_Init() to ensure that the enumeration process
+ *      functions correctly.
+ *    - The USBInterrupt.c USB driver source file has been relocated from LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ to LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel.
+ *      Projects must update their makefile SRC values accordingly.
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration100219 Migrating from 091223 to 100219
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - Due to some ADC channels not being identical to their ADC MUX selection masks for single-ended conversions on some AVR models,
+ *      the ADC driver now has explicit masks for each of the standard ADC channels (see \ref Group_ADC). These masks should be used 
+ *      when calling the ADC functions to ensure proper operation across all AVR models. Note that the \ref ADC_SetupChannel() function 
+ *      is an exception, and should always be called with a channel number rather than a channel mask.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The MIDI Host Class driver send and receive routines now operate on packed events, where multiple MIDI events may be
+ *      packed into a single USB packet. This means that the sending of MIDI events will now be delayed until the MIDI send
+ *      pipe bank is full. To override this new behaviour and revert to the previous behaviour, the user application may manually
+ *      flush the queued event(s) to the device by calling \ref MIDI_Host_Flush().
+ *    - The Pipe_IsEndpointBound() function now takes the endpoint's direction into account, by checking if the MSB of the endpoint's address
+ *      is set to denote IN endpoints. If the previous functionality where the direction is to be discounted is required, mask the endpoint
+ *      address against the \ref PIPE_EPNUM_MASK token before calling Pipe_IsEndpointBound().
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The MIDI Device Class driver send and receive routines now operate on packed events, where multiple MIDI events may be
+ *      packed into a single USB packet. This means that the sending of MIDI events will now be delayed until the MIDI send
+ *      endpoint bank is full. To override this new behaviour and revert to the previous behaviour, the user application may manually
+ *      flush the queued event(s) to the host by calling \ref MIDI_Device_Flush().
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration091223 Migrating from 091122 to 091223
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The Still Image Host Class driver SI_Host_USBTask() and SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() functions were misnamed, and are
+ *      now named \ref SImage_Host_USBTask() and \ref SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes() respectively.
+ *    - The HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnect enum value has been renamed to \ref HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected to be in
+ *      line with the rest of the library error codes.
+ *    - The HID Parser item usages no longer contain seperate minimum and maximum values, as this was a violation of the HID
+ *      specification. Instead, the values are distributed evenly across each item as its usage value, to ensure that all items
+ *      can be distinguished from oneanother.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() HID Device Class driver callback now has a new ReportType parameter to
+ *      indicate the report type to generate. Existing applications may simply add and ignore this additional parameter.
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration091122 Migrating from 090924 to 091122
+ *  
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The HID_PARSE_UsageStackOverflow HID parser error constant is now named \ref HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow
+ *    - The \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() HID Parser callback now passes a complete HID_ReportItem_t to the
+ *      user application, instead of just its attributes.
+ *    - The USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function was incorrectly named and is now called \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor().
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration090924 Migrating from 090810 to 090924
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The ADC_Off() function has been renamed to \ref ADC_ShutDown() to be consistent with the rest of the library.
+ *    - The \ref SPI_Init() routine's parameters have changed, so that the clock polarity and data sampling modes can be set. See
+ *      the \ref SPI_Init() function documentation for more details
+ *    - The \ref Dataflash_Init() routine no longer initializes the SPI bus - the SPI bus should be initialized manually via a
+ *      call to SPI_Init() before using the Dataflash driver
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function's parameters and behaviour has changed; the user is required to
+ *      preallocate the largest allowable buffer, and pass the size of the buffer to the function. This allows for a single
+ *      call to the function to retrieve, size check and validate the Configuration Descriptor rather than having the user
+ *      application perform these intermediatary steps.
+ *    - The HID report parser now requires a mandatory callback in the user code, to filter only the items the application
+ *      is interested in into the processed HID report item structure to save RAM. See \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem().
+ *    - The HID report parser now always parses FEATURE and always ignores constant-data items - the HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING
+ *      and HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS compile time tokens now have no effect.
+ *    - The USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now seperate USB_Descriptor_*
+ *      and USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so that both may be used in
+ *      the one project. For existing projects using the standardized names, change all code to use the USB_StdDescriptor_* variants.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now seperate USB_Descriptor_*
+ *      and USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so that both may be used in
+ *      the one project. For existing projects using the standardized names, change all code to use the USB_StdDescriptor_* variants.
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration090810 Migrating from 090605 to 090810
+ *
+ *  <b>All</b>
+ *    - The "Simple Scheduler" has been <i>deprecated</i>, as it was little more than an abtracted loop and caused much confusion.
+ *      User applications using the scheduler should switch to regular loops instead. The scheduler code will be removed in a future
+ *      release.
+ *    - The "Dynamic Memory Block Allocator" has been removed, as it was unused in (and unrelated to) the LUFA library and never
+ *      used in user applications. The library is available from the author's website for those wishing to still use it in their
+ *      applications.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The ATTR_NOINLINE function attribute macro has been renamed to ATTR_NO_INLINE to be in line with the rest of the function attribute
+ *      macro names.
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - Most demos now have a corresponding Class Driver implementation, which uses the new internal library class drivers for the standard
+ *      USB classes. This allows for more rapid device and host development, and so should be used in preference to the low level APIs where
+ *      possible so that fixes to the class drivers propagate to all applications which use them automatically with each new LUFA release.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The HIDParser.c module has moved from LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ to LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/.
+ *    - The USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function now requires the desired configuration index within the device as its first
+ *      parameter, to add support for multi-configuration devices. Existing code should use a configuration index of 1 to indicate the
+ *      first configuration descriptor within the device.
+ *    - The non-standard "Ready" host state has been removed. Existing \ref HOST_STATE_Configured code should be moved to the end of
+ *      the existing \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed state, and the existing HOST_STATE_Ready state code should be moved to the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured
+ *      state.
+ *    - The USB_IsConnected global has been removed, as it is too vague for general use. Test \ref USB_HostState explicitly to ensure the host is
+ *      in the desired state instead.
+ *    - The USB event names have been changed and their firing conditions changed to properly seperate out Host mode events from Device mode
+ *      events. See the \ref Group_Events page for details on the new event names and firing conditions.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function now takes an extra parameter to specify the descriptor's memory space so that
+ *      descriptors in mixed memory spaces can be used. The previous functionality can be returned by defining the USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+ *      token in the project makefile to fix all descriptors into FLASH space and remove the extra function parameter.
+ *    - The USB_IsSuspended global has been removed - test \ref USB_DeviceState against \ref DEVICE_STATE_Suspended instead.
+ *    - The USB_IsConnected global has been removed, as it is too vague for general use. Test \ref USB_DeviceState explicitly to ensure the device
+ *      is in the desired state instead.
+ *    - The VBUS events have been removed, as they are already exposed to the user via the USB_Connect and USB_Disconnect events.
+ *    - The USB event names have been changed and their firing conditions changed to properly seperate out Host mode events from Device mode
+ *      events. See the \ref Group_Events page for details on the new event names and firing conditions. *
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration090605 Migrating from 090510 to 090605
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - Support for non-control data endpoint interrupts has been dropped due to many issues in the implementation. All existing
+ *      projects using interrupts on non-control endpoints should switch to polling. For control interrupts, the library can
+ *      manage the control endpoint via interrupts automatically by compiling with the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token defined.
+ *    - The DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS() macro has been removed. User applications should use normal casts to obtain a descriptor's memory
+ *      address.
+ *    - The library events system has been rewritten, so that all macros have been removed to allow for clearer user code. See
+ *      \ref Group_Events for new API details.
+ *    - The STREAM_CALLBACK() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with regular
+ *      function signatures of a function accepting no arguments and returning a uint8_t value.
+ *    - The Event_DeviceError() event no longer exists, as its sole caller (unlinked USB_GetDescriptor() function) now produces a
+ *      compilation error rather than a runtime error. The StdDescriptors.c file no longer exists as a result, and should be removed
+ *      from project makefiles.
+ *    - The USB_GetDescriptor() function has been renamed to CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() to be in line with the new CALLBACK_ function
+ *      prefixes for functions which *must* be implemented in the user application.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - Support for non-control data pipe interrupts has been dropped due to many issues in the implementation. All existing
+ *      projects using interrupts on non-control pipes should switch to polling.
+ *    - The library events system has been rewritten, so that all macros have been removed to allow for clearer user code. See
+ *      \ref Group_Events for new API details.
+ *    - The STREAM_CALLBACK() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with regular
+ *      function signatures of a function accepting no arguments and returning a uint8_t value.
+ *    - The DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with
+ *      regular function signatures of a function accepting a void pointer to the descriptor to test, and returning a uint8_t value.
+ *
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration090510 Migrating from 090401 to 090510
+ *
+ *  <b>All</b>
+ *    - The ButtLoadTag.h header has been removed, as it was never used for its intended purpose. Projects should either remove all
+ *      BUTTLOADTAG elements, or download and extract ButtLoadTag.h header from the ButtLoad project.
+ *    - The Drivers/AT90USBXXX directory has been renamed to Drivers/Peripheral.
+ *    - The Serial_Stream driver has been renamed to SerialStream to remain consistent with the rest of the library naming scheme.
+ *    - The HWB driver has changed to the Buttons driver. See the board Buttons driver documentation for the new API.
+ *
+ *  <b>Dual Role Mode</b>
+ *    - The USB_PowerOnFail even has been renamed to USB_InitFailure.
+ *    - The functions in OTG.h have been renamed to remain more consistent with the library API. See the functions in OTG.h for more
+ *      details.
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - Most demos, bootloaders and applications have had significant changes from previous versions. Applications built off of any
+ *      library demos should update to the latest versions.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() macro has been removed, and is now replaced with the Endpoint_ClearIN(), Endpoint_ClearOUT() 
+ *      macros. See Endpoint.h documentation for more details on the new endpoint management macros.
+ *    - The Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() macro has been renamed to Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed() to be more consistent with the rest of
+ *      the API naming scheme.
+ *    - The Endpoint_IsSetupINReady() and Endpoint_IsSetupOutReceived() macros have been renamed to Endpoint_IsINReady() and
+ *      Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() respectively.
+ *    - The Endpoint_IsSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived().
+ *    - The Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to Endpoint_ClearSETUP().
+ *    - All endpoint read/write/discard aliases which did not have an explicitly endianness specifier (such as Endpoint_Read_Word()) have
+ *      been removed for clarity. Existing projects should use the "_LE" suffix on such calls to use the explicit Little Endian versions.
+ *    - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event no longer has any parameters. User code should no longer attempt to read in the remainder of
+ *      the Control Request header as all Control Request header data is now preloaded by the library and made available in the
+ *      USB_ControlRequest structure.
+ *    - The FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE token has been renamed to CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE.
+ *    - The STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION is no longer applicable as the library will apply this optimization when appropriate automatically.
+ *    - The values of the Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t and Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enums have had the "ERROR_" portion
+ *      of their names removed.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function no longer automatically selects the Control pipe (pipe 0) to allow it to be used on
+ *      other control type pipes. Care should be taken to ensure that the Control pipe is always selected before the function is called
+ *      in existing projects where the Control pipe is to be operated on.
+ *    - The USB Host management task now saves and restores the currently selected pipe before and after the task runs. Projects no longer
+ *      need to manage this manually when calling the USB management task.
+ *    - The Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() macro has been removed, and is now replaced with the Pipe_ClearIN(), Pipe_ClearOUT() macros. See
+ *      Pipe.h documentation for more details on the new pipe management macros.
+ *    - The Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed() macro has been renamed to Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed() to be more consistent with the rest of the API
+ *      naming scheme.
+ *    - The Pipe_IsSetupINReceived() and Pipe_IsOutReady() macros have been renamed to Pipe_IsINReceived() and Pipe_IsOUTReady()
+ *      respectively.
+ *    - The new Pipe_ClearSETUP() macro should be used to send SETUP transactions, rather than the previous Pipe_ClearSetupOUT() macro.
+ *    - The Pipe_IsSetupSent() macro has been renamed to Pipe_IsSETUPSent().
+ *    - The Pipe_ClearSetupSent() macro is no longer applicable and should be removed.
+ *    - All pipe read/write/discard aliases which did not have an explicitly endianness specifier (such as Pipe_Read_Word()) have
+ *      been removed for clarity. Existing projects should use the "_LE" suffix on such calls to use the explicit Little Endian versions.
+ *    - The Host_IsResetBusDone() macro has been renamed to Host_IsBusResetComplete().
+ *    - The Pipe_Ignore_Word() and Pipe_Ignore_DWord() functions have been renamed to Pipe_Discard_Word() and Pipe_Discard_DWord() to remain
+ *      consistent with the rest of the pipe API.
+ *    - It is no longer needed to manually include the headers from LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class, as they are now included along with the rest
+ *      of the USB headers when LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h is included.
+ *    - Functions in the ConfigDescriptor.h header file no longer have "Host_" as part of their names.
+ *    - The ProcessHIDReport() has been renamed to USB_ProcessHIDReport(), GetReportItemInfo() has been renamed to USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo()
+ *      and SetReportItemInfo() has been renamed to USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo().
+ *    - The values of the DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t and DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enums have had their respective "Descriptor_Search"
+ *      and "Descriptor_Search_Comp" prefixes changed to all caps.
+ *    - The USB_HostRequest global has been renamed to USB_ControlRequest, and is used in Device mode also. The USB_Host_Request_Header_t
+ *      structure type has been renamed to USB_Request_Header_t.
+ *    - The values of the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum have had the "ERROR_" portion of their names removed.
+ *
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration090401 Migrating from 090209 to 090401
+ *
+ *  <b>All</b>
+ *    - LUFA projects must now give the raw input clock frequency (before any prescaling) as a compile time constant "F_CLOCK",
+ *      defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler via the -D switch.
+ *    - The makefile EEPROM programming targets for FLIP and dfu-programmer no longer program in the FLASH data in addition to the
+ *      EEPROM data into the device. If both are to be programmed, both the EEPROM and FLASH programming targets must be called.
+ *    - As the avr-libc macro has been corrected in recent avr-libc distributions, the SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro has been removed.
+ *      Include <avr/power.h> and call clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); instead on recent avr-libc distributions.
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - The USBtoSerial demo now discards all data when not connected to a host, rather than buffering it for later transmission.
+ *    - Most demos, bootloaders and applications have had their control request handling code corrected, to properly send the status
+ *      stage in all handled requests. If you are using code based off one of the library demos, bootloaders or applications, you should
+ *      update to the latest revisions.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE function attribute macro has been renamed to ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE.
+ *    - Custom board Dataflash drivers now require the implementation of Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage() and Dataflash_SendAddressBytes().
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token has been renamed to FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE, and its function expanded
+ *      to also remove parts of the Get Status chapter 9 request to further reduce code usage. On all applications currently using the 
+ *      NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token, it can be replaced with the FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE token with no further
+ *      modifications required.
+ *
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration090209 Migrating from 081217 to 090209
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINTS constant has been renamed to the more appropriate name of ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS.
+ *    - The USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS stream timeout default period has been extended to 100ms. This can be overridden in the user
+ *      makefile if desired to restore the previous 50ms timeout.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The PIPE_MAX_ENDPOINTS constant has been renamed to the more appropriate name of PIPE_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS.
+ *    - The USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS stream timeout default period has been extended to 100ms. This can be overridden in the user
+ *      makefile if desired to restore the previous 50ms timeout.
+ *    - The USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event now contains a second "SubErrorCode" parameter, giving the error code of the function
+ *      which failed.
+ *    - The HID_PARSE_Sucessful enum member constant has been corrected to HID_PARSE_Successful.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The previous SPI_SendByte() functionality is now located in SPI_TransferByte(). SPI_SendByte() now discards the return byte
+ *      for speed, to compliment the new SPI_ReceiveByte() function. If two-way SPI transfers are required, calls to SPI_SendByte()
+ *      should be changed to SPI_TransferByte().
+ *    - The serial driver now sets the Tx line as an output explicitly, and enables the pullup of the Rx line.
+ *    - The Serial_Init() and SerialStream_Init() functions now take a second DoubleSpeed parameter, which indicates if the USART
+ *      should be initialized in double speed mode - useful in some circumstances for attaining baud rates not usually possible at
+ *      the given AVR clock speed.
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - Most library demos have been enhanced and/or had errors corrected. All users of all demos should upgrade their codebase to
+ *      the latest demo versions.
+ *
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration171208 Migrating from V1.5.3 to 081217
+ *
+ *  <b>All</b>
+ *    - The MyUSB project name has been changed to LUFA (Lightweight Framework for USB AVRs). All references to MyUSB, including macro names,
+ *      have been changed to LUFA.
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - The ReconfigureUSART() routine in the USBtoSerial demo was not being called after new line encoding
+ *      parameters were set by the host. Projects built on the USBtoSerial code should update to the latest version.
+ *    - The HID Parser now supports multiple report (on a single endpoint) HID devices. The MouseHostWithParser and
+ *      KeyboardHostWithPaser demos use the updated API functions to function correctly on such devices. Projects
+ *      built on either "WithParser" demo should update to the latest code.
+ *    - The RNDIS demo TCP stack has been modified so that connections can be properly closed. It is still not
+ *      recommended that the MyUSB RNDIS demo TCP/IP stack be used for anything other than demonstration purposes,
+ *      as it is neither a full nor a standards compliant implementation.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The Serial_IsCharReceived() macro has been changed to the correct spelling of Serial_IsCharReceived() in Serial.h.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token has been removed, and replaced with a USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL mask
+ *      to be used in the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function.
+ *    - Calling USB_Init() now forces a complete USB interface reset and enumeration, even if the USB interface is
+ *      currently initialized.
+ *    - Interrupts are now disabled when processing control requests, to avoid problems with interrupts causing the library
+ *      or user request processing code to exceed the strict USB timing requirements on control transfers.
+ *    - The USB Reset event now resets and disables all device endpoints. If user code depends on endpoints remaining configured
+ *      after a Reset event, it should be altered to explicitly re-initialize all user endpoints.
+ *    - The prototype for the GetDescriptor function has been changed, as the return value was redundant. The function now
+ *      returns the size of the descriptor, rather than passing it back via a parameter, or returns NO_DESCRIPTOR if the specified
+ *      descriptor does not exist.
+ *    - The NO_DESCRIPTOR_STRING macro has been renamed NO_DESCRIPTOR, and is now also used as a possible return value for the
+ *      GetDescriptor function.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token has been removed, and replaced with a USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL mask
+ *      to be used in the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function.
+ *    - The HID report parser now supports multiple Report IDs. The HID report parser GetReportItemInfo() and
+ *      SetReportItemInfo() routines now return a boolean, set if the requested report item was located in the
+ *      current report. If sending a report to a multi-report device, the first byte of the report is automatically
+ *      set to the report ID of the given report item.
+ *    - Calling USB_Init() now forces a complete USB interface reset and enumeration, even if the USB interface is
+ *      currently initialized.
+ *
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration152 Migrating from V1.5.2 to V1.5.3
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - Previously, all demos contained a serial number string descriptor, filled with all zeros. A serial number
+ *      string is required in Mass Storage devices, or devices which are to retain settings when moved between
+ *      ports on a machine. As people were not changing the serial number value, this was causing conflicts and so
+ *      the serial number descriptor has been removed from all but the Mass Storage demo, which requires it.
+ *    - The AudioOut and AudioIn demos did not previously silence their endpoints when the host has deactivated
+ *      them. Projects built upon either demo should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The FEATURE_ENDPOINT macro has been renamed FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, and is now correctly documented.
+ *    - The MassStoreHost demo contained errors which caused it to lock up randomly on certain devices. Projects built
+ *      on the MassStoreDemo code should update to the latest version.
+ *    - The Interrupt type endpoint in the CDC based demos previously had a polling interval of 0x02, which caused
+ *      problems on some Linux systems. This has been changed to 0xFF, projects built on the CDC demos should upgrade
+ *      to the latest code.
+ *    - The HID keyboard and mouse demos were not previously boot mode compatible. To enable boot mode support, projects
+ *      built on the keyboard or mouse demos (or derivatives) should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The Mass Storage demo was not previously standards compliant. Projects built on the Mass Storage demo should
+ *      upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The USART was not being reconfigured after the host sent new encoding settings in the USBtoSerial demo. This was
+ *      previously discovered and fixed, but the change was lost. Projects built on the USBtoSerial demo should update
+ *      to the latest code.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The endpoint non-control stream functions now have a default timeout of 50ms between packets in the stream.
+ *      If this timeout is exceeded, the function returns the new ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout error value. The
+ *      timeout value can be overridden by defining the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS in the project makefile to the desired
+ *      timeout duration in ms.
+ *    - Rather than returning fixed values, the flags indicating if the device has Remote Wakeup currently enabled
+ *      and/or is self-powered are now accessed and set through the new USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and
+ *      USB_CurrentlySelfPowered macros. See the DevChapter9.h documentation for more details.
+ *    - All endpoint stream functions now require an extra Callback function parameter. Existing code may be updated
+ *      to either supply NO_STREAM_CALLBACK as the extra parameter, or disable stream callbacks altogether by passing
+ *      the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS to the compiler using the -D switch.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The pipe non-control stream functions now have a default timeout of 50ms between packets in the stream.
+ *      If this timeout is exceeded, the function returns the new PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout error value. The
+ *      timeout value can be overridden by defining the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS in the project makefile to the desired
+ *      timeout duration in ms.
+ *    - CollectionPath_t has been renamed to HID_CollectionPath_t to be more in line with the other HID parser structures.
+ *    - All pipe stream functions now require an extra Callback function parameter. Existing code may be updated
+ *      to either supply NO_STREAM_CALLBACK as the extra parameter, or disable stream callbacks altogether by passing
+ *      the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS to the compiler using the -D switch.
+ *
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration151 Migrating from V1.5.1 to V1.5.2
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - The RNDIS demo application has been updated so that it is functional on Linux under earlier implementations
+ *      of the RNDIS specification, which had non-standard behaviour. Projects built upon the demo should upgrade
+ *      to the latest code.
+ *    - The DFU class bootloader has had several bugs corrected in this release. It is recommended that where
+ *      possible any existing devices upgrade to the latest bootloader code.
+ *
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration150 Migrating from V1.5.0 to V1.5.1
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - The USBtoSerial demo was broken in the 1.5.0 release, due to incorrect register polling in place of the
+ *      global "Transmitting" flag. The change has been reverted in this release. Projects built upon the demo
+ *      should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The HID class demos did not implement the mandatory GetReport HID class request. Projects built upon the HID
+ *      demos should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The HID class demos incorrectly reported themselves as boot-protocol enabled HID devices in their descriptors.
+ *      Projects built upon the HID demos should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The MIDI device demo had incorrect AudioStreaming interface descriptors. Projects built upon the MIDI demo
+ *      should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The AudioOut demo did not correctly tristate the speaker pins when USB was disconnected, wasting power.
+ *      Projects built upon the AudioOut demo should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *
+ *
+ * \section Sec_Migration141 Migrating from V1.4.1 to V1.5.0
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - Previous versions of the library demos had incorrectly encoded BCD version numbers in the descriptors. To
+ *      avoid such mistakes in the future, the VERSION_BCD macro has been added to StdDescriptors.h. Existing
+ *      projects should at least manually correct the BCD version numbers, or preferably update the descriptors to
+ *      encode the version number in BCD format using the new macro.
+ *    - The mandatory GetReport class-specific request was accidentally omitted from previous versions of the demos
+ *      based on the Human Interface Device (HID) class. This has been corrected, and any user projects based on the
+ *      HID demos should also be updated accordingly.
+ *    - The CDC demos now correctly send an empty packet directly after a full packet, to end the transmission.
+ *      Failure to do this on projects which always or frequently send full packets will cause buffering issues on
+ *      the host OS. All CDC user projects are advised to update their transmission routines in the same manner as
+ *      the library CDC demos.
+ *    - The previous interrupt-driven Endpoint/Pipe demos did not properly save and restore the currently selected
+ *      Endpoint/Pipe when the ISR fired. This has been corrected - user projects based on the interrupt driven
+ *      demos should also update to properly save and restore the selected Endpoint/Pipe.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The Atomic.h and ISRMacro.h header files in MyUSB/Common have been removed, as the library is now only
+ *      compatible with avr-libc library versions newer than the time before the functionality of the deleted
+ *      headers was available.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The GetDescriptor function (see StdDescriptors.h) now has a new prototype, with altered parameter names and
+ *      functions. Existing projects will need to update the GetDescriptor implementation to reflect the new API.
+ *      The previously split Type and Index parameters are now passed as the original wValue parameter to the
+ *      function, to make way for the USB specification wIndex parameter which is <i>not</i> the same as the
+ *      previous Index parameter.
+ *    - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event (see Events.h) now has new parameter names, to be in line with the
+ *      official USB specification. Existing code will need to be altered to use the new parameter names.
+ *    - The USB_CreateEndpoints event (see Events.h) has been renamed to USB_ConfigurationChanged, which is more
+ *      appropriate. It fires in an identical manner to the previously named event, thus the only change to be made
+ *      is the event name itself in the user project.
+ *    - The USB_Descriptor_Language_t structure no longer exists in StdDescriptors.h, as this was a
+ *      pseudo-descriptor modelled on the string descriptor. It is replaced by the true USB_Descriptor_String_t type
+ *      descriptor as indicated in the USB specification, thus all device code must be updated accordingly.
+ *    - The names of several Endpoint macros have been changed to be more consistent with the rest of the library,
+ *      with no implementation changes. This means that existing code can be altered to use the new macro names
+ *      with no other considerations required. See Endpoint.h for the new macro names.
+ *    - The previous version of the MassStorage demo had an incorrect value in the SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t
+ *      structure named SenseData in SCSI.c which caused some problems with some hosts. User projects based on this
+ *      demo should correct the structure value to maintain compatibility across multiple OS platforms.
+ *    - By default, the descriptor structures use the official USB specification names for the elements. Previous
+ *      versions of the library used non-standard (but more verbose) names, which are still usable in the current
+ *      and future releases when the correct compile time option is enabled. See the StdDescriptors.h file
+ *      documentation for more details.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The USB_Host_Request_Header_t structure in HostChapter9.h (used for issuing control requests) has had its
+ *      members renamed to the official USB specification names for requests. Existing code will need to be updated
+ *      to use the new names.
+ *    - The names of several Pipe macros have been changed to be more consistent with the rest of the library,
+ *      with no implementation changes. This means that existing code can be altered to use the new macro names
+ *      with no other considerations required. See Pipe.h for the new macro names.
+ *    - By default, the descriptor structures use the official USB specification names for the elements. Previous
+ *      versions of the library used non-standard (but more verbose) names, which are still usable in the current
+ *      and future releases when the correct compile time option is enabled. See the StdDescriptors.h file
+ *      documentation for more details.
+ *    - The names of the macros in Host.h for controlling the SOF generation have been renamed, see the Host.h
+ *      module documentation for the new macro names.
+ *
+ *  <b>Dual Role Mode</b>
+ *    - The OTG.h header file has been corrected so that the macros now perform their stated functions. Any existing
+ *      projects using custom headers to fix the broken OTG header should now be altered to once again use the OTG
+ *      header inside the library.
+ *    - The USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event (see Events.h) now also fires in Device mode, when the host has
+ *      finished enumerating the device. Projects relying on the event only firing in Host mode should be updated
+ *      so that the event action only occurs when the USB_Mode global is set to USB_MODE_HOST.
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/ProgrammingApps.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/ProgrammingApps.txt
index 4302170ec..4f3107502 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/ProgrammingApps.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/ProgrammingApps.txt
@@ -1,27 +1,27 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \page Page_ProgrammingApps Programming an Application into a USB AVR
- *
- *  Once you have built an application, you will need a way to program in the resulting ".HEX" file (and, if your
- *  application uses EEPROM variables with initial values, also a ".EEP" file) into your USB AVR. Normally, the
- *  reprogramming of an AVR device must be performed using a special piece of programming hardware, through one of the
- *  supported AVR programming protocols - ISP, HVSP, HVPP, JTAG or dW. This can be done through a custom programmer,
- *  a third party programmer, or an official Atmel AVR tool - for more information, see the Atmel.com website.
- *
- *  Alternatively, you can use the bootloader. From the Atmel factory, each USB AVR comes preloaded with the Atmel
- *  DFU (Device Firmware Update) class bootloader, a small piece of AVR firmware which allows the remainder of the
- *  AVR to be programmed through a non-standard interface such as the serial USART port, SPI, or (in this case) USB.
- *  Bootloaders have the advantage of not requiring any special hardware for programming, and cannot usually be erased
- *  or broken without an external programming device. They have disadvantages however; they cannot change the fuses of
- *  the AVR (special configuration settings that control the operation of the chip itself) and a small portion of the
- *  AVR's FLASH program memory must be reserved to contain the bootloader firmware, and thus cannot be used by the
- *  loaded application. Atmel's DFU bootloader is either 4KB (for the smaller USB AVRs) or 8KB (for the larger USB AVRs).
- *
- *  If you wish to use the DFU bootloader to program in your application, refer to your DFU programmer's documentation.
- *  Atmel provides a free utility called FLIP which is USB AVR compatible, and an open source (Linux compatible)
- *  alternative exists called "dfu-programmer".
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \page Page_ProgrammingApps Programming an Application into a USB AVR
+ *
+ *  Once you have built an application, you will need a way to program in the resulting ".HEX" file (and, if your
+ *  application uses EEPROM variables with initial values, also a ".EEP" file) into your USB AVR. Normally, the
+ *  reprogramming of an AVR device must be performed using a special piece of programming hardware, through one of the
+ *  supported AVR programming protocols - ISP, HVSP, HVPP, JTAG or dW. This can be done through a custom programmer,
+ *  a third party programmer, or an official Atmel AVR tool - for more information, see the Atmel.com website.
+ *
+ *  Alternatively, you can use the bootloader. From the Atmel factory, each USB AVR comes preloaded with the Atmel
+ *  DFU (Device Firmware Update) class bootloader, a small piece of AVR firmware which allows the remainder of the
+ *  AVR to be programmed through a non-standard interface such as the serial USART port, SPI, or (in this case) USB.
+ *  Bootloaders have the advantage of not requiring any special hardware for programming, and cannot usually be erased
+ *  or broken without an external programming device. They have disadvantages however; they cannot change the fuses of
+ *  the AVR (special configuration settings that control the operation of the chip itself) and a small portion of the
+ *  AVR's FLASH program memory must be reserved to contain the bootloader firmware, and thus cannot be used by the
+ *  loaded application. Atmel's DFU bootloader is either 4KB (for the smaller USB AVRs) or 8KB (for the larger USB AVRs).
+ *
+ *  If you wish to use the DFU bootloader to program in your application, refer to your DFU programmer's documentation.
+ *  Atmel provides a free utility called FLIP which is USB AVR compatible, and an open source (Linux compatible)
+ *  alternative exists called "dfu-programmer".
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/SchedulerOverview.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/SchedulerOverview.txt
index 3aa151750..b59821fe0 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/SchedulerOverview.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/SchedulerOverview.txt
@@ -1,35 +1,35 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \page Page_SchedulerOverview LUFA Scheduler Overview
- *
- *  <B>THE LUFA SCHEDULER IS NOW DEPRECATED AND WILL BE REMOVED IN A FUTURE RELEASE. EXISTING CODE SHOULD CONVERT
- *     TO STANDARD LOOPS AS SHOWN IN THE CURRENT LIBRARY DEMOS.</b>
- *
- *
- *  The LUFA library comes with a small, basic round-robbin scheduler which allows for small "tasks" to be executed
- *  continuously in sequence, and enabled/disabled at runtime. Unlike a conventional, complex RTOS scheduler, the
- *  LUFA scheduler is very simple in design and operation and is essentially a loop conditionally executing a series
- *  of functions.
- *
- *  Each LUFA scheduler task should be written similar to an ISR; it should execute quickly (so that no one task
- *  hogs the processor, preventing another from running before some sort of timeout is exceeded). Unlike normal RTOS
- *  tasks, each LUFA scheduler task is a regular function, and thus must be designed to be called, and designed to
- *  return to the calling scheduler function repeatedly. Data which must be preserved between task calls should be
- *  declared as global or (preferably) as a static local variable inside the task.
- *
- *  The scheduler consists of a task list, listing all the tasks which can be executed by the scheduler. Once started,
- *  each task is then called one after another, unless the task is stopped by another running task or interrupt.
- *
- *
- *  If desired, the LUFA scheduler <b>does not need to be used</b> in a LUFA powered application. A more conventional
- *  approach to application design can be used, or a proper scheduling RTOS inserted in the place of the LUFA scheduler.
- *  In the case of the former the USB task must be run manually repeatedly to maintain USB communications, and in the
- *  case of the latter a proper RTOS task must be set up to do the same.
- *
- *
- *  For more information on the LUFA scheduler, see the Scheduler.h file documentation.
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_SchedulerOverview LUFA Scheduler Overview
+ *
+ *  <B>THE LUFA SCHEDULER IS NOW DEPRECATED AND WILL BE REMOVED IN A FUTURE RELEASE. EXISTING CODE SHOULD CONVERT
+ *     TO STANDARD LOOPS AS SHOWN IN THE CURRENT LIBRARY DEMOS.</b>
+ *
+ *
+ *  The LUFA library comes with a small, basic round-robbin scheduler which allows for small "tasks" to be executed
+ *  continuously in sequence, and enabled/disabled at runtime. Unlike a conventional, complex RTOS scheduler, the
+ *  LUFA scheduler is very simple in design and operation and is essentially a loop conditionally executing a series
+ *  of functions.
+ *
+ *  Each LUFA scheduler task should be written similar to an ISR; it should execute quickly (so that no one task
+ *  hogs the processor, preventing another from running before some sort of timeout is exceeded). Unlike normal RTOS
+ *  tasks, each LUFA scheduler task is a regular function, and thus must be designed to be called, and designed to
+ *  return to the calling scheduler function repeatedly. Data which must be preserved between task calls should be
+ *  declared as global or (preferably) as a static local variable inside the task.
+ *
+ *  The scheduler consists of a task list, listing all the tasks which can be executed by the scheduler. Once started,
+ *  each task is then called one after another, unless the task is stopped by another running task or interrupt.
+ *
+ *
+ *  If desired, the LUFA scheduler <b>does not need to be used</b> in a LUFA powered application. A more conventional
+ *  approach to application design can be used, or a proper scheduling RTOS inserted in the place of the LUFA scheduler.
+ *  In the case of the former the USB task must be run manually repeatedly to maintain USB communications, and in the
+ *  case of the latter a proper RTOS task must be set up to do the same.
+ *
+ *
+ *  For more information on the LUFA scheduler, see the Scheduler.h file documentation.
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/SoftwareBootloaderJump.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/SoftwareBootloaderJump.txt
index 3f6e30582..1b284e4cd 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/SoftwareBootloaderJump.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/SoftwareBootloaderJump.txt
@@ -1,63 +1,63 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/**
- *  \page Page_SoftwareBootloaderStart Entering the Bootloader via Software
- *
- *  A common requirement of many applications is the ability to jump to the programmed bootloader of a chip
- *  on demand, via the code's firmware (i.e. not as a result of any physical user interaction with the
- *  hardware). This might be required because the device does not have any physical user input, or simply
- *  just to streamline the device upgrade process on the host PC.
- *
- *  The following C code snippet may be used to enter the bootloader upon request by the user application.
- *  By using the watchdog to physically reset the controller, it is ensured that all system hardware is
- *  completely reset to their defaults before the bootloader is run. This is important; since bootloaders
- *  are written to occupy a very limited space, they usually make assumptions about the register states based
- *  on the default values after a hard-reset of the chip.
- *
- *  \code
- *  #include <avr/wdt.h>
- *  #include <avr/io.h>
- *  #include <util/delay.h>
- *
- *  #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
- *  #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
- *
- *  uint32_t Boot_Key ATTR_NO_INIT;
- *
- *  #define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY            0xDC42ACCA
- *  #define BOOTLOADER_START_ADDRESS  ({FLASH_SIZE_BYTES} - {BOOTLOADER_SEC_SIZE_BYTES})
- *  
- *  void Bootloader_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
- *  void Bootloader_Jump_Check(void)
- *  {
- *      // If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the bootloader
- *      if ((MCUSR & (1<<WDRF)) && (Boot_Key == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
- *      {
- *          Boot_Key = 0;
- *          ((void (*)(void))BOOTLOADER_START_ADDRESS)(); 
- *      }
- *  }
- *
- *  void Jump_To_Bootloader(void)
- *  {
- *      // If USB is used, detatch from the bus and wait 2 seconds for the host to register it
- *      USB_ShutDown();
- *      for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 128; i++)
- *        _delay_ms(16);
- *
- *      // Set the bootloader key to the magic value and force a reset
- *      Boot_Key = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
- *      wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
- *      for (;;); 
- *  }
- *  \endcode
- *
- *  Note that the bootloader magic key can be any arbitrary value. The {FLASH_SIZE_BYTES} and
- *  {BOOTLOADER_SEC_SIZE_BYTES} tokens should be replaced with the total flash size of the AVR
- *  in bytes, and the allocated size of the bootloader section for the target AVR.
- * 
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_SoftwareBootloaderStart Entering the Bootloader via Software
+ *
+ *  A common requirement of many applications is the ability to jump to the programmed bootloader of a chip
+ *  on demand, via the code's firmware (i.e. not as a result of any physical user interaction with the
+ *  hardware). This might be required because the device does not have any physical user input, or simply
+ *  just to streamline the device upgrade process on the host PC.
+ *
+ *  The following C code snippet may be used to enter the bootloader upon request by the user application.
+ *  By using the watchdog to physically reset the controller, it is ensured that all system hardware is
+ *  completely reset to their defaults before the bootloader is run. This is important; since bootloaders
+ *  are written to occupy a very limited space, they usually make assumptions about the register states based
+ *  on the default values after a hard-reset of the chip.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ *  #include <avr/io.h>
+ *  #include <util/delay.h>
+ *
+ *  #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+ *  #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ *
+ *  uint32_t Boot_Key ATTR_NO_INIT;
+ *
+ *  #define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY            0xDC42ACCA
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_START_ADDRESS  ({FLASH_SIZE_BYTES} - {BOOTLOADER_SEC_SIZE_BYTES})
+ *  
+ *  void Bootloader_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+ *  void Bootloader_Jump_Check(void)
+ *  {
+ *      // If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the bootloader
+ *      if ((MCUSR & (1<<WDRF)) && (Boot_Key == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+ *      {
+ *          Boot_Key = 0;
+ *          ((void (*)(void))BOOTLOADER_START_ADDRESS)(); 
+ *      }
+ *  }
+ *
+ *  void Jump_To_Bootloader(void)
+ *  {
+ *      // If USB is used, detatch from the bus and wait 2 seconds for the host to register it
+ *      USB_ShutDown();
+ *      for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 128; i++)
+ *        _delay_ms(16);
+ *
+ *      // Set the bootloader key to the magic value and force a reset
+ *      Boot_Key = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+ *      wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+ *      for (;;); 
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Note that the bootloader magic key can be any arbitrary value. The {FLASH_SIZE_BYTES} and
+ *  {BOOTLOADER_SEC_SIZE_BYTES} tokens should be replaced with the total flash size of the AVR
+ *  in bytes, and the allocated size of the bootloader section for the target AVR.
+ * 
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/VIDAndPIDValues.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/VIDAndPIDValues.txt
index b5c187489..fb936600d 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/VIDAndPIDValues.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/VIDAndPIDValues.txt
@@ -1,423 +1,423 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \page Page_VIDPID VID and PID values
- *
- *  \section Sec_VIDPID_Allocations
- *  The LUFA library uses VID/PID combinations generously donated by Atmel. The following VID/PID combinations
- *  are used within the LUFA demos, and thus may be re-used by derivations of each demo. Free PID values may be
- *  used by future LUFA demo projects.
- *
- *  <b>These VID/PID values should not be used in commercial designs under any circumstances.</b> Private projects
- *  may use the following values freely, but must accept any collisions due to other LUFA derived private projects
- *  sharing identical values. It is suggested that private projects using interfaces compatible with existing
- *  demos share the save VID/PID value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     <b>VID</b>
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <b>PID</b>
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <b>Usage</b>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2040
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Test VID/PID (See below)
- *    </td>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2041
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Mouse Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2042
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Keyboard Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2043
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Joystick Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2044
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     CDC Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2045
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Mass Storage Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2046
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Audio Output Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2047
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Audio Input Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2048
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     MIDI Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2049
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     MagStripe Project
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x204A
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     CDC Bootloader
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x204B
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     USB to Serial Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x204C
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     RNDIS Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x204D
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Combined Keyboard and Mouse Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x204E
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Dual CDC Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x204F
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Generic HID Demo Application
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2060
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Benito Programmer Project
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2061
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard Demo
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2062
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Combined CDC and Mouse Demo
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2063
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Mass Storage/HID Interface Datalogger Project
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2064
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     Interfaceless Control-Only LUFA Devices
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2065
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2066
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2067
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2068
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x2069
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x206A
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x206B
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x206C
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x206D
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x206E
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     0x03EB
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     0x206F
- *    </td>
- *    <td>
- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section Sec_Test_VIDPID The Test VID/PID Combination:
- *  For use in testing of LUFA powered devices during development only, by non-commercial entities.
- *  All devices must accept collisions on this VID/PID range (from other in-development LUFA devices)
- *  to be resolved by using a unique release number in the Device Descriptor. No devices using this
- *  VID/PID combination may be released to the general public.
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_VIDPID VID and PID values
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_VIDPID_Allocations
+ *  The LUFA library uses VID/PID combinations generously donated by Atmel. The following VID/PID combinations
+ *  are used within the LUFA demos, and thus may be re-used by derivations of each demo. Free PID values may be
+ *  used by future LUFA demo projects.
+ *
+ *  <b>These VID/PID values should not be used in commercial designs under any circumstances.</b> Private projects
+ *  may use the following values freely, but must accept any collisions due to other LUFA derived private projects
+ *  sharing identical values. It is suggested that private projects using interfaces compatible with existing
+ *  demos share the save VID/PID value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <b>VID</b>
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <b>PID</b>
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <b>Usage</b>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2040
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Test VID/PID (See below)
+ *    </td>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2041
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Mouse Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2042
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Keyboard Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2043
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Joystick Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2044
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     CDC Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2045
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Mass Storage Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2046
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Audio Output Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2047
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Audio Input Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2048
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     MIDI Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2049
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     MagStripe Project
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x204A
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     CDC Bootloader
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x204B
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     USB to Serial Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x204C
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     RNDIS Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x204D
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Combined Keyboard and Mouse Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x204E
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Dual CDC Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x204F
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Generic HID Demo Application
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2060
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Benito Programmer Project
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2061
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard Demo
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2062
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Combined CDC and Mouse Demo
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2063
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Mass Storage/HID Interface Datalogger Project
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2064
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     Interfaceless Control-Only LUFA Devices
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2065
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2066
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2067
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2068
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2069
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x206A
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x206B
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x206C
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x206D
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x206E
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x03EB
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x206F
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Test_VIDPID The Test VID/PID Combination:
+ *  For use in testing of LUFA powered devices during development only, by non-commercial entities.
+ *  All devices must accept collisions on this VID/PID range (from other in-development LUFA devices)
+ *  to be resolved by using a unique release number in the Device Descriptor. No devices using this
+ *  VID/PID combination may be released to the general public.
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/WhyUseLUFA.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/WhyUseLUFA.txt
index b4a1c19f6..bb5fcc784 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/WhyUseLUFA.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/WhyUseLUFA.txt
@@ -1,46 +1,46 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/**
- *  \page Page_WhyUseLUFA Why Use LUFA?
- *
- *  The LUFA Library has many advantages over implementing the code required to drive the USB AVRs directly.
- *  It is much more preferable to incorporate LUFA into your existing projects - or even make a new project
- *  using LUFA - than it is to start from scratch and use the USB AVR registers directly. Some of these reasons
- *  are:
- *
- *  - <b>Portability:</b>
- *    The LUFA stack is designed to run (at some capacity) on the entire Atmel range of USB AVRs, regardless of the
- *    exact USB controller revision used. If you decide to implement your own USB stack, you will either need to
- *    code around the differences between each USB AVR controller's implementation between different chip models, or
- *    require your code to run on only one specific USB AVR model series.
- *
- *  - <b>Speed of Development:</b>
- *    LUFA ships with a wide range of pre-made demos, bootloaders and projects for you to try, learn and extend. Each
- *    of these demos are tested (where possible) across as many USB AVRs and Operating Systems as possible, to ensure
- *    that they work under as many conditions as possible. In addition, there are inbuilt class drivers for several of
- *    the USB classes which you can make use of in your projects with minimal effort.
- *
- *  - <b>Maintainability:</b>
- *    As LUFA takes care of much of the USB implementation, you can be left to focusing on your actual project's
- *    functionality, rather than being held back developing and debugging the USB stack code. Since LUFA uses clear APIs
- *    for USB development, your code will be more readable than if it had the low level USB stack code integrated into
- *    it directly. Updating the LUFA library is a simple folder-replacement and gives new features and bug fixes in
- *    seconds each time a new release is made.
- *
- *  - <b>Size:</b>
- *    Not just requiring less code to make complex USB devices, LUFA (under most cases with the correct compile options)
- *    requires less FLASH space than Atmel's stack, meaning more space for the user application*.
- *
- *  - <b>Support:</b>
- *    Since many people are now using LUFA in their own projects, you can take advantage of other's knowedge when you run
- *    into difficulties or need some advice. In addition, you can also email the library author to recieve personalised
- *    support when you need it (subject to author's schedule).
- *
- *   <small>* Atmel Stack Mouse Device Demo 4292 bytes, LUFA Mouse Low Level Device Demo 3296 bytes, under identical build
- *   environments</small>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_WhyUseLUFA Why Use LUFA?
+ *
+ *  The LUFA Library has many advantages over implementing the code required to drive the USB AVRs directly.
+ *  It is much more preferable to incorporate LUFA into your existing projects - or even make a new project
+ *  using LUFA - than it is to start from scratch and use the USB AVR registers directly. Some of these reasons
+ *  are:
+ *
+ *  - <b>Portability:</b>
+ *    The LUFA stack is designed to run (at some capacity) on the entire Atmel range of USB AVRs, regardless of the
+ *    exact USB controller revision used. If you decide to implement your own USB stack, you will either need to
+ *    code around the differences between each USB AVR controller's implementation between different chip models, or
+ *    require your code to run on only one specific USB AVR model series.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Speed of Development:</b>
+ *    LUFA ships with a wide range of pre-made demos, bootloaders and projects for you to try, learn and extend. Each
+ *    of these demos are tested (where possible) across as many USB AVRs and Operating Systems as possible, to ensure
+ *    that they work under as many conditions as possible. In addition, there are inbuilt class drivers for several of
+ *    the USB classes which you can make use of in your projects with minimal effort.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Maintainability:</b>
+ *    As LUFA takes care of much of the USB implementation, you can be left to focusing on your actual project's
+ *    functionality, rather than being held back developing and debugging the USB stack code. Since LUFA uses clear APIs
+ *    for USB development, your code will be more readable than if it had the low level USB stack code integrated into
+ *    it directly. Updating the LUFA library is a simple folder-replacement and gives new features and bug fixes in
+ *    seconds each time a new release is made.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Size:</b>
+ *    Not just requiring less code to make complex USB devices, LUFA (under most cases with the correct compile options)
+ *    requires less FLASH space than Atmel's stack, meaning more space for the user application*.
+ *
+ *  - <b>Support:</b>
+ *    Since many people are now using LUFA in their own projects, you can take advantage of other's knowedge when you run
+ *    into difficulties or need some advice. In addition, you can also email the library author to recieve personalised
+ *    support when you need it (subject to author's schedule).
+ *
+ *   <small>* Atmel Stack Mouse Device Demo 4292 bytes, LUFA Mouse Low Level Device Demo 3296 bytes, under identical build
+ *   environments</small>
+ */
  
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/LUFA/ManPages/WritingBoardDrivers.txt b/LUFA/ManPages/WritingBoardDrivers.txt
index cf4f47c13..c3371a93a 100644
--- a/LUFA/ManPages/WritingBoardDrivers.txt
+++ b/LUFA/ManPages/WritingBoardDrivers.txt
@@ -1,26 +1,26 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \page Page_WritingBoardDrivers Writing LUFA Board Drivers
- *
- *  LUFA ships with several basic pre-made board drivers, to control hardware present on the supported board
- *  hardware - such as Dataflash ICs, LEDs, Joysticks, or other hardware peripherals. When compiling an application
- *  which makes use of one or more board drivers located in LUFA/Drivers/Board, you must also indicate what board
- *  hardware you are using in your project makefile. This is done by defining the BOARD macro using the -D switch
- *  passed to the compiler, with a constant of BOARD_{Name}. For example <b>-DBOARD=BOARD_USBKEY</b> instructs the
- *  compiler to use the USBKEY board hardware drivers.
- *
- *  If your application does not use *any* board level drivers, you can omit the definition of the BOARD macro.
- *  However, some users may wish to write their own custom board hardware drivers which are to remain compatible
- *  with the LUFA hardware API. To do this, the BOARD macro should be defined to the value BOARD_USER. This indicates
- *  that the board level drivers should be located in a folder named "Board" located inside the application's folder.
- *
- *  When used, the driver stub files located in the DriverStubs folder should be copied to the user Board directory,
- *  and fleshed out to include the values and code needed to control the custom board hardware. Once done, the existing
- *  LUFA board level APIs (accessed in the regular LUFA/Drivers/Board/ folder) will redirect to the user board drivers,
- *  maintaining code compatibility and allowing for a different board to be selected through the project makefile with
- *  no code changes.
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_WritingBoardDrivers Writing LUFA Board Drivers
+ *
+ *  LUFA ships with several basic pre-made board drivers, to control hardware present on the supported board
+ *  hardware - such as Dataflash ICs, LEDs, Joysticks, or other hardware peripherals. When compiling an application
+ *  which makes use of one or more board drivers located in LUFA/Drivers/Board, you must also indicate what board
+ *  hardware you are using in your project makefile. This is done by defining the BOARD macro using the -D switch
+ *  passed to the compiler, with a constant of BOARD_{Name}. For example <b>-DBOARD=BOARD_USBKEY</b> instructs the
+ *  compiler to use the USBKEY board hardware drivers.
+ *
+ *  If your application does not use *any* board level drivers, you can omit the definition of the BOARD macro.
+ *  However, some users may wish to write their own custom board hardware drivers which are to remain compatible
+ *  with the LUFA hardware API. To do this, the BOARD macro should be defined to the value BOARD_USER. This indicates
+ *  that the board level drivers should be located in a folder named "Board" located inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  When used, the driver stub files located in the DriverStubs folder should be copied to the user Board directory,
+ *  and fleshed out to include the values and code needed to control the custom board hardware. Once done, the existing
+ *  LUFA board level APIs (accessed in the regular LUFA/Drivers/Board/ folder) will redirect to the user board drivers,
+ *  maintaining code compatibility and allowing for a different board to be selected through the project makefile with
+ *  no code changes.
+ */
diff --git a/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c b/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c
index abacc08ad..11ba5cc0f 100644
--- a/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c
+++ b/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c
@@ -1,95 +1,95 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "Scheduler.h"
-
-volatile SchedulerDelayCounter_t Scheduler_TickCounter;
-volatile uint8_t                 Scheduler_TotalTasks;
-
-bool Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(const uint16_t Delay, SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter)
-{
-	SchedulerDelayCounter_t CurrentTickValue_LCL;
-	SchedulerDelayCounter_t DelayCounter_LCL;
-	
-	ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
-	{
-		CurrentTickValue_LCL = Scheduler_TickCounter;
-	}
-	
-	DelayCounter_LCL = *DelayCounter;
-	
-	if (CurrentTickValue_LCL >= DelayCounter_LCL)
-	{
-		if ((CurrentTickValue_LCL - DelayCounter_LCL) >= Delay)
-		{
-			*DelayCounter = CurrentTickValue_LCL;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		if (((MAX_DELAYCTR_COUNT - DelayCounter_LCL) + CurrentTickValue_LCL) >= Delay)
-		{
-			*DelayCounter = CurrentTickValue_LCL;
-			return true;
-		}	
-	}
-	
-	return false;
-}
-
-void Scheduler_SetTaskMode(const TaskPtr_t Task, const bool TaskStatus)
-{
-	TaskEntry_t* CurrTask = &Scheduler_TaskList[0];
-					
-	while (CurrTask != &Scheduler_TaskList[Scheduler_TotalTasks])
-	{
-		if (CurrTask->Task == Task)
-		{
-			CurrTask->TaskStatus = TaskStatus;
-			break;
-		}
-		
-		CurrTask++;
-	}
-}
-
-void Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(const uint8_t GroupID, const bool TaskStatus)
-{
-	TaskEntry_t* CurrTask = &Scheduler_TaskList[0];
-					
-	while (CurrTask != &Scheduler_TaskList[Scheduler_TotalTasks])
-	{
-		if (CurrTask->GroupID == GroupID)
-		  CurrTask->TaskStatus = TaskStatus;
-		
-		CurrTask++;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "Scheduler.h"
+
+volatile SchedulerDelayCounter_t Scheduler_TickCounter;
+volatile uint8_t                 Scheduler_TotalTasks;
+
+bool Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(const uint16_t Delay, SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter)
+{
+	SchedulerDelayCounter_t CurrentTickValue_LCL;
+	SchedulerDelayCounter_t DelayCounter_LCL;
+	
+	ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
+	{
+		CurrentTickValue_LCL = Scheduler_TickCounter;
+	}
+	
+	DelayCounter_LCL = *DelayCounter;
+	
+	if (CurrentTickValue_LCL >= DelayCounter_LCL)
+	{
+		if ((CurrentTickValue_LCL - DelayCounter_LCL) >= Delay)
+		{
+			*DelayCounter = CurrentTickValue_LCL;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		if (((MAX_DELAYCTR_COUNT - DelayCounter_LCL) + CurrentTickValue_LCL) >= Delay)
+		{
+			*DelayCounter = CurrentTickValue_LCL;
+			return true;
+		}	
+	}
+	
+	return false;
+}
+
+void Scheduler_SetTaskMode(const TaskPtr_t Task, const bool TaskStatus)
+{
+	TaskEntry_t* CurrTask = &Scheduler_TaskList[0];
+					
+	while (CurrTask != &Scheduler_TaskList[Scheduler_TotalTasks])
+	{
+		if (CurrTask->Task == Task)
+		{
+			CurrTask->TaskStatus = TaskStatus;
+			break;
+		}
+		
+		CurrTask++;
+	}
+}
+
+void Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(const uint8_t GroupID, const bool TaskStatus)
+{
+	TaskEntry_t* CurrTask = &Scheduler_TaskList[0];
+					
+	while (CurrTask != &Scheduler_TaskList[Scheduler_TotalTasks])
+	{
+		if (CurrTask->GroupID == GroupID)
+		  CurrTask->TaskStatus = TaskStatus;
+		
+		CurrTask++;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h b/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h
index 024a2c22f..672af2f98 100644
--- a/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h
+++ b/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h
@@ -1,293 +1,293 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Simple round-robbin pseudo-task scheduler.
- *
- *  Simple round-robbin cooperative scheduler for use in basic projects where non real-time tasks need
- *  to be executed. Each task is executed in sequence, and can be enabled or disabled individually or as a group.
- *
- *  \deprecated This module is deprecated and will be removed in a future library release.
- */
- 
-/** @defgroup Group_Scheduler Simple Task Scheduler - LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h
- *
- *  \deprecated This module is deprecated and will be removed in a future library release.
- *
- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- *    - LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c
- *
- *  \section Module Description
- *  Simple round-robbin cooperative scheduler for use in basic projects where non real-time tasks need
- *  to be executed. Each task is executed in sequence, and can be enabled or disabled individually or as a group.
- *
- *  For a task to yield it must return, thus each task should have persistent data marked with the static attribute.
- *
- *  Usage Example:
- *  \code
- *      #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h>
- *      
- *      TASK(MyTask1);
- *      TASK(MyTask2);
- *      
- *      TASK_LIST
- *      {
- *      	{ .Task = MyTask1, .TaskStatus = TASK_RUN, .GroupID = 1  },
- *      	{ .Task = MyTask2, .TaskStatus = TASK_RUN, .GroupID = 1  },
- *      }
- *
- *      int main(void)
- *      {
- *      	Scheduler_Start();
- *      }
- *
- *      TASK(MyTask1)
- *      {
- *      	// Implementation Here
- *      }
- *
- *      TASK(MyTask2)
- *      {
- *      	// Implementation Here
- *      }
- *  \endcode
- *
- *  @{
- */
- 
-#ifndef __SCHEDULER_H__
-#define __SCHEDULER_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include <util/atomic.h>
-
-		#include "../Common/Common.h"
-
-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Creates a new scheduler task body or prototype. Should be used in the form:
-			 *  \code
-			 *      TASK(TaskName); // Prototype
-			 *
-			 *      TASK(TaskName)
-			 *      {
-			 *           // Task body
-			 *      }
-			 *  \endcode
-			 */
-			#define TASK(name)                        void name (void)
-			
-			/** Defines a task list array, containing one or more task entries of the type TaskEntry_t. Each task list
-			 *  should be encased in curly braces and ended with a comma.
-			 *
-			 *  Usage Example:
-			 *  \code
-			 *      TASK_LIST
-			 *      {
-			 *           { .Task = MyTask1, .TaskStatus = TASK_RUN, .GroupID = 1 },
-			 *           // More task entries here
-			 *      }
-			 *  \endcode
-			 */
-			#define TASK_LIST                         TaskEntry_t Scheduler_TaskList[] = 
-			
-			/** Constant, giving the maximum delay in scheduler ticks which can be stored in a variable of type
-			 *  SchedulerDelayCounter_t.
-			 */
-			#define TASK_MAX_DELAY                    (MAX_DELAYCTR_COUNT - 1)
-
-			/** Task status mode constant, for passing to Scheduler_SetTaskMode() or Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(). */
-			#define TASK_RUN                          true
-
-			/** Task status mode constant, for passing to Scheduler_SetTaskMode() or Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(). */
-			#define TASK_STOP                         false
-			
-		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-				/** Starts the scheduler in its infinite loop, executing running tasks. This should be placed at the end
-				 *  of the user application's main() function, as it can never return to the calling function.
-				 */
-				void Scheduler_Start(void);
-				
-				/** Initializes the scheduler so that the scheduler functions can be called before the scheduler itself
-				 *  is started. This must be executed before any scheduler function calls other than Scheduler_Start(),
-				 *  and can be omitted if no such functions could be called before the scheduler is started.
-				 */
-				void Scheduler_Init(void);
-			#else
-				#define Scheduler_Start()                 Scheduler_GoSchedule(TOTAL_TASKS);
-				
-				#define Scheduler_Init()                  Scheduler_InitScheduler(TOTAL_TASKS);
-			#endif
-
-		/* Type Defines: */
-			/** Type define for a pointer to a scheduler task. */
-			typedef void (*TaskPtr_t)(void);
-			
-			/** Type define for a variable which can hold a tick delay value for the scheduler up to the maximum delay
-			 *  possible.
-			 */
-			typedef uint16_t SchedulerDelayCounter_t;
-			
-			/** \brief Scheduler Task List Entry Structure.
-			 *
-			 *  Structure for holding a single task's information in the scheduler task list.
-			 */
-			typedef struct
-			{
-				TaskPtr_t Task;       /**< Pointer to the task to execute. */
-				bool      TaskStatus; /**< Status of the task (either TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP). */
-				uint8_t   GroupID;    /**< Group ID of the task so that its status can be changed as a group. */
-			} TaskEntry_t;			
-
-		/* Global Variables: */
-			/** Task entry list, containing the scheduler tasks, task statuses and group IDs. Each entry is of type
-			 *  TaskEntry_t and can be manipulated as desired, although it is preferential that the proper Scheduler
-			 *  functions should be used instead of direct manipulation.
-			 */
-			extern          TaskEntry_t               Scheduler_TaskList[];
-			
-			/** Contains the total number of tasks in the task list, irrespective of if the task's status is set to
-			 *  TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP.
-			 *
-			 *  \note This value should be treated as read-only, and never altered in user-code.
-			 */
-			extern volatile uint8_t                   Scheduler_TotalTasks;
-
-			/**  Contains the current scheduler tick count, for use with the delay functions. If the delay functions
-			 *   are used in the user code, this should be incremented each tick period so that the delays can be
-			 *   calculated.
-			 */
-			extern volatile SchedulerDelayCounter_t   Scheduler_TickCounter;
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Resets the delay counter value to the current tick count. This should be called to reset the period
-			 *  for a delay in a task which is dependant on the current tick value.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[out] DelayCounter  Counter which is storing the starting tick count for a given delay.
-			 */
-			static inline void Scheduler_ResetDelay(SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter)
-			                                        ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Scheduler_ResetDelay(SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter)
-			{
-				ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
-				{
-					*DelayCounter = Scheduler_TickCounter;
-				}
-			}
-		
-		/* Function Prototypes: */
-			/** Determines if the given tick delay has elapsed, based on the given .
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Delay         The delay to test for, measured in ticks
-			 *  \param[in] DelayCounter  The counter which is storing the starting tick value for the delay
-			 *
-			 *  \return Boolean true if the delay has elapsed, false otherwise
-			 *
-			 *  Usage Example:
-			 *  \code
-			 *      static SchedulerDelayCounter_t DelayCounter = 10000; // Force immediate run on start-up
-			 *				 
-			 *      // Task runs every 10000 ticks, 10 seconds for this demo
-			 *      if (Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(10000, &DelayCounter))
-			 *      {
-			 *           // Code to execute after delay interval elapsed here
-			 *      }
-			 *  \endcode
-			 */
-			bool Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(const uint16_t Delay,
-			                               SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter)
-										   ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
-			
-			/** Sets the task mode for a given task.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] Task        Name of the task whose status is to be changed
-			 *  \param[in] TaskStatus  New task status for the task (TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP)
-			 */
-			void Scheduler_SetTaskMode(const TaskPtr_t Task, const bool TaskStatus);
-			
-			/** Sets the task mode for a given task group ID, allowing for an entire group of tasks to have their
-			 *  statuses changed at once.
-			 *
-			 *  \param[in] GroupID     Value of the task group ID whose status is to be changed
-			 *  \param[in] TaskStatus  New task status for tasks in the specified group (TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP)
-			 */
-			void Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(const uint8_t GroupID, const bool TaskStatus);
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */		
-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-		/* Macros: */
-			#define TOTAL_TASKS                       (sizeof(Scheduler_TaskList) / sizeof(TaskEntry_t))
-			#define MAX_DELAYCTR_COUNT                0xFFFF
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			static inline void Scheduler_InitScheduler(const uint8_t TotalTasks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
-			static inline void Scheduler_InitScheduler(const uint8_t TotalTasks)
-			{
-				Scheduler_TotalTasks = TotalTasks;
-			}
-		
-			static inline void Scheduler_GoSchedule(const uint8_t TotalTasks) ATTR_NO_RETURN ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_DEPRECATED;
-			static inline void Scheduler_GoSchedule(const uint8_t TotalTasks)
-			{
-				Scheduler_InitScheduler(TotalTasks);
-
-				for (;;)
-				{
-					TaskEntry_t* CurrTask = &Scheduler_TaskList[0];
-					
-					while (CurrTask != &Scheduler_TaskList[TotalTasks])
-					{
-						if (CurrTask->TaskStatus == TASK_RUN)
-						  CurrTask->Task();
-
-						CurrTask++;
-					}
-				}
-			}
-	#endif
-		
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Simple round-robbin pseudo-task scheduler.
+ *
+ *  Simple round-robbin cooperative scheduler for use in basic projects where non real-time tasks need
+ *  to be executed. Each task is executed in sequence, and can be enabled or disabled individually or as a group.
+ *
+ *  \deprecated This module is deprecated and will be removed in a future library release.
+ */
+ 
+/** @defgroup Group_Scheduler Simple Task Scheduler - LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h
+ *
+ *  \deprecated This module is deprecated and will be removed in a future library release.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c
+ *
+ *  \section Module Description
+ *  Simple round-robbin cooperative scheduler for use in basic projects where non real-time tasks need
+ *  to be executed. Each task is executed in sequence, and can be enabled or disabled individually or as a group.
+ *
+ *  For a task to yield it must return, thus each task should have persistent data marked with the static attribute.
+ *
+ *  Usage Example:
+ *  \code
+ *      #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h>
+ *      
+ *      TASK(MyTask1);
+ *      TASK(MyTask2);
+ *      
+ *      TASK_LIST
+ *      {
+ *      	{ .Task = MyTask1, .TaskStatus = TASK_RUN, .GroupID = 1  },
+ *      	{ .Task = MyTask2, .TaskStatus = TASK_RUN, .GroupID = 1  },
+ *      }
+ *
+ *      int main(void)
+ *      {
+ *      	Scheduler_Start();
+ *      }
+ *
+ *      TASK(MyTask1)
+ *      {
+ *      	// Implementation Here
+ *      }
+ *
+ *      TASK(MyTask2)
+ *      {
+ *      	// Implementation Here
+ *      }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef __SCHEDULER_H__
+#define __SCHEDULER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include <util/atomic.h>
+
+		#include "../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Creates a new scheduler task body or prototype. Should be used in the form:
+			 *  \code
+			 *      TASK(TaskName); // Prototype
+			 *
+			 *      TASK(TaskName)
+			 *      {
+			 *           // Task body
+			 *      }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 */
+			#define TASK(name)                        void name (void)
+			
+			/** Defines a task list array, containing one or more task entries of the type TaskEntry_t. Each task list
+			 *  should be encased in curly braces and ended with a comma.
+			 *
+			 *  Usage Example:
+			 *  \code
+			 *      TASK_LIST
+			 *      {
+			 *           { .Task = MyTask1, .TaskStatus = TASK_RUN, .GroupID = 1 },
+			 *           // More task entries here
+			 *      }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 */
+			#define TASK_LIST                         TaskEntry_t Scheduler_TaskList[] = 
+			
+			/** Constant, giving the maximum delay in scheduler ticks which can be stored in a variable of type
+			 *  SchedulerDelayCounter_t.
+			 */
+			#define TASK_MAX_DELAY                    (MAX_DELAYCTR_COUNT - 1)
+
+			/** Task status mode constant, for passing to Scheduler_SetTaskMode() or Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(). */
+			#define TASK_RUN                          true
+
+			/** Task status mode constant, for passing to Scheduler_SetTaskMode() or Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(). */
+			#define TASK_STOP                         false
+			
+		/* Pseudo-Function Macros: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Starts the scheduler in its infinite loop, executing running tasks. This should be placed at the end
+				 *  of the user application's main() function, as it can never return to the calling function.
+				 */
+				void Scheduler_Start(void);
+				
+				/** Initializes the scheduler so that the scheduler functions can be called before the scheduler itself
+				 *  is started. This must be executed before any scheduler function calls other than Scheduler_Start(),
+				 *  and can be omitted if no such functions could be called before the scheduler is started.
+				 */
+				void Scheduler_Init(void);
+			#else
+				#define Scheduler_Start()                 Scheduler_GoSchedule(TOTAL_TASKS);
+				
+				#define Scheduler_Init()                  Scheduler_InitScheduler(TOTAL_TASKS);
+			#endif
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** Type define for a pointer to a scheduler task. */
+			typedef void (*TaskPtr_t)(void);
+			
+			/** Type define for a variable which can hold a tick delay value for the scheduler up to the maximum delay
+			 *  possible.
+			 */
+			typedef uint16_t SchedulerDelayCounter_t;
+			
+			/** \brief Scheduler Task List Entry Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Structure for holding a single task's information in the scheduler task list.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				TaskPtr_t Task;       /**< Pointer to the task to execute. */
+				bool      TaskStatus; /**< Status of the task (either TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP). */
+				uint8_t   GroupID;    /**< Group ID of the task so that its status can be changed as a group. */
+			} TaskEntry_t;			
+
+		/* Global Variables: */
+			/** Task entry list, containing the scheduler tasks, task statuses and group IDs. Each entry is of type
+			 *  TaskEntry_t and can be manipulated as desired, although it is preferential that the proper Scheduler
+			 *  functions should be used instead of direct manipulation.
+			 */
+			extern          TaskEntry_t               Scheduler_TaskList[];
+			
+			/** Contains the total number of tasks in the task list, irrespective of if the task's status is set to
+			 *  TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This value should be treated as read-only, and never altered in user-code.
+			 */
+			extern volatile uint8_t                   Scheduler_TotalTasks;
+
+			/**  Contains the current scheduler tick count, for use with the delay functions. If the delay functions
+			 *   are used in the user code, this should be incremented each tick period so that the delays can be
+			 *   calculated.
+			 */
+			extern volatile SchedulerDelayCounter_t   Scheduler_TickCounter;
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Resets the delay counter value to the current tick count. This should be called to reset the period
+			 *  for a delay in a task which is dependant on the current tick value.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] DelayCounter  Counter which is storing the starting tick count for a given delay.
+			 */
+			static inline void Scheduler_ResetDelay(SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter)
+			                                        ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Scheduler_ResetDelay(SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter)
+			{
+				ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
+				{
+					*DelayCounter = Scheduler_TickCounter;
+				}
+			}
+		
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Determines if the given tick delay has elapsed, based on the given .
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Delay         The delay to test for, measured in ticks
+			 *  \param[in] DelayCounter  The counter which is storing the starting tick value for the delay
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean true if the delay has elapsed, false otherwise
+			 *
+			 *  Usage Example:
+			 *  \code
+			 *      static SchedulerDelayCounter_t DelayCounter = 10000; // Force immediate run on start-up
+			 *				 
+			 *      // Task runs every 10000 ticks, 10 seconds for this demo
+			 *      if (Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(10000, &DelayCounter))
+			 *      {
+			 *           // Code to execute after delay interval elapsed here
+			 *      }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 */
+			bool Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(const uint16_t Delay,
+			                               SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter)
+										   ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			
+			/** Sets the task mode for a given task.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Task        Name of the task whose status is to be changed
+			 *  \param[in] TaskStatus  New task status for the task (TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP)
+			 */
+			void Scheduler_SetTaskMode(const TaskPtr_t Task, const bool TaskStatus);
+			
+			/** Sets the task mode for a given task group ID, allowing for an entire group of tasks to have their
+			 *  statuses changed at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] GroupID     Value of the task group ID whose status is to be changed
+			 *  \param[in] TaskStatus  New task status for tasks in the specified group (TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP)
+			 */
+			void Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(const uint8_t GroupID, const bool TaskStatus);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */		
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define TOTAL_TASKS                       (sizeof(Scheduler_TaskList) / sizeof(TaskEntry_t))
+			#define MAX_DELAYCTR_COUNT                0xFFFF
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline void Scheduler_InitScheduler(const uint8_t TotalTasks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Scheduler_InitScheduler(const uint8_t TotalTasks)
+			{
+				Scheduler_TotalTasks = TotalTasks;
+			}
+		
+			static inline void Scheduler_GoSchedule(const uint8_t TotalTasks) ATTR_NO_RETURN ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_DEPRECATED;
+			static inline void Scheduler_GoSchedule(const uint8_t TotalTasks)
+			{
+				Scheduler_InitScheduler(TotalTasks);
+
+				for (;;)
+				{
+					TaskEntry_t* CurrTask = &Scheduler_TaskList[0];
+					
+					while (CurrTask != &Scheduler_TaskList[TotalTasks])
+					{
+						if (CurrTask->TaskStatus == TASK_RUN)
+						  CurrTask->Task();
+
+						CurrTask++;
+					}
+				}
+			}
+	#endif
+		
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/LUFA/Version.h b/LUFA/Version.h
index f36e25d85..986ad1e7f 100644
--- a/LUFA/Version.h
+++ b/LUFA/Version.h
@@ -1,51 +1,51 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  \brief LUFA library version constants.
- *
- *  Version constants for informational purposes and version-specific macro creation. This header file contains the
- *  current LUFA version number in several forms, for use in the user-application (for example, for printing out 
- *  whilst debugging, or for testing for version compatibility).
- */
-
-#ifndef __LUFA_VERSION_H__
-#define __LUFA_VERSION_H__
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Indicates the version number of the library, as an integer. */
-			#define LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER     0x000000
-
-			/** Indicates the version number of the library, as a string. */
-			#define LUFA_VERSION_STRING      "XXXXXX"
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  \brief LUFA library version constants.
+ *
+ *  Version constants for informational purposes and version-specific macro creation. This header file contains the
+ *  current LUFA version number in several forms, for use in the user-application (for example, for printing out 
+ *  whilst debugging, or for testing for version compatibility).
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_VERSION_H__
+#define __LUFA_VERSION_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the version number of the library, as an integer. */
+			#define LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER     0x000000
+
+			/** Indicates the version number of the library, as a string. */
+			#define LUFA_VERSION_STRING      "XXXXXX"
+
+#endif
diff --git a/LUFA/makefile b/LUFA/makefile
index 2a106c176..804e721e2 100644
--- a/LUFA/makefile
+++ b/LUFA/makefile
@@ -1,58 +1,58 @@
-#
-#             LUFA Library
-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-#              
-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-#      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-#
-
-# Makefile for the LUFA library itself.
-
-LUFA_SRC_FILES =     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c          \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c           \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c          \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c          \
-                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c       \
-                     ./Drivers/Board/Temperature.c               \
-                     ./Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-                     ./Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-
-LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@echo
-	@echo Generating LUFA event name list...
-	@$(shell) cat `find ./ -name "*.h"` | grep -E "EVENT_[^\(]*\(" | \
-	              sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	              cut -d'(' -f1 | sort | uniq | tee LUFA_Events.lst
-				  
-all: LUFA_Events.lst
-
-clean:
-	rm -f $(LUFA_SRC_FILES:%.c=%.o)
-	rm -f LUFA_Events.lst
-	
-clean_list:
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Library Documentation...
-	( cat Doxygen.conf ; echo "PROJECT_NUMBER=`grep LUFA_VERSION_STRING Version.h | cut -d'"' -f2`" ) | doxygen -
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+#              
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+#
+
+# Makefile for the LUFA library itself.
+
+LUFA_SRC_FILES =     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/Audio.c          \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c           \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c          \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/Printer.c          \
+                     ./Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImage.c       \
+                     ./Drivers/Board/Temperature.c               \
+                     ./Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+                     ./Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+
+LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@echo
+	@echo Generating LUFA event name list...
+	@$(shell) cat `find ./ -name "*.h"` | grep -E "EVENT_[^\(]*\(" | \
+	              sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	              cut -d'(' -f1 | sort | uniq | tee LUFA_Events.lst
+				  
+all: LUFA_Events.lst
+
+clean:
+	rm -f $(LUFA_SRC_FILES:%.c=%.o)
+	rm -f LUFA_Events.lst
+	
+clean_list:
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Library Documentation...
+	( cat Doxygen.conf ; echo "PROJECT_NUMBER=`grep LUFA_VERSION_STRING Version.h | cut -d'"' -f2`" ) | doxygen -
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.c b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.c
index cea1161d5..88403b269 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.c
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.c
@@ -1,131 +1,131 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the AVRISP project. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "AVRISP.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Process_AVRISP_Commands();
-		
-		V2Params_UpdateParamValues();
-		
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-	V2Protocol_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	/* Setup AVRISP data Endpoints */
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-
-	#if defined(LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT)
-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
-	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	}
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Processes incoming V2 Protocol commands from the host, returning a response when required. */
-void Process_AVRISP_Commands(void)
-{
-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Check to see if a V2 Protocol command has been received */
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
-
-		/* Pass off processing of the V2 Protocol command to the V2 Protocol handler */
-		V2Protocol_ProcessCommand();
-
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	}
-}
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AVRISP project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AVRISP.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Process_AVRISP_Commands();
+		
+		V2Params_UpdateParamValues();
+		
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	V2Protocol_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Setup AVRISP data Endpoints */
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+
+	#if defined(LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT)
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                             ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+	                                 ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE)))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	}
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Processes incoming V2 Protocol commands from the host, returning a response when required. */
+void Process_AVRISP_Commands(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Check to see if a V2 Protocol command has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+
+		/* Pass off processing of the V2 Protocol command to the V2 Protocol handler */
+		V2Protocol_ProcessCommand();
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.h
index c9f3263ad..409b14744 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.h
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for AVRISP.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _AVRISP_H_
-#define _AVRISP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#if defined(ADC)
-			#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
-		#endif
-		
-		#include "Lib/V2Protocol.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void Process_AVRISP_Commands(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AVRISP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AVRISP_H_
+#define _AVRISP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#if defined(ADC)
+			#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#endif
+		
+		#include "Lib/V2Protocol.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void Process_AVRISP_Commands(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.txt b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.txt
index 034df6717..6483cbd03 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.txt
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP.txt
@@ -1,269 +1,269 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage AVRISP MKII Programmer Project
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs (8KB versions with reduced features only)
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- * <table>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *   <td>Device</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *   <td>Vendor Specific Class</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr> 
- *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *   <td>N/A</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *   <td>Atmel AVRISP MKII Protocol Specification</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *  </tr>
- * </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Firmware for an AVRStudio compatible AVRISP-MKII clone programmer. This project will enable the USB AVR series of
- *  microcontrollers to act as a clone of the official Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer, usable within AVRStudio. In its
- *  most basic form, it allows for the programming of 5V AVRs from within AVRStudio with no special hardware other than
- *  the USB AVR and the parts needed for the USB interface. If the user desires, more advanced circuits incorporating
- *  level conversion can be made to allow for the programming of 3.3V AVR designs.
- *
- *  This device spoofs Atmel's official AVRISP-MKII device PID so that it remains compatible with Atmel's AVRISP-MKII
- *  drivers. When prompted, direct your OS to install Atmel's AVRISP-MKII drivers provided with AVRStudio.
- *
- *  Note that this design currently has the following limitations:
- *    - Minimum ISP target clock speed of 500KHz due to hardware SPI module prescaler limitations
- *    - No reversed/shorted target connector detection and notification
- *    - A seperate header is required for each of the ISP, PDI and TPI programming protocols that the user wishes to use
- *
- *  On AVR models with an ADC converter, AVCC should be tied to 5V (e.g. VBUS) and the VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL token should be
- *  set to an appropriate ADC channel number in the project makefile for VTARGET detection to operate correctly. On models
- *  without an ADC converter, VTARGET will report a fixed 5V level at all times.
- *
- *  While this application can be compiled for USB AVRs with as little as 8KB of FLASH, for full functionality 16KB or more
- *  of FLASH is required. On 8KB devices, ISP or PDI/TPI programming support can be disabled to reduce program size.
- *
- *  \section Sec_ISP ISP Connections
- *  Connections to the device for SPI programming (when enabled):
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Programmer Pin:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Target Device Pin:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>ISP 6 Pin Layout:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MISO</td>
- *    <td>PDO</td>
- *    <td>1</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
- *    <td>VTARGET</td>
- *    <td>2</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>SCLK</td>
- *    <td>SCLK</td>
- *    <td>3</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MOSI</td>
- *    <td>PDI</td>
- *    <td>4</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>PORTx.y <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
- *    <td>/RESET</td>
- *    <td>5</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>GND</td>
- *    <td>GND</td>
- *    <td>6</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  In addition, the AVR's XCK pin will generate a .5MHz clock when SPI programming is used, to act as an external
- *  device clock if the fuses have been mis-set. To use the recovery clock, connect XCK to the target AVR's XTAL1
- *  pin, and set the ISP programming speed to 125KHz or below.
- *
- *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref SSec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
- *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>See AUX line related tokens in the \ref SSec_Options section</i>
- *
- *  \section Sec_PDI PDI Connections
- *  Connections to the device for PDI programming<b><sup>1</sup></b> (when enabled):
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Programmer Pin:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Target Device Pin:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>PDI 6 Pin Layout:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Tx/Rx <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
- *    <td>DATA</td>
- *    <td>1</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
- *    <td>VTARGET</td>
- *    <td>2</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *    <td>3</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *    <td>4</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>XCLK</td>
- *    <td>CLOCK</td>
- *    <td>5</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>GND</td>
- *    <td>GND</td>
- *    <td>6</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref SSec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
- *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>The AVR's Tx and Rx become the DATA line when connected together via a pair of 220 ohm resistors</i> \n
- *
- *  \section Sec_TPI TPI Connections
- *  Connections to the device for TPI programming<b><sup>1</sup></b> (when enabled):
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Programmer Pin:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Target Device Pin:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>TPI 6 Pin Layout:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Tx/Rx <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
- *    <td>DATA</td>
- *    <td>1</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
- *    <td>VTARGET</td>
- *    <td>2</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>XCLK <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
- *    <td>CLOCK</td>
- *    <td>3</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *    <td>4</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>PORTx.y <b><sup>3</sup></b></td>
- *    <td>/RESET</td>
- *    <td>5</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>GND</td>
- *    <td>GND</td>
- *    <td>6</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref SSec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
- *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>The AVR's Tx and Rx become the DATA line when connected together via a pair of 220 ohm resistors</i> \n
- *  <b><sup>3</sup></b> <i>See AUX line related tokens in the \ref SSec_Options section</i>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUX_LINE_PORT</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>PORT register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
- *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUX_LINE_PIN</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>PIN register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
- *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUX_LINE_DDR</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>DDR register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
- *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AUX_LINE_MASK</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Mask for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
- *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <b>Must not be the AVR's /SS pin</b>. <i>Ignored when
- *        compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>ADC channel number (on supported AVRs) to use for VTARGET level detection, if NO_VTARGET_DETECT is not defined.</td> 
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Define to enable SPI programming protocol support. <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>  
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Define to enable PDI and TPI programming protocol support. <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>  
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>NO_VTARGET_DETECT</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Define to disable VTARGET sampling and reporting on AVR models with an ADC converter. This will cause the programmer
- *        to report a fixed 5V target voltage to the host regardless of the real target voltage.</td>  
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Define to switch to a non-standard endpoint scheme, breaking compatibility with AVRStudio under Windows but making
- *        the code compatible with Windows builds of avrdude using the libUSB driver. Linux platforms are not affected by this
- *        option.
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage AVRISP MKII Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs (8KB versions with reduced features only)
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Vendor Specific Class</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr> 
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Atmel AVRISP MKII Protocol Specification</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Firmware for an AVRStudio compatible AVRISP-MKII clone programmer. This project will enable the USB AVR series of
+ *  microcontrollers to act as a clone of the official Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer, usable within AVRStudio. In its
+ *  most basic form, it allows for the programming of 5V AVRs from within AVRStudio with no special hardware other than
+ *  the USB AVR and the parts needed for the USB interface. If the user desires, more advanced circuits incorporating
+ *  level conversion can be made to allow for the programming of 3.3V AVR designs.
+ *
+ *  This device spoofs Atmel's official AVRISP-MKII device PID so that it remains compatible with Atmel's AVRISP-MKII
+ *  drivers. When prompted, direct your OS to install Atmel's AVRISP-MKII drivers provided with AVRStudio.
+ *
+ *  Note that this design currently has the following limitations:
+ *    - Minimum ISP target clock speed of 500KHz due to hardware SPI module prescaler limitations
+ *    - No reversed/shorted target connector detection and notification
+ *    - A seperate header is required for each of the ISP, PDI and TPI programming protocols that the user wishes to use
+ *
+ *  On AVR models with an ADC converter, AVCC should be tied to 5V (e.g. VBUS) and the VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL token should be
+ *  set to an appropriate ADC channel number in the project makefile for VTARGET detection to operate correctly. On models
+ *  without an ADC converter, VTARGET will report a fixed 5V level at all times.
+ *
+ *  While this application can be compiled for USB AVRs with as little as 8KB of FLASH, for full functionality 16KB or more
+ *  of FLASH is required. On 8KB devices, ISP or PDI/TPI programming support can be disabled to reduce program size.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ISP ISP Connections
+ *  Connections to the device for SPI programming (when enabled):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Programmer Pin:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Target Device Pin:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>ISP 6 Pin Layout:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MISO</td>
+ *    <td>PDO</td>
+ *    <td>1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>VTARGET</td>
+ *    <td>2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SCLK</td>
+ *    <td>SCLK</td>
+ *    <td>3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MOSI</td>
+ *    <td>PDI</td>
+ *    <td>4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PORTx.y <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>/RESET</td>
+ *    <td>5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  In addition, the AVR's XCK pin will generate a .5MHz clock when SPI programming is used, to act as an external
+ *  device clock if the fuses have been mis-set. To use the recovery clock, connect XCK to the target AVR's XTAL1
+ *  pin, and set the ISP programming speed to 125KHz or below.
+ *
+ *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref SSec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>See AUX line related tokens in the \ref SSec_Options section</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PDI PDI Connections
+ *  Connections to the device for PDI programming<b><sup>1</sup></b> (when enabled):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Programmer Pin:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Target Device Pin:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>PDI 6 Pin Layout:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Tx/Rx <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>DATA</td>
+ *    <td>1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>VTARGET</td>
+ *    <td>2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>XCLK</td>
+ *    <td>CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref SSec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>The AVR's Tx and Rx become the DATA line when connected together via a pair of 220 ohm resistors</i> \n
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TPI TPI Connections
+ *  Connections to the device for TPI programming<b><sup>1</sup></b> (when enabled):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Programmer Pin:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Target Device Pin:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>TPI 6 Pin Layout:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Tx/Rx <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>DATA</td>
+ *    <td>1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>VTARGET</td>
+ *    <td>2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>XCLK <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PORTx.y <b><sup>3</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>/RESET</td>
+ *    <td>5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref SSec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>The AVR's Tx and Rx become the DATA line when connected together via a pair of 220 ohm resistors</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>3</sup></b> <i>See AUX line related tokens in the \ref SSec_Options section</i>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_PORT</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>PORT register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_PIN</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>PIN register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_DDR</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>DDR register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_MASK</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <b>Must not be the AVR's /SS pin</b>. <i>Ignored when
+ *        compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>ADC channel number (on supported AVRs) to use for VTARGET level detection, if NO_VTARGET_DETECT is not defined.</td> 
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Define to enable SPI programming protocol support. <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>  
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Define to enable PDI and TPI programming protocol support. <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>  
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_VTARGET_DETECT</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable VTARGET sampling and reporting on AVR models with an ADC converter. This will cause the programmer
+ *        to report a fixed 5V target voltage to the host regardless of the real target voltage.</td>  
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Define to switch to a non-standard endpoint scheme, breaking compatibility with AVRStudio under Windows but making
+ *        the code compatible with Windows builds of avrdude using the libUSB driver. Linux platforms are not affected by this
+ *        option.
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Descriptors.c b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Descriptors.c
index af28b4b30..a57ad06c3 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,219 +1,219 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0xFF,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2104,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = 0x03,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-
-	.AVRISP_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0xFF,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.AVRISP_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(22), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA AVRISP MkII Clone"
-};
-
-/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a
- *  series of uppercase hexadecimal digits.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM SerialString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"0000A00128255"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-	
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x03:
-					Address = (void*)&SerialString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&SerialString.Header.Size);
-					break;					
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0xFF,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2104,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = 0x03,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0xFF,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(22), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA AVRISP MkII Clone"
+};
+
+/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a
+ *  series of uppercase hexadecimal digits.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM SerialString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"0000A00128255"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+	
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x03:
+					Address = (void*)&SerialString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&SerialString.Header.Size);
+					break;					
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Descriptors.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Descriptors.h
index 3a4828364..7415d8138 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#if !defined(LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT)
-			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */
-			#define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM      2
-
-			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */
-			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM       2
-		#else
-			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */
-			#define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM      2
-
-			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */
-			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM       3
-		#endif
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the AVRISP data endpoint. */
-		#define AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE             64
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               AVRISP_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if !defined(LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT)
+			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM      2
+
+			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM       2
+		#else
+			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM      2
+
+			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM       3
+		#endif
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the AVRISP data endpoint. */
+		#define AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE             64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               AVRISP_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Doxygen.conf
index 643c799a7..8274d0004 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c
index 9d0a26c33..a16504da1 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c
@@ -1,545 +1,545 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  ISP Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol wrapped ISP commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
- */
-
-#include "ISPProtocol.h"
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP command, which attempts to enter programming mode on
- *  the attached device, returning success or failure back to the host.
- */
-void ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(void)
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t TimeoutMS;
-		uint8_t PinStabDelayMS;
-		uint8_t ExecutionDelayMS;
-		uint8_t SynchLoops;
-		uint8_t ByteDelay;
-		uint8_t PollValue;
-		uint8_t PollIndex;
-		uint8_t EnterProgBytes[4];
-	} Enter_ISP_Params;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Enter_ISP_Params, sizeof(Enter_ISP_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-
-	uint8_t ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_FAILED;
-	
-	CurrentAddress = 0;
-	
-	/* Set up the synchronous USART to generate the recovery clock on XCK pin */
-	UBRR1  = (F_CPU / 500000UL);
-	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
-	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
-	DDRD  |= (1 << 5);
-
-	/* Perform execution delay, initialize SPI bus */
-	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.ExecutionDelayMS); 
-	SPI_Init(ISPTarget_GetSPIPrescalerMask() | SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
-
-	/* Continuously attempt to synchronize with the target until either the number of attempts specified
-	 * by the host has exceeded, or the the device sends back the expected response values */
-	while (Enter_ISP_Params.SynchLoops-- && (ResponseStatus == STATUS_CMD_FAILED) && TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	{
-		uint8_t ResponseBytes[4];
-
-		ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(true);
-		ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS);
-
-		for (uint8_t RByte = 0; RByte < sizeof(ResponseBytes); RByte++)
-		{
-			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.ByteDelay);
-			ResponseBytes[RByte] = SPI_TransferByte(Enter_ISP_Params.EnterProgBytes[RByte]);
-		}
-		
-		/* Check if polling disabled, or if the polled value matches the expected value */
-		if (!(Enter_ISP_Params.PollIndex) || (ResponseBytes[Enter_ISP_Params.PollIndex - 1] == Enter_ISP_Params.PollValue))
-		{
-			ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(false);
-			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS);
-		}
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseStatus);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_LEAVE_ISP command, which releases the target from programming mode. */
-void ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(void)
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t PreDelayMS;
-		uint8_t PostDelayMS;
-	} Leave_ISP_Params;
-
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Leave_ISP_Params, sizeof(Leave_ISP_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-
-	/* Perform pre-exit delay, release the target /RESET, disable the SPI bus and perform the post-exit delay */
-	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Leave_ISP_Params.PreDelayMS);
-	ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(false);
-	SPI_ShutDown();
-	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Leave_ISP_Params.PostDelayMS);
-
-	/* Turn off the synchronous USART to terminate the recovery clock on XCK pin */
-	UBRR1  = (F_CPU / 500000UL);
-	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
-	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
-	DDRD  &= ~(1 << 5);
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP and CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP commands, writing out bytes,
- *  words or pages of data to the attached device.
- *
- *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
- */
-void ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(uint8_t V2Command)
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint16_t BytesToWrite;
-		uint8_t  ProgrammingMode;
-		uint8_t  DelayMS;
-		uint8_t  ProgrammingCommands[3];
-		uint8_t  PollValue1;
-		uint8_t  PollValue2;
-		uint8_t  ProgData[256]; // Note, the Jungo driver has a very short ACK timeout period, need to buffer the
-	} Write_Memory_Params;      // whole page and ACK the packet as fast as possible to prevent it from aborting
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_Memory_Params, (sizeof(Write_Memory_Params) -
-	                                               sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData)), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-
-	Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite = SwapEndian_16(Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite);
-	
-	if (Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite > sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData))
-	{
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-		Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-
-		Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
-		Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_Memory_Params.ProgData, Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-
-	uint8_t  ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;	
-	uint16_t PollAddress       = 0;
-	uint8_t  PollValue         = (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) ? Write_Memory_Params.PollValue1 :
-	                                                                    Write_Memory_Params.PollValue2;
-	uint8_t* NextWriteByte = Write_Memory_Params.ProgData;
-
-	/* Check to see if the host has issued a SET ADDRESS command and we haven't sent a
-	 * LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command (if needed, used when operating beyond the 128KB
-	 * FLASH barrier) */
-	if (MustSetAddress)
-	{
-		if (CurrentAddress & (1UL << 31))
-		  ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress();
-
-		MustSetAddress = false;
-	}
-
-	/* Check the programming mode desired by the host, either Paged or Word memory writes */
-	if (Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK)
-	{
-		uint16_t StartAddress = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF);
-	
-		/* Paged mode memory programming */
-		for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite; CurrentByte++)
-		{
-			bool    IsOddByte   = (CurrentByte & 0x01);
-			uint8_t ByteToWrite = *(NextWriteByte++);
-		
-			SPI_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0]);
-			SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8);
-			SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF);
-			SPI_SendByte(ByteToWrite);
-			
-			/* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the write command based on if we are writing a high
-			 * or low byte at the current word address */
-			if (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP)
-			  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0] ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
-
-			/* Check to see the write completion method, to see if we have a valid polling address */
-			if (!(PollAddress) && (ByteToWrite != PollValue))
-			{
-				if (IsOddByte && (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP))
-				  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2] |= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
-
-				PollAddress = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF);				
-			}		
-
-			if (IsOddByte || (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP))
-			  CurrentAddress++;
-		}
-		
-		/* If the current page must be committed, send the PROGRAM PAGE command to the target */
-		if (Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK)
-		{
-			SPI_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[1]);
-			SPI_SendByte(StartAddress >> 8);
-			SPI_SendByte(StartAddress & 0xFF);
-			SPI_SendByte(0x00);
-			
-			/* Check if polling is possible, if not switch to timed delay mode */
-			if (!(PollAddress))
-			{
-				Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode &= ~PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK;
-				Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode |=  PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK;				
-			}
-
-			ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode, PollAddress, PollValue,
-			                                                  Write_Memory_Params.DelayMS, Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2]);
-		}
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Word/byte mode memory programming */
-		for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite; CurrentByte++)
-		{
-			bool    IsOddByte   = (CurrentByte & 0x01);
-			uint8_t ByteToWrite = *(NextWriteByte++);
-			  
-			SPI_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0]);
-			SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8);
-			SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF);
-			SPI_SendByte(ByteToWrite);
-			
-			/* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the write command based on if we are writing a high
-			 * or low byte at the current word address */
-			if (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP)
-			  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0] ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
-
-			if (ByteToWrite != PollValue)
-			{
-				if (IsOddByte && (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP))
-				  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2] |= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
-				  
-				PollAddress = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF);
-			}
-
-			if (IsOddByte || (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP))
-			  CurrentAddress++;
-			
-			ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode, PollAddress, PollValue,
-			                                                  Write_Memory_Params.DelayMS, Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2]);
-			  
-			if (ProgrammingStatus != STATUS_CMD_OK)
-			  break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ProgrammingStatus);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP and CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP commands, reading in bytes,
- *  words or pages of data from the attached device.
- *
- *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
- */
-void ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(uint8_t V2Command)
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint16_t BytesToRead;
-		uint8_t  ReadMemoryCommand;
-	} Read_Memory_Params;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Read_Memory_Params, sizeof(Read_Memory_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead = SwapEndian_16(Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead);
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-	
-	/* Check to see if the host has issued a SET ADDRESS command and we haven't sent a
-	 * LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command (if needed, used when operating beyond the 128KB
-	 * FLASH barrier) */
-	if (MustSetAddress)
-	{
-		if (CurrentAddress & (1UL << 31))
-		  ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress();
-
-		MustSetAddress = false;
-	}
-
-	/* Read each byte from the device and write them to the packet for the host */
-	for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead; CurrentByte++)
-	{
-		/* Read the next byte from the desired memory space in the device */
-		SPI_SendByte(Read_Memory_Params.ReadMemoryCommand);
-		SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8);
-		SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF);
-		Endpoint_Write_Byte(SPI_ReceiveByte());
-		
-		/* Check if the endpoint bank is currently full, if so send the packet */
-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-		{
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
-		}
-		
-		/* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the read command based on if we are reading a high
-		 * or low byte at the current word address */
-		if (V2Command == CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP)
-		  Read_Memory_Params.ReadMemoryCommand ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
-
-		/* Only increment the current address if we have read both bytes in the current word when in FLASH
-		 * read mode, or for each byte when in EEPROM read mode */		 
-		if (((CurrentByte & 0x01) && (V2Command == CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP)) || (V2Command == CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP))
-		  CurrentAddress++;
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-
-	bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Ensure last packet is a short packet to terminate the transfer */
-	if (IsEndpointFull)
-	{
-		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();	
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();	
-	}
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_CHI_ERASE_ISP command, clearing the target's FLASH memory. */
-void ISPProtocol_ChipErase(void)
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t EraseDelayMS;
-		uint8_t PollMethod;
-		uint8_t EraseCommandBytes[4];
-	} Erase_Chip_Params;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Erase_Chip_Params, sizeof(Erase_Chip_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	uint8_t ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
-	
-	/* Send the chip erase commands as given by the host to the device */
-	for (uint8_t SByte = 0; SByte < sizeof(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseCommandBytes); SByte++)
-	  SPI_SendByte(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseCommandBytes[SByte]);
-
-	/* Use appropriate command completion check as given by the host (delay or busy polling) */
-	if (!(Erase_Chip_Params.PollMethod))
-	  ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseDelayMS);
-	else
-	  ResponseStatus = ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy();
-	  
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseStatus);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP, CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP, CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP and CMD_READ_OSCCAL commands,
- *  reading the requested configuration byte from the device.
- *
- *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
- */
-void ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(uint8_t V2Command)
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t RetByte;
-		uint8_t ReadCommandBytes[4];
-	} Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params, sizeof(Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-
-	uint8_t ResponseBytes[4];
-
-	/* Send the Fuse or Lock byte read commands as given by the host to the device, store response */
-	for (uint8_t RByte = 0; RByte < sizeof(ResponseBytes); RByte++)
-	  ResponseBytes[RByte] = SPI_TransferByte(Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params.ReadCommandBytes[RByte]);
-		
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseBytes[Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params.RetByte - 1]);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_WRITE_FUSE_ISP and CMD_WRITE_LOCK_ISP commands, writing the requested configuration
- *  byte to the device.
- *
- *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
- */
-void ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(uint8_t V2Command)
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t WriteCommandBytes[4];
-	} Write_FuseLockSig_Params;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_FuseLockSig_Params, sizeof(Write_FuseLockSig_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-
-	/* Send the Fuse or Lock byte program commands as given by the host to the device */
-	for (uint8_t SByte = 0; SByte < sizeof(Write_FuseLockSig_Params.WriteCommandBytes); SByte++)
-	  SPI_SendByte(Write_FuseLockSig_Params.WriteCommandBytes[SByte]);
-		
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_SPI_MULTI command, writing and reading arbitrary SPI data to and from the attached device. */
-void ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(void)
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t TxBytes;
-		uint8_t RxBytes;
-		uint8_t RxStartAddr;
-		uint8_t TxData[255];
-	} SPI_Multi_Params;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SPI_Multi_Params, (sizeof(SPI_Multi_Params) - sizeof(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData)), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SPI_Multi_Params.TxData, SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_SPI_MULTI);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-
-	uint8_t CurrTxPos = 0;
-	uint8_t CurrRxPos = 0;
-
-	/* Write out bytes to transmit until the start of the bytes to receive is met */
-	while (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.RxStartAddr)
-	{
-		if (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes)
-		  SPI_SendByte(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData[CurrTxPos]);
-		else
-		  SPI_SendByte(0);
-		
-		CurrTxPos++;
-	}
-
-	/* Transmit remaining bytes with padding as needed, read in response bytes */
-	while (CurrRxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.RxBytes)
-	{
-		if (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes)
-		  Endpoint_Write_Byte(SPI_TransferByte(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData[CurrTxPos++]));
-		else
-		  Endpoint_Write_Byte(SPI_ReceiveByte());
-		  
-		/* Check to see if we have filled the endpoint bank and need to send the packet */
-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-		{
-			Endpoint_ClearIN();
-			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
-		}
-		
-		CurrRxPos++;
-	}	
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-
-	bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Ensure last packet is a short packet to terminate the transfer */
-	if (IsEndpointFull)
-	{
-		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();	
-		Endpoint_ClearIN();
-		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();	
-	}
-}
-
-/** Blocking delay for a given number of milliseconds.
- *
- *  \param[in] DelayMS  Number of milliseconds to delay for
- */
-void ISPProtocol_DelayMS(uint8_t DelayMS)
-{
-	while (DelayMS-- && TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	{
-		if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-		  TimeoutMSRemaining--;
-		  
-		_delay_ms(1);
-	}
-}
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  ISP Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol wrapped ISP commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
+ */
+
+#include "ISPProtocol.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP command, which attempts to enter programming mode on
+ *  the attached device, returning success or failure back to the host.
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t TimeoutMS;
+		uint8_t PinStabDelayMS;
+		uint8_t ExecutionDelayMS;
+		uint8_t SynchLoops;
+		uint8_t ByteDelay;
+		uint8_t PollValue;
+		uint8_t PollIndex;
+		uint8_t EnterProgBytes[4];
+	} Enter_ISP_Params;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Enter_ISP_Params, sizeof(Enter_ISP_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_FAILED;
+	
+	CurrentAddress = 0;
+	
+	/* Set up the synchronous USART to generate the recovery clock on XCK pin */
+	UBRR1  = (F_CPU / 500000UL);
+	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
+	DDRD  |= (1 << 5);
+
+	/* Perform execution delay, initialize SPI bus */
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.ExecutionDelayMS); 
+	SPI_Init(ISPTarget_GetSPIPrescalerMask() | SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+
+	/* Continuously attempt to synchronize with the target until either the number of attempts specified
+	 * by the host has exceeded, or the the device sends back the expected response values */
+	while (Enter_ISP_Params.SynchLoops-- && (ResponseStatus == STATUS_CMD_FAILED) && TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	{
+		uint8_t ResponseBytes[4];
+
+		ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(true);
+		ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS);
+
+		for (uint8_t RByte = 0; RByte < sizeof(ResponseBytes); RByte++)
+		{
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.ByteDelay);
+			ResponseBytes[RByte] = SPI_TransferByte(Enter_ISP_Params.EnterProgBytes[RByte]);
+		}
+		
+		/* Check if polling disabled, or if the polled value matches the expected value */
+		if (!(Enter_ISP_Params.PollIndex) || (ResponseBytes[Enter_ISP_Params.PollIndex - 1] == Enter_ISP_Params.PollValue))
+		{
+			ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(false);
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS);
+		}
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_LEAVE_ISP command, which releases the target from programming mode. */
+void ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t PreDelayMS;
+		uint8_t PostDelayMS;
+	} Leave_ISP_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Leave_ISP_Params, sizeof(Leave_ISP_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	/* Perform pre-exit delay, release the target /RESET, disable the SPI bus and perform the post-exit delay */
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Leave_ISP_Params.PreDelayMS);
+	ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(false);
+	SPI_ShutDown();
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Leave_ISP_Params.PostDelayMS);
+
+	/* Turn off the synchronous USART to terminate the recovery clock on XCK pin */
+	UBRR1  = (F_CPU / 500000UL);
+	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
+	DDRD  &= ~(1 << 5);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP and CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP commands, writing out bytes,
+ *  words or pages of data to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint16_t BytesToWrite;
+		uint8_t  ProgrammingMode;
+		uint8_t  DelayMS;
+		uint8_t  ProgrammingCommands[3];
+		uint8_t  PollValue1;
+		uint8_t  PollValue2;
+		uint8_t  ProgData[256]; // Note, the Jungo driver has a very short ACK timeout period, need to buffer the
+	} Write_Memory_Params;      // whole page and ACK the packet as fast as possible to prevent it from aborting
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_Memory_Params, (sizeof(Write_Memory_Params) -
+	                                               sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData)), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+
+	Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite = SwapEndian_16(Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite);
+	
+	if (Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite > sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+		Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+		Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
+		Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_Memory_Params.ProgData, Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t  ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;	
+	uint16_t PollAddress       = 0;
+	uint8_t  PollValue         = (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) ? Write_Memory_Params.PollValue1 :
+	                                                                    Write_Memory_Params.PollValue2;
+	uint8_t* NextWriteByte = Write_Memory_Params.ProgData;
+
+	/* Check to see if the host has issued a SET ADDRESS command and we haven't sent a
+	 * LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command (if needed, used when operating beyond the 128KB
+	 * FLASH barrier) */
+	if (MustSetAddress)
+	{
+		if (CurrentAddress & (1UL << 31))
+		  ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress();
+
+		MustSetAddress = false;
+	}
+
+	/* Check the programming mode desired by the host, either Paged or Word memory writes */
+	if (Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK)
+	{
+		uint16_t StartAddress = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF);
+	
+		/* Paged mode memory programming */
+		for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite; CurrentByte++)
+		{
+			bool    IsOddByte   = (CurrentByte & 0x01);
+			uint8_t ByteToWrite = *(NextWriteByte++);
+		
+			SPI_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0]);
+			SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8);
+			SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF);
+			SPI_SendByte(ByteToWrite);
+			
+			/* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the write command based on if we are writing a high
+			 * or low byte at the current word address */
+			if (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP)
+			  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0] ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+
+			/* Check to see the write completion method, to see if we have a valid polling address */
+			if (!(PollAddress) && (ByteToWrite != PollValue))
+			{
+				if (IsOddByte && (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP))
+				  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2] |= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+
+				PollAddress = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF);				
+			}		
+
+			if (IsOddByte || (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP))
+			  CurrentAddress++;
+		}
+		
+		/* If the current page must be committed, send the PROGRAM PAGE command to the target */
+		if (Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK)
+		{
+			SPI_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[1]);
+			SPI_SendByte(StartAddress >> 8);
+			SPI_SendByte(StartAddress & 0xFF);
+			SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+			
+			/* Check if polling is possible, if not switch to timed delay mode */
+			if (!(PollAddress))
+			{
+				Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode &= ~PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK;
+				Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode |=  PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK;				
+			}
+
+			ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode, PollAddress, PollValue,
+			                                                  Write_Memory_Params.DelayMS, Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2]);
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Word/byte mode memory programming */
+		for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite; CurrentByte++)
+		{
+			bool    IsOddByte   = (CurrentByte & 0x01);
+			uint8_t ByteToWrite = *(NextWriteByte++);
+			  
+			SPI_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0]);
+			SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8);
+			SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF);
+			SPI_SendByte(ByteToWrite);
+			
+			/* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the write command based on if we are writing a high
+			 * or low byte at the current word address */
+			if (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP)
+			  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0] ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+
+			if (ByteToWrite != PollValue)
+			{
+				if (IsOddByte && (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP))
+				  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2] |= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+				  
+				PollAddress = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF);
+			}
+
+			if (IsOddByte || (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP))
+			  CurrentAddress++;
+			
+			ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode, PollAddress, PollValue,
+			                                                  Write_Memory_Params.DelayMS, Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2]);
+			  
+			if (ProgrammingStatus != STATUS_CMD_OK)
+			  break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ProgrammingStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP and CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP commands, reading in bytes,
+ *  words or pages of data from the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint16_t BytesToRead;
+		uint8_t  ReadMemoryCommand;
+	} Read_Memory_Params;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Read_Memory_Params, sizeof(Read_Memory_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead = SwapEndian_16(Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead);
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	
+	/* Check to see if the host has issued a SET ADDRESS command and we haven't sent a
+	 * LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command (if needed, used when operating beyond the 128KB
+	 * FLASH barrier) */
+	if (MustSetAddress)
+	{
+		if (CurrentAddress & (1UL << 31))
+		  ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress();
+
+		MustSetAddress = false;
+	}
+
+	/* Read each byte from the device and write them to the packet for the host */
+	for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead; CurrentByte++)
+	{
+		/* Read the next byte from the desired memory space in the device */
+		SPI_SendByte(Read_Memory_Params.ReadMemoryCommand);
+		SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8);
+		SPI_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF);
+		Endpoint_Write_Byte(SPI_ReceiveByte());
+		
+		/* Check if the endpoint bank is currently full, if so send the packet */
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		}
+		
+		/* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the read command based on if we are reading a high
+		 * or low byte at the current word address */
+		if (V2Command == CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP)
+		  Read_Memory_Params.ReadMemoryCommand ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+
+		/* Only increment the current address if we have read both bytes in the current word when in FLASH
+		 * read mode, or for each byte when in EEPROM read mode */		 
+		if (((CurrentByte & 0x01) && (V2Command == CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP)) || (V2Command == CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP))
+		  CurrentAddress++;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Ensure last packet is a short packet to terminate the transfer */
+	if (IsEndpointFull)
+	{
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();	
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();	
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_CHI_ERASE_ISP command, clearing the target's FLASH memory. */
+void ISPProtocol_ChipErase(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t EraseDelayMS;
+		uint8_t PollMethod;
+		uint8_t EraseCommandBytes[4];
+	} Erase_Chip_Params;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Erase_Chip_Params, sizeof(Erase_Chip_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	uint8_t ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+	
+	/* Send the chip erase commands as given by the host to the device */
+	for (uint8_t SByte = 0; SByte < sizeof(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseCommandBytes); SByte++)
+	  SPI_SendByte(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseCommandBytes[SByte]);
+
+	/* Use appropriate command completion check as given by the host (delay or busy polling) */
+	if (!(Erase_Chip_Params.PollMethod))
+	  ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseDelayMS);
+	else
+	  ResponseStatus = ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy();
+	  
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP, CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP, CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP and CMD_READ_OSCCAL commands,
+ *  reading the requested configuration byte from the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t RetByte;
+		uint8_t ReadCommandBytes[4];
+	} Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params, sizeof(Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ResponseBytes[4];
+
+	/* Send the Fuse or Lock byte read commands as given by the host to the device, store response */
+	for (uint8_t RByte = 0; RByte < sizeof(ResponseBytes); RByte++)
+	  ResponseBytes[RByte] = SPI_TransferByte(Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params.ReadCommandBytes[RByte]);
+		
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseBytes[Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params.RetByte - 1]);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_WRITE_FUSE_ISP and CMD_WRITE_LOCK_ISP commands, writing the requested configuration
+ *  byte to the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t WriteCommandBytes[4];
+	} Write_FuseLockSig_Params;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_FuseLockSig_Params, sizeof(Write_FuseLockSig_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	/* Send the Fuse or Lock byte program commands as given by the host to the device */
+	for (uint8_t SByte = 0; SByte < sizeof(Write_FuseLockSig_Params.WriteCommandBytes); SByte++)
+	  SPI_SendByte(Write_FuseLockSig_Params.WriteCommandBytes[SByte]);
+		
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_SPI_MULTI command, writing and reading arbitrary SPI data to and from the attached device. */
+void ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t TxBytes;
+		uint8_t RxBytes;
+		uint8_t RxStartAddr;
+		uint8_t TxData[255];
+	} SPI_Multi_Params;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SPI_Multi_Params, (sizeof(SPI_Multi_Params) - sizeof(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData)), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SPI_Multi_Params.TxData, SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_SPI_MULTI);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	uint8_t CurrTxPos = 0;
+	uint8_t CurrRxPos = 0;
+
+	/* Write out bytes to transmit until the start of the bytes to receive is met */
+	while (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.RxStartAddr)
+	{
+		if (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes)
+		  SPI_SendByte(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData[CurrTxPos]);
+		else
+		  SPI_SendByte(0);
+		
+		CurrTxPos++;
+	}
+
+	/* Transmit remaining bytes with padding as needed, read in response bytes */
+	while (CurrRxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.RxBytes)
+	{
+		if (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes)
+		  Endpoint_Write_Byte(SPI_TransferByte(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData[CurrTxPos++]));
+		else
+		  Endpoint_Write_Byte(SPI_ReceiveByte());
+		  
+		/* Check to see if we have filled the endpoint bank and need to send the packet */
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		}
+		
+		CurrRxPos++;
+	}	
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Ensure last packet is a short packet to terminate the transfer */
+	if (IsEndpointFull)
+	{
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();	
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();	
+	}
+}
+
+/** Blocking delay for a given number of milliseconds.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] DelayMS  Number of milliseconds to delay for
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_DelayMS(uint8_t DelayMS)
+{
+	while (DelayMS-- && TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	{
+		if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+		  TimeoutMSRemaining--;
+		  
+		_delay_ms(1);
+	}
+}
+
 #endif
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h
index a9114e1e8..c983f49c6 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ISPProtocol.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _ISP_PROTOCOL_
-#define _ISP_PROTOCOL_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <util/delay.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
-		
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
-			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
-			
-			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
-				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
-			#endif
-		#endif
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Mask for the reading or writing of the high byte in a FLASH word when issuing a low-level programming command */
-		#define READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK       (1 << 3)
-
-		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK     (1 << 0)
-		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK   (1 << 1)
-		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK       (1 << 2)
-		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK   (1 << 3)
-		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK  (1 << 4)
-		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK      (1 << 5)
-		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_READYBUSY_MASK  (1 << 6)
-		#define PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK      (1 << 7)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(void);
-		void ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(void);
-		void ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(const uint8_t V2Command);
-		void ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(const uint8_t V2Command);
-		void ISPProtocol_ChipErase(void);
-		void ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(const uint8_t V2Command);
-		void ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(const uint8_t V2Command);
-		void ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(void);
-		void ISPProtocol_DelayMS(uint8_t DelayMS);
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ISPProtocol.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ISP_PROTOCOL_
+#define _ISP_PROTOCOL_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+			
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Mask for the reading or writing of the high byte in a FLASH word when issuing a low-level programming command */
+		#define READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK       (1 << 3)
+
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK     (1 << 0)
+		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK   (1 << 1)
+		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK       (1 << 2)
+		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK   (1 << 3)
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK  (1 << 4)
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK      (1 << 5)
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_READYBUSY_MASK  (1 << 6)
+		#define PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK      (1 << 7)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_ChipErase(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_DelayMS(uint8_t DelayMS);
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c
index 1c5376579..d7c6882cd 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c
@@ -1,187 +1,187 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Target-related functions for the ISP Protocol decoder.
- */
-
-#include "ISPTarget.h"
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** Converts the given AVR Studio SCK duration parameter (set by a SET PARAM command from the host) to the nearest
- *  possible SPI clock prescaler mask for passing to the SPI_Init() routine.
- *
- *  \return Nearest SPI prescaler mask for the given SCK frequency
- */
-uint8_t ISPTarget_GetSPIPrescalerMask(void)
-{
-	static const uint8_t SPIMaskFromSCKDuration[] =
-	{
-	#if (F_CPU == 8000000)
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   8MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   4MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4,    // AVRStudio =   2MHz SPI, Actual =   2MHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8,    // AVRStudio =   1MHz SPI, Actual =   1MHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16,   // AVRStudio = 500KHz SPI, Actual = 500KHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32,   // AVRStudio = 250KHz SPI, Actual = 250KHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64,   // AVRStudio = 125KHz SPI, Actual = 125KHz SPI
-	#elif (F_CPU == 16000000)
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   8MHz SPI, Actual =   8MHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4,    // AVRStudio =   4MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8,    // AVRStudio =   2MHz SPI, Actual =   2MHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16,   // AVRStudio =   1MHz SPI, Actual =   1MHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32,   // AVRStudio = 500KHz SPI, Actual = 500KHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64,   // AVRStudio = 250KHz SPI, Actual = 250KHz SPI
-		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128   // AVRStudio = 125KHz SPI, Actual = 125KHz SPI
-	#else
-		#error No SPI prescaler masks for chosen F_CPU speed.
-	#endif
-	};
-
-	uint8_t SCKDuration = V2Params_GetParameterValue(PARAM_SCK_DURATION);
-
-	if (SCKDuration >= sizeof(SPIMaskFromSCKDuration))
-	  SCKDuration = (sizeof(SPIMaskFromSCKDuration) - 1);
-	  
-	return SPIMaskFromSCKDuration[SCKDuration];
-}
-
-/** Asserts or deasserts the target's reset line, using the correct polarity as set by the host using a SET PARAM command.
- *  When not asserted, the line is tristated so as not to interfere with normal device operation.
- *
- *  \param[in] ResetTarget Boolean true when the target should be held in reset, false otherwise
- */
-void ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(const bool ResetTarget)
-{
-	if (ResetTarget)
-	{
-		AUX_LINE_DDR |= AUX_LINE_MASK;
-		
-		if (!(V2Params_GetParameterValue(PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)))
-		  AUX_LINE_PORT |= AUX_LINE_MASK;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		AUX_LINE_DDR  &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
-		AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Waits until the last issued target memory programming command has completed, via the check mode given and using
- *  the given parameters.
- *
- *  \param[in] ProgrammingMode  Programming mode used and completion check to use, a mask of PROG_MODE_* constants
- *  \param[in] PollAddress  Memory address to poll for completion if polling check mode used
- *  \param[in] PollValue  Poll value to check against if polling check mode used
- *  \param[in] DelayMS  Milliseconds to delay before returning if delay check mode used
- *  \param[in] ReadMemCommand  Device low-level READ MEMORY command to send if value check mode used
- *
- *  \return V2 Protocol status \ref STATUS_CMD_OK if the no timeout occurred, \ref STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT or
- *          \ref STATUS_CMD_TOUT otherwise
- */
-uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(const uint8_t ProgrammingMode, const uint16_t PollAddress, const uint8_t PollValue,
-                                      const uint8_t DelayMS, const uint8_t ReadMemCommand)
-{
-	uint8_t ProgrammingStatus  = STATUS_CMD_OK;
-
-	/* Determine method of Programming Complete check */
-	switch (ProgrammingMode & ~(PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK | PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK))
-	{
-		case PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK:
-		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK:
-			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(DelayMS);
-			break;
-		case PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK:
-		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK:
-			do
-			{
-				SPI_SendByte(ReadMemCommand);
-				SPI_SendByte(PollAddress >> 8);
-				SPI_SendByte(PollAddress & 0xFF);
-			}
-			while ((SPI_TransferByte(0x00) == PollValue) && TimeoutMSRemaining);
-
-			if (!(TimeoutMSRemaining))
-			 ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_TOUT;
-			
-			break;		
-		case PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK:
-		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_READYBUSY_MASK:
-			ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy();
-			break;
-	}
-
-	if (ProgrammingStatus == STATUS_CMD_OK)
-	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-
-	return ProgrammingStatus;
-}
-
-/** Waits until the target has completed the last operation, by continuously polling the device's
- *  BUSY flag until it is cleared, or until the command timeout period has expired.
- *
- *  \return V2 Protocol status \ref STATUS_CMD_OK if the no timeout occurred, \ref STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT otherwise
- */
-uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(void)
-{
-	do
-	{
-		SPI_SendByte(0xF0);
-		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
-		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
-	}
-	while ((SPI_ReceiveByte() & 0x01) && TimeoutMSRemaining);
-
-	if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	{
-		TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-		return STATUS_CMD_OK;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		return STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Sends a low-level LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target, for addressing of memory beyond the
- *  64KB boundary. This sends the command with the correct address as indicated by the current address
- *  pointer variable set by the host when a SET ADDRESS command is issued.
- */
-void ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(void)
-{
-	SPI_SendByte(LOAD_EXTENDED_ADDRESS_CMD);
-	SPI_SendByte(0x00);
-	SPI_SendByte((CurrentAddress & 0x00FF0000) >> 16);
-	SPI_SendByte(0x00);	
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the ISP Protocol decoder.
+ */
+
+#include "ISPTarget.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Converts the given AVR Studio SCK duration parameter (set by a SET PARAM command from the host) to the nearest
+ *  possible SPI clock prescaler mask for passing to the SPI_Init() routine.
+ *
+ *  \return Nearest SPI prescaler mask for the given SCK frequency
+ */
+uint8_t ISPTarget_GetSPIPrescalerMask(void)
+{
+	static const uint8_t SPIMaskFromSCKDuration[] =
+	{
+	#if (F_CPU == 8000000)
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   8MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   4MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4,    // AVRStudio =   2MHz SPI, Actual =   2MHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8,    // AVRStudio =   1MHz SPI, Actual =   1MHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16,   // AVRStudio = 500KHz SPI, Actual = 500KHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32,   // AVRStudio = 250KHz SPI, Actual = 250KHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64,   // AVRStudio = 125KHz SPI, Actual = 125KHz SPI
+	#elif (F_CPU == 16000000)
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   8MHz SPI, Actual =   8MHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4,    // AVRStudio =   4MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8,    // AVRStudio =   2MHz SPI, Actual =   2MHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16,   // AVRStudio =   1MHz SPI, Actual =   1MHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32,   // AVRStudio = 500KHz SPI, Actual = 500KHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64,   // AVRStudio = 250KHz SPI, Actual = 250KHz SPI
+		SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128   // AVRStudio = 125KHz SPI, Actual = 125KHz SPI
+	#else
+		#error No SPI prescaler masks for chosen F_CPU speed.
+	#endif
+	};
+
+	uint8_t SCKDuration = V2Params_GetParameterValue(PARAM_SCK_DURATION);
+
+	if (SCKDuration >= sizeof(SPIMaskFromSCKDuration))
+	  SCKDuration = (sizeof(SPIMaskFromSCKDuration) - 1);
+	  
+	return SPIMaskFromSCKDuration[SCKDuration];
+}
+
+/** Asserts or deasserts the target's reset line, using the correct polarity as set by the host using a SET PARAM command.
+ *  When not asserted, the line is tristated so as not to interfere with normal device operation.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ResetTarget Boolean true when the target should be held in reset, false otherwise
+ */
+void ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(const bool ResetTarget)
+{
+	if (ResetTarget)
+	{
+		AUX_LINE_DDR |= AUX_LINE_MASK;
+		
+		if (!(V2Params_GetParameterValue(PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)))
+		  AUX_LINE_PORT |= AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		AUX_LINE_DDR  &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+		AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Waits until the last issued target memory programming command has completed, via the check mode given and using
+ *  the given parameters.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ProgrammingMode  Programming mode used and completion check to use, a mask of PROG_MODE_* constants
+ *  \param[in] PollAddress  Memory address to poll for completion if polling check mode used
+ *  \param[in] PollValue  Poll value to check against if polling check mode used
+ *  \param[in] DelayMS  Milliseconds to delay before returning if delay check mode used
+ *  \param[in] ReadMemCommand  Device low-level READ MEMORY command to send if value check mode used
+ *
+ *  \return V2 Protocol status \ref STATUS_CMD_OK if the no timeout occurred, \ref STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT or
+ *          \ref STATUS_CMD_TOUT otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(const uint8_t ProgrammingMode, const uint16_t PollAddress, const uint8_t PollValue,
+                                      const uint8_t DelayMS, const uint8_t ReadMemCommand)
+{
+	uint8_t ProgrammingStatus  = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+
+	/* Determine method of Programming Complete check */
+	switch (ProgrammingMode & ~(PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK | PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK))
+	{
+		case PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK:
+		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK:
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(DelayMS);
+			break;
+		case PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK:
+		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK:
+			do
+			{
+				SPI_SendByte(ReadMemCommand);
+				SPI_SendByte(PollAddress >> 8);
+				SPI_SendByte(PollAddress & 0xFF);
+			}
+			while ((SPI_TransferByte(0x00) == PollValue) && TimeoutMSRemaining);
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRemaining))
+			 ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_TOUT;
+			
+			break;		
+		case PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK:
+		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_READYBUSY_MASK:
+			ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy();
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if (ProgrammingStatus == STATUS_CMD_OK)
+	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+
+	return ProgrammingStatus;
+}
+
+/** Waits until the target has completed the last operation, by continuously polling the device's
+ *  BUSY flag until it is cleared, or until the command timeout period has expired.
+ *
+ *  \return V2 Protocol status \ref STATUS_CMD_OK if the no timeout occurred, \ref STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(void)
+{
+	do
+	{
+		SPI_SendByte(0xF0);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+	}
+	while ((SPI_ReceiveByte() & 0x01) && TimeoutMSRemaining);
+
+	if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	{
+		TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+		return STATUS_CMD_OK;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		return STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Sends a low-level LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target, for addressing of memory beyond the
+ *  64KB boundary. This sends the command with the correct address as indicated by the current address
+ *  pointer variable set by the host when a SET ADDRESS command is issued.
+ */
+void ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(void)
+{
+	SPI_SendByte(LOAD_EXTENDED_ADDRESS_CMD);
+	SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+	SPI_SendByte((CurrentAddress & 0x00FF0000) >> 16);
+	SPI_SendByte(0x00);	
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h
index 995461099..d6e943582 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ISPTarget.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _ISP_TARGET_
-#define _ISP_TARGET_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <util/delay.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
-		
-		#include "../V2ProtocolParams.h"
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
-			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
-			
-			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
-				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
-			#endif
-		#endif
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Total number of allowable ISP programming speeds supported by the device */
-		#define TOTAL_ISP_PROGRAMMING_SPEEDS  7
-		
-		#define LOAD_EXTENDED_ADDRESS_CMD     0x4D
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ISPTarget_GetSPIPrescalerMask(void);
-		void    ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(const bool ResetTarget);
-		uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(const uint8_t ProgrammingMode, const uint16_t PollAddress,
-		                                      const uint8_t PollValue, const uint8_t DelayMS,
-		                                      const uint8_t ReadMemCommand);
-		uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(void);
-		void    ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ISPTarget.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ISP_TARGET_
+#define _ISP_TARGET_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
+		
+		#include "../V2ProtocolParams.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+			
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Total number of allowable ISP programming speeds supported by the device */
+		#define TOTAL_ISP_PROGRAMMING_SPEEDS  7
+		
+		#define LOAD_EXTENDED_ADDRESS_CMD     0x4D
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ISPTarget_GetSPIPrescalerMask(void);
+		void    ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(const bool ResetTarget);
+		uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(const uint8_t ProgrammingMode, const uint16_t PollAddress,
+		                                      const uint8_t PollValue, const uint8_t DelayMS,
+		                                      const uint8_t ReadMemCommand);
+		uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(void);
+		void    ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c
index 096551d81..3e12bdc11 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c
@@ -1,259 +1,259 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  V2Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_C
-#include "V2Protocol.h"
-
-/** Current memory address for FLASH/EEPROM memory read/write commands */
-uint32_t CurrentAddress;
-
-/** Flag to indicate that the next read/write operation must update the device's current address */
-bool MustSetAddress;
-
-
-/** ISR to manage timeouts whilst processing a V2Protocol command */
-ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_NOBLOCK)
-{
-	if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	  TimeoutMSRemaining--;
-}
-
-/** Initializes the hardware and software associated with the V2 protocol command handling. */
-void V2Protocol_Init(void)
-{
-	#if defined(ADC)
-	/* Initialize the ADC converter for VTARGET level detection on supported AVR models */
-	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128);
-	ADC_SetupChannel(VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL);
-	ADC_StartReading(VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC);
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Millisecond timer initialization for managing the command timeout counter */
-	OCR0A  = ((F_CPU / 64) / 1000);
-	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
-	TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
-	
-	V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues();
-}
-
-/** Master V2 Protocol packet handler, for received V2 Protocol packets from a connected host.
- *  This routine decodes the issued command and passes off the handling of the command to the
- *  appropriate function.
- */
-void V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(void)
-{
-	uint8_t V2Command = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-	
-	/* Start the timeout management timer */
-	TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-	TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00));
-	
-	switch (V2Command)
-	{
-		case CMD_SIGN_ON:
-			V2Protocol_SignOn();
-			break;
-		case CMD_SET_PARAMETER:
-		case CMD_GET_PARAMETER:
-			V2Protocol_GetSetParam(V2Command);
-			break;
-		case CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS:
-			V2Protocol_LoadAddress();
-			break;
-		case CMD_RESET_PROTECTION:
-			V2Protocol_ResetProtection();
-			break;
-#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL)
-		case CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP:
-			ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode();
-			break;
-		case CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP:
-			ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode();
-			break;
-		case CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP:
-		case CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP:
-			ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(V2Command);			
-			break;
-		case CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP:
-		case CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP:
-			ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(V2Command);
-			break;
-		case CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP:
-			ISPProtocol_ChipErase();
-			break;
-		case CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP:
-		case CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP:
-		case CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP:
-		case CMD_READ_OSCCAL_ISP:
-			ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(V2Command);
-			break;
-		case CMD_PROGRAM_FUSE_ISP:
-		case CMD_PROGRAM_LOCK_ISP:
-			ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(V2Command);
-			break;
-		case CMD_SPI_MULTI:
-			ISPProtocol_SPIMulti();
-			break;
-#endif
-#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
-		case CMD_XPROG_SETMODE:
-			XPROGProtocol_SetMode();
-			break;
-		case CMD_XPROG:
-			XPROGProtocol_Command();
-			break;
-#endif
-		default:
-			V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(V2Command);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	/* Disable the timeout management timer */
-	TCCR0B = 0;
-
-	Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT);
-}
-
-/** Handler for unknown V2 protocol commands. This discards all sent data and returns a
- *  STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN status back to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
- */
-static void V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(const uint8_t V2Command)
-{
-	/* Discard all incoming data */
-	while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE)
-	{
-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_SIGN_ON command, returning the programmer ID string to the host. */
-static void V2Protocol_SignOn(void)
-{
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_SIGN_ON);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(sizeof(PROGRAMMER_ID) - 1);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PROGRAMMER_ID, (sizeof(PROGRAMMER_ID) - 1), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_RESET_PROTECTION command, implemented as a dummy ACK function as
- *  no target short-circuit protection is currently implemented.
- */
-static void V2Protocol_ResetProtection(void)
-{
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_RESET_PROTECTION);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();	
-}
-
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_SET_PARAMETER and CMD_GET_PARAMETER commands from the host, setting or
- *  getting a device parameter's value from the parameter table.
- *
- *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
- */
-static void V2Protocol_GetSetParam(const uint8_t V2Command)
-{
-	uint8_t ParamID = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-	uint8_t ParamValue;
-	
-	if (V2Command == CMD_SET_PARAMETER)
-	  ParamValue = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
-	
-	uint8_t ParamPrivs = V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(ParamID);
-	
-	if ((V2Command == CMD_SET_PARAMETER) && (ParamPrivs & PARAM_PRIV_WRITE))
-	{
-		Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-		V2Params_SetParameterValue(ParamID, ParamValue);
-	}
-	else if ((V2Command == CMD_GET_PARAMETER) && (ParamPrivs & PARAM_PRIV_READ))
-	{
-		Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-		Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Params_GetParameterValue(ParamID));
-	}
-	else
-	{	
-		Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS command, loading the given device address into a
- *  global storage variable for later use, and issuing LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS commands
- *  to the attached device as required.
- */
-static void V2Protocol_LoadAddress(void)
-{
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(&CurrentAddress, sizeof(CurrentAddress), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	MustSetAddress = true;
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  V2Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_C
+#include "V2Protocol.h"
+
+/** Current memory address for FLASH/EEPROM memory read/write commands */
+uint32_t CurrentAddress;
+
+/** Flag to indicate that the next read/write operation must update the device's current address */
+bool MustSetAddress;
+
+
+/** ISR to manage timeouts whilst processing a V2Protocol command */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_NOBLOCK)
+{
+	if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	  TimeoutMSRemaining--;
+}
+
+/** Initializes the hardware and software associated with the V2 protocol command handling. */
+void V2Protocol_Init(void)
+{
+	#if defined(ADC)
+	/* Initialize the ADC converter for VTARGET level detection on supported AVR models */
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128);
+	ADC_SetupChannel(VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL);
+	ADC_StartReading(VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC);
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Millisecond timer initialization for managing the command timeout counter */
+	OCR0A  = ((F_CPU / 64) / 1000);
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+	TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	
+	V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues();
+}
+
+/** Master V2 Protocol packet handler, for received V2 Protocol packets from a connected host.
+ *  This routine decodes the issued command and passes off the handling of the command to the
+ *  appropriate function.
+ */
+void V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(void)
+{
+	uint8_t V2Command = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+	
+	/* Start the timeout management timer */
+	TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00));
+	
+	switch (V2Command)
+	{
+		case CMD_SIGN_ON:
+			V2Protocol_SignOn();
+			break;
+		case CMD_SET_PARAMETER:
+		case CMD_GET_PARAMETER:
+			V2Protocol_GetSetParam(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS:
+			V2Protocol_LoadAddress();
+			break;
+		case CMD_RESET_PROTECTION:
+			V2Protocol_ResetProtection();
+			break;
+#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL)
+		case CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode();
+			break;
+		case CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode();
+			break;
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP:
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(V2Command);			
+			break;
+		case CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ChipErase();
+			break;
+		case CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_OSCCAL_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_FUSE_ISP:
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_LOCK_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_SPI_MULTI:
+			ISPProtocol_SPIMulti();
+			break;
+#endif
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+		case CMD_XPROG_SETMODE:
+			XPROGProtocol_SetMode();
+			break;
+		case CMD_XPROG:
+			XPROGProtocol_Command();
+			break;
+#endif
+		default:
+			V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(V2Command);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	/* Disable the timeout management timer */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+
+	Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT);
+}
+
+/** Handler for unknown V2 protocol commands. This discards all sent data and returns a
+ *  STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN status back to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(const uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	/* Discard all incoming data */
+	while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE)
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_SIGN_ON command, returning the programmer ID string to the host. */
+static void V2Protocol_SignOn(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_SIGN_ON);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(sizeof(PROGRAMMER_ID) - 1);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PROGRAMMER_ID, (sizeof(PROGRAMMER_ID) - 1), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_RESET_PROTECTION command, implemented as a dummy ACK function as
+ *  no target short-circuit protection is currently implemented.
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_ResetProtection(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_RESET_PROTECTION);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();	
+}
+
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_SET_PARAMETER and CMD_GET_PARAMETER commands from the host, setting or
+ *  getting a device parameter's value from the parameter table.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_GetSetParam(const uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	uint8_t ParamID = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+	uint8_t ParamValue;
+	
+	if (V2Command == CMD_SET_PARAMETER)
+	  ParamValue = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Command);
+	
+	uint8_t ParamPrivs = V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(ParamID);
+	
+	if ((V2Command == CMD_SET_PARAMETER) && (ParamPrivs & PARAM_PRIV_WRITE))
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+		V2Params_SetParameterValue(ParamID, ParamValue);
+	}
+	else if ((V2Command == CMD_GET_PARAMETER) && (ParamPrivs & PARAM_PRIV_READ))
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+		Endpoint_Write_Byte(V2Params_GetParameterValue(ParamID));
+	}
+	else
+	{	
+		Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS command, loading the given device address into a
+ *  global storage variable for later use, and issuing LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS commands
+ *  to the attached device as required.
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_LoadAddress(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(&CurrentAddress, sizeof(CurrentAddress), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	MustSetAddress = true;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h
index 7ad896da8..0f0794b5c 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h
@@ -1,105 +1,105 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for V2Protocol.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_
-#define _V2_PROTOCOL_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#if !defined(__ASSEMBLER__)
-			#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-			#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
-			
-			#include "../Descriptors.h"
-			#include "V2ProtocolConstants.h"
-			#include "V2ProtocolParams.h"
-			#include "ISP/ISPProtocol.h"
-			#include "XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h"
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
-			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
-			
-			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
-				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
-			#endif
-		#endif
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			#define _GETADCMUXMASK2(x, y)       x ## y
-			#define _GETADCMUXMASK(x, y)        _GETADCMUXMASK2(x, y)
-		#endif
-
-		/** Programmer ID string, returned to the host during the CMD_SIGN_ON command processing */
-		#define PROGRAMMER_ID              "AVRISP_MK2"
-		
-		/** Timeout period for each issued command from the host before it is aborted */
-		#define COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS         200
-		
-		/** Command timeout counter register, GPIOR for speed */
-		#define TimeoutMSRemaining         GPIOR0
-
-		/** MUX mask for the VTARGET ADC channel number */
-		#define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK   _GETADCMUXMASK(ADC_CHANNEL, VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL)
-		
-		#if !defined(WIN_AVRDUDE_COMPAT)
-			#define SELECT_DATA_OUT_ENDPOINT() Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT);
-		#else
-			#define SELECT_DATA_OUT_ENDPOINT() Endpoint_SelectEndpoint();
-		#endif
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		#if !defined(__ASSEMBLER__)
-			extern uint32_t CurrentAddress;
-			extern bool     MustSetAddress;
-		#endif
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		#if !defined(__ASSEMBLER__)
-			void V2Protocol_Init(void);
-			void V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(void);
-			
-			#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_C)
-				static void V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(const uint8_t V2Command);
-				static void V2Protocol_SignOn(void);
-				static void V2Protocol_GetSetParam(const uint8_t V2Command);
-				static void V2Protocol_ResetProtection(void);
-				static void V2Protocol_LoadAddress(void);
-			#endif
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for V2Protocol.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_
+#define _V2_PROTOCOL_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#if !defined(__ASSEMBLER__)
+			#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+			#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
+			
+			#include "../Descriptors.h"
+			#include "V2ProtocolConstants.h"
+			#include "V2ProtocolParams.h"
+			#include "ISP/ISPProtocol.h"
+			#include "XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+			
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#define _GETADCMUXMASK2(x, y)       x ## y
+			#define _GETADCMUXMASK(x, y)        _GETADCMUXMASK2(x, y)
+		#endif
+
+		/** Programmer ID string, returned to the host during the CMD_SIGN_ON command processing */
+		#define PROGRAMMER_ID              "AVRISP_MK2"
+		
+		/** Timeout period for each issued command from the host before it is aborted */
+		#define COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS         200
+		
+		/** Command timeout counter register, GPIOR for speed */
+		#define TimeoutMSRemaining         GPIOR0
+
+		/** MUX mask for the VTARGET ADC channel number */
+		#define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK   _GETADCMUXMASK(ADC_CHANNEL, VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL)
+		
+		#if !defined(WIN_AVRDUDE_COMPAT)
+			#define SELECT_DATA_OUT_ENDPOINT() Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT);
+		#else
+			#define SELECT_DATA_OUT_ENDPOINT() Endpoint_SelectEndpoint();
+		#endif
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		#if !defined(__ASSEMBLER__)
+			extern uint32_t CurrentAddress;
+			extern bool     MustSetAddress;
+		#endif
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if !defined(__ASSEMBLER__)
+			void V2Protocol_Init(void);
+			void V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(void);
+			
+			#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_C)
+				static void V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(const uint8_t V2Command);
+				static void V2Protocol_SignOn(void);
+				static void V2Protocol_GetSetParam(const uint8_t V2Command);
+				static void V2Protocol_ResetProtection(void);
+				static void V2Protocol_LoadAddress(void);
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h
index 45397403b..94c60766b 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h
@@ -1,88 +1,88 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Macros for the V2 Protocol Packet Commands and Responses.
- */
-
-#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_CONSTANTS_
-#define _V2_PROTOCOL_CONSTANTS_
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define CMD_SIGN_ON                 0x01
-		#define CMD_SET_PARAMETER           0x02
-		#define CMD_GET_PARAMETER           0x03
-		#define CMD_OSCCAL                  0x05
-		#define CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS            0x06
-		#define CMD_FIRMWARE_UPGRADE        0x07
-		#define CMD_RESET_PROTECTION        0x0A
-		#define CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP      0x10
-		#define CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP      0x11
-		#define CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP          0x12
-		#define CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP       0x13
-		#define CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP          0x14
-		#define CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP      0x15
-		#define CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP         0x16
-		#define CMD_PROGRAM_FUSE_ISP        0x17
-		#define CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP           0x18
-		#define CMD_PROGRAM_LOCK_ISP        0x19
-		#define CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP           0x1A
-		#define CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP      0x1B
-		#define CMD_READ_OSCCAL_ISP         0x1C
-		#define CMD_SPI_MULTI               0x1D
-		#define CMD_XPROG                   0x50
-		#define CMD_XPROG_SETMODE           0x51
-
-		#define STATUS_CMD_OK               0x00
-		#define STATUS_CMD_TOUT             0x80
-		#define STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT         0x81
-		#define STATUS_SET_PARAM_MISSING    0x82
-		#define STATUS_CMD_FAILED           0xC0
-		#define STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN          0xC9
-		#define STATUS_ISP_READY            0x00
-		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_MOSI       0x01
-		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_RST        0x02
-		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_SCK        0x04
-		#define STATUS_TGT_NOT_DETECTED     0x10
-		#define STATUS_TGT_REVERSE_INSERTED 0x20
-
-		#define PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_LOW      0x80
-		#define PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_HIGH     0x81
-		#define PARAM_HW_VER                0x90
-		#define PARAM_SW_MAJOR              0x91
-		#define PARAM_SW_MINOR              0x92
-		#define PARAM_VTARGET               0x94
-		#define PARAM_SCK_DURATION          0x98
-		#define PARAM_RESET_POLARITY        0x9E
-		#define PARAM_STATUS_TGT_CONN       0xA1
-		#define PARAM_DISCHARGEDELAY        0xA4
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Macros for the V2 Protocol Packet Commands and Responses.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_CONSTANTS_
+#define _V2_PROTOCOL_CONSTANTS_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define CMD_SIGN_ON                 0x01
+		#define CMD_SET_PARAMETER           0x02
+		#define CMD_GET_PARAMETER           0x03
+		#define CMD_OSCCAL                  0x05
+		#define CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS            0x06
+		#define CMD_FIRMWARE_UPGRADE        0x07
+		#define CMD_RESET_PROTECTION        0x0A
+		#define CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP      0x10
+		#define CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP      0x11
+		#define CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP          0x12
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP       0x13
+		#define CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP          0x14
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP      0x15
+		#define CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP         0x16
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_FUSE_ISP        0x17
+		#define CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP           0x18
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_LOCK_ISP        0x19
+		#define CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP           0x1A
+		#define CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP      0x1B
+		#define CMD_READ_OSCCAL_ISP         0x1C
+		#define CMD_SPI_MULTI               0x1D
+		#define CMD_XPROG                   0x50
+		#define CMD_XPROG_SETMODE           0x51
+
+		#define STATUS_CMD_OK               0x00
+		#define STATUS_CMD_TOUT             0x80
+		#define STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT         0x81
+		#define STATUS_SET_PARAM_MISSING    0x82
+		#define STATUS_CMD_FAILED           0xC0
+		#define STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN          0xC9
+		#define STATUS_ISP_READY            0x00
+		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_MOSI       0x01
+		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_RST        0x02
+		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_SCK        0x04
+		#define STATUS_TGT_NOT_DETECTED     0x10
+		#define STATUS_TGT_REVERSE_INSERTED 0x20
+
+		#define PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_LOW      0x80
+		#define PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_HIGH     0x81
+		#define PARAM_HW_VER                0x90
+		#define PARAM_SW_MAJOR              0x91
+		#define PARAM_SW_MINOR              0x92
+		#define PARAM_VTARGET               0x94
+		#define PARAM_SCK_DURATION          0x98
+		#define PARAM_RESET_POLARITY        0x9E
+		#define PARAM_STATUS_TGT_CONN       0xA1
+		#define PARAM_DISCHARGEDELAY        0xA4
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c
index 4d508f508..b8c5930a0 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c
@@ -1,182 +1,182 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  V2Protocol parameter handler, to process V2 Protocol device parameters.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_PARAMS_C
-#include "V2ProtocolParams.h"
-
-/* Non-Volatile Parameter Values for EEPROM storage */
-uint8_t EEMEM EEPROM_Rest_Polarity = 0x00;
-
-/* Volatile Parameter Values for RAM storage */
-static ParameterItem_t ParameterTable[] = 
-	{
-		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_LOW,
-		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
-		  .ParamValue       = (LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER >> 8)        },
-
-		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_HIGH,
-		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
-		  .ParamValue       = (LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER & 0xFF),     },
-
-		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_HW_VER,
-		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
-		  .ParamValue       = 0x00                               },
-
-		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SW_MAJOR,
-		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
-		  .ParamValue       = 0x01                               },
-
-		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SW_MINOR,
-		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
-		  .ParamValue       = 0x0D                               },
-
-		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_VTARGET,
-		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
-		  .ParamValue       = 0x32                               },
-
-		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SCK_DURATION,
-		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
-		  .ParamValue       = (TOTAL_ISP_PROGRAMMING_SPEEDS - 1) },
-
-		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_RESET_POLARITY,
-		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
-		  .ParamValue       = 0x00                               },
-
-		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_STATUS_TGT_CONN,
-		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
-		  .ParamValue       = STATUS_ISP_READY                   },
-
-		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_DISCHARGEDELAY,
-		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
-		  .ParamValue       = 0x00                               },
-	};
-
-
-/** Loads saved non-volatile parameter values from the EEPROM into the parameter table, as needed. */
-void V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(void)
-{
-	/* Target RESET line polarity is a non-volatile value, retrieve current parameter value from EEPROM -
-	 *   NB: Cannot call V2Protocol_SetParameterValue() here, as that will cause another EEPROM write! */
-	V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)->ParamValue = eeprom_read_byte(&EEPROM_Rest_Polarity);
-}
-
-/** Updates any parameter values that are sourced from hardware rather than explicitly set by the host, such as
- *  VTARGET levels from the ADC on supported AVR models.
- */
-void V2Params_UpdateParamValues(void)
-{
-	#if (defined(ADC) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT))
-	/* Update VTARGET parameter with the latest ADC conversion of VTARGET on supported AVR models */
-	V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_VTARGET)->ParamValue = ((5 * 10 * ADC_GetResult()) / 1024);
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the host PC read/write privileges for a given parameter in the parameter table. This should
- *  be called before calls to \ref V2Params_GetParameterValue() or \ref V2Params_SetParameterValue() when
- *  getting or setting parameter values in response to requests from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose privileges are to be retrieved from the table
- *
- *  \return Privileges for the requested parameter, as a mask of PARAM_PRIV_* masks
- */ 
-uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(const uint8_t ParamID)
-{
-	ParameterItem_t* ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
-	
-	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
-	  return 0;
-
-	return ParamInfo->ParamPrivileges;
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the current value for a given parameter in the parameter table.
- *
- *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose value is to be retrieved from the table
- *
- *  \return Current value of the parameter in the table, or 0 if not found
- */ 
-uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID)
-{
-	ParameterItem_t* ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
-	
-	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
-	  return 0;
-	
-	return ParamInfo->ParamValue;
-}
-
-/** Sets the value for a given parameter in the parameter table.
- *
- *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose value is to be set in the table
- *  \param[in] Value    New value to set the parameter to
- *
- *  \return Pointer to the associated parameter information from the parameter table if found, NULL otherwise
- */
-void V2Params_SetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID, const uint8_t Value)
-{
-	ParameterItem_t* ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
-
-	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
-	  return;
-
-	ParamInfo->ParamValue = Value;
-
-	/* The target RESET line polarity is a non-volatile parameter, save to EEPROM when changed */
-	if (ParamID == PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)
-	  eeprom_write_byte(&EEPROM_Rest_Polarity, Value);  
-}
-
-/** Retrieves a parameter entry (including ID, value and privileges) from the parameter table that matches the given
- *  parameter ID.
- *
- *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID to find in the table
- *
- *  \return Pointer to the associated parameter information from the parameter table if found, NULL otherwise
- */
-static ParameterItem_t* V2Params_GetParamFromTable(const uint8_t ParamID)
-{
-	ParameterItem_t* CurrTableItem = ParameterTable;
-
-	/* Find the parameter in the parameter table if present */
-	for (uint8_t TableIndex = 0; TableIndex < TABLE_PARAM_COUNT; TableIndex++)
-	{
-		if (ParamID == CurrTableItem->ParamID)
-		  return CurrTableItem;
-		
-		CurrTableItem++;
-	}
-
-	return NULL;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  V2Protocol parameter handler, to process V2 Protocol device parameters.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_PARAMS_C
+#include "V2ProtocolParams.h"
+
+/* Non-Volatile Parameter Values for EEPROM storage */
+uint8_t EEMEM EEPROM_Rest_Polarity = 0x00;
+
+/* Volatile Parameter Values for RAM storage */
+static ParameterItem_t ParameterTable[] = 
+	{
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_LOW,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = (LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER >> 8)        },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_HIGH,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = (LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER & 0xFF),     },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_HW_VER,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x00                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SW_MAJOR,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x01                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SW_MINOR,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x0D                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_VTARGET,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x32                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SCK_DURATION,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
+		  .ParamValue       = (TOTAL_ISP_PROGRAMMING_SPEEDS - 1) },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_RESET_POLARITY,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x00                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_STATUS_TGT_CONN,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = STATUS_ISP_READY                   },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_DISCHARGEDELAY,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x00                               },
+	};
+
+
+/** Loads saved non-volatile parameter values from the EEPROM into the parameter table, as needed. */
+void V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(void)
+{
+	/* Target RESET line polarity is a non-volatile value, retrieve current parameter value from EEPROM -
+	 *   NB: Cannot call V2Protocol_SetParameterValue() here, as that will cause another EEPROM write! */
+	V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)->ParamValue = eeprom_read_byte(&EEPROM_Rest_Polarity);
+}
+
+/** Updates any parameter values that are sourced from hardware rather than explicitly set by the host, such as
+ *  VTARGET levels from the ADC on supported AVR models.
+ */
+void V2Params_UpdateParamValues(void)
+{
+	#if (defined(ADC) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT))
+	/* Update VTARGET parameter with the latest ADC conversion of VTARGET on supported AVR models */
+	V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_VTARGET)->ParamValue = ((5 * 10 * ADC_GetResult()) / 1024);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the host PC read/write privileges for a given parameter in the parameter table. This should
+ *  be called before calls to \ref V2Params_GetParameterValue() or \ref V2Params_SetParameterValue() when
+ *  getting or setting parameter values in response to requests from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose privileges are to be retrieved from the table
+ *
+ *  \return Privileges for the requested parameter, as a mask of PARAM_PRIV_* masks
+ */ 
+uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(const uint8_t ParamID)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
+	
+	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
+	  return 0;
+
+	return ParamInfo->ParamPrivileges;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current value for a given parameter in the parameter table.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose value is to be retrieved from the table
+ *
+ *  \return Current value of the parameter in the table, or 0 if not found
+ */ 
+uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
+	
+	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
+	  return 0;
+	
+	return ParamInfo->ParamValue;
+}
+
+/** Sets the value for a given parameter in the parameter table.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose value is to be set in the table
+ *  \param[in] Value    New value to set the parameter to
+ *
+ *  \return Pointer to the associated parameter information from the parameter table if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+void V2Params_SetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID, const uint8_t Value)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
+
+	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
+	  return;
+
+	ParamInfo->ParamValue = Value;
+
+	/* The target RESET line polarity is a non-volatile parameter, save to EEPROM when changed */
+	if (ParamID == PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)
+	  eeprom_write_byte(&EEPROM_Rest_Polarity, Value);  
+}
+
+/** Retrieves a parameter entry (including ID, value and privileges) from the parameter table that matches the given
+ *  parameter ID.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID to find in the table
+ *
+ *  \return Pointer to the associated parameter information from the parameter table if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+static ParameterItem_t* V2Params_GetParamFromTable(const uint8_t ParamID)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* CurrTableItem = ParameterTable;
+
+	/* Find the parameter in the parameter table if present */
+	for (uint8_t TableIndex = 0; TableIndex < TABLE_PARAM_COUNT; TableIndex++)
+	{
+		if (ParamID == CurrTableItem->ParamID)
+		  return CurrTableItem;
+		
+		CurrTableItem++;
+	}
+
+	return NULL;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h
index 995468a4d..4bbb02419 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for V2ProtocolParams.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_PARAMS_
-#define _V2_PROTOCOL_PARAMS_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-
-		#if defined(ADC)
-			#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
-		#endif
-		
-		#include "V2Protocol.h"
-		#include "V2ProtocolConstants.h"
-		#include "ISP/ISPTarget.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Parameter privilege mask to allow the host PC to read the parameter's value */
-		#define PARAM_PRIV_READ     (1 << 0)
-
-		/** Parameter privilege mask to allow the host PC to change the parameter's value */
-		#define PARAM_PRIV_WRITE    (1 << 1)
-		
-		/** Total number of parameters in the parameter table */
-		#define TABLE_PARAM_COUNT   (sizeof(ParameterTable) / sizeof(ParameterTable[0]))
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a parameter table entry indicating a PC readable or writable device parameter. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			const uint8_t ParamID; /**< Parameter ID number to uniquely identify the parameter within the device */
-			const uint8_t ParamPrivileges;  /**< Parameter privileges to allow the host to read or write the parameter's value */
-			uint8_t ParamValue; /**< Current parameter's value within the device */
-		} ParameterItem_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void    V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(void);
-		void    V2Params_UpdateParamValues(void);
-	
-		uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(const uint8_t ParamID);
-		uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID);
-		void    V2Params_SetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID, const uint8_t Value);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_PARAMS_C)
-			static ParameterItem_t* V2Params_GetParamFromTable(const uint8_t ParamID);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for V2ProtocolParams.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_PARAMS_
+#define _V2_PROTOCOL_PARAMS_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+
+		#if defined(ADC)
+			#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#endif
+		
+		#include "V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "V2ProtocolConstants.h"
+		#include "ISP/ISPTarget.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Parameter privilege mask to allow the host PC to read the parameter's value */
+		#define PARAM_PRIV_READ     (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Parameter privilege mask to allow the host PC to change the parameter's value */
+		#define PARAM_PRIV_WRITE    (1 << 1)
+		
+		/** Total number of parameters in the parameter table */
+		#define TABLE_PARAM_COUNT   (sizeof(ParameterTable) / sizeof(ParameterTable[0]))
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a parameter table entry indicating a PC readable or writable device parameter. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			const uint8_t ParamID; /**< Parameter ID number to uniquely identify the parameter within the device */
+			const uint8_t ParamPrivileges;  /**< Parameter privileges to allow the host to read or write the parameter's value */
+			uint8_t ParamValue; /**< Current parameter's value within the device */
+		} ParameterItem_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(void);
+		void    V2Params_UpdateParamValues(void);
+	
+		uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(const uint8_t ParamID);
+		uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID);
+		void    V2Params_SetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID, const uint8_t Value);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_PARAMS_C)
+			static ParameterItem_t* V2Params_GetParamFromTable(const uint8_t ParamID);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c
index 817f22347..f9815043f 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c
@@ -1,238 +1,238 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Target-related functions for the TINY target's NVM module.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TINYNVM_C
-#include "TINYNVM.h"
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** Sends the given pointer address to the target's TPI pointer register */
-static void TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(const uint16_t AbsoluteAddress)
-{
-	/* Send the given 16-bit address to the target, LSB first */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTPR | 0);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[0]);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTPR | 1);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[1]);
-}
-
-/** Sends a SIN command to the target with the specified I/O address, ready for the data byte to be written.
- *
- *  \param[in] Address  6-bit I/O address to write to in the target's I/O memory space
- */
-static void TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address)
-{
-	/* The TPI command for reading from the I/O space uses strange addressing, where the I/O address's upper
-	 * two bits of the 6-bit address are shifted left once */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SIN | ((Address & 0x30) << 1) | (Address & 0x0F));
-}
-
-/** Sends a SOUT command to the target with the specified I/O address, ready for the data byte to be read.
- *
- *  \param[in] Address  6-bit I/O address to read from in the target's I/O memory space
- */
-static void TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address)
-{
-	/* The TPI command for reading from the I/O space uses strange addressing, where the I/O address's upper
-	 * two bits of the 6-bit address are shifted left once */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SOUT | ((Address & 0x30) << 1) | (Address & 0x0F));
-}
-
-/** Busy-waits while the NVM controller is busy performing a NVM operation, such as a FLASH page read.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, false otherwise
- */
-bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void)
-{
-	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
-	while (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	{
-		/* Send the SLDCS command to read the TPI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is active */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLDCS | TPI_STATUS_REG);
-
-		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
-
-		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
-		if (!(TimeoutMSRemaining))
-		  return false;
-
-		/* Check the status register read response to see if the NVM bus is enabled */
-		if (StatusRegister & TPI_STATUS_NVM)
-		{
-			TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** Waits while the target's NVM controller is busy performing an operation, exiting if the
- *  timeout period expires.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, false otherwise
- */
-bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void)
-{
-	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
-	while (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	{
-		/* Send the SIN command to read the TPI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is busy */
-		TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr);
-
-		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
-
-		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
-		if (!(TimeoutMSRemaining))
-		  return false;
-
-		/* Check to see if the BUSY flag is still set */
-		if (!(StatusRegister & (1 << 7)))
-		{
-			TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** Reads memory from the target's memory spaces.
- *
- *  \param[in]  ReadAddress  Start address to read from within the target's address space
- *  \param[out] ReadBuffer   Buffer to store read data into
- *  \param[in]  ReadSize     Length of the data to read from the device
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
- */
-bool TINYNVM_ReadMemory(const uint16_t ReadAddress, uint8_t* ReadBuffer, uint16_t ReadSize)
-{
-	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-	  return false;
-
-	/* Set the NVM control register to the NO OP command for memory reading */
-	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TINY_NVM_CMD_NOOP);
-	
-	/* Send the address of the location to read from */
-	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(ReadAddress);
-	
-	while (ReadSize-- && TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	{
-		/* Read the byte of data from the target */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLD | TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI);
-		*(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
-	}
-	
-	return (TimeoutMSRemaining != 0);
-}
-
-/** Writes word addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
- *
- *  \param[in] WriteAddress  Start address to write to within the target's address space
- *  \param[in] WriteBuffer   Buffer to source data from
- *  \param[in] WriteLength   Total number of bytes to write to the device (must be an integer multiple of 2)
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
- */
-bool TINYNVM_WriteMemory(const uint16_t WriteAddress, uint8_t* WriteBuffer, uint16_t WriteLength)
-{
-	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-	  return false;
-	  
-	/* Must have an integer number of words to write - if extra byte, word-align via a dummy high byte */
-	if (WriteLength & 0x01)
-	  WriteBuffer[WriteLength++] = 0xFF;
-
-	/* Set the NVM control register to the WORD WRITE command for memory reading */
-	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TINY_NVM_CMD_WORDWRITE);
-	
-	/* Send the address of the location to write to */
-	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(WriteAddress);
-	
-	while (WriteLength)
-	{
-		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-		if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-		  return false;
-
-		/* Write the low byte of data to the target */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST | TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
-		
-		/* Write the high byte of data to the target */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST | TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
-
-		/* Need to decrement the write length twice, since we read out a whole word */
-		WriteLength -= 2;
-	}
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Erases the target's memory space.
- *
- *  \param[in] EraseCommand  NVM erase command to send to the device
- *  \param[in] Address       Address inside the memory space to erase
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
- */
-bool TINYNVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, const uint16_t Address)
-{
-	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-	  return false;
-
-	/* Set the NVM control register to the target memory erase command */
-	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
-
-	/* Write to a high byte location within the target address space to start the erase process */
-	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(Address | 0x0001);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST | TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
-
-	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-	  return false;
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the TINY target's NVM module.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TINYNVM_C
+#include "TINYNVM.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Sends the given pointer address to the target's TPI pointer register */
+static void TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(const uint16_t AbsoluteAddress)
+{
+	/* Send the given 16-bit address to the target, LSB first */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTPR | 0);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[0]);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTPR | 1);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[1]);
+}
+
+/** Sends a SIN command to the target with the specified I/O address, ready for the data byte to be written.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Address  6-bit I/O address to write to in the target's I/O memory space
+ */
+static void TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address)
+{
+	/* The TPI command for reading from the I/O space uses strange addressing, where the I/O address's upper
+	 * two bits of the 6-bit address are shifted left once */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SIN | ((Address & 0x30) << 1) | (Address & 0x0F));
+}
+
+/** Sends a SOUT command to the target with the specified I/O address, ready for the data byte to be read.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Address  6-bit I/O address to read from in the target's I/O memory space
+ */
+static void TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address)
+{
+	/* The TPI command for reading from the I/O space uses strange addressing, where the I/O address's upper
+	 * two bits of the 6-bit address are shifted left once */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SOUT | ((Address & 0x30) << 1) | (Address & 0x0F));
+}
+
+/** Busy-waits while the NVM controller is busy performing a NVM operation, such as a FLASH page read.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, false otherwise
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
+	while (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Send the SLDCS command to read the TPI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is active */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLDCS | TPI_STATUS_REG);
+
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutMSRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check the status register read response to see if the NVM bus is enabled */
+		if (StatusRegister & TPI_STATUS_NVM)
+		{
+			TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Waits while the target's NVM controller is busy performing an operation, exiting if the
+ *  timeout period expires.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, false otherwise
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
+	while (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Send the SIN command to read the TPI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is busy */
+		TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr);
+
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutMSRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check to see if the BUSY flag is still set */
+		if (!(StatusRegister & (1 << 7)))
+		{
+			TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Reads memory from the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  ReadAddress  Start address to read from within the target's address space
+ *  \param[out] ReadBuffer   Buffer to store read data into
+ *  \param[in]  ReadSize     Length of the data to read from the device
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_ReadMemory(const uint16_t ReadAddress, uint8_t* ReadBuffer, uint16_t ReadSize)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Set the NVM control register to the NO OP command for memory reading */
+	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TINY_NVM_CMD_NOOP);
+	
+	/* Send the address of the location to read from */
+	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(ReadAddress);
+	
+	while (ReadSize-- && TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Read the byte of data from the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLD | TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI);
+		*(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+	}
+	
+	return (TimeoutMSRemaining != 0);
+}
+
+/** Writes word addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] WriteAddress  Start address to write to within the target's address space
+ *  \param[in] WriteBuffer   Buffer to source data from
+ *  \param[in] WriteLength   Total number of bytes to write to the device (must be an integer multiple of 2)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_WriteMemory(const uint16_t WriteAddress, uint8_t* WriteBuffer, uint16_t WriteLength)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+	  
+	/* Must have an integer number of words to write - if extra byte, word-align via a dummy high byte */
+	if (WriteLength & 0x01)
+	  WriteBuffer[WriteLength++] = 0xFF;
+
+	/* Set the NVM control register to the WORD WRITE command for memory reading */
+	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TINY_NVM_CMD_WORDWRITE);
+	
+	/* Send the address of the location to write to */
+	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(WriteAddress);
+	
+	while (WriteLength)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Write the low byte of data to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST | TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
+		
+		/* Write the high byte of data to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST | TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
+
+		/* Need to decrement the write length twice, since we read out a whole word */
+		WriteLength -= 2;
+	}
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Erases the target's memory space.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] EraseCommand  NVM erase command to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] Address       Address inside the memory space to erase
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Set the NVM control register to the target memory erase command */
+	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
+
+	/* Write to a high byte location within the target address space to start the erase process */
+	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(Address | 0x0001);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST | TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h
index 223bbccfd..73bf1f953 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for TINYNVM.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _TINY_NVM_
-#define _TINY_NVM_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		
-		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
-		#include "XPROGTarget.h"
-	
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
-			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
-			
-			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
-				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
-			#endif
-		#endif
-
-	/* Defines: */
-		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_NOOP              0x00
-		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE         0x10
-		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_SECTIONERASE      0x14
-		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_WORDWRITE         0x1D
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */		
-		bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
-		bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void);
-		bool TINYNVM_ReadMemory(const uint16_t ReadAddress, uint8_t* ReadBuffer, uint16_t ReadLength);
-		bool TINYNVM_WriteMemory(const uint16_t WriteAddress, uint8_t* WriteBuffer, uint16_t WriteLength);
-		bool TINYNVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, const uint16_t Address);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TINYNVM_C)
-			static void TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address);
-			static void TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address);
-			static void TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(const uint16_t AbsoluteAddress);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TINYNVM.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TINY_NVM_
+#define _TINY_NVM_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		
+		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#include "XPROGTarget.h"
+	
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+			
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_NOOP              0x00
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE         0x10
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_SECTIONERASE      0x14
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_WORDWRITE         0x1D
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */		
+		bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
+		bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void);
+		bool TINYNVM_ReadMemory(const uint16_t ReadAddress, uint8_t* ReadBuffer, uint16_t ReadLength);
+		bool TINYNVM_WriteMemory(const uint16_t WriteAddress, uint8_t* WriteBuffer, uint16_t WriteLength);
+		bool TINYNVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, const uint16_t Address);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TINYNVM_C)
+			static void TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address);
+			static void TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address);
+			static void TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(const uint16_t AbsoluteAddress);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c
index 1671d29ba..14ad97c74 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c
@@ -1,356 +1,356 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Target-related functions for the XMEGA target's NVM module.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XMEGA_NVM_C
-#include "XMEGANVM.h"
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** Sends the given 32-bit absolute address to the target.
- *
- *  \param[in] AbsoluteAddress  Absolute address to send to the target
- */
-static void XMEGANVM_SendAddress(const uint32_t AbsoluteAddress)
-{
-	/* Send the given 32-bit address to the target, LSB first */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[0]);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[1]);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[2]);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[3]);
-}
-
-/** Sends the given NVM register address to the target.
- *
- *  \param[in] Register  NVM register whose absolute address is to be sent
- */
-static void XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(const uint8_t Register)
-{
-	/* Determine the absolute register address from the NVM base memory address and the NVM register address */
-	uint32_t Address = XPROG_Param_NVMBase | Register;
-
-	/* Send the calculated 32-bit address to the target, LSB first */
-	XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address);
-}
-
-/** Busy-waits while the NVM controller is busy performing a NVM operation, such as a FLASH page read or CRC
- *  calculation.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, false otherwise
- */
-bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void)
-{
-	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
-	while (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	{
-		/* Send the LDCS command to read the PDI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is active */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDCS | PDI_STATUS_REG);
-		
-		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
-		
-		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
-		if (!(TimeoutMSRemaining))
-		  return false;
-		
-		/* Check the status register read response to see if the NVM bus is enabled */
-		if (StatusRegister & PDI_STATUS_NVM)
-		{
-			TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** Waits while the target's NVM controller is busy performing an operation, exiting if the
- *  timeout period expires.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, false otherwise
- */
-bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void)
-{
-	/* Poll the NVM STATUS register while the NVM controller is busy */
-	while (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	{
-		/* Send a LDS command to read the NVM STATUS register to check the BUSY flag */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_STATUS);
-		
-		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
-
-		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
-		if (!(TimeoutMSRemaining))
-		  return false;
-
-		/* Check to see if the BUSY flag is still set */
-		if (!(StatusRegister & (1 << 7)))
-		{
-			TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-			return true;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the CRC value of the given memory space.
- *
- *  \param[in]  CRCCommand  NVM CRC command to issue to the target
- *  \param[out] CRCDest     CRC Destination when read from the target
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
- */
-bool XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(const uint8_t CRCCommand, uint32_t* const CRCDest)
-{
-	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-	  return false;
-	  
-	/* Set the NVM command to the correct CRC read command */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(CRCCommand);
-
-	/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the CRC generation */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(1 << 0);
-
-	/* Wait until the NVM bus is ready again */
-	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy()))
-	  return false;
-
-	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-	  return false;
-	
-	/* Load the PDI pointer register with the DAT0 register start address */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST | (PDI_POINTER_DIRECT << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES);
-	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT0);
-
-	/* Send the REPEAT command to grab the CRC bytes */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH - 1);
-	
-	/* Read in the CRC bytes from the target */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD | (PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH; i++)
-	  ((uint8_t*)CRCDest)[i] = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
-	
-	return (TimeoutMSRemaining != 0);
-}
-
-/** Reads memory from the target's memory spaces.
- *
- *  \param[in]  ReadAddress  Start address to read from within the target's address space
- *  \param[out] ReadBuffer   Buffer to store read data into
- *  \param[in]  ReadSize     Number of bytes to read
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
- */
-bool XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(const uint32_t ReadAddress, uint8_t* ReadBuffer, uint16_t ReadSize)
-{
-	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-	  return false;
-	
-	/* Send the READNVM command to the NVM controller for reading of an arbitrary location */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READNVM);
-
-	/* Load the PDI pointer register with the start address we want to read from */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST | (PDI_POINTER_DIRECT << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES);
-	XMEGANVM_SendAddress(ReadAddress);
-
-	/* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to read */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(ReadSize - 1);
-		
-	/* Send a LD command with indirect access and postincrement to read out the bytes */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD | (PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
-	while (ReadSize-- && TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	  *(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
-	
-	return (TimeoutMSRemaining != 0);
-}
-
-/** Writes byte addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
- *
- *  \param[in]  WriteCommand  Command to send to the device to write each memory byte
- *  \param[in]  WriteAddress  Address to write to within the target's address space
- *  \param[in]  Byte          Byte to write to the target
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
- */
-bool XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(const uint8_t WriteCommand, const uint32_t WriteAddress, const uint8_t Byte)
-{
-	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-	  return false;
-
-	/* Send the memory write command to the target */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteCommand);
-	
-	/* Send new memory byte to the memory to the target */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-	XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(Byte);
-	
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Writes page addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
- *
- *  \param[in]  WriteBuffCommand  Command to send to the device to write a byte to the memory page buffer
- *  \param[in]  EraseBuffCommand  Command to send to the device to erase the memory page buffer
- *  \param[in]  WritePageCommand  Command to send to the device to write the page buffer to the destination memory
- *  \param[in]  PageMode          Bitfield indicating what operations need to be executed on the specified page
- *  \param[in]  WriteAddress      Start address to write the page data to within the target's address space
- *  \param[in]  WriteBuffer       Buffer to source data from
- *  \param[in]  WriteSize         Number of bytes to write
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
- */
-bool XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(const uint8_t WriteBuffCommand, const uint8_t EraseBuffCommand,
-                              const uint8_t WritePageCommand, const uint8_t PageMode, const uint32_t WriteAddress,
-                              const uint8_t* WriteBuffer, uint16_t WriteSize)
-{
-	if (PageMode & XPRG_PAGEMODE_ERASE)
-	{
-		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-		  return false;
-
-		/* Send the memory buffer erase command to the target */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseBuffCommand);
-
-		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the buffer erase */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(1 << 0);
-	}
-
-	if (WriteSize)
-	{
-		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-		  return false;
-
-		/* Send the memory buffer write command to the target */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteBuffCommand);
-
-		/* Load the PDI pointer register with the start address we want to write to */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST | (PDI_POINTER_DIRECT << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES);
-		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
-
-		/* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to write */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteSize - 1);
-			
-		/* Send a ST command with indirect access and postincrement to write the bytes */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST | (PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
-		while (WriteSize--)
-		  XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
-	}
-	
-	if (PageMode & XPRG_PAGEMODE_WRITE)
-	{
-		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-		  return false;
-
-		/* Send the memory write command to the target */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WritePageCommand);
-		
-		/* Send the address of the first page location to write the memory page */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
-	}
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Erases a specific memory space of the target.
- *
- *  \param[in] EraseCommand  NVM erase command to send to the device
- *  \param[in] Address  Address inside the memory space to erase
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
- */
-bool XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, const uint32_t Address)
-{
-	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
-	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
-	  return false;
-	  
-	/* Send the memory erase command to the target */
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
-	XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
-	
-	/* Chip erase is handled separately, since it's procedure is different to other erase types */
-	if (EraseCommand == XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE)
-	{
-		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the chip erase */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(1 << 0);		
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Other erase modes just need us to address a byte within the target memory space */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
-		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
-	}
-	
-	/* Wait until the NVM bus is ready again */
-	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy()))
-	  return false;
-	  
-	return true;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the XMEGA target's NVM module.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XMEGA_NVM_C
+#include "XMEGANVM.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Sends the given 32-bit absolute address to the target.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] AbsoluteAddress  Absolute address to send to the target
+ */
+static void XMEGANVM_SendAddress(const uint32_t AbsoluteAddress)
+{
+	/* Send the given 32-bit address to the target, LSB first */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[0]);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[1]);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[2]);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(((uint8_t*)&AbsoluteAddress)[3]);
+}
+
+/** Sends the given NVM register address to the target.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Register  NVM register whose absolute address is to be sent
+ */
+static void XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(const uint8_t Register)
+{
+	/* Determine the absolute register address from the NVM base memory address and the NVM register address */
+	uint32_t Address = XPROG_Param_NVMBase | Register;
+
+	/* Send the calculated 32-bit address to the target, LSB first */
+	XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address);
+}
+
+/** Busy-waits while the NVM controller is busy performing a NVM operation, such as a FLASH page read or CRC
+ *  calculation.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, false otherwise
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
+	while (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Send the LDCS command to read the PDI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is active */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDCS | PDI_STATUS_REG);
+		
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+		
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutMSRemaining))
+		  return false;
+		
+		/* Check the status register read response to see if the NVM bus is enabled */
+		if (StatusRegister & PDI_STATUS_NVM)
+		{
+			TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Waits while the target's NVM controller is busy performing an operation, exiting if the
+ *  timeout period expires.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, false otherwise
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Poll the NVM STATUS register while the NVM controller is busy */
+	while (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Send a LDS command to read the NVM STATUS register to check the BUSY flag */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_STATUS);
+		
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutMSRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check to see if the BUSY flag is still set */
+		if (!(StatusRegister & (1 << 7)))
+		{
+			TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the CRC value of the given memory space.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  CRCCommand  NVM CRC command to issue to the target
+ *  \param[out] CRCDest     CRC Destination when read from the target
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(const uint8_t CRCCommand, uint32_t* const CRCDest)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+	  
+	/* Set the NVM command to the correct CRC read command */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(CRCCommand);
+
+	/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the CRC generation */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(1 << 0);
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM bus is ready again */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+	
+	/* Load the PDI pointer register with the DAT0 register start address */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST | (PDI_POINTER_DIRECT << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES);
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT0);
+
+	/* Send the REPEAT command to grab the CRC bytes */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH - 1);
+	
+	/* Read in the CRC bytes from the target */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD | (PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH; i++)
+	  ((uint8_t*)CRCDest)[i] = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+	
+	return (TimeoutMSRemaining != 0);
+}
+
+/** Reads memory from the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  ReadAddress  Start address to read from within the target's address space
+ *  \param[out] ReadBuffer   Buffer to store read data into
+ *  \param[in]  ReadSize     Number of bytes to read
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(const uint32_t ReadAddress, uint8_t* ReadBuffer, uint16_t ReadSize)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+	
+	/* Send the READNVM command to the NVM controller for reading of an arbitrary location */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READNVM);
+
+	/* Load the PDI pointer register with the start address we want to read from */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST | (PDI_POINTER_DIRECT << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES);
+	XMEGANVM_SendAddress(ReadAddress);
+
+	/* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to read */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(ReadSize - 1);
+		
+	/* Send a LD command with indirect access and postincrement to read out the bytes */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD | (PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
+	while (ReadSize-- && TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	  *(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+	
+	return (TimeoutMSRemaining != 0);
+}
+
+/** Writes byte addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  WriteCommand  Command to send to the device to write each memory byte
+ *  \param[in]  WriteAddress  Address to write to within the target's address space
+ *  \param[in]  Byte          Byte to write to the target
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(const uint8_t WriteCommand, const uint32_t WriteAddress, const uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Send the memory write command to the target */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteCommand);
+	
+	/* Send new memory byte to the memory to the target */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+	XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(Byte);
+	
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Writes page addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  WriteBuffCommand  Command to send to the device to write a byte to the memory page buffer
+ *  \param[in]  EraseBuffCommand  Command to send to the device to erase the memory page buffer
+ *  \param[in]  WritePageCommand  Command to send to the device to write the page buffer to the destination memory
+ *  \param[in]  PageMode          Bitfield indicating what operations need to be executed on the specified page
+ *  \param[in]  WriteAddress      Start address to write the page data to within the target's address space
+ *  \param[in]  WriteBuffer       Buffer to source data from
+ *  \param[in]  WriteSize         Number of bytes to write
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(const uint8_t WriteBuffCommand, const uint8_t EraseBuffCommand,
+                              const uint8_t WritePageCommand, const uint8_t PageMode, const uint32_t WriteAddress,
+                              const uint8_t* WriteBuffer, uint16_t WriteSize)
+{
+	if (PageMode & XPRG_PAGEMODE_ERASE)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the memory buffer erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseBuffCommand);
+
+		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the buffer erase */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(1 << 0);
+	}
+
+	if (WriteSize)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the memory buffer write command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteBuffCommand);
+
+		/* Load the PDI pointer register with the start address we want to write to */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST | (PDI_POINTER_DIRECT << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES);
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
+
+		/* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to write */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteSize - 1);
+			
+		/* Send a ST command with indirect access and postincrement to write the bytes */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST | (PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI << 2) | PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE);
+		while (WriteSize--)
+		  XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
+	}
+	
+	if (PageMode & XPRG_PAGEMODE_WRITE)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the memory write command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WritePageCommand);
+		
+		/* Send the address of the first page location to write the memory page */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Erases a specific memory space of the target.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] EraseCommand  NVM erase command to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] Address  Address inside the memory space to erase
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+	  
+	/* Send the memory erase command to the target */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
+	
+	/* Chip erase is handled separately, since it's procedure is different to other erase types */
+	if (EraseCommand == XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE)
+	{
+		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the chip erase */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(1 << 0);		
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Other erase modes just need us to address a byte within the target memory space */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS | (PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES << 2));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	}
+	
+	/* Wait until the NVM bus is ready again */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy()))
+	  return false;
+	  
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h
index 583a2878b..af38afdac 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h
@@ -1,124 +1,124 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for XMEGANVM.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _XMEGA_NVM_
-#define _XMEGA_NVM_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		
-		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
-		#include "XPROGTarget.h"
-	
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
-			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
-			
-			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
-				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
-			#endif
-		#endif
-
-	/* Defines: */
-		#define XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH                     3
-	
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR0                  0x00
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR1                  0x01
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR2                  0x02
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT0                   0x04
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT1                   0x05
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT2                   0x06
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD                    0x0A
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA                  0x0B
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLB                  0x0C
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_INTCTRL                0x0D
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_STATUS                 0x0F
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_LOCKBITS               0x10
-		
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_NOOP                   0x00
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE              0x40
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READNVM                0x43
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADFLASHPAGEBUFF      0x23
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGEBUFF     0x26
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGE         0x2B
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFLASHPAGE         0x2E
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEFLASH        0x2F
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_FLASHCRC               0x78
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSEC            0x20
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSECPAGE        0x22
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEAPPSECPAGE        0x24
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEAPPSECPAGE   0x25
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_APPCRC                 0x38
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSEC           0x68
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSECPAGE       0x2A
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEBOOTSECPAGE       0x2C
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEBOOTSECPAGE  0x2D
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_BOOTCRC                0x39
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READUSERSIG            0x03
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEUSERSIG           0x18
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEUSERSIG           0x1A
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READCALIBRATION        0x02
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READFUSE               0x07
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFUSE              0x4C
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITELOCK              0x08
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF     0x33
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF    0x36
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM            0x30
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGE        0x32
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEEEPROMPAGE        0x34
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEEEPROMPAGE   0x35
-		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READEEPROM             0x06
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
-		bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void);
-		bool XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(const uint8_t CRCCommand, uint32_t* const CRCDest);
-		bool XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(const uint32_t ReadAddress, uint8_t* ReadBuffer, uint16_t ReadSize);
-		bool XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(const uint8_t WriteCommand, const uint32_t WriteAddress, const uint8_t Byte);
-		bool XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(const uint8_t WriteBuffCommand, const uint8_t EraseBuffCommand,
-		                              const uint8_t WritePageCommand, const uint8_t PageMode, const uint32_t WriteAddress,
-		                              const uint8_t* WriteBuffer, uint16_t WriteSize);
-		bool XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, const uint32_t Address);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XMEGANVM_C)
-			static void XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(const uint8_t Register);
-			static void XMEGANVM_SendAddress(const uint32_t AbsoluteAddress);		
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XMEGANVM.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XMEGA_NVM_
+#define _XMEGA_NVM_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		
+		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#include "XPROGTarget.h"
+	
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+			
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		#define XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH                     3
+	
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR0                  0x00
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR1                  0x01
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR2                  0x02
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT0                   0x04
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT1                   0x05
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT2                   0x06
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD                    0x0A
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA                  0x0B
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLB                  0x0C
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_INTCTRL                0x0D
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_STATUS                 0x0F
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_LOCKBITS               0x10
+		
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_NOOP                   0x00
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE              0x40
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READNVM                0x43
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADFLASHPAGEBUFF      0x23
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGEBUFF     0x26
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGE         0x2B
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFLASHPAGE         0x2E
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEFLASH        0x2F
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_FLASHCRC               0x78
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSEC            0x20
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSECPAGE        0x22
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEAPPSECPAGE        0x24
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEAPPSECPAGE   0x25
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_APPCRC                 0x38
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSEC           0x68
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSECPAGE       0x2A
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEBOOTSECPAGE       0x2C
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEBOOTSECPAGE  0x2D
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_BOOTCRC                0x39
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READUSERSIG            0x03
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEUSERSIG           0x18
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEUSERSIG           0x1A
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READCALIBRATION        0x02
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READFUSE               0x07
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFUSE              0x4C
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITELOCK              0x08
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF     0x33
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF    0x36
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM            0x30
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGE        0x32
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEEEPROMPAGE        0x34
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEEEPROMPAGE   0x35
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READEEPROM             0x06
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
+		bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void);
+		bool XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(const uint8_t CRCCommand, uint32_t* const CRCDest);
+		bool XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(const uint32_t ReadAddress, uint8_t* ReadBuffer, uint16_t ReadSize);
+		bool XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(const uint8_t WriteCommand, const uint32_t WriteAddress, const uint8_t Byte);
+		bool XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(const uint8_t WriteBuffCommand, const uint8_t EraseBuffCommand,
+		                              const uint8_t WritePageCommand, const uint8_t PageMode, const uint32_t WriteAddress,
+		                              const uint8_t* WriteBuffer, uint16_t WriteSize);
+		bool XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, const uint32_t Address);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XMEGANVM_C)
+			static void XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(const uint8_t Register);
+			static void XMEGANVM_SendAddress(const uint32_t AbsoluteAddress);		
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c
index cc521ce87..7a4b1a547 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c
@@ -1,514 +1,514 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  XPROG Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol wrapped XPROG commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGPROTOCOL_C
-#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-/** Base absolute address for the target's NVM controller for PDI programming */
-uint32_t XPROG_Param_NVMBase = 0x010001C0;
-
-/** Size in bytes of the target's EEPROM page */
-uint16_t XPROG_Param_EEPageSize;
-
-/** Address of the TPI device's NVMCMD register for TPI programming */
-uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr;
-
-/** Address of the TPI device's NVMCSR register for TPI programming */
-uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr;
-
-/** Currently selected XPROG programming protocol */
-uint8_t  XPROG_SelectedProtocol = XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI;
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_XPROG_SETMODE command, which sets the programmer-to-target protocol used for PDI/TPI
- *  programming.
- */
-void XPROGProtocol_SetMode(void)
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t Protocol;
-	} SetMode_XPROG_Params;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SetMode_XPROG_Params, sizeof(SetMode_XPROG_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	XPROG_SelectedProtocol = SetMode_XPROG_Params.Protocol;
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG_SETMODE);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte((SetMode_XPROG_Params.Protocol != XPRG_PROTOCOL_JTAG) ? STATUS_CMD_OK : STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();	
-}
-
-/** Handler for the CMD_XPROG command, which wraps up XPROG commands in a V2 wrapper which need to be
- *  removed and processed so that the underlying XPROG command can be handled.
- */
-void XPROGProtocol_Command(void)
-{
-	uint8_t XPROGCommand = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-	
-	switch (XPROGCommand)
-	{
-		case XPRG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE:
-			XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode();
-			break;
-		case XPRG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE:
-			XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode();
-			break;
-		case XPRG_CMD_ERASE:
-			XPROGProtocol_Erase();
-			break;
-		case XPRG_CMD_WRITE_MEM:
-			XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory();
-			break;
-		case XPRG_CMD_READ_MEM:
-			XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory();
-			break;
-		case XPRG_CMD_CRC:
-			XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC();
-			break;
-		case XPRG_CMD_SET_PARAM:
-			XPROGProtocol_SetParam();
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Handler for the XPROG ENTER_PROGMODE command to establish a connection with the attached device. */
-static void XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(void)
-{
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	bool NVMBusEnabled;
-
-	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
-	{
-		/* Enable PDI programming mode with the attached target */
-		XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI();
-
-		/* Store the RESET key into the RESET PDI register to keep the XMEGA in reset */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS | PDI_RESET_REG);	
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_RESET_KEY);
-
-		/* Lower direction change guard time to 0 USART bits */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS | PDI_CTRL_REG);	
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x07);
-
-		/* Enable access to the XPROG NVM bus by sending the documented NVM access key to the device */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_KEY);	
-		for (uint8_t i = sizeof(PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY); i > 0; i--)
-		  XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY[i - 1]);
-
-		/* Wait until the NVM bus becomes active */
-		NVMBusEnabled = XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Enable TPI programming mode with the attached target */
-		XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI();
-		
-		/* Lower direction change guard time to 0 USART bits */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTCS | TPI_CTRL_REG);
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x07);
-		
-		/* Enable access to the XPROG NVM bus by sending the documented NVM access key to the device */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SKEY);	
-		for (uint8_t i = sizeof(TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY); i > 0; i--)
-		  XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY[i - 1]);
-
-		/* Wait until the NVM bus becomes active */
-		NVMBusEnabled = TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(NVMBusEnabled ? XPRG_ERR_OK : XPRG_ERR_FAILED);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the XPROG LEAVE_PROGMODE command to terminate the PDI programming connection with
- *  the attached device.
- */
-static void XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(void)
-{
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
-	{
-		XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
-
-		/* Clear the RESET key in the RESET PDI register to allow the XMEGA to run */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS | PDI_RESET_REG);	
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
-
-		/* Do it twice to make sure it takes affect (silicon bug?) */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS | PDI_RESET_REG);	
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
-
-		XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI();
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
-
-		/* Clear the NVMEN bit in the TPI CONTROL register to disable TPI mode */
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTCS | TPI_CTRL_REG);	
-		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
-	
-		XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI();
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_ERR_OK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the XPRG ERASE command to erase a specific memory address space in the attached device. */
-static void XPROGProtocol_Erase(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_OK;
-
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t  MemoryType;
-		uint32_t Address;
-	} Erase_XPROG_Params;
-
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Erase_XPROG_Params, sizeof(Erase_XPROG_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Erase_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(Erase_XPROG_Params.Address);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	uint8_t EraseCommand;
-
-	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
-	{	
-		/* Determine which NVM command to send to the device depending on the memory to erase */
-		switch (Erase_XPROG_Params.MemoryType)
-		{
-			case XPRG_ERASE_CHIP:
-				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_ERASE_APP:
-				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSEC;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_ERASE_BOOT:
-				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSEC;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_ERASE_EEPROM:
-				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_ERASE_APP_PAGE:
-				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSECPAGE;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_ERASE_BOOT_PAGE:
-				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSECPAGE;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_ERASE_EEPROM_PAGE:
-				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGE;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_ERASE_USERSIG:
-				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEUSERSIG;
-				break;
-			default:
-				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_NOOP;
-				break;
-		}
-		
-		/* Erase the target memory, indicate timeout if ocurred */
-		if (!(XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(EraseCommand, Erase_XPROG_Params.Address)))
-		  ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		if (Erase_XPROG_Params.MemoryType == XPRG_ERASE_CHIP)
-		  EraseCommand = TINY_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE;
-		else
-		  EraseCommand = TINY_NVM_CMD_SECTIONERASE;
-	
-		/* Erase the target memory, indicate timeout if ocurred */
-		if (!(TINYNVM_EraseMemory(EraseCommand, Erase_XPROG_Params.Address)))
-		  ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_ERASE);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReturnStatus);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();	
-}
-
-/** Handler for the XPROG WRITE_MEMORY command to write to a specific memory space within the attached device. */
-static void XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_OK;
-
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t  MemoryType;
-		uint8_t  PageMode;
-		uint32_t Address;
-		uint16_t Length;
-		uint8_t  ProgData[256];
-	} WriteMemory_XPROG_Params;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&WriteMemory_XPROG_Params, (sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params) -
-	                                                    sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params).ProgData), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address);
-	WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length  = SwapEndian_16(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length);
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-
-	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
-	{
-		/* Assume FLASH page programming by default, as it is the common case */
-		uint8_t WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFLASHPAGE;
-		uint8_t WriteBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADFLASHPAGEBUFF;
-		uint8_t EraseBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGEBUFF;
-		bool    PagedMemory      = true;
-		
-		switch (WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.MemoryType)
-		{
-			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_APPL:
-				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEAPPSECPAGE;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_BOOT:
-				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEBOOTSECPAGE;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_EEPROM:
-				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEEEPROMPAGE;
-				WriteBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF;
-				EraseBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF;			
-				break;
-			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_USERSIG:
-				/* User signature is paged, but needs us to manually indicate the mode bits since the host doesn't set them */
-				WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.PageMode = (XPRG_PAGEMODE_ERASE | XPRG_PAGEMODE_WRITE);
-				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEUSERSIG;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_FUSE:
-				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFUSE;
-				PagedMemory      = false;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_LOCKBITS:
-				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITELOCK;
-				PagedMemory      = false;
-				break;
-		}
-		
-		/* Send the appropriate memory write commands to the device, indicate timeout if occurred */
-		if ((PagedMemory && !(XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(WriteBuffCommand, EraseBuffCommand, WriteCommand, 
-													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.PageMode, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address,
-													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length))) ||
-		   (!PagedMemory && !(XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(WriteCommand, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address,
-													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData[0]))))
-		{
-			ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
-		}
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Send write command to the TPI device, indicate timeout if occurred */
-		if (!(TINYNVM_WriteMemory(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData,
-		      WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
-		{
-			ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_WRITE_MEM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReturnStatus);	
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the XPROG READ_MEMORY command to read data from a specific address space within the
- *  attached device.
- */
-static void XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_OK;
-
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t  MemoryType;
-		uint32_t Address;
-		uint16_t Length;
-	} ReadMemory_XPROG_Params;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ReadMemory_XPROG_Params, sizeof(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address);
-	ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length  = SwapEndian_16(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-
-	uint8_t ReadBuffer[256];
-	
-	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
-	{
-		/* Read the PDI target's memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
-		if (!(XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
-		  ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Read the TPI target's memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
-		if (!(TINYNVM_ReadMemory(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
-		  ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_READ_MEM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReturnStatus);
-	
-	if (ReturnStatus == XPRG_ERR_OK)
-	  Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-/** Handler for the XPROG CRC command to read a specific memory space's CRC value for comparison between the
- *  attached device's memory and a data set on the host.
- */
-static void XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_OK;
-	
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t CRCType;
-	} ReadCRC_XPROG_Params;
-	
-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ReadCRC_XPROG_Params, sizeof(ReadCRC_XPROG_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-	
-	uint32_t MemoryCRC;
-
-	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
-	{
-		uint8_t CRCCommand;
-
-		/* Determine which NVM command to send to the device depending on the memory to CRC */
-		switch (ReadCRC_XPROG_Params.CRCType)
-		{
-			case XPRG_CRC_APP:
-				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_APPCRC;
-				break;
-			case XPRG_CRC_BOOT:
-				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_BOOTCRC;
-				break;
-			default:
-				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_FLASHCRC;
-				break;
-		}
-		
-		/* Perform and retrieve the memory CRC, indicate timeout if occurred */
-		if (!(XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(CRCCommand, &MemoryCRC)))
-		  ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* TPI does not support memory CRC */
-		ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_FAILED;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_CRC);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReturnStatus);
-	
-	if (ReturnStatus == XPRG_ERR_OK)
-	{
-		Endpoint_Write_Byte(MemoryCRC >> 16);
-		Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(MemoryCRC & 0xFFFF);		
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();	
-}
-
-/** Handler for the XPROG SET_PARAM command to set a XPROG parameter for use when communicating with the
- *  attached device.
- */
-static void XPROGProtocol_SetParam(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_OK;
-
-	uint8_t XPROGParam = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-	
-	/* Determine which parameter is being set, store the new parameter value */
-	switch (XPROGParam)
-	{
-		case XPRG_PARAM_NVMBASE:
-			XPROG_Param_NVMBase = Endpoint_Read_DWord_BE();
-			break;
-		case XPRG_PARAM_EEPPAGESIZE:
-			XPROG_Param_EEPageSize = Endpoint_Read_Word_BE();
-			break;
-		case XPRG_PARAM_NVMCMD_REG:
-			XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-			break;
-		case XPRG_PARAM_NVMCSR_REG:
-			XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
-			break;
-		default:
-			ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_FAILED;
-			break;
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
-	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
-		  
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_SET_PARAM);
-	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReturnStatus);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  XPROG Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol wrapped XPROG commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGPROTOCOL_C
+#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+/** Base absolute address for the target's NVM controller for PDI programming */
+uint32_t XPROG_Param_NVMBase = 0x010001C0;
+
+/** Size in bytes of the target's EEPROM page */
+uint16_t XPROG_Param_EEPageSize;
+
+/** Address of the TPI device's NVMCMD register for TPI programming */
+uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr;
+
+/** Address of the TPI device's NVMCSR register for TPI programming */
+uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr;
+
+/** Currently selected XPROG programming protocol */
+uint8_t  XPROG_SelectedProtocol = XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI;
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_XPROG_SETMODE command, which sets the programmer-to-target protocol used for PDI/TPI
+ *  programming.
+ */
+void XPROGProtocol_SetMode(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t Protocol;
+	} SetMode_XPROG_Params;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SetMode_XPROG_Params, sizeof(SetMode_XPROG_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	XPROG_SelectedProtocol = SetMode_XPROG_Params.Protocol;
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG_SETMODE);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte((SetMode_XPROG_Params.Protocol != XPRG_PROTOCOL_JTAG) ? STATUS_CMD_OK : STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();	
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_XPROG command, which wraps up XPROG commands in a V2 wrapper which need to be
+ *  removed and processed so that the underlying XPROG command can be handled.
+ */
+void XPROGProtocol_Command(void)
+{
+	uint8_t XPROGCommand = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+	
+	switch (XPROGCommand)
+	{
+		case XPRG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE:
+			XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode();
+			break;
+		case XPRG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE:
+			XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode();
+			break;
+		case XPRG_CMD_ERASE:
+			XPROGProtocol_Erase();
+			break;
+		case XPRG_CMD_WRITE_MEM:
+			XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory();
+			break;
+		case XPRG_CMD_READ_MEM:
+			XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory();
+			break;
+		case XPRG_CMD_CRC:
+			XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC();
+			break;
+		case XPRG_CMD_SET_PARAM:
+			XPROGProtocol_SetParam();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG ENTER_PROGMODE command to establish a connection with the attached device. */
+static void XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	bool NVMBusEnabled;
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		/* Enable PDI programming mode with the attached target */
+		XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI();
+
+		/* Store the RESET key into the RESET PDI register to keep the XMEGA in reset */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS | PDI_RESET_REG);	
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_RESET_KEY);
+
+		/* Lower direction change guard time to 0 USART bits */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS | PDI_CTRL_REG);	
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x07);
+
+		/* Enable access to the XPROG NVM bus by sending the documented NVM access key to the device */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_KEY);	
+		for (uint8_t i = sizeof(PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY); i > 0; i--)
+		  XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY[i - 1]);
+
+		/* Wait until the NVM bus becomes active */
+		NVMBusEnabled = XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Enable TPI programming mode with the attached target */
+		XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI();
+		
+		/* Lower direction change guard time to 0 USART bits */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTCS | TPI_CTRL_REG);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x07);
+		
+		/* Enable access to the XPROG NVM bus by sending the documented NVM access key to the device */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SKEY);	
+		for (uint8_t i = sizeof(TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY); i > 0; i--)
+		  XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY[i - 1]);
+
+		/* Wait until the NVM bus becomes active */
+		NVMBusEnabled = TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(NVMBusEnabled ? XPRG_ERR_OK : XPRG_ERR_FAILED);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG LEAVE_PROGMODE command to terminate the PDI programming connection with
+ *  the attached device.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+
+		/* Clear the RESET key in the RESET PDI register to allow the XMEGA to run */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS | PDI_RESET_REG);	
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+		/* Do it twice to make sure it takes affect (silicon bug?) */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS | PDI_RESET_REG);	
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+		XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+
+		/* Clear the NVMEN bit in the TPI CONTROL register to disable TPI mode */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTCS | TPI_CTRL_REG);	
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	
+		XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI();
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_ERR_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPRG ERASE command to erase a specific memory address space in the attached device. */
+static void XPROGProtocol_Erase(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  MemoryType;
+		uint32_t Address;
+	} Erase_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Erase_XPROG_Params, sizeof(Erase_XPROG_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Erase_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(Erase_XPROG_Params.Address);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	uint8_t EraseCommand;
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{	
+		/* Determine which NVM command to send to the device depending on the memory to erase */
+		switch (Erase_XPROG_Params.MemoryType)
+		{
+			case XPRG_ERASE_CHIP:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_ERASE_APP:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSEC;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_ERASE_BOOT:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSEC;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_ERASE_EEPROM:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_ERASE_APP_PAGE:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_ERASE_BOOT_PAGE:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_ERASE_EEPROM_PAGE:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_ERASE_USERSIG:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEUSERSIG;
+				break;
+			default:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_NOOP;
+				break;
+		}
+		
+		/* Erase the target memory, indicate timeout if ocurred */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(EraseCommand, Erase_XPROG_Params.Address)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		if (Erase_XPROG_Params.MemoryType == XPRG_ERASE_CHIP)
+		  EraseCommand = TINY_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE;
+		else
+		  EraseCommand = TINY_NVM_CMD_SECTIONERASE;
+	
+		/* Erase the target memory, indicate timeout if ocurred */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_EraseMemory(EraseCommand, Erase_XPROG_Params.Address)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_ERASE);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReturnStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();	
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG WRITE_MEMORY command to write to a specific memory space within the attached device. */
+static void XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  MemoryType;
+		uint8_t  PageMode;
+		uint32_t Address;
+		uint16_t Length;
+		uint8_t  ProgData[256];
+	} WriteMemory_XPROG_Params;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&WriteMemory_XPROG_Params, (sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params) -
+	                                                    sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params).ProgData), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address);
+	WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length  = SwapEndian_16(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length);
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		/* Assume FLASH page programming by default, as it is the common case */
+		uint8_t WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFLASHPAGE;
+		uint8_t WriteBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADFLASHPAGEBUFF;
+		uint8_t EraseBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGEBUFF;
+		bool    PagedMemory      = true;
+		
+		switch (WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.MemoryType)
+		{
+			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_APPL:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEAPPSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_BOOT:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEBOOTSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_EEPROM:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEEEPROMPAGE;
+				WriteBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF;
+				EraseBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF;			
+				break;
+			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_USERSIG:
+				/* User signature is paged, but needs us to manually indicate the mode bits since the host doesn't set them */
+				WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.PageMode = (XPRG_PAGEMODE_ERASE | XPRG_PAGEMODE_WRITE);
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEUSERSIG;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_FUSE:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFUSE;
+				PagedMemory      = false;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_MEM_TYPE_LOCKBITS:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITELOCK;
+				PagedMemory      = false;
+				break;
+		}
+		
+		/* Send the appropriate memory write commands to the device, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if ((PagedMemory && !(XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(WriteBuffCommand, EraseBuffCommand, WriteCommand, 
+													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.PageMode, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address,
+													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length))) ||
+		   (!PagedMemory && !(XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(WriteCommand, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address,
+													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData[0]))))
+		{
+			ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Send write command to the TPI device, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_WriteMemory(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData,
+		      WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
+		{
+			ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_WRITE_MEM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReturnStatus);	
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG READ_MEMORY command to read data from a specific address space within the
+ *  attached device.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  MemoryType;
+		uint32_t Address;
+		uint16_t Length;
+	} ReadMemory_XPROG_Params;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ReadMemory_XPROG_Params, sizeof(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address);
+	ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length  = SwapEndian_16(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ReadBuffer[256];
+	
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		/* Read the PDI target's memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Read the TPI target's memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_ReadMemory(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_READ_MEM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReturnStatus);
+	
+	if (ReturnStatus == XPRG_ERR_OK)
+	  Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG CRC command to read a specific memory space's CRC value for comparison between the
+ *  attached device's memory and a data set on the host.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_OK;
+	
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t CRCType;
+	} ReadCRC_XPROG_Params;
+	
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ReadCRC_XPROG_Params, sizeof(ReadCRC_XPROG_Params), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	
+	uint32_t MemoryCRC;
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		uint8_t CRCCommand;
+
+		/* Determine which NVM command to send to the device depending on the memory to CRC */
+		switch (ReadCRC_XPROG_Params.CRCType)
+		{
+			case XPRG_CRC_APP:
+				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_APPCRC;
+				break;
+			case XPRG_CRC_BOOT:
+				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_BOOTCRC;
+				break;
+			default:
+				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_FLASHCRC;
+				break;
+		}
+		
+		/* Perform and retrieve the memory CRC, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(CRCCommand, &MemoryCRC)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* TPI does not support memory CRC */
+		ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_FAILED;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_CRC);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReturnStatus);
+	
+	if (ReturnStatus == XPRG_ERR_OK)
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_Byte(MemoryCRC >> 16);
+		Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(MemoryCRC & 0xFFFF);		
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();	
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG SET_PARAM command to set a XPROG parameter for use when communicating with the
+ *  attached device.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_SetParam(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_OK;
+
+	uint8_t XPROGParam = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+	
+	/* Determine which parameter is being set, store the new parameter value */
+	switch (XPROGParam)
+	{
+		case XPRG_PARAM_NVMBASE:
+			XPROG_Param_NVMBase = Endpoint_Read_DWord_BE();
+			break;
+		case XPRG_PARAM_EEPPAGESIZE:
+			XPROG_Param_EEPageSize = Endpoint_Read_Word_BE();
+			break;
+		case XPRG_PARAM_NVMCMD_REG:
+			XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+			break;
+		case XPRG_PARAM_NVMCSR_REG:
+			XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+			break;
+		default:
+			ReturnStatus = XPRG_ERR_FAILED;
+			break;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+		  
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(XPRG_CMD_SET_PARAM);
+	Endpoint_Write_Byte(ReturnStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h
index 8e5d1b06d..1fdb5a1b8 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h
@@ -1,132 +1,132 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for XPROGProtocol.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _XPROG_PROTOCOL_
-#define _XPROG_PROTOCOL_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <util/delay.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-	
-		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
-		#include "XPROGTarget.h"
-		#include "XMEGANVM.h"
-		#include "TINYNVM.h"
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
-			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
-			
-			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
-				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
-			#endif
-		#endif
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define XPRG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE             0x01
-		#define XPRG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE             0x02
-		#define XPRG_CMD_ERASE                      0x03
-		#define XPRG_CMD_WRITE_MEM                  0x04
-		#define XPRG_CMD_READ_MEM                   0x05
-		#define XPRG_CMD_CRC                        0x06
-		#define XPRG_CMD_SET_PARAM                  0x07
-
-		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_APPL                  1
-		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_BOOT                  2
-		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_EEPROM                3
-		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_FUSE                  4
-		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_LOCKBITS              5
-		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_USERSIG               6
-		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_FACTORY_CALIBRATION   7
-
-		#define XPRG_ERASE_CHIP                     1
-		#define XPRG_ERASE_APP                      2
-		#define XPRG_ERASE_BOOT                     3
-		#define XPRG_ERASE_EEPROM                   4
-		#define XPRG_ERASE_APP_PAGE                 5
-		#define XPRG_ERASE_BOOT_PAGE                6
-		#define XPRG_ERASE_EEPROM_PAGE              7
-		#define XPRG_ERASE_USERSIG                  8
-
-		#define XPRG_MEM_WRITE_ERASE                0
-		#define XPRG_MEM_WRITE_WRITE                1
-
-		#define XPRG_CRC_APP                        1
-		#define XPRG_CRC_BOOT                       2
-		#define XPRG_CRC_FLASH                      3
-
-		#define XPRG_ERR_OK                         0
-		#define XPRG_ERR_FAILED                     1
-		#define XPRG_ERR_COLLISION                  2
-		#define XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT                    3
-
-		#define XPRG_PARAM_NVMBASE                  0x01
-		#define XPRG_PARAM_EEPPAGESIZE              0x02
-		#define XPRG_PARAM_NVMCMD_REG               0x03 /* Undocumented, Reverse-engineered */
-		#define XPRG_PARAM_NVMCSR_REG               0x04 /* Undocumented, Reverse-engineered */
-		
-		#define XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI                   0x00
-		#define XPRG_PROTOCOL_JTAG                  0x01
-		#define XPRG_PROTOCOL_TPI                   0x02 /* Undocumented, Reverse-engineered */
-		
-		#define XPRG_PAGEMODE_WRITE                 (1 << 1)
-		#define XPRG_PAGEMODE_ERASE                 (1 << 0)
-	
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern uint32_t XPROG_Param_NVMBase;
-		extern uint16_t XPROG_Param_EEPageSize;
-		extern uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr;
-		extern uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr;
-		extern uint8_t  XPROG_SelectedProtocol;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void XPROGProtocol_SetMode(void);
-		void XPROGProtocol_Command(void);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGPROTOCOL_C)
-			static void XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(void);
-			static void XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(void);
-			static void XPROGProtocol_SetParam(void);
-			static void XPROGProtocol_Erase(void);
-			static void XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(void);
-			static void XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(void);
-			static void XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(void);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XPROGProtocol.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XPROG_PROTOCOL_
+#define _XPROG_PROTOCOL_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+	
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "XPROGTarget.h"
+		#include "XMEGANVM.h"
+		#include "TINYNVM.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+			
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define XPRG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE             0x01
+		#define XPRG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE             0x02
+		#define XPRG_CMD_ERASE                      0x03
+		#define XPRG_CMD_WRITE_MEM                  0x04
+		#define XPRG_CMD_READ_MEM                   0x05
+		#define XPRG_CMD_CRC                        0x06
+		#define XPRG_CMD_SET_PARAM                  0x07
+
+		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_APPL                  1
+		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_BOOT                  2
+		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_EEPROM                3
+		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_FUSE                  4
+		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_LOCKBITS              5
+		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_USERSIG               6
+		#define XPRG_MEM_TYPE_FACTORY_CALIBRATION   7
+
+		#define XPRG_ERASE_CHIP                     1
+		#define XPRG_ERASE_APP                      2
+		#define XPRG_ERASE_BOOT                     3
+		#define XPRG_ERASE_EEPROM                   4
+		#define XPRG_ERASE_APP_PAGE                 5
+		#define XPRG_ERASE_BOOT_PAGE                6
+		#define XPRG_ERASE_EEPROM_PAGE              7
+		#define XPRG_ERASE_USERSIG                  8
+
+		#define XPRG_MEM_WRITE_ERASE                0
+		#define XPRG_MEM_WRITE_WRITE                1
+
+		#define XPRG_CRC_APP                        1
+		#define XPRG_CRC_BOOT                       2
+		#define XPRG_CRC_FLASH                      3
+
+		#define XPRG_ERR_OK                         0
+		#define XPRG_ERR_FAILED                     1
+		#define XPRG_ERR_COLLISION                  2
+		#define XPRG_ERR_TIMEOUT                    3
+
+		#define XPRG_PARAM_NVMBASE                  0x01
+		#define XPRG_PARAM_EEPPAGESIZE              0x02
+		#define XPRG_PARAM_NVMCMD_REG               0x03 /* Undocumented, Reverse-engineered */
+		#define XPRG_PARAM_NVMCSR_REG               0x04 /* Undocumented, Reverse-engineered */
+		
+		#define XPRG_PROTOCOL_PDI                   0x00
+		#define XPRG_PROTOCOL_JTAG                  0x01
+		#define XPRG_PROTOCOL_TPI                   0x02 /* Undocumented, Reverse-engineered */
+		
+		#define XPRG_PAGEMODE_WRITE                 (1 << 1)
+		#define XPRG_PAGEMODE_ERASE                 (1 << 0)
+	
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint32_t XPROG_Param_NVMBase;
+		extern uint16_t XPROG_Param_EEPageSize;
+		extern uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr;
+		extern uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr;
+		extern uint8_t  XPROG_SelectedProtocol;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void XPROGProtocol_SetMode(void);
+		void XPROGProtocol_Command(void);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGPROTOCOL_C)
+			static void XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_SetParam(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_Erase(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(void);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c
index 72a38f824..5598791a6 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c
@@ -1,221 +1,221 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Target-related functions for the PDI Protocol decoder.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGTARGET_C
-#include "XPROGTarget.h"
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** Flag to indicate if the USART is currently in Tx or Rx mode. */
-volatile bool IsSending;
-
-/** Enables the target's PDI interface, holding the target in reset until PDI mode is exited. */
-void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(void)
-{
-	IsSending = false;
-
-	/* Set Tx and XCK as outputs, Rx as input */
-	DDRD |=  (1 << 5) | (1 << 3);
-	DDRD &= ~(1 << 2);
-	
-	/* Set DATA line high for at least 90ns to disable /RESET functionality */
-	PORTD |= (1 << 3);
-	_delay_us(1);
-	
-	/* Set up the synchronous USART for XMEGA communications - 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits */
-	UBRR1  = (F_CPU / XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED);
-	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
-	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
-
-	/* Send two BREAKs of 12 bits each to enable PDI interface (need at least 16 idle bits) */
-	XPROGTarget_SendBreak();
-	XPROGTarget_SendBreak();
-}
-
-/** Enables the target's TPI interface, holding the target in reset until TPI mode is exited. */
-void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(void)
-{
-	IsSending = false;
-
-	/* Set /RESET line low for at least 400ns to enable TPI functionality */
-	AUX_LINE_DDR  |=  AUX_LINE_MASK;
-	AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
-	_delay_us(1);
-
-	/* Set Tx and XCK as outputs, Rx as input */
-	DDRD |=  (1 << 5) | (1 << 3);
-	DDRD &= ~(1 << 2);
-		
-	/* Set up the synchronous USART for TINY communications - 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits */
-	UBRR1  = (F_CPU / XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED);
-	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
-	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
-
-	/* Send two BREAKs of 12 bits each to enable TPI interface (need at least 16 idle bits) */
-	XPROGTarget_SendBreak();
-	XPROGTarget_SendBreak();
-}
-
-/** Disables the target's PDI interface, exits programming mode and starts the target's application. */
-void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(void)
-{
-	/* Switch to Rx mode to ensure that all pending transmissions are complete */
-	XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
-
-	/* Turn off receiver and transmitter of the USART, clear settings */
-	UCSR1A  = ((1 << TXC1) | (1 << RXC1));
-	UCSR1B  = 0;
-	UCSR1C  = 0;
-
-	/* Tristate all pins */
-	DDRD  &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3));
-	PORTD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 2));
-}
-
-/** Disables the target's TPI interface, exits programming mode and starts the target's application. */
-void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(void)
-{
-	/* Switch to Rx mode to ensure that all pending transmissions are complete */
-	XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
-
-	/* Turn off receiver and transmitter of the USART, clear settings */
-	UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1) | (1 << RXC1);
-	UCSR1B  = 0;
-	UCSR1C  = 0;
-
-	/* Set all USART lines as input, tristate */
-	DDRD  &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3));
-	PORTD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 2));
-
-	/* Tristate target /RESET line */
-	AUX_LINE_DDR  &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
-	AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
-}
-
-/** Sends a byte via the USART.
- *
- *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send through the USART
- */
-void XPROGTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
-{
-	/* Switch to Tx mode if currently in Rx mode */
-	if (!(IsSending))
-	  XPROGTarget_SetTxMode();
-	  
-	/* Wait until there is space in the hardware Tx buffer before writing */
-	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)));
-	UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1);
-	UDR1    = Byte;
-
-    if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-}
-
-/** Receives a byte via the software USART, blocking until data is received.
- *
- *  \return Received byte from the USART
- */
-uint8_t XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(void)
-{
-	/* Switch to Rx mode if currently in Tx mode */
-	if (IsSending)
-	  XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
-
-	/* Wait until a byte has been received before reading */
-	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)) && TimeoutMSRemaining);
-	
-	if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-
-	return UDR1;
-}
-
-/** Sends a BREAK via the USART to the attached target, consisting of a full frame of idle bits. */
-void XPROGTarget_SendBreak(void)
-{
-	/* Switch to Tx mode if currently in Rx mode */
-	if (!(IsSending))
-	  XPROGTarget_SetTxMode();
-
-	/* Need to do nothing for a full frame to send a BREAK */
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BITS_IN_USART_FRAME; i++)
-	{
-		/* Wait for a full cycle of the clock */
-		while (PIND & (1 << 5));
-		while (!(PIND & (1 << 5)));
-	}
-
-    if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-}
-
-static void XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(void)
-{
-	/* Wait for a full cycle of the clock */
-	while (PIND & (1 << 5));
-	while (!(PIND & (1 << 5)));
-
-	PORTD  |=  (1 << 3);
-	DDRD   |=  (1 << 3);
-
-	UCSR1B &= ~(1 << RXEN1);
-	UCSR1B |=  (1 << TXEN1);
-		
-	IsSending = true;
-
-    if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-
-	IsSending = true;
-}
-
-static void XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(void)
-{
-	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << TXC1)));
-	UCSR1A |=  (1 << TXC1);
-
-	UCSR1B &= ~(1 << TXEN1);
-	UCSR1B |=  (1 << RXEN1);
-
-	DDRD   &= ~(1 << 3);
-	PORTD  &= ~(1 << 3);
-
-    if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
-	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
-
-	IsSending = false;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the PDI Protocol decoder.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGTARGET_C
+#include "XPROGTarget.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the USART is currently in Tx or Rx mode. */
+volatile bool IsSending;
+
+/** Enables the target's PDI interface, holding the target in reset until PDI mode is exited. */
+void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(void)
+{
+	IsSending = false;
+
+	/* Set Tx and XCK as outputs, Rx as input */
+	DDRD |=  (1 << 5) | (1 << 3);
+	DDRD &= ~(1 << 2);
+	
+	/* Set DATA line high for at least 90ns to disable /RESET functionality */
+	PORTD |= (1 << 3);
+	_delay_us(1);
+	
+	/* Set up the synchronous USART for XMEGA communications - 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits */
+	UBRR1  = (F_CPU / XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED);
+	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
+
+	/* Send two BREAKs of 12 bits each to enable PDI interface (need at least 16 idle bits) */
+	XPROGTarget_SendBreak();
+	XPROGTarget_SendBreak();
+}
+
+/** Enables the target's TPI interface, holding the target in reset until TPI mode is exited. */
+void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(void)
+{
+	IsSending = false;
+
+	/* Set /RESET line low for at least 400ns to enable TPI functionality */
+	AUX_LINE_DDR  |=  AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	_delay_us(1);
+
+	/* Set Tx and XCK as outputs, Rx as input */
+	DDRD |=  (1 << 5) | (1 << 3);
+	DDRD &= ~(1 << 2);
+		
+	/* Set up the synchronous USART for TINY communications - 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits */
+	UBRR1  = (F_CPU / XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED);
+	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
+
+	/* Send two BREAKs of 12 bits each to enable TPI interface (need at least 16 idle bits) */
+	XPROGTarget_SendBreak();
+	XPROGTarget_SendBreak();
+}
+
+/** Disables the target's PDI interface, exits programming mode and starts the target's application. */
+void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Rx mode to ensure that all pending transmissions are complete */
+	XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
+
+	/* Turn off receiver and transmitter of the USART, clear settings */
+	UCSR1A  = ((1 << TXC1) | (1 << RXC1));
+	UCSR1B  = 0;
+	UCSR1C  = 0;
+
+	/* Tristate all pins */
+	DDRD  &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3));
+	PORTD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 2));
+}
+
+/** Disables the target's TPI interface, exits programming mode and starts the target's application. */
+void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Rx mode to ensure that all pending transmissions are complete */
+	XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
+
+	/* Turn off receiver and transmitter of the USART, clear settings */
+	UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1) | (1 << RXC1);
+	UCSR1B  = 0;
+	UCSR1C  = 0;
+
+	/* Set all USART lines as input, tristate */
+	DDRD  &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3));
+	PORTD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 2));
+
+	/* Tristate target /RESET line */
+	AUX_LINE_DDR  &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+}
+
+/** Sends a byte via the USART.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send through the USART
+ */
+void XPROGTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	/* Switch to Tx mode if currently in Rx mode */
+	if (!(IsSending))
+	  XPROGTarget_SetTxMode();
+	  
+	/* Wait until there is space in the hardware Tx buffer before writing */
+	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)));
+	UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1);
+	UDR1    = Byte;
+
+    if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+}
+
+/** Receives a byte via the software USART, blocking until data is received.
+ *
+ *  \return Received byte from the USART
+ */
+uint8_t XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Rx mode if currently in Tx mode */
+	if (IsSending)
+	  XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
+
+	/* Wait until a byte has been received before reading */
+	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)) && TimeoutMSRemaining);
+	
+	if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+
+	return UDR1;
+}
+
+/** Sends a BREAK via the USART to the attached target, consisting of a full frame of idle bits. */
+void XPROGTarget_SendBreak(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Tx mode if currently in Rx mode */
+	if (!(IsSending))
+	  XPROGTarget_SetTxMode();
+
+	/* Need to do nothing for a full frame to send a BREAK */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BITS_IN_USART_FRAME; i++)
+	{
+		/* Wait for a full cycle of the clock */
+		while (PIND & (1 << 5));
+		while (!(PIND & (1 << 5)));
+	}
+
+    if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+}
+
+static void XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(void)
+{
+	/* Wait for a full cycle of the clock */
+	while (PIND & (1 << 5));
+	while (!(PIND & (1 << 5)));
+
+	PORTD  |=  (1 << 3);
+	DDRD   |=  (1 << 3);
+
+	UCSR1B &= ~(1 << RXEN1);
+	UCSR1B |=  (1 << TXEN1);
+		
+	IsSending = true;
+
+    if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+
+	IsSending = true;
+}
+
+static void XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(void)
+{
+	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << TXC1)));
+	UCSR1A |=  (1 << TXC1);
+
+	UCSR1B &= ~(1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1B |=  (1 << RXEN1);
+
+	DDRD   &= ~(1 << 3);
+	PORTD  &= ~(1 << 3);
+
+    if (TimeoutMSRemaining)
+	  TimeoutMSRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_MS;
+
+	IsSending = false;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h
index 65ec11bcf..436f0f30d 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h
@@ -1,126 +1,126 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for XPROGTarget.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _XPROG_TARGET_
-#define _XPROG_TARGET_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		
-		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
-		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
-	
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
-			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
-			
-			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
-				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
-			#endif
-		#endif
-		
-		/** Serial carrier TPI/PDI speed when hardware TPI/PDI mode is used */
-		#define XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED       1000000
-
-		/** Total number of bits in a single USART frame */
-		#define BITS_IN_USART_FRAME        12
-		
-		#define PDI_CMD_LDS                0x00
-		#define PDI_CMD_LD                 0x20
-		#define PDI_CMD_STS                0x40
-		#define PDI_CMD_ST                 0x60
-		#define PDI_CMD_LDCS               0x80
-		#define PDI_CMD_REPEAT             0xA0
-		#define PDI_CMD_STCS               0xC0
-		#define PDI_CMD_KEY                0xE0
-		
-		#define PDI_STATUS_REG             0
-		#define PDI_RESET_REG              1
-		#define PDI_CTRL_REG               2
-		
-		#define PDI_STATUS_NVM             (1 << 1)
-
-		#define PDI_RESET_KEY              0x59
-		#define PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY          (uint8_t[]){0x12, 0x89, 0xAB, 0x45, 0xCD, 0xD8, 0x88, 0xFF}
-
-		#define PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE          0
-		#define PDI_DATSIZE_2BYTES         1
-		#define PDI_DATSIZE_3BYTES         2
-		#define PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES         3
-		
-		#define PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT       0
-		#define PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI    1
-		#define PDI_POINTER_DIRECT         2
-
-		#define TPI_CMD_SLD                0x20
-		#define TPI_CMD_SST                0x60
-		#define TPI_CMD_SSTPR              0x68
-		#define TPI_CMD_SIN                0x10
-		#define TPI_CMD_SOUT               0x90
-		#define TPI_CMD_SLDCS              0x80
-		#define TPI_CMD_SSTCS              0xC0
-		#define TPI_CMD_SKEY               0xE0
-
-		#define TPI_STATUS_REG             0x00
-		#define TPI_CTRL_REG               0x02
-		#define TPI_ID_REG                 0x0F
-		
-		#define TPI_STATUS_NVM             (1 << 1)
-
-		#define TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY          (uint8_t[]){0x12, 0x89, 0xAB, 0x45, 0xCD, 0xD8, 0x88, 0xFF}
-
-		#define TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT       0
-		#define TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI    4
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void    XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(void);
-		void    XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(void);
-		void    XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(void);
-		void    XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(void);
-		void    XPROGTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte);
-		uint8_t XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(void);
-		void    XPROGTarget_SendBreak(void);
-		bool    XPROGTarget_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGTARGET_C)
-			static void XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(void);
-			static void XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(void);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XPROGTarget.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XPROG_TARGET_
+#define _XPROG_TARGET_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+	
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+			
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+		
+		/** Serial carrier TPI/PDI speed when hardware TPI/PDI mode is used */
+		#define XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED       1000000
+
+		/** Total number of bits in a single USART frame */
+		#define BITS_IN_USART_FRAME        12
+		
+		#define PDI_CMD_LDS                0x00
+		#define PDI_CMD_LD                 0x20
+		#define PDI_CMD_STS                0x40
+		#define PDI_CMD_ST                 0x60
+		#define PDI_CMD_LDCS               0x80
+		#define PDI_CMD_REPEAT             0xA0
+		#define PDI_CMD_STCS               0xC0
+		#define PDI_CMD_KEY                0xE0
+		
+		#define PDI_STATUS_REG             0
+		#define PDI_RESET_REG              1
+		#define PDI_CTRL_REG               2
+		
+		#define PDI_STATUS_NVM             (1 << 1)
+
+		#define PDI_RESET_KEY              0x59
+		#define PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY          (uint8_t[]){0x12, 0x89, 0xAB, 0x45, 0xCD, 0xD8, 0x88, 0xFF}
+
+		#define PDI_DATSIZE_1BYTE          0
+		#define PDI_DATSIZE_2BYTES         1
+		#define PDI_DATSIZE_3BYTES         2
+		#define PDI_DATSIZE_4BYTES         3
+		
+		#define PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT       0
+		#define PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI    1
+		#define PDI_POINTER_DIRECT         2
+
+		#define TPI_CMD_SLD                0x20
+		#define TPI_CMD_SST                0x60
+		#define TPI_CMD_SSTPR              0x68
+		#define TPI_CMD_SIN                0x10
+		#define TPI_CMD_SOUT               0x90
+		#define TPI_CMD_SLDCS              0x80
+		#define TPI_CMD_SSTCS              0xC0
+		#define TPI_CMD_SKEY               0xE0
+
+		#define TPI_STATUS_REG             0x00
+		#define TPI_CTRL_REG               0x02
+		#define TPI_ID_REG                 0x0F
+		
+		#define TPI_STATUS_NVM             (1 << 1)
+
+		#define TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY          (uint8_t[]){0x12, 0x89, 0xAB, 0x45, 0xCD, 0xD8, 0x88, 0xFF}
+
+		#define TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT       0
+		#define TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI    4
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte);
+		uint8_t XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_SendBreak(void);
+		bool    XPROGTarget_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGTARGET_C)
+			static void XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(void);
+			static void XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile
index 3c946540c..a0169332f 100644
--- a/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile
@@ -1,754 +1,754 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = AVRISP
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=16
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-      Lib/V2Protocol.c                                            \
-      Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c                                      \
-      Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c                                       \
-      Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c                                         \
-	  Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c                                   \
-	  Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c                                     \
-	  Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c                                        \
-	  Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c                                         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC = 
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_PORT=PORTB
-CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_PIN=PINB
-CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_DDR=DDRB
-CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_MASK="(1 << 4)"
-CDEFS += -DVTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL=2
-CDEFS += -DENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
-CDEFS += -DENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
-#CDEFS += -DXPROG_VIA_HARDWARE_USART
-#CDEFS += -DNO_VTARGET_DETECT
-#CDEFS += -DLIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = AVRISP
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=16
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+      Lib/V2Protocol.c                                            \
+      Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c                                      \
+      Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c                                       \
+      Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c                                         \
+	  Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c                                   \
+	  Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c                                     \
+	  Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c                                        \
+	  Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c                                         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC = 
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_PORT=PORTB
+CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_PIN=PINB
+CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_DDR=DDRB
+CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_MASK="(1 << 4)"
+CDEFS += -DVTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL=2
+CDEFS += -DENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+CDEFS += -DENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+#CDEFS += -DXPROG_VIA_HARDWARE_USART
+#CDEFS += -DNO_VTARGET_DETECT
+#CDEFS += -DLIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/Benito/Benito Programmer.inf b/Projects/Benito/Benito Programmer.inf
index d819ec0d5..efdfad2bc 100644
--- a/Projects/Benito/Benito Programmer.inf
+++ b/Projects/Benito/Benito Programmer.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
-INSTDISK="LUFA Benito Programmer Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
+INSTDISK="LUFA Benito Programmer Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/Benito/Benito.c b/Projects/Benito/Benito.c
index a91cef037..1fceec1f6 100644
--- a/Projects/Benito/Benito.c
+++ b/Projects/Benito/Benito.c
@@ -1,264 +1,264 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Benito project. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "Benito.h"
-
-/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
-RingBuff_t Tx_Buffer;
-
-/** Pulse generation counters to keep track of the number of milliseconds remaining for each pulse type */
-volatile struct
-{
-	uint8_t ResetPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for target /RESET pulse */
-	uint8_t TxLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for data Tx LED pulse */
-	uint8_t RxLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for data Rx LED pulse */
-	uint8_t PingPongLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for enumeration Tx/Rx ping-pong LED pulse */
-} PulseMSRemaining;
-
-/** Previous state of the virtual DTR control line from the host */
-bool PreviousDTRState = false;
-
-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config = 
-			{
-				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
-
-				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
-				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	Buffer_Initialize(&Tx_Buffer);
-	
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		/* Echo bytes from the host to the target via the hardware USART */
-		while (CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface) > 0)
-		{
-			Serial_TxByte(CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface));
-
-			LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
-			PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse = TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS;			
-		}
-		
-		/* Echo bytes from the target to the host via the virtual serial port */
-		while (Tx_Buffer.Elements > 0)
-		{
-			CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, Buffer_GetElement(&Tx_Buffer));
-
-			LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDMASK_RX);
-			PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse = TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS;
-		}
-		
-		/* Check if the millisecond timer has elapsed */
-		if (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A))
-		{
-			/* Check if the reset pulse period has elapsed, if so tristate the target reset line */
-			if (PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse))
-			{
-				LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
-				AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
-			}
-			
-			/* Check if the LEDs should be ping-ponging (during enumeration) */
-			if (PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse))
-			{
-				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDMASK_TX | LEDMASK_RX);
-				PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS;
-			}
-		
-			/* Turn off TX LED(s) once the TX pulse period has elapsed */
-			if (PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse))
-			  LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
-
-			/* Turn off RX LED(s) once the RX pulse period has elapsed */
-			if (PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse))
-			  LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_RX);
-
-			/* Clear the millisecond timer CTC flag (cleared by writing logic one to the register) */
-			TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);		
-		}
-		
-		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Serial_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-
-	/* Millisecond Timer Interrupt */
-	OCR0A  = (F_CPU / 64 / 1000);
-	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
-	TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00));
-	
-	/* Tristate target /RESET Line */
-	AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
-	AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR  &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS;
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = 0;
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = 0;
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
-
-	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event.
- *
- *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
- */
-void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t ConfigMask = 0;
-
-	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType)
-	{
-		case CDC_PARITY_Odd:
-			ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10));		
-			break;
-		case CDC_PARITY_Even:
-			ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11);		
-			break;
-	}
-
-	if (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat == CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits)
-	  ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1);
-
-	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits)
-	{
-		case 6:
-			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10);
-			break;
-		case 7:
-			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11);
-			break;
-		case 8:
-			ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1);
-	UCSR1B = ((1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1));
-	UCSR1C = ConfigMask;	
-	UBRR1  = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
-}
-
-/** ISR to manage the reception of data from the serial port, placing received bytes into a circular buffer
- *  for later transmission to the host.
- */
-ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
-{
-	uint8_t ReceivedByte = UDR1;
-
-	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Host-to-Device Line Encoding Changed event.
- *
- *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
- */
-void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool CurrentDTRState = (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice & CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR);
-
-	/* Check if the DTR line has been asserted - if so, start the target AVR's reset pulse */
-	if (!(PreviousDTRState) && CurrentDTRState)
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
-	
-		AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR |= AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
-		PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse = AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS;
-	}
-	
-	PreviousDTRState = CurrentDTRState;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Benito project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Benito.h"
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
+RingBuff_t Tx_Buffer;
+
+/** Pulse generation counters to keep track of the number of milliseconds remaining for each pulse type */
+volatile struct
+{
+	uint8_t ResetPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for target /RESET pulse */
+	uint8_t TxLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for data Tx LED pulse */
+	uint8_t RxLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for data Rx LED pulse */
+	uint8_t PingPongLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for enumeration Tx/Rx ping-pong LED pulse */
+} PulseMSRemaining;
+
+/** Previous state of the virtual DTR control line from the host */
+bool PreviousDTRState = false;
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config = 
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	Buffer_Initialize(&Tx_Buffer);
+	
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Echo bytes from the host to the target via the hardware USART */
+		while (CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface) > 0)
+		{
+			Serial_TxByte(CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface));
+
+			LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
+			PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse = TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS;			
+		}
+		
+		/* Echo bytes from the target to the host via the virtual serial port */
+		while (Tx_Buffer.Elements > 0)
+		{
+			CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, Buffer_GetElement(&Tx_Buffer));
+
+			LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDMASK_RX);
+			PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse = TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS;
+		}
+		
+		/* Check if the millisecond timer has elapsed */
+		if (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A))
+		{
+			/* Check if the reset pulse period has elapsed, if so tristate the target reset line */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse))
+			{
+				LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+				AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+			}
+			
+			/* Check if the LEDs should be ping-ponging (during enumeration) */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse))
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDMASK_TX | LEDMASK_RX);
+				PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS;
+			}
+		
+			/* Turn off TX LED(s) once the TX pulse period has elapsed */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse))
+			  LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
+
+			/* Turn off RX LED(s) once the RX pulse period has elapsed */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse))
+			  LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_RX);
+
+			/* Clear the millisecond timer CTC flag (cleared by writing logic one to the register) */
+			TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);		
+		}
+		
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Millisecond Timer Interrupt */
+	OCR0A  = (F_CPU / 64 / 1000);
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+	TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00));
+	
+	/* Tristate target /RESET Line */
+	AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+	AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR  &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS;
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = 0;
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = 0;
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+
+	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ConfigMask = 0;
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType)
+	{
+		case CDC_PARITY_Odd:
+			ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10));		
+			break;
+		case CDC_PARITY_Even:
+			ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11);		
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat == CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits)
+	  ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1);
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits)
+	{
+		case 6:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10);
+			break;
+		case 7:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11);
+			break;
+		case 8:
+			ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1);
+	UCSR1B = ((1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1));
+	UCSR1C = ConfigMask;	
+	UBRR1  = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
+}
+
+/** ISR to manage the reception of data from the serial port, placing received bytes into a circular buffer
+ *  for later transmission to the host.
+ */
+ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t ReceivedByte = UDR1;
+
+	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Host-to-Device Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CurrentDTRState = (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice & CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR);
+
+	/* Check if the DTR line has been asserted - if so, start the target AVR's reset pulse */
+	if (!(PreviousDTRState) && CurrentDTRState)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+	
+		AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR |= AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+		PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse = AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS;
+	}
+	
+	PreviousDTRState = CurrentDTRState;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Benito/Benito.h b/Projects/Benito/Benito.h
index c6b534e42..6e72da193 100644
--- a/Projects/Benito/Benito.h
+++ b/Projects/Benito/Benito.h
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Benito.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _BENITO_H_
-#define _BENITO_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "Lib/RingBuff.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate TX activity. */
-		#define LEDMASK_TX               LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate RX activity. */
-		#define LEDMASK_RX               LEDS_LED2
-		
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_ERROR            (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-		
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
-		void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Benito.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BENITO_H_
+#define _BENITO_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/RingBuff.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate TX activity. */
+		#define LEDMASK_TX               LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate RX activity. */
+		#define LEDMASK_RX               LEDS_LED2
+		
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_ERROR            (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+		
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt b/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt
index 1461d6dc0..0f71a6b61 100644
--- a/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt
+++ b/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt
@@ -1,100 +1,100 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Benito Arduino Programmer Project
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- * <table>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *   <td>Device</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *   <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr> 
- *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *   <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *   <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard \n
- *       Arduino Bootloader Specification</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *  </tr>
- * </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Firmware for a USB AVR powered programmer for Arduino boards using the official Arduino bootloader. This
- *  project acts like a regular USB to Serial bridge, except that asserting the DTR line will cause a pulse
- *  to appear on a given port pin, to control the target's /RESET pin.
- *
- *  This is primarily designed to fit the Benito board from www.dorkbotpdx.org, but will suit all USB AVRs.
- *
- *  After running this project for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF file located
- *  in this project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. This will enable Windows to use
- *  its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other Operating Systems should
- *  automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Indicates the PORT register of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Indicates the DDR register of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Indicates the mask of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the target /RESET pulse.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the activity Tx/Rx LEDs.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the enumeration LED ping-poning between toggles.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Benito Arduino Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr> 
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard \n
+ *       Arduino Bootloader Specification</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a USB AVR powered programmer for Arduino boards using the official Arduino bootloader. This
+ *  project acts like a regular USB to Serial bridge, except that asserting the DTR line will cause a pulse
+ *  to appear on a given port pin, to control the target's /RESET pin.
+ *
+ *  This is primarily designed to fit the Benito board from www.dorkbotpdx.org, but will suit all USB AVRs.
+ *
+ *  After running this project for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF file located
+ *  in this project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. This will enable Windows to use
+ *  its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other Operating Systems should
+ *  automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the PORT register of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the DDR register of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the mask of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the target /RESET pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the activity Tx/Rx LEDs.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the enumeration LED ping-poning between toggles.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c b/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c
index 85c2c1408..32f737d42 100644
--- a/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,255 +1,255 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x02,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2060,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_Functional_Union= 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(25), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Benito Arduino Programmer"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x02,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2060,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_Functional_Union= 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(25), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Benito Arduino Programmer"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h b/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h
index 45bab84d9..e00c5e2ed 100644
--- a/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16	
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16	
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Benito/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/Benito/Doxygen.conf
index ef177e501..e515b441a 100644
--- a/Projects/Benito/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Projects/Benito/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "Benito Arduino Programmer Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Benito Arduino Programmer Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Projects/Benito/Lib/RingBuff.c b/Projects/Benito/Lib/RingBuff.c
index 2109f8cc0..91c61d06b 100644
--- a/Projects/Benito/Lib/RingBuff.c
+++ b/Projects/Benito/Lib/RingBuff.c
@@ -1,120 +1,120 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "RingBuff.h"
-
-void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
-{
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-		Buffer->InPtr    = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-		Buffer->OutPtr   = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-		Buffer->Elements = 0;
-	}
-}
-
-void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data)
-{
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-	#if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD)
-		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
-		{
-			Buffer->OutPtr++;
-	
-			if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
-			  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Buffer->Elements++;
-		}
-	#elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW)
-		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
-		  return;
-	
-		  Buffer->Elements++;
-	#elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)
-		  Buffer->Elements++;
-	#endif
-	
-		*(Buffer->InPtr) = Data;
-		Buffer->InPtr++;
-	
-		if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
-		  Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-	}
-}
-
-RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
-{
-	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
-	
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
-		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
-		  return 0;
-#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
-	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
-#endif
-
-		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
-	
-		Buffer->OutPtr++;
-		Buffer->Elements--;
-	
-		if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
-		  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-	}
-	
-	return BuffData;
-}
-
-#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
-RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
-{
-	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
-
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
-		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
-		  return 0;
-#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
-	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
-#endif
-
-		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
-	}
-
-	return BuffData;
-}
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "RingBuff.h"
+
+void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+		Buffer->InPtr    = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		Buffer->OutPtr   = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		Buffer->Elements = 0;
+	}
+}
+
+void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data)
+{
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+	#if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD)
+		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
+		{
+			Buffer->OutPtr++;
+	
+			if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+			  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Buffer->Elements++;
+		}
+	#elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW)
+		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
+		  return;
+	
+		  Buffer->Elements++;
+	#elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)
+		  Buffer->Elements++;
+	#endif
+	
+		*(Buffer->InPtr) = Data;
+		Buffer->InPtr++;
+	
+		if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+		  Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+	}
+}
+
+RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
+	
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
+		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+		  return 0;
+#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
+	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
+#endif
+
+		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
+	
+		Buffer->OutPtr++;
+		Buffer->Elements--;
+	
+		if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+		  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+	}
+	
+	return BuffData;
+}
+
+#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
+RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
+
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
+		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+		  return 0;
+#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
+	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
+#endif
+
+		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
+	}
+
+	return BuffData;
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Benito/Lib/RingBuff.h b/Projects/Benito/Lib/RingBuff.h
index 2e03a28be..b4933aa4d 100644
--- a/Projects/Benito/Lib/RingBuff.h
+++ b/Projects/Benito/Lib/RingBuff.h
@@ -1,116 +1,116 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/* Buffer Configuration: */
-   /* Buffer length - select static size of created ring buffers: */
-	 #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128      // Set to the static ring buffer size for all ring buffers (place size after define)
-
-   /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */
-	 #define BUFF_VOLATILE            // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access
-
-   /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */
-     #define BUFF_DROPOLD             // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full
-     // #define BUFF_DROPNEW          // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full
-     // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK      // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user!
-
-   /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ring buffer: */
-     //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO  // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ring buffer is read
-     #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK        // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ring buffers - checking left to user!
-	
-   /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */
-     #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t    // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer
-	
-   /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */
-     //#define BUFF_USEPEEK
-	 	
-#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_
-#define _RINGBUFF_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-	#include <avr/io.h>
-	#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-	#include <util/atomic.h>
-	#include <limits.h>
-
-	#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-
-	/* Defines and checks: */
-	#if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE)
-		#define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE
-	#else
-		#error No buffer length specified!
-	#endif
-
-	#if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK))
-		#error No buffer drop mode specified.
-	#endif
-
-	#if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE)
-		#error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified.
-	#endif
-
-	#if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE)
-		#define BUFF_MODE            volatile
-		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK    ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
-	#else
-		#define BUFF_MODE
-		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	#endif
-
-	#if (BUFF_STATICSIZE   > LONG_MAX)
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t
-	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX)
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t
-	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX)
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t
-	#else
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-	typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t;
-
-	typedef BUFF_MODE struct
-	{
-		RingBuff_Data_t      Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH];
-		RingBuff_Data_t*     InPtr;
-		RingBuff_Data_t*     OutPtr;
-		RingBuff_Elements_t  Elements;
-	} RingBuff_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-	void            Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buff);
-	void            Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data);
-	RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
-	#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
-		RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
-	#endif
-	
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/* Buffer Configuration: */
+   /* Buffer length - select static size of created ring buffers: */
+	 #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128      // Set to the static ring buffer size for all ring buffers (place size after define)
+
+   /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */
+	 #define BUFF_VOLATILE            // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access
+
+   /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */
+     #define BUFF_DROPOLD             // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full
+     // #define BUFF_DROPNEW          // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full
+     // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK      // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user!
+
+   /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ring buffer: */
+     //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO  // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ring buffer is read
+     #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK        // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ring buffers - checking left to user!
+	
+   /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */
+     #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t    // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer
+	
+   /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */
+     //#define BUFF_USEPEEK
+	 	
+#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_
+#define _RINGBUFF_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+	#include <avr/io.h>
+	#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+	#include <util/atomic.h>
+	#include <limits.h>
+
+	#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Defines and checks: */
+	#if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE)
+		#define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE
+	#else
+		#error No buffer length specified!
+	#endif
+
+	#if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK))
+		#error No buffer drop mode specified.
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE)
+		#error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified.
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE)
+		#define BUFF_MODE            volatile
+		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK    ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
+	#else
+		#define BUFF_MODE
+		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	#endif
+
+	#if (BUFF_STATICSIZE   > LONG_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t
+	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t
+	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t
+	#else
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+	typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t;
+
+	typedef BUFF_MODE struct
+	{
+		RingBuff_Data_t      Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH];
+		RingBuff_Data_t*     InPtr;
+		RingBuff_Data_t*     OutPtr;
+		RingBuff_Elements_t  Elements;
+	} RingBuff_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+	void            Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buff);
+	void            Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data);
+	RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
+	#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
+		RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
+	#endif
+	
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Benito/makefile b/Projects/Benito/makefile
index b6f53ad3a..96bf07c1d 100644
--- a/Projects/Benito/makefile
+++ b/Projects/Benito/makefile
@@ -1,744 +1,744 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = atmega32u2
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = BENITO
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 16000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = Benito
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  Lib/RingBuff.c                                              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DAVR_RESET_LINE_PORT="PORTD"
-CDEFS += -DAVR_RESET_LINE_DDR="DDRD"
-CDEFS += -DAVR_RESET_LINE_MASK="(1 << 4)"
-CDEFS += -DAVR_RESET_PULSE_MS=10
-CDEFS += -DTX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS=30
-CDEFS += -DPING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS=100
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = atmega32u2
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = BENITO
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 16000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Benito
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  Lib/RingBuff.c                                              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DAVR_RESET_LINE_PORT="PORTD"
+CDEFS += -DAVR_RESET_LINE_DDR="DDRD"
+CDEFS += -DAVR_RESET_LINE_MASK="(1 << 4)"
+CDEFS += -DAVR_RESET_PULSE_MS=10
+CDEFS += -DTX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS=30
+CDEFS += -DPING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS=100
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c b/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c
index 4b9e03bff..640c83224 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,326 +1,326 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
- 
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2048,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
-
-			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-	
-	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
-			
-			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t),
-			
-			.InCollection             = 1,
-			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
-		},
-
-	.Audio_StreamInterface = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
-				
-			.Class                    = 0x01,
-			.SubClass                 = 0x03,
-			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-
-			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-			
-			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
-			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
-			.JackID                   = 0x01,
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
-			.JackID                   = 0x02,
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-		
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
-			.JackID                   = 0x03,
-
-			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
-			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
-			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
-			
-			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
-			.JackID                   = 0x04,
-
-			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
-			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
-			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
-			
-			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint = 
-		{
-			.Endpoint = 
-				{
-					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM),
-					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
-				},
-			
-			.Refresh                  = 0,
-			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
-		},
-		
-	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-
-			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
-			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01}
-		},
-
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint = 
-		{
-			.Endpoint = 
-				{
-					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM),
-					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
-				},
-			
-			.Refresh                  = 0,
-			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
-		},
-		
-	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
-		{
-			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
-			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
-
-			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
-			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x03}
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA MIDI Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2048,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_ControlInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x01,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+	
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_Header,
+			
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t),
+			
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumbers         = {1},
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
+				
+			.Class                    = 0x01,
+			.SubClass                 = 0x03,
+			.Protocol                 = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+			
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
+			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
+			.JackID                   = 0x01,
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
+			.JackID                   = 0x02,
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+		
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
+			.JackID                   = 0x03,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
+			
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
+			.JackID                   = 0x04,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+			
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint = 
+		{
+			.Endpoint = 
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM),
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
+				},
+			
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+		
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01}
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint = 
+		{
+			.Endpoint = 
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM),
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0
+				},
+			
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+		
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = 
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x03}
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA MIDI Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h b/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h
index ffd261e58..9933d060e 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
-
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
-		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM        2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
-		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM       1
-
-		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
-			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface;
-			USB_MIDI_AudioInterface_AS_t          Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
-			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
-			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
-			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
-			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
-			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
-			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
-			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM        2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM       1
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Interface_AC_t              Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Audio_StreamInterface;
+			USB_MIDI_AudioInterface_AS_t          Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t                    MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t                   MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_StreamEndpoint_Std_t        MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t              MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c b/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c
index c86cd0752..4b55b8da8 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c
@@ -1,186 +1,186 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "MIDIToneGenerator.h"
-
-/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-const uint8_t SineTable[] PROGMEM =
-{
-	0x80, 0x83, 0x86, 0x89, 0x8c, 0x8f, 0x92, 0x95, 0x98, 0x9c, 0x9f, 0xa2, 0xa5, 0xa8, 0xab, 0xae, 
-	0xb0, 0xb3, 0xb6, 0xb9, 0xbc, 0xbf, 0xc1, 0xc4, 0xc7, 0xc9, 0xcc, 0xce, 0xd1, 0xd3, 0xd5, 0xd8, 
-	0xda, 0xdc, 0xde, 0xe0, 0xe2, 0xe4, 0xe6, 0xe8, 0xea, 0xec, 0xed, 0xef, 0xf0, 0xf2, 0xf3, 0xf5, 
-	0xf6, 0xf7, 0xf8, 0xf9, 0xfa, 0xfb, 0xfc, 0xfc, 0xfd, 0xfe, 0xfe, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 
-	0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xfe, 0xfe, 0xfd, 0xfc, 0xfc, 0xfb, 0xfa, 0xf9, 0xf8, 0xf7, 
-	0xf6, 0xf5, 0xf3, 0xf2, 0xf0, 0xef, 0xed, 0xec, 0xea, 0xe8, 0xe6, 0xe4, 0xe2, 0xe0, 0xde, 0xdc, 
-	0xda, 0xd8, 0xd5, 0xd3, 0xd1, 0xce, 0xcc, 0xc9, 0xc7, 0xc4, 0xc1, 0xbf, 0xbc, 0xb9, 0xb6, 0xb3, 
-	0xb0, 0xae, 0xab, 0xa8, 0xa5, 0xa2, 0x9f, 0x9c, 0x98, 0x95, 0x92, 0x8f, 0x8c, 0x89, 0x86, 0x83, 
-	0x80, 0x7c, 0x79, 0x76, 0x73, 0x70, 0x6d, 0x6a, 0x67, 0x63, 0x60, 0x5d, 0x5a, 0x57, 0x54, 0x51, 
-	0x4f, 0x4c, 0x49, 0x46, 0x43, 0x40, 0x3e, 0x3b, 0x38, 0x36, 0x33, 0x31, 0x2e, 0x2c, 0x2a, 0x27, 
-	0x25, 0x23, 0x21, 0x1f, 0x1d, 0x1b, 0x19, 0x17, 0x15, 0x13, 0x12, 0x10, 0x0f, 0x0d, 0x0c, 0x0a, 
-	0x09, 0x08, 0x07, 0x06, 0x05, 0x04, 0x03, 0x03, 0x02, 0x01, 0x01, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 
-	0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x01, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x03, 0x04, 0x05, 0x06, 0x07, 0x08, 
-	0x09, 0x0a, 0x0c, 0x0d, 0x0f, 0x10, 0x12, 0x13, 0x15, 0x17, 0x19, 0x1b, 0x1d, 0x1f, 0x21, 0x23, 
-	0x25, 0x27, 0x2a, 0x2c, 0x2e, 0x31, 0x33, 0x36, 0x38, 0x3b, 0x3e, 0x40, 0x43, 0x46, 0x49, 0x4c, 
-	0x4f, 0x51, 0x54, 0x57, 0x5a, 0x5d, 0x60, 0x63, 0x67, 0x6a, 0x6d, 0x70, 0x73, 0x76, 0x79, 0x7c
-};
-
-uint8_t Pitch;
-uint8_t Velocity;	
-uint8_t CurrentPos;
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent;
-		if (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent))
-		{
-			if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON >> 4)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0))
-			{
-				Pitch    = ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2;
-				Velocity = ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data3;
-
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
-			}
-			else if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF >> 4)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0))
-			{
-				Velocity = 0;
-				
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
-			}
-		}
-
-		/* Check if the sample reload timer period has elapsed, and that the USB bus is ready for a new sample */
-		if (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A))
-		{
-			/* Clear the sample reload timer */
-			TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
-
-			/* Fetch the current sample from the sine lookup table */
-			OCR3A = Velocity ? pgm_read_byte(&SineTable[CurrentPos]) : 0;
-				
-			/* Calculate next sample table position for this channel */
-			CurrentPos += (Pitch >> 1);
-		}
-	
-		MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-	
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-
-	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
-	OCR0A   = (F_CPU / 8 / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY) - 1;
-	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
-	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
-
-	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
-	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM30) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
-	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-
-	/* Set speaker as output */
-	DDRC |= (1 << 6);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-
-	/* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
-	DDRC &= ~(1 << 6);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	
-	if (!(MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MIDIToneGenerator.h"
+
+/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+const uint8_t SineTable[] PROGMEM =
+{
+	0x80, 0x83, 0x86, 0x89, 0x8c, 0x8f, 0x92, 0x95, 0x98, 0x9c, 0x9f, 0xa2, 0xa5, 0xa8, 0xab, 0xae, 
+	0xb0, 0xb3, 0xb6, 0xb9, 0xbc, 0xbf, 0xc1, 0xc4, 0xc7, 0xc9, 0xcc, 0xce, 0xd1, 0xd3, 0xd5, 0xd8, 
+	0xda, 0xdc, 0xde, 0xe0, 0xe2, 0xe4, 0xe6, 0xe8, 0xea, 0xec, 0xed, 0xef, 0xf0, 0xf2, 0xf3, 0xf5, 
+	0xf6, 0xf7, 0xf8, 0xf9, 0xfa, 0xfb, 0xfc, 0xfc, 0xfd, 0xfe, 0xfe, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 
+	0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xfe, 0xfe, 0xfd, 0xfc, 0xfc, 0xfb, 0xfa, 0xf9, 0xf8, 0xf7, 
+	0xf6, 0xf5, 0xf3, 0xf2, 0xf0, 0xef, 0xed, 0xec, 0xea, 0xe8, 0xe6, 0xe4, 0xe2, 0xe0, 0xde, 0xdc, 
+	0xda, 0xd8, 0xd5, 0xd3, 0xd1, 0xce, 0xcc, 0xc9, 0xc7, 0xc4, 0xc1, 0xbf, 0xbc, 0xb9, 0xb6, 0xb3, 
+	0xb0, 0xae, 0xab, 0xa8, 0xa5, 0xa2, 0x9f, 0x9c, 0x98, 0x95, 0x92, 0x8f, 0x8c, 0x89, 0x86, 0x83, 
+	0x80, 0x7c, 0x79, 0x76, 0x73, 0x70, 0x6d, 0x6a, 0x67, 0x63, 0x60, 0x5d, 0x5a, 0x57, 0x54, 0x51, 
+	0x4f, 0x4c, 0x49, 0x46, 0x43, 0x40, 0x3e, 0x3b, 0x38, 0x36, 0x33, 0x31, 0x2e, 0x2c, 0x2a, 0x27, 
+	0x25, 0x23, 0x21, 0x1f, 0x1d, 0x1b, 0x19, 0x17, 0x15, 0x13, 0x12, 0x10, 0x0f, 0x0d, 0x0c, 0x0a, 
+	0x09, 0x08, 0x07, 0x06, 0x05, 0x04, 0x03, 0x03, 0x02, 0x01, 0x01, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 
+	0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x01, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x03, 0x04, 0x05, 0x06, 0x07, 0x08, 
+	0x09, 0x0a, 0x0c, 0x0d, 0x0f, 0x10, 0x12, 0x13, 0x15, 0x17, 0x19, 0x1b, 0x1d, 0x1f, 0x21, 0x23, 
+	0x25, 0x27, 0x2a, 0x2c, 0x2e, 0x31, 0x33, 0x36, 0x38, 0x3b, 0x3e, 0x40, 0x43, 0x46, 0x49, 0x4c, 
+	0x4f, 0x51, 0x54, 0x57, 0x5a, 0x5d, 0x60, 0x63, 0x67, 0x6a, 0x6d, 0x70, 0x73, 0x76, 0x79, 0x7c
+};
+
+uint8_t Pitch;
+uint8_t Velocity;	
+uint8_t CurrentPos;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent;
+		if (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent))
+		{
+			if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON >> 4)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0))
+			{
+				Pitch    = ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2;
+				Velocity = ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data3;
+
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+			}
+			else if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF >> 4)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0))
+			{
+				Velocity = 0;
+				
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* Check if the sample reload timer period has elapsed, and that the USB bus is ready for a new sample */
+		if (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A))
+		{
+			/* Clear the sample reload timer */
+			TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
+
+			/* Fetch the current sample from the sine lookup table */
+			OCR3A = Velocity ? pgm_read_byte(&SineTable[CurrentPos]) : 0;
+				
+			/* Calculate next sample table position for this channel */
+			CurrentPos += (Pitch >> 1);
+		}
+	
+		MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	OCR0A   = (F_CPU / 8 / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY) - 1;
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+
+	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
+	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM30) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
+	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC |= (1 << 6);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+	/* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC &= ~(1 << 6);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	
+	if (!(MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h b/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h
index d2405f881..5ff19f1be 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h
@@ -1,78 +1,78 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-				
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY    24000
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+				
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY    24000
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile b/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile
index 38060cd4c..94c745cc6 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MIDIToneGenerator
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MIDIToneGenerator
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDI.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Descriptors.c b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Descriptors.c
index 9836d4338..d6ffde804 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,221 +1,221 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0xEF,
-	.SubClass               = 0x02,
-	.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2063,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0001,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-
-	.MS_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x08,
-			.SubClass               = 0x06,
-			.Protocol               = 0x50,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(26), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Standalone Programmer"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0xEF,
+	.SubClass               = 0x02,
+	.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2063,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0001,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x08,
+			.SubClass               = 0x06,
+			.Protocol               = 0x50,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(26), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Standalone Programmer"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Descriptors.h b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Descriptors.h
index 46a9c8014..440259341 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,88 +1,88 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         5
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   1
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   2
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          3	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         4	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */		
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               MS_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                MS_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                MS_DataOutEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         5
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   1
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   2
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */		
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskDevice.c b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskDevice.c
index 8868733a4..516917cf4 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskDevice.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskDevice.c
@@ -1,102 +1,102 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "DiskDevice.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t DiskDevice_MS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber           = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize        = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-
-				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
-			},
-	};
-
-void DiskDevice_USBTask(void)
-{
-	MS_Device_USBTask(&DiskDevice_MS_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&DiskDevice_MS_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&DiskDevice_MS_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
- */
-bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool CommandSuccess;
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	
-	return CommandSuccess;
-}
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "DiskDevice.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t DiskDevice_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize        = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+
+				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
+			},
+	};
+
+void DiskDevice_USBTask(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_USBTask(&DiskDevice_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&DiskDevice_MS_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&DiskDevice_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskDevice.h b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskDevice.h
index 1d7569b1c..85977522b 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskDevice.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskDevice.h
@@ -1,61 +1,61 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DiskDevice.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DISK_DEVICE_H_
-#define _DISK_DEVICE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "StandaloneProgrammer.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			void DiskDevice_USBTask(void);
-
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-			void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-			bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DiskDevice.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DISK_DEVICE_H_
+#define _DISK_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "StandaloneProgrammer.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			void DiskDevice_USBTask(void);
+
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+			bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskHost.c b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskHost.c
index e50fc30af..e7831cd71 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskHost.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskHost.c
@@ -1,127 +1,127 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "DiskHost.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t DiskHost_MS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
-				
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-void DiskHost_USBTask(void)
-{
-	if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Addressed)
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-	
-		uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-		uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-		if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-											   sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-		{
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-			return;
-		}
-
-		if (MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&DiskHost_MS_Interface,
-		                           ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-		{
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-			return;
-		}
-		
-		if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-		{
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-			return;
-		}
-		
-		uint8_t MaxLUNIndex;
-		if (MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(&DiskHost_MS_Interface, &MaxLUNIndex))
-		{
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-			return;
-		}
-		
-		if (MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(&DiskHost_MS_Interface))
-		{
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-			return;
-		}
-		
-		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-		
-		/* Note: For the RequestSense call to work, the host state machine must be in the 
-		 *       Configured state, or the call will be aborted */
-		SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData;
-		if (MS_Host_RequestSense(&DiskHost_MS_Interface, 0, &SenseData) != 0)
-		{
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-			return;
-		}
-		
-		pf_mount(&DiskFATState);
-		
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	}
-
-	MS_Host_USBTask(&DiskHost_MS_Interface);		
-}
-
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "DiskHost.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t DiskHost_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber       = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank   = false,
+				
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber      = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank  = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+void DiskHost_USBTask(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Addressed)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+	
+		uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+		uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+		if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+											   sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+			return;
+		}
+
+		if (MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&DiskHost_MS_Interface,
+		                           ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+			return;
+		}
+		
+		if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+			return;
+		}
+		
+		uint8_t MaxLUNIndex;
+		if (MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(&DiskHost_MS_Interface, &MaxLUNIndex))
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+			return;
+		}
+		
+		if (MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(&DiskHost_MS_Interface))
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+			return;
+		}
+		
+		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+		
+		/* Note: For the RequestSense call to work, the host state machine must be in the 
+		 *       Configured state, or the call will be aborted */
+		SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData;
+		if (MS_Host_RequestSense(&DiskHost_MS_Interface, 0, &SenseData) != 0)
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+			return;
+		}
+		
+		pf_mount(&DiskFATState);
+		
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+
+	MS_Host_USBTask(&DiskHost_MS_Interface);		
+}
+
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskHost.h b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskHost.h
index 5e417aefd..72c4f621b 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskHost.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/DiskHost.h
@@ -1,62 +1,62 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DiskHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DISK_HOST_H_
-#define _DISK_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "StandaloneProgrammer.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-		extern USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t DiskHost_MS_Interface;
-		#endif
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-			void DiskHost_USBTask(void);
-			
-			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DiskHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DISK_HOST_H_
+#define _DISK_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "StandaloneProgrammer.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+		extern USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t DiskHost_MS_Interface;
+		#endif
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			void DiskHost_USBTask(void);
+			
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/DataflashManager.c
index 976d9e98e..f54b25be4 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/DataflashManager.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -1,527 +1,527 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
- *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
- *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
- *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
-#include "DataflashManager.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
- *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-				
-				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
-			}
-
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;			
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-				
-				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-			
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-	
-	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
- *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
- *  dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
-			}
-			
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
- *  the files stored on the dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
-void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
-{
-	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	
-	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
- */
-bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnByte;
-
-	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-	#endif
-	
-	return true;
-}
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;			
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+			
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+	
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+			
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	
+	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+	
+	return true;
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/DataflashManager.h
index a67f533d6..8f62219ca 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/DataflashManager.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -1,82 +1,82 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		
-		#include "StandaloneProgrammer.h"
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
-			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Defines: */
-		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
-
-		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
-		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
-		
-		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
-		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-											  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-			void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-											 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-			void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-												  const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-			void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-												 uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-			void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
-			bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		
+		#include "StandaloneProgrammer.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+		
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+											  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+			void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+											 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+			void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+												  const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+			void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+												 uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+			void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+			bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/00readme.txt b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/00readme.txt
index 0703d5925..ee8effcf4 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/00readme.txt
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/00readme.txt
@@ -1,36 +1,36 @@
-Petit FatFs Module Source Files R0.01a                 (C)ChaN, 2010
-
-
-FILES
-
-  pff.h      Common include file for Petit FatFs and application module.
-  pff.c      Petit FatFs module.
-  diskio.h   Common include file for Petit FatFs and disk I/O module.
-  diskio.c   Skeleton of low level disk I/O module.
-  integer.h  Alternative type definitions for integer variables.
-
-  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the Petit
-  FatFs module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any
-  specific storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that
-  written to control your storage device.
-
-
-
-AGREEMENTS
-
- Petit FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
- small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
- research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
-
-  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
-
- * The Petit FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
- * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-   personal, non-profit or commercial use UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
- * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-
-
-
-REVISION HISTORY
-
-  Jun 15, 2010  R0.01a  First release (Branched from FatFs R0.07b)
+Petit FatFs Module Source Files R0.01a                 (C)ChaN, 2010
+
+
+FILES
+
+  pff.h      Common include file for Petit FatFs and application module.
+  pff.c      Petit FatFs module.
+  diskio.h   Common include file for Petit FatFs and disk I/O module.
+  diskio.c   Skeleton of low level disk I/O module.
+  integer.h  Alternative type definitions for integer variables.
+
+  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the Petit
+  FatFs module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any
+  specific storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that
+  written to control your storage device.
+
+
+
+AGREEMENTS
+
+ Petit FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
+ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
+ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
+
+  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
+
+ * The Petit FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+   personal, non-profit or commercial use UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+
+
+
+REVISION HISTORY
+
+  Jun 15, 2010  R0.01a  First release (Branched from FatFs R0.07b)
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/diskio.c b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/diskio.c
index c0393dd84..47e73159f 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/diskio.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/diskio.c
@@ -1,57 +1,57 @@
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for Petit FatFs (C)ChaN, 2010      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include "diskio.h"
-
-#include <string.h>
-#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-#include "../DataflashManager.h"
-#include "../../DiskHost.h"
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Initialize Disk Drive                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-DSTATUS disk_initialize (void)
-{
-	return RES_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read Partial Sector                                                   */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-DRESULT disk_readp (
-	void* dest,			/* Pointer to the destination object */
-	DWORD sector,		/* Sector number (LBA) */
-	WORD sofs,			/* Offset in the sector */
-	WORD count			/* Byte count (bit15:destination) */
-)
-{
-	DRESULT ErrorCode = RES_OK;
-	uint8_t BlockTemp[512];
-
-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
-	{
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-		if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
-		  ErrorCode = RES_NOTRDY;
-		else if (MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(&DiskHost_MS_Interface, 0, sector, 1, 512, BlockTemp))
-		  ErrorCode = RES_ERROR;
-		#endif
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-		DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, 1, BlockTemp);
-		#endif
-	}
-
-	memcpy(dest, &BlockTemp[sofs], count);
-
-	return ErrorCode;
-}
-
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for Petit FatFs (C)ChaN, 2010      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "diskio.h"
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+#include "../DataflashManager.h"
+#include "../../DiskHost.h"
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Initialize Disk Drive                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (void)
+{
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Partial Sector                                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+DRESULT disk_readp (
+	void* dest,			/* Pointer to the destination object */
+	DWORD sector,		/* Sector number (LBA) */
+	WORD sofs,			/* Offset in the sector */
+	WORD count			/* Byte count (bit15:destination) */
+)
+{
+	DRESULT ErrorCode = RES_OK;
+	uint8_t BlockTemp[512];
+
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
+	{
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+		if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+		  ErrorCode = RES_NOTRDY;
+		else if (MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(&DiskHost_MS_Interface, 0, sector, 1, 512, BlockTemp))
+		  ErrorCode = RES_ERROR;
+		#endif
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+		DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, 1, BlockTemp);
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	memcpy(dest, &BlockTemp[sofs], count);
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/diskio.h b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/diskio.h
index 7caa7f44f..4e9aa76f4 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/diskio.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/diskio.h
@@ -1,36 +1,36 @@
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-/  PFF - Low level disk interface modlue include file    (C)ChaN, 2010
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _DISKIO
-
-#include "integer.h"
-
-
-/* Status of Disk Functions */
-typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
-
-
-/* Results of Disk Functions */
-typedef enum {
-	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Function succeeded */
-	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: Disk error */
-	RES_STRERR,		/* 2: Seream error */
-	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not ready */
-	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid parameter */
-} DRESULT;
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------*/
-/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
-
-DSTATUS disk_initialize (void);
-DRESULT disk_readp (void*, DWORD, WORD, WORD);
-
-BOOL assign_drives (int argc, char *argv[]);
-
-#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
-#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
-
-#define _DISKIO
-#endif
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+/  PFF - Low level disk interface modlue include file    (C)ChaN, 2010
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _DISKIO
+
+#include "integer.h"
+
+
+/* Status of Disk Functions */
+typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
+
+
+/* Results of Disk Functions */
+typedef enum {
+	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Function succeeded */
+	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: Disk error */
+	RES_STRERR,		/* 2: Seream error */
+	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not ready */
+	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid parameter */
+} DRESULT;
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------*/
+/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (void);
+DRESULT disk_readp (void*, DWORD, WORD, WORD);
+
+BOOL assign_drives (int argc, char *argv[]);
+
+#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
+#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
+
+#define _DISKIO
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/integer.h b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/integer.h
index 1d6bac368..851a78da2 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/integer.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/integer.h
@@ -1,37 +1,37 @@
-/*-------------------------------------------*/
-/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
-/*-------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _INTEGER
-
-#if 0
-#include <windows.h>
-#else
-
-/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
-typedef int				INT;
-typedef unsigned int	UINT;
-
-/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
-typedef signed char		CHAR;
-typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
-typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
-
-/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
-typedef short			SHORT;
-typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
-typedef unsigned short	WORD;
-typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
-
-/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
-typedef long			LONG;
-typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
-typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
-
-/* Boolean type */
-typedef enum { FALSE = 0, TRUE } BOOL;
-
-#endif
-
-#define _INTEGER
-#endif
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _INTEGER
+
+#if 0
+#include <windows.h>
+#else
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
+typedef int				INT;
+typedef unsigned int	UINT;
+
+/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
+typedef signed char		CHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
+typedef short			SHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	WORD;
+typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
+
+/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
+typedef long			LONG;
+typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
+typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
+
+/* Boolean type */
+typedef enum { FALSE = 0, TRUE } BOOL;
+
+#endif
+
+#define _INTEGER
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.c b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.c
index 54c1d2406..b7b7fb8cb 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.c
@@ -1,777 +1,777 @@
-/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  Petit FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.01a                (C)ChaN, 2010
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Petit FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
-/ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
-/ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
-/
-/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
-/
-/ * The Petit FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
-/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-/   personal, non-profit or commercial use UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
-/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-/
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Jun 15,'09 R0.01a  Branched from FatFs R0.07b
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include "pff.h"		/* Petit FatFs configurations and declarations */
-#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Private Work Area
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FATFS *FatFs;	/* Pointer to the file system object (logical drive) */
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Private Functions
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* String functions                                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/* Fill memory */
-static
-void mem_set (void* dst, int val, int cnt) {
-	char *d = (char*)dst;
-	while (cnt--) *d++ = (char)val;
-}
-
-/* Compare memory to memory */
-static
-int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, int cnt) {
-	const char *d = (const char *)dst, *s = (const char *)src;
-	int r = 0;
-	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
-	return r;
-}
-
-/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
-static
-int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
-	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
-	return *str;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-CLUST get_fat (	/* 1:IO error, Else:Cluster status */
-	CLUST clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
-)
-{
-	WORD wc, bc, ofs;
-	BYTE buf[4];
-	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
-
-
-	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust)	/* Range check */
-		return 1;
-
-	switch (fs->fs_type) {
-	case FS_FAT12 :
-		bc = (WORD)clst; bc += bc / 2;
-		ofs = bc % 512; bc /= 512;
-		if (ofs != 511) {
-			if (disk_readp(buf, fs->fatbase + bc, ofs, 2)) break;
-		} else {
-			if (disk_readp(buf, fs->fatbase + bc, 511, 1)) break;
-			if (disk_readp(buf+1, fs->fatbase + bc + 1, 0, 1)) break;
-		}
-		wc = LD_WORD(buf);
-		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
-
-	case FS_FAT16 :
-		if (disk_readp(buf, fs->fatbase + clst / 256, (WORD)(((WORD)clst % 256) * 2), 2)) break;
-		return LD_WORD(buf);
-#if _FS_FAT32
-	case FS_FAT32 :
-		if (disk_readp(buf, fs->fatbase + clst / 128, (WORD)(((WORD)clst % 128) * 4), 4)) break;
-		return LD_DWORD(buf) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
-#endif
-	}
-
-	return 1;	/* An error occured at the disk I/O layer */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
-	CLUST clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
-)
-{
-	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
-
-
-	clst -= 2;
-	if (clst >= (fs->max_clust - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
-	return (DWORD)clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Rewind directory index                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_rewind (
-	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to directory object */
-)
-{
-	CLUST clst;
-	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
-
-
-	dj->index = 0;
-	clst = dj->sclust;
-	if (clst == 1 || clst >= fs->max_clust)	/* Check start cluster range */
-		return FR_DISK_ERR;
-#if _FS_FAT32
-	if (!clst && fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
-		clst = fs->dirbase;
-#endif
-	dj->clust = clst;						/* Current cluster */
-	dj->sect = clst ? clust2sect(clst) : fs->dirbase;	/* Current sector */
-
-	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Move directory index next                        */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not streach */
-	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to directory object */
-)
-{
-	CLUST clst;
-	WORD i;
-	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
-
-
-	i = dj->index + 1;
-	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
-		return FR_NO_FILE;
-
-	if (!(i & (16-1))) {	/* Sector changed? */
-		dj->sect++;			/* Next sector */
-
-		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
-			if (i >= fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
-				return FR_NO_FILE;
-		}
-		else {					/* Dynamic table */
-			if (((i / 16) & (fs->csize-1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
-				clst = get_fat(dj->clust);		/* Get next cluster */
-				if (clst <= 1) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-				if (clst >= fs->max_clust)		/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
-					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
-				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
-				dj->sect = clust2sect(clst);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	dj->index = i;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_find (
-	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE c, *dir;
-
-
-	res = dir_rewind(dj);			/* Rewind directory object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
-
-	dir = FatFs->buf;
-	do {
-		res = disk_readp(dir, dj->sect, (WORD)((dj->index % 16) * 32), 32)	/* Read an entry */
-			? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK;
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		c = dir[DIR_Name];	/* First character */
-		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
-		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
-			break;
-		res = dir_next(dj);							/* Next entry */
-	} while (res == FR_OK);
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_DIR
-static
-FRESULT dir_read (
-	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object to store read object name */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE a, c, *dir;
-
-
-	res = FR_NO_FILE;
-	while (dj->sect) {
-		dir = FatFs->buf;
-		res = disk_readp(dir, dj->sect, (WORD)((dj->index % 16) * 32), 32)	/* Read an entry */
-			? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK;
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		c = dir[DIR_Name];
-		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
-		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
-		if (c != 0xE5 && c != '.' && !(a & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
-			break;
-		res = dir_next(dj);				/* Next entry */
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-	}
-
-	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-static
-FRESULT create_name (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
-	const char **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
-)
-{
-	BYTE c, ni, si, i, *sfn;
-	const char *p;
-
-	/* Create file name in directory form */
-	sfn = dj->fn;
-	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
-	si = i = 0; ni = 8;
-	p = *path;
-	for (;;) {
-		c = p[si++];
-		if (c < ' ' || c == '/') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
-		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
-			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			i = 8; ni = 11;
-			continue;
-		}
-		if (c >= 0x7F || chk_chr(" +,;[=\\]\"*:<>\?|", c))	/* Reject unallowable chrs for SFN */
-			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		if (c >='a' && c <= 'z') c -= 0x20;
-		sfn[i++] = c;
-	}
-	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject null string */
-	*path = &p[si];						/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
-
-	sfn[11] = (c < ' ') ? 1 : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_DIR
-static
-void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
-	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to store the file information */
-)
-{
-	BYTE i, c, *dir;
-	char *p;
-
-
-	p = fno->fname;
-	if (dj->sect) {
-		dir = FatFs->buf;
-		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy file name body */
-			c = dir[i];
-			if (c == ' ') break;
-			if (c == 0x05) c = 0xE5;
-			*p++ = c;
-		}
-		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy file name extension */
-			*p++ = '.';
-			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
-				c = dir[i];
-				if (c == ' ') break;
-				*p++ = c;
-			}
-		}
-		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
-		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
-		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
-		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
-	}
-	*p = 0;
-}
-#endif /* _USE_DIR */
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Follow a file path                                                    */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
-	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
-	const char *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	if (*path == '/') path++;			/* Strip heading separator */
-	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Set start directory (always root dir) */
-
-	if ((BYTE)*path < ' ') {			/* Null path means the root directory */
-		res = dir_rewind(dj);
-		FatFs->buf[0] = 0;
-
-	} else {							/* Follow path */
-		for (;;) {
-			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
-			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Could not find the object */
-				if (res == FR_NO_FILE && !*(dj->fn+11))
-					res = FR_NO_PATH;
-				break;
-			}
-			if (*(dj->fn+11)) break;		/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
-			dir = FatFs->buf;				/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
-			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Cannot follow because it is a file */
-				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
-			}
-			dj->sclust =
-#if _FS_FAT32
-				((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | 
-#endif
-				LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Check a sector if it is an FAT boot record                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:The FAT boot record, 1:Valid boot record but not an FAT, 2:Not a boot record, 3:Error */
-	BYTE *buf,	/* Working buffer */
-	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
-)
-{
-	if (disk_readp(buf, sect, 510, 2))		/* Read the boot sector */
-		return 3;
-	if (LD_WORD(buf) != 0xAA55)				/* Check record signature */
-		return 2;
-
-	if (!disk_readp(buf, sect, BS_FilSysType, 2) && LD_WORD(buf) == 0x4146)	/* Check FAT12/16 */
-		return 0;
-#if _FS_FAT32
-	if (!disk_readp(buf, sect, BS_FilSysType32, 2) && LD_WORD(buf) == 0x4146)	/* Check FAT32 */
-		return 0;
-#endif
-	return 1;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Public Functions
-
---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Mount/Unmount a Locical Drive                                         */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT pf_mount (
-	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL: Unmount) */
-)
-{
-	BYTE fmt, buf[36];
-	DWORD bsect, fsize, tsect, mclst;
-
-
-	FatFs = 0;
-	if (!fs) return FR_OK;				/* Unregister fs object */
-
-	if (disk_initialize() & STA_NOINIT)	/* Check if the drive is ready or not */
-		return FR_NOT_READY;
-
-	/* Search FAT partition on the drive */
-	bsect = 0;
-	fmt = check_fs(buf, bsect);			/* Check sector 0 as an SFD format */
-	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT boot record, it may be FDISK format */
-		/* Check a partition listed in top of the partition table */
-		if (disk_readp(buf, bsect, MBR_Table, 16)) {	/* 1st partition entry */
-			fmt = 3;
-		} else {
-			if (buf[4]) {					/* Is the partition existing? */
-				bsect = LD_DWORD(&buf[8]);	/* Partition offset in LBA */
-				fmt = check_fs(buf, bsect);	/* Check the partition */
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-	if (fmt) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* No valid FAT patition is found */
-
-	/* Initialize the file system object */
-	if (disk_readp(buf, bsect, 13, sizeof(buf))) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-
-	fsize = LD_WORD(buf+BPB_FATSz16-13);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
-	if (!fsize) fsize = LD_DWORD(buf+BPB_FATSz32-13);
-
-	fsize *= buf[BPB_NumFATs-13];						/* Number of sectors in FAT area */
-	fs->fatbase = bsect + LD_WORD(buf+BPB_RsvdSecCnt-13); /* FAT start sector (lba) */
-	fs->csize = buf[BPB_SecPerClus-13];					/* Number of sectors per cluster */
-	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(buf+BPB_RootEntCnt-13);		/* Nmuber of root directory entries */
-	tsect = LD_WORD(buf+BPB_TotSec16-13);				/* Number of sectors on the file system */
-	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(buf+BPB_TotSec32-13);
-	mclst = (tsect						/* Last cluster# + 1 */
-		- LD_WORD(buf+BPB_RsvdSecCnt-13) - fsize - fs->n_rootdir / 16
-		) / fs->csize + 2;
-	fs->max_clust = (CLUST)mclst;
-
-	fmt = FS_FAT12;							/* Determine the FAT sub type */
-	if (mclst >= 0xFF7) fmt = FS_FAT16;		/* Number of clusters >= 0xFF5 */
-	if (mclst >= 0xFFF7)					/* Number of clusters >= 0xFFF5 */
-#if _FS_FAT32
-		fmt = FS_FAT32;
-#else
-		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
-#endif
-
-	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
-#if _FS_FAT32
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)
-		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(buf+(BPB_RootClus-13));	/* Root directory start cluster */
-	else
-#endif
-		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fsize;				/* Root directory start sector (lba) */
-	fs->database = fs->fatbase + fsize + fs->n_rootdir / 16;	/* Data start sector (lba) */
-
-	fs->flag = 0;
-	FatFs = fs;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT pf_open (
-	const char *path	/* Pointer to the file name */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	BYTE sp[12], dir[32];
-	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
-
-
-	if (!fs)						/* Check file system */
-		return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
-
-	fs->flag = 0;
-	fs->buf = dir;
-	dj.fn = sp;
-	res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
-	if (res != FR_OK) return res;	/* Follow failed */
-	if (!dir[0] || (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR))	/* It is a directory */
-		return FR_NO_FILE;
-
-	fs->org_clust =						/* File start cluster */
-#if _FS_FAT32
-		((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) |
-#endif
-		LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-	fs->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
-	fs->fptr = 0;						/* File pointer */
-	fs->flag = FA_READ;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read File                                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT pf_read (
-	void* dest,		/* Pointer to the destination object */
-	WORD btr,		/* Number of bytes to read (bit15:destination) */
-	WORD* br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
-)
-{
-	DRESULT dr;
-	CLUST clst;
-	DWORD sect, remain;
-	WORD rcnt;
-	BYTE *rbuff = dest;
-	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
-
-
-	*br = 0;
-	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;		/* Check file system */
-	if (!(fs->flag & FA_READ))
-			return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
-
-	remain = fs->fsize - fs->fptr;
-	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
-
-	for ( ;  btr;									/* Repeat until all data transferred */
-		rbuff += rcnt, fs->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
-		if ((fs->fptr % 512) == 0) {				/* On the sector boundary? */
-			if ((fs->fptr / 512 % fs->csize) == 0) {	/* On the cluster boundary? */
-				clst = (fs->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
-					fs->org_clust : get_fat(fs->curr_clust);
-				if (clst <= 1) {
-					fs->flag = 0; return FR_DISK_ERR;
-				}
-				fs->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
-				fs->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector offset in the cluster */
-			}
-			sect = clust2sect(fs->curr_clust);		/* Get current sector */
-			if (!sect) {
-				fs->flag = 0; return FR_DISK_ERR;
-			}
-			sect += fs->csect;
-			fs->dsect = sect;
-			fs->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-		}
-		rcnt = 512 - ((WORD)fs->fptr % 512);		/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
-		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
-		if (fs->flag & FA_STREAM) {
-			dr = disk_readp(dest, fs->dsect, (WORD)(fs->fptr % 512), (WORD)(rcnt | 0x8000));
-		} else {
-			dr = disk_readp(rbuff, fs->dsect, (WORD)(fs->fptr % 512), rcnt);
-		}
-		if (dr) {
-			fs->flag = 0;
-			return (dr == RES_STRERR) ? FR_STREAM_ERR : FR_DISK_ERR;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-#if _USE_LSEEK
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT pf_lseek (
-	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
-)
-{
-	CLUST clst;
-	DWORD bcs, nsect, ifptr;
-	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
-
-
-	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;		/* Check file system */
-	if (!(fs->flag & FA_READ))
-			return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
-
-	if (ofs > fs->fsize) ofs = fs->fsize;	/* Clip offset with the file size */
-	ifptr = fs->fptr;
-	fs->fptr = 0;
-	if (ofs > 0) {
-		bcs = (DWORD)fs->csize * 512;	/* Cluster size (byte) */
-		if (ifptr > 0 &&
-			(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
-			fs->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
-			ofs -= fs->fptr;
-			clst = fs->curr_clust;
-		} else {							/* When seek to back cluster, */
-			clst = fs->org_clust;			/* start from the first cluster */
-			fs->curr_clust = clst;
-		}
-		while (ofs > bcs) {				/* Cluster following loop */
-				clst = get_fat(clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
-			if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fs->max_clust) {
-				fs->flag = 0; return FR_DISK_ERR;
-			}
-			fs->curr_clust = clst;
-			fs->fptr += bcs;
-			ofs -= bcs;
-		}
-		fs->fptr += ofs;
-		fs->csect = (BYTE)(ofs / 512) + 1;	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
-		nsect = clust2sect(clst);	/* Current sector */
-		if (!nsect) {
-			fs->flag = 0; return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		}
-		fs->dsect = nsect + fs->csect - 1;
-	}
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-#if _USE_DIR
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create a Directroy Object                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT pf_opendir (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
-	const char *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE sp[12], dir[32];
-	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
-
-
-	if (!fs) {				/* Check file system */
-		res = FR_NOT_ENABLED;
-	} else {
-		fs->buf = dir;
-		dj->fn = sp;
-		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
-			if (dir[0]) {						/* It is not the root dir */
-				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
-					dj->sclust =
-#if _FS_FAT32
-					((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) |
-#endif
-					LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
-					res = FR_NO_PATH;
-				}
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {
-				res = dir_rewind(dj);			/* Rewind dir */
-			}
-		}
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read Directory Entry in Sequense                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT pf_readdir (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
-	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE sp[12], dir[32];
-	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
-
-
-	if (!fs) {				/* Check file system */
-		res = FR_NOT_ENABLED;
-	} else {
-		fs->buf = dir;
-		dj->fn = sp;
-		if (!fno) {
-			res = dir_rewind(dj);
-		} else {
-			res = dir_read(dj);
-			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
-				dj->sect = 0;
-				res = FR_OK;
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
-				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
-				res = dir_next(dj);			/* Increment index for next */
-				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
-					dj->sect = 0;
-					res = FR_OK;
-				}
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-#endif /* _FS_DIR */
-
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  Petit FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.01a                (C)ChaN, 2010
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Petit FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
+/ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
+/ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The Petit FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial use UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Jun 15,'09 R0.01a  Branched from FatFs R0.07b
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "pff.h"		/* Petit FatFs configurations and declarations */
+#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Private Work Area
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FATFS *FatFs;	/* Pointer to the file system object (logical drive) */
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Private Functions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* String functions                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Fill memory */
+static
+void mem_set (void* dst, int val, int cnt) {
+	char *d = (char*)dst;
+	while (cnt--) *d++ = (char)val;
+}
+
+/* Compare memory to memory */
+static
+int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, int cnt) {
+	const char *d = (const char *)dst, *s = (const char *)src;
+	int r = 0;
+	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
+	return r;
+}
+
+/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
+static
+int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
+	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
+	return *str;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+CLUST get_fat (	/* 1:IO error, Else:Cluster status */
+	CLUST clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
+)
+{
+	WORD wc, bc, ofs;
+	BYTE buf[4];
+	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust)	/* Range check */
+		return 1;
+
+	switch (fs->fs_type) {
+	case FS_FAT12 :
+		bc = (WORD)clst; bc += bc / 2;
+		ofs = bc % 512; bc /= 512;
+		if (ofs != 511) {
+			if (disk_readp(buf, fs->fatbase + bc, ofs, 2)) break;
+		} else {
+			if (disk_readp(buf, fs->fatbase + bc, 511, 1)) break;
+			if (disk_readp(buf+1, fs->fatbase + bc + 1, 0, 1)) break;
+		}
+		wc = LD_WORD(buf);
+		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
+
+	case FS_FAT16 :
+		if (disk_readp(buf, fs->fatbase + clst / 256, (WORD)(((WORD)clst % 256) * 2), 2)) break;
+		return LD_WORD(buf);
+#if _FS_FAT32
+	case FS_FAT32 :
+		if (disk_readp(buf, fs->fatbase + clst / 128, (WORD)(((WORD)clst % 128) * 4), 4)) break;
+		return LD_DWORD(buf) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
+#endif
+	}
+
+	return 1;	/* An error occured at the disk I/O layer */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
+	CLUST clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
+)
+{
+	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
+
+
+	clst -= 2;
+	if (clst >= (fs->max_clust - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
+	return (DWORD)clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Rewind directory index                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_rewind (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to directory object */
+)
+{
+	CLUST clst;
+	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
+
+
+	dj->index = 0;
+	clst = dj->sclust;
+	if (clst == 1 || clst >= fs->max_clust)	/* Check start cluster range */
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+#if _FS_FAT32
+	if (!clst && fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
+		clst = fs->dirbase;
+#endif
+	dj->clust = clst;						/* Current cluster */
+	dj->sect = clst ? clust2sect(clst) : fs->dirbase;	/* Current sector */
+
+	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Move directory index next                        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not streach */
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to directory object */
+)
+{
+	CLUST clst;
+	WORD i;
+	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
+
+
+	i = dj->index + 1;
+	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
+		return FR_NO_FILE;
+
+	if (!(i & (16-1))) {	/* Sector changed? */
+		dj->sect++;			/* Next sector */
+
+		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
+			if (i >= fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
+				return FR_NO_FILE;
+		}
+		else {					/* Dynamic table */
+			if (((i / 16) & (fs->csize-1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
+				clst = get_fat(dj->clust);		/* Get next cluster */
+				if (clst <= 1) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (clst >= fs->max_clust)		/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
+					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
+				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
+				dj->sect = clust2sect(clst);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	dj->index = i;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_find (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+
+
+	res = dir_rewind(dj);			/* Rewind directory object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+
+	dir = FatFs->buf;
+	do {
+		res = disk_readp(dir, dj->sect, (WORD)((dj->index % 16) * 32), 32)	/* Read an entry */
+			? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK;
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];	/* First character */
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+		res = dir_next(dj);							/* Next entry */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_DIR
+static
+FRESULT dir_read (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object to store read object name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE a, c, *dir;
+
+
+	res = FR_NO_FILE;
+	while (dj->sect) {
+		dir = FatFs->buf;
+		res = disk_readp(dir, dj->sect, (WORD)((dj->index % 16) * 32), 32)	/* Read an entry */
+			? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK;
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c != 0xE5 && c != '.' && !(a & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+		res = dir_next(dj);				/* Next entry */
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+	}
+
+	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+static
+FRESULT create_name (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	const char **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
+)
+{
+	BYTE c, ni, si, i, *sfn;
+	const char *p;
+
+	/* Create file name in directory form */
+	sfn = dj->fn;
+	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
+	si = i = 0; ni = 8;
+	p = *path;
+	for (;;) {
+		c = p[si++];
+		if (c < ' ' || c == '/') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
+			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			i = 8; ni = 11;
+			continue;
+		}
+		if (c >= 0x7F || chk_chr(" +,;[=\\]\"*:<>\?|", c))	/* Reject unallowable chrs for SFN */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (c >='a' && c <= 'z') c -= 0x20;
+		sfn[i++] = c;
+	}
+	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject null string */
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
+
+	sfn[11] = (c < ' ') ? 1 : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_DIR
+static
+void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to store the file information */
+)
+{
+	BYTE i, c, *dir;
+	char *p;
+
+
+	p = fno->fname;
+	if (dj->sect) {
+		dir = FatFs->buf;
+		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy file name body */
+			c = dir[i];
+			if (c == ' ') break;
+			if (c == 0x05) c = 0xE5;
+			*p++ = c;
+		}
+		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy file name extension */
+			*p++ = '.';
+			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
+				c = dir[i];
+				if (c == ' ') break;
+				*p++ = c;
+			}
+		}
+		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
+		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
+		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
+		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
+	}
+	*p = 0;
+}
+#endif /* _USE_DIR */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Follow a file path                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
+	const char *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	if (*path == '/') path++;			/* Strip heading separator */
+	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Set start directory (always root dir) */
+
+	if ((BYTE)*path < ' ') {			/* Null path means the root directory */
+		res = dir_rewind(dj);
+		FatFs->buf[0] = 0;
+
+	} else {							/* Follow path */
+		for (;;) {
+			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
+			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Could not find the object */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE && !*(dj->fn+11))
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				break;
+			}
+			if (*(dj->fn+11)) break;		/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
+			dir = FatFs->buf;				/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
+			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Cannot follow because it is a file */
+				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
+			}
+			dj->sclust =
+#if _FS_FAT32
+				((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | 
+#endif
+				LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check a sector if it is an FAT boot record                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:The FAT boot record, 1:Valid boot record but not an FAT, 2:Not a boot record, 3:Error */
+	BYTE *buf,	/* Working buffer */
+	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
+)
+{
+	if (disk_readp(buf, sect, 510, 2))		/* Read the boot sector */
+		return 3;
+	if (LD_WORD(buf) != 0xAA55)				/* Check record signature */
+		return 2;
+
+	if (!disk_readp(buf, sect, BS_FilSysType, 2) && LD_WORD(buf) == 0x4146)	/* Check FAT12/16 */
+		return 0;
+#if _FS_FAT32
+	if (!disk_readp(buf, sect, BS_FilSysType32, 2) && LD_WORD(buf) == 0x4146)	/* Check FAT32 */
+		return 0;
+#endif
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Public Functions
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Mount/Unmount a Locical Drive                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT pf_mount (
+	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL: Unmount) */
+)
+{
+	BYTE fmt, buf[36];
+	DWORD bsect, fsize, tsect, mclst;
+
+
+	FatFs = 0;
+	if (!fs) return FR_OK;				/* Unregister fs object */
+
+	if (disk_initialize() & STA_NOINIT)	/* Check if the drive is ready or not */
+		return FR_NOT_READY;
+
+	/* Search FAT partition on the drive */
+	bsect = 0;
+	fmt = check_fs(buf, bsect);			/* Check sector 0 as an SFD format */
+	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT boot record, it may be FDISK format */
+		/* Check a partition listed in top of the partition table */
+		if (disk_readp(buf, bsect, MBR_Table, 16)) {	/* 1st partition entry */
+			fmt = 3;
+		} else {
+			if (buf[4]) {					/* Is the partition existing? */
+				bsect = LD_DWORD(&buf[8]);	/* Partition offset in LBA */
+				fmt = check_fs(buf, bsect);	/* Check the partition */
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* No valid FAT patition is found */
+
+	/* Initialize the file system object */
+	if (disk_readp(buf, bsect, 13, sizeof(buf))) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+
+	fsize = LD_WORD(buf+BPB_FATSz16-13);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+	if (!fsize) fsize = LD_DWORD(buf+BPB_FATSz32-13);
+
+	fsize *= buf[BPB_NumFATs-13];						/* Number of sectors in FAT area */
+	fs->fatbase = bsect + LD_WORD(buf+BPB_RsvdSecCnt-13); /* FAT start sector (lba) */
+	fs->csize = buf[BPB_SecPerClus-13];					/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(buf+BPB_RootEntCnt-13);		/* Nmuber of root directory entries */
+	tsect = LD_WORD(buf+BPB_TotSec16-13);				/* Number of sectors on the file system */
+	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(buf+BPB_TotSec32-13);
+	mclst = (tsect						/* Last cluster# + 1 */
+		- LD_WORD(buf+BPB_RsvdSecCnt-13) - fsize - fs->n_rootdir / 16
+		) / fs->csize + 2;
+	fs->max_clust = (CLUST)mclst;
+
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;							/* Determine the FAT sub type */
+	if (mclst >= 0xFF7) fmt = FS_FAT16;		/* Number of clusters >= 0xFF5 */
+	if (mclst >= 0xFFF7)					/* Number of clusters >= 0xFFF5 */
+#if _FS_FAT32
+		fmt = FS_FAT32;
+#else
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+#endif
+
+	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
+#if _FS_FAT32
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)
+		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(buf+(BPB_RootClus-13));	/* Root directory start cluster */
+	else
+#endif
+		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fsize;				/* Root directory start sector (lba) */
+	fs->database = fs->fatbase + fsize + fs->n_rootdir / 16;	/* Data start sector (lba) */
+
+	fs->flag = 0;
+	FatFs = fs;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT pf_open (
+	const char *path	/* Pointer to the file name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE sp[12], dir[32];
+	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
+
+
+	if (!fs)						/* Check file system */
+		return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
+
+	fs->flag = 0;
+	fs->buf = dir;
+	dj.fn = sp;
+	res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;	/* Follow failed */
+	if (!dir[0] || (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR))	/* It is a directory */
+		return FR_NO_FILE;
+
+	fs->org_clust =						/* File start cluster */
+#if _FS_FAT32
+		((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) |
+#endif
+		LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+	fs->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
+	fs->fptr = 0;						/* File pointer */
+	fs->flag = FA_READ;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read File                                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT pf_read (
+	void* dest,		/* Pointer to the destination object */
+	WORD btr,		/* Number of bytes to read (bit15:destination) */
+	WORD* br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
+)
+{
+	DRESULT dr;
+	CLUST clst;
+	DWORD sect, remain;
+	WORD rcnt;
+	BYTE *rbuff = dest;
+	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
+
+
+	*br = 0;
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;		/* Check file system */
+	if (!(fs->flag & FA_READ))
+			return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	remain = fs->fsize - fs->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr;									/* Repeat until all data transferred */
+		rbuff += rcnt, fs->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		if ((fs->fptr % 512) == 0) {				/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if ((fs->fptr / 512 % fs->csize) == 0) {	/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				clst = (fs->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
+					fs->org_clust : get_fat(fs->curr_clust);
+				if (clst <= 1) {
+					fs->flag = 0; return FR_DISK_ERR;
+				}
+				fs->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+				fs->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector offset in the cluster */
+			}
+			sect = clust2sect(fs->curr_clust);		/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) {
+				fs->flag = 0; return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			}
+			sect += fs->csect;
+			fs->dsect = sect;
+			fs->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+		}
+		rcnt = 512 - ((WORD)fs->fptr % 512);		/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+		if (fs->flag & FA_STREAM) {
+			dr = disk_readp(dest, fs->dsect, (WORD)(fs->fptr % 512), (WORD)(rcnt | 0x8000));
+		} else {
+			dr = disk_readp(rbuff, fs->dsect, (WORD)(fs->fptr % 512), rcnt);
+		}
+		if (dr) {
+			fs->flag = 0;
+			return (dr == RES_STRERR) ? FR_STREAM_ERR : FR_DISK_ERR;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+#if _USE_LSEEK
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT pf_lseek (
+	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
+)
+{
+	CLUST clst;
+	DWORD bcs, nsect, ifptr;
+	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
+
+
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;		/* Check file system */
+	if (!(fs->flag & FA_READ))
+			return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	if (ofs > fs->fsize) ofs = fs->fsize;	/* Clip offset with the file size */
+	ifptr = fs->fptr;
+	fs->fptr = 0;
+	if (ofs > 0) {
+		bcs = (DWORD)fs->csize * 512;	/* Cluster size (byte) */
+		if (ifptr > 0 &&
+			(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
+			fs->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
+			ofs -= fs->fptr;
+			clst = fs->curr_clust;
+		} else {							/* When seek to back cluster, */
+			clst = fs->org_clust;			/* start from the first cluster */
+			fs->curr_clust = clst;
+		}
+		while (ofs > bcs) {				/* Cluster following loop */
+				clst = get_fat(clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
+			if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fs->max_clust) {
+				fs->flag = 0; return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			}
+			fs->curr_clust = clst;
+			fs->fptr += bcs;
+			ofs -= bcs;
+		}
+		fs->fptr += ofs;
+		fs->csect = (BYTE)(ofs / 512) + 1;	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+		nsect = clust2sect(clst);	/* Current sector */
+		if (!nsect) {
+			fs->flag = 0; return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		}
+		fs->dsect = nsect + fs->csect - 1;
+	}
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+#if _USE_DIR
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directroy Object                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT pf_opendir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
+	const char *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE sp[12], dir[32];
+	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
+
+
+	if (!fs) {				/* Check file system */
+		res = FR_NOT_ENABLED;
+	} else {
+		fs->buf = dir;
+		dj->fn = sp;
+		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
+			if (dir[0]) {						/* It is not the root dir */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
+					dj->sclust =
+#if _FS_FAT32
+					((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) |
+#endif
+					LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				res = dir_rewind(dj);			/* Rewind dir */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Directory Entry in Sequense                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT pf_readdir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE sp[12], dir[32];
+	FATFS *fs = FatFs;
+
+
+	if (!fs) {				/* Check file system */
+		res = FR_NOT_ENABLED;
+	} else {
+		fs->buf = dir;
+		dj->fn = sp;
+		if (!fno) {
+			res = dir_rewind(dj);
+		} else {
+			res = dir_read(dj);
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
+				dj->sect = 0;
+				res = FR_OK;
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
+				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
+				res = dir_next(dj);			/* Increment index for next */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
+					dj->sect = 0;
+					res = FR_OK;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+#endif /* _FS_DIR */
+
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.h b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.h
index abd4f541c..bd43fbce1 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.h
@@ -1,237 +1,237 @@
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  Petit FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.01a   (C)ChaN, 2010
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Petit FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
-/ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
-/ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
-/
-/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
-/
-/ * The Petit FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
-/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-/   personal, non-profit or commercial use UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
-/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include "integer.h"
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Petit FatFs Configuration Options
-/
-/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
-/ the configuration options.
-/
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#ifndef _FATFS
-#define _FATFS
-
-#define _WORD_ACCESS	0
-/* The _WORD_ACCESS option defines which access method is used to the word
-/  data in the FAT structure.
-/
-/   0: Byte-by-byte access. Always compatible with all platforms.
-/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
-/
-/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned
-/  word access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
-/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
-/  performance and code efficiency. */
-
-
-#define	_USE_DIR	0
-/* To enable pf_opendir and pf_readdir function, set _USE_DIR to 1. */
-
-
-#define	_USE_LSEEK	0
-/* To enable pf_lseek function, set _USE_LSEEK to 1. */
-
-
-#define _FS_FAT32	1
-/* To enable FAT32 support, set _FS_FAT32 to 1. */
-
-
-/* End of configuration options. Do not change followings without care.     */
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-#if _FS_FAT32
-#define	CLUST	DWORD
-#else
-#define	CLUST	WORD
-#endif
-
-
-/* File system object structure */
-
-typedef struct _FATFS_ {
-	BYTE	fs_type;	/* FAT sub type */
-	BYTE	csize;		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
-	BYTE	flag;		/* File status flags */
-	BYTE	csect;		/* File sector address in the cluster */
-	WORD	n_rootdir;	/* Number of root directory entries (0 on FAT32) */
-	BYTE*	buf;		/* Pointer to the disk access buffer */
-	CLUST	max_clust;	/* Maximum cluster# + 1. Number of clusters is max_clust - 2 */
-	DWORD	fatbase;	/* FAT start sector */
-	DWORD	dirbase;	/* Root directory start sector (Cluster# on FAT32) */
-	DWORD	database;	/* Data start sector */
-	DWORD	fptr;		/* File R/W pointer */
-	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
-	CLUST	org_clust;	/* File start cluster */
-	CLUST	curr_clust;	/* File current cluster */
-	DWORD	dsect;		/* File current data sector */
-} FATFS;
-
-
-
-/* Directory object structure */
-
-typedef struct _DIR_ {
-	WORD	index;		/* Current read/write index number */
-	BYTE*	fn;			/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
-	CLUST	sclust;		/* Table start cluster (0:Static table) */
-	CLUST	clust;		/* Current cluster */
-	DWORD	sect;		/* Current sector */
-} DIR;
-
-
-
-/* File status structure */
-
-typedef struct _FILINFO_ {
-	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
-	WORD	fdate;		/* Last modified date */
-	WORD	ftime;		/* Last modified time */
-	BYTE	fattrib;	/* Attribute */
-	char	fname[13];	/* File name */
-} FILINFO;
-
-
-
-/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
-
-typedef enum {
-	FR_OK = 0,			/* 0 */
-	FR_DISK_ERR,		/* 1 */
-	FR_NOT_READY,		/* 2 */
-	FR_NO_FILE,			/* 3 */
-	FR_NO_PATH,			/* 4 */
-	FR_INVALID_NAME,	/* 5 */
-	FR_STREAM_ERR,		/* 6 */
-	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,	/* 7 */
-	FR_NOT_ENABLED,		/* 8 */
-	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM	/* 9 */
-} FRESULT;
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Petit FatFs module application interface                     */
-
-FRESULT pf_mount (FATFS*);				/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
-FRESULT pf_open (const char*);			/* Open a file */
-FRESULT pf_read (void*, WORD, WORD*);	/* Read data from a file */
-FRESULT pf_lseek (DWORD);				/* Move file pointer of a file object */
-FRESULT pf_opendir (DIR*, const char*);	/* Open an existing directory */
-FRESULT pf_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);	/* Read a directory item */
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Flags and offset address                                     */
-
-/* File status flag (FATFS.flag) */
-
-#define	FA_READ		0x01
-#define	FA_STREAM	0x40
-#define	FA__ERROR	0x80
-
-
-/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
-
-#define FS_FAT12	1
-#define FS_FAT16	2
-#define FS_FAT32	3
-
-
-/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
-
-#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
-#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
-#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
-#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
-#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
-#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
-#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
-#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
-
-
-/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures with byte offset instead
-/ of structure member because there are incompatibility of the packing option
-/ between various compilers. */
-
-#define BS_jmpBoot			0
-#define BS_OEMName			3
-#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11
-#define BPB_SecPerClus		13
-#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14
-#define BPB_NumFATs			16
-#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17
-#define BPB_TotSec16		19
-#define BPB_Media			21
-#define BPB_FATSz16			22
-#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24
-#define BPB_NumHeads		26
-#define BPB_HiddSec			28
-#define BPB_TotSec32		32
-#define BS_55AA				510
-
-#define BS_DrvNum			36
-#define BS_BootSig			38
-#define BS_VolID			39
-#define BS_VolLab			43
-#define BS_FilSysType		54
-
-#define BPB_FATSz32			36
-#define BPB_ExtFlags		40
-#define BPB_FSVer			42
-#define BPB_RootClus		44
-#define BPB_FSInfo			48
-#define BPB_BkBootSec		50
-#define BS_DrvNum32			64
-#define BS_BootSig32		66
-#define BS_VolID32			67
-#define BS_VolLab32			71
-#define BS_FilSysType32		82
-
-#define MBR_Table			446
-
-#define	DIR_Name			0
-#define	DIR_Attr			11
-#define	DIR_NTres			12
-#define	DIR_CrtTime			14
-#define	DIR_CrtDate			16
-#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20
-#define	DIR_WrtTime			22
-#define	DIR_WrtDate			24
-#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26
-#define	DIR_FileSize		28
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------*/
-/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
-
-#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
-#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
-#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
-#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
-#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
-#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
-#endif
-
-
-#endif /* _FATFS */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  Petit FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.01a   (C)ChaN, 2010
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Petit FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
+/ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
+/ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The Petit FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial use UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "integer.h"
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Petit FatFs Configuration Options
+/
+/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
+/ the configuration options.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#ifndef _FATFS
+#define _FATFS
+
+#define _WORD_ACCESS	0
+/* The _WORD_ACCESS option defines which access method is used to the word
+/  data in the FAT structure.
+/
+/   0: Byte-by-byte access. Always compatible with all platforms.
+/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
+/
+/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned
+/  word access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
+/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
+/  performance and code efficiency. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_DIR	0
+/* To enable pf_opendir and pf_readdir function, set _USE_DIR to 1. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_LSEEK	0
+/* To enable pf_lseek function, set _USE_LSEEK to 1. */
+
+
+#define _FS_FAT32	1
+/* To enable FAT32 support, set _FS_FAT32 to 1. */
+
+
+/* End of configuration options. Do not change followings without care.     */
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+#if _FS_FAT32
+#define	CLUST	DWORD
+#else
+#define	CLUST	WORD
+#endif
+
+
+/* File system object structure */
+
+typedef struct _FATFS_ {
+	BYTE	fs_type;	/* FAT sub type */
+	BYTE	csize;		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	BYTE	flag;		/* File status flags */
+	BYTE	csect;		/* File sector address in the cluster */
+	WORD	n_rootdir;	/* Number of root directory entries (0 on FAT32) */
+	BYTE*	buf;		/* Pointer to the disk access buffer */
+	CLUST	max_clust;	/* Maximum cluster# + 1. Number of clusters is max_clust - 2 */
+	DWORD	fatbase;	/* FAT start sector */
+	DWORD	dirbase;	/* Root directory start sector (Cluster# on FAT32) */
+	DWORD	database;	/* Data start sector */
+	DWORD	fptr;		/* File R/W pointer */
+	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
+	CLUST	org_clust;	/* File start cluster */
+	CLUST	curr_clust;	/* File current cluster */
+	DWORD	dsect;		/* File current data sector */
+} FATFS;
+
+
+
+/* Directory object structure */
+
+typedef struct _DIR_ {
+	WORD	index;		/* Current read/write index number */
+	BYTE*	fn;			/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
+	CLUST	sclust;		/* Table start cluster (0:Static table) */
+	CLUST	clust;		/* Current cluster */
+	DWORD	sect;		/* Current sector */
+} DIR;
+
+
+
+/* File status structure */
+
+typedef struct _FILINFO_ {
+	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
+	WORD	fdate;		/* Last modified date */
+	WORD	ftime;		/* Last modified time */
+	BYTE	fattrib;	/* Attribute */
+	char	fname[13];	/* File name */
+} FILINFO;
+
+
+
+/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
+
+typedef enum {
+	FR_OK = 0,			/* 0 */
+	FR_DISK_ERR,		/* 1 */
+	FR_NOT_READY,		/* 2 */
+	FR_NO_FILE,			/* 3 */
+	FR_NO_PATH,			/* 4 */
+	FR_INVALID_NAME,	/* 5 */
+	FR_STREAM_ERR,		/* 6 */
+	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,	/* 7 */
+	FR_NOT_ENABLED,		/* 8 */
+	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM	/* 9 */
+} FRESULT;
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Petit FatFs module application interface                     */
+
+FRESULT pf_mount (FATFS*);				/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
+FRESULT pf_open (const char*);			/* Open a file */
+FRESULT pf_read (void*, WORD, WORD*);	/* Read data from a file */
+FRESULT pf_lseek (DWORD);				/* Move file pointer of a file object */
+FRESULT pf_opendir (DIR*, const char*);	/* Open an existing directory */
+FRESULT pf_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);	/* Read a directory item */
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Flags and offset address                                     */
+
+/* File status flag (FATFS.flag) */
+
+#define	FA_READ		0x01
+#define	FA_STREAM	0x40
+#define	FA__ERROR	0x80
+
+
+/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
+
+#define FS_FAT12	1
+#define FS_FAT16	2
+#define FS_FAT32	3
+
+
+/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
+
+#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
+#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
+#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
+#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
+#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
+#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
+#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
+#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
+
+
+/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures with byte offset instead
+/ of structure member because there are incompatibility of the packing option
+/ between various compilers. */
+
+#define BS_jmpBoot			0
+#define BS_OEMName			3
+#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11
+#define BPB_SecPerClus		13
+#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14
+#define BPB_NumFATs			16
+#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17
+#define BPB_TotSec16		19
+#define BPB_Media			21
+#define BPB_FATSz16			22
+#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24
+#define BPB_NumHeads		26
+#define BPB_HiddSec			28
+#define BPB_TotSec32		32
+#define BS_55AA				510
+
+#define BS_DrvNum			36
+#define BS_BootSig			38
+#define BS_VolID			39
+#define BS_VolLab			43
+#define BS_FilSysType		54
+
+#define BPB_FATSz32			36
+#define BPB_ExtFlags		40
+#define BPB_FSVer			42
+#define BPB_RootClus		44
+#define BPB_FSInfo			48
+#define BPB_BkBootSec		50
+#define BS_DrvNum32			64
+#define BS_BootSig32		66
+#define BS_VolID32			67
+#define BS_VolLab32			71
+#define BS_FilSysType32		82
+
+#define MBR_Table			446
+
+#define	DIR_Name			0
+#define	DIR_Attr			11
+#define	DIR_NTres			12
+#define	DIR_CrtTime			14
+#define	DIR_CrtDate			16
+#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20
+#define	DIR_WrtTime			22
+#define	DIR_WrtDate			24
+#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26
+#define	DIR_FileSize		28
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------*/
+/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
+#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
+#endif
+
+
+#endif /* _FATFS */
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/ProgrammerConfig.c b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/ProgrammerConfig.c
index e43556fa1..63beb1d21 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/ProgrammerConfig.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/ProgrammerConfig.c
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "ProgrammerConfig.h"
-
-struct
-{
-	uint16_t SigBytes[4];
-	bool EnforceSigBytes;
-	
-	uint32_t ProgrammingSpeed;
-} ProgrammerConfig;
-
-bool ProgrammerConfig_ProcessConfiguration(void)
-{
-	memset(&ProgrammerConfig, sizeof(ProgrammerConfig), 0x00);
-
-	if (!(pf_open("CONF.txt") == FR_OK))
-	{
-		puts(" >> ERROR: CONF.txt File Not Found.\r\n");
-		return false;
-	}
-	
-	char  LineBuff[100];
-	char* CurrentLine;
-			
-	do
-	{
-		CurrentLine = fgets(LineBuff, sizeof(LineBuff), &DiskStream);
-		
-		if (CurrentLine)
-		{
-			sscanf(CurrentLine, "SIGNATURE = %02x %02x %02x %02x", &ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[0],
-			                                                       &ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[1],
-			                                                       &ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[2],
-			                                                       &ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[3]);
-
-			sscanf(CurrentLine, "SPEED = %lu", &ProgrammerConfig.ProgrammingSpeed);
-		}
-	} while (CurrentLine);
-	
-	printf(" >> *** Configuration: ***\r\n");
-	printf(" >> Device Signature: 0x%02x 0x%02x 0x%02x 0x%02x\r\n", ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[0],
-			                                                        ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[1],
-			                                                        ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[2],
-			                                                        ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[3]);
-	printf(" >> Programming Speed: %lu Hz\r\n", ProgrammerConfig.ProgrammingSpeed);
-	
-	return true;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "ProgrammerConfig.h"
+
+struct
+{
+	uint16_t SigBytes[4];
+	bool EnforceSigBytes;
+	
+	uint32_t ProgrammingSpeed;
+} ProgrammerConfig;
+
+bool ProgrammerConfig_ProcessConfiguration(void)
+{
+	memset(&ProgrammerConfig, sizeof(ProgrammerConfig), 0x00);
+
+	if (!(pf_open("CONF.txt") == FR_OK))
+	{
+		puts(" >> ERROR: CONF.txt File Not Found.\r\n");
+		return false;
+	}
+	
+	char  LineBuff[100];
+	char* CurrentLine;
+			
+	do
+	{
+		CurrentLine = fgets(LineBuff, sizeof(LineBuff), &DiskStream);
+		
+		if (CurrentLine)
+		{
+			sscanf(CurrentLine, "SIGNATURE = %02x %02x %02x %02x", &ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[0],
+			                                                       &ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[1],
+			                                                       &ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[2],
+			                                                       &ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[3]);
+
+			sscanf(CurrentLine, "SPEED = %lu", &ProgrammerConfig.ProgrammingSpeed);
+		}
+	} while (CurrentLine);
+	
+	printf(" >> *** Configuration: ***\r\n");
+	printf(" >> Device Signature: 0x%02x 0x%02x 0x%02x 0x%02x\r\n", ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[0],
+			                                                        ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[1],
+			                                                        ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[2],
+			                                                        ProgrammerConfig.SigBytes[3]);
+	printf(" >> Programming Speed: %lu Hz\r\n", ProgrammerConfig.ProgrammingSpeed);
+	
+	return true;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/ProgrammerConfig.h b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/ProgrammerConfig.h
index cd0843529..ba6e9add6 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/ProgrammerConfig.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/ProgrammerConfig.h
@@ -1,44 +1,44 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _PROGRAMMER_CONFIG_H_
-#define _PROGRAMMER_CONFIG_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include "../StandaloneProgrammer.h"
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		bool ProgrammerConfig_ProcessConfiguration(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _PROGRAMMER_CONFIG_H_
+#define _PROGRAMMER_CONFIG_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "../StandaloneProgrammer.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool ProgrammerConfig_ProcessConfiguration(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/SCSI.c b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/SCSI.c
index 7a28cfc3d..402160496 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/SCSI.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -1,283 +1,283 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
- *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
- *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
-#include "SCSI.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
- *  features and capabilities.
- */
-SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
-	{
-		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
-		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
-			
-		.Removable           = true,
-			
-		.Version             = 0,
-			
-		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
-		.NormACA             = false,
-		.TrmTsk              = false,
-		.AERC                = false,
-
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
-			
-		.SoftReset           = false,
-		.CmdQue              = false,
-		.Linked              = false,
-		.Sync                = false,
-		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
-		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
-		.RelAddr             = false,
-		
-		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
-		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
-		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
-	};
-
-/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
- *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
- */
-SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
-	{
-		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
-	};
-
-
-/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
- *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
- *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Set initial sense data, before the requested command is processed */
-	SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
-	               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-	               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-					   
-	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
-	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
-	{
-		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
-			SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
-			SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
-			SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
-			SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
-			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
-			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
-		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
-		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
-			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-			break;
-		default:
-			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
-			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-			break;
-	}
-
-	return (SenseData.SenseKey == SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD);
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
- *  and capabilities to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
-	                                         MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
-	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
-	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
-
-	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
-	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
-	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
-	{
-		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-	
-	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
- *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
-	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
-	
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
- *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
-	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
- *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
- *  supported.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
-	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
-	{
-		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
-	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
-	{
-		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
-	
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
- *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
- *  reading and writing of the data.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead)
-{
-	uint32_t BlockAddress;
-	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
-	
-	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
-	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
-
-	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
-	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
-	
-	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
-	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
-	{
-		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
-	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
-	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-	else
-	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-
-	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
-}
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+			
+		.Removable           = true,
+			
+		.Version             = 0,
+			
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+			
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+		
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Set initial sense data, before the requested command is processed */
+	SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+	               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+	               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+					   
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	return (SenseData.SenseKey == SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD);
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
+	                                         MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
+	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+	
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
+	
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
+	
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+	
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+	
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/SCSI.h b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/SCSI.h
index 9d5024c70..8eeed95ed 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/SCSI.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -1,87 +1,87 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for SCSI.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _SCSI_H_
-#define _SCSI_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "DataflashManager.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
-		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
-		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
-		 */
-		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = key;              \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = acode; \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = aqual; }MACROE
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_READ           true
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_WRITE          false
-
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
-		
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
-			
-			#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
-				static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-				static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-				static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-				static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-				static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead);
-			#endif
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = key;              \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = acode; \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = aqual; }MACROE
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+		
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* MSInterfaceInfo);
+			
+			#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+				static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+				static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+				static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+				static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+				static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead);
+			#endif
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Standalone Programmer.inf b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Standalone Programmer.inf
index 9881abc34..8472fefde 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Standalone Programmer.inf
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/Standalone Programmer.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2063&MI_00
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2063&MI_00
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="CCS, Inc."
-INSTDISK="LUFA Benito Programmer Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2063&MI_00
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2063&MI_00
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="CCS, Inc."
+INSTDISK="LUFA Benito Programmer Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/StandaloneProgrammer.c b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/StandaloneProgrammer.c
index 239eb7137..4db5a568a 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/StandaloneProgrammer.c
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/StandaloneProgrammer.c
@@ -1,161 +1,161 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Standalone Programmer project. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_STANDALONEPROG_C
-#include "StandaloneProgrammer.h"
-
-/** Standard file stream for the currently open file on the disk. */
-FILE DiskStream = FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(NULL, Disk_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_READ);
-
-/** Petite FAT Fs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the dataflash contents. */
-FATFS DiskFATState;
-
-/** Stream character fetching routine for the FAT driver so that characters from the currently open file can be
- *  read in sequence when applied to a stdio stream.
- */
-static int Disk_getchar(FILE* Stream)
-{
-	char ReadByte;
-	WORD ByteWasRead;
-
-	if (pf_read(&ReadByte, 1, &ByteWasRead) != FR_OK)
-	  return _FDEV_ERR;
-
-	return (ByteWasRead ? ReadByte : _FDEV_EOF);
-}
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-/** Event to handle mode changes in the library, to clear the FAT library's drive state structure when transitioning
- *  between modes. This ensures that the library always works with current disk data.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void)
-{
-	pf_mount(&DiskFATState);
-}
-#endif
-
-/** Task to determine if the user is wishes to start the programming sequence, and if so executes the 
- *  required functions to program the attached target (if any) with the files loaded to the dataflash.
- */
-void Programmer_Task(void)
-{
-	static bool HasAttempted = false;
-
-	if (Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	{
-		if (!(HasAttempted))
-			HasAttempted = true;
-		else
-			return;
-			
-		puts("==== PROGRAMMING CYCLE STARTED ====\r\n");
-
-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-		printf("Using %s Drive...\r\n", (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) ? "External" : "Internal");
-		#endif
-
-		puts("Reading Configuration File...\r\n");
-		if (!(ProgrammerConfig_ProcessConfiguration()))
-		  goto EndOfProgCycle;
-
-		EndOfProgCycle:
-		puts("==== PROGRAMMING CYCLE FINISHED ====\r\n");
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		HasAttempted = false;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Programmer_Task();
-		  
-		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
-		{
-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-			DiskHost_USBTask();
-			#endif
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-			DiskDevice_USBTask();
-			#endif
-		}
-		
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
-	USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID);
-	#else
-	USB_Init();
-	#endif
-
-	LEDs_Init();
-	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
-	Dataflash_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-	SerialStream_Init(9600, true);
-
-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
-	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
-	#endif
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Standalone Programmer project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_STANDALONEPROG_C
+#include "StandaloneProgrammer.h"
+
+/** Standard file stream for the currently open file on the disk. */
+FILE DiskStream = FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(NULL, Disk_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_READ);
+
+/** Petite FAT Fs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the dataflash contents. */
+FATFS DiskFATState;
+
+/** Stream character fetching routine for the FAT driver so that characters from the currently open file can be
+ *  read in sequence when applied to a stdio stream.
+ */
+static int Disk_getchar(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	char ReadByte;
+	WORD ByteWasRead;
+
+	if (pf_read(&ReadByte, 1, &ByteWasRead) != FR_OK)
+	  return _FDEV_ERR;
+
+	return (ByteWasRead ? ReadByte : _FDEV_EOF);
+}
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+/** Event to handle mode changes in the library, to clear the FAT library's drive state structure when transitioning
+ *  between modes. This ensures that the library always works with current disk data.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void)
+{
+	pf_mount(&DiskFATState);
+}
+#endif
+
+/** Task to determine if the user is wishes to start the programming sequence, and if so executes the 
+ *  required functions to program the attached target (if any) with the files loaded to the dataflash.
+ */
+void Programmer_Task(void)
+{
+	static bool HasAttempted = false;
+
+	if (Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	{
+		if (!(HasAttempted))
+			HasAttempted = true;
+		else
+			return;
+			
+		puts("==== PROGRAMMING CYCLE STARTED ====\r\n");
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+		printf("Using %s Drive...\r\n", (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) ? "External" : "Internal");
+		#endif
+
+		puts("Reading Configuration File...\r\n");
+		if (!(ProgrammerConfig_ProcessConfiguration()))
+		  goto EndOfProgCycle;
+
+		EndOfProgCycle:
+		puts("==== PROGRAMMING CYCLE FINISHED ====\r\n");
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		HasAttempted = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Programmer_Task();
+		  
+		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
+		{
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			DiskHost_USBTask();
+			#endif
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			DiskDevice_USBTask();
+			#endif
+		}
+		
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID);
+	#else
+	USB_Init();
+	#endif
+
+	LEDs_Init();
+	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, true);
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+	#endif
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/StandaloneProgrammer.h b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/StandaloneProgrammer.h
index f61e369eb..dff45fcb2 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/StandaloneProgrammer.h
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/StandaloneProgrammer.h
@@ -1,88 +1,88 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for StandaloneProgrammer.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _STANDALONE_PROG_H_
-#define _STANDALONE_PROG_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include "DiskDevice.h"
-		#include "DiskHost.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
-		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
-		#include "Lib/ProgrammerConfig.h"
-		#include "Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-		
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern FILE DiskStream;
-		extern FATFS DiskFATState;
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_STANDALONEPROG_C)
-			static int Disk_getchar(FILE* Stream);
-		#endif
-		
-		void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void);
-		
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void Programmer_Task(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for StandaloneProgrammer.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _STANDALONE_PROG_H_
+#define _STANDALONE_PROG_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "DiskDevice.h"
+		#include "DiskHost.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Lib/ProgrammerConfig.h"
+		#include "Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+		
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern FILE DiskStream;
+		extern FATFS DiskFATState;
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_STANDALONEPROG_C)
+			static int Disk_getchar(FILE* Stream);
+		#endif
+		
+		void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void);
+		
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void Programmer_Task(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/makefile b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/makefile
index b21645237..c5ac77047 100644
--- a/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/makefile
+++ b/Projects/Incomplete/StandaloneProgrammer/makefile
@@ -1,747 +1,747 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = StandaloneProgrammer
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-LUFA_OPTS += -D INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  DiskHost.c                                                  \
-	  DiskDevice.c                                                \
-	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
-	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
-	  Lib/ProgrammerConfig.c                                      \
-	  Lib/PetiteFATFs/diskio.c                                    \
-	  Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.c                                       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = StandaloneProgrammer
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+LUFA_OPTS += -D INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  DiskHost.c                                                  \
+	  DiskDevice.c                                                \
+	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
+	  Lib/ProgrammerConfig.c                                      \
+	  Lib/PetiteFATFs/diskio.c                                    \
+	  Lib/PetiteFATFs/pff.c                                       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/Board/LEDs.h b/Projects/LEDNotifier/Board/LEDs.h
index c8d0d393b..87dbf6f02 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/Board/LEDs.h
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/Board/LEDs.h
@@ -1,112 +1,112 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/*
-   LED Driver for the RGB LED on the Busware BUI board.
-*/
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_USER_H__
-#define __LEDS_USER_H__
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			extern "C" {
-		#endif
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** LED mask for the blue LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 2)
-
-			/** LED mask for the green LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 3)
-
-			/** LED mask for the red LED on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 4)
-
-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
-
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
-			{
-				DDRC |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTC |= LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTC = (PORTC & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask;
-			}
-			
-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
-			{
-				PORTC = (PORTC & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask;
-			}
-
-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
-			{
-				PORTC ^= LEDMask;
-			}
-			
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
-			{
-				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
-			}
-		#endif
-
-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
-		#if defined(__cplusplus)
-			}
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+   LED Driver for the RGB LED on the Busware BUI board.
+*/
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_USER_H__
+#define __LEDS_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the blue LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 2)
+
+			/** LED mask for the green LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 3)
+
+			/** LED mask for the red LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRC |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = (PORTC & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask;
+			}
+			
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = (PORTC & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC ^= LEDMask;
+			}
+			
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs
index 020cda46e..2b189943a 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs
@@ -1,131 +1,131 @@
-namespace CPUMonitor
-{
-    partial class frmCPU
-    {
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Required designer variable.
-        /// </summary>
-        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
-
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Clean up any resources being used.
-        /// </summary>
-        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
-        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
-        {
-            if (disposing && (components != null))
-            {
-                components.Dispose();
-            }
-            base.Dispose(disposing);
-        }
-
-        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
-
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
-        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
-        /// </summary>
-        private void InitializeComponent()
-        {
-            this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container();
-            this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components);
-            this.tmrCPUTimer = new System.Windows.Forms.Timer(this.components);
-            this.cmbComPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox();
-            this.pcCPUUsage = new System.Diagnostics.PerformanceCounter();
-            this.lblCPU = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
-            this.nicoNotifyIcon = new System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon(this.components);
-            this.btnMinimizeToTray = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
-            this.btnExit = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
-            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.pcCPUUsage)).BeginInit();
-            this.SuspendLayout();
-            // 
-            // tmrCPUTimer
-            // 
-            this.tmrCPUTimer.Enabled = true;
-            this.tmrCPUTimer.Interval = 1000;
-            this.tmrCPUTimer.Tick += new System.EventHandler(this.tmrCPUTimer_Tick);
-            // 
-            // cmbComPort
-            // 
-            this.cmbComPort.FormattingEnabled = true;
-            this.cmbComPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(48, 12);
-            this.cmbComPort.Name = "cmbComPort";
-            this.cmbComPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(156, 21);
-            this.cmbComPort.TabIndex = 0;
-            this.cmbComPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged);
-            // 
-            // pcCPUUsage
-            // 
-            this.pcCPUUsage.CategoryName = "Processor";
-            this.pcCPUUsage.CounterName = "% Processor Time";
-            this.pcCPUUsage.InstanceName = "_Total";
-            // 
-            // lblCPU
-            // 
-            this.lblCPU.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 14.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
-            this.lblCPU.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(44, 36);
-            this.lblCPU.Name = "lblCPU";
-            this.lblCPU.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(160, 28);
-            this.lblCPU.TabIndex = 1;
-            this.lblCPU.Text = "0%";
-            this.lblCPU.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleCenter;
-            // 
-            // nicoNotifyIcon
-            // 
-            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Text = "CPU Usage Monitor";
-            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Visible = true;
-            // 
-            // btnMinimizeToTray
-            // 
-            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(12, 67);
-            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Name = "btnMinimizeToTray";
-            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(111, 28);
-            this.btnMinimizeToTray.TabIndex = 2;
-            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Text = "Minimize to Tray";
-            this.btnMinimizeToTray.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
-            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnMinimizeToTray_Click);
-            // 
-            // btnExit
-            // 
-            this.btnExit.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(126, 67);
-            this.btnExit.Name = "btnExit";
-            this.btnExit.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(111, 28);
-            this.btnExit.TabIndex = 3;
-            this.btnExit.Text = "Exit";
-            this.btnExit.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
-            this.btnExit.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnExit_Click);
-            // 
-            // frmCPU
-            // 
-            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
-            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
-            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(249, 106);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.btnExit);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.btnMinimizeToTray);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.lblCPU);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.cmbComPort);
-            this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle;
-            this.MaximizeBox = false;
-            this.Name = "frmCPU";
-            this.Text = "CPU Usage Monitor";
-            this.WindowState = System.Windows.Forms.FormWindowState.Minimized;
-            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.Form1_Load);
-            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.pcCPUUsage)).EndInit();
-            this.ResumeLayout(false);
-
-        }
-
-        #endregion
-
-        private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Timer tmrCPUTimer;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cmbComPort;
-        private System.Diagnostics.PerformanceCounter pcCPUUsage;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblCPU;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon nicoNotifyIcon;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnMinimizeToTray;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnExit;
-    }
-}
-
+namespace CPUMonitor
+{
+    partial class frmCPU
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required designer variable.
+        /// </summary>
+        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Clean up any resources being used.
+        /// </summary>
+        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
+        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
+        {
+            if (disposing && (components != null))
+            {
+                components.Dispose();
+            }
+            base.Dispose(disposing);
+        }
+
+        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
+        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
+        /// </summary>
+        private void InitializeComponent()
+        {
+            this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container();
+            this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components);
+            this.tmrCPUTimer = new System.Windows.Forms.Timer(this.components);
+            this.cmbComPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox();
+            this.pcCPUUsage = new System.Diagnostics.PerformanceCounter();
+            this.lblCPU = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon = new System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon(this.components);
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.btnExit = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.pcCPUUsage)).BeginInit();
+            this.SuspendLayout();
+            // 
+            // tmrCPUTimer
+            // 
+            this.tmrCPUTimer.Enabled = true;
+            this.tmrCPUTimer.Interval = 1000;
+            this.tmrCPUTimer.Tick += new System.EventHandler(this.tmrCPUTimer_Tick);
+            // 
+            // cmbComPort
+            // 
+            this.cmbComPort.FormattingEnabled = true;
+            this.cmbComPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(48, 12);
+            this.cmbComPort.Name = "cmbComPort";
+            this.cmbComPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(156, 21);
+            this.cmbComPort.TabIndex = 0;
+            this.cmbComPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged);
+            // 
+            // pcCPUUsage
+            // 
+            this.pcCPUUsage.CategoryName = "Processor";
+            this.pcCPUUsage.CounterName = "% Processor Time";
+            this.pcCPUUsage.InstanceName = "_Total";
+            // 
+            // lblCPU
+            // 
+            this.lblCPU.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 14.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblCPU.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(44, 36);
+            this.lblCPU.Name = "lblCPU";
+            this.lblCPU.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(160, 28);
+            this.lblCPU.TabIndex = 1;
+            this.lblCPU.Text = "0%";
+            this.lblCPU.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleCenter;
+            // 
+            // nicoNotifyIcon
+            // 
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Text = "CPU Usage Monitor";
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Visible = true;
+            // 
+            // btnMinimizeToTray
+            // 
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(12, 67);
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Name = "btnMinimizeToTray";
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(111, 28);
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.TabIndex = 2;
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Text = "Minimize to Tray";
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnMinimizeToTray_Click);
+            // 
+            // btnExit
+            // 
+            this.btnExit.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(126, 67);
+            this.btnExit.Name = "btnExit";
+            this.btnExit.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(111, 28);
+            this.btnExit.TabIndex = 3;
+            this.btnExit.Text = "Exit";
+            this.btnExit.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnExit.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnExit_Click);
+            // 
+            // frmCPU
+            // 
+            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
+            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
+            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(249, 106);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnExit);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnMinimizeToTray);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblCPU);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.cmbComPort);
+            this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle;
+            this.MaximizeBox = false;
+            this.Name = "frmCPU";
+            this.Text = "CPU Usage Monitor";
+            this.WindowState = System.Windows.Forms.FormWindowState.Minimized;
+            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.Form1_Load);
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.pcCPUUsage)).EndInit();
+            this.ResumeLayout(false);
+
+        }
+
+        #endregion
+
+        private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Timer tmrCPUTimer;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cmbComPort;
+        private System.Diagnostics.PerformanceCounter pcCPUUsage;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblCPU;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon nicoNotifyIcon;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnMinimizeToTray;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnExit;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs
index 4e2a6f9f9..34903f425 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs
@@ -1,113 +1,113 @@
-using System;
-using System.Collections.Generic;
-using System.ComponentModel;
-using System.Data;
-using System.Drawing;
-using System.Linq;
-using System.Text;
-using System.Windows.Forms;
-using Microsoft.Win32;
-
-namespace CPUMonitor
-{
-    public partial class frmCPU : Form
-    {
-        private RegistryKey AppRegKey;
-
-        private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F;
-
-        public frmCPU()
-        {
-            InitializeComponent();
-
-            nicoNotifyIcon.Icon = this.Icon;
-            nicoNotifyIcon.MouseClick += new MouseEventHandler(TrayIconClick);        
-        }
-
-        private void Form1_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            AppRegKey = Registry.CurrentUser.CreateSubKey("Software\\CPUMonitor");
-
-            for (int i = 1; i <= 99; i++)
-                cmbComPort.Items.Add("COM" + i.ToString());
-
-            cmbComPort.SelectedIndex = System.Convert.ToInt32(AppRegKey.GetValue("Port", "1")) - 1;
-            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
-
-            Hide();
-        }
-
-        private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue)
-        {
-            byte[] buffer = new byte[3];
-            buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX));
-            buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX));
-            buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX));
-
-            try
-            {
-                serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
-                serSerialPort.Open();
-                serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
-                serSerialPort.Close();
-            }
-            catch (Exception e)
-            {
-
-            }
-        }
-
-        private void tmrCPUTimer_Tick(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            float CPUUsage = pcCPUUsage.NextValue();
-
-            int Red = 0;
-            int Green = 0;
-            int Blue = 0;
-
-            if (CPUUsage < 25)
-            {
-                Green = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * CPUUsage);
-            }
-            else if (CPUUsage < 50)
-            {
-                Blue = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * (CPUUsage - 25));
-                Green = LIGHT_MAX - Blue;
-            }
-            else if (CPUUsage < 75)
-            {
-                Red = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * (CPUUsage - 50));
-                Blue = LIGHT_MAX - Red;
-            }
-            else
-            {
-                Red = LIGHT_MAX;
-            }
-
-            NotifyLight(Red, Green, Blue);
-            lblCPU.Text = ((int)CPUUsage).ToString() + "%";
-        }
-
-        private void btnExit_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            Application.Exit();
-        }
-
-        private void btnMinimizeToTray_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            this.Hide();
-        }
-
-        private void TrayIconClick(object sender, MouseEventArgs e)
-        {
-            this.Show();
-            this.WindowState = FormWindowState.Normal;
-        }
-
-        private void cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            AppRegKey.SetValue("Port", cmbComPort.SelectedIndex + 1);
-            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
-        }
-    }
-}
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.ComponentModel;
+using System.Data;
+using System.Drawing;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Text;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+using Microsoft.Win32;
+
+namespace CPUMonitor
+{
+    public partial class frmCPU : Form
+    {
+        private RegistryKey AppRegKey;
+
+        private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F;
+
+        public frmCPU()
+        {
+            InitializeComponent();
+
+            nicoNotifyIcon.Icon = this.Icon;
+            nicoNotifyIcon.MouseClick += new MouseEventHandler(TrayIconClick);        
+        }
+
+        private void Form1_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            AppRegKey = Registry.CurrentUser.CreateSubKey("Software\\CPUMonitor");
+
+            for (int i = 1; i <= 99; i++)
+                cmbComPort.Items.Add("COM" + i.ToString());
+
+            cmbComPort.SelectedIndex = System.Convert.ToInt32(AppRegKey.GetValue("Port", "1")) - 1;
+            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+
+            Hide();
+        }
+
+        private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue)
+        {
+            byte[] buffer = new byte[3];
+            buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX));
+
+            try
+            {
+                serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+                serSerialPort.Open();
+                serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
+                serSerialPort.Close();
+            }
+            catch (Exception e)
+            {
+
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void tmrCPUTimer_Tick(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            float CPUUsage = pcCPUUsage.NextValue();
+
+            int Red = 0;
+            int Green = 0;
+            int Blue = 0;
+
+            if (CPUUsage < 25)
+            {
+                Green = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * CPUUsage);
+            }
+            else if (CPUUsage < 50)
+            {
+                Blue = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * (CPUUsage - 25));
+                Green = LIGHT_MAX - Blue;
+            }
+            else if (CPUUsage < 75)
+            {
+                Red = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * (CPUUsage - 50));
+                Blue = LIGHT_MAX - Red;
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                Red = LIGHT_MAX;
+            }
+
+            NotifyLight(Red, Green, Blue);
+            lblCPU.Text = ((int)CPUUsage).ToString() + "%";
+        }
+
+        private void btnExit_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            Application.Exit();
+        }
+
+        private void btnMinimizeToTray_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            this.Hide();
+        }
+
+        private void TrayIconClick(object sender, MouseEventArgs e)
+        {
+            this.Show();
+            this.WindowState = FormWindowState.Normal;
+        }
+
+        private void cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            AppRegKey.SetValue("Port", cmbComPort.SelectedIndex + 1);
+            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs
index 02d83c2b6..cb4fd89f2 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs
@@ -1,21 +1,21 @@
-using System;
-using System.Collections.Generic;
-using System.Linq;
-using System.Windows.Forms;
-
-namespace CPUMonitor
-{
-    static class Program
-    {
-        /// <summary>
-        /// The main entry point for the application.
-        /// </summary>
-        [STAThread]
-        static void Main()
-        {
-            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
-            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
-            Application.Run(new frmCPU());
-        }
-    }
-}
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace CPUMonitor
+{
+    static class Program
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// The main entry point for the application.
+        /// </summary>
+        [STAThread]
+        static void Main()
+        {
+            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
+            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
+            Application.Run(new frmCPU());
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
index f82aa5960..85d31fcba 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
@@ -1,36 +1,36 @@
-using System.Reflection;
-using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
-using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
-
-// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
-// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
-// associated with an assembly.
-[assembly: AssemblyTitle("CPUMonitor")]
-[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
-[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
-[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Microsoft")]
-[assembly: AssemblyProduct("CPUMonitor")]
-[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Microsoft 2009")]
-[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
-[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
-
-// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
-// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
-// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
-[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
-
-// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
-[assembly: Guid("3e4a61da-cdde-46de-848b-b5206d225e21")]
-
-// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
-//
-//      Major Version
-//      Minor Version 
-//      Build Number
-//      Revision
-//
-// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
-// by using the '*' as shown below:
-// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
-[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
-[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+using System.Reflection;
+using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
+using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
+
+// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
+// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
+// associated with an assembly.
+[assembly: AssemblyTitle("CPUMonitor")]
+[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Microsoft")]
+[assembly: AssemblyProduct("CPUMonitor")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Microsoft 2009")]
+[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
+
+// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
+// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
+// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
+[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
+
+// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
+[assembly: Guid("3e4a61da-cdde-46de-848b-b5206d225e21")]
+
+// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
+//
+//      Major Version
+//      Minor Version 
+//      Build Number
+//      Revision
+//
+// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
+// by using the '*' as shown below:
+// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
+[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
index 43ba43ef6..a3ba63d3d 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
@@ -1,71 +1,71 @@
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// <auto-generated>
-//     This code was generated by a tool.
-//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
-//
-//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
-//     the code is regenerated.
-// </auto-generated>
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-namespace CPUMonitor.Properties
-{
-
-
-    /// <summary>
-    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
-    /// </summary>
-    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
-    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
-    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
-    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
-    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "2.0.0.0")]
-    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
-    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
-    internal class Resources
-    {
-
-        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
-
-        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
-
-        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
-        internal Resources()
-        {
-        }
-
-        /// <summary>
-        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
-        /// </summary>
-        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
-        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager
-        {
-            get
-            {
-                if ((resourceMan == null))
-                {
-                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("CPUMonitor.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
-                    resourceMan = temp;
-                }
-                return resourceMan;
-            }
-        }
-
-        /// <summary>
-        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
-        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
-        /// </summary>
-        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
-        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture
-        {
-            get
-            {
-                return resourceCulture;
-            }
-            set
-            {
-                resourceCulture = value;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace CPUMonitor.Properties
+{
+
+
+    /// <summary>
+    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
+    /// </summary>
+    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
+    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
+    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
+    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "2.0.0.0")]
+    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    internal class Resources
+    {
+
+        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
+
+        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
+
+        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
+        internal Resources()
+        {
+        }
+
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager
+        {
+            get
+            {
+                if ((resourceMan == null))
+                {
+                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("CPUMonitor.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
+                    resourceMan = temp;
+                }
+                return resourceMan;
+            }
+        }
+
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
+        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture
+        {
+            get
+            {
+                return resourceCulture;
+            }
+            set
+            {
+                resourceCulture = value;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
index b9bf6776c..31165608c 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
@@ -1,30 +1,30 @@
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// <auto-generated>
-//     This code was generated by a tool.
-//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
-//
-//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
-//     the code is regenerated.
-// </auto-generated>
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-namespace CPUMonitor.Properties
-{
-
-
-    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
-    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "9.0.0.0")]
-    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase
-    {
-
-        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
-
-        public static Settings Default
-        {
-            get
-            {
-                return defaultInstance;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace CPUMonitor.Properties
+{
+
+
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "9.0.0.0")]
+    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase
+    {
+
+        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
+
+        public static Settings Default
+        {
+            get
+            {
+                return defaultInstance;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c b/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c
index deef0876d..b5cb8872a 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,267 +1,267 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x02,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2044,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-			
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-			
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-			
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-			
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(12), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LED Notifier"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*          Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t       Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x02,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2044,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+			
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+			
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+			
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(12), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LED Notifier"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*          Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t       Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h b/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h
index 76eb1fc24..bb0b8e546 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/LEDNotifier/Doxygen.conf
index abe146d04..524a5f3e5 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - USB LED Notifier Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ CPUUsageApp/ HotmailNotifierApp/ LEDMixerApp/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - USB LED Notifier Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ CPUUsageApp/ HotmailNotifierApp/ LEDMixerApp/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/MailNotifier.Designer.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/MailNotifier.Designer.cs
index 9e4734dc1..c4e494bbe 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/MailNotifier.Designer.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/MailNotifier.Designer.cs
@@ -1,113 +1,113 @@
-namespace TestWinForms
-{
-    partial class MailNotifier
-    {
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Required designer variable.
-        /// </summary>
-        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
-
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Clean up any resources being used.
-        /// </summary>
-        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
-        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
-        {
-            if (disposing && (components != null))
-            {
-                components.Dispose();
-            }
-            base.Dispose(disposing);
-        }
-
-        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
-
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
-        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
-        /// </summary>
-        private void InitializeComponent()
-        {
-            this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container();
-            this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components);
-            this.cmbComPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox();
-            this.lblComPort = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
-            this.btnMinimize = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
-            this.btnExit = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
-            this.nicoNotifyIcon = new System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon(this.components);
-            this.SuspendLayout();
-            // 
-            // cmbComPort
-            // 
-            this.cmbComPort.FormattingEnabled = true;
-            this.cmbComPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(108, 12);
-            this.cmbComPort.Name = "cmbComPort";
-            this.cmbComPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(126, 21);
-            this.cmbComPort.TabIndex = 0;
-            this.cmbComPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cmbComPort_SelectedIndexChanged);
-            // 
-            // lblComPort
-            // 
-            this.lblComPort.AutoSize = true;
-            this.lblComPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(12, 15);
-            this.lblComPort.Name = "lblComPort";
-            this.lblComPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 13);
-            this.lblComPort.TabIndex = 1;
-            this.lblComPort.Text = "COM Port to Use:";
-            // 
-            // btnMinimize
-            // 
-            this.btnMinimize.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(12, 42);
-            this.btnMinimize.Name = "btnMinimize";
-            this.btnMinimize.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(109, 23);
-            this.btnMinimize.TabIndex = 2;
-            this.btnMinimize.Text = "Minimize to Tray";
-            this.btnMinimize.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
-            this.btnMinimize.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnMinimize_Click);
-            // 
-            // btnExit
-            // 
-            this.btnExit.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(131, 42);
-            this.btnExit.Name = "btnExit";
-            this.btnExit.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(109, 23);
-            this.btnExit.TabIndex = 3;
-            this.btnExit.Text = "Exit";
-            this.btnExit.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
-            this.btnExit.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnExit_Click);
-            // 
-            // nicoNotifyIcon
-            // 
-            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Text = "Mail Notifier";
-            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Visible = true;
-            // 
-            // MailNotifier
-            // 
-            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
-            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
-            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(252, 77);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.btnExit);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.btnMinimize);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.lblComPort);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.cmbComPort);
-            this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle;
-            this.MaximizeBox = false;
-            this.Name = "MailNotifier";
-            this.Text = "Mail Notifier Light";
-            this.WindowState = System.Windows.Forms.FormWindowState.Minimized;
-            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.MailNotifier_Load);
-            this.ResumeLayout(false);
-            this.PerformLayout();
-
-        }
-
-        #endregion
-
-        private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cmbComPort;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblComPort;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnMinimize;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnExit;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon nicoNotifyIcon;
-    }
-}
-
+namespace TestWinForms
+{
+    partial class MailNotifier
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required designer variable.
+        /// </summary>
+        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Clean up any resources being used.
+        /// </summary>
+        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
+        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
+        {
+            if (disposing && (components != null))
+            {
+                components.Dispose();
+            }
+            base.Dispose(disposing);
+        }
+
+        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
+        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
+        /// </summary>
+        private void InitializeComponent()
+        {
+            this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container();
+            this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components);
+            this.cmbComPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox();
+            this.lblComPort = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.btnMinimize = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.btnExit = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon = new System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon(this.components);
+            this.SuspendLayout();
+            // 
+            // cmbComPort
+            // 
+            this.cmbComPort.FormattingEnabled = true;
+            this.cmbComPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(108, 12);
+            this.cmbComPort.Name = "cmbComPort";
+            this.cmbComPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(126, 21);
+            this.cmbComPort.TabIndex = 0;
+            this.cmbComPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cmbComPort_SelectedIndexChanged);
+            // 
+            // lblComPort
+            // 
+            this.lblComPort.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblComPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(12, 15);
+            this.lblComPort.Name = "lblComPort";
+            this.lblComPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 13);
+            this.lblComPort.TabIndex = 1;
+            this.lblComPort.Text = "COM Port to Use:";
+            // 
+            // btnMinimize
+            // 
+            this.btnMinimize.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(12, 42);
+            this.btnMinimize.Name = "btnMinimize";
+            this.btnMinimize.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(109, 23);
+            this.btnMinimize.TabIndex = 2;
+            this.btnMinimize.Text = "Minimize to Tray";
+            this.btnMinimize.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnMinimize.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnMinimize_Click);
+            // 
+            // btnExit
+            // 
+            this.btnExit.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(131, 42);
+            this.btnExit.Name = "btnExit";
+            this.btnExit.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(109, 23);
+            this.btnExit.TabIndex = 3;
+            this.btnExit.Text = "Exit";
+            this.btnExit.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnExit.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnExit_Click);
+            // 
+            // nicoNotifyIcon
+            // 
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Text = "Mail Notifier";
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Visible = true;
+            // 
+            // MailNotifier
+            // 
+            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
+            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
+            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(252, 77);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnExit);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnMinimize);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblComPort);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.cmbComPort);
+            this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle;
+            this.MaximizeBox = false;
+            this.Name = "MailNotifier";
+            this.Text = "Mail Notifier Light";
+            this.WindowState = System.Windows.Forms.FormWindowState.Minimized;
+            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.MailNotifier_Load);
+            this.ResumeLayout(false);
+            this.PerformLayout();
+
+        }
+
+        #endregion
+
+        private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cmbComPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblComPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnMinimize;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnExit;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon nicoNotifyIcon;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/MailNotifier.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/MailNotifier.cs
index 742948fca..43cbef88c 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/MailNotifier.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/MailNotifier.cs
@@ -1,111 +1,111 @@
-using System;
-using System.Collections.Generic;
-using System.ComponentModel;
-using System.Data;
-using System.Drawing;
-using System.Text;
-using System.Windows.Forms;
-using Microsoft.Win32;
-
-namespace TestWinForms
-{
-    public partial class MailNotifier : Form
-    {
-        private MessengerAPI.Messenger Messenger;
-        private RegistryKey AppRegKey;
-
-        private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F;
-
-        public MailNotifier()
-        {
-            InitializeComponent();
-
-            Messenger = new MessengerAPI.Messenger();
-            AppRegKey = Registry.CurrentUser.CreateSubKey("Software\\MailNotifier");
-
-            for (int i = 1; i < 99; i++)
-                cmbComPort.Items.Add("COM" + i.ToString());
-
-            cmbComPort.SelectedIndex = System.Convert.ToInt32(AppRegKey.GetValue("Port", "1")) - 1;
-            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
-
-            nicoNotifyIcon.Icon = this.Icon;
-            nicoNotifyIcon.MouseClick += new MouseEventHandler(TrayIconClick);
-        }
-
-        private void MailNotifier_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            Messenger.OnUnreadEmailChange += new MessengerAPI.DMessengerEvents_OnUnreadEmailChangeEventHandler(NewEmail);
-
-            bool UnreadMail = (Messenger.get_UnreadEmailCount(MessengerAPI.MUAFOLDER.MUAFOLDER_INBOX) > 0);
-            NotifyLight((!UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), (UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), 0);
-
-            Hide();
-        }
-
-        private void TrayIconClick(object sender, MouseEventArgs e)
-        {
-            this.Show();
-            this.WindowState = FormWindowState.Normal;
-        }
-
-        private void NewEmail(MessengerAPI.MUAFOLDER folder, int amount, ref bool enableDefault)
-        {
-            if (folder == MessengerAPI.MUAFOLDER.MUAFOLDER_INBOX)
-            {
-                bool UnreadMail = (Messenger.get_UnreadEmailCount(MessengerAPI.MUAFOLDER.MUAFOLDER_INBOX) > 0);
-                NotifyLight((!UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), (UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), 0);
-            }
-        }
-
-        private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue)
-        {
-            byte[] buffer = new byte[3];
-            buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX));
-            buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX));
-            buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX));
-
-            try
-            {
-                serSerialPort.Open();
-                serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
-                serSerialPort.Close();
-            }
-            catch (Exception e)
-            {
-
-            }
-        }
-
-        private void btnExit_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            Application.Exit();
-        }
-
-        private void cmbComPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            AppRegKey.SetValue("Port", cmbComPort.SelectedIndex + 1);
-            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
-
-            for (int i = 1; i < 10; i++)
-            {
-                NotifyLight((LIGHT_MAX / i), (LIGHT_MAX / (i * 10)), 0);
-                System.Threading.Thread.Sleep(10);
-            }
-
-            for (int i = 10; i > 0; i--)
-            {
-                NotifyLight((LIGHT_MAX / i), (LIGHT_MAX / (i * 10)), 0);
-                System.Threading.Thread.Sleep(10);
-            }
-
-            bool UnreadMail = (Messenger.get_UnreadEmailCount(MessengerAPI.MUAFOLDER.MUAFOLDER_INBOX) > 0);
-            NotifyLight((!UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), (UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), 0);
-        }
-
-        private void btnMinimize_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            this.Hide();
-        }
-    }
-}
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.ComponentModel;
+using System.Data;
+using System.Drawing;
+using System.Text;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+using Microsoft.Win32;
+
+namespace TestWinForms
+{
+    public partial class MailNotifier : Form
+    {
+        private MessengerAPI.Messenger Messenger;
+        private RegistryKey AppRegKey;
+
+        private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F;
+
+        public MailNotifier()
+        {
+            InitializeComponent();
+
+            Messenger = new MessengerAPI.Messenger();
+            AppRegKey = Registry.CurrentUser.CreateSubKey("Software\\MailNotifier");
+
+            for (int i = 1; i < 99; i++)
+                cmbComPort.Items.Add("COM" + i.ToString());
+
+            cmbComPort.SelectedIndex = System.Convert.ToInt32(AppRegKey.GetValue("Port", "1")) - 1;
+            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+
+            nicoNotifyIcon.Icon = this.Icon;
+            nicoNotifyIcon.MouseClick += new MouseEventHandler(TrayIconClick);
+        }
+
+        private void MailNotifier_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            Messenger.OnUnreadEmailChange += new MessengerAPI.DMessengerEvents_OnUnreadEmailChangeEventHandler(NewEmail);
+
+            bool UnreadMail = (Messenger.get_UnreadEmailCount(MessengerAPI.MUAFOLDER.MUAFOLDER_INBOX) > 0);
+            NotifyLight((!UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), (UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), 0);
+
+            Hide();
+        }
+
+        private void TrayIconClick(object sender, MouseEventArgs e)
+        {
+            this.Show();
+            this.WindowState = FormWindowState.Normal;
+        }
+
+        private void NewEmail(MessengerAPI.MUAFOLDER folder, int amount, ref bool enableDefault)
+        {
+            if (folder == MessengerAPI.MUAFOLDER.MUAFOLDER_INBOX)
+            {
+                bool UnreadMail = (Messenger.get_UnreadEmailCount(MessengerAPI.MUAFOLDER.MUAFOLDER_INBOX) > 0);
+                NotifyLight((!UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), (UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), 0);
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue)
+        {
+            byte[] buffer = new byte[3];
+            buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX));
+
+            try
+            {
+                serSerialPort.Open();
+                serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
+                serSerialPort.Close();
+            }
+            catch (Exception e)
+            {
+
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void btnExit_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            Application.Exit();
+        }
+
+        private void cmbComPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            AppRegKey.SetValue("Port", cmbComPort.SelectedIndex + 1);
+            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+
+            for (int i = 1; i < 10; i++)
+            {
+                NotifyLight((LIGHT_MAX / i), (LIGHT_MAX / (i * 10)), 0);
+                System.Threading.Thread.Sleep(10);
+            }
+
+            for (int i = 10; i > 0; i--)
+            {
+                NotifyLight((LIGHT_MAX / i), (LIGHT_MAX / (i * 10)), 0);
+                System.Threading.Thread.Sleep(10);
+            }
+
+            bool UnreadMail = (Messenger.get_UnreadEmailCount(MessengerAPI.MUAFOLDER.MUAFOLDER_INBOX) > 0);
+            NotifyLight((!UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), (UnreadMail ? LIGHT_MAX : 0), 0);
+        }
+
+        private void btnMinimize_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            this.Hide();
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Program.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Program.cs
index 1dd229d91..7c5690828 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Program.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Program.cs
@@ -1,20 +1,20 @@
-using System;
-using System.Collections.Generic;
-using System.Windows.Forms;
-
-namespace TestWinForms
-{
-    static class Program
-    {
-        /// <summary>
-        /// The main entry point for the application.
-        /// </summary>
-        [STAThread]
-        static void Main()
-        {
-            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
-            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
-            Application.Run(new MailNotifier());
-        }
-    }
-}
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace TestWinForms
+{
+    static class Program
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// The main entry point for the application.
+        /// </summary>
+        [STAThread]
+        static void Main()
+        {
+            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
+            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
+            Application.Run(new MailNotifier());
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
index 86b056454..83ead884d 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
@@ -1,36 +1,36 @@
-using System.Reflection;
-using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
-using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
-
-// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
-// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
-// associated with an assembly.
-[assembly: AssemblyTitle("MailNotifier")]
-[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
-[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
-[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Dean Camera")]
-[assembly: AssemblyProduct("Mail LED Notifier")]
-[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Public Domain")]
-[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
-[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
-
-// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
-// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
-// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
-[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
-
-// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
-[assembly: Guid("25e10140-cf96-4619-adaa-9010abc62d0a")]
-
-// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
-//
-//      Major Version
-//      Minor Version 
-//      Build Number
-//      Revision
-//
-// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
-// by using the '*' as shown below:
-// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
-[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
-[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+using System.Reflection;
+using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
+using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
+
+// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
+// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
+// associated with an assembly.
+[assembly: AssemblyTitle("MailNotifier")]
+[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Dean Camera")]
+[assembly: AssemblyProduct("Mail LED Notifier")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Public Domain")]
+[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
+
+// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
+// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
+// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
+[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
+
+// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
+[assembly: Guid("25e10140-cf96-4619-adaa-9010abc62d0a")]
+
+// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
+//
+//      Major Version
+//      Minor Version 
+//      Build Number
+//      Revision
+//
+// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
+// by using the '*' as shown below:
+// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
+[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
index 8eb902684..67e2793d2 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
@@ -1,63 +1,63 @@
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// <auto-generated>
-//     This code was generated by a tool.
-//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
-//
-//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
-//     the code is regenerated.
-// </auto-generated>
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-namespace MailNotifier.Properties {
-    using System;
-    
-    
-    /// <summary>
-    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
-    /// </summary>
-    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
-    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
-    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
-    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
-    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "2.0.0.0")]
-    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
-    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
-    internal class Resources {
-        
-        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
-        
-        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
-        
-        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
-        internal Resources() {
-        }
-        
-        /// <summary>
-        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
-        /// </summary>
-        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
-        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager {
-            get {
-                if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) {
-                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("MailNotifier.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
-                    resourceMan = temp;
-                }
-                return resourceMan;
-            }
-        }
-        
-        /// <summary>
-        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
-        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
-        /// </summary>
-        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
-        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture {
-            get {
-                return resourceCulture;
-            }
-            set {
-                resourceCulture = value;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace MailNotifier.Properties {
+    using System;
+    
+    
+    /// <summary>
+    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
+    /// </summary>
+    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
+    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
+    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
+    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "2.0.0.0")]
+    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    internal class Resources {
+        
+        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
+        
+        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
+        
+        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
+        internal Resources() {
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager {
+            get {
+                if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) {
+                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("MailNotifier.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
+                    resourceMan = temp;
+                }
+                return resourceMan;
+            }
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
+        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture {
+            get {
+                return resourceCulture;
+            }
+            set {
+                resourceCulture = value;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
index bb55ab3e3..2906c3ff3 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/HotmailNotifierApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
@@ -1,26 +1,26 @@
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// <auto-generated>
-//     This code was generated by a tool.
-//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
-//
-//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
-//     the code is regenerated.
-// </auto-generated>
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-namespace MailNotifier.Properties {
-    
-    
-    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
-    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "9.0.0.0")]
-    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase {
-        
-        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
-        
-        public static Settings Default {
-            get {
-                return defaultInstance;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace MailNotifier.Properties {
+    
+    
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "9.0.0.0")]
+    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase {
+        
+        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
+        
+        public static Settings Default {
+            get {
+                return defaultInstance;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs
index 8ed0665f7..595083a4a 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs
@@ -1,149 +1,149 @@
-namespace LEDMixer
-{
-    partial class LEDMixer
-    {
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Required designer variable.
-        /// </summary>
-        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
-
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Clean up any resources being used.
-        /// </summary>
-        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
-        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
-        {
-            if (disposing && (components != null))
-            {
-                components.Dispose();
-            }
-            base.Dispose(disposing);
-        }
-
-        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
-
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
-        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
-        /// </summary>
-        private void InitializeComponent()
-        {
-            this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container();
-            this.tbRed = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
-            this.tbGreen = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
-            this.tbBlue = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
-            this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components);
-            this.cbPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox();
-            this.lblRed = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
-            this.lblBlue = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
-            this.lblGreen = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
-            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbRed)).BeginInit();
-            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbGreen)).BeginInit();
-            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbBlue)).BeginInit();
-            this.SuspendLayout();
-            // 
-            // tbRed
-            // 
-            this.tbRed.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 64);
-            this.tbRed.Maximum = 512;
-            this.tbRed.Name = "tbRed";
-            this.tbRed.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
-            this.tbRed.TabIndex = 0;
-            this.tbRed.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbRed_Scroll);
-            // 
-            // tbGreen
-            // 
-            this.tbGreen.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 115);
-            this.tbGreen.Maximum = 512;
-            this.tbGreen.Name = "tbGreen";
-            this.tbGreen.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
-            this.tbGreen.TabIndex = 1;
-            this.tbGreen.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbGreen_Scroll);
-            // 
-            // tbBlue
-            // 
-            this.tbBlue.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 163);
-            this.tbBlue.Maximum = 512;
-            this.tbBlue.Name = "tbBlue";
-            this.tbBlue.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
-            this.tbBlue.TabIndex = 2;
-            this.tbBlue.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbBlue_Scroll);
-            // 
-            // cbPort
-            // 
-            this.cbPort.FormattingEnabled = true;
-            this.cbPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(97, 12);
-            this.cbPort.Name = "cbPort";
-            this.cbPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(99, 21);
-            this.cbPort.TabIndex = 3;
-            this.cbPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged);
-            // 
-            // lblRed
-            // 
-            this.lblRed.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
-            this.lblRed.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 64);
-            this.lblRed.Name = "lblRed";
-            this.lblRed.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(48, 29);
-            this.lblRed.TabIndex = 4;
-            this.lblRed.Text = "Red";
-            this.lblRed.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
-            // 
-            // lblBlue
-            // 
-            this.lblBlue.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
-            this.lblBlue.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 115);
-            this.lblBlue.Name = "lblGreen";
-            this.lblBlue.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(50, 27);
-            this.lblBlue.TabIndex = 5;
-            this.lblBlue.Text = "Green";
-            this.lblBlue.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
-            // 
-            // lblGreen
-            // 
-            this.lblGreen.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
-            this.lblGreen.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 163);
-            this.lblGreen.Name = "lblBlue";
-            this.lblGreen.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(50, 25);
-            this.lblGreen.TabIndex = 6;
-            this.lblGreen.Text = "Blue";
-            this.lblGreen.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
-            // 
-            // LEDMixer
-            // 
-            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
-            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
-            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(284, 207);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.lblGreen);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.lblBlue);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.lblRed);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.cbPort);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.tbBlue);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.tbGreen);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.tbRed);
-            this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle;
-            this.MaximizeBox = false;
-            this.MinimizeBox = false;
-            this.Name = "LEDMixer";
-            this.Text = "LED Mixer";
-            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.LEDMixer_Load);
-            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbRed)).EndInit();
-            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbGreen)).EndInit();
-            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbBlue)).EndInit();
-            this.ResumeLayout(false);
-            this.PerformLayout();
-
-        }
-
-        #endregion
-
-        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbRed;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbGreen;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbBlue;
-        private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cbPort;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblRed;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblBlue;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblGreen;
-    }
-}
-
+namespace LEDMixer
+{
+    partial class LEDMixer
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required designer variable.
+        /// </summary>
+        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Clean up any resources being used.
+        /// </summary>
+        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
+        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
+        {
+            if (disposing && (components != null))
+            {
+                components.Dispose();
+            }
+            base.Dispose(disposing);
+        }
+
+        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
+        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
+        /// </summary>
+        private void InitializeComponent()
+        {
+            this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container();
+            this.tbRed = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
+            this.tbGreen = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
+            this.tbBlue = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
+            this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components);
+            this.cbPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox();
+            this.lblRed = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.lblBlue = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.lblGreen = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbRed)).BeginInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbGreen)).BeginInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbBlue)).BeginInit();
+            this.SuspendLayout();
+            // 
+            // tbRed
+            // 
+            this.tbRed.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 64);
+            this.tbRed.Maximum = 512;
+            this.tbRed.Name = "tbRed";
+            this.tbRed.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
+            this.tbRed.TabIndex = 0;
+            this.tbRed.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbRed_Scroll);
+            // 
+            // tbGreen
+            // 
+            this.tbGreen.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 115);
+            this.tbGreen.Maximum = 512;
+            this.tbGreen.Name = "tbGreen";
+            this.tbGreen.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
+            this.tbGreen.TabIndex = 1;
+            this.tbGreen.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbGreen_Scroll);
+            // 
+            // tbBlue
+            // 
+            this.tbBlue.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 163);
+            this.tbBlue.Maximum = 512;
+            this.tbBlue.Name = "tbBlue";
+            this.tbBlue.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
+            this.tbBlue.TabIndex = 2;
+            this.tbBlue.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbBlue_Scroll);
+            // 
+            // cbPort
+            // 
+            this.cbPort.FormattingEnabled = true;
+            this.cbPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(97, 12);
+            this.cbPort.Name = "cbPort";
+            this.cbPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(99, 21);
+            this.cbPort.TabIndex = 3;
+            this.cbPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged);
+            // 
+            // lblRed
+            // 
+            this.lblRed.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblRed.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 64);
+            this.lblRed.Name = "lblRed";
+            this.lblRed.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(48, 29);
+            this.lblRed.TabIndex = 4;
+            this.lblRed.Text = "Red";
+            this.lblRed.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
+            // 
+            // lblBlue
+            // 
+            this.lblBlue.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblBlue.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 115);
+            this.lblBlue.Name = "lblGreen";
+            this.lblBlue.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(50, 27);
+            this.lblBlue.TabIndex = 5;
+            this.lblBlue.Text = "Green";
+            this.lblBlue.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
+            // 
+            // lblGreen
+            // 
+            this.lblGreen.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblGreen.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 163);
+            this.lblGreen.Name = "lblBlue";
+            this.lblGreen.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(50, 25);
+            this.lblGreen.TabIndex = 6;
+            this.lblGreen.Text = "Blue";
+            this.lblGreen.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
+            // 
+            // LEDMixer
+            // 
+            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
+            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
+            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(284, 207);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblGreen);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblBlue);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblRed);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.cbPort);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.tbBlue);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.tbGreen);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.tbRed);
+            this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle;
+            this.MaximizeBox = false;
+            this.MinimizeBox = false;
+            this.Name = "LEDMixer";
+            this.Text = "LED Mixer";
+            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.LEDMixer_Load);
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbRed)).EndInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbGreen)).EndInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbBlue)).EndInit();
+            this.ResumeLayout(false);
+            this.PerformLayout();
+
+        }
+
+        #endregion
+
+        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbRed;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbGreen;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbBlue;
+        private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cbPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblRed;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblBlue;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblGreen;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs
index ccc89a7a2..6e19af8ed 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs
@@ -1,73 +1,73 @@
-using System;
-using System.Collections.Generic;
-using System.ComponentModel;
-using System.Data;
-using System.Drawing;
-using System.Linq;
-using System.Text;
-using System.Windows.Forms;
-
-namespace LEDMixer
-{
-    public partial class LEDMixer : Form
-    {
-        private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F;
-        
-        public LEDMixer()
-        {
-            InitializeComponent();
-        }
-
-        private void LEDMixer_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            for (int i = 1; i <= 99; i++)
-                cbPort.Items.Add("COM" + i.ToString());
-
-            cbPort.SelectedIndex = 0;
-
-            tbRed.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
-            tbGreen.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
-            tbBlue.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
-        }
-
-        private void tbRed_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
-        }
-
-        private void tbGreen_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
-        }
-
-        private void tbBlue_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
-        }
-        
-        private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue)
-        {
-            byte[] buffer = new byte[3];
-            buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX));
-            buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX));
-            buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX));
-
-            try
-            {
-                serSerialPort.PortName = cbPort.Text;
-                serSerialPort.Open();
-                serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
-                serSerialPort.Close();
-            }
-            catch (Exception e)
-            {
-
-            }
-        }
-
-        private void cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
-        }
-    }
-}
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.ComponentModel;
+using System.Data;
+using System.Drawing;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Text;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace LEDMixer
+{
+    public partial class LEDMixer : Form
+    {
+        private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F;
+        
+        public LEDMixer()
+        {
+            InitializeComponent();
+        }
+
+        private void LEDMixer_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            for (int i = 1; i <= 99; i++)
+                cbPort.Items.Add("COM" + i.ToString());
+
+            cbPort.SelectedIndex = 0;
+
+            tbRed.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
+            tbGreen.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
+            tbBlue.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
+        }
+
+        private void tbRed_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+
+        private void tbGreen_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+
+        private void tbBlue_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+        
+        private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue)
+        {
+            byte[] buffer = new byte[3];
+            buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX));
+
+            try
+            {
+                serSerialPort.PortName = cbPort.Text;
+                serSerialPort.Open();
+                serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
+                serSerialPort.Close();
+            }
+            catch (Exception e)
+            {
+
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs
index d9171482b..8958f86d2 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs
@@ -1,21 +1,21 @@
-using System;
-using System.Collections.Generic;
-using System.Linq;
-using System.Windows.Forms;
-
-namespace LEDMixer
-{
-    static class Program
-    {
-        /// <summary>
-        /// The main entry point for the application.
-        /// </summary>
-        [STAThread]
-        static void Main()
-        {
-            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
-            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
-            Application.Run(new LEDMixer());
-        }
-    }
-}
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace LEDMixer
+{
+    static class Program
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// The main entry point for the application.
+        /// </summary>
+        [STAThread]
+        static void Main()
+        {
+            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
+            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
+            Application.Run(new LEDMixer());
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
index 1a6f3bd3b..c88194381 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
@@ -1,36 +1,36 @@
-using System.Reflection;
-using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
-using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
-
-// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
-// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
-// associated with an assembly.
-[assembly: AssemblyTitle("LEDMixer")]
-[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
-[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
-[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Microsoft")]
-[assembly: AssemblyProduct("LEDMixer")]
-[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Microsoft 2009")]
-[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
-[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
-
-// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
-// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
-// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
-[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
-
-// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
-[assembly: Guid("335c1112-9aa6-42a0-9765-5cc6deb78c88")]
-
-// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
-//
-//      Major Version
-//      Minor Version 
-//      Build Number
-//      Revision
-//
-// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
-// by using the '*' as shown below:
-// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
-[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
-[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+using System.Reflection;
+using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
+using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
+
+// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
+// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
+// associated with an assembly.
+[assembly: AssemblyTitle("LEDMixer")]
+[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Microsoft")]
+[assembly: AssemblyProduct("LEDMixer")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Microsoft 2009")]
+[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
+
+// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
+// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
+// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
+[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
+
+// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
+[assembly: Guid("335c1112-9aa6-42a0-9765-5cc6deb78c88")]
+
+// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
+//
+//      Major Version
+//      Minor Version 
+//      Build Number
+//      Revision
+//
+// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
+// by using the '*' as shown below:
+// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
+[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
index 30431f028..74c0e3e7e 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
@@ -1,71 +1,71 @@
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// <auto-generated>
-//     This code was generated by a tool.
-//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
-//
-//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
-//     the code is regenerated.
-// </auto-generated>
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-namespace LEDMixer.Properties
-{
-
-
-    /// <summary>
-    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
-    /// </summary>
-    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
-    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
-    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
-    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
-    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "2.0.0.0")]
-    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
-    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
-    internal class Resources
-    {
-
-        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
-
-        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
-
-        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
-        internal Resources()
-        {
-        }
-
-        /// <summary>
-        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
-        /// </summary>
-        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
-        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager
-        {
-            get
-            {
-                if ((resourceMan == null))
-                {
-                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("LEDMixer.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
-                    resourceMan = temp;
-                }
-                return resourceMan;
-            }
-        }
-
-        /// <summary>
-        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
-        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
-        /// </summary>
-        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
-        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture
-        {
-            get
-            {
-                return resourceCulture;
-            }
-            set
-            {
-                resourceCulture = value;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace LEDMixer.Properties
+{
+
+
+    /// <summary>
+    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
+    /// </summary>
+    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
+    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
+    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
+    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "2.0.0.0")]
+    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    internal class Resources
+    {
+
+        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
+
+        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
+
+        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
+        internal Resources()
+        {
+        }
+
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager
+        {
+            get
+            {
+                if ((resourceMan == null))
+                {
+                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("LEDMixer.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
+                    resourceMan = temp;
+                }
+                return resourceMan;
+            }
+        }
+
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
+        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture
+        {
+            get
+            {
+                return resourceCulture;
+            }
+            set
+            {
+                resourceCulture = value;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
index 9c1748eda..1e613aa26 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
@@ -1,30 +1,30 @@
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// <auto-generated>
-//     This code was generated by a tool.
-//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
-//
-//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
-//     the code is regenerated.
-// </auto-generated>
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-namespace LEDMixer.Properties
-{
-
-
-    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
-    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "9.0.0.0")]
-    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase
-    {
-
-        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
-
-        public static Settings Default
-        {
-            get
-            {
-                return defaultInstance;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:2.0.50727.4927
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace LEDMixer.Properties
+{
+
+
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "9.0.0.0")]
+    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase
+    {
+
+        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
+
+        public static Settings Default
+        {
+            get
+            {
+                return defaultInstance;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c
index 5b5390024..da4ee9e5c 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c
@@ -1,167 +1,167 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the LEDNotfier project. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "LEDNotifier.h"
-
-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
-
-				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
-				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Counter for the software PWM */
-static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Count;
-
-/** Duty cycle for the first software PWM channel */
-static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty;
-
-/** Duty cycle for the second software PWM channel */
-static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty;
-
-/** Duty cycle for the third software PWM channel */
-static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty;
-
-
-/** Interrupt handler for managing the software PWM channels for the LEDs */
-ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
-{
-	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
-
-	if (++SoftPWM_Count == 0b00011111)
-	  SoftPWM_Count = 0;
-
-	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty)
-	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED1;
-
-	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty)
-	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED2;
-
-	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty)
-	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED3;
-	  
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-}
-
-/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be
- *  used like any regular character stream in the C APIs
- */
-static FILE USBSerialStream;
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	/* Create a regular blocking character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */
-	CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);
-	
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		/* Read in next LED colour command from the host */
-		uint8_t ColorUpdate = fgetc(&USBSerialStream);
-		
-		/* Top 3 bits select the LED, bottom 5 control the brightness */
-		uint8_t Channel = (ColorUpdate & 0b11100000);
-		uint8_t Duty    = (ColorUpdate & 0b00011111);
-		
-		if (Channel & (1 << 5))
-		  SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty = Duty;
-		
-		if (Channel & (1 << 6))
-		  SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty = Duty;
-
-		if (Channel & (1 << 7))
-		  SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty = Duty;
-
-		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-	
-	/* Timer Initialization */
-	OCR0A  = 100;
-	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
-	TCCR0B = (1 << CS00);
-	TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the LEDNotfier project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "LEDNotifier.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Counter for the software PWM */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Count;
+
+/** Duty cycle for the first software PWM channel */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty;
+
+/** Duty cycle for the second software PWM channel */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty;
+
+/** Duty cycle for the third software PWM channel */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty;
+
+
+/** Interrupt handler for managing the software PWM channels for the LEDs */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+
+	if (++SoftPWM_Count == 0b00011111)
+	  SoftPWM_Count = 0;
+
+	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty)
+	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED1;
+
+	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty)
+	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED2;
+
+	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty)
+	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED3;
+	  
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be
+ *  used like any regular character stream in the C APIs
+ */
+static FILE USBSerialStream;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	/* Create a regular blocking character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */
+	CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);
+	
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Read in next LED colour command from the host */
+		uint8_t ColorUpdate = fgetc(&USBSerialStream);
+		
+		/* Top 3 bits select the LED, bottom 5 control the brightness */
+		uint8_t Channel = (ColorUpdate & 0b11100000);
+		uint8_t Duty    = (ColorUpdate & 0b00011111);
+		
+		if (Channel & (1 << 5))
+		  SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty = Duty;
+		
+		if (Channel & (1 << 6))
+		  SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty = Duty;
+
+		if (Channel & (1 << 7))
+		  SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty = Duty;
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	
+	/* Timer Initialization */
+	OCR0A  = 100;
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+	TCCR0B = (1 << CS00);
+	TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h
index 243723ec8..3565e8bed 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h
@@ -1,60 +1,60 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for LEDNotifier.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _LEDNOTIFIER_H_
-#define _LEDNOTIFIER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for LEDNotifier.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LEDNOTIFIER_H_
+#define _LEDNOTIFIER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt
index 840d89068..ee0a2eb85 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt
@@ -1,62 +1,62 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage USB LED Notifier Project
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - AT90USB646
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  USB LED Notifier Project. This project is designed for the Busware BUI board, however it can run easily on any
- *  USB AVR. It is a generic RGB LED controller (via a three channel software PWM) which listens for commands from the
- *  host on a CDC virtual serial port. When new commands are received, it updates the board LEDs.
- *
- *  This can be controlled with any host application that can write to the virtual serial port, allowing it to become
- *  a visual notification system for any number of custom host applications, such as a new unread email notifier.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage USB LED Notifier Project
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - AT90USB646
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  USB LED Notifier Project. This project is designed for the Busware BUI board, however it can run easily on any
+ *  USB AVR. It is a generic RGB LED controller (via a three channel software PWM) which listens for commands from the
+ *  host on a CDC virtual serial port. When new commands are received, it updates the board LEDs.
+ *
+ *  This can be controlled with any host application that can write to the virtual serial port, allowing it to become
+ *  a visual notification system for any number of custom host applications, such as a new unread email notifier.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf
index a179053eb..cd9c3433a 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
-INSTDISK="LUFA CDC Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
+INSTDISK="LUFA CDC Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile b/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile
index 01331fb17..da9053aef 100644
--- a/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile
+++ b/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile
@@ -1,738 +1,738 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USER
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = LEDNotifier
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USER
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = LEDNotifier
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c b/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c
index ee6235859..c544ba635 100644
--- a/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,247 +1,247 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
- 
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID report descriptor. This is a HID class specific descriptor, which defines the structure of the
- *  reports sent and received by the HID device to and from the USB host. It indicates what data is sent,
- *  where in the report each element is located and exactly how the data should be interpreted and used.
- *
- *  See the HID class specification for more information on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
-{
-	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
-	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
-	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
-	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
-	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
-	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
-	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
-	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
-	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
-	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
-	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
-	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
-	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
-	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2042,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x01,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_KeyboardHID = 
-		{  
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-			
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
-		},
-		
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x01
-		},
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. */ 
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(32), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera and Denver Gingerich"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(20), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Magnetic Card Reader"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration:
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String:
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00:
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01:
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02:
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID:
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report:
-			Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID report descriptor. This is a HID class specific descriptor, which defines the structure of the
+ *  reports sent and received by the HID device to and from the USB host. It indicates what data is sent,
+ *  where in the report each element is located and exactly how the data should be interpreted and used.
+ *
+ *  See the HID class specification for more information on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
+	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
+	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
+	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
+	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
+	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
+	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
+	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
+	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2042,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0x00,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardHID = 
+		{  
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+		
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x01
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. */ 
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(32), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera and Denver Gingerich"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(20), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Magnetic Card Reader"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = (void*)&KeyboardReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h b/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h
index 88eaf33d0..02a14b400 100644
--- a/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,70 +1,70 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; /**< Configuration descriptor header structure */
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface; /**< Keyboard interface descriptor */
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_KeyboardHID; /**< Keyboard HID descriptor */
-	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint; /**< Keyboard key report endpoint descriptor */
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-					
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the keyboard key press reporting endpoint. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_EPNUM               1
-		
-		/** Size of the keyboard report endpoints, in bytes. */
-		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; /**< Configuration descriptor header structure */
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface; /**< Keyboard interface descriptor */
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_KeyboardHID; /**< Keyboard HID descriptor */
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint; /**< Keyboard key report endpoint descriptor */
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the keyboard key press reporting endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPNUM               1
+		
+		/** Size of the keyboard report endpoints, in bytes. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf
index 569be0b89..0b6bdf0b9 100644
--- a/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "Denver Gingerich's Stripe Snoop Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Denver Gingerich's Stripe Snoop Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c b/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c
index 128639413..8be527b4d 100644
--- a/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c
@@ -1,113 +1,113 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** Circular bit buffer library. This will allow for individual bits
- *  to be stored in packed form inside circular buffers, to reduce
- *  overall RAM usage.
- */
-
-#include "CircularBitBuffer.h"
-
-/** Function to initialize or reset a bit buffer, ready for data to be stored into it. */
-void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer)
-{
-	/* Reset the number of stored bits in the buffer */
-	Buffer->Elements        = 0;
-	
-	/* Reset the data in and out pointer structures in the buffer to the first buffer bit */
-	Buffer->In.CurrentByte  = Buffer->Data;
-	Buffer->In.ByteMask     = (1 << 0);
-	Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
-	Buffer->Out.ByteMask    = (1 << 0);
-}
-
-/** Function to store the given bit into the given bit buffer. */
-void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer, const bool Bit)
-{
-	/* If the bit to store is true, set the next bit in the buffer */
-	if (Bit)
-	  *Buffer->In.CurrentByte |= Buffer->In.ByteMask;
-	
-	/* Increment the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */
-	Buffer->Elements++;
-	
-	/* Check if the current buffer byte is full of stored bits */
-	if (Buffer->In.ByteMask == (1 << 7))
-	{
-		/* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */
-		if (Buffer->In.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1])
-		  Buffer->In.CurrentByte++;
-		else
-		  Buffer->In.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
-		  
-		/* Reset the storage bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */		
-		Buffer->In.ByteMask = (1 << 0);
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Shift the current storage bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */
-		Buffer->In.ByteMask <<= 1;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Function to retrieve the next bit stored in the given bit buffer. */
-bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer)
-{	
-	/* Retrieve the value of the next bit stored in the buffer */
-	bool Bit = ((*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte & Buffer->Out.ByteMask) != 0);
-
-	/* Clear the buffer bit */
-	*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte &= ~Buffer->Out.ByteMask;
-
-	/* Decrement the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */
-	Buffer->Elements--;
-	
-	/* Check if the current buffer byte is empty of stored bits */	
-	if (Buffer->Out.ByteMask == (1 << 7))
-	{
-		/* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */
-		if (Buffer->Out.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1])
-		  Buffer->Out.CurrentByte++;
-		else
-		  Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;		
-		
-		/* Reset the retrieval bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */		
-		Buffer->Out.ByteMask = (1 << 0);
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Shift the current retrieval bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */
-		Buffer->Out.ByteMask <<= 1;
-	}
-
-	/* Return the retrieved bit from the buffer */
-	return Bit;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** Circular bit buffer library. This will allow for individual bits
+ *  to be stored in packed form inside circular buffers, to reduce
+ *  overall RAM usage.
+ */
+
+#include "CircularBitBuffer.h"
+
+/** Function to initialize or reset a bit buffer, ready for data to be stored into it. */
+void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	/* Reset the number of stored bits in the buffer */
+	Buffer->Elements        = 0;
+	
+	/* Reset the data in and out pointer structures in the buffer to the first buffer bit */
+	Buffer->In.CurrentByte  = Buffer->Data;
+	Buffer->In.ByteMask     = (1 << 0);
+	Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
+	Buffer->Out.ByteMask    = (1 << 0);
+}
+
+/** Function to store the given bit into the given bit buffer. */
+void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer, const bool Bit)
+{
+	/* If the bit to store is true, set the next bit in the buffer */
+	if (Bit)
+	  *Buffer->In.CurrentByte |= Buffer->In.ByteMask;
+	
+	/* Increment the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */
+	Buffer->Elements++;
+	
+	/* Check if the current buffer byte is full of stored bits */
+	if (Buffer->In.ByteMask == (1 << 7))
+	{
+		/* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */
+		if (Buffer->In.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1])
+		  Buffer->In.CurrentByte++;
+		else
+		  Buffer->In.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
+		  
+		/* Reset the storage bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */		
+		Buffer->In.ByteMask = (1 << 0);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Shift the current storage bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */
+		Buffer->In.ByteMask <<= 1;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to retrieve the next bit stored in the given bit buffer. */
+bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+{	
+	/* Retrieve the value of the next bit stored in the buffer */
+	bool Bit = ((*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte & Buffer->Out.ByteMask) != 0);
+
+	/* Clear the buffer bit */
+	*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte &= ~Buffer->Out.ByteMask;
+
+	/* Decrement the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */
+	Buffer->Elements--;
+	
+	/* Check if the current buffer byte is empty of stored bits */	
+	if (Buffer->Out.ByteMask == (1 << 7))
+	{
+		/* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */
+		if (Buffer->Out.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1])
+		  Buffer->Out.CurrentByte++;
+		else
+		  Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;		
+		
+		/* Reset the retrieval bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */		
+		Buffer->Out.ByteMask = (1 << 0);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Shift the current retrieval bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */
+		Buffer->Out.ByteMask <<= 1;
+	}
+
+	/* Return the retrieved bit from the buffer */
+	return Bit;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h b/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h
index 05496f62d..dff4d2e5d 100644
--- a/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h
@@ -1,95 +1,95 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for CircularBitBuffer.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_
-#define _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
-		     defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-			/** Maximum number of bits which can be stored into a bit buffer. The memory usage is one eighth of this value per buffer. */
-			#define MAX_BITS 8192
-		#else
-			#define MAX_BITS 1024
-		#endif
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a pointer to a bit in a bit buffer. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t* CurrentByte; /**< Pointer to the current byte in the buffer */
-			uint8_t  ByteMask; /**< Mask of the current bit in the buffer */
-		} BitBufferPointer_t;
-
-		/** Type define for a circular packet bit buffer. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t            Data[MAX_BITS / 8]; /**< Buffer to hold the stored bits in packed form */
-			uint16_t           Elements; /**< Number of stored bits in the bit buffer */
-			
-			BitBufferPointer_t In; /**< Bit pointer to the next storage location in the buffer */
-			BitBufferPointer_t Out; /**< Bit pointer to the next retrieval location in the buffer */
-		} BitBuffer_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */	
-		/** Initializes or resets a given bit buffer, ready to store new bits.
-		 *  
-		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to initialize
-		 */
-		void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-		
-		/** Stores a bit into the next location inside a given bit buffer.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to store a bit into
-		 *  \param[in] Bit  Bit to store into the buffer
-		 */
-		void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer, const bool Bit) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-		
-		/** Retrieves a bit from the next location inside a given bit buffer.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to store a bit into
-		 *
-		 *  \return Next bit from the buffer
-		 */
-		bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for CircularBitBuffer.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_
+#define _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
+		     defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Maximum number of bits which can be stored into a bit buffer. The memory usage is one eighth of this value per buffer. */
+			#define MAX_BITS 8192
+		#else
+			#define MAX_BITS 1024
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a pointer to a bit in a bit buffer. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t* CurrentByte; /**< Pointer to the current byte in the buffer */
+			uint8_t  ByteMask; /**< Mask of the current bit in the buffer */
+		} BitBufferPointer_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a circular packet bit buffer. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t            Data[MAX_BITS / 8]; /**< Buffer to hold the stored bits in packed form */
+			uint16_t           Elements; /**< Number of stored bits in the bit buffer */
+			
+			BitBufferPointer_t In; /**< Bit pointer to the next storage location in the buffer */
+			BitBufferPointer_t Out; /**< Bit pointer to the next retrieval location in the buffer */
+		} BitBuffer_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */	
+		/** Initializes or resets a given bit buffer, ready to store new bits.
+		 *  
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to initialize
+		 */
+		void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		
+		/** Stores a bit into the next location inside a given bit buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to store a bit into
+		 *  \param[in] Bit  Bit to store into the buffer
+		 */
+		void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer, const bool Bit) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		
+		/** Retrieves a bit from the next location inside a given bit buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to store a bit into
+		 *
+		 *  \return Next bit from the buffer
+		 */
+		bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h b/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h
index 915144819..7afde48e8 100644
--- a/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h
@@ -1,100 +1,100 @@
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/*
-	NOTE: The user of this include file MUST define the following macros
-	prior to including the file:
-
-	MAG_T1_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 1 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC1)
-	MAG_T1_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 1 data wire (i.e.. PORTC2)
-	MAG_T2_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 2 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC3)
-	MAG_T2_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 2 data wire (i.e.. PORTC0)
-	MAG_T3_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 3 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC5)
-	MAG_T3_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 3 data wire (i.e.. PORTC6)
-	MAG_CLS_PIN        Pin connected to card loaded wire (i.e.. PORTC4)
-	MAG_PIN            PIN macro for the reader's port (i.e.. PINC)
-	MAG_DDR            DDR macro for the reader's port (i.e.. DDRC)
-	MAG_PORT           PORT macro for the reader's port (i.e.. PORTC)
-
-	The example macros listed above assume that the Track 2 data wire is
-	connected to pin 0 on port C, the Track 2 clock wire is connected to
-	pin 3 on port C (similarly for Tracks 1 and 3), and the card loaded
-	wire is connected to pin 4 on port C.
-
-	If the mag-stripe reader you are using only reads one or two tracks,
-	then set the clock and data pins for the tracks it doesn't read to a
-	pin that is unused.  For example, on the AT90USBKey, any of the pins on
-	port C that do not have wires attached will be unused since they are
-	not connected to any onboard devices (such as the joystick or
-	temperature sensor).
-
-	Connecting wires to pins on different ports (i.e.. a data wire to pin 0
-	on port C and a clock wire to pin 0 on port D) is currently
-	unsupported.  All pins specified above must be on the same port.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Driver header for a TTL Magnetic Card reader device (such as the Omron V3B-4K).
- */
-
-#ifndef _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_
-#define _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-
-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
-		/* Macros: */
-			/** Mask of the track data, clock and card detection pins. */
-			#define MAG_MASK    (MAG_T1_DATA | MAG_T1_CLOCK | \
-			                     MAG_T2_DATA | MAG_T2_CLOCK | \
-			                     MAG_T3_DATA | MAG_T3_CLOCK | \
-			                     MAG_CARDPRESENT)
-
-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
-		/* Inline Functions: */
-			/** Initializes the magnetic stripe card reader ports and pins so that the card reader
-			 *  device can be controlled and read by the card reader driver. This must be called before
-			 *  trying to read any of the card reader's status lines.
-			 */
-			static inline void Magstripe_Init(void)
-			{
-				MAG_DDR  &= ~MAG_MASK;
-				MAG_PORT |=  MAG_MASK;
-			};
-
-			/** Returns the status of all the magnetic card reader's outputs.
-			 *
-			 *  \return A mask indicating which card lines are high or low
-			 */
-			static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-			static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void)
-			{
-				/* Mag-stripe IOs are active low and must be inverted when read */
-				return ((uint8_t)~MAG_PIN & MAG_MASK);
-			}
-
-#endif
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+	NOTE: The user of this include file MUST define the following macros
+	prior to including the file:
+
+	MAG_T1_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 1 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC1)
+	MAG_T1_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 1 data wire (i.e.. PORTC2)
+	MAG_T2_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 2 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC3)
+	MAG_T2_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 2 data wire (i.e.. PORTC0)
+	MAG_T3_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 3 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC5)
+	MAG_T3_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 3 data wire (i.e.. PORTC6)
+	MAG_CLS_PIN        Pin connected to card loaded wire (i.e.. PORTC4)
+	MAG_PIN            PIN macro for the reader's port (i.e.. PINC)
+	MAG_DDR            DDR macro for the reader's port (i.e.. DDRC)
+	MAG_PORT           PORT macro for the reader's port (i.e.. PORTC)
+
+	The example macros listed above assume that the Track 2 data wire is
+	connected to pin 0 on port C, the Track 2 clock wire is connected to
+	pin 3 on port C (similarly for Tracks 1 and 3), and the card loaded
+	wire is connected to pin 4 on port C.
+
+	If the mag-stripe reader you are using only reads one or two tracks,
+	then set the clock and data pins for the tracks it doesn't read to a
+	pin that is unused.  For example, on the AT90USBKey, any of the pins on
+	port C that do not have wires attached will be unused since they are
+	not connected to any onboard devices (such as the joystick or
+	temperature sensor).
+
+	Connecting wires to pins on different ports (i.e.. a data wire to pin 0
+	on port C and a clock wire to pin 0 on port D) is currently
+	unsupported.  All pins specified above must be on the same port.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Driver header for a TTL Magnetic Card reader device (such as the Omron V3B-4K).
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_
+#define _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask of the track data, clock and card detection pins. */
+			#define MAG_MASK    (MAG_T1_DATA | MAG_T1_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_T2_DATA | MAG_T2_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_T3_DATA | MAG_T3_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the magnetic stripe card reader ports and pins so that the card reader
+			 *  device can be controlled and read by the card reader driver. This must be called before
+			 *  trying to read any of the card reader's status lines.
+			 */
+			static inline void Magstripe_Init(void)
+			{
+				MAG_DDR  &= ~MAG_MASK;
+				MAG_PORT |=  MAG_MASK;
+			};
+
+			/** Returns the status of all the magnetic card reader's outputs.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A mask indicating which card lines are high or low
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				/* Mag-stripe IOs are active low and must be inverted when read */
+				return ((uint8_t)~MAG_PIN & MAG_MASK);
+			}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c
index 39149b480..6dbceb6e5 100644
--- a/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c
@@ -1,216 +1,216 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
- 
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MagStripe reader program. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "Magstripe.h"
-
-/** Bit buffers to hold the read bits for each of the three magnetic card tracks before they are transmitted
- *  to the host as keyboard presses.
- */
-BitBuffer_t TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS];
-
-/** Pointer to the current track buffer being sent to the host. */
-BitBuffer_t* CurrentTrackBuffer = &TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS];
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber            = 0,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber     = KEYBOARD_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize       = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
-
-				.PrevReportINBuffer         = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize     = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	for (uint8_t Buffer = 0; Buffer < TOTAL_TRACKS; Buffer++)
-	  BitBuffer_Init(&TrackDataBuffers[Buffer]);
-	  
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		if (Magstripe_GetStatus() & MAG_CARDPRESENT)
-		  ReadMagstripeData();
-
-		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Magstripe_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Determines if a card has been inserted, and if so reads in each track's contents into the bit buffers
- *  until they are read out to the host as a series of keyboard presses.
- */
-void ReadMagstripeData(void)
-{
-	/* Arrays to hold the buffer pointers, clock and data bit masks for the separate card tracks */
-	const struct
-	{
-		uint8_t ClockMask;
-		uint8_t DataMask;	
-	} TrackInfo[] = {{MAG_T1_CLOCK, MAG_T1_DATA},
-	                 {MAG_T2_CLOCK, MAG_T2_DATA},
-	                 {MAG_T3_CLOCK, MAG_T3_DATA}};
-
-	uint8_t Magstripe_Prev = 0;
-	uint8_t Magstripe_LCL  = Magstripe_GetStatus();
-
-	while (Magstripe_LCL & MAG_CARDPRESENT)
-	{
-		for (uint8_t Track = 0; Track < TOTAL_TRACKS; Track++)
-		{
-			bool DataPinLevel      = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].DataMask) != 0);
-			bool ClockPinLevel     = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0);
-			bool ClockLevelChanged = (((Magstripe_LCL ^ Magstripe_Prev) & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0);
-		
-			/* Sample data on rising clock edges from the card reader */
-			if (ClockPinLevel && ClockLevelChanged)
-			  BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&TrackDataBuffers[Track], DataPinLevel);
-		}
-
-		Magstripe_Prev = Magstripe_LCL;
-		Magstripe_LCL  = Magstripe_GetStatus();
-	}
-	
-	CurrentTrackBuffer = &TrackDataBuffers[0];
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-	
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Packet event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
-{
-	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
- *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
-{
-	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
-
-	static bool IsKeyReleaseReport;
-
-	/* Key reports must be interleaved with key release reports, or repeated keys will be ignored */
-	IsKeyReleaseReport = !IsKeyReleaseReport;
-
-	if ((IsKeyReleaseReport) || (CurrentTrackBuffer == &TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS]))
-	{
-		/* No more data to send, or key release report between key presses */
-		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = KEY_NONE;
-	}
-	else if (!(CurrentTrackBuffer->Elements))
-	{
-		/* End of current track, send an enter press and change to the next track's buffer */
-		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = KEY_ENTER;
-		CurrentTrackBuffer++;
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Still data in the current track; convert next bit to a 1 or 0 keypress */
-		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = BitBuffer_GetNextBit(CurrentTrackBuffer) ? KEY_1 : KEY_0;
-	}
-	
-	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** HID Class driver callback function for the processing of a received HID report from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID interface structure for the HID interface being referenced
- *  \param[in] ReportID          Report ID of the received report from the host
- *  \param[in] ReportData        Pointer to the report buffer where the received report is stored
- *  \param[in] ReportSize        Size in bytes of the report received from the host
- */
-void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+ 
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MagStripe reader program. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "Magstripe.h"
+
+/** Bit buffers to hold the read bits for each of the three magnetic card tracks before they are transmitted
+ *  to the host as keyboard presses.
+ */
+BitBuffer_t TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS];
+
+/** Pointer to the current track buffer being sent to the host. */
+BitBuffer_t* CurrentTrackBuffer = &TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS];
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber            = 0,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber     = KEYBOARD_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize       = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+
+				.PrevReportINBuffer         = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize     = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	for (uint8_t Buffer = 0; Buffer < TOTAL_TRACKS; Buffer++)
+	  BitBuffer_Init(&TrackDataBuffers[Buffer]);
+	  
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Magstripe_GetStatus() & MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+		  ReadMagstripeData();
+
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Magstripe_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Determines if a card has been inserted, and if so reads in each track's contents into the bit buffers
+ *  until they are read out to the host as a series of keyboard presses.
+ */
+void ReadMagstripeData(void)
+{
+	/* Arrays to hold the buffer pointers, clock and data bit masks for the separate card tracks */
+	const struct
+	{
+		uint8_t ClockMask;
+		uint8_t DataMask;	
+	} TrackInfo[] = {{MAG_T1_CLOCK, MAG_T1_DATA},
+	                 {MAG_T2_CLOCK, MAG_T2_DATA},
+	                 {MAG_T3_CLOCK, MAG_T3_DATA}};
+
+	uint8_t Magstripe_Prev = 0;
+	uint8_t Magstripe_LCL  = Magstripe_GetStatus();
+
+	while (Magstripe_LCL & MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+	{
+		for (uint8_t Track = 0; Track < TOTAL_TRACKS; Track++)
+		{
+			bool DataPinLevel      = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].DataMask) != 0);
+			bool ClockPinLevel     = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0);
+			bool ClockLevelChanged = (((Magstripe_LCL ^ Magstripe_Prev) & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0);
+		
+			/* Sample data on rising clock edges from the card reader */
+			if (ClockPinLevel && ClockLevelChanged)
+			  BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&TrackDataBuffers[Track], DataPinLevel);
+		}
+
+		Magstripe_Prev = Magstripe_LCL;
+		Magstripe_LCL  = Magstripe_GetStatus();
+	}
+	
+	CurrentTrackBuffer = &TrackDataBuffers[0];
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+	
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Packet event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	static bool IsKeyReleaseReport;
+
+	/* Key reports must be interleaved with key release reports, or repeated keys will be ignored */
+	IsKeyReleaseReport = !IsKeyReleaseReport;
+
+	if ((IsKeyReleaseReport) || (CurrentTrackBuffer == &TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS]))
+	{
+		/* No more data to send, or key release report between key presses */
+		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = KEY_NONE;
+	}
+	else if (!(CurrentTrackBuffer->Elements))
+	{
+		/* End of current track, send an enter press and change to the next track's buffer */
+		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = KEY_ENTER;
+		CurrentTrackBuffer++;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Still data in the current track; convert next bit to a 1 or 0 keypress */
+		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = BitBuffer_GetNextBit(CurrentTrackBuffer) ? KEY_1 : KEY_0;
+	}
+	
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID Class driver callback function for the processing of a received HID report from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID interface structure for the HID interface being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID          Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportData        Pointer to the report buffer where the received report is stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize        Size in bytes of the report received from the host
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h
index 8a48e7c1a..08b867ec7 100644
--- a/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Magstripe.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MAGSTRIPE_H_
-#define _MAGSTRIPE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "Lib/MagstripeHW.h"
-		#include "Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Total number of tracks which can be read from the card, between 1 and 3. */
-		#define TOTAL_TRACKS       3
-	
-		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that no is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEY_NONE           0
-	
-		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "1" key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEY_1              30
-
-		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "0" key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEY_0              39
-
-		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the enter key is currently pressed. */
-		#define KEY_ENTER          40
-	
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void ReadMagstripeData(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
-		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
-		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-														  
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Magstripe.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MAGSTRIPE_H_
+#define _MAGSTRIPE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/MagstripeHW.h"
+		#include "Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Total number of tracks which can be read from the card, between 1 and 3. */
+		#define TOTAL_TRACKS       3
+	
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that no is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_NONE           0
+	
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "1" key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_1              30
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "0" key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_0              39
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the enter key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_ENTER          40
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void ReadMagstripeData(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
+		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+														  
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt
index 41c6b6e86..931111243 100644
--- a/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt
@@ -1,164 +1,164 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Denver Gingerich's USBSnoop Magnetic Card Reader Project
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- *  - AT90USB1287
- *  - AT90USB1286
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- * <table>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *   <td>Device</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *   <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr> 
- *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *   <td>Keyboard</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *   <td>USBIF HID Standard, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *  </tr>
- * </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Firmware for a USB AVR powered USB TTL magnetic stripe reader (using a card
- *  reader such as the Omron V3B-4K) by Denver Gingerich. This project is designed
- *  to be used with the open source Stripe Snoop project at <a>http://stripesnoop.sourceforge.net/</a>.
- * 
- *  See <a>http://ossguy.com/ss_usb/</a> for the USB reader hardware project website,
- *  including construction and support details.
- * 
- *  To use, connect your magnetic card reader device to the USB AVR as follows (pin and port mapping may be adjusted
- *  from the project makefile):
- * 
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Signal:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>AVR Port:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Track 1 Data</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 1</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Track 1 Clock</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 2</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Track 2 Data</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 3</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Track 2 Clock</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 0</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Track 3 Data</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Track 3 Clock</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Card Detect</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  This project is based on the LUFA Keyboard projectnstration application,
- *  written by Denver Gingerich.
- *
- *  This application uses a keyboard HID driver to communicate the data collected
- *  a TTL magnetic stripe reader to the connected computer. The raw bitstream
- *  obtained from the magnetic stripe reader is "typed" through the keyboard
- *  driver as 0's and 1's. After every card swipe, the project will send a return key.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAX_BITS</td>
- *    <td>CircularBitBuffer.h</td>
- *    <td>Gives the maximum number of bits per track which can be buffered by the device for later transmission to a host.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAG_T1_CLOCK</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 1 output.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAG_T1_DATA</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 1 output.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAG_T2_CLOCK</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 2 output.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAG_T2_DATA</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 2 output.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAG_T3_CLOCK</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 3 output.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAG_T3_DATA</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 3 output.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAG_CARDPRESENT</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's card detection output.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAG_PIN</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>PIN register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAG_PORT</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>PORT register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAG_DDR</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>DDR register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Denver Gingerich's USBSnoop Magnetic Card Reader Project
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  - AT90USB1287
+ *  - AT90USB1286
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr> 
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Keyboard</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF HID Standard, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a USB AVR powered USB TTL magnetic stripe reader (using a card
+ *  reader such as the Omron V3B-4K) by Denver Gingerich. This project is designed
+ *  to be used with the open source Stripe Snoop project at <a>http://stripesnoop.sourceforge.net/</a>.
+ * 
+ *  See <a>http://ossguy.com/ss_usb/</a> for the USB reader hardware project website,
+ *  including construction and support details.
+ * 
+ *  To use, connect your magnetic card reader device to the USB AVR as follows (pin and port mapping may be adjusted
+ *  from the project makefile):
+ * 
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Signal:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>AVR Port:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 1 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 1 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 2 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 2 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 0</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 3 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 3 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Card Detect</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  This project is based on the LUFA Keyboard projectnstration application,
+ *  written by Denver Gingerich.
+ *
+ *  This application uses a keyboard HID driver to communicate the data collected
+ *  a TTL magnetic stripe reader to the connected computer. The raw bitstream
+ *  obtained from the magnetic stripe reader is "typed" through the keyboard
+ *  driver as 0's and 1's. After every card swipe, the project will send a return key.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAX_BITS</td>
+ *    <td>CircularBitBuffer.h</td>
+ *    <td>Gives the maximum number of bits per track which can be buffered by the device for later transmission to a host.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T1_CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 1 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T1_DATA</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 1 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T2_CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 2 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T2_DATA</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 2 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T3_CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 3 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T3_DATA</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 3 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_CARDPRESENT</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's card detection output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_PIN</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>PIN register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_PORT</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>PORT register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_DDR</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>DDR register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c
index 88f7bacb7..7214c7e6a 100644
--- a/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c
+++ b/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -1,167 +1,167 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
- *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- *  with compatible devices.
- *
- *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
- *
- *  \return An error code from the GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
-	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
-	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
-	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
-	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
-	{
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
-			break;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
-			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
-		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
-			return DescriptorTooLarge;
-		default:
-			return ControlError;
-	}
-	
-	/* Get the HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-	                              DComp_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-	{
-		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
-	}
-
-	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
-	{
-		/* Get the next HID interface's data endpoint descriptor */
-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
-		                              DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
-		{
-			/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint - if we've reached the end of the HID descriptor
-			 * but only found the mandatory IN endpoint, it's safe to continue with the device enumeration */
-			if (FoundEndpoints == (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE))
-			  break;
-				
-			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
-			return NoEndpointFound;
-		}
-		
-		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
-		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
-		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
-		{
-			/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
-							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			/* Configure the HID data OUT pipe */
-			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
-							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-			
-			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);		
-		}
-	}
-			
-	/* Valid data found, return success */
-	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct HID Class value.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	/* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
-		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == HID_CLASS)
-		{
-			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-		}
-	}
-	
-	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
- *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
- *
- *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
-	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
-	{
-		/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
-	}
-	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
-	{
-		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
-	}
-
-	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+	uint8_t  FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+	
+	/* Get the HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DComp_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+		return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
+	{
+		/* Get the next HID interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint - if we've reached the end of the HID descriptor
+			 * but only found the mandatory IN endpoint, it's safe to continue with the device enumeration */
+			if (FoundEndpoints == (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE))
+			  break;
+				
+			/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+			return NoEndpointFound;
+		}
+		
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Configure the HID data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+							   EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+			
+			FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);		
+		}
+	}
+			
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct HID Class value.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	/* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == HID_CLASS)
+		{
+			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h
index 2d86c0b97..df21702e5 100644
--- a/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h
+++ b/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -1,66 +1,66 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "MissileLauncher.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
-		#define HID_CLASS                 0x03
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
-		enum GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
-		{
-			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
-			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
-			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
-			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
-			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
-		};	
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
-
-		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-		uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "MissileLauncher.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+		#define HID_CLASS                 0x03
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoEndpointFound                 = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+		};	
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/MissileLauncher/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/MissileLauncher/Doxygen.conf
index e601541f4..dc992c576 100644
--- a/Projects/MissileLauncher/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Projects/MissileLauncher/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "Dave Fletcher's Missile Launcher Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Dave Fletcher's Missile Launcher Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c b/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c
index cb0bd8570..dcc6e732f 100644
--- a/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c
+++ b/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c
@@ -1,337 +1,337 @@
-/*
-         USB Missile Launcher Demo
-	 Copyright (C) Dave Fletcher, 2010.
-	  fletch at fletchtronics dot net
-	  
-	 Based on research by Scott Weston at
-	  http://code.google.com/p/pymissile
- */
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dave Fletcher (fletch [at] fletchtronics [dot] net)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/*
- *  Missile Launcher host. This is a host driver for the popular USB-controller table top toy missile launchers,
- *  which can typically aim and fire small foam "missiles" from a spring-loaded turret. This project controls the
- *  launcher via a joystick and button to aim and fire missiles at targets without a PC.
- */
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the MissileLauncher application. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the application and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration as well
- *  as the sending of commands to the attached launcher toy.
- */
- 
-#include "MissileLauncher.h"
-
-/** Launcher first init command report data sequence */
-uint8_t CMD_INITA[8]     = {  85, 83, 66, 67,  0,  0,  4,  0  };
-
-/** Launcher second init command report data sequence */
-uint8_t CMD_INITB[8]     = {  85, 83, 66, 67,  0, 64,  2,  0  };
-
-/** Launcher command report data sequence to stop all movement */
-uint8_t CMD_STOP[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
-
-/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left */
-uint8_t CMD_LEFT[8]      = {   0,  1,  0,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
-
-/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right */
-uint8_t CMD_RIGHT[8]     = {   0,  0,  1,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
-
-/** Launcher command report data sequence to move up */
-uint8_t CMD_UP[8]        = {   0,  0,  0,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
-
-/** Launcher command report data sequence to move down */
-uint8_t CMD_DOWN[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
-
-/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left and up */
-uint8_t CMD_LEFTUP[8]    = {   0,  1,  0,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
-
-/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right and up */
-uint8_t CMD_RIGHTUP[8]   = {   0,  0,  1,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
-
-/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left and down */
-uint8_t CMD_LEFTDOWN[8]  = {   0,  1,  0,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
-
-/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right and down */
-uint8_t CMD_RIGHTDOWN[8] = {   0,  0,  1,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
-
-/** Launcher command report data sequence to fire a missile */
-uint8_t CMD_FIRE[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  1,  8,  8  };
-
-/** Last command sent to the launcher, to determine what new command (if any) must be sent */
-uint8_t* CmdState;
-
-/** Buffer to hold a command to send to the launcher */
-uint8_t  CmdBuffer[LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE];
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	CmdState = CMD_STOP;
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		Read_Joystick_Status();
-	
-		HID_Host_Task();
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-	Joystick_Init();
-	Buttons_Init();
-}
-
-/** Reads the joystick and button status, sending commands to the launcher as needed. */
-void Read_Joystick_Status(void)
-{
-	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
-	uint8_t Buttons_LCL   = Buttons_GetStatus();
-
-	if (Buttons_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
-	  Send_Command(CMD_FIRE);
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
-	  Send_Command(CMD_UP);
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
-	  Send_Command(CMD_DOWN);
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
-	  Send_Command(CMD_LEFT);
-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
-	  Send_Command(CMD_RIGHT);
-	else if (CmdState != CMD_STOP)
-	  Send_Command(CMD_STOP);
-}
-
-/** Lower level send routine, copies report into a larger buffer and sends.
- *
- *  \param[in] Report  Report data to send.
- *  \param[in] ReportSize  Report length in bytes.
- */
-void Send_Command_Report(uint8_t* const Report, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	memcpy(CmdBuffer, Report, 8);
-	WriteNextReport(CmdBuffer, ReportSize);
-}
-
-/** Sends one of the CMD_* command constants to the attached device.
- *
- *  \param[in] Command  One of the command constants.
- */
-void Send_Command(uint8_t* const Command)
-{
-	if ((CmdState == CMD_STOP && Command != CMD_STOP) ||
-		(CmdState != CMD_STOP && Command == CMD_STOP))
-	{
-		LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED4);
-
-		Send_Command_Report(CMD_INITA, 8);
-		Send_Command_Report(CMD_INITB, 8);
-		Send_Command_Report(Command, LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE);
-	}
-	
-	CmdState = Command;
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Reads in and discards the next report from the attached device. */
-void DiscardNextReport(void)
-{
-	/* Select and unfreeze HID data IN pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
-	Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
-	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
-	{
-		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-			
-		return;
-	}
-		
-	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
-	Pipe_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
-	Pipe_Freeze();
-}
-
-/** Writes a report to the attached device.
- *
- *  \param[in] ReportOUTData  Buffer containing the report to send to the device
- *  \param[in] ReportLength  Length of the report to send
- */
-void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* const ReportOUTData, const uint16_t ReportLength)
-{
-	/* Select and unfreeze HID data OUT pipe */
-	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
-	
-	/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint (some require OUT reports to be sent over the
-	 * control endpoint instead) - check to see if the OUT endpoint has been initialized */
-	if (Pipe_IsConfigured())
-	{
-		Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
-		/* Ensure pipe is ready to be written to before continuing */
-		if (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
-		{
-			/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
-			Pipe_Freeze();
-			
-			return;
-		}
-		
-		/* Write out HID report data */
-		Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportLength);				
-			
-		/* Clear the OUT endpoint, send last data packet */
-		Pipe_ClearOUT();
-
-		/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
-		Pipe_Freeze();
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* Class specific request to send a HID report to the device */
-		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
-			{
-				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
-				.bRequest      = REQ_SetReport,
-				.wValue        = 0x02,
-				.wIndex        = 0x01,
-				.wLength       = ReportLength,
-			};
-
-		/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
-
-		/* Send the request to the device */
-		USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ReportOUTData);
-	}
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
- *  HID reports from the device and to send reports if desired.
- */
-void HID_Host_Task(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
-	/* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
-			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
-			{
-				/* Indicate error status */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
-			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				/* Indicate error status */
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				
-				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			DiscardNextReport();
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+         USB Missile Launcher Demo
+	 Copyright (C) Dave Fletcher, 2010.
+	  fletch at fletchtronics dot net
+	  
+	 Based on research by Scott Weston at
+	  http://code.google.com/p/pymissile
+ */
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dave Fletcher (fletch [at] fletchtronics [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+ *  Missile Launcher host. This is a host driver for the popular USB-controller table top toy missile launchers,
+ *  which can typically aim and fire small foam "missiles" from a spring-loaded turret. This project controls the
+ *  launcher via a joystick and button to aim and fire missiles at targets without a PC.
+ */
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MissileLauncher application. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the application and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration as well
+ *  as the sending of commands to the attached launcher toy.
+ */
+ 
+#include "MissileLauncher.h"
+
+/** Launcher first init command report data sequence */
+uint8_t CMD_INITA[8]     = {  85, 83, 66, 67,  0,  0,  4,  0  };
+
+/** Launcher second init command report data sequence */
+uint8_t CMD_INITB[8]     = {  85, 83, 66, 67,  0, 64,  2,  0  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to stop all movement */
+uint8_t CMD_STOP[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left */
+uint8_t CMD_LEFT[8]      = {   0,  1,  0,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right */
+uint8_t CMD_RIGHT[8]     = {   0,  0,  1,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move up */
+uint8_t CMD_UP[8]        = {   0,  0,  0,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move down */
+uint8_t CMD_DOWN[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left and up */
+uint8_t CMD_LEFTUP[8]    = {   0,  1,  0,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right and up */
+uint8_t CMD_RIGHTUP[8]   = {   0,  0,  1,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left and down */
+uint8_t CMD_LEFTDOWN[8]  = {   0,  1,  0,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right and down */
+uint8_t CMD_RIGHTDOWN[8] = {   0,  0,  1,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to fire a missile */
+uint8_t CMD_FIRE[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  1,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Last command sent to the launcher, to determine what new command (if any) must be sent */
+uint8_t* CmdState;
+
+/** Buffer to hold a command to send to the launcher */
+uint8_t  CmdBuffer[LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE];
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	CmdState = CMD_STOP;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Read_Joystick_Status();
+	
+		HID_Host_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+}
+
+/** Reads the joystick and button status, sending commands to the launcher as needed. */
+void Read_Joystick_Status(void)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t Buttons_LCL   = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (Buttons_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_FIRE);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_UP);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_DOWN);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_LEFT);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_RIGHT);
+	else if (CmdState != CMD_STOP)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_STOP);
+}
+
+/** Lower level send routine, copies report into a larger buffer and sends.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Report  Report data to send.
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Report length in bytes.
+ */
+void Send_Command_Report(uint8_t* const Report, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	memcpy(CmdBuffer, Report, 8);
+	WriteNextReport(CmdBuffer, ReportSize);
+}
+
+/** Sends one of the CMD_* command constants to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Command  One of the command constants.
+ */
+void Send_Command(uint8_t* const Command)
+{
+	if ((CmdState == CMD_STOP && Command != CMD_STOP) ||
+		(CmdState != CMD_STOP && Command == CMD_STOP))
+	{
+		LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED4);
+
+		Send_Command_Report(CMD_INITA, 8);
+		Send_Command_Report(CMD_INITB, 8);
+		Send_Command_Report(Command, LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE);
+	}
+	
+	CmdState = Command;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and discards the next report from the attached device. */
+void DiscardNextReport(void)
+{
+	/* Select and unfreeze HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+			
+		return;
+	}
+		
+	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Writes a report to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ReportOUTData  Buffer containing the report to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] ReportLength  Length of the report to send
+ */
+void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* const ReportOUTData, const uint16_t ReportLength)
+{
+	/* Select and unfreeze HID data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	
+	/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint (some require OUT reports to be sent over the
+	 * control endpoint instead) - check to see if the OUT endpoint has been initialized */
+	if (Pipe_IsConfigured())
+	{
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Ensure pipe is ready to be written to before continuing */
+		if (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+		{
+			/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			
+			return;
+		}
+		
+		/* Write out HID report data */
+		Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportLength);				
+			
+		/* Clear the OUT endpoint, send last data packet */
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Class specific request to send a HID report to the device */
+		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = REQ_SetReport,
+				.wValue        = 0x02,
+				.wIndex        = 0x01,
+				.wLength       = ReportLength,
+			};
+
+		/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+		/* Send the request to the device */
+		USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ReportOUTData);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ *  HID reports from the device and to send reports if desired.
+ */
+void HID_Host_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+			if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+			{
+				/* Indicate error status */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+			if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				/* Indicate error status */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				
+				/* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			DiscardNextReport();
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h b/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h
index 089b0dc84..31bb9386f 100644
--- a/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h
+++ b/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h
@@ -1,99 +1,99 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for MissileLauncher.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _MISSILELAUNCHER_HOST_H_
-#define _MISSILELAUNCHER_HOST_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		
-		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Pipe number for the HID data IN pipe */
-		#define HID_DATA_IN_PIPE          1
-		
-		/** Pipe number for the HID data OUT pipe */
-		#define HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE         2
-
-		/** HID Class specific request to send a HID report to the device. */
-		#define REQ_SetReport             0x09
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-		/** Size of the Launcher report command buffer */
-		#define LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE 64
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void Read_Joystick_Status(void);
-        void Send_Command_Report(uint8_t* const Report, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-        void Send_Command(uint8_t* const Command);
-
-		void HID_Host_Task(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-		void DiscardNextReport(void);
-		void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* const ReportOUTData, const uint16_t ReportLength);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MissileLauncher.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MISSILELAUNCHER_HOST_H_
+#define _MISSILELAUNCHER_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe number for the HID data IN pipe */
+		#define HID_DATA_IN_PIPE          1
+		
+		/** Pipe number for the HID data OUT pipe */
+		#define HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE         2
+
+		/** HID Class specific request to send a HID report to the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetReport             0x09
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+		/** Size of the Launcher report command buffer */
+		#define LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE 64
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void Read_Joystick_Status(void);
+        void Send_Command_Report(uint8_t* const Report, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+        void Send_Command(uint8_t* const Command);
+
+		void HID_Host_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void DiscardNextReport(void);
+		void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* const ReportOUTData, const uint16_t ReportLength);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt b/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt
index 519410ef1..d93c21da1 100644
--- a/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt
+++ b/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt
@@ -1,59 +1,59 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage David Fletcher's Missile Launcher
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Host</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Missile Launcher host. This is a host driver for the popular USB-controller table top toy missile launchers,
- *  which can typically aim and fire small foam "missiles" from a spring-loaded turret. This project controls the
- *  launcher via a joystick and button to aim and fire missiles at targets without a PC.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>
- *     None
- *    </td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage David Fletcher's Missile Launcher
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Missile Launcher host. This is a host driver for the popular USB-controller table top toy missile launchers,
+ *  which can typically aim and fire small foam "missiles" from a spring-loaded turret. This project controls the
+ *  launcher via a joystick and button to aim and fire missiles at targets without a PC.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile b/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile
index 7b50e6903..c57e215c3 100644
--- a/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile
+++ b/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MissileLauncher
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MissileLauncher
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USB_HOST_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  ConfigDescriptor.c                                          \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c        \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c b/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c
index d4857a557..ca353d51f 100644
--- a/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,200 +1,200 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0xFF,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-
-	.VendorID               = 0x04B4,
-	.ProductID              = 0xFD11,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
-
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = 0x03,
-
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-RelayBoard_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(RelayBoard_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(500)
-		},
-
-	.RelayBoardInterface =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 0,
-
-			.Class                  = 0xFF,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(5), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"SISPM"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(10), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"RelayBoard"
-};
-
-/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a
- *  series of uppercase hexadecimal digits.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_SerialString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(5), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
-	.UnicodeString          = L"00001"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration:
-			Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(RelayBoard_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String:
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00:
-					Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01:
-					Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02:
-					Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x03:
-					Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_SerialString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_SerialString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0xFF,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x04B4,
+	.ProductID              = 0xFD11,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = 0x03,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+RelayBoard_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(RelayBoard_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(500)
+		},
+
+	.RelayBoardInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 0,
+
+			.Class                  = 0xFF,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(5), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"SISPM"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(10), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"RelayBoard"
+};
+
+/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a
+ *  series of uppercase hexadecimal digits.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_SerialString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(5), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"00001"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(RelayBoard_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x03:
+					Address = (void*)&RelayBoard_SerialString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_SerialString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h b/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h
index 6cd6feefc..7b217fbcf 100644
--- a/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,59 +1,59 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               RelayBoardInterface;
-		} RelayBoard_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               RelayBoardInterface;
+		} RelayBoard_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/RelayBoard/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/RelayBoard/Doxygen.conf
index aba5e61c1..afb8a17c4 100644
--- a/Projects/RelayBoard/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Projects/RelayBoard/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "OB's Dual-Relay outlet control using a Teensy2++"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "OB's Dual-Relay outlet control using a Teensy2++"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
 DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c b/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c
index 2fb7b696c..2f084f3e7 100644
--- a/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c
+++ b/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c
@@ -1,149 +1,149 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the RelayBoard program. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "RelayBoard.h"
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	  USB_USBTask();
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the project's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	USB_Init();
-
-	/* Initialize Relays */
-	DDRC  |=  ALL_RELAYS;
-	PORTC &= ~ALL_RELAYS;
-}
-
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Packet event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-    const uint8_t SerialNumber[5] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1 };
-	uint8_t ControlData[2]        = { 0, 0 };
-
-    switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
-	{
-		case 0x09:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
-
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(ControlData, sizeof(ControlData));
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-				switch (USB_ControlRequest.wValue)
-				{
-					case 0x303:
-						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY1; else PORTC |= RELAY1;
-						break;
-					case 0x306:
-						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY2; else PORTC |= RELAY2;
-						break;
-					case 0x309:
-						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY3; else PORTC |= RELAY3;
-						break;
-					case 0x30c:
-						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY4; else PORTC |= RELAY4;
-						break;
-				}
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case 0x01:
-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
-			{
-				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
-
-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
-				switch (USB_ControlRequest.wValue)
-				{
-					case 0x301:
-						Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(SerialNumber, sizeof(SerialNumber));
-						break;
-					case 0x303:
-						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY1) ? 2 : 3;
-						break;
-					case 0x306:
-						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY2) ? 2 : 3;
-						break;
-					case 0x309:
-						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY3) ? 2 : 3;
-						break;
-					case 0x30c:
-						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY4) ? 2 : 3;
-						break;
-				}
-				
-				if (ControlData[1])
-				  Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ControlData, sizeof(ControlData));
-
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RelayBoard program. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RelayBoard.h"
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	  USB_USBTask();
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the project's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Initialize Relays */
+	DDRC  |=  ALL_RELAYS;
+	PORTC &= ~ALL_RELAYS;
+}
+
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Packet event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+    const uint8_t SerialNumber[5] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1 };
+	uint8_t ControlData[2]        = { 0, 0 };
+
+    switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case 0x09:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(ControlData, sizeof(ControlData));
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				switch (USB_ControlRequest.wValue)
+				{
+					case 0x303:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY1; else PORTC |= RELAY1;
+						break;
+					case 0x306:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY2; else PORTC |= RELAY2;
+						break;
+					case 0x309:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY3; else PORTC |= RELAY3;
+						break;
+					case 0x30c:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY4; else PORTC |= RELAY4;
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case 0x01:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				switch (USB_ControlRequest.wValue)
+				{
+					case 0x301:
+						Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(SerialNumber, sizeof(SerialNumber));
+						break;
+					case 0x303:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY1) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+					case 0x306:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY2) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+					case 0x309:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY3) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+					case 0x30c:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY4) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+				}
+				
+				if (ControlData[1])
+				  Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ControlData, sizeof(ControlData));
+
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h b/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h
index f42d78cde..cfd75794d 100644
--- a/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h
+++ b/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h
@@ -1,64 +1,64 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for RelayBoard.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _RELAYBOARD_H_
-#define _RELAYBOARD_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define RELAY1      (1 << 7)
-		#define RELAY2      (1 << 6)
-		#define RELAY3      (1 << 5)
-		#define RELAY4      (1 << 4)
-		#define ALL_RELAYS  (RELAY1|RELAY2|RELAY3|RELAY4)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RelayBoard.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RELAYBOARD_H_
+#define _RELAYBOARD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define RELAY1      (1 << 7)
+		#define RELAY2      (1 << 6)
+		#define RELAY3      (1 << 5)
+		#define RELAY4      (1 << 4)
+		#define ALL_RELAYS  (RELAY1|RELAY2|RELAY3|RELAY4)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt b/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt
index ccb188350..bb484be7e 100644
--- a/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt
+++ b/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt
@@ -1,95 +1,95 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \mainpage OB's Quad-Relay outlet control using a Teensy2++
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- *  - AT90USB1286
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- * <table>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *   <td>Device</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *   <td>None</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *   <td>None</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *   <td>USB Standards</td>
- *  </tr>
- *  <tr>
- *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *   <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
- *  </tr>
- * </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description:
- *
- *  Firmware for a Teensy2++ AVR-based miniboard to control four relays, using the
- *  same protocol used by the commercially available Silver Shield PM power outlets
- *  ( http://sourceforge.net/projects/sispmctl ) sold for some time. Because this
- *  project mimics the original device, it can be controlled using the "sismpctl"
- *  package included in many Linux distributions - including router-orientated
- *  versions such as OpenWRT - to control the board's relays.
- *
- *  Relays 1 to 4 are respectively wired to pins C4, C5, C6 and C7 of the Teensy++ V2,
- *  which are the PORTC bits 4 to 7 of the AT90USB1286. The relays MUST be wired through
- *  a transistor, and a diode must be added on the relay's contact pins to protect
- *  the transistor from back EMF generated from the relay when the coil is turned off.
- *  The transistor base pin is wired to the Teensy data port through a 10K resistor. A
- *  LED may be also be added as a relay status indicator on each channel.
- *
- *  The Relay coil will be driven by the transistor, but the power will come from
- *  the 5V from the PC's USB port: Be careful in choosing the relay to avoid overloading
- *  the PC, as the maximum current used MUST remains under ~450mA @ 5V.
- *
- *  The author's tested relays are 2 Finder 32.21.7.005.2000, coil il 125ohm, which can
- *  handle 5A @ 250VAC. Be careful to use proper isolation if high voltages are manipulated.
- *  The author used Hotglue to isolate all parts of the PCB in contact with high voltage.
- *
- *  See <a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/</a> for the Teensy2++ website.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Signal:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>AVR Port:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Relay 1</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Relay 2</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Relay 3</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Relay 4</td>
- *    <td>PORTC, Pin 7</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>Teensy2++ Yellow Led</td>
- *    <td>PORTD, pin 6</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage OB's Quad-Relay outlet control using a Teensy2++
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  - AT90USB1286
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>None</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>None</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USB Standards</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a Teensy2++ AVR-based miniboard to control four relays, using the
+ *  same protocol used by the commercially available Silver Shield PM power outlets
+ *  ( http://sourceforge.net/projects/sispmctl ) sold for some time. Because this
+ *  project mimics the original device, it can be controlled using the "sismpctl"
+ *  package included in many Linux distributions - including router-orientated
+ *  versions such as OpenWRT - to control the board's relays.
+ *
+ *  Relays 1 to 4 are respectively wired to pins C4, C5, C6 and C7 of the Teensy++ V2,
+ *  which are the PORTC bits 4 to 7 of the AT90USB1286. The relays MUST be wired through
+ *  a transistor, and a diode must be added on the relay's contact pins to protect
+ *  the transistor from back EMF generated from the relay when the coil is turned off.
+ *  The transistor base pin is wired to the Teensy data port through a 10K resistor. A
+ *  LED may be also be added as a relay status indicator on each channel.
+ *
+ *  The Relay coil will be driven by the transistor, but the power will come from
+ *  the 5V from the PC's USB port: Be careful in choosing the relay to avoid overloading
+ *  the PC, as the maximum current used MUST remains under ~450mA @ 5V.
+ *
+ *  The author's tested relays are 2 Finder 32.21.7.005.2000, coil il 125ohm, which can
+ *  handle 5A @ 250VAC. Be careful to use proper isolation if high voltages are manipulated.
+ *  The author used Hotglue to isolate all parts of the PCB in contact with high voltage.
+ *
+ *  See <a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/</a> for the Teensy2++ website.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Signal:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>AVR Port:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 1</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 2</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 3</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 4</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 7</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Teensy2++ Yellow Led</td>
+ *    <td>PORTD, pin 6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile b/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile
index f30f42976..ae286c61e 100644
--- a/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile
+++ b/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile
@@ -1,736 +1,736 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1286
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = TEENSY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 16000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = RelayBoard
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC =
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB =
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB =
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion :
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config:
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1286
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = TEENSY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 16000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = RelayBoard
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Descriptors.c b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Descriptors.c
index 48778d8c5..8f409a63d 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,288 +1,288 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- *  more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] =
-{
-	0x06, 0x9c, 0xff,     /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined)                     */
-	0x09, 0x01,           /* Usage (Vendor Defined)                          */
-	0xa1, 0x01,           /* Collection (Vendor Defined)                     */
-	0x09, 0x02,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
-	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
-	0x15, 0x80,           /*   Logical Minimum (-128)                        */
-	0x25, 0x7F,           /*   Logical Maximum (127)                         */
-	0x81, 0x02,           /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
-	0x09, 0x03,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
-	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
-	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
-	0x15, 0x00,           /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
-	0x25, 0xff,           /*   Logical Maximum (255)                         */
-	0x91, 0x02,           /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
-	0xc0                  /* End Collection                                  */
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2063,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.MS_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x08,
-			.SubClass               = 0x06,
-			.Protocol               = 0x50,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.HID_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x03,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.HID_GenericHID = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
-									 
-			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
-			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
-			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
-			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
-			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(GenericReport)
-		},
-
-	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-										 
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | GENERIC_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
-		},		
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(10), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Datalogger"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_HID: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Report: 
-			Address = (void*)&GenericReport;
-			Size    = sizeof(GenericReport);
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] =
+{
+	0x06, 0x9c, 0xff,     /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined)                     */
+	0x09, 0x01,           /* Usage (Vendor Defined)                          */
+	0xa1, 0x01,           /* Collection (Vendor Defined)                     */
+	0x09, 0x02,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
+	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
+	0x15, 0x80,           /*   Logical Minimum (-128)                        */
+	0x25, 0x7F,           /*   Logical Maximum (127)                         */
+	0x81, 0x02,           /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
+	0x09, 0x03,           /*   Usage (Vendor Defined)                        */
+	0x75, 0x08,           /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x95, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE, /*   Report Count (GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)       */
+	0x15, 0x00,           /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0xff,           /*   Logical Maximum (255)                         */
+	0x91, 0x02,           /*   Output (Data, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0xc0                  /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2063,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.MS_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x08,
+			.SubClass               = 0x06,
+			.Protocol               = 0x50,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.HID_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x03,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = HID_NON_BOOT_PROTOCOL,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_GenericHID = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t), .Type = DTYPE_HID},
+									 
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(GenericReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | GENERIC_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},		
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(10), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Datalogger"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report: 
+			Address = (void*)&GenericReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(GenericReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Descriptors.h b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Descriptors.h
index 6c238ac42..a2ab5852e 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,60 +1,60 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-		
-		#include "TempDataLogger.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          3	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         4	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */
-		#define GENERIC_IN_EPNUM               1
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */
-		#define GENERIC_EPSIZE                 16
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reports (including report ID byte). */
-		#define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE            sizeof(Device_Report_t)
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */		
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
-			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_GenericHID;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+		
+		#include "TempDataLogger.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_IN_EPNUM               1
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_EPSIZE                 16
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reports (including report ID byte). */
+		#define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE            sizeof(Device_Report_t)
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */		
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_t                  HID_GenericHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Doxygen.conf
index 1430ad516..d570077b6 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "Temperature Datalogger Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ TempLogHostApp/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Temperature Datalogger Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ TempLogHostApp/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DS1307.c b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DS1307.c
index 0c1d98f00..8aa6ad0ef 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DS1307.c
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DS1307.c
@@ -1,124 +1,124 @@
-/*
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-#include "DS1307.h"
-
-void DS1307_SetDate(uint8_t Day, uint8_t Month, uint8_t Year)
-{
-#if defined(DUMMY_RTC)
-	return;
-#endif
-
-	DS1307_DateRegs_t CurrentRTCDate;		
-	CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.TenDay   = (Day / 10);
-	CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.Day      = (Day % 10);
-	CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.TenMonth = (Month / 10);
-	CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.Month    = (Month % 10);
-	CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.TenYear  = (Year / 10);
-	CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.Year     = (Year % 10);
-
-	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10))
-	{
-		TWI_SendByte(DS1307_DATEREG_START);
-		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.IntVal);
-		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.IntVal);
-		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.IntVal);
-		
-		TWI_StopTransmission();
-	}
-}
-
-void DS1307_SetTime(uint8_t Hour, uint8_t Minute, uint8_t Second)
-{
-#if defined(DUMMY_RTC)
-	return;
-#endif
-
-	DS1307_TimeRegs_t CurrentRTCTime;
-	CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.TenSec  = (Second / 10);
-	CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.Sec     = (Second % 10);
-	CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.CH      = false;
-	CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.TenMin  = (Minute / 10);
-	CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.Min     = (Minute % 10);
-	CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.TenHour = (Hour / 10);
-	CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.Hour    = (Hour % 10);
-	CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.TwelveHourMode = false;
-	
-	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10))
-	{
-		TWI_SendByte(DS1307_TIMEREG_START);
-		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.IntVal);
-		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.IntVal);
-		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.IntVal);
-		
-		TWI_StopTransmission();
-	}
-}
-		
-void DS1307_GetDate(uint8_t* Day, uint8_t* Month, uint8_t* Year)
-{
-#if defined(DUMMY_RTC)
-	*Day   = 1;
-	*Month = 1;
-	*Year  = 1;
-	return;
-#endif
-
-	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10))
-	{
-		TWI_SendByte(DS1307_DATEREG_START);
-		
-		TWI_StopTransmission();
-	}
-
-	DS1307_DateRegs_t CurrentRTCDate;
-
-	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_READ, 10))
-	{
-		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.IntVal, false);
-		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.IntVal, false);
-		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.IntVal, true);
-		
-		TWI_StopTransmission();
-	}
-
-	*Day    = (CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.TenDay   * 10) + CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.Day;
-	*Month  = (CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.TenMonth * 10) + CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.Month;
-	*Year   = (CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.TenYear  * 10) + CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.Year;
-}
-
-void DS1307_GetTime(uint8_t* Hour, uint8_t* Minute, uint8_t* Second)
-{
-#if defined(DUMMY_RTC)
-	*Hour   = 1;
-	*Minute = 1;
-	*Second = 1;
-	return;
-#endif
-
-	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10))
-	{
-		TWI_SendByte(DS1307_TIMEREG_START);
-		
-		TWI_StopTransmission();
-	}
-	
-	DS1307_TimeRegs_t CurrentRTCTime;
-
-	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_READ, 10))
-	{
-		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.IntVal, false);
-		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.IntVal, false);
-		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.IntVal, true);
-		
-		TWI_StopTransmission();
-	}
-
-	*Second  = (CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.TenSec  * 10) + CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.Sec;
-	*Minute  = (CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.TenMin  * 10) + CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.Min;
-	*Hour    = (CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.TenHour * 10) + CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.Hour;
-}
+/*
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+#include "DS1307.h"
+
+void DS1307_SetDate(uint8_t Day, uint8_t Month, uint8_t Year)
+{
+#if defined(DUMMY_RTC)
+	return;
+#endif
+
+	DS1307_DateRegs_t CurrentRTCDate;		
+	CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.TenDay   = (Day / 10);
+	CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.Day      = (Day % 10);
+	CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.TenMonth = (Month / 10);
+	CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.Month    = (Month % 10);
+	CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.TenYear  = (Year / 10);
+	CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.Year     = (Year % 10);
+
+	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10))
+	{
+		TWI_SendByte(DS1307_DATEREG_START);
+		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.IntVal);
+		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.IntVal);
+		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.IntVal);
+		
+		TWI_StopTransmission();
+	}
+}
+
+void DS1307_SetTime(uint8_t Hour, uint8_t Minute, uint8_t Second)
+{
+#if defined(DUMMY_RTC)
+	return;
+#endif
+
+	DS1307_TimeRegs_t CurrentRTCTime;
+	CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.TenSec  = (Second / 10);
+	CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.Sec     = (Second % 10);
+	CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.CH      = false;
+	CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.TenMin  = (Minute / 10);
+	CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.Min     = (Minute % 10);
+	CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.TenHour = (Hour / 10);
+	CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.Hour    = (Hour % 10);
+	CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.TwelveHourMode = false;
+	
+	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10))
+	{
+		TWI_SendByte(DS1307_TIMEREG_START);
+		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.IntVal);
+		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.IntVal);
+		TWI_SendByte(CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.IntVal);
+		
+		TWI_StopTransmission();
+	}
+}
+		
+void DS1307_GetDate(uint8_t* Day, uint8_t* Month, uint8_t* Year)
+{
+#if defined(DUMMY_RTC)
+	*Day   = 1;
+	*Month = 1;
+	*Year  = 1;
+	return;
+#endif
+
+	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10))
+	{
+		TWI_SendByte(DS1307_DATEREG_START);
+		
+		TWI_StopTransmission();
+	}
+
+	DS1307_DateRegs_t CurrentRTCDate;
+
+	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_READ, 10))
+	{
+		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.IntVal, false);
+		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.IntVal, false);
+		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.IntVal, true);
+		
+		TWI_StopTransmission();
+	}
+
+	*Day    = (CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.TenDay   * 10) + CurrentRTCDate.Byte1.Day;
+	*Month  = (CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.TenMonth * 10) + CurrentRTCDate.Byte2.Month;
+	*Year   = (CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.TenYear  * 10) + CurrentRTCDate.Byte3.Year;
+}
+
+void DS1307_GetTime(uint8_t* Hour, uint8_t* Minute, uint8_t* Second)
+{
+#if defined(DUMMY_RTC)
+	*Hour   = 1;
+	*Minute = 1;
+	*Second = 1;
+	return;
+#endif
+
+	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10))
+	{
+		TWI_SendByte(DS1307_TIMEREG_START);
+		
+		TWI_StopTransmission();
+	}
+	
+	DS1307_TimeRegs_t CurrentRTCTime;
+
+	if (TWI_StartTransmission(DS1307_ADDRESS_READ, 10))
+	{
+		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.IntVal, false);
+		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.IntVal, false);
+		TWI_ReceiveByte(&CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.IntVal, true);
+		
+		TWI_StopTransmission();
+	}
+
+	*Second  = (CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.TenSec  * 10) + CurrentRTCTime.Byte1.Sec;
+	*Minute  = (CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.TenMin  * 10) + CurrentRTCTime.Byte2.Min;
+	*Hour    = (CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.TenHour * 10) + CurrentRTCTime.Byte3.Hour;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DS1307.h b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DS1307.h
index 90b91e3e8..9b14ee467 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DS1307.h
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DS1307.h
@@ -1,109 +1,109 @@
-/*
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-#ifndef _DS1307_H_
-#define _DS1307_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h>
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			union
-			{
-				struct
-				{
-					unsigned int Sec            : 4;
-					unsigned int TenSec         : 3;
-					unsigned int CH             : 1;
-				};
-				
-				uint8_t IntVal;
-			} Byte1;
-			
-			union
-			{
-				struct
-				{
-					unsigned int Min            : 4;
-					unsigned int TenMin         : 3;
-					unsigned int _RESERVED      : 1;
-				};
-				
-				uint8_t IntVal;
-			} Byte2;
-			
-			union
-			{
-				struct
-				{
-					unsigned int Hour            : 4;
-					unsigned int TenHour         : 2;
-					unsigned int TwelveHourMode  : 1;
-					unsigned int _RESERVED       : 1;
-				};
-				
-				uint8_t IntVal;
-			} Byte3;
-		} DS1307_TimeRegs_t;
-
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			union
-			{
-				struct
-				{
-					unsigned int Day             : 4;
-					unsigned int TenDay          : 2;
-					unsigned int _RESERVED       : 2;
-				};
-			
-				uint8_t IntVal;
-			} Byte1;
-
-			union
-			{
-				struct
-				{
-					unsigned int Month           : 4;
-					unsigned int TenMonth        : 1;
-					unsigned int _RESERVED       : 3;
-				};
-				
-				uint8_t IntVal;
-			} Byte2;
-			
-			union
-			{
-				struct
-				{
-					unsigned int Year            : 4;
-					unsigned int TenYear         : 4;
-				};
-				
-				uint8_t IntVal;
-			} Byte3;
-		} DS1307_DateRegs_t;
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define DS1307_TIMEREG_START  0x00
-		#define DS1307_DATEREG_START  0x04
-	
-		#define DS1307_ADDRESS_READ   0b11010001
-		#define DS1307_ADDRESS_WRITE  0b11010000
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DS1307_SetDate(uint8_t Day, uint8_t Month, uint8_t Year);
-		void DS1307_SetTime(uint8_t Hour, uint8_t Minute, uint8_t Second);
-		
-		void DS1307_GetDate(uint8_t* Day, uint8_t* Month, uint8_t* Year);
-		void DS1307_GetTime(uint8_t* Hour, uint8_t* Minute, uint8_t* Second);
-
-#endif
+/*
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+#ifndef _DS1307_H_
+#define _DS1307_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned int Sec            : 4;
+					unsigned int TenSec         : 3;
+					unsigned int CH             : 1;
+				};
+				
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte1;
+			
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned int Min            : 4;
+					unsigned int TenMin         : 3;
+					unsigned int _RESERVED      : 1;
+				};
+				
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte2;
+			
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned int Hour            : 4;
+					unsigned int TenHour         : 2;
+					unsigned int TwelveHourMode  : 1;
+					unsigned int _RESERVED       : 1;
+				};
+				
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte3;
+		} DS1307_TimeRegs_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned int Day             : 4;
+					unsigned int TenDay          : 2;
+					unsigned int _RESERVED       : 2;
+				};
+			
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte1;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned int Month           : 4;
+					unsigned int TenMonth        : 1;
+					unsigned int _RESERVED       : 3;
+				};
+				
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte2;
+			
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned int Year            : 4;
+					unsigned int TenYear         : 4;
+				};
+				
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte3;
+		} DS1307_DateRegs_t;
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define DS1307_TIMEREG_START  0x00
+		#define DS1307_DATEREG_START  0x04
+	
+		#define DS1307_ADDRESS_READ   0b11010001
+		#define DS1307_ADDRESS_WRITE  0b11010000
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DS1307_SetDate(uint8_t Day, uint8_t Month, uint8_t Year);
+		void DS1307_SetTime(uint8_t Hour, uint8_t Minute, uint8_t Second);
+		
+		void DS1307_GetDate(uint8_t* Day, uint8_t* Month, uint8_t* Year);
+		void DS1307_GetTime(uint8_t* Hour, uint8_t* Minute, uint8_t* Second);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c
index da57e7f49..48c4fa7e6 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -1,525 +1,525 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
- *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
- *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
- *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
-#include "DataflashManager.h"
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
- *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-				
-				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
-			}
-
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;			
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-				
-				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-			
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-	
-	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
- *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
- *  dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
-			}
-			
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
- *  the files stored on the dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
-void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
-{
-	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	
-	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
- */
-bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnByte;
-
-	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-	#endif
-	
-	return true;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;			
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+			
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+	
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+			
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	
+	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+	
+	return true;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h
index 2b855dc8a..3c75c4c75 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		
-		#include "TempDataLogger.h"
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
-			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Defines: */
-		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
-
-		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
-		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
-		
-		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
-		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
-		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		
+		#include "TempDataLogger.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+		
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
index 295be3b9a..eb378c51e 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
@@ -1,110 +1,110 @@
-FatFs Module Source Files R0.07e                        (C)ChaN, 2010
-
-
-FILES
-
-  ffconf.h   Configuration file for FatFs module.
-  ff.h       Common include file for FatFs and application module.
-  ff.c       FatFs module.
-  diskio.h   Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module.
-  diskio.c   Skeleton of low level disk I/O module.
-  integer.h  Alternative type definitions for integer variables.
-  option     Optional external functions.
-
-  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs
-  module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific
-  storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written
-  to control your storage device.
-
-
-
-AGREEMENTS
-
- FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
- small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
- research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
-
-  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
-
- * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
- * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
- * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-
-
-
-REVISION HISTORY
-
-  Feb 26, 2006  R0.00  Prototype
-
-  Apr 29, 2006  R0.01  First release.
-
-  Jun 01, 2006  R0.02  Added FAT12.
-                       Removed unbuffered mode.
-                       Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
-
-  Jun 10, 2006  R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM.
-
-  Sep 22, 2006  R0.03  Added f_rename.
-                       Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
-
-  Dec 11, 2006  R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
-                       Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
-
-  Feb 04, 2007  R0.04  Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs)
-                       Changed some APIs for multiple drive system.
-                       Added f_mkfs. (FatFs)
-                       Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs)
-
-  Apr 01, 2007  R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs)
-                       Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs)
-                       Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek.
-                       Added minimization level 3.
-                       Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an
-                       existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs)
-
-  May 05, 2007  R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option.
-                       Added FSInfo support.
-                       Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs)
-                       Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
-                       Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object.
-
-  Aug 25, 2007  R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read, f_write.
-                       Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs)
-                       Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs)
-                       Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs)
-
-  Feb 03, 2008  R0.05a Added f_truncate().
-                       Added f_utime().
-                       Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
-                       Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
-                       Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
-
-  Apr 01, 2008  R0.06  Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs)
-                       Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
-                       Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster.
-
-  Apr 01, 2010, R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
-                       Added long file name support.
-                       Added multiple code page support.
-                       Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
-                       Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
-                       Added rewind option to f_readdir().
-                       Changed result code of critical errors.
-                       Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
-
-  Apr 14, 2010, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
-                       Added multiple sector size support.
-
-  Jun 21, 2010, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error.
-                       Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
-                       Added relative path feature.
-                       Added f_chdir().
-                       Added f_chdrive().
-                       Added proper case conversion for extended characters.
-
-  Nov 03,'2010 R0.07e  Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
-                       Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
-                       Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
-                       Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
-                       Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
+FatFs Module Source Files R0.07e                        (C)ChaN, 2010
+
+
+FILES
+
+  ffconf.h   Configuration file for FatFs module.
+  ff.h       Common include file for FatFs and application module.
+  ff.c       FatFs module.
+  diskio.h   Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module.
+  diskio.c   Skeleton of low level disk I/O module.
+  integer.h  Alternative type definitions for integer variables.
+  option     Optional external functions.
+
+  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs
+  module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific
+  storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written
+  to control your storage device.
+
+
+
+AGREEMENTS
+
+ FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
+ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
+ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
+
+  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
+
+ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+
+
+
+REVISION HISTORY
+
+  Feb 26, 2006  R0.00  Prototype
+
+  Apr 29, 2006  R0.01  First release.
+
+  Jun 01, 2006  R0.02  Added FAT12.
+                       Removed unbuffered mode.
+                       Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
+
+  Jun 10, 2006  R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM.
+
+  Sep 22, 2006  R0.03  Added f_rename.
+                       Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+
+  Dec 11, 2006  R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
+                       Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+
+  Feb 04, 2007  R0.04  Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs)
+                       Changed some APIs for multiple drive system.
+                       Added f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  Apr 01, 2007  R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek.
+                       Added minimization level 3.
+                       Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an
+                       existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  May 05, 2007  R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option.
+                       Added FSInfo support.
+                       Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+                       Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object.
+
+  Aug 25, 2007  R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read, f_write.
+                       Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs)
+
+  Feb 03, 2008  R0.05a Added f_truncate().
+                       Added f_utime().
+                       Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+                       Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+                       Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
+
+  Apr 01, 2008  R0.06  Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+                       Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster.
+
+  Apr 01, 2010, R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
+                       Added long file name support.
+                       Added multiple code page support.
+                       Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+                       Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+                       Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+                       Changed result code of critical errors.
+                       Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+
+  Apr 14, 2010, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+                       Added multiple sector size support.
+
+  Jun 21, 2010, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error.
+                       Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+                       Added relative path feature.
+                       Added f_chdir().
+                       Added f_chdrive().
+                       Added proper case conversion for extended characters.
+
+  Nov 03,'2010 R0.07e  Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+                       Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+                       Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+                       Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+                       Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
index 0c0083bac..d4f3897bb 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
@@ -1,99 +1,99 @@
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs     (C)ChaN, 2007        */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */
-/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include "diskio.h"
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Inidialize a Drive                                                    */
-
-DSTATUS disk_initialize (
-	BYTE drv				/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
-)
-{
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Return Disk Status                                                    */
-
-DSTATUS disk_status (
-	BYTE drv		/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
-)
-{
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read Sector(s)                                                        */
-
-DRESULT disk_read (
-	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
-	BYTE *buff,		/* Data buffer to store read data */
-	DWORD sector,	/* Sector address (LBA) */
-	BYTE count		/* Number of sectors to read (1..255) */
-)
-{
-	DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
-	return RES_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Write Sector(s)                                                       */
-
-#if _READONLY == 0
-DRESULT disk_write (
-	BYTE drv,			/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
-	const BYTE *buff,	/* Data to be written */
-	DWORD sector,		/* Sector address (LBA) */
-	BYTE count			/* Number of sectors to write (1..255) */
-)
-{
-	DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
-	return RES_OK;
-}
-#endif /* _READONLY */
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Miscellaneous Functions                                               */
-
-DRESULT disk_ioctl (
-	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
-	BYTE ctrl,		/* Control code */
-	void *buff		/* Buffer to send/receive control data */
-)
-{
-	if (ctrl == CTRL_SYNC)
-	  return RES_OK;
-	else
-	  return RES_PARERR;
-}
-
-
-DWORD get_fattime (void)
-{
-	uint8_t Day,  Month,  Year;
-	uint8_t Hour, Minute, Second;
-
-	DS1307_GetDate(&Day,  &Month,  &Year);
-	DS1307_GetTime(&Hour, &Minute, &Second);
-
-
-	return ((DWORD)(20 + Year) << 25) |
-	             ((DWORD)Month << 21) |
-	               ((DWORD)Day << 16) |
-	              ((DWORD)Hour << 11) |
-	             ((DWORD)Minute << 5) |
-	      (((DWORD)Second >> 1) << 0);
-}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs     (C)ChaN, 2007        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */
+/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "diskio.h"
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Inidialize a Drive                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (
+	BYTE drv				/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Return Disk Status                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_status (
+	BYTE drv		/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Sector(s)                                                        */
+
+DRESULT disk_read (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
+	BYTE *buff,		/* Data buffer to store read data */
+	DWORD sector,	/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count		/* Number of sectors to read (1..255) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write Sector(s)                                                       */
+
+#if _READONLY == 0
+DRESULT disk_write (
+	BYTE drv,			/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
+	const BYTE *buff,	/* Data to be written */
+	DWORD sector,		/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count			/* Number of sectors to write (1..255) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+#endif /* _READONLY */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Miscellaneous Functions                                               */
+
+DRESULT disk_ioctl (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
+	BYTE ctrl,		/* Control code */
+	void *buff		/* Buffer to send/receive control data */
+)
+{
+	if (ctrl == CTRL_SYNC)
+	  return RES_OK;
+	else
+	  return RES_PARERR;
+}
+
+
+DWORD get_fattime (void)
+{
+	uint8_t Day,  Month,  Year;
+	uint8_t Hour, Minute, Second;
+
+	DS1307_GetDate(&Day,  &Month,  &Year);
+	DS1307_GetTime(&Hour, &Minute, &Second);
+
+
+	return ((DWORD)(20 + Year) << 25) |
+	             ((DWORD)Month << 21) |
+	               ((DWORD)Day << 16) |
+	              ((DWORD)Hour << 11) |
+	             ((DWORD)Minute << 5) |
+	      (((DWORD)Second >> 1) << 0);
+}
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
index 4085501da..ad126712d 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
@@ -1,71 +1,71 @@
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-/  Low level disk interface modlue include file  R0.07   (C)ChaN, 2010
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _DISKIO
-
-#define _READONLY	0	/* 1: Read-only mode */
-#define _USE_IOCTL	1
-
-#include "integer.h"
-
-#include "../DataflashManager.h"
-
-
-/* Status of Disk Functions */
-typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
-
-/* Results of Disk Functions */
-typedef enum {
-	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Successful */
-	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: R/W Error */
-	RES_WRPRT,		/* 2: Write Protected */
-	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not Ready */
-	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid Parameter */
-} DRESULT;
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------*/
-/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
-
-BOOL assign_drives (int argc, char *argv[]);
-DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE);
-DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE);
-DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
-#if	_READONLY == 0
-DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
-#endif
-DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*);
-
-
-/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */
-
-#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
-#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
-#define STA_PROTECT		0x04	/* Write protected */
-
-
-/* Command code for disk_ioctrl() */
-
-/* Generic command */
-#define CTRL_SYNC			0	/* Mandatory for write functions */
-#define GET_SECTOR_COUNT	1	/* Mandatory for only f_mkfs() */
-#define GET_SECTOR_SIZE		2	/* Mandatory for multiple sector size cfg */
-#define GET_BLOCK_SIZE		3	/* Mandatory for only f_mkfs() */
-#define CTRL_POWER			4
-#define CTRL_LOCK			5
-#define CTRL_EJECT			6
-/* MMC/SDC command */
-#define MMC_GET_TYPE		10
-#define MMC_GET_CSD			11
-#define MMC_GET_CID			12
-#define MMC_GET_OCR			13
-#define MMC_GET_SDSTAT		14
-/* ATA/CF command */
-#define ATA_GET_REV			20
-#define ATA_GET_MODEL		21
-#define ATA_GET_SN			22
-
-
-#define _DISKIO
-#endif
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+/  Low level disk interface modlue include file  R0.07   (C)ChaN, 2010
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _DISKIO
+
+#define _READONLY	0	/* 1: Read-only mode */
+#define _USE_IOCTL	1
+
+#include "integer.h"
+
+#include "../DataflashManager.h"
+
+
+/* Status of Disk Functions */
+typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
+
+/* Results of Disk Functions */
+typedef enum {
+	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Successful */
+	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: R/W Error */
+	RES_WRPRT,		/* 2: Write Protected */
+	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not Ready */
+	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid Parameter */
+} DRESULT;
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------*/
+/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
+
+BOOL assign_drives (int argc, char *argv[]);
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE);
+DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE);
+DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+#if	_READONLY == 0
+DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+#endif
+DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*);
+
+
+/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */
+
+#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
+#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
+#define STA_PROTECT		0x04	/* Write protected */
+
+
+/* Command code for disk_ioctrl() */
+
+/* Generic command */
+#define CTRL_SYNC			0	/* Mandatory for write functions */
+#define GET_SECTOR_COUNT	1	/* Mandatory for only f_mkfs() */
+#define GET_SECTOR_SIZE		2	/* Mandatory for multiple sector size cfg */
+#define GET_BLOCK_SIZE		3	/* Mandatory for only f_mkfs() */
+#define CTRL_POWER			4
+#define CTRL_LOCK			5
+#define CTRL_EJECT			6
+/* MMC/SDC command */
+#define MMC_GET_TYPE		10
+#define MMC_GET_CSD			11
+#define MMC_GET_CID			12
+#define MMC_GET_OCR			13
+#define MMC_GET_SDSTAT		14
+/* ATA/CF command */
+#define ATA_GET_REV			20
+#define ATA_GET_MODEL		21
+#define ATA_GET_SN			22
+
+
+#define _DISKIO
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
index 6382fea1f..b30139055 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
@@ -1,3153 +1,3153 @@
-/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.07e                    (C)ChaN, 2010
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
-/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
-/ developments under license policy of following trems.
-/
-/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
-/
-/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
-/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-/   personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
-/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-/
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00  Prototype.
-/
-/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01  First stable version.
-/
-/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02  Added FAT12 support.
-/                   Removed unbuffered mode.
-/                   Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
-/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM).
-/
-/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03  Added f_rename().
-/                   Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
-/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
-/                   Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
-/
-/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04  Supported multiple drive system.
-/                   Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system.
-/                   Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount().
-/                   Added f_mkfs().
-/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive.
-/                   Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek().
-/                   Added minimization level 3.
-/                   Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs().
-/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG.
-/                   Added FSInfo support.
-/                   Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
-/                   Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object.
-/
-/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs().
-/                   Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo.
-/                   Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory.
-/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime().
-/                   Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
-/                   Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
-/                   Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close
-/                   without write.
-/
-/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06  Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
-/                   Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same
-/                   or following cluster.
-/
-/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
-/                   Added long file name support.
-/                   Added multiple code page support.
-/                   Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
-/                   Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
-/                   Added rewind option to f_readdir().
-/                   Changed result code of critical errors.
-/                   Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
-/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
-/                   Added multiple sector size support.
-/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error.
-/                   Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
-/                   Added relative path feature.
-/                   Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive().
-/                   Added proper case conversion to extended char.
-/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
-/                   Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
-/                   Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
-/                   Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
-/                   Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper
-/                   case on non-LFN cfg.
-/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include "ff.h"			/* FatFs configurations and declarations */
-#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Module Private Definitions
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#if _FATFS != 0x007E
-#error Wrong include file (ff.h).
-#endif
-
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-#if _USE_LFN == 1
-#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration.
-#endif
-#define	ENTER_FF(fs)		{ if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; }
-#define	LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	{ unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; }
-
-#else
-#define	ENTER_FF(fs)
-#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	return res
-
-#endif
-
-#define	ABORT(fs, res)		{ fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); }
-
-#ifndef NULL
-#define	NULL	0
-#endif
-
-/* Name status flags */
-#define NS			11		/* Offset of name status byte */
-#define NS_LOSS		0x01	/* Out of 8.3 format */
-#define NS_LFN		0x02	/* Force to create LFN entry */
-#define NS_LAST		0x04	/* Last segment */
-#define NS_BODY		0x08	/* Lower case flag (body) */
-#define NS_EXT		0x10	/* Lower case flag (ext) */
-#define NS_DOT		0x20	/* Dot entry */
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Private Work Area
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#if _DRIVES < 1 || _DRIVES > 9
-#error Number of drives must be 1-9.
-#endif
-static
-FATFS *FatFs[_DRIVES];	/* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */
-
-static
-WORD Fsid;				/* File system mount ID */
-
-#if _FS_RPATH
-static
-BYTE Drive;				/* Current drive */
-#endif
-
-
-#if _USE_LFN == 1	/* LFN with static LFN working buffer */
-static
-WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN + 1];
-#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]; WCHAR *lp = LfnBuf
-#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp; dj.lfn = lp
-
-#elif _USE_LFN > 1	/* LFN with dynamic LFN working buffer */
-#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN + 1], *lp = lbuf
-#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp; dj.lfn = lp
-
-#else				/* No LFN */
-#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]
-#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Module Private Functions
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* String functions                                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/* Copy memory to memory */
-static
-void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, int cnt) {
-	char *d = (char*)dst;
-	const char *s = (const char *)src;
-	while (cnt--) *d++ = *s++;
-}
-
-/* Fill memory */
-static
-void mem_set (void* dst, int val, int cnt) {
-	char *d = (char*)dst;
-	while (cnt--) *d++ = (char)val;
-}
-
-/* Compare memory to memory */
-static
-int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, int cnt) {
-	const char *d = (const char *)dst, *s = (const char *)src;
-	int r = 0;
-	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
-	return r;
-}
-
-/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
-static
-int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
-	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
-	return *str;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Request/Release grant to access the volume                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-
-static
-BOOL lock_fs (
-	FATFS *fs		/* File system object */
-)
-{
-	return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj);
-}
-
-
-static
-void unlock_fs (
-	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
-	FRESULT res		/* Result code to be returned */
-)
-{
-	if (res != FR_NOT_ENABLED &&
-		res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE &&
-		res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT &&
-		res != FR_TIMEOUT) {
-		ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj);
-	}
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change window offset                                                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT move_window (
-	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
-	DWORD sector	/* Sector number to make apperance in the fs->win[] */
-)					/* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */
-{
-	DWORD wsect;
-
-
-	wsect = fs->winsect;
-	if (wsect != sector) {	/* Changed current window */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-		if (fs->wflag) {	/* Write back dirty window if needed */
-			if (disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-				return FR_DISK_ERR;
-			fs->wflag = 0;
-			if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->sects_fat)) {	/* In FAT area */
-				BYTE nf;
-				for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) {	/* Refrect the change to all FAT copies */
-					wsect += fs->sects_fat;
-					disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, wsect, 1);
-				}
-			}
-		}
-#endif
-		if (sector) {
-			if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK)
-				return FR_DISK_ERR;
-			fs->winsect = sector;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Clean-up cached data                                                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-FRESULT sync (	/* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */
-	FATFS *fs	/* File system object */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-	res = move_window(fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		/* Update FSInfo sector if needed */
-		if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) {
-			fs->winsect = 0;
-			mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512);
-			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust);
-			disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1);
-			fs->fsi_flag = 0;
-		}
-		/* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */
-		if (disk_ioctl(fs->drive, CTRL_SYNC, (void*)NULL) != RES_OK)
-			res = FR_DISK_ERR;
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-DWORD get_fat (	/* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Interal error, Else:Cluster status */
-	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
-)
-{
-	UINT wc, bc;
-	DWORD fsect;
-
-
-	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust)	/* Range check */
-		return 1;
-
-	fsect = fs->fatbase;
-	switch (fs->fs_type) {
-	case FS_FAT12 :
-		bc = clst; bc += bc / 2;
-		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
-		wc = fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)]; bc++;
-		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
-		wc |= (WORD)fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)] << 8;
-		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
-
-	case FS_FAT16 :
-		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break;
-		return LD_WORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 2) & (SS(fs) - 1)]);
-
-	case FS_FAT32 :
-		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break;
-		return LD_DWORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 4) & (SS(fs) - 1)]) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
-	}
-
-	return 0xFFFFFFFF;	/* An error occured at the disk I/O layer */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry                              */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-
-FRESULT put_fat (
-	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst,	/* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->max_clust - 1 */
-	DWORD val	/* New value to mark the cluster */
-)
-{
-	UINT bc;
-	BYTE *p;
-	DWORD fsect;
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust) {	/* Range check */
-		res = FR_INT_ERR;
-
-	} else {
-		fsect = fs->fatbase;
-		switch (fs->fs_type) {
-		case FS_FAT12 :
-			bc = clst; bc += bc / 2;
-			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			p = &fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)];
-			*p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val;
-			bc++;
-			fs->wflag = 1;
-			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			p = &fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)];
-			*p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F));
-			break;
-
-		case FS_FAT16 :
-			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			ST_WORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 2) & (SS(fs) - 1)], (WORD)val);
-			break;
-
-		case FS_FAT32 :
-			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			ST_DWORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 4) & (SS(fs) - 1)], val);
-			break;
-
-		default :
-			res = FR_INT_ERR;
-		}
-		fs->wflag = 1;
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-FRESULT remove_chain (
-	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to remove a chain from */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD nxt;
-
-
-	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust) {	/* Check the range of cluster# */
-		res = FR_INT_ERR;
-
-	} else {
-		res = FR_OK;
-		while (clst < fs->max_clust) {			/* Not a last link? */
-			nxt = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Get cluster status */
-			if (nxt == 0) break;				/* Empty cluster? */
-			if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }	/* Internal error? */
-			if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }	/* Disk error? */
-			res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0);			/* Mark the cluster "empty" */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {	/* Update FSInfo */
-				fs->free_clust++;
-				fs->fsi_flag = 1;
-			}
-			clst = nxt;	/* Next cluster */
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-DWORD create_chain (	/* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */
-	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */
-)
-{
-	DWORD cs, ncl, scl, mcl;
-
-
-	mcl = fs->max_clust;
-	if (clst == 0) {		/* Create new chain */
-		scl = fs->last_clust;			/* Get suggested start point */
-		if (scl == 0 || scl >= mcl) scl = 1;
-	}
-	else {					/* Stretch existing chain */
-		cs = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Check the cluster status */
-		if (cs < 2) return 1;			/* It is an invalid cluster */
-		if (cs < mcl) return cs;		/* It is already followed by next cluster */
-		scl = clst;
-	}
-
-	ncl = scl;				/* Start cluster */
-	for (;;) {
-		ncl++;							/* Next cluster */
-		if (ncl >= mcl) {				/* Wrap around */
-			ncl = 2;
-			if (ncl > scl) return 0;	/* No free custer */
-		}
-		cs = get_fat(fs, ncl);			/* Get the cluster status */
-		if (cs == 0) break;				/* Found a free cluster */
-		if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occured */
-			return cs;
-		if (ncl == scl) return 0;		/* No free custer */
-	}
-
-	if (put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF))	/* Mark the new cluster "in use" */
-		return 0xFFFFFFFF;
-	if (clst != 0) {					/* Link it to the previous one if needed */
-		if (put_fat(fs, clst, ncl))
-			return 0xFFFFFFFF;
-	}
-
-	fs->last_clust = ncl;				/* Update FSINFO */
-	if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {
-		fs->free_clust--;
-		fs->fsi_flag = 1;
-	}
-
-	return ncl;		/* Return new cluster number */
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
-	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
-)
-{
-	clst -= 2;
-	if (clst >= (fs->max_clust - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
-	return clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Seek directory index                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_seek (
-	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
-	WORD idx		/* Directory index number */
-)
-{
-	DWORD clst;
-	WORD ic;
-
-
-	dj->index = idx;
-	clst = dj->sclust;
-	if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->max_clust)	/* Check start cluster range */
-		return FR_INT_ERR;
-	if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
-		clst = dj->fs->dirbase;
-
-	if (clst == 0) {	/* Static table */
-		dj->clust = clst;
-		if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)		/* Index is out of range */
-			return FR_INT_ERR;
-		dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / 32);	/* Sector# */
-	}
-	else {				/* Dynamic table */
-		ic = SS(dj->fs) / 32 * dj->fs->csize;	/* Entries per cluster */
-		while (idx >= ic) {	/* Follow cluster chain */
-			clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst);				/* Get next cluster */
-			if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Disk error */
-			if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->max_clust)	/* Reached to end of table or int error */
-				return FR_INT_ERR;
-			idx -= ic;
-		}
-		dj->clust = clst;
-		dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / 32);	/* Sector# */
-	}
-
-	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) * 32;	/* Ptr to the entry in the sector */
-
-	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Move directory index next                        */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not streach */
-	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
-	BOOL streach	/* FALSE: Do not streach table, TRUE: Streach table if needed */
-)
-{
-	DWORD clst;
-	WORD i;
-
-
-	i = dj->index + 1;
-	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
-		return FR_NO_FILE;
-
-	if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / 32))) {	/* Sector changed? */
-		dj->sect++;					/* Next sector */
-
-		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
-			if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
-				return FR_NO_FILE;
-		}
-		else {					/* Dynamic table */
-			if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
-				clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust);				/* Get next cluster */
-				if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-				if (clst >= dj->fs->max_clust) {				/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-					BYTE c;
-					if (!streach) return FR_NO_FILE;			/* When do not streach, report EOT */
-					clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust);		/* Streach cluster chain */
-					if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED;			/* No free cluster */
-					if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
-					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-					/* Clean-up streached table */
-					if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Flush active window */
-					mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs));			/* Clear window buffer */
-					dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);	/* Cluster start sector */
-					for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) {		/* Fill the new cluster with 0 */
-						dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-						if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-						dj->fs->winsect++;
-					}
-					dj->fs->winsect -= c;						/* Rewind window address */
-#else
-					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
-#endif
-				}
-				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
-				dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	dj->index = i;
-	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) * 32;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry   */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_LFN
-static
-const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30};	/* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */
-
-
-static
-BOOL cmp_lfn (			/* TRUE:Matched, FALSE:Not matched */
-	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */
-	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */
-)
-{
-	int i, s;
-	WCHAR wc, uc;
-
-
-	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0xBF) - 1) * 13;	/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
-	s = 0; wc = 1;
-	do {
-		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);	/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
-		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
-			wc = ff_wtoupper(uc);		/* Convert it to upper case */
-			if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++]))	/* Compare it */
-				return FALSE;			/* Not matched */
-		} else {
-			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return FALSE;	/* Check filler */
-		}
-	} while (++s < 13);				/* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */
-
-	if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x40) && wc && lfnbuf[i])	/* Last segment matched but different length */
-		return FALSE;
-
-	return TRUE;					/* The part of LFN matched */
-}
-
-
-
-static
-BOOL pick_lfn (			/* TRUE:Succeeded, FALSE:Buffer overflow */
-	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */
-	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-)
-{
-	int i, s;
-	WCHAR wc, uc;
-
-
-	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13;	/* Offset in the LFN buffer */
-
-	s = 0; wc = 1;
-	do {
-		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);			/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
-		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
-			if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return FALSE;	/* Buffer overflow? */
-			lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc;				/* Store it */
-		} else {
-			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return FALSE;		/* Check filler */
-		}
-	} while (++s < 13);						/* Read all character in the entry */
-
-	if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x40) {				/* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */
-		if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return FALSE;	/* Buffer overflow? */
-		lfnbuf[i] = 0;
-	}
-
-	return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-void fit_lfn (
-	const WCHAR *lfnbuf,	/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
-	BYTE *dir,				/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-	BYTE ord,				/* LFN order (1-20) */
-	BYTE sum				/* SFN sum */
-)
-{
-	int i, s;
-	WCHAR wc;
-
-
-	dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum;			/* Set check sum */
-	dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN;		/* Set attribute. LFN entry */
-	dir[LDIR_Type] = 0;
-	ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0);
-
-	i = (ord - 1) * 13;				/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
-	s = wc = 0;
-	do {
-		if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++];	/* Get an effective char */
-		ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc);	/* Put it */
-		if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF;		/* Padding chars following last char */
-	} while (++s < 13);
-	if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= 0x40;	/* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */
-	dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord;			/* Set the LFN order */
-}
-
-#endif
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create numbered name                                                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_LFN
-void gen_numname (
-	BYTE *dst,			/* Pointer to genartated SFN */
-	const BYTE *src,	/* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */
-	const WCHAR *lfn,	/* Pointer to LFN */
-	WORD num			/* Sequense number */
-)
-{
-	char ns[8];
-	int i, j;
-
-
-	mem_cpy(dst, src, 11);
-
-	if (num > 5) {	/* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequencial number */
-		do num = (num >> 1) + (num << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn);
-	}
-
-	/* itoa */
-	i = 7;
-	do {
-		ns[i--] = (num % 10) + '0';
-		num /= 10;
-	} while (num);
-	ns[i] = '~';
-
-	/* Append the number */
-	for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) {
-		if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) {
-			if (j == i - 1) break;
-			j++;
-		}
-	}
-	do {
-		dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' ';
-	} while (j < 8);
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Calculate sum of an SFN                                               */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_LFN
-static
-BYTE sum_sfn (
-	const BYTE *dir		/* Ptr to directory entry */
-)
-{
-	BYTE sum = 0;
-	int n = 11;
-
-	do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n);
-	return sum;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_find (
-	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE c, *dir;
-#if _USE_LFN
-	BYTE a, ord, sum;
-#endif
-
-	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);			/* Rewind directory object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
-
-#if _USE_LFN
-	ord = sum = 0xFF;
-#endif
-	do {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
-		c = dir[DIR_Name];
-		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
-		if (c == 0xE5 || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
-			ord = 0xFF;
-		} else {
-			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
-				if (dj->lfn) {
-					if (c & 0x40) {		/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
-						sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
-						c &= 0xBF; ord = c;	/* LFN start order */
-						dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
-					}
-					/* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */
-					ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
-				}
-			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
-				if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break;	/* LFN matched? */
-				ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;	/* Reset LFN sequence */
-				if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break;	/* SFN matched? */
-			}
-		}
-#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
-		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
-			break;
-#endif
-		res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);		/* Next entry */
-	} while (res == FR_OK);
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
-static
-FRESULT dir_read (
-	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE c, *dir;
-#if _USE_LFN
-	BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF;
-#endif
-
-	res = FR_NO_FILE;
-	while (dj->sect) {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
-		c = dir[DIR_Name];
-		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
-		if (c == 0xE5 || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
-			ord = 0xFF;
-		} else {
-			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
-				if (c & 0x40) {			/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
-					sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
-					c &= 0xBF; ord = c;
-					dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
-				}
-				/* Check LFN validity and capture it */
-				ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
-			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
-				if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir))	/* Is there a valid LFN? */
-					dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;		/* It has no LFN. */
-				break;
-			}
-		}
-#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
-		if (c != 0xE5 && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
-			break;
-#endif
-		res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);				/* Next entry */
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-	}
-
-	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Register an object to the directory                                   */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-FRESULT dir_register (	/* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */
-	DIR *dj				/* Target directory with object name to be created */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE c, *dir;
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-	WORD n, ne, is;
-	BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum;
-	WCHAR *lfn;
-
-
-	fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn;
-	mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12);
-
-	if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT)) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Cannot create dot entry */
-
-	if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) {			/* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */
-		fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = NULL;			/* Find only SFN */
-		for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) {
-			gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n);	/* Generate a numbered name */
-			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		}
-		if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED;		/* Abort if too many collisions */
-		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res;	/* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */
-		fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn;
-	}
-
-	if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) {			/* When LFN is to be created, reserve reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */
-		for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ;
-		ne = (ne + 25) / 13;
-	} else {						/* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */
-		ne = 1;
-	}
-
-	/* Reserve contiguous entries */
-	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
-	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
-	n = is = 0;
-	do {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		c = *dj->dir;				/* Check the entry status */
-		if (c == 0xE5 || c == 0) {	/* Is it a blank entry? */
-			if (n == 0) is = dj->index;	/* First index of the contigulus entry */
-			if (++n == ne) break;	/* A contiguous entry that requiered count is found */
-		} else {
-			n = 0;					/* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */
-		}
-		res = dir_next(dj, TRUE);	/* Next entry with table streach */
-	} while (res == FR_OK);
-
-	if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) {	/* Initialize LFN entry if needed */
-		res = dir_seek(dj, is);
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn);	/* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */
-			ne--;
-			do {					/* Store LFN entries in bottom first */
-				res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-				if (res != FR_OK) break;
-				fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum);
-				dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Next entry */
-			} while (res == FR_OK && --ne);
-		}
-	}
-
-#else	/* Non LFN configuration */
-	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		do {	/* Find a blank entry for the SFN */
-			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			c = *dj->dir;
-			if (c == 0xE5 || c == 0) break;	/* Is it a blank entry? */
-			res = dir_next(dj, TRUE);		/* Next entry with table streach */
-		} while (res == FR_OK);
-	}
-#endif
-
-	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Initialize the SFN entry */
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj->dir;
-			mem_set(dir, 0, 32);		/* Clean the entry */
-			mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11);	/* Put SFN */
-			dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT);	/* Put NT flag */
-			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Remove an object from the directory                                   */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE
-static
-FRESULT dir_remove (	/* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */
-	DIR *dj				/* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-	WORD i;
-
-	i = dj->index;	/* SFN index */
-	res = dir_seek(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx));	/* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		do {
-			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			*dj->dir = 0xE5;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
-			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-			if (dj->index >= i) break;	/* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */
-			res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Next entry */
-		} while (res == FR_OK);
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;
-	}
-
-#else			/* Non LFN configuration */
-	res = dir_seek(dj, dj->index);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			*dj->dir = 0xE5;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
-			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-		}
-	}
-#endif
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT create_name (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
-	const XCHAR **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
-)
-{
-#ifdef _EXCVT
-	static const BYTE cvt[] = _EXCVT;
-#endif
-
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-	BYTE b, cf;
-	WCHAR w, *lfn;
-	int i, ni, si, di;
-	const XCHAR *p;
-
-	/* Create LFN in Unicode */
-	si = di = 0;
-	p = *path;
-	lfn = dj->lfn;
-	for (;;) {
-		w = p[si++];					/* Get a character */
-		if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
-		if (di >= _MAX_LFN)				/* Reject too long name */
-			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-#if !_LFN_UNICODE
-		w &= 0xFF;
-		if (IsDBCS1(w)) {				/* If it is a DBC 1st byte */
-			b = p[si++];				/* Get 2nd byte */
-			if (!IsDBCS2(b))			/* Reject invalid code for DBC */
-				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			w = (w << 8) + b;
-		}
-		w = ff_convert(w, 1);			/* Convert OEM to Unicode */
-		if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid code */
-#endif
-		if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */
-			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		lfn[di++] = w;					/* Store the Unicode char */
-	}
-	*path = &p[si];						/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
-	cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	if ((di == 1 && lfn[di - 1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */
-		(di == 2 && lfn[di - 1] == '.' && lfn[di - 2] == '.')) {
-		lfn[di] = 0;
-		for (i = 0; i < 11; i++)
-			dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' ';
-		dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT;		/* This is a dot entry */
-		return FR_OK;
-	}
-#endif
-	while (di) {						/* Strip trailing spaces and dots */
-		w = lfn[di - 1];
-		if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break;
-		di--;
-	}
-	if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject null string */
-
-	lfn[di] = 0;						/* LFN is created */
-
-	/* Create SFN in directory form */
-	mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11);
-	for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ;	/* Strip leading spaces and dots */
-	if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;
-	while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--;	/* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */
-
-	b = i = 0; ni = 8;
-	for (;;) {
-		w = lfn[si++];					/* Get an LFN char */
-		if (!w) break;					/* Break on enf of the LFN */
-		if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) {	/* Remove spaces and dots */
-			cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue;
-		}
-
-		if (i >= ni || si == di) {		/* Extension or end of SFN */
-			if (ni == 11) {				/* Long extension */
-				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break;
-			}
-			if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Out of 8.3 format */
-			if (si > di) break;			/* No extension */
-			si = di; i = 8; ni = 11;	/* Enter extension section */
-			b <<= 2; continue;
-		}
-
-		if (w >= 0x80) {				/* Non ASCII char */
-#ifdef _EXCVT
-			w = ff_convert(w, 0);		/* Unicode -> OEM code */
-			if (w) w = cvt[w - 0x80];	/* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */
-#else
-			w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0);	/* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */
-#endif
-			cf |= NS_LFN;				/* Force create LFN entry */
-		}
-
-		if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) {		/* Double byte char */
-			if (i >= ni - 1) {
-				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue;
-			}
-			dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8);
-		} else {						/* Single byte char */
-			if (!w || chk_chr("+,;[=]", w)) {		/* Replace illegal chars for SFN */
-				w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Lossy conversion */
-			} else {
-				if (IsUpper(w)) {		/* ASCII large capital */
-					b |= 2;
-				} else {
-					if (IsLower(w)) {	/* ASCII small capital */
-						b |= 1; w -= 0x20;
-					}
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w;
-	}
-
-	if (dj->fn[0] == 0xE5) dj->fn[0] = 0x05;	/* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */
-
-	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
-	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03)	/* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */
-		cf |= NS_LFN;
-	if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) {						/* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */
-		if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
-		if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
-	}
-
-	dj->fn[NS] = cf;	/* SFN is created */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-
-
-#else	/* Non-LFN configuration */
-	BYTE b, c, d, *sfn;
-	int ni, si, i;
-	const char *p;
-
-	/* Create file name in directory form */
-	sfn = dj->fn;
-	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
-	si = i = b = 0; ni = 8;
-	p = *path;
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */
-		for (;;) {
-			c = p[si++];
-			if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break;
-			sfn[i++] = c;
-		}
-		if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		*path = &p[si];									/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
-		sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT;	/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
-		return FR_OK;
-	}
-#endif
-	for (;;) {
-		c = p[si++];
-		if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
-		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
-			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			i = 8; ni = 11;
-			b <<= 2; continue;
-		}
-		if (c >= 0x80) {				/* Extended char */
-#ifdef _EXCVT
-			c = cvt[c - 0x80];			/* Convert extend char (SBCS) */
-#else
-			b |= 3;						/* Eliminate NT flag if ext char is exist */
-#if !_DF1S	/* ASCII only cfg */
-			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-#endif
-#endif
-		}
-		if (IsDBCS1(c)) {				/* DBC 1st byte? */
-			d = p[si++];				/* Get 2nd byte */
-			if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1)	/* Reject invalid DBC */
-				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			sfn[i++] = c;
-			sfn[i++] = d;
-		} else {						/* Single byte code */
-			if (chk_chr(" \"*+,[=]|\x7F", c))	/* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */
-				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			if (IsUpper(c)) {			/* ASCII large capital? */
-				b |= 2;
-			} else {
-				if (IsLower(c)) {		/* ASCII small capital? */
-					b |= 1; c -= 0x20;
-				}
-			}
-			sfn[i++] = c;
-		}
-	}
-	*path = &p[si];						/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
-	c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
-
-	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject null string */
-	if (sfn[0] == 0xE5) sfn[0] = 0x05;	/* When first char collides with 0xE5, replace it with 0x05 */
-
-	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
-	if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
-	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
-
-	sfn[NS] = c;		/* Store NT flag, File name is created */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
-static
-void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
-	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to the file information to be filled */
-)
-{
-	int i;
-	BYTE c, nt, *dir;
-	char *p;
-
-
-	p = fno->fname;
-	if (dj->sect) {
-		dir = dj->dir;
-		nt = dir[DIR_NTres];		/* NT flag */
-		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy name body */
-			c = dir[i];
-			if (c == ' ') break;
-			if (c == 0x05) c = 0xE5;
-			if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
-			*p++ = c;
-		}
-		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy name extension */
-			*p++ = '.';
-			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
-				c = dir[i];
-				if (c == ' ') break;
-				if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
-				*p++ = c;
-			}
-		}
-		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
-		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
-		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
-		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
-	}
-	*p = 0;
-
-#if _USE_LFN
-	if (fno->lfname) {
-		XCHAR *tp = fno->lfname;
-		WCHAR w, *lfn;
-
-		i = 0;
-		if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */
-			lfn = dj->lfn;
-			while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) {			/* Get an LFN char */
-#if !_LFN_UNICODE
-				w = ff_convert(w, 0);			/* Unicode -> OEM conversion */
-				if (!w) { i = 0; break; }		/* Could not convert, no LFN */
-				if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100)		/* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC */
-					tp[i++] = (XCHAR)(w >> 8);
-#endif
-				if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; }	/* Buffer overrun, no LFN */
-				tp[i++] = (XCHAR)w;
-			}
-		}
-		tp[i] = 0;	/* Terminator */
-	}
-#endif
-}
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Follow a file path                                                    */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
-	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
-	const XCHAR *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE *dir, last;
-
-
-	while (!_USE_LFN && *path == ' ') path++;	/* Skip leading spaces */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */
-		path++;	dj->sclust = 0;		/* Strip it and start from the root dir */
-	} else {							/* No heading saparator */
-		dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir;	/* Start from the current dir */
-	}
-#else
-	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\')	/* Strip heading separator if exist */
-		path++;
-	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Start from the root dir */
-#endif
-
-	if ((UINT)*path < ' ') {			/* Null path means the start directory itself */
-		res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
-		dj->dir = NULL;
-
-	} else {							/* Follow path */
-		for (;;) {
-			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
-			last = *(dj->fn+NS) & NS_LAST;
-			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Could not find the object */
-				if (res == FR_NO_FILE && !last)
-					res = FR_NO_PATH;
-				break;
-			}
-			if (last) break;				/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
-			dir = dj->dir;					/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
-			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Cannot follow because it is a file */
-				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
-			}
-			dj->sclust = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Load boot record and check if it is an FAT boot record                */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:The FAT boot record, 1:Valid boot record but not an FAT, 2:Not a boot record, 3:Error */
-	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
-	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
-)
-{
-	if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load boot record */
-		return 3;
-	if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55)		/* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */
-		return 2;
-
-	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)	/* Check "FAT" string */
-		return 0;
-	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)
-		return 0;
-
-	return 1;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Make sure that the file system is valid                               */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-FRESULT chk_mounted (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occured */
-	const XCHAR **path,	/* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */
-	FATFS **rfs,		/* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */
-	BYTE chk_wp			/* !=0: Check media write protection for write access */
-)
-{
-	BYTE fmt, *tbl;
-	UINT vol;
-	DSTATUS stat;
-	DWORD bsect, fsize, tsect, mclst;
-	const XCHAR *p = *path;
-	FATFS *fs;
-
-	/* Get logical drive number from the path name */
-	vol = p[0] - '0';				/* Is there a drive number? */
-	if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') {	/* Found a drive number, get and strip it */
-		p += 2; *path = p;			/* Return pointer to the path name */
-	} else {						/* No drive number is given */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-		vol = Drive;				/* Use current drive */
-#else
-		vol = 0;					/* Use drive 0 */
-#endif
-	}
-
-	/* Check if the logical drive is valid or not */
-	if (vol >= _DRIVES) 			/* Is the drive number valid? */
-		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-	*rfs = fs = FatFs[vol];			/* Returen pointer to the corresponding file system object */
-	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;	/* Is the file system object available? */
-
-	ENTER_FF(fs);					/* Lock file system */
-
-	if (fs->fs_type) {				/* If the logical drive has been mounted */
-		stat = disk_status(fs->drive);
-		if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) {	/* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-			if (chk_wp && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check write protection if needed */
-				return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
-#endif
-			return FR_OK;			/* The file system object is valid */
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* The logical drive must be mounted. Following code attempts to mount the volume */
-
-	fs->fs_type = 0;					/* Clear the file system object */
-	fs->drive = (BYTE)LD2PD(vol);		/* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */
-	stat = disk_initialize(fs->drive);	/* Initialize low level disk I/O layer */
-	if (stat & STA_NOINIT)				/* Check if the drive is ready */
-		return FR_NOT_READY;
-#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size if needed */
-	if (disk_ioctl(fs->drive, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
-		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
-#endif
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	if (chk_wp && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check disk write protection if needed */
-		return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
-#endif
-	/* Search FAT partition on the drive */
-	fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0);		/* Check sector 0 as an SFD format */
-	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT boot record, it may be patitioned */
-		/* Check a partition listed in top of the partition table */
-		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + LD2PT(vol) * 16];	/* Partition table */
-		if (tbl[4]) {									/* Is the partition existing? */
-			bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]);					/* Partition offset in LBA */
-			fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect);					/* Check the partition */
-		}
-	}
-	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-	if (fmt || LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs))	/* No valid FAT patition is found */
-		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
-
-	/* Initialize the file system object */
-	fsize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
-	if (!fsize) fsize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32);
-	fs->sects_fat = fsize;
-	fs->n_fats = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs];					/* Number of FAT copies */
-	fsize *= fs->n_fats;								/* (Number of sectors in FAT area) */
-	fs->fatbase = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt); /* FAT start sector (lba) */
-	fs->csize = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus];				/* Number of sectors per cluster */
-	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt);	/* Nmuber of root directory entries */
-	tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16);				/* Number of sectors on the volume */
-	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32);
-	fs->max_clust = mclst = (tsect						/* Last cluster# + 1 (Number of clusters + 2) */
-		- LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt) - fsize - fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs)/32)
-		) / fs->csize + 2;
-
-	fmt = FS_FAT12;										/* Determine the FAT sub type */
-	if (mclst >= 0xFF7) fmt = FS_FAT16;					/* Number of clusters >= 0xFF5 */
-	if (mclst >= 0xFFF7) fmt = FS_FAT32;				/* Number of clusters >= 0xFFF5 */
-
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)
-		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus);	/* Root directory start cluster */
-	else
-		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fsize;				/* Root directory start sector (lba) */
-	fs->database = fs->fatbase + fsize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs)/32);	/* Data start sector (lba) */
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	/* Initialize allocation information */
-	fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF;
-	fs->wflag = 0;
-	/* Get fsinfo if needed */
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
-	 	fs->fsi_flag = 0;
-		fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo);
-		if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK &&
-			LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 &&
-			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 &&
-			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) {
-			fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free);
-			fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count);
-		}
-	}
-#endif
-	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
-	fs->winsect = 0;		/* Invalidate sector cache */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	fs->cdir = 0;			/* Current directory (root dir) */
-#endif
-	fs->id = ++Fsid;		/* File system mount ID */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not                          */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT validate (	/* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */
-	FATFS *fs,		/* Pointer to the file system object */
-	WORD id			/* Member id of the target object to be checked */
-)
-{
-	if (!fs || !fs->fs_type || fs->id != id)
-		return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
-
-	ENTER_FF(fs);		/* Lock file system */
-
-	if (disk_status(fs->drive) & STA_NOINIT)
-		return FR_NOT_READY;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Public Functions
-
---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Mount/Unmount a Locical Drive                                         */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_mount (
-	BYTE vol,		/* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */
-	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/
-)
-{
-	FATFS *rfs;
-
-
-	if (vol >= _DRIVES)				/* Check if the drive number is valid */
-		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-	rfs = FatFs[vol];				/* Get current fs object */
-
-	if (rfs) {
-#if _FS_REENTRANT					/* Discard sync object of the current volume */
-		if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
-#endif
-		rfs->fs_type = 0;			/* Clear old fs object */
-	}
-
-	if (fs) {
-		fs->fs_type = 0;			/* Clear new fs object */
-#if _FS_REENTRANT					/* Create sync object for the new volume */
-		if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
-#endif
-	}
-	FatFs[vol] = fs;				/* Register new fs object */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_open (
-	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the blank file object */
-	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file name */
-	BYTE mode			/* Access mode and file open mode flags */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	fp->fs = NULL;		/* Clear file object */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	mode &= (FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW);
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & (FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)));
-#else
-	mode &= FA_READ;
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
-#endif
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-	res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	/* Create or Open a file */
-	if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) {
-		DWORD ps, cl;
-
-		if (res != FR_OK) {			/* No file, create new */
-			if (res == FR_NO_FILE)	/* There is no file to open, create a new entry */
-				res = dir_register(&dj);
-			if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-			mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS;
-			dir = dj.dir;			/* Created entry (SFN entry) */
-		}
-		else {						/* Any object is already existing */
-			if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW)			/* Cannot create new */
-				LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_EXIST);
-			dir = dj.dir;
-			if (!dir || (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)))	/* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */
-				LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
-			if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS) {		/* Resize it to zero on over write mode */
-				cl = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);	/* Get start cluster */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, 0);	/* cluster = 0 */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, 0);
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0);	/* size = 0 */
-				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-				ps = dj.fs->winsect;			/* Remove the cluster chain */
-				if (cl) {
-					res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl);
-					if (res) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-					dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1;	/* Reuse the cluster hole */
-				}
-				res = move_window(dj.fs, ps);
-				if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-			}
-		}
-		if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS) {
-			dir[DIR_Attr] = 0;					/* Reset attribute */
-			ps = get_fattime();
-			ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, ps);		/* Created time */
-			dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-			mode |= FA__WRITTEN;				/* Set file changed flag */
-		}
-	}
-	/* Open an existing file */
-	else {
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-		if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);	/* Follow failed */
-		dir = dj.dir;
-		if (!dir || (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR))	/* It is a directory */
-			LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_NO_FILE);
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-		if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */
-			LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
-	}
-	fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect;		/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-	fp->dir_ptr = dj.dir;
-#endif
-	fp->flag = mode;					/* File access mode */
-	fp->org_clust =						/* File start cluster */
-		((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-	fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
-	fp->fptr = 0; fp->csect = 255;		/* File pointer */
-	fp->dsect = 0;
-	fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id;	/* Owner file system object of the file */
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_OK);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read File                                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_read (
-	FIL *fp, 		/* Pointer to the file object */
-	void *buff,		/* Pointer to data buffer */
-	UINT btr,		/* Number of bytes to read */
-	UINT *br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD clst, sect, remain;
-	UINT rcnt, cc;
-	BYTE *rbuff = buff;
-
-
-	*br = 0;	/* Initialize bytes read */
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check abort flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) 						/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
-	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
-
-	for ( ;  btr;									/* Repeat until all data transferred */
-		rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
-		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
-			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
-				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
-					fp->org_clust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
-				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
-				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector offset in the cluster */
-			}
-			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current sector */
-			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-			sect += fp->csect;
-			cc = btr / SS(fp->fs);					/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
-			if (cc) {								/* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */
-				if (fp->csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
-					cc = fp->fs->csize - fp->csect;
-				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
-#if _FS_TINY
-				if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc)		/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
-					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs));
-#else
-				if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc)	/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
-					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs));
-#endif
-#endif
-				fp->csect += (BYTE)cc;				/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-				rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;				/* Number of bytes transferred */
-				continue;
-			}
-#if !_FS_TINY
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write sector I/O buffer if needed */
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-			}
-#endif
-			if (fp->dsect != sect) {			/* Fill sector buffer with file data */
-				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-			}
-#endif
-			fp->dsect = sect;
-			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-		}
-		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
-		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
-#if _FS_TINY
-		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))			/* Move sector window */
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
-#else
-		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
-#endif
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
-}
-
-
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Write File                                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_write (
-	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the file object */
-	const void *buff,	/* Pointer to the data to be written */
-	UINT btw,			/* Number of bytes to write */
-	UINT *bw			/* Pointer to number of bytes written */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD clst, sect;
-	UINT wcnt, cc;
-	const BYTE *wbuff = buff;
-
-
-	*bw = 0;	/* Initialize bytes written */
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check abort flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))						/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-	if (fp->fsize + btw < fp->fsize) btw = 0;		/* File size cannot reach 4GB */
-
-	for ( ;  btw;									/* Repeat until all data transferred */
-		wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) {
-		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
-			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
-				if (fp->fptr == 0) {				/* On the top of the file? */
-					clst = fp->org_clust;			/* Follow from the origin */
-					if (clst == 0)					/* When there is no cluster chain, */
-						fp->org_clust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);	/* Create a new cluster chain */
-				} else {							/* Middle or end of the file */
-					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);			/* Follow or streach cluster chain */
-				}
-				if (clst == 0) break;				/* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */
-				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
-				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector address in the cluster */
-			}
-#if _FS_TINY
-			if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0))	/* Write back data buffer prior to following direct transfer */
-				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#else
-			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write back data buffer prior to following direct transfer */
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-			}
-#endif
-			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current sector */
-			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-			sect += fp->csect;
-			cc = btw / SS(fp->fs);					/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
-			if (cc) {								/* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */
-				if (fp->csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
-					cc = fp->fs->csize - fp->csect;
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#if _FS_TINY
-				if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) {	/* Refill sector cache if it gets dirty by the direct write */
-					mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
-					fp->fs->wflag = 0;
-				}
-#else
-				if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) {		/* Refill sector cache if it gets dirty by the direct write */
-					mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
-					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-				}
-#endif
-				fp->csect += (BYTE)cc;				/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-				wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;				/* Number of bytes transferred */
-				continue;
-			}
-#if _FS_TINY
-			if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) {			/* Avoid silly buffer filling at growing edge */
-				if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->fs->winsect = sect;
-			}
-#else
-			if (fp->dsect != sect) {				/* Fill sector buffer with file data */
-				if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize &&
-					disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
-						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-			}
-#endif
-			fp->dsect = sect;
-			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-		}
-		wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */
-		if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw;
-#if _FS_TINY
-		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))			/* Move sector window */
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-		mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
-		fp->fs->wflag = 1;
-#else
-		mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
-		fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY;
-#endif
-	}
-
-	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Update file size if needed */
-	fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;						/* Set file changed flag */
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Synchronize the File Object                                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_sync (
-	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD tim;
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) {	/* Has the file been written? */
-#if !_FS_TINY	/* Write-back dirty buffer */
-			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-			}
-#endif
-			/* Update the directory entry */
-			res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect);
-			if (res == FR_OK) {
-				dir = fp->dir_ptr;
-				dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC;					/* Set archive bit */
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize);		/* Update file size */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, fp->org_clust);	/* Update start cluster */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, fp->org_clust >> 16);
-				tim = get_fattime();			/* Updated time */
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN;
-				fp->fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = sync(fp->fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-}
-
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Close File                                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_close (
-	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object to be closed */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-#if _FS_READONLY
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);
-	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = NULL;
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-#else
-	res = f_sync(fp);
-	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = NULL;
-	return res;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change Current Drive/Directory                                        */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#if _FS_RPATH
-
-FRESULT f_chdrive (
-	BYTE drv		/* Drive number */
-)
-{
-	if (drv >= _DRIVES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-
-	Drive = drv;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-FRESULT f_chdir (
-	const XCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow completed */
-			dir = dj.dir;					/* Pointer to the entry */
-			if (!dir) {
-				dj.fs->cdir = 0;			/* No entry (root dir) */
-			} else {
-				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* Reached to the dir */
-					dj.fs->cdir = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-				else
-					res = FR_NO_PATH;		/* Could not reach the dir (it is a file) */
-			}
-		}
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_lseek (
-	FIL *fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
-	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr;
-
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (ofs > fp->fsize					/* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-		 && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)
-#endif
-		) ofs = fp->fsize;
-
-	ifptr = fp->fptr;
-	fp->fptr = nsect = 0; fp->csect = 255;
-	if (ofs > 0) {
-		bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs);	/* Cluster size (byte) */
-		if (ifptr > 0 &&
-			(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
-			fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
-			ofs -= fp->fptr;
-			clst = fp->curr_clust;
-		} else {									/* When seek to back cluster, */
-			clst = fp->org_clust;					/* start from the first cluster */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-			if (clst == 0) {						/* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */
-				clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);
-				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->org_clust = clst;
-			}
-#endif
-			fp->curr_clust = clst;
-		}
-		if (clst != 0) {
-			while (ofs > bcs) {						/* Cluster following loop */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-				if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) {			/* Check if in write mode or not */
-					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst);	/* Force streached if in write mode */
-					if (clst == 0) {				/* When disk gets full, clip file size */
-						ofs = bcs; break;
-					}
-				} else
-#endif
-					clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->max_clust) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				fp->curr_clust = clst;
-				fp->fptr += bcs;
-				ofs -= bcs;
-			}
-			fp->fptr += ofs;
-			fp->csect = (BYTE)(ofs / SS(fp->fs));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
-			if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) {
-				nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst);	/* Current sector */
-				if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				nsect += fp->csect;
-				fp->csect++;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) {
-#if !_FS_TINY
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-		if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write-back dirty buffer if needed */
-			if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-			fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-		}
-#endif
-		if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#endif
-		fp->dsect = nsect;
-	}
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) {			/* Set changed flag if the file size is extended */
-		fp->fsize = fp->fptr;
-		fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
-	}
-#endif
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create a Directroy Object                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_opendir (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
-	const XCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF((*dj), sfn, lfn);
-		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
-			dir = dj->dir;
-			if (dir) {							/* It is not the root dir */
-				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
-					dj->sclust = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
-					res = FR_NO_PATH;
-				}
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {
-				dj->id = dj->fs->id;
-				res = dir_seek(dj, 0);			/* Rewind dir */
-			}
-		}
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read Directory Entry in Sequense                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_readdir (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
-	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-
-
-	res = validate(dj->fs, dj->id);			/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF((*dj), sfn, lfn);
-		if (!fno) {
-			res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
-		} else {
-			res = dir_read(dj);
-			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
-				dj->sect = 0;
-				res = FR_OK;
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
-				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
-				res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Increment index for next */
-				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
-					dj->sect = 0;
-					res = FR_OK;
-				}
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get File Status                                                       */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_stat (
-	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
-	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {				/* Follwo completed */
-			if (dj.dir)	/* Found an object */
-				get_fileinfo(&dj, fno);
-			else		/* It is root dir */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get Number of Free Clusters                                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_getfree (
-	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */
-	DWORD *nclst,		/* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */
-	FATFS **fatfs		/* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD n, clst, sect, stat;
-	UINT i;
-	BYTE fat, *p;
-
-
-	/* Get drive number */
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0);
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, res);
-
-	/* If number of free cluster is valid, return it without cluster scan. */
-	if ((*fatfs)->free_clust <= (*fatfs)->max_clust - 2) {
-		*nclst = (*fatfs)->free_clust;
-		LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_OK);
-	}
-
-	/* Get number of free clusters */
-	fat = (*fatfs)->fs_type;
-	n = 0;
-	if (fat == FS_FAT12) {
-		clst = 2;
-		do {
-			stat = get_fat(*fatfs, clst);
-			if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-			if (stat == 1) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_INT_ERR);
-			if (stat == 0) n++;
-		} while (++clst < (*fatfs)->max_clust);
-	} else {
-		clst = (*fatfs)->max_clust;
-		sect = (*fatfs)->fatbase;
-		i = 0; p = 0;
-		do {
-			if (!i) {
-				res = move_window(*fatfs, sect++);
-				if (res != FR_OK)
-					LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, res);
-				p = (*fatfs)->win;
-				i = SS(*fatfs);
-			}
-			if (fat == FS_FAT16) {
-				if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++;
-				p += 2; i -= 2;
-			} else {
-				if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++;
-				p += 4; i -= 4;
-			}
-		} while (--clst);
-	}
-	(*fatfs)->free_clust = n;
-	if (fat == FS_FAT32) (*fatfs)->fsi_flag = 1;
-	*nclst = n;
-
-	LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_OK);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Truncate File                                                         */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_truncate (
-	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD ncl;
-
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))			/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-
-	if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) {
-		fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Set file size to current R/W point */
-		fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
-		if (fp->fptr == 0) {	/* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */
-			res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->org_clust);
-			fp->org_clust = 0;
-		} else {				/* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */
-			ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
-			res = FR_OK;
-			if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
-			if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
-			if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->max_clust) {
-				res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust, 0x0FFFFFFF);
-				if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR;
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Delete a File or Directory                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_unlink (
-	const XCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the file or directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj, sdj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-	DWORD dclst;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-
-	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-	res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
-	if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-		res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); /* Follow failed */
-
-	dir = dj.dir;
-	if (!dir)								/* Is it the root directory? */
-		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_INVALID_NAME);
-	if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)				/* Is it a R/O object? */
-		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
-	dclst = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-
-	if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {			/* It is a sub-directory */
-		if (dclst < 2) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-		mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof(DIR));	/* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */
-		sdj.sclust = dclst;
-		res = dir_seek(&sdj, 2);
-		if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-		res = dir_read(&sdj);
-		if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_DENIED;	/* Not empty sub-dir */
-		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-	}
-
-	res = dir_remove(&dj);					/* Remove directory entry */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		if (dclst)
-			res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);	/* Remove the cluster chain */
-		if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs);
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create a Directory                                                    */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_mkdir (
-	const XCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir, n;
-	DWORD dsect, dclst, pclst, tim;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-
-	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-	res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
-	if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* Any file or directory is already existing */
-	if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-		res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-	if (res != FR_NO_FILE)					/* Any error occured */
-		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-
-	dclst = create_chain(dj.fs, 0);			/* Allocate a new cluster for new directory table */
-	res = FR_OK;
-	if (dclst == 0) res = FR_DENIED;
-	if (dclst == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
-	if (dclst == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
-	if (res == FR_OK)
-		res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-	dsect = clust2sect(dj.fs, dclst);
-
-	dir = dj.fs->win;						/* Initialize the new directory table */
-	mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
-	mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3);		/* Create "." entry */
-	dir[DIR_Name] = '.';
-	dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;
-	tim = get_fattime();
-	ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
-	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dclst);
-	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dclst >> 16);
-	mem_cpy(dir+32, dir, 32); 			/* Create ".." entry */
-	dir[33] = '.';
-	pclst = dj.sclust;
-	if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pclst == dj.fs->dirbase)
-		pclst = 0;
-	ST_WORD(dir+32+DIR_FstClusLO, pclst);
-	ST_WORD(dir+32+DIR_FstClusHI, pclst >> 16);
-	for (n = 0; n < dj.fs->csize; n++) {	/* Write dot entries and clear left sectors */
-		dj.fs->winsect = dsect++;
-		dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-		res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
-		if (res) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-		mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
-	}
-
-	res = dir_register(&dj);
-	if (res != FR_OK) {
-		remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);
-	} else {
-		dir = dj.dir;
-		dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;					/* Attribute */
-		ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);			/* Crated time */
-		ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dclst);		/* Table start cluster */
-		ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dclst >> 16);
-		dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-		res = sync(dj.fs);
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change File Attribute                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_chmod (
-	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
-	BYTE value,			/* Attribute bits */
-	BYTE mask			/* Attribute mask to change */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj.dir;
-			if (!dir) {						/* Is it a root directory? */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			} else {						/* File or sub directory */
-				mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC;	/* Valid attribute mask */
-				dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask);	/* Apply attribute change */
-				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = sync(dj.fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change Timestamp                                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_utime (
-	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file/directory name */
-	const FILINFO *fno	/* Pointer to the timestamp to be set */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj.dir;
-			if (!dir) {				/* Root directory */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			} else {				/* File or sub-directory */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime);
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate);
-				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = sync(dj.fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Rename File/Directory                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_rename (
-	const XCHAR *path_old,	/* Pointer to the old name */
-	const XCHAR *path_new	/* Pointer to the new name */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj_old, dj_new;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE buf[21], *dir;
-	DWORD dw;
-
-
-	INITBUF(dj_old, sfn, lfn);
-	res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &dj_old.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		dj_new.fs = dj_old.fs;
-		res = follow_path(&dj_old, path_old);	/* Check old object */
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj_old.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-	}
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, res);	/* The old object is not found */
-
-	if (!dj_old.dir) LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, FR_NO_FILE);	/* Is root dir? */
-	mem_cpy(buf, dj_old.dir+DIR_Attr, 21);		/* Save the object information */
-
-	mem_cpy(&dj_new, &dj_old, sizeof(DIR));
-	res = follow_path(&dj_new, path_new);		/* Check new object */
-	if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;			/* The new object name is already existing */
-	if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { 					/* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */
-		res = dir_register(&dj_new);			/* Register the new object */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj_new.dir;					/* Copy object information into new entry */
-			mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19);
-			dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC;
-			dj_old.fs->wflag = 1;
-			if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {		/* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */
-				dw = clust2sect(dj_new.fs, (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO));
-				if (!dw) {
-					res = FR_INT_ERR;
-				} else {
-					res = move_window(dj_new.fs, dw);
-					dir = dj_new.fs->win+32;
-					if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') {
-						dw = (dj_new.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && dj_new.sclust == dj_new.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : dj_new.sclust;
-						ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dw);
-						ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dw >> 16);
-						dj_new.fs->wflag = 1;
-					}
-				}
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {
-				res = dir_remove(&dj_old);			/* Remove old entry */
-				if (res == FR_OK)
-					res = sync(dj_old.fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, res);
-}
-
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Forward data to the stream directly (Available on only _FS_TINY cfg)  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY
-
-FRESULT f_forward (
-	FIL *fp, 						/* Pointer to the file object */
-	UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT),	/* Pointer to the streaming function */
-	UINT btr,						/* Number of bytes to forward */
-	UINT *bf						/* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD remain, clst, sect;
-	UINT rcnt;
-
-
-	*bf = 0;
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check error flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ))						/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-
-	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
-	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
-
-	for ( ;  btr && (*func)(NULL, 0);				/* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */
-		fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
-		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
-			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
-				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
-					fp->org_clust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
-				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
-				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector address in the cluster */
-			}
-			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-		}
-		sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current data sector */
-		if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-		sect += fp->csect - 1;
-		if (move_window(fp->fs, sect))				/* Move sector window */
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-		fp->dsect = sect;
-		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Forward data from sector window */
-		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
-		rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);
-		if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
-}
-#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */
-
-
-
-#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create File System on the Drive                                       */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#define N_ROOTDIR	512			/* Multiple of 32 and <= 2048 */
-#define N_FATS		1			/* 1 or 2 */
-#define MAX_SECTOR	131072000UL	/* Maximum partition size */
-#define MIN_SECTOR	2000UL		/* Minimum partition size */
-
-
-FRESULT f_mkfs (
-	BYTE drv,			/* Logical drive number */
-	BYTE partition,		/* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */
-	WORD allocsize		/* Allocation unit size [bytes] */
-)
-{
-	static const DWORD sstbl[] = { 2048000, 1024000, 512000, 256000, 128000, 64000, 32000, 16000, 8000, 4000,   0 };
-	static const WORD cstbl[] =  {   32768,   16384,   8192,   4096,   2048, 16384,  8192,  4096, 2048, 1024, 512 };
-	BYTE fmt, m, *tbl;
-	DWORD b_part, b_fat, b_dir, b_data;		/* Area offset (LBA) */
-	DWORD n_part, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir;		/* Area size */
-	DWORD n_clst, d, n;
-	WORD as;
-	FATFS *fs;
-	DSTATUS stat;
-
-
-	/* Check validity of the parameters */
-	if (drv >= _DRIVES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-	if (partition >= 2) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-
-	/* Check mounted drive and clear work area */
-	fs = FatFs[drv];
-	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
-	fs->fs_type = 0;
-	drv = LD2PD(drv);
-
-	/* Get disk statics */
-	stat = disk_initialize(drv);
-	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
-	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
-#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size */
-	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK
-		|| SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
-		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-#endif
-	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_part) != RES_OK || n_part < MIN_SECTOR)
-		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-	if (n_part > MAX_SECTOR) n_part = MAX_SECTOR;
-	b_part = (!partition) ? 63 : 0;		/* Boot sector */
-	n_part -= b_part;
-	for (d = 512; d <= 32768U && d != allocsize; d <<= 1) ;	/* Check validity of the allocation unit size */
-	if (d != allocsize) allocsize = 0;
-	if (!allocsize) {					/* Auto selection of cluster size */
-		d = n_part;
-		for (as = SS(fs); as > 512U; as >>= 1) d >>= 1;
-		for (n = 0; d < sstbl[n]; n++) ;
-		allocsize = cstbl[n];
-	}
-	if (allocsize < SS(fs)) allocsize = SS(fs);
-
-	allocsize /= SS(fs);		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
-
-	/* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT type */
-	n_clst = n_part / allocsize;
-	fmt = FS_FAT12;
-	if (n_clst >= 0xFF5) fmt = FS_FAT16;
-	if (n_clst >= 0xFFF5) fmt = FS_FAT32;
-
-	/* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */
-	switch (fmt) {
-	case FS_FAT12:
-		n_fat = ((n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
-		n_rsv = 1 + partition;
-		n_dir = N_ROOTDIR * 32 / SS(fs);
-		break;
-	case FS_FAT16:
-		n_fat = ((n_clst * 2) + 4 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
-		n_rsv = 1 + partition;
-		n_dir = N_ROOTDIR * 32 / SS(fs);
-		break;
-	default:
-		n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
-		n_rsv = 33 - partition;
-		n_dir = 0;
-	}
-	b_fat = b_part + n_rsv;			/* FATs start sector */
-	b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS;	/* Directory start sector */
-	b_data = b_dir + n_dir;			/* Data start sector */
-
-	/* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */
-	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-	n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1);
-	n_fat += (n - b_data) / N_FATS;
-	/* b_dir and b_data are no longer used below */
-
-	/* Determine number of cluster and final check of validity of the FAT type */
-	n_clst = (n_part - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / allocsize;
-	if (   (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < 0xFF5)
-		|| (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < 0xFFF5))
-		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-
-	/* Create partition table if needed */
-	if (!partition) {
-		DWORD n_disk = b_part + n_part;
-
-		mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs));
-		tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table;
-		ST_DWORD(tbl, 0x00010180);		/* Partition start in CHS */
-		if (n_disk < 63UL * 255 * 1024) {	/* Partition end in CHS */
-			n_disk = n_disk / 63 / 255;
-			tbl[7] = (BYTE)n_disk;
-			tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n_disk >> 2) | 63);
-		} else {
-			ST_WORD(&tbl[6], 0xFFFF);
-		}
-		tbl[5] = 254;
-		if (fmt != FS_FAT32)			/* System ID */
-			tbl[4] = (n_part < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06;
-		else
-			tbl[4] = 0x0c;
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63);			/* Partition start in LBA */
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_part);		/* Partition size in LBA */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+64, 0xAA55);		/* Signature */
-		if (disk_write(drv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK)
-			return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		partition = 0xF8;
-	} else {
-		partition = 0xF0;
-	}
-
-	/* Create boot record */
-	tbl = fs->win;								/* Clear buffer */
-	mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));
-	ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_jmpBoot, 0x90FEEB);			/* Boot code (jmp $, nop) */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, SS(fs));		/* Sector size */
-	tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)allocsize;		/* Sectors per cluster */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv);			/* Reserved sectors */
-	tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS;					/* Number of FATs */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, SS(fs) / 32 * n_dir); /* Number of rootdir entries */
-	if (n_part < 0x10000) {						/* Number of total sectors */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_part);
-	} else {
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_part);
-	}
-	tbl[BPB_Media] = partition;					/* Media descripter */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63);				/* Number of sectors per track */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255);				/* Number of heads */
-	ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_part);			/* Hidden sectors */
-	n = get_fattime();							/* Use current time as a VSN */
-	if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n);				/* Volume serial number */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat);		/* Number of secters per FAT */
-		tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80;					/* Drive number */
-		tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29;					/* Extended boot signature */
-		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME    FAT     ", 19);	/* Volume lavel, FAT signature */
-	} else {
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n);			/* Volume serial number */
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat);		/* Number of secters per FAT */
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2);			/* Root directory cluster (2) */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1);				/* FSInfo record offset (bs+1) */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6);			/* Backup boot record offset (bs+6) */
-		tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80;				/* Drive number */
-		tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29;				/* Extended boot signature */
-		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME    FAT32   ", 19);	/* Volume lavel, FAT signature */
-	}
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);				/* Signature */
-	if (SS(fs) > 512U) {
-		ST_WORD(tbl+SS(fs)-2, 0xAA55);
-	}
-	if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+0, 1) != RES_OK)
-		return FR_DISK_ERR;
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)
-		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+6, 1);
-
-	/* Initialize FAT area */
-	for (m = 0; m < N_FATS; m++) {
-		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));		/* 1st sector of the FAT  */
-		if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
-			n = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00;
-			n |= partition;
-			ST_DWORD(tbl, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */
-		} else {
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, 0xFFFFFFF8);	/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF);
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */
-		}
-		if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
-			return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));		/* Following FAT entries are filled by zero */
-		for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) {
-			if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
-				return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Initialize Root directory */
-	m = (BYTE)((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? allocsize : n_dir);
-	do {
-		if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
-			return FR_DISK_ERR;
-	} while (--m);
-
-	/* Create FSInfo record if needed */
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1);
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 0xFFFFFFFF);
-		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+1, 1);
-		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+7, 1);
-	}
-
-	return (disk_ioctl(drv, CTRL_SYNC, (void*)NULL) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR;
-}
-
-#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-#if _USE_STRFUNC
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get a string from the file                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-char* f_gets (
-	char* buff,	/* Pointer to the string buffer to read */
-	int len,	/* Size of string buffer */
-	FIL* fil	/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	int i = 0;
-	char *p = buff;
-	UINT rc;
-
-
-	while (i < len - 1) {			/* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */
-		f_read(fil, p, 1, &rc);
-		if (rc != 1) break;			/* Break when no data to read */
-#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
-		if (*p == '\r') continue;	/* Strip '\r' */
-#endif
-		i++;
-		if (*p++ == '\n') break;	/* Break when reached end of line */
-	}
-	*p = 0;
-	return i ? buff : NULL;			/* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */
-}
-
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-#include <stdarg.h>
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Put a character to the file                                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-int f_putc (
-	int chr,	/* A character to be output */
-	FIL* fil	/* Ponter to the file object */
-)
-{
-	UINT bw;
-	char c;
-
-
-#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
-	if (chr == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil);	/* LF -> CRLF conversion */
-#endif
-	if (!fil) {	/* Special value may be used to switch the destination to any other device */
-	/*	put_console(chr);	*/
-		return chr;
-	}
-	c = (char)chr;
-	f_write(fil, &c, 1, &bw);	/* Write a byte to the file */
-	return bw ? chr : EOF;		/* Return the result */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Put a string to the file                                              */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-int f_puts (
-	const char* str,	/* Pointer to the string to be output */
-	FIL* fil			/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	int n;
-
-
-	for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) {
-		if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF;
-	}
-	return n;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Put a formatted string to the file                                    */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-int f_printf (
-	FIL* fil,			/* Pointer to the file object */
-	const char* str,	/* Pointer to the format string */
-	...					/* Optional arguments... */
-)
-{
-	va_list arp;
-	UCHAR c, f, r;
-	ULONG val;
-	char s[16];
-	int i, w, res, cc;
-
-
-	va_start(arp, str);
-
-	for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) {
-		c = *str++;
-		if (c == 0) break;			/* End of string */
-		if (c != '%') {				/* Non escape cahracter */
-			cc = f_putc(c, fil);
-			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
-			continue;
-		}
-		w = f = 0;
-		c = *str++;
-		if (c == '0') {				/* Flag: '0' padding */
-			f = 1; c = *str++;
-		}
-		while (c >= '0' && c <= '9') {	/* Precision */
-			w = w * 10 + (c - '0');
-			c = *str++;
-		}
-		if (c == 'l') {				/* Prefix: Size is long int */
-			f |= 2; c = *str++;
-		}
-		if (c == 's') {				/* Type is string */
-			cc = f_puts(va_arg(arp, char*), fil);
-			continue;
-		}
-		if (c == 'c') {				/* Type is character */
-			cc = f_putc(va_arg(arp, int), fil);
-			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
-			continue;
-		}
-		r = 0;
-		if (c == 'd') r = 10;		/* Type is signed decimal */
-		if (c == 'u') r = 10;		/* Type is unsigned decimal */
-		if (c == 'X') r = 16;		/* Type is unsigned hexdecimal */
-		if (r == 0) break;			/* Unknown type */
-		if (f & 2) {				/* Get the value */
-			val = (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long);
-		} else {
-			val = (c == 'd') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int);
-		}
-		/* Put numeral string */
-		if (c == 'd') {
-			if (val & 0x80000000) {
-				val = 0 - val;
-				f |= 4;
-			}
-		}
-		i = sizeof(s) - 1; s[i] = 0;
-		do {
-			c = (UCHAR)(val % r + '0');
-			if (c > '9') c += 7;
-			s[--i] = c;
-			val /= r;
-		} while (i && val);
-		if (i && (f & 4)) s[--i] = '-';
-		w = sizeof(s) - 1 - w;
-		while (i && i > w) s[--i] = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' ';
-		cc = f_puts(&s[i], fil);
-	}
-
-	va_end(arp);
-	return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res;
-}
-
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.07e                    (C)ChaN, 2010
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following trems.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00  Prototype.
+/
+/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01  First stable version.
+/
+/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02  Added FAT12 support.
+/                   Removed unbuffered mode.
+/                   Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
+/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM).
+/
+/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03  Added f_rename().
+/                   Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+/
+/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04  Supported multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount().
+/                   Added f_mkfs().
+/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive.
+/                   Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek().
+/                   Added minimization level 3.
+/                   Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs().
+/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG.
+/                   Added FSInfo support.
+/                   Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+/                   Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object.
+/
+/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs().
+/                   Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory.
+/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime().
+/                   Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+/                   Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+/                   Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close
+/                   without write.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06  Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+/                   Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same
+/                   or following cluster.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
+/                   Added long file name support.
+/                   Added multiple code page support.
+/                   Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+/                   Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+/                   Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+/                   Changed result code of critical errors.
+/                   Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+/                   Added multiple sector size support.
+/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error.
+/                   Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+/                   Added relative path feature.
+/                   Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive().
+/                   Added proper case conversion to extended char.
+/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+/                   Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+/                   Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+/                   Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+/                   Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper
+/                   case on non-LFN cfg.
+/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "ff.h"			/* FatFs configurations and declarations */
+#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Definitions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FATFS != 0x007E
+#error Wrong include file (ff.h).
+#endif
+
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+#if _USE_LFN == 1
+#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration.
+#endif
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)		{ if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; }
+#define	LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	{ unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; }
+
+#else
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)
+#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	return res
+
+#endif
+
+#define	ABORT(fs, res)		{ fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); }
+
+#ifndef NULL
+#define	NULL	0
+#endif
+
+/* Name status flags */
+#define NS			11		/* Offset of name status byte */
+#define NS_LOSS		0x01	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+#define NS_LFN		0x02	/* Force to create LFN entry */
+#define NS_LAST		0x04	/* Last segment */
+#define NS_BODY		0x08	/* Lower case flag (body) */
+#define NS_EXT		0x10	/* Lower case flag (ext) */
+#define NS_DOT		0x20	/* Dot entry */
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Private Work Area
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _DRIVES < 1 || _DRIVES > 9
+#error Number of drives must be 1-9.
+#endif
+static
+FATFS *FatFs[_DRIVES];	/* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */
+
+static
+WORD Fsid;				/* File system mount ID */
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+static
+BYTE Drive;				/* Current drive */
+#endif
+
+
+#if _USE_LFN == 1	/* LFN with static LFN working buffer */
+static
+WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN + 1];
+#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]; WCHAR *lp = LfnBuf
+#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp; dj.lfn = lp
+
+#elif _USE_LFN > 1	/* LFN with dynamic LFN working buffer */
+#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN + 1], *lp = lbuf
+#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp; dj.lfn = lp
+
+#else				/* No LFN */
+#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]
+#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Functions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* String functions                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Copy memory to memory */
+static
+void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, int cnt) {
+	char *d = (char*)dst;
+	const char *s = (const char *)src;
+	while (cnt--) *d++ = *s++;
+}
+
+/* Fill memory */
+static
+void mem_set (void* dst, int val, int cnt) {
+	char *d = (char*)dst;
+	while (cnt--) *d++ = (char)val;
+}
+
+/* Compare memory to memory */
+static
+int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, int cnt) {
+	const char *d = (const char *)dst, *s = (const char *)src;
+	int r = 0;
+	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
+	return r;
+}
+
+/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
+static
+int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
+	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
+	return *str;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Request/Release grant to access the volume                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+
+static
+BOOL lock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs		/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj);
+}
+
+
+static
+void unlock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	FRESULT res		/* Result code to be returned */
+)
+{
+	if (res != FR_NOT_ENABLED &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT &&
+		res != FR_TIMEOUT) {
+		ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj);
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change window offset                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT move_window (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD sector	/* Sector number to make apperance in the fs->win[] */
+)					/* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */
+{
+	DWORD wsect;
+
+
+	wsect = fs->winsect;
+	if (wsect != sector) {	/* Changed current window */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fs->wflag) {	/* Write back dirty window if needed */
+			if (disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->wflag = 0;
+			if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->sects_fat)) {	/* In FAT area */
+				BYTE nf;
+				for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) {	/* Refrect the change to all FAT copies */
+					wsect += fs->sects_fat;
+					disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, wsect, 1);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+		if (sector) {
+			if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->winsect = sector;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Clean-up cached data                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT sync (	/* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */
+	FATFS *fs	/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	res = move_window(fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		/* Update FSInfo sector if needed */
+		if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) {
+			fs->winsect = 0;
+			mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512);
+			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust);
+			disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1);
+			fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		}
+		/* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */
+		if (disk_ioctl(fs->drive, CTRL_SYNC, (void*)NULL) != RES_OK)
+			res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD get_fat (	/* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Interal error, Else:Cluster status */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
+)
+{
+	UINT wc, bc;
+	DWORD fsect;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust)	/* Range check */
+		return 1;
+
+	fsect = fs->fatbase;
+	switch (fs->fs_type) {
+	case FS_FAT12 :
+		bc = clst; bc += bc / 2;
+		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc = fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)]; bc++;
+		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc |= (WORD)fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)] << 8;
+		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
+
+	case FS_FAT16 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break;
+		return LD_WORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 2) & (SS(fs) - 1)]);
+
+	case FS_FAT32 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break;
+		return LD_DWORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 4) & (SS(fs) - 1)]) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
+	}
+
+	return 0xFFFFFFFF;	/* An error occured at the disk I/O layer */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+
+FRESULT put_fat (
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst,	/* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->max_clust - 1 */
+	DWORD val	/* New value to mark the cluster */
+)
+{
+	UINT bc;
+	BYTE *p;
+	DWORD fsect;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust) {	/* Range check */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		fsect = fs->fatbase;
+		switch (fs->fs_type) {
+		case FS_FAT12 :
+			bc = clst; bc += bc / 2;
+			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val;
+			bc++;
+			fs->wflag = 1;
+			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F));
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT16 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			ST_WORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 2) & (SS(fs) - 1)], (WORD)val);
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT32 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			ST_DWORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 4) & (SS(fs) - 1)], val);
+			break;
+
+		default :
+			res = FR_INT_ERR;
+		}
+		fs->wflag = 1;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT remove_chain (
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to remove a chain from */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD nxt;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust) {	/* Check the range of cluster# */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		res = FR_OK;
+		while (clst < fs->max_clust) {			/* Not a last link? */
+			nxt = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Get cluster status */
+			if (nxt == 0) break;				/* Empty cluster? */
+			if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }	/* Internal error? */
+			if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }	/* Disk error? */
+			res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0);			/* Mark the cluster "empty" */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {	/* Update FSInfo */
+				fs->free_clust++;
+				fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+			}
+			clst = nxt;	/* Next cluster */
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+DWORD create_chain (	/* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cs, ncl, scl, mcl;
+
+
+	mcl = fs->max_clust;
+	if (clst == 0) {		/* Create new chain */
+		scl = fs->last_clust;			/* Get suggested start point */
+		if (scl == 0 || scl >= mcl) scl = 1;
+	}
+	else {					/* Stretch existing chain */
+		cs = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Check the cluster status */
+		if (cs < 2) return 1;			/* It is an invalid cluster */
+		if (cs < mcl) return cs;		/* It is already followed by next cluster */
+		scl = clst;
+	}
+
+	ncl = scl;				/* Start cluster */
+	for (;;) {
+		ncl++;							/* Next cluster */
+		if (ncl >= mcl) {				/* Wrap around */
+			ncl = 2;
+			if (ncl > scl) return 0;	/* No free custer */
+		}
+		cs = get_fat(fs, ncl);			/* Get the cluster status */
+		if (cs == 0) break;				/* Found a free cluster */
+		if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occured */
+			return cs;
+		if (ncl == scl) return 0;		/* No free custer */
+	}
+
+	if (put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF))	/* Mark the new cluster "in use" */
+		return 0xFFFFFFFF;
+	if (clst != 0) {					/* Link it to the previous one if needed */
+		if (put_fat(fs, clst, ncl))
+			return 0xFFFFFFFF;
+	}
+
+	fs->last_clust = ncl;				/* Update FSINFO */
+	if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {
+		fs->free_clust--;
+		fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+	}
+
+	return ncl;		/* Return new cluster number */
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
+)
+{
+	clst -= 2;
+	if (clst >= (fs->max_clust - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
+	return clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Seek directory index                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_seek (
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	WORD idx		/* Directory index number */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD ic;
+
+
+	dj->index = idx;
+	clst = dj->sclust;
+	if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->max_clust)	/* Check start cluster range */
+		return FR_INT_ERR;
+	if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
+		clst = dj->fs->dirbase;
+
+	if (clst == 0) {	/* Static table */
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)		/* Index is out of range */
+			return FR_INT_ERR;
+		dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / 32);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+	else {				/* Dynamic table */
+		ic = SS(dj->fs) / 32 * dj->fs->csize;	/* Entries per cluster */
+		while (idx >= ic) {	/* Follow cluster chain */
+			clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst);				/* Get next cluster */
+			if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Disk error */
+			if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->max_clust)	/* Reached to end of table or int error */
+				return FR_INT_ERR;
+			idx -= ic;
+		}
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / 32);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) * 32;	/* Ptr to the entry in the sector */
+
+	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Move directory index next                        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not streach */
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	BOOL streach	/* FALSE: Do not streach table, TRUE: Streach table if needed */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD i;
+
+
+	i = dj->index + 1;
+	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
+		return FR_NO_FILE;
+
+	if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / 32))) {	/* Sector changed? */
+		dj->sect++;					/* Next sector */
+
+		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
+			if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
+				return FR_NO_FILE;
+		}
+		else {					/* Dynamic table */
+			if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
+				clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust);				/* Get next cluster */
+				if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (clst >= dj->fs->max_clust) {				/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					BYTE c;
+					if (!streach) return FR_NO_FILE;			/* When do not streach, report EOT */
+					clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust);		/* Streach cluster chain */
+					if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED;			/* No free cluster */
+					if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+					/* Clean-up streached table */
+					if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Flush active window */
+					mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs));			/* Clear window buffer */
+					dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);	/* Cluster start sector */
+					for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) {		/* Fill the new cluster with 0 */
+						dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+						if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+						dj->fs->winsect++;
+					}
+					dj->fs->winsect -= c;						/* Rewind window address */
+#else
+					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
+#endif
+				}
+				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
+				dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	dj->index = i;
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) * 32;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30};	/* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */
+
+
+static
+BOOL cmp_lfn (			/* TRUE:Matched, FALSE:Not matched */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */
+)
+{
+	int i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0xBF) - 1) * 13;	/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);	/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			wc = ff_wtoupper(uc);		/* Convert it to upper case */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++]))	/* Compare it */
+				return FALSE;			/* Not matched */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return FALSE;	/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);				/* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */
+
+	if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x40) && wc && lfnbuf[i])	/* Last segment matched but different length */
+		return FALSE;
+
+	return TRUE;					/* The part of LFN matched */
+}
+
+
+
+static
+BOOL pick_lfn (			/* TRUE:Succeeded, FALSE:Buffer overflow */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+)
+{
+	int i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13;	/* Offset in the LFN buffer */
+
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);			/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return FALSE;	/* Buffer overflow? */
+			lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc;				/* Store it */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return FALSE;		/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);						/* Read all character in the entry */
+
+	if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x40) {				/* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */
+		if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return FALSE;	/* Buffer overflow? */
+		lfnbuf[i] = 0;
+	}
+
+	return TRUE;
+}
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+void fit_lfn (
+	const WCHAR *lfnbuf,	/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir,				/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	BYTE ord,				/* LFN order (1-20) */
+	BYTE sum				/* SFN sum */
+)
+{
+	int i, s;
+	WCHAR wc;
+
+
+	dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum;			/* Set check sum */
+	dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN;		/* Set attribute. LFN entry */
+	dir[LDIR_Type] = 0;
+	ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0);
+
+	i = (ord - 1) * 13;				/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = wc = 0;
+	do {
+		if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++];	/* Get an effective char */
+		ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc);	/* Put it */
+		if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF;		/* Padding chars following last char */
+	} while (++s < 13);
+	if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= 0x40;	/* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */
+	dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord;			/* Set the LFN order */
+}
+
+#endif
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create numbered name                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+void gen_numname (
+	BYTE *dst,			/* Pointer to genartated SFN */
+	const BYTE *src,	/* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */
+	const WCHAR *lfn,	/* Pointer to LFN */
+	WORD num			/* Sequense number */
+)
+{
+	char ns[8];
+	int i, j;
+
+
+	mem_cpy(dst, src, 11);
+
+	if (num > 5) {	/* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequencial number */
+		do num = (num >> 1) + (num << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn);
+	}
+
+	/* itoa */
+	i = 7;
+	do {
+		ns[i--] = (num % 10) + '0';
+		num /= 10;
+	} while (num);
+	ns[i] = '~';
+
+	/* Append the number */
+	for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) {
+		if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) {
+			if (j == i - 1) break;
+			j++;
+		}
+	}
+	do {
+		dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' ';
+	} while (j < 8);
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Calculate sum of an SFN                                               */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+BYTE sum_sfn (
+	const BYTE *dir		/* Ptr to directory entry */
+)
+{
+	BYTE sum = 0;
+	int n = 11;
+
+	do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n);
+	return sum;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_find (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord, sum;
+#endif
+
+	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);			/* Rewind directory object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	ord = sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == 0xE5 || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (dj->lfn) {
+					if (c & 0x40) {		/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+						sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+						c &= 0xBF; ord = c;	/* LFN start order */
+						dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+					}
+					/* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */
+					ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+				}
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break;	/* LFN matched? */
+				ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;	/* Reset LFN sequence */
+				if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break;	/* SFN matched? */
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);		/* Next entry */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+FRESULT dir_read (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+
+	res = FR_NO_FILE;
+	while (dj->sect) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == 0xE5 || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (c & 0x40) {			/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+					sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+					c &= 0xBF; ord = c;
+					dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+				}
+				/* Check LFN validity and capture it */
+				ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir))	/* Is there a valid LFN? */
+					dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;		/* It has no LFN. */
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (c != 0xE5 && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);				/* Next entry */
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+	}
+
+	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Register an object to the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT dir_register (	/* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Target directory with object name to be created */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD n, ne, is;
+	BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum;
+	WCHAR *lfn;
+
+
+	fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn;
+	mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12);
+
+	if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT)) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Cannot create dot entry */
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) {			/* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */
+		fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = NULL;			/* Find only SFN */
+		for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) {
+			gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n);	/* Generate a numbered name */
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		}
+		if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED;		/* Abort if too many collisions */
+		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res;	/* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */
+		fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn;
+	}
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) {			/* When LFN is to be created, reserve reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */
+		for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ;
+		ne = (ne + 25) / 13;
+	} else {						/* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */
+		ne = 1;
+	}
+
+	/* Reserve contiguous entries */
+	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+	n = is = 0;
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		c = *dj->dir;				/* Check the entry status */
+		if (c == 0xE5 || c == 0) {	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			if (n == 0) is = dj->index;	/* First index of the contigulus entry */
+			if (++n == ne) break;	/* A contiguous entry that requiered count is found */
+		} else {
+			n = 0;					/* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */
+		}
+		res = dir_next(dj, TRUE);	/* Next entry with table streach */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) {	/* Initialize LFN entry if needed */
+		res = dir_seek(dj, is);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn);	/* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */
+			ne--;
+			do {					/* Store LFN entries in bottom first */
+				res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+				if (res != FR_OK) break;
+				fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum);
+				dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Next entry */
+			} while (res == FR_OK && --ne);
+		}
+	}
+
+#else	/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {	/* Find a blank entry for the SFN */
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			c = *dj->dir;
+			if (c == 0xE5 || c == 0) break;	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			res = dir_next(dj, TRUE);		/* Next entry with table streach */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+	}
+#endif
+
+	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Initialize the SFN entry */
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj->dir;
+			mem_set(dir, 0, 32);		/* Clean the entry */
+			mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11);	/* Put SFN */
+			dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT);	/* Put NT flag */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Remove an object from the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE
+static
+FRESULT dir_remove (	/* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD i;
+
+	i = dj->index;	/* SFN index */
+	res = dir_seek(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx));	/* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			*dj->dir = 0xE5;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+			if (dj->index >= i) break;	/* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */
+			res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Next entry */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	}
+
+#else			/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_seek(dj, dj->index);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			*dj->dir = 0xE5;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT create_name (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	const XCHAR **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
+)
+{
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+	static const BYTE cvt[] = _EXCVT;
+#endif
+
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, cf;
+	WCHAR w, *lfn;
+	int i, ni, si, di;
+	const XCHAR *p;
+
+	/* Create LFN in Unicode */
+	si = di = 0;
+	p = *path;
+	lfn = dj->lfn;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = p[si++];					/* Get a character */
+		if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (di >= _MAX_LFN)				/* Reject too long name */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+		w &= 0xFF;
+		if (IsDBCS1(w)) {				/* If it is a DBC 1st byte */
+			b = p[si++];				/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(b))			/* Reject invalid code for DBC */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			w = (w << 8) + b;
+		}
+		w = ff_convert(w, 1);			/* Convert OEM to Unicode */
+		if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid code */
+#endif
+		if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		lfn[di++] = w;					/* Store the Unicode char */
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
+	cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if ((di == 1 && lfn[di - 1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		(di == 2 && lfn[di - 1] == '.' && lfn[di - 2] == '.')) {
+		lfn[di] = 0;
+		for (i = 0; i < 11; i++)
+			dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' ';
+		dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT;		/* This is a dot entry */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	while (di) {						/* Strip trailing spaces and dots */
+		w = lfn[di - 1];
+		if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break;
+		di--;
+	}
+	if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject null string */
+
+	lfn[di] = 0;						/* LFN is created */
+
+	/* Create SFN in directory form */
+	mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11);
+	for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ;	/* Strip leading spaces and dots */
+	if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;
+	while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--;	/* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */
+
+	b = i = 0; ni = 8;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = lfn[si++];					/* Get an LFN char */
+		if (!w) break;					/* Break on enf of the LFN */
+		if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) {	/* Remove spaces and dots */
+			cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (i >= ni || si == di) {		/* Extension or end of SFN */
+			if (ni == 11) {				/* Long extension */
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break;
+			}
+			if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+			if (si > di) break;			/* No extension */
+			si = di; i = 8; ni = 11;	/* Enter extension section */
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (w >= 0x80) {				/* Non ASCII char */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			w = ff_convert(w, 0);		/* Unicode -> OEM code */
+			if (w) w = cvt[w - 0x80];	/* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */
+#else
+			w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0);	/* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */
+#endif
+			cf |= NS_LFN;				/* Force create LFN entry */
+		}
+
+		if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) {		/* Double byte char */
+			if (i >= ni - 1) {
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue;
+			}
+			dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8);
+		} else {						/* Single byte char */
+			if (!w || chk_chr("+,;[=]", w)) {		/* Replace illegal chars for SFN */
+				w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Lossy conversion */
+			} else {
+				if (IsUpper(w)) {		/* ASCII large capital */
+					b |= 2;
+				} else {
+					if (IsLower(w)) {	/* ASCII small capital */
+						b |= 1; w -= 0x20;
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w;
+	}
+
+	if (dj->fn[0] == 0xE5) dj->fn[0] = 0x05;	/* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03)	/* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */
+		cf |= NS_LFN;
+	if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) {						/* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */
+		if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
+		if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
+	}
+
+	dj->fn[NS] = cf;	/* SFN is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+
+
+#else	/* Non-LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, c, d, *sfn;
+	int ni, si, i;
+	const char *p;
+
+	/* Create file name in directory form */
+	sfn = dj->fn;
+	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
+	si = i = b = 0; ni = 8;
+	p = *path;
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		for (;;) {
+			c = p[si++];
+			if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+		if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		*path = &p[si];									/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
+		sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT;	/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	for (;;) {
+		c = p[si++];
+		if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
+			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			i = 8; ni = 11;
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+		if (c >= 0x80) {				/* Extended char */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			c = cvt[c - 0x80];			/* Convert extend char (SBCS) */
+#else
+			b |= 3;						/* Eliminate NT flag if ext char is exist */
+#if !_DF1S	/* ASCII only cfg */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#endif
+#endif
+		}
+		if (IsDBCS1(c)) {				/* DBC 1st byte? */
+			d = p[si++];				/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1)	/* Reject invalid DBC */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+			sfn[i++] = d;
+		} else {						/* Single byte code */
+			if (chk_chr(" \"*+,[=]|\x7F", c))	/* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			if (IsUpper(c)) {			/* ASCII large capital? */
+				b |= 2;
+			} else {
+				if (IsLower(c)) {		/* ASCII small capital? */
+					b |= 1; c -= 0x20;
+				}
+			}
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
+	c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+
+	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject null string */
+	if (sfn[0] == 0xE5) sfn[0] = 0x05;	/* When first char collides with 0xE5, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
+
+	sfn[NS] = c;		/* Store NT flag, File name is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to the file information to be filled */
+)
+{
+	int i;
+	BYTE c, nt, *dir;
+	char *p;
+
+
+	p = fno->fname;
+	if (dj->sect) {
+		dir = dj->dir;
+		nt = dir[DIR_NTres];		/* NT flag */
+		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy name body */
+			c = dir[i];
+			if (c == ' ') break;
+			if (c == 0x05) c = 0xE5;
+			if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+			*p++ = c;
+		}
+		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy name extension */
+			*p++ = '.';
+			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
+				c = dir[i];
+				if (c == ' ') break;
+				if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+				*p++ = c;
+			}
+		}
+		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
+		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
+		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
+		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
+	}
+	*p = 0;
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	if (fno->lfname) {
+		XCHAR *tp = fno->lfname;
+		WCHAR w, *lfn;
+
+		i = 0;
+		if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */
+			lfn = dj->lfn;
+			while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) {			/* Get an LFN char */
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+				w = ff_convert(w, 0);			/* Unicode -> OEM conversion */
+				if (!w) { i = 0; break; }		/* Could not convert, no LFN */
+				if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100)		/* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC */
+					tp[i++] = (XCHAR)(w >> 8);
+#endif
+				if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; }	/* Buffer overrun, no LFN */
+				tp[i++] = (XCHAR)w;
+			}
+		}
+		tp[i] = 0;	/* Terminator */
+	}
+#endif
+}
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Follow a file path                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
+	const XCHAR *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE *dir, last;
+
+
+	while (!_USE_LFN && *path == ' ') path++;	/* Skip leading spaces */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */
+		path++;	dj->sclust = 0;		/* Strip it and start from the root dir */
+	} else {							/* No heading saparator */
+		dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir;	/* Start from the current dir */
+	}
+#else
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\')	/* Strip heading separator if exist */
+		path++;
+	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Start from the root dir */
+#endif
+
+	if ((UINT)*path < ' ') {			/* Null path means the start directory itself */
+		res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
+		dj->dir = NULL;
+
+	} else {							/* Follow path */
+		for (;;) {
+			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
+			last = *(dj->fn+NS) & NS_LAST;
+			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Could not find the object */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE && !last)
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				break;
+			}
+			if (last) break;				/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
+			dir = dj->dir;					/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
+			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Cannot follow because it is a file */
+				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
+			}
+			dj->sclust = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Load boot record and check if it is an FAT boot record                */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:The FAT boot record, 1:Valid boot record but not an FAT, 2:Not a boot record, 3:Error */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
+)
+{
+	if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load boot record */
+		return 3;
+	if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55)		/* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */
+		return 2;
+
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)	/* Check "FAT" string */
+		return 0;
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)
+		return 0;
+
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Make sure that the file system is valid                               */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+FRESULT chk_mounted (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occured */
+	const XCHAR **path,	/* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */
+	FATFS **rfs,		/* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */
+	BYTE chk_wp			/* !=0: Check media write protection for write access */
+)
+{
+	BYTE fmt, *tbl;
+	UINT vol;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+	DWORD bsect, fsize, tsect, mclst;
+	const XCHAR *p = *path;
+	FATFS *fs;
+
+	/* Get logical drive number from the path name */
+	vol = p[0] - '0';				/* Is there a drive number? */
+	if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') {	/* Found a drive number, get and strip it */
+		p += 2; *path = p;			/* Return pointer to the path name */
+	} else {						/* No drive number is given */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+		vol = Drive;				/* Use current drive */
+#else
+		vol = 0;					/* Use drive 0 */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the logical drive is valid or not */
+	if (vol >= _DRIVES) 			/* Is the drive number valid? */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	*rfs = fs = FatFs[vol];			/* Returen pointer to the corresponding file system object */
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;	/* Is the file system object available? */
+
+	ENTER_FF(fs);					/* Lock file system */
+
+	if (fs->fs_type) {				/* If the logical drive has been mounted */
+		stat = disk_status(fs->drive);
+		if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) {	/* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			if (chk_wp && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check write protection if needed */
+				return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#endif
+			return FR_OK;			/* The file system object is valid */
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* The logical drive must be mounted. Following code attempts to mount the volume */
+
+	fs->fs_type = 0;					/* Clear the file system object */
+	fs->drive = (BYTE)LD2PD(vol);		/* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */
+	stat = disk_initialize(fs->drive);	/* Initialize low level disk I/O layer */
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT)				/* Check if the drive is ready */
+		return FR_NOT_READY;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size if needed */
+	if (disk_ioctl(fs->drive, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+#endif
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	if (chk_wp && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check disk write protection if needed */
+		return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#endif
+	/* Search FAT partition on the drive */
+	fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0);		/* Check sector 0 as an SFD format */
+	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT boot record, it may be patitioned */
+		/* Check a partition listed in top of the partition table */
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + LD2PT(vol) * 16];	/* Partition table */
+		if (tbl[4]) {									/* Is the partition existing? */
+			bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]);					/* Partition offset in LBA */
+			fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect);					/* Check the partition */
+		}
+	}
+	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt || LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs))	/* No valid FAT patition is found */
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+
+	/* Initialize the file system object */
+	fsize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+	if (!fsize) fsize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32);
+	fs->sects_fat = fsize;
+	fs->n_fats = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs];					/* Number of FAT copies */
+	fsize *= fs->n_fats;								/* (Number of sectors in FAT area) */
+	fs->fatbase = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt); /* FAT start sector (lba) */
+	fs->csize = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus];				/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt);	/* Nmuber of root directory entries */
+	tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16);				/* Number of sectors on the volume */
+	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32);
+	fs->max_clust = mclst = (tsect						/* Last cluster# + 1 (Number of clusters + 2) */
+		- LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt) - fsize - fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs)/32)
+		) / fs->csize + 2;
+
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;										/* Determine the FAT sub type */
+	if (mclst >= 0xFF7) fmt = FS_FAT16;					/* Number of clusters >= 0xFF5 */
+	if (mclst >= 0xFFF7) fmt = FS_FAT32;				/* Number of clusters >= 0xFFF5 */
+
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)
+		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus);	/* Root directory start cluster */
+	else
+		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fsize;				/* Root directory start sector (lba) */
+	fs->database = fs->fatbase + fsize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs)/32);	/* Data start sector (lba) */
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	/* Initialize allocation information */
+	fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+	fs->wflag = 0;
+	/* Get fsinfo if needed */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+	 	fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo);
+		if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK &&
+			LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) {
+			fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free);
+			fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count);
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
+	fs->winsect = 0;		/* Invalidate sector cache */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	fs->cdir = 0;			/* Current directory (root dir) */
+#endif
+	fs->id = ++Fsid;		/* File system mount ID */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not                          */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT validate (	/* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */
+	FATFS *fs,		/* Pointer to the file system object */
+	WORD id			/* Member id of the target object to be checked */
+)
+{
+	if (!fs || !fs->fs_type || fs->id != id)
+		return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	ENTER_FF(fs);		/* Lock file system */
+
+	if (disk_status(fs->drive) & STA_NOINIT)
+		return FR_NOT_READY;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Public Functions
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Mount/Unmount a Locical Drive                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mount (
+	BYTE vol,		/* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */
+	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/
+)
+{
+	FATFS *rfs;
+
+
+	if (vol >= _DRIVES)				/* Check if the drive number is valid */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	rfs = FatFs[vol];				/* Get current fs object */
+
+	if (rfs) {
+#if _FS_REENTRANT					/* Discard sync object of the current volume */
+		if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+		rfs->fs_type = 0;			/* Clear old fs object */
+	}
+
+	if (fs) {
+		fs->fs_type = 0;			/* Clear new fs object */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT					/* Create sync object for the new volume */
+		if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+	}
+	FatFs[vol] = fs;				/* Register new fs object */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_open (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the blank file object */
+	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file name */
+	BYTE mode			/* Access mode and file open mode flags */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	fp->fs = NULL;		/* Clear file object */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	mode &= (FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW);
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & (FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)));
+#else
+	mode &= FA_READ;
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+#endif
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+	res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	/* Create or Open a file */
+	if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) {
+		DWORD ps, cl;
+
+		if (res != FR_OK) {			/* No file, create new */
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE)	/* There is no file to open, create a new entry */
+				res = dir_register(&dj);
+			if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+			mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS;
+			dir = dj.dir;			/* Created entry (SFN entry) */
+		}
+		else {						/* Any object is already existing */
+			if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW)			/* Cannot create new */
+				LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_EXIST);
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir || (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)))	/* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */
+				LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
+			if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS) {		/* Resize it to zero on over write mode */
+				cl = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);	/* Get start cluster */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, 0);	/* cluster = 0 */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, 0);
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0);	/* size = 0 */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				ps = dj.fs->winsect;			/* Remove the cluster chain */
+				if (cl) {
+					res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl);
+					if (res) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+					dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1;	/* Reuse the cluster hole */
+				}
+				res = move_window(dj.fs, ps);
+				if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+			}
+		}
+		if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS) {
+			dir[DIR_Attr] = 0;					/* Reset attribute */
+			ps = get_fattime();
+			ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, ps);		/* Created time */
+			dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+			mode |= FA__WRITTEN;				/* Set file changed flag */
+		}
+	}
+	/* Open an existing file */
+	else {
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+		if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);	/* Follow failed */
+		dir = dj.dir;
+		if (!dir || (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR))	/* It is a directory */
+			LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_NO_FILE);
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */
+			LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
+	}
+	fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect;		/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	fp->dir_ptr = dj.dir;
+#endif
+	fp->flag = mode;					/* File access mode */
+	fp->org_clust =						/* File start cluster */
+		((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+	fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
+	fp->fptr = 0; fp->csect = 255;		/* File pointer */
+	fp->dsect = 0;
+	fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id;	/* Owner file system object of the file */
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read File                                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_read (
+	FIL *fp, 		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	void *buff,		/* Pointer to data buffer */
+	UINT btr,		/* Number of bytes to read */
+	UINT *br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect, remain;
+	UINT rcnt, cc;
+	BYTE *rbuff = buff;
+
+
+	*br = 0;	/* Initialize bytes read */
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) 						/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr;									/* Repeat until all data transferred */
+		rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
+					fp->org_clust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
+				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector offset in the cluster */
+			}
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += fp->csect;
+			cc = btr / SS(fp->fs);					/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {								/* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (fp->csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - fp->csect;
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc)		/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs));
+#else
+				if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc)	/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs));
+#endif
+#endif
+				fp->csect += (BYTE)cc;				/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+				rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;				/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write sector I/O buffer if needed */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {			/* Fill sector buffer with file data */
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+		}
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))			/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#else
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_write (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const void *buff,	/* Pointer to the data to be written */
+	UINT btw,			/* Number of bytes to write */
+	UINT *bw			/* Pointer to number of bytes written */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect;
+	UINT wcnt, cc;
+	const BYTE *wbuff = buff;
+
+
+	*bw = 0;	/* Initialize bytes written */
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))						/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	if (fp->fsize + btw < fp->fsize) btw = 0;		/* File size cannot reach 4GB */
+
+	for ( ;  btw;									/* Repeat until all data transferred */
+		wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				if (fp->fptr == 0) {				/* On the top of the file? */
+					clst = fp->org_clust;			/* Follow from the origin */
+					if (clst == 0)					/* When there is no cluster chain, */
+						fp->org_clust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);	/* Create a new cluster chain */
+				} else {							/* Middle or end of the file */
+					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);			/* Follow or streach cluster chain */
+				}
+				if (clst == 0) break;				/* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */
+				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector address in the cluster */
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0))	/* Write back data buffer prior to following direct transfer */
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#else
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write back data buffer prior to following direct transfer */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += fp->csect;
+			cc = btw / SS(fp->fs);					/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {								/* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (fp->csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - fp->csect;
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) {	/* Refill sector cache if it gets dirty by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->fs->wflag = 0;
+				}
+#else
+				if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) {		/* Refill sector cache if it gets dirty by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+				}
+#endif
+				fp->csect += (BYTE)cc;				/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+				wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;				/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) {			/* Avoid silly buffer filling at growing edge */
+				if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->fs->winsect = sect;
+			}
+#else
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {				/* Fill sector buffer with file data */
+				if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize &&
+					disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+		}
+		wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */
+		if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))			/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+#else
+		mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY;
+#endif
+	}
+
+	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Update file size if needed */
+	fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;						/* Set file changed flag */
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Synchronize the File Object                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_sync (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD tim;
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) {	/* Has the file been written? */
+#if !_FS_TINY	/* Write-back dirty buffer */
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			/* Update the directory entry */
+			res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect);
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dir = fp->dir_ptr;
+				dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC;					/* Set archive bit */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize);		/* Update file size */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, fp->org_clust);	/* Update start cluster */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, fp->org_clust >> 16);
+				tim = get_fattime();			/* Updated time */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN;
+				fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(fp->fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Close File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_close (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object to be closed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+#if _FS_READONLY
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);
+	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = NULL;
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+#else
+	res = f_sync(fp);
+	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = NULL;
+	return res;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Current Drive/Directory                                        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+
+FRESULT f_chdrive (
+	BYTE drv		/* Drive number */
+)
+{
+	if (drv >= _DRIVES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+
+	Drive = drv;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+FRESULT f_chdir (
+	const XCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow completed */
+			dir = dj.dir;					/* Pointer to the entry */
+			if (!dir) {
+				dj.fs->cdir = 0;			/* No entry (root dir) */
+			} else {
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* Reached to the dir */
+					dj.fs->cdir = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+				else
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;		/* Could not reach the dir (it is a file) */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_lseek (
+	FIL *fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (ofs > fp->fsize					/* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		 && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)
+#endif
+		) ofs = fp->fsize;
+
+	ifptr = fp->fptr;
+	fp->fptr = nsect = 0; fp->csect = 255;
+	if (ofs > 0) {
+		bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs);	/* Cluster size (byte) */
+		if (ifptr > 0 &&
+			(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
+			fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
+			ofs -= fp->fptr;
+			clst = fp->curr_clust;
+		} else {									/* When seek to back cluster, */
+			clst = fp->org_clust;					/* start from the first cluster */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			if (clst == 0) {						/* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */
+				clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);
+				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->org_clust = clst;
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->curr_clust = clst;
+		}
+		if (clst != 0) {
+			while (ofs > bcs) {						/* Cluster following loop */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+				if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) {			/* Check if in write mode or not */
+					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst);	/* Force streached if in write mode */
+					if (clst == 0) {				/* When disk gets full, clip file size */
+						ofs = bcs; break;
+					}
+				} else
+#endif
+					clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->max_clust) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				fp->curr_clust = clst;
+				fp->fptr += bcs;
+				ofs -= bcs;
+			}
+			fp->fptr += ofs;
+			fp->csect = (BYTE)(ofs / SS(fp->fs));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+			if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) {
+				nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst);	/* Current sector */
+				if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				nsect += fp->csect;
+				fp->csect++;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) {
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write-back dirty buffer if needed */
+			if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+		}
+#endif
+		if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#endif
+		fp->dsect = nsect;
+	}
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) {			/* Set changed flag if the file size is extended */
+		fp->fsize = fp->fptr;
+		fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+	}
+#endif
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directroy Object                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_opendir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
+	const XCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF((*dj), sfn, lfn);
+		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
+			dir = dj->dir;
+			if (dir) {							/* It is not the root dir */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
+					dj->sclust = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dj->id = dj->fs->id;
+				res = dir_seek(dj, 0);			/* Rewind dir */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Directory Entry in Sequense                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_readdir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+
+
+	res = validate(dj->fs, dj->id);			/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF((*dj), sfn, lfn);
+		if (!fno) {
+			res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
+		} else {
+			res = dir_read(dj);
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
+				dj->sect = 0;
+				res = FR_OK;
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
+				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
+				res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Increment index for next */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
+					dj->sect = 0;
+					res = FR_OK;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get File Status                                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_stat (
+	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {				/* Follwo completed */
+			if (dj.dir)	/* Found an object */
+				get_fileinfo(&dj, fno);
+			else		/* It is root dir */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get Number of Free Clusters                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_getfree (
+	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */
+	DWORD *nclst,		/* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */
+	FATFS **fatfs		/* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD n, clst, sect, stat;
+	UINT i;
+	BYTE fat, *p;
+
+
+	/* Get drive number */
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0);
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, res);
+
+	/* If number of free cluster is valid, return it without cluster scan. */
+	if ((*fatfs)->free_clust <= (*fatfs)->max_clust - 2) {
+		*nclst = (*fatfs)->free_clust;
+		LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_OK);
+	}
+
+	/* Get number of free clusters */
+	fat = (*fatfs)->fs_type;
+	n = 0;
+	if (fat == FS_FAT12) {
+		clst = 2;
+		do {
+			stat = get_fat(*fatfs, clst);
+			if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			if (stat == 1) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			if (stat == 0) n++;
+		} while (++clst < (*fatfs)->max_clust);
+	} else {
+		clst = (*fatfs)->max_clust;
+		sect = (*fatfs)->fatbase;
+		i = 0; p = 0;
+		do {
+			if (!i) {
+				res = move_window(*fatfs, sect++);
+				if (res != FR_OK)
+					LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, res);
+				p = (*fatfs)->win;
+				i = SS(*fatfs);
+			}
+			if (fat == FS_FAT16) {
+				if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++;
+				p += 2; i -= 2;
+			} else {
+				if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++;
+				p += 4; i -= 4;
+			}
+		} while (--clst);
+	}
+	(*fatfs)->free_clust = n;
+	if (fat == FS_FAT32) (*fatfs)->fsi_flag = 1;
+	*nclst = n;
+
+	LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Truncate File                                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_truncate (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD ncl;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))			/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+
+	if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) {
+		fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Set file size to current R/W point */
+		fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+		if (fp->fptr == 0) {	/* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */
+			res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->org_clust);
+			fp->org_clust = 0;
+		} else {				/* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */
+			ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
+			res = FR_OK;
+			if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+			if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+			if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->max_clust) {
+				res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust, 0x0FFFFFFF);
+				if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR;
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Delete a File or Directory                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_unlink (
+	const XCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the file or directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj, sdj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DWORD dclst;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+
+	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+	res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
+	if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+		res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); /* Follow failed */
+
+	dir = dj.dir;
+	if (!dir)								/* Is it the root directory? */
+		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_INVALID_NAME);
+	if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)				/* Is it a R/O object? */
+		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
+	dclst = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+
+	if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {			/* It is a sub-directory */
+		if (dclst < 2) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof(DIR));	/* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */
+		sdj.sclust = dclst;
+		res = dir_seek(&sdj, 2);
+		if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+		res = dir_read(&sdj);
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_DENIED;	/* Not empty sub-dir */
+		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+	}
+
+	res = dir_remove(&dj);					/* Remove directory entry */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (dclst)
+			res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);	/* Remove the cluster chain */
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs);
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directory                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mkdir (
+	const XCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir, n;
+	DWORD dsect, dclst, pclst, tim;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+
+	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+	res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
+	if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* Any file or directory is already existing */
+	if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+		res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+	if (res != FR_NO_FILE)					/* Any error occured */
+		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+
+	dclst = create_chain(dj.fs, 0);			/* Allocate a new cluster for new directory table */
+	res = FR_OK;
+	if (dclst == 0) res = FR_DENIED;
+	if (dclst == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	if (dclst == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (res == FR_OK)
+		res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+	dsect = clust2sect(dj.fs, dclst);
+
+	dir = dj.fs->win;						/* Initialize the new directory table */
+	mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+	mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3);		/* Create "." entry */
+	dir[DIR_Name] = '.';
+	dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;
+	tim = get_fattime();
+	ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dclst);
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dclst >> 16);
+	mem_cpy(dir+32, dir, 32); 			/* Create ".." entry */
+	dir[33] = '.';
+	pclst = dj.sclust;
+	if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pclst == dj.fs->dirbase)
+		pclst = 0;
+	ST_WORD(dir+32+DIR_FstClusLO, pclst);
+	ST_WORD(dir+32+DIR_FstClusHI, pclst >> 16);
+	for (n = 0; n < dj.fs->csize; n++) {	/* Write dot entries and clear left sectors */
+		dj.fs->winsect = dsect++;
+		dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+		res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+		if (res) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+		mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+	}
+
+	res = dir_register(&dj);
+	if (res != FR_OK) {
+		remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);
+	} else {
+		dir = dj.dir;
+		dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;					/* Attribute */
+		ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);			/* Crated time */
+		ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dclst);		/* Table start cluster */
+		ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dclst >> 16);
+		dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+		res = sync(dj.fs);
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change File Attribute                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_chmod (
+	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	BYTE value,			/* Attribute bits */
+	BYTE mask			/* Attribute mask to change */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {						/* Is it a root directory? */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {						/* File or sub directory */
+				mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC;	/* Valid attribute mask */
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask);	/* Apply attribute change */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Timestamp                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_utime (
+	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file/directory name */
+	const FILINFO *fno	/* Pointer to the timestamp to be set */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {				/* Root directory */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {				/* File or sub-directory */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime);
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate);
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Rename File/Directory                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_rename (
+	const XCHAR *path_old,	/* Pointer to the old name */
+	const XCHAR *path_new	/* Pointer to the new name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj_old, dj_new;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE buf[21], *dir;
+	DWORD dw;
+
+
+	INITBUF(dj_old, sfn, lfn);
+	res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &dj_old.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		dj_new.fs = dj_old.fs;
+		res = follow_path(&dj_old, path_old);	/* Check old object */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj_old.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+	}
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, res);	/* The old object is not found */
+
+	if (!dj_old.dir) LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, FR_NO_FILE);	/* Is root dir? */
+	mem_cpy(buf, dj_old.dir+DIR_Attr, 21);		/* Save the object information */
+
+	mem_cpy(&dj_new, &dj_old, sizeof(DIR));
+	res = follow_path(&dj_new, path_new);		/* Check new object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;			/* The new object name is already existing */
+	if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { 					/* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */
+		res = dir_register(&dj_new);			/* Register the new object */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj_new.dir;					/* Copy object information into new entry */
+			mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19);
+			dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC;
+			dj_old.fs->wflag = 1;
+			if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {		/* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */
+				dw = clust2sect(dj_new.fs, (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO));
+				if (!dw) {
+					res = FR_INT_ERR;
+				} else {
+					res = move_window(dj_new.fs, dw);
+					dir = dj_new.fs->win+32;
+					if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') {
+						dw = (dj_new.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && dj_new.sclust == dj_new.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : dj_new.sclust;
+						ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dw);
+						ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dw >> 16);
+						dj_new.fs->wflag = 1;
+					}
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				res = dir_remove(&dj_old);			/* Remove old entry */
+				if (res == FR_OK)
+					res = sync(dj_old.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Forward data to the stream directly (Available on only _FS_TINY cfg)  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY
+
+FRESULT f_forward (
+	FIL *fp, 						/* Pointer to the file object */
+	UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT),	/* Pointer to the streaming function */
+	UINT btr,						/* Number of bytes to forward */
+	UINT *bf						/* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD remain, clst, sect;
+	UINT rcnt;
+
+
+	*bf = 0;
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check error flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ))						/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr && (*func)(NULL, 0);				/* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */
+		fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
+					fp->org_clust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
+				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector address in the cluster */
+			}
+			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+		}
+		sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current data sector */
+		if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+		sect += fp->csect - 1;
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, sect))				/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		fp->dsect = sect;
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Forward data from sector window */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+		rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);
+		if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */
+
+
+
+#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create File System on the Drive                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define N_ROOTDIR	512			/* Multiple of 32 and <= 2048 */
+#define N_FATS		1			/* 1 or 2 */
+#define MAX_SECTOR	131072000UL	/* Maximum partition size */
+#define MIN_SECTOR	2000UL		/* Minimum partition size */
+
+
+FRESULT f_mkfs (
+	BYTE drv,			/* Logical drive number */
+	BYTE partition,		/* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */
+	WORD allocsize		/* Allocation unit size [bytes] */
+)
+{
+	static const DWORD sstbl[] = { 2048000, 1024000, 512000, 256000, 128000, 64000, 32000, 16000, 8000, 4000,   0 };
+	static const WORD cstbl[] =  {   32768,   16384,   8192,   4096,   2048, 16384,  8192,  4096, 2048, 1024, 512 };
+	BYTE fmt, m, *tbl;
+	DWORD b_part, b_fat, b_dir, b_data;		/* Area offset (LBA) */
+	DWORD n_part, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir;		/* Area size */
+	DWORD n_clst, d, n;
+	WORD as;
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+
+
+	/* Check validity of the parameters */
+	if (drv >= _DRIVES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	if (partition >= 2) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+
+	/* Check mounted drive and clear work area */
+	fs = FatFs[drv];
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
+	fs->fs_type = 0;
+	drv = LD2PD(drv);
+
+	/* Get disk statics */
+	stat = disk_initialize(drv);
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
+	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size */
+	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK
+		|| SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
+		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+#endif
+	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_part) != RES_OK || n_part < MIN_SECTOR)
+		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+	if (n_part > MAX_SECTOR) n_part = MAX_SECTOR;
+	b_part = (!partition) ? 63 : 0;		/* Boot sector */
+	n_part -= b_part;
+	for (d = 512; d <= 32768U && d != allocsize; d <<= 1) ;	/* Check validity of the allocation unit size */
+	if (d != allocsize) allocsize = 0;
+	if (!allocsize) {					/* Auto selection of cluster size */
+		d = n_part;
+		for (as = SS(fs); as > 512U; as >>= 1) d >>= 1;
+		for (n = 0; d < sstbl[n]; n++) ;
+		allocsize = cstbl[n];
+	}
+	if (allocsize < SS(fs)) allocsize = SS(fs);
+
+	allocsize /= SS(fs);		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+
+	/* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT type */
+	n_clst = n_part / allocsize;
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;
+	if (n_clst >= 0xFF5) fmt = FS_FAT16;
+	if (n_clst >= 0xFFF5) fmt = FS_FAT32;
+
+	/* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */
+	switch (fmt) {
+	case FS_FAT12:
+		n_fat = ((n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 1 + partition;
+		n_dir = N_ROOTDIR * 32 / SS(fs);
+		break;
+	case FS_FAT16:
+		n_fat = ((n_clst * 2) + 4 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 1 + partition;
+		n_dir = N_ROOTDIR * 32 / SS(fs);
+		break;
+	default:
+		n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 33 - partition;
+		n_dir = 0;
+	}
+	b_fat = b_part + n_rsv;			/* FATs start sector */
+	b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS;	/* Directory start sector */
+	b_data = b_dir + n_dir;			/* Data start sector */
+
+	/* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */
+	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+	n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1);
+	n_fat += (n - b_data) / N_FATS;
+	/* b_dir and b_data are no longer used below */
+
+	/* Determine number of cluster and final check of validity of the FAT type */
+	n_clst = (n_part - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / allocsize;
+	if (   (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < 0xFF5)
+		|| (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < 0xFFF5))
+		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+
+	/* Create partition table if needed */
+	if (!partition) {
+		DWORD n_disk = b_part + n_part;
+
+		mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs));
+		tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table;
+		ST_DWORD(tbl, 0x00010180);		/* Partition start in CHS */
+		if (n_disk < 63UL * 255 * 1024) {	/* Partition end in CHS */
+			n_disk = n_disk / 63 / 255;
+			tbl[7] = (BYTE)n_disk;
+			tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n_disk >> 2) | 63);
+		} else {
+			ST_WORD(&tbl[6], 0xFFFF);
+		}
+		tbl[5] = 254;
+		if (fmt != FS_FAT32)			/* System ID */
+			tbl[4] = (n_part < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06;
+		else
+			tbl[4] = 0x0c;
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63);			/* Partition start in LBA */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_part);		/* Partition size in LBA */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+64, 0xAA55);		/* Signature */
+		if (disk_write(drv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		partition = 0xF8;
+	} else {
+		partition = 0xF0;
+	}
+
+	/* Create boot record */
+	tbl = fs->win;								/* Clear buffer */
+	mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));
+	ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_jmpBoot, 0x90FEEB);			/* Boot code (jmp $, nop) */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, SS(fs));		/* Sector size */
+	tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)allocsize;		/* Sectors per cluster */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv);			/* Reserved sectors */
+	tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS;					/* Number of FATs */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, SS(fs) / 32 * n_dir); /* Number of rootdir entries */
+	if (n_part < 0x10000) {						/* Number of total sectors */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_part);
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_part);
+	}
+	tbl[BPB_Media] = partition;					/* Media descripter */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63);				/* Number of sectors per track */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255);				/* Number of heads */
+	ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_part);			/* Hidden sectors */
+	n = get_fattime();							/* Use current time as a VSN */
+	if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n);				/* Volume serial number */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat);		/* Number of secters per FAT */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80;					/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29;					/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME    FAT     ", 19);	/* Volume lavel, FAT signature */
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n);			/* Volume serial number */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat);		/* Number of secters per FAT */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2);			/* Root directory cluster (2) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1);				/* FSInfo record offset (bs+1) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6);			/* Backup boot record offset (bs+6) */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80;				/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29;				/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME    FAT32   ", 19);	/* Volume lavel, FAT signature */
+	}
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);				/* Signature */
+	if (SS(fs) > 512U) {
+		ST_WORD(tbl+SS(fs)-2, 0xAA55);
+	}
+	if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+0, 1) != RES_OK)
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)
+		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+6, 1);
+
+	/* Initialize FAT area */
+	for (m = 0; m < N_FATS; m++) {
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));		/* 1st sector of the FAT  */
+		if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
+			n = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00;
+			n |= partition;
+			ST_DWORD(tbl, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */
+		} else {
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, 0xFFFFFFF8);	/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF);
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */
+		}
+		if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));		/* Following FAT entries are filled by zero */
+		for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) {
+			if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Initialize Root directory */
+	m = (BYTE)((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? allocsize : n_dir);
+	do {
+		if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	} while (--m);
+
+	/* Create FSInfo record if needed */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 0xFFFFFFFF);
+		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+1, 1);
+		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+7, 1);
+	}
+
+	return (disk_ioctl(drv, CTRL_SYNC, (void*)NULL) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR;
+}
+
+#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get a string from the file                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+char* f_gets (
+	char* buff,	/* Pointer to the string buffer to read */
+	int len,	/* Size of string buffer */
+	FIL* fil	/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int i = 0;
+	char *p = buff;
+	UINT rc;
+
+
+	while (i < len - 1) {			/* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */
+		f_read(fil, p, 1, &rc);
+		if (rc != 1) break;			/* Break when no data to read */
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+		if (*p == '\r') continue;	/* Strip '\r' */
+#endif
+		i++;
+		if (*p++ == '\n') break;	/* Break when reached end of line */
+	}
+	*p = 0;
+	return i ? buff : NULL;			/* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+#include <stdarg.h>
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a character to the file                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_putc (
+	int chr,	/* A character to be output */
+	FIL* fil	/* Ponter to the file object */
+)
+{
+	UINT bw;
+	char c;
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+	if (chr == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil);	/* LF -> CRLF conversion */
+#endif
+	if (!fil) {	/* Special value may be used to switch the destination to any other device */
+	/*	put_console(chr);	*/
+		return chr;
+	}
+	c = (char)chr;
+	f_write(fil, &c, 1, &bw);	/* Write a byte to the file */
+	return bw ? chr : EOF;		/* Return the result */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a string to the file                                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_puts (
+	const char* str,	/* Pointer to the string to be output */
+	FIL* fil			/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int n;
+
+
+	for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) {
+		if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF;
+	}
+	return n;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a formatted string to the file                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_printf (
+	FIL* fil,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const char* str,	/* Pointer to the format string */
+	...					/* Optional arguments... */
+)
+{
+	va_list arp;
+	UCHAR c, f, r;
+	ULONG val;
+	char s[16];
+	int i, w, res, cc;
+
+
+	va_start(arp, str);
+
+	for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) {
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == 0) break;			/* End of string */
+		if (c != '%') {				/* Non escape cahracter */
+			cc = f_putc(c, fil);
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
+			continue;
+		}
+		w = f = 0;
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == '0') {				/* Flag: '0' padding */
+			f = 1; c = *str++;
+		}
+		while (c >= '0' && c <= '9') {	/* Precision */
+			w = w * 10 + (c - '0');
+			c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (c == 'l') {				/* Prefix: Size is long int */
+			f |= 2; c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (c == 's') {				/* Type is string */
+			cc = f_puts(va_arg(arp, char*), fil);
+			continue;
+		}
+		if (c == 'c') {				/* Type is character */
+			cc = f_putc(va_arg(arp, int), fil);
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
+			continue;
+		}
+		r = 0;
+		if (c == 'd') r = 10;		/* Type is signed decimal */
+		if (c == 'u') r = 10;		/* Type is unsigned decimal */
+		if (c == 'X') r = 16;		/* Type is unsigned hexdecimal */
+		if (r == 0) break;			/* Unknown type */
+		if (f & 2) {				/* Get the value */
+			val = (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long);
+		} else {
+			val = (c == 'd') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int);
+		}
+		/* Put numeral string */
+		if (c == 'd') {
+			if (val & 0x80000000) {
+				val = 0 - val;
+				f |= 4;
+			}
+		}
+		i = sizeof(s) - 1; s[i] = 0;
+		do {
+			c = (UCHAR)(val % r + '0');
+			if (c > '9') c += 7;
+			s[--i] = c;
+			val /= r;
+		} while (i && val);
+		if (i && (f & 4)) s[--i] = '-';
+		w = sizeof(s) - 1 - w;
+		while (i && i > w) s[--i] = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' ';
+		cc = f_puts(&s[i], fil);
+	}
+
+	va_end(arp);
+	return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res;
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
index 41e136ee5..69bfd3109 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
@@ -1,596 +1,596 @@
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.07e       (C)ChaN, 2010
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
-/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
-/ developments under license policy of following trems.
-/
-/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
-/
-/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
-/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-/   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
-/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _FATFS
-#define _FATFS	0x007E
-
-#include "integer.h"	/* Basic integer types */
-#include "ffconf.h"		/* FatFs configuration options */
-
-#if _FATFS != _FFCONFIG
-#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h).
-#endif
-
-
-/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */
-
-#if _CODE_PAGE == 932	/* Japanese Shift-JIS */
-#define _DF1S	0x81	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */
-#define _DF1E	0x9F	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */
-#define _DF2S	0xE0	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */
-#define _DF2E	0xFC	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */
-#define _DS1S	0x40	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */
-#define _DS1E	0x7E	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */
-#define _DS2S	0x80	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */
-#define _DS2E	0xFC	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936	/* Simplified Chinese GBK */
-#define _DF1S	0x81
-#define _DF1E	0xFE
-#define _DS1S	0x40
-#define _DS1E	0x7E
-#define _DS2S	0x80
-#define _DS2E	0xFE
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949	/* Korean */
-#define _DF1S	0x81
-#define _DF1E	0xFE
-#define _DS1S	0x41
-#define _DS1E	0x5A
-#define _DS2S	0x61
-#define _DS2E	0x7A
-#define _DS3S	0x81
-#define _DS3E	0xFE
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950	/* Traditional Chinese Big5 */
-#define _DF1S	0x81
-#define _DF1E	0xFE
-#define _DS1S	0x40
-#define _DS1E	0x7E
-#define _DS2S	0xA1
-#define _DS2E	0xFE
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437	/* U.S. (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720	/* Arabic (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737	/* Greek (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \
-				0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775	/* Baltic (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850	/* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852	/* Latin 2 (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855	/* Cyrillic (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \
-				0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857	/* Turkish (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858	/* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862	/* Hebrew (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866	/* Russian (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874	/* Thai (OEM, Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
-				0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \
-				0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1	/* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-
-#else
-#error Unknown code page
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* Character code support macros */
-
-#define IsUpper(c)	(((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z'))
-#define IsLower(c)	(((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z'))
-
-#if _DF1S		/* DBCS configuration */
-
-#ifdef _DF2S	/* Two 1st byte areas */
-#define IsDBCS1(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E))
-#else			/* One 1st byte area */
-#define IsDBCS1(c)	((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E)
-#endif
-
-#ifdef _DS3S	/* Three 2nd byte areas */
-#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E))
-#else			/* Two 2nd byte areas */
-#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E))
-#endif
-
-#else			/* SBCS configuration */
-
-#define IsDBCS1(c)	0
-#define IsDBCS2(c)	0
-
-#endif /* _DF1S */
-
-
-
-/* Definitions corresponds to multi partition */
-
-#if _MULTI_PARTITION		/* Multiple partition configuration */
-
-typedef struct _PARTITION {
-	BYTE pd;	/* Physical drive# */
-	BYTE pt;	/* Partition # (0-3) */
-} PARTITION;
-
-extern
-const PARTITION Drives[];			/* Logical drive# to physical location conversion table */
-#define LD2PD(drv) (Drives[drv].pd)	/* Get physical drive# */
-#define LD2PT(drv) (Drives[drv].pt)	/* Get partition# */
-
-#else						/* Single partition configuration */
-
-#define LD2PD(drv) (drv)	/* Physical drive# is equal to the logical drive# */
-#define LD2PT(drv) 0		/* Always mounts the 1st partition */
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* Definitions corresponds to multiple sector size */
-
-#if _MAX_SS == 512		/* Single sector size */
-#define	SS(fs)	512U
-
-#elif _MAX_SS == 1024 || _MAX_SS == 2048 || _MAX_SS == 4096	/* Multiple sector size */
-#define	SS(fs)	((fs)->s_size)
-
-#else
-#error Sector size must be 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096.
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* Type of file name on FatFs API */
-
-#if _LFN_UNICODE && _USE_LFN
-typedef WCHAR XCHAR;	/* Unicode */
-#else
-typedef char XCHAR;		/* SBCS, DBCS */
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* File system object structure */
-
-typedef struct _FATFS_ {
-	BYTE	fs_type;	/* FAT sub type */
-	BYTE	drive;		/* Physical drive number */
-	BYTE	csize;		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
-	BYTE	n_fats;		/* Number of FAT copies */
-	BYTE	wflag;		/* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
-	BYTE	fsi_flag;	/* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
-	WORD	id;			/* File system mount ID */
-	WORD	n_rootdir;	/* Number of root directory entries (0 on FAT32) */
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-	_SYNC_t	sobj;		/* Identifier of sync object */
-#endif
-#if _MAX_SS != 512
-	WORD	s_size;		/* Sector size */
-#endif
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	DWORD	last_clust;	/* Last allocated cluster */
-	DWORD	free_clust;	/* Number of free clusters */
-	DWORD	fsi_sector;	/* fsinfo sector */
-#endif
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	DWORD	cdir;		/* Current directory (0:root)*/
-#endif
-	DWORD	sects_fat;	/* Sectors per fat */
-	DWORD	max_clust;	/* Maximum cluster# + 1. Number of clusters is max_clust - 2 */
-	DWORD	fatbase;	/* FAT start sector */
-	DWORD	dirbase;	/* Root directory start sector (Cluster# on FAT32) */
-	DWORD	database;	/* Data start sector */
-	DWORD	winsect;	/* Current sector appearing in the win[] */
-	BYTE	win[_MAX_SS];/* Disk access window for Directory/FAT */
-} FATFS;
-
-
-
-/* Directory object structure */
-
-typedef struct _DIR_ {
-	FATFS*	fs;			/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
-	WORD	id;			/* Owner file system mount ID */
-	WORD	index;		/* Current read/write index number */
-	DWORD	sclust;		/* Table start cluster (0:Static table) */
-	DWORD	clust;		/* Current cluster */
-	DWORD	sect;		/* Current sector */
-	BYTE*	dir;		/* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */
-	BYTE*	fn;			/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
-#if _USE_LFN
-	WCHAR*	lfn;		/* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */
-	WORD	lfn_idx;	/* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */
-#endif
-} DIR;
-
-
-
-/* File object structure */
-
-typedef struct _FIL_ {
-	FATFS*	fs;			/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
-	WORD	id;			/* Owner file system mount ID */
-	BYTE	flag;		/* File status flags */
-	BYTE	csect;		/* Sector address in the cluster */
-	DWORD	fptr;		/* File R/W pointer */
-	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
-	DWORD	org_clust;	/* File start cluster */
-	DWORD	curr_clust;	/* Current cluster */
-	DWORD	dsect;		/* Current data sector */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	DWORD	dir_sect;	/* Sector containing the directory entry */
-	BYTE*	dir_ptr;	/* Ponter to the directory entry in the window */
-#endif
-#if !_FS_TINY
-	BYTE	buf[_MAX_SS];/* File R/W buffer */
-#endif
-} FIL;
-
-
-
-/* File status structure */
-
-typedef struct _FILINFO_ {
-	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
-	WORD	fdate;		/* Last modified date */
-	WORD	ftime;		/* Last modified time */
-	BYTE	fattrib;	/* Attribute */
-	char	fname[13];	/* Short file name (8.3 format) */
-#if _USE_LFN
-	XCHAR*	lfname;		/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
-	int 	lfsize;		/* Size of LFN buffer [chrs] */
-#endif
-} FILINFO;
-
-
-
-/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
-
-typedef enum {
-	FR_OK = 0,			/* 0 */
-	FR_DISK_ERR,		/* 1 */
-	FR_INT_ERR,			/* 2 */
-	FR_NOT_READY,		/* 3 */
-	FR_NO_FILE,			/* 4 */
-	FR_NO_PATH,			/* 5 */
-	FR_INVALID_NAME,	/* 6 */
-	FR_DENIED,			/* 7 */
-	FR_EXIST,			/* 8 */
-	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,	/* 9 */
-	FR_WRITE_PROTECTED,	/* 10 */
-	FR_INVALID_DRIVE,	/* 11 */
-	FR_NOT_ENABLED,		/* 12 */
-	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM,	/* 13 */
-	FR_MKFS_ABORTED,	/* 14 */
-	FR_TIMEOUT			/* 15 */
-} FRESULT;
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FatFs module application interface                           */
-
-FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*);						/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
-FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const XCHAR*, BYTE);			/* Open or create a file */
-FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*);			/* Read data from a file */
-FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*);	/* Write data to a file */
-FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD);						/* Move file pointer of a file object */
-FRESULT f_close (FIL*);								/* Close an open file object */
-FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const XCHAR*);				/* Open an existing directory */
-FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);					/* Read a directory item */
-FRESULT f_stat (const XCHAR*, FILINFO*);			/* Get file status */
-FRESULT f_getfree (const XCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**);	/* Get number of free clusters on the drive */
-FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*);							/* Truncate file */
-FRESULT f_sync (FIL*);								/* Flush cached data of a writing file */
-FRESULT f_unlink (const XCHAR*);					/* Delete an existing file or directory */
-FRESULT	f_mkdir (const XCHAR*);						/* Create a new directory */
-FRESULT f_chmod (const XCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE);			/* Change attriburte of the file/dir */
-FRESULT f_utime (const XCHAR*, const FILINFO*);		/* Change timestamp of the file/dir */
-FRESULT f_rename (const XCHAR*, const XCHAR*);		/* Rename/Move a file or directory */
-FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*);	/* Forward data to the stream */
-FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, WORD);					/* Create a file system on the drive */
-FRESULT f_chdir (const XCHAR*);						/* Change current directory */
-FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE);							/* Change current drive */
-
-#if _USE_STRFUNC
-int f_putc (int, FIL*);								/* Put a character to the file */
-int f_puts (const char*, FIL*);						/* Put a string to the file */
-int f_printf (FIL*, const char*, ...);				/* Put a formatted string to the file */
-char* f_gets (char*, int, FIL*);					/* Get a string from the file */
-#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0)
-#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0)
-#ifndef EOF
-#define EOF -1
-#endif
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* User defined functions                                       */
-
-/* Real time clock */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-DWORD get_fattime (void);	/* 31-25: Year(0-127 org.1980), 24-21: Month(1-12), 20-16: Day(1-31) */
-							/* 15-11: Hour(0-23), 10-5: Minute(0-59), 4-0: Second(0-29 *2) */
-#endif
-
-/* Unicode - OEM code conversion */
-#if _USE_LFN
-WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT);
-WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR);
-#endif
-
-/* Sync functions */
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-BOOL ff_cre_syncobj(BYTE, _SYNC_t*);
-BOOL ff_del_syncobj(_SYNC_t);
-BOOL ff_req_grant(_SYNC_t);
-void ff_rel_grant(_SYNC_t);
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Flags and offset address                                     */
-
-
-/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */
-
-#define	FA_READ				0x01
-#define	FA_OPEN_EXISTING	0x00
-#if _FS_READONLY == 0
-#define	FA_WRITE			0x02
-#define	FA_CREATE_NEW		0x04
-#define	FA_CREATE_ALWAYS	0x08
-#define	FA_OPEN_ALWAYS		0x10
-#define FA__WRITTEN			0x20
-#define FA__DIRTY			0x40
-#endif
-#define FA__ERROR			0x80
-
-
-/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
-
-#define FS_FAT12	1
-#define FS_FAT16	2
-#define FS_FAT32	3
-
-
-/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
-
-#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
-#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
-#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
-#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
-#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
-#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
-#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
-#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
-
-
-/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures with byte offset instead
-/ of structure member because there are incompatibility of the packing option
-/ between various compilers. */
-
-#define BS_jmpBoot			0
-#define BS_OEMName			3
-#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11
-#define BPB_SecPerClus		13
-#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14
-#define BPB_NumFATs			16
-#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17
-#define BPB_TotSec16		19
-#define BPB_Media			21
-#define BPB_FATSz16			22
-#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24
-#define BPB_NumHeads		26
-#define BPB_HiddSec			28
-#define BPB_TotSec32		32
-#define BS_55AA				510
-
-#define BS_DrvNum			36
-#define BS_BootSig			38
-#define BS_VolID			39
-#define BS_VolLab			43
-#define BS_FilSysType		54
-
-#define BPB_FATSz32			36
-#define BPB_ExtFlags		40
-#define BPB_FSVer			42
-#define BPB_RootClus		44
-#define BPB_FSInfo			48
-#define BPB_BkBootSec		50
-#define BS_DrvNum32			64
-#define BS_BootSig32		66
-#define BS_VolID32			67
-#define BS_VolLab32			71
-#define BS_FilSysType32		82
-
-#define	FSI_LeadSig			0
-#define	FSI_StrucSig		484
-#define	FSI_Free_Count		488
-#define	FSI_Nxt_Free		492
-
-#define MBR_Table			446
-
-#define	DIR_Name			0
-#define	DIR_Attr			11
-#define	DIR_NTres			12
-#define	DIR_CrtTime			14
-#define	DIR_CrtDate			16
-#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20
-#define	DIR_WrtTime			22
-#define	DIR_WrtDate			24
-#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26
-#define	DIR_FileSize		28
-#define	LDIR_Ord			0
-#define	LDIR_Attr			11
-#define	LDIR_Type			12
-#define	LDIR_Chksum			13
-#define	LDIR_FstClusLO		26
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------*/
-/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
-
-#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
-#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
-#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
-#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
-#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
-#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
-#endif
-
-
-#endif /* _FATFS */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.07e       (C)ChaN, 2010
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following trems.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _FATFS
+#define _FATFS	0x007E
+
+#include "integer.h"	/* Basic integer types */
+#include "ffconf.h"		/* FatFs configuration options */
+
+#if _FATFS != _FFCONFIG
+#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h).
+#endif
+
+
+/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */
+
+#if _CODE_PAGE == 932	/* Japanese Shift-JIS */
+#define _DF1S	0x81	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */
+#define _DF1E	0x9F	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */
+#define _DF2S	0xE0	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */
+#define _DF2E	0xFC	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */
+#define _DS1S	0x40	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */
+#define _DS1E	0x7E	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */
+#define _DS2S	0x80	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */
+#define _DS2E	0xFC	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936	/* Simplified Chinese GBK */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0x80
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949	/* Korean */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x41
+#define _DS1E	0x5A
+#define _DS2S	0x61
+#define _DS2E	0x7A
+#define _DS3S	0x81
+#define _DS3E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950	/* Traditional Chinese Big5 */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0xA1
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437	/* U.S. (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720	/* Arabic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737	/* Greek (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \
+				0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775	/* Baltic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850	/* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852	/* Latin 2 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855	/* Cyrillic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \
+				0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857	/* Turkish (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858	/* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862	/* Hebrew (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866	/* Russian (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874	/* Thai (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \
+				0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1	/* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+
+#else
+#error Unknown code page
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Character code support macros */
+
+#define IsUpper(c)	(((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z'))
+#define IsLower(c)	(((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z'))
+
+#if _DF1S		/* DBCS configuration */
+
+#ifdef _DF2S	/* Two 1st byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E))
+#else			/* One 1st byte area */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _DS3S	/* Three 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E))
+#else			/* Two 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E))
+#endif
+
+#else			/* SBCS configuration */
+
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	0
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	0
+
+#endif /* _DF1S */
+
+
+
+/* Definitions corresponds to multi partition */
+
+#if _MULTI_PARTITION		/* Multiple partition configuration */
+
+typedef struct _PARTITION {
+	BYTE pd;	/* Physical drive# */
+	BYTE pt;	/* Partition # (0-3) */
+} PARTITION;
+
+extern
+const PARTITION Drives[];			/* Logical drive# to physical location conversion table */
+#define LD2PD(drv) (Drives[drv].pd)	/* Get physical drive# */
+#define LD2PT(drv) (Drives[drv].pt)	/* Get partition# */
+
+#else						/* Single partition configuration */
+
+#define LD2PD(drv) (drv)	/* Physical drive# is equal to the logical drive# */
+#define LD2PT(drv) 0		/* Always mounts the 1st partition */
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Definitions corresponds to multiple sector size */
+
+#if _MAX_SS == 512		/* Single sector size */
+#define	SS(fs)	512U
+
+#elif _MAX_SS == 1024 || _MAX_SS == 2048 || _MAX_SS == 4096	/* Multiple sector size */
+#define	SS(fs)	((fs)->s_size)
+
+#else
+#error Sector size must be 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096.
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Type of file name on FatFs API */
+
+#if _LFN_UNICODE && _USE_LFN
+typedef WCHAR XCHAR;	/* Unicode */
+#else
+typedef char XCHAR;		/* SBCS, DBCS */
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* File system object structure */
+
+typedef struct _FATFS_ {
+	BYTE	fs_type;	/* FAT sub type */
+	BYTE	drive;		/* Physical drive number */
+	BYTE	csize;		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	BYTE	n_fats;		/* Number of FAT copies */
+	BYTE	wflag;		/* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	BYTE	fsi_flag;	/* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	WORD	id;			/* File system mount ID */
+	WORD	n_rootdir;	/* Number of root directory entries (0 on FAT32) */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+	_SYNC_t	sobj;		/* Identifier of sync object */
+#endif
+#if _MAX_SS != 512
+	WORD	s_size;		/* Sector size */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	last_clust;	/* Last allocated cluster */
+	DWORD	free_clust;	/* Number of free clusters */
+	DWORD	fsi_sector;	/* fsinfo sector */
+#endif
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	DWORD	cdir;		/* Current directory (0:root)*/
+#endif
+	DWORD	sects_fat;	/* Sectors per fat */
+	DWORD	max_clust;	/* Maximum cluster# + 1. Number of clusters is max_clust - 2 */
+	DWORD	fatbase;	/* FAT start sector */
+	DWORD	dirbase;	/* Root directory start sector (Cluster# on FAT32) */
+	DWORD	database;	/* Data start sector */
+	DWORD	winsect;	/* Current sector appearing in the win[] */
+	BYTE	win[_MAX_SS];/* Disk access window for Directory/FAT */
+} FATFS;
+
+
+
+/* Directory object structure */
+
+typedef struct _DIR_ {
+	FATFS*	fs;			/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
+	WORD	id;			/* Owner file system mount ID */
+	WORD	index;		/* Current read/write index number */
+	DWORD	sclust;		/* Table start cluster (0:Static table) */
+	DWORD	clust;		/* Current cluster */
+	DWORD	sect;		/* Current sector */
+	BYTE*	dir;		/* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */
+	BYTE*	fn;			/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	WCHAR*	lfn;		/* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */
+	WORD	lfn_idx;	/* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */
+#endif
+} DIR;
+
+
+
+/* File object structure */
+
+typedef struct _FIL_ {
+	FATFS*	fs;			/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
+	WORD	id;			/* Owner file system mount ID */
+	BYTE	flag;		/* File status flags */
+	BYTE	csect;		/* Sector address in the cluster */
+	DWORD	fptr;		/* File R/W pointer */
+	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
+	DWORD	org_clust;	/* File start cluster */
+	DWORD	curr_clust;	/* Current cluster */
+	DWORD	dsect;		/* Current data sector */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	dir_sect;	/* Sector containing the directory entry */
+	BYTE*	dir_ptr;	/* Ponter to the directory entry in the window */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_TINY
+	BYTE	buf[_MAX_SS];/* File R/W buffer */
+#endif
+} FIL;
+
+
+
+/* File status structure */
+
+typedef struct _FILINFO_ {
+	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
+	WORD	fdate;		/* Last modified date */
+	WORD	ftime;		/* Last modified time */
+	BYTE	fattrib;	/* Attribute */
+	char	fname[13];	/* Short file name (8.3 format) */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	XCHAR*	lfname;		/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	int 	lfsize;		/* Size of LFN buffer [chrs] */
+#endif
+} FILINFO;
+
+
+
+/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
+
+typedef enum {
+	FR_OK = 0,			/* 0 */
+	FR_DISK_ERR,		/* 1 */
+	FR_INT_ERR,			/* 2 */
+	FR_NOT_READY,		/* 3 */
+	FR_NO_FILE,			/* 4 */
+	FR_NO_PATH,			/* 5 */
+	FR_INVALID_NAME,	/* 6 */
+	FR_DENIED,			/* 7 */
+	FR_EXIST,			/* 8 */
+	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,	/* 9 */
+	FR_WRITE_PROTECTED,	/* 10 */
+	FR_INVALID_DRIVE,	/* 11 */
+	FR_NOT_ENABLED,		/* 12 */
+	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM,	/* 13 */
+	FR_MKFS_ABORTED,	/* 14 */
+	FR_TIMEOUT			/* 15 */
+} FRESULT;
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FatFs module application interface                           */
+
+FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*);						/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
+FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const XCHAR*, BYTE);			/* Open or create a file */
+FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*);			/* Read data from a file */
+FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*);	/* Write data to a file */
+FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD);						/* Move file pointer of a file object */
+FRESULT f_close (FIL*);								/* Close an open file object */
+FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const XCHAR*);				/* Open an existing directory */
+FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);					/* Read a directory item */
+FRESULT f_stat (const XCHAR*, FILINFO*);			/* Get file status */
+FRESULT f_getfree (const XCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**);	/* Get number of free clusters on the drive */
+FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*);							/* Truncate file */
+FRESULT f_sync (FIL*);								/* Flush cached data of a writing file */
+FRESULT f_unlink (const XCHAR*);					/* Delete an existing file or directory */
+FRESULT	f_mkdir (const XCHAR*);						/* Create a new directory */
+FRESULT f_chmod (const XCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE);			/* Change attriburte of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_utime (const XCHAR*, const FILINFO*);		/* Change timestamp of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_rename (const XCHAR*, const XCHAR*);		/* Rename/Move a file or directory */
+FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*);	/* Forward data to the stream */
+FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, WORD);					/* Create a file system on the drive */
+FRESULT f_chdir (const XCHAR*);						/* Change current directory */
+FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE);							/* Change current drive */
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC
+int f_putc (int, FIL*);								/* Put a character to the file */
+int f_puts (const char*, FIL*);						/* Put a string to the file */
+int f_printf (FIL*, const char*, ...);				/* Put a formatted string to the file */
+char* f_gets (char*, int, FIL*);					/* Get a string from the file */
+#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0)
+#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0)
+#ifndef EOF
+#define EOF -1
+#endif
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* User defined functions                                       */
+
+/* Real time clock */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+DWORD get_fattime (void);	/* 31-25: Year(0-127 org.1980), 24-21: Month(1-12), 20-16: Day(1-31) */
+							/* 15-11: Hour(0-23), 10-5: Minute(0-59), 4-0: Second(0-29 *2) */
+#endif
+
+/* Unicode - OEM code conversion */
+#if _USE_LFN
+WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT);
+WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR);
+#endif
+
+/* Sync functions */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+BOOL ff_cre_syncobj(BYTE, _SYNC_t*);
+BOOL ff_del_syncobj(_SYNC_t);
+BOOL ff_req_grant(_SYNC_t);
+void ff_rel_grant(_SYNC_t);
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Flags and offset address                                     */
+
+
+/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */
+
+#define	FA_READ				0x01
+#define	FA_OPEN_EXISTING	0x00
+#if _FS_READONLY == 0
+#define	FA_WRITE			0x02
+#define	FA_CREATE_NEW		0x04
+#define	FA_CREATE_ALWAYS	0x08
+#define	FA_OPEN_ALWAYS		0x10
+#define FA__WRITTEN			0x20
+#define FA__DIRTY			0x40
+#endif
+#define FA__ERROR			0x80
+
+
+/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
+
+#define FS_FAT12	1
+#define FS_FAT16	2
+#define FS_FAT32	3
+
+
+/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
+
+#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
+#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
+#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
+#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
+#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
+#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
+#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
+#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
+
+
+/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures with byte offset instead
+/ of structure member because there are incompatibility of the packing option
+/ between various compilers. */
+
+#define BS_jmpBoot			0
+#define BS_OEMName			3
+#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11
+#define BPB_SecPerClus		13
+#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14
+#define BPB_NumFATs			16
+#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17
+#define BPB_TotSec16		19
+#define BPB_Media			21
+#define BPB_FATSz16			22
+#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24
+#define BPB_NumHeads		26
+#define BPB_HiddSec			28
+#define BPB_TotSec32		32
+#define BS_55AA				510
+
+#define BS_DrvNum			36
+#define BS_BootSig			38
+#define BS_VolID			39
+#define BS_VolLab			43
+#define BS_FilSysType		54
+
+#define BPB_FATSz32			36
+#define BPB_ExtFlags		40
+#define BPB_FSVer			42
+#define BPB_RootClus		44
+#define BPB_FSInfo			48
+#define BPB_BkBootSec		50
+#define BS_DrvNum32			64
+#define BS_BootSig32		66
+#define BS_VolID32			67
+#define BS_VolLab32			71
+#define BS_FilSysType32		82
+
+#define	FSI_LeadSig			0
+#define	FSI_StrucSig		484
+#define	FSI_Free_Count		488
+#define	FSI_Nxt_Free		492
+
+#define MBR_Table			446
+
+#define	DIR_Name			0
+#define	DIR_Attr			11
+#define	DIR_NTres			12
+#define	DIR_CrtTime			14
+#define	DIR_CrtDate			16
+#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20
+#define	DIR_WrtTime			22
+#define	DIR_WrtDate			24
+#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26
+#define	DIR_FileSize		28
+#define	LDIR_Ord			0
+#define	LDIR_Attr			11
+#define	LDIR_Type			12
+#define	LDIR_Chksum			13
+#define	LDIR_FstClusLO		26
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------*/
+/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
+#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
+#endif
+
+
+#endif /* _FATFS */
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
index 9b414e979..872e710c4 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
@@ -1,166 +1,166 @@
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file  R0.07e  (C)ChaN, 2010
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/
-/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
-/ the configuration options.
-/
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#ifndef _FFCONFIG
-#define _FFCONFIG 0x007E
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Function and Buffer Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define	_FS_TINY	1		/* 0 or 1 */
-/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system
-/  object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file
-/  data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */
-
-
-#define _FS_READONLY	0	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes
-/  writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename,
-/  f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */
-
-
-#define _FS_MINIMIZE	2	/* 0, 1, 2 or 3 */
-/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions.
-/
-/   0: Full function.
-/   1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename
-/      are removed.
-/   2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to level 1.
-/   3: f_lseek is removed in addition to level 2. */
-
-
-#define	_USE_STRFUNC	0	/* 0, 1 or 2 */
-/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */
-
-
-#define	_USE_MKFS	0		/* 0 or 1 */
-/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */
-
-
-#define	_USE_FORWARD	0	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */
-
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Locale and Namespace Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define _CODE_PAGE	932
-/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system.
-/  Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure.
-/
-/   932  - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   936  - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   949  - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   950  - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   1250 - Central Europe (Windows)
-/   1251 - Cyrillic (Windows)
-/   1252 - Latin 1 (Windows)
-/   1253 - Greek (Windows)
-/   1254 - Turkish (Windows)
-/   1255 - Hebrew (Windows)
-/   1256 - Arabic (Windows)
-/   1257 - Baltic (Windows)
-/   1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows)
-/   437  - U.S. (OEM)
-/   720  - Arabic (OEM)
-/   737  - Greek (OEM)
-/   775  - Baltic (OEM)
-/   850  - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM)
-/   858  - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM)
-/   852  - Latin 2 (OEM)
-/   855  - Cyrillic (OEM)
-/   866  - Russian (OEM)
-/   857  - Turkish (OEM)
-/   862  - Hebrew (OEM)
-/   874  - Thai (OEM, Windows)
-/	1    - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.)
-*/
-
-
-#define	_USE_LFN	0		/* 0, 1 or 2 */
-#define	_MAX_LFN	255		/* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */
-/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support.
-/
-/   0: Disable LFN. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect.
-/   1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the bss. NOT REENTRANT.
-/   2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK.
-/
-/  The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. When enable LFN,
-/  two Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added
-/  to the project. */
-
-
-#define	_LFN_UNICODE	0	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode,
-/  enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1.
-*/
-
-
-#define _FS_RPATH	0		/* 0 or 1 */
-/* When _FS_RPATH is set to 1, relative path feature is enabled and f_chdir,
-/  f_chdrive function are available.
-/  Note that output of the f_readdir fnction is affected by this option. */
-
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Physical Drive Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define _DRIVES		1
-/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */
-
-
-#define	_MAX_SS		512		/* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */
-/* Maximum sector size to be handled.
-/  Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be
-/  required for floppy disk (512/1024) and optical disk (512/2048).
-/  When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implememted
-/  to the disk_ioctl function. */
-
-
-#define	_MULTI_PARTITION	0	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* When _MULTI_PARTITION is set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical
-/ drive number and can mount only first primaly partition. When it is set to 1,
-/ each volume is tied to the partitions listed in Drives[]. */
-
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ System Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define _WORD_ACCESS	1	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* The _WORD_ACCESS option defines which access method is used to the word
-/  data on the FAT volume.
-/
-/   0: Byte-by-byte access. Always compatible with all platforms.
-/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
-/
-/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned
-/  word access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
-/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
-/  performance and code size. */
-
-
-#define _FS_REENTRANT	0		/* 0 or 1 */
-#define _FS_TIMEOUT		1000	/* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */
-#define	_SYNC_t			HANDLE	/* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */
-/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy of the FatFs module.
-/
-/   0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect.
-/   1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers,
-/      ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj
-/      function must be added to the project. */
-
-
-#endif /* _FFCONFIG */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file  R0.07e  (C)ChaN, 2010
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/
+/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
+/ the configuration options.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#ifndef _FFCONFIG
+#define _FFCONFIG 0x007E
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Function and Buffer Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define	_FS_TINY	1		/* 0 or 1 */
+/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system
+/  object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file
+/  data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */
+
+
+#define _FS_READONLY	0	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes
+/  writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename,
+/  f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */
+
+
+#define _FS_MINIMIZE	2	/* 0, 1, 2 or 3 */
+/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions.
+/
+/   0: Full function.
+/   1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename
+/      are removed.
+/   2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to level 1.
+/   3: f_lseek is removed in addition to level 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_STRFUNC	0	/* 0, 1 or 2 */
+/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_MKFS	0		/* 0 or 1 */
+/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */
+
+
+#define	_USE_FORWARD	0	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Locale and Namespace Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _CODE_PAGE	932
+/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system.
+/  Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure.
+/
+/   932  - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   936  - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   949  - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   950  - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   1250 - Central Europe (Windows)
+/   1251 - Cyrillic (Windows)
+/   1252 - Latin 1 (Windows)
+/   1253 - Greek (Windows)
+/   1254 - Turkish (Windows)
+/   1255 - Hebrew (Windows)
+/   1256 - Arabic (Windows)
+/   1257 - Baltic (Windows)
+/   1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows)
+/   437  - U.S. (OEM)
+/   720  - Arabic (OEM)
+/   737  - Greek (OEM)
+/   775  - Baltic (OEM)
+/   850  - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM)
+/   858  - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM)
+/   852  - Latin 2 (OEM)
+/   855  - Cyrillic (OEM)
+/   866  - Russian (OEM)
+/   857  - Turkish (OEM)
+/   862  - Hebrew (OEM)
+/   874  - Thai (OEM, Windows)
+/	1    - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.)
+*/
+
+
+#define	_USE_LFN	0		/* 0, 1 or 2 */
+#define	_MAX_LFN	255		/* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */
+/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support.
+/
+/   0: Disable LFN. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect.
+/   1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the bss. NOT REENTRANT.
+/   2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK.
+/
+/  The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. When enable LFN,
+/  two Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added
+/  to the project. */
+
+
+#define	_LFN_UNICODE	0	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode,
+/  enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1.
+*/
+
+
+#define _FS_RPATH	0		/* 0 or 1 */
+/* When _FS_RPATH is set to 1, relative path feature is enabled and f_chdir,
+/  f_chdrive function are available.
+/  Note that output of the f_readdir fnction is affected by this option. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Physical Drive Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _DRIVES		1
+/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */
+
+
+#define	_MAX_SS		512		/* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */
+/* Maximum sector size to be handled.
+/  Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be
+/  required for floppy disk (512/1024) and optical disk (512/2048).
+/  When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implememted
+/  to the disk_ioctl function. */
+
+
+#define	_MULTI_PARTITION	0	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* When _MULTI_PARTITION is set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical
+/ drive number and can mount only first primaly partition. When it is set to 1,
+/ each volume is tied to the partitions listed in Drives[]. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ System Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _WORD_ACCESS	1	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* The _WORD_ACCESS option defines which access method is used to the word
+/  data on the FAT volume.
+/
+/   0: Byte-by-byte access. Always compatible with all platforms.
+/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
+/
+/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned
+/  word access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
+/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
+/  performance and code size. */
+
+
+#define _FS_REENTRANT	0		/* 0 or 1 */
+#define _FS_TIMEOUT		1000	/* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */
+#define	_SYNC_t			HANDLE	/* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */
+/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy of the FatFs module.
+/
+/   0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect.
+/   1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers,
+/      ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj
+/      function must be added to the project. */
+
+
+#endif /* _FFCONFIG */
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
index 1d6bac368..851a78da2 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
@@ -1,37 +1,37 @@
-/*-------------------------------------------*/
-/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
-/*-------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _INTEGER
-
-#if 0
-#include <windows.h>
-#else
-
-/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
-typedef int				INT;
-typedef unsigned int	UINT;
-
-/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
-typedef signed char		CHAR;
-typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
-typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
-
-/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
-typedef short			SHORT;
-typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
-typedef unsigned short	WORD;
-typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
-
-/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
-typedef long			LONG;
-typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
-typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
-
-/* Boolean type */
-typedef enum { FALSE = 0, TRUE } BOOL;
-
-#endif
-
-#define _INTEGER
-#endif
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _INTEGER
+
+#if 0
+#include <windows.h>
+#else
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
+typedef int				INT;
+typedef unsigned int	UINT;
+
+/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
+typedef signed char		CHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
+typedef short			SHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	WORD;
+typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
+
+/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
+typedef long			LONG;
+typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
+typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
+
+/* Boolean type */
+typedef enum { FALSE = 0, TRUE } BOOL;
+
+#endif
+
+#define _INTEGER
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c
index 8a376a41b..55312e87b 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -1,281 +1,281 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
- *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
- *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
-#include "SCSI.h"
-
-/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
- *  features and capabilities.
- */
-SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
-	{
-		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
-		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
-			
-		.Removable           = true,
-			
-		.Version             = 0,
-			
-		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
-		.NormACA             = false,
-		.TrmTsk              = false,
-		.AERC                = false,
-
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
-			
-		.SoftReset           = false,
-		.CmdQue              = false,
-		.Linked              = false,
-		.Sync                = false,
-		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
-		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
-		.RelAddr             = false,
-		
-		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
-		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
-		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
-	};
-
-/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
- *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
- */
-SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
-	{
-		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
-	};
-
-
-/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
- *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
- *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Set initial sense data, before the requested command is processed */
-	SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
-	               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-	               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-					   
-	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
-	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
-	{
-		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
-			SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
-			SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
-			SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
-			SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
-			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
-			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
-		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
-		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
-			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-			break;
-		default:
-			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
-			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-			break;
-	}
-
-	return (SenseData.SenseKey == SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD);
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
- *  and capabilities to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
-	                                         MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
-	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
-	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
-
-	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
-	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
-	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
-	{
-		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-	
-	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
- *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
-	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
-	
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
- *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
-	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
- *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
- *  supported.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
-	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
-	{
-		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
-	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
-	{
-		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
-	
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
- *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
- *  reading and writing of the data.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead)
-{
-	uint32_t BlockAddress;
-	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
-	
-	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
-	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
-
-	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
-	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
-	
-	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
-	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
-	{
-		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
-	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
-	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-	else
-	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-
-	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+			
+		.Removable           = true,
+			
+		.Version             = 0,
+			
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+			
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+		
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Set initial sense data, before the requested command is processed */
+	SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+	               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+	               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+					   
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	return (SenseData.SenseKey == SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD);
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
+	                                         MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
+	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+	
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
+	
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
+	
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+	
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+	
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+}
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h
index 190d625be..914ca7b61 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -1,86 +1,86 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for SCSI.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _SCSI_H_
-#define _SCSI_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-
-		#include "../TempDataLogger.h"
-		#include "../Descriptors.h"
-		#include "DataflashManager.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
-		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
-		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
-		 */
-		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = (key);                   \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (acode);      \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (aqual); }MACROE
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_READ           true
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_WRITE          false
-
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
-		
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
-			static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+
+		#include "../TempDataLogger.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = (key);                   \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (acode);      \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (aqual); }MACROE
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+		
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c
index 59105286e..b5b913f37 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c
@@ -1,312 +1,312 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the TemperatureDataLogger project. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "TempDataLogger.h"
-
-/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber           = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize        = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-
-				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
-uint8_t PrevHIDReportBuffer[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Generic_HID_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber              = 1,
-
-				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = GENERIC_IN_EPNUM,
-				.ReportINEndpointSize         = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
-				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
-				
-				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevHIDReportBuffer,
-				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevHIDReportBuffer),
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Non-volatile Logging Interval value in EEPROM, stored as a number of 500ms ticks */
-uint8_t EEMEM LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM;
-
-/** SRAM Logging Interval value fetched from EEPROM, stored as a number of 500ms ticks */
-uint8_t LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM;
-
-/** Total number of 500ms logging ticks elapsed since the last log value was recorded */
-uint16_t CurrentLoggingTicks;
-
-/** FAT Fs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the dataflash contents. */
-FATFS DiskFATState;
-
-/** FAT Fs structure to hold a FAT file handle for the log data write destination. */
-FIL TempLogFile;
-
-
-/** ISR to handle the 500ms ticks for sampling and data logging */
-ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
-{
-	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDs_GetLEDs();
-
-	/* Check to see if the logging interval has expired */
-	if (CurrentLoggingTicks++ < LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM)
-	  return;
-	    
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
-	/* Reset log tick counter to prepare for next logging interval */
-	CurrentLoggingTicks = 0;
-	
-	/* Only log when not connected to a USB host */
-	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
-	{
-		uint8_t Day,  Month,  Year;
-		uint8_t Hour, Minute, Second;
-
-		DS1307_GetDate(&Day,  &Month,  &Year);
-		DS1307_GetTime(&Hour, &Minute, &Second);
-
-		char     LineBuffer[100];
-		uint16_t BytesWritten;
-
-		BytesWritten = sprintf(LineBuffer, "%02d/%02d/20%04d, %02d:%02d:%02d, %d Degrees\r\n",
-							   Day, Month, Year, Hour, Minute, Second, Temperature_GetTemperature());
-
-		f_write(&TempLogFile, LineBuffer, BytesWritten, &BytesWritten);
-		f_sync(&TempLogFile);
-	}
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
-}
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	/* Fetch logging interval from EEPROM */
-	LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = eeprom_read_byte(&LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM);
-
-	/* Mount and open the log file on the dataflash FAT partition */
-	OpenLogFile();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	/* Discard the first sample from the temperature sensor, as it is generally incorrect */
-	volatile uint8_t Dummy = Temperature_GetTemperature();
-	(void)Dummy;
-	
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-		HID_Device_USBTask(&Generic_HID_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Opens the log file on the Dataflash's FAT formatted partition according to the current date */
-void OpenLogFile(void)
-{
-	char LogFileName[12];
-
-	/* Get the current date for the filename as "DDMMYY.csv" */
-	uint8_t Day, Month, Year;
-	DS1307_GetDate(&Day, &Month, &Year);
-	sprintf(LogFileName, "%02d%02d%02d.csv", Day, Month, Year);
-
-	/* Mount the storage device, open the file */
-	f_mount(0, &DiskFATState);
-	f_open(&TempLogFile, LogFileName, FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_WRITE);
-	f_lseek(&TempLogFile, TempLogFile.fsize);
-}
-
-/** Closes the open data log file on the Dataflash's FAT formatted partition */
-void CloseLogFile(void)
-{
-	/* Sync any data waiting to be written, unmount the storage device */
-	f_sync(&TempLogFile);
-	f_close(&TempLogFile);
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	LEDs_Init();
-	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
-	ADC_Init(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128);
-	Temperature_Init();
-	Dataflash_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-	TWI_Init();
-	
-	/* 500ms logging interval timer configuration */
-	OCR1A   = ((F_CPU / 1024) / 2);
-	TCCR1B  = (1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10);
-	TIMSK1  = (1 << OCIE1A);
-
-	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
-	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-
-	/* Close the log file so that the host has exclusive filesystem access */
-	CloseLogFile();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	
-	/* Mount and open the log file on the dataflash FAT partition */
-	OpenLogFile();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	  
-	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Generic_HID_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);	
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Generic_HID_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
- */
-bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool CommandSuccess;
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	
-	return CommandSuccess;
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
- *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
- *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
- *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
- *
- *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
-{
-	Device_Report_t* ReportParams = (Device_Report_t*)ReportData;
-
-	DS1307_GetDate(&ReportParams->Day,  &ReportParams->Month,  &ReportParams->Year);
-	DS1307_GetTime(&ReportParams->Hour, &ReportParams->Minute, &ReportParams->Second);
-	
-	ReportParams->LogInterval500MS = LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM;
-
-	*ReportSize = sizeof(Device_Report_t);
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
- *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
- *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
- *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
- */
-void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
-                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
-{
-	Device_Report_t* ReportParams = (Device_Report_t*)ReportData;
-	
-	DS1307_SetDate(ReportParams->Day,  ReportParams->Month,  ReportParams->Year);
-	DS1307_SetTime(ReportParams->Hour, ReportParams->Minute, ReportParams->Second);
-	
-	/* If the logging interval has changed from its current value, write it to EEPROM */
-	if (LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM != ReportParams->LogInterval500MS)
-	{
-		LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = ReportParams->LogInterval500MS;
-		eeprom_write_byte(&LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM, LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM);
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the TemperatureDataLogger project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "TempDataLogger.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize        = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+
+				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+uint8_t PrevHIDReportBuffer[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Generic_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = 1,
+
+				.ReportINEndpointNumber       = GENERIC_IN_EPNUM,
+				.ReportINEndpointSize         = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+				.ReportINEndpointDoubleBank   = false,
+				
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Non-volatile Logging Interval value in EEPROM, stored as a number of 500ms ticks */
+uint8_t EEMEM LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM;
+
+/** SRAM Logging Interval value fetched from EEPROM, stored as a number of 500ms ticks */
+uint8_t LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM;
+
+/** Total number of 500ms logging ticks elapsed since the last log value was recorded */
+uint16_t CurrentLoggingTicks;
+
+/** FAT Fs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the dataflash contents. */
+FATFS DiskFATState;
+
+/** FAT Fs structure to hold a FAT file handle for the log data write destination. */
+FIL TempLogFile;
+
+
+/** ISR to handle the 500ms ticks for sampling and data logging */
+ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDs_GetLEDs();
+
+	/* Check to see if the logging interval has expired */
+	if (CurrentLoggingTicks++ < LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM)
+	  return;
+	    
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	/* Reset log tick counter to prepare for next logging interval */
+	CurrentLoggingTicks = 0;
+	
+	/* Only log when not connected to a USB host */
+	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+	{
+		uint8_t Day,  Month,  Year;
+		uint8_t Hour, Minute, Second;
+
+		DS1307_GetDate(&Day,  &Month,  &Year);
+		DS1307_GetTime(&Hour, &Minute, &Second);
+
+		char     LineBuffer[100];
+		uint16_t BytesWritten;
+
+		BytesWritten = sprintf(LineBuffer, "%02d/%02d/20%04d, %02d:%02d:%02d, %d Degrees\r\n",
+							   Day, Month, Year, Hour, Minute, Second, Temperature_GetTemperature());
+
+		f_write(&TempLogFile, LineBuffer, BytesWritten, &BytesWritten);
+		f_sync(&TempLogFile);
+	}
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Fetch logging interval from EEPROM */
+	LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = eeprom_read_byte(&LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM);
+
+	/* Mount and open the log file on the dataflash FAT partition */
+	OpenLogFile();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	/* Discard the first sample from the temperature sensor, as it is generally incorrect */
+	volatile uint8_t Dummy = Temperature_GetTemperature();
+	(void)Dummy;
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Opens the log file on the Dataflash's FAT formatted partition according to the current date */
+void OpenLogFile(void)
+{
+	char LogFileName[12];
+
+	/* Get the current date for the filename as "DDMMYY.csv" */
+	uint8_t Day, Month, Year;
+	DS1307_GetDate(&Day, &Month, &Year);
+	sprintf(LogFileName, "%02d%02d%02d.csv", Day, Month, Year);
+
+	/* Mount the storage device, open the file */
+	f_mount(0, &DiskFATState);
+	f_open(&TempLogFile, LogFileName, FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_WRITE);
+	f_lseek(&TempLogFile, TempLogFile.fsize);
+}
+
+/** Closes the open data log file on the Dataflash's FAT formatted partition */
+void CloseLogFile(void)
+{
+	/* Sync any data waiting to be written, unmount the storage device */
+	f_sync(&TempLogFile);
+	f_close(&TempLogFile);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+	ADC_Init(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128);
+	Temperature_Init();
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	TWI_Init();
+	
+	/* 500ms logging interval timer configuration */
+	OCR1A   = ((F_CPU / 1024) / 2);
+	TCCR1B  = (1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10);
+	TIMSK1  = (1 << OCIE1A);
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Close the log file so that the host has exclusive filesystem access */
+	CloseLogFile();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	
+	/* Mount and open the log file on the dataflash FAT partition */
+	OpenLogFile();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	  
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Generic_HID_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);	
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID  Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report to create, either REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In or REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out] ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true to force the sending of the report, false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize)
+{
+	Device_Report_t* ReportParams = (Device_Report_t*)ReportData;
+
+	DS1307_GetDate(&ReportParams->Day,  &ReportParams->Month,  &ReportParams->Year);
+	DS1307_GetTime(&ReportParams->Hour, &ReportParams->Minute, &ReportParams->Second);
+	
+	ReportParams->LogInterval500MS = LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM;
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(Device_Report_t);
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID  Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	Device_Report_t* ReportParams = (Device_Report_t*)ReportData;
+	
+	DS1307_SetDate(ReportParams->Day,  ReportParams->Month,  ReportParams->Year);
+	DS1307_SetTime(ReportParams->Hour, ReportParams->Minute, ReportParams->Second);
+	
+	/* If the logging interval has changed from its current value, write it to EEPROM */
+	if (LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM != ReportParams->LogInterval500MS)
+	{
+		LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = ReportParams->LogInterval500MS;
+		eeprom_write_byte(&LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM, LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM);
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h
index a6e770bb0..b6a3389fe 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h
@@ -1,113 +1,113 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for TempDataLogger.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _TEMP_DATALOGGER_H_
-#define _TEMP_DATALOGGER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
-		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
-		#include "Lib/FATFs/ff.h"
-		#include "Lib/DS1307.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
-		
-		/** Filename for the log data when written to the dataflash FAT filesystem. */
-		#define LOG_FILENAME             "TEMPLOG.txt"
-		
-		/** Data log interval between samples, in tens of milliseconds */
-		#define LOG_INTERVAL_10MS        1000
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t Day;
-			uint8_t Month;
-			uint8_t Year;
-
-			uint8_t Hour;
-			uint8_t Minute;
-			uint8_t Second;
-			
-			uint8_t LogInterval500MS;
-		} Device_Report_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void OpenLogFile(void);
-		void CloseLogFile(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
-                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
-		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
-		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TempDataLogger.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TEMP_DATALOGGER_H_
+#define _TEMP_DATALOGGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Lib/FATFs/ff.h"
+		#include "Lib/DS1307.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HID.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+		
+		/** Filename for the log data when written to the dataflash FAT filesystem. */
+		#define LOG_FILENAME             "TEMPLOG.txt"
+		
+		/** Data log interval between samples, in tens of milliseconds */
+		#define LOG_INTERVAL_10MS        1000
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Day;
+			uint8_t Month;
+			uint8_t Year;
+
+			uint8_t Hour;
+			uint8_t Minute;
+			uint8_t Second;
+			
+			uint8_t LogInterval500MS;
+		} Device_Report_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void OpenLogFile(void);
+		void CloseLogFile(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                                 const uint8_t ReportType, void* ReportData, uint16_t* ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, const uint8_t ReportID, 
+		                                          const void* ReportData, const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt
index b87303c39..fc8a5de7e 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt
@@ -1,165 +1,165 @@
-		   GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
-                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
-
- Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
- of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-
-
-  This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates
-the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public
-License, supplemented by the additional permissions listed below.
-
-  0. Additional Definitions. 
-
-  As used herein, "this License" refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser
-General Public License, and the "GNU GPL" refers to version 3 of the GNU
-General Public License.
-
-  "The Library" refers to a covered work governed by this License,
-other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below.
-
-  An "Application" is any work that makes use of an interface provided
-by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library.
-Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode
-of using an interface provided by the Library.
-
-  A "Combined Work" is a work produced by combining or linking an
-Application with the Library.  The particular version of the Library
-with which the Combined Work was made is also called the "Linked
-Version".
-
-  The "Minimal Corresponding Source" for a Combined Work means the
-Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source code
-for portions of the Combined Work that, considered in isolation, are
-based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version.
-
-  The "Corresponding Application Code" for a Combined Work means the
-object code and/or source code for the Application, including any data
-and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the
-Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work.
-
-  1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL.
-
-  You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License
-without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL.
-
-  2. Conveying Modified Versions.
-
-  If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a
-facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application
-that uses the facility (other than as an argument passed when the
-facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified
-version:
-
-   a) under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to
-   ensure that, in the event an Application does not supply the
-   function or data, the facility still operates, and performs
-   whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, or
-
-   b) under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of
-   this License applicable to that copy.
-
-  3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files.
-
-  The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from
-a header file that is part of the Library.  You may convey such object
-code under terms of your choice, provided that, if the incorporated
-material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure
-layouts and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates
-(ten or fewer lines in length), you do both of the following:
-
-   a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the
-   Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
-   covered by this License.
-
-   b) Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license
-   document.
-
-  4. Combined Works.
-
-  You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that,
-taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the
-portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse
-engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of
-the following:
-
-   a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that
-   the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
-   covered by this License.
-
-   b) Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license
-   document.
-
-   c) For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during
-   execution, include the copyright notice for the Library among
-   these notices, as well as a reference directing the user to the
-   copies of the GNU GPL and this license document.
-
-   d) Do one of the following:
-
-       0) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this
-       License, and the Corresponding Application Code in a form
-       suitable for, and under terms that permit, the user to
-       recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of
-       the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the
-       manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying
-       Corresponding Source.
-
-       1) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
-       Library.  A suitable mechanism is one that (a) uses at run time
-       a copy of the Library already present on the user's computer
-       system, and (b) will operate properly with a modified version
-       of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked
-       Version. 
-
-   e) Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise
-   be required to provide such information under section 6 of the
-   GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is
-   necessary to install and execute a modified version of the
-   Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the
-   Application with a modified version of the Linked Version. (If
-   you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany
-   the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application
-   Code. If you use option 4d1, you must provide the Installation
-   Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL
-   for conveying Corresponding Source.)
-
-  5. Combined Libraries.
-
-  You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
-Library side by side in a single library together with other library
-facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by this
-License, and convey such a combined library under terms of your
-choice, if you do both of the following:
-
-   a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based
-   on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities,
-   conveyed under the terms of this License.
-
-   b) Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it
-   is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the
-   accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
-
-  6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License.
-
-  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
-of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new
-versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
-differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
-
-  Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
-Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version
-of the GNU Lesser General Public License "or any later version"
-applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and
-conditions either of that published version or of any later version
-published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you
-received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser
-General Public License, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser
-General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
-
-  If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide
-whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall
-apply, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of any version is
-permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the
-Library.
+		   GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+
+  This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates
+the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public
+License, supplemented by the additional permissions listed below.
+
+  0. Additional Definitions. 
+
+  As used herein, "this License" refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, and the "GNU GPL" refers to version 3 of the GNU
+General Public License.
+
+  "The Library" refers to a covered work governed by this License,
+other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below.
+
+  An "Application" is any work that makes use of an interface provided
+by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library.
+Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode
+of using an interface provided by the Library.
+
+  A "Combined Work" is a work produced by combining or linking an
+Application with the Library.  The particular version of the Library
+with which the Combined Work was made is also called the "Linked
+Version".
+
+  The "Minimal Corresponding Source" for a Combined Work means the
+Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source code
+for portions of the Combined Work that, considered in isolation, are
+based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version.
+
+  The "Corresponding Application Code" for a Combined Work means the
+object code and/or source code for the Application, including any data
+and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the
+Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work.
+
+  1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL.
+
+  You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License
+without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL.
+
+  2. Conveying Modified Versions.
+
+  If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a
+facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application
+that uses the facility (other than as an argument passed when the
+facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified
+version:
+
+   a) under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to
+   ensure that, in the event an Application does not supply the
+   function or data, the facility still operates, and performs
+   whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, or
+
+   b) under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of
+   this License applicable to that copy.
+
+  3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files.
+
+  The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from
+a header file that is part of the Library.  You may convey such object
+code under terms of your choice, provided that, if the incorporated
+material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure
+layouts and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates
+(ten or fewer lines in length), you do both of the following:
+
+   a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the
+   Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
+   covered by this License.
+
+   b) Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license
+   document.
+
+  4. Combined Works.
+
+  You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that,
+taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the
+portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of
+the following:
+
+   a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that
+   the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
+   covered by this License.
+
+   b) Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license
+   document.
+
+   c) For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during
+   execution, include the copyright notice for the Library among
+   these notices, as well as a reference directing the user to the
+   copies of the GNU GPL and this license document.
+
+   d) Do one of the following:
+
+       0) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this
+       License, and the Corresponding Application Code in a form
+       suitable for, and under terms that permit, the user to
+       recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of
+       the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the
+       manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying
+       Corresponding Source.
+
+       1) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
+       Library.  A suitable mechanism is one that (a) uses at run time
+       a copy of the Library already present on the user's computer
+       system, and (b) will operate properly with a modified version
+       of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked
+       Version. 
+
+   e) Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise
+   be required to provide such information under section 6 of the
+   GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is
+   necessary to install and execute a modified version of the
+   Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the
+   Application with a modified version of the Linked Version. (If
+   you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany
+   the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application
+   Code. If you use option 4d1, you must provide the Installation
+   Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL
+   for conveying Corresponding Source.)
+
+  5. Combined Libraries.
+
+  You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side by side in a single library together with other library
+facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by this
+License, and convey such a combined library under terms of your
+choice, if you do both of the following:
+
+   a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based
+   on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities,
+   conveyed under the terms of this License.
+
+   b) Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it
+   is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the
+   accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+  6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License.
+
+  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+  Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
+Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version
+of the GNU Lesser General Public License "or any later version"
+applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that published version or of any later version
+published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you
+received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide
+whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall
+apply, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of any version is
+permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the
+Library.
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt
index 818433ecc..94a9ed024 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt
@@ -1,674 +1,674 @@
-                    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
-                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
-
- Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
- of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-
-                            Preamble
-
-  The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for
-software and other kinds of works.
-
-  The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
-to take away your freedom to share and change the works.  By contrast,
-the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
-share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free
-software for all its users.  We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
-GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
-any other work released this way by its authors.  You can apply it to
-your programs, too.
-
-  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
-price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
-have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
-them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
-want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
-free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
-
-  To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
-these rights or asking you to surrender the rights.  Therefore, you have
-certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if
-you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
-
-  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
-gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
-freedoms that you received.  You must make sure that they, too, receive
-or can get the source code.  And you must show them these terms so they
-know their rights.
-
-  Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
-(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
-giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
-
-  For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains
-that there is no warranty for this free software.  For both users' and
-authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
-changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
-authors of previous versions.
-
-  Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
-modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
-can do so.  This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of
-protecting users' freedom to change the software.  The systematic
-pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to
-use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.  Therefore, we
-have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those
-products.  If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we
-stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions
-of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
-
-  Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
-States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
-software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
-avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
-make it effectively proprietary.  To prevent this, the GPL assures that
-patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
-
-  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
-modification follow.
-
-                       TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
-  0. Definitions.
-
-  "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
-
-  "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of
-works, such as semiconductor masks.
-
-  "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
-License.  Each licensee is addressed as "you".  "Licensees" and
-"recipients" may be individuals or organizations.
-
-  To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work
-in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an
-exact copy.  The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the
-earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.
-
-  A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based
-on the Program.
-
-  To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without
-permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
-infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a
-computer or modifying a private copy.  Propagation includes copying,
-distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
-public, and in some countries other activities as well.
-
-  To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
-parties to make or receive copies.  Mere interaction with a user through
-a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
-
-  An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices"
-to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
-feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
-tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
-extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the
-work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License.  If
-the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a
-menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
-
-  1. Source Code.
-
-  The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
-for making modifications to it.  "Object code" means any non-source
-form of a work.
-
-  A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official
-standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of
-interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that
-is widely used among developers working in that language.
-
-  The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other
-than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of
-packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major
-Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that
-Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an
-implementation is available to the public in source code form.  A
-"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component
-(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system
-(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to
-produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
-
-  The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all
-the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
-work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to
-control those activities.  However, it does not include the work's
-System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free
-programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but
-which are not part of the work.  For example, Corresponding Source
-includes interface definition files associated with source files for
-the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically
-linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require,
-such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those
-subprograms and other parts of the work.
-
-  The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users
-can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
-Source.
-
-  The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
-same work.
-
-  2. Basic Permissions.
-
-  All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
-copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
-conditions are met.  This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
-permission to run the unmodified Program.  The output from running a
-covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its
-content, constitutes a covered work.  This License acknowledges your
-rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
-
-  You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
-convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains
-in force.  You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose
-of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you
-with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with
-the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do
-not control copyright.  Those thus making or running the covered works
-for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction
-and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of
-your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
-
-  Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
-the conditions stated below.  Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10
-makes it unnecessary.
-
-  3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
-
-  No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
-measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article
-11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or
-similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such
-measures.
-
-  When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
-circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention
-is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to
-the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or
-modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's
-users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of
-technological measures.
-
-  4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
-
-  You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
-receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
-appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
-keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
-non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
-keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all
-recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
-
-  You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
-and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
-
-  5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
-
-  You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
-produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
-terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
-
-    a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified
-    it, and giving a relevant date.
-
-    b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
-    released under this License and any conditions added under section
-    7.  This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to
-    "keep intact all notices".
-
-    c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
-    License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy.  This
-    License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7
-    additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
-    regardless of how they are packaged.  This License gives no
-    permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not
-    invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
-
-    d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
-    Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
-    interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your
-    work need not make them do so.
-
-  A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
-works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work,
-and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program,
-in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an
-"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not
-used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users
-beyond what the individual works permit.  Inclusion of a covered work
-in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other
-parts of the aggregate.
-
-  6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
-
-  You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
-of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
-machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License,
-in one of these ways:
-
-    a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
-    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
-    Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
-    customarily used for software interchange.
-
-    b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
-    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
-    written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as
-    long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
-    model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a
-    copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
-    product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical
-    medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no
-    more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this
-    conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the
-    Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
-
-    c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
-    written offer to provide the Corresponding Source.  This
-    alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and
-    only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord
-    with subsection 6b.
-
-    d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
-    place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the
-    Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no
-    further charge.  You need not require recipients to copy the
-    Corresponding Source along with the object code.  If the place to
-    copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source
-    may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party)
-    that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain
-    clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the
-    Corresponding Source.  Regardless of what server hosts the
-    Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is
-    available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
-
-    e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided
-    you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding
-    Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no
-    charge under subsection 6d.
-
-  A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
-from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be
-included in conveying the object code work.
-
-  A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any
-tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family,
-or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation
-into a dwelling.  In determining whether a product is a consumer product,
-doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage.  For a particular
-product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a
-typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status
-of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user
-actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product.  A product
-is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial
-commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
-the only significant mode of use of the product.
-
-  "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods,
-procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install
-and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from
-a modified version of its Corresponding Source.  The information must
-suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object
-code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
-modification has been made.
-
-  If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or
-specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as
-part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the
-User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a
-fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the
-Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
-by the Installation Information.  But this requirement does not apply
-if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
-modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has
-been installed in ROM).
-
-  The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a
-requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates
-for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for
-the User Product in which it has been modified or installed.  Access to a
-network may be denied when the modification itself materially and
-adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
-protocols for communication across the network.
-
-  Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided,
-in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
-documented (and with an implementation available to the public in
-source code form), and must require no special password or key for
-unpacking, reading or copying.
-
-  7. Additional Terms.
-
-  "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this
-License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
-Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall
-be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent
-that they are valid under applicable law.  If additional permissions
-apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately
-under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by
-this License without regard to the additional permissions.
-
-  When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
-remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of
-it.  (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
-removal in certain cases when you modify the work.)  You may place
-additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
-for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
-
-  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you
-add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of
-that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
-
-    a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the
-    terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
-
-    b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or
-    author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
-    Notices displayed by works containing it; or
-
-    c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
-    requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
-    reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
-
-    d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or
-    authors of the material; or
-
-    e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
-    trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
-
-    f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
-    material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
-    it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for
-    any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
-    those licensors and authors.
-
-  All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further
-restrictions" within the meaning of section 10.  If the Program as you
-received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is
-governed by this License along with a term that is a further
-restriction, you may remove that term.  If a license document contains
-a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this
-License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms
-of that license document, provided that the further restriction does
-not survive such relicensing or conveying.
-
-  If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
-must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
-additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
-where to find the applicable terms.
-
-  Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
-form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
-the above requirements apply either way.
-
-  8. Termination.
-
-  You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
-provided under this License.  Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
-modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
-this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
-paragraph of section 11).
-
-  However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
-license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
-provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
-finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
-holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means
-prior to 60 days after the cessation.
-
-  Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
-reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
-violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
-received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
-copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
-your receipt of the notice.
-
-  Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
-licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
-this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
-reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
-material under section 10.
-
-  9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
-
-  You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
-run a copy of the Program.  Ancillary propagation of a covered work
-occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission
-to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance.  However,
-nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or
-modify any covered work.  These actions infringe copyright if you do
-not accept this License.  Therefore, by modifying or propagating a
-covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
-
-  10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
-
-  Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
-receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
-propagate that work, subject to this License.  You are not responsible
-for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
-
-  An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an
-organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
-organization, or merging organizations.  If propagation of a covered
-work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
-transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
-licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could
-give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the
-Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if
-the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
-
-  You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
-rights granted or affirmed under this License.  For example, you may
-not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of
-rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation
-(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
-any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for
-sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
-
-  11. Patents.
-
-  A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
-License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based.  The
-work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
-
-  A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims
-owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
-hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted
-by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,
-but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a
-consequence of further modification of the contributor version.  For
-purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant
-patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
-this License.
-
-  Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
-patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to
-make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and
-propagate the contents of its contributor version.
-
-  In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express
-agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent
-(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to
-sue for patent infringement).  To "grant" such a patent license to a
-party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a
-patent against the party.
-
-  If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
-and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone
-to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a
-publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,
-then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so
-available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the
-patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner
-consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent
-license to downstream recipients.  "Knowingly relying" means you have
-actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the
-covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work
-in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
-country that you have reason to believe are valid.
-
-  If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
-arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
-covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
-receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify
-or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license
-you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered
-work and works based on it.
-
-  A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within
-the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
-conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are
-specifically granted under this License.  You may not convey a covered
-work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is
-in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment
-to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying
-the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the
-parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory
-patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work
-conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily
-for and in connection with specific products or compilations that
-contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement,
-or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
-
-  Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
-any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
-otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
-
-  12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
-
-  If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
-otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
-excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot convey a
-covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
-License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
-not convey it at all.  For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you
-to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey
-the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this
-License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
-
-  13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
-
-  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
-permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
-under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single
-combined work, and to convey the resulting work.  The terms of this
-License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work,
-but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License,
-section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the
-combination as such.
-
-  14. Revised Versions of this License.
-
-  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
-the GNU General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
-be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
-address new problems or concerns.
-
-  Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
-Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
-Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the
-option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
-version or of any later version published by the Free Software
-Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of the
-GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published
-by the Free Software Foundation.
-
-  If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
-versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's
-public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you
-to choose that version for the Program.
-
-  Later license versions may give you additional or different
-permissions.  However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
-author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
-later version.
-
-  15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
-
-  THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
-APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
-HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
-OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
-THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
-IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
-ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
-
-  16. Limitation of Liability.
-
-  IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
-WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS
-THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
-GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
-USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
-DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
-PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
-EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-SUCH DAMAGES.
-
-  17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
-
-  If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
-above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
-reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates
-an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
-Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a
-copy of the Program in return for a fee.
-
-                     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
-            How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
-
-  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
-possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
-free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
-
-  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
-to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
-state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
-the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
-
-    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
-    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
-
-    This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
-    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-    the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
-    (at your option) any later version.
-
-    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-    GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-    along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
-
-Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
-
-  If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
-notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
-
-    <program>  Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
-    This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
-    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
-    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
-
-The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
-parts of the General Public License.  Of course, your program's commands
-might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
-
-  You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
-if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
-For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
-<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
-
-  The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
-into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you
-may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
-the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
-Public License instead of this License.  But first, please read
-<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
+                    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+                            Preamble
+
+  The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for
+software and other kinds of works.
+
+  The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
+to take away your freedom to share and change the works.  By contrast,
+the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
+share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free
+software for all its users.  We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
+GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
+any other work released this way by its authors.  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
+want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
+free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
+these rights or asking you to surrender the rights.  Therefore, you have
+certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if
+you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
+freedoms that you received.  You must make sure that they, too, receive
+or can get the source code.  And you must show them these terms so they
+know their rights.
+
+  Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
+(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
+giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
+
+  For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains
+that there is no warranty for this free software.  For both users' and
+authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
+changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
+authors of previous versions.
+
+  Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
+modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
+can do so.  This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of
+protecting users' freedom to change the software.  The systematic
+pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to
+use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.  Therefore, we
+have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those
+products.  If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we
+stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions
+of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
+
+  Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
+States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
+software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
+avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
+make it effectively proprietary.  To prevent this, the GPL assures that
+patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+                       TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+  0. Definitions.
+
+  "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
+
+  "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of
+works, such as semiconductor masks.
+
+  "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
+License.  Each licensee is addressed as "you".  "Licensees" and
+"recipients" may be individuals or organizations.
+
+  To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work
+in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an
+exact copy.  The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the
+earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.
+
+  A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based
+on the Program.
+
+  To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without
+permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
+infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a
+computer or modifying a private copy.  Propagation includes copying,
+distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
+public, and in some countries other activities as well.
+
+  To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
+parties to make or receive copies.  Mere interaction with a user through
+a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
+
+  An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices"
+to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
+feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
+tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
+extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the
+work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License.  If
+the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a
+menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
+
+  1. Source Code.
+
+  The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
+for making modifications to it.  "Object code" means any non-source
+form of a work.
+
+  A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official
+standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of
+interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that
+is widely used among developers working in that language.
+
+  The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other
+than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of
+packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major
+Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that
+Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an
+implementation is available to the public in source code form.  A
+"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component
+(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system
+(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to
+produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
+
+  The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all
+the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
+work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to
+control those activities.  However, it does not include the work's
+System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free
+programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but
+which are not part of the work.  For example, Corresponding Source
+includes interface definition files associated with source files for
+the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically
+linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require,
+such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those
+subprograms and other parts of the work.
+
+  The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users
+can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
+Source.
+
+  The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
+same work.
+
+  2. Basic Permissions.
+
+  All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
+copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
+conditions are met.  This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
+permission to run the unmodified Program.  The output from running a
+covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its
+content, constitutes a covered work.  This License acknowledges your
+rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
+
+  You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
+convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains
+in force.  You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose
+of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you
+with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with
+the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do
+not control copyright.  Those thus making or running the covered works
+for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction
+and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of
+your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
+
+  Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
+the conditions stated below.  Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10
+makes it unnecessary.
+
+  3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
+
+  No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
+measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article
+11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or
+similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such
+measures.
+
+  When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
+circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention
+is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to
+the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or
+modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's
+users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of
+technological measures.
+
+  4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
+
+  You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
+receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
+appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
+keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
+non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
+keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all
+recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
+
+  You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
+and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
+
+  5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
+
+  You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
+produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
+terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified
+    it, and giving a relevant date.
+
+    b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
+    released under this License and any conditions added under section
+    7.  This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to
+    "keep intact all notices".
+
+    c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
+    License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy.  This
+    License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7
+    additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
+    regardless of how they are packaged.  This License gives no
+    permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not
+    invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
+
+    d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
+    Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
+    interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your
+    work need not make them do so.
+
+  A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
+works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work,
+and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program,
+in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an
+"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not
+used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users
+beyond what the individual works permit.  Inclusion of a covered work
+in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other
+parts of the aggregate.
+
+  6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
+
+  You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
+of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
+machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License,
+in one of these ways:
+
+    a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
+    Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
+    customarily used for software interchange.
+
+    b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
+    written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as
+    long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
+    model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a
+    copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
+    product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical
+    medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no
+    more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this
+    conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the
+    Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
+
+    c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
+    written offer to provide the Corresponding Source.  This
+    alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and
+    only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord
+    with subsection 6b.
+
+    d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
+    place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the
+    Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no
+    further charge.  You need not require recipients to copy the
+    Corresponding Source along with the object code.  If the place to
+    copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source
+    may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party)
+    that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain
+    clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the
+    Corresponding Source.  Regardless of what server hosts the
+    Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is
+    available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
+
+    e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided
+    you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding
+    Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no
+    charge under subsection 6d.
+
+  A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
+from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be
+included in conveying the object code work.
+
+  A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any
+tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family,
+or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation
+into a dwelling.  In determining whether a product is a consumer product,
+doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage.  For a particular
+product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a
+typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status
+of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user
+actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product.  A product
+is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial
+commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
+the only significant mode of use of the product.
+
+  "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods,
+procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install
+and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from
+a modified version of its Corresponding Source.  The information must
+suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object
+code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
+modification has been made.
+
+  If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or
+specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as
+part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the
+User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a
+fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the
+Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
+by the Installation Information.  But this requirement does not apply
+if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
+modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has
+been installed in ROM).
+
+  The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a
+requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates
+for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for
+the User Product in which it has been modified or installed.  Access to a
+network may be denied when the modification itself materially and
+adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
+protocols for communication across the network.
+
+  Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided,
+in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
+documented (and with an implementation available to the public in
+source code form), and must require no special password or key for
+unpacking, reading or copying.
+
+  7. Additional Terms.
+
+  "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this
+License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
+Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall
+be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent
+that they are valid under applicable law.  If additional permissions
+apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately
+under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by
+this License without regard to the additional permissions.
+
+  When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
+remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of
+it.  (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
+removal in certain cases when you modify the work.)  You may place
+additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
+for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you
+add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of
+that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
+
+    a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the
+    terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
+
+    b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or
+    author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
+    Notices displayed by works containing it; or
+
+    c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
+    requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
+    reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
+
+    d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or
+    authors of the material; or
+
+    e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
+    trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
+
+    f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
+    material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
+    it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for
+    any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
+    those licensors and authors.
+
+  All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further
+restrictions" within the meaning of section 10.  If the Program as you
+received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is
+governed by this License along with a term that is a further
+restriction, you may remove that term.  If a license document contains
+a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this
+License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms
+of that license document, provided that the further restriction does
+not survive such relicensing or conveying.
+
+  If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
+must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
+additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
+where to find the applicable terms.
+
+  Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
+form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
+the above requirements apply either way.
+
+  8. Termination.
+
+  You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
+provided under this License.  Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
+modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
+this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
+paragraph of section 11).
+
+  However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
+license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
+provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
+finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
+holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means
+prior to 60 days after the cessation.
+
+  Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
+reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
+violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
+received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
+copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
+your receipt of the notice.
+
+  Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
+licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
+this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
+reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
+material under section 10.
+
+  9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
+
+  You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
+run a copy of the Program.  Ancillary propagation of a covered work
+occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission
+to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance.  However,
+nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or
+modify any covered work.  These actions infringe copyright if you do
+not accept this License.  Therefore, by modifying or propagating a
+covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
+
+  10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
+
+  Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
+receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
+propagate that work, subject to this License.  You are not responsible
+for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
+
+  An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an
+organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
+organization, or merging organizations.  If propagation of a covered
+work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
+transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
+licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could
+give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the
+Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if
+the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
+
+  You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
+rights granted or affirmed under this License.  For example, you may
+not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of
+rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation
+(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
+any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for
+sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
+
+  11. Patents.
+
+  A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
+License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based.  The
+work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
+
+  A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims
+owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
+hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted
+by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,
+but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a
+consequence of further modification of the contributor version.  For
+purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant
+patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
+this License.
+
+  Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
+patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to
+make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and
+propagate the contents of its contributor version.
+
+  In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express
+agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent
+(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to
+sue for patent infringement).  To "grant" such a patent license to a
+party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a
+patent against the party.
+
+  If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
+and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone
+to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a
+publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,
+then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so
+available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the
+patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner
+consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent
+license to downstream recipients.  "Knowingly relying" means you have
+actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the
+covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work
+in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
+country that you have reason to believe are valid.
+
+  If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
+arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
+covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
+receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify
+or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license
+you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered
+work and works based on it.
+
+  A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within
+the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
+conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are
+specifically granted under this License.  You may not convey a covered
+work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is
+in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment
+to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying
+the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the
+parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory
+patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work
+conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily
+for and in connection with specific products or compilations that
+contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement,
+or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
+
+  Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
+any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
+otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
+
+  12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
+
+  If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot convey a
+covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
+not convey it at all.  For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you
+to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey
+the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this
+License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
+
+  13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
+permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
+under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single
+combined work, and to convey the resulting work.  The terms of this
+License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work,
+but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License,
+section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the
+combination as such.
+
+  14. Revised Versions of this License.
+
+  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
+the GNU General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+  Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
+Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
+Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the
+option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
+version or of any later version published by the Free Software
+Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of the
+GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published
+by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
+versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's
+public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you
+to choose that version for the Program.
+
+  Later license versions may give you additional or different
+permissions.  However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
+author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
+later version.
+
+  15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
+
+  THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
+APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
+HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
+OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
+IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
+ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  16. Limitation of Liability.
+
+  IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS
+THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
+GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
+USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
+DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
+PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
+EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+  17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
+
+  If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
+above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
+reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates
+an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
+Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a
+copy of the Program in return for a fee.
+
+                     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+            How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+  If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
+notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    <program>  Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+    This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, your program's commands
+might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
+
+  You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
+if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
+For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
+<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+  The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
+into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you
+may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
+the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
+Public License instead of this License.  But first, please read
+<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs
index c6b106f98..7b4249c42 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs
@@ -1,181 +1,181 @@
-namespace Project1HostApp
-{
-    partial class frmDataloggerSettings
-    {
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Required designer variable.
-        /// </summary>
-        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
-
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Clean up any resources being used.
-        /// </summary>
-        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
-        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
-        {
-            if (disposing && (components != null))
-            {
-                components.Dispose();
-            }
-            base.Dispose(disposing);
-        }
-
-        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
-
-        /// <summary>
-        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
-        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
-        /// </summary>
-        private void InitializeComponent()
-        {
-            this.btnSetValues = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
-            this.dtpTime = new System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker();
-            this.lblTime = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
-            this.lblLoggingInterval = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
-            this.nudLogInterval = new System.Windows.Forms.NumericUpDown();
-            this.lblSeconds = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
-            this.btnGetValues = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
-            this.lblDate = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
-            this.dtpDate = new System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker();
-            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.nudLogInterval)).BeginInit();
-            this.SuspendLayout();
-            // 
-            // btnSetValues
-            // 
-            this.btnSetValues.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(168, 136);
-            this.btnSetValues.Name = "btnSetValues";
-            this.btnSetValues.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 35);
-            this.btnSetValues.TabIndex = 0;
-            this.btnSetValues.Text = "Set Values";
-            this.btnSetValues.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
-            this.btnSetValues.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnSetValues_Click);
-            // 
-            // dtpTime
-            // 
-            this.dtpTime.CustomFormat = "";
-            this.dtpTime.Format = System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePickerFormat.Time;
-            this.dtpTime.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 61);
-            this.dtpTime.Name = "dtpTime";
-            this.dtpTime.ShowUpDown = true;
-            this.dtpTime.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(110, 20);
-            this.dtpTime.TabIndex = 1;
-            // 
-            // lblTime
-            // 
-            this.lblTime.AutoSize = true;
-            this.lblTime.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
-            this.lblTime.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(51, 67);
-            this.lblTime.Name = "lblTime";
-            this.lblTime.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(82, 13);
-            this.lblTime.TabIndex = 2;
-            this.lblTime.Text = "Device Time:";
-            // 
-            // lblLoggingInterval
-            // 
-            this.lblLoggingInterval.AutoSize = true;
-            this.lblLoggingInterval.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
-            this.lblLoggingInterval.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(30, 101);
-            this.lblLoggingInterval.Name = "lblLoggingInterval";
-            this.lblLoggingInterval.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(103, 13);
-            this.lblLoggingInterval.TabIndex = 3;
-            this.lblLoggingInterval.Text = "Logging Interval:";
-            // 
-            // nudLogInterval
-            // 
-            this.nudLogInterval.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 94);
-            this.nudLogInterval.Maximum = new decimal(new int[] {
-            60,
-            0,
-            0,
-            0});
-            this.nudLogInterval.Minimum = new decimal(new int[] {
-            1,
-            0,
-            0,
-            0});
-            this.nudLogInterval.Name = "nudLogInterval";
-            this.nudLogInterval.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(51, 20);
-            this.nudLogInterval.TabIndex = 5;
-            this.nudLogInterval.Value = new decimal(new int[] {
-            5,
-            0,
-            0,
-            0});
-            // 
-            // lblSeconds
-            // 
-            this.lblSeconds.AutoSize = true;
-            this.lblSeconds.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(209, 101);
-            this.lblSeconds.Name = "lblSeconds";
-            this.lblSeconds.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(49, 13);
-            this.lblSeconds.TabIndex = 6;
-            this.lblSeconds.Text = "Seconds";
-            // 
-            // btnGetValues
-            // 
-            this.btnGetValues.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(30, 136);
-            this.btnGetValues.Name = "btnGetValues";
-            this.btnGetValues.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 35);
-            this.btnGetValues.TabIndex = 7;
-            this.btnGetValues.Text = "Get Values";
-            this.btnGetValues.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
-            this.btnGetValues.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnGetValues_Click);
-            // 
-            // lblDate
-            // 
-            this.lblDate.AutoSize = true;
-            this.lblDate.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
-            this.lblDate.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(51, 33);
-            this.lblDate.Name = "lblDate";
-            this.lblDate.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(82, 13);
-            this.lblDate.TabIndex = 8;
-            this.lblDate.Text = "Device Date:";
-            // 
-            // dtpDate
-            // 
-            this.dtpDate.CustomFormat = "dd/MM/yyyy";
-            this.dtpDate.Format = System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePickerFormat.Custom;
-            this.dtpDate.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 27);
-            this.dtpDate.Name = "dtpDate";
-            this.dtpDate.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(110, 20);
-            this.dtpDate.TabIndex = 9;
-            // 
-            // frmDataloggerSettings
-            // 
-            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
-            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
-            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(300, 197);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.dtpDate);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.lblDate);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.btnGetValues);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.lblSeconds);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.nudLogInterval);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.lblLoggingInterval);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.lblTime);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.dtpTime);
-            this.Controls.Add(this.btnSetValues);
-            this.MaximizeBox = false;
-            this.MinimizeBox = false;
-            this.Name = "frmDataloggerSettings";
-            this.Text = "DataLogger";
-            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.frmDataloggerSettings_Load);
-            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.nudLogInterval)).EndInit();
-            this.ResumeLayout(false);
-            this.PerformLayout();
-
-        }
-
-        #endregion
-
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnSetValues;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker dtpTime;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblTime;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblLoggingInterval;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.NumericUpDown nudLogInterval;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblSeconds;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnGetValues;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblDate;
-        private System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker dtpDate;
-    }
-}
-
+namespace Project1HostApp
+{
+    partial class frmDataloggerSettings
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required designer variable.
+        /// </summary>
+        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Clean up any resources being used.
+        /// </summary>
+        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
+        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
+        {
+            if (disposing && (components != null))
+            {
+                components.Dispose();
+            }
+            base.Dispose(disposing);
+        }
+
+        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
+        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
+        /// </summary>
+        private void InitializeComponent()
+        {
+            this.btnSetValues = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.dtpTime = new System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker();
+            this.lblTime = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.lblLoggingInterval = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.nudLogInterval = new System.Windows.Forms.NumericUpDown();
+            this.lblSeconds = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.btnGetValues = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.lblDate = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.dtpDate = new System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.nudLogInterval)).BeginInit();
+            this.SuspendLayout();
+            // 
+            // btnSetValues
+            // 
+            this.btnSetValues.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(168, 136);
+            this.btnSetValues.Name = "btnSetValues";
+            this.btnSetValues.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 35);
+            this.btnSetValues.TabIndex = 0;
+            this.btnSetValues.Text = "Set Values";
+            this.btnSetValues.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnSetValues.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnSetValues_Click);
+            // 
+            // dtpTime
+            // 
+            this.dtpTime.CustomFormat = "";
+            this.dtpTime.Format = System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePickerFormat.Time;
+            this.dtpTime.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 61);
+            this.dtpTime.Name = "dtpTime";
+            this.dtpTime.ShowUpDown = true;
+            this.dtpTime.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(110, 20);
+            this.dtpTime.TabIndex = 1;
+            // 
+            // lblTime
+            // 
+            this.lblTime.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblTime.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblTime.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(51, 67);
+            this.lblTime.Name = "lblTime";
+            this.lblTime.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(82, 13);
+            this.lblTime.TabIndex = 2;
+            this.lblTime.Text = "Device Time:";
+            // 
+            // lblLoggingInterval
+            // 
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(30, 101);
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Name = "lblLoggingInterval";
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(103, 13);
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.TabIndex = 3;
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Text = "Logging Interval:";
+            // 
+            // nudLogInterval
+            // 
+            this.nudLogInterval.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 94);
+            this.nudLogInterval.Maximum = new decimal(new int[] {
+            60,
+            0,
+            0,
+            0});
+            this.nudLogInterval.Minimum = new decimal(new int[] {
+            1,
+            0,
+            0,
+            0});
+            this.nudLogInterval.Name = "nudLogInterval";
+            this.nudLogInterval.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(51, 20);
+            this.nudLogInterval.TabIndex = 5;
+            this.nudLogInterval.Value = new decimal(new int[] {
+            5,
+            0,
+            0,
+            0});
+            // 
+            // lblSeconds
+            // 
+            this.lblSeconds.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblSeconds.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(209, 101);
+            this.lblSeconds.Name = "lblSeconds";
+            this.lblSeconds.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(49, 13);
+            this.lblSeconds.TabIndex = 6;
+            this.lblSeconds.Text = "Seconds";
+            // 
+            // btnGetValues
+            // 
+            this.btnGetValues.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(30, 136);
+            this.btnGetValues.Name = "btnGetValues";
+            this.btnGetValues.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 35);
+            this.btnGetValues.TabIndex = 7;
+            this.btnGetValues.Text = "Get Values";
+            this.btnGetValues.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnGetValues.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnGetValues_Click);
+            // 
+            // lblDate
+            // 
+            this.lblDate.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblDate.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblDate.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(51, 33);
+            this.lblDate.Name = "lblDate";
+            this.lblDate.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(82, 13);
+            this.lblDate.TabIndex = 8;
+            this.lblDate.Text = "Device Date:";
+            // 
+            // dtpDate
+            // 
+            this.dtpDate.CustomFormat = "dd/MM/yyyy";
+            this.dtpDate.Format = System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePickerFormat.Custom;
+            this.dtpDate.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 27);
+            this.dtpDate.Name = "dtpDate";
+            this.dtpDate.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(110, 20);
+            this.dtpDate.TabIndex = 9;
+            // 
+            // frmDataloggerSettings
+            // 
+            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
+            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
+            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(300, 197);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.dtpDate);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblDate);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnGetValues);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblSeconds);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.nudLogInterval);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblLoggingInterval);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblTime);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.dtpTime);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnSetValues);
+            this.MaximizeBox = false;
+            this.MinimizeBox = false;
+            this.Name = "frmDataloggerSettings";
+            this.Text = "DataLogger";
+            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.frmDataloggerSettings_Load);
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.nudLogInterval)).EndInit();
+            this.ResumeLayout(false);
+            this.PerformLayout();
+
+        }
+
+        #endregion
+
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnSetValues;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker dtpTime;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblTime;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblLoggingInterval;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.NumericUpDown nudLogInterval;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblSeconds;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnGetValues;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblDate;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker dtpDate;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs
index 370dfbd69..0168fb8cf 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs
@@ -1,172 +1,172 @@
-using System;
-using System.Collections.Generic;
-using System.ComponentModel;
-using System.Data;
-using System.Drawing;
-using System.Linq;
-using System.Text;
-using System.Windows.Forms;
-using Hid;
-
-namespace Project1HostApp
-{
-    public partial class frmDataloggerSettings : Form
-    {
-        private const int DEVICE_VID = 0x03EB;
-        private const int DEVICE_PID = 0xFAFA;
-
-        private struct Device_Report_t
-        {
-            public Byte Day;
-            public Byte Month;
-            public Byte Year;
-
-            public Byte Hour;
-            public Byte Minute;
-            public Byte Second;
-
-            public Byte LogInterval500MS;
-
-            public Byte[] ToReport()
-            {
-                Byte[] Report = new Byte[7];
-
-                Report[0] = this.Day;
-                Report[1] = this.Month;
-                Report[2] = this.Year;
-                Report[3] = this.Hour;
-                Report[4] = this.Minute;
-                Report[5] = this.Second;
-                Report[6] = this.LogInterval500MS;
-
-                return Report;
-            }
-
-            public void FromReport(Byte[] Report)
-            {
-                this.Day = Report[0];
-                this.Month = Report[1];
-                this.Year = Report[2];
-                this.Hour = Report[3];
-                this.Minute = Report[4];
-                this.Second = Report[5];
-                this.LogInterval500MS = Report[6];
-            }
-        };
-
-        private IDevice GetDeviceConnection()
-        {
-            IDevice[] ConnectedDevices = DeviceFactory.Enumerate(DEVICE_VID, DEVICE_PID);
-            IDevice ConnectionHandle = null;
-
-            if (ConnectedDevices.Count() > 0)
-                ConnectionHandle = ConnectedDevices[0];
-            else
-                return null;
-
-            // Fix report handle under Windows
-            if (ConnectionHandle is Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)
-            {
-                ((Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)ConnectionHandle).AddDevice(0x00,
-                    ((Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)ConnectionHandle).UnallocatedDevices[0]);
-            }
-
-            return ConnectionHandle;
-        }
-
-        public frmDataloggerSettings()
-        {
-            InitializeComponent();
-        }
-
-        private void btnSetValues_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            IDevice ConnectionHandle = GetDeviceConnection();
-
-            if (ConnectionHandle == null)
-            {
-                MessageBox.Show("Error: Cannot connect to DataLogger device.");
-                return;
-            }
-
-            Device_Report_t DeviceReport = new Device_Report_t();
-            DeviceReport.Day = (byte)dtpDate.Value.Day;
-            DeviceReport.Month = (byte)dtpDate.Value.Month;
-            DeviceReport.Year = (byte)((dtpDate.Value.Year < 2000) ? 0 : (dtpDate.Value.Year - 2000));
-            DeviceReport.Hour = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Hour;
-            DeviceReport.Minute = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Minute;
-            DeviceReport.Second = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Second;
-            DeviceReport.LogInterval500MS = (byte)(nudLogInterval.Value * 2);
-
-            try
-            {
-                ConnectionHandle.Write(0x00, DeviceReport.ToReport());
-                MessageBox.Show("Device parameters updated sucessfully.");
-            }
-            catch (Exception ex)
-            {
-                MessageBox.Show("Error: " + ex.Message);
-            }
-        }
-
-        private void btnGetValues_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-            IDevice ConnectionHandle = GetDeviceConnection();
-
-            if (ConnectionHandle == null)
-            {
-                MessageBox.Show("Error: Cannot connect to DataLogger device.");
-                return;
-            }
-
-            Device_Report_t DeviceReport = new Device_Report_t();
-
-            try
-            {
-                Byte[] Report = new Byte[7];
-
-                ConnectionHandle.Read(0x00, Report);
-                DeviceReport.FromReport(Report);
-
-                try
-                {
-                    dtpDate.Value = new DateTime(
-                        (2000 + DeviceReport.Year),
-                        DeviceReport.Month,
-                        DeviceReport.Day); 
-                    
-                    dtpTime.Value = new DateTime(
-                        DateTime.Now.Year, DateTime.Now.Month, DateTime.Now.Day,
-                        DeviceReport.Hour,
-                        DeviceReport.Minute,
-                        DeviceReport.Second);
-                }
-                catch (Exception ex)
-                {
-                    dtpDate.Value = DateTime.Now;
-                    dtpTime.Value = DateTime.Now;
-                }
-
-                try
-                {
-                    nudLogInterval.Value = (DeviceReport.LogInterval500MS / 2);
-                }
-                catch (Exception ex)
-                {
-                    nudLogInterval.Value = nudLogInterval.Minimum;
-                }
-
-                MessageBox.Show("Device parameters retrieved sucessfully.");
-            }
-            catch (Exception ex)
-            {
-                MessageBox.Show("Error: " + ex.Message);
-            }
-        }
-
-        private void frmDataloggerSettings_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
-        {
-
-        }
-    }
-}
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.ComponentModel;
+using System.Data;
+using System.Drawing;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Text;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+using Hid;
+
+namespace Project1HostApp
+{
+    public partial class frmDataloggerSettings : Form
+    {
+        private const int DEVICE_VID = 0x03EB;
+        private const int DEVICE_PID = 0xFAFA;
+
+        private struct Device_Report_t
+        {
+            public Byte Day;
+            public Byte Month;
+            public Byte Year;
+
+            public Byte Hour;
+            public Byte Minute;
+            public Byte Second;
+
+            public Byte LogInterval500MS;
+
+            public Byte[] ToReport()
+            {
+                Byte[] Report = new Byte[7];
+
+                Report[0] = this.Day;
+                Report[1] = this.Month;
+                Report[2] = this.Year;
+                Report[3] = this.Hour;
+                Report[4] = this.Minute;
+                Report[5] = this.Second;
+                Report[6] = this.LogInterval500MS;
+
+                return Report;
+            }
+
+            public void FromReport(Byte[] Report)
+            {
+                this.Day = Report[0];
+                this.Month = Report[1];
+                this.Year = Report[2];
+                this.Hour = Report[3];
+                this.Minute = Report[4];
+                this.Second = Report[5];
+                this.LogInterval500MS = Report[6];
+            }
+        };
+
+        private IDevice GetDeviceConnection()
+        {
+            IDevice[] ConnectedDevices = DeviceFactory.Enumerate(DEVICE_VID, DEVICE_PID);
+            IDevice ConnectionHandle = null;
+
+            if (ConnectedDevices.Count() > 0)
+                ConnectionHandle = ConnectedDevices[0];
+            else
+                return null;
+
+            // Fix report handle under Windows
+            if (ConnectionHandle is Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)
+            {
+                ((Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)ConnectionHandle).AddDevice(0x00,
+                    ((Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)ConnectionHandle).UnallocatedDevices[0]);
+            }
+
+            return ConnectionHandle;
+        }
+
+        public frmDataloggerSettings()
+        {
+            InitializeComponent();
+        }
+
+        private void btnSetValues_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            IDevice ConnectionHandle = GetDeviceConnection();
+
+            if (ConnectionHandle == null)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: Cannot connect to DataLogger device.");
+                return;
+            }
+
+            Device_Report_t DeviceReport = new Device_Report_t();
+            DeviceReport.Day = (byte)dtpDate.Value.Day;
+            DeviceReport.Month = (byte)dtpDate.Value.Month;
+            DeviceReport.Year = (byte)((dtpDate.Value.Year < 2000) ? 0 : (dtpDate.Value.Year - 2000));
+            DeviceReport.Hour = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Hour;
+            DeviceReport.Minute = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Minute;
+            DeviceReport.Second = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Second;
+            DeviceReport.LogInterval500MS = (byte)(nudLogInterval.Value * 2);
+
+            try
+            {
+                ConnectionHandle.Write(0x00, DeviceReport.ToReport());
+                MessageBox.Show("Device parameters updated sucessfully.");
+            }
+            catch (Exception ex)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: " + ex.Message);
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void btnGetValues_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            IDevice ConnectionHandle = GetDeviceConnection();
+
+            if (ConnectionHandle == null)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: Cannot connect to DataLogger device.");
+                return;
+            }
+
+            Device_Report_t DeviceReport = new Device_Report_t();
+
+            try
+            {
+                Byte[] Report = new Byte[7];
+
+                ConnectionHandle.Read(0x00, Report);
+                DeviceReport.FromReport(Report);
+
+                try
+                {
+                    dtpDate.Value = new DateTime(
+                        (2000 + DeviceReport.Year),
+                        DeviceReport.Month,
+                        DeviceReport.Day); 
+                    
+                    dtpTime.Value = new DateTime(
+                        DateTime.Now.Year, DateTime.Now.Month, DateTime.Now.Day,
+                        DeviceReport.Hour,
+                        DeviceReport.Minute,
+                        DeviceReport.Second);
+                }
+                catch (Exception ex)
+                {
+                    dtpDate.Value = DateTime.Now;
+                    dtpTime.Value = DateTime.Now;
+                }
+
+                try
+                {
+                    nudLogInterval.Value = (DeviceReport.LogInterval500MS / 2);
+                }
+                catch (Exception ex)
+                {
+                    nudLogInterval.Value = nudLogInterval.Minimum;
+                }
+
+                MessageBox.Show("Device parameters retrieved sucessfully.");
+            }
+            catch (Exception ex)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: " + ex.Message);
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void frmDataloggerSettings_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs
index dc818c822..2588e60c1 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs
@@ -1,21 +1,21 @@
-using System;
-using System.Collections.Generic;
-using System.Linq;
-using System.Windows.Forms;
-
-namespace Project1HostApp
-{
-    static class Program
-    {
-        /// <summary>
-        /// The main entry point for the application.
-        /// </summary>
-        [STAThread]
-        static void Main()
-        {
-            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
-            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
-            Application.Run(new frmDataloggerSettings());
-        }
-    }
-}
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace Project1HostApp
+{
+    static class Program
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// The main entry point for the application.
+        /// </summary>
+        [STAThread]
+        static void Main()
+        {
+            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
+            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
+            Application.Run(new frmDataloggerSettings());
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt
index 35bc08e63..34f85533e 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt
@@ -1,21 +1,21 @@
-This library has been tested on Windows Vista 32bit, Windows Vista 64bit,
-Windows XP 32bit and Debian (Lenny) AMD64 but should work on any version of
-Windows that can run the .NET framework 2.0 and any other operating system
-that has both hiddev and Mono.
-
-Any additions must be tested and work on Windows and Linux, on both 32 and
-64 bit. Windows 64 bit testing is particularly important as it is often
-neglected.
-
-
-Hid.Linux.dll was compiled under Linux with Mono (mcs) and uses no generics.
-
-Hid.Win32.dll and Hid.Net.dll were compiled under Windows with the .NET
-Framework v2.0.50727 but are also tested to compile with Mono (gmcs).
-
-
-A good starting point when using this library is Hid.DeviceFactory's Enumerate
-methods.
-
-LogitechMX5000.cs is a simple example of how the library can be used. Other
-examples on common devices are welcomed.
+This library has been tested on Windows Vista 32bit, Windows Vista 64bit,
+Windows XP 32bit and Debian (Lenny) AMD64 but should work on any version of
+Windows that can run the .NET framework 2.0 and any other operating system
+that has both hiddev and Mono.
+
+Any additions must be tested and work on Windows and Linux, on both 32 and
+64 bit. Windows 64 bit testing is particularly important as it is often
+neglected.
+
+
+Hid.Linux.dll was compiled under Linux with Mono (mcs) and uses no generics.
+
+Hid.Win32.dll and Hid.Net.dll were compiled under Windows with the .NET
+Framework v2.0.50727 but are also tested to compile with Mono (gmcs).
+
+
+A good starting point when using this library is Hid.DeviceFactory's Enumerate
+methods.
+
+LogitechMX5000.cs is a simple example of how the library can be used. Other
+examples on common devices are welcomed.
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt
index 280c5fe02..136d0385b 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage Temperature Datalogger Project
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs (with >16KB of FLASH)
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Classes:</b></td>
- *    <td>Mass Storage Device \n
- *        Human Interface Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclasses:</b></td>
- *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport \n
- *        Keyboard Subclass</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
- *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
- *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
- *        SCSI Block Commands Specification \n
- *        USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Temperature Data Logger project. This project is a very basic USB data logger for the current temperature as reported by
- *  the board's temperature sensor, writing the temperature to a file stored on the board's Dataflash in a FAT filesystem
- *  each time a specified interval elapses. When inserted into a PC, the datalogger will appear as a standard USB Mass Storage
- *  device with a single text file, which contains the logged data. Files are named according to the current date when the
- *  logging commences.
- *
- *  A DS1307 or compatible RTC IC is designed to be attached to the AVR's TWI bus, for the management of timestamps on the
- *  sampled data. This project will not function correctly if the RTC chip is omitted unless the DUMMY_RTC compile time token
- *  is specified - see \ref SSec_Options.
- *
- *  Due to the host's need for exclusive access to the filesystem, the device will not log samples while connected to a host.
- *  For the logger to store data, the Dataflash must first be formatted by the host so that it contains a valid FAT filesystem.
- *
- *  This project uses the FatFS library from ELM Chan (http://elm-chan.org/fsw/ff/00index_e.html) and the .NET HID device library
- *  LibHIDNet (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libhidnet/).
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>DUMMY_RTC</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When a DS1307 RTC chip is not fitted, this token can be defined to make the demo assume a 1/1/1 01:01:01 date/time
- *        stamp at all times, effectively transforming the project into a basic data logger with no specified sample times.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Temperature Datalogger Project
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs (with >16KB of FLASH)
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Classes:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device \n
+ *        Human Interface Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclasses:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport \n
+ *        Keyboard Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Temperature Data Logger project. This project is a very basic USB data logger for the current temperature as reported by
+ *  the board's temperature sensor, writing the temperature to a file stored on the board's Dataflash in a FAT filesystem
+ *  each time a specified interval elapses. When inserted into a PC, the datalogger will appear as a standard USB Mass Storage
+ *  device with a single text file, which contains the logged data. Files are named according to the current date when the
+ *  logging commences.
+ *
+ *  A DS1307 or compatible RTC IC is designed to be attached to the AVR's TWI bus, for the management of timestamps on the
+ *  sampled data. This project will not function correctly if the RTC chip is omitted unless the DUMMY_RTC compile time token
+ *  is specified - see \ref SSec_Options.
+ *
+ *  Due to the host's need for exclusive access to the filesystem, the device will not log samples while connected to a host.
+ *  For the logger to store data, the Dataflash must first be formatted by the host so that it contains a valid FAT filesystem.
+ *
+ *  This project uses the FatFS library from ELM Chan (http://elm-chan.org/fsw/ff/00index_e.html) and the .NET HID device library
+ *  LibHIDNet (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libhidnet/).
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DUMMY_RTC</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When a DS1307 RTC chip is not fitted, this token can be defined to make the demo assume a 1/1/1 01:01:01 date/time
+ *        stamp at all times, effectively transforming the project into a basic data logger with no specified sample times.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/makefile b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/makefile
index c06577ad7..c1787710a 100644
--- a/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/makefile
+++ b/Projects/TemperatureDataLogger/makefile
@@ -1,748 +1,748 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = TempDataLogger
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
-	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
-	  Lib/DS1307.c                                                \
-	  Lib/FATFs/diskio.c                                          \
-	  Lib/FATFs/ff.c                                              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.c                  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DDUMMY_RTC
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = TempDataLogger
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
+	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/DS1307.c                                                \
+	  Lib/FATFs/diskio.c                                          \
+	  Lib/FATFs/ff.c                                              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.c                  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HID.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HID.c              \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DDUMMY_RTC
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c b/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c
index 9343b92c0..202c3e3fe 100644
--- a/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,267 +1,267 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x02,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204B,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_Functional_Union= 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(23), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA USB-RS232 Adapter"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x02,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204B,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_Functional_Union= 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(23), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA USB-RS232 Adapter"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h b/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h
index 45bab84d9..e00c5e2ed 100644
--- a/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16	
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16	
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf
index 697bf8a2f..e0ffac9bd 100644
--- a/Projects/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Projects/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - USB to Serial Device Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - USB to Serial Device Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf b/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf
index 9a0a0e418..5f9bc1a3d 100644
--- a/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf
+++ b/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
-INSTDISK="LUFA USB-RS232 CDC Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
+INSTDISK="LUFA USB-RS232 CDC Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/USBtoSerial/Lib/RingBuff.c b/Projects/USBtoSerial/Lib/RingBuff.c
index 2109f8cc0..91c61d06b 100644
--- a/Projects/USBtoSerial/Lib/RingBuff.c
+++ b/Projects/USBtoSerial/Lib/RingBuff.c
@@ -1,120 +1,120 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "RingBuff.h"
-
-void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
-{
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-		Buffer->InPtr    = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-		Buffer->OutPtr   = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-		Buffer->Elements = 0;
-	}
-}
-
-void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data)
-{
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-	#if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD)
-		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
-		{
-			Buffer->OutPtr++;
-	
-			if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
-			  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Buffer->Elements++;
-		}
-	#elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW)
-		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
-		  return;
-	
-		  Buffer->Elements++;
-	#elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)
-		  Buffer->Elements++;
-	#endif
-	
-		*(Buffer->InPtr) = Data;
-		Buffer->InPtr++;
-	
-		if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
-		  Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-	}
-}
-
-RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
-{
-	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
-	
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
-		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
-		  return 0;
-#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
-	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
-#endif
-
-		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
-	
-		Buffer->OutPtr++;
-		Buffer->Elements--;
-	
-		if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
-		  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-	}
-	
-	return BuffData;
-}
-
-#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
-RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
-{
-	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
-
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
-		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
-		  return 0;
-#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
-	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
-#endif
-
-		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
-	}
-
-	return BuffData;
-}
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "RingBuff.h"
+
+void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+		Buffer->InPtr    = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		Buffer->OutPtr   = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		Buffer->Elements = 0;
+	}
+}
+
+void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data)
+{
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+	#if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD)
+		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
+		{
+			Buffer->OutPtr++;
+	
+			if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+			  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Buffer->Elements++;
+		}
+	#elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW)
+		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
+		  return;
+	
+		  Buffer->Elements++;
+	#elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)
+		  Buffer->Elements++;
+	#endif
+	
+		*(Buffer->InPtr) = Data;
+		Buffer->InPtr++;
+	
+		if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+		  Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+	}
+}
+
+RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
+	
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
+		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+		  return 0;
+#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
+	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
+#endif
+
+		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
+	
+		Buffer->OutPtr++;
+		Buffer->Elements--;
+	
+		if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+		  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+	}
+	
+	return BuffData;
+}
+
+#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
+RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
+
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
+		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+		  return 0;
+#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
+	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
+#endif
+
+		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
+	}
+
+	return BuffData;
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/USBtoSerial/Lib/RingBuff.h b/Projects/USBtoSerial/Lib/RingBuff.h
index 2e03a28be..b4933aa4d 100644
--- a/Projects/USBtoSerial/Lib/RingBuff.h
+++ b/Projects/USBtoSerial/Lib/RingBuff.h
@@ -1,116 +1,116 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/* Buffer Configuration: */
-   /* Buffer length - select static size of created ring buffers: */
-	 #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128      // Set to the static ring buffer size for all ring buffers (place size after define)
-
-   /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */
-	 #define BUFF_VOLATILE            // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access
-
-   /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */
-     #define BUFF_DROPOLD             // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full
-     // #define BUFF_DROPNEW          // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full
-     // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK      // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user!
-
-   /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ring buffer: */
-     //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO  // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ring buffer is read
-     #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK        // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ring buffers - checking left to user!
-	
-   /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */
-     #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t    // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer
-	
-   /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */
-     //#define BUFF_USEPEEK
-	 	
-#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_
-#define _RINGBUFF_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-	#include <avr/io.h>
-	#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-	#include <util/atomic.h>
-	#include <limits.h>
-
-	#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-
-	/* Defines and checks: */
-	#if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE)
-		#define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE
-	#else
-		#error No buffer length specified!
-	#endif
-
-	#if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK))
-		#error No buffer drop mode specified.
-	#endif
-
-	#if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE)
-		#error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified.
-	#endif
-
-	#if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE)
-		#define BUFF_MODE            volatile
-		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK    ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
-	#else
-		#define BUFF_MODE
-		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	#endif
-
-	#if (BUFF_STATICSIZE   > LONG_MAX)
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t
-	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX)
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t
-	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX)
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t
-	#else
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-	typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t;
-
-	typedef BUFF_MODE struct
-	{
-		RingBuff_Data_t      Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH];
-		RingBuff_Data_t*     InPtr;
-		RingBuff_Data_t*     OutPtr;
-		RingBuff_Elements_t  Elements;
-	} RingBuff_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-	void            Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buff);
-	void            Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data);
-	RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
-	#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
-		RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
-	#endif
-	
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/* Buffer Configuration: */
+   /* Buffer length - select static size of created ring buffers: */
+	 #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128      // Set to the static ring buffer size for all ring buffers (place size after define)
+
+   /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */
+	 #define BUFF_VOLATILE            // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access
+
+   /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */
+     #define BUFF_DROPOLD             // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full
+     // #define BUFF_DROPNEW          // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full
+     // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK      // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user!
+
+   /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ring buffer: */
+     //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO  // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ring buffer is read
+     #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK        // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ring buffers - checking left to user!
+	
+   /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */
+     #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t    // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer
+	
+   /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */
+     //#define BUFF_USEPEEK
+	 	
+#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_
+#define _RINGBUFF_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+	#include <avr/io.h>
+	#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+	#include <util/atomic.h>
+	#include <limits.h>
+
+	#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Defines and checks: */
+	#if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE)
+		#define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE
+	#else
+		#error No buffer length specified!
+	#endif
+
+	#if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK))
+		#error No buffer drop mode specified.
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE)
+		#error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified.
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE)
+		#define BUFF_MODE            volatile
+		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK    ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
+	#else
+		#define BUFF_MODE
+		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	#endif
+
+	#if (BUFF_STATICSIZE   > LONG_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t
+	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t
+	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t
+	#else
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+	typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t;
+
+	typedef BUFF_MODE struct
+	{
+		RingBuff_Data_t      Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH];
+		RingBuff_Data_t*     InPtr;
+		RingBuff_Data_t*     OutPtr;
+		RingBuff_Elements_t  Elements;
+	} RingBuff_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+	void            Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buff);
+	void            Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data);
+	RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
+	#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
+		RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
+	#endif
+	
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c b/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c
index 1b4cab289..dd9a133c3 100644
--- a/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c
+++ b/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c
@@ -1,198 +1,198 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the USBtoSerial project. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "USBtoSerial.h"
-
-/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the device via the serial port. */
-RingBuff_t USBtoUSART_Buffer;
-
-/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
-RingBuff_t USARTtoUSB_Buffer;
-
-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config = 
-			{
-				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
-
-				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
-				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-			},
-	};
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	Buffer_Initialize(&USBtoUSART_Buffer);
-	Buffer_Initialize(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		/* Read bytes from the USB OUT endpoint into the USART transmit buffer */
-		for (uint8_t DataBytesRem = CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); DataBytesRem != 0; DataBytesRem--)
-		{
-			if (!(BUFF_STATICSIZE - USBtoUSART_Buffer.Elements))
-			  break;
-			  
-			Buffer_StoreElement(&USBtoUSART_Buffer, CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface));
-		}
-		
-		/* Read bytes from the USART receive buffer into the USB IN endpoint */
-		while (USARTtoUSB_Buffer.Elements)
-		  CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, Buffer_GetElement(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer));
-		
-		/* Load bytes from the USART transmit buffer into the USART */
-		while (USBtoUSART_Buffer.Elements)
-		  Serial_TxByte(Buffer_GetElement(&USBtoUSART_Buffer));
-		
-		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Serial_Init(9600, false);
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-}
-
-/** ISR to manage the reception of data from the serial port, placing received bytes into a circular buffer
- *  for later transmission to the host.
- */
-ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
-{
-	uint8_t ReceivedByte = UDR1;
-
-	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  Buffer_StoreElement(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event.
- *
- *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
- */
-void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t ConfigMask = 0;
-
-	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType)
-	{
-		case CDC_PARITY_Odd:
-			ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10));		
-			break;
-		case CDC_PARITY_Even:
-			ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11);		
-			break;
-	}
-
-	if (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat == CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits)
-	  ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1);
-
-	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits)
-	{
-		case 6:
-			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10);
-			break;
-		case 7:
-			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11);
-			break;
-		case 8:
-			ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1);	
-	UCSR1B = ((1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1));
-	UCSR1C = ConfigMask;	
-	UBRR1  = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the USBtoSerial project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "USBtoSerial.h"
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the device via the serial port. */
+RingBuff_t USBtoUSART_Buffer;
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
+RingBuff_t USARTtoUSB_Buffer;
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config = 
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	Buffer_Initialize(&USBtoUSART_Buffer);
+	Buffer_Initialize(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Read bytes from the USB OUT endpoint into the USART transmit buffer */
+		for (uint8_t DataBytesRem = CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); DataBytesRem != 0; DataBytesRem--)
+		{
+			if (!(BUFF_STATICSIZE - USBtoUSART_Buffer.Elements))
+			  break;
+			  
+			Buffer_StoreElement(&USBtoUSART_Buffer, CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface));
+		}
+		
+		/* Read bytes from the USART receive buffer into the USB IN endpoint */
+		while (USARTtoUSB_Buffer.Elements)
+		  CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, Buffer_GetElement(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer));
+		
+		/* Load bytes from the USART transmit buffer into the USART */
+		while (USBtoUSART_Buffer.Elements)
+		  Serial_TxByte(Buffer_GetElement(&USBtoUSART_Buffer));
+		
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** ISR to manage the reception of data from the serial port, placing received bytes into a circular buffer
+ *  for later transmission to the host.
+ */
+ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t ReceivedByte = UDR1;
+
+	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  Buffer_StoreElement(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ConfigMask = 0;
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType)
+	{
+		case CDC_PARITY_Odd:
+			ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10));		
+			break;
+		case CDC_PARITY_Even:
+			ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11);		
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat == CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits)
+	  ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1);
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits)
+	{
+		case 6:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10);
+			break;
+		case 7:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11);
+			break;
+		case 8:
+			ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1);	
+	UCSR1B = ((1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1));
+	UCSR1C = ConfigMask;	
+	UBRR1  = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
+}
diff --git a/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h b/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h
index 77ceefbf6..92ec055b3 100644
--- a/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h
+++ b/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h
@@ -1,78 +1,78 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for USBtoSerial.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _USB_SERIAL_H_
-#define _USB_SERIAL_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/RingBuff.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		
-		void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USBtoSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USB_SERIAL_H_
+#define _USB_SERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/RingBuff.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt b/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt
index 10f0003c6..e10b359bd 100644
--- a/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt
+++ b/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt
@@ -1,82 +1,82 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage USB to Serial Converter Project
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
- *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  USB to Serial bridge project. This project allows a USB AVR to serve
- *  as a USB to USART bridge between a USB host and a device lacking a
- *  USB port. When programmed into a USB AVR, the AVR will enumerate as a
- *  virtual COM port.
- *
- *  The AVR's hardware USART's settings will change to mirror as closely as
- *  possible the serial settings set on the host. However, due to hardware
- *  limitations, some options may not be supported (baud rates with unacceptable
- *  error rates at the AVR's clock speed, data lengths other than 6, 7 or 8 bits,
- *  1.5 stop bits, parity other than none, even or odd).
- *  
- *  After running this project for the first time on a new computer,
- *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this project
- *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
- *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
- *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
- *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
- *  CDC-ACM drivers.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>BUFF_STATICSIZE</td>
- *    <td>RingBuff.h</td>
- *    <td>Defines the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered in each Ring Buffer.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage USB to Serial Converter Project
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 2 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  USB to Serial bridge project. This project allows a USB AVR to serve
+ *  as a USB to USART bridge between a USB host and a device lacking a
+ *  USB port. When programmed into a USB AVR, the AVR will enumerate as a
+ *  virtual COM port.
+ *
+ *  The AVR's hardware USART's settings will change to mirror as closely as
+ *  possible the serial settings set on the host. However, due to hardware
+ *  limitations, some options may not be supported (baud rates with unacceptable
+ *  error rates at the AVR's clock speed, data lengths other than 6, 7 or 8 bits,
+ *  1.5 stop bits, parity other than none, even or odd).
+ *  
+ *  After running this project for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this project
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>BUFF_STATICSIZE</td>
+ *    <td>RingBuff.h</td>
+ *    <td>Defines the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered in each Ring Buffer.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile b/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile
index e40246eca..9d34457b5 100644
--- a/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile
+++ b/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile
@@ -1,739 +1,739 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = USBtoSerial
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  Lib/RingBuff.c                                              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = USBtoSerial
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  Lib/RingBuff.c                                              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c b/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c
index 72adec35f..0b134c0ad 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,217 +1,217 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x00,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2045,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.MS_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x08,
-			.SubClass               = 0x06,
-			.Protocol               = 0x50,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Webserver"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2045,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.MS_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x08,
+			.SubClass               = 0x06,
+			.Protocol               = 0x50,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA Webserver"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h b/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h
index e249fc479..a13ee013f 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          3	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         4	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */		
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */		
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/Webserver/Doxygen.conf
index dd0be3e6e..0d3c83cf5 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - uIP Powered Webserver Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = */uip/* */FATFs/* 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - uIP Powered Webserver Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = */uip/* */FATFs/* 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c
index 9d085a785..7f822538e 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c
@@ -1,264 +1,264 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  DHCP Client Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will retrieve IP configuration settings from the
- *  DHCP server on the network.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C
-#include "DHCPClientApp.h"
-
-/** Initialization function for the DHCP client. */
-void DHCPClientApp_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */
-	struct uip_udp_conn* Connection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCPC_SERVER_PORT));
-	
-	/* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */
-	if (Connection != NULL)
-	{
-		uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState = &Connection->appstate;
-		uip_udp_bind(Connection, HTONS(DHCPC_CLIENT_PORT));
-		
-		/* Set the initial client state */
-		AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
-
-		/* Set timeout period to half a second for a DHCP server to respond */
-		timer_set(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout, CLOCK_SECOND / 2);
-	}
-}
- 
-/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP client. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack 
- *  needs a UDP packet to be processed.
- */
-void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void)
-{
-	uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_udp_conn->appstate;
-	DHCP_Header_t*      const AppData     = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata;
-	uint16_t                  AppDataSize = 0;
-	
-	switch (AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState)
-	{
-		case DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover:
-			/* Clear all DHCP settings, reset client IP address */
-			memset(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data, 0x00, sizeof(AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data));
-			uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
-
-			/* Fill out the DHCP response header */
-			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_DISCOVER, AppState);
-			
-			/* Add the required DHCP options list to the packet */
-			uint8_t RequiredOptionList[] = {DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER};
-			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST, sizeof(RequiredOptionList),
-			                                       RequiredOptionList);			
-			
-			/* Send the DHCP DISCOVER packet */
-			uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
-
-			/* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */
-			timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
-			AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer;			
-			
-			break;
-		case DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer:
-			if (!(uip_newdata()))
-			{
-				/* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */
-				if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout))
-				  AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
-				
-				break;
-			}
-			  
-			uint8_t OfferResponse_MessageType;
-			if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) &&
-			    DHCPClientApp_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &OfferResponse_MessageType) &&
-			    (OfferResponse_MessageType == DHCP_OFFER))
-			{
-				/* Received a DHCP offer for an IP address, copy over values for later request */
-				memcpy(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, &AppData->YourIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-				DHCPClientApp_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask);
-				DHCPClientApp_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,      &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP);
-				DHCPClientApp_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID,   &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP);
-				
-				timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
-				AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendRequest;
-			}
-
-			break;
-		case DHCP_STATE_SendRequest:
-			/* Fill out the DHCP response header */
-			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_REQUEST, AppState);
-
-			/* Add the DHCP REQUESTED IP ADDRESS option to the packet */
-			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t),
-			                                       &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
-
-			/* Add the DHCP SERVER IP ADDRESS option to the packet */
-			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t),
-			                                       &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP);
-
-			/* Send the DHCP REQUEST packet */
-			uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
-			
-			/* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */
-			timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
-			AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK;
-
-			break;
-		case DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK:
-			if (!(uip_newdata()))
-			{
-				/* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */
-				if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout))
-				  AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
-				
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			uint8_t RequestResponse_MessageType;
-			if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) &&
-			    DHCPClientApp_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &RequestResponse_MessageType) &&
-			    (RequestResponse_MessageType == DHCP_ACK))
-			{
-				/* Set the new network parameters from the DHCP server */
-				uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
-				uip_setnetmask((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask);
-				uip_setdraddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP);
-			
-				/* Indicate to the user that we now have a valid IP configuration */
-				HaveIPConfiguration = true;
-
-				AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased;				
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required
- *  fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP server.
- *
- *  \param[out] DHCPHeader  Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to
- *  \param[in]  DHCPMessageType  DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER
- *  \param[in]  AppState    Application state of the current UDP connection
- *
- *  \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet
- */
-static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader, const uint8_t DHCPMessageType, uip_udp_appstate_t* AppState)
-{
-	/* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */
- 	memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-
-	/* Fill out the DHCP packet header */
-	DHCPHeader->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST;
-	DHCPHeader->HardwareType          = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET;
-	DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress);
-	DHCPHeader->Hops                  = 0;
-	DHCPHeader->TransactionID         = DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID;
-	DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
-	DHCPHeader->Flags                 = HTONS(BOOTP_BROADCAST);
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientIP,     &uip_hostaddr,        sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP,       &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP,    sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, &MACAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
-	DHCPHeader->Cookie                = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE;
-	
-	/* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */
-	DHCPHeader->Options[0]            = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE;
-	DHCPHeader->Options[1]            = 1;
-	DHCPHeader->Options[2]            = DHCPMessageType;
-	DHCPHeader->Options[3]            = DHCP_OPTION_END;
-	
-	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
-	return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4);
-}
-
-/** Sets the given DHCP option in the DHCP packet's option list. This automatically moves the
- *  end of options terminator past the new option in the options list.
- *
- *  \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList  Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list
- *  \param[in]     Option          DHCP option to add to the list
- *  \param[in]     DataLen         Size in bytes of the option data to add
- *  \param[in]     OptionData      Buffer where the option's data is to be sourced from
- *
- *  \return Number of bytes added to the DHCP packet
- */
-static uint8_t DHCPClientApp_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, uint8_t Option, uint8_t DataLen, void* OptionData)
-{
-	/* Skip through the DHCP options list until the terminator option is found */
-	while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END)
-	  DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2);
-
-	/* Overwrite the existing terminator with the new option, add a new terminator at the end of the list */
-	DHCPOptionList[0] = Option;
-	DHCPOptionList[1] = DataLen;
-	memcpy(&DHCPOptionList[2], OptionData, DataLen);
-	DHCPOptionList[2 + DataLen] = DHCP_OPTION_END;
-	
-	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
-	return (2 + DataLen);
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the given option's data (if present) from the DHCP packet's options list.
- *
- *  \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList  Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list
- *  \param[in]     Option          DHCP option to retrieve to the list
- *  \param[out]    Destination     Buffer where the option's data is to be written to if found
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if the option was found in the DHCP packet's options list, false otherwise
- */
-static bool DHCPClientApp_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, const uint8_t Option, void* const Destination)
-{
-	/* Look through the incoming DHCP packet's options list for the requested option */
-	while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END)
-	{
-		/* Check if the current DHCP option in the packet is the one requested */
-		if (DHCPOptionList[0] == Option)
-		{
-			/* Copy request option's data to the destination buffer */
-			memcpy(Destination, &DHCPOptionList[2], DHCPOptionList[1]);
-			
-			/* Indicate that the requested option data was successfully retrieved */
-			return true;
-		}
-		
-		/* Skip to next DHCP option in the options list */
-		DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2);
-	}
-	
-	/* Requested option not found in the incoming packet's DHCP options list */
-	return false;
-}
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  DHCP Client Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will retrieve IP configuration settings from the
+ *  DHCP server on the network.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C
+#include "DHCPClientApp.h"
+
+/** Initialization function for the DHCP client. */
+void DHCPClientApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */
+	struct uip_udp_conn* Connection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCPC_SERVER_PORT));
+	
+	/* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */
+	if (Connection != NULL)
+	{
+		uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState = &Connection->appstate;
+		uip_udp_bind(Connection, HTONS(DHCPC_CLIENT_PORT));
+		
+		/* Set the initial client state */
+		AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
+
+		/* Set timeout period to half a second for a DHCP server to respond */
+		timer_set(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout, CLOCK_SECOND / 2);
+	}
+}
+ 
+/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP client. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack 
+ *  needs a UDP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_udp_conn->appstate;
+	DHCP_Header_t*      const AppData     = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata;
+	uint16_t                  AppDataSize = 0;
+	
+	switch (AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState)
+	{
+		case DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover:
+			/* Clear all DHCP settings, reset client IP address */
+			memset(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data, 0x00, sizeof(AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data));
+			uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
+
+			/* Fill out the DHCP response header */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_DISCOVER, AppState);
+			
+			/* Add the required DHCP options list to the packet */
+			uint8_t RequiredOptionList[] = {DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER};
+			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST, sizeof(RequiredOptionList),
+			                                       RequiredOptionList);			
+			
+			/* Send the DHCP DISCOVER packet */
+			uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
+
+			/* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */
+			timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
+			AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer;			
+			
+			break;
+		case DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer:
+			if (!(uip_newdata()))
+			{
+				/* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */
+				if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout))
+				  AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
+				
+				break;
+			}
+			  
+			uint8_t OfferResponse_MessageType;
+			if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) &&
+			    DHCPClientApp_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &OfferResponse_MessageType) &&
+			    (OfferResponse_MessageType == DHCP_OFFER))
+			{
+				/* Received a DHCP offer for an IP address, copy over values for later request */
+				memcpy(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, &AppData->YourIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+				DHCPClientApp_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask);
+				DHCPClientApp_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,      &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP);
+				DHCPClientApp_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID,   &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP);
+				
+				timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
+				AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendRequest;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case DHCP_STATE_SendRequest:
+			/* Fill out the DHCP response header */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_REQUEST, AppState);
+
+			/* Add the DHCP REQUESTED IP ADDRESS option to the packet */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t),
+			                                       &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
+
+			/* Add the DHCP SERVER IP ADDRESS option to the packet */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t),
+			                                       &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP);
+
+			/* Send the DHCP REQUEST packet */
+			uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
+			
+			/* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */
+			timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
+			AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK;
+
+			break;
+		case DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK:
+			if (!(uip_newdata()))
+			{
+				/* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */
+				if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout))
+				  AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
+				
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			uint8_t RequestResponse_MessageType;
+			if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) &&
+			    DHCPClientApp_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &RequestResponse_MessageType) &&
+			    (RequestResponse_MessageType == DHCP_ACK))
+			{
+				/* Set the new network parameters from the DHCP server */
+				uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
+				uip_setnetmask((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask);
+				uip_setdraddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP);
+			
+				/* Indicate to the user that we now have a valid IP configuration */
+				HaveIPConfiguration = true;
+
+				AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased;				
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required
+ *  fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP server.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] DHCPHeader  Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to
+ *  \param[in]  DHCPMessageType  DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER
+ *  \param[in]  AppState    Application state of the current UDP connection
+ *
+ *  \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet
+ */
+static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader, const uint8_t DHCPMessageType, uip_udp_appstate_t* AppState)
+{
+	/* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */
+ 	memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	/* Fill out the DHCP packet header */
+	DHCPHeader->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST;
+	DHCPHeader->HardwareType          = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET;
+	DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress);
+	DHCPHeader->Hops                  = 0;
+	DHCPHeader->TransactionID         = DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID;
+	DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
+	DHCPHeader->Flags                 = HTONS(BOOTP_BROADCAST);
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientIP,     &uip_hostaddr,        sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP,       &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP,    sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, &MACAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
+	DHCPHeader->Cookie                = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE;
+	
+	/* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */
+	DHCPHeader->Options[0]            = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[1]            = 1;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[2]            = DHCPMessageType;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[3]            = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+	
+	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
+	return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4);
+}
+
+/** Sets the given DHCP option in the DHCP packet's option list. This automatically moves the
+ *  end of options terminator past the new option in the options list.
+ *
+ *  \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList  Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list
+ *  \param[in]     Option          DHCP option to add to the list
+ *  \param[in]     DataLen         Size in bytes of the option data to add
+ *  \param[in]     OptionData      Buffer where the option's data is to be sourced from
+ *
+ *  \return Number of bytes added to the DHCP packet
+ */
+static uint8_t DHCPClientApp_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, uint8_t Option, uint8_t DataLen, void* OptionData)
+{
+	/* Skip through the DHCP options list until the terminator option is found */
+	while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	  DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2);
+
+	/* Overwrite the existing terminator with the new option, add a new terminator at the end of the list */
+	DHCPOptionList[0] = Option;
+	DHCPOptionList[1] = DataLen;
+	memcpy(&DHCPOptionList[2], OptionData, DataLen);
+	DHCPOptionList[2 + DataLen] = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+	
+	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
+	return (2 + DataLen);
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the given option's data (if present) from the DHCP packet's options list.
+ *
+ *  \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList  Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list
+ *  \param[in]     Option          DHCP option to retrieve to the list
+ *  \param[out]    Destination     Buffer where the option's data is to be written to if found
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the option was found in the DHCP packet's options list, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool DHCPClientApp_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, const uint8_t Option, void* const Destination)
+{
+	/* Look through the incoming DHCP packet's options list for the requested option */
+	while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{
+		/* Check if the current DHCP option in the packet is the one requested */
+		if (DHCPOptionList[0] == Option)
+		{
+			/* Copy request option's data to the destination buffer */
+			memcpy(Destination, &DHCPOptionList[2], DHCPOptionList[1]);
+			
+			/* Indicate that the requested option data was successfully retrieved */
+			return true;
+		}
+		
+		/* Skip to next DHCP option in the options list */
+		DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2);
+	}
+	
+	/* Requested option not found in the incoming packet's DHCP options list */
+	return false;
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h
index fc43f6be5..d52398325 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h
@@ -1,169 +1,169 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DHCPClientApp.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_
-#define _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		
-		#include <uip.h>
-		
-		#include "../Webserver.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** UDP listen port for a BOOTP server */
-		#define DHCPC_SERVER_PORT         67
-
-		/** UDP listen port for a BOOTP client */
-		#define DHCPC_CLIENT_PORT         68
-
-		/** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REQUEST message */
-		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
-
-		/** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REPLY message */
-		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
-
-		/** BOOTP flag for a BOOTP broadcast message */
-		#define BOOTP_BROADCAST           0x8000
-		
-		/** Magic DHCP cookie for a BOOTP message to identify it as a DHCP message */
-		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63538263
-		
-		/** Unique transaction ID used to identify DHCP responses to the client */
-		#define DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID       0x13245466
-
-		/** DHCP message type for a DISCOVER message */
-		#define DHCP_DISCOVER             1
-
-		/** DHCP message type for an OFFER message */
-		#define DHCP_OFFER                2
-
-		/** DHCP message type for a REQUEST message */
-		#define DHCP_REQUEST              3
-
-		/** DHCP message type for a DECLINE message */
-		#define DHCP_DECLINE              4
-
-		/** DHCP message type for an ACK message */
-		#define DHCP_ACK                  5
-
-		/** DHCP message type for a NAK message */
-		#define DHCP_NAK                  6
-
-		/** DHCP message type for a RELEASE message */
-		#define DHCP_RELEASE              7
-
-		/** DHCP medium type for standard Ethernet */
-		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       1
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the network subnet mask */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK   1
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the network gateway IP */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER        3
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the network DNS server */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER    6
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the requested client IP address */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR    50
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the IP address lease time */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_LEASE_TIME    51
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the DHCP message type */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE      53
-		
-		/** DHCP message option for the DHCP server IP */		
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID     54
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the list of required options from the server */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST      55
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the options list terminator */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t  Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
-			uint8_t  HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
-			uint8_t  HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
-			uint8_t  Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
-
-			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
-
-			uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
-			uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
-			
-			uip_ipaddr_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
-			uip_ipaddr_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
-			uip_ipaddr_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			uip_ipaddr_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			
-			uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
-			uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			
-			uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
-			
-			uint8_t  Options[]; /** DHCP message options */
-		} DHCP_Header_t;
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** States for each DHCP connection to a DHCP client. */
-		enum DHCP_States_t
-		{
-			DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover,  /**< Send DISCOVER packet to retrieve DHCP lease offers */
-			DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer,  /**< Waiting for OFFER packet giving available DHCP leases */
-			DHCP_STATE_SendRequest,   /**< Send REQUEST packet to request a DHCP lease */
-			DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK,    /**< Wait for ACK packet to complete the DHCP lease */
-			DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased, /**< DHCP address has been leased from a DHCP server */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DHCPClientApp_Init(void);
-		void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C)
-			static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader, const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
-			                                             uip_udp_appstate_t* AppState);
-			static uint8_t  DHCPClientApp_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, uint8_t Option, uint8_t DataLen,
-			                                        void* OptionData);
-			static bool     DHCPClientApp_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, const uint8_t Option, void* const Destination);
-		#endif
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DHCPClientApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_
+#define _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		
+		#include <uip.h>
+		
+		#include "../Webserver.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** UDP listen port for a BOOTP server */
+		#define DHCPC_SERVER_PORT         67
+
+		/** UDP listen port for a BOOTP client */
+		#define DHCPC_CLIENT_PORT         68
+
+		/** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REQUEST message */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
+
+		/** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REPLY message */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
+
+		/** BOOTP flag for a BOOTP broadcast message */
+		#define BOOTP_BROADCAST           0x8000
+		
+		/** Magic DHCP cookie for a BOOTP message to identify it as a DHCP message */
+		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63538263
+		
+		/** Unique transaction ID used to identify DHCP responses to the client */
+		#define DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID       0x13245466
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a DISCOVER message */
+		#define DHCP_DISCOVER             1
+
+		/** DHCP message type for an OFFER message */
+		#define DHCP_OFFER                2
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a REQUEST message */
+		#define DHCP_REQUEST              3
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a DECLINE message */
+		#define DHCP_DECLINE              4
+
+		/** DHCP message type for an ACK message */
+		#define DHCP_ACK                  5
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a NAK message */
+		#define DHCP_NAK                  6
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a RELEASE message */
+		#define DHCP_RELEASE              7
+
+		/** DHCP medium type for standard Ethernet */
+		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       1
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the network subnet mask */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK   1
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the network gateway IP */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER        3
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the network DNS server */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER    6
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the requested client IP address */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR    50
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the IP address lease time */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_LEASE_TIME    51
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the DHCP message type */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE      53
+		
+		/** DHCP message option for the DHCP server IP */		
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID     54
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the list of required options from the server */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST      55
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the options list terminator */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
+			uint8_t  HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
+			uint8_t  HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
+			uint8_t  Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
+
+			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
+
+			uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
+			uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
+			
+			uip_ipaddr_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
+			uip_ipaddr_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
+			uip_ipaddr_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uip_ipaddr_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			
+			uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
+			uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			
+			uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
+			
+			uint8_t  Options[]; /** DHCP message options */
+		} DHCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** States for each DHCP connection to a DHCP client. */
+		enum DHCP_States_t
+		{
+			DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover,  /**< Send DISCOVER packet to retrieve DHCP lease offers */
+			DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer,  /**< Waiting for OFFER packet giving available DHCP leases */
+			DHCP_STATE_SendRequest,   /**< Send REQUEST packet to request a DHCP lease */
+			DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK,    /**< Wait for ACK packet to complete the DHCP lease */
+			DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased, /**< DHCP address has been leased from a DHCP server */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DHCPClientApp_Init(void);
+		void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C)
+			static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader, const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
+			                                             uip_udp_appstate_t* AppState);
+			static uint8_t  DHCPClientApp_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, uint8_t Option, uint8_t DataLen,
+			                                        void* OptionData);
+			static bool     DHCPClientApp_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, const uint8_t Option, void* const Destination);
+		#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c
index da57e7f49..48c4fa7e6 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -1,525 +1,525 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
- *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
- *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
- *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
-#include "DataflashManager.h"
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
- *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-				
-				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
-			}
-
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;			
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-				
-				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-			
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-	
-	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
- *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
- *  dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-	
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
-			}
-			
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
-		}
-			
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
- *  the files stored on the dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-		
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-				
-				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}	
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-			
-			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-			
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-		}
-		
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
-void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
-{
-	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	
-	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-	
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
- *
- *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
- */
-bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnByte;
-
-	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-	#endif
-	
-	return true;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);				
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;			
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+			
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+	
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+	
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+			
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;		
+		}
+			
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+		
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+				
+				/* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}	
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+			
+			/* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+			
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+		
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	
+	/* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+	
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Deselect current dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+	
+	return true;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h
index f475f449a..ebf0bd329 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
-			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Defines: */
-		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
-
-		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
-		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
-		
-		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
-		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
-		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+		
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
index 295be3b9a..eb378c51e 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
@@ -1,110 +1,110 @@
-FatFs Module Source Files R0.07e                        (C)ChaN, 2010
-
-
-FILES
-
-  ffconf.h   Configuration file for FatFs module.
-  ff.h       Common include file for FatFs and application module.
-  ff.c       FatFs module.
-  diskio.h   Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module.
-  diskio.c   Skeleton of low level disk I/O module.
-  integer.h  Alternative type definitions for integer variables.
-  option     Optional external functions.
-
-  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs
-  module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific
-  storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written
-  to control your storage device.
-
-
-
-AGREEMENTS
-
- FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
- small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
- research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
-
-  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
-
- * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
- * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
- * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-
-
-
-REVISION HISTORY
-
-  Feb 26, 2006  R0.00  Prototype
-
-  Apr 29, 2006  R0.01  First release.
-
-  Jun 01, 2006  R0.02  Added FAT12.
-                       Removed unbuffered mode.
-                       Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
-
-  Jun 10, 2006  R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM.
-
-  Sep 22, 2006  R0.03  Added f_rename.
-                       Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
-
-  Dec 11, 2006  R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
-                       Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
-
-  Feb 04, 2007  R0.04  Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs)
-                       Changed some APIs for multiple drive system.
-                       Added f_mkfs. (FatFs)
-                       Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs)
-
-  Apr 01, 2007  R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs)
-                       Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs)
-                       Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek.
-                       Added minimization level 3.
-                       Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an
-                       existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs)
-
-  May 05, 2007  R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option.
-                       Added FSInfo support.
-                       Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs)
-                       Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
-                       Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object.
-
-  Aug 25, 2007  R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read, f_write.
-                       Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs)
-                       Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs)
-                       Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs)
-
-  Feb 03, 2008  R0.05a Added f_truncate().
-                       Added f_utime().
-                       Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
-                       Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
-                       Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
-
-  Apr 01, 2008  R0.06  Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs)
-                       Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
-                       Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster.
-
-  Apr 01, 2010, R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
-                       Added long file name support.
-                       Added multiple code page support.
-                       Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
-                       Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
-                       Added rewind option to f_readdir().
-                       Changed result code of critical errors.
-                       Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
-
-  Apr 14, 2010, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
-                       Added multiple sector size support.
-
-  Jun 21, 2010, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error.
-                       Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
-                       Added relative path feature.
-                       Added f_chdir().
-                       Added f_chdrive().
-                       Added proper case conversion for extended characters.
-
-  Nov 03,'2010 R0.07e  Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
-                       Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
-                       Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
-                       Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
-                       Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
+FatFs Module Source Files R0.07e                        (C)ChaN, 2010
+
+
+FILES
+
+  ffconf.h   Configuration file for FatFs module.
+  ff.h       Common include file for FatFs and application module.
+  ff.c       FatFs module.
+  diskio.h   Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module.
+  diskio.c   Skeleton of low level disk I/O module.
+  integer.h  Alternative type definitions for integer variables.
+  option     Optional external functions.
+
+  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs
+  module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific
+  storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written
+  to control your storage device.
+
+
+
+AGREEMENTS
+
+ FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
+ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
+ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
+
+  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
+
+ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+
+
+
+REVISION HISTORY
+
+  Feb 26, 2006  R0.00  Prototype
+
+  Apr 29, 2006  R0.01  First release.
+
+  Jun 01, 2006  R0.02  Added FAT12.
+                       Removed unbuffered mode.
+                       Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
+
+  Jun 10, 2006  R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM.
+
+  Sep 22, 2006  R0.03  Added f_rename.
+                       Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+
+  Dec 11, 2006  R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
+                       Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+
+  Feb 04, 2007  R0.04  Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs)
+                       Changed some APIs for multiple drive system.
+                       Added f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  Apr 01, 2007  R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek.
+                       Added minimization level 3.
+                       Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an
+                       existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  May 05, 2007  R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option.
+                       Added FSInfo support.
+                       Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+                       Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object.
+
+  Aug 25, 2007  R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read, f_write.
+                       Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs)
+
+  Feb 03, 2008  R0.05a Added f_truncate().
+                       Added f_utime().
+                       Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+                       Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+                       Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
+
+  Apr 01, 2008  R0.06  Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+                       Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster.
+
+  Apr 01, 2010, R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
+                       Added long file name support.
+                       Added multiple code page support.
+                       Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+                       Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+                       Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+                       Changed result code of critical errors.
+                       Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+
+  Apr 14, 2010, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+                       Added multiple sector size support.
+
+  Jun 21, 2010, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error.
+                       Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+                       Added relative path feature.
+                       Added f_chdir().
+                       Added f_chdrive().
+                       Added proper case conversion for extended characters.
+
+  Nov 03,'2010 R0.07e  Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+                       Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+                       Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+                       Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+                       Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
index 028c631ba..d81885c29 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
@@ -1,64 +1,64 @@
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs     (C)ChaN, 2007        */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */
-/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include "diskio.h"
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Inidialize a Drive                                                    */
-
-DSTATUS disk_initialize (
-	BYTE drv				/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
-)
-{
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Return Disk Status                                                    */
-
-DSTATUS disk_status (
-	BYTE drv		/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
-)
-{
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read Sector(s)                                                        */
-
-DRESULT disk_read (
-	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
-	BYTE *buff,		/* Data buffer to store read data */
-	DWORD sector,	/* Sector address (LBA) */
-	BYTE count		/* Number of sectors to read (1..255) */
-)
-{
-	DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
-	return RES_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Write Sector(s)                                                       */
-
-#if _READONLY == 0
-DRESULT disk_write (
-	BYTE drv,			/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
-	const BYTE *buff,	/* Data to be written */
-	DWORD sector,		/* Sector address (LBA) */
-	BYTE count			/* Number of sectors to write (1..255) */
-)
-{
-	DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
-	return RES_OK;
-}
-#endif /* _READONLY */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs     (C)ChaN, 2007        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */
+/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "diskio.h"
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Inidialize a Drive                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (
+	BYTE drv				/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Return Disk Status                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_status (
+	BYTE drv		/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Sector(s)                                                        */
+
+DRESULT disk_read (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
+	BYTE *buff,		/* Data buffer to store read data */
+	DWORD sector,	/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count		/* Number of sectors to read (1..255) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write Sector(s)                                                       */
+
+#if _READONLY == 0
+DRESULT disk_write (
+	BYTE drv,			/* Physical drive nmuber (0..) */
+	const BYTE *buff,	/* Data to be written */
+	DWORD sector,		/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count			/* Number of sectors to write (1..255) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+#endif /* _READONLY */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
index 2f444f7b6..bd9d223c0 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
@@ -1,72 +1,72 @@
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-/  Low level disk interface modlue include file  R0.07   (C)ChaN, 2010
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _DISKIO
-
-#define _READONLY	0	/* 1: Read-only mode */
-#define _USE_IOCTL	0
-
-#include "integer.h"
-#include "ff.h"
-
-#include "../DataflashManager.h"
-
-
-/* Status of Disk Functions */
-typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
-
-/* Results of Disk Functions */
-typedef enum {
-	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Successful */
-	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: R/W Error */
-	RES_WRPRT,		/* 2: Write Protected */
-	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not Ready */
-	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid Parameter */
-} DRESULT;
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------*/
-/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
-
-BOOL assign_drives (int argc, char *argv[]);
-DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE);
-DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE);
-DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
-#if	_READONLY == 0
-DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
-#endif
-DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*);
-
-
-/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */
-
-#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
-#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
-#define STA_PROTECT		0x04	/* Write protected */
-
-
-/* Command code for disk_ioctrl() */
-
-/* Generic command */
-#define CTRL_SYNC			0	/* Mandatory for write functions */
-#define GET_SECTOR_COUNT	1	/* Mandatory for only f_mkfs() */
-#define GET_SECTOR_SIZE		2	/* Mandatory for multiple sector size cfg */
-#define GET_BLOCK_SIZE		3	/* Mandatory for only f_mkfs() */
-#define CTRL_POWER			4
-#define CTRL_LOCK			5
-#define CTRL_EJECT			6
-/* MMC/SDC command */
-#define MMC_GET_TYPE		10
-#define MMC_GET_CSD			11
-#define MMC_GET_CID			12
-#define MMC_GET_OCR			13
-#define MMC_GET_SDSTAT		14
-/* ATA/CF command */
-#define ATA_GET_REV			20
-#define ATA_GET_MODEL		21
-#define ATA_GET_SN			22
-
-
-#define _DISKIO
-#endif
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+/  Low level disk interface modlue include file  R0.07   (C)ChaN, 2010
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _DISKIO
+
+#define _READONLY	0	/* 1: Read-only mode */
+#define _USE_IOCTL	0
+
+#include "integer.h"
+#include "ff.h"
+
+#include "../DataflashManager.h"
+
+
+/* Status of Disk Functions */
+typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
+
+/* Results of Disk Functions */
+typedef enum {
+	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Successful */
+	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: R/W Error */
+	RES_WRPRT,		/* 2: Write Protected */
+	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not Ready */
+	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid Parameter */
+} DRESULT;
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------*/
+/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
+
+BOOL assign_drives (int argc, char *argv[]);
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE);
+DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE);
+DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+#if	_READONLY == 0
+DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+#endif
+DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*);
+
+
+/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */
+
+#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
+#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
+#define STA_PROTECT		0x04	/* Write protected */
+
+
+/* Command code for disk_ioctrl() */
+
+/* Generic command */
+#define CTRL_SYNC			0	/* Mandatory for write functions */
+#define GET_SECTOR_COUNT	1	/* Mandatory for only f_mkfs() */
+#define GET_SECTOR_SIZE		2	/* Mandatory for multiple sector size cfg */
+#define GET_BLOCK_SIZE		3	/* Mandatory for only f_mkfs() */
+#define CTRL_POWER			4
+#define CTRL_LOCK			5
+#define CTRL_EJECT			6
+/* MMC/SDC command */
+#define MMC_GET_TYPE		10
+#define MMC_GET_CSD			11
+#define MMC_GET_CID			12
+#define MMC_GET_OCR			13
+#define MMC_GET_SDSTAT		14
+/* ATA/CF command */
+#define ATA_GET_REV			20
+#define ATA_GET_MODEL		21
+#define ATA_GET_SN			22
+
+
+#define _DISKIO
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
index 6382fea1f..b30139055 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
@@ -1,3153 +1,3153 @@
-/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.07e                    (C)ChaN, 2010
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
-/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
-/ developments under license policy of following trems.
-/
-/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
-/
-/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
-/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-/   personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
-/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-/
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00  Prototype.
-/
-/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01  First stable version.
-/
-/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02  Added FAT12 support.
-/                   Removed unbuffered mode.
-/                   Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
-/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM).
-/
-/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03  Added f_rename().
-/                   Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
-/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
-/                   Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
-/
-/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04  Supported multiple drive system.
-/                   Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system.
-/                   Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount().
-/                   Added f_mkfs().
-/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive.
-/                   Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek().
-/                   Added minimization level 3.
-/                   Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs().
-/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG.
-/                   Added FSInfo support.
-/                   Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
-/                   Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object.
-/
-/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs().
-/                   Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo.
-/                   Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory.
-/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime().
-/                   Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
-/                   Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
-/                   Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close
-/                   without write.
-/
-/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06  Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
-/                   Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same
-/                   or following cluster.
-/
-/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
-/                   Added long file name support.
-/                   Added multiple code page support.
-/                   Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
-/                   Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
-/                   Added rewind option to f_readdir().
-/                   Changed result code of critical errors.
-/                   Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
-/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
-/                   Added multiple sector size support.
-/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error.
-/                   Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
-/                   Added relative path feature.
-/                   Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive().
-/                   Added proper case conversion to extended char.
-/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
-/                   Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
-/                   Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
-/                   Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
-/                   Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper
-/                   case on non-LFN cfg.
-/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include "ff.h"			/* FatFs configurations and declarations */
-#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Module Private Definitions
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#if _FATFS != 0x007E
-#error Wrong include file (ff.h).
-#endif
-
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-#if _USE_LFN == 1
-#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration.
-#endif
-#define	ENTER_FF(fs)		{ if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; }
-#define	LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	{ unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; }
-
-#else
-#define	ENTER_FF(fs)
-#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	return res
-
-#endif
-
-#define	ABORT(fs, res)		{ fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); }
-
-#ifndef NULL
-#define	NULL	0
-#endif
-
-/* Name status flags */
-#define NS			11		/* Offset of name status byte */
-#define NS_LOSS		0x01	/* Out of 8.3 format */
-#define NS_LFN		0x02	/* Force to create LFN entry */
-#define NS_LAST		0x04	/* Last segment */
-#define NS_BODY		0x08	/* Lower case flag (body) */
-#define NS_EXT		0x10	/* Lower case flag (ext) */
-#define NS_DOT		0x20	/* Dot entry */
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Private Work Area
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#if _DRIVES < 1 || _DRIVES > 9
-#error Number of drives must be 1-9.
-#endif
-static
-FATFS *FatFs[_DRIVES];	/* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */
-
-static
-WORD Fsid;				/* File system mount ID */
-
-#if _FS_RPATH
-static
-BYTE Drive;				/* Current drive */
-#endif
-
-
-#if _USE_LFN == 1	/* LFN with static LFN working buffer */
-static
-WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN + 1];
-#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]; WCHAR *lp = LfnBuf
-#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp; dj.lfn = lp
-
-#elif _USE_LFN > 1	/* LFN with dynamic LFN working buffer */
-#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN + 1], *lp = lbuf
-#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp; dj.lfn = lp
-
-#else				/* No LFN */
-#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]
-#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Module Private Functions
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* String functions                                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/* Copy memory to memory */
-static
-void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, int cnt) {
-	char *d = (char*)dst;
-	const char *s = (const char *)src;
-	while (cnt--) *d++ = *s++;
-}
-
-/* Fill memory */
-static
-void mem_set (void* dst, int val, int cnt) {
-	char *d = (char*)dst;
-	while (cnt--) *d++ = (char)val;
-}
-
-/* Compare memory to memory */
-static
-int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, int cnt) {
-	const char *d = (const char *)dst, *s = (const char *)src;
-	int r = 0;
-	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
-	return r;
-}
-
-/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
-static
-int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
-	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
-	return *str;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Request/Release grant to access the volume                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-
-static
-BOOL lock_fs (
-	FATFS *fs		/* File system object */
-)
-{
-	return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj);
-}
-
-
-static
-void unlock_fs (
-	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
-	FRESULT res		/* Result code to be returned */
-)
-{
-	if (res != FR_NOT_ENABLED &&
-		res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE &&
-		res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT &&
-		res != FR_TIMEOUT) {
-		ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj);
-	}
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change window offset                                                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT move_window (
-	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
-	DWORD sector	/* Sector number to make apperance in the fs->win[] */
-)					/* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */
-{
-	DWORD wsect;
-
-
-	wsect = fs->winsect;
-	if (wsect != sector) {	/* Changed current window */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-		if (fs->wflag) {	/* Write back dirty window if needed */
-			if (disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-				return FR_DISK_ERR;
-			fs->wflag = 0;
-			if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->sects_fat)) {	/* In FAT area */
-				BYTE nf;
-				for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) {	/* Refrect the change to all FAT copies */
-					wsect += fs->sects_fat;
-					disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, wsect, 1);
-				}
-			}
-		}
-#endif
-		if (sector) {
-			if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK)
-				return FR_DISK_ERR;
-			fs->winsect = sector;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Clean-up cached data                                                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-FRESULT sync (	/* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */
-	FATFS *fs	/* File system object */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-	res = move_window(fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		/* Update FSInfo sector if needed */
-		if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) {
-			fs->winsect = 0;
-			mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512);
-			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust);
-			disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1);
-			fs->fsi_flag = 0;
-		}
-		/* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */
-		if (disk_ioctl(fs->drive, CTRL_SYNC, (void*)NULL) != RES_OK)
-			res = FR_DISK_ERR;
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-DWORD get_fat (	/* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Interal error, Else:Cluster status */
-	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
-)
-{
-	UINT wc, bc;
-	DWORD fsect;
-
-
-	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust)	/* Range check */
-		return 1;
-
-	fsect = fs->fatbase;
-	switch (fs->fs_type) {
-	case FS_FAT12 :
-		bc = clst; bc += bc / 2;
-		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
-		wc = fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)]; bc++;
-		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
-		wc |= (WORD)fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)] << 8;
-		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
-
-	case FS_FAT16 :
-		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break;
-		return LD_WORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 2) & (SS(fs) - 1)]);
-
-	case FS_FAT32 :
-		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break;
-		return LD_DWORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 4) & (SS(fs) - 1)]) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
-	}
-
-	return 0xFFFFFFFF;	/* An error occured at the disk I/O layer */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry                              */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-
-FRESULT put_fat (
-	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst,	/* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->max_clust - 1 */
-	DWORD val	/* New value to mark the cluster */
-)
-{
-	UINT bc;
-	BYTE *p;
-	DWORD fsect;
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust) {	/* Range check */
-		res = FR_INT_ERR;
-
-	} else {
-		fsect = fs->fatbase;
-		switch (fs->fs_type) {
-		case FS_FAT12 :
-			bc = clst; bc += bc / 2;
-			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			p = &fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)];
-			*p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val;
-			bc++;
-			fs->wflag = 1;
-			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			p = &fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)];
-			*p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F));
-			break;
-
-		case FS_FAT16 :
-			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			ST_WORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 2) & (SS(fs) - 1)], (WORD)val);
-			break;
-
-		case FS_FAT32 :
-			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			ST_DWORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 4) & (SS(fs) - 1)], val);
-			break;
-
-		default :
-			res = FR_INT_ERR;
-		}
-		fs->wflag = 1;
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-FRESULT remove_chain (
-	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to remove a chain from */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD nxt;
-
-
-	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust) {	/* Check the range of cluster# */
-		res = FR_INT_ERR;
-
-	} else {
-		res = FR_OK;
-		while (clst < fs->max_clust) {			/* Not a last link? */
-			nxt = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Get cluster status */
-			if (nxt == 0) break;				/* Empty cluster? */
-			if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }	/* Internal error? */
-			if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }	/* Disk error? */
-			res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0);			/* Mark the cluster "empty" */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {	/* Update FSInfo */
-				fs->free_clust++;
-				fs->fsi_flag = 1;
-			}
-			clst = nxt;	/* Next cluster */
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-DWORD create_chain (	/* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */
-	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */
-)
-{
-	DWORD cs, ncl, scl, mcl;
-
-
-	mcl = fs->max_clust;
-	if (clst == 0) {		/* Create new chain */
-		scl = fs->last_clust;			/* Get suggested start point */
-		if (scl == 0 || scl >= mcl) scl = 1;
-	}
-	else {					/* Stretch existing chain */
-		cs = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Check the cluster status */
-		if (cs < 2) return 1;			/* It is an invalid cluster */
-		if (cs < mcl) return cs;		/* It is already followed by next cluster */
-		scl = clst;
-	}
-
-	ncl = scl;				/* Start cluster */
-	for (;;) {
-		ncl++;							/* Next cluster */
-		if (ncl >= mcl) {				/* Wrap around */
-			ncl = 2;
-			if (ncl > scl) return 0;	/* No free custer */
-		}
-		cs = get_fat(fs, ncl);			/* Get the cluster status */
-		if (cs == 0) break;				/* Found a free cluster */
-		if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occured */
-			return cs;
-		if (ncl == scl) return 0;		/* No free custer */
-	}
-
-	if (put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF))	/* Mark the new cluster "in use" */
-		return 0xFFFFFFFF;
-	if (clst != 0) {					/* Link it to the previous one if needed */
-		if (put_fat(fs, clst, ncl))
-			return 0xFFFFFFFF;
-	}
-
-	fs->last_clust = ncl;				/* Update FSINFO */
-	if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {
-		fs->free_clust--;
-		fs->fsi_flag = 1;
-	}
-
-	return ncl;		/* Return new cluster number */
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
-	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
-)
-{
-	clst -= 2;
-	if (clst >= (fs->max_clust - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
-	return clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Seek directory index                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_seek (
-	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
-	WORD idx		/* Directory index number */
-)
-{
-	DWORD clst;
-	WORD ic;
-
-
-	dj->index = idx;
-	clst = dj->sclust;
-	if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->max_clust)	/* Check start cluster range */
-		return FR_INT_ERR;
-	if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
-		clst = dj->fs->dirbase;
-
-	if (clst == 0) {	/* Static table */
-		dj->clust = clst;
-		if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)		/* Index is out of range */
-			return FR_INT_ERR;
-		dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / 32);	/* Sector# */
-	}
-	else {				/* Dynamic table */
-		ic = SS(dj->fs) / 32 * dj->fs->csize;	/* Entries per cluster */
-		while (idx >= ic) {	/* Follow cluster chain */
-			clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst);				/* Get next cluster */
-			if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Disk error */
-			if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->max_clust)	/* Reached to end of table or int error */
-				return FR_INT_ERR;
-			idx -= ic;
-		}
-		dj->clust = clst;
-		dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / 32);	/* Sector# */
-	}
-
-	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) * 32;	/* Ptr to the entry in the sector */
-
-	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Move directory index next                        */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not streach */
-	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
-	BOOL streach	/* FALSE: Do not streach table, TRUE: Streach table if needed */
-)
-{
-	DWORD clst;
-	WORD i;
-
-
-	i = dj->index + 1;
-	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
-		return FR_NO_FILE;
-
-	if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / 32))) {	/* Sector changed? */
-		dj->sect++;					/* Next sector */
-
-		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
-			if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
-				return FR_NO_FILE;
-		}
-		else {					/* Dynamic table */
-			if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
-				clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust);				/* Get next cluster */
-				if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-				if (clst >= dj->fs->max_clust) {				/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-					BYTE c;
-					if (!streach) return FR_NO_FILE;			/* When do not streach, report EOT */
-					clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust);		/* Streach cluster chain */
-					if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED;			/* No free cluster */
-					if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
-					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-					/* Clean-up streached table */
-					if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Flush active window */
-					mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs));			/* Clear window buffer */
-					dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);	/* Cluster start sector */
-					for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) {		/* Fill the new cluster with 0 */
-						dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-						if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-						dj->fs->winsect++;
-					}
-					dj->fs->winsect -= c;						/* Rewind window address */
-#else
-					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
-#endif
-				}
-				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
-				dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	dj->index = i;
-	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) * 32;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry   */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_LFN
-static
-const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30};	/* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */
-
-
-static
-BOOL cmp_lfn (			/* TRUE:Matched, FALSE:Not matched */
-	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */
-	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */
-)
-{
-	int i, s;
-	WCHAR wc, uc;
-
-
-	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0xBF) - 1) * 13;	/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
-	s = 0; wc = 1;
-	do {
-		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);	/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
-		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
-			wc = ff_wtoupper(uc);		/* Convert it to upper case */
-			if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++]))	/* Compare it */
-				return FALSE;			/* Not matched */
-		} else {
-			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return FALSE;	/* Check filler */
-		}
-	} while (++s < 13);				/* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */
-
-	if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x40) && wc && lfnbuf[i])	/* Last segment matched but different length */
-		return FALSE;
-
-	return TRUE;					/* The part of LFN matched */
-}
-
-
-
-static
-BOOL pick_lfn (			/* TRUE:Succeeded, FALSE:Buffer overflow */
-	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */
-	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-)
-{
-	int i, s;
-	WCHAR wc, uc;
-
-
-	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13;	/* Offset in the LFN buffer */
-
-	s = 0; wc = 1;
-	do {
-		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);			/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
-		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
-			if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return FALSE;	/* Buffer overflow? */
-			lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc;				/* Store it */
-		} else {
-			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return FALSE;		/* Check filler */
-		}
-	} while (++s < 13);						/* Read all character in the entry */
-
-	if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x40) {				/* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */
-		if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return FALSE;	/* Buffer overflow? */
-		lfnbuf[i] = 0;
-	}
-
-	return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-void fit_lfn (
-	const WCHAR *lfnbuf,	/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
-	BYTE *dir,				/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-	BYTE ord,				/* LFN order (1-20) */
-	BYTE sum				/* SFN sum */
-)
-{
-	int i, s;
-	WCHAR wc;
-
-
-	dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum;			/* Set check sum */
-	dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN;		/* Set attribute. LFN entry */
-	dir[LDIR_Type] = 0;
-	ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0);
-
-	i = (ord - 1) * 13;				/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
-	s = wc = 0;
-	do {
-		if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++];	/* Get an effective char */
-		ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc);	/* Put it */
-		if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF;		/* Padding chars following last char */
-	} while (++s < 13);
-	if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= 0x40;	/* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */
-	dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord;			/* Set the LFN order */
-}
-
-#endif
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create numbered name                                                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_LFN
-void gen_numname (
-	BYTE *dst,			/* Pointer to genartated SFN */
-	const BYTE *src,	/* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */
-	const WCHAR *lfn,	/* Pointer to LFN */
-	WORD num			/* Sequense number */
-)
-{
-	char ns[8];
-	int i, j;
-
-
-	mem_cpy(dst, src, 11);
-
-	if (num > 5) {	/* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequencial number */
-		do num = (num >> 1) + (num << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn);
-	}
-
-	/* itoa */
-	i = 7;
-	do {
-		ns[i--] = (num % 10) + '0';
-		num /= 10;
-	} while (num);
-	ns[i] = '~';
-
-	/* Append the number */
-	for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) {
-		if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) {
-			if (j == i - 1) break;
-			j++;
-		}
-	}
-	do {
-		dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' ';
-	} while (j < 8);
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Calculate sum of an SFN                                               */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_LFN
-static
-BYTE sum_sfn (
-	const BYTE *dir		/* Ptr to directory entry */
-)
-{
-	BYTE sum = 0;
-	int n = 11;
-
-	do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n);
-	return sum;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_find (
-	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE c, *dir;
-#if _USE_LFN
-	BYTE a, ord, sum;
-#endif
-
-	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);			/* Rewind directory object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
-
-#if _USE_LFN
-	ord = sum = 0xFF;
-#endif
-	do {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
-		c = dir[DIR_Name];
-		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
-		if (c == 0xE5 || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
-			ord = 0xFF;
-		} else {
-			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
-				if (dj->lfn) {
-					if (c & 0x40) {		/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
-						sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
-						c &= 0xBF; ord = c;	/* LFN start order */
-						dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
-					}
-					/* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */
-					ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
-				}
-			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
-				if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break;	/* LFN matched? */
-				ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;	/* Reset LFN sequence */
-				if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break;	/* SFN matched? */
-			}
-		}
-#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
-		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
-			break;
-#endif
-		res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);		/* Next entry */
-	} while (res == FR_OK);
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
-static
-FRESULT dir_read (
-	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE c, *dir;
-#if _USE_LFN
-	BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF;
-#endif
-
-	res = FR_NO_FILE;
-	while (dj->sect) {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
-		c = dir[DIR_Name];
-		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
-		if (c == 0xE5 || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
-			ord = 0xFF;
-		} else {
-			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
-				if (c & 0x40) {			/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
-					sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
-					c &= 0xBF; ord = c;
-					dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
-				}
-				/* Check LFN validity and capture it */
-				ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
-			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
-				if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir))	/* Is there a valid LFN? */
-					dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;		/* It has no LFN. */
-				break;
-			}
-		}
-#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
-		if (c != 0xE5 && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
-			break;
-#endif
-		res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);				/* Next entry */
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-	}
-
-	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Register an object to the directory                                   */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-FRESULT dir_register (	/* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */
-	DIR *dj				/* Target directory with object name to be created */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE c, *dir;
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-	WORD n, ne, is;
-	BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum;
-	WCHAR *lfn;
-
-
-	fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn;
-	mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12);
-
-	if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT)) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Cannot create dot entry */
-
-	if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) {			/* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */
-		fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = NULL;			/* Find only SFN */
-		for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) {
-			gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n);	/* Generate a numbered name */
-			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		}
-		if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED;		/* Abort if too many collisions */
-		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res;	/* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */
-		fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn;
-	}
-
-	if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) {			/* When LFN is to be created, reserve reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */
-		for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ;
-		ne = (ne + 25) / 13;
-	} else {						/* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */
-		ne = 1;
-	}
-
-	/* Reserve contiguous entries */
-	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
-	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
-	n = is = 0;
-	do {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		c = *dj->dir;				/* Check the entry status */
-		if (c == 0xE5 || c == 0) {	/* Is it a blank entry? */
-			if (n == 0) is = dj->index;	/* First index of the contigulus entry */
-			if (++n == ne) break;	/* A contiguous entry that requiered count is found */
-		} else {
-			n = 0;					/* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */
-		}
-		res = dir_next(dj, TRUE);	/* Next entry with table streach */
-	} while (res == FR_OK);
-
-	if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) {	/* Initialize LFN entry if needed */
-		res = dir_seek(dj, is);
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn);	/* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */
-			ne--;
-			do {					/* Store LFN entries in bottom first */
-				res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-				if (res != FR_OK) break;
-				fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum);
-				dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Next entry */
-			} while (res == FR_OK && --ne);
-		}
-	}
-
-#else	/* Non LFN configuration */
-	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		do {	/* Find a blank entry for the SFN */
-			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			c = *dj->dir;
-			if (c == 0xE5 || c == 0) break;	/* Is it a blank entry? */
-			res = dir_next(dj, TRUE);		/* Next entry with table streach */
-		} while (res == FR_OK);
-	}
-#endif
-
-	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Initialize the SFN entry */
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj->dir;
-			mem_set(dir, 0, 32);		/* Clean the entry */
-			mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11);	/* Put SFN */
-			dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT);	/* Put NT flag */
-			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Remove an object from the directory                                   */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE
-static
-FRESULT dir_remove (	/* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */
-	DIR *dj				/* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-	WORD i;
-
-	i = dj->index;	/* SFN index */
-	res = dir_seek(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx));	/* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		do {
-			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			*dj->dir = 0xE5;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
-			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-			if (dj->index >= i) break;	/* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */
-			res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Next entry */
-		} while (res == FR_OK);
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;
-	}
-
-#else			/* Non LFN configuration */
-	res = dir_seek(dj, dj->index);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			*dj->dir = 0xE5;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
-			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-		}
-	}
-#endif
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT create_name (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
-	const XCHAR **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
-)
-{
-#ifdef _EXCVT
-	static const BYTE cvt[] = _EXCVT;
-#endif
-
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-	BYTE b, cf;
-	WCHAR w, *lfn;
-	int i, ni, si, di;
-	const XCHAR *p;
-
-	/* Create LFN in Unicode */
-	si = di = 0;
-	p = *path;
-	lfn = dj->lfn;
-	for (;;) {
-		w = p[si++];					/* Get a character */
-		if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
-		if (di >= _MAX_LFN)				/* Reject too long name */
-			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-#if !_LFN_UNICODE
-		w &= 0xFF;
-		if (IsDBCS1(w)) {				/* If it is a DBC 1st byte */
-			b = p[si++];				/* Get 2nd byte */
-			if (!IsDBCS2(b))			/* Reject invalid code for DBC */
-				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			w = (w << 8) + b;
-		}
-		w = ff_convert(w, 1);			/* Convert OEM to Unicode */
-		if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid code */
-#endif
-		if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */
-			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		lfn[di++] = w;					/* Store the Unicode char */
-	}
-	*path = &p[si];						/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
-	cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	if ((di == 1 && lfn[di - 1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */
-		(di == 2 && lfn[di - 1] == '.' && lfn[di - 2] == '.')) {
-		lfn[di] = 0;
-		for (i = 0; i < 11; i++)
-			dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' ';
-		dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT;		/* This is a dot entry */
-		return FR_OK;
-	}
-#endif
-	while (di) {						/* Strip trailing spaces and dots */
-		w = lfn[di - 1];
-		if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break;
-		di--;
-	}
-	if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject null string */
-
-	lfn[di] = 0;						/* LFN is created */
-
-	/* Create SFN in directory form */
-	mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11);
-	for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ;	/* Strip leading spaces and dots */
-	if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;
-	while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--;	/* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */
-
-	b = i = 0; ni = 8;
-	for (;;) {
-		w = lfn[si++];					/* Get an LFN char */
-		if (!w) break;					/* Break on enf of the LFN */
-		if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) {	/* Remove spaces and dots */
-			cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue;
-		}
-
-		if (i >= ni || si == di) {		/* Extension or end of SFN */
-			if (ni == 11) {				/* Long extension */
-				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break;
-			}
-			if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Out of 8.3 format */
-			if (si > di) break;			/* No extension */
-			si = di; i = 8; ni = 11;	/* Enter extension section */
-			b <<= 2; continue;
-		}
-
-		if (w >= 0x80) {				/* Non ASCII char */
-#ifdef _EXCVT
-			w = ff_convert(w, 0);		/* Unicode -> OEM code */
-			if (w) w = cvt[w - 0x80];	/* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */
-#else
-			w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0);	/* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */
-#endif
-			cf |= NS_LFN;				/* Force create LFN entry */
-		}
-
-		if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) {		/* Double byte char */
-			if (i >= ni - 1) {
-				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue;
-			}
-			dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8);
-		} else {						/* Single byte char */
-			if (!w || chk_chr("+,;[=]", w)) {		/* Replace illegal chars for SFN */
-				w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Lossy conversion */
-			} else {
-				if (IsUpper(w)) {		/* ASCII large capital */
-					b |= 2;
-				} else {
-					if (IsLower(w)) {	/* ASCII small capital */
-						b |= 1; w -= 0x20;
-					}
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w;
-	}
-
-	if (dj->fn[0] == 0xE5) dj->fn[0] = 0x05;	/* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */
-
-	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
-	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03)	/* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */
-		cf |= NS_LFN;
-	if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) {						/* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */
-		if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
-		if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
-	}
-
-	dj->fn[NS] = cf;	/* SFN is created */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-
-
-#else	/* Non-LFN configuration */
-	BYTE b, c, d, *sfn;
-	int ni, si, i;
-	const char *p;
-
-	/* Create file name in directory form */
-	sfn = dj->fn;
-	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
-	si = i = b = 0; ni = 8;
-	p = *path;
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */
-		for (;;) {
-			c = p[si++];
-			if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break;
-			sfn[i++] = c;
-		}
-		if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		*path = &p[si];									/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
-		sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT;	/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
-		return FR_OK;
-	}
-#endif
-	for (;;) {
-		c = p[si++];
-		if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
-		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
-			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			i = 8; ni = 11;
-			b <<= 2; continue;
-		}
-		if (c >= 0x80) {				/* Extended char */
-#ifdef _EXCVT
-			c = cvt[c - 0x80];			/* Convert extend char (SBCS) */
-#else
-			b |= 3;						/* Eliminate NT flag if ext char is exist */
-#if !_DF1S	/* ASCII only cfg */
-			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-#endif
-#endif
-		}
-		if (IsDBCS1(c)) {				/* DBC 1st byte? */
-			d = p[si++];				/* Get 2nd byte */
-			if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1)	/* Reject invalid DBC */
-				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			sfn[i++] = c;
-			sfn[i++] = d;
-		} else {						/* Single byte code */
-			if (chk_chr(" \"*+,[=]|\x7F", c))	/* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */
-				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			if (IsUpper(c)) {			/* ASCII large capital? */
-				b |= 2;
-			} else {
-				if (IsLower(c)) {		/* ASCII small capital? */
-					b |= 1; c -= 0x20;
-				}
-			}
-			sfn[i++] = c;
-		}
-	}
-	*path = &p[si];						/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
-	c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
-
-	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject null string */
-	if (sfn[0] == 0xE5) sfn[0] = 0x05;	/* When first char collides with 0xE5, replace it with 0x05 */
-
-	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
-	if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
-	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
-
-	sfn[NS] = c;		/* Store NT flag, File name is created */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
-static
-void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
-	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to the file information to be filled */
-)
-{
-	int i;
-	BYTE c, nt, *dir;
-	char *p;
-
-
-	p = fno->fname;
-	if (dj->sect) {
-		dir = dj->dir;
-		nt = dir[DIR_NTres];		/* NT flag */
-		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy name body */
-			c = dir[i];
-			if (c == ' ') break;
-			if (c == 0x05) c = 0xE5;
-			if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
-			*p++ = c;
-		}
-		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy name extension */
-			*p++ = '.';
-			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
-				c = dir[i];
-				if (c == ' ') break;
-				if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
-				*p++ = c;
-			}
-		}
-		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
-		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
-		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
-		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
-	}
-	*p = 0;
-
-#if _USE_LFN
-	if (fno->lfname) {
-		XCHAR *tp = fno->lfname;
-		WCHAR w, *lfn;
-
-		i = 0;
-		if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */
-			lfn = dj->lfn;
-			while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) {			/* Get an LFN char */
-#if !_LFN_UNICODE
-				w = ff_convert(w, 0);			/* Unicode -> OEM conversion */
-				if (!w) { i = 0; break; }		/* Could not convert, no LFN */
-				if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100)		/* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC */
-					tp[i++] = (XCHAR)(w >> 8);
-#endif
-				if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; }	/* Buffer overrun, no LFN */
-				tp[i++] = (XCHAR)w;
-			}
-		}
-		tp[i] = 0;	/* Terminator */
-	}
-#endif
-}
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Follow a file path                                                    */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
-	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
-	const XCHAR *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE *dir, last;
-
-
-	while (!_USE_LFN && *path == ' ') path++;	/* Skip leading spaces */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */
-		path++;	dj->sclust = 0;		/* Strip it and start from the root dir */
-	} else {							/* No heading saparator */
-		dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir;	/* Start from the current dir */
-	}
-#else
-	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\')	/* Strip heading separator if exist */
-		path++;
-	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Start from the root dir */
-#endif
-
-	if ((UINT)*path < ' ') {			/* Null path means the start directory itself */
-		res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
-		dj->dir = NULL;
-
-	} else {							/* Follow path */
-		for (;;) {
-			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
-			last = *(dj->fn+NS) & NS_LAST;
-			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Could not find the object */
-				if (res == FR_NO_FILE && !last)
-					res = FR_NO_PATH;
-				break;
-			}
-			if (last) break;				/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
-			dir = dj->dir;					/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
-			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Cannot follow because it is a file */
-				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
-			}
-			dj->sclust = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Load boot record and check if it is an FAT boot record                */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:The FAT boot record, 1:Valid boot record but not an FAT, 2:Not a boot record, 3:Error */
-	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
-	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
-)
-{
-	if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load boot record */
-		return 3;
-	if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55)		/* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */
-		return 2;
-
-	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)	/* Check "FAT" string */
-		return 0;
-	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)
-		return 0;
-
-	return 1;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Make sure that the file system is valid                               */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-FRESULT chk_mounted (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occured */
-	const XCHAR **path,	/* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */
-	FATFS **rfs,		/* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */
-	BYTE chk_wp			/* !=0: Check media write protection for write access */
-)
-{
-	BYTE fmt, *tbl;
-	UINT vol;
-	DSTATUS stat;
-	DWORD bsect, fsize, tsect, mclst;
-	const XCHAR *p = *path;
-	FATFS *fs;
-
-	/* Get logical drive number from the path name */
-	vol = p[0] - '0';				/* Is there a drive number? */
-	if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') {	/* Found a drive number, get and strip it */
-		p += 2; *path = p;			/* Return pointer to the path name */
-	} else {						/* No drive number is given */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-		vol = Drive;				/* Use current drive */
-#else
-		vol = 0;					/* Use drive 0 */
-#endif
-	}
-
-	/* Check if the logical drive is valid or not */
-	if (vol >= _DRIVES) 			/* Is the drive number valid? */
-		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-	*rfs = fs = FatFs[vol];			/* Returen pointer to the corresponding file system object */
-	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;	/* Is the file system object available? */
-
-	ENTER_FF(fs);					/* Lock file system */
-
-	if (fs->fs_type) {				/* If the logical drive has been mounted */
-		stat = disk_status(fs->drive);
-		if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) {	/* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-			if (chk_wp && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check write protection if needed */
-				return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
-#endif
-			return FR_OK;			/* The file system object is valid */
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* The logical drive must be mounted. Following code attempts to mount the volume */
-
-	fs->fs_type = 0;					/* Clear the file system object */
-	fs->drive = (BYTE)LD2PD(vol);		/* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */
-	stat = disk_initialize(fs->drive);	/* Initialize low level disk I/O layer */
-	if (stat & STA_NOINIT)				/* Check if the drive is ready */
-		return FR_NOT_READY;
-#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size if needed */
-	if (disk_ioctl(fs->drive, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
-		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
-#endif
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	if (chk_wp && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check disk write protection if needed */
-		return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
-#endif
-	/* Search FAT partition on the drive */
-	fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0);		/* Check sector 0 as an SFD format */
-	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT boot record, it may be patitioned */
-		/* Check a partition listed in top of the partition table */
-		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + LD2PT(vol) * 16];	/* Partition table */
-		if (tbl[4]) {									/* Is the partition existing? */
-			bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]);					/* Partition offset in LBA */
-			fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect);					/* Check the partition */
-		}
-	}
-	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-	if (fmt || LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs))	/* No valid FAT patition is found */
-		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
-
-	/* Initialize the file system object */
-	fsize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
-	if (!fsize) fsize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32);
-	fs->sects_fat = fsize;
-	fs->n_fats = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs];					/* Number of FAT copies */
-	fsize *= fs->n_fats;								/* (Number of sectors in FAT area) */
-	fs->fatbase = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt); /* FAT start sector (lba) */
-	fs->csize = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus];				/* Number of sectors per cluster */
-	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt);	/* Nmuber of root directory entries */
-	tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16);				/* Number of sectors on the volume */
-	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32);
-	fs->max_clust = mclst = (tsect						/* Last cluster# + 1 (Number of clusters + 2) */
-		- LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt) - fsize - fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs)/32)
-		) / fs->csize + 2;
-
-	fmt = FS_FAT12;										/* Determine the FAT sub type */
-	if (mclst >= 0xFF7) fmt = FS_FAT16;					/* Number of clusters >= 0xFF5 */
-	if (mclst >= 0xFFF7) fmt = FS_FAT32;				/* Number of clusters >= 0xFFF5 */
-
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)
-		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus);	/* Root directory start cluster */
-	else
-		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fsize;				/* Root directory start sector (lba) */
-	fs->database = fs->fatbase + fsize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs)/32);	/* Data start sector (lba) */
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	/* Initialize allocation information */
-	fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF;
-	fs->wflag = 0;
-	/* Get fsinfo if needed */
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
-	 	fs->fsi_flag = 0;
-		fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo);
-		if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK &&
-			LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 &&
-			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 &&
-			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) {
-			fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free);
-			fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count);
-		}
-	}
-#endif
-	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
-	fs->winsect = 0;		/* Invalidate sector cache */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	fs->cdir = 0;			/* Current directory (root dir) */
-#endif
-	fs->id = ++Fsid;		/* File system mount ID */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not                          */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT validate (	/* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */
-	FATFS *fs,		/* Pointer to the file system object */
-	WORD id			/* Member id of the target object to be checked */
-)
-{
-	if (!fs || !fs->fs_type || fs->id != id)
-		return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
-
-	ENTER_FF(fs);		/* Lock file system */
-
-	if (disk_status(fs->drive) & STA_NOINIT)
-		return FR_NOT_READY;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Public Functions
-
---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Mount/Unmount a Locical Drive                                         */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_mount (
-	BYTE vol,		/* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */
-	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/
-)
-{
-	FATFS *rfs;
-
-
-	if (vol >= _DRIVES)				/* Check if the drive number is valid */
-		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-	rfs = FatFs[vol];				/* Get current fs object */
-
-	if (rfs) {
-#if _FS_REENTRANT					/* Discard sync object of the current volume */
-		if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
-#endif
-		rfs->fs_type = 0;			/* Clear old fs object */
-	}
-
-	if (fs) {
-		fs->fs_type = 0;			/* Clear new fs object */
-#if _FS_REENTRANT					/* Create sync object for the new volume */
-		if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
-#endif
-	}
-	FatFs[vol] = fs;				/* Register new fs object */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_open (
-	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the blank file object */
-	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file name */
-	BYTE mode			/* Access mode and file open mode flags */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	fp->fs = NULL;		/* Clear file object */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	mode &= (FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW);
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & (FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)));
-#else
-	mode &= FA_READ;
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
-#endif
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-	res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	/* Create or Open a file */
-	if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) {
-		DWORD ps, cl;
-
-		if (res != FR_OK) {			/* No file, create new */
-			if (res == FR_NO_FILE)	/* There is no file to open, create a new entry */
-				res = dir_register(&dj);
-			if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-			mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS;
-			dir = dj.dir;			/* Created entry (SFN entry) */
-		}
-		else {						/* Any object is already existing */
-			if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW)			/* Cannot create new */
-				LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_EXIST);
-			dir = dj.dir;
-			if (!dir || (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)))	/* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */
-				LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
-			if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS) {		/* Resize it to zero on over write mode */
-				cl = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);	/* Get start cluster */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, 0);	/* cluster = 0 */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, 0);
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0);	/* size = 0 */
-				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-				ps = dj.fs->winsect;			/* Remove the cluster chain */
-				if (cl) {
-					res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl);
-					if (res) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-					dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1;	/* Reuse the cluster hole */
-				}
-				res = move_window(dj.fs, ps);
-				if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-			}
-		}
-		if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS) {
-			dir[DIR_Attr] = 0;					/* Reset attribute */
-			ps = get_fattime();
-			ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, ps);		/* Created time */
-			dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-			mode |= FA__WRITTEN;				/* Set file changed flag */
-		}
-	}
-	/* Open an existing file */
-	else {
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-		if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);	/* Follow failed */
-		dir = dj.dir;
-		if (!dir || (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR))	/* It is a directory */
-			LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_NO_FILE);
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-		if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */
-			LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
-	}
-	fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect;		/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-	fp->dir_ptr = dj.dir;
-#endif
-	fp->flag = mode;					/* File access mode */
-	fp->org_clust =						/* File start cluster */
-		((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-	fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
-	fp->fptr = 0; fp->csect = 255;		/* File pointer */
-	fp->dsect = 0;
-	fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id;	/* Owner file system object of the file */
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_OK);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read File                                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_read (
-	FIL *fp, 		/* Pointer to the file object */
-	void *buff,		/* Pointer to data buffer */
-	UINT btr,		/* Number of bytes to read */
-	UINT *br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD clst, sect, remain;
-	UINT rcnt, cc;
-	BYTE *rbuff = buff;
-
-
-	*br = 0;	/* Initialize bytes read */
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check abort flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) 						/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
-	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
-
-	for ( ;  btr;									/* Repeat until all data transferred */
-		rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
-		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
-			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
-				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
-					fp->org_clust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
-				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
-				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector offset in the cluster */
-			}
-			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current sector */
-			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-			sect += fp->csect;
-			cc = btr / SS(fp->fs);					/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
-			if (cc) {								/* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */
-				if (fp->csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
-					cc = fp->fs->csize - fp->csect;
-				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
-#if _FS_TINY
-				if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc)		/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
-					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs));
-#else
-				if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc)	/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
-					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs));
-#endif
-#endif
-				fp->csect += (BYTE)cc;				/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-				rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;				/* Number of bytes transferred */
-				continue;
-			}
-#if !_FS_TINY
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write sector I/O buffer if needed */
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-			}
-#endif
-			if (fp->dsect != sect) {			/* Fill sector buffer with file data */
-				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-			}
-#endif
-			fp->dsect = sect;
-			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-		}
-		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
-		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
-#if _FS_TINY
-		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))			/* Move sector window */
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
-#else
-		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
-#endif
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
-}
-
-
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Write File                                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_write (
-	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the file object */
-	const void *buff,	/* Pointer to the data to be written */
-	UINT btw,			/* Number of bytes to write */
-	UINT *bw			/* Pointer to number of bytes written */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD clst, sect;
-	UINT wcnt, cc;
-	const BYTE *wbuff = buff;
-
-
-	*bw = 0;	/* Initialize bytes written */
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check abort flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))						/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-	if (fp->fsize + btw < fp->fsize) btw = 0;		/* File size cannot reach 4GB */
-
-	for ( ;  btw;									/* Repeat until all data transferred */
-		wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) {
-		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
-			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
-				if (fp->fptr == 0) {				/* On the top of the file? */
-					clst = fp->org_clust;			/* Follow from the origin */
-					if (clst == 0)					/* When there is no cluster chain, */
-						fp->org_clust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);	/* Create a new cluster chain */
-				} else {							/* Middle or end of the file */
-					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);			/* Follow or streach cluster chain */
-				}
-				if (clst == 0) break;				/* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */
-				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
-				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector address in the cluster */
-			}
-#if _FS_TINY
-			if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0))	/* Write back data buffer prior to following direct transfer */
-				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#else
-			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write back data buffer prior to following direct transfer */
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-			}
-#endif
-			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current sector */
-			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-			sect += fp->csect;
-			cc = btw / SS(fp->fs);					/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
-			if (cc) {								/* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */
-				if (fp->csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
-					cc = fp->fs->csize - fp->csect;
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#if _FS_TINY
-				if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) {	/* Refill sector cache if it gets dirty by the direct write */
-					mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
-					fp->fs->wflag = 0;
-				}
-#else
-				if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) {		/* Refill sector cache if it gets dirty by the direct write */
-					mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
-					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-				}
-#endif
-				fp->csect += (BYTE)cc;				/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-				wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;				/* Number of bytes transferred */
-				continue;
-			}
-#if _FS_TINY
-			if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) {			/* Avoid silly buffer filling at growing edge */
-				if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->fs->winsect = sect;
-			}
-#else
-			if (fp->dsect != sect) {				/* Fill sector buffer with file data */
-				if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize &&
-					disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
-						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-			}
-#endif
-			fp->dsect = sect;
-			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-		}
-		wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */
-		if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw;
-#if _FS_TINY
-		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))			/* Move sector window */
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-		mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
-		fp->fs->wflag = 1;
-#else
-		mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
-		fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY;
-#endif
-	}
-
-	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Update file size if needed */
-	fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;						/* Set file changed flag */
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Synchronize the File Object                                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_sync (
-	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD tim;
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) {	/* Has the file been written? */
-#if !_FS_TINY	/* Write-back dirty buffer */
-			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-			}
-#endif
-			/* Update the directory entry */
-			res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect);
-			if (res == FR_OK) {
-				dir = fp->dir_ptr;
-				dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC;					/* Set archive bit */
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize);		/* Update file size */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, fp->org_clust);	/* Update start cluster */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, fp->org_clust >> 16);
-				tim = get_fattime();			/* Updated time */
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN;
-				fp->fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = sync(fp->fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-}
-
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Close File                                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_close (
-	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object to be closed */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-#if _FS_READONLY
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);
-	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = NULL;
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-#else
-	res = f_sync(fp);
-	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = NULL;
-	return res;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change Current Drive/Directory                                        */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#if _FS_RPATH
-
-FRESULT f_chdrive (
-	BYTE drv		/* Drive number */
-)
-{
-	if (drv >= _DRIVES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-
-	Drive = drv;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-FRESULT f_chdir (
-	const XCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow completed */
-			dir = dj.dir;					/* Pointer to the entry */
-			if (!dir) {
-				dj.fs->cdir = 0;			/* No entry (root dir) */
-			} else {
-				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* Reached to the dir */
-					dj.fs->cdir = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-				else
-					res = FR_NO_PATH;		/* Could not reach the dir (it is a file) */
-			}
-		}
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_lseek (
-	FIL *fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
-	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr;
-
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (ofs > fp->fsize					/* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-		 && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)
-#endif
-		) ofs = fp->fsize;
-
-	ifptr = fp->fptr;
-	fp->fptr = nsect = 0; fp->csect = 255;
-	if (ofs > 0) {
-		bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs);	/* Cluster size (byte) */
-		if (ifptr > 0 &&
-			(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
-			fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
-			ofs -= fp->fptr;
-			clst = fp->curr_clust;
-		} else {									/* When seek to back cluster, */
-			clst = fp->org_clust;					/* start from the first cluster */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-			if (clst == 0) {						/* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */
-				clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);
-				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->org_clust = clst;
-			}
-#endif
-			fp->curr_clust = clst;
-		}
-		if (clst != 0) {
-			while (ofs > bcs) {						/* Cluster following loop */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-				if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) {			/* Check if in write mode or not */
-					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst);	/* Force streached if in write mode */
-					if (clst == 0) {				/* When disk gets full, clip file size */
-						ofs = bcs; break;
-					}
-				} else
-#endif
-					clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->max_clust) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				fp->curr_clust = clst;
-				fp->fptr += bcs;
-				ofs -= bcs;
-			}
-			fp->fptr += ofs;
-			fp->csect = (BYTE)(ofs / SS(fp->fs));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
-			if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) {
-				nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst);	/* Current sector */
-				if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				nsect += fp->csect;
-				fp->csect++;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) {
-#if !_FS_TINY
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-		if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write-back dirty buffer if needed */
-			if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-			fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-		}
-#endif
-		if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#endif
-		fp->dsect = nsect;
-	}
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) {			/* Set changed flag if the file size is extended */
-		fp->fsize = fp->fptr;
-		fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
-	}
-#endif
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create a Directroy Object                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_opendir (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
-	const XCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF((*dj), sfn, lfn);
-		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
-			dir = dj->dir;
-			if (dir) {							/* It is not the root dir */
-				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
-					dj->sclust = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
-					res = FR_NO_PATH;
-				}
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {
-				dj->id = dj->fs->id;
-				res = dir_seek(dj, 0);			/* Rewind dir */
-			}
-		}
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read Directory Entry in Sequense                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_readdir (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
-	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-
-
-	res = validate(dj->fs, dj->id);			/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF((*dj), sfn, lfn);
-		if (!fno) {
-			res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
-		} else {
-			res = dir_read(dj);
-			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
-				dj->sect = 0;
-				res = FR_OK;
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
-				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
-				res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Increment index for next */
-				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
-					dj->sect = 0;
-					res = FR_OK;
-				}
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get File Status                                                       */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_stat (
-	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
-	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {				/* Follwo completed */
-			if (dj.dir)	/* Found an object */
-				get_fileinfo(&dj, fno);
-			else		/* It is root dir */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get Number of Free Clusters                                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_getfree (
-	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */
-	DWORD *nclst,		/* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */
-	FATFS **fatfs		/* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD n, clst, sect, stat;
-	UINT i;
-	BYTE fat, *p;
-
-
-	/* Get drive number */
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0);
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, res);
-
-	/* If number of free cluster is valid, return it without cluster scan. */
-	if ((*fatfs)->free_clust <= (*fatfs)->max_clust - 2) {
-		*nclst = (*fatfs)->free_clust;
-		LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_OK);
-	}
-
-	/* Get number of free clusters */
-	fat = (*fatfs)->fs_type;
-	n = 0;
-	if (fat == FS_FAT12) {
-		clst = 2;
-		do {
-			stat = get_fat(*fatfs, clst);
-			if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-			if (stat == 1) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_INT_ERR);
-			if (stat == 0) n++;
-		} while (++clst < (*fatfs)->max_clust);
-	} else {
-		clst = (*fatfs)->max_clust;
-		sect = (*fatfs)->fatbase;
-		i = 0; p = 0;
-		do {
-			if (!i) {
-				res = move_window(*fatfs, sect++);
-				if (res != FR_OK)
-					LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, res);
-				p = (*fatfs)->win;
-				i = SS(*fatfs);
-			}
-			if (fat == FS_FAT16) {
-				if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++;
-				p += 2; i -= 2;
-			} else {
-				if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++;
-				p += 4; i -= 4;
-			}
-		} while (--clst);
-	}
-	(*fatfs)->free_clust = n;
-	if (fat == FS_FAT32) (*fatfs)->fsi_flag = 1;
-	*nclst = n;
-
-	LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_OK);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Truncate File                                                         */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_truncate (
-	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD ncl;
-
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))			/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-
-	if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) {
-		fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Set file size to current R/W point */
-		fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
-		if (fp->fptr == 0) {	/* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */
-			res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->org_clust);
-			fp->org_clust = 0;
-		} else {				/* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */
-			ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
-			res = FR_OK;
-			if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
-			if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
-			if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->max_clust) {
-				res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust, 0x0FFFFFFF);
-				if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-	if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR;
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Delete a File or Directory                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_unlink (
-	const XCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the file or directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj, sdj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-	DWORD dclst;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-
-	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-	res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
-	if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-		res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); /* Follow failed */
-
-	dir = dj.dir;
-	if (!dir)								/* Is it the root directory? */
-		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_INVALID_NAME);
-	if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)				/* Is it a R/O object? */
-		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
-	dclst = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-
-	if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {			/* It is a sub-directory */
-		if (dclst < 2) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-		mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof(DIR));	/* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */
-		sdj.sclust = dclst;
-		res = dir_seek(&sdj, 2);
-		if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-		res = dir_read(&sdj);
-		if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_DENIED;	/* Not empty sub-dir */
-		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-	}
-
-	res = dir_remove(&dj);					/* Remove directory entry */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		if (dclst)
-			res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);	/* Remove the cluster chain */
-		if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs);
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create a Directory                                                    */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_mkdir (
-	const XCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir, n;
-	DWORD dsect, dclst, pclst, tim;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-
-	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-	res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
-	if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* Any file or directory is already existing */
-	if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-		res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-	if (res != FR_NO_FILE)					/* Any error occured */
-		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-
-	dclst = create_chain(dj.fs, 0);			/* Allocate a new cluster for new directory table */
-	res = FR_OK;
-	if (dclst == 0) res = FR_DENIED;
-	if (dclst == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
-	if (dclst == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
-	if (res == FR_OK)
-		res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-	dsect = clust2sect(dj.fs, dclst);
-
-	dir = dj.fs->win;						/* Initialize the new directory table */
-	mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
-	mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3);		/* Create "." entry */
-	dir[DIR_Name] = '.';
-	dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;
-	tim = get_fattime();
-	ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
-	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dclst);
-	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dclst >> 16);
-	mem_cpy(dir+32, dir, 32); 			/* Create ".." entry */
-	dir[33] = '.';
-	pclst = dj.sclust;
-	if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pclst == dj.fs->dirbase)
-		pclst = 0;
-	ST_WORD(dir+32+DIR_FstClusLO, pclst);
-	ST_WORD(dir+32+DIR_FstClusHI, pclst >> 16);
-	for (n = 0; n < dj.fs->csize; n++) {	/* Write dot entries and clear left sectors */
-		dj.fs->winsect = dsect++;
-		dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-		res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
-		if (res) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-		mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
-	}
-
-	res = dir_register(&dj);
-	if (res != FR_OK) {
-		remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);
-	} else {
-		dir = dj.dir;
-		dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;					/* Attribute */
-		ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);			/* Crated time */
-		ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dclst);		/* Table start cluster */
-		ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dclst >> 16);
-		dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-		res = sync(dj.fs);
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change File Attribute                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_chmod (
-	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
-	BYTE value,			/* Attribute bits */
-	BYTE mask			/* Attribute mask to change */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj.dir;
-			if (!dir) {						/* Is it a root directory? */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			} else {						/* File or sub directory */
-				mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC;	/* Valid attribute mask */
-				dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask);	/* Apply attribute change */
-				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = sync(dj.fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change Timestamp                                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_utime (
-	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file/directory name */
-	const FILINFO *fno	/* Pointer to the timestamp to be set */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj.dir;
-			if (!dir) {				/* Root directory */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			} else {				/* File or sub-directory */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime);
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate);
-				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = sync(dj.fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Rename File/Directory                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_rename (
-	const XCHAR *path_old,	/* Pointer to the old name */
-	const XCHAR *path_new	/* Pointer to the new name */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj_old, dj_new;
-	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
-	BYTE buf[21], *dir;
-	DWORD dw;
-
-
-	INITBUF(dj_old, sfn, lfn);
-	res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &dj_old.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		dj_new.fs = dj_old.fs;
-		res = follow_path(&dj_old, path_old);	/* Check old object */
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj_old.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-	}
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, res);	/* The old object is not found */
-
-	if (!dj_old.dir) LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, FR_NO_FILE);	/* Is root dir? */
-	mem_cpy(buf, dj_old.dir+DIR_Attr, 21);		/* Save the object information */
-
-	mem_cpy(&dj_new, &dj_old, sizeof(DIR));
-	res = follow_path(&dj_new, path_new);		/* Check new object */
-	if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;			/* The new object name is already existing */
-	if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { 					/* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */
-		res = dir_register(&dj_new);			/* Register the new object */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj_new.dir;					/* Copy object information into new entry */
-			mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19);
-			dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC;
-			dj_old.fs->wflag = 1;
-			if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {		/* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */
-				dw = clust2sect(dj_new.fs, (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO));
-				if (!dw) {
-					res = FR_INT_ERR;
-				} else {
-					res = move_window(dj_new.fs, dw);
-					dir = dj_new.fs->win+32;
-					if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') {
-						dw = (dj_new.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && dj_new.sclust == dj_new.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : dj_new.sclust;
-						ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dw);
-						ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dw >> 16);
-						dj_new.fs->wflag = 1;
-					}
-				}
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {
-				res = dir_remove(&dj_old);			/* Remove old entry */
-				if (res == FR_OK)
-					res = sync(dj_old.fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, res);
-}
-
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Forward data to the stream directly (Available on only _FS_TINY cfg)  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY
-
-FRESULT f_forward (
-	FIL *fp, 						/* Pointer to the file object */
-	UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT),	/* Pointer to the streaming function */
-	UINT btr,						/* Number of bytes to forward */
-	UINT *bf						/* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD remain, clst, sect;
-	UINT rcnt;
-
-
-	*bf = 0;
-
-	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check error flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ))						/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-
-	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
-	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
-
-	for ( ;  btr && (*func)(NULL, 0);				/* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */
-		fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
-		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
-			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
-				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
-					fp->org_clust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
-				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
-				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector address in the cluster */
-			}
-			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
-		}
-		sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current data sector */
-		if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-		sect += fp->csect - 1;
-		if (move_window(fp->fs, sect))				/* Move sector window */
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-		fp->dsect = sect;
-		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Forward data from sector window */
-		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
-		rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);
-		if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
-}
-#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */
-
-
-
-#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create File System on the Drive                                       */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#define N_ROOTDIR	512			/* Multiple of 32 and <= 2048 */
-#define N_FATS		1			/* 1 or 2 */
-#define MAX_SECTOR	131072000UL	/* Maximum partition size */
-#define MIN_SECTOR	2000UL		/* Minimum partition size */
-
-
-FRESULT f_mkfs (
-	BYTE drv,			/* Logical drive number */
-	BYTE partition,		/* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */
-	WORD allocsize		/* Allocation unit size [bytes] */
-)
-{
-	static const DWORD sstbl[] = { 2048000, 1024000, 512000, 256000, 128000, 64000, 32000, 16000, 8000, 4000,   0 };
-	static const WORD cstbl[] =  {   32768,   16384,   8192,   4096,   2048, 16384,  8192,  4096, 2048, 1024, 512 };
-	BYTE fmt, m, *tbl;
-	DWORD b_part, b_fat, b_dir, b_data;		/* Area offset (LBA) */
-	DWORD n_part, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir;		/* Area size */
-	DWORD n_clst, d, n;
-	WORD as;
-	FATFS *fs;
-	DSTATUS stat;
-
-
-	/* Check validity of the parameters */
-	if (drv >= _DRIVES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-	if (partition >= 2) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-
-	/* Check mounted drive and clear work area */
-	fs = FatFs[drv];
-	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
-	fs->fs_type = 0;
-	drv = LD2PD(drv);
-
-	/* Get disk statics */
-	stat = disk_initialize(drv);
-	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
-	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
-#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size */
-	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK
-		|| SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
-		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-#endif
-	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_part) != RES_OK || n_part < MIN_SECTOR)
-		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-	if (n_part > MAX_SECTOR) n_part = MAX_SECTOR;
-	b_part = (!partition) ? 63 : 0;		/* Boot sector */
-	n_part -= b_part;
-	for (d = 512; d <= 32768U && d != allocsize; d <<= 1) ;	/* Check validity of the allocation unit size */
-	if (d != allocsize) allocsize = 0;
-	if (!allocsize) {					/* Auto selection of cluster size */
-		d = n_part;
-		for (as = SS(fs); as > 512U; as >>= 1) d >>= 1;
-		for (n = 0; d < sstbl[n]; n++) ;
-		allocsize = cstbl[n];
-	}
-	if (allocsize < SS(fs)) allocsize = SS(fs);
-
-	allocsize /= SS(fs);		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
-
-	/* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT type */
-	n_clst = n_part / allocsize;
-	fmt = FS_FAT12;
-	if (n_clst >= 0xFF5) fmt = FS_FAT16;
-	if (n_clst >= 0xFFF5) fmt = FS_FAT32;
-
-	/* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */
-	switch (fmt) {
-	case FS_FAT12:
-		n_fat = ((n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
-		n_rsv = 1 + partition;
-		n_dir = N_ROOTDIR * 32 / SS(fs);
-		break;
-	case FS_FAT16:
-		n_fat = ((n_clst * 2) + 4 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
-		n_rsv = 1 + partition;
-		n_dir = N_ROOTDIR * 32 / SS(fs);
-		break;
-	default:
-		n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
-		n_rsv = 33 - partition;
-		n_dir = 0;
-	}
-	b_fat = b_part + n_rsv;			/* FATs start sector */
-	b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS;	/* Directory start sector */
-	b_data = b_dir + n_dir;			/* Data start sector */
-
-	/* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */
-	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-	n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1);
-	n_fat += (n - b_data) / N_FATS;
-	/* b_dir and b_data are no longer used below */
-
-	/* Determine number of cluster and final check of validity of the FAT type */
-	n_clst = (n_part - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / allocsize;
-	if (   (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < 0xFF5)
-		|| (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < 0xFFF5))
-		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-
-	/* Create partition table if needed */
-	if (!partition) {
-		DWORD n_disk = b_part + n_part;
-
-		mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs));
-		tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table;
-		ST_DWORD(tbl, 0x00010180);		/* Partition start in CHS */
-		if (n_disk < 63UL * 255 * 1024) {	/* Partition end in CHS */
-			n_disk = n_disk / 63 / 255;
-			tbl[7] = (BYTE)n_disk;
-			tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n_disk >> 2) | 63);
-		} else {
-			ST_WORD(&tbl[6], 0xFFFF);
-		}
-		tbl[5] = 254;
-		if (fmt != FS_FAT32)			/* System ID */
-			tbl[4] = (n_part < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06;
-		else
-			tbl[4] = 0x0c;
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63);			/* Partition start in LBA */
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_part);		/* Partition size in LBA */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+64, 0xAA55);		/* Signature */
-		if (disk_write(drv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK)
-			return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		partition = 0xF8;
-	} else {
-		partition = 0xF0;
-	}
-
-	/* Create boot record */
-	tbl = fs->win;								/* Clear buffer */
-	mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));
-	ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_jmpBoot, 0x90FEEB);			/* Boot code (jmp $, nop) */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, SS(fs));		/* Sector size */
-	tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)allocsize;		/* Sectors per cluster */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv);			/* Reserved sectors */
-	tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS;					/* Number of FATs */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, SS(fs) / 32 * n_dir); /* Number of rootdir entries */
-	if (n_part < 0x10000) {						/* Number of total sectors */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_part);
-	} else {
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_part);
-	}
-	tbl[BPB_Media] = partition;					/* Media descripter */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63);				/* Number of sectors per track */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255);				/* Number of heads */
-	ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_part);			/* Hidden sectors */
-	n = get_fattime();							/* Use current time as a VSN */
-	if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n);				/* Volume serial number */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat);		/* Number of secters per FAT */
-		tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80;					/* Drive number */
-		tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29;					/* Extended boot signature */
-		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME    FAT     ", 19);	/* Volume lavel, FAT signature */
-	} else {
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n);			/* Volume serial number */
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat);		/* Number of secters per FAT */
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2);			/* Root directory cluster (2) */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1);				/* FSInfo record offset (bs+1) */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6);			/* Backup boot record offset (bs+6) */
-		tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80;				/* Drive number */
-		tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29;				/* Extended boot signature */
-		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME    FAT32   ", 19);	/* Volume lavel, FAT signature */
-	}
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);				/* Signature */
-	if (SS(fs) > 512U) {
-		ST_WORD(tbl+SS(fs)-2, 0xAA55);
-	}
-	if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+0, 1) != RES_OK)
-		return FR_DISK_ERR;
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)
-		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+6, 1);
-
-	/* Initialize FAT area */
-	for (m = 0; m < N_FATS; m++) {
-		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));		/* 1st sector of the FAT  */
-		if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
-			n = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00;
-			n |= partition;
-			ST_DWORD(tbl, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */
-		} else {
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, 0xFFFFFFF8);	/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF);
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */
-		}
-		if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
-			return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));		/* Following FAT entries are filled by zero */
-		for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) {
-			if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
-				return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Initialize Root directory */
-	m = (BYTE)((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? allocsize : n_dir);
-	do {
-		if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
-			return FR_DISK_ERR;
-	} while (--m);
-
-	/* Create FSInfo record if needed */
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1);
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 0xFFFFFFFF);
-		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+1, 1);
-		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+7, 1);
-	}
-
-	return (disk_ioctl(drv, CTRL_SYNC, (void*)NULL) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR;
-}
-
-#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-#if _USE_STRFUNC
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get a string from the file                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-char* f_gets (
-	char* buff,	/* Pointer to the string buffer to read */
-	int len,	/* Size of string buffer */
-	FIL* fil	/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	int i = 0;
-	char *p = buff;
-	UINT rc;
-
-
-	while (i < len - 1) {			/* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */
-		f_read(fil, p, 1, &rc);
-		if (rc != 1) break;			/* Break when no data to read */
-#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
-		if (*p == '\r') continue;	/* Strip '\r' */
-#endif
-		i++;
-		if (*p++ == '\n') break;	/* Break when reached end of line */
-	}
-	*p = 0;
-	return i ? buff : NULL;			/* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */
-}
-
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-#include <stdarg.h>
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Put a character to the file                                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-int f_putc (
-	int chr,	/* A character to be output */
-	FIL* fil	/* Ponter to the file object */
-)
-{
-	UINT bw;
-	char c;
-
-
-#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
-	if (chr == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil);	/* LF -> CRLF conversion */
-#endif
-	if (!fil) {	/* Special value may be used to switch the destination to any other device */
-	/*	put_console(chr);	*/
-		return chr;
-	}
-	c = (char)chr;
-	f_write(fil, &c, 1, &bw);	/* Write a byte to the file */
-	return bw ? chr : EOF;		/* Return the result */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Put a string to the file                                              */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-int f_puts (
-	const char* str,	/* Pointer to the string to be output */
-	FIL* fil			/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	int n;
-
-
-	for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) {
-		if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF;
-	}
-	return n;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Put a formatted string to the file                                    */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-int f_printf (
-	FIL* fil,			/* Pointer to the file object */
-	const char* str,	/* Pointer to the format string */
-	...					/* Optional arguments... */
-)
-{
-	va_list arp;
-	UCHAR c, f, r;
-	ULONG val;
-	char s[16];
-	int i, w, res, cc;
-
-
-	va_start(arp, str);
-
-	for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) {
-		c = *str++;
-		if (c == 0) break;			/* End of string */
-		if (c != '%') {				/* Non escape cahracter */
-			cc = f_putc(c, fil);
-			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
-			continue;
-		}
-		w = f = 0;
-		c = *str++;
-		if (c == '0') {				/* Flag: '0' padding */
-			f = 1; c = *str++;
-		}
-		while (c >= '0' && c <= '9') {	/* Precision */
-			w = w * 10 + (c - '0');
-			c = *str++;
-		}
-		if (c == 'l') {				/* Prefix: Size is long int */
-			f |= 2; c = *str++;
-		}
-		if (c == 's') {				/* Type is string */
-			cc = f_puts(va_arg(arp, char*), fil);
-			continue;
-		}
-		if (c == 'c') {				/* Type is character */
-			cc = f_putc(va_arg(arp, int), fil);
-			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
-			continue;
-		}
-		r = 0;
-		if (c == 'd') r = 10;		/* Type is signed decimal */
-		if (c == 'u') r = 10;		/* Type is unsigned decimal */
-		if (c == 'X') r = 16;		/* Type is unsigned hexdecimal */
-		if (r == 0) break;			/* Unknown type */
-		if (f & 2) {				/* Get the value */
-			val = (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long);
-		} else {
-			val = (c == 'd') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int);
-		}
-		/* Put numeral string */
-		if (c == 'd') {
-			if (val & 0x80000000) {
-				val = 0 - val;
-				f |= 4;
-			}
-		}
-		i = sizeof(s) - 1; s[i] = 0;
-		do {
-			c = (UCHAR)(val % r + '0');
-			if (c > '9') c += 7;
-			s[--i] = c;
-			val /= r;
-		} while (i && val);
-		if (i && (f & 4)) s[--i] = '-';
-		w = sizeof(s) - 1 - w;
-		while (i && i > w) s[--i] = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' ';
-		cc = f_puts(&s[i], fil);
-	}
-
-	va_end(arp);
-	return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res;
-}
-
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.07e                    (C)ChaN, 2010
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following trems.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00  Prototype.
+/
+/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01  First stable version.
+/
+/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02  Added FAT12 support.
+/                   Removed unbuffered mode.
+/                   Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
+/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM).
+/
+/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03  Added f_rename().
+/                   Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+/
+/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04  Supported multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount().
+/                   Added f_mkfs().
+/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive.
+/                   Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek().
+/                   Added minimization level 3.
+/                   Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs().
+/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG.
+/                   Added FSInfo support.
+/                   Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+/                   Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object.
+/
+/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs().
+/                   Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory.
+/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime().
+/                   Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+/                   Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+/                   Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close
+/                   without write.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06  Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+/                   Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same
+/                   or following cluster.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
+/                   Added long file name support.
+/                   Added multiple code page support.
+/                   Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+/                   Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+/                   Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+/                   Changed result code of critical errors.
+/                   Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+/                   Added multiple sector size support.
+/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error.
+/                   Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+/                   Added relative path feature.
+/                   Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive().
+/                   Added proper case conversion to extended char.
+/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+/                   Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+/                   Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+/                   Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+/                   Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper
+/                   case on non-LFN cfg.
+/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "ff.h"			/* FatFs configurations and declarations */
+#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Definitions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FATFS != 0x007E
+#error Wrong include file (ff.h).
+#endif
+
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+#if _USE_LFN == 1
+#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration.
+#endif
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)		{ if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; }
+#define	LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	{ unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; }
+
+#else
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)
+#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	return res
+
+#endif
+
+#define	ABORT(fs, res)		{ fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); }
+
+#ifndef NULL
+#define	NULL	0
+#endif
+
+/* Name status flags */
+#define NS			11		/* Offset of name status byte */
+#define NS_LOSS		0x01	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+#define NS_LFN		0x02	/* Force to create LFN entry */
+#define NS_LAST		0x04	/* Last segment */
+#define NS_BODY		0x08	/* Lower case flag (body) */
+#define NS_EXT		0x10	/* Lower case flag (ext) */
+#define NS_DOT		0x20	/* Dot entry */
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Private Work Area
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _DRIVES < 1 || _DRIVES > 9
+#error Number of drives must be 1-9.
+#endif
+static
+FATFS *FatFs[_DRIVES];	/* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */
+
+static
+WORD Fsid;				/* File system mount ID */
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+static
+BYTE Drive;				/* Current drive */
+#endif
+
+
+#if _USE_LFN == 1	/* LFN with static LFN working buffer */
+static
+WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN + 1];
+#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]; WCHAR *lp = LfnBuf
+#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp; dj.lfn = lp
+
+#elif _USE_LFN > 1	/* LFN with dynamic LFN working buffer */
+#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN + 1], *lp = lbuf
+#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp; dj.lfn = lp
+
+#else				/* No LFN */
+#define	NAMEBUF(sp,lp)	BYTE sp[12]
+#define INITBUF(dj,sp,lp)	dj.fn = sp
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Functions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* String functions                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Copy memory to memory */
+static
+void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, int cnt) {
+	char *d = (char*)dst;
+	const char *s = (const char *)src;
+	while (cnt--) *d++ = *s++;
+}
+
+/* Fill memory */
+static
+void mem_set (void* dst, int val, int cnt) {
+	char *d = (char*)dst;
+	while (cnt--) *d++ = (char)val;
+}
+
+/* Compare memory to memory */
+static
+int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, int cnt) {
+	const char *d = (const char *)dst, *s = (const char *)src;
+	int r = 0;
+	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
+	return r;
+}
+
+/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
+static
+int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
+	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
+	return *str;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Request/Release grant to access the volume                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+
+static
+BOOL lock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs		/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj);
+}
+
+
+static
+void unlock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	FRESULT res		/* Result code to be returned */
+)
+{
+	if (res != FR_NOT_ENABLED &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT &&
+		res != FR_TIMEOUT) {
+		ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj);
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change window offset                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT move_window (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD sector	/* Sector number to make apperance in the fs->win[] */
+)					/* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */
+{
+	DWORD wsect;
+
+
+	wsect = fs->winsect;
+	if (wsect != sector) {	/* Changed current window */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fs->wflag) {	/* Write back dirty window if needed */
+			if (disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->wflag = 0;
+			if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->sects_fat)) {	/* In FAT area */
+				BYTE nf;
+				for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) {	/* Refrect the change to all FAT copies */
+					wsect += fs->sects_fat;
+					disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, wsect, 1);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+		if (sector) {
+			if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->winsect = sector;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Clean-up cached data                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT sync (	/* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */
+	FATFS *fs	/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	res = move_window(fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		/* Update FSInfo sector if needed */
+		if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) {
+			fs->winsect = 0;
+			mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512);
+			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust);
+			disk_write(fs->drive, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1);
+			fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		}
+		/* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */
+		if (disk_ioctl(fs->drive, CTRL_SYNC, (void*)NULL) != RES_OK)
+			res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD get_fat (	/* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Interal error, Else:Cluster status */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
+)
+{
+	UINT wc, bc;
+	DWORD fsect;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust)	/* Range check */
+		return 1;
+
+	fsect = fs->fatbase;
+	switch (fs->fs_type) {
+	case FS_FAT12 :
+		bc = clst; bc += bc / 2;
+		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc = fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)]; bc++;
+		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc |= (WORD)fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)] << 8;
+		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
+
+	case FS_FAT16 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break;
+		return LD_WORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 2) & (SS(fs) - 1)]);
+
+	case FS_FAT32 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break;
+		return LD_DWORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 4) & (SS(fs) - 1)]) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
+	}
+
+	return 0xFFFFFFFF;	/* An error occured at the disk I/O layer */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+
+FRESULT put_fat (
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst,	/* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->max_clust - 1 */
+	DWORD val	/* New value to mark the cluster */
+)
+{
+	UINT bc;
+	BYTE *p;
+	DWORD fsect;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust) {	/* Range check */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		fsect = fs->fatbase;
+		switch (fs->fs_type) {
+		case FS_FAT12 :
+			bc = clst; bc += bc / 2;
+			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val;
+			bc++;
+			fs->wflag = 1;
+			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc & (SS(fs) - 1)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F));
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT16 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			ST_WORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 2) & (SS(fs) - 1)], (WORD)val);
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT32 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fsect + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			ST_DWORD(&fs->win[((WORD)clst * 4) & (SS(fs) - 1)], val);
+			break;
+
+		default :
+			res = FR_INT_ERR;
+		}
+		fs->wflag = 1;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT remove_chain (
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to remove a chain from */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD nxt;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->max_clust) {	/* Check the range of cluster# */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		res = FR_OK;
+		while (clst < fs->max_clust) {			/* Not a last link? */
+			nxt = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Get cluster status */
+			if (nxt == 0) break;				/* Empty cluster? */
+			if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }	/* Internal error? */
+			if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }	/* Disk error? */
+			res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0);			/* Mark the cluster "empty" */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {	/* Update FSInfo */
+				fs->free_clust++;
+				fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+			}
+			clst = nxt;	/* Next cluster */
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+DWORD create_chain (	/* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cs, ncl, scl, mcl;
+
+
+	mcl = fs->max_clust;
+	if (clst == 0) {		/* Create new chain */
+		scl = fs->last_clust;			/* Get suggested start point */
+		if (scl == 0 || scl >= mcl) scl = 1;
+	}
+	else {					/* Stretch existing chain */
+		cs = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Check the cluster status */
+		if (cs < 2) return 1;			/* It is an invalid cluster */
+		if (cs < mcl) return cs;		/* It is already followed by next cluster */
+		scl = clst;
+	}
+
+	ncl = scl;				/* Start cluster */
+	for (;;) {
+		ncl++;							/* Next cluster */
+		if (ncl >= mcl) {				/* Wrap around */
+			ncl = 2;
+			if (ncl > scl) return 0;	/* No free custer */
+		}
+		cs = get_fat(fs, ncl);			/* Get the cluster status */
+		if (cs == 0) break;				/* Found a free cluster */
+		if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occured */
+			return cs;
+		if (ncl == scl) return 0;		/* No free custer */
+	}
+
+	if (put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF))	/* Mark the new cluster "in use" */
+		return 0xFFFFFFFF;
+	if (clst != 0) {					/* Link it to the previous one if needed */
+		if (put_fat(fs, clst, ncl))
+			return 0xFFFFFFFF;
+	}
+
+	fs->last_clust = ncl;				/* Update FSINFO */
+	if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {
+		fs->free_clust--;
+		fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+	}
+
+	return ncl;		/* Return new cluster number */
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
+)
+{
+	clst -= 2;
+	if (clst >= (fs->max_clust - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
+	return clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Seek directory index                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_seek (
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	WORD idx		/* Directory index number */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD ic;
+
+
+	dj->index = idx;
+	clst = dj->sclust;
+	if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->max_clust)	/* Check start cluster range */
+		return FR_INT_ERR;
+	if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
+		clst = dj->fs->dirbase;
+
+	if (clst == 0) {	/* Static table */
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)		/* Index is out of range */
+			return FR_INT_ERR;
+		dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / 32);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+	else {				/* Dynamic table */
+		ic = SS(dj->fs) / 32 * dj->fs->csize;	/* Entries per cluster */
+		while (idx >= ic) {	/* Follow cluster chain */
+			clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst);				/* Get next cluster */
+			if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Disk error */
+			if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->max_clust)	/* Reached to end of table or int error */
+				return FR_INT_ERR;
+			idx -= ic;
+		}
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / 32);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) * 32;	/* Ptr to the entry in the sector */
+
+	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Move directory index next                        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not streach */
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	BOOL streach	/* FALSE: Do not streach table, TRUE: Streach table if needed */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD i;
+
+
+	i = dj->index + 1;
+	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
+		return FR_NO_FILE;
+
+	if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / 32))) {	/* Sector changed? */
+		dj->sect++;					/* Next sector */
+
+		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
+			if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
+				return FR_NO_FILE;
+		}
+		else {					/* Dynamic table */
+			if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
+				clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust);				/* Get next cluster */
+				if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (clst >= dj->fs->max_clust) {				/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					BYTE c;
+					if (!streach) return FR_NO_FILE;			/* When do not streach, report EOT */
+					clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust);		/* Streach cluster chain */
+					if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED;			/* No free cluster */
+					if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+					/* Clean-up streached table */
+					if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Flush active window */
+					mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs));			/* Clear window buffer */
+					dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);	/* Cluster start sector */
+					for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) {		/* Fill the new cluster with 0 */
+						dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+						if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+						dj->fs->winsect++;
+					}
+					dj->fs->winsect -= c;						/* Rewind window address */
+#else
+					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
+#endif
+				}
+				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
+				dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	dj->index = i;
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / 32)) * 32;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30};	/* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */
+
+
+static
+BOOL cmp_lfn (			/* TRUE:Matched, FALSE:Not matched */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */
+)
+{
+	int i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0xBF) - 1) * 13;	/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);	/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			wc = ff_wtoupper(uc);		/* Convert it to upper case */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++]))	/* Compare it */
+				return FALSE;			/* Not matched */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return FALSE;	/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);				/* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */
+
+	if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x40) && wc && lfnbuf[i])	/* Last segment matched but different length */
+		return FALSE;
+
+	return TRUE;					/* The part of LFN matched */
+}
+
+
+
+static
+BOOL pick_lfn (			/* TRUE:Succeeded, FALSE:Buffer overflow */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+)
+{
+	int i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13;	/* Offset in the LFN buffer */
+
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);			/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return FALSE;	/* Buffer overflow? */
+			lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc;				/* Store it */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return FALSE;		/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);						/* Read all character in the entry */
+
+	if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x40) {				/* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */
+		if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return FALSE;	/* Buffer overflow? */
+		lfnbuf[i] = 0;
+	}
+
+	return TRUE;
+}
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+void fit_lfn (
+	const WCHAR *lfnbuf,	/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir,				/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	BYTE ord,				/* LFN order (1-20) */
+	BYTE sum				/* SFN sum */
+)
+{
+	int i, s;
+	WCHAR wc;
+
+
+	dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum;			/* Set check sum */
+	dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN;		/* Set attribute. LFN entry */
+	dir[LDIR_Type] = 0;
+	ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0);
+
+	i = (ord - 1) * 13;				/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = wc = 0;
+	do {
+		if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++];	/* Get an effective char */
+		ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc);	/* Put it */
+		if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF;		/* Padding chars following last char */
+	} while (++s < 13);
+	if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= 0x40;	/* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */
+	dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord;			/* Set the LFN order */
+}
+
+#endif
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create numbered name                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+void gen_numname (
+	BYTE *dst,			/* Pointer to genartated SFN */
+	const BYTE *src,	/* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */
+	const WCHAR *lfn,	/* Pointer to LFN */
+	WORD num			/* Sequense number */
+)
+{
+	char ns[8];
+	int i, j;
+
+
+	mem_cpy(dst, src, 11);
+
+	if (num > 5) {	/* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequencial number */
+		do num = (num >> 1) + (num << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn);
+	}
+
+	/* itoa */
+	i = 7;
+	do {
+		ns[i--] = (num % 10) + '0';
+		num /= 10;
+	} while (num);
+	ns[i] = '~';
+
+	/* Append the number */
+	for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) {
+		if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) {
+			if (j == i - 1) break;
+			j++;
+		}
+	}
+	do {
+		dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' ';
+	} while (j < 8);
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Calculate sum of an SFN                                               */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+BYTE sum_sfn (
+	const BYTE *dir		/* Ptr to directory entry */
+)
+{
+	BYTE sum = 0;
+	int n = 11;
+
+	do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n);
+	return sum;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_find (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord, sum;
+#endif
+
+	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);			/* Rewind directory object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	ord = sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == 0xE5 || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (dj->lfn) {
+					if (c & 0x40) {		/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+						sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+						c &= 0xBF; ord = c;	/* LFN start order */
+						dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+					}
+					/* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */
+					ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+				}
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break;	/* LFN matched? */
+				ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;	/* Reset LFN sequence */
+				if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break;	/* SFN matched? */
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);		/* Next entry */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+FRESULT dir_read (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+
+	res = FR_NO_FILE;
+	while (dj->sect) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == 0xE5 || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (c & 0x40) {			/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+					sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+					c &= 0xBF; ord = c;
+					dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+				}
+				/* Check LFN validity and capture it */
+				ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir))	/* Is there a valid LFN? */
+					dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;		/* It has no LFN. */
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (c != 0xE5 && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);				/* Next entry */
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+	}
+
+	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Register an object to the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT dir_register (	/* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Target directory with object name to be created */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD n, ne, is;
+	BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum;
+	WCHAR *lfn;
+
+
+	fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn;
+	mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12);
+
+	if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT)) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Cannot create dot entry */
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) {			/* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */
+		fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = NULL;			/* Find only SFN */
+		for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) {
+			gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n);	/* Generate a numbered name */
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		}
+		if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED;		/* Abort if too many collisions */
+		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res;	/* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */
+		fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn;
+	}
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) {			/* When LFN is to be created, reserve reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */
+		for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ;
+		ne = (ne + 25) / 13;
+	} else {						/* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */
+		ne = 1;
+	}
+
+	/* Reserve contiguous entries */
+	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+	n = is = 0;
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		c = *dj->dir;				/* Check the entry status */
+		if (c == 0xE5 || c == 0) {	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			if (n == 0) is = dj->index;	/* First index of the contigulus entry */
+			if (++n == ne) break;	/* A contiguous entry that requiered count is found */
+		} else {
+			n = 0;					/* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */
+		}
+		res = dir_next(dj, TRUE);	/* Next entry with table streach */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) {	/* Initialize LFN entry if needed */
+		res = dir_seek(dj, is);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn);	/* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */
+			ne--;
+			do {					/* Store LFN entries in bottom first */
+				res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+				if (res != FR_OK) break;
+				fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum);
+				dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Next entry */
+			} while (res == FR_OK && --ne);
+		}
+	}
+
+#else	/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {	/* Find a blank entry for the SFN */
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			c = *dj->dir;
+			if (c == 0xE5 || c == 0) break;	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			res = dir_next(dj, TRUE);		/* Next entry with table streach */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+	}
+#endif
+
+	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Initialize the SFN entry */
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj->dir;
+			mem_set(dir, 0, 32);		/* Clean the entry */
+			mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11);	/* Put SFN */
+			dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT);	/* Put NT flag */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Remove an object from the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE
+static
+FRESULT dir_remove (	/* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD i;
+
+	i = dj->index;	/* SFN index */
+	res = dir_seek(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx));	/* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			*dj->dir = 0xE5;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+			if (dj->index >= i) break;	/* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */
+			res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Next entry */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	}
+
+#else			/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_seek(dj, dj->index);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			*dj->dir = 0xE5;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT create_name (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	const XCHAR **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
+)
+{
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+	static const BYTE cvt[] = _EXCVT;
+#endif
+
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, cf;
+	WCHAR w, *lfn;
+	int i, ni, si, di;
+	const XCHAR *p;
+
+	/* Create LFN in Unicode */
+	si = di = 0;
+	p = *path;
+	lfn = dj->lfn;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = p[si++];					/* Get a character */
+		if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (di >= _MAX_LFN)				/* Reject too long name */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+		w &= 0xFF;
+		if (IsDBCS1(w)) {				/* If it is a DBC 1st byte */
+			b = p[si++];				/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(b))			/* Reject invalid code for DBC */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			w = (w << 8) + b;
+		}
+		w = ff_convert(w, 1);			/* Convert OEM to Unicode */
+		if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid code */
+#endif
+		if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		lfn[di++] = w;					/* Store the Unicode char */
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
+	cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if ((di == 1 && lfn[di - 1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		(di == 2 && lfn[di - 1] == '.' && lfn[di - 2] == '.')) {
+		lfn[di] = 0;
+		for (i = 0; i < 11; i++)
+			dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' ';
+		dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT;		/* This is a dot entry */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	while (di) {						/* Strip trailing spaces and dots */
+		w = lfn[di - 1];
+		if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break;
+		di--;
+	}
+	if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject null string */
+
+	lfn[di] = 0;						/* LFN is created */
+
+	/* Create SFN in directory form */
+	mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11);
+	for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ;	/* Strip leading spaces and dots */
+	if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;
+	while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--;	/* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */
+
+	b = i = 0; ni = 8;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = lfn[si++];					/* Get an LFN char */
+		if (!w) break;					/* Break on enf of the LFN */
+		if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) {	/* Remove spaces and dots */
+			cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (i >= ni || si == di) {		/* Extension or end of SFN */
+			if (ni == 11) {				/* Long extension */
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break;
+			}
+			if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+			if (si > di) break;			/* No extension */
+			si = di; i = 8; ni = 11;	/* Enter extension section */
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (w >= 0x80) {				/* Non ASCII char */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			w = ff_convert(w, 0);		/* Unicode -> OEM code */
+			if (w) w = cvt[w - 0x80];	/* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */
+#else
+			w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0);	/* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */
+#endif
+			cf |= NS_LFN;				/* Force create LFN entry */
+		}
+
+		if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) {		/* Double byte char */
+			if (i >= ni - 1) {
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue;
+			}
+			dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8);
+		} else {						/* Single byte char */
+			if (!w || chk_chr("+,;[=]", w)) {		/* Replace illegal chars for SFN */
+				w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Lossy conversion */
+			} else {
+				if (IsUpper(w)) {		/* ASCII large capital */
+					b |= 2;
+				} else {
+					if (IsLower(w)) {	/* ASCII small capital */
+						b |= 1; w -= 0x20;
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w;
+	}
+
+	if (dj->fn[0] == 0xE5) dj->fn[0] = 0x05;	/* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03)	/* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */
+		cf |= NS_LFN;
+	if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) {						/* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */
+		if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
+		if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
+	}
+
+	dj->fn[NS] = cf;	/* SFN is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+
+
+#else	/* Non-LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, c, d, *sfn;
+	int ni, si, i;
+	const char *p;
+
+	/* Create file name in directory form */
+	sfn = dj->fn;
+	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
+	si = i = b = 0; ni = 8;
+	p = *path;
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		for (;;) {
+			c = p[si++];
+			if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+		if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		*path = &p[si];									/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
+		sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT;	/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	for (;;) {
+		c = p[si++];
+		if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
+			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			i = 8; ni = 11;
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+		if (c >= 0x80) {				/* Extended char */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			c = cvt[c - 0x80];			/* Convert extend char (SBCS) */
+#else
+			b |= 3;						/* Eliminate NT flag if ext char is exist */
+#if !_DF1S	/* ASCII only cfg */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#endif
+#endif
+		}
+		if (IsDBCS1(c)) {				/* DBC 1st byte? */
+			d = p[si++];				/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1)	/* Reject invalid DBC */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+			sfn[i++] = d;
+		} else {						/* Single byte code */
+			if (chk_chr(" \"*+,[=]|\x7F", c))	/* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			if (IsUpper(c)) {			/* ASCII large capital? */
+				b |= 2;
+			} else {
+				if (IsLower(c)) {		/* ASCII small capital? */
+					b |= 1; c -= 0x20;
+				}
+			}
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Rerurn pointer to the next segment */
+	c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+
+	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject null string */
+	if (sfn[0] == 0xE5) sfn[0] = 0x05;	/* When first char collides with 0xE5, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
+
+	sfn[NS] = c;		/* Store NT flag, File name is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to the file information to be filled */
+)
+{
+	int i;
+	BYTE c, nt, *dir;
+	char *p;
+
+
+	p = fno->fname;
+	if (dj->sect) {
+		dir = dj->dir;
+		nt = dir[DIR_NTres];		/* NT flag */
+		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy name body */
+			c = dir[i];
+			if (c == ' ') break;
+			if (c == 0x05) c = 0xE5;
+			if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+			*p++ = c;
+		}
+		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy name extension */
+			*p++ = '.';
+			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
+				c = dir[i];
+				if (c == ' ') break;
+				if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+				*p++ = c;
+			}
+		}
+		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
+		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
+		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
+		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
+	}
+	*p = 0;
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	if (fno->lfname) {
+		XCHAR *tp = fno->lfname;
+		WCHAR w, *lfn;
+
+		i = 0;
+		if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */
+			lfn = dj->lfn;
+			while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) {			/* Get an LFN char */
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+				w = ff_convert(w, 0);			/* Unicode -> OEM conversion */
+				if (!w) { i = 0; break; }		/* Could not convert, no LFN */
+				if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100)		/* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC */
+					tp[i++] = (XCHAR)(w >> 8);
+#endif
+				if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; }	/* Buffer overrun, no LFN */
+				tp[i++] = (XCHAR)w;
+			}
+		}
+		tp[i] = 0;	/* Terminator */
+	}
+#endif
+}
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Follow a file path                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
+	const XCHAR *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE *dir, last;
+
+
+	while (!_USE_LFN && *path == ' ') path++;	/* Skip leading spaces */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */
+		path++;	dj->sclust = 0;		/* Strip it and start from the root dir */
+	} else {							/* No heading saparator */
+		dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir;	/* Start from the current dir */
+	}
+#else
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\')	/* Strip heading separator if exist */
+		path++;
+	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Start from the root dir */
+#endif
+
+	if ((UINT)*path < ' ') {			/* Null path means the start directory itself */
+		res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
+		dj->dir = NULL;
+
+	} else {							/* Follow path */
+		for (;;) {
+			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
+			last = *(dj->fn+NS) & NS_LAST;
+			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Could not find the object */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE && !last)
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				break;
+			}
+			if (last) break;				/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
+			dir = dj->dir;					/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
+			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Cannot follow because it is a file */
+				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
+			}
+			dj->sclust = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Load boot record and check if it is an FAT boot record                */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:The FAT boot record, 1:Valid boot record but not an FAT, 2:Not a boot record, 3:Error */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
+)
+{
+	if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load boot record */
+		return 3;
+	if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55)		/* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */
+		return 2;
+
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)	/* Check "FAT" string */
+		return 0;
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)
+		return 0;
+
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Make sure that the file system is valid                               */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+FRESULT chk_mounted (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occured */
+	const XCHAR **path,	/* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */
+	FATFS **rfs,		/* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */
+	BYTE chk_wp			/* !=0: Check media write protection for write access */
+)
+{
+	BYTE fmt, *tbl;
+	UINT vol;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+	DWORD bsect, fsize, tsect, mclst;
+	const XCHAR *p = *path;
+	FATFS *fs;
+
+	/* Get logical drive number from the path name */
+	vol = p[0] - '0';				/* Is there a drive number? */
+	if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') {	/* Found a drive number, get and strip it */
+		p += 2; *path = p;			/* Return pointer to the path name */
+	} else {						/* No drive number is given */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+		vol = Drive;				/* Use current drive */
+#else
+		vol = 0;					/* Use drive 0 */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the logical drive is valid or not */
+	if (vol >= _DRIVES) 			/* Is the drive number valid? */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	*rfs = fs = FatFs[vol];			/* Returen pointer to the corresponding file system object */
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;	/* Is the file system object available? */
+
+	ENTER_FF(fs);					/* Lock file system */
+
+	if (fs->fs_type) {				/* If the logical drive has been mounted */
+		stat = disk_status(fs->drive);
+		if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) {	/* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			if (chk_wp && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check write protection if needed */
+				return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#endif
+			return FR_OK;			/* The file system object is valid */
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* The logical drive must be mounted. Following code attempts to mount the volume */
+
+	fs->fs_type = 0;					/* Clear the file system object */
+	fs->drive = (BYTE)LD2PD(vol);		/* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */
+	stat = disk_initialize(fs->drive);	/* Initialize low level disk I/O layer */
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT)				/* Check if the drive is ready */
+		return FR_NOT_READY;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size if needed */
+	if (disk_ioctl(fs->drive, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+#endif
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	if (chk_wp && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check disk write protection if needed */
+		return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#endif
+	/* Search FAT partition on the drive */
+	fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0);		/* Check sector 0 as an SFD format */
+	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT boot record, it may be patitioned */
+		/* Check a partition listed in top of the partition table */
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + LD2PT(vol) * 16];	/* Partition table */
+		if (tbl[4]) {									/* Is the partition existing? */
+			bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]);					/* Partition offset in LBA */
+			fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect);					/* Check the partition */
+		}
+	}
+	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt || LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs))	/* No valid FAT patition is found */
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+
+	/* Initialize the file system object */
+	fsize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+	if (!fsize) fsize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32);
+	fs->sects_fat = fsize;
+	fs->n_fats = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs];					/* Number of FAT copies */
+	fsize *= fs->n_fats;								/* (Number of sectors in FAT area) */
+	fs->fatbase = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt); /* FAT start sector (lba) */
+	fs->csize = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus];				/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt);	/* Nmuber of root directory entries */
+	tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16);				/* Number of sectors on the volume */
+	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32);
+	fs->max_clust = mclst = (tsect						/* Last cluster# + 1 (Number of clusters + 2) */
+		- LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt) - fsize - fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs)/32)
+		) / fs->csize + 2;
+
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;										/* Determine the FAT sub type */
+	if (mclst >= 0xFF7) fmt = FS_FAT16;					/* Number of clusters >= 0xFF5 */
+	if (mclst >= 0xFFF7) fmt = FS_FAT32;				/* Number of clusters >= 0xFFF5 */
+
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)
+		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus);	/* Root directory start cluster */
+	else
+		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fsize;				/* Root directory start sector (lba) */
+	fs->database = fs->fatbase + fsize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs)/32);	/* Data start sector (lba) */
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	/* Initialize allocation information */
+	fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+	fs->wflag = 0;
+	/* Get fsinfo if needed */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+	 	fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo);
+		if (disk_read(fs->drive, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK &&
+			LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) {
+			fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free);
+			fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count);
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
+	fs->winsect = 0;		/* Invalidate sector cache */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	fs->cdir = 0;			/* Current directory (root dir) */
+#endif
+	fs->id = ++Fsid;		/* File system mount ID */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not                          */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT validate (	/* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */
+	FATFS *fs,		/* Pointer to the file system object */
+	WORD id			/* Member id of the target object to be checked */
+)
+{
+	if (!fs || !fs->fs_type || fs->id != id)
+		return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	ENTER_FF(fs);		/* Lock file system */
+
+	if (disk_status(fs->drive) & STA_NOINIT)
+		return FR_NOT_READY;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Public Functions
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Mount/Unmount a Locical Drive                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mount (
+	BYTE vol,		/* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */
+	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/
+)
+{
+	FATFS *rfs;
+
+
+	if (vol >= _DRIVES)				/* Check if the drive number is valid */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	rfs = FatFs[vol];				/* Get current fs object */
+
+	if (rfs) {
+#if _FS_REENTRANT					/* Discard sync object of the current volume */
+		if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+		rfs->fs_type = 0;			/* Clear old fs object */
+	}
+
+	if (fs) {
+		fs->fs_type = 0;			/* Clear new fs object */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT					/* Create sync object for the new volume */
+		if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+	}
+	FatFs[vol] = fs;				/* Register new fs object */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_open (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the blank file object */
+	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file name */
+	BYTE mode			/* Access mode and file open mode flags */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	fp->fs = NULL;		/* Clear file object */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	mode &= (FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW);
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & (FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)));
+#else
+	mode &= FA_READ;
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+#endif
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+	res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	/* Create or Open a file */
+	if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) {
+		DWORD ps, cl;
+
+		if (res != FR_OK) {			/* No file, create new */
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE)	/* There is no file to open, create a new entry */
+				res = dir_register(&dj);
+			if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+			mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS;
+			dir = dj.dir;			/* Created entry (SFN entry) */
+		}
+		else {						/* Any object is already existing */
+			if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW)			/* Cannot create new */
+				LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_EXIST);
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir || (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)))	/* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */
+				LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
+			if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS) {		/* Resize it to zero on over write mode */
+				cl = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);	/* Get start cluster */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, 0);	/* cluster = 0 */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, 0);
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0);	/* size = 0 */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				ps = dj.fs->winsect;			/* Remove the cluster chain */
+				if (cl) {
+					res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl);
+					if (res) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+					dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1;	/* Reuse the cluster hole */
+				}
+				res = move_window(dj.fs, ps);
+				if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+			}
+		}
+		if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS) {
+			dir[DIR_Attr] = 0;					/* Reset attribute */
+			ps = get_fattime();
+			ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, ps);		/* Created time */
+			dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+			mode |= FA__WRITTEN;				/* Set file changed flag */
+		}
+	}
+	/* Open an existing file */
+	else {
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+		if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);	/* Follow failed */
+		dir = dj.dir;
+		if (!dir || (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR))	/* It is a directory */
+			LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_NO_FILE);
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */
+			LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
+	}
+	fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect;		/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	fp->dir_ptr = dj.dir;
+#endif
+	fp->flag = mode;					/* File access mode */
+	fp->org_clust =						/* File start cluster */
+		((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+	fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
+	fp->fptr = 0; fp->csect = 255;		/* File pointer */
+	fp->dsect = 0;
+	fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id;	/* Owner file system object of the file */
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read File                                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_read (
+	FIL *fp, 		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	void *buff,		/* Pointer to data buffer */
+	UINT btr,		/* Number of bytes to read */
+	UINT *br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect, remain;
+	UINT rcnt, cc;
+	BYTE *rbuff = buff;
+
+
+	*br = 0;	/* Initialize bytes read */
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) 						/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr;									/* Repeat until all data transferred */
+		rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
+					fp->org_clust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
+				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector offset in the cluster */
+			}
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += fp->csect;
+			cc = btr / SS(fp->fs);					/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {								/* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (fp->csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - fp->csect;
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc)		/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs));
+#else
+				if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc)	/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs));
+#endif
+#endif
+				fp->csect += (BYTE)cc;				/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+				rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;				/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write sector I/O buffer if needed */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {			/* Fill sector buffer with file data */
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+		}
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))			/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#else
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_write (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const void *buff,	/* Pointer to the data to be written */
+	UINT btw,			/* Number of bytes to write */
+	UINT *bw			/* Pointer to number of bytes written */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect;
+	UINT wcnt, cc;
+	const BYTE *wbuff = buff;
+
+
+	*bw = 0;	/* Initialize bytes written */
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))						/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	if (fp->fsize + btw < fp->fsize) btw = 0;		/* File size cannot reach 4GB */
+
+	for ( ;  btw;									/* Repeat until all data transferred */
+		wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				if (fp->fptr == 0) {				/* On the top of the file? */
+					clst = fp->org_clust;			/* Follow from the origin */
+					if (clst == 0)					/* When there is no cluster chain, */
+						fp->org_clust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);	/* Create a new cluster chain */
+				} else {							/* Middle or end of the file */
+					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);			/* Follow or streach cluster chain */
+				}
+				if (clst == 0) break;				/* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */
+				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector address in the cluster */
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0))	/* Write back data buffer prior to following direct transfer */
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#else
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write back data buffer prior to following direct transfer */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += fp->csect;
+			cc = btw / SS(fp->fs);					/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {								/* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (fp->csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - fp->csect;
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) {	/* Refill sector cache if it gets dirty by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->fs->wflag = 0;
+				}
+#else
+				if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) {		/* Refill sector cache if it gets dirty by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+				}
+#endif
+				fp->csect += (BYTE)cc;				/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+				wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;				/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) {			/* Avoid silly buffer filling at growing edge */
+				if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->fs->winsect = sect;
+			}
+#else
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {				/* Fill sector buffer with file data */
+				if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize &&
+					disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+		}
+		wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */
+		if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))			/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+#else
+		mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY;
+#endif
+	}
+
+	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Update file size if needed */
+	fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;						/* Set file changed flag */
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Synchronize the File Object                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_sync (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD tim;
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) {	/* Has the file been written? */
+#if !_FS_TINY	/* Write-back dirty buffer */
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			/* Update the directory entry */
+			res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect);
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dir = fp->dir_ptr;
+				dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC;					/* Set archive bit */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize);		/* Update file size */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, fp->org_clust);	/* Update start cluster */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, fp->org_clust >> 16);
+				tim = get_fattime();			/* Updated time */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN;
+				fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(fp->fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Close File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_close (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object to be closed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+#if _FS_READONLY
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);
+	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = NULL;
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+#else
+	res = f_sync(fp);
+	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = NULL;
+	return res;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Current Drive/Directory                                        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+
+FRESULT f_chdrive (
+	BYTE drv		/* Drive number */
+)
+{
+	if (drv >= _DRIVES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+
+	Drive = drv;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+FRESULT f_chdir (
+	const XCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow completed */
+			dir = dj.dir;					/* Pointer to the entry */
+			if (!dir) {
+				dj.fs->cdir = 0;			/* No entry (root dir) */
+			} else {
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* Reached to the dir */
+					dj.fs->cdir = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+				else
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;		/* Could not reach the dir (it is a file) */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_lseek (
+	FIL *fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (ofs > fp->fsize					/* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		 && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)
+#endif
+		) ofs = fp->fsize;
+
+	ifptr = fp->fptr;
+	fp->fptr = nsect = 0; fp->csect = 255;
+	if (ofs > 0) {
+		bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs);	/* Cluster size (byte) */
+		if (ifptr > 0 &&
+			(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
+			fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
+			ofs -= fp->fptr;
+			clst = fp->curr_clust;
+		} else {									/* When seek to back cluster, */
+			clst = fp->org_clust;					/* start from the first cluster */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			if (clst == 0) {						/* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */
+				clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);
+				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->org_clust = clst;
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->curr_clust = clst;
+		}
+		if (clst != 0) {
+			while (ofs > bcs) {						/* Cluster following loop */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+				if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) {			/* Check if in write mode or not */
+					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst);	/* Force streached if in write mode */
+					if (clst == 0) {				/* When disk gets full, clip file size */
+						ofs = bcs; break;
+					}
+				} else
+#endif
+					clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->max_clust) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				fp->curr_clust = clst;
+				fp->fptr += bcs;
+				ofs -= bcs;
+			}
+			fp->fptr += ofs;
+			fp->csect = (BYTE)(ofs / SS(fp->fs));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+			if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) {
+				nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst);	/* Current sector */
+				if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				nsect += fp->csect;
+				fp->csect++;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) {
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write-back dirty buffer if needed */
+			if (disk_write(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+		}
+#endif
+		if (disk_read(fp->fs->drive, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#endif
+		fp->dsect = nsect;
+	}
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) {			/* Set changed flag if the file size is extended */
+		fp->fsize = fp->fptr;
+		fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+	}
+#endif
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directroy Object                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_opendir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
+	const XCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF((*dj), sfn, lfn);
+		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
+			dir = dj->dir;
+			if (dir) {							/* It is not the root dir */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
+					dj->sclust = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dj->id = dj->fs->id;
+				res = dir_seek(dj, 0);			/* Rewind dir */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Directory Entry in Sequense                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_readdir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+
+
+	res = validate(dj->fs, dj->id);			/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF((*dj), sfn, lfn);
+		if (!fno) {
+			res = dir_seek(dj, 0);
+		} else {
+			res = dir_read(dj);
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
+				dj->sect = 0;
+				res = FR_OK;
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
+				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
+				res = dir_next(dj, FALSE);	/* Increment index for next */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
+					dj->sect = 0;
+					res = FR_OK;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get File Status                                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_stat (
+	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {				/* Follwo completed */
+			if (dj.dir)	/* Found an object */
+				get_fileinfo(&dj, fno);
+			else		/* It is root dir */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get Number of Free Clusters                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_getfree (
+	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */
+	DWORD *nclst,		/* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */
+	FATFS **fatfs		/* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD n, clst, sect, stat;
+	UINT i;
+	BYTE fat, *p;
+
+
+	/* Get drive number */
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0);
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, res);
+
+	/* If number of free cluster is valid, return it without cluster scan. */
+	if ((*fatfs)->free_clust <= (*fatfs)->max_clust - 2) {
+		*nclst = (*fatfs)->free_clust;
+		LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_OK);
+	}
+
+	/* Get number of free clusters */
+	fat = (*fatfs)->fs_type;
+	n = 0;
+	if (fat == FS_FAT12) {
+		clst = 2;
+		do {
+			stat = get_fat(*fatfs, clst);
+			if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			if (stat == 1) LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			if (stat == 0) n++;
+		} while (++clst < (*fatfs)->max_clust);
+	} else {
+		clst = (*fatfs)->max_clust;
+		sect = (*fatfs)->fatbase;
+		i = 0; p = 0;
+		do {
+			if (!i) {
+				res = move_window(*fatfs, sect++);
+				if (res != FR_OK)
+					LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, res);
+				p = (*fatfs)->win;
+				i = SS(*fatfs);
+			}
+			if (fat == FS_FAT16) {
+				if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++;
+				p += 2; i -= 2;
+			} else {
+				if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++;
+				p += 4; i -= 4;
+			}
+		} while (--clst);
+	}
+	(*fatfs)->free_clust = n;
+	if (fat == FS_FAT32) (*fatfs)->fsi_flag = 1;
+	*nclst = n;
+
+	LEAVE_FF(*fatfs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Truncate File                                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_truncate (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD ncl;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);		/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))			/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+
+	if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) {
+		fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Set file size to current R/W point */
+		fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+		if (fp->fptr == 0) {	/* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */
+			res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->org_clust);
+			fp->org_clust = 0;
+		} else {				/* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */
+			ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
+			res = FR_OK;
+			if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+			if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+			if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->max_clust) {
+				res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust, 0x0FFFFFFF);
+				if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR;
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Delete a File or Directory                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_unlink (
+	const XCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the file or directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj, sdj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DWORD dclst;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+
+	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+	res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
+	if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+		res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); /* Follow failed */
+
+	dir = dj.dir;
+	if (!dir)								/* Is it the root directory? */
+		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_INVALID_NAME);
+	if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)				/* Is it a R/O object? */
+		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_DENIED);
+	dclst = ((DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+
+	if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {			/* It is a sub-directory */
+		if (dclst < 2) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof(DIR));	/* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */
+		sdj.sclust = dclst;
+		res = dir_seek(&sdj, 2);
+		if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+		res = dir_read(&sdj);
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_DENIED;	/* Not empty sub-dir */
+		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+	}
+
+	res = dir_remove(&dj);					/* Remove directory entry */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (dclst)
+			res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);	/* Remove the cluster chain */
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs);
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directory                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mkdir (
+	const XCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir, n;
+	DWORD dsect, dclst, pclst, tim;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+
+	INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+	res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
+	if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* Any file or directory is already existing */
+	if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+		res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+	if (res != FR_NO_FILE)					/* Any error occured */
+		LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+
+	dclst = create_chain(dj.fs, 0);			/* Allocate a new cluster for new directory table */
+	res = FR_OK;
+	if (dclst == 0) res = FR_DENIED;
+	if (dclst == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	if (dclst == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (res == FR_OK)
+		res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+	dsect = clust2sect(dj.fs, dclst);
+
+	dir = dj.fs->win;						/* Initialize the new directory table */
+	mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+	mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3);		/* Create "." entry */
+	dir[DIR_Name] = '.';
+	dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;
+	tim = get_fattime();
+	ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dclst);
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dclst >> 16);
+	mem_cpy(dir+32, dir, 32); 			/* Create ".." entry */
+	dir[33] = '.';
+	pclst = dj.sclust;
+	if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pclst == dj.fs->dirbase)
+		pclst = 0;
+	ST_WORD(dir+32+DIR_FstClusLO, pclst);
+	ST_WORD(dir+32+DIR_FstClusHI, pclst >> 16);
+	for (n = 0; n < dj.fs->csize; n++) {	/* Write dot entries and clear left sectors */
+		dj.fs->winsect = dsect++;
+		dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+		res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+		if (res) LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+		mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+	}
+
+	res = dir_register(&dj);
+	if (res != FR_OK) {
+		remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);
+	} else {
+		dir = dj.dir;
+		dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;					/* Attribute */
+		ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);			/* Crated time */
+		ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dclst);		/* Table start cluster */
+		ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dclst >> 16);
+		dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+		res = sync(dj.fs);
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change File Attribute                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_chmod (
+	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	BYTE value,			/* Attribute bits */
+	BYTE mask			/* Attribute mask to change */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {						/* Is it a root directory? */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {						/* File or sub directory */
+				mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC;	/* Valid attribute mask */
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask);	/* Apply attribute change */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Timestamp                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_utime (
+	const XCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file/directory name */
+	const FILINFO *fno	/* Pointer to the timestamp to be set */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INITBUF(dj, sfn, lfn);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {				/* Root directory */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {				/* File or sub-directory */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime);
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate);
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Rename File/Directory                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_rename (
+	const XCHAR *path_old,	/* Pointer to the old name */
+	const XCHAR *path_new	/* Pointer to the new name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj_old, dj_new;
+	NAMEBUF(sfn, lfn);
+	BYTE buf[21], *dir;
+	DWORD dw;
+
+
+	INITBUF(dj_old, sfn, lfn);
+	res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &dj_old.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		dj_new.fs = dj_old.fs;
+		res = follow_path(&dj_old, path_old);	/* Check old object */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj_old.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+	}
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, res);	/* The old object is not found */
+
+	if (!dj_old.dir) LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, FR_NO_FILE);	/* Is root dir? */
+	mem_cpy(buf, dj_old.dir+DIR_Attr, 21);		/* Save the object information */
+
+	mem_cpy(&dj_new, &dj_old, sizeof(DIR));
+	res = follow_path(&dj_new, path_new);		/* Check new object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;			/* The new object name is already existing */
+	if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { 					/* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */
+		res = dir_register(&dj_new);			/* Register the new object */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj_new.dir;					/* Copy object information into new entry */
+			mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19);
+			dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC;
+			dj_old.fs->wflag = 1;
+			if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {		/* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */
+				dw = clust2sect(dj_new.fs, (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) | LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO));
+				if (!dw) {
+					res = FR_INT_ERR;
+				} else {
+					res = move_window(dj_new.fs, dw);
+					dir = dj_new.fs->win+32;
+					if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') {
+						dw = (dj_new.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && dj_new.sclust == dj_new.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : dj_new.sclust;
+						ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, dw);
+						ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, dw >> 16);
+						dj_new.fs->wflag = 1;
+					}
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				res = dir_remove(&dj_old);			/* Remove old entry */
+				if (res == FR_OK)
+					res = sync(dj_old.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj_old.fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Forward data to the stream directly (Available on only _FS_TINY cfg)  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY
+
+FRESULT f_forward (
+	FIL *fp, 						/* Pointer to the file object */
+	UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT),	/* Pointer to the streaming function */
+	UINT btr,						/* Number of bytes to forward */
+	UINT *bf						/* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD remain, clst, sect;
+	UINT rcnt;
+
+
+	*bf = 0;
+
+	res = validate(fp->fs, fp->id);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check error flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ))						/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr && (*func)(NULL, 0);				/* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */
+		fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if (fp->csect >= fp->fs->csize) {		/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
+					fp->org_clust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);
+				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->curr_clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+				fp->csect = 0;						/* Reset sector address in the cluster */
+			}
+			fp->csect++;							/* Next sector address in the cluster */
+		}
+		sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->curr_clust);	/* Get current data sector */
+		if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+		sect += fp->csect - 1;
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, sect))				/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		fp->dsect = sect;
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Forward data from sector window */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+		rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);
+		if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */
+
+
+
+#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create File System on the Drive                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define N_ROOTDIR	512			/* Multiple of 32 and <= 2048 */
+#define N_FATS		1			/* 1 or 2 */
+#define MAX_SECTOR	131072000UL	/* Maximum partition size */
+#define MIN_SECTOR	2000UL		/* Minimum partition size */
+
+
+FRESULT f_mkfs (
+	BYTE drv,			/* Logical drive number */
+	BYTE partition,		/* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */
+	WORD allocsize		/* Allocation unit size [bytes] */
+)
+{
+	static const DWORD sstbl[] = { 2048000, 1024000, 512000, 256000, 128000, 64000, 32000, 16000, 8000, 4000,   0 };
+	static const WORD cstbl[] =  {   32768,   16384,   8192,   4096,   2048, 16384,  8192,  4096, 2048, 1024, 512 };
+	BYTE fmt, m, *tbl;
+	DWORD b_part, b_fat, b_dir, b_data;		/* Area offset (LBA) */
+	DWORD n_part, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir;		/* Area size */
+	DWORD n_clst, d, n;
+	WORD as;
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+
+
+	/* Check validity of the parameters */
+	if (drv >= _DRIVES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	if (partition >= 2) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+
+	/* Check mounted drive and clear work area */
+	fs = FatFs[drv];
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
+	fs->fs_type = 0;
+	drv = LD2PD(drv);
+
+	/* Get disk statics */
+	stat = disk_initialize(drv);
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
+	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size */
+	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK
+		|| SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
+		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+#endif
+	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_part) != RES_OK || n_part < MIN_SECTOR)
+		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+	if (n_part > MAX_SECTOR) n_part = MAX_SECTOR;
+	b_part = (!partition) ? 63 : 0;		/* Boot sector */
+	n_part -= b_part;
+	for (d = 512; d <= 32768U && d != allocsize; d <<= 1) ;	/* Check validity of the allocation unit size */
+	if (d != allocsize) allocsize = 0;
+	if (!allocsize) {					/* Auto selection of cluster size */
+		d = n_part;
+		for (as = SS(fs); as > 512U; as >>= 1) d >>= 1;
+		for (n = 0; d < sstbl[n]; n++) ;
+		allocsize = cstbl[n];
+	}
+	if (allocsize < SS(fs)) allocsize = SS(fs);
+
+	allocsize /= SS(fs);		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+
+	/* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT type */
+	n_clst = n_part / allocsize;
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;
+	if (n_clst >= 0xFF5) fmt = FS_FAT16;
+	if (n_clst >= 0xFFF5) fmt = FS_FAT32;
+
+	/* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */
+	switch (fmt) {
+	case FS_FAT12:
+		n_fat = ((n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 1 + partition;
+		n_dir = N_ROOTDIR * 32 / SS(fs);
+		break;
+	case FS_FAT16:
+		n_fat = ((n_clst * 2) + 4 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 1 + partition;
+		n_dir = N_ROOTDIR * 32 / SS(fs);
+		break;
+	default:
+		n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 33 - partition;
+		n_dir = 0;
+	}
+	b_fat = b_part + n_rsv;			/* FATs start sector */
+	b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS;	/* Directory start sector */
+	b_data = b_dir + n_dir;			/* Data start sector */
+
+	/* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */
+	if (disk_ioctl(drv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+	n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1);
+	n_fat += (n - b_data) / N_FATS;
+	/* b_dir and b_data are no longer used below */
+
+	/* Determine number of cluster and final check of validity of the FAT type */
+	n_clst = (n_part - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / allocsize;
+	if (   (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < 0xFF5)
+		|| (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < 0xFFF5))
+		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+
+	/* Create partition table if needed */
+	if (!partition) {
+		DWORD n_disk = b_part + n_part;
+
+		mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs));
+		tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table;
+		ST_DWORD(tbl, 0x00010180);		/* Partition start in CHS */
+		if (n_disk < 63UL * 255 * 1024) {	/* Partition end in CHS */
+			n_disk = n_disk / 63 / 255;
+			tbl[7] = (BYTE)n_disk;
+			tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n_disk >> 2) | 63);
+		} else {
+			ST_WORD(&tbl[6], 0xFFFF);
+		}
+		tbl[5] = 254;
+		if (fmt != FS_FAT32)			/* System ID */
+			tbl[4] = (n_part < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06;
+		else
+			tbl[4] = 0x0c;
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63);			/* Partition start in LBA */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_part);		/* Partition size in LBA */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+64, 0xAA55);		/* Signature */
+		if (disk_write(drv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		partition = 0xF8;
+	} else {
+		partition = 0xF0;
+	}
+
+	/* Create boot record */
+	tbl = fs->win;								/* Clear buffer */
+	mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));
+	ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_jmpBoot, 0x90FEEB);			/* Boot code (jmp $, nop) */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, SS(fs));		/* Sector size */
+	tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)allocsize;		/* Sectors per cluster */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv);			/* Reserved sectors */
+	tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS;					/* Number of FATs */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, SS(fs) / 32 * n_dir); /* Number of rootdir entries */
+	if (n_part < 0x10000) {						/* Number of total sectors */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_part);
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_part);
+	}
+	tbl[BPB_Media] = partition;					/* Media descripter */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63);				/* Number of sectors per track */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255);				/* Number of heads */
+	ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_part);			/* Hidden sectors */
+	n = get_fattime();							/* Use current time as a VSN */
+	if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n);				/* Volume serial number */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat);		/* Number of secters per FAT */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80;					/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29;					/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME    FAT     ", 19);	/* Volume lavel, FAT signature */
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n);			/* Volume serial number */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat);		/* Number of secters per FAT */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2);			/* Root directory cluster (2) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1);				/* FSInfo record offset (bs+1) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6);			/* Backup boot record offset (bs+6) */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80;				/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29;				/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME    FAT32   ", 19);	/* Volume lavel, FAT signature */
+	}
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);				/* Signature */
+	if (SS(fs) > 512U) {
+		ST_WORD(tbl+SS(fs)-2, 0xAA55);
+	}
+	if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+0, 1) != RES_OK)
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)
+		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+6, 1);
+
+	/* Initialize FAT area */
+	for (m = 0; m < N_FATS; m++) {
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));		/* 1st sector of the FAT  */
+		if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
+			n = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00;
+			n |= partition;
+			ST_DWORD(tbl, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */
+		} else {
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, 0xFFFFFFF8);	/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF);
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */
+		}
+		if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));		/* Following FAT entries are filled by zero */
+		for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) {
+			if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Initialize Root directory */
+	m = (BYTE)((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? allocsize : n_dir);
+	do {
+		if (disk_write(drv, tbl, b_fat++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	} while (--m);
+
+	/* Create FSInfo record if needed */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 0xFFFFFFFF);
+		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+1, 1);
+		disk_write(drv, tbl, b_part+7, 1);
+	}
+
+	return (disk_ioctl(drv, CTRL_SYNC, (void*)NULL) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR;
+}
+
+#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get a string from the file                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+char* f_gets (
+	char* buff,	/* Pointer to the string buffer to read */
+	int len,	/* Size of string buffer */
+	FIL* fil	/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int i = 0;
+	char *p = buff;
+	UINT rc;
+
+
+	while (i < len - 1) {			/* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */
+		f_read(fil, p, 1, &rc);
+		if (rc != 1) break;			/* Break when no data to read */
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+		if (*p == '\r') continue;	/* Strip '\r' */
+#endif
+		i++;
+		if (*p++ == '\n') break;	/* Break when reached end of line */
+	}
+	*p = 0;
+	return i ? buff : NULL;			/* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+#include <stdarg.h>
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a character to the file                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_putc (
+	int chr,	/* A character to be output */
+	FIL* fil	/* Ponter to the file object */
+)
+{
+	UINT bw;
+	char c;
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+	if (chr == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil);	/* LF -> CRLF conversion */
+#endif
+	if (!fil) {	/* Special value may be used to switch the destination to any other device */
+	/*	put_console(chr);	*/
+		return chr;
+	}
+	c = (char)chr;
+	f_write(fil, &c, 1, &bw);	/* Write a byte to the file */
+	return bw ? chr : EOF;		/* Return the result */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a string to the file                                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_puts (
+	const char* str,	/* Pointer to the string to be output */
+	FIL* fil			/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int n;
+
+
+	for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) {
+		if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF;
+	}
+	return n;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a formatted string to the file                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_printf (
+	FIL* fil,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const char* str,	/* Pointer to the format string */
+	...					/* Optional arguments... */
+)
+{
+	va_list arp;
+	UCHAR c, f, r;
+	ULONG val;
+	char s[16];
+	int i, w, res, cc;
+
+
+	va_start(arp, str);
+
+	for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) {
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == 0) break;			/* End of string */
+		if (c != '%') {				/* Non escape cahracter */
+			cc = f_putc(c, fil);
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
+			continue;
+		}
+		w = f = 0;
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == '0') {				/* Flag: '0' padding */
+			f = 1; c = *str++;
+		}
+		while (c >= '0' && c <= '9') {	/* Precision */
+			w = w * 10 + (c - '0');
+			c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (c == 'l') {				/* Prefix: Size is long int */
+			f |= 2; c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (c == 's') {				/* Type is string */
+			cc = f_puts(va_arg(arp, char*), fil);
+			continue;
+		}
+		if (c == 'c') {				/* Type is character */
+			cc = f_putc(va_arg(arp, int), fil);
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
+			continue;
+		}
+		r = 0;
+		if (c == 'd') r = 10;		/* Type is signed decimal */
+		if (c == 'u') r = 10;		/* Type is unsigned decimal */
+		if (c == 'X') r = 16;		/* Type is unsigned hexdecimal */
+		if (r == 0) break;			/* Unknown type */
+		if (f & 2) {				/* Get the value */
+			val = (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long);
+		} else {
+			val = (c == 'd') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int);
+		}
+		/* Put numeral string */
+		if (c == 'd') {
+			if (val & 0x80000000) {
+				val = 0 - val;
+				f |= 4;
+			}
+		}
+		i = sizeof(s) - 1; s[i] = 0;
+		do {
+			c = (UCHAR)(val % r + '0');
+			if (c > '9') c += 7;
+			s[--i] = c;
+			val /= r;
+		} while (i && val);
+		if (i && (f & 4)) s[--i] = '-';
+		w = sizeof(s) - 1 - w;
+		while (i && i > w) s[--i] = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' ';
+		cc = f_puts(&s[i], fil);
+	}
+
+	va_end(arp);
+	return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res;
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
index 41e136ee5..69bfd3109 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
@@ -1,596 +1,596 @@
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.07e       (C)ChaN, 2010
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
-/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
-/ developments under license policy of following trems.
-/
-/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
-/
-/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
-/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-/   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
-/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _FATFS
-#define _FATFS	0x007E
-
-#include "integer.h"	/* Basic integer types */
-#include "ffconf.h"		/* FatFs configuration options */
-
-#if _FATFS != _FFCONFIG
-#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h).
-#endif
-
-
-/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */
-
-#if _CODE_PAGE == 932	/* Japanese Shift-JIS */
-#define _DF1S	0x81	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */
-#define _DF1E	0x9F	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */
-#define _DF2S	0xE0	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */
-#define _DF2E	0xFC	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */
-#define _DS1S	0x40	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */
-#define _DS1E	0x7E	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */
-#define _DS2S	0x80	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */
-#define _DS2E	0xFC	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936	/* Simplified Chinese GBK */
-#define _DF1S	0x81
-#define _DF1E	0xFE
-#define _DS1S	0x40
-#define _DS1E	0x7E
-#define _DS2S	0x80
-#define _DS2E	0xFE
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949	/* Korean */
-#define _DF1S	0x81
-#define _DF1E	0xFE
-#define _DS1S	0x41
-#define _DS1E	0x5A
-#define _DS2S	0x61
-#define _DS2E	0x7A
-#define _DS3S	0x81
-#define _DS3E	0xFE
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950	/* Traditional Chinese Big5 */
-#define _DF1S	0x81
-#define _DF1E	0xFE
-#define _DS1S	0x40
-#define _DS1E	0x7E
-#define _DS2S	0xA1
-#define _DS2E	0xFE
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437	/* U.S. (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720	/* Arabic (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737	/* Greek (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \
-				0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775	/* Baltic (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850	/* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852	/* Latin 2 (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855	/* Cyrillic (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \
-				0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857	/* Turkish (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858	/* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862	/* Hebrew (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866	/* Russian (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874	/* Thai (OEM, Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
-				0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \
-				0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1	/* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-
-#else
-#error Unknown code page
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* Character code support macros */
-
-#define IsUpper(c)	(((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z'))
-#define IsLower(c)	(((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z'))
-
-#if _DF1S		/* DBCS configuration */
-
-#ifdef _DF2S	/* Two 1st byte areas */
-#define IsDBCS1(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E))
-#else			/* One 1st byte area */
-#define IsDBCS1(c)	((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E)
-#endif
-
-#ifdef _DS3S	/* Three 2nd byte areas */
-#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E))
-#else			/* Two 2nd byte areas */
-#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E))
-#endif
-
-#else			/* SBCS configuration */
-
-#define IsDBCS1(c)	0
-#define IsDBCS2(c)	0
-
-#endif /* _DF1S */
-
-
-
-/* Definitions corresponds to multi partition */
-
-#if _MULTI_PARTITION		/* Multiple partition configuration */
-
-typedef struct _PARTITION {
-	BYTE pd;	/* Physical drive# */
-	BYTE pt;	/* Partition # (0-3) */
-} PARTITION;
-
-extern
-const PARTITION Drives[];			/* Logical drive# to physical location conversion table */
-#define LD2PD(drv) (Drives[drv].pd)	/* Get physical drive# */
-#define LD2PT(drv) (Drives[drv].pt)	/* Get partition# */
-
-#else						/* Single partition configuration */
-
-#define LD2PD(drv) (drv)	/* Physical drive# is equal to the logical drive# */
-#define LD2PT(drv) 0		/* Always mounts the 1st partition */
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* Definitions corresponds to multiple sector size */
-
-#if _MAX_SS == 512		/* Single sector size */
-#define	SS(fs)	512U
-
-#elif _MAX_SS == 1024 || _MAX_SS == 2048 || _MAX_SS == 4096	/* Multiple sector size */
-#define	SS(fs)	((fs)->s_size)
-
-#else
-#error Sector size must be 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096.
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* Type of file name on FatFs API */
-
-#if _LFN_UNICODE && _USE_LFN
-typedef WCHAR XCHAR;	/* Unicode */
-#else
-typedef char XCHAR;		/* SBCS, DBCS */
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* File system object structure */
-
-typedef struct _FATFS_ {
-	BYTE	fs_type;	/* FAT sub type */
-	BYTE	drive;		/* Physical drive number */
-	BYTE	csize;		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
-	BYTE	n_fats;		/* Number of FAT copies */
-	BYTE	wflag;		/* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
-	BYTE	fsi_flag;	/* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
-	WORD	id;			/* File system mount ID */
-	WORD	n_rootdir;	/* Number of root directory entries (0 on FAT32) */
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-	_SYNC_t	sobj;		/* Identifier of sync object */
-#endif
-#if _MAX_SS != 512
-	WORD	s_size;		/* Sector size */
-#endif
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	DWORD	last_clust;	/* Last allocated cluster */
-	DWORD	free_clust;	/* Number of free clusters */
-	DWORD	fsi_sector;	/* fsinfo sector */
-#endif
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	DWORD	cdir;		/* Current directory (0:root)*/
-#endif
-	DWORD	sects_fat;	/* Sectors per fat */
-	DWORD	max_clust;	/* Maximum cluster# + 1. Number of clusters is max_clust - 2 */
-	DWORD	fatbase;	/* FAT start sector */
-	DWORD	dirbase;	/* Root directory start sector (Cluster# on FAT32) */
-	DWORD	database;	/* Data start sector */
-	DWORD	winsect;	/* Current sector appearing in the win[] */
-	BYTE	win[_MAX_SS];/* Disk access window for Directory/FAT */
-} FATFS;
-
-
-
-/* Directory object structure */
-
-typedef struct _DIR_ {
-	FATFS*	fs;			/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
-	WORD	id;			/* Owner file system mount ID */
-	WORD	index;		/* Current read/write index number */
-	DWORD	sclust;		/* Table start cluster (0:Static table) */
-	DWORD	clust;		/* Current cluster */
-	DWORD	sect;		/* Current sector */
-	BYTE*	dir;		/* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */
-	BYTE*	fn;			/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
-#if _USE_LFN
-	WCHAR*	lfn;		/* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */
-	WORD	lfn_idx;	/* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */
-#endif
-} DIR;
-
-
-
-/* File object structure */
-
-typedef struct _FIL_ {
-	FATFS*	fs;			/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
-	WORD	id;			/* Owner file system mount ID */
-	BYTE	flag;		/* File status flags */
-	BYTE	csect;		/* Sector address in the cluster */
-	DWORD	fptr;		/* File R/W pointer */
-	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
-	DWORD	org_clust;	/* File start cluster */
-	DWORD	curr_clust;	/* Current cluster */
-	DWORD	dsect;		/* Current data sector */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	DWORD	dir_sect;	/* Sector containing the directory entry */
-	BYTE*	dir_ptr;	/* Ponter to the directory entry in the window */
-#endif
-#if !_FS_TINY
-	BYTE	buf[_MAX_SS];/* File R/W buffer */
-#endif
-} FIL;
-
-
-
-/* File status structure */
-
-typedef struct _FILINFO_ {
-	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
-	WORD	fdate;		/* Last modified date */
-	WORD	ftime;		/* Last modified time */
-	BYTE	fattrib;	/* Attribute */
-	char	fname[13];	/* Short file name (8.3 format) */
-#if _USE_LFN
-	XCHAR*	lfname;		/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
-	int 	lfsize;		/* Size of LFN buffer [chrs] */
-#endif
-} FILINFO;
-
-
-
-/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
-
-typedef enum {
-	FR_OK = 0,			/* 0 */
-	FR_DISK_ERR,		/* 1 */
-	FR_INT_ERR,			/* 2 */
-	FR_NOT_READY,		/* 3 */
-	FR_NO_FILE,			/* 4 */
-	FR_NO_PATH,			/* 5 */
-	FR_INVALID_NAME,	/* 6 */
-	FR_DENIED,			/* 7 */
-	FR_EXIST,			/* 8 */
-	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,	/* 9 */
-	FR_WRITE_PROTECTED,	/* 10 */
-	FR_INVALID_DRIVE,	/* 11 */
-	FR_NOT_ENABLED,		/* 12 */
-	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM,	/* 13 */
-	FR_MKFS_ABORTED,	/* 14 */
-	FR_TIMEOUT			/* 15 */
-} FRESULT;
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FatFs module application interface                           */
-
-FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*);						/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
-FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const XCHAR*, BYTE);			/* Open or create a file */
-FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*);			/* Read data from a file */
-FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*);	/* Write data to a file */
-FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD);						/* Move file pointer of a file object */
-FRESULT f_close (FIL*);								/* Close an open file object */
-FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const XCHAR*);				/* Open an existing directory */
-FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);					/* Read a directory item */
-FRESULT f_stat (const XCHAR*, FILINFO*);			/* Get file status */
-FRESULT f_getfree (const XCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**);	/* Get number of free clusters on the drive */
-FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*);							/* Truncate file */
-FRESULT f_sync (FIL*);								/* Flush cached data of a writing file */
-FRESULT f_unlink (const XCHAR*);					/* Delete an existing file or directory */
-FRESULT	f_mkdir (const XCHAR*);						/* Create a new directory */
-FRESULT f_chmod (const XCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE);			/* Change attriburte of the file/dir */
-FRESULT f_utime (const XCHAR*, const FILINFO*);		/* Change timestamp of the file/dir */
-FRESULT f_rename (const XCHAR*, const XCHAR*);		/* Rename/Move a file or directory */
-FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*);	/* Forward data to the stream */
-FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, WORD);					/* Create a file system on the drive */
-FRESULT f_chdir (const XCHAR*);						/* Change current directory */
-FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE);							/* Change current drive */
-
-#if _USE_STRFUNC
-int f_putc (int, FIL*);								/* Put a character to the file */
-int f_puts (const char*, FIL*);						/* Put a string to the file */
-int f_printf (FIL*, const char*, ...);				/* Put a formatted string to the file */
-char* f_gets (char*, int, FIL*);					/* Get a string from the file */
-#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0)
-#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0)
-#ifndef EOF
-#define EOF -1
-#endif
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* User defined functions                                       */
-
-/* Real time clock */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-DWORD get_fattime (void);	/* 31-25: Year(0-127 org.1980), 24-21: Month(1-12), 20-16: Day(1-31) */
-							/* 15-11: Hour(0-23), 10-5: Minute(0-59), 4-0: Second(0-29 *2) */
-#endif
-
-/* Unicode - OEM code conversion */
-#if _USE_LFN
-WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT);
-WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR);
-#endif
-
-/* Sync functions */
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-BOOL ff_cre_syncobj(BYTE, _SYNC_t*);
-BOOL ff_del_syncobj(_SYNC_t);
-BOOL ff_req_grant(_SYNC_t);
-void ff_rel_grant(_SYNC_t);
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Flags and offset address                                     */
-
-
-/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */
-
-#define	FA_READ				0x01
-#define	FA_OPEN_EXISTING	0x00
-#if _FS_READONLY == 0
-#define	FA_WRITE			0x02
-#define	FA_CREATE_NEW		0x04
-#define	FA_CREATE_ALWAYS	0x08
-#define	FA_OPEN_ALWAYS		0x10
-#define FA__WRITTEN			0x20
-#define FA__DIRTY			0x40
-#endif
-#define FA__ERROR			0x80
-
-
-/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
-
-#define FS_FAT12	1
-#define FS_FAT16	2
-#define FS_FAT32	3
-
-
-/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
-
-#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
-#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
-#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
-#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
-#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
-#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
-#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
-#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
-
-
-/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures with byte offset instead
-/ of structure member because there are incompatibility of the packing option
-/ between various compilers. */
-
-#define BS_jmpBoot			0
-#define BS_OEMName			3
-#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11
-#define BPB_SecPerClus		13
-#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14
-#define BPB_NumFATs			16
-#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17
-#define BPB_TotSec16		19
-#define BPB_Media			21
-#define BPB_FATSz16			22
-#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24
-#define BPB_NumHeads		26
-#define BPB_HiddSec			28
-#define BPB_TotSec32		32
-#define BS_55AA				510
-
-#define BS_DrvNum			36
-#define BS_BootSig			38
-#define BS_VolID			39
-#define BS_VolLab			43
-#define BS_FilSysType		54
-
-#define BPB_FATSz32			36
-#define BPB_ExtFlags		40
-#define BPB_FSVer			42
-#define BPB_RootClus		44
-#define BPB_FSInfo			48
-#define BPB_BkBootSec		50
-#define BS_DrvNum32			64
-#define BS_BootSig32		66
-#define BS_VolID32			67
-#define BS_VolLab32			71
-#define BS_FilSysType32		82
-
-#define	FSI_LeadSig			0
-#define	FSI_StrucSig		484
-#define	FSI_Free_Count		488
-#define	FSI_Nxt_Free		492
-
-#define MBR_Table			446
-
-#define	DIR_Name			0
-#define	DIR_Attr			11
-#define	DIR_NTres			12
-#define	DIR_CrtTime			14
-#define	DIR_CrtDate			16
-#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20
-#define	DIR_WrtTime			22
-#define	DIR_WrtDate			24
-#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26
-#define	DIR_FileSize		28
-#define	LDIR_Ord			0
-#define	LDIR_Attr			11
-#define	LDIR_Type			12
-#define	LDIR_Chksum			13
-#define	LDIR_FstClusLO		26
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------*/
-/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
-
-#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
-#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
-#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
-#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
-#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
-#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
-#endif
-
-
-#endif /* _FATFS */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.07e       (C)ChaN, 2010
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following trems.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2010, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _FATFS
+#define _FATFS	0x007E
+
+#include "integer.h"	/* Basic integer types */
+#include "ffconf.h"		/* FatFs configuration options */
+
+#if _FATFS != _FFCONFIG
+#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h).
+#endif
+
+
+/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */
+
+#if _CODE_PAGE == 932	/* Japanese Shift-JIS */
+#define _DF1S	0x81	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */
+#define _DF1E	0x9F	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */
+#define _DF2S	0xE0	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */
+#define _DF2E	0xFC	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */
+#define _DS1S	0x40	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */
+#define _DS1E	0x7E	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */
+#define _DS2S	0x80	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */
+#define _DS2E	0xFC	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936	/* Simplified Chinese GBK */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0x80
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949	/* Korean */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x41
+#define _DS1E	0x5A
+#define _DS2S	0x61
+#define _DS2E	0x7A
+#define _DS3S	0x81
+#define _DS3E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950	/* Traditional Chinese Big5 */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0xA1
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437	/* U.S. (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720	/* Arabic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737	/* Greek (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \
+				0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775	/* Baltic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850	/* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852	/* Latin 2 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855	/* Cyrillic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \
+				0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857	/* Turkish (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858	/* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862	/* Hebrew (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866	/* Russian (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874	/* Thai (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \
+				0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1	/* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+
+#else
+#error Unknown code page
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Character code support macros */
+
+#define IsUpper(c)	(((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z'))
+#define IsLower(c)	(((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z'))
+
+#if _DF1S		/* DBCS configuration */
+
+#ifdef _DF2S	/* Two 1st byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E))
+#else			/* One 1st byte area */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _DS3S	/* Three 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E))
+#else			/* Two 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E))
+#endif
+
+#else			/* SBCS configuration */
+
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	0
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	0
+
+#endif /* _DF1S */
+
+
+
+/* Definitions corresponds to multi partition */
+
+#if _MULTI_PARTITION		/* Multiple partition configuration */
+
+typedef struct _PARTITION {
+	BYTE pd;	/* Physical drive# */
+	BYTE pt;	/* Partition # (0-3) */
+} PARTITION;
+
+extern
+const PARTITION Drives[];			/* Logical drive# to physical location conversion table */
+#define LD2PD(drv) (Drives[drv].pd)	/* Get physical drive# */
+#define LD2PT(drv) (Drives[drv].pt)	/* Get partition# */
+
+#else						/* Single partition configuration */
+
+#define LD2PD(drv) (drv)	/* Physical drive# is equal to the logical drive# */
+#define LD2PT(drv) 0		/* Always mounts the 1st partition */
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Definitions corresponds to multiple sector size */
+
+#if _MAX_SS == 512		/* Single sector size */
+#define	SS(fs)	512U
+
+#elif _MAX_SS == 1024 || _MAX_SS == 2048 || _MAX_SS == 4096	/* Multiple sector size */
+#define	SS(fs)	((fs)->s_size)
+
+#else
+#error Sector size must be 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096.
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Type of file name on FatFs API */
+
+#if _LFN_UNICODE && _USE_LFN
+typedef WCHAR XCHAR;	/* Unicode */
+#else
+typedef char XCHAR;		/* SBCS, DBCS */
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* File system object structure */
+
+typedef struct _FATFS_ {
+	BYTE	fs_type;	/* FAT sub type */
+	BYTE	drive;		/* Physical drive number */
+	BYTE	csize;		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	BYTE	n_fats;		/* Number of FAT copies */
+	BYTE	wflag;		/* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	BYTE	fsi_flag;	/* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	WORD	id;			/* File system mount ID */
+	WORD	n_rootdir;	/* Number of root directory entries (0 on FAT32) */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+	_SYNC_t	sobj;		/* Identifier of sync object */
+#endif
+#if _MAX_SS != 512
+	WORD	s_size;		/* Sector size */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	last_clust;	/* Last allocated cluster */
+	DWORD	free_clust;	/* Number of free clusters */
+	DWORD	fsi_sector;	/* fsinfo sector */
+#endif
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	DWORD	cdir;		/* Current directory (0:root)*/
+#endif
+	DWORD	sects_fat;	/* Sectors per fat */
+	DWORD	max_clust;	/* Maximum cluster# + 1. Number of clusters is max_clust - 2 */
+	DWORD	fatbase;	/* FAT start sector */
+	DWORD	dirbase;	/* Root directory start sector (Cluster# on FAT32) */
+	DWORD	database;	/* Data start sector */
+	DWORD	winsect;	/* Current sector appearing in the win[] */
+	BYTE	win[_MAX_SS];/* Disk access window for Directory/FAT */
+} FATFS;
+
+
+
+/* Directory object structure */
+
+typedef struct _DIR_ {
+	FATFS*	fs;			/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
+	WORD	id;			/* Owner file system mount ID */
+	WORD	index;		/* Current read/write index number */
+	DWORD	sclust;		/* Table start cluster (0:Static table) */
+	DWORD	clust;		/* Current cluster */
+	DWORD	sect;		/* Current sector */
+	BYTE*	dir;		/* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */
+	BYTE*	fn;			/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	WCHAR*	lfn;		/* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */
+	WORD	lfn_idx;	/* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */
+#endif
+} DIR;
+
+
+
+/* File object structure */
+
+typedef struct _FIL_ {
+	FATFS*	fs;			/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
+	WORD	id;			/* Owner file system mount ID */
+	BYTE	flag;		/* File status flags */
+	BYTE	csect;		/* Sector address in the cluster */
+	DWORD	fptr;		/* File R/W pointer */
+	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
+	DWORD	org_clust;	/* File start cluster */
+	DWORD	curr_clust;	/* Current cluster */
+	DWORD	dsect;		/* Current data sector */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	dir_sect;	/* Sector containing the directory entry */
+	BYTE*	dir_ptr;	/* Ponter to the directory entry in the window */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_TINY
+	BYTE	buf[_MAX_SS];/* File R/W buffer */
+#endif
+} FIL;
+
+
+
+/* File status structure */
+
+typedef struct _FILINFO_ {
+	DWORD	fsize;		/* File size */
+	WORD	fdate;		/* Last modified date */
+	WORD	ftime;		/* Last modified time */
+	BYTE	fattrib;	/* Attribute */
+	char	fname[13];	/* Short file name (8.3 format) */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	XCHAR*	lfname;		/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	int 	lfsize;		/* Size of LFN buffer [chrs] */
+#endif
+} FILINFO;
+
+
+
+/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
+
+typedef enum {
+	FR_OK = 0,			/* 0 */
+	FR_DISK_ERR,		/* 1 */
+	FR_INT_ERR,			/* 2 */
+	FR_NOT_READY,		/* 3 */
+	FR_NO_FILE,			/* 4 */
+	FR_NO_PATH,			/* 5 */
+	FR_INVALID_NAME,	/* 6 */
+	FR_DENIED,			/* 7 */
+	FR_EXIST,			/* 8 */
+	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,	/* 9 */
+	FR_WRITE_PROTECTED,	/* 10 */
+	FR_INVALID_DRIVE,	/* 11 */
+	FR_NOT_ENABLED,		/* 12 */
+	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM,	/* 13 */
+	FR_MKFS_ABORTED,	/* 14 */
+	FR_TIMEOUT			/* 15 */
+} FRESULT;
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FatFs module application interface                           */
+
+FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*);						/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
+FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const XCHAR*, BYTE);			/* Open or create a file */
+FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*);			/* Read data from a file */
+FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*);	/* Write data to a file */
+FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD);						/* Move file pointer of a file object */
+FRESULT f_close (FIL*);								/* Close an open file object */
+FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const XCHAR*);				/* Open an existing directory */
+FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);					/* Read a directory item */
+FRESULT f_stat (const XCHAR*, FILINFO*);			/* Get file status */
+FRESULT f_getfree (const XCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**);	/* Get number of free clusters on the drive */
+FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*);							/* Truncate file */
+FRESULT f_sync (FIL*);								/* Flush cached data of a writing file */
+FRESULT f_unlink (const XCHAR*);					/* Delete an existing file or directory */
+FRESULT	f_mkdir (const XCHAR*);						/* Create a new directory */
+FRESULT f_chmod (const XCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE);			/* Change attriburte of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_utime (const XCHAR*, const FILINFO*);		/* Change timestamp of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_rename (const XCHAR*, const XCHAR*);		/* Rename/Move a file or directory */
+FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*);	/* Forward data to the stream */
+FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, WORD);					/* Create a file system on the drive */
+FRESULT f_chdir (const XCHAR*);						/* Change current directory */
+FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE);							/* Change current drive */
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC
+int f_putc (int, FIL*);								/* Put a character to the file */
+int f_puts (const char*, FIL*);						/* Put a string to the file */
+int f_printf (FIL*, const char*, ...);				/* Put a formatted string to the file */
+char* f_gets (char*, int, FIL*);					/* Get a string from the file */
+#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0)
+#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0)
+#ifndef EOF
+#define EOF -1
+#endif
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* User defined functions                                       */
+
+/* Real time clock */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+DWORD get_fattime (void);	/* 31-25: Year(0-127 org.1980), 24-21: Month(1-12), 20-16: Day(1-31) */
+							/* 15-11: Hour(0-23), 10-5: Minute(0-59), 4-0: Second(0-29 *2) */
+#endif
+
+/* Unicode - OEM code conversion */
+#if _USE_LFN
+WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT);
+WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR);
+#endif
+
+/* Sync functions */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+BOOL ff_cre_syncobj(BYTE, _SYNC_t*);
+BOOL ff_del_syncobj(_SYNC_t);
+BOOL ff_req_grant(_SYNC_t);
+void ff_rel_grant(_SYNC_t);
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Flags and offset address                                     */
+
+
+/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */
+
+#define	FA_READ				0x01
+#define	FA_OPEN_EXISTING	0x00
+#if _FS_READONLY == 0
+#define	FA_WRITE			0x02
+#define	FA_CREATE_NEW		0x04
+#define	FA_CREATE_ALWAYS	0x08
+#define	FA_OPEN_ALWAYS		0x10
+#define FA__WRITTEN			0x20
+#define FA__DIRTY			0x40
+#endif
+#define FA__ERROR			0x80
+
+
+/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
+
+#define FS_FAT12	1
+#define FS_FAT16	2
+#define FS_FAT32	3
+
+
+/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
+
+#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
+#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
+#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
+#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
+#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
+#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
+#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
+#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
+
+
+/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures with byte offset instead
+/ of structure member because there are incompatibility of the packing option
+/ between various compilers. */
+
+#define BS_jmpBoot			0
+#define BS_OEMName			3
+#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11
+#define BPB_SecPerClus		13
+#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14
+#define BPB_NumFATs			16
+#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17
+#define BPB_TotSec16		19
+#define BPB_Media			21
+#define BPB_FATSz16			22
+#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24
+#define BPB_NumHeads		26
+#define BPB_HiddSec			28
+#define BPB_TotSec32		32
+#define BS_55AA				510
+
+#define BS_DrvNum			36
+#define BS_BootSig			38
+#define BS_VolID			39
+#define BS_VolLab			43
+#define BS_FilSysType		54
+
+#define BPB_FATSz32			36
+#define BPB_ExtFlags		40
+#define BPB_FSVer			42
+#define BPB_RootClus		44
+#define BPB_FSInfo			48
+#define BPB_BkBootSec		50
+#define BS_DrvNum32			64
+#define BS_BootSig32		66
+#define BS_VolID32			67
+#define BS_VolLab32			71
+#define BS_FilSysType32		82
+
+#define	FSI_LeadSig			0
+#define	FSI_StrucSig		484
+#define	FSI_Free_Count		488
+#define	FSI_Nxt_Free		492
+
+#define MBR_Table			446
+
+#define	DIR_Name			0
+#define	DIR_Attr			11
+#define	DIR_NTres			12
+#define	DIR_CrtTime			14
+#define	DIR_CrtDate			16
+#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20
+#define	DIR_WrtTime			22
+#define	DIR_WrtDate			24
+#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26
+#define	DIR_FileSize		28
+#define	LDIR_Ord			0
+#define	LDIR_Attr			11
+#define	LDIR_Type			12
+#define	LDIR_Chksum			13
+#define	LDIR_FstClusLO		26
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------*/
+/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
+#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *(BYTE*)((ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
+#endif
+
+
+#endif /* _FATFS */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
index 4b19f1326..a82109469 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
@@ -1,166 +1,166 @@
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file  R0.07e  (C)ChaN, 2010
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/
-/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
-/ the configuration options.
-/
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#ifndef _FFCONFIG
-#define _FFCONFIG 0x007E
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Function and Buffer Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define	_FS_TINY	1		/* 0 or 1 */
-/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system
-/  object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file
-/  data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */
-
-
-#define _FS_READONLY	1	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes
-/  writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename,
-/  f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */
-
-
-#define _FS_MINIMIZE	2	/* 0, 1, 2 or 3 */
-/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions.
-/
-/   0: Full function.
-/   1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename
-/      are removed.
-/   2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to level 1.
-/   3: f_lseek is removed in addition to level 2. */
-
-
-#define	_USE_STRFUNC	0	/* 0, 1 or 2 */
-/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */
-
-
-#define	_USE_MKFS	0		/* 0 or 1 */
-/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */
-
-
-#define	_USE_FORWARD	0	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */
-
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Locale and Namespace Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define _CODE_PAGE	932
-/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system.
-/  Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure.
-/
-/   932  - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   936  - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   949  - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   950  - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   1250 - Central Europe (Windows)
-/   1251 - Cyrillic (Windows)
-/   1252 - Latin 1 (Windows)
-/   1253 - Greek (Windows)
-/   1254 - Turkish (Windows)
-/   1255 - Hebrew (Windows)
-/   1256 - Arabic (Windows)
-/   1257 - Baltic (Windows)
-/   1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows)
-/   437  - U.S. (OEM)
-/   720  - Arabic (OEM)
-/   737  - Greek (OEM)
-/   775  - Baltic (OEM)
-/   850  - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM)
-/   858  - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM)
-/   852  - Latin 2 (OEM)
-/   855  - Cyrillic (OEM)
-/   866  - Russian (OEM)
-/   857  - Turkish (OEM)
-/   862  - Hebrew (OEM)
-/   874  - Thai (OEM, Windows)
-/	1    - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.)
-*/
-
-
-#define	_USE_LFN	0		/* 0, 1 or 2 */
-#define	_MAX_LFN	255		/* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */
-/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support.
-/
-/   0: Disable LFN. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect.
-/   1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the bss. NOT REENTRANT.
-/   2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK.
-/
-/  The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. When enable LFN,
-/  two Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added
-/  to the project. */
-
-
-#define	_LFN_UNICODE	0	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode,
-/  enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1.
-*/
-
-
-#define _FS_RPATH	0		/* 0 or 1 */
-/* When _FS_RPATH is set to 1, relative path feature is enabled and f_chdir,
-/  f_chdrive function are available.
-/  Note that output of the f_readdir fnction is affected by this option. */
-
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Physical Drive Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define _DRIVES		1
-/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */
-
-
-#define	_MAX_SS		512		/* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */
-/* Maximum sector size to be handled.
-/  Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be
-/  required for floppy disk (512/1024) and optical disk (512/2048).
-/  When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implememted
-/  to the disk_ioctl function. */
-
-
-#define	_MULTI_PARTITION	0	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* When _MULTI_PARTITION is set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical
-/ drive number and can mount only first primaly partition. When it is set to 1,
-/ each volume is tied to the partitions listed in Drives[]. */
-
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ System Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define _WORD_ACCESS	1	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* The _WORD_ACCESS option defines which access method is used to the word
-/  data on the FAT volume.
-/
-/   0: Byte-by-byte access. Always compatible with all platforms.
-/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
-/
-/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned
-/  word access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
-/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
-/  performance and code size. */
-
-
-#define _FS_REENTRANT	0		/* 0 or 1 */
-#define _FS_TIMEOUT		1000	/* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */
-#define	_SYNC_t			HANDLE	/* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */
-/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy of the FatFs module.
-/
-/   0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect.
-/   1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers,
-/      ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj
-/      function must be added to the project. */
-
-
-#endif /* _FFCONFIG */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file  R0.07e  (C)ChaN, 2010
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/
+/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
+/ the configuration options.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#ifndef _FFCONFIG
+#define _FFCONFIG 0x007E
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Function and Buffer Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define	_FS_TINY	1		/* 0 or 1 */
+/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system
+/  object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file
+/  data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */
+
+
+#define _FS_READONLY	1	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes
+/  writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename,
+/  f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */
+
+
+#define _FS_MINIMIZE	2	/* 0, 1, 2 or 3 */
+/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions.
+/
+/   0: Full function.
+/   1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename
+/      are removed.
+/   2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to level 1.
+/   3: f_lseek is removed in addition to level 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_STRFUNC	0	/* 0, 1 or 2 */
+/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_MKFS	0		/* 0 or 1 */
+/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */
+
+
+#define	_USE_FORWARD	0	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Locale and Namespace Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _CODE_PAGE	932
+/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system.
+/  Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure.
+/
+/   932  - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   936  - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   949  - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   950  - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   1250 - Central Europe (Windows)
+/   1251 - Cyrillic (Windows)
+/   1252 - Latin 1 (Windows)
+/   1253 - Greek (Windows)
+/   1254 - Turkish (Windows)
+/   1255 - Hebrew (Windows)
+/   1256 - Arabic (Windows)
+/   1257 - Baltic (Windows)
+/   1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows)
+/   437  - U.S. (OEM)
+/   720  - Arabic (OEM)
+/   737  - Greek (OEM)
+/   775  - Baltic (OEM)
+/   850  - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM)
+/   858  - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM)
+/   852  - Latin 2 (OEM)
+/   855  - Cyrillic (OEM)
+/   866  - Russian (OEM)
+/   857  - Turkish (OEM)
+/   862  - Hebrew (OEM)
+/   874  - Thai (OEM, Windows)
+/	1    - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.)
+*/
+
+
+#define	_USE_LFN	0		/* 0, 1 or 2 */
+#define	_MAX_LFN	255		/* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */
+/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support.
+/
+/   0: Disable LFN. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect.
+/   1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the bss. NOT REENTRANT.
+/   2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK.
+/
+/  The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. When enable LFN,
+/  two Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added
+/  to the project. */
+
+
+#define	_LFN_UNICODE	0	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode,
+/  enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1.
+*/
+
+
+#define _FS_RPATH	0		/* 0 or 1 */
+/* When _FS_RPATH is set to 1, relative path feature is enabled and f_chdir,
+/  f_chdrive function are available.
+/  Note that output of the f_readdir fnction is affected by this option. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Physical Drive Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _DRIVES		1
+/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */
+
+
+#define	_MAX_SS		512		/* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */
+/* Maximum sector size to be handled.
+/  Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be
+/  required for floppy disk (512/1024) and optical disk (512/2048).
+/  When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implememted
+/  to the disk_ioctl function. */
+
+
+#define	_MULTI_PARTITION	0	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* When _MULTI_PARTITION is set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical
+/ drive number and can mount only first primaly partition. When it is set to 1,
+/ each volume is tied to the partitions listed in Drives[]. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ System Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _WORD_ACCESS	1	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* The _WORD_ACCESS option defines which access method is used to the word
+/  data on the FAT volume.
+/
+/   0: Byte-by-byte access. Always compatible with all platforms.
+/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
+/
+/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned
+/  word access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
+/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
+/  performance and code size. */
+
+
+#define _FS_REENTRANT	0		/* 0 or 1 */
+#define _FS_TIMEOUT		1000	/* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */
+#define	_SYNC_t			HANDLE	/* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */
+/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy of the FatFs module.
+/
+/   0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect.
+/   1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers,
+/      ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj
+/      function must be added to the project. */
+
+
+#endif /* _FFCONFIG */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
index 1d6bac368..851a78da2 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
@@ -1,37 +1,37 @@
-/*-------------------------------------------*/
-/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
-/*-------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _INTEGER
-
-#if 0
-#include <windows.h>
-#else
-
-/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
-typedef int				INT;
-typedef unsigned int	UINT;
-
-/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
-typedef signed char		CHAR;
-typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
-typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
-
-/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
-typedef short			SHORT;
-typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
-typedef unsigned short	WORD;
-typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
-
-/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
-typedef long			LONG;
-typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
-typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
-
-/* Boolean type */
-typedef enum { FALSE = 0, TRUE } BOOL;
-
-#endif
-
-#define _INTEGER
-#endif
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _INTEGER
+
+#if 0
+#include <windows.h>
+#else
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
+typedef int				INT;
+typedef unsigned int	UINT;
+
+/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
+typedef signed char		CHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
+typedef short			SHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	WORD;
+typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
+
+/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
+typedef long			LONG;
+typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
+typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
+
+/* Boolean type */
+typedef enum { FALSE = 0, TRUE } BOOL;
+
+#endif
+
+#define _INTEGER
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c
index 08d849433..646410f3d 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c
@@ -1,289 +1,289 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Simple HTTP Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack,
- *  this will serve out files to HTTP clients on port 80.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C
-#include "HTTPServerApp.h"
-
-/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
- *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
- */
-const char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
-                                     "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n"
-                                     "Connection: close\r\n"
-                                     "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n"
-                                     "Content-Type: ";
-
-/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
- *  given URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
- */
-const char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
-                                     "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n"
-                                     "Connection: close\r\n"
-                                     "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n"
-                                     "Content-Type: text/plain\r\n\r\n"
-                                     "Error 404: File Not Found: /";
-
-/** Default filename to fetch when a directory is requested */
-const char PROGMEM DefaultDirFileName[] = "index.htm";
-
-/** Default MIME type sent if no other MIME type can be determined. */
-const char PROGMEM DefaultMIMEType[] = "text/plain";
-
-/** List of MIME types for each supported file extension. */
-const MIME_Type_t MIMETypes[] =
-	{
-		{.Extension = "htm", .MIMEType = "text/html"},
-		{.Extension = "jpg", .MIMEType = "image/jpeg"},
-		{.Extension = "gif", .MIMEType = "image/gif"},
-		{.Extension = "bmp", .MIMEType = "image/bmp"},
-		{.Extension = "png", .MIMEType = "image/png"},
-		{.Extension = "ico", .MIMEType = "image/x-icon"},
-		{.Extension = "exe", .MIMEType = "application/octet-stream"},
-		{.Extension = "gz",  .MIMEType = "application/x-gzip"},
-		{.Extension = "zip", .MIMEType = "application/zip"},
-		{.Extension = "pdf", .MIMEType = "application/pdf"},
-	};
-
-/** FATFs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the dataflash contents. */
-FATFS DiskFATState;
-
-
-/** Initialization function for the simple HTTP webserver. */
-void HTTPServerApp_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Listen on port 80 for HTTP connections from hosts */
-	uip_listen(HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT));
-	
-	/* Mount the dataflash disk via FatFS */
-	f_mount(0, &DiskFATState);
-}
-
-/** uIP stack application callback for the simple HTTP webserver. This function must be called each time the
- *  TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed.
- */
-void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void)
-{
-	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_conn->appstate;
-
-	if (uip_aborted() || uip_timedout() || uip_closed())
-	{
-		/* Lock to the closed state so that no further processing will occur on the connection */
-		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState  = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
-		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState     = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
-	}
-
-	if (uip_connected())
-	{
-		/* New connection - initialize connection state values */
-		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState  = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile;
-		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState     = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile;
-		AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen      = false;
-		AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos  = 0;
-		AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize = 0;
-	}
-
-	if (uip_acked())
-	{
-		/* Add the amount of ACKed file data to the total sent file bytes counter */
-		AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos += AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize;
-
-		/* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */
-		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = AppState->HTTPServer.NextState;
-	}
-
-	if (uip_rexmit())
-	{
-		/* Return file pointer to the last ACKed position */
-		f_lseek(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos);	
-	}
-
-	if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll())
-	{
-		switch (AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState)
-		{
-			case WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile:
-				HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile();
-				break;
-			case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader:
-				HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader();
-				break;
-			case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData:
-				HTTPServerApp_SendData();
-				break;
-			case WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing:
-				/* Connection is being terminated for some reason - close file handle */
-				f_close(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle);
-				AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen = false;
-		
-				/* If connection is not already closed, close it */
-				uip_close();
-				
-				AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed;
-				AppState->HTTPServer.NextState    = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed;
-				break;
-		}		  
-	}		
-}
-
-/** HTTP Server State handler for the Request Process state. This state manages the processing of incoming HTTP
- *  GET requests to the server from the receiving HTTP client.
- */
-static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void)
-{
-	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
-	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
-	
-	/* No HTTP header received from the client, abort processing */
-	if (!(uip_newdata()))
-	  return;
-	  
-	char* RequestToken      = strtok(AppData, " ");
-	char* RequestedFileName = strtok(NULL, " ");
-			
-	/* Must be a GET request, abort otherwise */
-	if (strcmp_P(RequestToken, PSTR("GET")) != 0)
-	{
-		uip_abort();
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Copy over the requested filename */
-	strncpy(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, &RequestedFileName[1], (sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - 1));
-	
-	/* Ensure filename is null-terminated */
-	AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - 1] = 0x00;
-	
-	/* Determine the length of the URI so that it can be checked to see if it is a directory */
-	uint8_t FileNameLen = strlen(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName);
-
-	/* If the URI is a directory, append the default filename */
-	if (AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen - 1] == '/')
-	{
-		strncpy_P(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen], DefaultDirFileName,
-		          (sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - FileNameLen));
-
-		/* Ensure altered filename is still null-terminated */
-		AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - 1] = 0x00;
-	}
-	
-	/* Try to open the file from the Dataflash disk */
-	AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen     = (f_open(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.FileName,
-	                                            (FA_OPEN_EXISTING | FA_READ)) == FR_OK);
-
-	/* Lock to the SendResponseHeader state until connection terminated */
-	AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader;
-	AppState->HTTPServer.NextState    = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader;
-}
-
-/** HTTP Server State handler for the HTTP Response Header Send state. This state manages the transmission of
- *  the HTTP response header to the receiving HTTP client.
- */
-static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void)
-{
-	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
-	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
-
-	char* Extension     = strpbrk(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, ".");
-	bool  FoundMIMEType = false;
-
-	/* If the file isn't already open, it wasn't found - send back a 404 error response and abort */
-	if (!(AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen))
-	{
-		/* Copy over the HTTP 404 response header and send it to the receiving client */
-		strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP404Header);
-		strcpy(&AppData[strlen(AppData)], AppState->HTTPServer.FileName);		
-		uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
-		
-		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Copy over the HTTP 200 response header and send it to the receiving client */
-	strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP200Header);
-
-	/* Check to see if a MIME type for the requested file's extension was found */
-	if (Extension != NULL)
-	{
-		/* Look through the MIME type list, copy over the required MIME type if found */
-		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < (sizeof(MIMETypes) / sizeof(MIMETypes[0])); i++)
-		{
-			if (strcmp(&Extension[1], MIMETypes[i].Extension) == 0)
-			{
-				strcpy(&AppData[strlen(AppData)], MIMETypes[i].MIMEType);						
-				FoundMIMEType = true;
-				break;
-			}
-		} 
-	}
-
-	/* Check if a MIME type was found and copied to the output buffer */
-	if (!(FoundMIMEType))
-	{
-		/* MIME type not found - copy over the default MIME type */
-		strcpy_P(&AppData[strlen(AppData)], DefaultMIMEType);
-	}
-	
-	/* Add the end-of-line terminator and end-of-headers terminator after the MIME type */
-	strcpy_P(&AppData[strlen(AppData)], PSTR("\r\n\r\n"));
-	
-	/* Send the MIME header to the receiving client */
-	uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
-	
-	/* When the MIME header is ACKed, progress to the data send stage */
-	AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData;
-}
-
-/** HTTP Server State handler for the Data Send state. This state manages the transmission of file chunks
- *  to the receiving HTTP client.
- */
-static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void)
-{
-	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
-	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
-
-	/* Get the maximum segment size for the current packet */
-	uint16_t MaxChunkSize = uip_mss();
-
-	/* Read the next chunk of data from the open file */
-	f_read(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppData, MaxChunkSize, &AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize);
-	
-	/* Send the next file chunk to the receiving client */
-	uip_send(AppData, AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize);
-			
-	/* Check if we are at the last chunk of the file, if so next ACK should close the connection */
-	if (MaxChunkSize != AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize)
-	  AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Simple HTTP Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack,
+ *  this will serve out files to HTTP clients on port 80.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C
+#include "HTTPServerApp.h"
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
+ *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
+ */
+const char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
+                                     "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n"
+                                     "Connection: close\r\n"
+                                     "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n"
+                                     "Content-Type: ";
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
+ *  given URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
+ */
+const char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
+                                     "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n"
+                                     "Connection: close\r\n"
+                                     "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n"
+                                     "Content-Type: text/plain\r\n\r\n"
+                                     "Error 404: File Not Found: /";
+
+/** Default filename to fetch when a directory is requested */
+const char PROGMEM DefaultDirFileName[] = "index.htm";
+
+/** Default MIME type sent if no other MIME type can be determined. */
+const char PROGMEM DefaultMIMEType[] = "text/plain";
+
+/** List of MIME types for each supported file extension. */
+const MIME_Type_t MIMETypes[] =
+	{
+		{.Extension = "htm", .MIMEType = "text/html"},
+		{.Extension = "jpg", .MIMEType = "image/jpeg"},
+		{.Extension = "gif", .MIMEType = "image/gif"},
+		{.Extension = "bmp", .MIMEType = "image/bmp"},
+		{.Extension = "png", .MIMEType = "image/png"},
+		{.Extension = "ico", .MIMEType = "image/x-icon"},
+		{.Extension = "exe", .MIMEType = "application/octet-stream"},
+		{.Extension = "gz",  .MIMEType = "application/x-gzip"},
+		{.Extension = "zip", .MIMEType = "application/zip"},
+		{.Extension = "pdf", .MIMEType = "application/pdf"},
+	};
+
+/** FATFs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the dataflash contents. */
+FATFS DiskFATState;
+
+
+/** Initialization function for the simple HTTP webserver. */
+void HTTPServerApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Listen on port 80 for HTTP connections from hosts */
+	uip_listen(HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT));
+	
+	/* Mount the dataflash disk via FatFS */
+	f_mount(0, &DiskFATState);
+}
+
+/** uIP stack application callback for the simple HTTP webserver. This function must be called each time the
+ *  TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_conn->appstate;
+
+	if (uip_aborted() || uip_timedout() || uip_closed())
+	{
+		/* Lock to the closed state so that no further processing will occur on the connection */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState  = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState     = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_connected())
+	{
+		/* New connection - initialize connection state values */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState  = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState     = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen      = false;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos  = 0;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize = 0;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_acked())
+	{
+		/* Add the amount of ACKed file data to the total sent file bytes counter */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos += AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize;
+
+		/* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = AppState->HTTPServer.NextState;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_rexmit())
+	{
+		/* Return file pointer to the last ACKed position */
+		f_lseek(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos);	
+	}
+
+	if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll())
+	{
+		switch (AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState)
+		{
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile:
+				HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile();
+				break;
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader:
+				HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader();
+				break;
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData:
+				HTTPServerApp_SendData();
+				break;
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing:
+				/* Connection is being terminated for some reason - close file handle */
+				f_close(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle);
+				AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen = false;
+		
+				/* If connection is not already closed, close it */
+				uip_close();
+				
+				AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed;
+				AppState->HTTPServer.NextState    = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed;
+				break;
+		}		  
+	}		
+}
+
+/** HTTP Server State handler for the Request Process state. This state manages the processing of incoming HTTP
+ *  GET requests to the server from the receiving HTTP client.
+ */
+static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
+	
+	/* No HTTP header received from the client, abort processing */
+	if (!(uip_newdata()))
+	  return;
+	  
+	char* RequestToken      = strtok(AppData, " ");
+	char* RequestedFileName = strtok(NULL, " ");
+			
+	/* Must be a GET request, abort otherwise */
+	if (strcmp_P(RequestToken, PSTR("GET")) != 0)
+	{
+		uip_abort();
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Copy over the requested filename */
+	strncpy(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, &RequestedFileName[1], (sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - 1));
+	
+	/* Ensure filename is null-terminated */
+	AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - 1] = 0x00;
+	
+	/* Determine the length of the URI so that it can be checked to see if it is a directory */
+	uint8_t FileNameLen = strlen(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName);
+
+	/* If the URI is a directory, append the default filename */
+	if (AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen - 1] == '/')
+	{
+		strncpy_P(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen], DefaultDirFileName,
+		          (sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - FileNameLen));
+
+		/* Ensure altered filename is still null-terminated */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - 1] = 0x00;
+	}
+	
+	/* Try to open the file from the Dataflash disk */
+	AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen     = (f_open(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.FileName,
+	                                            (FA_OPEN_EXISTING | FA_READ)) == FR_OK);
+
+	/* Lock to the SendResponseHeader state until connection terminated */
+	AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader;
+	AppState->HTTPServer.NextState    = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader;
+}
+
+/** HTTP Server State handler for the HTTP Response Header Send state. This state manages the transmission of
+ *  the HTTP response header to the receiving HTTP client.
+ */
+static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	char* Extension     = strpbrk(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, ".");
+	bool  FoundMIMEType = false;
+
+	/* If the file isn't already open, it wasn't found - send back a 404 error response and abort */
+	if (!(AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen))
+	{
+		/* Copy over the HTTP 404 response header and send it to the receiving client */
+		strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP404Header);
+		strcpy(&AppData[strlen(AppData)], AppState->HTTPServer.FileName);		
+		uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+		
+		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Copy over the HTTP 200 response header and send it to the receiving client */
+	strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP200Header);
+
+	/* Check to see if a MIME type for the requested file's extension was found */
+	if (Extension != NULL)
+	{
+		/* Look through the MIME type list, copy over the required MIME type if found */
+		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < (sizeof(MIMETypes) / sizeof(MIMETypes[0])); i++)
+		{
+			if (strcmp(&Extension[1], MIMETypes[i].Extension) == 0)
+			{
+				strcpy(&AppData[strlen(AppData)], MIMETypes[i].MIMEType);						
+				FoundMIMEType = true;
+				break;
+			}
+		} 
+	}
+
+	/* Check if a MIME type was found and copied to the output buffer */
+	if (!(FoundMIMEType))
+	{
+		/* MIME type not found - copy over the default MIME type */
+		strcpy_P(&AppData[strlen(AppData)], DefaultMIMEType);
+	}
+	
+	/* Add the end-of-line terminator and end-of-headers terminator after the MIME type */
+	strcpy_P(&AppData[strlen(AppData)], PSTR("\r\n\r\n"));
+	
+	/* Send the MIME header to the receiving client */
+	uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+	
+	/* When the MIME header is ACKed, progress to the data send stage */
+	AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData;
+}
+
+/** HTTP Server State handler for the Data Send state. This state manages the transmission of file chunks
+ *  to the receiving HTTP client.
+ */
+static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	/* Get the maximum segment size for the current packet */
+	uint16_t MaxChunkSize = uip_mss();
+
+	/* Read the next chunk of data from the open file */
+	f_read(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppData, MaxChunkSize, &AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize);
+	
+	/* Send the next file chunk to the receiving client */
+	uip_send(AppData, AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize);
+			
+	/* Check if we are at the last chunk of the file, if so next ACK should close the connection */
+	if (MaxChunkSize != AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize)
+	  AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h
index 47b810845..04cdbe5fe 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for HTTPServerApp.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_
-#define _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-
-		#include <uip.h>
-		#include <ff.h>
-	
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** States for each HTTP connection to the webserver. */
-		enum Webserver_States_t
-		{
-			WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile, /**< Currently opening requested file */
-			WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader, /**< Currently sending HTTP response headers to the client */
-			WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData, /**< Currently sending HTTP page data to the client */
-			WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing, /**< Ready to close the connection to the client */
-			WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed, /**< Connection closed after all data sent */
-		};
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a MIME type handler. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			char* Extension; /**< File extension (no leading '.' character) */
-			char* MIMEType;  /**< Appropriate MIME type to send when the extension is encountered */
-		} MIME_Type_t;
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** TCP listen port for incoming HTTP traffic */
-		#define HTTP_SERVER_PORT  80
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void HTTPServerApp_Init(void);
-		void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C)
-			static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void);
-			static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void);
-			static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HTTPServerApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_
+#define _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+		#include <ff.h>
+	
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** States for each HTTP connection to the webserver. */
+		enum Webserver_States_t
+		{
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile, /**< Currently opening requested file */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader, /**< Currently sending HTTP response headers to the client */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData, /**< Currently sending HTTP page data to the client */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing, /**< Ready to close the connection to the client */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed, /**< Connection closed after all data sent */
+		};
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a MIME type handler. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			char* Extension; /**< File extension (no leading '.' character) */
+			char* MIMEType;  /**< Appropriate MIME type to send when the extension is encountered */
+		} MIME_Type_t;
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** TCP listen port for incoming HTTP traffic */
+		#define HTTP_SERVER_PORT  80
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void HTTPServerApp_Init(void);
+		void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C)
+			static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void);
+			static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void);
+			static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c
index 8a376a41b..55312e87b 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -1,281 +1,281 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
- *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
- *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
-#include "SCSI.h"
-
-/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
- *  features and capabilities.
- */
-SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
-	{
-		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
-		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
-			
-		.Removable           = true,
-			
-		.Version             = 0,
-			
-		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
-		.NormACA             = false,
-		.TrmTsk              = false,
-		.AERC                = false,
-
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
-			
-		.SoftReset           = false,
-		.CmdQue              = false,
-		.Linked              = false,
-		.Sync                = false,
-		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
-		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
-		.RelAddr             = false,
-		
-		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
-		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
-		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
-	};
-
-/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
- *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
- */
-SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
-	{
-		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
-	};
-
-
-/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
- *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
- *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Set initial sense data, before the requested command is processed */
-	SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
-	               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-	               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-					   
-	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
-	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
-	{
-		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
-			SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
-			SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
-			SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);			
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
-			SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
-			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
-			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
-		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
-		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
-			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-			break;
-		default:
-			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
-			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-			break;
-	}
-
-	return (SenseData.SenseKey == SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD);
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
- *  and capabilities to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
-	                                         MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
-	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
-	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
-
-	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
-	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
-	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
-	{
-		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-	
-	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-
-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
- *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
-	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
-	
-	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
- *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
-	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
- *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
- *  supported.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
-	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
-	{
-		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
-	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
-	{
-		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
-	
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
- *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
- *  reading and writing of the data.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
- */
-static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead)
-{
-	uint32_t BlockAddress;
-	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
-	
-	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
-	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
-
-	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
-	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
-	
-	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
-	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
-	{
-		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
-	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
-	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-	else
-	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-
-	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = 
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+			
+		.Removable           = true,
+			
+		.Version             = 0,
+			
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+			
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+		
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Set initial sense data, before the requested command is processed */
+	SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+	               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+	               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+					   
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);			
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	return (SenseData.SenseKey == SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD);
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = (((uint16_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
+	                                         MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
+	                                                                       sizeof(InquiryData);
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+	
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
+	
+	uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NO_STREAM_CALLBACK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);	
+	
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ */
+static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+	
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+	
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return;
+	}
+	
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h
index 196b5f689..e83f59bfc 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for SCSI.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _SCSI_H_
-#define _SCSI_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-
-		#include "../Descriptors.h"
-		#include "DataflashManager.h"
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
-		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
-		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
-		 */
-		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = (key);                   \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (acode);      \
-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (aqual); }MACROE
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_READ           true
-
-		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_WRITE          false
-
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
-		
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
-			static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = (key);                   \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (acode);      \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (aqual); }MACROE
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+		
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static void SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static void SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, const bool IsDataRead);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c
index 2855f8d76..da9108676 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c
@@ -1,162 +1,162 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  TELNET Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack,
- *  this will serve out raw TELNET to the client on port 23.
- */
- 
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C
-#include "TELNETServerApp.h"
-
-/** Welcome message to send to a TELNET client when a connection is first made. */
-const char PROGMEM WelcomeHeader[] = "********************************************\r\n"
-                                     "*       LUFA uIP Webserver (TELNET)        *\r\n"
-                                     "********************************************\r\n";
-
-/** Main TELNET menu, giving the user the list of available commands they may issue */
-const char PROGMEM TELNETMenu[] = "\r\n"
-                                  "  == Available Commands: ==\r\n"
-                                  "     c) List Active TCP Connections\r\n"
-                                  "  =========================\r\n"
-                                  "\r\n>";
-								  
-/** Header to print before the current connections are printed to the client */
-const char PROGMEM CurrentConnectionsHeader[] = "\r\n* Current TCP Connections: *\r\n";
-
-/** Initialization function for the simple HTTP webserver. */
-void TELNETServerApp_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Listen on port 23 for TELNET connections from hosts */
-	uip_listen(HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT));
-}
-
-/** uIP stack application callback for the TELNET server. This function must be called each time the
- *  TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed.
- */
-void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void)
-{
-	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState   = &uip_conn->appstate;
-	char*               const AppData    = (char*)uip_appdata;
-
-	if (uip_connected())
-	{
-		/* New connection - initialize connection state values */
-		AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = TELNET_STATE_SendHeader;
-	}
-
-	if (uip_acked())
-	{
-		/* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */
-		AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = AppState->TELNETServer.NextState;	
-	}
-
-	if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll())
-	{
-		switch (AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState)
-		{
-			case TELNET_STATE_SendHeader:
-				/* Copy over and send the TELNET welcome message upon first connection */
-				strcpy_P(AppData, WelcomeHeader);
-				uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
-				
-				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu;
-				break;
-			case TELNET_STATE_SendMenu:
-				/* Copy over and send the TELNET menu to the client */
-				strcpy_P(AppData, TELNETMenu);
-				uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
-				
-				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_GetCommand;
-				break;
-			case TELNET_STATE_GetCommand:
-				if (!(uip_datalen()))
-				  break;
-
-				/* Save the issued command for later processing */
-				AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand = AppData[0];
- 
-				AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState  = TELNET_STATE_SendResponse;
-				break;
-			case TELNET_STATE_SendResponse:
-				/* Determine which command was issued, perform command processing */
-				switch (AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand)
-				{
-					case 'c':
-						TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections();
-						break;
-					default:
-						strcpy_P(AppData, PSTR("Invalid Command.\r\n"));
-						uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
-						break;
-				}
-
-				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu;
-				break;
-		}
-	}		
-}
-
-/** Sends a list of active TCP connections to the TELNET client. */
-static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void)
-{
-	char* const AppData    = (char*)uip_appdata;
-
-	strcpy_P(AppData, CurrentConnectionsHeader);
-							
-	uint16_t ResponseLen     = strlen(AppData);
-	uint8_t  ActiveConnCount = 0;
-
-	/* Loop through the complete uIP TCP connections list, looking for active connections */
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
-	{
-		struct uip_conn* CurrConnection = &uip_conns[i];
-		
-		/* If the connection is not closed, it is active and must be added to the out buffer */
-		if (CurrConnection->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED)
-		{
-			/* Add the current connection's details to the out buffer */
-			ResponseLen += sprintf_P(&AppData[ResponseLen], PSTR("%u) %02d.%02d.%02d.%02d (Local %u, Remote %u)\r\n"),
-			                         ++ActiveConnCount,
-			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[0],
-			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[1],
-			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[2],
-			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[3],
-			                         HTONS(CurrConnection->lport), HTONS(CurrConnection->rport));
-		}
-	}
-
-	uip_send(AppData, ResponseLen);
-}
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  TELNET Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack,
+ *  this will serve out raw TELNET to the client on port 23.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C
+#include "TELNETServerApp.h"
+
+/** Welcome message to send to a TELNET client when a connection is first made. */
+const char PROGMEM WelcomeHeader[] = "********************************************\r\n"
+                                     "*       LUFA uIP Webserver (TELNET)        *\r\n"
+                                     "********************************************\r\n";
+
+/** Main TELNET menu, giving the user the list of available commands they may issue */
+const char PROGMEM TELNETMenu[] = "\r\n"
+                                  "  == Available Commands: ==\r\n"
+                                  "     c) List Active TCP Connections\r\n"
+                                  "  =========================\r\n"
+                                  "\r\n>";
+								  
+/** Header to print before the current connections are printed to the client */
+const char PROGMEM CurrentConnectionsHeader[] = "\r\n* Current TCP Connections: *\r\n";
+
+/** Initialization function for the simple HTTP webserver. */
+void TELNETServerApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Listen on port 23 for TELNET connections from hosts */
+	uip_listen(HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT));
+}
+
+/** uIP stack application callback for the TELNET server. This function must be called each time the
+ *  TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState   = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData    = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	if (uip_connected())
+	{
+		/* New connection - initialize connection state values */
+		AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = TELNET_STATE_SendHeader;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_acked())
+	{
+		/* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */
+		AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = AppState->TELNETServer.NextState;	
+	}
+
+	if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll())
+	{
+		switch (AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState)
+		{
+			case TELNET_STATE_SendHeader:
+				/* Copy over and send the TELNET welcome message upon first connection */
+				strcpy_P(AppData, WelcomeHeader);
+				uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+				
+				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu;
+				break;
+			case TELNET_STATE_SendMenu:
+				/* Copy over and send the TELNET menu to the client */
+				strcpy_P(AppData, TELNETMenu);
+				uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+				
+				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_GetCommand;
+				break;
+			case TELNET_STATE_GetCommand:
+				if (!(uip_datalen()))
+				  break;
+
+				/* Save the issued command for later processing */
+				AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand = AppData[0];
+ 
+				AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState  = TELNET_STATE_SendResponse;
+				break;
+			case TELNET_STATE_SendResponse:
+				/* Determine which command was issued, perform command processing */
+				switch (AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand)
+				{
+					case 'c':
+						TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections();
+						break;
+					default:
+						strcpy_P(AppData, PSTR("Invalid Command.\r\n"));
+						uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+						break;
+				}
+
+				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu;
+				break;
+		}
+	}		
+}
+
+/** Sends a list of active TCP connections to the TELNET client. */
+static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void)
+{
+	char* const AppData    = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	strcpy_P(AppData, CurrentConnectionsHeader);
+							
+	uint16_t ResponseLen     = strlen(AppData);
+	uint8_t  ActiveConnCount = 0;
+
+	/* Loop through the complete uIP TCP connections list, looking for active connections */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
+	{
+		struct uip_conn* CurrConnection = &uip_conns[i];
+		
+		/* If the connection is not closed, it is active and must be added to the out buffer */
+		if (CurrConnection->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED)
+		{
+			/* Add the current connection's details to the out buffer */
+			ResponseLen += sprintf_P(&AppData[ResponseLen], PSTR("%u) %02d.%02d.%02d.%02d (Local %u, Remote %u)\r\n"),
+			                         ++ActiveConnCount,
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[0],
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[1],
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[2],
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[3],
+			                         HTONS(CurrConnection->lport), HTONS(CurrConnection->rport));
+		}
+	}
+
+	uip_send(AppData, ResponseLen);
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h
index ff34d1482..c42725763 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h
@@ -1,68 +1,68 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for TELNETServerApp.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_
-#define _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-		
-		#include <uip.h>
-	
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** TCP listen port for incoming TELNET traffic */
-		#define TELNET_SERVER_PORT  23
-		
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** States for each TELNET connection to the server. */
-		enum TELNET_States_t
-		{
-			TELNET_STATE_SendHeader, /**< Currently sending welcome header to the client */
-			TELNET_STATE_SendMenu, /**< Currently sending the command list menu to the client */
-			TELNET_STATE_GetCommand, /**< Currently waiting for a command from the client */
-			TELNET_STATE_SendResponse, /**< Processing the issued command and sending a response */
-		};	
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void TELNETServerApp_Init(void);
-		void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C)
-			static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TELNETServerApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_
+#define _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		
+		#include <uip.h>
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** TCP listen port for incoming TELNET traffic */
+		#define TELNET_SERVER_PORT  23
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** States for each TELNET connection to the server. */
+		enum TELNET_States_t
+		{
+			TELNET_STATE_SendHeader, /**< Currently sending welcome header to the client */
+			TELNET_STATE_SendMenu, /**< Currently sending the command list menu to the client */
+			TELNET_STATE_GetCommand, /**< Currently waiting for a command from the client */
+			TELNET_STATE_SendResponse, /**< Processing the issued command and sending a response */
+		};	
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void TELNETServerApp_Init(void);
+		void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C)
+			static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c
index 45f8a6ae5..2d1a93130 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c
@@ -1,251 +1,251 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  uIP Management functions. This file contains the functions and globals needed to maintain the uIP
- *  stack once an RNDIS device has been attached to the system.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C
-#include "uIPManagement.h"
-
-/** Connection timer, to retain the time elapsed since the last time the uIP connections were managed. */
-struct timer ConnectionTimer;
-
-/** ARP timer, to retain the time elapsed since the ARP cache was last updated. */
-struct timer ARPTimer;
-
-/** MAC address of the RNDIS device, when enumerated */
-struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress;
-
-bool HaveIPConfiguration;
-
-/** Configures the uIP stack ready for network traffic. */
-void uIPManagement_Init(void)
-{
-	/* uIP Timing Initialization */
-	clock_init();
-	timer_set(&ConnectionTimer, CLOCK_SECOND / 2);
-	timer_set(&ARPTimer, CLOCK_SECOND * 10);	
-
-	/* uIP Stack Initialization */
-	uip_init();
-	uip_arp_init();
-	uip_setethaddr(MACAddress);
-
-	/* DHCP/Server IP Settings Initialization */
-	#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
-	HaveIPConfiguration = false;
-	DHCPClientApp_Init();
-	#else
-	HaveIPConfiguration = true;
-	uip_ipaddr_t IPAddress, Netmask, GatewayIPAddress;
-	uip_ipaddr(&IPAddress,        DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[0], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[1], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[2], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[3]);
-	uip_ipaddr(&Netmask,          DEVICE_NETMASK[0],    DEVICE_NETMASK[1],    DEVICE_NETMASK[2],    DEVICE_NETMASK[3]);
-	uip_ipaddr(&GatewayIPAddress, DEVICE_GATEWAY[0],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[1],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[2],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[3]);
-	uip_sethostaddr(&IPAddress);
-	uip_setnetmask(&Netmask);
-	uip_setdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
-	#endif
-	
-	/* HTTP Webserver Initialization */
-	HTTPServerApp_Init();
-	
-	/* TELNET Server Initialization */
-	#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER)
-	TELNETServerApp_Init();
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** uIP Management function. This function manages the uIP stack when called while an RNDIS device has been
- *  attached to the system.
- */
-void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void)
-{
-	if ((USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) && (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Configured))
-	{
-		uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket();
-		uIPManagement_ManageConnections();
-	}
-}
-
-/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given TCP connection. This routine dispatches
- *  to the appropriate TCP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number.
- */
-void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void)
-{
-	/* Call the correct TCP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */
-	switch (uip_conn->lport)
-	{
-		case HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT):
-			HTTPServerApp_Callback();
-			break;
-		#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER)
-		case HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT):
-			TELNETServerApp_Callback();
-			break;
-		#endif
-	}
-}
-
-/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given UDP connection. This routine dispatches
- *  to the appropriate UDP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number.
- */
-void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void)
-{
-	/* Call the correct UDP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */
-	switch (uip_udp_conn->lport)
-	{
-		case HTONS(DHCPC_CLIENT_PORT):
-			DHCPClientApp_Callback();
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Processes Incoming packets to the server from the connected RNDIS device, creating responses as needed. */
-static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void)
-{
-	/* If no packet received, exit processing routine */
-	if (!(RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface)))
-	  return;
-	  
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
-	/* Read the Incoming packet straight into the UIP packet buffer */
-	RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, uip_buf, &uip_len);
-
-	/* If the packet contains an Ethernet frame, process it */
-	if (uip_len > 0)
-	{
-		switch (((struct uip_eth_hdr*)uip_buf)->type)
-		{
-			case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP):
-				/* Filter packet by MAC destination */
-				uip_arp_ipin();
-
-				/* Process Incoming packet */
-				uip_input();
-
-				/* If a response was generated, send it */
-				if (uip_len > 0)
-				{
-					/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
-					uip_arp_out();
-
-					uip_split_output();
-				}
-				
-				break;
-			case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP):
-				/* Process ARP packet */
-				uip_arp_arpin();
-				
-				/* If a response was generated, send it */
-				if (uip_len > 0)
-				  uip_split_output();
-				
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY | ((HaveIPConfiguration) ? LEDMASK_UIP_READY_CONFIG : LEDMASK_UIP_READY_NOCONFIG));
-}
-
-/** Manages the currently open network connections, including TCP and (if enabled) UDP. */
-static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void)
-{
-	/* Poll TCP connections for more data to send back to the host */
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
-	{
-		uip_poll_conn(&uip_conns[i]);
-
-		/* If a response was generated, send it */
-		if (uip_len > 0)
-		{
-			/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
-			uip_arp_out();
-
-			/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
-			uip_split_output();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Manage open connections for timeouts */
-	if (timer_expired(&ConnectionTimer))
-	{
-		timer_reset(&ConnectionTimer);
-
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-		
-		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
-		{
-			/* Run periodic connection management for each TCP connection */
-			uip_periodic(i);
-
-			/* If a response was generated, send it */
-			if (uip_len > 0)
-			{
-				/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
-				uip_arp_out();
-
-				/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
-				uip_split_output();
-			}
-		}
-		
-		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
-		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++)
-		{
-			/* Run periodic connection management for each UDP connection */
-			uip_udp_periodic(i);
-
-			/* If a response was generated, send it */
-			if (uip_len > 0)
-			{
-				/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
-				uip_arp_out();
-
-				/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
-				uip_split_output();
-			}
-		}
-		#endif
-
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	}
-
-	/* Manage ARP cache refreshing */
-	if (timer_expired(&ARPTimer))
-	{
-		timer_reset(&ARPTimer);
-		uip_arp_timer();
-	}
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  uIP Management functions. This file contains the functions and globals needed to maintain the uIP
+ *  stack once an RNDIS device has been attached to the system.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C
+#include "uIPManagement.h"
+
+/** Connection timer, to retain the time elapsed since the last time the uIP connections were managed. */
+struct timer ConnectionTimer;
+
+/** ARP timer, to retain the time elapsed since the ARP cache was last updated. */
+struct timer ARPTimer;
+
+/** MAC address of the RNDIS device, when enumerated */
+struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress;
+
+bool HaveIPConfiguration;
+
+/** Configures the uIP stack ready for network traffic. */
+void uIPManagement_Init(void)
+{
+	/* uIP Timing Initialization */
+	clock_init();
+	timer_set(&ConnectionTimer, CLOCK_SECOND / 2);
+	timer_set(&ARPTimer, CLOCK_SECOND * 10);	
+
+	/* uIP Stack Initialization */
+	uip_init();
+	uip_arp_init();
+	uip_setethaddr(MACAddress);
+
+	/* DHCP/Server IP Settings Initialization */
+	#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
+	HaveIPConfiguration = false;
+	DHCPClientApp_Init();
+	#else
+	HaveIPConfiguration = true;
+	uip_ipaddr_t IPAddress, Netmask, GatewayIPAddress;
+	uip_ipaddr(&IPAddress,        DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[0], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[1], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[2], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[3]);
+	uip_ipaddr(&Netmask,          DEVICE_NETMASK[0],    DEVICE_NETMASK[1],    DEVICE_NETMASK[2],    DEVICE_NETMASK[3]);
+	uip_ipaddr(&GatewayIPAddress, DEVICE_GATEWAY[0],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[1],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[2],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[3]);
+	uip_sethostaddr(&IPAddress);
+	uip_setnetmask(&Netmask);
+	uip_setdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
+	#endif
+	
+	/* HTTP Webserver Initialization */
+	HTTPServerApp_Init();
+	
+	/* TELNET Server Initialization */
+	#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER)
+	TELNETServerApp_Init();
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** uIP Management function. This function manages the uIP stack when called while an RNDIS device has been
+ *  attached to the system.
+ */
+void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void)
+{
+	if ((USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) && (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Configured))
+	{
+		uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket();
+		uIPManagement_ManageConnections();
+	}
+}
+
+/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given TCP connection. This routine dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate TCP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number.
+ */
+void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void)
+{
+	/* Call the correct TCP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */
+	switch (uip_conn->lport)
+	{
+		case HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT):
+			HTTPServerApp_Callback();
+			break;
+		#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER)
+		case HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT):
+			TELNETServerApp_Callback();
+			break;
+		#endif
+	}
+}
+
+/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given UDP connection. This routine dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate UDP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number.
+ */
+void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void)
+{
+	/* Call the correct UDP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */
+	switch (uip_udp_conn->lport)
+	{
+		case HTONS(DHCPC_CLIENT_PORT):
+			DHCPClientApp_Callback();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes Incoming packets to the server from the connected RNDIS device, creating responses as needed. */
+static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void)
+{
+	/* If no packet received, exit processing routine */
+	if (!(RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface)))
+	  return;
+	  
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	/* Read the Incoming packet straight into the UIP packet buffer */
+	RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, uip_buf, &uip_len);
+
+	/* If the packet contains an Ethernet frame, process it */
+	if (uip_len > 0)
+	{
+		switch (((struct uip_eth_hdr*)uip_buf)->type)
+		{
+			case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP):
+				/* Filter packet by MAC destination */
+				uip_arp_ipin();
+
+				/* Process Incoming packet */
+				uip_input();
+
+				/* If a response was generated, send it */
+				if (uip_len > 0)
+				{
+					/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+					uip_arp_out();
+
+					uip_split_output();
+				}
+				
+				break;
+			case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP):
+				/* Process ARP packet */
+				uip_arp_arpin();
+				
+				/* If a response was generated, send it */
+				if (uip_len > 0)
+				  uip_split_output();
+				
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY | ((HaveIPConfiguration) ? LEDMASK_UIP_READY_CONFIG : LEDMASK_UIP_READY_NOCONFIG));
+}
+
+/** Manages the currently open network connections, including TCP and (if enabled) UDP. */
+static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void)
+{
+	/* Poll TCP connections for more data to send back to the host */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
+	{
+		uip_poll_conn(&uip_conns[i]);
+
+		/* If a response was generated, send it */
+		if (uip_len > 0)
+		{
+			/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+			uip_arp_out();
+
+			/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
+			uip_split_output();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Manage open connections for timeouts */
+	if (timer_expired(&ConnectionTimer))
+	{
+		timer_reset(&ConnectionTimer);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+		
+		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
+		{
+			/* Run periodic connection management for each TCP connection */
+			uip_periodic(i);
+
+			/* If a response was generated, send it */
+			if (uip_len > 0)
+			{
+				/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+				uip_arp_out();
+
+				/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
+				uip_split_output();
+			}
+		}
+		
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
+		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++)
+		{
+			/* Run periodic connection management for each UDP connection */
+			uip_udp_periodic(i);
+
+			/* If a response was generated, send it */
+			if (uip_len > 0)
+			{
+				/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+				uip_arp_out();
+
+				/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
+				uip_split_output();
+			}
+		}
+		#endif
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+
+	/* Manage ARP cache refreshing */
+	if (timer_expired(&ARPTimer))
+	{
+		timer_reset(&ARPTimer);
+		uip_arp_timer();
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h
index ed02374f5..37c54e9ad 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h
@@ -1,79 +1,79 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for uIPManagement.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_
-#define _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
-
-		#include <uip.h>
-		#include <uip_arp.h>
-		#include <uip-split.h>
-		#include <timer.h>
-		
-		#include "Lib/DHCPClientApp.h"
-		#include "Lib/HTTPServerApp.h"
-		#include "Lib/TELNETServerApp.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** IP address that the webserver should use once connected to a RNDIS device (when DHCP is disabled). */
-		#define DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS         (uint8_t[]){192, 168, 1, 10}
-		
-		/** Netmask that the webserver should once connected to a RNDIS device (when DHCP is disabled). */
-		#define DEVICE_NETMASK            (uint8_t[]){255, 255, 255, 0}
-		
-		/** IP address of the default gateway the webserver should use when routing outside the local subnet
-		 *  (when DHCP is disabled).
-		 */
-		#define DEVICE_GATEWAY            (uint8_t[]){192, 168, 1, 1}
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress;
-		
-		extern bool HaveIPConfiguration;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void uIPManagement_Init(void);
-		void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void);
-		void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void);
-		void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void);
-		
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C)
-			static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void);
-			static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void);
-		#endif
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for uIPManagement.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_
+#define _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+		#include <uip_arp.h>
+		#include <uip-split.h>
+		#include <timer.h>
+		
+		#include "Lib/DHCPClientApp.h"
+		#include "Lib/HTTPServerApp.h"
+		#include "Lib/TELNETServerApp.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** IP address that the webserver should use once connected to a RNDIS device (when DHCP is disabled). */
+		#define DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS         (uint8_t[]){192, 168, 1, 10}
+		
+		/** Netmask that the webserver should once connected to a RNDIS device (when DHCP is disabled). */
+		#define DEVICE_NETMASK            (uint8_t[]){255, 255, 255, 0}
+		
+		/** IP address of the default gateway the webserver should use when routing outside the local subnet
+		 *  (when DHCP is disabled).
+		 */
+		#define DEVICE_GATEWAY            (uint8_t[]){192, 168, 1, 1}
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress;
+		
+		extern bool HaveIPConfiguration;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void uIPManagement_Init(void);
+		void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void);
+		void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void);
+		void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void);
+		
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C)
+			static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void);
+			static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void);
+		#endif
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c
index 450714888..046b6e344 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c
@@ -1,38 +1,38 @@
-#include <stdint.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-#include <avr/io.h>
-#include <avr/sfr_defs.h>
-
-#include "clock.h"
-
-//Counted time
-volatile clock_time_t clock_datetime = 0;
-
-//Overflow interrupt
-ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect)
-{
-	clock_datetime += 1;
-}
-
-//Initialise the clock
-void clock_init()
-{
-	OCR1A  = ((F_CPU / 1024) / 100);
-	TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10));
-	TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A);
-}
-
-//Return time
-clock_time_t clock_time()
-{
-	clock_time_t time;
-
-	ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_FORCEON)
-	{
-		time = clock_datetime;
-	}
-
-	return time;
-}
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+#include <avr/io.h>
+#include <avr/sfr_defs.h>
+
+#include "clock.h"
+
+//Counted time
+volatile clock_time_t clock_datetime = 0;
+
+//Overflow interrupt
+ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect)
+{
+	clock_datetime += 1;
+}
+
+//Initialise the clock
+void clock_init()
+{
+	OCR1A  = ((F_CPU / 1024) / 100);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10));
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A);
+}
+
+//Return time
+clock_time_t clock_time()
+{
+	clock_time_t time;
+
+	ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_FORCEON)
+	{
+		time = clock_datetime;
+	}
+
+	return time;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h
index b585f47aa..05d30386b 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
-#ifndef __CLOCK_ARCH_H__
-#define __CLOCK_ARCH_H__
-
-#include <stdint.h>
-#include <util/atomic.h>
-
-typedef uint16_t clock_time_t;
-#define CLOCK_SECOND 100
-void clock_init(void);
-clock_time_t clock_time(void);
-
-#endif /* __CLOCK_ARCH_H__ */
+#ifndef __CLOCK_ARCH_H__
+#define __CLOCK_ARCH_H__
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <util/atomic.h>
+
+typedef uint16_t clock_time_t;
+#define CLOCK_SECOND 100
+void clock_init(void);
+clock_time_t clock_time(void);
+
+#endif /* __CLOCK_ARCH_H__ */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c
index 8c270b233..74eedf611 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c
@@ -1,127 +1,127 @@
-/**
- * \addtogroup timer
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Timer library implementation.
- * \author
- * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
- *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
- *    without specific prior written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
- * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
- * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
- * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
- * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
- * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
- * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
- * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
- * SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack
- *
- * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- *
- * $Id: timer.c,v 1.2 2006/06/12 08:00:30 adam Exp $
- */
-
-#include "clock.h"
-#include "timer.h"
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Set a timer.
- *
- * This function is used to set a timer for a time sometime in the
- * future. The function timer_expired() will evaluate to true after
- * the timer has expired.
- *
- * \param t A pointer to the timer
- * \param interval The interval before the timer expires.
- *
- */
-void
-timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval)
-{
-  t->interval = interval;
-  t->start = clock_time();
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Reset the timer with the same interval.
- *
- * This function resets the timer with the same interval that was
- * given to the timer_set() function. The start point of the interval
- * is the exact time that the timer last expired. Therefore, this
- * function will cause the timer to be stable over time, unlike the
- * timer_rester() function.
- *
- * \param t A pointer to the timer.
- *
- * \sa timer_restart()
- */
-void
-timer_reset(struct timer *t)
-{
-  t->start += t->interval;
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Restart the timer from the current point in time
- *
- * This function restarts a timer with the same interval that was
- * given to the timer_set() function. The timer will start at the
- * current time.
- *
- * \note A periodic timer will drift if this function is used to reset
- * it. For preioric timers, use the timer_reset() function instead.
- *
- * \param t A pointer to the timer.
- *
- * \sa timer_reset()
- */
-void
-timer_restart(struct timer *t)
-{
-  t->start = clock_time();
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Check if a timer has expired.
- *
- * This function tests if a timer has expired and returns true or
- * false depending on its status.
- *
- * \param t A pointer to the timer
- *
- * \return Non-zero if the timer has expired, zero otherwise.
- *
- */
-int
-timer_expired(struct timer *t)
-{
-  return (clock_time_t)(clock_time() - t->start) >= (clock_time_t)t->interval;
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/** @} */
+/**
+ * \addtogroup timer
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Timer library implementation.
+ * \author
+ * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: timer.c,v 1.2 2006/06/12 08:00:30 adam Exp $
+ */
+
+#include "clock.h"
+#include "timer.h"
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Set a timer.
+ *
+ * This function is used to set a timer for a time sometime in the
+ * future. The function timer_expired() will evaluate to true after
+ * the timer has expired.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer
+ * \param interval The interval before the timer expires.
+ *
+ */
+void
+timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval)
+{
+  t->interval = interval;
+  t->start = clock_time();
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Reset the timer with the same interval.
+ *
+ * This function resets the timer with the same interval that was
+ * given to the timer_set() function. The start point of the interval
+ * is the exact time that the timer last expired. Therefore, this
+ * function will cause the timer to be stable over time, unlike the
+ * timer_rester() function.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer.
+ *
+ * \sa timer_restart()
+ */
+void
+timer_reset(struct timer *t)
+{
+  t->start += t->interval;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Restart the timer from the current point in time
+ *
+ * This function restarts a timer with the same interval that was
+ * given to the timer_set() function. The timer will start at the
+ * current time.
+ *
+ * \note A periodic timer will drift if this function is used to reset
+ * it. For preioric timers, use the timer_reset() function instead.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer.
+ *
+ * \sa timer_reset()
+ */
+void
+timer_restart(struct timer *t)
+{
+  t->start = clock_time();
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Check if a timer has expired.
+ *
+ * This function tests if a timer has expired and returns true or
+ * false depending on its status.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer
+ *
+ * \return Non-zero if the timer has expired, zero otherwise.
+ *
+ */
+int
+timer_expired(struct timer *t)
+{
+  return (clock_time_t)(clock_time() - t->start) >= (clock_time_t)t->interval;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h
index e28e3ca5f..057bea49c 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h
@@ -1,86 +1,86 @@
-/**
- * \defgroup timer Timer library
- *
- * The timer library provides functions for setting, resetting and
- * restarting timers, and for checking if a timer has expired. An
- * application must "manually" check if its timers have expired; this
- * is not done automatically.
- *
- * A timer is declared as a \c struct \c timer and all access to the
- * timer is made by a pointer to the declared timer.
- *
- * \note The timer library uses the \ref clock "Clock library" to
- * measure time. Intervals should be specified in the format used by
- * the clock library.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Timer library header file.
- * \author
- * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
- *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
- *    without specific prior written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
- * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
- * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
- * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
- * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
- * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
- * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
- * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
- * SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack
- *
- * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- *
- * $Id: timer.h,v 1.3 2006/06/11 21:46:39 adam Exp $
- */
-#ifndef __TIMER_H__
-#define __TIMER_H__
-
-#include "clock.h"
-
-/**
- * A timer.
- *
- * This structure is used for declaring a timer. The timer must be set
- * with timer_set() before it can be used.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-struct timer {
-  clock_time_t start;
-  clock_time_t interval;
-};
-
-void timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval);
-void timer_reset(struct timer *t);
-void timer_restart(struct timer *t);
-int timer_expired(struct timer *t);
-
-#endif /* __TIMER_H__ */
-
-/** @} */
+/**
+ * \defgroup timer Timer library
+ *
+ * The timer library provides functions for setting, resetting and
+ * restarting timers, and for checking if a timer has expired. An
+ * application must "manually" check if its timers have expired; this
+ * is not done automatically.
+ *
+ * A timer is declared as a \c struct \c timer and all access to the
+ * timer is made by a pointer to the declared timer.
+ *
+ * \note The timer library uses the \ref clock "Clock library" to
+ * measure time. Intervals should be specified in the format used by
+ * the clock library.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Timer library header file.
+ * \author
+ * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: timer.h,v 1.3 2006/06/11 21:46:39 adam Exp $
+ */
+#ifndef __TIMER_H__
+#define __TIMER_H__
+
+#include "clock.h"
+
+/**
+ * A timer.
+ *
+ * This structure is used for declaring a timer. The timer must be set
+ * with timer_set() before it can be used.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+struct timer {
+  clock_time_t start;
+  clock_time_t interval;
+};
+
+void timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval);
+void timer_reset(struct timer *t);
+void timer_restart(struct timer *t);
+int timer_expired(struct timer *t);
+
+#endif /* __TIMER_H__ */
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c
index 9b1d1ce88..5924fabe5 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c
@@ -1,141 +1,141 @@
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
- *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
- *    without specific prior written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
- * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
- * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
- * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
- * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
- * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
- * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
- * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
- * SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the Contiki operating system.
- *
- * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- *
- * $Id: uip-split.c,v 1.2 2008/10/14 13:39:12 julienabeille Exp $
- */
-
-#include "uip-split.h"
-
-
-#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_split_output(void)
-{
-#if UIP_TCP
-  u16_t tcplen, len1, len2;
-
-  /* We only try to split maximum sized TCP segments. */
-  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP  && uip_len == UIP_BUFSIZE) {
-  
-    tcplen = uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN;
-    /* Split the segment in two. If the original packet length was
-       odd, we make the second packet one byte larger. */
-    len1 = len2 = tcplen / 2;
-    if(len1 + len2 < tcplen) {
-      ++len2;
-    }
-
-    /* Create the first packet. This is done by altering the length
-       field of the IP header and updating the checksums. */
-    uip_len = len1 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN;
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
-       length. */
-    BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
-    BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    BUF->len[0] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8;
-    BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    
-    /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */
-    BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
-    BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */
-    BUF->ipchksum = 0;
-    BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    
-    /* Transmit the first packet. */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    tcpip_ipv6_output();
-#else
-	RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, uip_buf, uip_len);
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-   
-    /* Now, create the second packet. To do this, it is not enough to
-       just alter the length field, but we must also update the TCP
-       sequence number and point the uip_appdata to a new place in
-       memory. This place is detemined by the length of the first
-       packet (len1). */
-    uip_len = len2 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN;
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
-       length. */
-    BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
-    BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    BUF->len[0] = (uip_len  - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8;
-    BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    
-    memcpy(uip_appdata, (u8_t *)uip_appdata + len1, len2);
-
-    uip_add32(BUF->seqno, len1);
-    BUF->seqno[0] = uip_acc32[0];
-    BUF->seqno[1] = uip_acc32[1];
-    BUF->seqno[2] = uip_acc32[2];
-    BUF->seqno[3] = uip_acc32[3];
-    
-    /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */
-    BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
-    BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */
-    BUF->ipchksum = 0;
-    BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-    /* Transmit the second packet. */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    tcpip_ipv6_output();
-#else
-	RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, uip_buf, uip_len);
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    return;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_TCP */
-
-  /*    uip_fw_output();*/
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-	tcpip_ipv6_output();
-#else
-	RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, uip_buf, uip_len);
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-}
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the Contiki operating system.
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: uip-split.c,v 1.2 2008/10/14 13:39:12 julienabeille Exp $
+ */
+
+#include "uip-split.h"
+
+
+#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_split_output(void)
+{
+#if UIP_TCP
+  u16_t tcplen, len1, len2;
+
+  /* We only try to split maximum sized TCP segments. */
+  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP  && uip_len == UIP_BUFSIZE) {
+  
+    tcplen = uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN;
+    /* Split the segment in two. If the original packet length was
+       odd, we make the second packet one byte larger. */
+    len1 = len2 = tcplen / 2;
+    if(len1 + len2 < tcplen) {
+      ++len2;
+    }
+
+    /* Create the first packet. This is done by altering the length
+       field of the IP header and updating the checksums. */
+    uip_len = len1 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN;
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+       length. */
+    BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+    BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    BUF->len[0] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8;
+    BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    
+    /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */
+    BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
+    BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */
+    BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+    BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    
+    /* Transmit the first packet. */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    tcpip_ipv6_output();
+#else
+	RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, uip_buf, uip_len);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+   
+    /* Now, create the second packet. To do this, it is not enough to
+       just alter the length field, but we must also update the TCP
+       sequence number and point the uip_appdata to a new place in
+       memory. This place is detemined by the length of the first
+       packet (len1). */
+    uip_len = len2 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN;
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+       length. */
+    BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+    BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    BUF->len[0] = (uip_len  - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8;
+    BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    
+    memcpy(uip_appdata, (u8_t *)uip_appdata + len1, len2);
+
+    uip_add32(BUF->seqno, len1);
+    BUF->seqno[0] = uip_acc32[0];
+    BUF->seqno[1] = uip_acc32[1];
+    BUF->seqno[2] = uip_acc32[2];
+    BUF->seqno[3] = uip_acc32[3];
+    
+    /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */
+    BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
+    BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */
+    BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+    BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    /* Transmit the second packet. */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    tcpip_ipv6_output();
+#else
+	RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, uip_buf, uip_len);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    return;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_TCP */
+
+  /*    uip_fw_output();*/
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+	tcpip_ipv6_output();
+#else
+	RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, uip_buf, uip_len);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+}
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h
index 1df837ef3..c7274c36a 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h
@@ -1,103 +1,103 @@
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
- * All rights reserved. 
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without 
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions 
- * are met: 
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright 
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright 
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the 
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 
- * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors 
- *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software 
- *    without specific prior written permission. 
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND 
- * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE 
- * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE 
- * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL 
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS 
- * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) 
- * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT 
- * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY 
- * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF 
- * SUCH DAMAGE. 
- *
- * This file is part of the Contiki operating system.
- * 
- * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- *
- * $Id: uip-split.h,v 1.1 2006/06/17 22:41:19 adamdunkels Exp $
- */
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipsplit uIP TCP throughput booster hack
- * @{
- *
- * The basic uIP TCP implementation only allows each TCP connection to
- * have a single TCP segment in flight at any given time. Because of
- * the delayed ACK algorithm employed by most TCP receivers, uIP's
- * limit on the amount of in-flight TCP segments seriously reduces the
- * maximum achievable throughput for sending data from uIP.
- *
- * The uip-split module is a hack which tries to remedy this
- * situation. By splitting maximum sized outgoing TCP segments into
- * two, the delayed ACK algorithm is not invoked at TCP
- * receivers. This improves the throughput when sending data from uIP
- * by orders of magnitude.
- *
- * The uip-split module uses the uip-fw module (uIP IP packet
- * forwarding) for sending packets. Therefore, the uip-fw module must
- * be set up with the appropriate network interfaces for this module
- * to work.
- */
-
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Module for splitting outbound TCP segments in two to avoid the
- * delayed ACK throughput degradation. 
- * \author
- * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- *
- */
-
-#ifndef __UIP_SPLIT_H__
-#define __UIP_SPLIT_H__
-
-#include <string.h>
-#include <uip.h>
-
-#include "../../USBHostMode.h"
-
-#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
-
-/**
- * Handle outgoing packets.
- *
- * This function inspects an outgoing packet in the uip_buf buffer and
- * sends it out using the uip_fw_output() function. If the packet is a
- * full-sized TCP segment it will be split into two segments and
- * transmitted separately. This function should be called instead of
- * the actual device driver output function, or the uip_fw_output()
- * function.
- *
- * The headers of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the uip_buf
- * buffer and the payload is assumed to be wherever uip_appdata
- * points. The length of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the
- * uip_len variable.
- *
- */
-void uip_split_output(void);
-void uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16);
-#endif /* __UIP_SPLIT_H__ */
-
-/** @} */
-/** @} */
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved. 
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without 
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions 
+ * are met: 
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright 
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright 
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the 
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors 
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software 
+ *    without specific prior written permission. 
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND 
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE 
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE 
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL 
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS 
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) 
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT 
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY 
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF 
+ * SUCH DAMAGE. 
+ *
+ * This file is part of the Contiki operating system.
+ * 
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: uip-split.h,v 1.1 2006/06/17 22:41:19 adamdunkels Exp $
+ */
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipsplit uIP TCP throughput booster hack
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The basic uIP TCP implementation only allows each TCP connection to
+ * have a single TCP segment in flight at any given time. Because of
+ * the delayed ACK algorithm employed by most TCP receivers, uIP's
+ * limit on the amount of in-flight TCP segments seriously reduces the
+ * maximum achievable throughput for sending data from uIP.
+ *
+ * The uip-split module is a hack which tries to remedy this
+ * situation. By splitting maximum sized outgoing TCP segments into
+ * two, the delayed ACK algorithm is not invoked at TCP
+ * receivers. This improves the throughput when sending data from uIP
+ * by orders of magnitude.
+ *
+ * The uip-split module uses the uip-fw module (uIP IP packet
+ * forwarding) for sending packets. Therefore, the uip-fw module must
+ * be set up with the appropriate network interfaces for this module
+ * to work.
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Module for splitting outbound TCP segments in two to avoid the
+ * delayed ACK throughput degradation. 
+ * \author
+ * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIP_SPLIT_H__
+#define __UIP_SPLIT_H__
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <uip.h>
+
+#include "../../USBHostMode.h"
+
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+
+/**
+ * Handle outgoing packets.
+ *
+ * This function inspects an outgoing packet in the uip_buf buffer and
+ * sends it out using the uip_fw_output() function. If the packet is a
+ * full-sized TCP segment it will be split into two segments and
+ * transmitted separately. This function should be called instead of
+ * the actual device driver output function, or the uip_fw_output()
+ * function.
+ *
+ * The headers of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the uip_buf
+ * buffer and the payload is assumed to be wherever uip_appdata
+ * points. The length of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the
+ * uip_len variable.
+ *
+ */
+void uip_split_output(void);
+void uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16);
+#endif /* __UIP_SPLIT_H__ */
+
+/** @} */
+/** @} */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c
index b2c422825..22a72043f 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c
@@ -1,1938 +1,1938 @@
-#define DEBUG_PRINTF(...) /*printf(__VA_ARGS__)*/
-
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \file
- * The uIP TCP/IP stack code.
- * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
- *    products derived from this software without specific prior
- *    written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
- * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
- * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
- * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
- * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
- * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
- * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
- * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
- * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- *
- * $Id: uip.c,v 1.15 2008/10/15 08:08:32 adamdunkels Exp $
- *
- */
-
-/*
- * uIP is a small implementation of the IP, UDP and TCP protocols (as
- * well as some basic ICMP stuff). The implementation couples the IP,
- * UDP, TCP and the application layers very tightly. To keep the size
- * of the compiled code down, this code frequently uses the goto
- * statement. While it would be possible to break the uip_process()
- * function into many smaller functions, this would increase the code
- * size because of the overhead of parameter passing and the fact that
- * the optimier would not be as efficient.
- *
- * The principle is that we have a small buffer, called the uip_buf,
- * in which the device driver puts an incoming packet. The TCP/IP
- * stack parses the headers in the packet, and calls the
- * application. If the remote host has sent data to the application,
- * this data is present in the uip_buf and the application read the
- * data from there. It is up to the application to put this data into
- * a byte stream if needed. The application will not be fed with data
- * that is out of sequence.
- *
- * If the application whishes to send data to the peer, it should put
- * its data into the uip_buf. The uip_appdata pointer points to the
- * first available byte. The TCP/IP stack will calculate the
- * checksums, and fill in the necessary header fields and finally send
- * the packet back to the peer.
-*/
-
-#include "uip.h"
-#include "uipopt.h"
-#include "uip_arp.h"
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 /* If UIP_CONF_IPV6 is defined, we compile the
-		      uip6.c file instead of this one. Therefore
-		      this #ifndef removes the entire compilation
-		      output of the uip.c file */
-
-
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-#include "net/uip-neighbor.h"
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-#include <string.h>
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Variable definitions. */
-
-
-/* The IP address of this host. If it is defined to be fixed (by
-   setting UIP_FIXEDADDR to 1 in uipopt.h), the address is set
-   here. Otherwise, the address */
-#if UIP_FIXEDADDR > 0
-const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr =
-  { UIP_IPADDR0, UIP_IPADDR1, UIP_IPADDR2, UIP_IPADDR3 };
-const uip_ipaddr_t uip_draddr =
-  { UIP_DRIPADDR0, UIP_DRIPADDR1, UIP_DRIPADDR2, UIP_DRIPADDR3 };
-const uip_ipaddr_t uip_netmask =
-  { UIP_NETMASK0, UIP_NETMASK1, UIP_NETMASK2, UIP_NETMASK3 };
-#else
-uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_draddr, uip_netmask;
-#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
-
-const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr =
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff,
-      0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } };
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } };
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr = { { 0x0, /* rest is 0 */ } };
-
-#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR
-const struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{UIP_ETHADDR0,
-					  UIP_ETHADDR1,
-					  UIP_ETHADDR2,
-					  UIP_ETHADDR3,
-					  UIP_ETHADDR4,
-					  UIP_ETHADDR5}};
-#else
-struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{0,0,0,0,0,0}};
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER
-u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE + 2];   /* The packet buffer that contains
-				    incoming packets. */
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER */
-
-void *uip_appdata;               /* The uip_appdata pointer points to
-				    application data. */
-void *uip_sappdata;              /* The uip_appdata pointer points to
-				    the application data which is to
-				    be sent. */
-#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
-void *uip_urgdata;               /* The uip_urgdata pointer points to
-   				    urgent data (out-of-band data), if
-   				    present. */
-u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen;
-#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
-
-u16_t uip_len, uip_slen;
-                             /* The uip_len is either 8 or 16 bits,
-				depending on the maximum packet
-				size. */
-
-u8_t uip_flags;     /* The uip_flags variable is used for
-				communication between the TCP/IP stack
-				and the application program. */
-struct uip_conn *uip_conn;   /* uip_conn always points to the current
-				connection. */
-
-struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS];
-                             /* The uip_conns array holds all TCP
-				connections. */
-u16_t uip_listenports[UIP_LISTENPORTS];
-                             /* The uip_listenports list all currently
-				listning ports. */
-#if UIP_UDP
-struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn;
-struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-static u16_t ipid;           /* Ths ipid variable is an increasing
-				number that is used for the IP ID
-				field. */
-
-void uip_setipid(u16_t id) { ipid = id; }
-
-static u8_t iss[4];          /* The iss variable is used for the TCP
-				initial sequence number. */
-
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
-static u16_t lastport;       /* Keeps track of the last port used for
-				a new connection. */
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-
-/* Temporary variables. */
-u8_t uip_acc32[4];
-static u8_t c, opt;
-static u16_t tmp16;
-
-/* Structures and definitions. */
-#define TCP_FIN 0x01
-#define TCP_SYN 0x02
-#define TCP_RST 0x04
-#define TCP_PSH 0x08
-#define TCP_ACK 0x10
-#define TCP_URG 0x20
-#define TCP_CTL 0x3f
-
-#define TCP_OPT_END     0   /* End of TCP options list */
-#define TCP_OPT_NOOP    1   /* "No-operation" TCP option */
-#define TCP_OPT_MSS     2   /* Maximum segment size TCP option */
-
-#define TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN 4   /* Length of TCP MSS option. */
-
-#define ICMP_ECHO_REPLY 0
-#define ICMP_ECHO       8
-
-#define ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE        3
-#define ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE        3
-
-#define ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY             129
-#define ICMP6_ECHO                   128
-#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION  135
-#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT 136
-
-#define ICMP6_FLAG_S (1 << 6)
-
-#define ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS 1
-#define ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS 2
-
-
-/* Macros. */
-#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
-#define FBUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_reassbuf[0])
-#define ICMPBUF ((struct uip_icmpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
-#define UDPBUF ((struct uip_udpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
-
-
-#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1
-struct uip_stats uip_stat;
-#define UIP_STAT(s) s
-#else
-#define UIP_STAT(s)
-#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */
-
-#if UIP_LOGGING == 1
-#include <stdio.h>
-void uip_log(char *msg);
-#define UIP_LOG(m) uip_log(m)
-#else
-#define UIP_LOG(m)
-#endif /* UIP_LOGGING == 1 */
-
-#if ! UIP_ARCH_ADD32
-void
-uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16)
-{
-  uip_acc32[3] = op32[3] + (op16 & 0xff);
-  uip_acc32[2] = op32[2] + (op16 >> 8);
-  uip_acc32[1] = op32[1];
-  uip_acc32[0] = op32[0];
-  
-  if(uip_acc32[2] < (op16 >> 8)) {
-    ++uip_acc32[1];
-    if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) {
-      ++uip_acc32[0];
-    }
-  }
-  
-  
-  if(uip_acc32[3] < (op16 & 0xff)) {
-    ++uip_acc32[2];
-    if(uip_acc32[2] == 0) {
-      ++uip_acc32[1];
-      if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) {
-	++uip_acc32[0];
-      }
-    }
-  }
-}
-
-#endif /* UIP_ARCH_ADD32 */
-
-#if ! UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-static u16_t
-chksum(u16_t sum, const u8_t *data, u16_t len)
-{
-  u16_t t;
-  const u8_t *dataptr;
-  const u8_t *last_byte;
-
-  dataptr = data;
-  last_byte = data + len - 1;
-  
-  while(dataptr < last_byte) {	/* At least two more bytes */
-    t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + dataptr[1];
-    sum += t;
-    if(sum < t) {
-      sum++;		/* carry */
-    }
-    dataptr += 2;
-  }
-  
-  if(dataptr == last_byte) {
-    t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + 0;
-    sum += t;
-    if(sum < t) {
-      sum++;		/* carry */
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Return sum in host byte order. */
-  return sum;
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-u16_t
-uip_chksum(u16_t *data, u16_t len)
-{
-  return htons(chksum(0, (u8_t *)data, len));
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#ifndef UIP_ARCH_IPCHKSUM
-u16_t
-uip_ipchksum(void)
-{
-  u16_t sum;
-
-  sum = chksum(0, &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_IPH_LEN);
-  DEBUG_PRINTF("uip_ipchksum: sum 0x%04x\n", sum);
-  return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum);
-}
-#endif
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-static u16_t
-upper_layer_chksum(u8_t proto)
-{
-  u16_t upper_layer_len;
-  u16_t sum;
-  
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]);
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]) - UIP_IPH_LEN;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  
-  /* First sum pseudoheader. */
-  
-  /* IP protocol and length fields. This addition cannot carry. */
-  sum = upper_layer_len + proto;
-  /* Sum IP source and destination addresses. */
-  sum = chksum(sum, (u8_t *)&BUF->srcipaddr, 2 * sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-
-  /* Sum TCP header and data. */
-  sum = chksum(sum, &uip_buf[UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN],
-	       upper_layer_len);
-    
-  return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum);
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-u16_t
-uip_icmp6chksum(void)
-{
-  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_ICMP6);
-  
-}
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-u16_t
-uip_tcpchksum(void)
-{
-  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_TCP);
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
-u16_t
-uip_udpchksum(void)
-{
-  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_UDP);
-}
-#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
-#endif /* UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_init(void)
-{
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
-    uip_listenports[c] = 0;
-  }
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-  }
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
-  lastport = 1024;
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-
-#if UIP_UDP
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    uip_udp_conns[c].lport = 0;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-  
-
-  /* IPv4 initialization. */
-#if UIP_FIXEDADDR == 0
-  /*  uip_hostaddr[0] = uip_hostaddr[1] = 0;*/
-#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
-
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
-struct uip_conn *
-uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport)
-{
-  register struct uip_conn *conn, *cconn;
-  
-  /* Find an unused local port. */
- again:
-  ++lastport;
-
-  if(lastport >= 32000) {
-    lastport = 4096;
-  }
-
-  /* Check if this port is already in use, and if so try to find
-     another one. */
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    conn = &uip_conns[c];
-    if(conn->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED &&
-       conn->lport == htons(lastport)) {
-      goto again;
-    }
-  }
-
-  conn = 0;
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    cconn = &uip_conns[c];
-    if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) {
-      conn = cconn;
-      break;
-    }
-    if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) {
-      if(conn == 0 ||
-	 cconn->timer > conn->timer) {
-	conn = cconn;
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  if(conn == 0) {
-    return 0;
-  }
-  
-  conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_SENT;
-
-  conn->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0];
-  conn->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1];
-  conn->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2];
-  conn->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3];
-
-  conn->initialmss = conn->mss = UIP_TCP_MSS;
-  
-  conn->len = 1;   /* TCP length of the SYN is one. */
-  conn->nrtx = 0;
-  conn->timer = 1; /* Send the SYN next time around. */
-  conn->rto = UIP_RTO;
-  conn->sa = 0;
-  conn->sv = 16;   /* Initial value of the RTT variance. */
-  conn->lport = htons(lastport);
-  conn->rport = rport;
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr);
-  
-  return conn;
-}
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if UIP_UDP
-struct uip_udp_conn *
-uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport)
-{
-  register struct uip_udp_conn *conn;
-  
-  /* Find an unused local port. */
- again:
-  ++lastport;
-
-  if(lastport >= 32000) {
-    lastport = 4096;
-  }
-  
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == htons(lastport)) {
-      goto again;
-    }
-  }
-
-
-  conn = 0;
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == 0) {
-      conn = &uip_udp_conns[c];
-      break;
-    }
-  }
-
-  if(conn == 0) {
-    return 0;
-  }
-  
-  conn->lport = HTONS(lastport);
-  conn->rport = rport;
-  if(ripaddr == NULL) {
-    memset(&conn->ripaddr, 0, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-  } else {
-    uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr);
-  }
-  conn->ttl = UIP_TTL;
-  
-  return conn;
-}
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_unlisten(u16_t port)
-{
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
-    if(uip_listenports[c] == port) {
-      uip_listenports[c] = 0;
-      return;
-    }
-  }
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_listen(u16_t port)
-{
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
-    if(uip_listenports[c] == 0) {
-      uip_listenports[c] = port;
-      return;
-    }
-  }
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* XXX: IP fragment reassembly: not well-tested. */
-
-#if UIP_REASSEMBLY && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-#define UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN)
-static u8_t uip_reassbuf[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE];
-static u8_t uip_reassbitmap[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE / (8 * 8)];
-static const u8_t bitmap_bits[8] = {0xff, 0x7f, 0x3f, 0x1f,
-				    0x0f, 0x07, 0x03, 0x01};
-static u16_t uip_reasslen;
-static u8_t uip_reassflags;
-#define UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG 0x01
-static u8_t uip_reasstmr;
-
-#define IP_MF   0x20
-
-static u8_t
-uip_reass(void)
-{
-  u16_t offset, len;
-  u16_t i;
-
-  /* If ip_reasstmr is zero, no packet is present in the buffer, so we
-     write the IP header of the fragment into the reassembly
-     buffer. The timer is updated with the maximum age. */
-  if(uip_reasstmr == 0) {
-    memcpy(uip_reassbuf, &BUF->vhl, UIP_IPH_LEN);
-    uip_reasstmr = UIP_REASS_MAXAGE;
-    uip_reassflags = 0;
-    /* Clear the bitmap. */
-    memset(uip_reassbitmap, 0, sizeof(uip_reassbitmap));
-  }
-
-  /* Check if the incoming fragment matches the one currently present
-     in the reasembly buffer. If so, we proceed with copying the
-     fragment into the buffer. */
-  if(BUF->srcipaddr[0] == FBUF->srcipaddr[0] &&
-     BUF->srcipaddr[1] == FBUF->srcipaddr[1] &&
-     BUF->destipaddr[0] == FBUF->destipaddr[0] &&
-     BUF->destipaddr[1] == FBUF->destipaddr[1] &&
-     BUF->ipid[0] == FBUF->ipid[0] &&
-     BUF->ipid[1] == FBUF->ipid[1]) {
-
-    len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] - (BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4;
-    offset = (((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) << 8) + BUF->ipoffset[1]) * 8;
-
-    /* If the offset or the offset + fragment length overflows the
-       reassembly buffer, we discard the entire packet. */
-    if(offset > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE ||
-       offset + len > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE) {
-      uip_reasstmr = 0;
-      goto nullreturn;
-    }
-
-    /* Copy the fragment into the reassembly buffer, at the right
-       offset. */
-    memcpy(&uip_reassbuf[UIP_IPH_LEN + offset],
-	   (char *)BUF + (int)((BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4),
-	   len);
-      
-    /* Update the bitmap. */
-    if(offset / (8 * 8) == (offset + len) / (8 * 8)) {
-      /* If the two endpoints are in the same byte, we only update
-	 that byte. */
-	     
-      uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |=
-	     bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7] &
-	     ~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7];
-    } else {
-      /* If the two endpoints are in different bytes, we update the
-	 bytes in the endpoints and fill the stuff inbetween with
-	 0xff. */
-      uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |=
-	bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7];
-      for(i = 1 + offset / (8 * 8); i < (offset + len) / (8 * 8); ++i) {
-	uip_reassbitmap[i] = 0xff;
-      }
-      uip_reassbitmap[(offset + len) / (8 * 8)] |=
-	~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7];
-    }
-    
-    /* If this fragment has the More Fragments flag set to zero, we
-       know that this is the last fragment, so we can calculate the
-       size of the entire packet. We also set the
-       IP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG flag to indicate that we have received
-       the final fragment. */
-
-    if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & IP_MF) == 0) {
-      uip_reassflags |= UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG;
-      uip_reasslen = offset + len;
-    }
-    
-    /* Finally, we check if we have a full packet in the buffer. We do
-       this by checking if we have the last fragment and if all bits
-       in the bitmap are set. */
-    if(uip_reassflags & UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG) {
-      /* Check all bytes up to and including all but the last byte in
-	 the bitmap. */
-      for(i = 0; i < uip_reasslen / (8 * 8) - 1; ++i) {
-	if(uip_reassbitmap[i] != 0xff) {
-	  goto nullreturn;
-	}
-      }
-      /* Check the last byte in the bitmap. It should contain just the
-	 right amount of bits. */
-      if(uip_reassbitmap[uip_reasslen / (8 * 8)] !=
-	 (u8_t)~bitmap_bits[uip_reasslen / 8 & 7]) {
-	goto nullreturn;
-      }
-
-      /* If we have come this far, we have a full packet in the
-	 buffer, so we allocate a pbuf and copy the packet into it. We
-	 also reset the timer. */
-      uip_reasstmr = 0;
-      memcpy(BUF, FBUF, uip_reasslen);
-
-      /* Pretend to be a "normal" (i.e., not fragmented) IP packet
-	 from now on. */
-      BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0;
-      BUF->len[0] = uip_reasslen >> 8;
-      BUF->len[1] = uip_reasslen & 0xff;
-      BUF->ipchksum = 0;
-      BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
-
-      return uip_reasslen;
-    }
-  }
-
- nullreturn:
-  return 0;
-}
-#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-static void
-uip_add_rcv_nxt(u16_t n)
-{
-  uip_add32(uip_conn->rcv_nxt, n);
-  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0];
-  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1];
-  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2];
-  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3];
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_process(u8_t flag)
-{
-  register struct uip_conn *uip_connr = uip_conn;
-
-#if UIP_UDP
-  if(flag == UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN) {
-    goto udp_send;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-  
-  uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN];
-
-  /* Check if we were invoked because of a poll request for a
-     particular connection. */
-  if(flag == UIP_POLL_REQUEST) {
-    if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED &&
-       !uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
-	uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
-	uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
-	UIP_APPCALL();
-	goto appsend;
-    }
-    goto drop;
-    
-    /* Check if we were invoked because of the perodic timer fireing. */
-  } else if(flag == UIP_TIMER) {
-#if UIP_REASSEMBLY
-    if(uip_reasstmr != 0) {
-      --uip_reasstmr;
-    }
-#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
-    /* Increase the initial sequence number. */
-    if(++iss[3] == 0) {
-      if(++iss[2] == 0) {
-	if(++iss[1] == 0) {
-	  ++iss[0];
-	}
-      }
-    }
-
-    /* Reset the length variables. */
-    uip_len = 0;
-    uip_slen = 0;
-
-    /* Check if the connection is in a state in which we simply wait
-       for the connection to time out. If so, we increase the
-       connection's timer and remove the connection if it times
-       out. */
-    if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT ||
-       uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_FIN_WAIT_2) {
-      ++(uip_connr->timer);
-      if(uip_connr->timer == UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT) {
-	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-      }
-    } else if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED) {
-      /* If the connection has outstanding data, we increase the
-	 connection's timer and see if it has reached the RTO value
-	 in which case we retransmit. */
-      if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
-	if(uip_connr->timer-- == 0) {
-	  if(uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXRTX ||
-	     ((uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_SENT ||
-	       uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_RCVD) &&
-	      uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXSYNRTX)) {
-	    uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-
-	    /* We call UIP_APPCALL() with uip_flags set to
-	       UIP_TIMEDOUT to inform the application that the
-	       connection has timed out. */
-	    uip_flags = UIP_TIMEDOUT;
-	    UIP_APPCALL();
-
-	    /* We also send a reset packet to the remote host. */
-	    BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
-	    goto tcp_send_nodata;
-	  }
-
-	  /* Exponential backoff. */
-	  uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO << (uip_connr->nrtx > 4?
-					 4:
-					 uip_connr->nrtx);
-	  ++(uip_connr->nrtx);
-	  
-	  /* Ok, so we need to retransmit. We do this differently
-	     depending on which state we are in. In ESTABLISHED, we
-	     call upon the application so that it may prepare the
-	     data for the retransmit. In SYN_RCVD, we resend the
-	     SYNACK that we sent earlier and in LAST_ACK we have to
-	     retransmit our FINACK. */
-	  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rexmit);
-	  switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) {
-	  case UIP_SYN_RCVD:
-	    /* In the SYN_RCVD state, we should retransmit our
-               SYNACK. */
-	    goto tcp_send_synack;
-	    
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
-	  case UIP_SYN_SENT:
-	    /* In the SYN_SENT state, we retransmit out SYN. */
-	    BUF->flags = 0;
-	    goto tcp_send_syn;
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-	    
-	  case UIP_ESTABLISHED:
-	    /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application
-               to do the actual retransmit after which we jump into
-               the code for sending out the packet (the apprexmit
-               label). */
-	    uip_flags = UIP_REXMIT;
-	    UIP_APPCALL();
-	    goto apprexmit;
-	    
-	  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1:
-	  case UIP_CLOSING:
-	  case UIP_LAST_ACK:
-	    /* In all these states we should retransmit a FINACK. */
-	    goto tcp_send_finack;
-	    
-	  }
-	}
-      } else if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED) {
-	/* If there was no need for a retransmission, we poll the
-           application for new data. */
-	uip_len = uip_slen = 0;		   
-	uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
-	UIP_APPCALL();
-	goto appsend;
-      }
-    }
-    goto drop;
-  }
-#if UIP_UDP
-  if(flag == UIP_UDP_TIMER) {
-    if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0) {
-      uip_conn = NULL;
-      uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
-      uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
-      uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
-      UIP_UDP_APPCALL();
-      goto udp_send;
-    } else {
-      goto drop;
-    }
-  }
-#endif
-
-  /* This is where the input processing starts. */
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.recv);
-
-  /* Start of IP input header processing code. */
-  
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* Check validity of the IP header. */
-  if((BUF->vtc & 0xf0) != 0x60)  { /* IP version and header length. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ipv6: invalid version.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  /* Check validity of the IP header. */
-  if(BUF->vhl != 0x45)  { /* IP version and header length. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ip: invalid version or header length.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  
-  /* Check the size of the packet. If the size reported to us in
-     uip_len is smaller the size reported in the IP header, we assume
-     that the packet has been corrupted in transit. If the size of
-     uip_len is larger than the size reported in the IP packet header,
-     the packet has been padded and we set uip_len to the correct
-     value.. */
-
-  if((BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] <= uip_len) {
-    uip_len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1];
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    uip_len += 40; /* The length reported in the IPv6 header is the
-		      length of the payload that follows the
-		      header. However, uIP uses the uip_len variable
-		      for holding the size of the entire packet,
-		      including the IP header. For IPv4 this is not a
-		      problem as the length field in the IPv4 header
-		      contains the length of the entire packet. But
-		      for IPv6 we need to add the size of the IPv6
-		      header (40 bytes). */
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  } else {
-    UIP_LOG("ip: packet shorter than reported in IP header.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* Check the fragment flag. */
-  if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) != 0 ||
-     BUF->ipoffset[1] != 0) {
-#if UIP_REASSEMBLY
-    uip_len = uip_reass();
-    if(uip_len == 0) {
-      goto drop;
-    }
-#else /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.fragerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ip: fragment dropped.");
-    goto drop;
-#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
-    /* If we are configured to use ping IP address configuration and
-       hasn't been assigned an IP address yet, we accept all ICMP
-       packets. */
-#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_ICMP) {
-      UIP_LOG("ip: possible ping config packet received.");
-      goto icmp_input;
-    } else {
-      UIP_LOG("ip: packet dropped since no address assigned.");
-      goto drop;
-    }
-#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
-
-  } else {
-    /* If IP broadcast support is configured, we check for a broadcast
-       UDP packet, which may be destined to us. */
-#if UIP_BROADCAST
-    DEBUG_PRINTF("UDP IP checksum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum());
-    if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP &&
-       uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr)
-       /*&&
-	 uip_ipchksum() == 0xffff*/) {
-      goto udp_input;
-    }
-#endif /* UIP_BROADCAST */
-    
-    /* Check if the packet is destined for our IP address. */
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
-      UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-      goto drop;
-    }
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    /* For IPv6, packet reception is a little trickier as we need to
-       make sure that we listen to certain multicast addresses (all
-       hosts multicast address, and the solicited-node multicast
-       address) as well. However, we will cheat here and accept all
-       multicast packets that are sent to the ff02::/16 addresses. */
-    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr) &&
-       BUF->destipaddr.u16[0] != HTONS(0xff02)) {
-      UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-      goto drop;
-    }
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  }
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  if(uip_ipchksum() != 0xffff) { /* Compute and check the IP header
-				    checksum. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.chkerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ip: bad checksum.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP) { /* Check for TCP packet. If so,
-				       proceed with TCP input
-				       processing. */
-    goto tcp_input;
-  }
-
-#if UIP_UDP
-  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP) {
-    goto udp_input;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* ICMPv4 processing code follows. */
-  if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP) { /* We only allow ICMP packets from
-					here. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF
- icmp_input:
-#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv);
-
-  /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only change
-     the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and adjust the ICMP
-     checksum before we return the packet. */
-  if(ICMPBUF->type != ICMP_ECHO) {
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr);
-    UIP_LOG("icmp: not icmp echo.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-  /* If we are configured to use ping IP address assignment, we use
-     the destination IP address of this ping packet and assign it to
-     ourself. */
-#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF
-  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
-    uip_hostaddr = BUF->destipaddr;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
-
-  ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_ECHO_REPLY;
-
-  if(ICMPBUF->icmpchksum >= HTONS(0xffff - (ICMP_ECHO << 8))) {
-    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8) + 1;
-  } else {
-    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8);
-  }
-
-  /* Swap IP addresses. */
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent);
-  BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
-  goto ip_send_nolen;
-
-  /* End of IPv4 input header processing code. */
-#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  /* This is IPv6 ICMPv6 processing code. */
-  DEBUG_PRINTF("icmp6_input: length %d\n", uip_len);
-
-  if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP6) { /* We only allow ICMPv6 packets from
-					 here. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp6.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv);
-
-  /* If we get a neighbor solicitation for our address we should send
-     a neighbor advertisement message back. */
-  if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION) {
-    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ICMPBUF->icmp6data, &uip_hostaddr)) {
-
-      if(ICMPBUF->options[0] == ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS) {
-	/* Save the sender's address in our neighbor list. */
-	uip_neighbor_add(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &(ICMPBUF->options[2]));
-      }
-      
-      /* We should now send a neighbor advertisement back to where the
-	 neighbor solicication came from. */
-      ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT;
-      ICMPBUF->flags = ICMP6_FLAG_S; /* Solicited flag. */
-      
-      ICMPBUF->reserved1 = ICMPBUF->reserved2 = ICMPBUF->reserved3 = 0;
-      
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->destipaddr, &ICMPBUF->srcipaddr);
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-      ICMPBUF->options[0] = ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS;
-      ICMPBUF->options[1] = 1;  /* Options length, 1 = 8 bytes. */
-      memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->options[2]), &uip_ethaddr, sizeof(uip_ethaddr));
-      ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
-      ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum();
-      
-      goto send;
-      
-    }
-    goto drop;
-  } else if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_ECHO) {
-    /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only
-       change the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and update the
-       ICMP checksum before we return the packet. */
-
-    ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY;
-    
-    uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
-    uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
-    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum();
-    
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent);
-    goto send;
-  } else {
-    DEBUG_PRINTF("Unknown icmp6 message type %d\n", ICMPBUF->type);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr);
-    UIP_LOG("icmp: unknown ICMP message.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-  /* End of IPv6 ICMP processing. */
-  
-#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-#if UIP_UDP
-  /* UDP input processing. */
- udp_input:
-  /* UDP processing is really just a hack. We don't do anything to the
-     UDP/IP headers, but let the UDP application do all the hard
-     work. If the application sets uip_slen, it has a packet to
-     send. */
-#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
-  uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
-  uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
-  if(UDPBUF->udpchksum != 0 && uip_udpchksum() != 0xffff) {
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.chkerr);
-    UIP_LOG("udp: bad checksum.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-#else /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
-  uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
-#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
-
-  /* Demultiplex this UDP packet between the UDP "connections". */
-  for(uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[0];
-      uip_udp_conn < &uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
-      ++uip_udp_conn) {
-    /* If the local UDP port is non-zero, the connection is considered
-       to be used. If so, the local port number is checked against the
-       destination port number in the received packet. If the two port
-       numbers match, the remote port number is checked if the
-       connection is bound to a remote port. Finally, if the
-       connection is bound to a remote IP address, the source IP
-       address of the packet is checked. */
-    if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0 &&
-       UDPBUF->destport == uip_udp_conn->lport &&
-       (uip_udp_conn->rport == 0 ||
-        UDPBUF->srcport == uip_udp_conn->rport) &&
-       (uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) ||
-	uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr) ||
-	uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr))) {
-      goto udp_found;
-    }
-  }
-  UIP_LOG("udp: no matching connection found");
-#if UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* Copy fields from packet header into payload of this ICMP packet. */
-  memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->payload[0]), ICMPBUF, UIP_IPH_LEN + 8);
-
-  /* Set the ICMP type and code. */
-  ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE;
-  ICMPBUF->icode = ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE;
-
-  /* Calculate the ICMP checksum. */
-  ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
-  ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_chksum((u16_t *)&(ICMPBUF->type), 36);
-
-  /* Set the IP destination address to be the source address of the
-     original packet. */
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
-
-  /* Set our IP address as the source address. */
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-
-  /* The size of the ICMP destination unreachable packet is 36 + the
-     size of the IP header (20) = 56. */
-  uip_len = 36 + UIP_IPH_LEN;
-  ICMPBUF->len[0] = 0;
-  ICMPBUF->len[1] = (u8_t)uip_len;
-  ICMPBUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
-  ICMPBUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_ICMP;
-
-  goto ip_send_nolen;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */
-  goto drop;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */
-  
- udp_found:
-  uip_conn = NULL;
-  uip_flags = UIP_NEWDATA;
-  uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
-  uip_slen = 0;
-  UIP_UDP_APPCALL();
-
- udp_send:
-  if(uip_slen == 0) {
-    goto drop;
-  }
-  uip_len = uip_slen + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
-
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
-     length. */
-  BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
-  BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8);
-  BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff);
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  BUF->ttl = uip_udp_conn->ttl;
-  BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_UDP;
-
-  UDPBUF->udplen = HTONS(uip_slen + UIP_UDPH_LEN);
-  UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0;
-
-  BUF->srcport  = uip_udp_conn->lport;
-  BUF->destport = uip_udp_conn->rport;
-
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr);
-   
-  uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPTCPH_LEN];
-
-#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
-  /* Calculate UDP checksum. */
-  UDPBUF->udpchksum = ~(uip_udpchksum());
-  if(UDPBUF->udpchksum == 0) {
-    UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0xffff;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
-  
-  goto ip_send_nolen;
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-  
-  /* TCP input processing. */
- tcp_input:
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.recv);
-
-  /* Start of TCP input header processing code. */
-  
-  if(uip_tcpchksum() != 0xffff) {   /* Compute and check the TCP
-				       checksum. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.chkerr);
-    UIP_LOG("tcp: bad checksum.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-  
-  /* Demultiplex this segment. */
-  /* First check any active connections. */
-  for(uip_connr = &uip_conns[0]; uip_connr <= &uip_conns[UIP_CONNS - 1];
-      ++uip_connr) {
-    if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED &&
-       BUF->destport == uip_connr->lport &&
-       BUF->srcport == uip_connr->rport &&
-       uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr)) {
-      goto found;
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* If we didn't find and active connection that expected the packet,
-     either this packet is an old duplicate, or this is a SYN packet
-     destined for a connection in LISTEN. If the SYN flag isn't set,
-     it is an old packet and we send a RST. */
-  if((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) != TCP_SYN) {
-    goto reset;
-  }
-  
-  tmp16 = BUF->destport;
-  /* Next, check listening connections. */
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
-    if(tmp16 == uip_listenports[c]) {
-      goto found_listen;
-    }
-  }
-  
-  /* No matching connection found, so we send a RST packet. */
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.synrst);
-
- reset:
-  /* We do not send resets in response to resets. */
-  if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) {
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rst);
-  
-  BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
-  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN;
-  BUF->tcpoffset = 5 << 4;
-
-  /* Flip the seqno and ackno fields in the TCP header. */
-  c = BUF->seqno[3];
-  BUF->seqno[3] = BUF->ackno[3];
-  BUF->ackno[3] = c;
-  
-  c = BUF->seqno[2];
-  BUF->seqno[2] = BUF->ackno[2];
-  BUF->ackno[2] = c;
-  
-  c = BUF->seqno[1];
-  BUF->seqno[1] = BUF->ackno[1];
-  BUF->ackno[1] = c;
-  
-  c = BUF->seqno[0];
-  BUF->seqno[0] = BUF->ackno[0];
-  BUF->ackno[0] = c;
-
-  /* We also have to increase the sequence number we are
-     acknowledging. If the least significant byte overflowed, we need
-     to propagate the carry to the other bytes as well. */
-  if(++BUF->ackno[3] == 0) {
-    if(++BUF->ackno[2] == 0) {
-      if(++BUF->ackno[1] == 0) {
-	++BUF->ackno[0];
-      }
-    }
-  }
- 
-  /* Swap port numbers. */
-  tmp16 = BUF->srcport;
-  BUF->srcport = BUF->destport;
-  BUF->destport = tmp16;
-  
-  /* Swap IP addresses. */
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-  
-  /* And send out the RST packet! */
-  goto tcp_send_noconn;
-
-  /* This label will be jumped to if we matched the incoming packet
-     with a connection in LISTEN. In that case, we should create a new
-     connection and send a SYNACK in return. */
- found_listen:
-  /* First we check if there are any connections avaliable. Unused
-     connections are kept in the same table as used connections, but
-     unused ones have the tcpstate set to CLOSED. Also, connections in
-     TIME_WAIT are kept track of and we'll use the oldest one if no
-     CLOSED connections are found. Thanks to Eddie C. Dost for a very
-     nice algorithm for the TIME_WAIT search. */
-  uip_connr = 0;
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) {
-      uip_connr = &uip_conns[c];
-      break;
-    }
-    if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) {
-      if(uip_connr == 0 ||
-	 uip_conns[c].timer > uip_connr->timer) {
-	uip_connr = &uip_conns[c];
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  if(uip_connr == 0) {
-    /* All connections are used already, we drop packet and hope that
-       the remote end will retransmit the packet at a time when we
-       have more spare connections. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.syndrop);
-    UIP_LOG("tcp: found no unused connections.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-  uip_conn = uip_connr;
-  
-  /* Fill in the necessary fields for the new connection. */
-  uip_connr->rto = uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO;
-  uip_connr->sa = 0;
-  uip_connr->sv = 4;
-  uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
-  uip_connr->lport = BUF->destport;
-  uip_connr->rport = BUF->srcport;
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_connr->ripaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
-  uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_RCVD;
-
-  uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0];
-  uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1];
-  uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2];
-  uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3];
-  uip_connr->len = 1;
-
-  /* rcv_nxt should be the seqno from the incoming packet + 1. */
-  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3];
-  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2];
-  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1];
-  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0];
-  uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
-
-  /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */
-  if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) {
-    for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) {
-      opt = uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c];
-      if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) {
-	/* End of options. */
-	break;
-      } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) {
-	++c;
-	/* NOP option. */
-      } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS &&
-		uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) {
-	/* An MSS option with the right option length. */
-	tmp16 = ((u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) |
-	  (u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c];
-	uip_connr->initialmss = uip_connr->mss =
-	  tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16;
-	
-	/* And we are done processing options. */
-	break;
-      } else {
-	/* All other options have a length field, so that we easily
-	   can skip past them. */
-	if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) {
-	  /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed
-	     and we don't process them further. */
-	  break;
-	}
-	c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c];
-      }
-    }
-  }
-  
-  /* Our response will be a SYNACK. */
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
- tcp_send_synack:
-  BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
-  
- tcp_send_syn:
-  BUF->flags |= TCP_SYN;
-#else /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
- tcp_send_synack:
-  BUF->flags = TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK;
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-  
-  /* We send out the TCP Maximum Segment Size option with our
-     SYNACK. */
-  BUF->optdata[0] = TCP_OPT_MSS;
-  BUF->optdata[1] = TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN;
-  BUF->optdata[2] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) / 256;
-  BUF->optdata[3] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) & 255;
-  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN;
-  BUF->tcpoffset = ((UIP_TCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) / 4) << 4;
-  goto tcp_send;
-
-  /* This label will be jumped to if we found an active connection. */
- found:
-  uip_conn = uip_connr;
-  uip_flags = 0;
-  /* We do a very naive form of TCP reset processing; we just accept
-     any RST and kill our connection. We should in fact check if the
-     sequence number of this reset is wihtin our advertised window
-     before we accept the reset. */
-  if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) {
-    uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-    UIP_LOG("tcp: got reset, aborting connection.");
-    uip_flags = UIP_ABORT;
-    UIP_APPCALL();
-    goto drop;
-  }
-  /* Calculate the length of the data, if the application has sent
-     any data to us. */
-  c = (BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) << 2;
-  /* uip_len will contain the length of the actual TCP data. This is
-     calculated by subtracing the length of the TCP header (in
-     c) and the length of the IP header (20 bytes). */
-  uip_len = uip_len - c - UIP_IPH_LEN;
-
-  /* First, check if the sequence number of the incoming packet is
-     what we're expecting next. If not, we send out an ACK with the
-     correct numbers in. */
-  if(!(((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_SYN_SENT) &&
-       ((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)))) {
-    if((uip_len > 0 || ((BUF->flags & (TCP_SYN | TCP_FIN)) != 0)) &&
-       (BUF->seqno[0] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] ||
-	BUF->seqno[1] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] ||
-	BUF->seqno[2] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] ||
-	BUF->seqno[3] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3])) {
-      goto tcp_send_ack;
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Next, check if the incoming segment acknowledges any outstanding
-     data. If so, we update the sequence number, reset the length of
-     the outstanding data, calculate RTT estimations, and reset the
-     retransmission timer. */
-  if((BUF->flags & TCP_ACK) && uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
-    uip_add32(uip_connr->snd_nxt, uip_connr->len);
-
-    if(BUF->ackno[0] == uip_acc32[0] &&
-       BUF->ackno[1] == uip_acc32[1] &&
-       BUF->ackno[2] == uip_acc32[2] &&
-       BUF->ackno[3] == uip_acc32[3]) {
-      /* Update sequence number. */
-      uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0];
-      uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1];
-      uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2];
-      uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3];
-	
-      /* Do RTT estimation, unless we have done retransmissions. */
-      if(uip_connr->nrtx == 0) {
-	signed char m;
-	m = uip_connr->rto - uip_connr->timer;
-	/* This is taken directly from VJs original code in his paper */
-	m = m - (uip_connr->sa >> 3);
-	uip_connr->sa += m;
-	if(m < 0) {
-	  m = -m;
-	}
-	m = m - (uip_connr->sv >> 2);
-	uip_connr->sv += m;
-	uip_connr->rto = (uip_connr->sa >> 3) + uip_connr->sv;
-
-      }
-      /* Set the acknowledged flag. */
-      uip_flags = UIP_ACKDATA;
-      /* Reset the retransmission timer. */
-      uip_connr->timer = uip_connr->rto;
-
-      /* Reset length of outstanding data. */
-      uip_connr->len = 0;
-    }
-    
-  }
-
-  /* Do different things depending on in what state the connection is. */
-  switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) {
-    /* CLOSED and LISTEN are not handled here. CLOSE_WAIT is not
-	implemented, since we force the application to close when the
-	peer sends a FIN (hence the application goes directly from
-	ESTABLISHED to LAST_ACK). */
-  case UIP_SYN_RCVD:
-    /* In SYN_RCVD we have sent out a SYNACK in response to a SYN, and
-       we are waiting for an ACK that acknowledges the data we sent
-       out the last time. Therefore, we want to have the UIP_ACKDATA
-       flag set. If so, we enter the ESTABLISHED state. */
-    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED;
-      uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED;
-      uip_connr->len = 0;
-      if(uip_len > 0) {
-        uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
-        uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
-      }
-      uip_slen = 0;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-      goto appsend;
-    }
-    goto drop;
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
-  case UIP_SYN_SENT:
-    /* In SYN_SENT, we wait for a SYNACK that is sent in response to
-       our SYN. The rcv_nxt is set to sequence number in the SYNACK
-       plus one, and we send an ACK. We move into the ESTABLISHED
-       state. */
-    if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) &&
-       (BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)) {
-
-      /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */
-      if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) {
-	for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) {
-	  opt = uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c];
-	  if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) {
-	    /* End of options. */
-	    break;
-	  } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) {
-	    ++c;
-	    /* NOP option. */
-	  } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS &&
-		    uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) {
-	    /* An MSS option with the right option length. */
-	    tmp16 = (uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) |
-	      uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c];
-	    uip_connr->initialmss =
-	      uip_connr->mss = tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16;
-
-	    /* And we are done processing options. */
-	    break;
-	  } else {
-	    /* All other options have a length field, so that we easily
-	       can skip past them. */
-	    if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) {
-	      /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed
-		 and we don't process them further. */
-	      break;
-	    }
-	    c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c];
-	  }
-	}
-      }
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED;
-      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0];
-      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1];
-      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2];
-      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3];
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
-      uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED | UIP_NEWDATA;
-      uip_connr->len = 0;
-      uip_len = 0;
-      uip_slen = 0;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-      goto appsend;
-    }
-    /* Inform the application that the connection failed */
-    uip_flags = UIP_ABORT;
-    UIP_APPCALL();
-    /* The connection is closed after we send the RST */
-    uip_conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-    goto reset;
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-    
-  case UIP_ESTABLISHED:
-    /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application to feed
-    data into the uip_buf. If the UIP_ACKDATA flag is set, the
-    application should put new data into the buffer, otherwise we are
-    retransmitting an old segment, and the application should put that
-    data into the buffer.
-
-    If the incoming packet is a FIN, we should close the connection on
-    this side as well, and we send out a FIN and enter the LAST_ACK
-    state. We require that there is no outstanding data; otherwise the
-    sequence numbers will be screwed up. */
-
-    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) {
-      if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
-	goto drop;
-      }
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1 + uip_len);
-      uip_flags |= UIP_CLOSE;
-      if(uip_len > 0) {
-	uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
-      }
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-      uip_connr->len = 1;
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_LAST_ACK;
-      uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
-    tcp_send_finack:
-      BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK;
-      goto tcp_send_nodata;
-    }
-
-    /* Check the URG flag. If this is set, the segment carries urgent
-       data that we must pass to the application. */
-    if((BUF->flags & TCP_URG) != 0) {
-#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
-      uip_urglen = (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1];
-      if(uip_urglen > uip_len) {
-	/* There is more urgent data in the next segment to come. */
-	uip_urglen = uip_len;
-      }
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_urglen);
-      uip_len -= uip_urglen;
-      uip_urgdata = uip_appdata;
-      uip_appdata += uip_urglen;
-    } else {
-      uip_urglen = 0;
-#else /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
-      uip_appdata = ((char *)uip_appdata) + ((BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1]);
-      uip_len -= (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1];
-#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
-    }
-
-    /* If uip_len > 0 we have TCP data in the packet, and we flag this
-       by setting the UIP_NEWDATA flag and update the sequence number
-       we acknowledge. If the application has stopped the dataflow
-       using uip_stop(), we must not accept any data packets from the
-       remote host. */
-    if(uip_len > 0 && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) {
-      uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
-    }
-
-    /* Check if the available buffer space advertised by the other end
-       is smaller than the initial MSS for this connection. If so, we
-       set the current MSS to the window size to ensure that the
-       application does not send more data than the other end can
-       handle.
-
-       If the remote host advertises a zero window, we set the MSS to
-       the initial MSS so that the application will send an entire MSS
-       of data. This data will not be acknowledged by the receiver,
-       and the application will retransmit it. This is called the
-       "persistent timer" and uses the retransmission mechanim.
-    */
-    tmp16 = ((u16_t)BUF->wnd[0] << 8) + (u16_t)BUF->wnd[1];
-    if(tmp16 > uip_connr->initialmss ||
-       tmp16 == 0) {
-      tmp16 = uip_connr->initialmss;
-    }
-    uip_connr->mss = tmp16;
-
-    /* If this packet constitutes an ACK for outstanding data (flagged
-       by the UIP_ACKDATA flag, we should call the application since it
-       might want to send more data. If the incoming packet had data
-       from the peer (as flagged by the UIP_NEWDATA flag), the
-       application must also be notified.
-
-       When the application is called, the global variable uip_len
-       contains the length of the incoming data. The application can
-       access the incoming data through the global pointer
-       uip_appdata, which usually points UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN
-       bytes into the uip_buf array.
-
-       If the application wishes to send any data, this data should be
-       put into the uip_appdata and the length of the data should be
-       put into uip_len. If the application don't have any data to
-       send, uip_len must be set to 0. */
-    if(uip_flags & (UIP_NEWDATA | UIP_ACKDATA)) {
-      uip_slen = 0;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-
-    appsend:
-      
-      if(uip_flags & UIP_ABORT) {
-	uip_slen = 0;
-	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-	BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
-	goto tcp_send_nodata;
-      }
-
-      if(uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE) {
-	uip_slen = 0;
-	uip_connr->len = 1;
-	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_1;
-	uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
-	BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK;
-	goto tcp_send_nodata;
-      }
-
-      /* If uip_slen > 0, the application has data to be sent. */
-      if(uip_slen > 0) {
-
-	/* If the connection has acknowledged data, the contents of
-	   the ->len variable should be discarded. */
-	if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) != 0) {
-	  uip_connr->len = 0;
-	}
-
-	/* If the ->len variable is non-zero the connection has
-	   already data in transit and cannot send anymore right
-	   now. */
-	if(uip_connr->len == 0) {
-
-	  /* The application cannot send more than what is allowed by
-	     the mss (the minumum of the MSS and the available
-	     window). */
-	  if(uip_slen > uip_connr->mss) {
-	    uip_slen = uip_connr->mss;
-	  }
-
-	  /* Remember how much data we send out now so that we know
-	     when everything has been acknowledged. */
-	  uip_connr->len = uip_slen;
-	} else {
-
-	  /* If the application already had unacknowledged data, we
-	     make sure that the application does not send (i.e.,
-	     retransmit) out more than it previously sent out. */
-	  uip_slen = uip_connr->len;
-	}
-      }
-      uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
-    apprexmit:
-      uip_appdata = uip_sappdata;
-      
-      /* If the application has data to be sent, or if the incoming
-         packet had new data in it, we must send out a packet. */
-      if(uip_slen > 0 && uip_connr->len > 0) {
-	/* Add the length of the IP and TCP headers. */
-	uip_len = uip_connr->len + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN;
-	/* We always set the ACK flag in response packets. */
-	BUF->flags = TCP_ACK | TCP_PSH;
-	/* Send the packet. */
-	goto tcp_send_noopts;
-      }
-      /* If there is no data to send, just send out a pure ACK if
-	 there is newdata. */
-      if(uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA) {
-	uip_len = UIP_TCPIP_HLEN;
-	BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
-	goto tcp_send_noopts;
-      }
-    }
-    goto drop;
-  case UIP_LAST_ACK:
-    /* We can close this connection if the peer has acknowledged our
-       FIN. This is indicated by the UIP_ACKDATA flag. */
-    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-    }
-    break;
-    
-  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1:
-    /* The application has closed the connection, but the remote host
-       hasn't closed its end yet. Thus we do nothing but wait for a
-       FIN from the other side. */
-    if(uip_len > 0) {
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
-    }
-    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) {
-      if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
-	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
-	uip_connr->timer = 0;
-	uip_connr->len = 0;
-      } else {
-	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSING;
-      }
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
-      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-      goto tcp_send_ack;
-    } else if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_2;
-      uip_connr->len = 0;
-      goto drop;
-    }
-    if(uip_len > 0) {
-      goto tcp_send_ack;
-    }
-    goto drop;
-      
-  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_2:
-    if(uip_len > 0) {
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
-    }
-    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) {
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
-      uip_connr->timer = 0;
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
-      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-      goto tcp_send_ack;
-    }
-    if(uip_len > 0) {
-      goto tcp_send_ack;
-    }
-    goto drop;
-
-  case UIP_TIME_WAIT:
-    goto tcp_send_ack;
-    
-  case UIP_CLOSING:
-    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
-      uip_connr->timer = 0;
-    }
-  }
-  goto drop;
-  
-  /* We jump here when we are ready to send the packet, and just want
-     to set the appropriate TCP sequence numbers in the TCP header. */
- tcp_send_ack:
-  BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
-
- tcp_send_nodata:
-  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN;
-
- tcp_send_noopts:
-  BUF->tcpoffset = (UIP_TCPH_LEN / 4) << 4;
-
-  /* We're done with the input processing. We are now ready to send a
-     reply. Our job is to fill in all the fields of the TCP and IP
-     headers before calculating the checksum and finally send the
-     packet. */
- tcp_send:
-  BUF->ackno[0] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0];
-  BUF->ackno[1] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1];
-  BUF->ackno[2] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2];
-  BUF->ackno[3] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3];
-  
-  BUF->seqno[0] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[0];
-  BUF->seqno[1] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[1];
-  BUF->seqno[2] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[2];
-  BUF->seqno[3] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[3];
-
-  BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_TCP;
-  
-  BUF->srcport  = uip_connr->lport;
-  BUF->destport = uip_connr->rport;
-
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr);
-
-  if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED) {
-    /* If the connection has issued uip_stop(), we advertise a zero
-       window so that the remote host will stop sending data. */
-    BUF->wnd[0] = BUF->wnd[1] = 0;
-  } else {
-    BUF->wnd[0] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) >> 8);
-    BUF->wnd[1] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) & 0xff);
-  }
-
- tcp_send_noconn:
-  BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
-     length. */
-  BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
-  BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8);
-  BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff);
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  BUF->urgp[0] = BUF->urgp[1] = 0;
-  
-  /* Calculate TCP checksum. */
-  BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
-  BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
-
- ip_send_nolen:
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  BUF->vtc = 0x60;
-  BUF->tcflow = 0x00;
-  BUF->flow = 0x00;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  BUF->vhl = 0x45;
-  BUF->tos = 0;
-  BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0;
-  ++ipid;
-  BUF->ipid[0] = ipid >> 8;
-  BUF->ipid[1] = ipid & 0xff;
-  /* Calculate IP checksum. */
-  BUF->ipchksum = 0;
-  BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
-  DEBUG_PRINTF("uip ip_send_nolen: chkecum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum());
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */   
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.sent);
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
- send:
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  DEBUG_PRINTF("Sending packet with length %d (%d)\n", uip_len,
-	       (BUF->len[0] << 8) | BUF->len[1]);
-  
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.sent);
-  /* Return and let the caller do the actual transmission. */
-  uip_flags = 0;
-  return;
-
- drop:
-  uip_len = 0;
-  uip_flags = 0;
-  return;
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-u16_t
-htons(u16_t val)
-{
-  return HTONS(val);
-}
-
-u32_t
-htonl(u32_t val)
-{
-  return HTONL(val);
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_send(const void *data, int len)
-{
-  int copylen;
-#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b)? (a): (b))
-  copylen = MIN(len, UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN -
-		(int)((char *)uip_sappdata - (char *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN]));
-  if(copylen > 0) {
-    uip_slen = copylen;
-    if(data != uip_sappdata) {
-      memcpy(uip_sappdata, (data), uip_slen);
-    }
-  }
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/** @} */
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+#define DEBUG_PRINTF(...) /*printf(__VA_ARGS__)*/
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * The uIP TCP/IP stack code.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip.c,v 1.15 2008/10/15 08:08:32 adamdunkels Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+/*
+ * uIP is a small implementation of the IP, UDP and TCP protocols (as
+ * well as some basic ICMP stuff). The implementation couples the IP,
+ * UDP, TCP and the application layers very tightly. To keep the size
+ * of the compiled code down, this code frequently uses the goto
+ * statement. While it would be possible to break the uip_process()
+ * function into many smaller functions, this would increase the code
+ * size because of the overhead of parameter passing and the fact that
+ * the optimier would not be as efficient.
+ *
+ * The principle is that we have a small buffer, called the uip_buf,
+ * in which the device driver puts an incoming packet. The TCP/IP
+ * stack parses the headers in the packet, and calls the
+ * application. If the remote host has sent data to the application,
+ * this data is present in the uip_buf and the application read the
+ * data from there. It is up to the application to put this data into
+ * a byte stream if needed. The application will not be fed with data
+ * that is out of sequence.
+ *
+ * If the application whishes to send data to the peer, it should put
+ * its data into the uip_buf. The uip_appdata pointer points to the
+ * first available byte. The TCP/IP stack will calculate the
+ * checksums, and fill in the necessary header fields and finally send
+ * the packet back to the peer.
+*/
+
+#include "uip.h"
+#include "uipopt.h"
+#include "uip_arp.h"
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 /* If UIP_CONF_IPV6 is defined, we compile the
+		      uip6.c file instead of this one. Therefore
+		      this #ifndef removes the entire compilation
+		      output of the uip.c file */
+
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#include "net/uip-neighbor.h"
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Variable definitions. */
+
+
+/* The IP address of this host. If it is defined to be fixed (by
+   setting UIP_FIXEDADDR to 1 in uipopt.h), the address is set
+   here. Otherwise, the address */
+#if UIP_FIXEDADDR > 0
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr =
+  { UIP_IPADDR0, UIP_IPADDR1, UIP_IPADDR2, UIP_IPADDR3 };
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_draddr =
+  { UIP_DRIPADDR0, UIP_DRIPADDR1, UIP_DRIPADDR2, UIP_DRIPADDR3 };
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_netmask =
+  { UIP_NETMASK0, UIP_NETMASK1, UIP_NETMASK2, UIP_NETMASK3 };
+#else
+uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_draddr, uip_netmask;
+#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr =
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff,
+      0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } };
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } };
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr = { { 0x0, /* rest is 0 */ } };
+
+#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR
+const struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{UIP_ETHADDR0,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR1,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR2,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR3,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR4,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR5}};
+#else
+struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{0,0,0,0,0,0}};
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER
+u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE + 2];   /* The packet buffer that contains
+				    incoming packets. */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER */
+
+void *uip_appdata;               /* The uip_appdata pointer points to
+				    application data. */
+void *uip_sappdata;              /* The uip_appdata pointer points to
+				    the application data which is to
+				    be sent. */
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+void *uip_urgdata;               /* The uip_urgdata pointer points to
+   				    urgent data (out-of-band data), if
+   				    present. */
+u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen;
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+
+u16_t uip_len, uip_slen;
+                             /* The uip_len is either 8 or 16 bits,
+				depending on the maximum packet
+				size. */
+
+u8_t uip_flags;     /* The uip_flags variable is used for
+				communication between the TCP/IP stack
+				and the application program. */
+struct uip_conn *uip_conn;   /* uip_conn always points to the current
+				connection. */
+
+struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS];
+                             /* The uip_conns array holds all TCP
+				connections. */
+u16_t uip_listenports[UIP_LISTENPORTS];
+                             /* The uip_listenports list all currently
+				listning ports. */
+#if UIP_UDP
+struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn;
+struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+static u16_t ipid;           /* Ths ipid variable is an increasing
+				number that is used for the IP ID
+				field. */
+
+void uip_setipid(u16_t id) { ipid = id; }
+
+static u8_t iss[4];          /* The iss variable is used for the TCP
+				initial sequence number. */
+
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+static u16_t lastport;       /* Keeps track of the last port used for
+				a new connection. */
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+/* Temporary variables. */
+u8_t uip_acc32[4];
+static u8_t c, opt;
+static u16_t tmp16;
+
+/* Structures and definitions. */
+#define TCP_FIN 0x01
+#define TCP_SYN 0x02
+#define TCP_RST 0x04
+#define TCP_PSH 0x08
+#define TCP_ACK 0x10
+#define TCP_URG 0x20
+#define TCP_CTL 0x3f
+
+#define TCP_OPT_END     0   /* End of TCP options list */
+#define TCP_OPT_NOOP    1   /* "No-operation" TCP option */
+#define TCP_OPT_MSS     2   /* Maximum segment size TCP option */
+
+#define TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN 4   /* Length of TCP MSS option. */
+
+#define ICMP_ECHO_REPLY 0
+#define ICMP_ECHO       8
+
+#define ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE        3
+#define ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE        3
+
+#define ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY             129
+#define ICMP6_ECHO                   128
+#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION  135
+#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT 136
+
+#define ICMP6_FLAG_S (1 << 6)
+
+#define ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS 1
+#define ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS 2
+
+
+/* Macros. */
+#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+#define FBUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_reassbuf[0])
+#define ICMPBUF ((struct uip_icmpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+#define UDPBUF ((struct uip_udpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+
+
+#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1
+struct uip_stats uip_stat;
+#define UIP_STAT(s) s
+#else
+#define UIP_STAT(s)
+#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */
+
+#if UIP_LOGGING == 1
+#include <stdio.h>
+void uip_log(char *msg);
+#define UIP_LOG(m) uip_log(m)
+#else
+#define UIP_LOG(m)
+#endif /* UIP_LOGGING == 1 */
+
+#if ! UIP_ARCH_ADD32
+void
+uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16)
+{
+  uip_acc32[3] = op32[3] + (op16 & 0xff);
+  uip_acc32[2] = op32[2] + (op16 >> 8);
+  uip_acc32[1] = op32[1];
+  uip_acc32[0] = op32[0];
+  
+  if(uip_acc32[2] < (op16 >> 8)) {
+    ++uip_acc32[1];
+    if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) {
+      ++uip_acc32[0];
+    }
+  }
+  
+  
+  if(uip_acc32[3] < (op16 & 0xff)) {
+    ++uip_acc32[2];
+    if(uip_acc32[2] == 0) {
+      ++uip_acc32[1];
+      if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) {
+	++uip_acc32[0];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+#endif /* UIP_ARCH_ADD32 */
+
+#if ! UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static u16_t
+chksum(u16_t sum, const u8_t *data, u16_t len)
+{
+  u16_t t;
+  const u8_t *dataptr;
+  const u8_t *last_byte;
+
+  dataptr = data;
+  last_byte = data + len - 1;
+  
+  while(dataptr < last_byte) {	/* At least two more bytes */
+    t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + dataptr[1];
+    sum += t;
+    if(sum < t) {
+      sum++;		/* carry */
+    }
+    dataptr += 2;
+  }
+  
+  if(dataptr == last_byte) {
+    t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + 0;
+    sum += t;
+    if(sum < t) {
+      sum++;		/* carry */
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Return sum in host byte order. */
+  return sum;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+u16_t
+uip_chksum(u16_t *data, u16_t len)
+{
+  return htons(chksum(0, (u8_t *)data, len));
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#ifndef UIP_ARCH_IPCHKSUM
+u16_t
+uip_ipchksum(void)
+{
+  u16_t sum;
+
+  sum = chksum(0, &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_IPH_LEN);
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("uip_ipchksum: sum 0x%04x\n", sum);
+  return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum);
+}
+#endif
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static u16_t
+upper_layer_chksum(u8_t proto)
+{
+  u16_t upper_layer_len;
+  u16_t sum;
+  
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]) - UIP_IPH_LEN;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  
+  /* First sum pseudoheader. */
+  
+  /* IP protocol and length fields. This addition cannot carry. */
+  sum = upper_layer_len + proto;
+  /* Sum IP source and destination addresses. */
+  sum = chksum(sum, (u8_t *)&BUF->srcipaddr, 2 * sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+
+  /* Sum TCP header and data. */
+  sum = chksum(sum, &uip_buf[UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN],
+	       upper_layer_len);
+    
+  return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum);
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+u16_t
+uip_icmp6chksum(void)
+{
+  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_ICMP6);
+  
+}
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+u16_t
+uip_tcpchksum(void)
+{
+  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_TCP);
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+u16_t
+uip_udpchksum(void)
+{
+  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_UDP);
+}
+#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+#endif /* UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_init(void)
+{
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    uip_listenports[c] = 0;
+  }
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+  }
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+  lastport = 1024;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    uip_udp_conns[c].lport = 0;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+  
+
+  /* IPv4 initialization. */
+#if UIP_FIXEDADDR == 0
+  /*  uip_hostaddr[0] = uip_hostaddr[1] = 0;*/
+#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+struct uip_conn *
+uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport)
+{
+  register struct uip_conn *conn, *cconn;
+  
+  /* Find an unused local port. */
+ again:
+  ++lastport;
+
+  if(lastport >= 32000) {
+    lastport = 4096;
+  }
+
+  /* Check if this port is already in use, and if so try to find
+     another one. */
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    conn = &uip_conns[c];
+    if(conn->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED &&
+       conn->lport == htons(lastport)) {
+      goto again;
+    }
+  }
+
+  conn = 0;
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    cconn = &uip_conns[c];
+    if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) {
+      conn = cconn;
+      break;
+    }
+    if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) {
+      if(conn == 0 ||
+	 cconn->timer > conn->timer) {
+	conn = cconn;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  if(conn == 0) {
+    return 0;
+  }
+  
+  conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_SENT;
+
+  conn->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0];
+  conn->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1];
+  conn->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2];
+  conn->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3];
+
+  conn->initialmss = conn->mss = UIP_TCP_MSS;
+  
+  conn->len = 1;   /* TCP length of the SYN is one. */
+  conn->nrtx = 0;
+  conn->timer = 1; /* Send the SYN next time around. */
+  conn->rto = UIP_RTO;
+  conn->sa = 0;
+  conn->sv = 16;   /* Initial value of the RTT variance. */
+  conn->lport = htons(lastport);
+  conn->rport = rport;
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr);
+  
+  return conn;
+}
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_UDP
+struct uip_udp_conn *
+uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport)
+{
+  register struct uip_udp_conn *conn;
+  
+  /* Find an unused local port. */
+ again:
+  ++lastport;
+
+  if(lastport >= 32000) {
+    lastport = 4096;
+  }
+  
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == htons(lastport)) {
+      goto again;
+    }
+  }
+
+
+  conn = 0;
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == 0) {
+      conn = &uip_udp_conns[c];
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  if(conn == 0) {
+    return 0;
+  }
+  
+  conn->lport = HTONS(lastport);
+  conn->rport = rport;
+  if(ripaddr == NULL) {
+    memset(&conn->ripaddr, 0, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+  } else {
+    uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr);
+  }
+  conn->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+  
+  return conn;
+}
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_unlisten(u16_t port)
+{
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_listenports[c] == port) {
+      uip_listenports[c] = 0;
+      return;
+    }
+  }
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_listen(u16_t port)
+{
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_listenports[c] == 0) {
+      uip_listenports[c] = port;
+      return;
+    }
+  }
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* XXX: IP fragment reassembly: not well-tested. */
+
+#if UIP_REASSEMBLY && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN)
+static u8_t uip_reassbuf[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE];
+static u8_t uip_reassbitmap[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE / (8 * 8)];
+static const u8_t bitmap_bits[8] = {0xff, 0x7f, 0x3f, 0x1f,
+				    0x0f, 0x07, 0x03, 0x01};
+static u16_t uip_reasslen;
+static u8_t uip_reassflags;
+#define UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG 0x01
+static u8_t uip_reasstmr;
+
+#define IP_MF   0x20
+
+static u8_t
+uip_reass(void)
+{
+  u16_t offset, len;
+  u16_t i;
+
+  /* If ip_reasstmr is zero, no packet is present in the buffer, so we
+     write the IP header of the fragment into the reassembly
+     buffer. The timer is updated with the maximum age. */
+  if(uip_reasstmr == 0) {
+    memcpy(uip_reassbuf, &BUF->vhl, UIP_IPH_LEN);
+    uip_reasstmr = UIP_REASS_MAXAGE;
+    uip_reassflags = 0;
+    /* Clear the bitmap. */
+    memset(uip_reassbitmap, 0, sizeof(uip_reassbitmap));
+  }
+
+  /* Check if the incoming fragment matches the one currently present
+     in the reasembly buffer. If so, we proceed with copying the
+     fragment into the buffer. */
+  if(BUF->srcipaddr[0] == FBUF->srcipaddr[0] &&
+     BUF->srcipaddr[1] == FBUF->srcipaddr[1] &&
+     BUF->destipaddr[0] == FBUF->destipaddr[0] &&
+     BUF->destipaddr[1] == FBUF->destipaddr[1] &&
+     BUF->ipid[0] == FBUF->ipid[0] &&
+     BUF->ipid[1] == FBUF->ipid[1]) {
+
+    len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] - (BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4;
+    offset = (((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) << 8) + BUF->ipoffset[1]) * 8;
+
+    /* If the offset or the offset + fragment length overflows the
+       reassembly buffer, we discard the entire packet. */
+    if(offset > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE ||
+       offset + len > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE) {
+      uip_reasstmr = 0;
+      goto nullreturn;
+    }
+
+    /* Copy the fragment into the reassembly buffer, at the right
+       offset. */
+    memcpy(&uip_reassbuf[UIP_IPH_LEN + offset],
+	   (char *)BUF + (int)((BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4),
+	   len);
+      
+    /* Update the bitmap. */
+    if(offset / (8 * 8) == (offset + len) / (8 * 8)) {
+      /* If the two endpoints are in the same byte, we only update
+	 that byte. */
+	     
+      uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |=
+	     bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7] &
+	     ~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7];
+    } else {
+      /* If the two endpoints are in different bytes, we update the
+	 bytes in the endpoints and fill the stuff inbetween with
+	 0xff. */
+      uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |=
+	bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7];
+      for(i = 1 + offset / (8 * 8); i < (offset + len) / (8 * 8); ++i) {
+	uip_reassbitmap[i] = 0xff;
+      }
+      uip_reassbitmap[(offset + len) / (8 * 8)] |=
+	~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7];
+    }
+    
+    /* If this fragment has the More Fragments flag set to zero, we
+       know that this is the last fragment, so we can calculate the
+       size of the entire packet. We also set the
+       IP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG flag to indicate that we have received
+       the final fragment. */
+
+    if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & IP_MF) == 0) {
+      uip_reassflags |= UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG;
+      uip_reasslen = offset + len;
+    }
+    
+    /* Finally, we check if we have a full packet in the buffer. We do
+       this by checking if we have the last fragment and if all bits
+       in the bitmap are set. */
+    if(uip_reassflags & UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG) {
+      /* Check all bytes up to and including all but the last byte in
+	 the bitmap. */
+      for(i = 0; i < uip_reasslen / (8 * 8) - 1; ++i) {
+	if(uip_reassbitmap[i] != 0xff) {
+	  goto nullreturn;
+	}
+      }
+      /* Check the last byte in the bitmap. It should contain just the
+	 right amount of bits. */
+      if(uip_reassbitmap[uip_reasslen / (8 * 8)] !=
+	 (u8_t)~bitmap_bits[uip_reasslen / 8 & 7]) {
+	goto nullreturn;
+      }
+
+      /* If we have come this far, we have a full packet in the
+	 buffer, so we allocate a pbuf and copy the packet into it. We
+	 also reset the timer. */
+      uip_reasstmr = 0;
+      memcpy(BUF, FBUF, uip_reasslen);
+
+      /* Pretend to be a "normal" (i.e., not fragmented) IP packet
+	 from now on. */
+      BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0;
+      BUF->len[0] = uip_reasslen >> 8;
+      BUF->len[1] = uip_reasslen & 0xff;
+      BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+      BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+
+      return uip_reasslen;
+    }
+  }
+
+ nullreturn:
+  return 0;
+}
+#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static void
+uip_add_rcv_nxt(u16_t n)
+{
+  uip_add32(uip_conn->rcv_nxt, n);
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0];
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1];
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2];
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3];
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_process(u8_t flag)
+{
+  register struct uip_conn *uip_connr = uip_conn;
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  if(flag == UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN) {
+    goto udp_send;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+  
+  uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN];
+
+  /* Check if we were invoked because of a poll request for a
+     particular connection. */
+  if(flag == UIP_POLL_REQUEST) {
+    if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED &&
+       !uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+	uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
+	UIP_APPCALL();
+	goto appsend;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+    
+    /* Check if we were invoked because of the perodic timer fireing. */
+  } else if(flag == UIP_TIMER) {
+#if UIP_REASSEMBLY
+    if(uip_reasstmr != 0) {
+      --uip_reasstmr;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+    /* Increase the initial sequence number. */
+    if(++iss[3] == 0) {
+      if(++iss[2] == 0) {
+	if(++iss[1] == 0) {
+	  ++iss[0];
+	}
+      }
+    }
+
+    /* Reset the length variables. */
+    uip_len = 0;
+    uip_slen = 0;
+
+    /* Check if the connection is in a state in which we simply wait
+       for the connection to time out. If so, we increase the
+       connection's timer and remove the connection if it times
+       out. */
+    if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT ||
+       uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_FIN_WAIT_2) {
+      ++(uip_connr->timer);
+      if(uip_connr->timer == UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT) {
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+      }
+    } else if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED) {
+      /* If the connection has outstanding data, we increase the
+	 connection's timer and see if it has reached the RTO value
+	 in which case we retransmit. */
+      if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+	if(uip_connr->timer-- == 0) {
+	  if(uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXRTX ||
+	     ((uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_SENT ||
+	       uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_RCVD) &&
+	      uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXSYNRTX)) {
+	    uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+
+	    /* We call UIP_APPCALL() with uip_flags set to
+	       UIP_TIMEDOUT to inform the application that the
+	       connection has timed out. */
+	    uip_flags = UIP_TIMEDOUT;
+	    UIP_APPCALL();
+
+	    /* We also send a reset packet to the remote host. */
+	    BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
+	    goto tcp_send_nodata;
+	  }
+
+	  /* Exponential backoff. */
+	  uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO << (uip_connr->nrtx > 4?
+					 4:
+					 uip_connr->nrtx);
+	  ++(uip_connr->nrtx);
+	  
+	  /* Ok, so we need to retransmit. We do this differently
+	     depending on which state we are in. In ESTABLISHED, we
+	     call upon the application so that it may prepare the
+	     data for the retransmit. In SYN_RCVD, we resend the
+	     SYNACK that we sent earlier and in LAST_ACK we have to
+	     retransmit our FINACK. */
+	  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rexmit);
+	  switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) {
+	  case UIP_SYN_RCVD:
+	    /* In the SYN_RCVD state, we should retransmit our
+               SYNACK. */
+	    goto tcp_send_synack;
+	    
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+	  case UIP_SYN_SENT:
+	    /* In the SYN_SENT state, we retransmit out SYN. */
+	    BUF->flags = 0;
+	    goto tcp_send_syn;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+	    
+	  case UIP_ESTABLISHED:
+	    /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application
+               to do the actual retransmit after which we jump into
+               the code for sending out the packet (the apprexmit
+               label). */
+	    uip_flags = UIP_REXMIT;
+	    UIP_APPCALL();
+	    goto apprexmit;
+	    
+	  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1:
+	  case UIP_CLOSING:
+	  case UIP_LAST_ACK:
+	    /* In all these states we should retransmit a FINACK. */
+	    goto tcp_send_finack;
+	    
+	  }
+	}
+      } else if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED) {
+	/* If there was no need for a retransmission, we poll the
+           application for new data. */
+	uip_len = uip_slen = 0;		   
+	uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
+	UIP_APPCALL();
+	goto appsend;
+      }
+    }
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#if UIP_UDP
+  if(flag == UIP_UDP_TIMER) {
+    if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0) {
+      uip_conn = NULL;
+      uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
+      uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
+      uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
+      UIP_UDP_APPCALL();
+      goto udp_send;
+    } else {
+      goto drop;
+    }
+  }
+#endif
+
+  /* This is where the input processing starts. */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.recv);
+
+  /* Start of IP input header processing code. */
+  
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* Check validity of the IP header. */
+  if((BUF->vtc & 0xf0) != 0x60)  { /* IP version and header length. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ipv6: invalid version.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* Check validity of the IP header. */
+  if(BUF->vhl != 0x45)  { /* IP version and header length. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: invalid version or header length.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  
+  /* Check the size of the packet. If the size reported to us in
+     uip_len is smaller the size reported in the IP header, we assume
+     that the packet has been corrupted in transit. If the size of
+     uip_len is larger than the size reported in the IP packet header,
+     the packet has been padded and we set uip_len to the correct
+     value.. */
+
+  if((BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] <= uip_len) {
+    uip_len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1];
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    uip_len += 40; /* The length reported in the IPv6 header is the
+		      length of the payload that follows the
+		      header. However, uIP uses the uip_len variable
+		      for holding the size of the entire packet,
+		      including the IP header. For IPv4 this is not a
+		      problem as the length field in the IPv4 header
+		      contains the length of the entire packet. But
+		      for IPv6 we need to add the size of the IPv6
+		      header (40 bytes). */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  } else {
+    UIP_LOG("ip: packet shorter than reported in IP header.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* Check the fragment flag. */
+  if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) != 0 ||
+     BUF->ipoffset[1] != 0) {
+#if UIP_REASSEMBLY
+    uip_len = uip_reass();
+    if(uip_len == 0) {
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#else /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.fragerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: fragment dropped.");
+    goto drop;
+#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+    /* If we are configured to use ping IP address configuration and
+       hasn't been assigned an IP address yet, we accept all ICMP
+       packets. */
+#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_ICMP) {
+      UIP_LOG("ip: possible ping config packet received.");
+      goto icmp_input;
+    } else {
+      UIP_LOG("ip: packet dropped since no address assigned.");
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
+
+  } else {
+    /* If IP broadcast support is configured, we check for a broadcast
+       UDP packet, which may be destined to us. */
+#if UIP_BROADCAST
+    DEBUG_PRINTF("UDP IP checksum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum());
+    if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP &&
+       uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr)
+       /*&&
+	 uip_ipchksum() == 0xffff*/) {
+      goto udp_input;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_BROADCAST */
+    
+    /* Check if the packet is destined for our IP address. */
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+      UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    /* For IPv6, packet reception is a little trickier as we need to
+       make sure that we listen to certain multicast addresses (all
+       hosts multicast address, and the solicited-node multicast
+       address) as well. However, we will cheat here and accept all
+       multicast packets that are sent to the ff02::/16 addresses. */
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr) &&
+       BUF->destipaddr.u16[0] != HTONS(0xff02)) {
+      UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  }
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  if(uip_ipchksum() != 0xffff) { /* Compute and check the IP header
+				    checksum. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.chkerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: bad checksum.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP) { /* Check for TCP packet. If so,
+				       proceed with TCP input
+				       processing. */
+    goto tcp_input;
+  }
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP) {
+    goto udp_input;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* ICMPv4 processing code follows. */
+  if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP) { /* We only allow ICMP packets from
+					here. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF
+ icmp_input:
+#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv);
+
+  /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only change
+     the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and adjust the ICMP
+     checksum before we return the packet. */
+  if(ICMPBUF->type != ICMP_ECHO) {
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr);
+    UIP_LOG("icmp: not icmp echo.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  /* If we are configured to use ping IP address assignment, we use
+     the destination IP address of this ping packet and assign it to
+     ourself. */
+#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF
+  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+    uip_hostaddr = BUF->destipaddr;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
+
+  ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_ECHO_REPLY;
+
+  if(ICMPBUF->icmpchksum >= HTONS(0xffff - (ICMP_ECHO << 8))) {
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8) + 1;
+  } else {
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8);
+  }
+
+  /* Swap IP addresses. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent);
+  BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+  goto ip_send_nolen;
+
+  /* End of IPv4 input header processing code. */
+#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* This is IPv6 ICMPv6 processing code. */
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("icmp6_input: length %d\n", uip_len);
+
+  if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP6) { /* We only allow ICMPv6 packets from
+					 here. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp6.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv);
+
+  /* If we get a neighbor solicitation for our address we should send
+     a neighbor advertisement message back. */
+  if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION) {
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ICMPBUF->icmp6data, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+
+      if(ICMPBUF->options[0] == ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS) {
+	/* Save the sender's address in our neighbor list. */
+	uip_neighbor_add(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &(ICMPBUF->options[2]));
+      }
+      
+      /* We should now send a neighbor advertisement back to where the
+	 neighbor solicication came from. */
+      ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT;
+      ICMPBUF->flags = ICMP6_FLAG_S; /* Solicited flag. */
+      
+      ICMPBUF->reserved1 = ICMPBUF->reserved2 = ICMPBUF->reserved3 = 0;
+      
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->destipaddr, &ICMPBUF->srcipaddr);
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+      ICMPBUF->options[0] = ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS;
+      ICMPBUF->options[1] = 1;  /* Options length, 1 = 8 bytes. */
+      memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->options[2]), &uip_ethaddr, sizeof(uip_ethaddr));
+      ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
+      ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum();
+      
+      goto send;
+      
+    }
+    goto drop;
+  } else if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_ECHO) {
+    /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only
+       change the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and update the
+       ICMP checksum before we return the packet. */
+
+    ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY;
+    
+    uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+    uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum();
+    
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent);
+    goto send;
+  } else {
+    DEBUG_PRINTF("Unknown icmp6 message type %d\n", ICMPBUF->type);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr);
+    UIP_LOG("icmp: unknown ICMP message.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  /* End of IPv6 ICMP processing. */
+  
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  /* UDP input processing. */
+ udp_input:
+  /* UDP processing is really just a hack. We don't do anything to the
+     UDP/IP headers, but let the UDP application do all the hard
+     work. If the application sets uip_slen, it has a packet to
+     send. */
+#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+  uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
+  uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
+  if(UDPBUF->udpchksum != 0 && uip_udpchksum() != 0xffff) {
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.chkerr);
+    UIP_LOG("udp: bad checksum.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#else /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+  uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
+#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+
+  /* Demultiplex this UDP packet between the UDP "connections". */
+  for(uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[0];
+      uip_udp_conn < &uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
+      ++uip_udp_conn) {
+    /* If the local UDP port is non-zero, the connection is considered
+       to be used. If so, the local port number is checked against the
+       destination port number in the received packet. If the two port
+       numbers match, the remote port number is checked if the
+       connection is bound to a remote port. Finally, if the
+       connection is bound to a remote IP address, the source IP
+       address of the packet is checked. */
+    if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0 &&
+       UDPBUF->destport == uip_udp_conn->lport &&
+       (uip_udp_conn->rport == 0 ||
+        UDPBUF->srcport == uip_udp_conn->rport) &&
+       (uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) ||
+	uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr) ||
+	uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr))) {
+      goto udp_found;
+    }
+  }
+  UIP_LOG("udp: no matching connection found");
+#if UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* Copy fields from packet header into payload of this ICMP packet. */
+  memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->payload[0]), ICMPBUF, UIP_IPH_LEN + 8);
+
+  /* Set the ICMP type and code. */
+  ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE;
+  ICMPBUF->icode = ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE;
+
+  /* Calculate the ICMP checksum. */
+  ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
+  ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_chksum((u16_t *)&(ICMPBUF->type), 36);
+
+  /* Set the IP destination address to be the source address of the
+     original packet. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+
+  /* Set our IP address as the source address. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+  /* The size of the ICMP destination unreachable packet is 36 + the
+     size of the IP header (20) = 56. */
+  uip_len = 36 + UIP_IPH_LEN;
+  ICMPBUF->len[0] = 0;
+  ICMPBUF->len[1] = (u8_t)uip_len;
+  ICMPBUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+  ICMPBUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_ICMP;
+
+  goto ip_send_nolen;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */
+  goto drop;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */
+  
+ udp_found:
+  uip_conn = NULL;
+  uip_flags = UIP_NEWDATA;
+  uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
+  uip_slen = 0;
+  UIP_UDP_APPCALL();
+
+ udp_send:
+  if(uip_slen == 0) {
+    goto drop;
+  }
+  uip_len = uip_slen + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+     length. */
+  BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  BUF->ttl = uip_udp_conn->ttl;
+  BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_UDP;
+
+  UDPBUF->udplen = HTONS(uip_slen + UIP_UDPH_LEN);
+  UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0;
+
+  BUF->srcport  = uip_udp_conn->lport;
+  BUF->destport = uip_udp_conn->rport;
+
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr);
+   
+  uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPTCPH_LEN];
+
+#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+  /* Calculate UDP checksum. */
+  UDPBUF->udpchksum = ~(uip_udpchksum());
+  if(UDPBUF->udpchksum == 0) {
+    UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0xffff;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+  
+  goto ip_send_nolen;
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+  
+  /* TCP input processing. */
+ tcp_input:
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.recv);
+
+  /* Start of TCP input header processing code. */
+  
+  if(uip_tcpchksum() != 0xffff) {   /* Compute and check the TCP
+				       checksum. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.chkerr);
+    UIP_LOG("tcp: bad checksum.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+  
+  /* Demultiplex this segment. */
+  /* First check any active connections. */
+  for(uip_connr = &uip_conns[0]; uip_connr <= &uip_conns[UIP_CONNS - 1];
+      ++uip_connr) {
+    if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED &&
+       BUF->destport == uip_connr->lport &&
+       BUF->srcport == uip_connr->rport &&
+       uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr)) {
+      goto found;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* If we didn't find and active connection that expected the packet,
+     either this packet is an old duplicate, or this is a SYN packet
+     destined for a connection in LISTEN. If the SYN flag isn't set,
+     it is an old packet and we send a RST. */
+  if((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) != TCP_SYN) {
+    goto reset;
+  }
+  
+  tmp16 = BUF->destport;
+  /* Next, check listening connections. */
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    if(tmp16 == uip_listenports[c]) {
+      goto found_listen;
+    }
+  }
+  
+  /* No matching connection found, so we send a RST packet. */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.synrst);
+
+ reset:
+  /* We do not send resets in response to resets. */
+  if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) {
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rst);
+  
+  BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
+  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN;
+  BUF->tcpoffset = 5 << 4;
+
+  /* Flip the seqno and ackno fields in the TCP header. */
+  c = BUF->seqno[3];
+  BUF->seqno[3] = BUF->ackno[3];
+  BUF->ackno[3] = c;
+  
+  c = BUF->seqno[2];
+  BUF->seqno[2] = BUF->ackno[2];
+  BUF->ackno[2] = c;
+  
+  c = BUF->seqno[1];
+  BUF->seqno[1] = BUF->ackno[1];
+  BUF->ackno[1] = c;
+  
+  c = BUF->seqno[0];
+  BUF->seqno[0] = BUF->ackno[0];
+  BUF->ackno[0] = c;
+
+  /* We also have to increase the sequence number we are
+     acknowledging. If the least significant byte overflowed, we need
+     to propagate the carry to the other bytes as well. */
+  if(++BUF->ackno[3] == 0) {
+    if(++BUF->ackno[2] == 0) {
+      if(++BUF->ackno[1] == 0) {
+	++BUF->ackno[0];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+ 
+  /* Swap port numbers. */
+  tmp16 = BUF->srcport;
+  BUF->srcport = BUF->destport;
+  BUF->destport = tmp16;
+  
+  /* Swap IP addresses. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+  
+  /* And send out the RST packet! */
+  goto tcp_send_noconn;
+
+  /* This label will be jumped to if we matched the incoming packet
+     with a connection in LISTEN. In that case, we should create a new
+     connection and send a SYNACK in return. */
+ found_listen:
+  /* First we check if there are any connections avaliable. Unused
+     connections are kept in the same table as used connections, but
+     unused ones have the tcpstate set to CLOSED. Also, connections in
+     TIME_WAIT are kept track of and we'll use the oldest one if no
+     CLOSED connections are found. Thanks to Eddie C. Dost for a very
+     nice algorithm for the TIME_WAIT search. */
+  uip_connr = 0;
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) {
+      uip_connr = &uip_conns[c];
+      break;
+    }
+    if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) {
+      if(uip_connr == 0 ||
+	 uip_conns[c].timer > uip_connr->timer) {
+	uip_connr = &uip_conns[c];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  if(uip_connr == 0) {
+    /* All connections are used already, we drop packet and hope that
+       the remote end will retransmit the packet at a time when we
+       have more spare connections. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.syndrop);
+    UIP_LOG("tcp: found no unused connections.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+  uip_conn = uip_connr;
+  
+  /* Fill in the necessary fields for the new connection. */
+  uip_connr->rto = uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO;
+  uip_connr->sa = 0;
+  uip_connr->sv = 4;
+  uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+  uip_connr->lport = BUF->destport;
+  uip_connr->rport = BUF->srcport;
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_connr->ripaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+  uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_RCVD;
+
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0];
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1];
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2];
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3];
+  uip_connr->len = 1;
+
+  /* rcv_nxt should be the seqno from the incoming packet + 1. */
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3];
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2];
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1];
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0];
+  uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+
+  /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */
+  if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) {
+    for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) {
+      opt = uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c];
+      if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) {
+	/* End of options. */
+	break;
+      } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) {
+	++c;
+	/* NOP option. */
+      } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS &&
+		uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) {
+	/* An MSS option with the right option length. */
+	tmp16 = ((u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) |
+	  (u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c];
+	uip_connr->initialmss = uip_connr->mss =
+	  tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16;
+	
+	/* And we are done processing options. */
+	break;
+      } else {
+	/* All other options have a length field, so that we easily
+	   can skip past them. */
+	if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) {
+	  /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed
+	     and we don't process them further. */
+	  break;
+	}
+	c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  
+  /* Our response will be a SYNACK. */
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+ tcp_send_synack:
+  BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
+  
+ tcp_send_syn:
+  BUF->flags |= TCP_SYN;
+#else /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+ tcp_send_synack:
+  BUF->flags = TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+  
+  /* We send out the TCP Maximum Segment Size option with our
+     SYNACK. */
+  BUF->optdata[0] = TCP_OPT_MSS;
+  BUF->optdata[1] = TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN;
+  BUF->optdata[2] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) / 256;
+  BUF->optdata[3] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) & 255;
+  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN;
+  BUF->tcpoffset = ((UIP_TCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) / 4) << 4;
+  goto tcp_send;
+
+  /* This label will be jumped to if we found an active connection. */
+ found:
+  uip_conn = uip_connr;
+  uip_flags = 0;
+  /* We do a very naive form of TCP reset processing; we just accept
+     any RST and kill our connection. We should in fact check if the
+     sequence number of this reset is wihtin our advertised window
+     before we accept the reset. */
+  if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) {
+    uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+    UIP_LOG("tcp: got reset, aborting connection.");
+    uip_flags = UIP_ABORT;
+    UIP_APPCALL();
+    goto drop;
+  }
+  /* Calculate the length of the data, if the application has sent
+     any data to us. */
+  c = (BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) << 2;
+  /* uip_len will contain the length of the actual TCP data. This is
+     calculated by subtracing the length of the TCP header (in
+     c) and the length of the IP header (20 bytes). */
+  uip_len = uip_len - c - UIP_IPH_LEN;
+
+  /* First, check if the sequence number of the incoming packet is
+     what we're expecting next. If not, we send out an ACK with the
+     correct numbers in. */
+  if(!(((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_SYN_SENT) &&
+       ((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)))) {
+    if((uip_len > 0 || ((BUF->flags & (TCP_SYN | TCP_FIN)) != 0)) &&
+       (BUF->seqno[0] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] ||
+	BUF->seqno[1] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] ||
+	BUF->seqno[2] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] ||
+	BUF->seqno[3] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3])) {
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Next, check if the incoming segment acknowledges any outstanding
+     data. If so, we update the sequence number, reset the length of
+     the outstanding data, calculate RTT estimations, and reset the
+     retransmission timer. */
+  if((BUF->flags & TCP_ACK) && uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+    uip_add32(uip_connr->snd_nxt, uip_connr->len);
+
+    if(BUF->ackno[0] == uip_acc32[0] &&
+       BUF->ackno[1] == uip_acc32[1] &&
+       BUF->ackno[2] == uip_acc32[2] &&
+       BUF->ackno[3] == uip_acc32[3]) {
+      /* Update sequence number. */
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0];
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1];
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2];
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3];
+	
+      /* Do RTT estimation, unless we have done retransmissions. */
+      if(uip_connr->nrtx == 0) {
+	signed char m;
+	m = uip_connr->rto - uip_connr->timer;
+	/* This is taken directly from VJs original code in his paper */
+	m = m - (uip_connr->sa >> 3);
+	uip_connr->sa += m;
+	if(m < 0) {
+	  m = -m;
+	}
+	m = m - (uip_connr->sv >> 2);
+	uip_connr->sv += m;
+	uip_connr->rto = (uip_connr->sa >> 3) + uip_connr->sv;
+
+      }
+      /* Set the acknowledged flag. */
+      uip_flags = UIP_ACKDATA;
+      /* Reset the retransmission timer. */
+      uip_connr->timer = uip_connr->rto;
+
+      /* Reset length of outstanding data. */
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+    }
+    
+  }
+
+  /* Do different things depending on in what state the connection is. */
+  switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) {
+    /* CLOSED and LISTEN are not handled here. CLOSE_WAIT is not
+	implemented, since we force the application to close when the
+	peer sends a FIN (hence the application goes directly from
+	ESTABLISHED to LAST_ACK). */
+  case UIP_SYN_RCVD:
+    /* In SYN_RCVD we have sent out a SYNACK in response to a SYN, and
+       we are waiting for an ACK that acknowledges the data we sent
+       out the last time. Therefore, we want to have the UIP_ACKDATA
+       flag set. If so, we enter the ESTABLISHED state. */
+    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED;
+      uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED;
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+      if(uip_len > 0) {
+        uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
+        uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+      }
+      uip_slen = 0;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto appsend;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+  case UIP_SYN_SENT:
+    /* In SYN_SENT, we wait for a SYNACK that is sent in response to
+       our SYN. The rcv_nxt is set to sequence number in the SYNACK
+       plus one, and we send an ACK. We move into the ESTABLISHED
+       state. */
+    if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) &&
+       (BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)) {
+
+      /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */
+      if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) {
+	for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) {
+	  opt = uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c];
+	  if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) {
+	    /* End of options. */
+	    break;
+	  } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) {
+	    ++c;
+	    /* NOP option. */
+	  } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS &&
+		    uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) {
+	    /* An MSS option with the right option length. */
+	    tmp16 = (uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) |
+	      uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c];
+	    uip_connr->initialmss =
+	      uip_connr->mss = tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16;
+
+	    /* And we are done processing options. */
+	    break;
+	  } else {
+	    /* All other options have a length field, so that we easily
+	       can skip past them. */
+	    if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) {
+	      /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed
+		 and we don't process them further. */
+	      break;
+	    }
+	    c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c];
+	  }
+	}
+      }
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED;
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0];
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1];
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2];
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3];
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+      uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED | UIP_NEWDATA;
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+      uip_len = 0;
+      uip_slen = 0;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto appsend;
+    }
+    /* Inform the application that the connection failed */
+    uip_flags = UIP_ABORT;
+    UIP_APPCALL();
+    /* The connection is closed after we send the RST */
+    uip_conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+    goto reset;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+    
+  case UIP_ESTABLISHED:
+    /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application to feed
+    data into the uip_buf. If the UIP_ACKDATA flag is set, the
+    application should put new data into the buffer, otherwise we are
+    retransmitting an old segment, and the application should put that
+    data into the buffer.
+
+    If the incoming packet is a FIN, we should close the connection on
+    this side as well, and we send out a FIN and enter the LAST_ACK
+    state. We require that there is no outstanding data; otherwise the
+    sequence numbers will be screwed up. */
+
+    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) {
+      if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+	goto drop;
+      }
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1 + uip_len);
+      uip_flags |= UIP_CLOSE;
+      if(uip_len > 0) {
+	uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
+      }
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      uip_connr->len = 1;
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_LAST_ACK;
+      uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+    tcp_send_finack:
+      BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK;
+      goto tcp_send_nodata;
+    }
+
+    /* Check the URG flag. If this is set, the segment carries urgent
+       data that we must pass to the application. */
+    if((BUF->flags & TCP_URG) != 0) {
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+      uip_urglen = (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1];
+      if(uip_urglen > uip_len) {
+	/* There is more urgent data in the next segment to come. */
+	uip_urglen = uip_len;
+      }
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_urglen);
+      uip_len -= uip_urglen;
+      uip_urgdata = uip_appdata;
+      uip_appdata += uip_urglen;
+    } else {
+      uip_urglen = 0;
+#else /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+      uip_appdata = ((char *)uip_appdata) + ((BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1]);
+      uip_len -= (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1];
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+    }
+
+    /* If uip_len > 0 we have TCP data in the packet, and we flag this
+       by setting the UIP_NEWDATA flag and update the sequence number
+       we acknowledge. If the application has stopped the dataflow
+       using uip_stop(), we must not accept any data packets from the
+       remote host. */
+    if(uip_len > 0 && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) {
+      uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+    }
+
+    /* Check if the available buffer space advertised by the other end
+       is smaller than the initial MSS for this connection. If so, we
+       set the current MSS to the window size to ensure that the
+       application does not send more data than the other end can
+       handle.
+
+       If the remote host advertises a zero window, we set the MSS to
+       the initial MSS so that the application will send an entire MSS
+       of data. This data will not be acknowledged by the receiver,
+       and the application will retransmit it. This is called the
+       "persistent timer" and uses the retransmission mechanim.
+    */
+    tmp16 = ((u16_t)BUF->wnd[0] << 8) + (u16_t)BUF->wnd[1];
+    if(tmp16 > uip_connr->initialmss ||
+       tmp16 == 0) {
+      tmp16 = uip_connr->initialmss;
+    }
+    uip_connr->mss = tmp16;
+
+    /* If this packet constitutes an ACK for outstanding data (flagged
+       by the UIP_ACKDATA flag, we should call the application since it
+       might want to send more data. If the incoming packet had data
+       from the peer (as flagged by the UIP_NEWDATA flag), the
+       application must also be notified.
+
+       When the application is called, the global variable uip_len
+       contains the length of the incoming data. The application can
+       access the incoming data through the global pointer
+       uip_appdata, which usually points UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN
+       bytes into the uip_buf array.
+
+       If the application wishes to send any data, this data should be
+       put into the uip_appdata and the length of the data should be
+       put into uip_len. If the application don't have any data to
+       send, uip_len must be set to 0. */
+    if(uip_flags & (UIP_NEWDATA | UIP_ACKDATA)) {
+      uip_slen = 0;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+
+    appsend:
+      
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_ABORT) {
+	uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+	BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
+	goto tcp_send_nodata;
+      }
+
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE) {
+	uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_connr->len = 1;
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_1;
+	uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+	BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK;
+	goto tcp_send_nodata;
+      }
+
+      /* If uip_slen > 0, the application has data to be sent. */
+      if(uip_slen > 0) {
+
+	/* If the connection has acknowledged data, the contents of
+	   the ->len variable should be discarded. */
+	if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) != 0) {
+	  uip_connr->len = 0;
+	}
+
+	/* If the ->len variable is non-zero the connection has
+	   already data in transit and cannot send anymore right
+	   now. */
+	if(uip_connr->len == 0) {
+
+	  /* The application cannot send more than what is allowed by
+	     the mss (the minumum of the MSS and the available
+	     window). */
+	  if(uip_slen > uip_connr->mss) {
+	    uip_slen = uip_connr->mss;
+	  }
+
+	  /* Remember how much data we send out now so that we know
+	     when everything has been acknowledged. */
+	  uip_connr->len = uip_slen;
+	} else {
+
+	  /* If the application already had unacknowledged data, we
+	     make sure that the application does not send (i.e.,
+	     retransmit) out more than it previously sent out. */
+	  uip_slen = uip_connr->len;
+	}
+      }
+      uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+    apprexmit:
+      uip_appdata = uip_sappdata;
+      
+      /* If the application has data to be sent, or if the incoming
+         packet had new data in it, we must send out a packet. */
+      if(uip_slen > 0 && uip_connr->len > 0) {
+	/* Add the length of the IP and TCP headers. */
+	uip_len = uip_connr->len + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN;
+	/* We always set the ACK flag in response packets. */
+	BUF->flags = TCP_ACK | TCP_PSH;
+	/* Send the packet. */
+	goto tcp_send_noopts;
+      }
+      /* If there is no data to send, just send out a pure ACK if
+	 there is newdata. */
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA) {
+	uip_len = UIP_TCPIP_HLEN;
+	BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
+	goto tcp_send_noopts;
+      }
+    }
+    goto drop;
+  case UIP_LAST_ACK:
+    /* We can close this connection if the peer has acknowledged our
+       FIN. This is indicated by the UIP_ACKDATA flag. */
+    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+    }
+    break;
+    
+  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1:
+    /* The application has closed the connection, but the remote host
+       hasn't closed its end yet. Thus we do nothing but wait for a
+       FIN from the other side. */
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+    }
+    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) {
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
+	uip_connr->timer = 0;
+	uip_connr->len = 0;
+      } else {
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSING;
+      }
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    } else if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_2;
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+      goto drop;
+    }
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+      
+  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_2:
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+    }
+    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
+      uip_connr->timer = 0;
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+
+  case UIP_TIME_WAIT:
+    goto tcp_send_ack;
+    
+  case UIP_CLOSING:
+    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
+      uip_connr->timer = 0;
+    }
+  }
+  goto drop;
+  
+  /* We jump here when we are ready to send the packet, and just want
+     to set the appropriate TCP sequence numbers in the TCP header. */
+ tcp_send_ack:
+  BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
+
+ tcp_send_nodata:
+  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN;
+
+ tcp_send_noopts:
+  BUF->tcpoffset = (UIP_TCPH_LEN / 4) << 4;
+
+  /* We're done with the input processing. We are now ready to send a
+     reply. Our job is to fill in all the fields of the TCP and IP
+     headers before calculating the checksum and finally send the
+     packet. */
+ tcp_send:
+  BUF->ackno[0] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0];
+  BUF->ackno[1] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1];
+  BUF->ackno[2] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2];
+  BUF->ackno[3] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3];
+  
+  BUF->seqno[0] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[0];
+  BUF->seqno[1] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[1];
+  BUF->seqno[2] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[2];
+  BUF->seqno[3] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[3];
+
+  BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_TCP;
+  
+  BUF->srcport  = uip_connr->lport;
+  BUF->destport = uip_connr->rport;
+
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr);
+
+  if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED) {
+    /* If the connection has issued uip_stop(), we advertise a zero
+       window so that the remote host will stop sending data. */
+    BUF->wnd[0] = BUF->wnd[1] = 0;
+  } else {
+    BUF->wnd[0] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) >> 8);
+    BUF->wnd[1] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) & 0xff);
+  }
+
+ tcp_send_noconn:
+  BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+     length. */
+  BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  BUF->urgp[0] = BUF->urgp[1] = 0;
+  
+  /* Calculate TCP checksum. */
+  BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
+  BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
+
+ ip_send_nolen:
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  BUF->vtc = 0x60;
+  BUF->tcflow = 0x00;
+  BUF->flow = 0x00;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  BUF->vhl = 0x45;
+  BUF->tos = 0;
+  BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0;
+  ++ipid;
+  BUF->ipid[0] = ipid >> 8;
+  BUF->ipid[1] = ipid & 0xff;
+  /* Calculate IP checksum. */
+  BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+  BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("uip ip_send_nolen: chkecum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum());
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */   
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.sent);
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+ send:
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("Sending packet with length %d (%d)\n", uip_len,
+	       (BUF->len[0] << 8) | BUF->len[1]);
+  
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.sent);
+  /* Return and let the caller do the actual transmission. */
+  uip_flags = 0;
+  return;
+
+ drop:
+  uip_len = 0;
+  uip_flags = 0;
+  return;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+u16_t
+htons(u16_t val)
+{
+  return HTONS(val);
+}
+
+u32_t
+htonl(u32_t val)
+{
+  return HTONL(val);
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_send(const void *data, int len)
+{
+  int copylen;
+#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b)? (a): (b))
+  copylen = MIN(len, UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN -
+		(int)((char *)uip_sappdata - (char *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN]));
+  if(copylen > 0) {
+    uip_slen = copylen;
+    if(data != uip_sappdata) {
+      memcpy(uip_sappdata, (data), uip_slen);
+    }
+  }
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @} */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h
index 3e8504c49..a10699dc1 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h
@@ -1,2129 +1,2129 @@
-
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Header file for the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- * \author  Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
- * \author  Julien Abeille <jabeille@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code)
- * \author  Mathilde Durvy <mdurvy@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code)
- *
- * The uIP TCP/IP stack header file contains definitions for a number
- * of C macros that are used by uIP programs as well as internal uIP
- * structures, TCP/IP header structures and function declarations.
- *
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
- *    products derived from this software without specific prior
- *    written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
- * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
- * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
- * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
- * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
- * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
- * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
- * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
- * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- *
- * $Id: uip.h,v 1.24 2009/04/06 13:18:50 nvt-se Exp $
- *
- */
-
-#ifndef __UIP_H__
-#define __UIP_H__
-
-#include "uipopt.h"
-
-/**
- * Representation of an IP address.
- *
- */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-typedef union uip_ip6addr_t {
-  u8_t  u8[16];			/* Initializer, must come first!!! */
-  u16_t u16[8];
-} uip_ip6addr_t;
-
-typedef uip_ip6addr_t uip_ipaddr_t;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-typedef union uip_ip4addr_t {
-  u8_t  u8[4];			/* Initializer, must come first!!! */
-  u16_t u16[2];
-#if 0
-  u32_t u32;
-#endif
-} uip_ip4addr_t;
-typedef uip_ip4addr_t uip_ipaddr_t;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/** \brief 16 bit 802.15.4 address */
-struct uip_802154_shortaddr {
-  u8_t addr[2];
-};
-/** \brief 64 bit 802.15.4 address */
-struct uip_802154_longaddr {
-  u8_t addr[8];
-};
-
-/** \brief 802.11 address */
-struct uip_80211_addr {
-  u8_t addr[6];
-};
-
-/** \brief 802.3 address */
-struct uip_eth_addr {
-  u8_t addr[6];
-};
-
-#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154
-/** \brief 802.15.4 address */
-typedef struct uip_802154_longaddr uip_lladdr_t;
-#define UIP_802154_SHORTADDR_LEN 2
-#define UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN  8
-#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN
-#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
-#if UIP_CONF_LL_80211
-/** \brief 802.11 address */
-typedef struct uip_80211_addr uip_lladdr_t;
-#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6
-#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/
-/** \brief Ethernet address */
-typedef struct uip_eth_addr uip_lladdr_t;
-#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* First, the functions that should be called from the
- * system. Initialization, the periodic timer, and incoming packets are
- * handled by the following three functions.
- */
-/**
- * \defgroup uipconffunc uIP configuration functions
- * @{
- *
- * The uIP configuration functions are used for setting run-time
- * parameters in uIP such as IP addresses.
- */
-
-/**
- * Set the IP address of this host.
- *
- * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first
- * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte
- * array.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
-
- uip_ipaddr_t addr;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,1,2);
- uip_sethostaddr(&addr);
- 
- \endcode
- * \param addr A pointer to an IP address of type uip_ipaddr_t;
- *
- * \sa uip_ipaddr()
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_sethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_hostaddr, (addr))
-
-/**
- * Get the IP address of this host.
- *
- * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first
- * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte
- * array.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t hostaddr;
-
- uip_gethostaddr(&hostaddr);
- \endcode
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
- * filled in with the currently configured IP address.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_gethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_hostaddr)
-
-/**
- * Set the default router's IP address.
- *
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP
- * address of the default router.
- *
- * \sa uip_ipaddr()
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_setdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_draddr, (addr))
-
-/**
- * Set the netmask.
- *
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP
- * address of the netmask.
- *
- * \sa uip_ipaddr()
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_setnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_netmask, (addr))
-
-
-/**
- * Get the default router's IP address.
- *
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
- * filled in with the IP address of the default router.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_getdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_draddr)
-
-/**
- * Get the netmask.
- *
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
- * filled in with the value of the netmask.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_getnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_netmask)
-
-/** @} */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipinit uIP initialization functions
- * @{
- *
- * The uIP initialization functions are used for booting uIP.
- */
-
-/**
- * uIP initialization function.
- *
- * This function should be called at boot up to initilize the uIP
- * TCP/IP stack.
- */
-void uip_init(void);
-
-/**
- * uIP initialization function.
- *
- * This function may be used at boot time to set the initial ip_id.
- */
-void uip_setipid(u16_t id);
-
-/** @} */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipdevfunc uIP device driver functions
- * @{
- *
- * These functions are used by a network device driver for interacting
- * with uIP.
- */
-
-/**
- * Process an incoming packet.
- *
- * This function should be called when the device driver has received
- * a packet from the network. The packet from the device driver must
- * be present in the uip_buf buffer, and the length of the packet
- * should be placed in the uip_len variable.
- *
- * When the function returns, there may be an outbound packet placed
- * in the uip_buf packet buffer. If so, the uip_len variable is set to
- * the length of the packet. If no packet is to be sent out, the
- * uip_len variable is set to 0.
- *
- * The usual way of calling the function is presented by the source
- * code below.
- \code
- uip_len = devicedriver_poll();
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- uip_input();
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP
- * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over
- * Ethernet, you will need to call the uIP ARP code before calling
- * this function:
- \code
- #define BUF ((struct uip_eth_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
- uip_len = ethernet_devicedrver_poll();
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP)) {
- uip_arp_ipin();
- uip_input();
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- uip_arp_out();
- ethernet_devicedriver_send();
- }
- } else if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP)) {
- uip_arp_arpin();
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- ethernet_devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_input()        uip_process(UIP_DATA)
-
-
-/**
- * Periodic processing for a connection identified by its number.
- *
- * This function does the necessary periodic processing (timers,
- * polling) for a uIP TCP conneciton, and should be called when the
- * periodic uIP timer goes off. It should be called for every
- * connection, regardless of whether they are open of closed.
- *
- * When the function returns, it may have an outbound packet waiting
- * for service in the uIP packet buffer, and if so the uip_len
- * variable is set to a value larger than zero. The device driver
- * should be called to send out the packet.
- *
- * The usual way of calling the function is through a for() loop like
- * this:
- \code
- for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) {
- uip_periodic(i);
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP
- * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over
- * Ethernet, you will need to call the uip_arp_out() function before
- * calling the device driver:
- \code
- for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) {
- uip_periodic(i);
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- uip_arp_out();
- ethernet_devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \param conn The number of the connection which is to be periodically polled.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#if UIP_TCP
-#define uip_periodic(conn) do { uip_conn = &uip_conns[conn];    \
-    uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0)
-
-/**
- *
- *
- */
-#define uip_conn_active(conn) (uip_conns[conn].tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED)
-
-/**
- * Perform periodic processing for a connection identified by a pointer
- * to its structure.
- *
- * Same as uip_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual uip_conn
- * struct instead of an integer as its argument. This function can be
- * used to force periodic processing of a specific connection.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to
- * be processed.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn;   \
-    uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0)
-
-/**
- * Request that a particular connection should be polled.
- *
- * Similar to uip_periodic_conn() but does not perform any timer
- * processing. The application is polled for new data.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to
- * be processed.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_poll_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn;       \
-    uip_process(UIP_POLL_REQUEST); } while (0)
-
-#endif /* UIP_TCP */
-
-#if UIP_UDP
-/**
- * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by its number.
- *
- * This function is essentially the same as uip_periodic(), but for
- * UDP connections. It is called in a similar fashion as the
- * uip_periodic() function:
- \code
- for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) {
- uip_udp_periodic(i);
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \note As for the uip_periodic() function, special care has to be
- * taken when using uIP together with ARP and Ethernet:
- \code
- for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) {
- uip_udp_periodic(i);
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- uip_arp_out();
- ethernet_devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \param conn The number of the UDP connection to be processed.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_udp_periodic(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[conn]; \
-    uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0)
-
-/**
- * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by a pointer to
- * its structure.
- *
- * Same as uip_udp_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual
- * uip_conn struct instead of an integer as its argument. This
- * function can be used to force periodic processing of a specific
- * connection.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn struct for the connection
- * to be processed.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_udp_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = conn;   \
-    uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0)
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-/** \brief Abandon the reassembly of the current packet */
-void uip_reass_over(void);
-
-/**
- * The uIP packet buffer.
- *
- * The uip_buf array is used to hold incoming and outgoing
- * packets. The device driver should place incoming data into this
- * buffer. When sending data, the device driver should read the link
- * level headers and the TCP/IP headers from this buffer. The size of
- * the link level headers is configured by the UIP_LLH_LEN define.
- *
- * \note The application data need not be placed in this buffer, so
- * the device driver must read it from the place pointed to by the
- * uip_appdata pointer as illustrated by the following example:
- \code
- void
- devicedriver_send(void)
- {
- hwsend(&uip_buf[0], UIP_LLH_LEN);
- if(uip_len <= UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN) {
- hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN);
- } else {
- hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_TCPIP_HLEN);
- hwsend(uip_appdata, uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN);
- }
- }
- \endcode
-*/
-extern u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE+2];
-
-
-
-/** @} */
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Functions that are used by the uIP application program. Opening and
- * closing connections, sending and receiving data, etc. is all
- * handled by the functions below.
- */
-/**
- * \defgroup uipappfunc uIP application functions
- * @{
- *
- * Functions used by an application running of top of uIP.
- */
-
-/**
- * Start listening to the specified port.
- *
- * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte
- * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
- *
- \code
- uip_listen(HTONS(80));
- \endcode
- *
- * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
- */
-void uip_listen(u16_t port);
-
-/**
- * Stop listening to the specified port.
- *
- * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte
- * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
- *
- \code
- uip_unlisten(HTONS(80));
- \endcode
- *
- * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
- */
-void uip_unlisten(u16_t port);
-
-/**
- * Connect to a remote host using TCP.
- *
- * This function is used to start a new connection to the specified
- * port on the specified host. It allocates a new connection identifier,
- * sets the connection to the SYN_SENT state and sets the
- * retransmission timer to 0. This will cause a TCP SYN segment to be
- * sent out the next time this connection is periodically processed,
- * which usually is done within 0.5 seconds after the call to
- * uip_connect().
- *
- * \note This function is available only if support for active open
- * has been configured by defining UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN to 1 in uipopt.h.
- *
- * \note Since this function requires the port number to be in network
- * byte order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
- *
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2);
- uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80));
- \endcode
- *
- * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host.
- *
- * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
- *
- * \return A pointer to the uIP connection identifier for the new connection,
- * or NULL if no connection could be allocated.
- *
- */
-struct uip_conn *uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t port);
-
-
-
-/**
- * \internal
- *
- * Check if a connection has outstanding (i.e., unacknowledged) data.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn structure for the connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_outstanding(conn) ((conn)->len)
-
-/**
- * Send data on the current connection.
- *
- * This function is used to send out a single segment of TCP
- * data. Only applications that have been invoked by uIP for event
- * processing can send data.
- *
- * The amount of data that actually is sent out after a call to this
- * function is determined by the maximum amount of data TCP allows. uIP
- * will automatically crop the data so that only the appropriate
- * amount of data is sent. The function uip_mss() can be used to query
- * uIP for the amount of data that actually will be sent.
- *
- * \note This function does not guarantee that the sent data will
- * arrive at the destination. If the data is lost in the network, the
- * application will be invoked with the uip_rexmit() event being
- * set. The application will then have to resend the data using this
- * function.
- *
- * \param data A pointer to the data which is to be sent.
- *
- * \param len The maximum amount of data bytes to be sent.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-void uip_send(const void *data, int len);
-
-/**
- * The length of any incoming data that is currently available (if available)
- * in the uip_appdata buffer.
- *
- * The test function uip_data() must first be used to check if there
- * is any data available at all.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-/*void uip_datalen(void);*/
-#define uip_datalen()       uip_len
-
-/**
- * The length of any out-of-band data (urgent data) that has arrived
- * on the connection.
- *
- * \note The configuration parameter UIP_URGDATA must be set for this
- * function to be enabled.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_urgdatalen()    uip_urglen
-
-/**
- * Close the current connection.
- *
- * This function will close the current connection in a nice way.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_close()         (uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE)
-
-/**
- * Abort the current connection.
- *
- * This function will abort (reset) the current connection, and is
- * usually used when an error has occurred that prevents using the
- * uip_close() function.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_abort()         (uip_flags = UIP_ABORT)
-
-/**
- * Tell the sending host to stop sending data.
- *
- * This function will close our receiver's window so that we stop
- * receiving data for the current connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_stop()          (uip_conn->tcpstateflags |= UIP_STOPPED)
-
-/**
- * Find out if the current connection has been previously stopped with
- * uip_stop().
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_stopped(conn)   ((conn)->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)
-
-/**
- * Restart the current connection, if is has previously been stopped
- * with uip_stop().
- *
- * This function will open the receiver's window again so that we
- * start receiving data for the current connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_restart()         do { uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;    \
-    uip_conn->tcpstateflags &= ~UIP_STOPPED;                    \
-  } while(0)
-
-
-/* uIP tests that can be made to determine in what state the current
-   connection is, and what the application function should do. */
-
-/**
- * Is the current connection a UDP connection?
- *
- * This function checks whether the current connection is a UDP connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- *
- */
-#define uip_udpconnection() (uip_conn == NULL)
-
-/**
- * Is new incoming data available?
- *
- * Will reduce to non-zero if there is new data for the application
- * present at the uip_appdata pointer. The size of the data is
- * available through the uip_len variable.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_newdata()   (uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA)
-
-/**
- * Has previously sent data been acknowledged?
- *
- * Will reduce to non-zero if the previously sent data has been
- * acknowledged by the remote host. This means that the application
- * can send new data.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_acked()   (uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA)
-
-/**
- * Has the connection just been connected?
- *
- * Reduces to non-zero if the current connection has been connected to
- * a remote host. This will happen both if the connection has been
- * actively opened (with uip_connect()) or passively opened (with
- * uip_listen()).
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_connected() (uip_flags & UIP_CONNECTED)
-
-/**
- * Has the connection been closed by the other end?
- *
- * Is non-zero if the connection has been closed by the remote
- * host. The application may then do the necessary clean-ups.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_closed()    (uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE)
-
-/**
- * Has the connection been aborted by the other end?
- *
- * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted (reset) by the
- * remote host.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_aborted()    (uip_flags & UIP_ABORT)
-
-/**
- * Has the connection timed out?
- *
- * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted due to too many
- * retransmissions.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_timedout()    (uip_flags & UIP_TIMEDOUT)
-
-/**
- * Do we need to retransmit previously data?
- *
- * Reduces to non-zero if the previously sent data has been lost in
- * the network, and the application should retransmit it. The
- * application should send the exact same data as it did the last
- * time, using the uip_send() function.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_rexmit()     (uip_flags & UIP_REXMIT)
-
-/**
- * Is the connection being polled by uIP?
- *
- * Is non-zero if the reason the application is invoked is that the
- * current connection has been idle for a while and should be
- * polled.
- *
- * The polling event can be used for sending data without having to
- * wait for the remote host to send data.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_poll()       (uip_flags & UIP_POLL)
-
-/**
- * Get the initial maximum segment size (MSS) of the current
- * connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_initialmss()             (uip_conn->initialmss)
-
-/**
- * Get the current maximum segment size that can be sent on the current
- * connection.
- *
- * The current maximum segment size that can be sent on the
- * connection is computed from the receiver's window and the MSS of
- * the connection (which also is available by calling
- * uip_initialmss()).
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_mss()             (uip_conn->mss)
-
-/**
- * Set up a new UDP connection.
- *
- * This function sets up a new UDP connection. The function will
- * automatically allocate an unused local port for the new
- * connection. However, another port can be chosen by using the
- * uip_udp_bind() call, after the uip_udp_new() function has been
- * called.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t addr;
- struct uip_udp_conn *c;
- 
- uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,2,1);
- c = uip_udp_new(&addr, HTONS(12345));
- if(c != NULL) {
- uip_udp_bind(c, HTONS(12344));
- }
- \endcode
- * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host.
- *
- * \param rport The remote port number in network byte order.
- *
- * \return The uip_udp_conn structure for the new connection or NULL
- * if no connection could be allocated.
- */
-struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport);
-
-/**
- * Removed a UDP connection.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_udp_remove(conn) (conn)->lport = 0
-
-/**
- * Bind a UDP connection to a local port.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the
- * connection.
- *
- * \param port The local port number, in network byte order.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_udp_bind(conn, port) (conn)->lport = port
-
-/**
- * Send a UDP datagram of length len on the current connection.
- *
- * This function can only be called in response to a UDP event (poll
- * or newdata). The data must be present in the uip_buf buffer, at the
- * place pointed to by the uip_appdata pointer.
- *
- * \param len The length of the data in the uip_buf buffer.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_udp_send(len) uip_send((char *)uip_appdata, len)
-
-/** @} */
-
-/* uIP convenience and converting functions. */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipconvfunc uIP conversion functions
- * @{
- *
- * These functions can be used for converting between different data
- * formats used by uIP.
- */
- 
-/**
- * Convert an IP address to four bytes separated by commas.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- printf("ipaddr=%d.%d.%d.%d\n", uip_ipaddr_to_quad(&ipaddr));
- \endcode
- *
- * \param a A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t.
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr_to_quad(a) (a)->u8[0],(a)->u8[1],(a)->u8[2],(a)->u8[3]
-
-/**
- * Construct an IP address from four bytes.
- *
- * This function constructs an IP address of the type that uIP handles
- * internally from four bytes. The function is handy for specifying IP
- * addresses to use with e.g. the uip_connect() function.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- struct uip_conn *c;
- 
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2);
- c = uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80));
- \endcode
- *
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
- * filled in with the IP address.
- *
- * \param addr0 The first octet of the IP address.
- * \param addr1 The second octet of the IP address.
- * \param addr2 The third octet of the IP address.
- * \param addr3 The forth octet of the IP address.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3) do {  \
-    (addr)->u8[0] = addr0;                              \
-    (addr)->u8[1] = addr1;                              \
-    (addr)->u8[2] = addr2;                              \
-    (addr)->u8[3] = addr3;                              \
-  } while(0)
-
-/**
- * Construct an IPv6 address from eight 16-bit words.
- *
- * This function constructs an IPv6 address.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ip6addr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7) do { \
-    (addr)->u16[0] = HTONS(addr0);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[1] = HTONS(addr1);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[2] = HTONS(addr2);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[3] = HTONS(addr3);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[4] = HTONS(addr4);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[5] = HTONS(addr5);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[6] = HTONS(addr6);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[7] = HTONS(addr7);                                      \
-  } while(0)
-
-/**
- * Construct an IPv6 address from eight 8-bit words.
- *
- * This function constructs an IPv6 address.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ip6addr_u8(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7,addr8,addr9,addr10,addr11,addr12,addr13,addr14,addr15) do { \
-    (addr)->u8[0] = addr0;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[1] = addr1;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[2] = addr2;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[3] = addr3;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[4] = addr4;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[5] = addr5;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[6] = addr6;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[7] = addr7;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[8] = addr8;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[9] = addr9;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[10] = addr10;                                     \
-    (addr)->u8[11] = addr11;                                     \
-    (addr)->u8[12] = addr12;                                     \
-    (addr)->u8[13] = addr13;                                     \
-    (addr)->u8[14] = addr14;                                     \
-    (addr)->u8[15] = addr15;                                     \
-  } while(0)
-
-
-/**
- * Copy an IP address to another IP address.
- *
- * Copies an IP address from one place to another.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
- uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1);
- \endcode
- *
- * \param dest The destination for the copy.
- * \param src The source from where to copy.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef uip_ipaddr_copy
-#define uip_ipaddr_copy(dest, src) (*(dest) = *(src))
-#endif
-
-/**
- * Compare two IP addresses
- *
- * Compares two IP addresses.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
- if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1)) {
- printf("They are the same");
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \param addr1 The first IP address.
- * \param addr2 The second IP address.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) ((addr1)->u16[0] == (addr2)->u16[0] && \
-				      (addr1)->u16[1] == (addr2)->u16[1])
-#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, sizeof(uip_ip6addr_t)) == 0)
-#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-/**
- * Compare two IP addresses with netmasks
- *
- * Compares two IP addresses with netmasks. The masks are used to mask
- * out the bits that are to be compared.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, mask;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&mask, 255,255,255,0);
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr2, 192,16,1,3);
- if(uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&ipaddr1, &ipaddr2, &mask)) {
- printf("They are the same");
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \param addr1 The first IP address.
- * \param addr2 The second IP address.
- * \param mask The netmask.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-#define uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(addr1, addr2, mask)          \
-  (((((u16_t *)addr1)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0]) ==       \
-    (((u16_t *)addr2)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0])) &&      \
-   ((((u16_t *)addr1)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1]) ==       \
-    (((u16_t *)addr2)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1])))
-#else
-#define uip_ipaddr_prefixcmp(addr1, addr2, length) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, length>>3) == 0)
-#endif
-
-
-/**
- * Check if an address is a broadcast address for a network.
- *
- * Checks if an address is the broadcast address for a network. The
- * network is defined by an IP address that is on the network and the
- * network's netmask.
- *
- * \param addr The IP address.
- * \param netaddr The network's IP address.
- * \param netmask The network's netmask.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-/*#define uip_ipaddr_isbroadcast(addr, netaddr, netmask)
-  ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16 & ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16*/
-
-
-
-/**
- * Mask out the network part of an IP address.
- *
- * Masks out the network part of an IP address, given the address and
- * the netmask.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, netmask;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
- uip_ipaddr(&netmask, 255,255,255,0);
- uip_ipaddr_mask(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1, &netmask);
- \endcode
- *
- * In the example above, the variable "ipaddr2" will contain the IP
- * address 192.168.1.0.
- *
- * \param dest Where the result is to be placed.
- * \param src The IP address.
- * \param mask The netmask.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr_mask(dest, src, mask) do {                           \
-    ((u16_t *)dest)[0] = ((u16_t *)src)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0];        \
-    ((u16_t *)dest)[1] = ((u16_t *)src)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1];        \
-  } while(0)
-
-/**
- * Pick the first octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Picks out the first octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- u8_t octet;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
- octet = uip_ipaddr1(&ipaddr);
- \endcode
- *
- * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 1.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr1(addr) ((addr)->u8[0])
-
-/**
- * Pick the second octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Picks out the second octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- u8_t octet;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
- octet = uip_ipaddr2(&ipaddr);
- \endcode
- *
- * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 2.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr2(addr) ((addr)->u8[1])
-
-/**
- * Pick the third octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Picks out the third octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- u8_t octet;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
- octet = uip_ipaddr3(&ipaddr);
- \endcode
- *
- * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 3.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr3(addr) ((addr)->u8[2])
-
-/**
- * Pick the fourth octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Picks out the fourth octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- u8_t octet;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
- octet = uip_ipaddr4(&ipaddr);
- \endcode
- *
- * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 4.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr4(addr) ((addr)->u8[3])
-
-/**
- * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
- *
- * This macro is primarily used for converting constants from host
- * byte order to network byte order. For converting variables to
- * network byte order, use the htons() function instead.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef HTONS
-#   if UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN
-#      define HTONS(n) (n)
-#      define HTONL(n) (n)
-#   else /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
-#      define HTONS(n) (u16_t)((((u16_t) (n)) << 8) | (((u16_t) (n)) >> 8))
-#      define HTONL(n) (((u32_t)HTONS(n) << 16) | HTONS((u32_t)(n) >> 16))
-#   endif /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
-#else
-#error "HTONS already defined!"
-#endif /* HTONS */
-
-/**
- * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
- *
- * This function is primarily used for converting variables from host
- * byte order to network byte order. For converting constants to
- * network byte order, use the HTONS() macro instead.
- */
-#ifndef htons
-u16_t htons(u16_t val);
-#endif /* htons */
-#ifndef ntohs
-#define ntohs htons
-#endif
-
-#ifndef htonl
-u32_t htonl(u32_t val);
-#endif /* htonl */
-#ifndef ntohl
-#define ntohl htonl
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
-/**
- * Pointer to the application data in the packet buffer.
- *
- * This pointer points to the application data when the application is
- * called. If the application wishes to send data, the application may
- * use this space to write the data into before calling uip_send().
- */
-extern void *uip_appdata;
-
-#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
-/* u8_t *uip_urgdata:
- *
- * This pointer points to any urgent data that has been received. Only
- * present if compiled with support for urgent data (UIP_URGDATA).
- */
-extern void *uip_urgdata;
-#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
-
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipdrivervars Variables used in uIP device drivers
- * @{
- *
- * uIP has a few global variables that are used in device drivers for
- * uIP.
- */
-
-/**
- * The length of the packet in the uip_buf buffer.
- *
- * The global variable uip_len holds the length of the packet in the
- * uip_buf buffer.
- *
- * When the network device driver calls the uIP input function,
- * uip_len should be set to the length of the packet in the uip_buf
- * buffer.
- *
- * When sending packets, the device driver should use the contents of
- * the uip_len variable to determine the length of the outgoing
- * packet.
- *
- */
-extern u16_t uip_len;
-
-/**
- * The length of the extension headers
- */
-extern u8_t uip_ext_len;
-/** @} */
-
-#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
-extern u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen;
-#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
-
-
-/**
- * Representation of a uIP TCP connection.
- *
- * The uip_conn structure is used for identifying a connection. All
- * but one field in the structure are to be considered read-only by an
- * application. The only exception is the appstate field whose purpose
- * is to let the application store application-specific state (e.g.,
- * file pointers) for the connection. The type of this field is
- * configured in the "uipopt.h" header file.
- */
-struct uip_conn {
-  uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr;   /**< The IP address of the remote host. */
-  
-  u16_t lport;        /**< The local TCP port, in network byte order. */
-  u16_t rport;        /**< The local remote TCP port, in network byte
-			 order. */
-  
-  u8_t rcv_nxt[4];    /**< The sequence number that we expect to
-			 receive next. */
-  u8_t snd_nxt[4];    /**< The sequence number that was last sent by
-                         us. */
-  u16_t len;          /**< Length of the data that was previously sent. */
-  u16_t mss;          /**< Current maximum segment size for the
-			 connection. */
-  u16_t initialmss;   /**< Initial maximum segment size for the
-			 connection. */
-  u8_t sa;            /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state
-			 variable. */
-  u8_t sv;            /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state
-			 variable. */
-  u8_t rto;           /**< Retransmission time-out. */
-  u8_t tcpstateflags; /**< TCP state and flags. */
-  u8_t timer;         /**< The retransmission timer. */
-  u8_t nrtx;          /**< The number of retransmissions for the last
-			 segment sent. */
-
-  /** The application state. */
-  uip_tcp_appstate_t appstate;
-};
-
-
-/**
- * Pointer to the current TCP connection.
- *
- * The uip_conn pointer can be used to access the current TCP
- * connection.
- */
-
-extern struct uip_conn *uip_conn;
-#if UIP_TCP
-/* The array containing all uIP connections. */
-extern struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS];
-#endif
-
-/**
- * \addtogroup uiparch
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * 4-byte array used for the 32-bit sequence number calculations.
- */
-extern u8_t uip_acc32[4];
-/** @} */
-
-/**
- * Representation of a uIP UDP connection.
- */
-struct uip_udp_conn {
-  uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr;   /**< The IP address of the remote peer. */
-  u16_t lport;        /**< The local port number in network byte order. */
-  u16_t rport;        /**< The remote port number in network byte order. */
-  u8_t  ttl;          /**< Default time-to-live. */
-
-  /** The application state. */
-  uip_udp_appstate_t appstate;
-};
-
-/**
- * The current UDP connection.
- */
-extern struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn;
-extern struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
-
-struct uip_router {
-  int (*activate)(void);
-  int (*deactivate)(void);
-  uip_ipaddr_t *(*lookup)(uip_ipaddr_t *destipaddr, uip_ipaddr_t *nexthop);
-};
-
-#if UIP_CONF_ROUTER
-extern const struct uip_router *uip_router;
-
-/**
- * uIP routing driver registration function.
- */
-void uip_router_register(const struct uip_router *router);
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_ROUTER*/
-
-#if UIP_CONF_ICMP6
-struct uip_icmp6_conn {
-  uip_icmp6_appstate_t appstate;
-};
-extern struct uip_icmp6_conn uip_icmp6_conns;
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_ICMP6*/
-
-/**
- * The uIP TCP/IP statistics.
- *
- * This is the variable in which the uIP TCP/IP statistics are gathered.
- */
-#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1
-extern struct uip_stats uip_stat;
-#define UIP_STAT(s) s
-#else
-#define UIP_STAT(s)
-#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */
-
-/**
- * The structure holding the TCP/IP statistics that are gathered if
- * UIP_STATISTICS is set to 1.
- *
- */
-struct uip_stats {
-  struct {
-    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received packets at the IP
-			     layer. */
-    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent packets at the IP
-			     layer. */
-    uip_stats_t forwarded;/**< Number of forwarded packets at the IP 
-			     layer. */
-    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped packets at the IP
-			     layer. */
-    uip_stats_t vhlerr;   /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
-			     IP version or header length. */
-    uip_stats_t hblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
-			     IP length, high byte. */
-    uip_stats_t lblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
-			     IP length, low byte. */
-    uip_stats_t fragerr;  /**< Number of packets dropped since they
-			     were IP fragments. */
-    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of packets dropped due to IP
-			     checksum errors. */
-    uip_stats_t protoerr; /**< Number of packets dropped since they
-			     were neither ICMP, UDP nor TCP. */
-  } ip;                   /**< IP statistics. */
-  struct {
-    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received ICMP packets. */
-    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent ICMP packets. */
-    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped ICMP packets. */
-    uip_stats_t typeerr;  /**< Number of ICMP packets with a wrong
-			     type. */
-    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of ICMP packets with a bad
-			     checksum. */
-  } icmp;                 /**< ICMP statistics. */
-#if UIP_TCP
-  struct {
-    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of recived TCP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent TCP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped TCP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad
-			     checksum. */
-    uip_stats_t ackerr;   /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad ACK
-			     number. */
-    uip_stats_t rst;      /**< Number of recevied TCP RST (reset) segments. */
-    uip_stats_t rexmit;   /**< Number of retransmitted TCP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t syndrop;  /**< Number of dropped SYNs due to too few
-			     connections was avaliable. */
-    uip_stats_t synrst;   /**< Number of SYNs for closed ports,
-			     triggering a RST. */
-  } tcp;                  /**< TCP statistics. */
-#endif
-#if UIP_UDP
-  struct {
-    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped UDP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of recived UDP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent UDP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of UDP segments with a bad
-			     checksum. */
-  } udp;                  /**< UDP statistics. */
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  struct {
-    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped ND6 packets. */
-    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of recived ND6 packets */
-    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent ND6 packets */
-  } nd6;
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
-};
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* All the stuff below this point is internal to uIP and should not be
- * used directly by an application or by a device driver.
- */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-
-/* u8_t uip_flags:
- *
- * When the application is called, uip_flags will contain the flags
- * that are defined in this file. Please read below for more
- * information.
- */
-extern u8_t uip_flags;
-
-/* The following flags may be set in the global variable uip_flags
-   before calling the application callback. The UIP_ACKDATA,
-   UIP_NEWDATA, and UIP_CLOSE flags may both be set at the same time,
-   whereas the others are mutually exclusive. Note that these flags
-   should *NOT* be accessed directly, but only through the uIP
-   functions/macros. */
-
-#define UIP_ACKDATA   1     /* Signifies that the outstanding data was
-			       acked and the application should send
-			       out new data instead of retransmitting
-			       the last data. */
-#define UIP_NEWDATA   2     /* Flags the fact that the peer has sent
-			       us new data. */
-#define UIP_REXMIT    4     /* Tells the application to retransmit the
-			       data that was last sent. */
-#define UIP_POLL      8     /* Used for polling the application, to
-			       check if the application has data that
-			       it wants to send. */
-#define UIP_CLOSE     16    /* The remote host has closed the
-			       connection, thus the connection has
-			       gone away. Or the application signals
-			       that it wants to close the
-			       connection. */
-#define UIP_ABORT     32    /* The remote host has aborted the
-			       connection, thus the connection has
-			       gone away. Or the application signals
-			       that it wants to abort the
-			       connection. */
-#define UIP_CONNECTED 64    /* We have got a connection from a remote
-                               host and have set up a new connection
-                               for it, or an active connection has
-                               been successfully established. */
-
-#define UIP_TIMEDOUT  128   /* The connection has been aborted due to
-			       too many retransmissions. */
-
-
-/**
- * \brief process the options within a hop by hop or destination option header
- * \retval 0: nothing to send,
- * \retval 1: drop pkt
- * \retval 2: ICMP error message to send
-*/
-/*static u8_t
-uip_ext_hdr_options_process(); */
-
-/* uip_process(flag):
- *
- * The actual uIP function which does all the work.
- */
-void uip_process(u8_t flag);
-  
-  /* The following flags are passed as an argument to the uip_process()
-   function. They are used to distinguish between the two cases where
-   uip_process() is called. It can be called either because we have
-   incoming data that should be processed, or because the periodic
-   timer has fired. These values are never used directly, but only in
-   the macros defined in this file. */
- 
-#define UIP_DATA          1     /* Tells uIP that there is incoming
-				   data in the uip_buf buffer. The
-				   length of the data is stored in the
-				   global variable uip_len. */
-#define UIP_TIMER         2     /* Tells uIP that the periodic timer
-				   has fired. */
-#define UIP_POLL_REQUEST  3     /* Tells uIP that a connection should
-				   be polled. */
-#define UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN 4     /* Tells uIP that a UDP datagram
-				   should be constructed in the
-				   uip_buf buffer. */
-#if UIP_UDP
-#define UIP_UDP_TIMER     5
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-/* The TCP states used in the uip_conn->tcpstateflags. */
-#define UIP_CLOSED      0
-#define UIP_SYN_RCVD    1
-#define UIP_SYN_SENT    2
-#define UIP_ESTABLISHED 3
-#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_1  4
-#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_2  5
-#define UIP_CLOSING     6
-#define UIP_TIME_WAIT   7
-#define UIP_LAST_ACK    8
-#define UIP_TS_MASK     15
-  
-#define UIP_STOPPED      16
-
-/* The TCP and IP headers. */
-struct uip_tcpip_hdr {
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* IPv6 header. */
-  u8_t vtc,
-    tcflow;
-  u16_t flow;
-  u8_t len[2];
-  u8_t proto, ttl;
-  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  /* IPv4 header. */
-  u8_t vhl,
-    tos,
-    len[2],
-    ipid[2],
-    ipoffset[2],
-    ttl,
-    proto;
-  u16_t ipchksum;
-  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  
-  /* TCP header. */
-  u16_t srcport,
-    destport;
-  u8_t seqno[4],
-    ackno[4],
-    tcpoffset,
-    flags,
-    wnd[2];
-  u16_t tcpchksum;
-  u8_t urgp[2];
-  u8_t optdata[4];
-};
-
-/* The ICMP and IP headers. */
-struct uip_icmpip_hdr {
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* IPv6 header. */
-  u8_t vtc,
-    tcf;
-  u16_t flow;
-  u8_t len[2];
-  u8_t proto, ttl;
-  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  /* IPv4 header. */
-  u8_t vhl,
-    tos,
-    len[2],
-    ipid[2],
-    ipoffset[2],
-    ttl,
-    proto;
-  u16_t ipchksum;
-  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  
-  /* ICMP header. */
-  u8_t type, icode;
-  u16_t icmpchksum;
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  u16_t id, seqno;
-  u8_t payload[1];
-#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-};
-
-
-/* The UDP and IP headers. */
-struct uip_udpip_hdr {
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* IPv6 header. */
-  u8_t vtc,
-    tcf;
-  u16_t flow;
-  u8_t len[2];
-  u8_t proto, ttl;
-  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  /* IP header. */
-  u8_t vhl,
-    tos,
-    len[2],
-    ipid[2],
-    ipoffset[2],
-    ttl,
-    proto;
-  u16_t ipchksum;
-  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  
-  /* UDP header. */
-  u16_t srcport,
-    destport;
-  u16_t udplen;
-  u16_t udpchksum;
-};
-
-/*
- * In IPv6 the length of the L3 headers before the transport header is
- * not fixed, due to the possibility to include extension option headers
- * after the IP header. hence we split here L3 and L4 headers
- */
-/* The IP header */
-struct uip_ip_hdr {
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* IPV6 header */
-  u8_t vtc;
-  u8_t tcflow;
-  u16_t flow;
-  u8_t len[2];
-  u8_t proto, ttl;
-  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  /* IPV4 header */
-  u8_t vhl,
-    tos,
-    len[2],
-    ipid[2],
-    ipoffset[2],
-    ttl,
-    proto;
-  u16_t ipchksum;
-  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-};
-
-
-/*
- * IPv6 extension option headers: we are able to process
- * the 4 extension headers defined in RFC2460 (IPv6):
- * - Hop by hop option header, destination option header:
- *   These two are not used by any core IPv6 protocol, hence
- *   we just read them and go to the next. They convey options,
- *   the options defined in RFC2460 are Pad1 and PadN, which do
- *   some padding, and that we do not need to read (the length
- *   field in the header is enough)
- * - Routing header: this one is most notably used by MIPv6,
- *   which we do not implement, hence we just read it and go
- *   to the next
- * - Fragmentation header: we read this header and are able to
- *   reassemble packets
- *
- * We do not offer any means to send packets with extension headers
- *
- * We do not implement Authentication and ESP headers, which are
- * used in IPSec and defined in RFC4302,4303,4305,4385
- */
-/* common header part */
-struct uip_ext_hdr {
-  u8_t next;
-  u8_t len;
-};
-
-/* Hop by Hop option header */
-struct uip_hbho_hdr {
-  u8_t next;
-  u8_t len;
-};
-
-/* destination option header */
-struct uip_desto_hdr {
-  u8_t next;
-  u8_t len;
-};
-
-/* We do not define structures for PAD1 and PADN options */
-
-/*
- * routing header
- * the routing header as 4 common bytes, then routing header type
- * specific data there are several types of routing header. Type 0 was
- * deprecated as per RFC5095 most notable other type is 2, used in
- * RFC3775 (MIPv6) here we do not implement MIPv6, so we just need to
- * parse the 4 first bytes
- */
-struct uip_routing_hdr {
-  u8_t next;
-  u8_t len;
-  u8_t routing_type;
-  u8_t seg_left;
-};
-
-/* fragmentation header */
-struct uip_frag_hdr {
-  u8_t next;
-  u8_t res;
-  u16_t offsetresmore;
-  u32_t id;
-};
-
-/*
- * an option within the destination or hop by hop option headers
- * it contains type an length, which is true for all options but PAD1
- */
-struct uip_ext_hdr_opt {
-  u8_t type;
-  u8_t len;
-};
-
-/* PADN option */
-struct uip_ext_hdr_opt_padn {
-  u8_t opt_type;
-  u8_t opt_len;
-};
-
-/* TCP header */
-struct uip_tcp_hdr {
-  u16_t srcport;
-  u16_t destport;
-  u8_t seqno[4];
-  u8_t ackno[4];
-  u8_t tcpoffset;
-  u8_t flags;
-  u8_t  wnd[2];
-  u16_t tcpchksum;
-  u8_t urgp[2];
-  u8_t optdata[4];
-};
-
-/* The ICMP headers. */
-struct uip_icmp_hdr {
-  u8_t type, icode;
-  u16_t icmpchksum;
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  u16_t id, seqno;
-#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-};
-
-
-/* The UDP headers. */
-struct uip_udp_hdr {
-  u16_t srcport;
-  u16_t destport;
-  u16_t udplen;
-  u16_t udpchksum;
-};
-
-
-/**
- * The buffer size available for user data in the \ref uip_buf buffer.
- *
- * This macro holds the available size for user data in the \ref
- * uip_buf buffer. The macro is intended to be used for checking
- * bounds of available user data.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- snprintf(uip_appdata, UIP_APPDATA_SIZE, "%u\n", i);
- \endcode
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define UIP_APPDATA_SIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN)
-#define UIP_APPDATA_PTR (void *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN]
-
-#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP  1
-#define UIP_PROTO_TCP   6
-#define UIP_PROTO_UDP   17
-#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP6 58
-
-
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-/** @{ */
-/** \brief  extension headers types */
-#define UIP_PROTO_HBHO        0
-#define UIP_PROTO_DESTO       60
-#define UIP_PROTO_ROUTING     43
-#define UIP_PROTO_FRAG        44
-#define UIP_PROTO_NONE        59
-/** @} */
-
-/** @{ */
-/** \brief  Destination and Hop By Hop extension headers option types */
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PAD1  0
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PADN  1
-/** @} */
-
-/** @{ */
-/**
- * \brief Bitmaps for extension header processing
- *
- * When processing extension headers, we should record somehow which one we
- * see, because you cannot have twice the same header, except for destination
- * We store all this in one u8_t bitmap one bit for each header expected. The
- * order in the bitmap is the order recommended in RFC2460
- */
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_HBHO 0x01
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO1 0x02
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ROUTING 0x04
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_FRAG 0x08
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_AH 0x10
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ESP 0x20
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO2 0x40
-/** @} */
-
-
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-
-/* Header sizes. */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-#define UIP_IPH_LEN    40
-#define UIP_FRAGH_LEN  8
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-#define UIP_IPH_LEN    20    /* Size of IP header */
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-#define UIP_UDPH_LEN    8    /* Size of UDP header */
-#define UIP_TCPH_LEN   20    /* Size of TCP header */
-#ifdef UIP_IPH_LEN
-#define UIP_ICMPH_LEN   4    /* Size of ICMP header */
-#endif
-#define UIP_IPUDPH_LEN (UIP_UDPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* Size of IP +
-                        * UDP
-							   * header */
-#define UIP_IPTCPH_LEN (UIP_TCPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* Size of IP +
-							   * TCP
-							   * header */
-#define UIP_TCPIP_HLEN UIP_IPTCPH_LEN
-#define UIP_IPICMPH_LEN (UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_ICMPH_LEN) /* size of ICMP
-                                                         + IP header */
-#define UIP_LLIPH_LEN (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* size of L2
-                                                        + IP header */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-/**
- * The sums below are quite used in ND. When used for uip_buf, we
- * include link layer length when used for uip_len, we do not, hence
- * we need values with and without LLH_LEN we do not use capital
- * letters as these values are variable
- */
-#define uip_l2_l3_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len)
-#define uip_l2_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN)
-#define uip_l3_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len)
-#define uip_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN)
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
-
-
-#if UIP_FIXEDADDR
-extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr;
-#else /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
-extern uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr;
-#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
-extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr;
-extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr;
-
-#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR
-extern const uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr;
-#else
-extern uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr;
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_IPV6
-/**
- * \brief Is IPv6 address a the unspecified address
- * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t
- */
-#define uip_is_addr_unspecified(a)               \
-  ((((a)->u16[0]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[7]) == 0))
-
-/** \brief Is IPv6 address a the link local all-nodes multicast address */
-#define uip_is_addr_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a)     \
-  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xff) &&                        \
-   (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) &&                        \
-   (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u8[14]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u8[15]) == 0x01))
-
-/** \brief set IP address a to unspecified */
-#define uip_create_unspecified(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)
-
-/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-nodes multicast address */
-#define uip_create_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0001)
-
-/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-routers multicast address */
-#define uip_create_linklocal_allrouters_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0002)
-
-/**
- * \brief  is addr (a) a solicited node multicast address, see RFC3513
- *  a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
- */
-#define uip_is_addr_solicited_node(a)           \
-  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF) &&                     \
-  (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) &&                     \
-  (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                       \
-  (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                       \
-  (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                       \
-  (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                       \
-  (((a)->u16[5]) == 1) &&                       \
-  (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xFF))
-
-/**
- * \briefput in b the solicited node address corresponding to address a
- * both a and b are of type uip_ipaddr_t*
- * */
-#define uip_create_solicited_node(a, b)    \
-  (((b)->u8[0]) = 0xFF);                        \
-  (((b)->u8[1]) = 0x02);                        \
-  (((b)->u16[1]) = 0);                          \
-  (((b)->u16[2]) = 0);                          \
-  (((b)->u16[3]) = 0);                          \
-  (((b)->u16[4]) = 0);                          \
-  (((b)->u8[10]) = 0);                          \
-  (((b)->u8[11]) = 0x01);                       \
-  (((b)->u8[12]) = 0xFF);                       \
-  (((b)->u8[13]) = ((a)->u8[13]));              \
-  (((b)->u16[7]) = ((a)->u16[7]))
-
-/**
- * \brief is addr (a) a link local unicast address, see RFC3513
- *  i.e. is (a) on prefix FE80::/10
- *  a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
- */
-#define uip_is_addr_link_local(a) \
-  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFE) && \
-  (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x80))
-
-/**
- * \brief was addr (a) forged based on the mac address m
- * a type is uip_ipaddr_t
- * m type is uiplladdr_t
- */
-#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154
-#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \
-  ((((a)->u8[8])  == (((m)->addr[0]) ^ 0x02)) &&   \
-   (((a)->u8[9])  == (m)->addr[1]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[11]) == (m)->addr[3]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[12]) == (m)->addr[4]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[5]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[6]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[7]))
-#else
-
-#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \
-  ((((a)->u8[8])  == (((m)->addr[0]) | 0x02)) &&   \
-   (((a)->u8[9])  == (m)->addr[1]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[11]) == 0xff) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xfe) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[3]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[4]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[5]))
-   
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
-
-/**
- * \brief is address a multicast address, see RFC 3513
- * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
- * */
-#define uip_is_addr_mcast(a)                    \
-  (((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF)
-
-/**
- * \brief is group-id of multicast address a
- * the all nodes group-id
- */
-#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_nodes(a) \
-  ((((a)->u16[1])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[2])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[3])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[4])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[5])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[6])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u8[14])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u8[15])  == 1))
-
-/**
- * \brief is group-id of multicast address a
- * the all routers group-id
- */
-#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_routers(a) \
-  ((((a)->u16[1])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[2])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[3])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[4])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[5])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[6])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u8[14])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u8[15])  == 2))
-
-
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
-
-/**
- * Calculate the Internet checksum over a buffer.
- *
- * The Internet checksum is the one's complement of the one's
- * complement sum of all 16-bit words in the buffer.
- *
- * See RFC1071.
- *
- * \param buf A pointer to the buffer over which the checksum is to be
- * computed.
- *
- * \param len The length of the buffer over which the checksum is to
- * be computed.
- *
- * \return The Internet checksum of the buffer.
- */
-u16_t uip_chksum(u16_t *buf, u16_t len);
-
-/**
- * Calculate the IP header checksum of the packet header in uip_buf.
- *
- * The IP header checksum is the Internet checksum of the 20 bytes of
- * the IP header.
- *
- * \return The IP header checksum of the IP header in the uip_buf
- * buffer.
- */
-u16_t uip_ipchksum(void);
-
-/**
- * Calculate the TCP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata.
- *
- * The TCP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the
- * TCP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC793.
- *
- * \return The TCP checksum of the TCP segment in uip_buf and pointed
- * to by uip_appdata.
- */
-u16_t uip_tcpchksum(void);
-
-/**
- * Calculate the UDP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata.
- *
- * The UDP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the
- * UDP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC768.
- *
- * \return The UDP checksum of the UDP segment in uip_buf and pointed
- * to by uip_appdata.
- */
-u16_t uip_udpchksum(void);
-
-/**
- * Calculate the ICMP checksum of the packet in uip_buf.
- *
- * \return The ICMP checksum of the ICMP packet in uip_buf
- */
-u16_t uip_icmp6chksum(void);
-
-
-#endif /* __UIP_H__ */
-
-
-/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Header file for the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ * \author  Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ * \author  Julien Abeille <jabeille@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code)
+ * \author  Mathilde Durvy <mdurvy@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code)
+ *
+ * The uIP TCP/IP stack header file contains definitions for a number
+ * of C macros that are used by uIP programs as well as internal uIP
+ * structures, TCP/IP header structures and function declarations.
+ *
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip.h,v 1.24 2009/04/06 13:18:50 nvt-se Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIP_H__
+#define __UIP_H__
+
+#include "uipopt.h"
+
+/**
+ * Representation of an IP address.
+ *
+ */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+typedef union uip_ip6addr_t {
+  u8_t  u8[16];			/* Initializer, must come first!!! */
+  u16_t u16[8];
+} uip_ip6addr_t;
+
+typedef uip_ip6addr_t uip_ipaddr_t;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+typedef union uip_ip4addr_t {
+  u8_t  u8[4];			/* Initializer, must come first!!! */
+  u16_t u16[2];
+#if 0
+  u32_t u32;
+#endif
+} uip_ip4addr_t;
+typedef uip_ip4addr_t uip_ipaddr_t;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** \brief 16 bit 802.15.4 address */
+struct uip_802154_shortaddr {
+  u8_t addr[2];
+};
+/** \brief 64 bit 802.15.4 address */
+struct uip_802154_longaddr {
+  u8_t addr[8];
+};
+
+/** \brief 802.11 address */
+struct uip_80211_addr {
+  u8_t addr[6];
+};
+
+/** \brief 802.3 address */
+struct uip_eth_addr {
+  u8_t addr[6];
+};
+
+#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154
+/** \brief 802.15.4 address */
+typedef struct uip_802154_longaddr uip_lladdr_t;
+#define UIP_802154_SHORTADDR_LEN 2
+#define UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN  8
+#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN
+#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
+#if UIP_CONF_LL_80211
+/** \brief 802.11 address */
+typedef struct uip_80211_addr uip_lladdr_t;
+#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6
+#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/
+/** \brief Ethernet address */
+typedef struct uip_eth_addr uip_lladdr_t;
+#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* First, the functions that should be called from the
+ * system. Initialization, the periodic timer, and incoming packets are
+ * handled by the following three functions.
+ */
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipconffunc uIP configuration functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The uIP configuration functions are used for setting run-time
+ * parameters in uIP such as IP addresses.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Set the IP address of this host.
+ *
+ * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first
+ * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte
+ * array.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+
+ uip_ipaddr_t addr;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,1,2);
+ uip_sethostaddr(&addr);
+ 
+ \endcode
+ * \param addr A pointer to an IP address of type uip_ipaddr_t;
+ *
+ * \sa uip_ipaddr()
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_sethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_hostaddr, (addr))
+
+/**
+ * Get the IP address of this host.
+ *
+ * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first
+ * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte
+ * array.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t hostaddr;
+
+ uip_gethostaddr(&hostaddr);
+ \endcode
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the currently configured IP address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_gethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_hostaddr)
+
+/**
+ * Set the default router's IP address.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP
+ * address of the default router.
+ *
+ * \sa uip_ipaddr()
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_setdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_draddr, (addr))
+
+/**
+ * Set the netmask.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP
+ * address of the netmask.
+ *
+ * \sa uip_ipaddr()
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_setnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_netmask, (addr))
+
+
+/**
+ * Get the default router's IP address.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the IP address of the default router.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_getdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_draddr)
+
+/**
+ * Get the netmask.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the value of the netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_getnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_netmask)
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipinit uIP initialization functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The uIP initialization functions are used for booting uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * uIP initialization function.
+ *
+ * This function should be called at boot up to initilize the uIP
+ * TCP/IP stack.
+ */
+void uip_init(void);
+
+/**
+ * uIP initialization function.
+ *
+ * This function may be used at boot time to set the initial ip_id.
+ */
+void uip_setipid(u16_t id);
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipdevfunc uIP device driver functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * These functions are used by a network device driver for interacting
+ * with uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Process an incoming packet.
+ *
+ * This function should be called when the device driver has received
+ * a packet from the network. The packet from the device driver must
+ * be present in the uip_buf buffer, and the length of the packet
+ * should be placed in the uip_len variable.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, there may be an outbound packet placed
+ * in the uip_buf packet buffer. If so, the uip_len variable is set to
+ * the length of the packet. If no packet is to be sent out, the
+ * uip_len variable is set to 0.
+ *
+ * The usual way of calling the function is presented by the source
+ * code below.
+ \code
+ uip_len = devicedriver_poll();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_input();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP
+ * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over
+ * Ethernet, you will need to call the uIP ARP code before calling
+ * this function:
+ \code
+ #define BUF ((struct uip_eth_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
+ uip_len = ethernet_devicedrver_poll();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP)) {
+ uip_arp_ipin();
+ uip_input();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_arp_out();
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ } else if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP)) {
+ uip_arp_arpin();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_input()        uip_process(UIP_DATA)
+
+
+/**
+ * Periodic processing for a connection identified by its number.
+ *
+ * This function does the necessary periodic processing (timers,
+ * polling) for a uIP TCP conneciton, and should be called when the
+ * periodic uIP timer goes off. It should be called for every
+ * connection, regardless of whether they are open of closed.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, it may have an outbound packet waiting
+ * for service in the uIP packet buffer, and if so the uip_len
+ * variable is set to a value larger than zero. The device driver
+ * should be called to send out the packet.
+ *
+ * The usual way of calling the function is through a for() loop like
+ * this:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) {
+ uip_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP
+ * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over
+ * Ethernet, you will need to call the uip_arp_out() function before
+ * calling the device driver:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) {
+ uip_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_arp_out();
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param conn The number of the connection which is to be periodically polled.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if UIP_TCP
+#define uip_periodic(conn) do { uip_conn = &uip_conns[conn];    \
+    uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0)
+
+/**
+ *
+ *
+ */
+#define uip_conn_active(conn) (uip_conns[conn].tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED)
+
+/**
+ * Perform periodic processing for a connection identified by a pointer
+ * to its structure.
+ *
+ * Same as uip_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual uip_conn
+ * struct instead of an integer as its argument. This function can be
+ * used to force periodic processing of a specific connection.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to
+ * be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn;   \
+    uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0)
+
+/**
+ * Request that a particular connection should be polled.
+ *
+ * Similar to uip_periodic_conn() but does not perform any timer
+ * processing. The application is polled for new data.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to
+ * be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_poll_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn;       \
+    uip_process(UIP_POLL_REQUEST); } while (0)
+
+#endif /* UIP_TCP */
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+/**
+ * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by its number.
+ *
+ * This function is essentially the same as uip_periodic(), but for
+ * UDP connections. It is called in a similar fashion as the
+ * uip_periodic() function:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) {
+ uip_udp_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \note As for the uip_periodic() function, special care has to be
+ * taken when using uIP together with ARP and Ethernet:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) {
+ uip_udp_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_arp_out();
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param conn The number of the UDP connection to be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_periodic(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[conn]; \
+    uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by a pointer to
+ * its structure.
+ *
+ * Same as uip_udp_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual
+ * uip_conn struct instead of an integer as its argument. This
+ * function can be used to force periodic processing of a specific
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn struct for the connection
+ * to be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = conn;   \
+    uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0)
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+/** \brief Abandon the reassembly of the current packet */
+void uip_reass_over(void);
+
+/**
+ * The uIP packet buffer.
+ *
+ * The uip_buf array is used to hold incoming and outgoing
+ * packets. The device driver should place incoming data into this
+ * buffer. When sending data, the device driver should read the link
+ * level headers and the TCP/IP headers from this buffer. The size of
+ * the link level headers is configured by the UIP_LLH_LEN define.
+ *
+ * \note The application data need not be placed in this buffer, so
+ * the device driver must read it from the place pointed to by the
+ * uip_appdata pointer as illustrated by the following example:
+ \code
+ void
+ devicedriver_send(void)
+ {
+ hwsend(&uip_buf[0], UIP_LLH_LEN);
+ if(uip_len <= UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN) {
+ hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN);
+ } else {
+ hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_TCPIP_HLEN);
+ hwsend(uip_appdata, uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN);
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+*/
+extern u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE+2];
+
+
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Functions that are used by the uIP application program. Opening and
+ * closing connections, sending and receiving data, etc. is all
+ * handled by the functions below.
+ */
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipappfunc uIP application functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * Functions used by an application running of top of uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Start listening to the specified port.
+ *
+ * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte
+ * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
+ *
+ \code
+ uip_listen(HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
+ */
+void uip_listen(u16_t port);
+
+/**
+ * Stop listening to the specified port.
+ *
+ * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte
+ * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
+ *
+ \code
+ uip_unlisten(HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
+ */
+void uip_unlisten(u16_t port);
+
+/**
+ * Connect to a remote host using TCP.
+ *
+ * This function is used to start a new connection to the specified
+ * port on the specified host. It allocates a new connection identifier,
+ * sets the connection to the SYN_SENT state and sets the
+ * retransmission timer to 0. This will cause a TCP SYN segment to be
+ * sent out the next time this connection is periodically processed,
+ * which usually is done within 0.5 seconds after the call to
+ * uip_connect().
+ *
+ * \note This function is available only if support for active open
+ * has been configured by defining UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN to 1 in uipopt.h.
+ *
+ * \note Since this function requires the port number to be in network
+ * byte order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
+ *
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2);
+ uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host.
+ *
+ * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
+ *
+ * \return A pointer to the uIP connection identifier for the new connection,
+ * or NULL if no connection could be allocated.
+ *
+ */
+struct uip_conn *uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t port);
+
+
+
+/**
+ * \internal
+ *
+ * Check if a connection has outstanding (i.e., unacknowledged) data.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn structure for the connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_outstanding(conn) ((conn)->len)
+
+/**
+ * Send data on the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function is used to send out a single segment of TCP
+ * data. Only applications that have been invoked by uIP for event
+ * processing can send data.
+ *
+ * The amount of data that actually is sent out after a call to this
+ * function is determined by the maximum amount of data TCP allows. uIP
+ * will automatically crop the data so that only the appropriate
+ * amount of data is sent. The function uip_mss() can be used to query
+ * uIP for the amount of data that actually will be sent.
+ *
+ * \note This function does not guarantee that the sent data will
+ * arrive at the destination. If the data is lost in the network, the
+ * application will be invoked with the uip_rexmit() event being
+ * set. The application will then have to resend the data using this
+ * function.
+ *
+ * \param data A pointer to the data which is to be sent.
+ *
+ * \param len The maximum amount of data bytes to be sent.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+void uip_send(const void *data, int len);
+
+/**
+ * The length of any incoming data that is currently available (if available)
+ * in the uip_appdata buffer.
+ *
+ * The test function uip_data() must first be used to check if there
+ * is any data available at all.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+/*void uip_datalen(void);*/
+#define uip_datalen()       uip_len
+
+/**
+ * The length of any out-of-band data (urgent data) that has arrived
+ * on the connection.
+ *
+ * \note The configuration parameter UIP_URGDATA must be set for this
+ * function to be enabled.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_urgdatalen()    uip_urglen
+
+/**
+ * Close the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function will close the current connection in a nice way.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_close()         (uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE)
+
+/**
+ * Abort the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function will abort (reset) the current connection, and is
+ * usually used when an error has occurred that prevents using the
+ * uip_close() function.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_abort()         (uip_flags = UIP_ABORT)
+
+/**
+ * Tell the sending host to stop sending data.
+ *
+ * This function will close our receiver's window so that we stop
+ * receiving data for the current connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_stop()          (uip_conn->tcpstateflags |= UIP_STOPPED)
+
+/**
+ * Find out if the current connection has been previously stopped with
+ * uip_stop().
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_stopped(conn)   ((conn)->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)
+
+/**
+ * Restart the current connection, if is has previously been stopped
+ * with uip_stop().
+ *
+ * This function will open the receiver's window again so that we
+ * start receiving data for the current connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_restart()         do { uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;    \
+    uip_conn->tcpstateflags &= ~UIP_STOPPED;                    \
+  } while(0)
+
+
+/* uIP tests that can be made to determine in what state the current
+   connection is, and what the application function should do. */
+
+/**
+ * Is the current connection a UDP connection?
+ *
+ * This function checks whether the current connection is a UDP connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ *
+ */
+#define uip_udpconnection() (uip_conn == NULL)
+
+/**
+ * Is new incoming data available?
+ *
+ * Will reduce to non-zero if there is new data for the application
+ * present at the uip_appdata pointer. The size of the data is
+ * available through the uip_len variable.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_newdata()   (uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA)
+
+/**
+ * Has previously sent data been acknowledged?
+ *
+ * Will reduce to non-zero if the previously sent data has been
+ * acknowledged by the remote host. This means that the application
+ * can send new data.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_acked()   (uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection just been connected?
+ *
+ * Reduces to non-zero if the current connection has been connected to
+ * a remote host. This will happen both if the connection has been
+ * actively opened (with uip_connect()) or passively opened (with
+ * uip_listen()).
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_connected() (uip_flags & UIP_CONNECTED)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection been closed by the other end?
+ *
+ * Is non-zero if the connection has been closed by the remote
+ * host. The application may then do the necessary clean-ups.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_closed()    (uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection been aborted by the other end?
+ *
+ * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted (reset) by the
+ * remote host.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_aborted()    (uip_flags & UIP_ABORT)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection timed out?
+ *
+ * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted due to too many
+ * retransmissions.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_timedout()    (uip_flags & UIP_TIMEDOUT)
+
+/**
+ * Do we need to retransmit previously data?
+ *
+ * Reduces to non-zero if the previously sent data has been lost in
+ * the network, and the application should retransmit it. The
+ * application should send the exact same data as it did the last
+ * time, using the uip_send() function.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_rexmit()     (uip_flags & UIP_REXMIT)
+
+/**
+ * Is the connection being polled by uIP?
+ *
+ * Is non-zero if the reason the application is invoked is that the
+ * current connection has been idle for a while and should be
+ * polled.
+ *
+ * The polling event can be used for sending data without having to
+ * wait for the remote host to send data.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_poll()       (uip_flags & UIP_POLL)
+
+/**
+ * Get the initial maximum segment size (MSS) of the current
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_initialmss()             (uip_conn->initialmss)
+
+/**
+ * Get the current maximum segment size that can be sent on the current
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * The current maximum segment size that can be sent on the
+ * connection is computed from the receiver's window and the MSS of
+ * the connection (which also is available by calling
+ * uip_initialmss()).
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_mss()             (uip_conn->mss)
+
+/**
+ * Set up a new UDP connection.
+ *
+ * This function sets up a new UDP connection. The function will
+ * automatically allocate an unused local port for the new
+ * connection. However, another port can be chosen by using the
+ * uip_udp_bind() call, after the uip_udp_new() function has been
+ * called.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t addr;
+ struct uip_udp_conn *c;
+ 
+ uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,2,1);
+ c = uip_udp_new(&addr, HTONS(12345));
+ if(c != NULL) {
+ uip_udp_bind(c, HTONS(12344));
+ }
+ \endcode
+ * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host.
+ *
+ * \param rport The remote port number in network byte order.
+ *
+ * \return The uip_udp_conn structure for the new connection or NULL
+ * if no connection could be allocated.
+ */
+struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport);
+
+/**
+ * Removed a UDP connection.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_remove(conn) (conn)->lport = 0
+
+/**
+ * Bind a UDP connection to a local port.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * \param port The local port number, in network byte order.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_bind(conn, port) (conn)->lport = port
+
+/**
+ * Send a UDP datagram of length len on the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function can only be called in response to a UDP event (poll
+ * or newdata). The data must be present in the uip_buf buffer, at the
+ * place pointed to by the uip_appdata pointer.
+ *
+ * \param len The length of the data in the uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_send(len) uip_send((char *)uip_appdata, len)
+
+/** @} */
+
+/* uIP convenience and converting functions. */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipconvfunc uIP conversion functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * These functions can be used for converting between different data
+ * formats used by uIP.
+ */
+ 
+/**
+ * Convert an IP address to four bytes separated by commas.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ printf("ipaddr=%d.%d.%d.%d\n", uip_ipaddr_to_quad(&ipaddr));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param a A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t.
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr_to_quad(a) (a)->u8[0],(a)->u8[1],(a)->u8[2],(a)->u8[3]
+
+/**
+ * Construct an IP address from four bytes.
+ *
+ * This function constructs an IP address of the type that uIP handles
+ * internally from four bytes. The function is handy for specifying IP
+ * addresses to use with e.g. the uip_connect() function.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ struct uip_conn *c;
+ 
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2);
+ c = uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the IP address.
+ *
+ * \param addr0 The first octet of the IP address.
+ * \param addr1 The second octet of the IP address.
+ * \param addr2 The third octet of the IP address.
+ * \param addr3 The forth octet of the IP address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3) do {  \
+    (addr)->u8[0] = addr0;                              \
+    (addr)->u8[1] = addr1;                              \
+    (addr)->u8[2] = addr2;                              \
+    (addr)->u8[3] = addr3;                              \
+  } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Construct an IPv6 address from eight 16-bit words.
+ *
+ * This function constructs an IPv6 address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ip6addr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7) do { \
+    (addr)->u16[0] = HTONS(addr0);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[1] = HTONS(addr1);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[2] = HTONS(addr2);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[3] = HTONS(addr3);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[4] = HTONS(addr4);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[5] = HTONS(addr5);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[6] = HTONS(addr6);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[7] = HTONS(addr7);                                      \
+  } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Construct an IPv6 address from eight 8-bit words.
+ *
+ * This function constructs an IPv6 address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ip6addr_u8(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7,addr8,addr9,addr10,addr11,addr12,addr13,addr14,addr15) do { \
+    (addr)->u8[0] = addr0;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[1] = addr1;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[2] = addr2;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[3] = addr3;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[4] = addr4;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[5] = addr5;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[6] = addr6;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[7] = addr7;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[8] = addr8;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[9] = addr9;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[10] = addr10;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[11] = addr11;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[12] = addr12;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[13] = addr13;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[14] = addr14;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[15] = addr15;                                     \
+  } while(0)
+
+
+/**
+ * Copy an IP address to another IP address.
+ *
+ * Copies an IP address from one place to another.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param dest The destination for the copy.
+ * \param src The source from where to copy.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef uip_ipaddr_copy
+#define uip_ipaddr_copy(dest, src) (*(dest) = *(src))
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Compare two IP addresses
+ *
+ * Compares two IP addresses.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1)) {
+ printf("They are the same");
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param addr1 The first IP address.
+ * \param addr2 The second IP address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) ((addr1)->u16[0] == (addr2)->u16[0] && \
+				      (addr1)->u16[1] == (addr2)->u16[1])
+#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, sizeof(uip_ip6addr_t)) == 0)
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+/**
+ * Compare two IP addresses with netmasks
+ *
+ * Compares two IP addresses with netmasks. The masks are used to mask
+ * out the bits that are to be compared.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, mask;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&mask, 255,255,255,0);
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr2, 192,16,1,3);
+ if(uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&ipaddr1, &ipaddr2, &mask)) {
+ printf("They are the same");
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param addr1 The first IP address.
+ * \param addr2 The second IP address.
+ * \param mask The netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(addr1, addr2, mask)          \
+  (((((u16_t *)addr1)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0]) ==       \
+    (((u16_t *)addr2)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0])) &&      \
+   ((((u16_t *)addr1)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1]) ==       \
+    (((u16_t *)addr2)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1])))
+#else
+#define uip_ipaddr_prefixcmp(addr1, addr2, length) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, length>>3) == 0)
+#endif
+
+
+/**
+ * Check if an address is a broadcast address for a network.
+ *
+ * Checks if an address is the broadcast address for a network. The
+ * network is defined by an IP address that is on the network and the
+ * network's netmask.
+ *
+ * \param addr The IP address.
+ * \param netaddr The network's IP address.
+ * \param netmask The network's netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+/*#define uip_ipaddr_isbroadcast(addr, netaddr, netmask)
+  ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16 & ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16*/
+
+
+
+/**
+ * Mask out the network part of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Masks out the network part of an IP address, given the address and
+ * the netmask.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, netmask;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ uip_ipaddr(&netmask, 255,255,255,0);
+ uip_ipaddr_mask(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1, &netmask);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "ipaddr2" will contain the IP
+ * address 192.168.1.0.
+ *
+ * \param dest Where the result is to be placed.
+ * \param src The IP address.
+ * \param mask The netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr_mask(dest, src, mask) do {                           \
+    ((u16_t *)dest)[0] = ((u16_t *)src)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0];        \
+    ((u16_t *)dest)[1] = ((u16_t *)src)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1];        \
+  } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Pick the first octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the first octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr1(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 1.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr1(addr) ((addr)->u8[0])
+
+/**
+ * Pick the second octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the second octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr2(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 2.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr2(addr) ((addr)->u8[1])
+
+/**
+ * Pick the third octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the third octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr3(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 3.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr3(addr) ((addr)->u8[2])
+
+/**
+ * Pick the fourth octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the fourth octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr4(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 4.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr4(addr) ((addr)->u8[3])
+
+/**
+ * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
+ *
+ * This macro is primarily used for converting constants from host
+ * byte order to network byte order. For converting variables to
+ * network byte order, use the htons() function instead.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef HTONS
+#   if UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN
+#      define HTONS(n) (n)
+#      define HTONL(n) (n)
+#   else /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
+#      define HTONS(n) (u16_t)((((u16_t) (n)) << 8) | (((u16_t) (n)) >> 8))
+#      define HTONL(n) (((u32_t)HTONS(n) << 16) | HTONS((u32_t)(n) >> 16))
+#   endif /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
+#else
+#error "HTONS already defined!"
+#endif /* HTONS */
+
+/**
+ * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
+ *
+ * This function is primarily used for converting variables from host
+ * byte order to network byte order. For converting constants to
+ * network byte order, use the HTONS() macro instead.
+ */
+#ifndef htons
+u16_t htons(u16_t val);
+#endif /* htons */
+#ifndef ntohs
+#define ntohs htons
+#endif
+
+#ifndef htonl
+u32_t htonl(u32_t val);
+#endif /* htonl */
+#ifndef ntohl
+#define ntohl htonl
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * Pointer to the application data in the packet buffer.
+ *
+ * This pointer points to the application data when the application is
+ * called. If the application wishes to send data, the application may
+ * use this space to write the data into before calling uip_send().
+ */
+extern void *uip_appdata;
+
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+/* u8_t *uip_urgdata:
+ *
+ * This pointer points to any urgent data that has been received. Only
+ * present if compiled with support for urgent data (UIP_URGDATA).
+ */
+extern void *uip_urgdata;
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipdrivervars Variables used in uIP device drivers
+ * @{
+ *
+ * uIP has a few global variables that are used in device drivers for
+ * uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The length of the packet in the uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * The global variable uip_len holds the length of the packet in the
+ * uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * When the network device driver calls the uIP input function,
+ * uip_len should be set to the length of the packet in the uip_buf
+ * buffer.
+ *
+ * When sending packets, the device driver should use the contents of
+ * the uip_len variable to determine the length of the outgoing
+ * packet.
+ *
+ */
+extern u16_t uip_len;
+
+/**
+ * The length of the extension headers
+ */
+extern u8_t uip_ext_len;
+/** @} */
+
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+extern u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen;
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+
+
+/**
+ * Representation of a uIP TCP connection.
+ *
+ * The uip_conn structure is used for identifying a connection. All
+ * but one field in the structure are to be considered read-only by an
+ * application. The only exception is the appstate field whose purpose
+ * is to let the application store application-specific state (e.g.,
+ * file pointers) for the connection. The type of this field is
+ * configured in the "uipopt.h" header file.
+ */
+struct uip_conn {
+  uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr;   /**< The IP address of the remote host. */
+  
+  u16_t lport;        /**< The local TCP port, in network byte order. */
+  u16_t rport;        /**< The local remote TCP port, in network byte
+			 order. */
+  
+  u8_t rcv_nxt[4];    /**< The sequence number that we expect to
+			 receive next. */
+  u8_t snd_nxt[4];    /**< The sequence number that was last sent by
+                         us. */
+  u16_t len;          /**< Length of the data that was previously sent. */
+  u16_t mss;          /**< Current maximum segment size for the
+			 connection. */
+  u16_t initialmss;   /**< Initial maximum segment size for the
+			 connection. */
+  u8_t sa;            /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state
+			 variable. */
+  u8_t sv;            /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state
+			 variable. */
+  u8_t rto;           /**< Retransmission time-out. */
+  u8_t tcpstateflags; /**< TCP state and flags. */
+  u8_t timer;         /**< The retransmission timer. */
+  u8_t nrtx;          /**< The number of retransmissions for the last
+			 segment sent. */
+
+  /** The application state. */
+  uip_tcp_appstate_t appstate;
+};
+
+
+/**
+ * Pointer to the current TCP connection.
+ *
+ * The uip_conn pointer can be used to access the current TCP
+ * connection.
+ */
+
+extern struct uip_conn *uip_conn;
+#if UIP_TCP
+/* The array containing all uIP connections. */
+extern struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS];
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uiparch
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * 4-byte array used for the 32-bit sequence number calculations.
+ */
+extern u8_t uip_acc32[4];
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * Representation of a uIP UDP connection.
+ */
+struct uip_udp_conn {
+  uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr;   /**< The IP address of the remote peer. */
+  u16_t lport;        /**< The local port number in network byte order. */
+  u16_t rport;        /**< The remote port number in network byte order. */
+  u8_t  ttl;          /**< Default time-to-live. */
+
+  /** The application state. */
+  uip_udp_appstate_t appstate;
+};
+
+/**
+ * The current UDP connection.
+ */
+extern struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn;
+extern struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
+
+struct uip_router {
+  int (*activate)(void);
+  int (*deactivate)(void);
+  uip_ipaddr_t *(*lookup)(uip_ipaddr_t *destipaddr, uip_ipaddr_t *nexthop);
+};
+
+#if UIP_CONF_ROUTER
+extern const struct uip_router *uip_router;
+
+/**
+ * uIP routing driver registration function.
+ */
+void uip_router_register(const struct uip_router *router);
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_ROUTER*/
+
+#if UIP_CONF_ICMP6
+struct uip_icmp6_conn {
+  uip_icmp6_appstate_t appstate;
+};
+extern struct uip_icmp6_conn uip_icmp6_conns;
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_ICMP6*/
+
+/**
+ * The uIP TCP/IP statistics.
+ *
+ * This is the variable in which the uIP TCP/IP statistics are gathered.
+ */
+#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1
+extern struct uip_stats uip_stat;
+#define UIP_STAT(s) s
+#else
+#define UIP_STAT(s)
+#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */
+
+/**
+ * The structure holding the TCP/IP statistics that are gathered if
+ * UIP_STATISTICS is set to 1.
+ *
+ */
+struct uip_stats {
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t forwarded;/**< Number of forwarded packets at the IP 
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t vhlerr;   /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
+			     IP version or header length. */
+    uip_stats_t hblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
+			     IP length, high byte. */
+    uip_stats_t lblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
+			     IP length, low byte. */
+    uip_stats_t fragerr;  /**< Number of packets dropped since they
+			     were IP fragments. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of packets dropped due to IP
+			     checksum errors. */
+    uip_stats_t protoerr; /**< Number of packets dropped since they
+			     were neither ICMP, UDP nor TCP. */
+  } ip;                   /**< IP statistics. */
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received ICMP packets. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent ICMP packets. */
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped ICMP packets. */
+    uip_stats_t typeerr;  /**< Number of ICMP packets with a wrong
+			     type. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of ICMP packets with a bad
+			     checksum. */
+  } icmp;                 /**< ICMP statistics. */
+#if UIP_TCP
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of recived TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad
+			     checksum. */
+    uip_stats_t ackerr;   /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad ACK
+			     number. */
+    uip_stats_t rst;      /**< Number of recevied TCP RST (reset) segments. */
+    uip_stats_t rexmit;   /**< Number of retransmitted TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t syndrop;  /**< Number of dropped SYNs due to too few
+			     connections was avaliable. */
+    uip_stats_t synrst;   /**< Number of SYNs for closed ports,
+			     triggering a RST. */
+  } tcp;                  /**< TCP statistics. */
+#endif
+#if UIP_UDP
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped UDP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of recived UDP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent UDP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of UDP segments with a bad
+			     checksum. */
+  } udp;                  /**< UDP statistics. */
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped ND6 packets. */
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of recived ND6 packets */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent ND6 packets */
+  } nd6;
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
+};
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* All the stuff below this point is internal to uIP and should not be
+ * used directly by an application or by a device driver.
+ */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+
+/* u8_t uip_flags:
+ *
+ * When the application is called, uip_flags will contain the flags
+ * that are defined in this file. Please read below for more
+ * information.
+ */
+extern u8_t uip_flags;
+
+/* The following flags may be set in the global variable uip_flags
+   before calling the application callback. The UIP_ACKDATA,
+   UIP_NEWDATA, and UIP_CLOSE flags may both be set at the same time,
+   whereas the others are mutually exclusive. Note that these flags
+   should *NOT* be accessed directly, but only through the uIP
+   functions/macros. */
+
+#define UIP_ACKDATA   1     /* Signifies that the outstanding data was
+			       acked and the application should send
+			       out new data instead of retransmitting
+			       the last data. */
+#define UIP_NEWDATA   2     /* Flags the fact that the peer has sent
+			       us new data. */
+#define UIP_REXMIT    4     /* Tells the application to retransmit the
+			       data that was last sent. */
+#define UIP_POLL      8     /* Used for polling the application, to
+			       check if the application has data that
+			       it wants to send. */
+#define UIP_CLOSE     16    /* The remote host has closed the
+			       connection, thus the connection has
+			       gone away. Or the application signals
+			       that it wants to close the
+			       connection. */
+#define UIP_ABORT     32    /* The remote host has aborted the
+			       connection, thus the connection has
+			       gone away. Or the application signals
+			       that it wants to abort the
+			       connection. */
+#define UIP_CONNECTED 64    /* We have got a connection from a remote
+                               host and have set up a new connection
+                               for it, or an active connection has
+                               been successfully established. */
+
+#define UIP_TIMEDOUT  128   /* The connection has been aborted due to
+			       too many retransmissions. */
+
+
+/**
+ * \brief process the options within a hop by hop or destination option header
+ * \retval 0: nothing to send,
+ * \retval 1: drop pkt
+ * \retval 2: ICMP error message to send
+*/
+/*static u8_t
+uip_ext_hdr_options_process(); */
+
+/* uip_process(flag):
+ *
+ * The actual uIP function which does all the work.
+ */
+void uip_process(u8_t flag);
+  
+  /* The following flags are passed as an argument to the uip_process()
+   function. They are used to distinguish between the two cases where
+   uip_process() is called. It can be called either because we have
+   incoming data that should be processed, or because the periodic
+   timer has fired. These values are never used directly, but only in
+   the macros defined in this file. */
+ 
+#define UIP_DATA          1     /* Tells uIP that there is incoming
+				   data in the uip_buf buffer. The
+				   length of the data is stored in the
+				   global variable uip_len. */
+#define UIP_TIMER         2     /* Tells uIP that the periodic timer
+				   has fired. */
+#define UIP_POLL_REQUEST  3     /* Tells uIP that a connection should
+				   be polled. */
+#define UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN 4     /* Tells uIP that a UDP datagram
+				   should be constructed in the
+				   uip_buf buffer. */
+#if UIP_UDP
+#define UIP_UDP_TIMER     5
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+/* The TCP states used in the uip_conn->tcpstateflags. */
+#define UIP_CLOSED      0
+#define UIP_SYN_RCVD    1
+#define UIP_SYN_SENT    2
+#define UIP_ESTABLISHED 3
+#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_1  4
+#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_2  5
+#define UIP_CLOSING     6
+#define UIP_TIME_WAIT   7
+#define UIP_LAST_ACK    8
+#define UIP_TS_MASK     15
+  
+#define UIP_STOPPED      16
+
+/* The TCP and IP headers. */
+struct uip_tcpip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPv6 header. */
+  u8_t vtc,
+    tcflow;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IPv4 header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  
+  /* TCP header. */
+  u16_t srcport,
+    destport;
+  u8_t seqno[4],
+    ackno[4],
+    tcpoffset,
+    flags,
+    wnd[2];
+  u16_t tcpchksum;
+  u8_t urgp[2];
+  u8_t optdata[4];
+};
+
+/* The ICMP and IP headers. */
+struct uip_icmpip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPv6 header. */
+  u8_t vtc,
+    tcf;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IPv4 header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  
+  /* ICMP header. */
+  u8_t type, icode;
+  u16_t icmpchksum;
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  u16_t id, seqno;
+  u8_t payload[1];
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+};
+
+
+/* The UDP and IP headers. */
+struct uip_udpip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPv6 header. */
+  u8_t vtc,
+    tcf;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IP header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  
+  /* UDP header. */
+  u16_t srcport,
+    destport;
+  u16_t udplen;
+  u16_t udpchksum;
+};
+
+/*
+ * In IPv6 the length of the L3 headers before the transport header is
+ * not fixed, due to the possibility to include extension option headers
+ * after the IP header. hence we split here L3 and L4 headers
+ */
+/* The IP header */
+struct uip_ip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPV6 header */
+  u8_t vtc;
+  u8_t tcflow;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IPV4 header */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+};
+
+
+/*
+ * IPv6 extension option headers: we are able to process
+ * the 4 extension headers defined in RFC2460 (IPv6):
+ * - Hop by hop option header, destination option header:
+ *   These two are not used by any core IPv6 protocol, hence
+ *   we just read them and go to the next. They convey options,
+ *   the options defined in RFC2460 are Pad1 and PadN, which do
+ *   some padding, and that we do not need to read (the length
+ *   field in the header is enough)
+ * - Routing header: this one is most notably used by MIPv6,
+ *   which we do not implement, hence we just read it and go
+ *   to the next
+ * - Fragmentation header: we read this header and are able to
+ *   reassemble packets
+ *
+ * We do not offer any means to send packets with extension headers
+ *
+ * We do not implement Authentication and ESP headers, which are
+ * used in IPSec and defined in RFC4302,4303,4305,4385
+ */
+/* common header part */
+struct uip_ext_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* Hop by Hop option header */
+struct uip_hbho_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* destination option header */
+struct uip_desto_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* We do not define structures for PAD1 and PADN options */
+
+/*
+ * routing header
+ * the routing header as 4 common bytes, then routing header type
+ * specific data there are several types of routing header. Type 0 was
+ * deprecated as per RFC5095 most notable other type is 2, used in
+ * RFC3775 (MIPv6) here we do not implement MIPv6, so we just need to
+ * parse the 4 first bytes
+ */
+struct uip_routing_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+  u8_t routing_type;
+  u8_t seg_left;
+};
+
+/* fragmentation header */
+struct uip_frag_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t res;
+  u16_t offsetresmore;
+  u32_t id;
+};
+
+/*
+ * an option within the destination or hop by hop option headers
+ * it contains type an length, which is true for all options but PAD1
+ */
+struct uip_ext_hdr_opt {
+  u8_t type;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* PADN option */
+struct uip_ext_hdr_opt_padn {
+  u8_t opt_type;
+  u8_t opt_len;
+};
+
+/* TCP header */
+struct uip_tcp_hdr {
+  u16_t srcport;
+  u16_t destport;
+  u8_t seqno[4];
+  u8_t ackno[4];
+  u8_t tcpoffset;
+  u8_t flags;
+  u8_t  wnd[2];
+  u16_t tcpchksum;
+  u8_t urgp[2];
+  u8_t optdata[4];
+};
+
+/* The ICMP headers. */
+struct uip_icmp_hdr {
+  u8_t type, icode;
+  u16_t icmpchksum;
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  u16_t id, seqno;
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+};
+
+
+/* The UDP headers. */
+struct uip_udp_hdr {
+  u16_t srcport;
+  u16_t destport;
+  u16_t udplen;
+  u16_t udpchksum;
+};
+
+
+/**
+ * The buffer size available for user data in the \ref uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * This macro holds the available size for user data in the \ref
+ * uip_buf buffer. The macro is intended to be used for checking
+ * bounds of available user data.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ snprintf(uip_appdata, UIP_APPDATA_SIZE, "%u\n", i);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define UIP_APPDATA_SIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN)
+#define UIP_APPDATA_PTR (void *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN]
+
+#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP  1
+#define UIP_PROTO_TCP   6
+#define UIP_PROTO_UDP   17
+#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP6 58
+
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/** @{ */
+/** \brief  extension headers types */
+#define UIP_PROTO_HBHO        0
+#define UIP_PROTO_DESTO       60
+#define UIP_PROTO_ROUTING     43
+#define UIP_PROTO_FRAG        44
+#define UIP_PROTO_NONE        59
+/** @} */
+
+/** @{ */
+/** \brief  Destination and Hop By Hop extension headers option types */
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PAD1  0
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PADN  1
+/** @} */
+
+/** @{ */
+/**
+ * \brief Bitmaps for extension header processing
+ *
+ * When processing extension headers, we should record somehow which one we
+ * see, because you cannot have twice the same header, except for destination
+ * We store all this in one u8_t bitmap one bit for each header expected. The
+ * order in the bitmap is the order recommended in RFC2460
+ */
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_HBHO 0x01
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO1 0x02
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ROUTING 0x04
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_FRAG 0x08
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_AH 0x10
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ESP 0x20
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO2 0x40
+/** @} */
+
+
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+
+/* Header sizes. */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define UIP_IPH_LEN    40
+#define UIP_FRAGH_LEN  8
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+#define UIP_IPH_LEN    20    /* Size of IP header */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+#define UIP_UDPH_LEN    8    /* Size of UDP header */
+#define UIP_TCPH_LEN   20    /* Size of TCP header */
+#ifdef UIP_IPH_LEN
+#define UIP_ICMPH_LEN   4    /* Size of ICMP header */
+#endif
+#define UIP_IPUDPH_LEN (UIP_UDPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* Size of IP +
+                        * UDP
+							   * header */
+#define UIP_IPTCPH_LEN (UIP_TCPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* Size of IP +
+							   * TCP
+							   * header */
+#define UIP_TCPIP_HLEN UIP_IPTCPH_LEN
+#define UIP_IPICMPH_LEN (UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_ICMPH_LEN) /* size of ICMP
+                                                         + IP header */
+#define UIP_LLIPH_LEN (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* size of L2
+                                                        + IP header */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/**
+ * The sums below are quite used in ND. When used for uip_buf, we
+ * include link layer length when used for uip_len, we do not, hence
+ * we need values with and without LLH_LEN we do not use capital
+ * letters as these values are variable
+ */
+#define uip_l2_l3_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len)
+#define uip_l2_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN)
+#define uip_l3_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len)
+#define uip_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN)
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
+
+
+#if UIP_FIXEDADDR
+extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr;
+#else /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+extern uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr;
+#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr;
+extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr;
+
+#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR
+extern const uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr;
+#else
+extern uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr;
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/**
+ * \brief Is IPv6 address a the unspecified address
+ * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t
+ */
+#define uip_is_addr_unspecified(a)               \
+  ((((a)->u16[0]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[7]) == 0))
+
+/** \brief Is IPv6 address a the link local all-nodes multicast address */
+#define uip_is_addr_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a)     \
+  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xff) &&                        \
+   (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) &&                        \
+   (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u8[14]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u8[15]) == 0x01))
+
+/** \brief set IP address a to unspecified */
+#define uip_create_unspecified(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)
+
+/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-nodes multicast address */
+#define uip_create_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0001)
+
+/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-routers multicast address */
+#define uip_create_linklocal_allrouters_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0002)
+
+/**
+ * \brief  is addr (a) a solicited node multicast address, see RFC3513
+ *  a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ */
+#define uip_is_addr_solicited_node(a)           \
+  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF) &&                     \
+  (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) &&                     \
+  (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[5]) == 1) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xFF))
+
+/**
+ * \briefput in b the solicited node address corresponding to address a
+ * both a and b are of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ * */
+#define uip_create_solicited_node(a, b)    \
+  (((b)->u8[0]) = 0xFF);                        \
+  (((b)->u8[1]) = 0x02);                        \
+  (((b)->u16[1]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u16[2]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u16[3]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u16[4]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u8[10]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u8[11]) = 0x01);                       \
+  (((b)->u8[12]) = 0xFF);                       \
+  (((b)->u8[13]) = ((a)->u8[13]));              \
+  (((b)->u16[7]) = ((a)->u16[7]))
+
+/**
+ * \brief is addr (a) a link local unicast address, see RFC3513
+ *  i.e. is (a) on prefix FE80::/10
+ *  a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ */
+#define uip_is_addr_link_local(a) \
+  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFE) && \
+  (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x80))
+
+/**
+ * \brief was addr (a) forged based on the mac address m
+ * a type is uip_ipaddr_t
+ * m type is uiplladdr_t
+ */
+#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154
+#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \
+  ((((a)->u8[8])  == (((m)->addr[0]) ^ 0x02)) &&   \
+   (((a)->u8[9])  == (m)->addr[1]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[11]) == (m)->addr[3]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[12]) == (m)->addr[4]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[5]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[6]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[7]))
+#else
+
+#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \
+  ((((a)->u8[8])  == (((m)->addr[0]) | 0x02)) &&   \
+   (((a)->u8[9])  == (m)->addr[1]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[11]) == 0xff) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xfe) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[3]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[4]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[5]))
+   
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
+
+/**
+ * \brief is address a multicast address, see RFC 3513
+ * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ * */
+#define uip_is_addr_mcast(a)                    \
+  (((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF)
+
+/**
+ * \brief is group-id of multicast address a
+ * the all nodes group-id
+ */
+#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_nodes(a) \
+  ((((a)->u16[1])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[2])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[3])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[4])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[5])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[6])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[14])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[15])  == 1))
+
+/**
+ * \brief is group-id of multicast address a
+ * the all routers group-id
+ */
+#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_routers(a) \
+  ((((a)->u16[1])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[2])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[3])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[4])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[5])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[6])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[14])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[15])  == 2))
+
+
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the Internet checksum over a buffer.
+ *
+ * The Internet checksum is the one's complement of the one's
+ * complement sum of all 16-bit words in the buffer.
+ *
+ * See RFC1071.
+ *
+ * \param buf A pointer to the buffer over which the checksum is to be
+ * computed.
+ *
+ * \param len The length of the buffer over which the checksum is to
+ * be computed.
+ *
+ * \return The Internet checksum of the buffer.
+ */
+u16_t uip_chksum(u16_t *buf, u16_t len);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the IP header checksum of the packet header in uip_buf.
+ *
+ * The IP header checksum is the Internet checksum of the 20 bytes of
+ * the IP header.
+ *
+ * \return The IP header checksum of the IP header in the uip_buf
+ * buffer.
+ */
+u16_t uip_ipchksum(void);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the TCP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata.
+ *
+ * The TCP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the
+ * TCP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC793.
+ *
+ * \return The TCP checksum of the TCP segment in uip_buf and pointed
+ * to by uip_appdata.
+ */
+u16_t uip_tcpchksum(void);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the UDP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata.
+ *
+ * The UDP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the
+ * UDP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC768.
+ *
+ * \return The UDP checksum of the UDP segment in uip_buf and pointed
+ * to by uip_appdata.
+ */
+u16_t uip_udpchksum(void);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the ICMP checksum of the packet in uip_buf.
+ *
+ * \return The ICMP checksum of the ICMP packet in uip_buf
+ */
+u16_t uip_icmp6chksum(void);
+
+
+#endif /* __UIP_H__ */
+
+
+/** @} */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c
index 88c14cc01..56dff9c43 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c
@@ -1,431 +1,431 @@
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uiparp uIP Address Resolution Protocol
- * @{
- *
- * The Address Resolution Protocol ARP is used for mapping between IP
- * addresses and link level addresses such as the Ethernet MAC
- * addresses. ARP uses broadcast queries to ask for the link level
- * address of a known IP address and the host which is configured with
- * the IP address for which the query was meant, will respond with its
- * link level address.
- *
- * \note This ARP implementation only supports Ethernet.
- */
- 
-/**
- * \file
- * Implementation of the ARP Address Resolution Protocol.
- * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
- *
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
- *    products derived from this software without specific prior
- *    written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
- * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
- * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
- * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
- * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
- * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
- * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
- * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
- * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- *
- * $Id: uip_arp.c,v 1.5 2008/02/07 01:35:00 adamdunkels Exp $
- *
- */
-
-
-#include "uip_arp.h"
-
-#include <string.h>
-
-struct arp_hdr {
-  struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr;
-  u16_t hwtype;
-  u16_t protocol;
-  u8_t hwlen;
-  u8_t protolen;
-  u16_t opcode;
-  struct uip_eth_addr shwaddr;
-  uip_ipaddr_t sipaddr;
-  struct uip_eth_addr dhwaddr;
-  uip_ipaddr_t dipaddr;
-};
-
-struct ethip_hdr {
-  struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr;
-  /* IP header. */
-  u8_t vhl,
-    tos,
-    len[2],
-    ipid[2],
-    ipoffset[2],
-    ttl,
-    proto;
-  u16_t ipchksum;
-  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-};
-
-#define ARP_REQUEST 1
-#define ARP_REPLY   2
-
-#define ARP_HWTYPE_ETH 1
-
-struct arp_entry {
-  uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
-  struct uip_eth_addr ethaddr;
-  u8_t time;
-};
-
-static const struct uip_eth_addr broadcast_ethaddr =
-  {{0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff}};
-static const u16_t broadcast_ipaddr[2] = {0xffff,0xffff};
-
-static struct arp_entry arp_table[UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE];
-static uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
-static u8_t i, c;
-
-static u8_t arptime;
-static u8_t tmpage;
-
-#define BUF   ((struct arp_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
-#define IPBUF ((struct ethip_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
-
-#define DEBUG 0
-#if DEBUG
-#include <stdio.h>
-#define PRINTF(...) printf(__VA_ARGS__)
-#else
-#define PRINTF(...)
-#endif
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Initialize the ARP module.
- *
- */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_arp_init(void)
-{
-  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-    memset(&arp_table[i].ipaddr, 0, 4);
-  }
-}
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Periodic ARP processing function.
- *
- * This function performs periodic timer processing in the ARP module
- * and should be called at regular intervals. The recommended interval
- * is 10 seconds between the calls.
- *
- */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_arp_timer(void)
-{
-  struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
-  
-  ++arptime;
-  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) &&
-       arptime - tabptr->time >= UIP_ARP_MAXAGE) {
-      memset(&tabptr->ipaddr, 0, 4);
-    }
-  }
-
-}
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-static void
-uip_arp_update(uip_ipaddr_t *ipaddr, struct uip_eth_addr *ethaddr)
-{
-  register struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
-  /* Walk through the ARP mapping table and try to find an entry to
-     update. If none is found, the IP -> MAC address mapping is
-     inserted in the ARP table. */
-  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-
-    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-    /* Only check those entries that are actually in use. */
-    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
-
-      /* Check if the source IP address of the incoming packet matches
-         the IP address in this ARP table entry. */
-      if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) {
-	 
-	/* An old entry found, update this and return. */
-	memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6);
-	tabptr->time = arptime;
-
-	return;
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* If we get here, no existing ARP table entry was found, so we
-     create one. */
-
-  /* First, we try to find an unused entry in the ARP table. */
-  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
-      break;
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* If no unused entry is found, we try to find the oldest entry and
-     throw it away. */
-  if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) {
-    tmpage = 0;
-    c = 0;
-    for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-      tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-      if(arptime - tabptr->time > tmpage) {
-	tmpage = arptime - tabptr->time;
-	c = i;
-      }
-    }
-    i = c;
-    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-  }
-
-  /* Now, i is the ARP table entry which we will fill with the new
-     information. */
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&tabptr->ipaddr, ipaddr);
-  memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6);
-  tabptr->time = arptime;
-}
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * ARP processing for incoming IP packets
- *
- * This function should be called by the device driver when an IP
- * packet has been received. The function will check if the address is
- * in the ARP cache, and if so the ARP cache entry will be
- * refreshed. If no ARP cache entry was found, a new one is created.
- *
- * This function expects an IP packet with a prepended Ethernet header
- * in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the global
- * variable uip_len.
- */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if 0
-void
-uip_arp_ipin(void)
-{
-  uip_len -= sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr);
-	
-  /* Only insert/update an entry if the source IP address of the
-     incoming IP packet comes from a host on the local network. */
-  if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0]) !=
-     (uip_hostaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0])) {
-    return;
-  }
-  if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1]) !=
-     (uip_hostaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1])) {
-    return;
-  }
-  uip_arp_update(IPBUF->srcipaddr, &(IPBUF->ethhdr.src));
-  
-  return;
-}
-#endif /* 0 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * ARP processing for incoming ARP packets.
- *
- * This function should be called by the device driver when an ARP
- * packet has been received. The function will act differently
- * depending on the ARP packet type: if it is a reply for a request
- * that we previously sent out, the ARP cache will be filled in with
- * the values from the ARP reply. If the incoming ARP packet is an ARP
- * request for our IP address, an ARP reply packet is created and put
- * into the uip_buf[] buffer.
- *
- * When the function returns, the value of the global variable uip_len
- * indicates whether the device driver should send out a packet or
- * not. If uip_len is zero, no packet should be sent. If uip_len is
- * non-zero, it contains the length of the outbound packet that is
- * present in the uip_buf[] buffer.
- *
- * This function expects an ARP packet with a prepended Ethernet
- * header in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the
- * global variable uip_len.
- */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_arp_arpin(void)
-{
-  if(uip_len < sizeof(struct arp_hdr)) {
-    uip_len = 0;
-    return;
-  }
-  uip_len = 0;
-  
-  switch(BUF->opcode) {
-  case HTONS(ARP_REQUEST):
-    /* ARP request. If it asked for our address, we send out a
-       reply. */
-    /*    if(BUF->dipaddr[0] == uip_hostaddr[0] &&
-	  BUF->dipaddr[1] == uip_hostaddr[1]) {*/
-    PRINTF("uip_arp_arpin: request for %d.%d.%d.%d (we are %d.%d.%d.%d)\n",
-	   BUF->dipaddr.u8[0], BUF->dipaddr.u8[1],
-	   BUF->dipaddr.u8[2], BUF->dipaddr.u8[3],
-	   uip_hostaddr.u8[0], uip_hostaddr.u8[1],
-	   uip_hostaddr.u8[2], uip_hostaddr.u8[3]);
-    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
-      /* First, we register the one who made the request in our ARP
-	 table, since it is likely that we will do more communication
-	 with this host in the future. */
-      uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr);
-      
-      BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REPLY);
-
-      memcpy(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, BUF->shwaddr.addr, 6);
-      memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 6);
-      
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &BUF->sipaddr);
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-
-      BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP);
-      uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr);
-    }
-    break;
-  case HTONS(ARP_REPLY):
-    /* ARP reply. We insert or update the ARP table if it was meant
-       for us. */
-    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
-      uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr);
-    }
-    break;
-  }
-
-  return;
-}
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Prepend Ethernet header to an outbound IP packet and see if we need
- * to send out an ARP request.
- *
- * This function should be called before sending out an IP packet. The
- * function checks the destination IP address of the IP packet to see
- * what Ethernet MAC address that should be used as a destination MAC
- * address on the Ethernet.
- *
- * If the destination IP address is in the local network (determined
- * by logical ANDing of netmask and our IP address), the function
- * checks the ARP cache to see if an entry for the destination IP
- * address is found. If so, an Ethernet header is prepended and the
- * function returns. If no ARP cache entry is found for the
- * destination IP address, the packet in the uip_buf[] is replaced by
- * an ARP request packet for the IP address. The IP packet is dropped
- * and it is assumed that they higher level protocols (e.g., TCP)
- * eventually will retransmit the dropped packet.
- *
- * If the destination IP address is not on the local network, the IP
- * address of the default router is used instead.
- *
- * When the function returns, a packet is present in the uip_buf[]
- * buffer, and the length of the packet is in the global variable
- * uip_len.
- */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_arp_out(void)
-{
-  struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
-  
-  /* Find the destination IP address in the ARP table and construct
-     the Ethernet header. If the destination IP addres isn't on the
-     local network, we use the default router's IP address instead.
-
-     If not ARP table entry is found, we overwrite the original IP
-     packet with an ARP request for the IP address. */
-
-  /* First check if destination is a local broadcast. */
-  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr)) {
-    memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, broadcast_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-  } else {
-    /* Check if the destination address is on the local network. */
-    if(!uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr, &uip_netmask)) {
-      /* Destination address was not on the local network, so we need to
-	 use the default router's IP address instead of the destination
-	 address when determining the MAC address. */
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &uip_draddr);
-    } else {
-      /* Else, we use the destination IP address. */
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &IPBUF->destipaddr);
-    }
-      
-    for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-      tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-      if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) {
-	break;
-      }
-    }
-
-    if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) {
-      /* The destination address was not in our ARP table, so we
-	 overwrite the IP packet with an ARP request. */
-
-      memset(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, 0xff, 6);
-      memset(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 0x00, 6);
-      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-      memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-    
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &ipaddr);
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-      BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REQUEST); /* ARP request. */
-      BUF->hwtype = HTONS(ARP_HWTYPE_ETH);
-      BUF->protocol = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP);
-      BUF->hwlen = 6;
-      BUF->protolen = 4;
-      BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP);
-
-      uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN];
-    
-      uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr);
-      return;
-    }
-
-    /* Build an ethernet header. */
-    memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, tabptr->ethaddr.addr, 6);
-  }
-  memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-  
-  IPBUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP);
-
-  uip_len += sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr);
-}
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/** @} */
-/** @} */
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uiparp uIP Address Resolution Protocol
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The Address Resolution Protocol ARP is used for mapping between IP
+ * addresses and link level addresses such as the Ethernet MAC
+ * addresses. ARP uses broadcast queries to ask for the link level
+ * address of a known IP address and the host which is configured with
+ * the IP address for which the query was meant, will respond with its
+ * link level address.
+ *
+ * \note This ARP implementation only supports Ethernet.
+ */
+ 
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Implementation of the ARP Address Resolution Protocol.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ *
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip_arp.c,v 1.5 2008/02/07 01:35:00 adamdunkels Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+
+#include "uip_arp.h"
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+struct arp_hdr {
+  struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr;
+  u16_t hwtype;
+  u16_t protocol;
+  u8_t hwlen;
+  u8_t protolen;
+  u16_t opcode;
+  struct uip_eth_addr shwaddr;
+  uip_ipaddr_t sipaddr;
+  struct uip_eth_addr dhwaddr;
+  uip_ipaddr_t dipaddr;
+};
+
+struct ethip_hdr {
+  struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr;
+  /* IP header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+};
+
+#define ARP_REQUEST 1
+#define ARP_REPLY   2
+
+#define ARP_HWTYPE_ETH 1
+
+struct arp_entry {
+  uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+  struct uip_eth_addr ethaddr;
+  u8_t time;
+};
+
+static const struct uip_eth_addr broadcast_ethaddr =
+  {{0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff}};
+static const u16_t broadcast_ipaddr[2] = {0xffff,0xffff};
+
+static struct arp_entry arp_table[UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE];
+static uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+static u8_t i, c;
+
+static u8_t arptime;
+static u8_t tmpage;
+
+#define BUF   ((struct arp_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
+#define IPBUF ((struct ethip_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
+
+#define DEBUG 0
+#if DEBUG
+#include <stdio.h>
+#define PRINTF(...) printf(__VA_ARGS__)
+#else
+#define PRINTF(...)
+#endif
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Initialize the ARP module.
+ *
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_init(void)
+{
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+    memset(&arp_table[i].ipaddr, 0, 4);
+  }
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Periodic ARP processing function.
+ *
+ * This function performs periodic timer processing in the ARP module
+ * and should be called at regular intervals. The recommended interval
+ * is 10 seconds between the calls.
+ *
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_timer(void)
+{
+  struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
+  
+  ++arptime;
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) &&
+       arptime - tabptr->time >= UIP_ARP_MAXAGE) {
+      memset(&tabptr->ipaddr, 0, 4);
+    }
+  }
+
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static void
+uip_arp_update(uip_ipaddr_t *ipaddr, struct uip_eth_addr *ethaddr)
+{
+  register struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
+  /* Walk through the ARP mapping table and try to find an entry to
+     update. If none is found, the IP -> MAC address mapping is
+     inserted in the ARP table. */
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+    /* Only check those entries that are actually in use. */
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+
+      /* Check if the source IP address of the incoming packet matches
+         the IP address in this ARP table entry. */
+      if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) {
+	 
+	/* An old entry found, update this and return. */
+	memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6);
+	tabptr->time = arptime;
+
+	return;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* If we get here, no existing ARP table entry was found, so we
+     create one. */
+
+  /* First, we try to find an unused entry in the ARP table. */
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* If no unused entry is found, we try to find the oldest entry and
+     throw it away. */
+  if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) {
+    tmpage = 0;
+    c = 0;
+    for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+      tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+      if(arptime - tabptr->time > tmpage) {
+	tmpage = arptime - tabptr->time;
+	c = i;
+      }
+    }
+    i = c;
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+  }
+
+  /* Now, i is the ARP table entry which we will fill with the new
+     information. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&tabptr->ipaddr, ipaddr);
+  memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6);
+  tabptr->time = arptime;
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * ARP processing for incoming IP packets
+ *
+ * This function should be called by the device driver when an IP
+ * packet has been received. The function will check if the address is
+ * in the ARP cache, and if so the ARP cache entry will be
+ * refreshed. If no ARP cache entry was found, a new one is created.
+ *
+ * This function expects an IP packet with a prepended Ethernet header
+ * in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the global
+ * variable uip_len.
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if 0
+void
+uip_arp_ipin(void)
+{
+  uip_len -= sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr);
+	
+  /* Only insert/update an entry if the source IP address of the
+     incoming IP packet comes from a host on the local network. */
+  if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0]) !=
+     (uip_hostaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0])) {
+    return;
+  }
+  if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1]) !=
+     (uip_hostaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1])) {
+    return;
+  }
+  uip_arp_update(IPBUF->srcipaddr, &(IPBUF->ethhdr.src));
+  
+  return;
+}
+#endif /* 0 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * ARP processing for incoming ARP packets.
+ *
+ * This function should be called by the device driver when an ARP
+ * packet has been received. The function will act differently
+ * depending on the ARP packet type: if it is a reply for a request
+ * that we previously sent out, the ARP cache will be filled in with
+ * the values from the ARP reply. If the incoming ARP packet is an ARP
+ * request for our IP address, an ARP reply packet is created and put
+ * into the uip_buf[] buffer.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, the value of the global variable uip_len
+ * indicates whether the device driver should send out a packet or
+ * not. If uip_len is zero, no packet should be sent. If uip_len is
+ * non-zero, it contains the length of the outbound packet that is
+ * present in the uip_buf[] buffer.
+ *
+ * This function expects an ARP packet with a prepended Ethernet
+ * header in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the
+ * global variable uip_len.
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_arpin(void)
+{
+  if(uip_len < sizeof(struct arp_hdr)) {
+    uip_len = 0;
+    return;
+  }
+  uip_len = 0;
+  
+  switch(BUF->opcode) {
+  case HTONS(ARP_REQUEST):
+    /* ARP request. If it asked for our address, we send out a
+       reply. */
+    /*    if(BUF->dipaddr[0] == uip_hostaddr[0] &&
+	  BUF->dipaddr[1] == uip_hostaddr[1]) {*/
+    PRINTF("uip_arp_arpin: request for %d.%d.%d.%d (we are %d.%d.%d.%d)\n",
+	   BUF->dipaddr.u8[0], BUF->dipaddr.u8[1],
+	   BUF->dipaddr.u8[2], BUF->dipaddr.u8[3],
+	   uip_hostaddr.u8[0], uip_hostaddr.u8[1],
+	   uip_hostaddr.u8[2], uip_hostaddr.u8[3]);
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+      /* First, we register the one who made the request in our ARP
+	 table, since it is likely that we will do more communication
+	 with this host in the future. */
+      uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr);
+      
+      BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REPLY);
+
+      memcpy(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, BUF->shwaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 6);
+      
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &BUF->sipaddr);
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+      BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP);
+      uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr);
+    }
+    break;
+  case HTONS(ARP_REPLY):
+    /* ARP reply. We insert or update the ARP table if it was meant
+       for us. */
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+      uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr);
+    }
+    break;
+  }
+
+  return;
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Prepend Ethernet header to an outbound IP packet and see if we need
+ * to send out an ARP request.
+ *
+ * This function should be called before sending out an IP packet. The
+ * function checks the destination IP address of the IP packet to see
+ * what Ethernet MAC address that should be used as a destination MAC
+ * address on the Ethernet.
+ *
+ * If the destination IP address is in the local network (determined
+ * by logical ANDing of netmask and our IP address), the function
+ * checks the ARP cache to see if an entry for the destination IP
+ * address is found. If so, an Ethernet header is prepended and the
+ * function returns. If no ARP cache entry is found for the
+ * destination IP address, the packet in the uip_buf[] is replaced by
+ * an ARP request packet for the IP address. The IP packet is dropped
+ * and it is assumed that they higher level protocols (e.g., TCP)
+ * eventually will retransmit the dropped packet.
+ *
+ * If the destination IP address is not on the local network, the IP
+ * address of the default router is used instead.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, a packet is present in the uip_buf[]
+ * buffer, and the length of the packet is in the global variable
+ * uip_len.
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_out(void)
+{
+  struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
+  
+  /* Find the destination IP address in the ARP table and construct
+     the Ethernet header. If the destination IP addres isn't on the
+     local network, we use the default router's IP address instead.
+
+     If not ARP table entry is found, we overwrite the original IP
+     packet with an ARP request for the IP address. */
+
+  /* First check if destination is a local broadcast. */
+  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr)) {
+    memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, broadcast_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+  } else {
+    /* Check if the destination address is on the local network. */
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr, &uip_netmask)) {
+      /* Destination address was not on the local network, so we need to
+	 use the default router's IP address instead of the destination
+	 address when determining the MAC address. */
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &uip_draddr);
+    } else {
+      /* Else, we use the destination IP address. */
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &IPBUF->destipaddr);
+    }
+      
+    for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+      tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+      if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) {
+	break;
+      }
+    }
+
+    if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) {
+      /* The destination address was not in our ARP table, so we
+	 overwrite the IP packet with an ARP request. */
+
+      memset(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, 0xff, 6);
+      memset(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 0x00, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+    
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &ipaddr);
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+      BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REQUEST); /* ARP request. */
+      BUF->hwtype = HTONS(ARP_HWTYPE_ETH);
+      BUF->protocol = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP);
+      BUF->hwlen = 6;
+      BUF->protolen = 4;
+      BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP);
+
+      uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN];
+    
+      uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr);
+      return;
+    }
+
+    /* Build an ethernet header. */
+    memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, tabptr->ethaddr.addr, 6);
+  }
+  memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+  
+  IPBUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP);
+
+  uip_len += sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr);
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @} */
+/** @} */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h
index ea2fd293c..114d4310c 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h
@@ -1,145 +1,145 @@
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \addtogroup uiparp
- * @{
- */
- 
-/**
- * \file
- * Macros and definitions for the ARP module.
- * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
- */
-  
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
- *    products derived from this software without specific prior
- *    written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
- * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
- * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
- * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
- * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
- * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
- * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
- * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
- * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- *
- * $Id: uip_arp.h,v 1.2 2006/08/26 23:58:45 oliverschmidt Exp $
- *
- */
-
-#ifndef __UIP_ARP_H__
-#define __UIP_ARP_H__
-
-#include "uip.h"
-
-
-extern struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr;
-
-/**
- * The Ethernet header.
- */
-struct uip_eth_hdr {
-  struct uip_eth_addr dest;
-  struct uip_eth_addr src;
-  u16_t type;
-};
-
-#define UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP  0x0806
-#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IP   0x0800
-#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IPV6 0x86dd
-
-
-/* The uip_arp_init() function must be called before any of the other
-   ARP functions. */
-void uip_arp_init(void);
-
-/* The uip_arp_ipin() function should be called whenever an IP packet
-   arrives from the Ethernet. This function refreshes the ARP table or
-   inserts a new mapping if none exists. The function assumes that an
-   IP packet with an Ethernet header is present in the uip_buf buffer
-   and that the length of the packet is in the uip_len variable. */
-/*void uip_arp_ipin(void);*/
-#define uip_arp_ipin()
-
-/* The uip_arp_arpin() should be called when an ARP packet is received
-   by the Ethernet driver. This function also assumes that the
-   Ethernet frame is present in the uip_buf buffer. When the
-   uip_arp_arpin() function returns, the contents of the uip_buf
-   buffer should be sent out on the Ethernet if the uip_len variable
-   is > 0. */
-void uip_arp_arpin(void);
-
-/* The uip_arp_out() function should be called when an IP packet
-   should be sent out on the Ethernet. This function creates an
-   Ethernet header before the IP header in the uip_buf buffer. The
-   Ethernet header will have the correct Ethernet MAC destination
-   address filled in if an ARP table entry for the destination IP
-   address (or the IP address of the default router) is present. If no
-   such table entry is found, the IP packet is overwritten with an ARP
-   request and we rely on TCP to retransmit the packet that was
-   overwritten. In any case, the uip_len variable holds the length of
-   the Ethernet frame that should be transmitted. */
-void uip_arp_out(void);
-
-/* The uip_arp_timer() function should be called every ten seconds. It
-   is responsible for flushing old entries in the ARP table. */
-void uip_arp_timer(void);
-
-/** @} */
-
-/**
- * \addtogroup uipconffunc
- * @{
- */
-
-
-/**
- * Specifiy the Ethernet MAC address.
- *
- * The ARP code needs to know the MAC address of the Ethernet card in
- * order to be able to respond to ARP queries and to generate working
- * Ethernet headers.
- *
- * \note This macro only specifies the Ethernet MAC address to the ARP
- * code. It cannot be used to change the MAC address of the Ethernet
- * card.
- *
- * \param eaddr A pointer to a struct uip_eth_addr containing the
- * Ethernet MAC address of the Ethernet card.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_setethaddr(eaddr) do {uip_ethaddr.addr[0] = eaddr.addr[0]; \
-                              uip_ethaddr.addr[1] = eaddr.addr[1];\
-                              uip_ethaddr.addr[2] = eaddr.addr[2];\
-                              uip_ethaddr.addr[3] = eaddr.addr[3];\
-                              uip_ethaddr.addr[4] = eaddr.addr[4];\
-                              uip_ethaddr.addr[5] = eaddr.addr[5];} while(0)
-
-/** @} */
-
-
-#endif /* __UIP_ARP_H__ */
-/** @} */
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uiparp
+ * @{
+ */
+ 
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Macros and definitions for the ARP module.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ */
+  
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip_arp.h,v 1.2 2006/08/26 23:58:45 oliverschmidt Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIP_ARP_H__
+#define __UIP_ARP_H__
+
+#include "uip.h"
+
+
+extern struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr;
+
+/**
+ * The Ethernet header.
+ */
+struct uip_eth_hdr {
+  struct uip_eth_addr dest;
+  struct uip_eth_addr src;
+  u16_t type;
+};
+
+#define UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP  0x0806
+#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IP   0x0800
+#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IPV6 0x86dd
+
+
+/* The uip_arp_init() function must be called before any of the other
+   ARP functions. */
+void uip_arp_init(void);
+
+/* The uip_arp_ipin() function should be called whenever an IP packet
+   arrives from the Ethernet. This function refreshes the ARP table or
+   inserts a new mapping if none exists. The function assumes that an
+   IP packet with an Ethernet header is present in the uip_buf buffer
+   and that the length of the packet is in the uip_len variable. */
+/*void uip_arp_ipin(void);*/
+#define uip_arp_ipin()
+
+/* The uip_arp_arpin() should be called when an ARP packet is received
+   by the Ethernet driver. This function also assumes that the
+   Ethernet frame is present in the uip_buf buffer. When the
+   uip_arp_arpin() function returns, the contents of the uip_buf
+   buffer should be sent out on the Ethernet if the uip_len variable
+   is > 0. */
+void uip_arp_arpin(void);
+
+/* The uip_arp_out() function should be called when an IP packet
+   should be sent out on the Ethernet. This function creates an
+   Ethernet header before the IP header in the uip_buf buffer. The
+   Ethernet header will have the correct Ethernet MAC destination
+   address filled in if an ARP table entry for the destination IP
+   address (or the IP address of the default router) is present. If no
+   such table entry is found, the IP packet is overwritten with an ARP
+   request and we rely on TCP to retransmit the packet that was
+   overwritten. In any case, the uip_len variable holds the length of
+   the Ethernet frame that should be transmitted. */
+void uip_arp_out(void);
+
+/* The uip_arp_timer() function should be called every ten seconds. It
+   is responsible for flushing old entries in the ARP table. */
+void uip_arp_timer(void);
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uipconffunc
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * Specifiy the Ethernet MAC address.
+ *
+ * The ARP code needs to know the MAC address of the Ethernet card in
+ * order to be able to respond to ARP queries and to generate working
+ * Ethernet headers.
+ *
+ * \note This macro only specifies the Ethernet MAC address to the ARP
+ * code. It cannot be used to change the MAC address of the Ethernet
+ * card.
+ *
+ * \param eaddr A pointer to a struct uip_eth_addr containing the
+ * Ethernet MAC address of the Ethernet card.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_setethaddr(eaddr) do {uip_ethaddr.addr[0] = eaddr.addr[0]; \
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[1] = eaddr.addr[1];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[2] = eaddr.addr[2];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[3] = eaddr.addr[3];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[4] = eaddr.addr[4];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[5] = eaddr.addr[5];} while(0)
+
+/** @} */
+
+
+#endif /* __UIP_ARP_H__ */
+/** @} */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h
index 7b9d19092..244ce1df1 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h
@@ -1,737 +1,737 @@
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipopt Configuration options for uIP
- * @{
- *
- * uIP is configured using the per-project configuration file
- * "uipopt.h". This file contains all compile-time options for uIP and
- * should be tweaked to match each specific project. The uIP
- * distribution contains a documented example "uipopt.h" that can be
- * copied and modified for each project.
- */
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Configuration options for uIP.
- * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
- *
- * This file is used for tweaking various configuration options for
- * uIP. You should make a copy of this file into one of your project's
- * directories instead of editing this example "uipopt.h" file that
- * comes with the uIP distribution.
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
- *    products derived from this software without specific prior
- *    written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
- * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
- * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
- * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
- * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
- * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
- * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
- * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
- * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- *
- * $Id: uipopt.h,v 1.11 2009/04/10 00:37:48 adamdunkels Exp $
- *
- */
-
-#ifndef __UIPOPT_H__
-#define __UIPOPT_H__
-
-#ifndef UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN
-#define UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN  3412
-#endif /* UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN */
-#ifndef UIP_BIG_ENDIAN
-#define UIP_BIG_ENDIAN     1234
-#endif /* UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptstaticconf Static configuration options
- * @{
- *
- * These configuration options can be used for setting the IP address
- * settings statically, but only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is set to 1. The
- * configuration options for a specific node includes IP address,
- * netmask and default router as well as the Ethernet address. The
- * netmask, default router and Ethernet address are applicable only
- * if uIP should be run over Ethernet.
- *
- * This options are meaningful only for the IPv4 code.
- *
- * All of these should be changed to suit your project.
- */
-
-/**
- * Determines if uIP should use a fixed IP address or not.
- *
- * If uIP should use a fixed IP address, the settings are set in the
- * uipopt.h file. If not, the macros uip_sethostaddr(),
- * uip_setdraddr() and uip_setnetmask() should be used instead.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define UIP_FIXEDADDR    0
-
-/**
- * Ping IP address assignment.
- *
- * uIP uses a "ping" packets for setting its own IP address if this
- * option is set. If so, uIP will start with an empty IP address and
- * the destination IP address of the first incoming "ping" (ICMP echo)
- * packet will be used for setting the hosts IP address.
- *
- * \note This works only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is 0.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF
-#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF
-#else /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */
-#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF 0
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */
-
-
-/**
- * Specifies if the uIP ARP module should be compiled with a fixed
- * Ethernet MAC address or not.
- *
- * If this configuration option is 0, the macro uip_setethaddr() can
- * be used to specify the Ethernet address at run-time.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define UIP_FIXEDETHADDR 0
-
-/** @} */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptip IP configuration options
- * @{
- *
- */
-/**
- * The IP TTL (time to live) of IP packets sent by uIP.
- *
- * This should normally not be changed.
- */
-#define UIP_TTL         64
-
-/**
- * The maximum time an IP fragment should wait in the reassembly
- * buffer before it is dropped.
- *
- */
-#define UIP_REASS_MAXAGE 60 /*60s*/
-
-/**
- * Turn on support for IP packet reassembly.
- *
- * uIP supports reassembly of fragmented IP packets. This features
- * requires an additional amount of RAM to hold the reassembly buffer
- * and the reassembly code size is approximately 700 bytes.  The
- * reassembly buffer is of the same size as the uip_buf buffer
- * (configured by UIP_BUFSIZE).
- *
- * \note IP packet reassembly is not heavily tested.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY
-#define UIP_REASSEMBLY UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY
-#else /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */
-#define UIP_REASSEMBLY 0
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */
-/** @} */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptipv6 IPv6 configuration options
- * @{
- *
- */
-
-/** The maximum transmission unit at the IP Layer*/
-#define UIP_LINK_MTU 1280
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6
-/** Do we use IPv6 or not (default: no) */
-#define UIP_CONF_IPV6                 0
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT
-/** Do we do per %neighbor queuing during address resolution (default: no) */
-#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT       0
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS 
-/** Do we do IPv6 consistency checks (highly recommended, default: yes) */
-#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS          1
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY 
-/** Do we do IPv6 fragmentation (default: no) */
-#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY      0
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES
-/** Default number of IPv6 addresses associated to the node's interface */
-#define UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES  3
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES 
-/** Default number of IPv6 prefixes associated to the node's interface */
-#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES     3
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS 
-/** Default number of neighbors that can be stored in the %neighbor cache */
-#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS    4  
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS
-/** Minimum number of default routers */
-#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS   2
-#endif
-/** @} */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptudp UDP configuration options
- * @{
- *
- * \note The UDP support in uIP is still not entirely complete; there
- * is no support for sending or receiving broadcast or multicast
- * packets, but it works well enough to support a number of vital
- * applications such as DNS queries, though
- */
-
-/**
- * Toggles whether UDP support should be compiled in or not.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP
-#define UIP_UDP UIP_CONF_UDP
-#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
-#define UIP_UDP           1
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
-
-/**
- * Toggles if UDP checksums should be used or not.
- *
- * \note Support for UDP checksums is currently not included in uIP,
- * so this option has no function.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS
-#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS
-#else
-#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS 0
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The maximum amount of concurrent UDP connections.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS
-#define UIP_UDP_CONNS UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS
-#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */
-#define UIP_UDP_CONNS    10
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */
-
-/**
- * The name of the function that should be called when UDP datagrams arrive.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-
-
-/** @} */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipopttcp TCP configuration options
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * Toggles whether UDP support should be compiled in or not.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP
-#define UIP_TCP UIP_CONF_TCP
-#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
-#define UIP_TCP           1
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
-
-/**
- * Determines if support for opening connections from uIP should be
- * compiled in.
- *
- * If the applications that are running on top of uIP for this project
- * do not need to open outgoing TCP connections, this configuration
- * option can be turned off to reduce the code size of uIP.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN
-#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN 1
-#else /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-
-/**
- * The maximum number of simultaneously open TCP connections.
- *
- * Since the TCP connections are statically allocated, turning this
- * configuration knob down results in less RAM used. Each TCP
- * connection requires approximately 30 bytes of memory.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS
-#define UIP_CONNS       10
-#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */
-#define UIP_CONNS UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */
-
-
-/**
- * The maximum number of simultaneously listening TCP ports.
- *
- * Each listening TCP port requires 2 bytes of memory.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS
-#define UIP_LISTENPORTS 20
-#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */
-#define UIP_LISTENPORTS UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */
-
-/**
- * Determines if support for TCP urgent data notification should be
- * compiled in.
- *
- * Urgent data (out-of-band data) is a rarely used TCP feature that
- * very seldom would be required.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#if !defined(UIP_URGDATA)
-#define UIP_URGDATA      0
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The initial retransmission timeout counted in timer pulses.
- *
- * This should not be changed.
- */
-#if !defined(UIP_RTO)
-#define UIP_RTO         3
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The maximum number of times a segment should be retransmitted
- * before the connection should be aborted.
- *
- * This should not be changed.
- */
-#if !defined(UIP_MAXRTX)
-#define UIP_MAXRTX      8
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The maximum number of times a SYN segment should be retransmitted
- * before a connection request should be deemed to have been
- * unsuccessful.
- *
- * This should not need to be changed.
- */
-#if !defined(UIP_MAXSYNRTX)
-#define UIP_MAXSYNRTX      5
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The TCP maximum segment size.
- *
- * This is should not be to set to more than
- * UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN.
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS
-#define UIP_TCP_MSS UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS
-#else
-#define UIP_TCP_MSS     (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN)
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The size of the advertised receiver's window.
- *
- * Should be set low (i.e., to the size of the uip_buf buffer) if the
- * application is slow to process incoming data, or high (32768 bytes)
- * if the application processes data quickly.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW
-#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_TCP_MSS
-#else
-#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW
-#endif
-
-/**
- * How long a connection should stay in the TIME_WAIT state.
- *
- * This configuration option has no real implication, and it should be
- * left untouched.
- */
-#define UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT 120
-
-
-/** @} */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptarp ARP configuration options
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * The size of the ARP table.
- *
- * This option should be set to a larger value if this uIP node will
- * have many connections from the local network.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE
-#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE
-#else
-#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE 8
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The maximum age of ARP table entries measured in 10ths of seconds.
- *
- * An UIP_ARP_MAXAGE of 120 corresponds to 20 minutes (BSD
- * default).
- */
-#define UIP_ARP_MAXAGE 120
-
-
-/** @} */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptmac layer 2 options (for ipv6)
- * @{
- */
-
-#define UIP_DEFAULT_PREFIX_LEN 64
-
-/** @} */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptsics 6lowpan options (for ipv6)
- * @{
- */
-/**
- * Timeout for packet reassembly at the 6lowpan layer
- * (should be < 60s)
- */
-#ifdef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE
-#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE
-#else
-#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE 20
-#endif
-
-/**
- * Do we compress the IP header or not (default: no)
- */
-#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION
-#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION 0
-#endif
-
-/**
- * If we use IPHC compression, how many address contexts do we support
- */
-#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS 
-#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS 1
-#endif
-
-/**
- * Do we support 6lowpan fragmentation
- */
-#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG  
-#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG  0
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptgeneral General configuration options
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * The size of the uIP packet buffer.
- *
- * The uIP packet buffer should not be smaller than 60 bytes, and does
- * not need to be larger than 1514 bytes. Lower size results in lower
- * TCP throughput, larger size results in higher TCP throughput.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE
-#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_LINK_MTU + UIP_LLH_LEN
-#else /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */
-#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */
-
-
-/**
- * Determines if statistics support should be compiled in.
- *
- * The statistics is useful for debugging and to show the user.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_STATISTICS
-#define UIP_STATISTICS  0
-#else /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */
-#define UIP_STATISTICS UIP_CONF_STATISTICS
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */
-
-/**
- * Determines if logging of certain events should be compiled in.
- *
- * This is useful mostly for debugging. The function uip_log()
- * must be implemented to suit the architecture of the project, if
- * logging is turned on.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_LOGGING
-#define UIP_LOGGING     0
-#else /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */
-#define UIP_LOGGING     UIP_CONF_LOGGING
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */
-
-/**
- * Broadcast support.
- *
- * This flag configures IP broadcast support. This is useful only
- * together with UDP.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- *
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_BROADCAST
-#define UIP_BROADCAST 0
-#else /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */
-#define UIP_BROADCAST UIP_CONF_BROADCAST
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */
-
-/**
- * Print out a uIP log message.
- *
- * This function must be implemented by the module that uses uIP, and
- * is called by uIP whenever a log message is generated.
- */
-void uip_log(char *msg);
-
-/**
- * The link level header length.
- *
- * This is the offset into the uip_buf where the IP header can be
- * found. For Ethernet, this should be set to 14. For SLIP, this
- * should be set to 0.
- *
- * \note we probably won't use this constant for other link layers than
- * ethernet as they have variable header length (this is due to variable
- * number and type of address fields and to optional security features)
- * E.g.: 802.15.4 -> 2 + (1/2*4/8) + 0/5/6/10/14
- *       802.11 -> 4 + (6*3/4) + 2
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN
-#define UIP_LLH_LEN UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN
-#else /* UIP_LLH_LEN */
-#define UIP_LLH_LEN     14
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN */
-
-/** @} */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptcpu CPU architecture configuration
- * @{
- *
- * The CPU architecture configuration is where the endianess of the
- * CPU on which uIP is to be run is specified. Most CPUs today are
- * little endian, and the most notable exception are the Motorolas
- * which are big endian. The BYTE_ORDER macro should be changed to
- * reflect the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run.
- */
-
-/**
- * The byte order of the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run.
- *
- * This option can be either UIP_BIG_ENDIAN (Motorola byte order) or
- * UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN (Intel byte order).
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER
-#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER     UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER
-#else /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */
-#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER     UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */
-
-/** @} */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include <ff.h>
-#include <stdbool.h>
-#include <stdint.h>
-
-#include "timer.h"
-
-typedef uint8_t u8_t;
-typedef uint16_t u16_t;
-typedef uint32_t u32_t;
-typedef uint32_t uip_stats_t;
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptapp Application specific configurations
- * @{
- *
- * An uIP application is implemented using a single application
- * function that is called by uIP whenever a TCP/IP event occurs. The
- * name of this function must be registered with uIP at compile time
- * using the UIP_APPCALL definition.
- *
- * uIP applications can store the application state within the
- * uip_conn structure by specifying the type of the application
- * structure by typedef:ing the type uip_tcp_appstate_t and uip_udp_appstate_t.
- *
- * The file containing the definitions must be included in the
- * uipopt.h file.
- *
- * The following example illustrates how this can look.
- \code
-
- void httpd_appcall(void);
- #define UIP_APPCALL     httpd_appcall
-
- struct httpd_state {
- u8_t state;
- u16_t count;
- char *dataptr;
- char *script;
- };
- typedef struct httpd_state uip_tcp_appstate_t
- \endcode
-*/
-#define UIP_UDP_APPCALL uIPManagement_UDPCallback
-void UIP_UDP_APPCALL(void);
-
-/**
- * \var #define UIP_APPCALL
- *
- * The name of the application function that uIP should call in
- * response to TCP/IP events.
- *
- */
-#define UIP_APPCALL     uIPManagement_TCPCallback
-void UIP_APPCALL(void);
-
-/**
- * \var typedef uip_tcp_appstate_t
- *
- * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the
- * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding
- * application state information.
- */
-typedef union
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t  CurrentState;
-		uint8_t  NextState;
-		
-		char     FileName[MAX_URI_LENGTH];
-		FIL      FileHandle;
-		bool     FileOpen;
-		uint32_t ACKedFilePos;
-		uint16_t SentChunkSize;
-	} HTTPServer;
-	
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t  CurrentState;
-		uint8_t  NextState;
-		
-		uint8_t  IssuedCommand;
-	} TELNETServer;
-} uip_tcp_appstate_t;
-
-/**
- * \var typedef uip_udp_appstate_t
- *
- * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the
- * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding
- * application state information.
- */
-typedef union
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t      CurrentState;
-		struct timer Timeout;
-		
-		struct
-		{
-			uint8_t AllocatedIP[4];
-			uint8_t Netmask[4];
-			uint8_t GatewayIP[4];
-			uint8_t ServerIP[4];
-		} DHCPOffer_Data;
-	} DHCPClient;
-} uip_udp_appstate_t;
-/** @} */
-
-#endif /* __UIPOPT_H__ */
-/** @} */
-/** @} */
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipopt Configuration options for uIP
+ * @{
+ *
+ * uIP is configured using the per-project configuration file
+ * "uipopt.h". This file contains all compile-time options for uIP and
+ * should be tweaked to match each specific project. The uIP
+ * distribution contains a documented example "uipopt.h" that can be
+ * copied and modified for each project.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Configuration options for uIP.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ *
+ * This file is used for tweaking various configuration options for
+ * uIP. You should make a copy of this file into one of your project's
+ * directories instead of editing this example "uipopt.h" file that
+ * comes with the uIP distribution.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uipopt.h,v 1.11 2009/04/10 00:37:48 adamdunkels Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIPOPT_H__
+#define __UIPOPT_H__
+
+#ifndef UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN
+#define UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN  3412
+#endif /* UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN */
+#ifndef UIP_BIG_ENDIAN
+#define UIP_BIG_ENDIAN     1234
+#endif /* UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptstaticconf Static configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ * These configuration options can be used for setting the IP address
+ * settings statically, but only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is set to 1. The
+ * configuration options for a specific node includes IP address,
+ * netmask and default router as well as the Ethernet address. The
+ * netmask, default router and Ethernet address are applicable only
+ * if uIP should be run over Ethernet.
+ *
+ * This options are meaningful only for the IPv4 code.
+ *
+ * All of these should be changed to suit your project.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if uIP should use a fixed IP address or not.
+ *
+ * If uIP should use a fixed IP address, the settings are set in the
+ * uipopt.h file. If not, the macros uip_sethostaddr(),
+ * uip_setdraddr() and uip_setnetmask() should be used instead.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define UIP_FIXEDADDR    0
+
+/**
+ * Ping IP address assignment.
+ *
+ * uIP uses a "ping" packets for setting its own IP address if this
+ * option is set. If so, uIP will start with an empty IP address and
+ * the destination IP address of the first incoming "ping" (ICMP echo)
+ * packet will be used for setting the hosts IP address.
+ *
+ * \note This works only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is 0.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF
+#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF
+#else /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */
+#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF 0
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */
+
+
+/**
+ * Specifies if the uIP ARP module should be compiled with a fixed
+ * Ethernet MAC address or not.
+ *
+ * If this configuration option is 0, the macro uip_setethaddr() can
+ * be used to specify the Ethernet address at run-time.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define UIP_FIXEDETHADDR 0
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptip IP configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ */
+/**
+ * The IP TTL (time to live) of IP packets sent by uIP.
+ *
+ * This should normally not be changed.
+ */
+#define UIP_TTL         64
+
+/**
+ * The maximum time an IP fragment should wait in the reassembly
+ * buffer before it is dropped.
+ *
+ */
+#define UIP_REASS_MAXAGE 60 /*60s*/
+
+/**
+ * Turn on support for IP packet reassembly.
+ *
+ * uIP supports reassembly of fragmented IP packets. This features
+ * requires an additional amount of RAM to hold the reassembly buffer
+ * and the reassembly code size is approximately 700 bytes.  The
+ * reassembly buffer is of the same size as the uip_buf buffer
+ * (configured by UIP_BUFSIZE).
+ *
+ * \note IP packet reassembly is not heavily tested.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY
+#define UIP_REASSEMBLY UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY
+#else /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */
+#define UIP_REASSEMBLY 0
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptipv6 IPv6 configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ */
+
+/** The maximum transmission unit at the IP Layer*/
+#define UIP_LINK_MTU 1280
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/** Do we use IPv6 or not (default: no) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6                 0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT
+/** Do we do per %neighbor queuing during address resolution (default: no) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT       0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS 
+/** Do we do IPv6 consistency checks (highly recommended, default: yes) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS          1
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY 
+/** Do we do IPv6 fragmentation (default: no) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY      0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES
+/** Default number of IPv6 addresses associated to the node's interface */
+#define UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES  3
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES 
+/** Default number of IPv6 prefixes associated to the node's interface */
+#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES     3
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS 
+/** Default number of neighbors that can be stored in the %neighbor cache */
+#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS    4  
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS
+/** Minimum number of default routers */
+#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS   2
+#endif
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptudp UDP configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ * \note The UDP support in uIP is still not entirely complete; there
+ * is no support for sending or receiving broadcast or multicast
+ * packets, but it works well enough to support a number of vital
+ * applications such as DNS queries, though
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Toggles whether UDP support should be compiled in or not.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP
+#define UIP_UDP UIP_CONF_UDP
+#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
+#define UIP_UDP           1
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
+
+/**
+ * Toggles if UDP checksums should be used or not.
+ *
+ * \note Support for UDP checksums is currently not included in uIP,
+ * so this option has no function.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+#else
+#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS 0
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum amount of concurrent UDP connections.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS
+#define UIP_UDP_CONNS UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS
+#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */
+#define UIP_UDP_CONNS    10
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */
+
+/**
+ * The name of the function that should be called when UDP datagrams arrive.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipopttcp TCP configuration options
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Toggles whether UDP support should be compiled in or not.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP
+#define UIP_TCP UIP_CONF_TCP
+#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
+#define UIP_TCP           1
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if support for opening connections from uIP should be
+ * compiled in.
+ *
+ * If the applications that are running on top of uIP for this project
+ * do not need to open outgoing TCP connections, this configuration
+ * option can be turned off to reduce the code size of uIP.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN
+#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN 1
+#else /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of simultaneously open TCP connections.
+ *
+ * Since the TCP connections are statically allocated, turning this
+ * configuration knob down results in less RAM used. Each TCP
+ * connection requires approximately 30 bytes of memory.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS
+#define UIP_CONNS       10
+#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */
+#define UIP_CONNS UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */
+
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of simultaneously listening TCP ports.
+ *
+ * Each listening TCP port requires 2 bytes of memory.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS
+#define UIP_LISTENPORTS 20
+#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */
+#define UIP_LISTENPORTS UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if support for TCP urgent data notification should be
+ * compiled in.
+ *
+ * Urgent data (out-of-band data) is a rarely used TCP feature that
+ * very seldom would be required.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_URGDATA)
+#define UIP_URGDATA      0
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The initial retransmission timeout counted in timer pulses.
+ *
+ * This should not be changed.
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_RTO)
+#define UIP_RTO         3
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of times a segment should be retransmitted
+ * before the connection should be aborted.
+ *
+ * This should not be changed.
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_MAXRTX)
+#define UIP_MAXRTX      8
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of times a SYN segment should be retransmitted
+ * before a connection request should be deemed to have been
+ * unsuccessful.
+ *
+ * This should not need to be changed.
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_MAXSYNRTX)
+#define UIP_MAXSYNRTX      5
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The TCP maximum segment size.
+ *
+ * This is should not be to set to more than
+ * UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN.
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS
+#define UIP_TCP_MSS UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS
+#else
+#define UIP_TCP_MSS     (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN)
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The size of the advertised receiver's window.
+ *
+ * Should be set low (i.e., to the size of the uip_buf buffer) if the
+ * application is slow to process incoming data, or high (32768 bytes)
+ * if the application processes data quickly.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW
+#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_TCP_MSS
+#else
+#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * How long a connection should stay in the TIME_WAIT state.
+ *
+ * This configuration option has no real implication, and it should be
+ * left untouched.
+ */
+#define UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT 120
+
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptarp ARP configuration options
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The size of the ARP table.
+ *
+ * This option should be set to a larger value if this uIP node will
+ * have many connections from the local network.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE
+#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE
+#else
+#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE 8
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum age of ARP table entries measured in 10ths of seconds.
+ *
+ * An UIP_ARP_MAXAGE of 120 corresponds to 20 minutes (BSD
+ * default).
+ */
+#define UIP_ARP_MAXAGE 120
+
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptmac layer 2 options (for ipv6)
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define UIP_DEFAULT_PREFIX_LEN 64
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptsics 6lowpan options (for ipv6)
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * Timeout for packet reassembly at the 6lowpan layer
+ * (should be < 60s)
+ */
+#ifdef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE
+#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE
+#else
+#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE 20
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Do we compress the IP header or not (default: no)
+ */
+#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION
+#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION 0
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * If we use IPHC compression, how many address contexts do we support
+ */
+#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS 
+#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS 1
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Do we support 6lowpan fragmentation
+ */
+#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG  
+#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG  0
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptgeneral General configuration options
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The size of the uIP packet buffer.
+ *
+ * The uIP packet buffer should not be smaller than 60 bytes, and does
+ * not need to be larger than 1514 bytes. Lower size results in lower
+ * TCP throughput, larger size results in higher TCP throughput.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE
+#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_LINK_MTU + UIP_LLH_LEN
+#else /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */
+#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */
+
+
+/**
+ * Determines if statistics support should be compiled in.
+ *
+ * The statistics is useful for debugging and to show the user.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_STATISTICS
+#define UIP_STATISTICS  0
+#else /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */
+#define UIP_STATISTICS UIP_CONF_STATISTICS
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if logging of certain events should be compiled in.
+ *
+ * This is useful mostly for debugging. The function uip_log()
+ * must be implemented to suit the architecture of the project, if
+ * logging is turned on.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_LOGGING
+#define UIP_LOGGING     0
+#else /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */
+#define UIP_LOGGING     UIP_CONF_LOGGING
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */
+
+/**
+ * Broadcast support.
+ *
+ * This flag configures IP broadcast support. This is useful only
+ * together with UDP.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ *
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_BROADCAST
+#define UIP_BROADCAST 0
+#else /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */
+#define UIP_BROADCAST UIP_CONF_BROADCAST
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */
+
+/**
+ * Print out a uIP log message.
+ *
+ * This function must be implemented by the module that uses uIP, and
+ * is called by uIP whenever a log message is generated.
+ */
+void uip_log(char *msg);
+
+/**
+ * The link level header length.
+ *
+ * This is the offset into the uip_buf where the IP header can be
+ * found. For Ethernet, this should be set to 14. For SLIP, this
+ * should be set to 0.
+ *
+ * \note we probably won't use this constant for other link layers than
+ * ethernet as they have variable header length (this is due to variable
+ * number and type of address fields and to optional security features)
+ * E.g.: 802.15.4 -> 2 + (1/2*4/8) + 0/5/6/10/14
+ *       802.11 -> 4 + (6*3/4) + 2
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN
+#define UIP_LLH_LEN UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN
+#else /* UIP_LLH_LEN */
+#define UIP_LLH_LEN     14
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN */
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptcpu CPU architecture configuration
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The CPU architecture configuration is where the endianess of the
+ * CPU on which uIP is to be run is specified. Most CPUs today are
+ * little endian, and the most notable exception are the Motorolas
+ * which are big endian. The BYTE_ORDER macro should be changed to
+ * reflect the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The byte order of the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run.
+ *
+ * This option can be either UIP_BIG_ENDIAN (Motorola byte order) or
+ * UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN (Intel byte order).
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER
+#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER     UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER
+#else /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */
+#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER     UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include <ff.h>
+#include <stdbool.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "timer.h"
+
+typedef uint8_t u8_t;
+typedef uint16_t u16_t;
+typedef uint32_t u32_t;
+typedef uint32_t uip_stats_t;
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptapp Application specific configurations
+ * @{
+ *
+ * An uIP application is implemented using a single application
+ * function that is called by uIP whenever a TCP/IP event occurs. The
+ * name of this function must be registered with uIP at compile time
+ * using the UIP_APPCALL definition.
+ *
+ * uIP applications can store the application state within the
+ * uip_conn structure by specifying the type of the application
+ * structure by typedef:ing the type uip_tcp_appstate_t and uip_udp_appstate_t.
+ *
+ * The file containing the definitions must be included in the
+ * uipopt.h file.
+ *
+ * The following example illustrates how this can look.
+ \code
+
+ void httpd_appcall(void);
+ #define UIP_APPCALL     httpd_appcall
+
+ struct httpd_state {
+ u8_t state;
+ u16_t count;
+ char *dataptr;
+ char *script;
+ };
+ typedef struct httpd_state uip_tcp_appstate_t
+ \endcode
+*/
+#define UIP_UDP_APPCALL uIPManagement_UDPCallback
+void UIP_UDP_APPCALL(void);
+
+/**
+ * \var #define UIP_APPCALL
+ *
+ * The name of the application function that uIP should call in
+ * response to TCP/IP events.
+ *
+ */
+#define UIP_APPCALL     uIPManagement_TCPCallback
+void UIP_APPCALL(void);
+
+/**
+ * \var typedef uip_tcp_appstate_t
+ *
+ * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the
+ * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding
+ * application state information.
+ */
+typedef union
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  CurrentState;
+		uint8_t  NextState;
+		
+		char     FileName[MAX_URI_LENGTH];
+		FIL      FileHandle;
+		bool     FileOpen;
+		uint32_t ACKedFilePos;
+		uint16_t SentChunkSize;
+	} HTTPServer;
+	
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  CurrentState;
+		uint8_t  NextState;
+		
+		uint8_t  IssuedCommand;
+	} TELNETServer;
+} uip_tcp_appstate_t;
+
+/**
+ * \var typedef uip_udp_appstate_t
+ *
+ * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the
+ * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding
+ * application state information.
+ */
+typedef union
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t      CurrentState;
+		struct timer Timeout;
+		
+		struct
+		{
+			uint8_t AllocatedIP[4];
+			uint8_t Netmask[4];
+			uint8_t GatewayIP[4];
+			uint8_t ServerIP[4];
+		} DHCPOffer_Data;
+	} DHCPClient;
+} uip_udp_appstate_t;
+/** @} */
+
+#endif /* __UIPOPT_H__ */
+/** @} */
+/** @} */
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c b/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c
index eecada91f..d6b76ec73 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c
@@ -1,113 +1,113 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to
- *  manage the USB Mass Storage device mode.
- */
- 
-#include "USBDeviceMode.h"
-
-/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber           = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize        = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = true,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = true,
-
-				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
-			},
-	};
-
-
-/** USB device mode management task. This function manages the Mass Storage Device class driver when the device is
- *  initialized in USB device mode.
- */
-void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void)
-{
-	if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_DEVICE)
-	  return;
-
-	MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	if (!(MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface)))
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
- */
-bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool CommandSuccess;
-	
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	
-	return CommandSuccess;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to
+ *  manage the USB Mass Storage device mode.
+ */
+ 
+#include "USBDeviceMode.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber      = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize        = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank  = true,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber     = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize       = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = true,
+
+				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** USB device mode management task. This function manages the Mass Storage Device class driver when the device is
+ *  initialized in USB device mode.
+ */
+void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void)
+{
+	if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_DEVICE)
+	  return;
+
+	MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+	
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h b/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h
index 9b563c30a..2bd7c3818 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h
@@ -1,57 +1,57 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for USBDeviceMode.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _USBDEVICEMODE_H_
-#define _USBDEVICEMODE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
-		
-		#include "Webserver.h"
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USBDeviceMode.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USBDEVICEMODE_H_
+#define _USBDEVICEMODE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorage.h>
+		
+		#include "Webserver.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c b/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c
index 14f33e07c..0eb5c6f4b 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c
@@ -1,178 +1,178 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Host Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to
- *  manage the USB RNDIS host mode.
- */
- 
-#include "USBHostMode.h"
-
-/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipeNumber           = 1,
-				.DataINPipeDoubleBank       = false,
-
-				.DataOUTPipeNumber          = 2,
-				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank      = false,
-
-				.NotificationPipeNumber     = 3,
-				.NotificationPipeDoubleBank = false,
-				
-				.HostMaxPacketSize          = UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE,
-			},
-	};
-
-
-/** USB host mode management task. This function manages the RNDIS Host class driver and uIP stack when the device is
- *  initialized in USB host mode.
- */
-void USBHostMode_USBTask(void)
-{
-	if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_HOST)
-	  return;
-
-	switch (USB_HostState)
-	{
-		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-		
-			uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-			uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-			if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-												   sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-			{
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-
-			if (RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface,
-										  ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-			{
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			if (RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;			
-			}
-			
-			uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST);
-			if (RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
-											&PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			if (RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
-											  &MACAddress, sizeof(MACAddress)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-			{
-				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
-				break;
-			}
-			
-			/* Initialize uIP stack */
-			uIPManagement_Init();
-			
-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
-			break;
-		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
-			uIPManagement_ManageNetwork();
-		
-			break;
-	}
-
-	RNDIS_Host_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_ShutDown();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Host Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to
+ *  manage the USB RNDIS host mode.
+ */
+ 
+#include "USBHostMode.h"
+
+/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipeNumber           = 1,
+				.DataINPipeDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTPipeNumber          = 2,
+				.DataOUTPipeDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationPipeNumber     = 3,
+				.NotificationPipeDoubleBank = false,
+				
+				.HostMaxPacketSize          = UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** USB host mode management task. This function manages the RNDIS Host class driver and uIP stack when the device is
+ *  initialized in USB host mode.
+ */
+void USBHostMode_USBTask(void)
+{
+	if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_HOST)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+		
+			uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+			uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+			if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+												   sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+			{
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			if (RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface,
+										  ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+			{
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			if (RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;			
+			}
+			
+			uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST);
+			if (RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+											&PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			if (RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
+											  &MACAddress, sizeof(MACAddress)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
+				break;
+			}
+			
+			/* Initialize uIP stack */
+			uIPManagement_Init();
+			
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+			uIPManagement_ManageNetwork();
+		
+			break;
+	}
+
+	RNDIS_Host_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_ShutDown();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h b/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h
index b548e6b8d..1b30f6ad6 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h
@@ -1,58 +1,58 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for USBHostMode.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _USBHOSTMODE_H_
-#define _USBHOSTMODE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
-		
-		#include "Webserver.h"
-		#include "Lib/uIPManagement.h"
-		
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void USBHostMode_USBTask(void);
-	
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USBHostMode.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USBHOSTMODE_H_
+#define _USBHOSTMODE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+		
+		#include "Webserver.h"
+		#include "Lib/uIPManagement.h"
+		
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void USBHostMode_USBTask(void);
+	
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c b/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c
index cecd88168..9354ee34c 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c
@@ -1,75 +1,75 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Webserver project. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
- 
-#include "Webserver.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
-		  USBHostMode_USBTask();
-		else
-		  USBDeviceMode_USBTask();
-
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
-	Dataflash_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Webserver project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+ 
+#include "Webserver.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST)
+		  USBHostMode_USBTask();
+		else
+		  USBDeviceMode_USBTask();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID);
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h b/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h
index 4fb5b37b4..0643c9b58 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Webserver.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
-#define _WEBSERVER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		
-		#include "USBDeviceMode.h"
-		#include "USBHostMode.h"
-		
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY          LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING      (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY             LEDS_LED2
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR            (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-		
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-		/** LED mask for the uIP stack idling with no IP configuration */
-		#define LEDMASK_UIP_READY_NOCONFIG    LEDS_LED3
-
-		/** LED mask for the uIP stack idling with a valid IP configuration */
-		#define LEDMASK_UIP_READY_CONFIG      LEDS_LED4
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Webserver.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
+#define _WEBSERVER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		
+		#include "USBDeviceMode.h"
+		#include "USBHostMode.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY          LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING      (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY             LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR            (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+		
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the uIP stack idling with no IP configuration */
+		#define LEDMASK_UIP_READY_NOCONFIG    LEDS_LED3
+
+		/** LED mask for the uIP stack idling with a valid IP configuration */
+		#define LEDMASK_UIP_READY_CONFIG      LEDS_LED4
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt b/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt
index 3c0c48e35..f20189c62 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt
@@ -1,113 +1,113 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage uIP Powered Webserver Project
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Dual Mode Host/Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
- *        Mass Storage Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard) \n
- *        Bulk-Only Transport</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification \n
- *        USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
- *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
- *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
- *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  Simple HTTP webserver project. This project combines the LUFA library with the uIP TCP/IP full network stack and FatFS
- *  library to create a RNDIS host capable of serving out HTTP webpages to multiple hosts simultaneously. This project
- *  demonstrates how the libraries can be combined into a robust network enabled application, with the addition of a RNDIS
- *  network device.
- *
- *  To use this project, plug the USB AVR into a computer, so that it enumerates as a standard Mass Storage device. Load
- *  HTML files onto the disk, so that they can be served out to clients -- the default file to serve should be called
- *  <i>index.htm</i>. Filenames must be in 8.3 format for them to be retrieved correctly by the webserver, and the total
- *  requested file path must be equal to or less than the maximum URI length (\see \ref SSec_Options).
- *
- *  When attached to a RNDIS class device, such as a USB (desktop) modem, the system will enumerate the device, set the
- *  appropriate parameters needed for connectivity and begin listening for new HTTP connections on port 80 and TELNET
- *  connections on port 23. The device IP, netmask and default gateway IP must be set to values appropriate for the RNDIS
- *  device being used for this project to work if the DHCP client is disabled (see \ref SSec_Options) - otherwise, the device
- *  will query the network's DHCP server for these parameters automatically.
- *
- *  When properly configured, the webserver can be accessed from any HTTP webrowser by typing in the device's statically or
- *  dynamically allocated IP address. The TELNET client can be accessed via any network socket app by connecting to the device
- *  on port 23 on the device's statically or dynamically allocated IP address.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this enables the TELNET server in addition to the HTTP webserver, which listens for incomming connections
- *        and processes user commands.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this enables the DHCP client for dynamic IP allocation of the network settings from a DHCP server.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS</td>
- *    <td>Lib/uIPManagement.h</td>
- *    <td>IP address that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>DEVICE_NETMASK</td>
- *    <td>Lib/uIPManagement.h</td>
- *    <td>Netmask that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>DEVICE_GATEWAY</td>
- *    <td>Lib/uIPManagement.h</td>
- *    <td>Default routing gateway that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT
- *        is not defined).</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAX_URI_LENGTH</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Maximum length of a URI for the Webserver. This is the maximum file path, including subdirectories and seperators.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage uIP Powered Webserver Project
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Dual Mode Host/Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
+ *        Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard) \n
+ *        Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Simple HTTP webserver project. This project combines the LUFA library with the uIP TCP/IP full network stack and FatFS
+ *  library to create a RNDIS host capable of serving out HTTP webpages to multiple hosts simultaneously. This project
+ *  demonstrates how the libraries can be combined into a robust network enabled application, with the addition of a RNDIS
+ *  network device.
+ *
+ *  To use this project, plug the USB AVR into a computer, so that it enumerates as a standard Mass Storage device. Load
+ *  HTML files onto the disk, so that they can be served out to clients -- the default file to serve should be called
+ *  <i>index.htm</i>. Filenames must be in 8.3 format for them to be retrieved correctly by the webserver, and the total
+ *  requested file path must be equal to or less than the maximum URI length (\see \ref SSec_Options).
+ *
+ *  When attached to a RNDIS class device, such as a USB (desktop) modem, the system will enumerate the device, set the
+ *  appropriate parameters needed for connectivity and begin listening for new HTTP connections on port 80 and TELNET
+ *  connections on port 23. The device IP, netmask and default gateway IP must be set to values appropriate for the RNDIS
+ *  device being used for this project to work if the DHCP client is disabled (see \ref SSec_Options) - otherwise, the device
+ *  will query the network's DHCP server for these parameters automatically.
+ *
+ *  When properly configured, the webserver can be accessed from any HTTP webrowser by typing in the device's statically or
+ *  dynamically allocated IP address. The TELNET client can be accessed via any network socket app by connecting to the device
+ *  on port 23 on the device's statically or dynamically allocated IP address.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this enables the TELNET server in addition to the HTTP webserver, which listens for incomming connections
+ *        and processes user commands.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this enables the DHCP client for dynamic IP allocation of the network settings from a DHCP server.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>Lib/uIPManagement.h</td>
+ *    <td>IP address that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DEVICE_NETMASK</td>
+ *    <td>Lib/uIPManagement.h</td>
+ *    <td>Netmask that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DEVICE_GATEWAY</td>
+ *    <td>Lib/uIPManagement.h</td>
+ *    <td>Default routing gateway that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT
+ *        is not defined).</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAX_URI_LENGTH</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Maximum length of a URI for the Webserver. This is the maximum file path, including subdirectories and seperators.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/makefile b/Projects/Webserver/makefile
index e3aaf3361..c0ddd40bd 100644
--- a/Projects/Webserver/makefile
+++ b/Projects/Webserver/makefile
@@ -1,762 +1,762 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = Webserver
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  Descriptors.c                                               \
-	  USBDeviceMode.c                                             \
-	  USBHostMode.c                                               \
-	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
-	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
-	  Lib/uIPManagement.c                                         \
-	  Lib/DHCPClientApp.c                                         \
-	  Lib/HTTPServerApp.c                                         \
-	  Lib/TELNETServerApp.c                                       \
-	  Lib/uip/uip.c                                               \
-	  Lib/uip/uip_arp.c                                           \
-	  Lib/uip/timer.c                                             \
-	  Lib/uip/clock.c                                             \
-	  Lib/uip/uip-split.c                                         \
-	  Lib/FATFs/diskio.c                                          \
-	  Lib/FATFs/ff.c                                              \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c          \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c            \
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ Lib/uip/ Lib/uip/conf/ Lib/FATFs/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT
-CDEFS += -DENABLE_TELNET_SERVER
-CDEFS += -DMAX_URI_LENGTH=50
-
-CDEFS += -DUIP_CONF_UDP="defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)" -DUIP_CONF_TCP=1 -DUIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS=1 -DUIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS=3
-CDEFS += -DUIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS=5 -DUIP_URGDATA=0 -DUIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE=1514 -DUIP_ARCH_CHKSUM=0 
-CDEFS += -DUIP_CONF_LL_802154=0 -DUIP_CONF_LL_80211=0 -DUIP_CONF_ROUTER=0 -DUIP_CONF_ICMP6=0
-CDEFS += -DUIP_ARCH_ADD32=0 -DUIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH=1 -DUIP_NEIGHBOR_CONF_ADDRTYPE=0
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Webserver
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  USBDeviceMode.c                                             \
+	  USBHostMode.c                                               \
+	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
+	  Lib/uIPManagement.c                                         \
+	  Lib/DHCPClientApp.c                                         \
+	  Lib/HTTPServerApp.c                                         \
+	  Lib/TELNETServerApp.c                                       \
+	  Lib/uip/uip.c                                               \
+	  Lib/uip/uip_arp.c                                           \
+	  Lib/uip/timer.c                                             \
+	  Lib/uip/clock.c                                             \
+	  Lib/uip/uip-split.c                                         \
+	  Lib/FATFs/diskio.c                                          \
+	  Lib/FATFs/ff.c                                              \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorage.c    \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorage.c      \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c          \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDIS.c            \
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ Lib/uip/ Lib/uip/conf/ Lib/FATFs/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT
+CDEFS += -DENABLE_TELNET_SERVER
+CDEFS += -DMAX_URI_LENGTH=50
+
+CDEFS += -DUIP_CONF_UDP="defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)" -DUIP_CONF_TCP=1 -DUIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS=1 -DUIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS=3
+CDEFS += -DUIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS=5 -DUIP_URGDATA=0 -DUIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE=1514 -DUIP_ARCH_CHKSUM=0 
+CDEFS += -DUIP_CONF_LL_802154=0 -DUIP_CONF_LL_80211=0 -DUIP_CONF_ROUTER=0 -DUIP_CONF_ICMP6=0
+CDEFS += -DUIP_ARCH_ADD32=0 -DUIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH=1 -DUIP_NEIGHBOR_CONF_ADDRTYPE=0
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/AVRISPDescriptors.c b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/AVRISPDescriptors.c
index 30e72e9e3..1f2e1677c 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/AVRISPDescriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/AVRISPDescriptors.c
@@ -1,219 +1,219 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM AVRISP_DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0xFF,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2104,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = 0x03,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED,
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-
-	.AVRISP_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0xFF,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.AVRISP_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-
-	.AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(22), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA AVRISP MkII Clone"
-};
-
-/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a
- *  series of uppercase hexadecimal digits.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_SerialString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"0000A00128255"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t AVRISP_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-	
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&AVRISP_DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&AVRISP_LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&AVRISP_ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&AVRISP_ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x03:
-					Address = (void*)&AVRISP_SerialString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_SerialString.Header.Size);
-					break;					
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM AVRISP_DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0xFF,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2104,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = 0x03,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED,
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0xFF,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(22), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA AVRISP MkII Clone"
+};
+
+/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a
+ *  series of uppercase hexadecimal digits.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_SerialString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(13), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"0000A00128255"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t AVRISP_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+	
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&AVRISP_DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&AVRISP_LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&AVRISP_ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&AVRISP_ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x03:
+					Address = (void*)&AVRISP_SerialString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_SerialString.Header.Size);
+					break;					
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/AVRISPDescriptors.h b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/AVRISPDescriptors.h
index 2fa18095d..7f190195e 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/AVRISPDescriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/AVRISPDescriptors.h
@@ -1,78 +1,78 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for AVRISPDescriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _AVRISP_DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _AVRISP_DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#if !defined(LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT)
-			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */
-			#define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM      2
-
-			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */
-			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM       2
-		#else
-			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */
-			#define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM      2
-
-			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */
-			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM       3
-		#endif
-		
-		/** Size in bytes of the AVRISP data endpoint. */
-		#define AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE             64	
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               AVRISP_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint;
-		} AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t AVRISP_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AVRISPDescriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _AVRISP_DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _AVRISP_DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if !defined(LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT)
+			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM      2
+
+			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM       2
+		#else
+			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM      2
+
+			/** Endpoint number of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM       3
+		#endif
+		
+		/** Size in bytes of the AVRISP data endpoint. */
+		#define AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE             64	
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               AVRISP_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t AVRISP_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Doxygen.conf
index 95095df51..0d59f2fbd 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - XPLAIN Serial Bridge/PDI Programmer Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - XPLAIN Serial Bridge/PDI Programmer Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf
index 9a0a0e418..5f9bc1a3d 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
-INSTDISK="LUFA USB-RS232 CDC Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com"
+INSTDISK="LUFA USB-RS232 CDC Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/RingBuff.c b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/RingBuff.c
index 2109f8cc0..91c61d06b 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/RingBuff.c
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/RingBuff.c
@@ -1,120 +1,120 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "RingBuff.h"
-
-void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
-{
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-		Buffer->InPtr    = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-		Buffer->OutPtr   = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-		Buffer->Elements = 0;
-	}
-}
-
-void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data)
-{
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-	#if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD)
-		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
-		{
-			Buffer->OutPtr++;
-	
-			if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
-			  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			Buffer->Elements++;
-		}
-	#elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW)
-		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
-		  return;
-	
-		  Buffer->Elements++;
-	#elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)
-		  Buffer->Elements++;
-	#endif
-	
-		*(Buffer->InPtr) = Data;
-		Buffer->InPtr++;
-	
-		if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
-		  Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-	}
-}
-
-RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
-{
-	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
-	
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
-		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
-		  return 0;
-#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
-	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
-#endif
-
-		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
-	
-		Buffer->OutPtr++;
-		Buffer->Elements--;
-	
-		if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
-		  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
-	}
-	
-	return BuffData;
-}
-
-#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
-RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
-{
-	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
-
-	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	{
-#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
-		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
-		  return 0;
-#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
-	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
-#endif
-
-		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
-	}
-
-	return BuffData;
-}
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "RingBuff.h"
+
+void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+		Buffer->InPtr    = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		Buffer->OutPtr   = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		Buffer->Elements = 0;
+	}
+}
+
+void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data)
+{
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+	#if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD)
+		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
+		{
+			Buffer->OutPtr++;
+	
+			if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+			  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Buffer->Elements++;
+		}
+	#elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW)
+		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
+		  return;
+	
+		  Buffer->Elements++;
+	#elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)
+		  Buffer->Elements++;
+	#endif
+	
+		*(Buffer->InPtr) = Data;
+		Buffer->InPtr++;
+	
+		if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+		  Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+	}
+}
+
+RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
+	
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
+		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+		  return 0;
+#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
+	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
+#endif
+
+		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
+	
+		Buffer->OutPtr++;
+		Buffer->Elements--;
+	
+		if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+		  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+	}
+	
+	return BuffData;
+}
+
+#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
+RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
+
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
+		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+		  return 0;
+#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
+	#error No empty buffer check behavior specified.
+#endif
+
+		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
+	}
+
+	return BuffData;
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/RingBuff.h b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/RingBuff.h
index 2e03a28be..b4933aa4d 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/RingBuff.h
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/RingBuff.h
@@ -1,116 +1,116 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/* Buffer Configuration: */
-   /* Buffer length - select static size of created ring buffers: */
-	 #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128      // Set to the static ring buffer size for all ring buffers (place size after define)
-
-   /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */
-	 #define BUFF_VOLATILE            // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access
-
-   /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */
-     #define BUFF_DROPOLD             // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full
-     // #define BUFF_DROPNEW          // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full
-     // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK      // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user!
-
-   /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ring buffer: */
-     //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO  // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ring buffer is read
-     #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK        // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ring buffers - checking left to user!
-	
-   /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */
-     #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t    // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer
-	
-   /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */
-     //#define BUFF_USEPEEK
-	 	
-#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_
-#define _RINGBUFF_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-	#include <avr/io.h>
-	#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-	#include <util/atomic.h>
-	#include <limits.h>
-
-	#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-
-	/* Defines and checks: */
-	#if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE)
-		#define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE
-	#else
-		#error No buffer length specified!
-	#endif
-
-	#if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK))
-		#error No buffer drop mode specified.
-	#endif
-
-	#if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE)
-		#error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified.
-	#endif
-
-	#if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE)
-		#define BUFF_MODE            volatile
-		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK    ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
-	#else
-		#define BUFF_MODE
-		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
-	#endif
-
-	#if (BUFF_STATICSIZE   > LONG_MAX)
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t
-	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX)
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t
-	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX)
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t
-	#else
-		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t
-	#endif
-	
-	/* Type Defines: */
-	typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t;
-
-	typedef BUFF_MODE struct
-	{
-		RingBuff_Data_t      Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH];
-		RingBuff_Data_t*     InPtr;
-		RingBuff_Data_t*     OutPtr;
-		RingBuff_Elements_t  Elements;
-	} RingBuff_t;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-	void            Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buff);
-	void            Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data);
-	RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
-	#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
-		RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
-	#endif
-	
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/* Buffer Configuration: */
+   /* Buffer length - select static size of created ring buffers: */
+	 #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128      // Set to the static ring buffer size for all ring buffers (place size after define)
+
+   /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */
+	 #define BUFF_VOLATILE            // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access
+
+   /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */
+     #define BUFF_DROPOLD             // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full
+     // #define BUFF_DROPNEW          // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full
+     // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK      // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user!
+
+   /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ring buffer: */
+     //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO  // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ring buffer is read
+     #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK        // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ring buffers - checking left to user!
+	
+   /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */
+     #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t    // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer
+	
+   /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */
+     //#define BUFF_USEPEEK
+	 	
+#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_
+#define _RINGBUFF_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+	#include <avr/io.h>
+	#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+	#include <util/atomic.h>
+	#include <limits.h>
+
+	#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Defines and checks: */
+	#if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE)
+		#define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE
+	#else
+		#error No buffer length specified!
+	#endif
+
+	#if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK))
+		#error No buffer drop mode specified.
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE)
+		#error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified.
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE)
+		#define BUFF_MODE            volatile
+		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK    ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
+	#else
+		#define BUFF_MODE
+		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	#endif
+
+	#if (BUFF_STATICSIZE   > LONG_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t
+	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t
+	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t
+	#else
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+	typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t;
+
+	typedef BUFF_MODE struct
+	{
+		RingBuff_Data_t      Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH];
+		RingBuff_Data_t*     InPtr;
+		RingBuff_Data_t*     OutPtr;
+		RingBuff_Elements_t  Elements;
+	} RingBuff_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+	void            Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* const Buff);
+	void            Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data);
+	RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
+	#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
+		RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* const Buffer);
+	#endif
+	
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c
index 31b11c1cf..194481d0e 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c
@@ -1,143 +1,143 @@
-/*
-			 LUFA Library
-	 Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-			  
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-	  www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  David Prentice (david.prentice [at] farming [dot] uk)
-  Copyright 2010  Peter Danneger
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#include "SoftUART.h"
-
-volatile uint8_t srx_done, stx_count;
-volatile uint8_t srx_data, srx_mask, srx_tmp, stx_data;
-
-uint8_t SoftUART_IsReady(void)
-{
-	return !(stx_count);
-}
-
-uint8_t SoftUART_TxByte(uint8_t Byte)
-{
-	while (stx_count);
-
-	stx_data  = ~Byte;
-	stx_count = 10;
-
-	return Byte;
-}
-
-uint8_t SoftUART_IsReceived(void)
-{
-	return srx_done;
-}
-
-uint8_t SoftUART_RxByte(void)
-{
-	while (!(srx_done));
-
-	srx_done = 0;
-
-	return srx_data;
-}
-
-void SoftUART_Init(void)
-{
-	OCR2B  = TCNT2 + 1;						// force first compare
-	TCCR2A = (1 << COM2B1) | (1 << COM2B0);	// T1 mode 0
-	TCCR2B = (1 << FOC2B)  | (1 << CS21); 	// CLK/8, T1 mode 0
-	TIMSK2 = (1 << OCIE2B);					// enable tx and wait for start
-	EICRA  = (1 << ISC01);					// -ve edge
-	EIMSK  = (1 << INT0);					// enable INT0 interrupt
-
-	stx_count = 0;							// nothing to send
-	srx_done = 0;							// nothing received
-	STXPORT |= 1 << STX;					// TX output
-	STXDDR  |= 1 << STX;					// TX output
-	SRXPORT |= (1 << SRX);					// pullup on INT0
-}
-
-/* ISR to detect the start of a bit being sent from the transmitter. */
-ISR(INT0_vect)
-{
-	OCR2A = TCNT2 + (BIT_TIME / 8 * 3 / 2);	// scan 1.5 bits after start
-
-	srx_tmp = 0;							// clear bit storage
-	srx_mask = 1;							// bit mask
-
-	TIFR2 = (1 << OCF2A);					// clear pending interrupt
-
-	if (!(SRXPIN & (1 << SRX)))				// still low
-	{
-		TIMSK2 = (1 << OCIE2A) | (1 << OCIE2B); // wait for first bit
-		EIMSK &= ~(1 << INT0);
-	}
-}
-
-/* ISR to manage the reception of bits to the transmitter. */
-ISR(TIMER2_COMPA_vect)
-{
-	if (srx_mask)
-	{
-		if (SRXPIN & (1 << SRX))
-		  srx_tmp |= srx_mask;
-
-		srx_mask <<= 1;
-
-		OCR2A += BIT_TIME / 8;				// next bit slice
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		srx_done  = 1;						// mark rx data valid
-		srx_data  = srx_tmp;				// store rx data
-		TIMSK2    = (1 << OCIE2B);			// enable tx and wait for start
-		EIMSK    |= (1 << INT0);			// enable START irq
-		EIFR      = (1 << INTF0);			// clear any pending
-	}
-}
-
-/* ISR to manage the transmission of bits to the receiver. */
-ISR(TIMER2_COMPB_vect)
-{
-	OCR2B += BIT_TIME / 8;					// next bit slice
-
-	if (stx_count)
-	{
-		if (--stx_count != 9)				// no start bit
-		{
-			if (!(stx_data & 1))			// test inverted data
-			  TCCR2A = (1 << COM2B1) | (1 << COM2B0);
-			else
-			  TCCR2A = (1 << COM2B1);
-
-			stx_data >>= 1;					// shift zero in from left
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			TCCR2A = (1 << COM2B1);			// START bit
-		}
-	}
-} 
+/*
+			 LUFA Library
+	 Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+			  
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+	  www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  David Prentice (david.prentice [at] farming [dot] uk)
+  Copyright 2010  Peter Danneger
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "SoftUART.h"
+
+volatile uint8_t srx_done, stx_count;
+volatile uint8_t srx_data, srx_mask, srx_tmp, stx_data;
+
+uint8_t SoftUART_IsReady(void)
+{
+	return !(stx_count);
+}
+
+uint8_t SoftUART_TxByte(uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	while (stx_count);
+
+	stx_data  = ~Byte;
+	stx_count = 10;
+
+	return Byte;
+}
+
+uint8_t SoftUART_IsReceived(void)
+{
+	return srx_done;
+}
+
+uint8_t SoftUART_RxByte(void)
+{
+	while (!(srx_done));
+
+	srx_done = 0;
+
+	return srx_data;
+}
+
+void SoftUART_Init(void)
+{
+	OCR2B  = TCNT2 + 1;						// force first compare
+	TCCR2A = (1 << COM2B1) | (1 << COM2B0);	// T1 mode 0
+	TCCR2B = (1 << FOC2B)  | (1 << CS21); 	// CLK/8, T1 mode 0
+	TIMSK2 = (1 << OCIE2B);					// enable tx and wait for start
+	EICRA  = (1 << ISC01);					// -ve edge
+	EIMSK  = (1 << INT0);					// enable INT0 interrupt
+
+	stx_count = 0;							// nothing to send
+	srx_done = 0;							// nothing received
+	STXPORT |= 1 << STX;					// TX output
+	STXDDR  |= 1 << STX;					// TX output
+	SRXPORT |= (1 << SRX);					// pullup on INT0
+}
+
+/* ISR to detect the start of a bit being sent from the transmitter. */
+ISR(INT0_vect)
+{
+	OCR2A = TCNT2 + (BIT_TIME / 8 * 3 / 2);	// scan 1.5 bits after start
+
+	srx_tmp = 0;							// clear bit storage
+	srx_mask = 1;							// bit mask
+
+	TIFR2 = (1 << OCF2A);					// clear pending interrupt
+
+	if (!(SRXPIN & (1 << SRX)))				// still low
+	{
+		TIMSK2 = (1 << OCIE2A) | (1 << OCIE2B); // wait for first bit
+		EIMSK &= ~(1 << INT0);
+	}
+}
+
+/* ISR to manage the reception of bits to the transmitter. */
+ISR(TIMER2_COMPA_vect)
+{
+	if (srx_mask)
+	{
+		if (SRXPIN & (1 << SRX))
+		  srx_tmp |= srx_mask;
+
+		srx_mask <<= 1;
+
+		OCR2A += BIT_TIME / 8;				// next bit slice
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		srx_done  = 1;						// mark rx data valid
+		srx_data  = srx_tmp;				// store rx data
+		TIMSK2    = (1 << OCIE2B);			// enable tx and wait for start
+		EIMSK    |= (1 << INT0);			// enable START irq
+		EIFR      = (1 << INTF0);			// clear any pending
+	}
+}
+
+/* ISR to manage the transmission of bits to the receiver. */
+ISR(TIMER2_COMPB_vect)
+{
+	OCR2B += BIT_TIME / 8;					// next bit slice
+
+	if (stx_count)
+	{
+		if (--stx_count != 9)				// no start bit
+		{
+			if (!(stx_data & 1))			// test inverted data
+			  TCCR2A = (1 << COM2B1) | (1 << COM2B0);
+			else
+			  TCCR2A = (1 << COM2B1);
+
+			stx_data >>= 1;					// shift zero in from left
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			TCCR2A = (1 << COM2B1);			// START bit
+		}
+	}
+} 
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h
index d6b24320f..07187c24a 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h
@@ -1,60 +1,60 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  David Prentice (david.prentice [at] farming [dot] uk)
-  Copyright 2010  Peter Danneger
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _SOFT_UART_
-#define _SOFT_UART_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-		#include "SoftUART.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		#define BAUD       9600
-		#define BIT_TIME   (uint16_t)((F_CPU + (BAUD / 2)) / BAUD)
-
-		#define SRX        PD0
-		#define SRXPIN     PIND
-		#define SRXPORT    PORTD
-
-		#define STX        PD1
-		#define STXPORT    PORTD
-		#define STXDDR     DDRD
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t SoftUART_IsReady(void);
-		uint8_t SoftUART_TxByte(uint8_t c);
-		uint8_t SoftUART_IsReceived(void);
-		uint8_t SoftUART_RxByte(void);
-		void    SoftUART_Init(void);
-
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  David Prentice (david.prentice [at] farming [dot] uk)
+  Copyright 2010  Peter Danneger
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _SOFT_UART_
+#define _SOFT_UART_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include "SoftUART.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define BAUD       9600
+		#define BIT_TIME   (uint16_t)((F_CPU + (BAUD / 2)) / BAUD)
+
+		#define SRX        PD0
+		#define SRXPIN     PIND
+		#define SRXPORT    PORTD
+
+		#define STX        PD1
+		#define STXPORT    PORTD
+		#define STXDDR     DDRD
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t SoftUART_IsReady(void);
+		uint8_t SoftUART_TxByte(uint8_t c);
+		uint8_t SoftUART_IsReceived(void);
+		uint8_t SoftUART_RxByte(void);
+		void    SoftUART_Init(void);
+
 #endif
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c
index ca98b33a0..e0978847c 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c
@@ -1,264 +1,264 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
- */
-
-#include "USARTDescriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM USART_DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-		
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
-	.Class                  = 0x02,
-	.SubClass               = 0x00,
-	.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-		
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x204B,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
-		
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-		
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM USART_ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-				
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-				
-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-			
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x02,
-			.SubClass               = 0x02,
-			.Protocol               = 0x01,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x00,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x02,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x06}
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_Functional_Union= 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
-			.SubType                = 0x06,
-			
-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
-		},
-
-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-			
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-				
-			.Class                  = 0x0A,
-			.SubClass               = 0x00,
-			.Protocol               = 0x00,
-				
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		},
-		
-	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-			
-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_LanguageString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_ManufacturerString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_ProductString =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-		
-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA XPLAIN Bridge"
-};
-
-/** Descriptior retrieval function for the USART Bridge descriptors. This function is in turn called by the GetDescriptor
- *  callback function in the main source file, to retrieve the device's descriptors when in USART bridge mode.
- */
-uint16_t USART_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	void*    Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device: 
-			Address = (void*)&USART_DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
-			Address = (void*)&USART_ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String: 
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case 0x00: 
-					Address = (void*)&USART_LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x01: 
-					Address = (void*)&USART_ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case 0x02: 
-					Address = (void*)&USART_ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-			
-			break;
-	}
-	
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "USARTDescriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM USART_DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x02,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204B,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM USART_ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_IntHeader = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_Functional_Union= 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(18), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA XPLAIN Bridge"
+};
+
+/** Descriptior retrieval function for the USART Bridge descriptors. This function is in turn called by the GetDescriptor
+ *  callback function in the main source file, to retrieve the device's descriptors when in USART bridge mode.
+ */
+uint16_t USART_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device: 
+			Address = (void*)&USART_DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&USART_ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String: 
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00: 
+					Address = (void*)&USART_LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01: 
+					Address = (void*)&USART_ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02: 
+					Address = (void*)&USART_ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h
index b91530102..269d3f5e0 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h
@@ -1,82 +1,82 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for USARTDescriptors.c.
- */
- 
-#ifndef _USART_DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _USART_DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3	
-
-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4	
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
-		
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
-		} USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t USART_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USARTDescriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _USART_DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _USART_DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t USART_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c
index 5457a2283..5d7605206 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c
@@ -1,240 +1,240 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the XPLAINBridge project. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "XPLAINBridge.h"
-
-/* Current firmware mode, making the device behave as either a programmer or a USART bridge */
-bool CurrentFirmwareMode = MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER;
-
-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config = 
-			{
-				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
-
-				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
-				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = true,
-
-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
-				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = true,
-
-				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
-				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-			},
-	};
-	
-/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the device via the serial port. */
-RingBuff_t USBtoUART_Buffer;
-
-/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
-RingBuff_t UARTtoUSB_Buffer;
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-	
-	Buffer_Initialize(&USBtoUART_Buffer);
-	Buffer_Initialize(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	sei();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
-		  USARTBridge_Task();
-		else
-		  AVRISP_Task();
-
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-void AVRISP_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Must be in the configured state for the AVRISP code to process data */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM);
-	
-	/* Check to see if a V2 Protocol command has been received */
-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
-
-		/* Pass off processing of the V2 Protocol command to the V2 Protocol handler */
-		V2Protocol_ProcessCommand();
-
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	}
-}
-
-void USARTBridge_Task(void)
-{
-	/* Must be in the configured state for the USART Bridge code to process data */
-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
-	  return;
-
-	/* Read bytes from the USB OUT endpoint into the UART transmit buffer */
-	for (uint8_t DataBytesRem = CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); DataBytesRem != 0; DataBytesRem--)
-	{
-		if (!(BUFF_STATICSIZE - USBtoUART_Buffer.Elements))
-		  break;
-		  
-		Buffer_StoreElement(&USBtoUART_Buffer, CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface));
-	}
-	
-	/* Read bytes from the UART receive buffer into the USB IN endpoint */
-	if (UARTtoUSB_Buffer.Elements)
-	  CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, Buffer_GetElement(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer));
-	
-	/* Load bytes from the UART transmit buffer into the UART */
-	if ((USBtoUART_Buffer.Elements) && SoftUART_IsReady())
-	  SoftUART_TxByte(Buffer_GetElement(&USBtoUART_Buffer));
-	
-	/* Load bytes from the UART into the UART receive buffer */
-	if (SoftUART_IsReceived())
-	  Buffer_StoreElement(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer, SoftUART_RxByte());
-
-	CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	SoftUART_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init();
-	V2Protocol_Init();
-	
-	/* Disable JTAG debugging */
-	MCUCR |= (1 << JTD);
-	MCUCR |= (1 << JTD);
-
-	/* Enable pullup on the JTAG TDI pin so we can use it to select the mode */
-	PORTF |= (1 << 7);
-	_delay_ms(10);
-
-	/* Select the firmware mode based on the JTD pin's value */
-	CurrentFirmwareMode = (PINF & (1 << 7)) ? MODE_USART_BRIDGE : MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER;
-
-	/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
-	MCUCR &= ~(1 << JTD);
-	MCUCR &= ~(1 << JTD);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	bool EndpointConfigSuccess = true;
-
-	/* Configure the device endpoints according to the selected mode */
-	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
-	{
-		EndpointConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		EndpointConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-										                    ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
-										                    ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-
-		#if defined(LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT)
-		EndpointConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
-		                                                    ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
-		                                                    ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-		#endif
-	}
-
-	if (EndpointConfigSuccess)
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	else
-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
-{
-	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
-	  CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	/* Return the correct descriptors based on the selected mode */
-	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
-	  return USART_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress);
-	else
-	  return AVRISP_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress);
-}
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the XPLAINBridge project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "XPLAINBridge.h"
+
+/* Current firmware mode, making the device behave as either a programmer or a USART bridge */
+bool CurrentFirmwareMode = MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER;
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config = 
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = true,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = true,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+			},
+	};
+	
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the device via the serial port. */
+RingBuff_t USBtoUART_Buffer;
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
+RingBuff_t UARTtoUSB_Buffer;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	
+	Buffer_Initialize(&USBtoUART_Buffer);
+	Buffer_Initialize(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+		  USARTBridge_Task();
+		else
+		  AVRISP_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+void AVRISP_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Must be in the configured state for the AVRISP code to process data */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Check to see if a V2 Protocol command has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+
+		/* Pass off processing of the V2 Protocol command to the V2 Protocol handler */
+		V2Protocol_ProcessCommand();
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+}
+
+void USARTBridge_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Must be in the configured state for the USART Bridge code to process data */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Read bytes from the USB OUT endpoint into the UART transmit buffer */
+	for (uint8_t DataBytesRem = CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); DataBytesRem != 0; DataBytesRem--)
+	{
+		if (!(BUFF_STATICSIZE - USBtoUART_Buffer.Elements))
+		  break;
+		  
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&USBtoUART_Buffer, CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface));
+	}
+	
+	/* Read bytes from the UART receive buffer into the USB IN endpoint */
+	if (UARTtoUSB_Buffer.Elements)
+	  CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, Buffer_GetElement(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer));
+	
+	/* Load bytes from the UART transmit buffer into the UART */
+	if ((USBtoUART_Buffer.Elements) && SoftUART_IsReady())
+	  SoftUART_TxByte(Buffer_GetElement(&USBtoUART_Buffer));
+	
+	/* Load bytes from the UART into the UART receive buffer */
+	if (SoftUART_IsReceived())
+	  Buffer_StoreElement(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer, SoftUART_RxByte());
+
+	CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SoftUART_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	V2Protocol_Init();
+	
+	/* Disable JTAG debugging */
+	MCUCR |= (1 << JTD);
+	MCUCR |= (1 << JTD);
+
+	/* Enable pullup on the JTAG TDI pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+	PORTF |= (1 << 7);
+	_delay_ms(10);
+
+	/* Select the firmware mode based on the JTD pin's value */
+	CurrentFirmwareMode = (PINF & (1 << 7)) ? MODE_USART_BRIDGE : MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER;
+
+	/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
+	MCUCR &= ~(1 << JTD);
+	MCUCR &= ~(1 << JTD);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool EndpointConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Configure the device endpoints according to the selected mode */
+	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+	{
+		EndpointConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		EndpointConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+										                    ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+										                    ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+		#if defined(LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT)
+		EndpointConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                                                    ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+		                                                    ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	if (EndpointConfigSuccess)
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	else
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+	  CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	/* Return the correct descriptors based on the selected mode */
+	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+	  return USART_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress);
+	else
+	  return AVRISP_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress);
+}
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h
index 877792d7f..9c90a8b3d 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h
@@ -1,94 +1,94 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-              
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for XPLAINBridge.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _XPLAIN_BRIDGE_H_
-#define _XPLAIN_BRIDGE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h"
-		#include "USARTDescriptors.h"
-
-		#include "Lib/RingBuff.h"
-		#include "Lib/SoftUART.h"		
-		#include <Lib/V2Protocol.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY     LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        LEDS_NO_LEDS
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        LEDS_LED1
-		
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** Firmware mode define for the USART Bridge mode. */
-		#define MODE_USART_BRIDGE        false
-
-		/** Firmware mode define for the AVRISP Programmer mode. */
-		#define MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER      true		
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern bool CurrentFirmwareMode;
-		
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-		void AVRISP_Task(void);
-		void USARTBridge_Task(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);		
-
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress);
-
-#endif
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XPLAINBridge.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XPLAIN_BRIDGE_H_
+#define _XPLAIN_BRIDGE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h"
+		#include "USARTDescriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/RingBuff.h"
+		#include "Lib/SoftUART.h"		
+		#include <Lib/V2Protocol.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDC.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY     LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        LEDS_NO_LEDS
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        LEDS_LED1
+		
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** Firmware mode define for the USART Bridge mode. */
+		#define MODE_USART_BRIDGE        false
+
+		/** Firmware mode define for the AVRISP Programmer mode. */
+		#define MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER      true		
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern bool CurrentFirmwareMode;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void AVRISP_Task(void);
+		void USARTBridge_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);		
+
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt
index 40ea08e6a..0c5635ac7 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt
@@ -1,89 +1,89 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
- 
-/** \mainpage XPLAIN UART Bridge/PDI Programmer Project
- *
- *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- *  - AT90USB1287
- *
- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>1) Device</td>
- *    <td>2) Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>1) Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
- *    <td>2) Vendor Specific Class</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr> 
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>1) Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
- *    <td>2) N/A</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>1) USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
- *    <td>2) Atmel AVRISP MKII Protocol Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>1) Full Speed Mode</td>
- *    <td>2) Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
- *
- *  This project serves a dual purpose. When loaded into the USB AVR on the XPLAIN board, it will act as either a USB to Serial
- *  converter for the XPLAIN's hardware USART (at a speed of 9600 baud), or an AVRStudio compaible PDI programmer for the XMEGA.
- *  This project replaces the firmware preloaded onto the XPLAIN's onboard AT90USB1287 microcontroller.
- *
- *  When power to the board is applied, the TDI pin (pin 9) of the USB AVR's JTAG port is read. If the pin is left high, the device
- *  will enumerate as a regular COM port on the host, which can then be opened and data exchanged between the XMEGA and Host as if
- *  the XMEGA was connected directly to the host's serial port. If the pin is pulled low by shorting it to GND (pin 10), the device
- *  will enumerate as an AVRISP-MKII to the host, so that the XMEGA can be reprogrammed by AVRStudio or other compatible software
- *  such as avrdude.
- *
- *  After running this project for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF file located in this project
- *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
- *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM
- *  drivers.
- *
- *  This project relies on files from the LUFA AVRISP-MKII project for compilation.
- *
- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>BUFF_STATICSIZE</td>
- *    <td>RingBuff.h</td>
- *    <td>Defines the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered in each Ring Buffer.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT</td>
- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
- *    <td>Define to switch to a non-standard endpoint scheme, breaking compatibility with AVRStudio under Windows but making
- *        the code compatible with Windows builds of avrdude using the libUSB driver. Linux platforms are not affected by this
- *        option.
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage XPLAIN UART Bridge/PDI Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  - AT90USB1287
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Device</td>
+ *    <td>2) Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *    <td>2) Vendor Specific Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *    <td>2) N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *    <td>2) Atmel AVRISP MKII Protocol Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *    <td>2) Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  This project serves a dual purpose. When loaded into the USB AVR on the XPLAIN board, it will act as either a USB to Serial
+ *  converter for the XPLAIN's hardware USART (at a speed of 9600 baud), or an AVRStudio compaible PDI programmer for the XMEGA.
+ *  This project replaces the firmware preloaded onto the XPLAIN's onboard AT90USB1287 microcontroller.
+ *
+ *  When power to the board is applied, the TDI pin (pin 9) of the USB AVR's JTAG port is read. If the pin is left high, the device
+ *  will enumerate as a regular COM port on the host, which can then be opened and data exchanged between the XMEGA and Host as if
+ *  the XMEGA was connected directly to the host's serial port. If the pin is pulled low by shorting it to GND (pin 10), the device
+ *  will enumerate as an AVRISP-MKII to the host, so that the XMEGA can be reprogrammed by AVRStudio or other compatible software
+ *  such as avrdude.
+ *
+ *  After running this project for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF file located in this project
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM
+ *  drivers.
+ *
+ *  This project relies on files from the LUFA AVRISP-MKII project for compilation.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>BUFF_STATICSIZE</td>
+ *    <td>RingBuff.h</td>
+ *    <td>Defines the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered in each Ring Buffer.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>Define to switch to a non-standard endpoint scheme, breaking compatibility with AVRStudio under Windows but making
+ *        the code compatible with Windows builds of avrdude using the libUSB driver. Linux platforms are not affected by this
+ *        option.
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile
index 9f48edd22..4931d2f38 100644
--- a/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile
+++ b/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile
@@ -1,757 +1,757 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-#            have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-#                DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD  = XPLAIN
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-#     software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-#     source code.
-#
-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = XPLAINBridge
-
-
-# Object files directory
-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-#     this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../
-
-# Path to the LUFA AVRISP-MKII project
-AVRISP_PATH = ../AVRISP-MKII/
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
-	  AVRISPDescriptors.c                                         \
-	  USARTDescriptors.c                                          \
-	  Lib/RingBuff.c                                              \
-	  Lib/SoftUART.c                                              \
-	  $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/V2Protocol.c                             \
-      $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c                       \
-      $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c                        \
-      $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c                          \
-	  $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c                    \
-	  $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c                      \
-	  $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c                         \
-	  $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c                          \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC = 
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC = 
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ $(AVRISP_PATH)/ 
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-#     c89   = "ANSI" C
-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_PORT=PORTB
-CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_PIN=PINB
-CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_DDR=DDRB
-CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_MASK="(1 << 4)"
-CDEFS += -DVTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL=2
-#CDEFS += -DLIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-#  -g*:          generate debugging information
-#  -O*:          optimization level
-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-#  -Wall...:     warning level
-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-#  -adhlns:   create listing
-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB = 
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB = 
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS = 
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-#    -Map:      create map file
-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
-#     avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = --------  end  --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
-	@echo $(MSG_END)
-	@echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
-	@echo
-	@echo Checking for invalid events...
-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-	
-showliboptions:
-	@echo
-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
-		echo $$i; \
-	done
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
-	@echo
-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
-	@echo --------------------------------------
-	
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion : 
-	@$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.  
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
-#     a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config: 
-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
-	$(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
-	@echo
-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
-	
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-	
-clean_list:
-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
-	rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = XPLAIN
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = XPLAINBridge
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../
+
+# Path to the LUFA AVRISP-MKII project
+AVRISP_PATH = ../AVRISP-MKII/
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  AVRISPDescriptors.c                                         \
+	  USARTDescriptors.c                                          \
+	  Lib/RingBuff.c                                              \
+	  Lib/SoftUART.c                                              \
+	  $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/V2Protocol.c                             \
+      $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c                       \
+      $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c                        \
+      $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c                          \
+	  $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c                    \
+	  $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c                      \
+	  $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c                         \
+	  $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c                          \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDC.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDC.c              \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC = 
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ $(AVRISP_PATH)/ 
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_PORT=PORTB
+CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_PIN=PINB
+CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_DDR=DDRB
+CDEFS += -DAUX_LINE_MASK="(1 << 4)"
+CDEFS += -DVTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL=2
+#CDEFS += -DLIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+	
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/README.txt b/README.txt
index a77b86272..cf1f1f673 100644
--- a/README.txt
+++ b/README.txt
@@ -1,32 +1,32 @@
-
-                     _   _ _ ___ _  
-                    | | | | | __/ \ 
-                    | |_| U | _| o | - The Lightweight USB
-                    |___|___|_||_n_|    Framework for AVRs
-                  =========================================
-                            Written by Dean Camera
-                    dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-
-                  http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php
-                  =========================================
-
-                 LUFA is donation supported. To support LUFA, 
-               please donate at http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com.
-
-                  For Commercial Licensing information, see
-                 http://fourwalledcubicle.com/PurchaseLUFA.php
-
-
-This package contains the complete LUFA library, demos, user-submitted projects
-and bootloaders for use with compatible microcontroller models. To get started,
-you will need to install the "Doxygen" documentation generation tool from
-www.doxygen.org, and run "make doxygen" from the command line whilst inside the
-extracted LUFA download package directory. From there, the generated Doxygen 
-HTML documentation for the library and included projects will be available in the
-generated Documentation/ subdirectories of the library core and projects. View
-the generated documentation for the library core in your chosen web browser for
-further Getting Started information.
-
-The documentation for the library itself (but not the documentation for the
-individual demos, projects or bootloaders) is also available as a seperate
+
+                     _   _ _ ___ _  
+                    | | | | | __/ \ 
+                    | |_| U | _| o | - The Lightweight USB
+                    |___|___|_||_n_|    Framework for AVRs
+                  =========================================
+                            Written by Dean Camera
+                    dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+
+                  http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php
+                  =========================================
+
+                 LUFA is donation supported. To support LUFA, 
+               please donate at http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com.
+
+                  For Commercial Licensing information, see
+                 http://fourwalledcubicle.com/PurchaseLUFA.php
+
+
+This package contains the complete LUFA library, demos, user-submitted projects
+and bootloaders for use with compatible microcontroller models. To get started,
+you will need to install the "Doxygen" documentation generation tool from
+www.doxygen.org, and run "make doxygen" from the command line whilst inside the
+extracted LUFA download package directory. From there, the generated Doxygen 
+HTML documentation for the library and included projects will be available in the
+generated Documentation/ subdirectories of the library core and projects. View
+the generated documentation for the library core in your chosen web browser for
+further Getting Started information.
+
+The documentation for the library itself (but not the documentation for the
+individual demos, projects or bootloaders) is also available as a seperate
 package from the project webpage for convenience if Doxygen cannot be installed.
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/makefile b/makefile
index da710b528..4fc793a46 100644
--- a/makefile
+++ b/makefile
@@ -1,26 +1,26 @@
-#
-#             LUFA Library
-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-#              
-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-#      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-#
-
-# Makefile to build the LUFA library, projects and demos.
-
-# Call with "make all" to rebuild everything, "make clean" to clean everything,
-# "make clean_list" to remove all intermediatary files but preserve any binaries,
-# "make doxygen" to document everything with Doxygen (if installed) and
-# "make clean_doxygen" to remove generated Doxygen documentation from everything.
-
-all:
-
-%:
-	@echo Executing \"make $@\" on all LUFA library elements.
-	@echo
-	$(MAKE) -C LUFA $@ -s
-	$(MAKE) -C Demos $@ -s
-	$(MAKE) -C Projects $@ -s
-	$(MAKE) -C Bootloaders $@ -s
-	@echo
-	@echo LUFA \"make $@\" operation complete.
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+#              
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+#
+
+# Makefile to build the LUFA library, projects and demos.
+
+# Call with "make all" to rebuild everything, "make clean" to clean everything,
+# "make clean_list" to remove all intermediatary files but preserve any binaries,
+# "make doxygen" to document everything with Doxygen (if installed) and
+# "make clean_doxygen" to remove generated Doxygen documentation from everything.
+
+all:
+
+%:
+	@echo Executing \"make $@\" on all LUFA library elements.
+	@echo
+	$(MAKE) -C LUFA $@ -s
+	$(MAKE) -C Demos $@ -s
+	$(MAKE) -C Projects $@ -s
+	$(MAKE) -C Bootloaders $@ -s
+	@echo
+	@echo LUFA \"make $@\" operation complete.